Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
97-238
THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BY-LAW NUMBER 97-238 Being a By-law to authorize a contract between the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington and Peak Engineering & Construction Ltd., Brighton, Ontario, for the construction of the twin pad expansion at the Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex. THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON HEREBY ENACTS AS FOLLOWS: 1. THAT the Mayor and Clerk are hereby authorized to execute, on behalf of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, and seal with the Corporation Seal, a Contract between Peak Engineering & Construction Ltd. and said Corporation; and 2. THAT this agreement attached hereto as Schedule "A" form part of this By-law. By-law read a first and second time this 27 day of October, 1997. By-law read a third time and finally passed this 27 day of October, 1997. Mayor Cl�k r , I REQUIRE TNI PR T E •. _ PLAN Q„ _ ' H KING H HW Y N 2 E S I G A P LAN 40 ' . ?j . DEPOSITED UNDER- THt DEPOSI TED PLAN 905 /HW Y'S/ REGISTRY ACT. RECEIVEQ AND DEPOSITED r OCTOBER 10, 1997 PART 7 Z PART 6 PLAN 40R-14121 M JU— PLAN 40R-14121 GATE Dare z M 42 CL a _ O Z N 0 3~ z� L. 0 L w It O _ V SIGNATURE SIGNATURE a z A. FLIM LAND REGISTRAR FOR THE 3 REGISTRY DIVISION OF NAME IN PRINT 0 o IB(1106) DURHAM N'40. w lop PART /, PLAN /OR-1864 CO _ 0 M co SCHEDULE N71'35010" PART LOCATION INSTRUMENT N2 SSIB O12 IB I PART OF LOT 18, CONCESSION 1 79982 INST. No. N20088 2 PART OF LOT 19, CONCESSION 1 152522 �Q 3 PART OF THE ORIGINAL ROAD ALLOWANCE BETWEEN LOTS 18 AND 19, CON. I PLAN OF SURVEY OF PART OF LOTS 18 AND 19, CONCESSION I AND PART OF THE ORIGINAL ROAD ALLOWANCE J -BETWEEN LOTS 19 AND 19, CONCESSION. I > FORMERLY IN THE GEOGRAPHIC TOWNSHIP OF CLARKE NOW IN THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON z• REGIONAL MUNICIPALITY OF DURHAM ' - N {— �M - _ N 0 �N 23 0 23 80 O J N O m CD SCALE 1 1000 metres A. FLIM O.L.S. N M Ih v LO SIBIMTC! r%1 � ' J , W Z c W SURVEYOR'S CERTIFICATE Lv I� ~ ° I CERTIFY THAT co OD o W oc Q w I. THIS SURVEY AND PLAN ARE CORRECT AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH O Q a- a � THE SURVEYS ACT, THE SURVEYORS ACT AND THE REGISTRY ACT LIJ z AND THE REGULATIONS MADE UNDER THEM. m 3 2. THE SURVEY WAS COMPLETED ON THE 10th., DAY OF OCTOBER 1997 z 0 0 u� � h N N OCTOBER 10, 1997 (.5 NZ Z DATE A. FLIM w LIJ Z i— ONTARIO LAND SURVEYOR z U z Q z 0 - NOTES. v Q Z Y BEARINGS ARE ASTRONOMIC AND ARE REFERRED TO THE SOUTH LIMIT OF PART I AS SHOWN ON PLAN IOR-1354, HAVING A BEARING OF N72'38'00"E. Q ® DENOTES SURVEY MONUMENT FOUND SIBlOU! N72'38'00"E N72'38'00"E ❑ DENOTES SURVEY MONUMENT PLANTED 3.00 ° 3.00 SIB DENOTES STANDARD IRON BAR Y; _IB IB IB WIT IB WIT SSIB DENOTES SHORT STANDARD IRON BAR 0 o IB DENOTES IRON BAR f, o ° Q ° �n a� N 0 ry a WIT. DENOTES WITNESS POST b WIRE FENCE a Q apN cc Nap Q i POST b WIRE FENCE C.C. DENOTES CUT CROSS t. LLJ z o0 3.0o z a OU DENOTES ORIGIN UNKNOWN £ 37.30 a 20.12 98.73 x x v x x 1790 DENOTES A.V. FLIM SURVEYING O.L.S. sIBtMTCt — --x- N72038'00"E O SIB(MTC) MTC DENOTES MINISTRY OF TRANSPORTATION & COMMUNICA,T[ONS &' O tP-I b MEAS,l� 0 3M w��♦ 3t- � (REFERENCE BEARING) 90 J P-1 DENOTES PLAN 40R-17790 w �`t`t P-2 DENOTES PLAN IOR-1354 c Zaoo� oil N, P-3 DENOTES PLAN 40R-1864 r DEPOSITED PLAN ////0 J�a , D EP O S I TED PLAN ////0 g° (P - 2704 - 581 � Q aa°- Q o (P - 2704 - 581 A.V. FLIM SURVEYING INC. Z ?m �' PROFESSIONAI LAND SURVEYORS 71 4 47 PRINCE STREET , tY w METRIC - DISTANCES SHOWN ON THIS PLAN ARE IN METRES AND OSHAWA, ONT. LIG 4G9 00 CAN BE CONVERTED TO FEET BY DIVIDING BY 0.3048. pH, (905) 723 — 6581 -, J e= t.}..- }} - W.0. Ns, 97221-A > W N • I REQUIRE THIS PLAN TO BE 4 T H E K I N G ' S H I G H A Y 2 DEPOSITED UNDER THE PLAN 40 R - DEPOS/TED PLAN 905 (HWY'Sl REGISTRY ACT. RECEIVEQ AND DEPOSITED -�` OCTOBER 10, 1997 .` PART 7 z PAR T 6 PLAN 40R-14121 ^"' PLAN 40R-14121 DATE DATE a 0 .0 ��*cvmdl Old -i V .�-� SIGNATURE SIGNATURE a Z A. FLIM LAND REGISTRAR FOR THE r 1 3 NAME IN PRINT REGISTRY DIVISION OF W 113(106) DURHAM N'40. PART /, PL AN /OR-/864 CL 0� 0 cy SCHEDULE N71'3b`l0" PART LOCATION INSTRUMENT N4 ss)B 20.12 1 PART OF LOT 18, CONCESSION 1 79982 � IB INST. No. N20088 2 PART OF LOT 19, CONCESSION 1 152522 �Q 3 PART OF THE ORIGINAL ROAD ALLOWANCE BETWEEN LOTS 18 AND 19, CON. I PLAN- OF SURVEY OF PART OF LOTS 18 AND 19, CONCESSION I AND PART co W OF THE ORIGINAL ROAD ALLOWANCE J BETWEEN LOTS 18 AND 19, CONCESSION I > FORMERLY IN THE GEOGRAPHIC TOWNSHIP OF CLARKE Z NOW IN THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON °• REGIONAL MUNICIPALITY OF DURHAM N F M i N 0 ON 25 0 25 50 O J N 0 SCALE 1 : 1000 metres m co \ 4 t� N A. FLIM O.L.S. N M M L SIB(MTC) M `n W 0 z N W SURVEYOR'S CERTIFICATE _ 3 W �� v 1 CERTIFY THAT �o O W Q W I. THIS SURVEY AND PLAN ARE CORRECT AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH a a Q) THE SURVEYS ACT, THE SURVEYORS ACT AND THE REGISTRY ACT WQ V z AND THE REGULATIONS MADE UNDER THEM. m 3 2. THE SURVEY WAS COMPLETED ON THE 10th., DAY OF OCTOBER , 1997 0 0 d z ul 'n st �t N N OCTOBER 10, 1997 LS co CC) DATE A. FLIM I— Q m LU Z a-- ONTARIO LAND SURVEYOR Z Z U z - Q z o - NOTES. a z Y BEARINGS ARE ASTRONOMIC AND ARE REFERRED TO THE SOUTH LIMIT OF PART I AS SHOWN ON PLAN IOR-1354, HAVING A BEARING OF 0 N72'38'00"E. J Q ® DENOTES SURVEY MONUMENT FOUND SIB(OU) N72 38 00 E DENOTES SURVEY MONUMENT PLANTED N72'38'00"E 3.00 ° 3.00 SIB DENOTES STANDARD IRON BAR _ IB IB IB w1T IB w)r SSIB DENOTES SHORT STANDARD IRON BAR N N o o Q o 0 IB DENOTES IRON BAR ~ BOO ° ° °' F °' WIT, DENOTES WITNESS qt Nto c�v N �N a:►�- POST b WIRE FENCE a a a�N N OD Q a POST b WIRE FENCE C.C. DENOTES CUT CROSS Z 00 3.00 z 0- 4 OU DENOTES ORIGIN UNKNOWN X 57.30 a 20.)2 X -- X 98.75 x 1790 DENOTES A.V. FLIM SURVEYING O.L.S. SIB(MTC) �^— 182.17 O ,� ., N72'38'00"E O SIBIMTC) MTC DENOTES MINISTRY OF TRANSPORTATION & COMMUNICATIONS O (P-I 3 MEAS.)% gyp' 3 Ld 0` � (REFERENCE BEARING) P-1 DENOTES PLAN 40R-17790 m •�� -moos )� P-2 DENOTES PLAN IOR-1354 N Z ti �,"' - P-3 DENOTES PLAN 40R-1864 DEPOSITED PLAN ////0 k Q N h ; DEPOSITED PLAN ////0 /P - 2 70 4 - 58l Q Q°°' Q (P - 2 T O 4 - •,5'8J A.V. FLIM SURVEYING INC. O ` Z> PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYORS °' Z 47 PRINCE STREET WZ . OSHAWA, ONT. LIG 4C9 ool_ METRIC - DISTANCES SHOWN ON THIS PLAN ARE IN METRES AND JZ CAN BE CONVERTED TO FEET BY DIVIDING BY 0.3048. PH, (905) 725 — (3881 U W.O. N2 97221-A SCHEDULE PLAN 40R- PART PART OF LOT CONCESSION AREA I� I REQUIRE THIS PLAN TO BE 1 0.048 ho DEPOSITED UNDER THE RECEIVED AND DEPOSITED 2 0.463 ha REGISTRY ACT. r DATE ha 3 ROAD ALLOWANCE BETWEEN BROKEN 0.016 .�Gf:...�.. •I T 4 LOTS 2 AND 3 FRONT 0.025 ha DATE 5 0.112 ho .. LAND REGISTRAR FOR THE 0.177 ho ...L�........ 6 S. E. COONS REGISTRY DIVISION OF N g4. OE /TED P y�Gy�^ v ontaric land surveyor DURHAM ( NO. 40 ) N 83° WYS i`i / �B• HIV NQ ro) ms' s - 2 4Q Posr 10. RT 3 A►VO SIB 20.551(P�gS NtEq. 0.01B 1 (r0) ) FENCE 0.2 N si>e 6, yU 18 �z D�/T� A _ ��. p1 iirD/ij 1\VJ _ P44n( �/11wys, wo• Zz N84• i8 P4l1/ p "�61 SIB �B3�o; WIP3 �) _ 23� PLAN OF SURVEY OF 74 C2 (Afro) NryRE —Jk FENCE 0.2 N 70.40, PART OF THE ROAD ALLOWANCE LO ZZ0 BETWEEN LOTS 2 AND 3 T ow BROKEN FRONT CONCESSION �p 0 Geographic TOWNSHIP OF DARLINGTON MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON pa a REGIONAL MUNICIPALITY OF DURHAM , 20.117 - o PART 8 u PART I o N IOR-373 PLAN SCALE 1 750 20 0 20 40 N Lw Metres Metres U Lw J . D . BARNES LIMITED - 1 997 Q� METRIC : J DISTANCES SHOWN ON THIS PLAN ARE IN METRES AND CAN • N v BE CONVERTED TO FEET BY DIVIDING BY 0.3048 it � � r,n QD n y 3 z 2 f O r m . -•I � n 0 . a z ��,. ... � R., 3 u W - A i+ �4 Oc a -4 N- 4 UNIT E. `-.-� (aH► v _ 11ore+) EXPROPRIATIDN PLAN p-2 SIB p• E �� `-2321P1EMEASI / (830) 02' t pCPROPR1AT10N PLAN D - 2 20.148 UNIT A. N 68°f_ -t� IB PLAN D - 2 / l 19e.970 P 1) I s W "� EXPROPRIATION '13 ltnEAS1 EASEMENT—J' 0, w D A . UNIT F. NgSTLE (1�uNGTONI -- SUBJECT T0.F�LS /00 SIB - AS IN LT792184 - $_ .PARCEL 1-1, SECTION B.F.C. . D - 2 $ EXPROPRIATION PLAN Q oo a Ln UNIT B• A o — --��N690 41 ' 20' E — FENCE • „__•� 10.066 10.066 POST AND WIRE SIB '0. Z FI FENCE icnB UN(;TOIW _ 01<.N/S FENCE CD ro 1.40 W OK N/S SECTION B.F.C. NEWCASTLE 4 a PARCEL I-I. PAR N�o O CD 0 20EN 1�2 v L AY PLAN D 2 SCNR I INST EXPROPRIATION 1 e CD UNIT C, f:eoce '�FENCE pip 0.20 N / WIRE 5 1 30 W L AND �'rN3 UAD N TIQNA / p05S u n /^ N°� NOTES : a m N U � D / '�' 131 163 / BEARINGS HEREON ARE GRID BEARINGS AND ARE REFERRED TO / No 10813 N / ICED PLAN // THE WESTERLY LIMIT OF THE ROAD ALLOWANCE BETWEEN LOTS INST. IAN I' o / / 2 Irv- / 2 AND 3, BROKEN FRONT CONCESSION AS SHOWN ON EXPROPRIATION PLAN CANAC P�r �+�� D-2, HAVING A BEARING OF N18°02'30" W. O DENOTES SURVEY MONUMENT PLANTED .�� ■ DENOTES SURVEY MONUMENT FOUND / WIRE 51B ( JDB 1 DENOTES J.D. BARNES LIMITED I prlo a 3 � o�I SIB DENOTES STANDARD IRON BAR / E PLAN NPOS� SCrevR 1 NS? I B DENOTES IRON BAR / DEPOS CM DENOTES CONCRETE MMU ENT f v _ ---- -AATJG—DENOTES Md t4STRY-OF_-TkZAAISP-0RTAT-LON OF-ONTARI O _- �i q� CNR DENOTES,CANADIAN NATIONAL RAILWAYS Nc� OH DENOTES ONTARIO HYDRO GO,``I 830 DENOTES E.W. PETZOLD LTD. PI DENOTES EXPROPRIATION PLAN o--2 o D P2 DENOTES PLAN IOR-1513 d rn N P3 DENOTES HWYS PLAN P-2695-23 N P4 DENOTES PLAN IOR-373 PARCEL 1-I, SECTION B.F.C. NEWCASTLE OMLINGTOM P5 DENOTES HWYS PLAN P-2695-2 A Cj o U a P6 DENOTES PLAN IOR-1330 ro o m PARCEL 1-1, SECTION B.F.C. NEWCASTLE 04RLINOTOAU - PART 3, PLAN /OR-1330 w PART I, PLAN /OR-1330 I�� NA SURVEYOR 'S CERTIFICATE `O zo 1 I CERTIFY THAT I . THIS SURVEY AND PLAN ARE CORRECT AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SURVEYS ACT, THE SURVEYORS ACT, THE REGISTRY ACT-AND THE REGULATIONS MADE UNDER THEM. SIB SIB SIB Ste 2. THIS SURVEY WAS COMPLETED ON THE 5th DAY OF JUNE,'1997. (011 15720 (P6dd+EAS) 20.120(P6&-SET N 72° 40' 10" E . ...........�g �.7d...................... �p I DATE S. E. COONS by -+ ONTARIO LAND SURVEYOR � 2 '� o � SURVEYING MAPPING, N Q�� LAND INFORMATION SERVICES R -� e PARCEL 32-4, SECTION CON. I (CLARK£J d PARCEL 32-4, SECTION CON. I (CLARKE 1 d OFFICE OF ORIGIN 1 a 1 10 SCOTIA COURT UNIT � 46 WHITBY ONTARIO A J . D . BARNES (905)123-1212 F7 PART 2, PLAN IOR-1330 I PART 4; PLAN IOR-1330 LIMITED L REFERENCE NO.: DRAWN BY: S.E.C. CHECKED BY: S.E.C. 87-25_'580_13 BARRY • BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS 11 St ley Court, Whitby, Ontario UN 8P9 Tel: (905) 666-52 • Tor: (905) 427-4495 • Fax: (905) 666-5256 E-mail: bba @idirect.com ADDITION & RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX TENDER NO. CL 9727 ' THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ARCHITECT ' BARRY-BRYAN ASSOCIATES(1991) LIMITED 11 Stanley Court, Unit 1 Whitby, Ontario L1N 8139 ' Tel: (905)666-5252 Tor: (905)427-4495 Fax: (905)666-5256 E-mail: bba @idirect.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ' CARRUTHERS&WALLACE LTD. 90 Eglinton Avenue West, Suite 500 Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 Tel: (416)489-0052 Fax: (416)489-8024 E-mail: cwl@cw-eng.com MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEER LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN AND PARTNERS INC. 235 Lesmill Road ' Don Mills, Ontario Tel: (416)445-8255 Fax: (416)445-7885 ' E-mail: Ikm-eng @the-wire.com Project No. 97100 September 1997 7100-TPGS.wpd Standard construction document CCDC I i Stipulated price contrac t r' Project: Addition and Renovations to Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex 2240 King Street West, Bowmanville, Ontario J J Canadian construction documents committee 1 Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 TABLE OF CONTENTS ' AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR PART 4 ALLOWANCES A-I The Work GC 4.1 Cash Allowances ' A-2 Agreements and Amendments GC 4.2 Contingency Allowance A-3 Contract Documents A-4 Contract Price PART 5 PAYMENT A-5 Payment GC 5.1 Financing Information Required of the Owner ' A-6 Receipt of and Addresses for Notices GC 5.2 Applications for Progress Payment A-7 Language of the Contract GC 5.3 Progress Payment A-8 Succession GC 5.4 Substantial Performance of the Work GC 5.5 Payment of Holdback upon Substantial Performance of the Work DEFINITIONS GC 5.6 Progressive Release of Holdback 1. Contract GC 5.7 Final Payment 2. Contract Documents GC 5.8 Withholding of Payment 3. Owner GC 5.9 Non-conforming Work 4. Contractor 5. Subcontractor PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK 6. Supplier GC 6.1 Changes 7. Consultant GC 6.2 Change Order 8. Project GC 6.3 Change Directive 9. Work GC 6.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 10. Place of the Work GC 6.5 Delays 11. Product 12. Provide PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE 13. Contract Price GC 7.1 Owner's Right to Perform the Work,Stop the Work,or 14. Contract Time Terminate the Contract 15. Working Day GC 7.2 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work or Terminate the 16. Supplemental Instruction Contract 17. Change Order 18. Change Directive PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ' 19. Substantial Performance of the Work GC 8.1 Authority of the Consultant 20. Value Added Taxes GC 8.2 Negotiation,Mediation,and Arbitration GC 8.3 Retention of Rights GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY PRICE CONTRACT GC 9.1 Protection of Work and Property GC 9.2 Damages and Mutual Responsibility PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 9.3 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Materials I GC 1.1 Contract Documents GC 1.2 Law of the Contract PART 10 GOVERNING REGULATIONS GC 1.3 Rights and Remedies GC 10.1 Taxes and Duties GC 1.4 Assignment GC 10.2 Laws,Notices,Permits,and Fees GC 10.3 Patent Fees PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT GC 10.4 Workers'Compensation GC 2.1 Authority of the Consultant GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant PART 11 INSURANCE-BONDS GC 2.3 Review and Inspection of the Work GC 11.1 Insurance GC 2.4 Defective Work GC 11.2 Bonds PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION-WAIVER-WARRANTY ' GC 3.1 Control of the Work GC 12.1 Indemnification GC 3.2 Construction by Owner or Other Contractors GC 12.2 Waiver of Claims GC 3.3 Temporary Supports,Structures,and Facilities GC 12.3 Warranty GC 3.4 Document Review GC 3.5 Construction Schedule GC 3.6 Construction Safety GC 3.7 Supervisor GC 3.8 Subcontractors and Suppliers GC 3.9 Labour and Products GC 3.10 Documents at the Site GC 3.11 Shop Drawings GC 3.12 Use of the Work CCDC Copyright 1994 I GC 3.13 Cutting and Remedial Work Must not be copied in whole or in part without the written permission GC 3.14 Cleanup of the CCDC. I Canadian construction documents committee SUMMARY OF IMPORTANT DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ' THE 1994 AND THE 1982 EDITIONS OF CCDC 2 • The Articles of the Agreement and General Conditions of the CCDC 2 - 1994 are reordered. ' Article A-4 of the Agreement- CONTRACT PRICE Value Added Taxes are excluded from the Contract Price. ' Article A-5 of the Agreement- PAYMENT `Final certificate for payment' is used as a milestone event in the life of the Contract. • GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER The Contractor is entitled to request the Owner to furnish reason evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. • GC 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK The Owner is required to place the holdback amount in a separate holdback account 10 days prior to the expiry of the holdback period. • GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE ' Introduces a new administrative document called a `Change Directive' which is signed by the Owner and authorizes the change to proceed where there has been no agreement on the value of a change or the valuation method. • GC 6.4 - CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS The scope is expanded to include concealed physical conditions as well as underground conditions.The procedure and time period for the giving of written notices are specified. ' Part 8 of the General Conditions -DISPUTE RESOLUTION The dispute resolution procedures are amended to mandate the sequential approach of negotiation, mediation,and arbitration.If neither party elects to use arbitration, the parties may refer the unresolved dispute to the courts or to any other form of dispute resolution, including arbitration,which they have agreed to use. • GC 9.3 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS New General Condition outlines the procedures to apply and the obligations of the parties respecting the presence of toxic or hazardous substances or materials at the Place of the Work. • GC 11.1 - INSURANCE ' The insurance conditions are revised to refer the prevailing standard insurance policy forms endorsed by the Insurance Bureau of Canada (IBC) rather than the current CCDC Policy Forms. Certain mandatory endorsements, however, are required by the CCDC provisions to the IBC policies. • GC 12.3 -WARRANTY New provision states that Product warranties requiring guarantees in excess of 1 year shall be issued by the manufacturer to the benefit of the Owner and they are to be acquired by the Contractor on behalf of the Owner. In the Committee's continuing effort to keep the wording of the standard documents clear and consistent, minor editorial changes have been made. These editorial changes do not change the intent of the document. June, 1994 TABLE OF CONCORDANT ARTICLES 1982/1994 EDITIONS OF CCDC 2 ' 1982 1994 1982 1994 Edition Edition Edition Edition ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT GC 14.3 GC 5.4 Substantial Performance of A-1 A-1 The Work the Work New A-2 Agreements and Amendments GC 14.4 GC 5.5 Payment of Holdback upon ' A-2 A-3 Contract Documents Substantial Performance of A-3 A-4 Contract Price the Work A-4 A-5 Payment GC 14.5-.6 GC 5.6 Progressive Release of Holdback A-6 A-6 Receipt of and Addresses for Notices GC 14.7 GC 5.7 Final Payment , A-7 A-7 Language of the Contract GC 14.9 GC 5.8 Withholding of Payment A-8 A-8 Succession GC 14.10 GC 5.9 Non-conforming Work PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK ' GENERAL CONDITIONS GC 11 GC 6.1 Changes PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 12.2 GC 6.2 Change Order GC 1 GC 1.1 Contract Documents New GC 6.3 Change Directive ' A-7 GC 1.2 Law of the Contract GC 28 GC 6.4 Concealed or Unknown A-5 GC 1.3 Rights and Remedies Conditions GC 8 GC 1.4 Assignment GC 4 GC 6.5 Delays PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE CONTRACT GC 5 GC 7.1 Owner's Right to Perform GC 3 GC 2.1 Authority of the Consultant the Work, Stop the Work, ' GC 2.1 & 3 GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant or Terminate the Contract GC 32 GC 2.3 Review and Inspection of the GC 6 GC 7.2 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Work or Terminate the Contract GC 33 GC 2.4 Defective Work , PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE GC 7.1-.3 GC 8.1 Authority of the Consultant WORK New GC 8.2 Negotiation, Mediation, and ' GC 25.1 GC 3.1 Control of the Work Arbitration GC 9 GC 3.2 Construction by Owner or GC 7.4 GC 8.3 Retention of Rights Other Contractors PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS GC 25.3-.4 GC 3.3 Temporary Supports, Structures, and Facilities AND PROPERTY GC 25.5 GC 3.4 Document Review GC 21 GC 9.1 Protection of Work and Property GC GC 25.6 GC 3.5 Construction Schedule 22 GC 9.2 Damages and Mutual Responsibility GC 25.2 GC 3.6 Construction Safety New GC 9.3 Toxic and Hazardous GC 26 GC 3.7 Supervisor GC 10 GC 3.8 Subcontractors and Suppliers Substances and Materials GC 27 GC 3.9 Labour and Products PART 10 GOVERNING ' GC 1.8 GC 3.10 Documents at the Site REGULATIONS GC 34 GC 3.11 Shop Drawings GC 15 GC 10.1 Taxes and Duties GC 29 GC 3.12 Use of the Work GC 16 GC 102 Laws, Notices, Permits, GC 31 GC 3.13 Cutting and Remedial Work and Fees GC 30 GC 3.14 Cleanup GC 17 GC 10.3 Patent Fees PART 4 ALLOWANCES GC 18 GC 10.4 Workers' Compensation ' GC 35 GC 4.1 Cash Allowances PART 11 INSURANCE-BONDS GC 36 GC 42 Contingency Allowance GC 20 GC 11.1 Insurance PART 5 PAYMENT GC 23 GC 11.2 Bonds New GC 5.1 Financing Information PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION- Required of the Owner WAIVER-WARRANTY GC 13 GC 5.2 Applications for Progress GC 19 GC 12.1 Indemnification Payment GC 14.12-.15 GC 12.2 Waiver of Claims GC 14.1-.2 GC 5.3 Progress Payment GC 24 GC 12.3 Warranty ' Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR For use when a stipulated price is the basis of payment. This Agreement made on the 13 day of November in the year nine -een_n;n Pty 5_e_v_en_ by and between Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington hereinafter called the "Owner" and Peak Engineering & Construction Ltd. -------------- - --- -- - ---------- hereinafter called the "Contractor" The Owner and the Contractor agree as follows: ' ARTICLE A-1 THE WORK The Contractor shall: 1.1 perform the Work required by the Contract Documents for Addition and Renovations to _Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex — ' insert above the title of the Work located at 2240 King Street West, Bowmanville Ontario ' insert above the Place of the Work which have been signed by the parties, and for which Barry o Bryan Associates 1991 _Limited _ insert above the name of the Consultant is acting as and is hereinafter called the "Consultant"and ' 1.2 do and fulfill everything indicated by this Agreement, and 1.3 commence the Work by the 20 day of November in the year 1997 and, subject to adjustment in Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents, attain Substantial Performance of the Work, by the 15 day of September in the year 1998 CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 1 ARTICLE A-2 AGREEMENTS AND AMENDMENTS ' 2.1 The Contract supersedes all prior negotiations,representations,or agreements,either written or oral,relating in any manner to the Work,including the bidding documents that are not expressly listed in Article A-3 of ' the Agreement- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 2.2 The Contract may be amended only as provided in the Contract Documents. ' ARTICLE A-3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.1 The following are the Contract Documents referred to in Article A-1 of the Agreement- THE WORK: ' • Agreement Between Owner and Contractor , • Definitions • The General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract 3.2 Tender Form submitted by Peak Engineering & Construction 10 Pages Ltd. dated October 16, 1997. 3.3 Table of Credit Items negotiated through meetings of 11 Pages ' October 21, 22 and 23, 1997 including attachments dated October 24, 1997. 3.4 Notice of Project dated November 11, 1997. 1 Page ' 3.5 Certificate of Insurance (General Liability and Builders 1 Page Risk) issued by Sedgwick Limited dated November 7, 1997. 3.6 Performance Bond issued by The Guarantee Company of North 1 Page ' America dated November 10, 1997. 3.7 Labour and Material Payment Bond issued by The Guarantee 2 Pages , Company of North America dated November 10, 1997. 3.8 Workers' Compensation Board Clearance Certificate dated 1 Page September 15, 1997. 3.9 Letter from Peak Engineering & Construction Ltd. to 1 Page Municipality of Clarington dated November 13, 1997, re: Items deleted from scope of work. ' 3.10 Post Tender Addendum No. 1 dated November 13, 1997. 9 Pages 3.11 Addendum No. 3 dated October 14, 1997. 1 Page ' 3. 12 Addendum No. 2 dated October 7, 1997. 33 Pages 3. 13 Addendum No. 1 dated October 7, 1997. 61 Pages 3. 14 Contract Specifications issued October 2, 1997. ' * (Insert here, attaching additional pages if required, a list identifying all other Contract Documents e.g. Supplementary Conditions;Specifications, giving a list of contents with section numbers and titles, number of pages, and date;Drawings, giving drawing number, title, date, revision date or mark,Addenda, giving title, ' number, date) CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 2 ' ARTICLE A-2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS (Cont'd) 3.15 Contract Drawings comprising those listed below: Architectural Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued A101 Site Plan 2 November 13, 1997 A102 Landscape 1 November 13, 1997 A103 Landscape 1 November 13, 1997 A201 Overall Floor Plan 1 November 13, 1997 ' A202 Enlarge Floor Plans 3 November 13, 1997 A203 Enlarge Floor Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A204 Enlarge Floor Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A205 Enlarge Floor Plans 1 November 13, 1997 ' A206 Reflective Ceiling Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A207 Roof Plans 1 November 13, 1997 ' A301 Elevation 1 November 13, 1997 A302 Elevation 1 November 13, 1997 A303 Interior 1 November 13, 1997 A304 Interior 2 November 13, 1997 A305 Interior Elevations 1 November 13, 1997 A401 Sections 1 November 13, 1997 A402 Sections 1 November 13, 1997 A403 Sections 1 November 13, 1997 A501 Details(Section) 3 November 13, 1997 A502 Details (Section) 2 November 13, 1997 A503 Details 3 November 13, 1997 A601 Details(Plan) 1 November 13, 1997 A701 Stairs&Misc. 1 November 13, 1997 iA801 Schedules 1 November 13, 1997 A901 Millwork 1 November 13, 1997 i7100ContractDwg List.wpd Page 2A ARTICLE A-2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS (Confd) Structural ' Drawing No. Title Rev. No. ,Issued ' S100 Key Plan and General Notes 0 November 13, 1997 S101 Typical Details 0 November 13, 1997 ' S200 Foundation Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S201 Foundation Plan 0 November 13, 1997 ' S202 Second Floor Framing Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S203 Roof Framing Plan 0 November 13, 1997 ' S204 Roof Framing Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S300 Sections 0 November 13, 1997 , S301 Sections 0 November 13, 1997 S302 Sections 0 November 13, 1997 ' Mechanical Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued M101 Site Plan, Mechanical 1 November 13, 1997 ' M201 Partial Floor Plan, Plumbing &Drainage 2 November 13, 1997 M202 Partial Floor Plan, Plumbing &Drainage 2 November 13, 1997 M203 Floor Plan, Sprinkler Zoning 0 November 13, 1997 M204 Partial Ground Floor Plan, HVAC 1 November 13, 1997 M205 Partial Floor Plan, HVAC 1 November 13, 1997 M206 Partial Second Floor Plan, HVAC 1 2 November 13, 1997 , M801 Schematics&Details, Mechanical 1 November 13, 1997 Refrigeration Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued , R201 Partial Floor Plan, Refrigeration 1 November 13, 1997 R801 Schematics&Details, Refrigeration 1 November 13, 1997 , R802 Schematics Diagram Refrigeration 1 November 13, 1997 Page 2B 7100ContractDwg List.wpd , r ARTICLE A-2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS (Cont'd) rElectrical Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued E101 Site Plan&Details 1 November 13, 1997 ' E201 New Rink Lighting Layout 1 November 13, 1997 E202 New Rink Power Layout 1 November 13, 1997 ' E203 Partial Second Floor Plan 1 November 13, 1997 E204 Part Floor Plan Lighting&Power Layouts 1 November 13, 1997 E801 Legend, Detail &Single Line Diagram 1 November 13, 1997 E802 Lighting Fixtures Schedule, Panel Schedule&Detail 1 November 13, 1997 i i 1 1 1 1 i r r Page 2C r7100contractDwg Ust.wpd ARTICLE A-4 CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 The Contract Price, which excludes Value Added Taxes, is: Four million, twenty—five thousand and nine hundred and twenty—five. . dollars ' and zero cents. $ 4,025,925.00 ' 4.2 Value Added Taxes (of 7 %) payable by the Owner to the Contractor are: Two Hundred and eighty—one thousand, eight hundred and ' fourteen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dollars and seventy—five cents. $ 281,814.75 4.3 Total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the construction of the Work is: Four million, three hundred and seven thousand, seven hundred and thirty—nine. .dollars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and seventy—five cents. $ 4,307,739.75 I4.4 All amounts are in Canadian funds. 4.5 These amounts shall be subject to adjustments as provided in the Contract Documents. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 3 1 ARTICLE A-5 PAYMENT ' 5.1 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, and in accordance with legislation and statutory regulations respecting holdback percentages and, where such legislation or regulations do not exist or apply, subject to a holdback of ten percent ( 10 %), "/004' r/sal AO J(A;W,fvW: f o r construction lien holdback, and a further one (1%) for the contract completion s curit account, the Owner hall in Canadi f ds: 1 make progress payments to the Contractor on account otnthe ontract Price when due in the amount certified by the Consultant together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment, and .2 upon Substantial Performance of the Work,pay to the Contractor the unpaid balance of the holdback ' amount when due together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment, and .3 upon the issuance of the final certificate for payment,pay to the Contractor the unpaid balance of the Contract Price when due together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment. 5.2 In the event of loss or damage occurring where payment becomes due under the property and boiler insurance ' policies, payments shall be made to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of GC 11.1 - INSURANCE. 5.3 Interest 1 Should either party fail to make payments as they become due under the terms of the Contract or in an award by arbitration or court, interest at prime rate percent ( ---- %) per annum 1 above the bank rate on such unpaid amounts shall also become due and payable until payment. Such interest shall be compounded on a monthly basis. The bank rate shall be the rate established by the Bank of Canada as the minimum rate at which the Bank of Canada makes short term advances to the ' chartered banks. .2 Interest shall apply at the rate and in the manner prescribed by paragraph 5.3.1 of this Article on the amount of any claim settled pursuant to Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPLTIE RESOLUTION from the date the amount would have been due and payable under the Contract, had it not been in dispute, until the date it is paid. i i i 1 _ 1 1 CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 4 In witness whereof the parties hereto have executed this Agreement and by the hands of their duly authorized representatives. SIGNED AND DELIVERED in the presence of. OWNER ' C_or_poration of the Municipality of Clarington name of owner ' signature WITNESS The or ' name title o rson si ' s' nature signature The Clerk name and title of person signing name and title of person signing ' CONTRACTOR 1 Peak Engineering & Construction Ltd. name of contractor 7 ' signature WITNESS name and title of person sign ---- ------------------------------------ signature signature ' name and title of person signing name and title of person signing N.B. Where legal jurisdiction, local practice, or Owner or Contractor requirement calls for: (a) proof of authority to execute this document, attach such proof of authority in the form of a certified copy of a resolution naming the representative(s)authorized to sign the Agreement for and on behalf of the corporation or partnership; or ' (b) the affixing of a corporate seal, this Agreement should be properly sealed. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 6 ARTICLE A-6 RECEIPT OF AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES , 6.1 Notices in writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be considered to have been received by the addressee on the date of delivery if delivered to the individual, or to a member of the firm, ' or to an officer of the corporation for whom they are intended by hand or by registered post; or if sent by regular post, to have been delivered within 5 Working Days of the date of mailing when addressed as follows: The Owner at 40 Temperance Street street and number and postal box number if applicable ' Bowmanville, Ontario post office or district,province,postal code L1C 3A6 , The Contractor at_ P.O. Box 984 street and number and postal box number if applicable ' _ Brighton, Ontario post office or district,province,postal code KOK 1H0 , The Consultant at 11 Stanley Court street and number and postal box number if applicable Whitby, Ontario post office or district,province,postal code ' L1N 8P9 ARTICLE A-7 LANGUAGE OF THE CONTRACT 7.1 When the Contract Documents are prepared in both the English and French languages, it is agreed that in the event of any apparent discrepancy between the English and French versions, the English/VikAgi V* language shall prevail. * Complete this statement by striking out inapplicable term. 7.2 This Agreement is drawn in English at the request of the parties hereto. La prdsente convention est rddigde , en anglais h la demande des parties. ARTICLE A-8 SUCCESSION 8.1 The Contract Documents are to be read into and form part of this Agreement and the whole shall constitute the Contract between the parties, and subject to the law and the provisions of the Contract Documents shall enure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto, their respective heirs, legal representatives, successors, and assigns. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 5 , Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 DEFINITIONS The following Definitions shall apply to all Contract Documents. 1. Contract The Contract is the undertaking by the parties to perform their respective duties, responsibilities, and obligations as prescribed in the Contract Documents and represents the entire agreement between the parties. 2. Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of those documents listed in Article A-3 of the Agreement - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and amendments agreed upon between the parties. 3. Owner The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Owner means the Owner or the Owner's authorized agent or representative as designated to the Contractor in writing, but does not include the Consultant. 4, Contractor The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Contractor means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative as designated to the Owner in writing. 5. Subcontractor A Subcontractor is a person or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a part or parts of the Work, or to supply Products worked to a special design for the Work. 6. Supplier A Supplier is a person or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor to supply Products not worked to a special design for the Work. 7. Consultant The Consultant is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The Consultant is the Architect, the Engineer, or entity licensed to practice in the province or territory of the Place of the Work. The term Consultant means the Consultant or the Consultant's authorized representative. 8. Project The Project means the total construction contemplated of which the Work may be the whole or a part. 9. Work The Work means the total construction and related services required by the Contract Documents. 10. Place of the Work The Place of the Work is the designated site or location of the Work identified in Article A-1 of the Agreement - THE WORK. 11. Product Product or Products means material, machinery, equipment, and fixtures forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used to prepare, fabricate, convey, or erect the Work, which are referred to as construction machinery and equipment. 12. Provide Provide means to supply and install. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00602 7 13. Contract Price The Contract Price is the amount stipulated in Article A-4 of the Agreement - CONTRACT PRICE. 14. Contract Time The Contract Time is the time stipulated in paragraph 1.3 of Article A-1 of the Agreement-THE WORK from commencement of the Work to Substantial Performance of the Work. 15. Working Day Working Day means a day other than a Saturday, Sunday, or a holiday which is observed by the construction industry in the area of the Place of the Work. 16. Supplemental Instruction A Supplemental Instruction is an instruction,not involving adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, in the form of specifications,drawings,schedules,samples,models or written instructions,consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. It is to be issued by the Consultant to supplement the Contract Documents as required for the performance of the Work. 17. Change Order A Change Order is a written amendment to the Contract prepared by the Consultant and signed by the Owner and the Contractor stating their agreement upon: - a change in the Work; - the method of adjustment or the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Price, if any; and - the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 18. Change Directive A Change Directive is a written instruction prepared by the Consultant and signed by the Owner directing a change in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents. ' 19. Substantial Performance of the Work Substantial Performance of the Work is as defined in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. If such legislation is not in force or does not contain such definition, Substantial Performance of the Work shall have been reached when the Work is ready for use or is being used for the purpose intended and is so certified by the Consultant. 20. Value Added Taxes ' Value Added Taxes means such sum as shall be levied upon the Contract Price by the Federal or any Provincial Government and is computed as a percentage of the Contract Price and includes the Goods and Services Tax, the Quebec Sales Tax and any similar tax, the payment or collection of which is by the legislation imposing such tax an obligation of the Contractor. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00602 8 , Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include the labour, Products, and services necessary for the performance of the Work by the Contractor in accordance with these documents. It is not intended, however,that the Contractor shall supply products or perform work not consistent with, not covered by,or not properly inferable from the Contract Documents. 1.1.2 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between: I the Owner and a Subcontractor, a Supplier, or their agent, employee, or other person performing any of the Work. .2 the Consultant and the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Supplier, or their agent, employee, or other person performing any of the Work. 1.1.3 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by*all. LI A Words and abbreviations which have well known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.1.5 References in the Contract Documents to the singular shall be considered to include the plural as the context requires. 1.1.6 The specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, consisting of the written requirements and standards for Products,systems, workmanship, and the services necessary for the performance of the Work. 1.1.7 The drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. 1.1.8 Neither the organization of the specifications into divisions, sections, and parts nor the arrangement of drawings shall control the Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors and Suppliers or in establishing the extent of the work to be performed by a trade. 1.1.9 If there is a conflict within Contract Documents: .1 the order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be • the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, • the Definitions, • Supplementary Conditions, • the General Conditions, • Division 1 of the specifications, • Divisions 2 through 16 of the specifications, • material and finishing schedules, • drawings. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 9 .2 drawings of larger scale shall govern over those of smaller scale of the same date. .3 dimensions shown on drawings shall govern over dimensions scaled from drawings. .4 later dated documents shall govern over earlier documents of the same type. 1.1.10 The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge, sufficient copies of the Contract Documents to perform the Work. 1.1.11 Specifications, drawings, models, and copies thereof furnished by the Consultant are and shall remain the Consultant's property, with the exception of the signed Contract sets, which shall belong to each party to ' the Contract. All specifications,drawings,and models furnished by the Consultant.are to be used only with respect to the Work and are not to be used on other work. These specifications, drawings, and models are not to be copied or altered in any manner without the written authorization of the Consultant. 1.1.12 Models furnished by the Contractor at the Owner's expense are the property of the Owner. GC 1.2 LAW OF THE CONTRACT 1.2.1 The law of the Place of the Work shall govern the interpretation of the Contract. GC 1.3 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 1.3.1 Except as expressly provided in the Contract Documents,the duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 1.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Consultant, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. GC 1.4 ASSIGNMENT 1.4.1 Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or a portion thereof without the written consent of the other, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT GC 2.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 2.1.1 The Consultant will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written agreement as provided in paragraph 2.1.2. 2.1.2 The duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Consultant as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be modified or extended only with the written consent of the Owner, the Contractor, and the Consultant. 2.1.3 If the Consultant's employment is terminated, the Owner shall immediately appoint or reappoint a Consultant against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Consultant. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 10 GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT 2.2.1 The Consultant will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents during construction until issuance of the final certificate for payment, and subject to GC 2.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT and with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time until the completion of any correction of defects as provided in paragraph 12.3.3 of GC 12.3 - WARRANTY. f2.2.2 The Consultant will visit the Place of the Work at intervals appropriate to the progress of construction to become familiar with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in general conformity with the Contract Documents. 2.2.3 If the Owner and the Consultant agree, the Consultant will provide at the Place of the Work, one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Consultant's responsibilities. The duties,responsibilities, and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in writing to the Contractor. 2.2.4 Based on the Consultant's observations and evaluation of the Contractor's applications for payment, the Consultant will determine the amounts owing to the Contractor under the Contract and will issue certificates for payment as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement-PAYMENT,GC 5.3 -PROGRESS PAYMENT, and GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT. 2.2.5 The Consultant will not be responsible for and will not have control,charge,or supervision of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs required in connection with the Work in accordance with the applicable construction safety legislation,other regulations, or general construction practice. The Consultant will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Consultant will not have control over, charge of, or be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers,or their agents, employees, or any other persons performing portions of the Work. 2.2.6 The Consultant will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall make findings as to the performance thereunder by both parties to the Contract, except with respect to GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER. Interpretations and findings of the Consultant shall be consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. When making such interpretations and findings the Consultant will not show partiality to either the Owner or the Contractor. 2.2.7 Claims,disputes,and other matters in question relating to the performance of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents, except for GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER, shall be referred initially to the Consultant by notice in writing given to the Consultant and to the other party for the Consultant's interpretation and finding which will be given by notice in writing to the parties within a reasonable time. 2.2.8 The Consultant will have authority to reject work which in the Consultant's opinion does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Whenever the Consultant considers it necessary or advisable, 1 the Consultant will have authority to require inspection or testing of work, whether or not such work is fabricated,installed,or completed. However,neither the authority of the Consultant to act nor any decision either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Consultant to the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or their agents, employees, or other persons performing any of the Work. 2.2.9 During the progress of the Work the Consultant will furnish Supplemental Instructions to the Contractor with reasonable promptness or in accordance with a schedule for such instructions agreed to by the Consultant and the Contractor. 2.2.10 The Consultant will review and take appropriate action upon such Contractor's submittals as shop drawings, Product data, and samples, as provided in the Contract Documents. CC DC 2- 1994 File 00712 11 2.2.11 The Consultant will prepare Change Orders and Change Directives as provided in GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 2.2.12 The Consultant will conduct reviews of the Work to determine the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as provided in GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. 2.2.13 All certificates issued by the Consultant shall be to the best of the Consultant's knowledge,information,and belief. By issuing any certificate, the Consultant does not guarantee the Work is correct or complete. 2.2.14 The Consultant will receive and review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and provided by the Contractor and will forward such warranties and documents to the Owner for the Owner's acceptance. GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK , 2.3.1 The Owner and the Consultant shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe, and proper facilities at all times for the review of the Work by the Consultant and the inspection of the Work by authorized agencies. If parts of the Work are in preparation at locations other than the Place of the Work, the Owner and the Consultant shall be given access to such work whenever it is in progress. 2.3.2 If work is designated for tests,inspections,or approvals in the Contract Documents,or by the Consultant's instructions, or the laws or ordinances of the Place of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Consultant reasonable notice of when the work will be ready for review and inspection. The Contractor shall arrange for and shall give the Consultant reasonable notice of the date and time of inspections by other authorities. 2.3.3 The Contractor shall furnish promptly to the Consultant two copies of certificates and inspection reports relating to the Work. 2.3.4 If the Contractor covers, or permits to be covered, work that has been designated for special tests, inspections, or approvals before such special tests, inspections,or approvals are made,given or completed, the Contractor shall,if so directed,uncover such work,have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed, and make good covering work at the Contractor's expense. 2.3.5 The Consultant may order any portion or portions of the Work to be examined to confirm that such work is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the work is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct the work and pay the cost of examination and correction. If the work is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of examination and restoration. GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK 2.4.1 The Contractor shall promptly remove from the Place of the Work and replace or re-execute defective work i that has been rejected by the Consultant as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether or not the defective work has been incorporated in the Work and whether or not the defect is the result of poor workmanship, use of defective products, or damage through carelessness or other act or omission of the Contractor. 2.4.2 The Contractor shall make good promptly other contractors' work destroyed or damaged by such removals or replacements at the Contractor's expense. 2.4.3 If in the opinion of the Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective work or work not performed as ' provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the amount otherwise due to the Contractor the difference in value between the work as performed and that called for by the Contract CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 12 Documents. If the Owner and the Contractor do not agree on the difference in value, they shall refer the matter to the Consultant for a determination. PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK 3.1.1 The Contractor shall have total control of the Work and shall effectively direct and supervise the Work so as to ensure conformity with the Contract Documents. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for co-ordinating the various parts of the Work under the Contract. GC 3.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS 3.2.1 The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other parts of the Project to other contractors and to perform work with own forces. 3.2.2 When separate contracts are awarded for other parts of the Project, or when work is performed by the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall: .1 provide for the co-ordination of the activities and work of other contractors and Owner's own forces with the Work of the Contract; .2 assume overall responsibility for compliance with the applicable health and construction safety legislation at the Place of the Work; .3 enter into separate contracts with other contractors under conditions of contract which are compatible with the conditions of the Contract; .4 ensure that insurance coverage is provided to the same requirements as are called for in GC 11.1 - INSURANCE and co-ordinate such insurance with the insurance coverage of the Contractor as it affects the Work; and .5 take all reasonable precautions to avoid labour disputes or other disputes on the Project arising from the work of other contractors or the Owner's own forces. 3.2.3 When separate contracts are awarded for other parts of the Project, or when work is performed by the Owner's own forces, the Contractor shall: .1 afford the Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity to introduce and store their products and use their construction machinery and equipment to execute their work; .2 co-ordinate and schedule the Work with the work of other contractors and Owner's own forces and connect as specified or shown in the Contract Documents; .3 participate with other contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed ' to do so; and .4 where part of the Work is affected by or depends upon for its proper execution the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces,promptly report to the Consultant in writing and prior to proceeding with that part of the Work, any apparent deficiencies in such work. Failure by the Contractor to so CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 13 report shall invalidate any claims against the Owner by reason of the deficiencies in the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces except those deficiencies not then reasonably discoverable. 3.2.4 Where a change in the Work is required as a result of the co-ordination and connection of the work of other , contractors or Owner's own forces with the Work, the changes shall be authorized and valued as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 3.2.5 Claims,disputes, and other matters in question between the Contractor and other contractors shall be dealt ' with as provided in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION provided the other contractors have reciprocal obligations. The Contractor shall be deemed to have consented to arbitration of any dispute with any other contractor whose contract with the Owner contains a similar agreement to arbitrate. GC 3.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS, STRUCTURES, AND FACILITIES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the design, erection, operation, maintenance, and removal of temporary supports, structures, and facilities and the design and execution of construction methods required in their use. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall engage and pay for registered professional engineering personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to perform those functions referred to in paragraph 3.3.1 where required by law or by the Contract Documents and in all cases where such temporary supports, structures, and facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature that professional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results. 3.3.3 Notwithstanding the provisions of GC 3.1 - CONTROL OF THE WORK, paragraph 3.3.1, and paragraph 3.3.2 or provisions to the contrary elsewhere in the Contract Documents where such Contract Documents include designs for temporary supports, structures, and facilities or specify a method of construction in whole or in part, such facilities and methods shall be considered to be part of the design of the Work and the Contractor shall not be held responsible for that part of the design or the specified method of construction. The Contractor shall, however, be responsible for the execution of such design or specified method of construction in the same manner as for the execution of the Work. GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW 3.4.1 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the Consultant any error, t inconsistency,or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall be to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information,and belief and in making such review the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or the Consultant for the accuracy of the review. The Contractor shall not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor did not discover. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant. GC 3.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 3.5.1 The Contractor shall: 1 prepare and submit to the Owner and the Consultant prior to the first application for payment, a , construction schedule that indicates the timing of the major activities of the Work and provides sufficient detail of the critical events and their inter-relationship to demonstrate the Work will be performed in conformity with the Contract Time; CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 14 1 .2 monitor the progress of the Work relative to the construction schedule and update the schedule on a monthly basis or as stipulated by the Contract Documents; and 1 .3 advise the Consultant of any revisions required to the schedule as the result of extensions of the Contract Time as provided in Part 6 of the General Conditions - CHANGES IN THE WORK. GC 3.6 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY 3.6.1 Subject to paragraph 3.2.2.2 of GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction safety at the Place of the Work and for compliance with the rules, regulations, and practices required by the applicable construction health and safety legislation and shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work. GC 3.7 SUPERVISOR 3.73 The Contractor shall employ a competent supervisor and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Place of the Work while work is being performed. The supervisor shall not be changed except for valid reason. 3.7.2 The supervisor shall represent the Contractor at the Place of the Work and notices and instructions given to the supervisor by the Consultant shall be held to have been received by the Contractor. GC 3.8 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS 3.8.1 The Contractor shall preserve and protect the rights of the parties under the Contract with respect to work to be performed under subcontract, and shall: .1 enter into contracts or written agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers to require them to perform their work as provided in the Contract Documents; .2 incorporate the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents into all contracts or written agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers; and .3 be as fully responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of Subcontractors,Suppliers,and of persons directly or indirectly employed by them as for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the Contractor. 3.8.2 The Contractor shall indicate in writing, at the request of the Owner, those Subcontractors or Suppliers whose bids have been received by the Contractor which the Contractor would be prepared to accept for the performance of a portion of the Work. Should the Owner not object before signing the Contract, the Contractor shall employ those Subcontractors or Suppliers so identified by the Contractor in writing for the performance of that portion of the Work to which their bid applies. 3.8.3 The Owner may, for reasonable cause, at any time before the Owner has signed the Contract, object to the use of a proposed Subcontractor or Supplier and require the Contractor to employ one of the other subcontract bidders. 3.8.4 If the Owner requires the Contractor to change a proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, the Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted by the differences occasioned by such required change. 3.8.5 The Contractor shall not be required to employ as a Subcontractor or Supplier, a person or firm to whom the Contractor may reasonably object. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 15 3.8.6 The Owner, through the Consultant, may provide to a Subcontractor or Supplier information as to the percentage of the Subcontractor's or Supplier's work which has been certified for payment. GC 3.9 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS 3.9.1 The Contractor shall provide and pay for labour, Products, tools, construction machinery and equipment, , water,heat, light,power, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract. 3.9.2 Products provided shall be new. Products which are not specified shall be of a quality consistent with those specified and their use acceptable to the Consultant. 3.9.3 The Contractor shall maintain good order and discipline among the Contractor's employees engaged on the Work and shall not employ on the Work anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned. GC 3.10 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE j 3.10.1 The Contractor shall keep one copy of current Contract Documents, submittals, reports, and records of meetings at the Place of the Work, in good order and available to the Owner and the Consultant. GC 3.11 SHOP DRAWINGS 3.11.1 Shop drawings are drawings,diagrams,illustrations,schedules,performance charts,brochures,Product,and other data which the Contractor provides to illustrate details of a portion of the Work. 3.11.2 The Contractor shall provide shop drawings as described in the Contract Documents or as the Consultant may reasonably request. 3.11.3 The Contractor shall review all shop drawings prior to submission to the Consultant. The Contractor , represents by this review that: the Contractor has determined and verified all field measurements and field construction conditions, or will do so; Product requirements; catalogue numbers; and similar data and that , the Contractor has checked and co-ordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall confirm this review of each shop drawing by stamp,date, and signature of the person responsible. At the time of submission the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.11.4 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Consultant to review in orderly sequence and sufficiently in advance so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of other contractors. Upon request of the Contractor or the Consultant, they jointly shall prepare a schedule of the dates for submission and return of shop drawings. Shop drawings which require approval of any legally constituted authority having jurisdiction shall be submitted to such authority by the Contractor for approval. 3.11.5 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in the form specified or as the Consultant may direct. The Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with the schedule agreed upon,or otherwise with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Consultant's review is for conformity to the design concept and for general arrangement only. The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor ' of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Consultant expressly notes the acceptance of a deviation on the shop drawings. 3.11.6 Upon the Consultant's request,the Contractor shall revise and resubmit shop drawings which the Consultant rejects as inconsistent with the Contract Documents unless otherwise directed by the Consultant. The CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 16 , tContractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions to the resubmission other than those requested by the Consultant. GC 3.12 USE OF THE WORK 3.12.1 The Contractor shall confine construction machinery and equipment, storage of Products, and operations of employees to limits indicated by laws, ordinances, permits, or the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the Work with Products. 3.12.2 The Contractor shall not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a weight or force that will endanger the safety of the Work. GC 3.13 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK 3.13.1 The Contractor shall do the cutting and remedial work required to make the several parts of the Work come together properly. 3.13.2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the Work to ensure that this requirement is kept to a minimum. 3.13.3 Should the Owner, the Consultant, other contractors or anyone employed by them be responsible for ill- timed work necessitating cutting or remedial work to be performed, the cost of such cutting or remedial work shall be valued as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 3.13.4 Cutting and remedial work shall be performed by specialists familiar with the Products affected and shall be performed in a manner to neither damage nor endanger the Work. GC 3.14 CLEANUP 3.14.1 The Contractor shall maintain the Work in a tidy condition and free from the accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other contractors or their employees. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall remove waste products and debris, other than that resulting from the work of the Owner, other contractors or their employees, and shall leave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by the Owner before attainment of Substantial Performance of the Work. The Contractor shall remove products, tools, construction machinery, and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining work. 3.14.3 Prior to application for the final certificate for payment, the Contractor shall remove products, tools, construction machinery and equipment, and waste products and debris, other than that resulting from the work of the Owner, other contractors or their employees. PART 4 ALLOWANCES GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES 1 4.1.1 The Contract Price includes cash allowances stated in the Contract Documents,which allowances shall be expended as the Owner directs through the Consultant. 4.1.2 Cash allowances cover the net cost to the Contractor of services, Products, construction machinery and equipment, freight, unloading, handling, storage, installation, and other authorized expenses incurred in CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 17 performing the work stipulated under the cash allowances but do not include any Value Added Taxes payable by the Owner to the Contractor. 4.1.3 The Contract Price, and not the cash allowances, includes the Contractor's overhead and profit in , connection with such cash allowances. 4.1.4 Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the allowance, the Contractor shall be , compensated for any excess incurred and substantiated plus an amount for overhead and profit as set out in the Contract Documents. 4.1.5 The Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order to provide for any difference between the actual cost and each cash allowance. 4.1.6 The value of the work performed under a cash allowance is eligible to be included in progress payments. 4.1.7 The Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly prepare a schedule that shows when the Consultant and Owner must authorize ordering of items called for under cash allowances to avoid delaying the progress of the Work. GC 4.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE 4.2.1 The Contract Price includes the contingency allowance, if any, stated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.2 Expenditures under the contingency allowance shall be authorized and valued as provided in GC 6.1 CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 4.2.3 The Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order to provide for any difference between the expenditures authorized under paragraph 4.2.2 and the contingency allowance. PART 5 PAYMENT GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 5.1.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement, and/or promptly from time to time thereafter,furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. 5.1.2 The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of any material change in the Owner's financial arrangements during the performance of the Contract. GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 5.2.1 Applications for payment on account as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT may be made monthly as the Work progresses. 5.2.2 Applications for payment shall be dated the last day of the agreed monthly payment period and the amount claimed shall be for the value,proportionate to the amount of the Contract,of work performed and Products delivered to the Place of the Work at that date. 5.2.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, at least 14 days before the first application for payment, a , schedule of values for the parts of the Work, aggregating the total amount of the Contract Price, so as to facilitate evaluation of applications for payment. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 18 , i 5.2.4 The schedule of values shall be made out in such form and supported by such evidence as the Consultant may reasonably direct and when accepted by the Consultant, shall be used as the basis for applications for payment, unless it is found to be in error. 5.2.5 The Contractor shall include a statement based on the schedule of values with each application for payment. 5.2.6 Claims for Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work shall be supported by such evidence as the Consultant may reasonably require to establish the value and delivery of the Products. GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT 5.3.1 The Consultant will issue to the Owner,no later than 10 days after the receipt of an application for payment from the Contractor submitted in accordance with GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT, a certificate for payment in the amount applied for or in such other amount as the Consultant determines to be properly due. If the Consultant amends the application,the Consultant will promptly notify the Contractor in writing giving reasons for the amendment. 53.2 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on account as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement- PAYMENT no later than 5 days after the date of a certificate for payment issued by the Consultant. GC 5.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 5.4.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work is substantially performed, or if permitted by the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work a designated portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately is substantially performed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Consultant a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected and apply for a review by the Consultant to establish Substantial Performance of the Work or substantial performance of the designated portion of the Work. Failure to include an item on the list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete the Contract. 5.4.2 No later than 10 days after the receipt of the Contractor's list and application, the Consultant will review the Work to verify the validity of the application,and no later than 7 days after completing the review,will notify the Contractor whether the Work or the designated portion of the Work is substantially performed. 5.4.3 The Consultant shall state the date of Substantial Performance of the Work or designated portion of the Work in a certificate. 5.4.4 Immediately following the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor, in consultation with the Consultant, will establish a reasonable date for finishing the Work. GC 5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 5.5.1 After the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall: .1 submit an application for payment of the holdback amount, .2 submit a sworn statement that all accounts for labour, subcontracts,Products, construction machinery and equipment, and other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor in the Substantial Performance of the Work and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full, except for amounts properly retained as a holdback or as an identified amount in dispute. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 19 5.5.2 After the receipt of an application for payment from the Contractor and the sworn statement as provided in paragraph 5.5.1, the Consultant will issue a certificate for payment of the holdback amount. 5.5.3 Where the holdback amount has not been placed in a separate holdback account, the Owner shall, 10 days prior to the expiry of the holdback period stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work, place the holdback amount in a bank account in the joint names of the Owner and the Contractor. 5.5.4 The holdback amount authorized by the certificate for payment of the holdback amount is due and payable , on the day following the expiration of the holdback period stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. Where lien legislation does not exist or apply, the holdback amount shall be due and payable in accordance with other legislation, industry practice, or provisions which may be agreed to between the parties. The Owner may retain out of the holdback amount any sums required by law to satisfy any liens against the Work or, if permitted by the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work,other third party monetary claims against the Contractor which are enforceable against the Owner. GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK 5.6.1 Where legislation permits and where,upon application by the Contractor,the Consultant has certified that the work of a Subcontractor or Supplier has been performed prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the holdback amount retained for such subcontract work,or the Products supplied by such Supplier, on the day following the expiration of the holdback period for such work stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. 5.6.2 Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding paragraph, and notwithstanding the wording of such , certificates, the Contractor shall ensure that such subcontract work or Products is protected pending the issuance of a final certificate for payment and be responsible for the correction of defects or work not performed regardless of whether or not such was apparent when such certificates were issued. GC 5.7 FINAL PAYMENT 5.7.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work is completed, the Contractor shall submit an application for final payment. 5.7.2 The Consultant will, no later than 10 days after the receipt of an application from the Contractor for final payment,review the Work to verify the validity of the application. The Consultant will,no later than 7 days after reviewing the Work, notify the Contractor that the application is valid or give reasons why it is not , valid. 5.7.3 When the Consultant finds the Contractor's application for final payment valid, the Consultant will issue a final certificate for payment. 5.7.4 Subject to the provision of paragraph 10.4.1 of GC 10.4 - WORKERS' COMPENSATION, and any lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work, the Owner shall, no later than 5 days after the issuance of a final certificate for payment, pay the Contractor as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT. GC 5.8 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT 5.8.1 If because of climatic or other conditions reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor, there are items of work that cannot be performed, payment in full for that portion of the Work which has been performed as certified by the Consultant shall not be withheld or delayed by the Owner on account thereof, but the Owner may withhold, until the remaining portion of the Work is finished, only such an amount that the Consultant determines is sufficient and reasonable to cover the cost of performing such remaining work. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 20 GC 5.9 NON-CONFORMING WORK 5.9.1 No payment by the Owner under the Contract nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of any portion of the Work or Products which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK GC 6.1 CHANGES 6.1.1 The Owner, through the Consultant, without invalidating the Contract, may make changes in the Work consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions to the Work by Change Order or Change Directive. 6.1.2 The Contractor shall not perform a change in the Work without a Change Order or a Change Directive. GC 6.2 CHANGE ORDER 6.2.1 When a change in the Work is proposed or required, the Consultant shall provide a notice describing the proposed change in the Work to the Contractor. The Contractor shall present, in a form acceptable to the Consultant, a method of adjustment or an amount of adjustment for the Contract Price, if any, and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, for the proposed change in the Work. 6.2.2 When the Owner and the Contractor agree to the adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Time or to the method to be used to determine the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded in a Change Order, signed by Owner and Contractor. The value of the work performed as the result of a Change Order shall be included in applications for progress payment. GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE 6.3.1 If the Owner requires the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work prior to the Owner and the Contractor agreeing upon the adjustment in Contract Price and Contract Time, the Owner, through the Consultant, shall issue a Change Directive. 6.3.2 Upon receipt of a Change Directive, the Contractor shall proceed promptly with the change in the Work. The adjustment in the Contract Price for a change carried out by way of a Change Directive shall be determined on the basis of the cost of expenditures and savings to perform the work attributable to the change. If a change in the Work results in a net increase in the Contract Price,an allowance for overhead and profit shall be included. 6.3.3 If a change in the Work results in a net decrease in the Contract Price,the amount of the credit shall be the net cost,without deduction for overhead or profit. When both additions and deletions covering related work or substitutions are involved in a change in the Work, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be calculated on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change in the Work. 6.3.4 The Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Consultant may require,an itemized accounting of the cost of expenditures and savings referred to in paragraph 6.3.2 together with supporting data. The 1 cost of performing the work attributable to the Change Directive shall be limited to the actual cost of all of the following: 1 wages and benefits paid for labour in the direct employ of the Contractor under applicable collective bargaining agreements,or under a salary or wage schedule agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor; CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 21 i .2 salaries, wages, and benefits of the Contractor's office personnel engaged in a technical capacity and other personnel at shops or on the road, engaged in expediting the production or transportation of materials or equipment; .3 contributions, assessments, or taxes incurred for such items as unemployment insurance, provincial health insurance, workers' compensation, and Canada or Quebec Pension Plan, insofar as such cost is based on wages, salaries, or other remuneration paid to employees of the Contractor and included in i the cost of the work as provided in paragraphs 6.3.4.1 and 6.3.4.2; .4 travel and subsistence expenses of the Contractor's personnel described in paragraphs 6.3.4.1 and 6.3.4.2; i .5 the cost of all Products including cost of transportation thereof, .6 the cost of materials, supplies,equipment, temporary services and facilities,and hand tools not owned by the workers, including transportation and maintenance thereof, which are consumed; and cost less salvage value on such items used but not consumed, which remain the property of the Contractor; .7 rental cost of all tools, machinery, and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from or provided by the Contractor or others, including installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling, removal, transportation and delivery cost thereof; , .8 deposits lost; .9 the amounts of all subcontracts; , .10 the cost of quality assurance such as independent inspection and testing services; .11 charges levied by authorities having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work; .12 royalties, patent license fees, and damages for infringement of patents and cost of defending suits therefor subject always to the Contractor's obligations to indemnify the Owner as provided in paragraph 10.3.1 of GC 10.3 - PATENT FEES; .13 any adjustment in premiums for all bonds and insurance which the Contractor is required, by the Contract Documents, to purchase and maintain; .14 any adjustment in taxes and duties for which the Contractor is liable; , .15 charges for long distance telephone and facsimile communications, courier services, expressage, and petty cash items incurred; .16 the cost of removal and disposal of waste products and debris; .17 cost incurred due to emergencies affecting the safety of persons or property; i 6.3.5 Pending determination of the final amount of a Change Directive, the undisputed value of the work performed as the result of a Change Directive is eligible to be included in progress payments. 6.3.6 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree on the proposed adjustment in the Contract Time or the method of determining it, the adjustment shall be referred to the Consultant for determination. i 6.3.7 If at any time after the start of the work directed by a Change Directive, the Owner and the Contractor reach agreement on the adjustment to the Contract Price and to the Contract Time,this agreement shall be recorded in a Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 22 ' GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS 6.4.1 If the Owner or the Contractor discover conditions at the Place of the Work which are: .1 subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which existed before the commencement of the Work which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents; or ' .2 physical conditions of a nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then the observing party shall notify the other party in writing before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 5 Working Days after first observance of the conditions. 6.4.2 The Consultant will promptly investigate such conditions and make a finding. If the finding is that the conditions differ materially and this would cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work, the Consultant, with the Owner's approval, shall issue appropriate instructions for a change in the Work as provided in GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER or GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 6.4.3 If the Consultant finds that the conditions at the Place of the Work are not materially different or that no change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time is justified, the Consultant shall report the reasons for this finding to the Owner and the Contractor in writing. GC 6.5 DELAYS 6.5.1 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an action or omission of the Owner, Consultant,or anyone employed or engaged by them directly or indirectly,contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents,then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor as the result of such delay. 6.5.2 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by a stop work order issued by a court or other public authority and providing that such order was not issued as the result of an act or fault of the Contractor or any person employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor as the result of such delay. 6.5.3 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by labour disputes,strikes,lock-outs(including lock-outs decreed or recommended for its members by a recognized contractors' association, of which the Contractor is a member or to which the Contractor is otherwise bound), fire, unusual delay by common carriers or unavoidable casualties, or without limit to any of the foregoing, by a cause beyond the Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The extension of time shall not be less than the time lost as the result of the event causing the delay, unless the Contractor agrees to a shorter extension. The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for costs incurred by such delays unless such delays result from actions by the Owner. 6.5.4 No extension shall be made for delay unless notice in writing of claim is given to the Consultant not later than 10 Working Days after the commencement of delay,providing however,that in the case of a continuing cause of delay only one notice of claim shall be necessary. 6.5.5 If no schedule is made under paragraph 2.2.9 of GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT, no claim for delay shall be allowed because of failure of the Consultant to furnish instructions until 10 Working Days after demand for such instructions has been made and not then, unless the claim is reasonable. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 23 PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE ' GC 7.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK, OR TERMINATE THE ' CONTRACT 7.1.1 If the Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors because of the Contractor's insolvency,or if a receiver is appointed because of the Contractor's insolvency, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, by giving the Contractor or receiver or trustee in bankruptcy notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.1.2 If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly or otherwise fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract to a substantial degree and if the Consultant has given a written statement to the Owner and Contractor that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, notify the Contractor in writing that the Contractor is in default of the Contractor's contractual obligations and instruct the Contractor to correct the default in the 5 Working Days immediately following the receipt of such notice. 7.1.3 If the default cannot be corrected in the 5 Working Days specified, the Contractor shall be in compliance with the Owner's instructions if the Contractor: .1 commences the correction of the default within the specified time, and .2 provides the Owner with an acceptable schedule for such correction, and , .3 corrects the default in accordance with such schedule. 7.1.4 If the Contractor fails to correct the default in the time specified or subsequently agreed upon, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, the Owner may: .1 correct such default and deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor ' provided the Consultant has certified such cost to the Owner and the Contractor, or .2 terminate the Contractor's right to continue with the Work in whole or in part or terminate the Contract. 7.1.5 If the Owner terminates the Contractor's right to continue with the Work as provided in paragraphs 7.1.1 and 7.1.4, the Owner shall be entitled to: .1 take possession of the Work and Products; utilize the construction machinery and equipment; subject to the rights of third parties, finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may consider expedient, but without undue delay or expense; and .2 withhold further payment to the Contractor until a final certificate for payment is issued; and .3 charge the Contractor the amount by which the full cost of finishing the Work as certified by the Consultant, including compensation to the Consultant for the Consultant's additional services and a reasonable allowance as determined' by the Consultant to cover the cost of corrections to work performed by the Contractor that may be required under GC 12.3-WARRANTY,exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price; however, if such cost of finishing the Work is less than the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the difference; and .4 on expiry of the warranty period, charge the Contractor the amount by which the cost of corrections to the Contractor's work under GC 12.3 - WARRANTY exceeds the allowance provided for such corrections, or if the cost of such corrections is less than the allowance, pay the Contractor the difference. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 24 ' 7.1.6 The Contractor's obligation under the Contract as to quality, correction, and warranty of the work performed by the Contractor up to the time of termination shall continue in force r fter such termination. GC 7.2 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 7.2.1 If the Owner should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors because of the Owner's insolvency, or if a receiver is appointed because of the Owner's insolvency, the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have, by giving the Owner or receiver or trustee in bankruptcy notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.2.2 If the Work should be stopped or otherwise delayed for a period of 30 days or more under an order of a court or other public authority and providing that such order was not issued as the result of an act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone directly or indirectly employed or engaged by the Contractor,the Contractor may,without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have,by giving the Owner notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.2.3 The Contractor may notify the Owner in writing,with a copy to the Consultant,that the Owner is in default of the Owner's contractual obligations if. 1 the Owner fails to furnish, when so requested by the Contractor, reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract, or .2 the Consultant fails to issue a certificate as provided in GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT, or .3 the Owner fails to pay the Contractor when due the amounts certified by the Consultant or awarded by arbitration or court, or .4 the Owner violates the requirements of the Contract to a substantial degree and the Consultant,except ' for GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER, confirms by written statement to the Contractor that sufficient cause exists. 7.2.4 The Contractor's notice in writing to the Owner provided under paragraph 7.2.3 shall advise that if the default is not corrected within 5 Working Days following the receipt of the notice in writing,the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have, stop the Work or terminate the Contract. 7.2.5 If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions set out above,the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all work performed including reasonable profit, for loss sustained upon Products and construction machinery and equipment, and such other damages as the Contractor may have sustained as a result of the termination of the Contract. PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION GC 8.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 8.1.1 Differences between the parties to the Contract as to the interpretation,application or administration of the Contract or any failure to agree where agreement between the parties is called for,herein collectively called disputes, which are not resolved in the first instance by findings of the Consultant as provided in GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT, shall be settled in accordance with the requirements of Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION. 8.1.2 If a dispute arises under the Contract in respect of a matter in which the Consultant has no authority under the Contract to make a finding,the procedures set out in paragraph 8.1.3 and paragraphs 8.2.3 to 8.2.8 of ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 25 GC 8.2 - NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION, AND ARBITRATION, and in GC 8.3 - RETENTION OF , RIGHTS apply to that dispute with the necessary changes to detail as may be required. 8.1.3 If a dispute is not resolved promptly, the Consultant shall give such instructions as in the Consultant's , opinion are necessary for the proper performance of the Work and to prevent delays pending settlement of the dispute. The parties shall act immediately according to such instructions, it being understood that by so doing neither party will jeopardize any claim the party may have. If it is subsequently determined that ' such instructions were in error or at variance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out such instructions which the Contractor was required to do beyond what the Contract Documents correctly understood and interpreted would have ' required, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work. GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION, AND ARBITRATION 8.2.1 In accordance with the latest edition of the Rules for Mediation of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes, the parties shall appoint a Project Mediator .1 within 30 days after the Contract was awarded, or i .2 if the parties neglected to make an appointment within the 30 day period, within 15 days after either party by notice in writing requests that the Project Mediator be appointed. 8.2.2 A party shall be conclusively deemed to have accepted a finding of the Consultant under GC 2.2 - ROLE ' OF THE CONSULTANT and to have expressly waived and released the other party from any claims in respect of the particular matter dealt with in that finding unless, within 15 Working Days after receipt of that finding, the party sends a notice in writing of dispute to the other party and to the Consultant, which contains the particulars of the matter in dispute and the relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. The responding party shall send a notice in writing of reply to the dispute within 10 Working Days after receipt of the notice of dispute setting out particulars of this response and any relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. , 8.2.3 The parties shall make all reasonable efforts to resolve their dispute by amicable negotiations and agree to provide,without prejudice,frank,candid and timely disclosure of relevant facts,information,and documents to facilitate these negotiations. 8.2.4 After a period of 10 Working Days following receipt of a responding party's notice in writing of reply under paragraph 8.2.2,the parties shall request the Project Mediator to assist the parties to reach agreement on any unresolved dispute. The mediated negotiations shall be conducted in accordance with the latest edition of the Rules for Mediation of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes. 8.2.5 If the dispute has not been resolved within 10 Working Days after the Project Mediator was requested under ' paragraph 8.2.4 or within such further period agreed by the parties, the Project Mediator shall terminate the mediated negotiations by giving notice in writing to both parties. 8.2.6 By giving a notice in writing to the other party,not later than 10 Working Days after the date of termination of the mediated negotiations under paragraph 8.2.5,either party may refer the dispute to be finally resolved , by arbitration under the latest edition of the Rules for Arbitration of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes. The arbitration shall be conducted in the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work. 8.2.7 On expiration of the 10 Working Days, the arbitration agreement under paragraph 8.2.6 is not binding on the parties and, if a notice is not given under paragraph 8.2.6 within the required time,the parties may refer the unresolved dispute to the courts or to any other form of dispute resolution, including arbitration, which they have agreed to use. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 26 ' r8.2.8 If neither party requires by notice in writing given within 10 Working Days of the date of notice requesting arbitration in paragraph 8.2.6 that a dispute be arbitrated immediately, all disputes referred to arbitration as provided in paragraph 8.2.6 shall be .1 held in abeyance until (1) Substantial Performance of the Work, (2) the Contract has been terminated, or (3) the Contractor has abandoned the Work, whichever is earlier, and .2 consolidated into a single arbitration under the rules governing the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6. ' GC 8.3 RETENTION OF RIGHTS 8.3.1 It is agreed that no act by either party shall be construed as a renunciation or waiver of any rights or recourses, provided the party has given the notices required under Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION and has carried out the instructions as provided in paragraph 8.1.3. 8.3.2 Nothing in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION shall be construed in any way to limit a party from asserting any statutory right to a lien under applicable lien legislation of the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work and the assertion of such right by initiating judicial proceedings is not to be construed as a waiver of any right that party may have under paragraph 8.2.6 to proceed by way of ' arbitration to adjudicate the merits of the claim upon which such a lien is based. PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ' GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 9.1.1 The Contractor shall protect the Work and the Owner's property and property adjacent to the Place of the Work from damage which may arise as the result of the Contractor's operations under the Contract, and shall be responsible for such damage, except damage which occurs as the result of- .] errors in the Contract Documents; .2 acts or omissions by the Owner, the Consultant, other contractors, their agents and employees. 9.1.2 Should the Contractor in the performance of the Contract damage the Work, the Owner's property, or property adjacent to the Place of the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for the making good such damage at the Contractor's expense. ' 9.1.3 Should damage occur to the Work or Owner's property for which the Contractor is not responsible, as provided in paragraph 9.1.1, the Contractor shall make good such damage to the Work and, if the Owner so directs, to the Owner's property. The Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted as provided ' in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. GC 9.2 DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 9.2.1 If either party to the Contract should suffer damage in any manner because of any wrongful act or neglect of the other party or of anyone for whom the other party is responsible in law, then that party shall be reimbursed by the other party for such damage. The reimbursing party shall be subrogated to the rights of the other party in respect of such wrongful act or neglect if it be that of a third party. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 27 9.2.2 Claims for damage under paragraph 9.2.1 shall be made in writing to the party liable within reasonable time after the first observance of such damage and if undisputed shall be confirmed by Change Order. Disputed claims shall be resolved as set out in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION. 9.2.3 If the Contractor has caused damage to the work of another contractor on the Project,the Contractor agrees ' upon due notice to settle with the other contractor by negotiation or arbitration. If the other contractor makes a claim against the Owner on account of damage alleged to have been so sustained,the Owner shall notify the Contractor and may require the Contractor to defend the action at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall satisfy a final order or judgment against the Owner and pay the costs incurred by the Owner arising from such action. 9.2.4 If the Contractor becomes liable to pay or satisfy a final order,judgment,or award against the Owner,then the Contractor,upon undertaking to indemnify the Owner against any and all liability for costs,shall have the right to appeal in the name of the Owner such final order or judgment to any and all courts of competent , jurisdiction. GC 9.3 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS 9.3.1 For the purposes of applicable environmental legislation, the Owner shall be deemed to have control and management of the Place of the Work with respect to existing conditions. 9.3.2 Prior to the Contractor commencing the Work, the Owner shall 1 take all reasonable steps to determine whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials are ' present at the Place of the Work, and .2 provide the Consultant and the Contractor with a written list of any such substances and materials. 9.3.3 The Owner shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that no person suffers injury,sickness,or death and that no property is injured or destroyed as a result of exposure to, or the presence of, toxic or hazardous ' substances or materials which were at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. 9.3.4 Unless the Contract expressly provides otherwise, the Owner shall be responsible for taking all necessary steps, in accordance with legal requirements, to dispose of, store or otherwise render harmless toxic or hazardous substances or materials which were present at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. 9.3.5 If the Contractor .1 encounters toxic or hazardous substances or materials at the Place of the Work, or .2 has reasonable grounds to believe that toxic or hazardous substances or materials are present at the Place of the Work, ' which were not disclosed by the Owner, as required under paragraph 9.3.2, or which were disclosed but have not been dealt with as required under paragraph 9.3.4, the Contractor shall ' .3 take all reasonable steps,including stopping the Work,to ensure that no person suffers injury,sickness, or death and that no property is injured or destroyed as a result of exposure to or the presence of the substances or materials, and .4 immediately report the circumstances to the Consultant and the Owner in writing. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 28 t9.3.6 If the Contractor is delayed in performing the Work or incurs additional costs as a result of taking steps required under paragraph 9.3.5.3, the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for ' reasonable costs incurred as a result of the delay and as a result of taking those steps. 9.3.7 Notwithstanding paragraphs 2.2.6 and 2.2.7 of GC 2.2-ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT,or paragraph 8.1.1 ' of GC 8.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT, the Consultant may select and rely upon the advice of an independent expert in a dispute under paragraph 9.3.6 and, in that case, the expert shall be deemed to have been jointly retained by the Owner and the Contractor and shall be jointly paid by them. 9.3.8 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, the Consultant,their agents and employees, from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of or resulting from exposure to,or the presence of,toxic or hazardous substances or materials which were at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. This obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity set out in GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION or which otherwise exist respecting a person or party described in this paragraph. 9.3.9 GC 9.3-TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3 - RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. ' PART 10 GOVERNING REGULATIONS GC 10.1 TAXES AND DUTIES 10.1.1 The Contract Price shall include all taxes and customs duties in effect at the time of the bid closing except for Value Added Taxes payable by the Owner to the Contractor as stipulated in Article A-4 of the ' Agreement - CONTRACT PRICE. 10.1.2 Any increase or decrease in costs to the Contractor due to changes in such included taxes and duties after the time of the bid closing shall increase or decrease the Contract Price accordingly. GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES 10.2.1 The laws of the Place of the Work shall govern the Work. 10.2.2 The Owner shall obtain and pay for the building permit,permanent easements,and rights of servitude. The Contractor shall be responsible for permits, licenses, or certificates necessary for the performance of the Work which were in force at the date of bid closing. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall give the required notices and comply with the laws, ordinances,rules,regulations,or codes which are or become in force during the performance of the Work and which relate to the Work, to the preservation of the public health, and to construction safety. 10.2.4 The Contractor shall not be responsible for verifying that the Contract Documents are in compliance with the applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations,or codes relating to the Work. If the Contract Documents . are at variance therewith, or if, subsequent to the date of bid closing, changes are made to the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes which require modification to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing requesting direction immediately upon such variance or ' change becoming known. The Consultant will make the changes required to the Contract Documents as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 29 10.2.5 If the Contractor fails to notify the Consultant in writing; and fails to obtain direction as required in paragraph 10.2.4; and performs work knowing it to be contrary to any laws,ordinances,rules, regulations, or codes; the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall correct the violations thereof, and shall bear the costs, expenses, and damages attributable to the failure to comply with the provisions of such laws, , ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes. GC 10.3 PATENT FEES 10.3.1 The Contractor shall pay the royalties and patent licence fees required for the performance of the Contract. , The Contractor shall hold the Owner harmless from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of a patent of invention by the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable. 10.3.2 The Owner shall hold the Contractor harmless against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of a patent of invention in executing anything for the purpose of the Contract, the model,plan, or design of which was supplied to the Contractor as part of the Contract Documents. GC 10.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION 10.4.1 Prior to commencing the Work,Substantial Performance of the Work,and the issuance of the final certificate for payment, the Contractor shall provide evidence of compliance with workers' compensation legislation at the Place of the Work, including payments due thereunder. 10.4.2 At any time during the term of the Contract, when requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide such evidence of compliance by the Contractor and Subcontractors. PART 11 INSURANCE—BONDS GC 11.1 INSURANCE 11.1.1 Without restricting the generality of GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION, the Contractor shall provide, maintain, and pay for the insurance coverages specified in GC 11.1 - INSURANCE. Unless otherwise stipulated,the duration of each insurance policy shall be from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of the final certificate for payment. Prior to commencement of the Work and upon the placement, renewal,amendment,or extension of all or any part of the insurance,the Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner with confirmation of coverage and, if required, a certified true copy of the policies certified by an authorized representative of the insurer together with copies of any amending endorsements. , .1 General Liability Insurance: General liability insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, the Owner, and the Consultant, with limits of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence and with a property damage deductible not exceeding $2,500. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 2100, or its equivalent replacement,provided that IBC Form 2100 shall contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. To achieve the desired limit, umbrella, or excess liability insurance may be used. All liability coverage shall be maintained for completed operations hazards from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the ' Work,on an ongoing basis for a period of 6 years following Substantial Performance of the Work. Where the Contractor maintains a single,blanket policy,the addition of the Owner and the Consultant is limited CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 30 ' to liability arising out of the Project and all operations necessary or incidental thereto. The policy shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice in writing in advance of any cancellation, and of change or amendment restricting coverage. .2 Automobile Liability Insurance: Automobile liability insurance in respect of licensed vehicles shall have limits of not less than$2,000,000 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property, covering all licensed vehicles owned or leased by the Contractor, and endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice ' in writing in advance of any cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage. Where the policy has been issued pursuant to a government-operated automobile insurance system, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with confirmation of automobile insurance coverage for all automobiles registered in the name of the Contractor. .3 Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance: Aircraft and watercraft liability insurance with respect to owned or non-owned aircraft and watercraft if used directly or indirectly in the performance of the Work, including use of additional premises, shall be subject to limits of not less than$2,000,000 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury,death,and damage ' to property including loss of use thereof and limits of not less than $2,000,000 for aircraft passenger hazard. Such insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of cancellation, change, or amendment restricting coverage. .4 Property and Boiler and Machinery Insurance: (1) "All risks" property insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, the Owner, and the Consultant,insuring not less than the sum of the amount of the Contract Price and the full value,as stated in the Supplementary Conditions,of Products that are specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work, with a deductible not exceeding $2,500. The ' insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 4042 or its equivalent replacement, provided that IBC Form 4042 shall'contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. The coverage shall be maintained continuously until 10 ' days after the date of the final certificate for payment. (2) Boiler and machinery insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor,the Owner,and ' the Consultant for not less than the replacement value of the boilers, pressure vessels, and other insurable objects forming part of the Work. The insurance provided shall not be less than the insurance provided by the"Comprehensive Boiler and Machinery Form"and shall be maintained continuously from commencement of use or operation of the property insured and until 10 days after the date of the final certificate for payment. (3) The policies shall allow for partial or total use or occupancy of the Work. If because of such use or occupancy the Contractor is unable to provide coverage,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing. Prior to such use or occupancy the Owner shall provide,maintain,and pay for property and boiler insurance insuring the full value of the Work, as in sub-paragraphs (1) and (2), including coverage for such use or occupancy and shall provide the Contractor with proof of such insurance. The Contractor shall refund to the Owner the unearned premiums applicable to the Contractor's policies upon termination of coverage. ' (4) The policies shall provide that, in the case of a loss or damage,payment shall be made to the Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss or damage payment with the insurers. When the extent of the loss or damage is determined, the Contractor shall proceed to restore the Work. Loss or damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except that the Contractor shall be entitled to CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 31 such reasonable extension of Contract Time relative to the extent of the loss or damage as the ' Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. (5) The Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the Owner, in addition to the amount due ' under the Contract, the amount at which the Owner's interest in restoration of the Work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. In addition the Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the payments made by the insurer the amount of the Contractor's interest in the restoration of the Work. (6) In the case of loss or damage to the Work arising from the work of another contractor, or Owner's own forces,the Owner,in accordance with the Owner's obligations under paragraph 3.2.2.4 of GC 3.2-CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS,shall pay , the Contractor the cost of restoring the Work as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. ' .5 Contractors' Equipment Insurance: "All risks"contractors' equipment insurance covering construction machinery and equipment used by the ' Contractor for the performance of the Work,including boiler insurance on temporary boilers and pressure vessels,shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall not allow subrogation claims by the insurer against the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of cancellation,change,or amendment restricting coverage. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor for self-insurance, the Owner agrees to waive the equipment insurance requirement. 11.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deductible amounts under the policies except where such amounts may be excluded from the Contractor's responsibility by the terms of GC 9.1 -PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY and GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. 11.1.3 Where the full insurable value of the Work is substantially less than the Contract Price, the Owner may reduce the amount of insurance required or waive the course of construction insurance requirement. 11.1.4 If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain insurance as required by the Contract Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to provide and maintain such insurance and give evidence to the Contractor and , the Consultant. The Contractor shall pay the cost thereof to the Owner on demand or the Owner may deduct the amount which is due or may become due to the Contractor. 11.1.5 All required insurance policies shall be with insurers licensed to underwrite insurance in the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work. GC 11.2 BONDS 11.2.1 The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the Work or within the specified time, provide to the ' Owner any surety bonds required by the Contract. 11.2.2 Such bonds shall be issued by a duly licensed surety company authorized to transact a business of suretyship in the province or territory of the Place of the Work and shall be maintained in good standing until the fulfilment of the Contract. The form of such bonds shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the CCDC approved bond forms. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 32 ' PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION — WAIVER— WARRANTY GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION 12.1.1 The Contractor shall'indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant, their agents and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings (hereinafter called "claims"), by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to, the Contractor's performance of the Contract provided such claims are: .1 attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, and .2 caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable, and .3 made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as ' set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work,or within such shorter period as may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work. ' The Owner expressly waives the right to indemnity for claims other than those stated above. 12.1.2 The obligation of the Contractor to indemnify hereunder shall be limited to$2,000,000 per occurrence from ' the commencement of the Work until Substantial Performance of the Work and thereafter to an aggregate limit of$2,000,000. 12.1.3 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,the Contractor's agents and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to a lack of or defect in title or an alleged lack of or defect in title to the Place of the Work. 12.1.4 GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3 - RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. GC 12.2 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 12.2.1 Waiver of Claims by Owner As of the date of the final certificate for payment,the Owner expressly waives and releases the Contractor from all claims against the Contractor including without limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Contractor except one or more of the following: .1 those made in writing prior to the date of the final certificate for payment and still unsettled; .2 those arising from the provisions of GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION or GC 12.3 - WARRANTY; .3 those arising from the provisions of paragraph 9.3.5 of GC 9.3 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS and those arising from the Contractor bringing or introducing any toxic or hazardous substances and materials to the Place of the Work after the Contractor commences the Work. In the Common Law provinces GC 12.2.1.4 shall read as follows: .4 those made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within such shorter period as ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 33 may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work and those arising from any liability of the Contractor for damages resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Contract with respect to substantial defects or deficiencies in the Work for which the Contractor is proven responsible. ' As used herein"substantial defects or deficiencies"means those defects or deficiencies in the Work which affect the Work to such an extent or in such a manner that a significant part or the whole of the Work is unfit for the purpose intended by the Contract Documents. In the Province of Quebec GC 12.2.1.4 shall read as follows: .4 those arising under the provisions of Article 2118 of the Civil Code of Quebec. 12.2.2 Waiver of Claims by Contractor , As of the date of the final certificate for payment,the Contractor expressly waives and releases the Owner , from all claims against the Owner including without limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Owner except: .1 those made in writing prior to the Contractor's application for final payment and still unsettled; and ' .2 those arising from the provisions of GC 9.3 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS or GC 10.3 - PATENT FEES. ' 12.2.3 GC 12.2-WAIVER OF CLAIMS shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3-RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. GC 12.3 WARRANTY 12.3.1 The warranty period with regard to the Contract is one year from the date of Substantial Performance of ' the Work or those periods specified in the Contract Documents for certain portions of the Work or Products. 12.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper performance of the Work to the extent that the design and Contract Documents permit such performance. 12.3.3 Except for the provisions of paragraph 12.3.6'and subject to paragraph 12.3.2, the Contractor shall correct promptly,at the Contractor's expense,defects or deficiencies in the Work which appear prior to and during ' the warranty periods specified in the Contract Documents. 12.3.4 The Owner,through the Consultant,shall promptly give the Contractor notice in writing of observed defects and deficiencies that occur during the warranty period. 12.3.5 The Contractor shall correct or pay for damage resulting from corrections made under the requirements of paragraph 12.3.3. t 12.3.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining Product warranties in excess of one year on behalf of the Owner from the manufacturer. These Product warranties shall be issued by the manufacturer to the benefit of the Owner. CCDC 2-1994 File 00712 34 -*s 1 EEOCanadian construction documents committee The Canadian Construction Documents Committee is a joint committee composed of representatives appointed by: The Association of Consulting Engineers of Canada The Canadian Construction Association The Canadian Council of Professional Engineers The Committee of Canadian Architectural Councils Construction Specifications Canada Committee policy and procedures are directed and approved by the constituent organizations. This document has been endorsed by each of the above organizations. Enquiries should be directed to: The Secretary, Canadian Construction Documents Committee, 85 Albert Street Ottawa, Ontario, Canada KIP 6A4 k y DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 1 R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 The Office of the Clerk ' The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3E6 ' Re: Additions And Renovations Gamet B. Rickard Recreation Complex 2440 King Street West Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 1K5 TENDER NO. CI_ 9727 ' Sir. 1.: „0, We- F E�C���.=EERY coUs�Rvc.l tom �..'jD agree for the (Company Name) Stipulated Price stated below to supply all necessary labour, materials, plant, equipment, services and overtime work as may be required for the execution and completion of all ' work in connection with the above referenced project for the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, in accordance with Instructions to Bidders, The Municipality of Clarington's Standard Terms and Conditions, the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions. Specifications and Drawings, prepared for that purpose by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, Whitby, Ontario and to the entire satisfaction of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington: ' STIPULATED PRICE (exclusive of GST) 2�7414 M/ / IL�A'l r&E /'y i,i,�'0 F) FT5” n1 X 7-rltn; /2 ' Dollars (.$ L4 •14 00 1) 2.0 Further, to assist you with the necessary information for tax purposes, etc., the stipulated price includes the following: ' Provincial Sales Tax $ ►t,.acLvo� 3.0 Goods and Services Tax (GST) at 7% to be added to the Stipulated Price $ 31 -?IV 4.0 The Stipulated Price includes CASH ALLOWANCES in the amount of$114,000.00 (One Hundred and Fourteen Thousand Dollars)as listed in the Instructions to Bidders, and also includes for Electrical Cash Allowance as per Section 16050 Item 1.7. ' 5.0 We agree the Owner reserves the ri ht to accept o 9 g p r reject prices bid for the work or for any portion of the work. ' 7100-OOZOO. W.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 2R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 6.0 We agree that the Owner reserves the right to take any financial benefit, from alternates submitted, into consideration in the evaluation of all tenders and the subsequent award of the Contract. 7.0 We agree to complete all work including necessary overtime work pursuant to this Contract in the period required to meet the scheduled completion dates as specified. 8.0 We have received and included for Addenda No. 1 to 3 in the Stipulated Price. 9.0 We submit the following separate prices which are included in the Stipulated Price: (Separate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and installation of two (2) flagpoles as specified in Section 10350 including concrete bases and lightning spikes. $ 2,500.- ' B. Supply and installation of all foot grilles as specified in Section 12690. $ Z ' C. Supply and installation of all planting material as specified in Section 02950. $ — ' 10.0 We submit the following alternate prices which are not included in the Stipulated Price: (Alternate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and install Solid Core Phenolic Toilet Partitions Type 130-TS by Watrous Sales Inc., or approved equal, in lieu of metal toilet partitions specified in Section 10162 $ 3 7L) extr redit . B. Supply and install Tuflex"rubber file flooring in lieu of Mondo flooring specified in Section 09671. extr redi C. Cost to enclose second floor viewing area as detailed on Drawing t A204 marked alternate price item 9 "C", and as shown on Typical Section (Alternate Price Item) 1/A204. The four additional doors ' required are to be type NL, solid wood core doors in P.S. frames. Sizes to be 900 x 2150 An Allowance of S1600 for door hardware is to be included in this alternate. See electrical and mechanical items for this alternate as detailed in Addendum No. 2. $ 9,5 �Of extr credit r 7100-00200-R1Ai."A DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 3R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 D. Hydraulic seed all areas shown on the site plan as sodded, in lieu of sod specified in Section 02935. $ Y O ' extr credit 11.0 In the event that work extra to that included in the Contract is required, and is authorized in writing by the Owner, the Contractor will add the following percentages to the cost of the work. Overhead Profit ' General Contractor's Work Subcontractor's Work --/OZ 5-Z r11.1 The owner reserves the right to include or exclude any of the above items in Sections 8 & 9 of this Tender Form. ' 12.0 We submit the names of subcontractors upon whose tender a sti pula ed price was based: 3J( ' TRADE FIRM ADDRESS ' Demolition owN F14C>R'cee-- Excavation and Backfili 01— nJ —s Tt M Asphalt Paving 0 _ 7-1/"1 E 3 o- CO Landscaping 0 —' (Y-1 T Unit Paving ' Reinforcing Steel W N 7 H Concrete Finishing M ' Precast Hollow Core Slabs _ Masonry ' Glass Block Miscellaneous Metals ' Structural Steel T(jA Pre-Engineered Building Structure AK+ERdCAw.> R,,vi�.Dt ' Steel Roof Deck and Floor Deck 4s/9 6C Rough Carpentry owr.� o2.c'►g Finish Carpentry owl FoQ.c �S ' 7100400200-R1A1 wpd ' N0 DIVISIO SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 4R r REVISION 1 ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 TRADE FIRM ADDRESS ' Cabinet Work , Damp Proofing ow N FoiZ.Gf�g ' Spray Applied Polyurethane w N S i!1-1-Pq7-6 Insulation ' Metal Siding FE- -F1 L E.P.D.M. Sheet Roofing 6,199 '$ Metal Flashing and Trim F-&4-r/L ' Hollow Metal Doors&Frames I vC Wood Doors C tvi A C i,ds ' Sectional Overhead Doors 14l-)S 1 L Rolling Shutters A/--I ' Aluminum Windows and Screens Glass and Glazing T ' Rubber Flooring C Resilient Flooring 51:6 Y ' Ceramic Tile and Quarry Tile Ik L" -) Drywall and Acoustics L6 C r,7-C-XI LIE j ' Metal Toilet Partitions Foot Grilles ti^,— v .v SEC i 01 FS tPainting ,Joe/ Dasherboard Systems - ' Fire Protection(Sprinklers) Amount Included in Tender Price CS Plumbing(Interior) Amount Included in Tender Price L4 %JI9G ' Plumbing(E)terior) 0 w N rb A&S Amount Included in Tender Price 1 ' 7100-00200-RIA1•wpd ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 5R REVISION 1 ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 TRADE FIRM ADDRESS ' HVAC Amount Included in Tender Price Jv6-P5O''`� $ ' Electrical Amount Included in Tender Price (.v/�-LL ' Refrigeration Amount Included in Tender Price G1/`1Go $ 13.0 We agree that, when requested by the Consultant, additional work will be performed at ' following unit prices exclusive of Overhead and Profit which shall cover all charges for labour and materials, supervision, plant and tools. Deletions will be deducted from additions before these unit prices are applied. Credits will be deducted from extras before ' charges for overhead and profit are added. All work will be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Provincial Sales Tax is included in these unit prices. Goods and Services Tax is not included in these unit prices. Breakdown of all taxes will be submitted ' later. Unit Prices for Additions and Deletions ' Nature of Work Additions Deletions ' 1. Earth Excavation by machine, calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. �O ' 2. Earth excavation by hand calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. 200 •- �o ' 3. Trenching up to 600 mm deep per cubic metre. �0 3 ' 4. Trenching up to 1200 mm deep per _ cubic metre. Its.— `.� 1 ' 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 6R REVISION 1 / ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 Nature of Work Additions Deletions ' 5. Trenching over 1200 mm deep per cubic metre. Z's.- S•` ' 6. OPSS Granular 'A' backfill (supply, _ place, and compact) per cubic metre. 30 • 15•" ' 7. OPSS Granular 'B' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. ' 8. Type 'C' Sand Fill, (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. Zo �• - ' 9. Reinforcing Steel, supply and place, per - metric tonne. 10. 25 MPa concrete-in-place to walls, footings or piers per cubic metre. ' 11. 35 MPa concrete-in-place to floors per cubic metre. 300•- ►ZS ' 12. Vertical formwork in place including all accessories and stripping per square metre of face area. 13. Concrete curbs as detailed per lineal metre. ' 14. Concrete sidewalks, 100 him thick including sub-grade, compaction and all accessories as specified per cubic ' metre. NOT APPLICABLE ' 15. HL6 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per swis fnetpe. Q •- . T'o.�tiE 16. HL3 Asphalt paving, supply, place and _ ' compact per rubi+<,Fnst�e. To..�Ne ' 7100400200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 7R REVISION 1 ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 Nature of Work Additions Deletions ' 17. Plain concrete block as specified, 90 mm 30.- installed, per square metre of wall area: 140 mm GAS.- 32.So ' 190 mm 240 mm = �►. _ 290 mm ' 18. Architectural concrete block as specified, 90 mm installed, per square metre of wall area: 140 mm ' 190 mm 240 mm log.- S�. 290 mm - ' 19. Spray applied polyurethane insulation, installed, per square metre of wall area. ' 20. Precast concrete curb as specified in _ Section 02516, supply and install, each: 5c•- 2'S.- 21. 12 dia EMT surface mounted conduit _ ' installed per metre. Au- 22. 20 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. 560 ' 23. 25 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. 8, /0 $; 3 48 ' 24. #12 copper RW90 installed in conduit per metre. 25. Duplex general purpose 15A, 120V , receptacle on local circuit within 20 metres, per metre. ' 14.0 We have carefully examined all the Tender Documents, have visited the Site, and have a clear and comprehensive knowledge of the Work required under this Contract and of all the working conditions and schedule requirements. ' 710000200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 tTENDER FORM Page 8R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 15.0 We the undersigned agree that this Tender is valid and irrevocable and subject to ' acceptance by the Owner without notice to us for a period of Sixty (60) days from date of receipt of Tender, and that if notified of award of Contract, we will within ten (10) days of receipt of notification of Acceptance of Tender. a) Furnish to the Owner, in care of the Consultant, copies of insurance policies as required by the Conditions of the Contract. b) Furnish to the Owner a breakdown of the Stipulated Price in such form and detail as required by the Owner for progress payments, taxation and internal accounting purposes. c) Furnish to the Owner, a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond, issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner; each for an amount equalling 100% of the Tender Price to ensure the full and proper completion of the Contract. d) Commence the work forthwith after the receipt of a letter of intent, contract or ' Purchase Order or when notified to do so by the Consultant and/or Owner and to execute the work continuously to completion. Time shall be the essence of the Contract and the work shall be completed in accordance with the schedule outlined in the Instructions to Bidders. e) Furnish to the Owner a Clearance Certificate of the Workers' Compensation Board. ' f) Submit within three(3)days of award of the contract a detailed construction schedule to the Owner for approval. ' g) Furnish to the Owner a copy of our Corporate Safety Policy. 16.0 Wherever the plural is used herein, the same shall be read and construed as if the singular had been used where the facts and context so requires and as if all necessary grammatical changes had been made. 17.0 Bid Security: Attached to this tender form is a bid deposit in the amount of $200,000.00. I/We the ' undersigned agree that if I.NVe withdraw this tender or default in executing a contract or providing the required Performance Security in accordance with the terms of the bid documents,the Owner shall have sustained liquidated damages in the amount equal to the difference between the amount of this bid and the amount for which the Owner legally contracts with another party to perform the work, if the latter amount exceeds the former up to.a maximum of$200,000.00 and such amount shall become the property of the Owner. 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd ' DIVISION 0 l SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 10R REVISION 2 ' ADDENDUM NO.2 We agree that this page 1 OR of Addendum No. 2 forms a portion of our Tender Form and that our ' Tender Form constitutes pages 1 R to 1 OR inclusive. ' 9.0 (Continuation of item 9.0, page 2R): D. The supply and installation of the 51 space parking lot(including curbs, islands and entrance roads) located on the east side of the new ice pad expansion (Ring Road not included). Area to be left graded at parking lot rough grade level and hydroseeded. $ 2Gi 000 Street Address Name of Company City or Town Signature m ny Official Postal Code Name and Title Ct-i9Ri}rcr9rtoA.6 ' t • /r�SpC-c T,� � pyre lJlv�Si - O v-4t.uF -#r50� —> ' 2• OM t-Je4c.4-... r3:�:�,.,,6 S uo r�pA wr Rob PEE c i0 r�� ' 710ao020o-R2n2.wpa DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 9R REVISION 1 ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 18.0 Bonds: ' Attached to this Tender Form is an agreement to bond in the amount of 100% for Performance, and 100% for Materials and Labour Payment. ' 19.0 ,Signature and Seal of Bidder. D 1 �o. �Ol� °�'�� f EAR E►��«JE�R.1� b Go�b-�a��pi Street Address Name of Company (_-T c>. ' City or Town Signature o o any Official K 1 o No �• -�CiZo•.��rh�S A� ��fL. � ' Postal Code Name and Title ' 9 o5. 3�5 - I�oo Telephone. No. Signature of Company Official z ' Date Name and Title SEAL qo5 - 3�5 -323 Facsimile No. t3o��{ 22s3R„� Tenderer's G.S.T. Registration No. If the bidding firm is a limited company, the company seal must appear on this Bid Form with the signature(s) of the proper signing official(s). ' 7100.00200-R1A1.wpd SUMMARY OF NEGOTIATIONS HELD WITH PEAK ENGINEERING, OCTOBER 21, 22, AND 23, 1997 GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX-TWIN PAD - CL 9727 TABLE OF CREDIT ITEMS FOR ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION Pro'ect No. 97100 October 24, 1997 DESCRIPTION OF CREDIT ITEM CREDIT ACCEPTED I REJECTED COMMENTS AMOUNT MECHANICAL 1. See attached letter supplied by LKM, dated October 20, 1997 $ 80,300.00 $ 80,300.00 Mechanical Savings 2. Change type of diffuser in corridor to compensate for removal of $119,400 baseboard heaters $ 0.00 $ 0.00 3. Alternate manufacturers for supply of equipment $ 9,500.00 $ 9,500.00 4. Delete C.O. detection system $ 2,600.00 $ 2,600.00 5. Delete A/C(partial) $ 9,000.00 $ 9,000.00 6. General impact of Architectural deletions $ 25,000.00 $ 15,000.00 7. East side RWL deletions $ 3,000.00 $ 3,000.00 REFRIGERATION $ 0.00 $ 0.00 Leave Doucette$19,300.00 1. Cimco letter dated October 17, 1997 attached $ 97,000.00 $ 77,700.00 INCLUDED ELSEWHERE 2. LKM letter dated October 20'attached. $ 0.00 $ 0.00 3. Reduce size of new condenser from 75hp to 50hp $ 4,050.00 $ 4,050.00 Refrigeration Savings 4. Review trench routing(pipe quantities) $ 0.00 $ 0A0 $120,750 5. Revise schedule to delete a double move of existing refrigeration plant $ 4,400.00 $ 4,400.00 6. Delete insulation on trench piping $ 4,200.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 7. Provide a conventional chiller as opposed to the one specified $ 17,400.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 8. General impact of architectural deletions $ 10,600.00 $ 10,600.00 9. Under slab insulation to be 3" instead of 4" $ 8,000.00 $ 8,000.00 10. Alternate compressor $ 6,000.00 $ 6,000.00 11. Donation $ 10,000.00 $ 10,000.00 7100CR-R1.wpd BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 1 DESCRIPTION OF CREDIT ITEM CREDIT ACCEPTED REJECTED COMMENTS AMOUNT ELECTRICAL $ 0.00 $ 0.00 1. LKM letter dated October 20'attached $ 39,855.00 $ 34,255.00 $5,600.00 Type EE lights/Ballast Change 2. Change lighting specification to allow more manufacturers to competitively bid $ 20,000.00 $ 10,000.00 3. Reduce quantity of rink lights, assuming lights can be at a height of INCLUDED IN 1. 22 feet $ 0.00 $ 0.00 4. Delete third party verification of fire alarm system $ 0.00 $ 0.00 INCLUDED IN 1. 5. Change hydro service from 1200 amp to 800 amp($6,000) $ 0.00 $ 0.00 INCLUDED IN 2. 6. Change baseboard from 307 to 208 V Electrical Savings Delete corridor baseboard heaters and various other baseboard $48,925.00 heaters(specify) $ 4,670.00 $ 4,670.00 7. General impact of architectural changes $ 4,000.00 $ 0.00 GENERAL $ 0.00 $ 0.00 1. Delete bus parking area $ 7,200.00 $ 7,200.00 2. Delete paving at north side of arena and finish with gravel. Provide small paved area for Zamboni use $ 5,200.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 3. Delete all modifications to west entrance, as per BSK2 $ 16,300.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 4. Reduce millwork cash allowance from$15,000 to$7,500 $ 7,500.00 $ 7,500.00 5. Reduce O/H and roll-up doors from 14'to 12'(3 doors) $ 500.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 6. Delete canopy and recess at service entry as per BSK1 attached $ 1,000.00 $ 1,000.00 7. Reduce roof insulation from 200 mm to 150 mm $ 0.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 8. Delete metal line panel at roof. Provide S5360 Roof Panel &Arena Shield Insulation $ 21,800.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 9. Delete insulation and plywood from ceiling of change rooms. Paint in lieu $ 11,500.00 $ 11,500.00 10. Reduce windows between Pad 1 and Pad 2 at high level by 2A $ 0.00 $ 0.00 11. Delete all windows at high level between Pad 1 and Pad 2. Finish to be existing siding $ 18,000.00 $ 18,000.00 7100CR-R1.WPd BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 2 DESCRIPTION OF CREDIT ITEM CREDIT ACCEPTED REJECTED COMMENTS AMOUNT 12. Delete all finishes to Figure Skating Room(counter, flooring, ceiling) $ 3,500.00 $ 3,500.00 13. Delete masonry cavity walls on north exterior wall and replace with siding $ 5,500.00 $ 5,500.00 14. Change facing of all interior blockwork from architectural block to regular painted block $ 0.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 15. Delete tectum board $ 3,200.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 16. Delete 2 screens from new corridor 124 to existing viewing gallery and provide block in lieu $ 0.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 17. Delete flagpoles $ 2,500.00 $ 2,500.00 18. Hydro seed in lieu of sod $ 3,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 19. Provide Tuflex flooring in lieu of Mondo $ 4,500.00 $ 4,500.00 20. Delete east parking lot $ 26,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 21. Delete sidewalks and pond. Sod whole area $ 5,900.00 $ 5,900.00 Asphalt to be modified as follows: Light Duty: 1 pass of 50 mm HL3 Heavy Duty: 40 mm HL8+ 30 mm HL3 $ 18,600.00 $ 18,600.00 22. Having deleted the rooftop dehumidifier, modify ice resurfacer building to pre-engineered with sloped metal roof and metal siding (with liner panels on roof and walls) $ 8,000.00 $ 8,000.00 23. Reduce the arena size by approximately 65 m'by pulling in the east building line by one metre $ 6,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 24. Delete corner storage rooms $ 8,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 25. Reuse the two existing concession shutters and provide only one new on in lieu of 3 $ 2,500.00 $ 2,500.00 7100CR-R1.wpd BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 3 DESCRIPTION OF CREDIT ITEM CREDIT ACCEPTED REJECTED COMMENTS AMOUNT 26. At viewing area#201, delete construction of stair#1 and door#152A. Block-up stair enclosure at base of stair and at opening for door 152A Extend item 28 above to further delete stair#2 and door#153A Delete stair#1 and#2, related doors, masonry enclosure wall and curved wall full height. Provide siding and insulation to block wall along grid line 10,this now being the exterior wall. Existing walls to remain and not be demolished. Delete doors 119A and 116A. Provide roofing over area previously occupied by stairs and curved wall. $ 24,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 27. Further to item#30 above, delete all masonry windows and doors to east and north walls of viewing room#201. Provide 1100 mm high guardrail in lieu—except over location of door 201A. Walls and windows overlooking the existing Arena to remain, except west wall to follow profile of existing ice resurfacer room below. Existing concrete floor to remain. $ 4,100.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 28. Delete gypsum board and acoustic tile ceiling to this area. Delete pot lights and provide chain hung flourescent lights in lieu $ 0.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 29. Delete drop-off parking (10 spaces) $ 2,400.00 $ 2,400.00 30. Delete pre-eng inspections $ 14,400.00 $ 14,400.00 31. Revise construction schedule to Sept IV'substantial completion,with ice available in the new arena at that time. Ice in existing arena to be available Aug 1`' $ 35,000.00 $ 35,000.00 32. Delete dasher board at back of players benches and penalty box End dasher boards to attach to building wall $ 400.00 $ 400.00 33. Delete Low E ceiling $ 26,500.00 $ 26,500.00 34. Septic tanks to be left in place, filled and buried $ 2,500.00 $ 2,500.00 35. Cash Allowance Reductions: $ 0.00 $ 0.00 Washroom Accessories $ 6,000.00 $ 6,000.00 Signage $ 7,000.00 $ 7,000.00 P.A. System $ 17,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ Hardware $ 5,000.00 $ 5,000.00 7100CR-R1.MW BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 4 r r r �r r rr �r rr rr �r r rr rr r rr rr r� r �r DESCRIPTION OF CREDIT ITEM CREDIT ACCEPTED REJECTED COMMENTS AMOUNT 36. Delete wall subgirt system $ 3,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 37. Delete pit in resurfacer room $ 1,600.00 $ 1,600.00 38. Delete 2 electric gates. Provide swing gates in new rink. Modify existing gates in existing arena $ 11,400.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 39. Use office in existing building for general contractor site office. 2 phone lines to be provided by owner $ 2,000.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 40. Drawing A204: Leave stairwells in place. Delete curved wall. Stairwell wall to be exterior wall, finished in siding. Delete stairs 1 & 2 and doors 152A, 153A, 116A, 119A. $ 0.00 $ 0.00 ✓ 41. Delete 50 mm skim slab under rink $ 8,000.00 $ 8,000.00 42. Revise roof framing to a sloped structure to eliminate tapered roof insulation $ 15,000.00 $ 15,000.00 43. Delete one shower per dressing room(2 in each to remain) $ 5,000.00 $ 5,000.00 44. Revise cavity insulated block walls at dressing rooms to regular Approx. To be finalized. architectural block walls $ 12,000.00 $ 12,000.00 45. Delete music room completely $ 4,000.00 $ 4,000.00 46. Change canopy and 2nd floor exterior siding from metallic finish to 500 series $ 1,500.00 $ 0.00 ✓ TOTAL SAVINGS $ 753,575.00 $ 530,075.00 o� 7100CR-R1.wpd BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 5 BARRY • BRYAN . ENGINEER O Stanley Court Whitby, Ontario UN 8P9 • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone(905)666.5252 ASSOCIATES (1991 LIMITED Fax(905)666-5256 ' GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX- TWIN PAD CL 9727 ' SUMMARY OF SAVINGS Project No. 97100 October 24, 1997 Original Base Bid $ 4,556,000.00 ' Mechanical $ (119,400.00) Refrigeration $ (120,750.00) Electrical $ (48,925.00) General $ (241,000.00) $ (530,075.00) Revised Contract Price $ 4,025,925.00 r . i Page 6 IC -20'•97(MON) 09. 32 BARRY-BRYAN ASSOCIATES TEL:9056665256 P. 003 OCT-20-1997 08:23 FROM L.K.M,C, & PSG= TO 1905666525657309 P.03iO4 P�ATNBAO L E 1 P C I R N.� ��IPCIG�R F Eno ' C.M IGMMIMKCA p, 1.MRELMIAM,P�np, KAMINKER T.64►a A R.i�E_NKlNP•8 p, MITELMAN L A. �� N.A.SHARM,6,+p. ' ,I SCHMITZ,C Y T And Partners Ina CONSULTING ENGIN(,j 9Ps M�33 T � )) F (4 289�edar ISK941'S a�MrysOr�riolc P�8 1 M9 J oaf (706) 675.8061 1 QX' (706;876-4302 LKM Project/t:97309 ' MECHANICAL R -1 October 20, 1997 GARNET 1 RICHARD ARENA ADDITION 1 .0 DRAWING NO. M-201 (NOT REISSUED):- 1 Delete 38 HWS/HWR loop and insulation for the snow malting pit and connect snowmelt it coil to OHW system for dressing rooms- 113 Revise size of pHW and QHWR loop o o rid 4� ' 1 S to 1 O to 31 from 26• / 2,0 DRAWING NO. M-202 (NOT REISSUED):- o too 1 Relate 25 HWSIHWR piping from boiler room to storage room 116• 3.p DRAWING NO. M-204 (NOT REISSUED);- ,1 Delete supply air of return air duct work associated with AC•4. t,j c c.vL62; 9.J= � � � C A—7.2 )c7c7v 4- 14,0 DRAWING NO. NI-206 (NOT REISSUED);- 02 SM " - *,1 Delete AC-4 and CC-1 , ductwork and refrigeration piping. 499a_09 , �,.2 Relate AC-3 and ductwork, cQ�les((460x3041sand entirety, twd exhaust fans one each in rooms 3 Supply and Install two T,A g 202 and 202 c/w speed controller. Install fans to face new pad WGr a 0 �kp 6r st �� grille and T.A. grilles In opposite 41H P th120 alts Forneq al shall in PENN, RFNCQOK. 1100RPM, 400CFM, 1/8" S.P , I 20 , 800x14 louvre, mat. damper, blydacreen at high level in the rink 4 Supply and install a 1 at grid 1 S-U and interlock with lrF-2 and manual switch in Mee resurface room to be activated manually to open when fan FF•2 on and close when EF-2 off, * .5 Supply and install two indoor ice rink dehumidifiers rId aunt controls structural cand Haste rdra stand at two corners of the new rink with local nearest drain. Units shall be 7.6 cooling capacity (each) for a total of 16 ton coolie ui ed with starters, hurmidlstat, defrost coils, filters, discharge duct Units shall be equipped (36" ' long) with pattern adjustable louvre, heat trace condensate trap, support stand 12' high, vibration isolators between stand and units, 676.3.60 volts, MCA 20 Amps, moisture removal,, 4600 CFM airflow. Units shall be Dry-O-Tran or equal in Desertaire, to ' Clmco. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN ' & Partners Inc. l I'1' 10/20/9? MON 15:52 FAX 416 465 7530 JDWGP 005 ' CIMCO ' October 17, 1997 LKM Inc. 235 Lesmill Rd. Don Mills, Ontario tM3B 2V 1 Attention:Kris Sharma,P.Eng. Re: Garnet B.Reckard; Arena.Addition ' Dear Sir: Further to our tender price given to the General Contractors yesterday, we have reviewed the tender ' and offer the following credits; ■ unloading solenoids on compressor 5750.00 ■ strainer on condenser water pump $900.00 ■ Doucette desuperheater and associated piping and valves Sig,300.00 � ' ■ Armstrong 216-6 high pressure float $2,500.00 ■ 6"balancing valves $4,100.00 ■ emergency switch $350.00 ' ■ ammonia leak detector $2,100.00 ■ MCC; combination control/starter panel will be supplied in lieu of MCC $9,000.00 ■ all vibration control devices including but not limited to spring isolators for piping, condenser spring isolators. $8,500.00 IN condenser supports at roof $9,000.00 • all concrete housekeeping pads including inertia bases $-6;z88- 4 19�zoo ■ Taco flow meters $3,800.00 • programmable controller; will use Honeywell electronic thermostats $23,500.00 The credit for all associated labour is also included. ' CREDIT: $100,000.00 PST INCL. 9 I CIMCO Refrigeration,65 Villiers Street,Toronm,Ontario M5A 3S1 ' Tel.:(416)465-7581 Fax Head Office:(416)465-8815•Fax Central District(416)465-7530 St.John's,Dartmouth,Moncton,Quebec City,Montreal,Ottawa,Toronto,London,Winnipeg,Regina,Saskatoon,Calgary,Edmonton, Vancouver,Victoria Boston,MA-Glasronbury,CT 20'.97(MON) 0933 BARRY-BRYAN ASSOCIATES TEL:9056665256 P. 004 OCT-20-1997 012:24 FROM L.K.M.C. S ASSOC, TO 1905666525697309 P104iO4 AnRTM�aa w L.l.t P.�wPry."E• na. tttt VWINK iI RP,µnp .AAR iMA NL E I I E i 0 MMi A"NKINKAMINKER ,. FI REM MITrLM /\ A� K K.a11HER, P-na, ` G 1"1`V N.A.FISH @R,1+�np. J,sem M.CA T qnd Perkrlrrs IpG k1l cc)NSUl,.TING ENGINFERS 235 l,asmill Road, Can M11Ia, 4�tarb M3�21Nr3 r Tal; 41 6j aa6 8 66 l Fax: ({a1$ 446.7882 289 CasMi SRrad Sudbury, , CrIt i0 P3 1 r Tel: �05 875-a 81 r Fm Q5 6575-6302 675-53x2 LKM Project#.97309 October 20, 1897 AEF GARNET I 8NRICHARD ARENA ADDITION R SPECIFICATIONS 17700:- Delete foil a in for the refrigeration plant. .1 w 9 .,2 Armstrong 1 Strainer an 216-8 high pressure float. ' 3 6" balancing valves. ' 4 Emergency switch. .5 New MCC2, ,S Spring isolatlon for piping, condenser etc. ,7 Condenser support ralis. Structural shall provide the roof support beams for ' condensers. ,g Concrete housekeeping pads/inertia bases, ' 9 Flow meters. .10 Unloading solenoids on compressors, '11 Programmable controller for both pads. .2 Supply following equipment pumps etc. in lieu of MCC,r panel for new,1 Combination contr relocated l aqu pment off tho refrigeration room floor an steel ' 2 Support new and channels, •3 Provide Honeywell Electronic thermostats andlceins reinstall In nerve�ppmals, ,4 Relocate existing ammonia shut off panel ' shall be responsible for complete design/build system ba8ed on ,3 Refrigeration contractor criteria indicated on drawings, specification and addenda. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN Partners Inc. gis Sharma, P. Eng. r�wn5111897197309ddd.r-1 C'� r ! . -20'.97(MON) 09:32 BARRY-BRYAN ASSOCIATES TEL:9056665256 P. 002 OCT-20-1997 x13:23 FROM L.K.M.C, 8 ASSOC. TO 1905666525697309 P.02iO4 PAnTEa L.LairclaER LEIPCIGER :M.KAMIN PPIE',M, KAM I N KE R MITELM�tN,P Ena MITELMAN 1 A^��e" , 3 PINKUB P Eno. K.K ' A A,P.Snp And PartnA �a Inc. NAPrsl�dp.PEnd ® J.BCMMIT� C.S.T. CCNSULTING ENGINSIRS 235 Ledmill Road, an Mi11abOntario M3j 2v1 1 TOO 41E) 45- 295 t Fax: 01$)A46-7886 298 Cadar Street, Jdburv, ntario P3 1MB I Tel: 05 X75 ee1 r Fax: (705)675-8302 I,KM Prof ect#-97309 October 20, 1997 oST TENDER ADDENDUM E-1 GARNET B. RICHARD ARENA ADDITION D ate 3 type I'EE" light standards. Delete 20 type "A" luminaires. Provide two 20A, 2P lighting contactors for lighting circuits 16�� AA•4/6 and AA.8/10 in lieu of 30A, 3P and 20A, 3P contactors, viY Fluorescent luminaires to be c/w RS h brid is in lieu of RS electronic ballasts. tcrS Provide 8x360`" battery units (12" PC) located at various Icoations in lieu of central battery unit, Emergency heads shall be 12", 12"' quart Halogen Texan cube. Exit lights shall be 347"0 v-1 AC/12" DC. Distribution boards and panels shall be complete with aluminium bus in lieu of oopper bus, M��' 8. Series rated breakers with upstream breakers are acceptable for panels AA, SB & CC in lieu of l ' 25"A breakers. 7, FIA System; Alternate WlAsystem l vices, newxa dosxiistinl9, shall lof sin9leemenufactu erl,g devlces�� to be replaced with n B. Delete co-ordination study for service equipment (section 3,6.16,400)• 'V 1EIPCIGER KAMINKER MITEt MAN and Partners Inc. hinh Hoang. Pang, z WITH eASTfVVO-� moo ` To U.A TQ 8rs w: WA�c pipm 4-~ ' d{ l EYE WASH AND DELUGE SHOWER 40 , W4 ' N - W1 0 1 C�L �07 REC NG, F108 W4 \ b W4 Q6 ' TITI E" PARTIAL FLOOR BARRY • BRYAN '"4G*IMR DATE: DRWG N0: PLAN ASSOCIATES (1991) UMITED •pRmcT ki.Awts OCT 20 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: g SK1 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=100 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON r rr� e r r it rr r� r r rr r r r � Ontario Ministere Notice of Project/Avis de chantier 12060711 Ministry of du Travail The Occupational Health and Safety Act/ Labour de ['Ontario Loi sur la sante et la securit6 au travail The following Notice of Project is given pursuant to the Regulations for Construction Projects, made thereunder. Print or type in BLOCK CAPITALS and press hard (you are making four(4) copies)./Le preavis suivant est donne conformement au R&giement relatif aux chantiers de construction, pris en application de la loi susmentionnee. Ecrivez EN MAJUSCULES en appuyant fermement (il y a quatre (4) copies) ou dactylographiez EN MAJUSCULES. Constructor/ Entrepreneur Owner of Project/Prop rietaire de chantier Name/Nom Name/Nom -Pc 0 i`- C NK,vtJ CCU J Kx�, C-1 1 o N LIP • M v ►C t p r�1,t `� O'F fL�f►u f.�"j-b Address/Adresse Address/Adresse City/Ville Province/Province City/Ville Province/Province t�la p r.a c�F-��' n W t1A 0I.ivt to rc I c)ii sT Postal Code/Code postal Telephone No./N°de telephone Postal Code/Code postal Telephone No./N°de telephone i w o -5 S"� (SLR 0 L_l c-. "3 A G W.C.B. Firm No./No attribue a 1'entreprise par la C.A.T. Location of Project (Attach map if necessary)/Lieu d'execution de -z-t4 0 ,{ L A travaux/(Joindre une carte si necessaire) Supervisor in charge of project/Superviseur responsible des Street &No./Numero et rue travaux de construction �f �f,W, Cco �-r 6� McAl2-Tl n-t P"D uwY Z- Description of Project/Description des travaux Lot &Plan/Lot et plan Other/Autre t-J Ca Municipality/Municipality 1-keg-G)/County/District/ 1l PWnKn/Comte/District Project Telephone No./N°de telephone du chantier ( Type of Construction (Please check)/Type de construction (Cocher la case appropriee) - New Construction/ [/�f Alteration/ El ❑ Repair or Restoration/ `� Nouvelle construction �j Changements Demolition Reparations ou renovation Classification of Construction (Please check)/Categorie de construction (Cocher la case appropriee) Other Building underground Electrical Power Generation & Residential; Construction Services/Services Distribution/Energie ylectrique Residentielle construction d'edifice souterrains Production et distribution Industrial, Commercial & Other Engineering- 1.71 Institutional/lndustrielle, ❑ Road &Highway/ El Marine Construction/ Construction/Autre construction l_1 commerciale et institutionnelle Route et autoroute Construction marine technique Sub Classification (Please check)/Sous-categorie (Cocher la case appropriee) Buildings or Structures Low rise or wood frame High Rise Buildings or 3-6 storeyslEdifices ouconstruct ion lPetits immeubles ou Asbestos Removal! t-J Structures/Tours batiments de 3 a 6 etages constructions en bois Enlevement de I'amiante List all designated substances that may be used, handled or disturbed by work on the project./Faire la liste de toutes les substances designees qui peuvent titre utifisees, manipulees ou depiacees au cours des travaux effectues sur le chantier. Tunnel, Shaft, Caisson or Cofferdam Information/Renseignements sur le tunnel; fa galerie, Ie.caisson'ou le`batardeau Will a tunnel (including boring, augering or jacking), shaft, caisson Name of Tunnelling Contractor/Nom de ['entrepreneur de or cofferdam be constructed on this project?/Y aura-t-il creusement d`un tunnel/plongee tunnel sur le chantier (y compris le forage au fleuret ou a la tariere)? Name/Nom r-' Yes/Oui dNo/Non AddressiAdresse If yes please specify & complete notice of tunnelling project/Dann 1 affirmative, preciser et rempiir I'avis de creusement de tunnel t - I nnnrd/l ....... ;a inlliiinlni Ic Cni•u:nn/(';nit.:rat (:ily/Vlllr+ Provinco/Provinco I� Cofferdam/ n Boring/Forage Auger ino/Forage 6atardeau F au fleuret J a la tariere - Postal Code/Code postal Telephone No./N°de telephone Jacking/Forage au .1 fleuret Will a diving operation be involved on this project/Y aura-t-il des operations de plongee? 1-1 Yes/Oui No/Non if yes. please specify & complete notice for Commercial Diving Operations/Dans I'affirmative, preciser et rempiir I'avis de operation de plongee ,,roject starting date/Date du debut Aniticipated Project Duration/ 'Total Cost of Project (See instructions on reverse)/Coot total des travaux de construction Duree prevue des travaux (V'oir les directives) D/J nrM Y/A �-i iJt.U, iE�<�� _ S��T 15 1e,101 � _ 4 o dab. Signature of Comp Offi,ial/Signature d'un representant de Position or Title/Poste ou fonction Date/Date 1'entreprise D/J M/M Y/A T/a ��-- —T i 1 r Ministry Use Only/Reserve au ministere �Imject Class/ SGC Loc. No./N°&t lion dps trarvnrtx ,;QIr,n to Notice of Tunnellino Operation-No. Notice of Diving Operation No. C:�tegoriit de chanhoi coda Uw)gra;,)Nquc tyke Avis du cious nient de tunnel Avis de plong6e Opdratlon ri OpE;iatiot n° r _ L. � riing Date/Date du debut des travaux Officer/Representant'du minister Type/Type._ _ F/F DiJ M/M Y/A Remarks/Observations 0175 OH08 (09/91) See instructions on r.=verse,/Voir les directives f J Sedgwick ' CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CERTIFICATE HOLDER INSURED ' The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington Peak Engineering &Construction Ltd. 40 Temperance Street P.O. Box 984 Bowmanville Ontario Brighton Ontario KOK 1 HO L1C 3A6 Attn: Rob Kennedy ' RE: TENDER NO. SL9727-GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX,ADDITION AND RENOVATIONS ' This rertlaates fumisfed to the:Holder as evidence that ttte he policy(ies)described provide coverage as shaven,subject to ail the terms,conditions, limitations and exciuslons of such policy(ies)as now exisf or nay later be endorsed. Any amendment or extension of such policy(ies)can only be effected by specific endorsement attached th.ereta. This certificate is furnished for information purposes only. The issuance at this certlffcate does not modify in any. ' manner the described policy(ies)nor.except as otherwise indicated below,make the Cent sate Hoiden an Additional insured: ' TYPE I INSURER I POLICY NUMBER I EXPIRATION I LIMITS)/AMOUNTS OF INSURANCE Umbrella Liability Dominion of Canada CCP8236929 January 27, 1998 $5,000,000. Limit of Liability General Ins. Co. excess of primary limits General Liability Dominion of Canada CCP8236929 January 27, 1998 $2,000,000. Limit of Liability including General Ins. Co. per Occurrence ' Contractual, Cross, Contingent Employers, ' Completed Operations and Non-Owned Auto Liability Automobile Dominion of Canada ABL8399001 June 5, 1998 $1,000,000. Third Party Limit General Ins. Co. of Liability Builders Risk Wm. H. McGee & Co. C112574 January 27, 1998 $4,025,925. Limit per Project ' OTHER INFORMATION: The certificate holder(owner), and Barry-Bryan Associates (1991) Limited (consultant) are added to the captioned liability policy as additional insureds, solely with respect to the operations of the named insured, as defined in the policy, at the project noted above. The insurers will endeavour to provide the certificate holder with 30 days prior written notice in the event of ' cancellation by the insurers. DATE: November 7, 1997 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE *►►7 R 1{ International Insurance Brokers Actuaries, Consultants and Administrators Throughout Canada and Around the World ' P.O.Box 439,T.D.Centre,Toronto,Ontario,M5K 1 M3 Phone:(416)361-6770 x252,Fax:(416)361-6764 THE GUARANTEE COMPANY CC OF NORTH AMERICA SUITE 1400. MADIS,*TRE 4950 YONGE STREET. NORTH YORK, ONTARIO 6K1 (416) 223-9580 FAX(416) 223-6577 *ISSUED IN TRIPLICATE P]ERFORMANCETiI�NE No. 5011778 Amount $ 4,307,739.75 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT PEAK ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION LTD. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA a corporation created and existing under the laws of Canada and duly authorized to transact a business of Suretyship in Ontario as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the amount of Four million three hundred seven thousand seven hundred thirty-nine 75/100 Dollars ($ 4,307,739.75) lawful money of Canada, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a written contract with the Obligee, dated the 7th day of November 1997, for Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex, Tender # CL9727 in accordance with the Contract Documents submitted therefor which are by reference made part hereof and are hereinafter referred to as the Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shall promptly and faithfully perform the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. Whenever the Principal shall be, and declared by the Obligee to be, in default under the Contract, the Obligee having performed the Obligee's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly (1) complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions or (2) obtain a bid or bids for submission to the Obligee for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions,and upon determination by the Obligee and the Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and the Obligee and make available as work progresses (even though there should be a default, or a succession of defaults, under the contract or contracts of completion, arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract price", as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the Contract, less the amount properly paid by the Obligee to the Principal. Any suit under this Bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the date on which final payment under the Contract falls due. The Surety shall not be liable for a greater sum than the specified penalty of this Bond. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond, to or for the use of, any person or corporation other than the Obligee named herein, or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of the Obligee. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have Signed and Sealed this Bond this 10th day of November 1997. SIGNED AND SEALED In the presence of. PEAK ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION LTD. THE G NTEE COMPANY OF NO AMERICA Phillip C. Searle Attorney-in-fact rmdorwd By:ACEC CCA CCPB CSC RAIC Approved byJNSURANCB BUREAU OF CANADA THE GUARANTEE COMPANY CCppl� OF NORTH AMERICA SUITE 1400. MADISOI �NTRE LABOUR AND MATERIAL ORTH YORK. ONTARIO 6K1 *ISSUED IN TRIPLICATE (TRUSTEE FO 4 -9580 FAX(416) 223-6577 No. 5011778 Amount $ 4,307,739.75 Note: This Bond is issued simultaneously with another Bond in favour of the Obligee conditioned for the full and faithful performance of the Contract. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT PEAK ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION LTD. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and THE GUARANTEE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA a corporation created and existing under the laws of Canada and duly authorized to transact the business of Suretyship in Ontario as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety are, subject to the conditions hereinafter contained, held and firmly bound unto THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON as Trustee, hereinafter called the Obligee, for the use and benefit of the Claimants, their and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, in the amount of Four million three hundred seven thousand seven hundred thirty-nine 75/100 Dollars ($ 4,307,739.75) of lawful money of Canada for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a written contract with the Obligee, dated the 7th day of November 1997, for Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex, Tender # CL9727 which Contract Documents are by reference made a part hereof, and are hereinafter referred to as the Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Principal shall make payment to all Claimants for labour and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: 1. A Claimant for the purpose of this Bond is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal for labour, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, labour and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment directly applicable to the Contract provided that a person,i firm or corporation who rents equipment to the Principal to be used in the performance of the Contract under a contract which provides that all or any part of the rent is to be applied towards the purchase price thereof, shall only be a Claimant to the extent of the prevailing industrial rental value of such equipment for the period during which the equipment was used in the performance of the Contract. The prevailing industrial rental value of equipment shall be determined, insofar as it is practical to do so, in accordance with and in the manner provided for in the latest revised edition of the publication of the Canadian Construction Association titled "Rental Rates on Contractors Equipment".published prior to the period during which the equipment was used in the performance of the contract.. 2. The Principal and the Surety, hereby jointly and severally agree with the Obligee, as Trustee, that every Claimant who has not been paid as provided for under the terms of his contract with the Principal, before the expiration of a period of ninety(90)days after the date on which the last of such Claimant's work or labour was done or performed or materials were furnished by such Claimant, may as a beneficiary of the trust herein provided-for,sue on this Bond,prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due to such Claimant under the terms of his contract with the Principal and have execution thereon. Provided that the Obligee is not obliged to do or take any act, action or proceeding against the Surety on behalf of the Claimants, or any of them, to enforce the provisions of this Bond. If any act, action or proceeding is taken either in the name of the Obligee or by joining the Obligee as a party to such proceeding, then such act, action or proceeding, shall be taken on the understanding and basis that the Claimants, or any of them, who take such act, action or proceeding shall indemnify and save harmless the Obligee against all costs, charges and expenses or liabilities incurred thereon and any loss or damage resulting to the Obligee by reason thereof. Provided.still further that, subject to the foregoing terms and conditions, the Claimants, or any of them, may use the name of the Obligee to sue on and enforce.,the provisions of this Bond. 3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder.by any Claimant: (a) unless such Claimant shall have given written notice within the time limits hereinafter set forth to each of the Principal, the Surety and the Obligee, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed. Such notice shall be served.by � i♦ � Illlll� � � � f♦ � � � � � � f♦ mailing the same by registered mail to the Principal, the Surety and the Obligee, at any place where an office is regularly maintained for the transaction of business by such persons or served in any manner in which legal process may be served in the Province or other part of Canada in which the subject matter of the Contract is located. Such notice shall be given (1) in respect of any claim for the amount or any portion thereof, required to be held back from the Claimant by the Principal, under either the terms of the Claimant's contract with the Principal, or under the Mechanics' Liens Legislation applicable to the Claimant's contract with the Principal, whichever is the greater, within one hundred and twenty (120) days after such Claimant should have been paid in full under the Claimant's contract with the Principal; (2) in respect of any claim other than for the holdback, or portion thereof, referred to above, within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the date upon which such Claimant did, or performed, the last of the work or labour or furnished the last of the materials for which such claim is made, under the Claimant's contract with the Principal; (b) after the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which the Principal ceased work on the Contract, including work performed under the guarantees provided in the Contract; (c) other than in a Court of competent jurisdiction in the Province or District of Canada in which the subject matter of the Contract, or any part thereof, is situated and not elsewhere, and the parties hereto agree to submit the jurisdiction of such Court. 4. The Surety agrees not to take advantage of Article 1959 of the Civil Code of the Province of Quebec in the event that, by an act or an omission of a Claimant, the Surety can no longer be subrogated in the rights, hypothecs and privileges of Said Claimant. 5. Any material change in the contract between the Principal and the Obligee shall not prejudice the rights or interest of any Claimant under this Bond, who is not instrumental in bringing about or has not caused such change. 6. The amount of this Bond shall be reduced by, and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good faith, and in accordance with the provisions hereof, inclusive of the payment by the Surety of Mechanic's Liens which may be filed of record against the subject matter of the Contract, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this Bond. 7. The Surety shall not be liable for a greater sum than the specified penalty of this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have Signed and Sealed this Bond this 10th day of November 1997. SIGNED and SEALED In the Presence of PEAK ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION LTD. THE GUARANTE NY OF NORTH AMERICA Phillip C. Searle Attorney-in-fact Endorsed by:ACEC CCA CCPE CSC RAIC Approved by:INSURANCB BUREAU OF CANADA SEP 16 '18 08:24 FR WCB CLEARANCE CENTRE 416 344 3384 TO 81190535532.-58 1`1.01it61 Workers' Commission 200 FRONT SZREET WEST Comp®nsation des accidents TORONTO, ONTARIO Clearance Certificate Board du tmva7 M5V 3JZ (416) 344-1012 Certificat de decharge ' Oix+na The Workers' Compensation Board (WCB) hereby waives its rights under Section 11 (3) (R.S.O. 1990) of the Workers'Compensation Act to hold the Principal that is in a contractual agreement with the Contractor ' named, liable for any Section 1 1(3) (R.S.O. 1990) liability of the Contractor for assessments and levies of the WCB owing now or within CONTRACTOR 60 days from the date of this Certificate. ' L'ENTREPRENEUR Par la prd-sente, la Commission des accidents du travail (CAT) renonce PEAK ENGINEERING & aux droits qui lui sont confdrds en vertu du paragraphe 11 (3) de la X01 sur les accidents ay travail(L.R.0, 1990)et qui l'autorisent A tenir CONSTRUCTION LTD 1'entrepreneur principal, qui a signd une entente conLractuelle aver ' BOX 984 1'entrepreneur dont le nom figure sur le present certificat, responsable du BRIGHTON ON paiement de toute cotisation ou de toute Somme que 1'entrepreneur est KOK 1HO tenu de verser A la CAT imm6diatement ou clans les 60 jours suivant la date indiqu6e sur ce certificat. ' THIS CERTIFICATE IS VALID FOR ALL CONTRACTS OF THE NAMED CONTRACTOR DURING THE EFFECTIVE PERIOD ' LE PRESENT CERTIFICAT .EST VALIDE POUR TOUS LES CONTRATS PASSES PAR LEDIT ENTREPRENEUR PENDANT LA PERIODE D'APPLICATION DU CERTIFICAT Valid only when signed by an authorized Officer of the WC6. Non va/ide sans la signature dun agent aurorlse de Is CAT.-10 Account No./NO de compte Firm Nod NO d'entieprise E r ' 6919995 240736LA 0 0 0 0 0 Rate/Taux Description —Rate/ x] Description ' 021099 INDUSTRIAL CONSTRU 1 Contract Description/Description du controt Certificate Nod NO do cerrificat I` ATTN: BARBARA 204782984 4., �. Contact the WCB if you question the validity of this document. Veuillez communiquer avec la CAT si vous doutez de Is validity du present document. 0190C (01/95) TOTAL PAGE.01 >K* SEP-16-1997 08;25 416 344 3384 96% P.01 ' HEAD OFFICE: BRANCH P.O.Box 984 OFFICE: r Brighton,Ontario 136 Victoria St. KOK i HO Barrie, Ontario Tel(613)475-4775 L4N 2J4 Tel:(905)355-1500 Tel:(705)739-7719 ' PEAK Fax:(905)355-3238 Fax: (705)739-7458 Eineeriing&ConsVUction LW. ' November 13, 1997 Barry Bryan Associates ' 11 Stanley Court Whitby, Ontario L1N 8P9 ' Attn: Denis O'Connell Re: Items deleted from scope of work for Addition and Renovations to Garnet B. Rickard Recreation ' Complex Dear Denis, ' As discussed, it is hereby agreed that the following stipulated prices will remain valid and irrevocable and subject to acceptance by-The Municipality of Clarington for a period of approximately months from ' this date for items 1 to 3 and three(3)months for item 4, subject to the timing of their inclusion not affecting the construction schedule or construction progress or subcontract award schedule. We will notify you one(1) month in advance of date a decision is required. ' 1. Supply and install second floor windows at high level between Pad 1 and Pad 2 along Line A as shown on Drawing#A204, issued for tender October 2, 1997 for the sum of$18,000.00(excluding GST). 2. Supply and install"Aluma-Zorb" low emissivity complete ceiling system, as distributed by Barsai Limited,Burlington, Ontario. Provision to be as per Section 13075 of specification issued for tender October 2, 1997 for the sum of$26,500.00 (excluding GST). ' 3. Remove underground septic tanks,Item G on Drawing A201 issued for tender October 2, 1997 if the consultant considers it necessary for the construction of the new area for the sum of$2,500.00 ' (excluding GST). 4. Enclose second floor viewing area as detailed on Drawing A204(issued for tender October 2, 1997) t marked alternate price item 9 "C"and as shown on Typical Section(Alternate Price Item) l/A204. The four additional doors required are to be type NL, solid wood core doors in P.S. frames. Sizes to be 900 x 2150. ' An allowance of$1,600.00 for door hardware is included in this price. Electrical and mechanical requirements are to be detailed in Addendum No. 2 issued for tender October 7, 1997. The cost for this ' work will be determined at time of request noting some of the selected cost savings have an impact on the scope of work. t Yours sincerely, Eng' ring& Construction Ltd. ' Tony Jer n u P.Eng. Partner 1 BARRY • BRYAN • ARCHITECT it Stanley Court • ENGINEER Whitby, Ontario UN 8P9 ' ASSOCIATES 1991 LIMITED • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone(905)666-5252 Fax(905)666-5256 POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 Project: Addition and Alterations Date: November 13, 1997 ' Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex Tender No. CL9727 Municipality of Clarington Project No.: 97100 The following shall constitute Post Tender Addendum No. 1. 1.0 SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .1 ITEM 17.1 REDUCE CASH ALLOWANCES AS FOLLOWS: 1 Independent Inspection and Testing $20,000.00 .2 Supply Only Of Finishing Hardware $35,000.00 .3 Supply Only Of Washroom Accessories $4,000.00 ' .4 Signage $5,000.00 .5 Public Address System $17,000.00 .6 Miscellaneous Millwork Items Not Specified Or Detailed In The Tender Documents $7,500.00 $88,500.00 ' 1.2 SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS .1 ITEM 1.02 SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS Delete item 1.02.6 and replace with : 1.02.6 Substantial Performance of this project will be September 15, 1998. Ice in the existing arena will be ready for use by August 1, 1998. ' Total Performance of the entire project shall be no later than October 15, 1998. ' 1.3 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING .1 ITEM 3.03 ' Delete item 3.03.8 and replace with: B. Heavy Duty Asphalt Paving Compacted Sub-grade 400 mm Granular`B' base course 100 mm Granular'A' base course 40 mm HL8 ASPHALT binder course ' 30 mm HL3 ASPHALT surface course ' 7�TA1311.#1.wpd ' Page 2 ' Light Duty Asphalt Paving Compacted Sub-grade 300 mm Granular`B' base course 100 mm Granular`A' base course 50 mm H.L.3 asphalt surface course in one pass 1.4 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING. .1 ITEM 1.06.C . Delete this item. 1.5 SECTION 09670 RUBBER FLOOR TILE .1 ITEM 2.01 Materials. Delete item 2.01 A and replace with: A. Provide"Tuflex" Rubber flooring as manufactured by Tuflex Rubber Products Inc. 1.6 SECTION 13075 LOW EMISSIVITY CEILING SYSTEMS. .1 Delete entire section. 1.7 ATTACHMENTS .1 Mechanical Post Tender Addendum # 1 attached (2 pages). .2 Electrical Post Tender Addendum# 1 attached (2 pages). .3 Refrigeration Post Tender Addendum#1 attached (1 page). 2.0 DRAWINGS 2.1 DRAWING NO. A101 (Reissued) .1 Delete bus parking area. .2 Delete sidewalk, pond and drop off parking at centre island. .3 Sod entire area of centre island. .4 Delete triangular asphalt island at west entrance road division and provide painted line to delineate traffic direction, in lieu. 2.2 DRAWING NO. A 202 (Reissued) 1 Delete entrance canopy at Line U/1 1A. Rework lighting as per electrical drawings. 2.3 DRAWING NO. A401 (Reissued) .1 Delete strapping, fire retardant plywood and rigid insulation on ceiling of dressing ' rooms. Paint H.C. slabs in lieu. 7100PTA131111.wpd ' � BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES )1991) LIMITED ' Page 3 2.4 DRAWING NO. A204(Reissued) ' .1 Delete all windows along line A with the exception of one window in the figure skating room. Existing siding to remain in lieu. .2 Delete room 203 completely, together with all related finishes and electrical/mechanical items. Rework viewing area lighting and conduit supply to figure skating Room 202, as per electrical drawings. .3 Delete flooring, ceiling and counter top to Room 202. Rework lighting as per electrical drawings. 2.5 DRAWING NO. A203 (Reissued) ' .1 Change wall type on north wall from W.I. to: 1. Line X to Line R to Type W9(see 6/A401)with 190 mm back up block to height of 2200 mm 2. All exterior walls of ice resurfacer Room to be type W.7. .2 Move exterior East wall of ice resurfacer Room 148 west to line X ( Delete column line W). .3 Delete snow melting pit, related curb and related mechanical/electrical/refrigeration. .4 Modification of ice resurfacer room exterior walls and roof to be included in pre- engineered package including design. Building to have sloped metal roof and 1 insulated metal siding to match with insulated liner panels on both roof and walls. Pre engineered drawings to be submitted for review as specified. Final tie in of roof area to main building to suit architectural, structural and code requirements. Footings to 1 be coordinated with pre-engineered building supplier. .5 Change wall type W3 along line Y from 8A to 1C to type W5 (190 mm). Change wall type W3 along line 1C + 2 metres t south, to wall type W5 (190 mm) (A to Y). Change wall type W3 along line 8A (A toY) to type W5 (190 mm). Change wall type W3 along line 1C+ 1.6 metres North (A to Y), and wall connection angled to X/1 B to type W5 (190 mm). .6 Delete dasher boards at back of players benches and penalty boxes on east side. Extend end walls and dividing dasher board walls to exterior wall along line R. Extend area of skate flooring to cover complete new floor areas. ' .7 Delete VCT in Room Vs, 133, 134, 136, 138, 139 and 142. Replace VCT with skate flooring. 7100PTA1311.#1.wpd M BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED 1 ' Page 4 2.6 DRAWING NO. A205 ( Reissued) .1 Plan#6. Concession Layout Plan. Delete two new Roller shutters. Replace with the ' two existing shutters to be removed from existing concession area. Adjust new opening sizes to suit. .2 Plan#4. Typical Dressing Room. Delete VCT and replace with skate flooring. 2.7 DRAWING NO. A305 (Reissued) iA Delete all references to Low E ceiling. Low E ceiling is deleted. 2.8 DRAWING NO. A201 (Reissued) .1 Re ITEM G. Septic Tanks. Septic tanks to remain. Decommission, fill and leave in place. Contractor to verify exact location. 2.9 DRAWING NO'S A401, A402, A403, A502. .1 Delete all references to tapered roof insulation. Roof slopes to be maintained by revising roof framing to a sloped structure. 2.10 DRAWING NO. A503 (REVISION 3) DETAILS NEW ISSUE NOVEMBER 13, 1997 2.11 DRAWING NO. S101. .1 Delete 50 mm skim slab .2 Change under slab insulation from 100 mm to 75 mm. .3 Elevation of finished Rink slab to remain unchanged. 2.12 Issued for construction drawings as per drawing list attached dated November 13, 1997 (3 pages). END OF POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 Denis O'Connell, Project Manager DOC/nb 1 1 7100PTA1311.91.wpd BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES 119911 LIMITED PARTNERS LEIPCIGER N.L.LEIPCIGER,P.Eng. M.y .MITELMAN,PRE g �i LL. . KAM I N KE R T.SAAR L.S. iNKUS, S SHARMPEng. MITELMAN L >�r a " K.K. HARMA,P.Eng. N.A.FISHER,P.Eng. And Partners In c. J.SCHMITZ.C.E.T. � CONSULTING ENGINEERS 235 Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Ontario M313 2V1 /Tel: (416)445-8255/Fax: (416)445-7885 LKM Project No. 97309 November 13, 1997 MECHANICAL POST TENDER ADDENDUM M-1 GARNET RICKARD ARENA ADDITION 1 .0 DRAWING M101 (REISSUED): .1 Revise storm water drain routing as shown. .2 Delete CBMH at northeast corner of new rink. .3 Change MH at property line to CBMH. 2.0 DRAWING NO. M201 (REISSUED): .1 Delete RD storm piping and connection to storm drain along grid R. .2 Provide two shower heads instead of three in each change rooms. .3 Delete 25HWS/HWR loop, 3-way valve and controls for snow melting pit from boiler room. ' .4 Delete sanitary sump pump and sump pit for snow melting pit. 3.0 DRAWING NO. M202 (REISSUED): 1 .1 Delete 25HWS/HWR loop from boiler room to grid "A" serving snow melting pit. 4.0 DRAWING NO. M204 (REISSUED): .1 Delete all ductwork associated with AC-4. .2 Delete CO/propane sensors. Fan EF-10 shall operate continuously. .3 Supply and install a 1800x1200 louvre, mot. damper, birdscreen at high level in the rink at grid 1 B-U and interlock with EF-2 and manual switch in ice resurface room to be activated manually to open when fan EF-2 on and close when EF-2 off. .4 Supply and install two indoor ice rink dehumidifiers c/w structural steel support stand at two corners of the new rink with local unit mounted controls and condensate drain to nearest drain. Units shall be 7.5 cooling capacity (each) for a total of 15 ton cooling. Units shall be equipped with starters, humidistat, defrost coils, filters, discharge duct (36" long) with pattern adjustable louvre, heat-trace condensate trap,support stand 12' high, vibration isolators between stand and units, 575-3-60 volts, MCA 20 Amps, 25#/hr moisture removal; ' 4500 CFM airflow. Units shall be Dry-O-Tron or equal in Desertaire, Cimco. ' - 2 - 5.0 DRAWING NO. M205 (REISSUED): .1 Supply double deflection grilles in corridor 123 and vestibule 103 in lieu of diffusers. Grilles shall be 200x150 c/w OBD. 6.0 DRAWING NO. M206 (REISSUED): .1 Delete AC-4, condenser CC-1, gas piping to AC-4, AC-3, controls and ductwork etc. .2 Supply and install EF-18 c/w grilles as shown in room 202. 7.0 DRAWING NO. M801 (REISSUED) ' .1 Revise equipment schedule to delete AC-3, AC-4, CC-1 and add EF-18. .2 DHW schematics revised to delete boiler B-3 and new 500 gallon tank and add 2 electric tanks and one gas fired tank and flue. Piping for the system shall be revised to suit for a complete operating system with aquastats, piping, isolation valves, relief valves, drains, flue etc. 8.0 SPECIFICATIONS: .1 DIVISION 15400: .1 Revise WC's to floor mounted with standard flush valve in lieu of wall mounted unit. .2 Revise urinals with standard flush valves. .3 Delete boiler and tank for domestic hot water system. .2 DIVISION 15850: .1 Delete AC-4, CC-1 from specifications. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN and Partners Inc. Kris Sharma, P.Eng. KS/hk P:\WP51\1997\97309KS.M-1 L E I I L I V E R PARTNERS N.L.LEIPCIGER.P.Eng. q D.M.KAMINKER,P.Eng. L.MITELMAN,P.Eng. KAM I N KE R T SAAR L.S. INKUSN MITELMAN s. SHARM,P .En K.K.SHARMA,P.Eng. N.A.FISHER,P.Eng. And Partners Inc. J.SCHMITZ,C.E.T. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 235 Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Ontario M36 2V1 /Tel: (416)445-8255/Fax: (416)445-7885 LKM Project No. 97309 DATE: November 13, 1997 ELECTRICAL POST TENDER ADDENDUM E-1 GARNET RICKARD ARENA ADDITION 1 . DRAWING # E201 1 . Delete 20 type "A" luminaires. Provide two 20A, 2P lighting contactors for lighting circuits AA-4/6 and AA-8/10 in lieu of 30A, 3P and 20A, 3P contactors. 2. Delete 5 type 75" luminaires in ice resurfacer room 148. 3. Provide 8x360W battery units (12VDC), located at various locations in lieu of central battery unit. Emergency head shall be 12V, 12W quartz halogen, lexan cube. Exit lights shall be 347 volt AC and 12VDC. 2. DRAWING # E202 1 . Provide connection for 600V, 30, 20A dehumidifier in ice resurfacer room 148. Circuit # CC-26/28/30 (30A, 3P). 2. Provide connection for 600V, 30, 20A dehumidifier in storage 115. Fed from switchboard "AAA" via 30A, 3A fused disconnect switch, 30A fuses. 3. Provide 120V connection for motorized damper at grids U/1 B. Circuit D-58. 4. Delete baseboard heaters in storages 151 & 115 and in offices 129 & 130. 5. Delete connection for CO detector, circuit D-58. 3. DRAWING # E-203 1 . Delete all outlets in music room 203. Delete 9 type "B" luminaires in music room 203. Terminate conduit for sound system in figure skating room. 2. Delete 9 type "G" luminaires. 3. Delete 13 type "B" luminaires in viewing room. Add three type "F1 " luminaires. i 1 - 2 - 4. Delete 2 type "F1" and 6 type "C" luminaires in figure skating room. Provide r6 type "F5" luminaires. 5. Delete power feeds for AC #4, CC-1 and AC-3. 6. Connect MAU-1 (600V 30 3HP) to LP "CC". Circuit CC-20/22/24 (15A, 3P). 7. Provide connection '/a HP exhaust fan in figure skating room. Connect to cct # D-24. 4. DRAWING # E204 1 . Replace type "AA" luminaire at exit door from receiving room 108 with type "1313" luminaire. 2. Delete baseboard heaters. 3. Heater in bestibule 101 shall be 6KW, 208V 30. Connect to cirucuit A- 62/64/66 (30A, 3P). 5. DRAWING # E801 1 1 . Fire alarm system: Alternate fire alarm system (Notifier) is acceptable provided that existing devices to be replaced with new. All devices, new and existing, shall be of single manufacturer. Delete third party verification. 2. Main switchboard AAA shall be 800A. Distribution sections shall be c/w fusible disconnect switches. 3. Incoming feeder shall be 2 runs of 4#500MCM. 4. Distribution boards and panels shall be c/w aluminium bus in lieu of copper bus. 5. Series rated breakers with upstream devices are acceptable. 6. Delete co-ordination study for service equipment. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN and Partners Inc. Lit Thinh Hoang, P.Eng. P:\WP51\1997\97309TH.E1 R PARTNERS LEIPCIGER N.L.LEIPCIGER,P.Eng. � KAM I N KE R L. M.KAMINKER, ��y�� L.MITELMAN,P.Eng. � T.SAAR y/ R.R.BLENKIN MITELMAN � L.S.PINKUS,P.Eng. K.K.SHARMA,P.Eng. And Partners InC. N.A. � FISHER, J.SCHMITZ,C.E.T. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1 235 Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Ontario M36 2V1 /Tel: 416 445-8255/Fax: 416 445-7885 289 Cedar Street, Sudbury,Ontario P313 1 M8/Tel: (7053 675 -6881 /Fax: (705)675-6302 jLKM Project No. 97309 November 13, 1997 REFRIGERATION POST TENDER ADDENDUM R-1 GARNET B. RICHARD ARENA ADDITION 1 .0 SPECIFICATIONS 17700:- .1 Delete following for the refrigeration plant. .1 Strainer on condenser water pump. .2 Armstrong 216-6 high pressure float. .3 6" balancing valves. .4 Emergency switch. .5 New MCC2. .6 Spring isolation for piping, condenser etc. .7 Condenser support rails. Structural shall provide the roof support beams for condensers. 1 .8 Concrete housekeeping pads/inertia bases. .9 Flow meters. .10 Unloading solenoids on compressors. .11 Programmable controller for both pads. .12 Revise new condenser size of 75 H.P. to 50 H.P. .13 Revise MYCOM COMPRESSOR to GRAM HC6100. 2 Supply following equipment .1 Combination control/starter panel for new compressor, pumps etc. in lieu of MCC. .2 Support new and relocated equipment off the refrigeration room floor on steel channels. .3 Provide Honeywell Electronic thermostats for ice temperature controls. .4 Relocate existing ammonia shut off panel and reinstall in new room .3 Refrigeration contractor shall be responsible for complete design/build system based on criteria indicated on drawings, specification and addenda. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN & Partners Inc. Kris Sharma, P. Eng. C:\WP51\1997\97309ADDR.R1 I BARRY • BRYAN • ARCHITECT 11 Stanley Court • ENGINEER Whitby, Ontario L1N 8P9 ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone(905)666.5256 POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 - ITEM 2.12 ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX 2440 KING STREET WEST BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO L1 C 1K5 TENDER NO. CL 9727 Architectural Project 97100 Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued A101 Site Plan 2 November 13, 1997 A102 Landscape 1 November 13, 1997 A103 Landscape 1 November 13, 1997 A201 Overall Floor Plan 1 November 13, 1997 A202 Enlarge Floor Plans 3 November 13, 1997 A203 Enlarge Floor Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A204 Enlarge Floor Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A205 Enlarge Floor Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A206 Reflective Ceiling Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A207 Roof Plans 1 November 13, 1997 A301 Elevation 1 November 13, 1997 A302 Elevation 1 November 13, 1997 A303 Interior 1 November 13, 1997 A304 Interior 2 November 13, 1997 A305 Interior Elevations 1 November 13, 1997 A401 Sections 1 November 13, 1997 rA402 Sections 1 November 13, 1997 A403 Sections 1 November 13, 1997 A501 Details(Section) 3 November 13, 1997 A502 Details(Section) 2 November 13, 1997 A503 Details 3 November 13, 1997 A601 Details(Plan) 1 November 13, 1997 A701 Stairs& Misc. 1 November 13, 1997 A801 Schedules 1 November 13, 1997 A901 Millwork 1 November 13, 1997 710OPTADng Ustmpd Page 1 of 3 Structural Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued S100 Key Plan and General Notes 0 November 13, 1997 S101 Typical Details 0 November 13, 1997 S200 Foundation Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S201 Foundation Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S202 Second Floor Framing Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S203 Roof Framing Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S204 Roof Framing Plan 0 November 13, 1997 S300 Sections 0 November 13, 1997 S301 Sections 0 November 13, 1997 S302 Sections 0 November 13, 1997 Mechanical Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued M101 Site Plan, Mechanical 1 November 13, 1997 M201 Partial Floor Plan, Plumbing & Drainage 2 November 13, 1997 M202 Partial Floor Plan, Plumbing&Drainage 2 November 13, 1997 M203 Floor Plan, Sprinkler Zoning 0 November 13, 1997 M204 Partial Ground Floor Plan, HVAC 1 November 13, 1997 M205 Partial Floor Plan, HVAC 1 November 13, 1997 M206 Partial Second Floor Plan, HVAC 2 November 13, 1997 M801 Schematics&Details, Mechanical 1 November 13, 1997 efrigeration Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued R201 Partial Floor Plan, Refrigeration 1 November 13, 1997 R801 Schematics&Details, Refrigeration 1 November 13, 1997 R802 Schematics Diagram Refrigeration 1 November 13, 1997 7100PTADwg Ust.wpd Page 2 of 3 BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (19911 LIMITED Electrical Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued E101 Site Plan& Details 1 November 13, 1997 E201 New Rink Lighting Layout 1 November 13, 1997 E202 New Rink Power Layout 1 November 13, 1997 E203 Partial Second Floor Plan 1 November 13, 1997 E204 Part Floor Plan Lighting &Power Layouts 1 November 13, 1997 E801 Legend, Detail &Single Line Diagram 1 November 13, 1997 E802 Lighting Fixtures Schedule, Panel Schedule&Detail 1 November 13, 1997 710OPTADwg Ust.wpd Page 3 of 3 ' - BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED r BARRY • BRYAN • ARCHITECT O Stanley Court ' • ENGINEER Whitby, Ontario L 1 8P9 ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone(W5)666-5256 Fax ADDENDUM NO. 3 r PROJECT: Addition and Renovations to PROJECT NO.: 97100 Garnet B. Rickard Sports Complex Tender No. CL 9727 DATE: October 14, 1997 Municipality of Clarington The following shall constitute Addendum No. 3. Bidders shall include all revisions/clarifications in their Total Stipulated Price. 1. DRAWINGS rA. DRAWING A304- SCREEN TYPES .1 Unless otherwise specified: (1) All exterior screens are to be aluminum. (2) All interior screens are to be hollow metal. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 Denis O'Connell DOC/cb r r 1 r 1 r 1 ' 7100A 1410.#3.wpd BARRY • BRYAN • ARCHITECT 11 Stanley Court • ENGINEER Whitby, Ontario ON 8P9 ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone(905)666.5256 MEETING REPORT PROJECT: Addition and Renovations to REPORT NO.: Pre-Bid Meeting Garnet B. Rickard Sports Complex (Addendum No. 2) Tender No. CL 9727 Municipality of Clarington PROJECT NO.: 97100 LOCATION: Site DATE: October 7, 1997 PURPOSE: Pre-tender meeting and site tour. ' PRESENT: Mr. Joe Caruana Municipality of Clarington Ms. Lou Ann Birkett Municipality of Clarington Mr. Scott Rose Municipality of Clarington ' Mr. Lee Courto Atlas Corp. Mr. Gary Hauck Ball Construction Mr. Joe Gerrits Gerr Construction Mr. Joel Melloul Melloul-Blamey Const. Co. Ltd. Mr. Tony Jeronimus Peak Engineering Mr. Greg Wilson Branair Ltd. Mr. Bill Stark H.R. Stark ' Mr. Adam Roznicki Nekison Engineering & Cont. Mr. Steve Zeitler Accel Electrical Mr. Caley Amadio Carlos Electric 1 Mr. Bev Southorn Wallwin Electric Mr. Richard Poole Cimco Mr. Paul Sandford Carruthers &Wallace Ltd. Mr. Kris Sharma LKM Engineering Mr. Thinh Hoang LKM Engineering Mr. Ian Magee Barry - Bryan Associates (1991) Limited Mr. Denis O'Connell Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited The following shall constitute Addendum No. 2. Bidders shall include all revisions/clarifications in their Total Stipulated Price. 1. Drawings and specifications were reviewed in detail. ' 2. The Pre-Bid Meeting Report will be issued to all invited Contractors. 3. Tender documents were discussed and Contractors instructed as to their completion. 4. Brand names specified shall be considered as meaning "or Owner's approved equal". Approval to be obtained prior to submitting tender. 5. Proposed alternate bids are to be quoted separately and not included in base bid, unless specified otherwise. ' 0710.#2.wpd Page 2 6. Bid is to be based on prices/wage rates, etc. (all inclusive) applicable at the time of installation and completion. Escalation clauses will not be considered nor accepted. 7. Contractors are to arrange any site tours with Mr. Scott Rose (905) 623-3379. 8. All demolished material shall be removed from the site and disposed of in legal landfill sites, by the contractor. Prior to commencing the work, the contractor shall submit to the owner, a Waste Management Plan. 9. The Contractor will be the"Constructor" on this project and provide the "Notice of Project" to the Ministry of Labour. 10. The contractor is reminded to follow all Municipality of Clarington Safety Procedures. The Municipal Corporate Health and Safety Program was distributed to all present. 11. Addendum No. 1 dated October 7 1997 was distributed to all present. 12. The new Revised Tender Form was distributed to all General Contractors present. 13. The Geotechnical Report for the proposed addition, as prepared by Walter H. Gibson & Associates Ltd. (Dated September 1997) was distributed to all General Contractors. 14. SPECIFICATIONS A. SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .1 Section 2 - Tender Submissions (1) Delete Item 2.2 and replace with the following: 2.2 Tenders executed and signed under seal will be received until 2:00 pm local time on Thursday, October 16, 1997. This initial submission will include a completed page 1 R and 9R of the Tender Form and will be accompanied by the Bid Security required by Item 17.0 (page 8R) of the Tender Form. Final completed Tender Forms executed and signed under seal will be received until 3:00 pm local time on Thursday, October 16, 1997. Late tenders for the 2:00 pm closing or the 3:00 pm closing will be returned unopened to the respective bidder. 7100A0710.#2.wpd BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 3 B. SECTION 01005- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS .1 Add the following item: ' 1.43 WASTE MANAGEMENT POLICY A. Prior to the commencement of the work, submit to the Consultant for approval, a Waste Management Policy. B. Waste Management Policy shall clearly state the ' Contractor's proposed procedures for the removal, storage, transportation, and disposal of all waste material. C. Waste material shall include surplus excavated material from demolition, scrap construction material, and the like. ' D. The Waste Management Policy shall include a Source Separation Program for recyclable material, and shall be in accordance with the established policies currently in place under the requirements of Ontario Regulation 103/94. 15. Add new page 1 O (Revision 2 Addendum 2) to Tender Form Revision 1, Addendum 1. ' 16. DRAWINGS ' A. DRAWING A201 Add notes: ( .1 Item G: (Buried Septic Tanks)also shown on Drawing A101. These are to be removed from site. See specification, Section 01005 - General ' Conditions Item 1.43. .2 Item H. (Septic Beds) also shown on Drawing A101. The beds are to be stripped of topsoil and then compacted to obtain 98% Standard Proctor Maximum Density, prior to adding further backfill to required elevation. B. DRAWING A202 .1 Wall Types: For wall types W1, W2, W3, and W12 (1) Delete reference to 50 mm Rigid Insulation, and add sprayed polyurethane foam insulation as per specification Section 07218 in lieu. C. DRAWING A403 .1 Delete reference to Detail D7-11. 7100A0710.#2.wpd BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 4 17. NEW ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS ' The following added architectural drawings are to be read in conjunction with the tender drawings: .1 New Drawing SKAl2 Section Detail .2 New Drawing SKA13 Section Detail ' .3 New Drawing SKA14 Perimeter Subdrain Detail .4 New Drawing SKA15 Typical Roof Expansion Joint ' 18. Refer to attached Structural Addendum No. 2, dated October 8, 1997 (3 pages). 19. Refer to attached Mechanical Addendum No. M-2, dated October 6, 1997 (12 pages). 20. Refer to attached Electrical Addendum No. E-2, dated October 6, 1997 (8 pages). ' 21. Refer to attached Refrigeration Addendum No. R-2, dated October 6, 1997 (1 page). END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 ' enis O'Connell DOC/cb ' C.C. Attachments: Page 10R (Revision 2 Addendum 2) New Drawing SKAl2 Section Detail ' New Drawing SKA13 Section Detail New Drawing SKA14 Perimeter Subdrain Detail New Drawing SKA15 Typical Roof Expansion Joint Structural Addendum No. 2, dated October 8, 1997 (3 pages) Mechanical Addendum No. 2, dated October 6, 1997 (12 pages) Electrical Addendum No. 2, dated October 6, 1997 (8 pages) ' Refrigeration Addendum No. R-2, dated October 6, 1997 (1 page) 7100A0710.02.wpd BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 1 O REVISION 2 ADDENDUM NO. 2 We agree that this page 1 OR of Addendum No. 2 forms a portion of our Tender Form and that our ' Tender Form constitutes pages 1 R to 10R inclusive. 9.0 (Continuation of item 9.0, page 2R): D. The supply and installation of the 51 space parking lot(including curbs, islands and pY p P 9 ( 9 entrance roads) located on the east side of the new ice pad expansion (Ring Road not included). Area to be left graded at parking lot rough grade level and hydroseeded. ' Street Address Name of Company City or Town Signature of Company Official Postal Code Name and Title 7106-00200-R2A2.wpd ' LAP AN R BARRIER 12 PREFIN MTL FLASHING D SEAL AI E WITH FR40 FLASHING TYPE 2 COLOUR 1 FR40 FLASHING CONT I OVER PARAPET. LAP AND ' SEAL ALL JOINTS _ 1 PREMANUFACTURED INSULATED ROOF CURB PREFIN MTL CLOSURE -� I I TYPICAL MEMBRANE ROOF PREFlN MTL SIDING 50 RIGID INSUL WITH 'Z' BARS _- AIR BARRIER 190 CONC BLOCK ' - TOP OF STEEL 125.15 PREFIN MTL DRIP ' FLASHING ( PREFIN MTL STL FRAMING FLASHING SEE STRUCT ' PATCH ROOF WHERE 50 RIGID INSULATION WITH DISTURBED WITH B.U. - 13 GYPSUM BOARD ROOF TO MATCH EXIST ' AND CONTINUE UP CURB REMOVE EXIST PARAPET AS INDICATED FLASHING AND WOOD BLOCKING. PREPARE FOR - INSTALLATION OF 5 BLOCK COURSES EXIST CONC - BLOCK EXIST B.U. ROOF t _ ASSEMBLY CANT STRIP N BL BLOCK THICKNESS W HTOCMATCH EXIST INSTALL NEW LINTEL TO I I Q SUIT WALL REMOVAL. REFER CUT EXIST LINTEL TO TO STRUCTURAL F- SUIT INFILL REFER TO ' I _ STUCTURAL 1 f -- 23 ' INSTALL LINTEL OVER DOOR. SEE STRUCT -794 TInE: SECTION BARRY • BRYAN •'"""'�` DATE: DRWG N0: ' DETAIL ASSOCIATES (1991) UNITED y OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA1 Z ' GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM50 ' B R OVE EXIST ROOF DECK TO OW FOR INSTALLATION OF 40 FLASHING. REINSTALL M DECK AND MAKE GOOD. CgNTINUE FR40 TO 1800mm FIROM EDGE OF ROOF CONTINUE MEMBRANE ALONG EXIST SLOPED ROOF AND SEAL FLAT STOCK FLASHING CAULK ' BLOCK DOWN 1 COURSE AND SEAL ALL AROUND. COLOUR TO MATCH PARAPET SHOWN. FLASH AND CAULK P�NETRATION UNE OF PARAPET BEYOND P EFlN MTL Ft HING TYPICAL MEMBRANE - � I ` TOP OF MASONRY 125.90 � g N MASONRY WALL TO EXTEND - - TOP OF MASONRY 125.70 TO MATCH INF1LL WALL - �� TOP OF STEEL 125.50 ' LAP FLASHING AS SHOWN AND SEAL NEW BEAM SEE STRUCT EXIST STL FRAMING j GYPSUM BOARD TO FOLLOW EXIST MTL STUDS I STOP BALL OF FLUTES UDECK. FIRE FlBRE INSULATION 13 GYPSUM BOARD REMOVE EXIST MTL SIDING ' TO REMAIN 11 pill AND PLYWOOD. INSTALL MTL FURRING AND 13 GYPSUM BOARD TO UNDERSIDE OF MTL DECK i ACOUSTIC PANEL ' MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES OF I CEIUNG EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN I I I i I I I I 1 1 RETURN GYPSUM BOARD INSTALL MTL STUD FRAMING TO DOOR FRAME AS REQUIRED TO SUIT NEW OPENING TITLE: SECTION BARRY • MAN ; T DATE: DRWG NO: DETAIL ASSOCIATES (1991) UMITED •. w OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: Kjk 1 3 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM50 ' SLOPE TO DRAIN ' - II Ohl= BACKFILL PER SPECIFICATIONS PROPOSED FOUNDATION WALL SEE STRUCTURAL o Z I!ili!�1= r4..ti.•''4 O =VIII•' O• X000 Odb O�pO 1 _ 4p �•0 00 IA Q O�O *8O 80 OD O •O 1 00m DIA. PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE WITH FILTER SOCK AT BASE OF FOOTING. PLACE AT SAME DEPTH IN LOCATIONS OF GRADE BEAM ' FILTER: 19mm CLEAN STONE FILTER TRANSMON: GEOTEXTILE FILTER CLOTH OR 150mm MIN. THICKNESS OF FINE AGGREGATE (OPSS 1002) ' TITLE: PERIMETER SUBDRAIN BARRY • BRYAN ARCHrTECT DATE' DRWG NO: DETAIL ASSMATES (1991) UMITED M OCT 1997 PROJECT. ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: . CHECKED BY: KA14 ' GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 i 1 1 1 EXPANSION JOINT SUPPORT BY MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER LAP VAPOUR BARRIER WITH MEMBRANE COUNTERFLASHING ROOF MEMBRANE AND SEAL ADHERED WITH SPLICING CEMENT 1 WOOD BLOCKING ANCHORED TYPICAL MEMBRANE TO DECK. HEIGHT TO MATCH ROOF 25 INSULATION THICKNESS 1 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER 1 L76x76x6 TYP FLEXIBLE PREFIN MTL BELLOWS r TITLE: TYPICAL ROOF BARRY • BRYAN ; DATE: DRWG N0: EXPANSION JOINT ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED -MoWmA ANAL es OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: KA1 5 i GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM50 ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX ' ADDENDUM NO. 2 STRUCTURAL OCTOBER 8, 1997 1. Drawing S204 i1.1 Along grid 12 at existing building, add new beam as per sketch SKS204-SK1. 1.2 Along grid 12 at existing building, add new section 27/S302 as per Sketch SKS302- SK2. ' 1.3 Where new building meets existing building at west end of new corridor add section 28/S302 as per Sketch SKS302-SK2. 1 i 1 1 i i i 1 V) °° 3 0 t !M 4 Qom' 3 LS30 x x 20 Q� ,'h ----------------° 13 5302 `� eQ 21 n 3 lao x ; S302 EXIST. JOIST J9 x I 1 X V':c 11,1 I III �h M 0Q (I x W M 0 III w r. w 11 N 0 00 3 , S3 2' ' W200 x 21 4,t M "3 x 0 O M '3 � I W200 x 21 �.-. EX W200x27 �- --E W200 x 27----- -______� I- ---- --- 28 1 1 12 S302 13 N PART ROOF FRAMING PLAN — SCALE 1:100 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PROJECT: R.P.F. 10 PROFESS/p� ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS °�'�'' °Za° So GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED. P.G.S. a P.SANDFORD z MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 8/97 '0 0 of oo Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. ' Consulting Structural Engineers SKS204--SK1 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. West, Suite 500, DATED TO BE VALID Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 l f CONT. L j I 76x76x6.4 J I f EL. 125.15 0 NEW W200 Li Z CI j 190 _ EL. 124.35 1 EXIST. JOIST � J ("2 7 j 5302 SCALE 1:20 Ii EXIST. MASONRY WALL EXIST. ROOF V EXIST. W200 EL. 125.15 NEW 38 STEEL DECK IEL. 125.15 � NEW W200 NEW COLOURED ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE BLOCK 1 140 (�28 S302 SCALE 1:20 1 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PROJECT: �pfES& `Y ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS 5250 �i� CHMI( D: H GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX P.SANDFORD MUNICIPALITY OF CLAWN" i BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 8/97 ° DRAWING NO. O Carruthers & 1Pallace Limited ' Consulting Structural Engineer SKS302-SK2 SEAL WjST BE SIGN O Alm 90 Eglinton Ave. West, Suite 500, DATED TO BE VAtm Toronto, Ontario WR 2E4 LEIPCIG ER KAMINKER MITELMAN And Partners Inc. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 235 Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Ontario M36 2V1 /Tel: (416)445-8255/Fax: (416)445-7885 Addition and Renovations OUR PROJECT No. 97309 Garnet B. Rickard Complex Municipality of Clarington October 6, 1997 MECHANICAL ADDENDUM M-2 1.0 Reference Specifications: .1 Delete articles 15050, 1.3.1 , 1 .5.2, 1 .5.3, 1 .5.4, 1.5.5 .2 Item 15050, 1 .4.3 - Revised to read "All excavation & backfilling inside & outside the building shall be Div. 15" .3 Item 15050, 3.19.1 - Revise to read "All piping shall be painted by Div. 15, not by Div. 9". .4 Item 15400,1 .4.1 - revised "Territorial to Local". .5 Revise item 15400,2.1 .4 to "Cement Transit". ' .6 Item 15400, 2.7.4 - Add " Supply & Install remotely located high water alarm on all sump pumps". i .7 Add Item 15400, 2.7.5 - "Div. 15 shall supply and install all prefabricated 600 X 600 x 2400 & 900 0-2400 sump pumps pits shown on the drawings including storm & sanitary pits. Sump pits shall be reinforced concrete of shapes & sizes as noted on drawings and sealed & water proofed". .8 Item 15490, 2.4.1 - Delete reference to City of Scarborough. .9 Item 15490 3.15 - Add " Pay all charges and make arrangements with Gas Co. & city to provide temporary services, piping installations, meter relocations and also for permanent gas & water services during construction of the building. I .10 Item 15850, 2.11.2 - Revise black iron to S.S. steel in exposed area of Concession. .11 Delete item 15850, 2.13.6 (door grilles) in its entirety. .12 Item 15850, 3.15.1 - Internally insulate All Ductwork for MAU-1, EF-1 , AC-4. .13 Item 15850, 3.29 - Add the following .1 AC-1, AC-2, and AC-3 - Room T'STAT shall control unit functions to maintain the space temperature. Unit shall operate in free cooling mode to suit outdoor reception/humidity condition. .2 AC-2 - Room bypass control terminals shall maintain space temperature. .3 AC-4/EF-2 .1 AC-4 shall maintain space humidity and temperature in the rink with minimum fresh air during occupied mode, zero fresh air during unoccupied mode and 100%. Fresh air during ice 1 resurfacing mode. Ef-2 motorized damper shall match water fresh air intake damper to exhaust similar quantity of air for space. During unoccupied mode Ef-2 shall be off. .4 MAU-1/EF-1 ' .1 Fans shall operated continuously during occupied mode. .2 MAU-1 shall heat or cool air to maintain 75 deg. Fahrenheit supply air temperature to all change rooms. .14 Revise item 15850, 3.6.9.1 to " Leave janitor room, Mechanical room ". .15 Delete Item 15850, 3.17.3. ' .16 Reference Specification 15330: .1 Sprinkler contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary sprinkler coverage during construction by installing a temporary system, connecting back to existing headers and revising piping to suit upon completion of new sprinkler room. .2 Coordinate all temporary piping on site to suit existing installation. .3 Low "E" ceiling blanket shall be installed new rink. Install heads to suit blanket and requirements of local fire department. 2.0 Reference Drawings .1 Drawing No. M201 (Not Re-Issued) .1 Plat Plan SKM-1 t .1 Supply and install 32 gas UH-1 piping complete with isolation valves for unit heaters UN-1 & UH-2 at Grid 1B. .2 Revise HWS/HWR piping for snow melting pit from 25mm to 38mm complete with fullport 3 way valve at the coil. Install ' 38mm HWS/HWR seperate loop from boiler room to snow melting pit. .3 All tempered water piping to showers shall be 20mm. .4 Supply & Install 25 gas line to radiant heater at grid 10-X and connect to roof gas main complete with valve. .5 Sump pits shall be 2400 deep. .2 Drawing No. M202 ( Not Re-Issued) .1 Part Plan SKM-2 .1 Supply and install 12 C/H piping to MS in janitor room. .2 Connect 150 sprinkler zone piping from temporary sprinkler header to two existing zones (Dry & Wet) and siamede piping in the ceiling of existing lobby area and cap existing mains as required. Approximate location of sprinkler mains is shown on the drawings M202. .2 Supply and install a 20mm tempered water piping to eyewash/shower. .3 Provide for gas connection to 3 kitchen equipment with 20mm gas pipe & valve. Coordinate equipment location with arch. & owner ' supplied equipment. .4 Piping size connection Hot Cold Tempered WC - 25 ' LAV/MS 12 12 UR1 20 SS 12 12 I SHOWERS _ _ 20 EW 20 I .5 Div. 15400 shall provide adequate hot, cold, recircular & tempered water branch mains from mains to suit number of fixtures being supplied. .6 All buried drains shall be 100 size. .7 Provide 50 cw mains with mains to heat exchanger in refrigeration room & HW back to boiler feed pipe. ' .8 For connection to existing gas and water mains services in site, coordinate with existing drawings. Main service shall be 200 RS . ' .9 Sump pits shall be 2400 deep. Sani : Sump Pump: Barnes 2 EH 3311 A, Automatic, 1/3 H.P., Highwater alarm, Switch floats, Level Control. ' Storm Sump Pump: Duplex 2EH 3311 A, Automatic, 1/3 H.P., Highwater alarm, Switch floats and alternating panels. .10 Shower mixing valve shall be equal to powers HI-LO cabinet fixture mixing valve 420/432, non scalding valve & remote audio/visual alarm pane. Complete installtion shall be in accordance with powers ' piping schematics. .11 Low pressure gas piping at PRV shall be 150 0 up to 100 0 take ' off. 3.0 Drawing No. 204 (Not Re-Issued) i .1 SKM -3 (Room 148) .1 Supply and Install UH-1 & UH-2 & T'STATS complete with gas flue through roof, suspend with vibration isolators in ice resurface room. .2 Louvre sizes: - West Wall - 600 X 600, Birdsceen and mot damper. North Wall - E-300 X300 Birdscreen & BDD. .2 Revise note at grid (T-7A) to " Interlock EF-2 with AC-4. .3 SKM -4 (Storage room 135, 137, 140, 141): .1 Supply and install Ef-14, EF-17, EF-18 complete with fire dampers, ductwork, grilles, 300 X 300 louvres and ON/OFF switch and balance for airflows shown. .2 Supply and install fire dampers on 500 X 500 & 400 X 650 duct risers at grill A-5A at entry to change room. supply and install similar fire dampers on the ducts at high level at entry point in the gallery level under MAU-1 & EF-1 . .3 Supply and install a reverse B ray radiant heater 50 MHB capacity at gridline 10- X to focus heat between grid 9-10 @ c/w T'STAT. Duct fresh air & Vent to outside the high level through wall. 4.0 Reference Drawing No. M-205 (Not Re-Issued) to doors. .2 Revise TA duct sizes to 300 X 200. .3 Delete note "UH to remain" @ grid 11. UH shall be relocated to vestibule 103. .4 Egg crate sizes 600 X 200 Typical. .5 Div. 15850 shall relocate existing rangehood & rangehood exhaust fan and reinstall in new concession area. Supply new roof curb, new welded duct from hood fan, new discharge duct and raincap for a complete installation as per NFPA 96 requirements. All electrical requirement,switches etc, shall be new. r .6 Div. 15850 shall remove, relocate and reinstall existing electrical room exhaust fan, T'STAT and few switch etc. to new electrical room. Supply and install new roof curb. Electrical room intake air louvre shall be 300X 300 complete with birdsceen & MD. .7 Div. 15850 shall install insulated sheet metal panels (18 Ga,painted) to cover roof openings where fans have been removed and relocated. .8 Install Ac-1 thermostat at east wall of ticket booth. .9 All T'STAT shall be complete with lockable clear plastic covers. 5.0 Reference Drawing No. M-206 (Not Re-issued). .1 Revise gas main on roof beyond AC-3 to 100 mm. ' .2 Supply and install two LGB-10 (10 size 600 CFM size) in room 201 . associated with AC-2 system. ( .3 T'STAT for Ac-3 shall be installed on west wall closest to AC-3. .4 Revise 400 dia duct to 550 x 250, 350DIA to 450 x 250 & 300 DIA. to 400 X 250 ducts for AC-3 distribution systems. .5 Provide separate identified cost of AC-3 system (10 ton unit, rectangular iductwork, controls etc.) serving rooms 202, 203 and 2nd floor gallery not included in the basic tender quotation. (See SKM-6) .6 Include identified cost of installation of AC-3 (3 TON UNIT) system including supply duct, diffusers, return grilles, controls etc. as shown in SKM-5 attached serving rooms 202 & 203 only in the basic tender quotation. AC-3 3 Ton carrier (48Tj004), 1100CFM. 0.5 "S.P., 575-3-60 volts, starter, filters roofcurb, economizer, T'STAT, MCA - 7.9. 6.0 Drawing No. M-801 (Not Re-Issued). .1 Sprinkler assembly - main domestic cold water piping to building shall be 75 mm beyond 50mm take off for DHW boilers. .2 Include heating capacities: In schedule AC-1 180 MBH AC-2 74 MBH AC-3 (ALTERNATE) 180 MBH (10 TON UNIT) AC-3 74 MBH (3TON UNIT) .3 Include AC-3 (3 TON) on Schedule: Carrier 48TJ004, 1100 CFM, 5" S.P. 960 RPM, 3/4 H.P., 575-3-60 volts, 7.9 MCA, Breaker 15A, 76 MBH, heating,3 TON cooling complete with filters, starter, roof curbs, T'STAT. economizer, power exhaust. .4 Revise equipment schedule as follows: .1 EF-4- Existing relocated (verify fan data on site). .2 EF-7- Revise to 2 speed fan 2000 CFM/4000 CFM, 1250/2500 RPM, 2H.P, motor, starter, 575-3-60 volts, roofcubs, BDD, .3 Add EF-14 - CSP 150 , 300 CFM, Switch, BDD, Vibrations Isolators. .4 Add EF-17 & EF- 18 - SP.1 17, 150 CFM, Switch, BDD, Vibration Isolators. .5 UH-1, UH-2 Reznor FE 125, 100 MBH, 1/4 H.P., 120 volts, T'STAT. flue through roof. .6 P-4 - Armstrong S-37 complete with starter. .7 P-5,-6 - complete with control panel (remote alarm). .8 Add P-7 - DuUex Sump Pump Barnes 30 USGPM. 120V, 1/2 H.P., complete with alternating panel, remote highwater alarm. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN and Partners Inc. Kris Sharma, P.Eng. C:\WP51\1997\97309.MADD RESURFACER � I I 6150 WORK SHOP 146 F 1 100 RD Tn- -— —� 150 t 2 'L' . , 2 3 � I L 32 _ T _ 75 FIRST Al 25 100- F 1477 F _ EXISTING 2000 1 ddFO BURIED STORM .. .. EXISTING RWL 32 GAS LINE FROM ABOVE � I 32 GAS LINE II TO UH-2 II I II RD II HEAT TRACED (TYPICAL)I E < I �I I I � 10 EXIST. ARENA 149 issued For: REVISED AS PER ADDENDUM M-1 Port of Dwg. No. M201 Title: ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS Dr PART Title: GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX P D ooR PLAN Scale: Revision: BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO 1:100 LEIPCIGER Drown by. C& Date: 10/6/97 KAt"ER Project No: Drawing No: MT9.MAN LKM And °artni' Inc. 97309 SKM-1 c TORONTO oNWIM e+crffxs TOTO- SUDBURY- ONTARIO J MOURN X11 017 ,��®�■��� -.� �LF, i Drawing ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS FLOOR'D COMPLEX BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO •. Drawn by. Date: KAMWER , And Parinors Inc. O' -250A250 { \ I UNIT HEATER WITH GAS PIPING i \X/ I UH-1 H O OOF00 FLUE UP THROUGH / \ FOR EF-1 MANUAL SWITCH WITH TIMER TO— START AC-4 ON 100% FRESH AIR I / \ { WO SHOP MODE. INST UNIT CONTROL \ I ( 94 1 FIC5,4RE /(— _ _ — 146 INSTALL CO SENSOR & INTERLOCK WITH EF-12. T T 94 250x25 ;,; =ICE - 3oox3OO LOUVRE C/W ESURFACER BIRDSCREEN & B.D.D. 148 300x20 94 -- FIRST AID 147 EF-11 I I r A - - - - - 600400 LOUVRE "2500 188 INSTALL A PROPANE SENSOR IN C/W BIRDSCREEN 250x2 SN'-"Y P17 & INTERLOCK WITH & MOT. DAMPER I I �� L V EF-10. II II TO I I I I UH-2 2000 DUCT DN. TO SNOW I I I I PIT AT WATER LEVEL. - I i l I I UNIT C/W T'STAT 30Ox300 LOUVRE C/W it BIRDSCREEN & B.D.D. I EF-10 III AY EXIST. ARENA 149 Issued For: REVISED AS PER ADDENDUM M-1 Part of Dwg. No. M204 Title: ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS Drawing Title: GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX PART GROUND FL. PLAN H.V.A.C. BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO Scale: 1000 Revision: Drawn by. Date: Z6LEIPCIGER cvL 1o/s/97 KAMWER Project No: Drawing No: NATELMM LKM `^"d `°' '" c«swr4G 8 5 toaro- soeY- oruo 97309 SKM-3 I I r STORAGE----I STORZI 30OX 1 141 250x 5 ° FD 300400 LOU E I H 11 STORAGE 41 rip 137 50x3 EF-17 250x2 STAIR NO. '� 47 � � Q° Ox 5011 FD F/0 ° _ _ Di x ii ♦ �,Ly ►NSU�ATE 300x300 LOUVRE ALL DUCTWORK 500x500 DUCT U 50x450 DUCT UP I 7 14 FC) 250400 1 It STORAGE 47 EF-18 a° 150x FD L.30'000� LOUVRE Issued For: REVISED AS PER ADDENDUM M-1 Port of Owg. No. M204 Title: ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS Drawing Titie: GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX PART GROUND FL. PLAN H.V.A.C. 80WMANVILLE ONTARIO Scale: 1:100 Revision: LEIPPCIGER Drown by: CVL Date: 10/6/97 Project No: Drawing No: WEliNAN LKM And Parfners Inc. 97309 SKM-4 CONSULTM eiGMMS TOR0170- SUDBURY- ONTAPoO EXTERNALLY INSULATE ALL EXPOSED DUCTS. 1B 1C A AIR N0. 1 1 DN 4 ® MUSIC 3000 3000 300 — - - - - - - 235 ' FIGURE SKATING 3000 300x25^- 7/A DUCT AC—3 (3 TON SYSTEM) ' AC-3 (3 TON SYSTEM) SEPARATE IDENTIFIED PRICE (INCLUDED IN THE TENDER COST) cued For REVISED AS PER ADDENDUM M-1 Part of Dwg. No. M206 Titte: ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS Drawing Title: GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX PART 2ND FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO Scale: 1:100 Revision: LK PACER Drawn by. CVL Dote: 10697 ' Project No: Drawing No: / / o: / / M LKM And va M EN Inc. 97309 SKM-5 coHSUrr�erwrrEets TORONTO— 3UDBtJRY— ONTARIO U ' F F: o Cm I ' z o+ = I W I I U- IL x Iy Q in V, I � (n I I U o •� W W O = I � o X I �, I �ZJ W in D J f x W U— F Z i < G J I U w Z W a _ e' i 00 J " 0 Q —J J 00 °_o I � M � Z N W I ® I QcaZ < x o i U O F� 1 a�^ FPO U < ` toW ie 1 x ' Issued For: REVISED AS PER ADDENDUM M-1 Part of Dwg. No. M206 Tale: ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS Drawing Title: t GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 2ND FLOOR GALLERY MECHANICAL BOWMANVILLE Stole:ONTARIO 1:200 Revision: ' Z6LEIPCIGER Drown ay: CVL Dote: 10/6/97 KAIVWER Project No: Drawing No: WrEL.MAN LKM And Partners Inc. 97309 SKM-6 cow egg PTO- SUOMr- OWAW LEIPCIGER KAMINKER f; MITELMAN And Partners Inc. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 235 Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Ontario M313 2V1 /Tel: (416)445-8255/Fax: (416)445-7885 ' Addition and Renovations OUR PROJECT No. 97309 Garnet B. Rickard Complex Bowmanville, Ontario October 6, 1997 ADDENDUM E-2 1 1 .0 Drawing E201-New Rink, lighting layout ( Not issued). .1 Rink lighting control diagram. .1 Push bottons shall be complete pilot lights and located in office # 130. 1 2.0 Drawing No E202 .1 Provide 120V connection for heat tracing cable near grids AZ & 9. Connect ' to circuit D 1 .5. .2 EF-10 to be complete with WP isolation switch. ' .3 See Mechnical drawing for location of EF-11 .4 Ice resurfacer room 148: .1 Add outlet for propane sensor at near exit door. Circuit D.58 .2 Add connection for UH -2 complete with control wire to thermostat circuit D.60. 1 .5 Storage # 141 : Add connection for EF-14 91/4 HP, 120V) complete with installation of control wiring and thermostat. Circuit D.62 1 .6 Storage # 137 : Add connection for EF-17 (1/6 HP, 120V) complete with installation of control wiring and thermostat. Circuit D1 .7 .7 Storage # 135 : Add connection for EF-18 (1/6 HP, 120V) complete with installation of control wiring and thermostat. Circuit D1 .9. .8 Add motorized damper for EF-2. Circuit A.16. .9 Office # 130 : Add one type "A", 750 W heater - Circuit BB.52 (30A). .10 Office # 129 : Add one type "A", 750W heater - Circuit BB.52 (30A). .11 General Note #1 : Relocation of mechanical equipment shall included relocation of control devices and line voltge control wiring. 3.0 Drawing E203 - Partial Second Floor Plan - Lighting & Power Layout (Not Issued) .1 Include in a base tender the power feed from "AAA" for AC-3 (600V, 1 3phase, 7A) located above figure skating room 202 complete with 15A, 3P breaker and 3#12-13mmC feeder. ' .2 Include in the alternate price #C the power feeder from "AAA" for alternate unit AC-3 (600V, 3phase,20A) located between gridlines 3A & 4A complete with 30A, 3p breaker and 3 # 10-19 mmC feeder. ' 4.0 Drawinq E204 - Partial Floor Plans - Lighting and Power Layout (Not Issued) .1 Detail # 1, Lighting .1 W/R -111; Shower light shall be type "F8A" ' .2 Detail # 2, Powe 1 .1 Vestibule #113 : Add connector for eyewash, circuit A.38 .2 Gas Detector to be connected to circuit A-40. ' .3 Vestibule # 113 : Add one type "C", 300 W heater. Circuit 1313.50 .4 Receiving # 108: Add 6 KW, type "131" heater, circuit BB.50 (30A). Type "B1" shall be same as type "B" but surface mounted. Provide chains to hang heater. .5 Proshop # 105 : Rename EF-14 to EF-3 .6 Corridor # 123 : Add two type "A", 1250W heaters. Circuit 66.52 ' (30A). .7 Relocation of Ac-2 to above lobby 102 - See Mechanical drawing. .8 Vestibule # 101 : Revise type "B" heater to type "132", 8 Kw, 347V 1 phase connect to circuit BB.54 (30A). Type "132" heater shall be ' recessed, built-in thermostat - Chromaloz CH series equal .3 Detail #2 - Lighting Layout 1 1 Corridor #123 : Type "F7" luminaires have been changed to type "F3A" - Total of 5 fixtures. .2 Existing Storage : re install fixutre and adjust wiring to suit. 1 .4 Detail #2 - Power Layout .1 Meeting room #128: Add one type "A" 750W heater. Circuit BB.52. .5 Mechanical room layout: Refer to mechanical drawings for exact locations of equipment. ' 5. Drawing E-801 (Not Issued) .1 P/A System, emmpty conduit diagram: Add legend Qs : P/A system speaker outlet box. .2 4" X 4" speaker outlet boxes shall be flush with ceiling and complete with s/s cover plates. ' .6 Drawing E-802 (Not Issued) .1 Panel LP "D" shall be 84 circuits. ' .2 Panel schedules to be revise suit to changes. ' .3 Branch circuit breaker for LP "AA", And "BB" and "CC" shall be 25KA .4 Ligting fixture schedule: .1 Type "A1 " fixture shall have 250 W stand by Quartz lamp. ' .2 Equal manufacturer of Vandal resistant fixture shall be Kenall. .3 Delete type "F2" fixture specification. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN and Partners Inc. P-e�4 Kris Sharma, P.Eng. ' C:\WP51\1997\97309.e2 CJ rn� ' o O U H 1 0 � N >N Oa N u,2 ' M in 8 O O dd •� 1 S 0 IN x CM t-j Li a o _ W d' O = W w LLJ c0 Y � i 1 r Q II —� >< I C1 N I o r N a o _ ® — N U I g, o N f I 0 � O OM Z J p D\ O U Z OV 00 Zet ? o ' N iC I j n.t0 >r7 ,0 <U OO �n NO O <t TAE NEW RINK 1 LEIPCIGER POWER LAYOUT K1�VAI111MINK�EARI,V1 DRAWN BY : M.N PROJECT NO. 97309 t/A" And Q �e"" �' CHECKED BY T.H DRAWING No. CONSULTING ENGINEERS Tek(,4 6)443 8255 / Fox:(41�4S 7W5 DATE : OCT. 06/97 S K E— 1 i SCALE : ,:100 u FI STORAGE STORAGE D-21 14rC4� 140 J;' 1 11 �STAI N0.3 D-37 D-37 ° 4 LP D" EF-14(1/4HP,120V) ' 45KVA MOUNTE CCT.# D-62 r LP"CC" AT HIGH LEVEL I OR. 6 F-18 F-22 , GENERAL F-16 1 52 A OFFICE r_ G 750 —24 130 l L_ STORAGE 1-18 BB-52 137 (3WOR M F-16 STAIR NO.5 C D 1 °� 131 F-20 MAIN T OFFICE EF-17 (I 6HP,12OV) I 750 129 F-20 E 10" R D1-7 BB j2 A ,n j STORAGE 135 REINST LED EXISTING � $ DEHUMIDIFIER — D1-1 I HEA TRACING CABLE _ r LP 01" FI CCT. D 1-5 + 1-6 ' T O 1—g8 (1/6HP,120V) I I MOTORIZED DAMPER CCT.#A-16 EF-2 — 600V, 30, 1 H BB-49/51/53 (15A, 3P) ® MECHANICAL 2 #12 — 13mmC F112 I TO TIME KEEPER'S BOX SYSTEM TITLE NEW RINK ' LEIPCIGER POWER LAYOUT KAMIINKE/R�� DRAWN BY : M.N PROJECT N0. 97309 MTF�LtviAN CHECKED eY : T.H DRAWING No. And P?artners Ine. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 235 eel: (6145-8256'/mills, Ontario(46u s3B say DATE OCT ZVI : S K E—2 . 06/97 SCALE 1:100 I 7EF N ROOF. A-18 600V.30. BB-32/34/36 (15A.3 ) 4 Wp FOR GAS DETECTOR r71 7=7 ST NO.6 CCT.# A-40 L/N Z NEW DU T BANK & NEW TPJ SECONDARY FEEDER SEE NO METER ABINET P C / VE .3 OUT ON THIS 13 BB 50 RE UNLESS B1 E NOTED. EYE WASH ELECTRICAL ICAL A-3s L15 L?L?-Ipv 107 112 (30A) \\��.� RECEMNG SEE LAYOUT ON THIS DRAWING UNLESS 5 108 A-22 6" OTHERWISE NOTED. OA R 0191 i1 STAFF 1.00 ' A-19 HD 1 106 (20A) II WAR BB-40 (30A) � A-23 A-24 as A-25 \ P 6" HD A `=' `=' J�WP A-25 BB —40 HD A 23 \ (30A) FOUNTAIN � EF-3 ON ROOF A —26(20 1/30HP.— 120V. IO W CCT.# A-2 1.25 ROOF. FED PRO SHOP BD 'AAA W R NG MACHINES 110 A-2 105 A-27 F-6 0 G B — 4 B2 0 in ( A) 8.0 F-7 F-9 F-11 F-13 A-27 104 g" A-27 LOBBY g • 102 �WP ' AC-2 ON.,ROOF. DOOR OPERATOR OOR OPERATOR 600V.30.-7A CCT.# F-15 VE T• CCT.# F-15I BB-43/45/47 (15A,3P) 1 1 ' TITLE PART FLOOR PLAN LEIPCIR LIGHTING LAYOUT KAMIN R DRAWN BY MN PROJECT N0. 97309 MTELMM CHECKED BY : TH DRAWING t1o. And Partners Inc. Z/A CONSULTING ENGINEERS 235 N: ILA 6 45-8255�n NiFax:O 416 5-885 DATE S K E-3 ( ) / ( 1N OCT. 06/97 SCALE . 1:100 6" FOR CON ' RE F-412. SEE DETAI STIBULE 103 A r 1.25 RE BB-38 / CORRIDOR CORRIDOR 123 A BB 38 123 1.25 (30A) i A 1.25 BB-52 ' RE A BB-52 1.25 (30A) R 0 ER r i E E MEETING ROOM r 125 EXISTING F/F HEATER (SEE NOTES) TD BE RELOCATED IB t r 127 MEETING ER 0 ER R 0E ARE CORRIDOR DER 126 r A 75 CKW.-600V.30. CONNEC TO BB-52 CCT.# BB-26/28/30 EXISTING CIRCUIT r (C 3P) i ' 10 11 6 12 ' TITLE PART FLOOR PLAN i LEIPCIGER LIGHTING LAYOUT KAMINKEwRA' DRAWN BY : MN PROJECT No. 97309 CHECKED BY : TH DRAWING No. Td(i � � F O( M8` CONSULTING ENGINEERS 46 4458255 / a 46445-785 DATE OCT.06/97 S K E-d SCALE 1:100 1 1B 1C 2A i i D-10 M DN 4R D-12 " i FOR F D-10 M D-24 D-44 D- D-20 iFIGURE SKATING D-20 E2-02 D-8 D-22 MUSIC D-18 iD-8 WF� STAIR N0.4 203 ® 155 D-18 D-26 M D- M D-16 AC-3 60OV, 30 - 7A D-14 D-16 FED FROM "AAA', 15A,3P i -e- 3 i i J 7D)N 4R FOLLOW SPOT 10" i 4 (20A) ®WP 1 iAC-3 ON ROOF. 60OV.30.- 20AMPS. FED FROM "AAA' ALTERNATE PRICE D-26 iTITLE PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR LEIPCIGER LIGHTING & POWER iZ/ KAMINKER DRAWN BY : M.N. PROJECT NO. 97309 And Inc. CHECKED BY : T.H. DRAWING No. ` And ortners In 235 tesmBl Rood, Don Uills, Ontario M38 2V1 S K E—5 CONSULTING ENGINEERS TN: (416)445-8255 / Fox: (416)445-7885 DATE OCT. 7/97 ' SCALE : 1:100 E I P L CIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN 11, And Partners Inc. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ' 235 Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Ontario M36 2V1 /Tel: (416)445-8255/Fax: (416)445-7885 Addition and Renovations OUR PROJECT No. 97309 Garnet B. Rickard Complex Municipality of Clarington October 6, 1997 ' REFRIGERATION ADDENDUM R-2 1 .0 Reference Drawing No. R-801 ' .1 Delete reference to 38mm wood trench cover (Trench p�p� 9 I In detail). .2 Delete reference to 37mm rigid insulation (Trench detail). .3 Insulate all piping in trench and exit locations. 2.0 Reference Drawinq No. R-802 ' .1 Delete reference to all pump numbers. Refer to specifications for pump numbers. ' .2 Change new condenser size to LSCB-135. .3 Plate & Plate head exchange shall be sized to suit total 225 H.P. ' compressor capacity. .4 Provide isolation valves at each equipment. .5 Rink pump (new rink) shall be sized for 125 H.P. operation. 3.0 General .1 Relocated existing evap. condenser to high roof over existing refrigeration ' room temporarily during construction in and around existing ice resurfacer room. Provide supports, repipe water and refrigeration piping to suit. ' .2 Revise compressor model from N4WA to N4WB. LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN and Partners Inc. ' Kris Sharma, P.Eng. C:\WP51\1997\97309.SADD i ADDENDUM NO. 1 ADDITION & RENOVATIONS ' GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX TENDER NO. CL 9727 THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ARCHITECT ' BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES(1991) LIMITED 11 Stanley Court, Unit 1 ' Whitby, Ontario L1N 8P9 Tel: (905)666-5252 Tor: (905)427-4495 Fax: (905)666-5256 E-mail: bba@idirect.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER CARRUTHERS&WALLACE LTD. 90 Eglinton Avenue West, Suite 500 Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 Tel: (416)489-0052 1 Fax: (416)489-8024 E-mail: cwl@cw-eng.com ' MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEER LEIPCIGER KAMINKER MITELMAN AND PARTNERS INC. 235 Lesmill Road ' Don Mills, Ontario Tel: (416)445-8255 Fax: (416)445-7885 E-mail: lkm-eng@the-wire.com Project No. 97100 October 7, 1997 7100-A1-tpgs.wpd • Stanley Court BARRY • BRYAN ARCHITECT O to y • ENGINEER Whitby, Ontario 0N 8P9 (905)666-5252 ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED • Telephone PROJECT MANAGERS Fax(905)666-5256 ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 ' PROJECT: Addition and Renovations to PROJECT NO.: 97100 Garnet B. Rickard Sports Complex Tender No. CL 9727 DATE: October 7, 1997 Municipality of Clarington The following shall constitute Addendum No. 1. Bidders shall include all revisions/clarifications in their Total Stipulated Price. 1. SPECIFICATIONS A. SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .1 Paragraph 8.1 Architectural (Drawing List) add new drawing to list of drawings: (1) A305 Interior Rev. 0 Issued October 2, 1997 ' B. SECTION 00200-TENDER FORM .1 Find attached to this addendum, revised Tender Form marked "Revision 1, Addendum No. V. ' .2 The contractor is to submit his stipulated price on the revised Tender Form "Revision 1, Addendum No. 1). No other Tender Form will be acceptable. C. SECTION 01005- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS .1 Paragraph 1.01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Item E not applicable. .2 Paragraph 9 -Temporary Light And Power Item A: ' (1) Add: Owner's power cannot be used for provision of temporary heat at any time. ' D. SECTION 05500- MISCELLANEOUS METALS .1 2.01 - MATERIALS (1) add Item U: U. Grating to melt pit to be 50 mm deep, hot dip galvanized, steel slats L.L. 12KN/m2 or concentrated load of 15 KN. ' 7jD9A0610.X1.wpd ILI Page 2 E. SECTION 05550- PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING .1 2.06- INSULATED METAL WALL ASSEMBLIES ' (1) Paragraph A, add 6.: ' 6. Provide all cladding and associated components for wall systems Type 1 as shown on the drawings, regardless that these wall type systems do not form part of the pre- engineered structure. (2) Paragraph 4 add at end of sentence: (On drawings referred to as Type 1). .2 3.05 - WALL SYSTEMS INSULATION (1) Paragraph B first sentence delete: bottom and end of siding add: bottom and sides of siding (2) Paragraph G add: and expansion joint flashing ' F. SECTION 07410- METAL WALL CLADDING ' .1 Paragraph D at end of last sentence add: (Referred to on drawings as colour Type 3). G. SECTION 10950- MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES .1 3.02 -SCHEDULE OF ITEMS (1) Delete Item 1. 2. NEW ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A. The following added architectural drawings to be read in conjunction with the Tender Drawings as noted on the drawing cover sheet and as noted in Specification Section 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, 8.0 LIST OF DRAWINGS. ' .1 New Drawing SKA1 PLAN DETAIL .2 New Drawing SKA2 OVERHEAD DETAIL 148D HEAD .3 New Drawing SKA3 OVERHEAD DETAIL 148D JAMB ' .4 New Drawing SKA4 CENTRE COLUMN ELEVATION (AT Yx/11 a) .5 New Drawing SKA5 PITCH POCKET .6 New Drawing SKA6 EXHAUST FAN CURB ' .7 New Drawing SKA7 ROOF ACCESS HATCH .8 New Drawing SKA8 TYPICAL TRENCH DRAIN ' Z1TA0610.#1.wpd BARRY- BRYAN fix-? ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 3 .9 New Drawing SKA9 HEADER TRENCH DRAIN .10 New Drawing SKA10 SECTION DETAIL .11 New Drawing SKA11 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN ' .12 New Drawing D5-2 SECTION DETAIL .13 New Drawing D5-3 SECTION DETAIL ARENA SEATING .14 New Drawing 136-1 SECTION DETAIL .15 New Drawing 136-2 ARENA SLOP SINK DETAIL .16 New Drawing D7-9 SECTION DETAIL .17 New Drawing D7-10 SECTION DETAIL .18 New Drawing D9-1 SECTION DETAIL B. DRAWING A202 - PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN (NEW LOBBY) .1 String of dimension grid 10 to 12A - see new drawing SKA-11. C. DRAWING A203 .1 Delete Detail 15/A601. Add: (refer to) new drawing SKA3. .2 Slope sink at Y/5a refer to new drawing D6-2. D. DRAWING A401 .1 Section 7/A202 read in conjunction with new drawing SKA10. E. DRAWING A402 .1 Section 1/A204 and A203 (between grid lines T&V) detail marker noted as D7-4 to read: SKA7. ' .2 Section 3/A203 detail D7-9 refer to new drawing D7-9. F. DRAWING A403 ' .1 Section 9/A203 detail reference D5-2 see new drawing D5-2. .2 Section 2/A202 detail reference D6-1 refer to new drawing D6-1. .3 Section 2/A202 detail reference D9-1 refer to new drawing D9-1. .4 Section 5/A202 refer for clarifications new drawings D7-10. ' G. DRAWING 501 .1 Detail 9/204 delete and refer to new drawing D5-3. ' .2 Section 2/A202 detail reference D6-1 refer to new drawing D6-1. .3 Section 2/A202 detail reference D9-1 refer to new drawing D9-1. .4 Section 5/A202 refer for clarifications new drawings D7-10. ' H. DRAWING A601 .1 Delete Detail 12/A203 .2 Add: (refer to) new drawing SKA1 ' gA0610.#1.wpd BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 4 3. Structural Addendum No. 1, dated October 7, 1997 attached (30 pages). END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 c� Denis O'Connell DOC/cb Attachments: Section 00200- Tender Form New Drawing SKA1 PLAN DETAIL New Drawing SKA2 OVERHEAD DETAIL 148D HEAD New Drawing SKA3. OVERHEAD DETAIL 148D JAMB tNew Drawing SKA4 CENTRE COLUMN ELEVATION (AT Yx/11 a) New Drawing SKA5 PITCH POCKET New Drawing SKA6 EXHAUST FAN CURB New Drawing SKA7 ROOF ACCESS HATCH New Drawing SKA8 TYPICAL TRENCH DRAIN New Drawing SKA9 HEADER TRENCH DRAIN New Drawing SKA10 SECTION DETAIL New Drawing SKA11 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN New Drawing D5-2 SECTION DETAIL ' New Drawing D5-3 SECTION DETAIL ARENA SEATING New Drawing D6-1 SECTION DETAIL New Drawing D6-2 ARENA SLOP SINK DETAIL New Drawing D7-9 SECTION DETAIL New Drawing D7-10 SECTION DETAIL New Drawing D9-1 SECTION DETAIL 1 Structural Addendum No. 1 1 1 1 r A061011.wpd BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED 1 rDIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 1 R REVISION 1 r ADDENDUM NO. 1 The Office of the Clerk The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3E6 I Re: Additions And Renovations Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex 2440 King Street West Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 1 K5 TENDER NO. CL 9727 Sir: 1.0 We agree for the (Company Name) Stipulated Price stated below to supply all necessary labour, materials, plant, equipment, services and overtime work as may be required for the execution and completion of all work in connection with the above referenced project for the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, in accordance with Instructions to Bidders, The Municipality of Clarington's Standard Terms and Conditions, the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Specifications and Drawings, prepared for that purpose by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, Whitby, Ontario and to the entire satisfaction of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington: STIPULATED PRICE (exclusive of GST) Dollars ($ ) 2.0 Further, to assist you with the necessary information for tax purposes, etc., the stipulated price includes the following: Provincial Sales Tax $ 3.0 Goods and Services Tax (GST) at 7% to be added to the Stipulated Price $ 4.0 The Stipulated Price includes CASH ALLOWANCES in the amount of$114,000.00 (One Hundred and Fourteen Thousand Dollars)as listed in the Instructions to Bidders, and also includes for Electrical Cash Allowance as per Section 16050 Item 1.7. r5.0 We agree the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject prices bid for the work or for any portion of the work. r ' 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 2R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 6.0 We agree that the Owner reserves the right to take any financial benefit, from alternates submitted, into consideration in the evaluation of all tenders and the subsequent award of the Contract. 7.0 We agree to complete all work including necessary overtime work pursuant to this ' Contract in the period required to meet the scheduled completion dates as specified. 8.0 We have received and included for Addenda No. to in the Stipulated Price. 9.0 We submit the following separate prices which are included in the Stipulated Price: (Separate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and installation of two (2) flagpoles as specified in Section 10350 including concrete bases and lightning spikes. $ B. Supply and installation of all foot grilles as specified in Section 12690. $ C. Supply and installation of all planting material as specified in Section 02950. $ 10.0 We submit the following alternate prices which are not included in the Stipulated Price: (Alternate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and install Solid Core Phenolic Toilet Partitions Type 130-TS by Watrous Sales Inc., or approved equal, in lieu of metal toilet partitions specified in Section 10162 $ extra/credit B. Supply and install Tuflex rubber tile flooring in lieu of Mondo ' flooring specified in Section 09671. $ extra/credit C. Cost to enclose second floor viewing area as detailed on Drawing A204 marked alternate price item 9 "C, and as shown on Typical Section (Alternate Price Item) 1/A204. The four additional doors required are to be type NIL, solid wood core doors in P.S. frames. Sizes to be 900 x 2150 An Allowance of$1600 for door hardware is to be included in this alternate. See electrical and mechanical items for this alternate as detailed in Addendum No. 2. $ ' extra/credit 1 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 3R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 D. Hydraulic seed all areas shown on the site plan as sodded, in lieu of sod specified in Section 02935. $ ' extra/credit 11.0 In the event that work extra to that included in the Contract is required, and is authorized in writing by the Owner, the Contractor will add the following percentages to the cost of the work. Overhead Pr it General Contractor's Work Subcontractor's Work 11.1 The owner reserves the right to include or exclude any of the above items in Sections 8 & 9 of this Tender Form. i12.0 We submit the names of subcontractors upon whose tender the stipulated price was based: TRADE FIRM ADDRESS Demolition Excavation and Backfill Asphalt Paving Landscaping Unit Paving ' Reinforcing Steel Concrete Finishing Precast Hollow Core Slabs Masonry Glass Block Miscellaneous Metals Structural Steel Pre-Engineered Building Structure 1 Steel Roof Deck and Floor Deck Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry ' 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 4R REVISION 1 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 TRADE FIRM ADDRESS ' Cabinet Work Damp Proofing 1 Spray Applied Polyurethane Insulation Metal Siding E.P.D.M. Sheet Roofing Metal Flashing and Trim Hollow Metal Doors&Frames Wood Doors Sectional Overhead Doors Rolling Shutters IAluminum Windows and Screens Glass and Glazing Rubber Flooring Resilient Flooring Ceramic Tile and Quarry Tile Drywall and Acoustics Metal Toilet Partitions Foot Grilles Painting Dasherboard Systems 1 Fire Protection(Sprinklers) Amount Included in Tender Price Plumbing(Interior) Amount Included in Tender Price $ ' Plumbing (Exterior) Amount Included in Tender Price r 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 5R REVISION 1 IADDENDUM NO. 1 TRADE FIRM ADDRESS HVAC Amount Included in Tender Price Electrical Amount Included in Tender Price ' Refrigeration Amount Included in Tender Price 13.0 We agree that, when requested by the Consultant, additional work will be performed at following unit prices exclusive of Overhead and Profit which shall cover all charges for labour and materials, supervision, plant and tools. Deletions will be deducted from additions before these unit prices are applied. Credits will be deducted from extras before charges for overhead and profit are added. All work will be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Provincial Sales Tax is included in these unit prices. Goods and Services Tax is not included in these unit prices. Breakdown of all taxes will be submitted later. Unit Prices for Additions and Deletions Nature of Work Additions Deletions 1. Earth Excavation by machine, calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. ' 2. Earth excavation by hand calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. 3. Trenching up to 600 mm deep per cubic metre. 4. Trenching up to 1200 mm deep per cubic metre. ' 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 6R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Nature of Work Additions Deletions ' 5. Trenching over 1200 mm deep per cubic metre. 6. OPSS Granular 'A' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 7. OPSS Granular `B' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 8. Type 'C' Sand Fill, (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 9. Reinforcing Steel, supply and place, per metric tonne. 10. 25 MPa concrete-in-place to walls, footings or piers per cubic metre. ' 11. 35 MPa concrete-in-place to floors per cubic metre. 12. Vertical formwork in place including all accessories and stripping per square metre of face area. 13. Concrete curbs as detailed per lineal metre. 14. Concrete sidewalks, 100 mm thick including sub-grade, compaction and all accessories as specified per cubic metre. NOT APPLICABLE 15. HL6 Asphalt paving, supply, place and ' compact per cubic metre. 16. HL3 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per cubic metre. 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 7R REVISION 1 ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 Nature of Work /additions Deletions 17. Plain concrete block as specified, 90 mm installed, per square metre of wall area: 140 mm 190 mm I 240 mm 290 mm ' 18. Architectural concrete block as specified, 90 mm installed, per square metre of wall area: 140 mm 190 mm 240 mm 290 mm 19. Spray applied polyurethane insulation, installed, per square metre of wall area. 20. Precast concrete curb as specified in Section 02516, supply and install, each: 21. 12 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. ' 22. 20 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. 23. 25 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. 24. #12 copper RW90 installed in conduit ' per metre. 25. Duplex general purpose 15A, 120V receptacle on local circuit within 20 metres, per metre. 14.0 We have carefully examined all the Tender Documents, have visited the Site, and have a clear and comprehensive knowledge of the Work required under this Contract and of all the working conditions and schedule requirements. 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 8R REVISION 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 15.0 We the undersigned agree that this Tender is valid and irrevocable and subject to acceptance by the Owner without notice to us for a period of Sixty (60) days from date of 1 receipt of Tender, and that if notified of award of Contract, we will within ten (10) days of receipt of notification of Acceptance of Tender: a) Furnish to the Owner, in care of the Consultant, copies of insurance policies as required by the Conditions of the Contract. b) Furnish to the Owner a breakdown of the Stipulated Price in such form and detail as required by the Owner for progress payments, taxation and internal accounting purposes. c) Furnish to the Owner, a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond, issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner, each for an amount equalling 100% of the Tender Price to ensure the full and proper completion of the Contract. d) Commence the work forthwith after the receipt of p a letter of intent, contract or Purchase Order or when notified to do so by the Consultant and/or Owner and to execute the work continuously to completion. Time shall be the essence of the Contract and the work shall be completed in accordance with the schedule outlined in the Instructions to Bidders. e) Furnish to the Owner a Clearance Certificate of the Workers' Compensation Board. f) Submit within three (3) days of award of the contract a detailed construction schedule to the Owner for approval. g) Furnish to the Owner a copy of our Corporate Safety Policy. 16.0 Wherever the plural is used herein, the same shall be read and construed as if the singular had been used where the facts and context so requires and as if all necessary grammatical changes had been made. 17.0 Bid Security: Attached to this tender form is a bid deposit in the amount of $200,000.00. I/We the undersigned agree that if I/We withdraw this tender or default in executing a contract or providing the required Performance Security in accordance with the terms of the bid documents, the Owner shall have sustained liquidated damages in the amount equal to the difference between the amount of this bid and the amount for which the Owner legally contracts with another party to perform the work, if the latter amount exceeds the former up to a maximum of$200,000.00 and such amount shall become the property of the Owner. 7100.00200-R1A1.wpd ! DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 9R REVISION 1 ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 18.0 Bonds: Attached to this Tender Form is an agreement to bond in the amount of 100% for Performance, and 100% for Materials and Labour Payment. 19.0 Signature and Seal of Bidder: Street Address Name of Company City or Town Signature of Company Official Postal Code Name and Title Telephone No. Signature of Company Official Date Name and Title SEAL Facsimile No. Tenderer's G.S.T. Registration No. If the bidding firm is a limited company, the company seal must appear on this Bid Form with the signature(s) of the proper signing official(s). 7100-00200-R1A1.wpd PLAM ON 19 'THERMALLY BROKEN ANODIZED PLYWOOD SILL ALUM FRAME WITH SEALED UNITS OF 2-5mm TEMP GLASS CAULK AND SEAL FRAME AT CONC BLOCK TYPICAL 90 WALL TYPE W 1 / ' 2 SPLIT RIB TYPE 2 BOTH SIDES -- 10 __ / AIR BARRIER 190 35 - 35 -- 200x200 NOM GLASS `0 BLOCK WITH REINF PANELS EXPANSION STRIP CAULK AND SEAL 140 CONC BLOCK ' TYPE 2 FACING .I STRUCT COLUMN C/W ANCHOR STRAPS. SEE STRUCT DRAWINGS o o BULLNOSE BLOCK M 590 N ' LINE OF DISPLAY CASE (CASH ALLOWANCE) TITLE: PLAN DETAIL BARRY • BRYAN " DATE: DRWG NO: iASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED •PROJECT MANAGERS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: S ' GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1-10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON - AM10 1 1x BLOCK TYPE 2 - _- _ / W WALL BLOCK TYPE 1 - i =- BLOCK TYPE 2 _ GYPSUM BOARD ON } FURRING. FILL WITH LOOSE INSULATION - BEAM AND PLATE LINTEL i THROUGH WALL FLASHING AND WEEPHOLES 080OC/C PREFINISHED METAL BENT STEEL PLATE CLAD BLOCKING DOOR JAMB - --- INSULATED SECTIONAL _ - OVERHEAD DOOR AND TRACK 1 = _ i i i TITLE: OVERHEAD DOOR 148D BARRY • BRYAN ;�� DATE: DRWG NO: ' HEAD ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED •PROJECT MANAWS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA2 i GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 i - i l ' BENT STEEL PLATE ANCHORED TO WALL INSULATED SECTIONAL AT 600 CjC VERT = OVERHEAD DOOR AND TRACK TITLE' OVERHEAD DOOR 148D BARRY • BRYAN :E%ONEER DATE: DRWG N0: JAMB ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED CR"CT wu+AOMS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA3 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON aeein 1 1 1 ' Y U w O OZm U 1 4-U 1 I 1 N Y ' O w I (Lm 1 Z U i i 1 Y U w OJ U -O 1 COLOURED PLAIN ARCH BLOCK COLOUR AS TYPE 1 RUBBER BASE 1 TITLE: ARCHITECT DATE: DRWG NO: CENTRE COLUMN BARRY • BRYAN .EH0 1 ELEVATION ASSOCIATES (1991) UNITED PRO.ECT m--G Jt$ OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA4 1 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 ' STL COLUMN THROUGH ROOF ' TOP OF BENT COUNTER FLASHING SET INTO PREFIN MTL COUNTER ( FLEXIBLE SEALER FLASHING ' FR40 FLASHING PITCH POCKET AROUND ' STL COLUMN ( �� 'YPCIAL MEMBRANE �) ROOF �/ OCXo QQQs2 Q_��`J_ _ _ oO00 �II 11 II 11 II II II IIIiI 11 II 11,11111 II II II II II II I II11 II II II II II 11 11 „ II 11 11 11 II 11 11 11 II I�,I 1 II 11 II 11 11 It II II II it If 11111 II II II 11 11. 11 II I � ' 1 11 11 11 II I) it 11 II II Ii 11 11 11 II 11 II II II 11 II I II II 41 „ II 11 III�I II If I111f Ilill illll II II 11 II I T 1.11 11 it II Ii 11 II 11 II II II 11 ,I II II II 11 11 11 11 I METAL DECK CLOSURE SECTION NEW STL. COLUMN THRU ROOF PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING ......................................... .......................................... PITCH POCKET AROUND STL. COLUMN PLAN TITLE: PITCH POCKET BARRY • BRYAN : T DATE: DRWG N0: tASSOCIATES (1991) UMITED •PROJECT MM404 S OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA5 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 EXHAUST FAN CURB FLANGE CONT WOOD NAILER FR40 FLASHING _ BY MECHANICAL ao M t TYPICAL MEMBRANE __ _ ROOF PREFABRICATED INSUL = METAL CURB BY MECH M I 1 it IIIII111I, . rl it II �I 11 II il! I�'.IIII (i ♦'I __ :: ^ __ ' CONT MTL ' STL FRAMING SEE STRUCT TITLE: EXHAUST FAN BARRY • BRYAN ARMTECT DATE: DRWG NO: CURB ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED P—mcc,m OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA6 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. ' MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 i 1 1 1 ' ROOF ACCESS HATCH NOTE: ROOF ACCESS HATCH TO HAVE SAFETY BAR 1 PRffIN MET FLASHING 1 FR40 FLASHING L�I - PREFAB INSULATED ^���o 00 'J _ METAL CURB 1I,1; -1 I1 II1: - ' METAL DECK CLOSURE ROOF FRAMING 1 SEE STRUCT 1 i TITLE: ROOF ACCESS BARRY • BRYAN ARCRYECT DATE: DRWG NO: 1 HATCH ASSOCIATES (1991) UMITED •,R"CT MANAGM OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA7 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. ' MUNICIPALITY OF CLARING TON AM10 ' REMOVEABLE GALV 400 STEEL GRATING ALV ANGLE 45x45x6 1 L 5M M ANCHORS 030OC/C leo ° 0 0 a ° w ° N= a N U F ° • w w 150 300 150 le TITLE: TYPICAL TRENCH BARRY • BRYAN ;ARCHTECT DATE: DRWG NO: ' DRAIN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED PROJECT MANAGERS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA8 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. ' MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 ' 125x75x8 GALV ANGLE L.L.V ANCHORED TO CONC SANDWICH PANEL OF PRESSURE TREATED 19 PLYWOOD EACH SIDE OF 38x89 PRESSURE TREATED FRAMING WITH 75 RIGID INSULATION a °o w :_ S E PLIAN CONC HEADER TRENCH FO WI HS _ 100 RIGID INSULATION AROUND TRENCH SLOPE A SLOPE 7. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION REFER TO STRUCTURAL AND REFRIGERATION DRAWINGS TITLE: HEADER TRENCH BARRY • BRYAN ;ARCHTECT DATE: DRWG NO: ' SECTION ASSOCIATES (1991) UMITED MN4^0 $ OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA9- GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 87100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 � O 40 z F- (10 0 1 2 ' I I 1 16455 of 700 5225 5530 7800 2410 5790 5 35 100 2580 2010 3200 2210 5080 I 2 35 0 114 HEADER JNCH ACCESS j REFRIGERATION 'l TOP OF dONC. I ' ELEV. 120.350 1 TITLE: PARTIAL FLOOR BARRY • BRYAN ARCHMCT DATE: DRWG NO: PLAN ASSOCIATES (1991) UNITED .PRO,ECT MMAWM OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA1 1 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=100 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM100 r r r 38 MTL DECK ON FILL TOP 2 COURSES WITH STEEL JOISTS SEE STRUCT CONC. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL r CONC SILL AT JOIST SHOE LOCATIONS SEE STRUCT TOP OF STEEL 23.87 r r r t t STEEL LINTEL. SEE STRUCT ' CONC FILL BLOCK U/S BEAM 23.27 ' REFER TO FRAME SCHEDULE FOR FRAME NOTES r t t tTITLE: SECTION DETAIL BARRY • BRYAN '"Ra"hcr DATE: DRWG NO: ' ASSOCIATES (1991) UNITED •PROJECT MANAOM OCT 1997 PROJECT. ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: D5-2 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX t MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 97100 1=10 D.L.B. AM14 1 2 i PLAM ON 19 400 PLYWOOD SILL _. �z—, ALUM THRESHOLD QT BASE AND FLOOR 2 ROWS OF 200x100x60 ' RECESSED FOOT GRILLE PAYERS ON 60mm SAND SEE STRUCT FOR = FOUNDATION WALL AND SLAB SLAB TO BE DOWELLED WITH (I: 10M BARS AT 40OCfC FLEX FILLER -_- AND SEALANT 50 RIGID PERIMETER _ L INSULATION ! i TITLE: SECTION DETAIL BARRY • BRYAN 'A"TECT DATE: DRWG NO: • ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED •ENvRagcNEoER T MANAGERS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: D6 1 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=1Q Q.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 i i z 1 TYPICAL MEMBRANE ROOFING _00o 0030 11. 11'1111 II II 11 11 If II If fl It Ii II 11 II II 11 I1�11 11 I 11 II 11 11 11 11 11 it II II II II II II II it II II II 11 II II II II I41:1 II 11 11 11 11 11 {{ IV If II If 11 11 11 11 J1, 1 1 II II II I II 11 tI III II 11 II 11 I4 !I 11 VI II 1 V II 11 11 1 II 11 I 11..1 1 1 1 I GYPSUM BOARD TO FOLLOW PROFILE OF DECK AND BE CAULKED (T') NOTE: SEE STRUCT DWGS FOR i BEAM AND ROOF DETAILS 13 GYPSUM BOARD i VAPOUR BARRIER 140 MT STUDS 040 >-< 13 GYPSUM BOARD STEEL ANGLE HANGERS AND CHANNEL 1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC TILE 'T' BAR CEILING I STEEL ANGLE FRAMING i 1 'J' MOULD SEALED DOUBLE GLAZED TYPE 2 PREFINISHED WHITE UNITS OF TEMPERED GLASS i METAL SIDING IN THERMALLY BROKEN ' ANODIZED ALUM FRAMES 1 TITLE• SECTION DETAIL BARRY • BRYAN •uaa.hor DATE: DRWG N0: ' ASSOCIATES (1991) UMITED PROXCT MANS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: D9 1 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 1 2 • SIM ' PREMOULDED FLUTE TYPICAL MEMBRANE FILLER INSULATION ROOF - ---- --- -- -I II tl tl; li it 11 I II II II 11 II II II II Il II II II II II tl II I1 11 II it I _ I L I it II I I I VIII II II ii I1 II 11 II II II II II 11 11 if II II II it II II II 11 II II BEAM AND GUSSET PLATE SEE STRUCT OWSJ SEE STRUCT STL BEAM FRAMING SEE STRUCT IL ' - PREFIN MTL SIDING TYPE 1 ON ANGLE AND 190 CO NC SLK STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME. ' AIR BARRIER = 950 SEE STRUCTURAL OWGS 50 RIGID INSUL ' STL LINTEL _ SEE STRUCT t - - - - - -- - - -- - - -- - - - PREFIN MTL CLOSURE PREFW DRIP FLASHING PREFIN MTL SIDING TYPE 1 ' FACE OF WALL v FRAMING BEYOND TITLE: SECTION DETAIL BARRY • BRYAN ,A�T DATE: DRWG NO: ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED K�CT MANAGERS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA1 O ' GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 1 . 1 380 PAINTED PIPE RAIL CAST INTO CONCRETE j 1 600 800 TO UPP T POURED CAP BEYOND 25 RAD di 1 ga4 POURED CONC CAP DOWELED p FlXEO MAPLE BENOi TO CONC FILLED CONC BLOCK SEAT PER DETAIL WITH 1 O RODS AT 400 C/C S a STAGGERED "n. n o o = 200 DEEP HOLLOW CO E PRECAST UNITS PANN i S NG BETW17EN 190 CONC BLOCK WALLS 140 CONC U\ u BLOCK FILLER 23.67 TOP OF CONC 90 CONC BLOCK TYPE 1 10 AIR SPACE 50 RIGID INSULATION - AIR BARRIER 140 CONC BLOCK .'`• LINTEL BLOCK == PER SCHEDULE _-- 125x 125x8 ' LOOSE ANGLE __ ___ 7nRE RETARDENT TREKIED COLOURED PLAIN CONC =_- AIVO NG BLOCK TYPE 2 IN RECESS 800 90 =_ ' 140 1 TITLE' SECTION DETAIL BARRY • BRYAN :� T DATE: DRwc No: ARENA SEATING ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED •PROJECT MANAGERS OCT 1997 PROJECT. ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: D5—3 ' GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 1 - 1 1 1 = 90 — 140 HOSE BIB SEE MECH - _ SIDES TILED WITH t 50x50 CERAMIC TILE i 0 AS PER SHOWERS i % — i� — = 50x50 CERAMIC = = AS PER SHOWERS 0 — 1 _ i = POURED CONC CURBS _ FACE WITH TILE __ O 190 CONC ,90 — 14p BLOCK WALL 1 _ — FLEXIBLE FILLER FLOOR DRAIN AND CAULK ALL AROUND SEE MECH - 1 _ N SL p $ OP CENTRE LINE = a SINK FLOOR DRAIN SEE MECH WATERPROOF MEMBRANE SETTING BED WITH PLAN ' WIRE MESH ^ 140 50 y TITLE: ARENA SLOP BARRY • BRYAN •ARCMT£CT DATE: DRWG NO: I • SECTION SINK DETAILS ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED 'PRENdNOJEEER CT MANAGERS OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: D6 2 ' GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 1 V EXMnNG SIDING AND ' ROOF ASSEMBLY I ' NEW TYPE 1 , � PROVIDE NEW CS CHANNEL AND SIDING BEYOND— SAG ROD TO SUPPORT CUT END OF SIDING. PROVIDE NEW 'Z' GIRT ' TO ATTACH EXISTING SIDING. ' MAKE GOOD INSULATION PACK %RTH LOOSE INSULA nON lie RFHlNn NEW PREFIN META SIDING FLASHING r -= I _= NEW PREFIN METAL -- TYPICAL MEMBRANE ROOFING BELLOWS FLASHING -- J _= I o ADDITIONAL AIR BARRIER � _ X11; it it �I1�11 II II it II It it it II 11 II -- „' ; TOP OF STEEL 26.47 I TYPICAL PREMANUFACTURED INSULATED CURB AND BLOCKING I I I SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS j l FOR DETAILS OF BEAMS 190 CONIC BLOCK WALL �I NEW 190 CONC BLOCK WALL TO HEAD OF ROLLER SHUTTER AND BEAM SEE STRUCTURAL _TOP OF STEEL 25.87 _ TOP STL LINTEL 25.87 ' I I T REMOVE EXISTING SIDING, INSULATION, AND LINER PANEL I I I I �nE' SECTION DETAIL BARRY • BRYAN ;T DATE: DRWG N0: ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED •PROJECT---s OCT 1997 I I PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT N0: SCALE: CHECKED BY: D7-9 ' GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 1=10 D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM 10 ' TYPICAL, MEMBRANE ROOF 2 FILL FLUTES WITH =_ LOOSE INSULATION =_ -- PREFIN CLOSURE rr rr rr rr rr rr tr rr rr rt tr r, rr rr rr rr rr rr ri rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr tr rr rr rr rr r: rr rr rr rr rr rt rr rr rr rr rr rr _ uuuuiu r r r r r r r r r r r r -- SIM GYPSUM BO TO IMM INTO FLUTES AND STEEL 1Eµ1 FRAMING 13 GYPSUM BOARD FULLY CAU AND SUSPENDED STRUCTURAL VAPOUR BARRIER MEMBERS. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 150 INSULATION 150 MTL STUDS 040OC/C PREFIN METAL SIDING 13 GYPSUM BOARD TYPE 2 STEEL STUD FRAMING PREFIN MTL SIDING TY�2PREFIN MTL FLASHING SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC \,--SUSPENDED A CEiLINGGSUM 'J' MOULD COLOUR-WHITE TILE CEILING LATERAL SUPPORT ' ANGLE CUPS 200x200 GLASS BLOCK TYPE 2 CONC BLOCK -r--GLASS BLOCK BEYOND BULLNOSE BLOCK 10 FLEXIBLE FILL 1 COURSE OF TYP AND SEALANT CAVITY WALL-HALF BLOCK UNITS ONLY 1 SLAB ON GRADE SEE STRUCT / THROUGH WALL FLASHING AND 0 u) i 50 RIGID INSULATION INTERIOR LINE OF FOUNDATION WALL BEYOND CONC FOUNDATION. SEE STRUCT DWGS FOR DETAILS. SECTION DETAIL BARRY - BRYAN AllAlEl DATE: DRWG NO: ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED PR"CIMNUGM OCT 1997 PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: 7- 10 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 97100 N.T.S. D.L.B. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON AM10 ' ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX ' ADDENDUM NO. 1 STRUCTURAL OCTOBER 7, 1997 ' 1. Specifications ' 1.1 Section 03300 1.1.1 Section is reissued in its entirety. ' 1.2 Section 03420 1.2.1 Paragraph 1.02 B; revise Section 04220 "Concrete Unit Masonry"to Section 04200 "Unit ' Masonry". 1.2.2 Paragraph 1.02 B; revise Section 07951 "Sealants and Caulking"to Section 07900 "Sealants". 1.2.3 Paragraph 1.02 D; revise Section 04220 to Section 04200. 9 ' 1.2.4 Paragraph 1.03 C; delete clause 4. 1.2.5 Paragraph 1.04 E clause 1; revise Section 01300 to Division 1. 1.3 Section 05120 ' 1.3.1 Paragraph 1.2 B; add Section 05550 "Pre-Engineered Building". 1.3.2 Paragraph 1.2 B; delete section references Section 09843 and Section 09845. 1.3.3 Add paragraph 2.2 D as follows: "Sliding Bearings: Steel upper sole plate, with stainless steel lower face with#10 mirror finish. Stainless ' steel to bear on pure virgin Teflon surfaced lower pad of reinforced elastomer of smaller dimensions than sole plate, as designed by: Structural Tech Corporation, Sarnia, Ontario Goodco Ltd., Markham, Ontario" 2.0 Drawings 2.1 Drawing S100 ' 2.2 Pre-Engineered Building; revise superimposed Dead Load to 0.5 kPa. ' Page 1 of 3 I I 2.2 Drawi�g S101 2.2.1 Rink SI lab Detail; add non-metallic shake hardener to surface of finished concrete. 2.3 Drawing S200 2.3.1 RevisE layout of trench header along grid 10 to match Architectural. ' 2.3.2 RevisE section 8/S300 as per Sketch SKS300-SK1. 2.3.3 Addsection 9/S300 as per Sketch SKS300-SK2. 2.3.4 Add 1�5 slab over trench header as shown in Sketch SKS200-SK1. 2.3.5 Add 1 0 slab over trench header as shown in Sketch SKS200-SK2. 2.3.6 Add Foundations for storage rooms as shown in Sketches SK200-SK2 and SKS200- ' SK3. 2.3.7 Add t p steel reinforcing to footings R-1 C, R-2A, R-3A, R-4A, R-5A, R-6A, R-7A and R-9, ' 7-25 Longit. and 10-25 Trans. 2.3.8 Add t�p steel reinforcing to footings Z-1 C, Z-2A, ZR-3A, Z-4A, Z-5A, Z-6A, Z-7A and Z-9, 6-20 ongit. and 6-20 Trans. 2.3.9 Provide non-metallic shake hardener to floor of Resurfacer Room 148 including the replacement slab within the existing building. 2.3.10 Remove existing concrete slab at the north-east corner of the existing building and provide new 125 slab and trench drain as shown on architectural. 2.3.11 Remove existing concrete slab at the south-east corner of the existing building and provide new 125 slab and trench drain as shown on architectural. ' 2.3.12 Reinforce caissons as follows: 750 dia. 9-25V, 10 @ 400 circular ties 900 dia. 12-25V, 10 @ 400 circular ties ' 2.4 Drawing 201 2.4.1 Revise plan as shown on Sketch SKS201-SK1. 2.5 Drawing S202 2.5.1 Provide Ceiling Framing over two Storage Rooms as shown on Sketch SKS202-SK1. ' Page 2 of 3 ' 2.6 Drawing S203 ' 2.6.1 Provide lintel, W200x27 + Plate 180x10, across diagonal opening from Resurfacer room to existing building. 2.6.2 Provide lintel, W31 0x31 + Plate 180x10, across opening into existing building adjacent to grid 1. ' 2.7 Drawing S204 2.7.1 Adjacent to grid U-1 1A at the entrance, delete W200 at roof level over door and add lintel at door head. See revised section 15/S302 on Sketch SKS302-SK1. 2.8 Drawing S300 ' 2.8.1 Section 2/S300, add Galvanized angle, 76x76x9.5 with straps, 40x5x200 long @ 300 cc., at corner of slab. ' 2.8.2 Section 5/S300, revise curb to be flush with top of perimeter slab. 2.8.3 Section 8/S300, revise as per Sketch SKS300-SK1. 2.8.4 Add Section 9/S300 as per Sketch SKS300-SK2. 2.9 Drawing S301 ' 2.9.1 Add section F7/S301 as per Sketch SKS301-SK1. 1 2.9.2 Add section F8/S301 as per Sketch SKS301-SK2. 2.9.3 Add section F9/S301 as per Sketch SKS301-SK3. ' 2.10 Drawing S302 2.10.1 Revise Section 15/S302 as per Sketch SKS302-SK1. 2.10.2 Sections 20, 21, 22/S302, add to clip angle, 2-16 dia. Studs x 100 long. Page 3 of 3 BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 PART 1. : GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. 1 B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which Drawings are in imperial units. C. Contractor shall obtain a copy of CSA Standards A23.1, and A23.2, and maintain on site. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Sections Which Specify Concrete Work Performed in Compliance with This Section: Section 02352: Excavated Caissons Section 02630: Concrete Sidewalks ' B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: Section 02200: Earthwork Section 03100: Concrete Formwork ' Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement Section 03420: Precast Prestressed Hallow Core Slabs Section 04200: Unit Masonry Section 05120: Structural Steel I Section 05550: Pre-Engineered Building Section 05320: Steel Floor Deck Section 05500: Metal Fabrications Section 07160: Bituminous Dampproofing Section 07900: Sealants Division 15 and Division 16: Equipment bases, exterior catch basins and manholes and similar work specified for inclusion under mechanical and electrical Work. Division 17: Refrigeration C. Co-operation with Consultant: 1. Before commencing work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. 2. Schedule Work to allow sufficient time and access for Consultant to carry out periodic field review. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except ' where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this Specification in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply ' but are not necessarily repeated in following list. BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 _ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 1. CSA A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. 2. CSA A23.2-94, Methods of Test for Concrete. 3. CAN/CSA-A23.5-M86(R1992), Supplementary Cementing Materials. 4. ACI 117-89, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials, American Concrete Institute. 5. CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. 6. CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. 7. CAN/CGSB-37.2-M88, Emulsified Asphalt, Mineral-Colloid Type, Unfilled,for Dampproofing and Waterproofing and for Roof Coatings. 8. CAN/CGSB-37.3-M89,Application of Emulsified Asphalts for Dampproofing or Waterproofing. 9. CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement. 10. CGSB 37-GP-6Ma, Asphalt, Cutback, Unfilled, for Dampproofing. 11. CGSB 37-GP-12Ma, Application of Unfilled Cutback Asphalt for Dampproofing. 12. Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates - Granular A, B, M and Select Subgrade Material (1988 Edition). 13. Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1212, Material Specification for Hot-Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint Sealing Compound (1983 Edition). 14. ASTM C309-95, Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. B. Tolerances: 1. In accordance with ACI 117; definitions for tolerance terminology and tolerances for formed concrete surfaces are recapitulated in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 2. Difference between elevation of high point and low point in specified area not to exceed: In any bay up to 100 M2[1100 ftl: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm ['/"] In any bay up to 400 m2[4300 ftl: . 25 mm [1"] 3. Straightedge Method: Finish floor slabs to meet following tolerances when measured at 72 :t 12 hours after completion of floor finishing, before shores are removed from formed slabs, by placing a freestanding unleveled straightedge anywhere on slab and allowing it to rest on two high spots. Gap between straightedge placed on two high spots and floor surface not to exceed: 3 m [10 ft.] straightedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm [5/16"] 2 m [6 ft.] straightedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' ' * * ' ' * ' 4 mm [3116"] 4. Finish Rink slab to tolerances specified in paragra . C. Sample of Floor Finishing: 1. Finish an area of floor slab where directed by Consultant to provide sample of finish for approval. 2. Provide new sample area until finish is approved. 3. If liquid membrane curing compound is to be used on Project, determine and ' apply correct quantity required to meet rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer for measured test area. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 3 4. Approved sample will provide standard by which subsequent finishing will be judged and will be incorporated into Work. D. Source Quality Control: 1. Both source quality control, and field quality control specified in article 3.10, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve ' Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3. Inspection and Testing Company shall be certified under CSA Standard A283, Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories, for Category 1 Certification. 4. Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from cash allowance specified in Section 01020. 5. Payment for additional tests (including testing of structure and its performance, and load testing) required by changes of materials or mix design requested by Contractor, and failure of completed Work to meet specified requirements, shall be made at Contractor's expense. ' 6. Perform Work of source quality control in accordance with CSA Standard A23.2 and to include (a) verification that ready-mix supplier is qualified to supply concrete in accordance with Specification. 1 (b) review of proposed concrete mix designs. (c) sampling, inspection, and testing of materials as may be required. 1.04 PROJECT RECORDS A. Concrete Pour Records: Record time, date, delivery slip serial number, and location in building of each concrete pour, and identify related test cylinders. Keep these records on site until Project is completed. t B. Delivery Records: File duplicate copies of concrete delivery slips on which shall be recorded: supplier, serial number of slip, date, truck number, contractor, Project, Class of exposure, cementing materials content, air content, volume in load, and time of first mixing of aggregate, cementing materials and water. 1 C. Record Drawings: 1. Record on a set of Drawings (a) time and date of each pour (b) high and low ambient air temperatures during each pour (c) date of removal of forms in each area (d) founding elevations of all footings (e) variations of foundation Work from that indicated on Drawings. L2. Make record drawings available for Consultant's inspection at all times. BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 4 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit for inspection, material samples of specified mix designs. B. Concrete Mix Designs: 1. Submit concrete mix designs for review; when optimum bulk density of aggregates is specified, provide supporting evidence of compliance with requirements. 2. Review of mix design does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for compliance with Contract Documents. C. Inspection Reports: Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1. Submit written reports of inspection and tests. I 2. Distribute reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 1 copy to Contractor. 3. On concrete cylinder test reports, include: (a) specific location of concrete represented by sample (b) design strength (c) unit weight of sample (d) Class of exposure (e) aggregate size and admixtures incorporated (f) date, hour and temperature at time sample taken (g) percentage air content (h) test strength of cylinder (i) type of failure if test fails to meet specification. D. Joint Location Drawings: 1. Submit drawings showing proposed location of control joints in slab-on- grade, where not shown on Drawings. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: In addition to Cold Weather and Hot Weather Requirements of CSA Standard 1 A23.1, the following shall apply to Work of this Section: 1. Provide protection or heat, or both, so that temperature of concrete at surfaces is maintained at not less than 21°C [70°F] for three days after placing, not less than 10°C [50°F]for the next two days and above freezing for the next two days. 2. Do not permit alternate freezing and thawing for fourteen days after placing. 3. Vent exhaust gases from combustion type heaters to atmosphere outside protection enclosures. 4. Provide protection to maintain concrete continuously moist during curing ' period. 5. For field cured cylinders representing strength development of in-situ concrete, provide same specified hot and cold weather protection for storage BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 5 1 of each concrete p compression specimen as for concrete from which it was p taken, until it is sent to testing laboratory. 6. Do not place concrete when it is raining. Should rain commence during placing, cover freshly placed concrete. 7. Do not place bonded toppings on rough slabs that are less than 15°C[60°F]. 1 8. Do not grout at ambient air temperatures or concrete surface temperatures less than 5°C [40 0F], or when temperature is forecast to fall to less than 5°C [40°F]within 24 hours of grouting. 9. Do not apply sealants at ambient air temperatures or concrete surface temperatures less than 5°C [40°F]. B. Protection: Protect floor slabs, and concrete surfaces exposed to view or on which finishes are to be applied, from grease, oil, and other soil which will affect appearance of concrete, or impair bond of toppings or finish materials. PART 2.: PRODUCTS 2.01 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as part of Tender shall include concrete, and its placing, curing and finishing. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Generally: ' In accordance with Reference Standards. B. Cementing Materials: 1. Portland Cement: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-A5. 2. Cementitious Hydraulic Slag: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-A23.5. C. Fine Aggregate: 1. For slabs-on-grade, fineness modulus of fine aggregate to be between 2.7 and 3.1. 1 D. Coarse Aggregates: 1. 20 mm [3/4"]to 5 mm [No. 4 sieve] except as specified below. 2. For Slabs-on-Grade: (a) Abrasion loss not to exceed 35%. (b) Petrographic number of aggregate not to exceed 125 when tested in accordance with ASTM C295, as conducted by Ministry of Transport ' of Ontario. 3. For Slabs-on-Grade 125 mm [5"] and Thicker: 40 mm [1Y2']to 5 mm [No. 4 sieve]; combine at least two of the single sizes specified in Table 2 Group II of CSA Standard A23.1, one of which is to be 40 mm [1%"], to obtain maximum bulk density (unit weight) and optimum grading, in accordance with an approved procedure. BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 6 4. For Slabs Over Open Web Steel Joists OWSJ and Less: 12 mm [%'] to 5 mm [No. 4 sieve]. E. Admixtures: 1. Conform to Reference Standards for chemical and air-entraining admixtures. ' 2. Provide only admixtures that are free of chlorides. 3. When requested, provide evidence acceptable to Consultant that superplasticizer does not increase shrinkage of concrete. F. Granular Underbed for Slabs-on-Grade: 1. Refer to Section 02200. G. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene membrane, 0.15 mm [6 mil] thick, perforated with 8 mm [5/16"] diameter holes at 150 mm [6"] centres, each way. H. Curing-Sealing Compound: Membrane curing-sealing compound formulated from chlorinated rubber resins, or acrylic emulsion or solvent free for use in occupied buildings, to ASTM C309, type 1; select compound which will not discolour in sunlight for use in such areas. Masterkure CR Clear, by Master Builders Ltd. Florseal WB, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario Sealtight CS309 or Vocomp-20, by W.R. Meadows of Canada Limited. ' I. Floor Hardener: 1. Non-Metallic Hardener: Natural and synthetic materials with Mohs hardness 7 minimum, premixed with Portland cement. Durag Premium, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. Mastercron, by Master Builders Ltd. J. Sealant: 1. Hot-Poured Asphalt: ' For use with bituminous type joint filler: rubberized asphalt compound, to OPSS 1212. Hi-Spec Hot Poured Joint Sealant, by W. R. Meadows of Canada Ltd. Sealz No. 6165 Hot Poured Sealant, by Hydrotech Membrane Corporation. 2. Cold Pored Liquid Neoprene: For use with non-bituminous joint filler. : Gardox, by W. R. Meadows of Canada Ltd. 3. Elastomeric Sealant: For use with non-bituminous type joint filler. (a) Two component polysulphide, or two component polyepoxide ' urethane, in colour selected by Consultant, to CGSB Specification CAN/CGSB-19.24. For horizonal joints: THC 900, by Tremco Ltd. For vertical joints: Dymeric, by Tremco Ltd. (b) Or one part urethane, in colour selected by Consultant, to CAN/CGSB-19.13. r BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 7 4. Sealant in Conjunction with Dampproofing: : Plastic cutback asphalt to CAN/CGSB-37.5. K. Control Joint Filler: 1. For control joints in interior floors, approved semi-rigid joint filler, to protect ' against slab edge breakdown: (a) For sawcuts made with "Soff-Cut®"saw: Loadflex SC Plus, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. Euco 700, by The Euclid Chemical Company, Rexdale, Ontario. (b) For other sawcuts and joints: : Loadflex, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. ' 2. For control joints in exterior floors left exposed. : Elastomeric sealant as specified in above sub-paragraph 2.2.J.1 L. Curing Blanket: Amoco Propex#4551, white colour, by Amoco Propex, Hawkesbury, Ontario. 2.03 CONCRETE MIXES A. Concrete: 1. Ready mix,with 28 day compressive strength as indicated on Drawings, and i in specifications. 2. Air dry unit weight: minimum 2300 kg/m3. [145 lbs./ft3] adjusted proportionally for maximum air content Listed in CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 15, Table 9. 3. Design concrete mix in conformance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 16, Table 11 (Alternative 1) and Clause 15, Tables 7, 8 and 9, and as follows. Provide concrete meeting water/cementing materials ratio and air content of Table 8 in accordance with Class of exposure specified in following sub- s paragraphs, and minimum strength specified on Drawings. Note that concrete designed in accordance with water/cementing materials ratio of Table 8 may yield strength exceeding minimum strength specified on Drawings. (a) Class of exposure C-1 with 25 percent Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag: for parking garage floors, and walls, balustrades and columns adjacent thereto. Conform to the additional requirements of CSA Standard S413, Parking Structures,Clause 6.1. (b) Class of exposure C-2 with 25 percent Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag: for pavements, sidewalks, curbs and gutters. (c) Class of exposure F-2 with 25 percent Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag: for basement walls and basement slabs, i and for exposed exterior beams, columns, walls and slabs. (d) Slabs-on-Grade: (i) Use type 20 Portland cement, or replace 35 percent type 10 Portland cement with cementitious hydraulic slag. (ii) When mean daily temperature exceeds 25°C [77°F] at time of placement, replace 25 percent of type 20 cement, or 50 percent of type 10 cement,with cementitious hydraulic slag. (iii) Use water/cementing materials ratio 0.50 maximum. (iv). Use aggregates specified in paragraphs 2.2.0 and 2.2.D (v) Cementing materials content 285 kg/M3 [480 Ib./yd3]. i BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 8 (vi) Modulus of rupture 3.5 MPa [510 psi] average, 3.0 MPa [435 psi] minimum. (vii) Slump at delivery, before addition of superplasticizer, 50 mm [2"]; add superplasticizer, not water, to bring slump to level acceptable to floor finisher for placement. (e) Interior Concrete, other than specified above, and not exposed to freezing and thawing or the application of deicing chemicals: Select water/cementing materials ratio and cementing materials content on basis of strength, workability and finishing requirements. (f) Rink Slab: Water/cementing materials ratio: 0.45 max. Cementing Materials Content: 325 kg/cu.m minimum. Slump at delivery, before addition of superplasticizer: 80mm. Slump at point of discharge in slab, after addition of superplasticizer: 125 mm. 1 Nominal size course aggregate: 20 mm. Total air content: 5.5%, + or- 1.5%. When mean daily temperature exceeds 18 degree C at time of placement, replace 25% of Portland Cement with cementitious hydraulic slag. This mix is expected to produce a 28 day strength of 32 mPa. ' minimum. Bring extra superplasticizer to site to permit additional dosage, if necessary. 4. Floor Hardeners: Confirm that concrete mix contains only materials compatible with floor hardener. 5. Caissons: Provide 150 mm [6"] slump concrete for caissons. 6. Submit evidence, and material samples if requested, acceptable to Inspection and Testing Company to verify that proposed concrete mix design will produce specified quality of concrete. B. Admixtures: 1. Chemical Admixture: Incorporate water-reducing admixture, type WN, in all concrete. 2. Air Entraining Agent: ' Incorporate air-entraining agent in addition to chemical admixture in concrete of relevant Class of exposure, in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 15, Table 9. 3. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride in concrete. C. Concrete Toppings: 1. Provide topping with minimum 28 day compressive strength of 30 MPa. D. Grout: ' 1. Dry Pack Grout Under Steel Plates and Where Grout Thickness Does Not Exceed 75 mm [3"]: BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 9 Mix one part Portland cement to two parts concrete sand that conforms to CSA Standard A23.1,with only sufficient water that mix will retain its shape when made into ball by hand. 2. Dry Pack Grout for Underpinning and Where Grout Thickness Equals or Exceeds 75 mm [Y]: Mix one part Portland cement, one and one-half (1'/2) parts concrete sand and two parts of 10 mm [3/8"] pea gravel, with only sufficient water that mix will retain its shape when made into ball by hand. E. Premixed Grout: Mix with water in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Non-Shrink Metallic: Embeco 636 Grout, by Master Builders Ltd. Ferrogrout 939 Premix, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario 2. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic: V-3 Grout, by W.R. Meadows of Canada Limited. Masterflow 713 Grout, by Master Builders Ltd. M-Bed Standard Premix, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. 1 3. Flowable Grout: Non-metallic shrinkage compensating: M-Bed Superflow, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. Masterflow 713, by Master Builders Ltd. In-Pakt Pre-Mix, by C.C. Chemicals Limited PART 3.: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Confirm that subgrade of compacted fill conforms to requirements specified for backfilling before placing slab underbed. B. Confirm that surfaces on which concrete is to be placed are free of frost and water ' before placing. C. Confirm that reinforcement, dowels, control joints, inserts and all other built-in Work are in place and secured before placing concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR SLABS-ON-GRADE A. Granular Underbed: 1. Obtain Geotechnical Consultant's written confirmation that prepared subgrade is acceptable for placement of granular underbed. ' 2. Place granular underbed over entire area of building and proof roll. 3. Obtain Geotechnical Consultant's confirmation that thickness, elevation and proof rolling of granular underbed are acceptable. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 10 B. Vapour Barrier: 1. Place perforated polyethylene membrane specified in paragraph 2.2.G, on top of prepared granular underbed, lap sides and end joints 150 mm [6"], and "shingle" laps in direction of concrete placing. C. Remove foreign materials from underbed and forms before placing concrete. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notification: Notify Consultant at least 24 hours before commencing to place concrete, and 24 hours before wall forms are closed in. Regardless of any requirement of Reference Standards to inspect all of the work prior to placing concrete, field review of construction will be in accordance with Sampling Program. B. Beams, Girders, Columns: Place beams, girders, brackets, column capitals and haunches monolithically with floor system. C. Concrete Placed over Open Web Steel Joists: Transport and spread concrete over joist construction in a manner to prevent ' lateral deflection and twisting of joists. D. Sloping Slabs and Other Sloping Surfaces: Commence concrete placement at bottom of sloping surfaces. E. Rink Floor Slab 1. Place rink slab only after building has been closed and made water tight. 2. Place skim slab to the following tolerances: 3 m straightedge................................8mm 2 m. straightedge...............................4mm Be aware that variation in level of skim slab will adversely affect the concrete cover over rink slab pipes and welded wire mesh, both of which are critical dimensions for proper performance of rink slab. Use laser to determine surface elevations while placing concrete for both skim slab and rink slab. 3. Submit to Consultant, elevation surrey of skim slab surface, and correct areas that do not meet specifications, before proceeding with rink slab. 4. Wire slab bars to special chairs designed to carry cooling pipes and reinforcement. 5. After reinforcing bars have been placed, provide moveable sheets of plywood placed over the chairs, to act as working platform for trades placing piping and welded wire mesh reinforcement. ' 6. Take special care not to walk on, or exert any forces on piping. 7. Take special care to maintain specified cover to welded wire mesh. Then tie wires down, and do not allow them to encroach into cover. Reverse alternate rows of sheets of mesh, so that at laps there are three thicknesses of wire. r At corners of sheets of mesh, cut out extra layers of overlapping mesh, so that only two sheets overlap. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 _ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 11 i 8. Verify that piping has been pressure tested for leaks before commencing concrete placement. 9. Circulate cool municipal water through the piping during entire concrete placement. Do not re-circulate water. 10. Provide concrete mix for rink slab as specified under paragraphs 2.3, ' "Concrete Mixes". A representative from the concrete supplier must be present during the rink slab pour. 11. Pump concrete for rink slabs. 12. Consider first concrete from first truck, as trial. Deposit in location within building other than rink slab, or in trial slab in prepared area outside building. If slump at end of pump line does not meet specifications, adjust superplasticizer dosage at truck. Remove trial slab from building site, on ' completion. 13. Do not add water to concrete mix on site. 14. Place concrete in 3000 mm wide strips running transversely across the rink, in accordance with details on drawings. 15. Vibrate concrete with small pencil vibrators. Do not over vibrate (over vibration may cause floatation of pipes). Provide at least two spare vibrators for use in case of equipment breakdown. 16. Immediately prior to casting each new strip, re-vibrate edges of adjacent previous strip. i 17. Apply non-metallic hardener in accordance with suppliers recommendation at a rate of not less than 500 kg per 100 sq.m. Placement of hardener shall begin in proper time to ensure a bond. 18. Finish to "Flat"floor finishing tolerance classification of F-number system, in ' accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1, clause 22.1.3, and Table 16. 19. Finish surface to hard dense steel trowel finish free, from blemishes, and of uniform appearance. ' 20. Cure by diking rink slab perimeter and ponding with 10 mm minimum depth of water for seven days minimum.. 21. Remove dikes and water on completion of curing and keep traffic off slab until concrete has reached specified strength, as determined by field cured cylinders. 3.04 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Floor, Stair Treads, and Other Slab Surfaces: 1. Perform finishing operations on plastic concrete surfaces in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 22, and as specified herein. 2. Refer to Drawings, Schedules, and other Sections of Specification, for required finishes and concrete toppings. ' 3. Verify with those responsible for Work of other Sections,that proposed finish is satisfactory for application of their materials. 4. Finish floors to match approved sample. ' 5. Screed surface to an even, level, or sloped surface, to elevations indicated on Drawings or required for specified finishes and concrete toppings. 6. Tile: ' Screed slab to level below finished floor necessary to accommodate finish material or topping. For bonded concrete topping, wire broom surface in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 22.6.3. For tile, wire broom surface to texture approved by tile trade. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 12 7. Covered or Painted Floor Surfaces: ' Provide smooth steel trowelled surface, free from ridges, trowel marks or undulations, for floors that are to be painted, or to receive permanent architectural covering, such as carpet,wood, resilient flooring, sheet flooring, and fluid or trowel applied flooring. 1 8. Exposed Floor Surfaces: Provide hard, smooth, dense, steel trowelled surface, free from blemishes, and of uniform appearance. 9. Non-Slip Floor Surfaces: Provide swirl trowel finish of texture acceptable to Consultant. 10. Hardened Floor Finish: (a) Apply premixed material specified in paragraph 2.2.1, prepackaged hardener, to total of 5 kg/m2[1 Ib/ftJ of floor surface. (b) Apply in two shakes, of half total specified amount in each shake; the second shake at right angles to the first. (c) Finish as specified for "Exposed Floor Surfaces", sub-paragraph 3.4.A.8 . (d) Follow manufacturer's special finishing instructions if concrete is air entrained. B. Control Joints In Slabs-On-Grade: ' 1. Sawcut control joints along column grid lines and additionally so that spacing does not exceed 30 times slab thickness, except where concrete mix incorporates 40 mm [1'/z'] aggregate proportioned to provide maximum bulk density in accordance with paragraph 2.2.D.3, sawcut so that spacing does not exceed 40 times slab thickness. 2. Sawcut before slab temperature starts to fall but commence within 18 hours ' of placement. 3. For slabs placed in longitudinal strips, sawcut transversely in sequence at half, then quarter, then eighth points. 4. Use 4 mm [3/16"] diamond tipped saw blades. 5. Sawcut unreinforced slabs to a depth of 0.25 slab thickness, fibre reinforced slabs to 0.33 slab thickness. ' C. Joint Filler in Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: 1. For floors which will be covered with finish materials which conceal joint: clean residue from floor and joint, fill with latex-sand-cement mortar worked 1 into joint, or place fine silica sand in bottom of joint and fill top 12 mm [Y2'] of joint with specified control joint filler to flush top with surface; do not overfill. 2. For floors exposed in the finished building, prepare and fill joint in accordance with following sub-paragraphs. (a) Do not fill joints until as long as possible after placing slab, but in no case less than 90 days. (b) Arrange for representative of sealant manufacturer to be present for a period of time at commencement of work to verify that proper procedures are being employed. (c) Clean sawcut residue from floor. (d) Clean residue from joint by power washing with 8 MPa [1200 psi] water jet and let dry. (e) Install polyethylene backer rod, of diameter 25 percent greater than joint width,flush with top of floor, to exclude dirt. i BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 13 (f) Install joint filler to thoroughly dry surfaces only, at ambient air ' temperatures above 5°C [40°F] (g) Keep off floor, construction traffic which may erode concrete at edges of sawcuts. (h) Immediately prior to filling joint, depress backer rod to bottom of joint and fill with control joint filler specified in paragraph 2.2.K; do not overfill. (i) Cut off any overpour of filler on adjacent slab surface after filler has ' hardened. (j) Immediately prior to handover of building, re-examine joint for separation of filler from slab. Clean separations with compressed air ' and fill. D. Formed Surfaces: 1. Treat formed surfaces in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clauses ' 24.1 and 24.2, and as additionally specified herein. 2. Provide"Smooth-Rubbed Finish" in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 24.3.4.2, for formed concrete surfaces which will be exposed to view ' in building and left unpainted. 3. Finish vertical surfaces to receive waterproofing membrane smooth with no ridges or depressions. ' 4. Finish surfaces to receive a hot-applied rubberized asphalt membrane smooth with no ridges or depressions, using "Sack-Rubbed Finish" in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 24.3.4.4. Clean surfaces of ' dust, oil, grease, salt, and loose or spalled material. Repair any honeycombed areas. Remove projecting mortar or concrete fins. 5. Cleaning out of cracks, and filling of holes, cracks and honeycombing at surfaces to be chemical waterproofed is specified under Work of Section ' 07122. 6. Obtain Consultant's approval of exposed concrete. Regrind or otherwise correct surfaces Consultant has not approved, and to his satisfaction. ' 7. Plugs at Recessed Ties: Clean tie holes to remove all foreign matter. Coat plugs by dipping in adhesive and insert in hole. ' Remove excess adhesive immediately with thinner which will not stain concrete, as recommended by manufacturer. 8. Elastomeric Membrane: ' Provide light sandblast finish to vertical surfaces, where fluid elastomeric waterproofing membrane turns up vertical surface. E. Curb Edging: Finish external corners of curbs rounded and smooth. F. Stair Tread Non-Slip Inserts: 1. Install one non-slip insert specified, at each tread and landing; place 40 mm [1Y2']from edge of nosings and extend for full width of nosings except for 80 mm [3"] at each end. 2. Set inserts in prepared grooves, secured with waterproof adhesive and with top set 1 mm [0.04"] above treads. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 14 ' 3.05 CURING AND SEALING ' A. Cure concrete in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 21 and as specified herein. 1 B. Curing Compound Method: 1. Use curing and sealing compound specified in paragraph 2.2.H except: (a) On surfaces to receive epoxy or similar paint finish. (b) On surfaces to which architectural finishes will be adhered, the adhesives for which are incompatible with the curing compound. (c) Air-entrained concrete for exterior slabs and sidewalks placed between October 1 and April 1. 2. Select acrylic water compound except that if ambient conditions extend drying time unduly and if area is well ventilated and unoccupied by other workers, solvent based compound may be used. ' 3. Apply curing and sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, increasing application rate as necessary to cover surface completely. C. Plastic Film Method: Where curing compound method cannot be used, cure finished floor surfaces not exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals as follows: 1. Cover with 0.102 mm [4 mil] thick polyethylene sheets. 2. Lap edges 100 mm [4"] minimum and seal laps. 3. Leave in place for the "Basic Curing Period" in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1 Clause 21.1.2, but in no case for less than 3 days, and not less than 7 days for exposed warehouse and industrial floor surfaces. ' D. Curing Blanket or Wet Burlap Method: For parking garage floors; exterior sidewalks, pavements and curbs; and other finished concrete surfaces that will be exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals: 1. Cover with curing blanket specified in paragraph 2.2.0, or wet burlap overlaid with 0.102 mm [4 mil] thick polyethylene, and maintain in place for the "Additional Curing for Durability" period in accordance with CSA Standard ' A23.1 Clause 21.1.3, but in no case for less than 7 days. 2. Wet blanket or burlap regularly to maintain in moist condition. Do not allow to dry out. 3.06 GROUTING FOR STEEL MEMBERS A. Provide and place grout under column base and beam bearing plates. Co-operate with other trades that supply and set plates. B. Dampen concrete surfaces immediately before installing grout. C. Install grout in a manner to ensure positive bearing of full area of steel plate. D. Use non-shrink and shrinkage-compensating grouts only when grout will be contained against expansion and self- disintegration. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 15 E. Slope grout beyond edge of plate at 45 degrees. F. Provide same environmental protection and curing as specified for concrete. G. Do not use flowable grout at beam bearing plates unless otherwise indicated, or 1 approved by Consultant. 3.07 CAULKING A. Caulk: 1. Joints exposed to view in walls and slabs with elastomeric sealant specified in sub-paragraph 2.02 J 3, in colour selected by Consultant. 2. Joints not exposed to view in walls with cold poured liquid neoprene sealant specified in sub-paragraph 2.02 J 2 . 3. Joints not exposed to view in slabs with hot poured asphalt specified in sub- paragraph 2.02 J 1, or cold poured liquid neoprene sealant specified in sub- paragraph 2.02 J 2 . B. Apply sealant to thoroughly dry surfaces only, at ambient air temperatures above 5°C [40°F]. C. Confirm that preformed joint filler and backer rod are compatible with sealant. D. Caulk control joints in slab-on-grade in accordance with paragraph 3.4.6. E. Caulk other joints in accordance with following: 1. Do not commence joint preparation until concrete is at least 28 days old. 2. Thoroughly clean sides of joints with mason's router, or power saw, equipped with double blade where necessary to suit joint width. 3. Blow clean.with compressed air with oil trap on line, or vacuum clean. 4. Install backer rod of diameter 25 percent greater than joint width, and of type recommended by sealant manufacturer to be compatible with sealant. Locate backer rod to provide for sealant depth of one-half joint width, but not less than 12 mm [%']. 1 5. Prime joint if required, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company, when appointed as specified for Source Quality Control in paragraph 1.3.D, shall perform sampling, inspection and testing of concrete Work at site. B. Perform sampling, inspection and testing in accordance with CSA Standard A23.2, and to include: 1. Making of standard slump tests. 2. Verification of air content of air-entrained concrete. (a) For Class of exposure F-1, C-1 and C-2, test at frequency in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1 Clause 17.4.1.1. (b) Make first test before placing any concrete. (c) After stable air content has been established, frequency of tests will 1 be determined by Consultant. BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 16 (d) For other Classes of exposure, test at time of obtaining strength test specimens. C. Inspection for Tolerances: 1. Confirm that concrete work meets tolerance requirements specified in paragraph 1.3.2. 2. Use the elevation survey records of elevations of soffit form surfaces and finished concrete surfaces specified in Section 03100 and this Section as i basis for judging compliance. 3. Use approved aluminum straightedge to judge compliance with specified slab finish tolerances, except use dipstick equipment where F-number tolerance is specified. D. Slabs-on-Grade: 1. Monitor on a random basis acceptable to Consultant, that slab is being sawcut before slab temperature starts to fall. 2. Observe application of curing compound to sample slab, recording rate of application. 3.09 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances and marked and disfigured surfaces that cannot be repaired by approved methods will be considered defective work performed by this Section. B. Replace or modify concrete that is out of place, or does not conform to lines, detail or grade as directed by Consultant. C. Replace or repair defectively placed or finished concrete as directed by Consultant. D. Testing and replacement of deficient concrete in place: 1. Contractor shall pay for additional testing, design, and related expenses if concrete has proven to be deficient. 2. Contractor shall replace or strengthen deficient concrete work as directed by ' Consultant, and pay for all testing and related expenses for replaced work until approved by Consultant. 3.10 CLEANING UP A. Remove from building site excess and waste materials, mock-up panels, test areas, and debris resulting from Work of this Section. Leave premises in a condition acceptable to Consultant before completion of work. -- End of Section -- 1 9 I i I J-1 11 1 I ' II --------- ------------- I I ' I X C � m . I / I . X I Nil 125 SLAB 10®200 TOP ------- ----I --————-- i I -------- �— ---- --- ----- I — i -------� I I +I IT _ I I c,T I NC it ' — I LI �I + PART FOUNDATION PLAN SCALE 1:100 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. pFESS, PROJECT: DRAWN: R.P.F. .0�`` °"`� ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS 3'" °'23O �� GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. ,� P.SANDFORD MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 ��0 or / Carrut hers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Engineers SKS200-SK1 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. West. Suite 500. DATED TO DE VALE Toronto. Ontario M4R 2E4 1 Cq) 1500 GR. BM. 350 x 1500 - --1 i ---_-_ GRADE BM.1°b x 1500L-- �T REINF. 2-25 T&B S301 I I 100300 TIES I L- 100300 H.E.F. 9 1 E - - - - - - i S300 x I o M ^ I W150x22 m I >; zi k- J 1 I I � 150 SLAB x 150200BOTT. o LO I n I � m I c� WOOD PLANK I r SEE ARCH. S 8 I I x s3oo I I °� M PART FOUNDATION PLAN SCALE 1:100 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PROJECT: PRAWN: R.P.F. OPI.SANDFORED ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS CHECKEO: P.G.S. GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Engineers SKS200-SK2 SEAL MUST K SIGNED AND 90 Eg inton Ave. West, Suits 500. DATED 70--K vALID Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 1B 1C FTG. 2000 x 3600 x 1000 DP — REINF, 10-30 BEW 7-25 LONGIT. TOP oQ 10-25 TRANS. TOP ,tipp DETAIL E/S300 + o U/S FTG. EL. 116.900 Op 0 g� o�P�op I I 4 I 0 o I 1 I � I i I I Fy 0'� I t I r GR. BM. 350 x 1500 GR. BM 350 x 1500 R I _ –J GRADE BM.ftx 1500 L_L �o REINF. 2-25 T&B 10 0300 TIES I I X 100300 H.E.F. – M Op Q� +4t���.�h .�lb- G. F9 p 1000 x 1 00 x 350 DP. F --1 PQ RLIN116-10 B.E.W. L –J r– To U/x 0- o I GRADE BEAM L x 0 M 0] 1 O PART FOUNDA'DON PLAN SCALE 1:100 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. � PROJECT: DRAWN: R.P.F. ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. MUNICIPAUTY OF CLARINGTON SOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Engineers SKS200-SK3 SEAL MUST K SIGNED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. West, Suite 900, DATED TO K VALID Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 10 10A 11A F9 F8 5301 5301 ------- ------ -- - R r 53D0 � , I F8 x I S301 �1 I m ��yo v I Q• � h I L •e-���' o`^o• I I VI \ I I- `- —J 1 x i I Lo I o Lo I ' I m °F°�o•oo I � 01 i_ T I I L I — 5301 I I O 1 II 1 1 I I I I Q I ICI 11 --�� - ' F5 I I Lo o , rn S301 F2 I s I csn� I PART FOUNDATION PLAN SCALE 1:100 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. , v4OFESSi PROJECT: PRAWN: R.P.F. ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS — 3 °'2'° GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. P.SANDFORD a MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 0 'Aer or Co Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Engineers 0�-SlC1 SEAL MUST K SIGNED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. west, Suite 500, S1C KS2S2 DATED TO K VAUD Toronto. Ontario M4R 2E4 1B 1C R 350 WSJ -Wtotal = 7.4 kPo CONT. L 76x76x6 5 WSJ Wtot I = ;4WF5-o 38 C MPOSITE STEEL DECK Wtota 2.5 kPo 350 OWSJ Wtotol = o I TOP OF STEE 'JOIST 350 OWSJ AT EL. 123.7 5 total =/.4 S - CONT. PLATE 100x6 + 160 STUDS x 100 LG. 0 400 C/C 9 10 350 OWSJ p R Wtotol = 7.j kPa CONT. L 7gg306x W 5 SJ Wtotal = 7. kPo 38 COMPOSITE STEEL DECK Wtotol = 2.5 kPo 350 OWSJ Wtotal = kPo TOP 0 STEEL JOIST AT EL. 123.775 350 QWSJ Wtotal = 4 kP CONT. PLATE 100 x 6 + 160 STUDS x 100 LG. 0 400 C/C STORAGE RM. CEILING FRAMING PLAN SCALE 1:100 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. otPROJECT: DRAWN: R.P.F. ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE. OCT. 6/97 Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structurd Engineer SKS202-SK1 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED ANp 90 Tg1inton Ave. West. Suite 500, L L DATED TO K VALID Toronto, Ontorio M4R 2E4 2LS— 51 x 51 x 6.4 GALV. + STRAPS 40 x 5 x 200 I.G. 0 300 c/c ('6�909 000 %% CF o h o'ITS 0 00 0 0 ul) 0 Z Jx A LAJ 100300 HEF 100300 VEF 100300 TEW 200 200 8 SCALE 1 20 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. VW ES PROJECT:ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS DRAWN: R.P.F. 5250 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. P.SANDFORD MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 or Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Engineers SK300-SK1 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND 90 E linton Ave. West, Suite 500. DATED TO BE VALID Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 I i 1 1 1 a ° BEAM 350 x 850 3-25 T&B 100300 TIES SEE DETAIL 8/S300 100300 HEF CONT. GALV. L 152 x 102 x 10 1'.1 0 ° o $ ° mr i REINF.. SEE 8/S300 200 9 S300 SCALE 1 20 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PROJECT: PRAWN: R.P.F. o egpFES ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS 9525 O % GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. N c3 P.SANDFORD MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 or Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Enginssrs 13K300-SK2 SEAL wusT SIGNED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. West, Suite 500, DATED TO K VALID Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 2-15 CONT. T&B EL.121-15 x� °.0 0 00 • 00 000 0 O O $ 0 0 $ o 4 10®300 DOWELS a ' °o ELEVATION STEPS SEE PLAN 190 500 rF 7 S30 SCALE 1:20 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 0", PROJECT: DRAWN: R.P.F. ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Engineers SK01_SK1 SEJ1t 11U5T BE SN:NED ANO 90 E9linton Ave, West. Suite 500. DATED TO BE VALE Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 N W Q EL.121.15 _ - 2-20 CONT. T&B 190 v 1-15 CONT. 0008 d o-0 6 4 .1 a a ° d ° 100300 0 DOWELS ° a 0 d d d ELEV. VARIES �— SEE PLANS 100 350 100 (�F8 530 1 SCALE 1:20 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PROJECT: PRAWN: R.P.F. �OfESS,q�, ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS ��c '—ta5250 �i CHECKED: P.G.S. H GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX P.SANDFORp MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 �4'10' Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structurol Engineers SKS30,1 -SK2 SEAL MUST BE SIGHED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. West. Suite 500. 1�r7�7 �•+" DATED TO BE VALID Toronto, Ontorio M4R 2E4 i 1-15 CONT. 100300 DOWELS EL.121-15 CONT. GALV. L )L 76 x S + _ 40 x 5 x 200 LG. 00 0°$ STRAP ANCHORS 300 C C d a 2-20 CONT. T&B G D d a a 100300 a DOWELS I e 0e 0 O a N ELEV. VARIES SEE PLANS t 100 350 100 rF 9 S30 SCALE 1:20 THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PROJECT: Si a oFES ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS DRAWN; R.P.F. 95250 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. P,SANDFORD �, MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 0 or Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. Consulting Structural Engineers SKS301-SK3 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. West, Suite 500, DATED 10 BE VALID Toronto, Ontor�o M4R 2E4 CONT. L � rrrr TOP OP & BOTTOM L76x76x6.4 VERTICALS ® BRACKETS BRACKETS AT BEAM LOCATIONS & AT ENDS 76 x L 7676x6.4 rl 5 5302 SCALE 1:20 1 t 1 t THIS DRAWING TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. on.AND PROJECT: ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS DRAWN: R.P.F. GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX CHECKED: P.G.S. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DATE: OCT. 6/97 Carruthers & Wallace Limited DRAWING NO. ' Consulting Structural Engineers SKS302-SK1 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND 90 Eglinton Ave. West, Suite 500, DATED TO BE vAuD Toronto, Ontario M4R 2E4 1 ADDITION & RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 DIVISION SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES 00 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Instructions to Bidders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Appendix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 00200 Tender Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 00300 General Conditions 1 00400 Supplementary General Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 01 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 01005 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 01100 Special Project Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 02 SITE WORK 02050 Demolition and Removals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 02200 Excavating, Backfilling and Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 02352 Excavated Caissons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 02400 Asphalt Paving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 02485 Hydraulic Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ' 02509 Unit Paving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 02514 Concrete Sidewalks 3 02516 Concrete Curbs and Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 02935 Sodding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 02950 Planting 8 03 CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 03200 Concrete Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 5 03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 16 03420 Precast Prestressed Hollow-Core Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 03555 Cementitious Underlayment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 04 MASONRY i04200 Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 04205 Glass Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7100-TBLC.wpd ADDITION & RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SPECIFICATIONS ' TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 DIVISION SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES 05 METALS 05120 Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 05210 Steel Joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 05310 Steel Roof Deck . : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6 05320 Steel Floor Deck 6 05500 Miscellaneous Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 05550 Pre-Engineered Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS ' 06100 Rough Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 06200 Finish Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 06410 Cabinet Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07160 Bituminous Dampproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 07195 Air Barrier . 5 07200 Building Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ' 07218 Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 07270 Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals 3 07410 Metal Wall Cladding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 07530 Roofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07620 Metal Flashing and Trim 5 07800 Roof Specialties and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 07900 Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames . . . . 5 08120 Aluminum Windows, Doors, Frames and Screens . . . . . . . . . . 7 08210 Wood Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 08343 Rolling Shutters 3 08346 Rolling Metal Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ' 08710 Finishing Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 08800 Glass and Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7100-TBLC.wpd ADDITION & RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 DIVISION -,SECTION TITLE NO, OF PAGES 09 FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Wallboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 09310 Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 09330 Quarry Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 09500 Acoustical Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 09660 Resilient Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 09670 Rubber Floor Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 09900 Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 010 SPECIALTIES 10162 Metal Toilet Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 10350 Flagpoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ' 10800 Washroom Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 10950 Miscellaneous Specialties . . . . . . . 2 ' 012 12690 Foot Grilles and Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 013 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13075 Low Emissivity Ceiling Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 13180 Dasherboard Systems 12 ' 015 MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 15240 Sound and Vibration Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 15250 Mechanical Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 15330 Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 15400 Inside Plumbing and Drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Plumbing Fixture List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15490 Outside Plumbing and Drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 15850 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 7100-TBLC.wpd iADDITION & RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX ' THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SPECIFICATIONS ' TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 DIVISION SECTION TITLE NO, OF PAGES 016 ELECTRICAL ! 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 16100 Raceways, Electrical Devices and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 16400 Service and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ' 16500 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 16505 Emergency Lighting Central Battery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 017 REFRIGERATION 17050 Basic Materials and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ' 17240 Sound and Vibration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 17250 Refrigeration Insulation . . 5 17500 Heating and Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 17700 Equipment and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ' 7100-TBLC.wpd 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' TENDER N0. CL 9727 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 SECTION 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Stipulated Price tenders executed and signed under seal, are invited for the supply of all labour, material, equipment and services to complete the work for the Addition & ' Renovations Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex, 2440 King Street West, Bowmanville, Ontario, Tender No. CL 9727, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications prepared by Barry - Bryan Associates (1991) Limited. ' 1.2 A Pre-bid meeting and site tour for Pre-Qualified General, Mechanical and Electrical Contractors only will be held at 10:00 am, Tuesday, October 7, 1997. The meeting will be 1 held at the Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex. Consultants will be represented at this meeting. ' Any other site visits must be arranged with the Municipality of Clarington through Mr. Scott Rose, telephone (905) 623-3379. 1.3 The Tender Documents including the Contract Form (Canadian Standard Form of ' Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2, 1994), as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions, the Instructions to Bidders including Appendix 'A', Specifications, Tender Form, and the Drawings listed in Section 8 hereof are all complementary and shall be read together. 1.4 Each Bidder shall examine the Tender Documents as soon as possible after receipt ' thereof, and should he discover any errors or omissions therein he shall notify the Consultant as soon as possible so that further instructions and/or Drawings may be issued to all Tenderers before the date set for receiving Tenders. ' 1.5 Tender documents will be available to Pre-Qualified General, Mechanical and Electrical Contractors on Thursday, October 2, 1997 at the Purchasing Department, The ' Municipality of Clarington, 40 Temperance Street, Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3A6, Telephone (905) 623-3379. One copy only of Tender Documents will be provided free of charge to pre-qualified General, Mechanical and Electrical Contractors. Additional copies may be obtained on receipt of a non-refundable fee of$100.00 for each set of documents. Payment may be ' made in the form of cash or certified cheque, payable to The Municipality of Clarington. 1.6 Tender documents will be available for viewing at the offices of the Durham Construction ' Association, The Peterborough Construction Association, and the Toronto Construction Association. ' 1.7 Individual drawings and sections of specifications are not available. t7100-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 SECTION 1 - GENERAL (Cont'd) ' 1.8 Bidders are advised that enquiries regarding interpretation of the drawings and specifications shall be directed to: Bart' - Bryan Associates (1991) Limited , 11 Stanley Court Whitby, Ontario L1 N 8P9 ' Attention: Mr. D.L. Bryan, P. Eng. OAA or Mr. B. Saul, OAA , or Mr. D. O'Connell Telephone No. (905) 666-5252 ' 1.9 The Consultant(s)will not accept any calls from bidders or sub-trades regarding enquiries on this project 24 hours prior to close of Tender. 1.10 Bidders shall be responsible for the distribution of all Contract Documents and Addenda to all Subcontractors and suppliers. ' 1.11 No claims for payment will be accepted because of failure on the part of the Owner, the Consultant or their representatives to supply any Subcontractor with all or part of the Contract Documents and Addenda thereto,which will have been supplied to the Bidder up , to the closing date. 1.12 The successful bidder shall submit proof of Liability Insurance in the amount of Seven ' Million dollars($7,000,000.00)to the Municipality of Clarington, prior to the commencement of the work. Insurance policy shall name the Owner and the Consultants as additional insured. , SECTION 2 -TENDER SUBMISSIONS 2.1 Tender submission shall be in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, Standard Terms and Conditions (Appendix ' A). 2.2 Tenders executed and signed under seal, will be received until 2:00 p.m. local time, on ' Wednesday, October 15, 1997. 1 7100-00100.WPd ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 ' SECTION 2 -TENDER SUBMISSIONS (Cont'd) Submit Tender to. Office of the Clerk Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3A6 2.3 Bidders are solely responsible for the delivery of Tenders to the Office of the Clerk, on or ' before the date and time set for the close of Tenders. 2.4 Each Tender shall state the stipulated PRICE/PRICES for which the Bidder will undertake ' to cant' out all the Work as described and/or shown in/on the Tender Documents. 2.5 The Tender Form , on the forms provided shall be filled in exactly as required, and shall be returned sealed in a Tender envelope provided by the Municipality of Clarington bearing the tenderer's name and clearly marked as indicated herein. ' 2.6 Two(2) sets of Tender Forms are provided. Bidders shall complete and return one (1) set of Tender Forms. 2.7 Bidders shall furnish all information requested and fill in all blanks in the Tender Form. Should any uncertainty arise as to the proper manner of completing the form, the requisite information will be given by the Consultant. 1 2.8 Tender Forms shall be completed in a legible manner. Incomplete tenders may not be considered. Bids must be typewritten or in ink. Erasures or noticeable changes to the Tender Forms must be initialled by the Bidder. ' 2.9 Incorporated Companies must attach Corporate Seal and Signatures of proper officers shall be affixed. Bids not signed are subject to rejection. 2.10 All prices (unless otherwise specifically requested in the Tender Documents) shall be "Work completed" prices, and shall be understood to include for all material, labour and other expenses including all Provincial Sales Taxes, fees, insurance, compensation and other items required by governing regulations, as well as overhead and profit for the work concerned. Tender prices shall not include Goods and Services Tax. ' 2.11 It shall be understood that the Stipulated Price submitted in the Tender Form shall be open for acceptance and irrevocable for a period of sixty (60) days. 2.12 Tenders may not be submitted by telegram, facsimile, telephone or orally. 7100-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4 ' SECTION 2 -TENDER SUBMISSIONS (Cont'd) ' 2.13 Late tenders will be returned unopened to the respective bidder. 2.14 The lowest or any tender will not necessarily be accepted. ' 2.15 Bidders must not include restrictive or conditional statements to alter the format, or intent of the tender. ' 2.16 Tenders received in accordance with these instructions will be,opened at a Public Meeting at the Municipal offices immediately following the close of the Tender period. , The tender opening meeting will be held in Meeting Room#1, First Floor, 40 Temperance Street, Bowmanville, Ontario, and interested bidders are invited to attend. ' SECTION 3 -ADDENDA ' 3.1 Bidders may, during the tendering period, be advised by Addenda of required additions to, deletions from, clarifications to, or alterations in the requirements of the Tender Documents. All such changes shall become an integral part of the Tender Documents and ' shall be allowed for in the Stipulated Price. 3.2 Bidders shall insert, in the space provided in the Tender Form, the Addenda numbers of ' all Addenda received by them. If no Addenda have been received, the word "NONE" shall be inserted in the space provided. SECTION 4 - BASE BID TENDERS 4.1 Materials and equipment are specifically described and named in this Specification to establish a standard of materials and workmanship to which the Bidders shall strictly adhere. Where manufacturer's trade names are used, the Stipulated Price shall be based on the use of such materials and equipment as specified, no substitutions will be allowed. 4.2 Bidders may submit with their tender alternative proposals based on the use of alternative ' material equivalent to the materials or equipment specified in quality and performance and provided clearances and dimensions shown on the drawings are maintained. For all such alternative proposals the Bidder shall include such proposals and the following information ' in a letter accompanying his Tender, for consideration by the Consultant, at the time of opening Tenders. .1 Manufacturer's name and supplier's name. i .2 Change in price if any. .3 Reason for proposing alternative. , 7100-00100xpd ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 SECTION 4 - BASE BID TENDERS (Cont'd) .4 Detailed description of alternative including identification of differences from specified products. ' .5 Statement assuming full responsibility that any equipment shall not exceed the space requirements allocated on the drawings. The successful Bidder shall be responsible for any additional installation cost, resulting from the acceptance of a ' substitute piece of equipment or product. .6 List of project references for proposed alternate equipment. .7 Any other information requested by the Consultant, including samples, as necessary to complete his evaluation of proposed alternates. Under no circumstances shall the value of an alternative material orequipment be included ' in the Stipulated Price. Under no circumstances will alternatives submitted after the closing of Tenders be considered. ' 4.3 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject proposed alternatives as he sees fit, and also to claim for himself the financial benefit of a substitution, if a substitution is accepted. A rejection by the Owner of the proposed alternative is final and the Owner does not become obligated to give any reason for his action. ' 4.4 The Owner further reserves the right to take any such financial benefit into consideration in their final evaluation of all Tenders and the subsequent award of the Contract. SECTION 5 - TENDERS NOT NECESSARILY ACCEPTED ' 5.1 The Municipality of Clarington reserves the right to: a) Cancel the Tender at any time prior to acceptance of a bid. ' b) Reject any or all bids. c) Cancel any order if the goods or services are unsatisfactory. d) Accept the Tender in whole or in part. ' e) Disqualify any Tenders not submitted in strict accordance with the requirements of the Tender Documents. f) Require each Bidder to submit evidence of his, and his proposed Subcontractors' experience and competence in similar work previously performed. ' 5.2 The Owner reserves the power and right to reject Tenders received from parties who cannot show a reasonable acquaintance with, and preparation of the proper performance of the class of work herein specified and shown on the drawings. 5.3 Tenders containing escalator clauses will not be considered. 7100-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 ' SECTION 5 -TENDERS NOT NECESSARILY ACCEPTED (Cont'd) 5.4 Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any tender which is incomplete, illegible or ' obscure, or which contains alterations not called for, or irregularities of any kind, may be rejected. ' SECTION 6-TAXES ' 6.1 The Tender amount shall include all Excise Taxes and Government Duties on all materials required for the completion of the work of this Tender, provided that same are in force at the time of signing the Contract. 6.2 Provincial Retail Sales Tax shall be included in tendered prices for material supplied under , this contract. 6.3 The total Tender amount shall not include Goods and Services Tax (G.S.T.). ' SECTION 7 -TIME OF THE ESSENCE , 7.1 The Contractor is cautioned that time is of the essence in this Contract and that the ability to complete the Work within the stipulated time period will be one of the factors considered in the award of the Contract. , 7.2 Upon commencing work on site, all work must continue until completion without delay or work stoppage unless instructed otherwise by the Owner. ' 7.3 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work to ensure completion of the work in accordance with the schedule set forth in Section 01100, Special Project Requirements. ' 7.4 The Contractor will be required to provide all labour, material and equipment and direct his subcontractors and suppliers to work the number of shifts and days that are necessary to ' meet the Owner's schedule. 7.5 Bidders shall allow in their Stipulated Price for all premium time and other costs as , necessary to meet the required completion date. 7100-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 7 ' SECTION 8 - LIST OF DRAWINGS 8.1 Architectural Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued A101 Site Plan 0 October 2, 1997 ' A102 Landscape 0 October 2, 1997 ' A103 Landscape 0 October 2, 1997 A201 Overall Floor Plan 0 October 2, 1997 A202 Enlarge Floor Plans 0 October 2, 1997 A203 Enlarge Floor Plans 0 October 2, 1997 ' A204 Enlarge Floor Plans 0 October 2, 1997 A205 Enlarge Floor Plans 0 October 2, 1997 A206 Reflective Ceiling Plans 0 October 2, 1997 A207 Roof Plans 0 October 2, 1997 A301 Elevation 0 October 2, 1997 A302 Elevation 0 October 2, 1997 ' A303 Interior 0 October 2, 1997 A304 Interior 0 October 2, 1997 A401 Sections 0 October 2, 1997 ' A402 Sections 0 October 2, 1997 A403 Sections 0 October 2, 1997 ' A501 Details (Section) 0 October 2, 1997 A502 Details (Section) 0 October 2, 1997 ' A601 Details (Plan) 0 October 2, 1997 A701 Stairs & Misc. 0 October 2, 1997 A801 Schedules 0 October 2, 1997 A901 Millwork 0 October 2, 1997 ' 7100-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 8 SECTION 8- LIST OF DRAWINGS (Cont'd) 8.2 Structural , Drawing No. Title Rev.No. Issued ' S100 Key Plan and General Notes 0 October 2, 1997 S101 Typical Details 0 October 2, 1997 ' S200 Foundation Plan 0 October 2, 1997 S201 Foundation Plan 0 October 2, 1997 ' S202 Second Floor Framing Plan 0 October 2, 1997 S203 Roof Framing Plan 0 October 2, 1997 S204 Roof Framing Plan 0 October 2, 1997 S300 Sections 0 October 2, 1997 ' S301 Sections 0 October 2, 1997 ' S302 Sections 0 October 2, 1997 8.3 Mechanical ' Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued ' M101 Site Plan, Mechanical 0 October 2, 1997 M201 Partial Floor Plan, Plumbing & 0 October 2, 1997 ' Drainage M202 Partial Floor Plan, Plumbing & 0 October 2, 1997 ' Drainage M203 Floor Plan, Sprinkler Zoning 0 October 2, 1997 M204 Partial Ground Floor Plan, HVAC 0 October 2, 1997 , M205 Partial Floor Plan, HVAC 0 October 2, 1997 ' M206 Partial Second Floor Plan, HVAC 0 October 2, 1997 M801 Schematics & Details, Mechanical 0 October 2, 1997 ' 7100-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 9 SECTION 8 - LIST OF DRAWINGS (Cont'd) 8.4 Refrigeration ' Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued R201 Partial Floor Plan, Refrigeration 0 October 2, 1997 R801 Schematics & Details, Refrigeration 0 October 2, 1997 R802 Schematics Dia ram Refrigeration 0 October 2, 1997 ' 8.4 Electrical ' Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued E101 Site Plan & Details 0 October 2, 1997 E201 New Rink Lighting Layout 0 October 2, 1997 E202 New Rink Power Layout 0 October 2, 1997 ' E203 Partial Second Floor Plan 0 October 2, 1997 ' E204 Part Floor Plan Lighting & Power 0 October 2, 1997 Layouts E801 Legend, Detail & Single Line Diagram 0 October 2, 1997 E802 Lighting Fixtures Schedule, Panel 0 October 2, 1997 Schedule & Detail 1 SECTION 9 - EXECUTE CONTRACT 9.1 The Successful Bidder shall execute the Contract Documents within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of notification of Acceptance of Tender from the Owner. 9.2 The Successful Bidder shall commence the Work at the site within three (3) calendar days of receipt of Notification to Commence Work, and complete all construction to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant as indicated in Section 7 herein. ' 9.3 Failure by the Successful Bidder to meet the above requirements will entitle the Owner to cancel the award of the Contract. The Owner may then award the Contract to one of the ' other bidders or to take such other action as he chooses. 7100-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 t SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 10 , SECTION 10- LOCATION 10.1 The site is located at 2440 King Street West, Bowmanville (Highway #2 and Regional , Road 57). SECTION 11 -APPROVED CONTRACTORS 11.1 The following Pre-Qualified General Contractors have been approved by the Owner to tender this project: Atlas Corp. 111 Ortona Court (P) 905-669-6825 ' Concord, Ontario L4K 3M3 - (F) 905-669-8288 Ball Construction 820 Victoria Street North, Box 1202 (P) 519-742-5851 ' Kitchener, Ontario N2G 4G8 (F) 519-742-6727 Gerr Construction R.R. #3 (P) 905-436-2018 Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3K4 (F) 905-436-5198 Melloul-Blarney Const. 700 Rubert Street, Unit A (P) 519-886-8850 , Co. Ltd. Waterloo, Ontario N2V 2135 (F) 519-886-8898 Peak Engineering P.O. Box 984 (P) 905-355-1500 Brighton, Ontario KOK 1 HO (F) 905-355-3238 t SECTION 12 -APPROVED SUB-CONTRACTORS 12.1 The following Pre-Qualified Mechanical Sub-Contractors only have been approved by the Owner: t Branair Ltd. 454 South Service Road W. (P) 905-842-2212 Oakville, Ontario L3K 2H4 (F) 905-842-2214 H.R. Stark 255 Simcoe Street South (P) 905-725-7321 Oshawa, Ontario L1 H 4H3 (F) 905-436-1069 , Nekison Engineering & 17 St. Lawrence Avenue (P) 416-259-4631 Cont. Etobicoke, Ontario M8Z 5TA (F) 416-255-7610 Sutherland-Schultz Inc. 859 Courtland Ave, E., Box 91326 (P) 519-743-4123 Kitchener, Ontario N2G 41-15 (F) 519-743-1628 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 11 ' 12.2 The following Pre-Qualified Electrical Sub-Contractors only have been approved by the Owner: ' Accel Electrical 12 Bradwick Drive, Unit 1 (P) 905-738-6970 Concord, Ontario L4K 3P6 (F) 905-738-5770 Carlos Electric 105 Olive Avenue (P) 905-728-7361 Oshawa, Ontario L1 H 2P1 (F) 905-728-5817 Guild Electric 470 Midwest Road (P) 416-288-8222 Scarborough, Ontario M1P 4Y5 (F) 416-288-1939 Sutherland-Schultz Inc. 859 Courtland Ave, E., Box 91326 (P) 519-743-4123 ' Kitchener, Ontario N2G 4115 (F) 519-743-1628 Wallwyn Electric 50 Innisfil Street (P) 705-726-1859 ' Barrie, Ontario L4N 4K5 (F) 705-726-8450 eSECTION 13 - BID SECURITY 13.1 Each tender shall be accompanied by a certified cheque in the amount of$200,000.00, payable to the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, as evidence of good faith that, if awarded the Contract, the bidder will execute and enter into a formal agreement within the time required and to give the specified security to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the Contract. Bids not accompanied by the required bid security will be trejected. 13.2 Bid bonds int the stipulated amount issued by a Surety, approved by, and in a form containing terms satisfactory to the Municipality's Treasurer, will be accepted in lieu of the Tender deposit. 1 13.3 All tender deposits will be returned to the respective bidders within ten (10) days after Tenders have been opened, except those of the two (2) low bidders which the Municipality of Clarington will retain until the successful bidder has executed the Contract Documents. The second low bidder may substitute a bid bond for his tender deposit cheque after the bids have been opened and checked. 13.4 The bid security deposit of the successful bidder will be returned when he has fully complied with the conditions set forth in the Tender Documents with regards to the Execution of a Contract. 7100M100.wpd r DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 12 ' SECTION 14- AGREEMENT TO BOND ' 14.1 Include with the tender, an agreement to bond issued by a duly incorporated and nationally recognized surety company, guaranteeing the faithful performance of the contract including the warrantee period, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Agree to ' furnish to the Owner, a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond, each in the amount of One Hundred Percent (100%) of the Stipulated Price. 14.2 The premiums for all bonds shall be included in the Stipulated Price. ' SECTION 15- CONTRACTOR'S WORK SPACE 15.1 The Contractor's attention is specifically drawn to the lack of storage space immediately ' adjacent to the site, and the requirements that the Contractor schedule his deliveries and operations so as not to interfere with the current or future operations of the Owner. 7100-00100.wpd , ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 13 SECTION 16 - LOCAL LABOUR 16.1 Since this project will be a major construction project in the Municipality of Clarington utilizing local taxpayers dollars, all Contractors and Subcontractors should make every ' effort to employ local labour, trades, and suppliers in the Municipality of Clarington and/or Durham Region. SECTION 17- CASH ALLOWANCES ' 17.1 Include in the Stipulated Price, the following cash allowances. .1 Independent inspection and testing $20,000.00 ' .2 Supply only of Finishing Hardware $40,000.00 .3 Supply only of Washroom Accessories $10,000.00 .4 Signage $12,000.00 .5 Public Address System $17,000.00 .6 Miscellaneous Millwork Items $15.000.00 not specified or detailed in the tender documents ' TOTAL CASH ALLOWANCES $114,000.00 ' SECTION 18 - STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington Standard Terms and Conditions attached as Appendix'A'to these Instructions to Bidders will be read in conjunction with the documents listed in Section 1, and will form a part of the contract, with the following amendments: 1. Delete the term "purchase order" and replace with "Canadian Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC-2, 1994 as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions". 2. In Article 7, 5h paragraph, change last sentence to read: ' "Goods and Services Tax shall be extra. Provincial Sales Tax is to be included in the bid price". 3. In Article 17, 2nd paragraph, change "90 days" to "60 days". 4. In Article 23, 11 paragraph, change insurance limits from $2,000,000 to $7,000,000 ' General Commercial Liability and $4,000,000 General Builders Risk. 5. In Article 23, 2nd paragraph, add "Barry - Bryan Associates (1991) Limited" as additional named insured. ' 7100-00100.wpd APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS 1. DEFINITIONS Municipality-The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, its successors and assigns. Bidder-The person, firm or corporation submitting a bid to the Municipality. Company-The person, contractor, firm or corporation to whom the Municipality has awarded the contract, it successors and assigns. Contract-The purchase order authorizing the company to perform the work, purchase order alterations, the document and addenda, the bid, and surety. Subcontractor-A person,firm or corporation having a contract with the company for, or any part of,the work. Document-The document(s)issued by the Municipality in response to which bids are invited to perform the work in accordance with the specifications contained in the document. 1 Bid-An offer by a Bidder in response to the document issued by the Municipality. Work - All labour, materials, products, articles, fixtures, services, supplies, and acts required to be done, furnished or performed by the company,which are subject to the Contract. 2. SUBMISSION OF BID Bid invitation shall be in accordance with the Municipality of Clarington Purchasing By-law#94-129 and will apply for the calling, receiving, and opening of bids. The Municipality will be responsible for evaluating bids, awarding and administering the contract in accordance with the Purchasing By-law. The bid must be submitted on the form(s)and in the envelope supplied by the Municipality unless otherwise provided herein. The envelope must not be covered by any outside wrappings, i.e. courier envelopes or other coverings. The bid must be signed by a designated signing officer of the Bidder. If a joint bid is submitted, it must be signed on behalf of each of the Bidders. ' The bid must be legible, written in ink, or typewritten. Any form of erasure, strikeout or over-writing must be initialled by the Bidder's authorized signing officer. The bid must not be restricted by a covering letter,a statement added, or by alterations to the document unless otherwise provided herein. Failure to return the document or invitation may result in the removal of the Bidder from the Municipality's bidder's list. A bid received after the closing date and time will not be considered and will be returned, unopened. Should a dispute arise from the terms and conditions of any part of the contract, regarding meaning, intent or ambiguity,the decision of the Municipality shall be final. 3. CONTRACT The contract consists of the documents aforementioned. ' The contract and portions thereof take precedence in the order in which they are named above, notwithstanding the chronological order in which they are issued or executed. 7100-Appendix A.wpd Page 1 of 7 APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS The intent of the contract is that the Company shall supply work which is fit and suitable for the Municipality's intended use and complete for a particular purpose. None of the conditions contained in the Bidder's standard or general conditions of sale shall be of any effect unless explicitly agreed to by the Municipality and specifically referred to in the purchase order. 4. CLARIFICATION OF THE DOCUMENT , Any clarification of the document required by the Bidder prior to submission of its bid shall be requested through the Municipality's contact identified in the document. Any such clarification so given shall not in any way alter the document and in no case shall oral arrangements be considered. Every notice, advice or other communication pertaining thereto will be in the form of a written addendum. No officer, agent or employee of the Municipality is authorized to alter orally any portion of the document. ' 5. PROOF OF ABILITY The bidder may be required to show, in terms of experience and facilities, evidence of its ability, as well as that of any proposed subcontractor, to perform the work by the specified delivery date. 6. DELIVERY Unless otherwise stated, the work specified in the bid shall be delivered or completely performed by the , Company as soon as possible and in any event within the period set out herein as the guaranteed period of delivery or completion after receipt of a purchase order therefor. A detailed delivery ticket or piece tally, showing the exact quantity of goods, materials, articles or equipment, , shall accompany each delivery thereof. Receiving by a foreperson, storekeeper or other such receiver shall not bind the Municipality to accept the work covered thereby, or the particulars of the delivery ticket or piece tally therefor. , Work shall be subject to further inspection and approval by the Municipality. The Company shall be responsible for arranging the work so that completion shall be as specified in the ' contract. Time shall be of the essence of the contract. 7. PRICING Prices shall be in Canadian Funds, quoted separately for each item stipulated, F.O.B. destination. ' Prices shall be firm for the duration of the contract. Prices bid must include all incidental costs and the Company shall be deemed to be satisfied as to the full , requirements of the bid. No claims for extra work will be entertained and any additional work must be authorized in writing prior to commencement. Should the Company require more information or clarification on any point, it must be obtained prior to the submission of the bid. Payment shall be full compensation for all costs related to the work, including operating and overhead costs to provide work to the satisfaction of the Municipality. 7100-Appendix A.wpd Page 2 of 7 ' APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS ' All prices quoted shall include applicable customs duty, excise tax, freight, insurance, and all other charges of every kind attributable to the work. Goods and Services Tax and Provincial Sales Tax shall be extra and not shown, unless otherwise specified herein. ' If the Bidder intends to manufacture or fabricate any part of the work outside of Canada, it shall arrange its shipping procedures so that its agent or representative in Canada is the importer of record for customs purposes. Should any additional tax, duty or any variation in any tax or duty be imposed by the Government of Canada or the Province of Ontario become directly applicable to work specified in this document subsequent to its submission by the Bidder and before the delivery of the work covered thereby pursuant to a purchase order issued by the Municipality appropriate increase or decrease in the price of work shall be made to compensate for such changes as of the effective date thereof. S. TERMS OF PAYMENT Where required by the Construction Lien Act appropriate monies may be held back until 46 days after the completion of the work. Payments made hereunder, including final payment shall not relieve the company from its obligations or liabilities under the contract. ' Acceptance by the company of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the company against the Municipality, except those previously made in writing in accordance with the contract and still unsettled. ' The Municipality shall have the right to withhold from any sum otherwise payable to the company such amount as may be sufficient to remedy any defect or deficiency in the work, pending correction of it. Payment may be made 30 days after delivery pursuant to the Bidder submitting an invoice, contract requirements being completed and work being deemed satisfactory. 9. PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The company shall, at its expense, defend all claims, actions or proceedings against the Municipality based on any allegations that the work or any part of the work constitutes an infringement of any patent, copyright ' or other proprietary right, and shall pay to the Municipality all costs, damages, charges and expenses, including its lawyers'fees on a solicitor and his own client basis occasioned to the Municipality by reason thereof. The company shall pay all royalties and patent license fees required for the work. If the work or any part thereof is in any action or proceeding held to constitute an infringement,the company shall forthwith either secure for the Municipality the right to continue using the work or shall at the company's expense, replace the infringing work with non-infringing work or modify it so that the work no longer infringes. 10. ALTERNATES Any opinion with regard to the use of a proposed alternate determined by the Municipality shall be final. Any bid proposing an alternate will not be considered unless otherwise specified herein. ' 11. EQUIVALENCY Any opinion determined by the Municipality with respect to equivalency shall be final. 7100-Appendix A.wpd Page 3 of 7 APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS 12. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING ' The company shall not assign or subcontract the contract or any portion thereof without the prior written ' consent of the Municipality. 13. FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE COMPANY ' The Municipality is entitled to request of the Company to furnish reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Municipality's obligations under the Contract. 14. LAWS AND REGULATIONS ' The company shall comply with relevant Federal, Provincial and Municipal statutes, regulations and by-laws pertaining to the work and its performance. The company shall be responsible for ensuring similar compliance by suppliers and subcontractors. The contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Province of Ontario. ' 15. CORRECTION OF DEFECTS , If at any time prior to one year after the actual delivery date or completion of the work (or specified warranty/guarantee period if longer than one year)any part of the work becomes defective or is deficient or fails due to defect in design, material or workmanship, or otherwise fails to meet the requirements of the , contract,the company,upon request, shall make good every such defect, deficiency or failure without cost to the Municipality. The company shall pay all transportation costs for work both ways between the company's factory or repair depot and the point of use. 16. BID ACCEPTANCE , The Municipality reserves the right to award by item, or part thereof, groups of items, or parts thereof, or all ' items of the bids and to award contracts to one or more bidders submitting identical bids as to price;to accept or reject any bids in whole or in part;to waive irregularities and omissions, if in so doing, the best interests of the Municipality will be served. No liability shall accrue to the Municipality for its decision in this regard. Bids shall be irrevocable for 90 days after the official closing time. ' The placing in the mail or delivery to the Bidder's shown address given in the bid of a notice of award to a ' bidder by the Municipality shall constitute notice of acceptance of contract by the Municipality to the extent described in the notice of award. 17. DEFAULT BY COMPANY , a. If the company: commits any act of bankruptcy; or if a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency or in respect of any of its property; or if the company makes a general assignment for the ' benefit of its creditors; then, in any such case,the Municipality may,without notice: terminate the contract. 7100-Appendix A.wpd Page 4 of 7 ' APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS b. If the company: fails to comply with any request, instruction or order of the Municipality; or fails to pay its accounts; or fails to comply with or persistently disregard statutes, regulations, by-laws or directives of relevant authorities relating to the work; or fails to prosecute the work with skill and ' diligence; or assigns or sublets the contract or any portion thereof without the Municipality's prior written consent;or refuses to correct defective work; or is otherwise in default in carrying out its part of any of the terms, conditions and obligations of the contract, then, in any such case, the Municipality may, upon expiration of ten days from the date of written notice to the company, ' terminate the contract. C. Any termination of the contract by the Municipality, as aforesaid, shall be without prejudice to any other rights or remedies the Municipality may have and without incurring any liability whatsoever in ' respect thereto. d. If the Municipality terminates the contract, it is entitled to: i) take possession of all work in progress, materials and construction equipment then at the project site(at no additional charge for the retention or use of the construction equipment), and finish the work by whatever means the Municipality may deem appropriate under the ' circumstances; ii) withhold any further payments to the company until the completion of the work and the expiry of all obligations under the Correction of Defects section; iii) recover from the company loss,damage and expense incurred by the Municipality by reason of the company's default(which may be deducted from any monies due or becoming due to the company, any balance to be paid by the company to the Municipality). ' 18. CONTRACT CANCELLATION The Municipality shall have the right,which may be exercised from time to time, to cancel any uncompleted or unperformed portion of the work or part thereof. In the event of such cancellation, the Municipality and the Company may negotiate a settlement. The Municipality shall not be liable to the Company for loss of anticipated profit on the cancelled portion or portions of the work. 19. QUANTITIES Unless otherwise specified herein, quantities are shown as approximate, are not guaranteed to be accurate, are furnished without any liability on behalf of the Municipality and shall be used as a basis for comparison only. Payment will be by the unit complete at the bid price on actual quantities deemed acceptable by the Municipality. i20. SAMPLES Upon request, samples must be submitted strictly in accordance with instructions. If samples are requested subsequent to opening of bids,they shall be delivered within three(3)working days following such request, unless additional time is granted. Samples must be submitted free of charge and will be returned at the bidder's expense, upon request, provided they have not been destroyed by tests, or are not required for comparison purposes. The acceptance of samples by the Municipality shall be at its sole discretion and any such acceptance shall in no way be construed to imply relief of the company from its obligations under the contract. ' Samples submitted must be accompanied by current Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)where applicable. 7100-Appendix A.wpd Page 5 of 7 APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS 21. US RETY ' The successful tenderer shall, if the Municipality in its absolute discretion so desires, be required to satisfy surety requirements by providing a deposit in the form of a certified cheque, bank draft or money order or other ' form of surety, in an amount determined by the Municipality. This surety may be held by the Municipality until 60 days after the day on which all work covered by the contract has been completed and accepted. The surety may be returned before the 60 days have elapsed providing satisfactory evidence is provided that all liabilities incurred by the company in carrying out the work have expired or have been satisfied and that a Certificate of Clearance from the Workers'Compensation Board has been received. The company shall, if the Municipality in its absolute discretion so desires, be required to satisfy fidelity bonding requirements by providing such bonding in an amount and form determined by the Municipality. Failure to fumish required surety within two weeks from date of request thereof by the Municipality shall make the award of the Contract by the Municipality subject to withdrawal. ' 22. WORKERS'COMPENSATION All of the Company's personnel must be covered by Workers' Compensation. Upon request by the ' Municipality, an original Letter of Good Standing from the Workers'Compensation Board shall be provided prior to the commencement of work indicating all payments by the Company to the Board have been made. Prior to final payment, a Certificate of Clearance must be issued indicating all payments by the Company to the Board in conjunction with the subject Contract have been made and that the Municipality will not be liable to the Board for future payments in connection with the company's fulfilment of the contract. Further Certificates of Clearance or other types of certificates shall be provided upon request. 23. INSURANCE The company shall maintain and pay for Comprehensive General Liability insurance including premises and all operations. This insurance coverage shall be subject to limits of not less than$2,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence for third party Bodily Injury and Property Damage or such other coverage or amount as may be requested. ' The policy shall include the Municipality as an additional named insured in respect of all operations performed by or on behalf of the Company. A certified copy of such policy or certificate shall be provided to the respective participant prior to commencement of the work. Further certified copies shall be provided upon ' request. 24. LIABILITY The company agrees to defend, fully indemnify and save harmless the Municipality from all actions, suits, claims, demands, losses, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever for all damage or injury including death to any person and all damage to any property which may arise directly or indirectly by reason of a requirement ' of the contract, save and except for damage caused by the negligence of the Municipality or its employees. The Company agrees to defend,fully indemnify and save harmless the group from any and all charges, fines, penalties and costs that may be incurred or paid by the Municipality if the Municipality or any of its employees ' shall be made a party to any charge under the Occupational Health and Safety Act in relation to any violation of the Act arising out of this contract. 7100-AppendtxAmpd Page 6 of 7 ' ' APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS 25. VISITING THE SITE The Company shall carefully examine the site and existing building and services affecting the proper execution ' of the work, and obtain a clear and comprehensive knowledge of the existing conditions. No claim for extra payment will be allowed for work or difficulties encountered due to conditions of the site which were visible or reasonably inferable, prior to the date of submission of Tenders. Bidders shall accept sole responsibility for any error or neglect on their part in this respect. 26. SAFETY The Company shall obey all Federal, Provincial and Municipal Laws,Act, Ordinances, Regulations, Orders-in- Council and By-laws,which could in any way pertain to the work outlined in the Contract or to the Employees of the Company. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Company shall satisfy all statutory requirements imposed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations made thereunder, on a contractor,a Constructor and/or Employer with respect to or arising out of the performance of the Company's obligations under this Contract. The Company shall be aware of and conform to all governing regulations including those established by the Municipality relating to employee health and safety. The Company shall keep employees and subcontractors informed of such regulations. The Company shall provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the Municipality for any supplied Hazardous Materials. ' 27. UNPAID ACCOUNTS The company shall indemnify the Municipality from all claims arising out of unpaid accounts relating to the work. The Municipality shall have the right at any time to require satisfactory evidence that the work in respect ' of which any payment has been made or is to be made by the Municipality is free and clear of liens, attachments, claims, demands, charges or other encumbrances. 28. SUSPENSION OF WORK The Municipality may, without invalidating the contract, suspend performance by the company from time to time of any part or all of the work for such reasonable period of time as the Municipality may determine. The resumption and completion of work after the suspension shall be governed by the schedule established by the Municipality. 29. CHANGES IN THE WORK The Municipality may, without invalidating the contract, direct the Company to make changes to the work. When a change causes an increase or decrease in the work,the contract price shall be increased or decreased by the application of unit prices to the quantum of such increase or decrease, or in the absence of applicable unit prices,by an amount to be agreed upon between the Municipality and the Company. All such changes ' shall be in writing and approved by the Municipality. 30. CONFLICT OF INTEREST No employee or member of Council of the Municipality shall sell goods or services to the Municipality or have a direct or indirect interest in a Company or own a Company which sells goods or services to the Municipality. 7100-Appendix A.wpd Page 7 of 7 i ' TENDER FORM ' TENDER NO. CL 9727 1 1 ' THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ' ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX 2440 KING STREET WEST ' BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO L1 C 1 K5 TENDER NO. CL 9727 NAME OF FIRM 1 ADDRESS POSTAL CODE TELEPHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER NAME OF PERSON SIGNING FOR FIRM ' POSITION OF PERSON SIGNING FOR FIRM TENDERS RECEIVED BY: The Office of the Clerk The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3E6 7100-TFTP.wpd 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 1 ' The Office of the Clerk The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street ' Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3E6 Re: Additions And Renovations Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex ' 2440 King Street West Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 1 K5 TENDER NO. CL 9727 ' Sir: ' 1.0 We agree for the (Company Name) Stipulated Price stated below to supply all necessary labour, materials, plant, equipment, ' services and overtime work as may be required for the execution and completion of all work in connection with the above referenced project for the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, in accordance with Instructions to Bidders, The Municipality of Clarington's Standard Terms and Conditions, the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Specifications and Drawings, prepared for that purpose by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, Whitby, Ontario and to the entire satisfaction of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington: STIPULATED PRICE exclusive of GST Dollars ($ ) 2.0 Further, to assist you with the necessary information for tax purposes, etc., the stipulated price includes the following: ' Provincial Sales Tax $ ' 3.0 Goods and Services Tax (GST) at 7% to be added to the Stipulated Price $ 4.0 The Stipulated Price includes CASH ALLOWANCES in the amount of$114,000.00 (One Hundred and Fourteen Thousand Dollars) as listed in the Instructions to Bidders. 1 5.0 We agree the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject prices bid for the work or for any portion of the work. 6.0 We agree that the Owner reserves the right to take any financial benefit, from alternates submitted, into consideration in the evaluation of all tenders and the subsequent award of ' the Contract. .7100-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 2 ' 7.0 We agree to complete all work including necessary overtime work pursuant to this Contract in the period required to meet the scheduled completion dates as specified. 8.0 We have received and included for Addenda No. to in the Stipulated Price. 9.0 We submit the following separate prices which are included in the Stipulated Price: (Separate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and installation of two (2) flagpoles as specified in Section 10350 including concrete bases and lightning spikes. $ B. Supply and installation of all foot grilles as specified in Section 12690. $ C. Supply and installation of all planting material as specified in Section 02950. $ ' 10.0 We submit the following alternate prices which are not included in the Stipulated Price: (Alternate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and install Solid Core Phenolic Toilet Partitions Type 130-TS by Watrous Sales Inc., or approved equal, in lieu of ' metal toilet partitions specified in Section 10162 $ extra/credit ' B. Supply and install Tuflex rubber tile flooring in lieu of Mondo flooring specified in Section 09671. $ extra/credit ' C. Cost to enclose second floor viewing area as detailed on the drawings including finishes, stairs, and all associated ' mechanical and electrical services. $ extra/credit D. Hydraulic seed all areas shown on the site plan as sodded, ' in lieu of sod specified in Section 02935. $ extra/credit 11.0 In the event that work extra to that included in the Contract is required, and is authorized in writing by the Owner, the Contractor will add the following percentages to the cost of the work. Overhead Profit General Contractor's Work Subcontractor's Work ' 7100-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 3 ' 12.0 We submit the names of subcontractors upon whose tender the stipulated price was based: ' TRADE FIRM ADDRESS Demolition Excavation and Backfill Asphalt Paving ' Landscaping Unit Paving ' Reinforcing Steel Concrete Finishing ' Precast Hollow Core Slabs Masonry ' Glass Block Miscellaneous Metals Structural Steel Pre-Engineered Building Structure Steel Roof Deck and Floor Deck ' Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry Cabinet Work Damp Proofing ' Spray Applied Polyurethane Insulation Metal Siding E.P.D.M. Sheet Roofing Metal Flashing and Trim Hollow Metal Doors&Frames ' Wood Doors Sectional Overhead Doors Rolling Shutters Aluminum Windows and Screens ' 7100-00200.wpd r rDIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 rTENDER FORM Page 4 ' TRADE FIRM ADDRESS Glass and Glazing ' Rubber Flooring Resilient Flooring ' Ceramic Tile and Quarry Tile Drywall and Acoustics 1 Metal Toilet Partitions Foot Grilles Painting Dasherboard Systems Fire Protection(Sprinklers) ' Amount Included in Tender Price $ ' Plumbing(Interior) Amount Included in Tender Price $ ' Plumbing (Exterior) Amount Included in Tender Price $ ' HVAC Amount Included in Tender Price $ Electrical Amount Included in Tender Price $ ' Refrigeration Amount Included in Tender Price $ 13.0 We agree that, when requested by the Consultant, additional work will be performed at following unit prices exclusive of Overhead and Profit which shall cover all charges for r labour and materials, supervision, plant and tools. Deletions will be deducted from additions before these unit prices are applied. Credits will be deducted from extras before charges for overhead and profit are added. All work will be performed in accordance with r the Contract Documents. Provincial Sales Tax is included in these unit prices. Goods and Services Tax is not included in these unit prices. Breakdown of all taxes will be submitted later. 1 ' 7100-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 5 ' Unit Prices for Additions and Deletions Nature of Work Additions Deletions ' 1. Earth Excavation by machine, calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. ' 2. Earth excavation by hand calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. 3. Trenching up to 600 mm deep per cubic ' metre. 4. Trenching up to 1200 mm deep per ' cubic metre. 5. Trenching over 1200 mm deep per cubic metre. 6. OPSS Granular 'A' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 7. OPSS Granular 'B' backfill (supply, ' place, and compact) per cubic metre. 8. Type 'C' Sand Fill, (supply, place, and ' compact) per cubic metre. 9. Reinforcing Steel, supply and place, per metric tonne. 10. 25 MPa concrete-in-place to walls, footings or piers per cubic metre. ' 11. 35 MPa concrete-in-place to floors per cubic metre. 12. Vertical formwork in place including all accessories and stripping per square metre of face area. 13. Concrete curbs as detailed per lineal metre. ' 7100-00200.wpd ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 6 ' Nature of Work Additions Deletions 14. Concrete sidewalks, 100 mm thick ' including sub-grade, compaction and all accessories as specified per cubic metre. i15. HL6 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per cubic metre. 16. HL3 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per cubic metre. ' 17. Plain concrete block as specified, 90 mm installed, per square metre of wall area: 140 mm 190 mm 1 240 mm 290 mm ' 18. Architectural concrete block as specified, 90 mm installed, per square metre of wall area: 140 mm 190 mm 240 mm 290 mm ' 19. Spray applied polyurethane insulation, installed, per square metre of wall area. ' 20. Precast concrete curb as specified in Section 02516, supply and install, each: ' 21. 12 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. ' 22. 20 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. 23. 25 dia EMT surface mounted conduit installed per metre. 24. #12 copper RW90 installed in conduit per metre. 25. Duplex general purpose 15A, 120V receptacle on local circuit within 20 metres, per metre. ' 7100-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 7 ' 14.0 We have carefully examined all the Tender Documents, have visited the Site, and have a clear and comprehensive knowledge of the Work required under this Contract and of all the working conditions and schedule requirements. ' 15.0 We the undersigned agree that this Tender is valid and irrevocable and subject to acceptance by the Owner without notice to us for a period of Sixty (60) days from date of receipt of Tender, and that if notified of award of Contract, we will within ten (10) days of ' receipt of notification of Acceptance of Tender: a) Furnish to the Owner, in care of the Consultant, copies of insurance policies as ' required by the Conditions of the Contract. b) Furnish to the Owner a breakdown of the Stipulated Price in such form and detail as required by the Owner for progress payments, taxation and internal accounting purposes. c) Furnish to the Owner, a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond, issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner, each for an amount equalling 100% of the Tender Price to ensure the full and proper completion of the Contract. ' d) Commence the work forthwith after the receipt of a letter of intent, contract or Purchase Order or when notified to do so by the Consultant and/or Owner and to ' execute the work continuously to completion. Time shall be the essence of the Contract and the work shall be completed in accordance with the schedule outlined in the Instructions to Bidders. e) Furnish to the Owner a Clearance Certificate of the Workers' Compensation Board. ' f) Submit within three (3) days of award of the contract a detailed construction schedule to the Owner for approval. g) Furnish to the Owner a copy of our Corporate Safety Policy. 16.0 Wherever the plural is used herein, the same shall be read and construed as if the singular had been used where the facts and context so requires and as if all necessary grammatical changes had been made. 17.0 Bid Security: 1 Attached to this tender form is a bid deposit in the amount of $200,000.00. I/We the undersigned agree that if I/We withdraw this tender or default in executing a contract or ' providing the required Performance.Security in accordance with the terms of the bid documents, the Owner shall have sustained liquidated damages in the amount equal to the difference between the amount of this bid and the amount for which the Owner legally ' contracts with another party to perform the work, if the latter amount exceeds the former up to a maximum of$200,000.00 and such amount shall become the property of the Owner. 7100-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 8 ' 18.0 Bonds: Attached to this Tender Form is an agreement to bond in the amount of 100% for Performance, and 100% for Materials and Labour Payment. 19.0 Signature and Seal of Bidder: Street Address Name of Company i ' City or Town Signature of Company Official Postal Code Name and Title ' Telephone No. Signature of Company Official 9 P Y ' Date Name and Title SEAL Facsimile No. i Tenderer's G.S.T. Registration No. ' If the bidding firm is a limited company, the company seal must appear on this Bid Form with the signature(s) of the proper signing official(s). 1100-00200.wpd ' GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS TENDER NO. CL 9727 1 1 1 1 1 1 t n��s� DIVISION 0 SECTION 00300 ' GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 1.0 GENERAL t .1 The Agreement, Definition and General Conditions of this Contract shall be the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC-2, 1994, Stipulated Price Contract, except as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions, Section 00400. 7100-00300.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 1. GENERAL .1 The Definitions and General Conditions of the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC-2, 1994, Stipulated Price Contract are amended as follows: i .2 The Municipality of Clarington Standard Terms and Conditions appended to Instructions to Bidders shall be read in conjunction with, and form part of, the ' Contract document. Wherever the contents of this document exceed the requirements of the General Conditions, provide such additional requirements. ' 2. DEFINITIONS ' The definitions set out on page 7 of the standard construction document are hereby amended by adding the following sentences to the appropriate paragraphs: .3 The term'Owner'The Municipality of Clarington, shall be understood to mean The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, Bowmanville, Ontario, or their authorized representatives. .7 The term 'Consultant', Architect or Engineer, refers to Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, or their authorized representatives, in conjunction with the Owner. 3. GC 1.1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .1 Delete from article 1.1.10 "sufficient copies of ...... work" and add: "15 sets of the drawings and specifications upon which the Contract is based. Additional copies of drawings and specifications will be issued to the Contractor at the Contractor's expense." 4. GC 2.3 - REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK .1 Add the following to GC 2.3.2: ' The Contractor shall give the Consultant and the Testing Agency at least three working days notice of the date and time fixed for all required tests and shall supply all labour, materials and fuel, etc. as necessary. ' 7100-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 2 5. GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS .1 Add new article as follows: 3.2.6 The Contractor shall afford all other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work. 6. GC 3.7 - SUPERVISOR .1 Add new article as follows: 3.7.3 The Contractor's Supervisor shall be satisfactory to the Consultant and ' must be maintained on the job full time until all deficiencies have been corrected and the completion of the Contract has been reached. Applications to replace the Supervisor during or prior to this period will not be considered. , 7. GC 3.9- LABOUR AND PRODUCTS i .1 Add new article as follows: ' 3.9.4 Manufactured materials and equipment which are specified by their proprietary names or by part of catalogue numbers must be provided. Where a number of proprietary materials are specified for one use the Contractor may select any of the materials specified. No substitute for the materials specified will be allowed unless written approval of alternate material equipment is authorized by the Consultant prior to signing of the Contract. .2 Add new article as follows: ' 3.9.5 The Contractor shall use all proprietary materials and equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. ' 8. GC 3.11 - SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Add new article as follows: ' 3.11.7 The Contractor shall arrange for the preparation of clearly identified shop drawings and submission of 1 sepia and 4 copies of such shop drawings, erection and setting drawings or diagrams including electrical wiring schematics. The Consultant will return 1 sepia and 1 copy to the , Contractor. 7100-00400.wpd l ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 3 8. GC 3.11 - SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd) .2 Add new article as follows: 1 3.11.8 The term Shop Drawings shall include erection and setting drawings, data sheets and electrical wiring schematics. .3 Add new article as follows: 3.11.9 The Shop Drawing Review Stamp shall be as herein shown: ' "This review by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not mean that Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all sub-trades". REVIEWED ( ) REVIEWED AS MODIFIED ( ) ' NOT REVIEWED ( ) IBARRY - BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED BY: ' DATE: .4 Add new article as follows: 3.11.10 Samples: Reviewed samples will be returned to the Contractor or his Superintendent on the site. Materials ordered and/or received must match reviewed samples. Any materials, whether incorporated in the building project or not, which do not match reviewed samples, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. ' 7100-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 , SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 4 9. GC 3.12 - USE OF THE WORK .1 Add new article as follows: 3.12.3 The Owner shall have the right to enter and occupy the building in whole, 1 or in.part, for the purpose of placing fittings and equipment or for other uses before completion of the contract. Such entry and occupation shall not be considered as acceptance of the work or in any way relieve the Contractor ' from his responsibility to complete the contract. 10. GC 3.14 - CLEAN-UP , .1 Add new article as follows: 3.14.4 Clean concrete floor slabs free of all rubbish, waste, mortar droppings, oil, grease, foreign matter, laitencies, and paint. .2 Add new article as follows: 3.14.5 As soon as sections or areas of the work are completed and ready for painting, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish and waste, replace all broken glass and leave the areas clean suitable for painting to the Painter's approval. On completion of the work the Contractor shall remove the dust by washing and vacuuming with industrial quality vacuum from walls, ceiling, sills, ledges, etc., thoroughly wash, wax and polish all floors and bases, dean and polish all mirrors and glass (both inside and outside) and leave the work in a condition satisfactory to the Consultant. Remove all plant and equipment, sheds, offices, barricades, hoarding, temporary roads,walks, and temporary services, surplus materials, and leave the work site in a condition satisfactory to the Consultant. .3 Add new article as follows: 3.14.6 The Owner shall have the right to back charge cleaning to the Contractor if not done by the Contractor within 24 hours of notice to clean. .4 Add new article as follows: 3.14.7 The Owner shall have the right to back charge cost of damage to the site caused by contractor transportation in and out of the site if not repaired before final payment. 7100-00400.wpd 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 5 11. GC 4.1 - CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Delete article 4.1.4 and insert the following: 4.1.4 In the event that the cost of the work covered by Cash Allowances should exceed the cash allowance, while the contract sum will be adjusted in conformity therewith, there shall be no adjustment to the Contractor's fee or other expenses such as overhead or profit, it being understood and agreed that the contract sum includes the Contractor's expenses and profit for all Cash Allowances whether or not they are exceeded. Work and material covered by Cash Allowance will be tendered later. The General Contractor shall sign the successful bidders as normal subcontractors and assume full responsibility for supervision, scheduling, guarantees and ' payment for this work. 12. GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER .1 Delete entirely, Articles 5.1.1 and 5.1.2. 13. GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT .1 Refer to Article 5.3.2 - Change "(5)"to "(30)". .2 Add new paragraph: 5.3.3 The Consultant shall deduct, on each Certificate of Payment, after the 10% lien holdback has been deducted, a further 1%, to be set aside and held as a Contract Completion Security Account. The accumulated amount in this account shall be released to the Contractor upon Total Performance of the Work. Partial releases will not be made. If, within fifteen (15) days of written notification by Owner at any time after Substantial Performance, the Contractor does not reach Total Performance, by failing to completely finish outstanding work, the Owner shall have the right to complete such work and deduct the cost for such work together with an appropriate administration fee from the Contract Completion Security Account. 14. GC 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK .1 Delete Article 5.5.3 entirely. 1 7100-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 6 15. GC 5.6 - PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK .1 Refer to Article 5.6.1 - Delete and replace with the following: "Holdback monies will not be released until 46 days after substantial performance ' of the Contract." 16. GC 5.7- FINAL PAYMENT .1 Refer to Article 5.7.4- Change "(5)"to 11(30)". 17. GC 10.1 -TAXES & DUTIES .1 Add the following to GC 10.1.2: .1 The Contractor must provide a detailed breakdown of additional taxes if , requested by the Owner in a form satisfactory to the Owner. .2 Profit and overhead shall not be included in the increase or decrease in costs incurred by the Contractor due to changes in the aforementioned taxes and duties. 18. GC 10.2 - LAWS. NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES .1 Add new articles as follows: 10.2.6 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to apply and pay for any Permits, including all Regional Municipality of Durham appropriate fees, the cost of which shall be included in the Stipulated Price except for the Municipality. of Clarington Building Permit which will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. 10.2.7 The Contractor will obtain and pay for Ministry of Labour approval, and will file a Notice of Project with the Ministry. The Contractor will be the 'Constructor' as defined by the Construction Health and Safety Act. 19. GC 11.1 - INSURANCE .1 Refer to paragraph 11.1.1(1): change "Two Million ($2,000,000)"to read "Seven Million ($7,000,000). .2 Refer to paragraph 1.1.1(5): add "Builders risk insurance shall be Four Million ($4,000,000). , 7100-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 7 19. GC 11.1 - INSURANCE (Cont'd) .3 Add new paragraph: 11.1.1(6) The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington and Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited are to be included in the list of insured. 20. GC 11.2 - BONDS .1 Add new article as follows: 11.2.3 The bonds shall cover payment of all obligations occurred in the event of the Contractor's default, including the following: Payment of all legal, architectural, mechanical, electrical and structural engineering expenses incurred by the Owner in determining the extent of work executed and work still to be executed and any additional work required as a result of the interruption of the work. 1 Payment of additional expenses to the Owner in the form of Watchmen's services, light, heat, power, etc., payable over the period between the default of the original contract and commencement of the new contract. 21. GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION .1 Paragraph 12.1.2 change $2,000,000 to $7,000,000. .2 Add new article as follows: 12.1.5 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant(s) for and against any and all costs and expenses (including legal and architect/engineering services and court costs) arising out of or a consequence of any default of the Contractor under the Contract. ' 22. GC 12.3- WARRANTY 1 Add the following to GC 12.3.3: The term"defect"shall not be construed as embracing such imperfections as would naturally follow misuse, failure to perform recommended maintenance, accident, or the wear and tear of normal use. 7100-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 t SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 8 22. SAC 12.3- WARRANTY(Cont'd) Generally, any manufactured item or material, which when used as directed, must be capable of such use for the duration of the specified warranty period. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be considered as being a "defect". The costs of investigations, tests, repairs and/or replacement and the making good of any resulting damage shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible to see that all required work is performed without undue delay. The carrying out of the replacement work and making good of defects shall be executed at such times as convenient with the Owner, which may entail overtime work on the part of the Contractor. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects promptly. Additional charges for overtime work in this regard must be borne by the Contractor. Prior to the expiry of the Warranty Period the Owner reserves the right to carry out a detailed and exhaustive inspection of the building with regard to all work carried out under the terms of this contract and the Contractor shall be required to make good the defective or unsatisfactory materials and/or workmanship observed. .2 Add new article as follows: 12.3.7 If extended warranties in excess of one year are required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the provision of this article shall also apply for such extended periods. .3 Add new article as follows: 12.3.8 Any material or equipment requiring excessive servicing during the warranty period (or free maintenance period if applicable) shall be considered defective and the warranty (or free maintenance period) shall be deemed to take effect from the time that the defect has been corrected so as to cause excessive servicing to terminate. .4 Add new article as follows: 12.3.9 The Contractor shall make good in a permanent manner, satisfactory to the Owner, any and all damage to the work both during construction and during the period of warranty as aforesaid. The Contractor shall commence repairs on any work identified as defective within 48 hours or receipt of notice from the Owner or the Consultant. .5 Add new article as follows: 12.3.10 The decision of the Owner and Consultant shall be final as to the necessity for repairs or for work to be done under this Section. 7100-00400.wpd t ' TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION TENDER NO. CL 9727 71 MTPGS.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Table of Contents 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.03 CO-OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.04 MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.05 EXAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.06 CONCEALMENT OF PIPES, DUCTS, TUBING AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.07 SCAFFOLDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ( 1.08 PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.09 LINES, LEVELS AND DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.10 FASTENINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.11 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.12 ACCESS TO EXISTING PREMISES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.14 CO-ORDINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.15 COLD WEATHER WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.16 SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 .1 Heat. Heating Equipment and Shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 .2 Weather Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .3 Dust Screens and Hoardings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .4 Hoisting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .5 Toilets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .8 Field Offices and Storage Sheds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 Temporary Light and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 .10 Barricades. Safety Fencing and Traffic Control 10 1.18 OVERLOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.19 FINAL CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.20 ACCESS TO SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.21 MAINTENANCE MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 t1.22 EXISTING SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.23 RECORD DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.24 CLOSING OFF AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.25 TAKE-OVER PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.26 FIRE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.27 VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.28 PROGRESS REPORTS AND PROJECT MEETINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 t1.29 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.30 UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.31 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1.32 DUST CONTROL ON DRIVEWAYS AND IN WORK AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1.33 DAILY REPORTS AND OVERTIME WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1.34 TAX ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.35 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 I SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Table of Contents 1.36 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT 1991 - DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.37 SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.38 SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.39 CASH ALLOWANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.40 QUALITY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.41 SPILLS REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ' 1.42 PROTECTION OF WATER QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless specified otherwise, the provisions of this Section shall apply to all Sections of the specifications. B. Conform to the General Conditions of the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 1994 Stipulated Price Contract as amended by Section 00400, The Supplementary General Conditions, and the Instructions to Bidders (including the Standard Terms and Conditions). ' C. Study all Contract Documents to determine additional work required by your Section on which the work of other Sections depend. D. Workmanship shall be of highest quality in accordance with best standard practice for this type of work, except where specified more precisely. F. All materials shall be exactly as specified or approved alternate. See Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. iG. It is a requirement of all Sections of the Work to review all the Documents in this Contract, and to make allowances for any and all items of the work of their respective Section regardless of which part of the Drawings and Specifications contain such requirements. The General Contractor is responsible to provide all of the work shown and specified. 1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT ' A. These specifications are not intended as a detailed description of installation methods but serve to indicate particular requirements in the completed work. B. Conform to The Building Code Act, Ontario Reg. 413/90 together with all its related supplements, hereinafter referred to as the"code"or"Code". Where Drawings and Specifications exceed Code requirements provide such additional requirements. C. Where a material is designated on Drawings or in the Specifications for a certain application, unless otherwise specified, that material shall conform to standards designated in the Code. Similarly, unless otherwise specified, installation methods and standards of workmanship shall also conform to standards invoked by the aforementioned Code. Where no particular material is specified for a certain use, the Contractor shall select from the choice offered in the Code in each case. D. Where the aforementioned Code or this specification does not provide all information necessary for complete installation of an item, then the manufacturer's instructions for first quality workmanship shall be strictly complied with. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 , SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 2 1.03 CO-OPERATION A. Cooperate with and coordinate with other trades as required for the satisfactory and expeditious completion of the work. Take field dimensions relative to this work. Fabricate and erect work to suit field dimensions and field conditions. Provide all forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to be fixed to or inserted in the work and set in place or instruct the related trades as to their location. Pay the cost of extra work caused by and make up time lost as the result of failure to provide the necessary cooperation, information or items to be fixed to , or built in, in adequate time. 1.04 MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store packaged materials in original, undamaged condition with manufacturers' , labels and seals intact. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturers' and suppliers' recommendations and in manner to prevent damage to materials during storage and handling. Replace damaged materials. Material storage within the Owner's buildings shall be approved by the Owner. 1.05 EXAMINATION i A. Examine the work upon which your work depends. Report to Consultant in writing defects in such work. The commencement of your work or any part of it, shall be deemed acceptance of the work upon which your work or that part of it which has been applied depends. B. Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are intended to convey scope of work and indicate general and approximate location, arrangement and sizes of fixtures and equipment. Obtain more accurate information about locations, arrangement and sizes from study and coordination of shop drawings, including architectural, structural, mechanical, sanitary and electrical drawings and become familiar with conditions and spaces affecting these matters before proceeding with work. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make changes at no additional cost to Owner. Similarly, where existing conditions interfere with new installation and require relocation, include such relocation in the work of this Contract. Install and arrange fixtures and equipment in such a way as to conserve as much headroom and space as possible. I 7100-01005.wpd IDIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 3 1.06 CONCEALMENT OF PIPES DUCTS, TUBING AND WIRING A. Pipes, ducts, tubing and wiring shall be concealed in the floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas wherever possible except where specified more Precisely. If any doubt arises as to the means of concealment, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Consultant before proceeding with the portion of the work in question. B. Mechanical and Electrical work shall be inspected and tested before being concealed. 1.07 SCAFFOLDING A. Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Use it in such a manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades. When not in use, move it as necessary to permit installation of other work. Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner. Remove it promptly when no longer required. B. Design and construct scaffolding in accordance with CSA S269.2-M. 1.08 PROTECTION A. Conform to the Ontario Ministry of Labour requirements and all applicable safety standards. B. Adequately protect trowelled concrete sub-floors and finished flooring from damage. Take special measures when moving heavy loads or equipment on finish floor slabs or flooring. C. Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affect bond of applied surfaces. 1 D. Damaged work shall be made good by appropriate trades but at the expense of those causing damage. rE. Protect existing Buildings, surfaces, equipment and work. Repair or replace any damage at no extra expense to the Owner, until final acceptance. 1.09 LINES, LEVELS AND DIMENSIONS A. Lay outwork in accordance with lines and levels shown on Drawings and existing conditions. B. Verify lines, levels and dimensions and report errors or inconsistencies in the Drawings to Consultant before commencing shop drawing or the work. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 4 1.09 LINES, LEVELS AND DIMENSIONS (Cont'd) C. Levels and dimensions necessary to relate the work of one Section to another , Section are the responsibility of the General Contractor. 1.10 FASTENINGS A. Supply all fastenings, anchors and accessories and adhesives required for fabrication and erection of the work. B. Exposed metal fastenings and accessories shall be of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur. C. Metal fastenings shall be of the same material as the metal component they are anchoring or of a metal which will not result in an electrolytic action which would cause damage to the fastening or metal component under moist or acidic conditions. D. Anchoring and fastening devices or adhesive shall be of appropriate type and shall be used in sufficient quantity in such a manner as to provide positive permanent anchorage of the unit to be anchored in position. Install anchors at spacing to provide for required load carrying capacity. E. Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, evenly spaced and neatly laid out. F. Supply adequate instructions and templates and, if necessary, supervise installation where fastenings or accessories are required to be built into work of other trades. G. Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is , being made are not permitted. H. Powder actuated fastening devices will not be permitted on this project. t I. Fasteners and anchors into precast concrete slabs shall be as approved by the precast manufacturer for size and location. The General Contractor shall obtain written instructions from the precast supplier and shall make such instructions available to all trades. 1.11 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS A. Where a reference is made to specification standards produced by various organizations, conform to latest edition of standards, as amended and revised to date of Contract. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 5 1.11 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS (Cont'd) B. Have a copy of each specified standard which relates to your work available on the site to be produced immediately on Consultant's request. C. Where a standard designates authorities such as the "Engineer", the "Owner" (when used in a sense other than that defined in the General Conditions) the "Purchaser"or some other such designation, these designations shall be taken to mean the Consultant. D. Wherever the words"acceptable", "approved", "satisfactory", "selected", "directed", ' "submit", or similar words or phrases are used in standards or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, it shall be understood that they mean, unless the context provides otherwise, "acceptable to the Consultant", "approved by the Consultant", "satisfactory to the Consultant", "selected by the Consultant", "directed by the Consultant", inspected by the Consultant", instructed by the Consultant", "required by the Consultant" and "submit to the Consultants". I1.12 ACCESS TO EX15TING PREMISES A. Wherever the Contractor contemplates entering any area of existing premises to carry out work or to obstruct or take out of use any area of existing premises, he shall request a meeting with the Owner and Consultant in order to reach agreement as to time and length of time he may possess, obstruct or remove from use any such area. Provide the Owner and the Consultant with at least 72 hours prior notice of such meetings. B. The Contractor shall make himself aware of all production restraints on the work of this contract. Hardship claims due to failure to do so will not be considered. C. All vehicle access to the site shall be via the driveway entrance at Regional Road 57. The existing driveway on King Street, and the west parking lot are off limits to construction traffic and parking. 1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch and make good to leave work in a finished condition where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered. B. Do cutting and patching in the following manner. 1 Regardless of which Subcontractor or Section of the specifications is responsible for any portion of cutting and patching work, in each case tradesmen qualified in the work being cut and patched shall be employed to ensure that it is correctly done. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 ' SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 6 1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING (Cont'd) .2 Do not cut, drill or sleeve load-bearing members without first obtaining , Consultant's written authority for each condition. .3 Drill work carefully, leaving clean hole not larger than required. This applies to both new and existing work. .4 Cut holes after they are located by trades requiring them. .5 Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges. Fit units to tolerances established by existing work and in conformance with best standard ' practice for applicable class of work. Make patches invisible in finished work. .6 Wherever it becomes necessary to cut or interfere in any manner with , existing services and apparatus, do so at such times as approved by the Consultant. Give minimum advance notice of ten (10) days of such requirements. .7 Co-ordinate work of your Section with work of other Sections, taking into ' account existing installations to assure best arrangement of components in available space. For critical locations review with Consultant before commencing work. .8 Cutting of precast concrete slabs shall be done only with the written permission of the precast manufacturer and in strict accordance with his printed directions. 1.14 CO-ORDINATION A. The Contractor shall co-ordinate all sections of the work. The responsibility as to which subcontractor, or supplier provides labour, material, equipment or services rests solely with the Contractor. The Consultant will not be required to settle disputes between the Contractor and subcontractors or suppliers. 1.15 COLD WEATHER WORKING A. Particular attention is drawn to the requirement that the Contractor shall commence , work immediately upon Contract award and shall continue full scale operations until the work is completed and accepted by the Consultant. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 7 ' 1.15 COLD WEATHER WORKING (Cont'd) ' B. It is understood that the STIPULATED PRICE includes all costs for the provision of temporary heating, temporary shelters and all other necessary cold weather measures to enable all trades including any assigned sub-trades to proceed without delay regardless of weather, to complete the entire building. ' 1.16 SCHEDULES A Immediately after award of the Contract submit, in a form approved by the Consultant, a progress schedule for the work of the entire Contract. B. Include with the schedule if requested by the Consultant a cash flow chart calendarized on a monthly basis in an approved manner. The cash flow chart shall indicate anticipated Contractor's monthly progress billings from commencement of the work to completion. C. Completely update the progress schedule and cash flow chart whenever changes occur to the scheduling and in a manner and at times satisfactory to the Consultant. D. The Contractor shall provide all premium time required to meet the Owner's scheduled start dates for installation of his equipment and for start of tryout period. E. Submit a shop drawing schedule to the consultant prior to commencement of the work. 1.17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Provide, install, maintain and locate where directed the following temporary facilities for the work and for all trades except where specified otherwise and remove them upon completion of the work: .1 Heat. Heating Equipment and Shelter The Contractor must keep that work which requires protection from cold adequately warm and sheltered from elements so that it may be done safely and with good workmanship meeting all code requirements. Provide minimum required temperatures and do everything necessary to produce a suitable environment for work to proceed without delay at all times of the year. The Owners electricity may not be used at any time for winter heat. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 8 ' 1.17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES (ConCd) .2 Weather Protection Provide adequate weather protection around and over all openings during the progress of the work to prevent damage to the existing building and ' completed work. Insulate openings or provide temporary heat to maintain comfort conditions in the area during construction. .3 Dust Screens and Hoardings ' Maintain adequate dust screens around demolition areas to protect buildings, equipment and staff. Schedule excessively noisy and dusty operations as approved by the Owner. Install hoarding where necessary to protect existing building during , construction. Hoarding shall be full height, insulated, wood partitions as described in Division 6. , .4 Hoisting Equipment Hoisting equipment shall be provided and operated by a fully qualified hoist operator, all trades making their own financial arrangements with Contractor for use thereof. .5 Toilets Provide toilet facilities for all personnel on the work. Toilets shall be in accordance with the Ministry of Labour requirements and shall include running, potable water. Keep facilities clean and sanitary and provided with supplies at all times. Remove wastes from the site. ' .6 Ventilation Provide minimum 1 air change per hour for enclosed structures receiving architectural finishes. Prior to commencement of work where hazardous or volatile adhesives, coatings, or substances are used, install adequate mechanical ventilation. Do not allow excessive build-up of moisture inside building. 7 e Water is available at the site for the contractors normal use. Excessive use of water will not be permitted, and the contractor will be required to supply water when the Owner determines that excessive use has or will occur. 7100-01005.wpd r rDIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 9 1.17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES (Cont'd) .7 Water(Cont'd) Conveniently locate water supply for use by all Sections of Work. Protect water lines against freezing. Water shall be potable and meet requirements specified under technical ' sections of specifications. .8 Field Offices and Storage Sheds rA. Space and locations for field offices and storage sheds for the contractors own use shall be assigned by the Owner. ' B. The Contractor shall provide a room 20' x 12' minimum for the conducting of regular project meetings with the Owner and Consultant. The room shall be suitably heated, lighted and furnished to the satisfaction of the Consultant, and shall be equipped with a telephone and facsimile machine and photocopier for the use of the Consultant and Owner. .9 Tempora[y Light and Power rA. 208 Volt power is available at the site for the Contractor's use. B. The Contractor shall provide all temporary electrical lighting and ' power systems for use by all trades. C. Where power requirements exceed 208 Volt service, the Contractor ' shall arrange, obtain and pay for service of sufficient size to allow use of required tools and equipment and adequate lighting levels for the proper execution of the work. The Contractor will be responsible for the supply, installation, maintenance and removal of the following: r1) Distribution transformers. 2) Distribution panel boards. 3) Branch wiring. 4) Grounding. 5) Lighting Fixtures. 6) Power Centres/Outlets. All equipment used shall be CSA approved. 1 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 10 ' 1.17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES (Cont'd) .9 Temporary Light and Power(Cont'd) Wiring and method of installation shall conform to Ontario Hydro requirements and shall be reviewed by the Owner and the Consultant prior to installation. D. Temporary lighting as necessary will be provided by the General ' Contractor. .10 Barricades. Safety Fencing and Traffic Control A. Provide all necessary barricades, fencing, hoarding and railings to protect the work areas and prevent access by unauthorized ' personnel from entering the site. Provide all necessary safety screens and hoarding to protect pedestrians and vehicles passing through the work area when necessary. B. Provide all required flagmen and watchmen to safely direct traffic around the work areas. 1.18 OVERLOADING A. Load no art of structure during construction with loads greater than calculated to p 9 9 be supported safely when completed. Make every temporary support as strong as permanent support. Place no load on concrete slabs until they have achieved , sufficient strength to safely carry such load. 1.19 FINAL CLEANING ' A. Keep building and site free from accumulation of dirt, debris and excess materials. , Remove oily rags and waste from premises at close of each day, or more often if required. B. Vacuum clean all areas prior to painting. Take care to settle and minimize dust , before painting begins. Use commercial type vacuum cleaners. C. Close rooms and areas finished by painter and decorators to all but authorized ' persons. D. On completion of work remove stains and smudges from paint work, hardware, aluminum and other finished surfaces and wash and polish glass. 7100-01005.wpd t r ' DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 11 1.19 FINAL CLEANING (Cont'd) ' E. Replace all broken, damaged or scratched glass other than those which have been broken or damaged by those installing them which shall be replaced by the installers. F. Use appropriate apparatus and cleaning materials. Clean manufactured articles in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions in each case. G. Upon completion of final cleaning, remove cleaning equipment, materials and debris from the Building and Site. H. Trademarks and labels will not be visible in the finished work. Where necessary, remove all trademarks and labels to the entire satisfaction of the owner. 1.20 ACCESS TO SITE ' A. Height, width and weight restrictions must be verified by the Contractor prior to bringing equipment into the work area. 1.21 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prior to issuance of the final certificate, assemble all warranties and guarantees submitted by manufacturers and called for throughout the specifications and printed or type-written copies of recommended maintenance procedures from those doing the work of each Section whose materials require regular maintenance on the part of the Owner. ' Assemble this information in triplicate in matching 3-ring binders and deliver to the Consultant. Each binder shall contain a complete list of contents. Manuals shall be submitted and approved prior to final inspection. 1.22 EXISTING SERVICES A. Carry out the breaking into or connecting to existing services at such hours and times as recommended by the governing authorities and approved by the ' Consultant, and with no disturbance to the existing Complex. 1.23 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Obtain sepia of floor plan and record any revisions to the work as detailed and shown on the Drawings. Provide Consultant with this sepia at completion of work. Recording of the 'as-built' changes shall be performed on a day-to-day basis. ' 7100-01005.wpd r DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 12 r 1.24 CLOSING OFF AREAS A. Close off access routes by placing barricades or to prevent unauthorized personnel r from having access to areas of the work. Unauthorized personnel shall mean the Owner's employees and anyone not directly concerned with the execution, supervision or inspection of the work. Obtain prior written approval from the Owner ' at least 10 working days in advance of any required closings . 1.25 TAKE-OVER PROCEDURE ' A. Take-over procedures will be as defined in the OAA/OGCA Document 100 dated November 1983"Recommended procedures concerning substantial performance of construction contracts and completion take-over of projects." 1.26 FIRE PROTECTION r A. The Contractor shall provide temporary fire protection throughout the course of ' construction. Particular attention shall be paid to the elimination of fire hazards. 1.27 VERIFICATION , A. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall carefully check the drawings and , specifications and shall draw to the attention of the Consultant any apparent discrepancies or dimensional errors before proceeding with the work. Any job deviation from the specifications and drawings shall be drawn to the attention of the Consultant for decision before proceeding with the work. The Contractor and r all sub-contractors shall check and verify all dimensions at the job wherever referring to the work. All dimensions when pertaining to the work of other trades shall be verified with the Contractor concerned prior to start of the work. r 1.28 PROGRESS REPORTS AND PROJECT MEETINGS , A. The Contractor shall keep a permanent written record on the site of the progress of the work. This record shall be open to the inspection of the Consultant at all r reasonable times and a copy shall be furnished to the Consultant upon request. B. The record shall show the dates of commencement and completion of the different trades and parts of the work coming under the Contract and shall include particulars regarding daily weather conditions, demolition work, erection work, etc., and number of employees of the various trades engaged on the work. 1 r 7100-01005.wpd r DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 ' GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 13 1.28 PROGRESS REPORTS AND PROJECT MEETINGS (Cont'd) C. After the award of the Contract and in consultation with the Consultant, the Contractor shall arrange regular weekly (or as otherwise required by the Owner) project meetings. The Contractor and the Owner shall be represented at these meetings, as well as any sub-contractor or supplier as may be invited to specific meetings. Minutes of such meetings shall be recorded by the Contractor, who shall forward a copy to all parties in attendance within three (3) days of the meeting. D. Prior to the regular project meetings with the Owner and Consultant the Contractor shall hold meetings with his workers and/or his sub-contractors and/or suppliers. Minutes of such meetings shall be submitted to the Consultant and Owner. E. During the course of the work on the site, the Contractor shall hold safety meetings ' at least weekly with his subtrades. The Contractor shall minute such meetings and submit same to the Consultant and all present. This does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to inform the Consultant and the Owner immediately of any accident or unsafe conditions. 1.29 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS A. All work or material delivered on the site or premises to form part of the works, shall be considered the property of the Contractor until installed and shall not be removed without the consent of the Owner, but the Contractor shall have the right to and shall remove the surplus material after he has completed the work. If so directed by the Consultant, such surplus material shall be removed at any time prior to the completion of the work. B. The General Contractors shall note that all demolition materials, concrete, steel, etc., shall be removed from the Owner's property, and disposed of at a location arranged for by the Contractor, and at the Contractor's expense, unless specifically noted otherwise. ' C. All material and equipment indicated on the Drawings to be removed and handed to the Owner shall be carefully removed and delivered to an area on the property as directed by the Consultant. Any damage to the removed materials that are to remain the property of the Owner shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant. 1.30 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all utilities where required. However, no claims will be considered which are based on delays or inconvenience resulting from relocation due to the Contractor failing to provide adequate protection. I7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 14 , 1.30 UTILITIES (Confd) B. The location and depth of any underground utilities shown on the Contract , Drawings are based on the investigations made by the Owner. It is, however, the Contractors responsibility to contact the Owner for further information in regard to the exact location of all utilities to exercise the necessary care in construction , operations and to take such other precautions as are necessary to safeguard the utilities from damage. 1.31 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY A. The attention of the Contractor and all sub-contractors is drawn to the fact that a , total safety program is in effect on the Owner's property and shall be strictly adhered -to. The Contractor will obtain a copy of the Municipality's "Corporate ' Safety and Health/Loss Control Plan", and shall adhere to the policies of this plan including the dress code for on the job safety. B. Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991 The Contractor shall obey all Federal, Provincial, and Municipal Laws, Acts, , Ordinances, Regulations, Orders-in-Council and By-laws, which could in any way pertain to the work outlined in the Contract or to the Employees of the Contractor. Without limiting the. generality of the foregoing, the Contractor shall satisfy all statutory requirements imposed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations made thereunder, on a Contractor, a Constructor and/or Employer with respect to or arising out of the performance of the Contractor's obligations under this Contract. , C. Confined Space If applicable to this project, the Contractor shall provide the Municipality with a copy of its Confined Space Entry Procedures and, in the event that the Contractor does not have defined procedures, the said Contractor shall abide by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and regulations made thereunder and any procedures of the Municipality of Clarington. The Contractor shall be aware of and confirm to all governing regulations, including those established by the Municipality, related to employee health and safety. The Contractor shall keep employees and Sub-Contractors informed of such regulations. D. The Owner subscribes to the principle that the safety of all persons, whether they be invitees or licensees, be maintained to all practicable extent, during all periods of time such persons remain on the Owner's property. 71oa01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 ' GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 15 1.31 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY (Cont'd) ' E. The supervisor of the project, representing the Contractor, will be responsible for his employees and subcontractors/suppliers maintaining standard safety practices, as well as the specific safety rules listed below. F. The following Acts and the regulations made thereunder(latest revisions), shall not be contravened: i) The Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Industrial Establishments ' ii) The Power Commission Act iii) The Boiler and Pressure Vessels Act iv) The Elevators and Lifts Act ' v) The Operating Engineer's Act vi) The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1991 and Regulations for Construction Projects vii) The Building Code viii) The Municipality of Clarington Corporate Safety Plan. ix) The Ministry of Labour X) The Fire Marshals Act A) Any other act or regulation of any authority having jurisdiction. G. The Owner reserves the right to order individuals to leave the site if the individual is in violation of any safety requirement or any Act, any expense incurred will be the responsibility of the Contractor. H. Without restricting the generality of the foregoing clauses, the following specific safety rules have been written: ' .1 Hard Hats- Hard Hats must be worn in construction area. The Contractor shall provide CSA approved hard hats for use by all visitors. .2 Safety Harness-A safety harness with a life line attached shall be worn by employees working in tanks or bins or in any area where there is a danger of anyone being overcome by fumes, or where it would be difficult to remove a man in case of emergency. An attendant must be stationed outside to render aid in case of trouble. .3 lRadlocks and Danger Tags - Where there is a danger of equipment being energised, the motor switch on all individual motor drives shall be locked in the open position. The Contractor shall affix his own lock (I man = I lock) and in addition, a danger tag shall also be applied to the switch handle bearing a brief description of the work being done. The tag and lock shall remain in place until the work has been completed. In the case where air, steam or liquid is the motivating power the valves shall be locked in the closed position and blanked. 7100-01005.,pe DIVISION 1 ' SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 16 1.31 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY (Cont'd) .4 Electrical-Only three-wire grounded equipment shall be used for a 110 volt , power supply. Plugs and cords shall be in good repair. Under no circumstances shall a connection be made to such an outlet , except through an approved three-wire plug. Insertion of bare wires in a female outlet is strictly prohibited. .5 Fire Protection -The use of extension lights, electric drills, emery grinding wheels or any spark emitting device shall not be permitted in any area where flammable liquids are stored or used. No flammable liquids may be brought onto the site unless they are stored in approved safety cans. ' .6 Oxygen - Acetylene and Arc Welding: If a gasoline powered generator is used, adequate ventilation must be provided. All electrical supply lines for arc welding must be kept in good repair. .7 Compressed Gas Cylinders-The following rules shall apply to compressed r gas cylinders on Owner's property: i) Storage - All compressed gas cylinders must be stored in a ventilated area which is located away from traffic and free from falling material. Full cylinders must be stored in a separate area from empty cylinders. In all cases cylinders must be fastened ' securely in an upright position, the valves closed and safety caps in place, hand tight. ii) Transportation - All cylinders being transported must be fastened ' securely in an upright position with the safety caps in place. No cylinder full or empty shall be transported lying across the forks of , lift trucks, shop trucks, etc. iii) Usage - During use, cylinders must be fastened securely in an upright position in an approved cart. In no case shall cylinders be used in a lying down position on shop trucks, stock baskets, etc. They shall never be used as rollers or for any purpose other than to carry. gas. Cylinders must be kept away from sparks, slag or excessive heat. Oil or grease should never come in contact with the bottles, lines or gauges. 7100-01005.wpd ' DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 17 ' 1.31 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY Cont'd iv) Disposition of Empty Cylinders-When cylinders are empty, they are to be taken to the empty storage area immediately. In no case are the empty cylinders to be left standing in the work area or left lying on the floor, on scrap heaps, shop trucks or left in the yard. When the Contract is complete, the Contractor will be responsible for removing all cylinders under their jurisdiction from the Owner's property. .8 Equipment- General ' All straight ladders must be free of damage; i.e. cracks or broken rungs, and must have adequate safety feet. They must not be placed on boxes, etc. or placed in a doorway unless someone is stationed at the bottom. All ladders must be tied-off. ' Scaffolds must be in good condition and if equipped with wheels, the wheels must be locked when in use. Planking on scaffold must meet the requirements of the Occupational ' Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects. Suspended loads must not be left unattended and must not be moved over the heads of anyone. When overhead work is in progress, the floor area should be roped off to prevent possible injury to anyone working or passing below. No one is to work over hot or corrosive materials without proper planking in addition to a safety belt and life line. Lift trucks must be equipped with an overhead screen guard and the forks ' must be straight and properly positioned. In addition, the vehicle should be large enough for the work involved. All welders and gasoline powered equipment to be vented to exterior. .9 Housekeeping Scrap and refuse should be removed from the worts area daily. ' Oily and waste solvent rags are a fire hazard and should be deposited in approved containers. Conduit, pipe or structural steel must not be left in such a way that it constitutes a hazard. 7100-01005:.pd DIVISION 1 , SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 18 , 1.31 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY (Cont'd) .9 Housekeeping (Cont'd) All openings in the roof or floor must be guarded to prevent anyone from falling through or to prevent stock or scrap from dropping down. , Outside holes or pits must be guarded and provided with warning lights. Loose equipment, tools, etc., must be cleaned off overhead areas before leaving each day. Boards with protruding nails must not be left on the floor. In addition, bolts, ' etc., must be cut off at floor level to eliminate a possible tripping hazard. Access routes to and from the work area from exterior shall be kept free from the accumulation of waste products and dirt. 1.32 DUST CONTROL ON DRIVEWAYS AND IN WORK AREAS ' A. The Contractor will be solely responsible for controlling dust nuisances resulting , from his operations, both within the work limits and elsewhere. Quantities of water and calcium chloride shall be supplied and applied by the Contractor to those areas as being necessary and unavoidable for the prevention of dust nuisance or hazard to the area, as directed by the Consultant at no additional cost. B. Care shall be taken to control dust within the building. The Contractor shall provide adequate protections and dust screens to the complete satisfaction of the t Consultant and as indicated on the drawings. 1.33 DAILY REPORTS AND OVERTIME WORK A. Sunday and Statutory Holiday Work , .1 Work may be permitted on Sundays, only with written permission from the Municipality , and only to such extent as he may judge to be necessary. ' .2 Under special circumstances, approval may be given for work on Statutory Holidays, at the discretion of the Municipality of Clarington. The Contractor ' must submit written notification at least four (4) days in advance of the Statutory Holiday on which he desires to work, indicating the location and nature of the work to be performed. The Contractor must obtain written , permission from the Municipality of Clarington authorizing work on a specific Statutory Holiday. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 19 1.34 TAX ASSISTANCE The Contractor shall provide to the Owner the following or other necessary information for tax purposes in respect to the Contract if so requested: a) Material Cost b) Field Labour Cost c) Freight Charges d) Custom Duties and Excise Taxes e) Goods and Services Tax f) Provincial Retail Sales Tax 1.35 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ' A. Workplace Hazardous Material Information System (WHMIS) Prior to the commencement of work the Contractor shall provide, to the Consultant, a list of those products controlled under WHMIS which he expects to use on this Contract. Related Material Safety Data Sheets shall accompany the submission. ' All containers used in the application of products controlled under WHMIS shall be labelled. The Contractor shall notify the Consultant of changes to the list in writing and provide the relevant Material Safety Data Sheets. B. "Hazardous Materials"will not be introduced for experimental or any other use prior to being evaluated for hazards. C. Many common construction materials such as asbestos pipe and various insulations are hazardous materials or contain hazardous materials and may not be used under any circumstances. D. When any material, which constitutes a hazard, is to be used, the Owners and Consultant should be consulted prior to bid submission to ensure adequate allowances have been made for the proper procedures to be followed at all times. 1.36 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT 1991 - DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 18a(1) of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, the Authority has determined that no designated substances as ' listed hereunder are present on the site and within the limits of this Contract. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 20 1.36 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT 1991 - DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES (Cont'd) ii. y �} 4titi:•i:•iiiiY.•i:v:•i'v:••i:i•:,,, ii'F x '13�...:.f ..:.. ::;!TFi. .7:,� Vk, ;...,.::�...'�F,7iF,:1;��•�; . :,':•.,�,,+:lie„.r• ..��i ,.• ,... v::•+:•:::::::;}.•:i::if:•..:nv::::;•:w:+.:•%iG::::;•:•:f:i•s •:i;n....r .w::.•:8.v•.v•:•:•.+.+.: .,:v.. ..:••• ... h,;i•t. Acrylonitrile Arsenic Asbestos Benzene Coke Oven Emissions ' Ethylene Oxide Isocynates ' Lead Mercury Silica Vinyl Chloride , B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all Sub-Contractors performing work under this Contract have received a copy of this specification, where Designated Substances are identified as being present at the site of the work. C. The Contractor shall comply with the governing Ministry of Labour Regulations , respecting protection of workers, removal, handling and disposition of the Designated Substances encountered on this Contract. D. Prior to the commencement of this work, the Contractor shall provide written notification to the Ministry of the Environment at 7 Overlea Boulevard, Toronto, , Ontario, M4H 1A8, of the location(s) proposed for disposal of Designated Substances. A copy of the notification shall be provided to the Contract Administrator a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance of work starting. ' E. In the event that the Ministry of the Environment has concerns with any proposed disposal location, further notification shall be provided until the Ministry of the Environment's concerns have been addressed. F. All costs associated with the removal and disposition of Designated Substances herein identified, shall be deemed to be included in the appropriate tender items. G. Should a Designated Substance not herein identified be encountered in the work, then management of such substance shall be treated as Extra Work. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 21 1.37 SECURITY ' A. Be responsible for security of all areas affected by work of this Contract, until taken over by Owner. fB. Take steps to prevent entry to the work by unauthorized persons and guard against theft, fire and damage by any cause. 1.38 SIGNS A. With the exception of project sign, safety signs or notices do not erect any signs unless approved by the Consultant. B. Erect signs related to safety on the work, or mandatory regulation notices. C. Prior to commencement of work wherein hazardous or volatile cements, coatings, ' or substances are used, barricade entire area and post adequate number of"NO SMOKING" signs. ' 1.39 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Comply with requirements specified herein and with applicable requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Unless otherwise specified, cash allowances shall cover the cost of the materials and equipment delivered F.O.B.job site, and all applicable taxes. The Contractor's handling costs on the site, labour, installation costs, overhead and profit and other expenses shall be included separately in the Contract Sum and not in the Cash Allowance. C. Where it is specified that a cash allowance is to include both supply and installation costs, such allowances shall cover the cost of the materials and equipment delivered and unloaded at the site, all applicable taxes, and the Contractor's handling costs on the site, labour and installation costs, and other expenses, except overhead and profit which shall be included separately in Contract Sum. D. Cash allowance for independent inspection and testing shall cover the cost of such services as provided by independent testing agency only. The Contractor's cost for labour, overhead and other expenses shall be included separately in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance. E. If the cost of the Work covered by allowances, when determined, is more or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change ' Order. ' 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 22 , 1.39 CASH ALLOWANCES (Cont'd) F. The Contractor shall cause the work covered by allowances to be performed for , such amounts and by such persons as the Architect may select and direct. G. Expenditures from cash allowances shall be authorized in writing by the Consultant. Trade Discounts and refunds shall be credited to the owner; only cash discounts (if any) on accounts paid by the Contractor before net due date being retained by the Contractor. ' H. Refer to Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, for list of Cash Allowances. 1.40 QUALITY CONTROL A. Requirements specified herein apply to independent inspection and testing i specified under technical Specification Sections: B. Requirements specified herein do not apply to the following: .1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and , orders by public authorities. .2 Testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. .3 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience. C. Refer to technical specification sections for specific inspection and testing requirements. D. Testing agency shall do the following: .1 Act on a professional and unprejudiced basis and carry out inspection and testing functions to establish compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. .2 Check work as it progresses. Failure to detect defective work or materials shall not in any way present later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate Consultant for final acceptance. .3 Prepare reports stating results of tests and conditions of work and state in each report whether specimens tested conform to requirements of Contract Documents, specifically noting deviations. ' 7100-01005.wpd t DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 23 1.40 QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd) .4 Distribute reports as follows: a) Consultant-4 copies b) Contractor-2 copies Testing agency is not authorized to amend or release any requirements of Contract ' Documents, nor to approve or reject any portion of work. E. Contractor shall do the following: 1 Notify testing agency 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. ' .2 Provide testing agency with access to work at all times. .3 Supply material samples for testing. .4 Supply casual labour and other incidental services required by testing ' agency. .5 Provide facilities for site storage of samples. ' F. When initial inspection and testing indicates noncompliance with Contract Documents, any subsequent reinspection and retesting occasioned by ' noncompliance shall be performed by same testing agency and cost thereof borne by Contractor. G. Employment of independent testing agency shall in no way relieve Contractor of ' his obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements. ' 1.41 SPILLS REPORTING A. Spills or discharges of pollutants or contaminants under the control of the Contractor, and spills or discharges of pollutants or contaminants that are a result of the Contractors operations that cause or are likely to cause adverse effects shall forthwith be reported to the Consultant. Such spills or discharges and their adverse effects shall be as defined in the Environmental Protection Act R.S.O. 1980. B. All spills or discharges of liquid, other than accumulated rain water, from luminaries, internally illuminated signs, lamps, and liquid type transformers under the control of the Contractor, and all spills or discharges from this equipment that are a result of the Contractors operations shall, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract, be ' assumed to contain PCB's and shall forthwith be reported to the Consultant. ' 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 24 1.41 SPILLS REPORTING (Cont'd) C. This reporting will not relieve the Contractor of his legislated responsibilities regarding such spills or discharges. 1.42 PROTECTION OF WATER QUALITY A. At all times, the Contractor shall maintain existing stream flows and shall control all construction work so as to allow sediment or other deleterious materials to enter streams. B. No waste or surplus organic material including topsoil is to be stored or disposed ' of within 30 metres of any watercourses. Run-off from excavation piles will not be permitted to drain directly into watercourses but shall be diffused onto vegetative ' areas a minimum of 30 metres from the watercourse. Where this measure is not sufficient or feasible to control sediment entering the watercourses, sedimentation traps or geotextile coverage will be required. C. If dewatering is required, the water shall be pumped into a sedimentation pond or diffused onto vegetated areas a minimum of 30 metres from the watercourses and not pumped directly into the watercourses. 7100-01005.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATION ' A. Work of this project is required to be constructed in stages and Contractor's use of site and premises may be limited to permit Owner to occupy and use facilities in accordance with scheduling requirements and commitments and with the least ' amount of inconvenience and disturbance possible. B. At all times restrict construction personnel, operations and procedures to designated locations and do not deviate from required procedures without prior approval by Owner. C. Periodically review proposed construction operations with Owner and Consult and co-operate as required to ensure that Owner's interests and requirements are not unduly compromised. D. Take over and assume responsibility for the area encompassed in this contract until Substantial Performance except as otherwise indicated. ' E. Provide and maintain access for Owner's staff and the public to areas designated for early take-over and occupancy. Carry out work at times and in manner preventing unreasonable interference with Owner's existing operations and use of ' facilities. Maintain access to the building and egress from occupied areas of the building to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code at all times. ' F. Erect dustproof,fire resistant screens to separate work areas from areas occupied by Owner. Control spread of dust and noxious fumes to occupied areas. Prevent disruption of life safety systems to occupied areas. Maintain required exits. G. Provide temporary weatherproof, insulated closures to protect openings made in exterior walls and roofs. H. Owner intends to store materials and equipment in designated areas within existing building. Be responsible for and protect such materials and equipment until ' Substantial Performance. ' 1.02 SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS A. It is mandatory that the Owner maintain full operation and program activities at the Garnet B. Rickard Recreation Complex for the duration of the work of this contract. ' E:\WORDPERFEC'RWPDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-01 100.wpd DIVISION 0 , SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 1.02 SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd) There may be periods during construction where no excessive noise can occur and ' these operations would have to be scheduled at an approved time. Allowances must be made for this special scheduling and hardship or delay claims will not be ' considered. The following scheduling requirements shall apply: ' .1 Commence construction November 20, 1997. .2 The existing ice surface will be shut down from approximately May 1 to , August 8, 1998 and all work related to the relocation of the refrigeration equipment and ice resurfacer equipment will be completed during this period. .3 Construction adjacent to, and demolition of existing service room at the southeast comer of the existing building may commence only following shutdown of the ice surface on approximately May 1, 1998. Access to these areas must remain clear at all times and the contractor will schedule , construction of the new building accordingly. Refer to detailed demolition and sequencing notes on the drawings. .4 Electrical service, gas service and fire protection (sprinklers) must remain ' in place without disruption, at all times during construction. The owner at its discretion will arrange for a three (3) day period when these services may be shut down, at which time, all service connections and associated , work will be completed. .5 Access must be provided for trucks into the existing arena for the Home Show from April 30 to May 4, 1998. .6 Total performance of the entire project shall be no later than July 31, 1998. .7 Other detailed requirements will be reviewed on site at the Pre-Bid Site Tour. .8 The existing exit doors at the east and south side of the existing arena must , be in use, providing safe egress form the existing building, during the Home Show (April 30 to May 14). If necessary, at that time, hoarding will be ' provided at the contractor's expense to provide safe egress through the new construction area. B. The Contractor must prepare and submit for approval, a schedule and a work i program based on the above general sequence taking into account key dates and scheduling requirements. E AW ORDPERFECT\W PDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-01100.wpd ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Pagel PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. B. Submit detailed written schedule and a proposal for demolition procedures to Consultant for review prior to commencement of demolition. C. Obtain and pay for all permits, and comply with all laws, rules, ordinances, and regulations relating to Building Demolition, disposal and preservation of public safety. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Removal and disposal of existing masonry. B. Removal and disposal of existing steel siding, sub-girls, insulation, flashings and liner panels. ' C. Removal and disposal of roof deck and roofing. D. Removal and disposal of structural steel and steel joists including framing, bridging etc. E. Removal and disposal of existing stair assemblies. ' F. Removal and disposal of existing windows and doors. G• Saw cutting, breaking out and disposal of existing concrete. H. Removal and disposal of existing finishes including walls, floors, and ceilings. ' I. Removal and disposal of existing cabinet work and fittings. J. All other removals as indicated on the drawings. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Excavating, Backfilling and Grating Section 02200 B. Structural Steel Section 05120 C. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 E. Roofing Section 07530 F. Mechanical Division 15 ' G. Electrical Division 16 ' 7100-02050.wpd DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 2 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES , A. The Building Code, Ontario Regulation 413/90. B. The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1978 and Regulations for Construction ' Projects. C. Laws, rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction. S D. The Ontario Fire Code, a regulation of the Fire Marshals Act. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS , A. Materials from demolition shall become the property of the Contractor unless specified otherwise and shall be removed from the Site the same or next day after demolition. B. All equipment and materials to be handed over to the Owner as indicated on the drawings shall be delivered and unloaded on the Owners property as directed by the Consultant. PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL A. The Contractor shall note that the removal of certain Mechanical and Electrical , equipment and structural steel, is shown on the Mechanical, Electrical and Structural drawings. The Contractor shall fully review these drawings prior to commencement of demolition. B. Before commencing demolition, the Contractor shall verify that existing sprinkler, water, gas, electrical and other services in areas being demolished are cut off, capped diverted or removed as required. Active services to the existing building shall be protected and maintained without interruption, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment which must 1 remain energized to serve adjacent areas during period of demolition. C. Before work is commenced in any section of the existing building, the Owner will , remove .all movable materials and equipment, etc., that do not require disconnecting from services. Material and equipment that cannot be moved shall be protected from damage by the Contractor. , 710"20M."d ! DIVISION 2 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 3 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL (Confd) D. During the execution of the work keep the spread of dust to other building areas to an absolute minimum. Demolition of or alterations to any portion of the existing building shall be commenced only after approval of the Consultant has been obtained, and after weather-tight and dust-proof screens have been erected to provide thorough protection to the adjoining areas. All areas within the existing ' building which are to be altered or are affected by the work of the new addition including areas adjacent thereto shall be thoroughly cleaned by the Contractor's forces daily. ! E. Maintain the work areas and storage areas clean and orderly at all times and free of rubbish and debris. ! F. Provide safe access and egress from working areas using entrances, hallways, stairways or ladder runs, protected to safeguard the personnel using them from falling debris. G. Glass occurring in windows to be removed shall be removed before removal of the window frames is commenced. H. When permission has been granted to proceed with demolition in the various phasing of the work, it shall be carried forth expeditiously and continuously to completion. I. Particular attention shall be paid to prevention of fire and elimination of fire hazards which would endanger new work or existing premises. J. Ensure that all work in the existing building, such as floors, finishes, trim, etc., is protected completely. Cut, patch and make good all existing roofs, walls, floors and other finishes where damaged or affected by the alterations. ! K. All roof decks over which steel, concrete or mechanical equipment are to be hoisted or transported over shall be planked with 50 mm thick minimum planking as a safety precaution. Planking to be of thickness required to prevent the loads being transported from penetrating through the roof decks in the case of the material being accidentally dropped. Planking shall be reviewed by the Owner. ' L. Execute all cutting and removal of existing building walls, floor slabs, structural steel, roof deck, roofing and other removals as indicated on the drawings and as required. Neatly cut existing metal siding and remove block walls to accommodate connections for new structural steel framing. Removing existing sections of walls as indicated. M. All existing concrete to be removed shall be saw cut to a minimum depth of 25 mm ' before breaking out concrete. 7100-02050.wpd DIVISION 2 1 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 4 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL (Cont'd) ' N. The Contractor shall be held responsible for maintaining the existing building in a weather and watertight condition at all times until the completion and acceptance of the work. All damage caused to the building interior/exterior and/or equipment, etc. of the existing buildings by the neglect of the Contractor or any of his forces shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor including all costs and charges which may be claimed by the Owner for damages or loss of production , suffered. O. The work shall be carried on in such a manner as to cause a minimum of noise or , interference to Owner's operations and the Contractor must secure the approval of the Consultant before proceeding with any work which may cause interference. P. The Contractor throughout the entire construction period shall provide and maintain proper and safe means of fire exit from all zones of the existing building at all times to the approval of the Authorities having jurisdiction and shall include in his tender, all costs for complying therewith as may be necessary. Q. Construct dust-proof screens as directed by the Consultant as required to completely enclose the work areas and the access passages to the work areas from the other areas of the existing building being used, from dust, dirt and the possibility of injury to all persons. , R. Screens shall be adequate to provide the protection noted above. S. The following methods of demolition will not be permitted in the work of this ' Contract: 1. Use of explosives. ' 2. Mechanical method of demolition whereby wrecking is accomplished by smashing the walls or floors with a heavy weight suspended by a cable from a boom or hoist or where masonry walls are collapsed using a power shovel, tractor or other mechanical means. T. At end of each day's work, leave work in safe condition so that no part is in danger of toppling or falling. (Protect interiors of building parts not to be demolished from exterior elements at all times.) ' U. Demolish in a manner to minimize dusting. Keep dusty materials wetted. V. Demolish masonry and concrete walls in small sections. Carefully remove and lower structural framing and other heavy or large objects. W. Selling or burning materials on site is not permitted. ' 7100-02050.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 5 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL (Cont'd) X. Remove contaminated or dangerous materials from site and dispose of in safe manner to minimize danger at site or at any time during disposal. Y. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details clearly showing sequence of disassembly work or supporting structures and underpinning. Z. Drawings for structural elements of the demolition process shall bear signature and stamp of qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. AA. Inspect site and verify with Consultant items designated for removal and items to be preserved prior to starting demolition. BB. Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean. tCC. Reinstate areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to conditions that existed prior to commencement of work. ' DD. At all times protect the structure from overloading. ' EE. Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, adjacent grades, and existing building to remain. Make good damage and be liable for injury caused by demolition. FF. This Contractor shall provide all shoring and bracing required for the execution of the work. 3.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE HANDED OVER TO OWNER A. Carefully remove and hand over to the Owner all items as indicated on the drawings. B. The Owner will remove items with their own forces as indicated on the drawings. 1 7100-02050.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. I1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all excavating, backfilling.and rough grading called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Clearing and grubbing. B. Stripping and grading of site to required elevations. C. Excavation for all footings and foundations. D. Excavation for all site services. E. Haul and dispose of excavated material off-site. ' F. Supply, place and compact granular material around new footings and foundations and below new slab on grade. G. Proof rolling of existing subgrade. H. Supply and place topsoil. 1. Pumping and de-watering of excavations. J. Under slab drainage. IK. Vapour barrier below slabs. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Demolition Section 02050 B. Excavated Caissons Section 02352 C. Asphalt Paving Section 02400 D. Hydraulic Seeding Section 02485 E. Unit Paving Section 02504 F. Concrete Sidewalks Section 02514 G. Concrete Curbs and Gutters Section 02516 H. Planting Section 02950 I. Concrete Work Section 03300 J. Bituminous Damp Proofing Section 07160 K. Building Insulation Section 07200 L. Mechanical Division 15 M. Electrical Division 16 7100-O2200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 2 , 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Earth: Site excavated material, including shale, rubble rock, building debris, shrub and tree roots and soil. B. Soil: Site excavated material, free from shale, rubble rock, building debris, shrub and tree roots. C. Fill: Approved materials, other than earth, clay and unapproved soil. Approved soil maybe used only with approval of the Consultant in writing. D. Rock: All solid rock in ledges, stratified deposits, unstratified masses, and all conglomerate deposits or any other material so firmly cemented by process of nature as to present all the characteristics of solid rock, being so hard or firmly cemented that it cannot be excavated and removed with a power shovel except after thorough and continuous drilling and blasting. E. Backfilling: The operation of supplying and installing fill and approved soil materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Codes, Regulations 1. Conform to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and the Occupational Health and Safety Act, "November 1992 Ontario Regulation 213/91" and , Regulations for Construction Projects. B. Examination 1. Examine the building site and determine the nature and extent of the materials to be removed or the additional fill required to provide depths and levels , indicated on drawings. Field check the site to review existing conditions. C. Setting Out Work 1. The drawings indicate the building components location, and proposed and final grades. The Contractor shall be responsible to construct the work according to levels and locations shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall report any I errors or discrepancies to the Consultant before commencing with the work. Commencement of any part of the work shall constitute acceptance of drawings as being correct. 7100-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 ' EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 3 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) C. Setting Out Work (Cont'd) 2. The Contractor shall employ a competent instrument man and provide all lines and levels, limit lines and boundary stakes for the execution of the work as required. All bench marks shall be carefully protected. 3. The Contractor shall provide all Subcontractors with, and be responsible for, all lines, levels and dimensions which such trades require to relate their work to the 1 work of the Contractor or other trades. All trades shall be notified that all such levels and dimensions must be obtained from the Contractor. D. Inspection and Testing 1. Provide proper and sufficient samples, ample opportunity and access at all times for the Consultant or Testing Agency to inspect materials, operations and completed works carried out under this Section. ' E. Soils Report 1. A soils report prepared by Gibson Associates Ltd. has been completed. The soils report is available at the Consultants Office for review. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protection of Existing Services 1. Before starting the work, verify the location of all known underground services and utilities occurring in the work site area. 2. Notify the Owner, Public Utility or Municipal authorities in advance of planned excavations adjacent to their services. 3. Take care not to damage or displace encountered known and unknown services. 4. When such services are encountered during the execution of work, immediately notify the Consultant and protect, brace and support active services. Where repairs to these services become necessary use the ' following procedure: a. Known services, repair at no expense to the Owner. 7100-02200.wpd r DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 4 , 1.06 PROTECTION (Cont'd) A. Protection of Existing Services (Cont'd) b. Unknown services,forward to the Consultant a complete breakdown r of the estimated cost of such work. When Consultant's signed Change Order has been received, proceed immediately with repairs. The amount approved therefore shall be considered as an addition to the Contract Sum. 5. In the case of damage to, or cutting off of an essential service, notify Consultant, the Owner, and Public Utility or Municipal authorities immediately and repair the service under the Consultant's direction. 6. Inform the Consultant about encountered services requiring adjustment, r relocation or abandonment to arrange for disconnection and capping of pipe. . r B. Shoring and Bracing 1. Shoring and trench timbering, in addition to requirements of local ' authorities, shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of The Occupational Health and Safety Act, "November 1992 Ontario Regulation 213/91" and Regulations for Construction Projects by Ontario Ministry of , Labour and to Construction Safety Association brochure "Trenching Safety April 1994". 2. Erect necessary shoring for excavations in such a manner that: a. Whenever a trench or excavated face is to exceed 1200 mm in r depth or height, the Contractor shall shore and brace to prevent failure. The Contractor shall engage a registered Professional Engineer fully qualified in this line of work to design, stamp shop drawings and assume responsibility for the shoring and bracing. All shop drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant for review as to compatibility with the overall project. b. It will properly retain the banks of the excavations and prevent caving-in or displacement or damage to surrounding or adjacent ' buildings or other property. C. All other work in connection with this Contract, including the , Mechanical and Electrical Trades, may be carried out while it is still in place if necessary. r 7100-02200.wpd 1 1 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 ' EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 5 1.06 PROTECTION (Cont'd) B. Shoring and Bracing (Cont'd) d. It will be entirely free of footings, foundation walls or other such work so that it may be removed entirely or in sections when it is no longer required or when directed, without causing any damage or injury to the structural work that has been completed. C. Work Inside Existing Buildings 1. Notify the Consultant of proposed work schedule for approval seven (7) days prior to commencement. Provide adequate protection around work ' area for Owner's employees. Use only approved access routes. Provide adequate ventilation of equipment exhaust fumes. Control dust in the work area and provide dust enclosure all around the area. 1 D. Work Adiacent to Existing Buildings 1. Exercise extreme caution when excavating adjacent to existing building. Do not damage existing building siding, foundation walls, or footings. 2. Review and obtain approval for procedures for excavation and backfill adjacent to existing building with consultant prior to commencing work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL rA. Type A Fill: Class "A" material conforming to OPSS Division 10, latest edition. B. Type B Fill: Class "B" material conforming to OPSS Division 10, latest edition. C. Topsoil: Natural, activated medium loam, possessing the characteristics of good p P agricultural soils capable of producing heavy vegetation. It shall be neither sand I nor heavy clay in nature and shall be free from living vegetation and roots, stone or other foreign matter larger than 25 mm in diameter. D. Sand Fill: All sand fill for the brine pipe sand zone must be well graded, compactable sand in accordance with gradation curves shown in Figure M-1 (attached). E. Crushed Stone: Crushed stone shall be composed of clean, hard, durable coarse gravel, or crushed rock fragments such that 100% of the particles pas the '/" sieve and not more that 10% of the particles pass the No. 4 sieve. No clay or other objectionable materials shall be present. 7100-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 , SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 6 , 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' F. Drainage Pipe. Drainage piping and perimeter sub-drain to be 150 mm diameter (perforated where shown on the drawings), P.V.C. sub-drain, CSA approved as supplied by Canron, Canplast or approved equal. Exposed ends of drainage piping (at outfalls) shall be protected with 6 mm galvanized steel mesh rodent screen, 16 gauge. G. Filter Cloth for Sub-drains: All sub-drains to be wrapped with filter cloth, Mirafi 140 or approved equal. H. Vapour Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film to CAN/CGSB-51.34-M in roll width ' of 3000 mm. Adhesive tape shall be 50 mm wide Scotch Brand No. 352 polyester tape. PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clearing- Clear and remove all obstructions to excavating. t B. Lines and Levels- Establish accurate lines and levels as required and supply batter boards, lines, stakes and templates and establish permanent reference lines and , bench marks required. C. Stock Piles - Materials shall not be stockpiled on the site except with the prior approval of the Owner. 3.02 EXCAVATION WORK A. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or required by the work, plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms, shoring and inspection. Excavation shall be made to clean lines to minimize quantity of fill material required. B. The floor slab area on grade should be proof rolled to the density specified herein. t Any soft spots which are revealed should be sub-excavated and backfilled with suitable compacted fill. Refer to 3.03 Backfilling herein. C. Remove large rocks, stumps and other obstructions of whatever nature encountered in the course of excavation and haul away off the site. 7100-02200.wpd r rDIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 rEXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 7 3.02 EXCAVATION WORK (Cont'd) D. Unauthorized Excavation - Excavation to greater than required depth shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense in a manner as directed by the rConsultant. Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces and footings with concrete as specified for foundations. E. Keep excavation free of water by bailing, pumping or a system of drainage as required and provide pumps, suction and discharge lines or well points of sufficient capacity and maintain until such time as the permanent drainage system is ' installed or until the Consultant's approval of removal of equipment is obtained. Take all necessary measures to prevent flow of water into the excavation. ' F. Protect the bottom and sides of excavated pits and trenches from freezing. Protect also from exposure to the sun and wet weather to prevent cave-ins and softening of the bed upon which concrete or drains rest. G. Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials levelled and stepped at changes of levels with exception of excavations made for drainage purposes and those to slope as required. H. If the excavations reveal seepage zones, springs or other unexpected sub-surface ' conditions which may necessitate revisions or additions to any drainage system, inform the Consultant immediately so that remedial action can be taken. I. Protect existing trees scheduled to remain at all times during excavation. Do not damage roots. Refer to General Conditions. J. If removal of earth causes displacement of adjacent earth, the earth so disturbed shall be removed at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Conditions of Excavated Surfaces 1. Excavate to a depth sufficient to expose firm undisturbed subsoil, free of organic matter and to the Testing Agency's approval. 2. Hand trimming the bottom of foundations: Complete hand trimming of disturbed soil just prior to concrete placement. r3. Remove soft, wet or unconsolidated ground and organic material encountered in excavating. ' 4. Should the nature of the sub-soil at the depths shown prove to be unsatisfactory to the Consultant for the placing of the concrete work, then upon the Consultant's written order, the Contractor shall excavate to greater depth until a satisfactory bottom is reached. ' 7100-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 8 3.02 EXCAVATION WORK (Cont'd) ' L. Tolerances 1. General excavation shall be to the elevations shown on the drawings, plus ' or minus 25 mm. 2. Excavate for footings to elevations indicated on drawings, plus or minus 13 mm. 3. Sloped subgrade surfaces for the ice rink slabs must be within a tolerance of 13 mm, plus or minus. 3.03 BACKFILLING , A. Proceed promptly with backfilling as the building progresses, and as work to be backfilled has been inspected and approved by the Consultant. The backfill in areas where settlement cannot be tolerated, e.g. service and footing trenches under the floor slab, should be compacted to at least 100 per cent of its Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density. The backfill should be placed in lifts not greater than 8"(200 mm)thick in the loose state, each lift being compacted with a suitable compactor to the specified density. B. Do not commence backfilling operations until mechanical and electrical services, and site drainage systems have been inspected and approved by Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction. Existing floor subgrade must be proof rolled before backfilling. C. Withdraw shoring material during backfill. Lumber left in place without the ' Consultant's approval will not be paid for by the Owner. D. Backfill evenly on both sides of foundation walls to avoid unequal fill pressures on walls. E. Place fill around foundation walls and footings so that footings will have a minimum ' of 48" (1200 mm) coverage, measured at an angle of 45 degrees from bottom of footing to protect against frost until final grading is complete. F. Where fill is placed adjacent to structures or vulnerable building components or in restricted areas, the fill shall be compacted to the same degree as specified by suitable equipment approved by the Consultant. Avoid damage to or displacement of walls, columns, piers, underground services, and process/ production equipment. G. Add water in amounts required only to achieve the optimum moisture content. , 7100-02200mpd , DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 9 ' 3.03 BACKFILLING (Cont'd) H. Backfill shall be free of snow and ice. 3.04 ROUGH GRADING A. Preparation and Layout 1. Establish extent of grading by area and elevation. 2. Prior to commencement of grading work, establish location and extent of all underground utilities occurring in work areas. Maintain, reroute or extend as required. Pay all costs for this work, except costs borne by utilities companies. 3. Slope grade away from building as indicated on drawings. 3.05 FILLS UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. The fill shall be deposited in layers of such thickness that the equipment being used for compacting can produce the specified density. If lumps are present in the material each layer shall be continuously disced in order to ensure proper compaction. B. Immediately after levelling, each layer of fill shall be thoroughly compacted by the use of approved mechanical equipment. ' C. The exposed subgrade shall be proof rolled to at least 95% Standard Proctor Maximum Density using equipment approved by the Consultant. Any loose, wet or deleterious material shall be sub-excavated and replaced by the Contractor with Type 2 fill which must be compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. ' 3.06 QOMPACTION DENSITY A. Use approved equipment for compaction. Maintain materials at optimum moisture ' content to obtain required compaction. Special care shall be taken to prevent disturbance of the existing subgrade and adjacent structures and equipment. ' B. Be responsible for damage to the subgrade and installed materials due to improper compaction methods. Make good to approval of the Consultant. ' 7100-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 10 3.06 COMPACTION DENSITY (Cont'd) ' C. The minimum density of fill in place shall be the following values of Standard proctor densities for corresponding locations in accordance with latest revisions of A.S.T.M. D698-(STD). 1. Type A Fill: To 100% Standard Proctor Maximum Density. 2. Type B Fill: To 98% Standard Proctor Maximum Density. D. If during progress of work, tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at own expense, as directed by Consultant. E. Ensure compacted fills are tested and approved before proceeding with placement of surface materials. 3.07 FILL LOCATIONS A. Type A Fill: t 1. Under all interior and exterior concrete slabs 150 mm minimum thickness. ' 2. Under concrete sidewalks, 100 mm minimum thickness. B. Type B Fill: 1. Around all footings, foundations, grade beams and walls u p to the underside of Type A fill. 2. Above all pipes and trenches for mechanical or electrical work. (Pipes to be , laid in sand bed.) C. Sand Fill: 1. Below ice surface slab, minimum 300 mm thick. ' 2. Below all pipes and electrical services and in drainage trenches, minimum 150 mm deep. D. Topsoil: , 1. Place topsoil below sodded or seeded areas to 100 mm minimum thickness. 7100-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 11 3.07 FILL LOCATIONS (Confd) E. Crushed Stone: 1. Under all interior and exterior concrete slabs and below interior asphalt paving, 8" minimum thickness. 1 2. Around all drainage pipe, minimum 200 mm thick. 3.08 WATER ON PREPARED SURFACES A. Promptly remove, by approved methods, water rising from seeping of the soil or ' resulting from rainfall wherever such water is on the surface of sub-grade soil and compacted fill. B. Where proper drainage and pumping is not carried out as specified herein, and any prepared sub-grade soil for under structural work, and any compacted fill for under concrete slabs, is softened or disturbed by water due to improper drainage and ' pumping, the Contractor shall remove the unsatisfactory soil and fill, and bear all incidental costs in connection with additional excavation and placing and compacting of granular fill under floor slabs, without extra cost to the Owner. 3.09 ICE RINK SUB-DRAINAGE ' A. The Contractor shall do all drainage piping excavation of whatever substances are encountered to depth shown on the drawings. Excavated materials shall be removed off site. Excavation shall not be carried below required level to provide suitable bearing values. The Contractor shall remove by pumping or other means approved by the Consultant, any water accumulated in excavation at his ow expense. B. Lay filter cloth in trench and place 8" crushed stone base. All pipe shall be laid to line and grade sloped to ensure proper drainage. Complete installation by surrounding pipes with 8" crushed stone and lapping filter cloth over pipes completely enclosing crushed stone and drain piping. C. The pipe shall be properly backfilled with approved Granular'A' material as shown on the plans. The backfill shall be carefully placed and compacted to maintain the required alignment and grade to prevent the possibility of future settling. ' 7100-02200.wpd 1 DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 12 , 3.10 VAPOUR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Immediately prior to commencement of concrete or asphalt floor slab installation, lay polyethylene vapour barrier over granular base. All joints shall be lapped minimum 6" and sealed with polyethylene tape. Turn edges up face of concrete , wall. B. Restrict traffic over vapour barrier. , C. Prior to placing of insulation (by others), inspect vapour barrier and repair all torn or damaged areas. 3.11 SURPLUS SOIL DISPOSAL , A. Surplus soil and excavated material shall be promptly removed and disposed of off the site at legal dump sites. Conform to local bylaw requirements for trucking and disposal. 3.12 CLEAN-UP , A. As excavation proceeds, keep roads and aisles clean of dirt and excavated ' material. B. Clean up and wash down to remove all dirt and excavated materials caused by the ' work of this section daily. r 1 r r r r 7100-02200.wpd 1 ����1111��111����IIIIi1lIl H�lillilnlvl ii/1i�111Y�111�ilii�liliillllii ., r���lllt�illlt■��Iill�Illl�i��1111�11 t1%%��1111�//tl����lliliil ., ����111t�1111����IIII�1111■i��1111�1111 r/i�tllll/1111����IIII�11 ., ����IIIM��IIIr���1111�1111rr��1111�1111�i��1111%I111��I�1111�11 :, ■���IIII�1111%i��illl�llil -' ���1111�11►.1%i��llli�llll����llll�li %���111t�11tt�i��llil�llll������11�/In ri��/%111111����1111�11 , %���IIII�1111%i��llll�llll�i��::::!!%In%i�/%1111111■�I�IIII�ii ., ���1111�1111�i��llll�llli�i��lli►,%11:1�i�1n11�1A11�i��llll�ll ., ����IIIIS1111�i��1111�1111�i��11/1111!►w��1111�1111����IIII�11 . ���111l�11l1%ie�litf�llii■i��►111�11f1��i��illl�lill■�1�1111�11 . ����1111�11110���1111�1111���r�1111�1111�%I�1111�1111����illi�ll . ���illlt�lltl�i��llll�lill■i/%11111111/i��n11�11t1����illl�ii , � �1111�1111����II11�1111 t■%�1111�1111 r1���1111�1111����1111�11 � �IIlt�illt�i��llil�llll�I/��1111�1111.%���IIII�IIfI��I�Ilii�il , ����1111�1111����1111�1111�►►/��1111�1�11����1111�11t1����1111�11 ��l�Illl�llll�i��llil�llli I/■��illl/%111 H��IIII�IIII����ilil�ll , ����1111�1111����1111�1111%���11���11t1����1111�1111�0��1111�11 ����1111�111t����1111�11►I�i���/II�IIII�i��1111�1111����1111�11 , ����1111�1111�i��1111�1�1��i�/111111111�fi��1111�111t��1�111l�ii ■�l�IIII�IItI�i��1111�11_I./i��1111�1111����1111�1111���illll�ll ,Sand San Fine Gravel Coarse G avel Fine Gravel Crnvpl Coarse _RXW*"f Fine Sand Medium t� , SAMPLE No. ., ' BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 2 SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 1 ' PART 1. : GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which Drawings are in imperial units. 1.02 DESCRIPTION tA. Work Installed by this Section but Supplied by Others: Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement: to supply steel reinforcement B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections: Section 02200: Excavation Section 02400: Shoring Section 03100: Concrete Formwork Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete: caisson and caisson caps. C. Co-operation with Work of Other Sections: 1. Check project Drawings and Specifications for requirements of other Sections, which will affect Work of this Section. 2. Inform those performing Work of other Sections, in writing or by schedules, of requirements for materials and built-in items supplied by other Sections. ' D. Co-operation with Consultant: 1. Before commencing work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. ' 2. Schedule Work to allow sufficient time and access for Consultant to carry out periodic field review. E. Co-operate with Inspection and Testing Company appointed to inspect caisson excavations. Provide free access to Work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except 1 where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this Specification in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. ' 1. CSA A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. 2. CSA A23.2-94, Methods of Test for Concrete. 3. CSA A283-1980, Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories. 4. The Ontario Building Code, 1990 Edition. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 2 B. Qualifications: ' 1. Undertake the Work of this Section by Contractor experienced in this type of work. ' C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Conform to local and provincial regulations, including construction safety ' regulations. D. Tolerances: 1. For centre line of caisson shaft: 1124th of shaft diameter or 75 mm [3"], whichever is less,from location indicated. 2. . For vertical caissons: plumb within 1.5% of total length. 3. For battered caissons: maximum deviation of 5% of total length from ' indicated inclination. 4. For diameter: within 25 mm [1"] of specified dimension at any cross section of shaft and bell. ' 5. For top of caisson: within plus 25 mm [1"]to minus 75 mm [3"]of indicated elevation. E. Source Quality Control: ' 1. Both source quality control and field quality control specified in article 3.6, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. ' 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall , not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3. Inspection and Testing Company shall be certified under CSA Standard ' A283, for Category 1 Certification. 4. Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from cash allowance specified in Section 01020. , 5. Payment for additional inspection and testing, including load testing, required by changes..of procedures, materials or mix design requested by Contractor, and failure of completed Work to meet specified requirements, shall be made at Contractor's expense. 6. Test concrete in accordance with Section 03300. F. GeotechnicalInvestigation: 1. Geotechnical investigation has been carried out by Gibson & Associates Limited. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for geotechnical reports. 1.04 PROJECT RECORDS , A. Maintain concrete pour and delivery records as specified in Section 03300. B. Record on set of Drawings: soil conditions encountered founding and top elevations of caissons dimensioned position of caisson. i BOWMANVILLE ARENA i DIVISION 2 SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 3 iC. Report immediately conditions which are inconsistent with Contract Documents. i1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: i 1. Submit shop drawings. 2. Indicate on shop drawings: Location and size of each caisson Founding and top of each caisson Details of reinforcement Grade and size of reinforcement Details of dowels Strength of concrete Exposure Classification of concrete Shaft diameter Size of caisson bells. 3. Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review, Contractor represents to have determined and verified field i measurements,site conditions, materials,catalogue number and similar data and to have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of i each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 4. At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. i 5. Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule. Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for general arrangement, and shall not relieve Contractor of i responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of Contract Documents. 6. Contractor shall make any changes in shop drawings which Consultant may ' require consistent with Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by Consultant.When resubmitting,Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 7. Submit shop drawings as follows: i4 copies for review before any Work commences. 2 additional copies for distribution as directed by Consultant. 2 copies to Inspection and Testing Company. B. Inspection Reports: Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1. Submit reports at least weekly when site Work of this Section is in progress. 2. Distribute inspection reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; i 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 2 copies to Contractor. 3. Sign report by inspector who performs inspection, and describe progress of Work, deficiencies found and corrective actions taken. i4. Include deficiency list of outstanding items from previous reports, and comment on status. 1 i BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 2 i SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 4 C. Survey Report: Submit in duplicate a final survey report prepared by a licensed Ontario Land i Surveyor, showing locations and elevations of tops of caissons. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: , Comply with environmental conditions specified in Section 03300, for concrete Work. ' B. Protection: 1. Provide protection of Work and persons as required by regulatory agencies, ' including standby pumps, lighting and equipment to provide continuous ventilation while persons are in caisson excavation. 2. Provide watertight curb 450 mm [1'-6"] high around tops of caisson excavations. 3. Check each caisson excavation for toxic and explosive gases prior to personnel entering. If gas is found, ventilate with forced air until safe for entry. ' 4. Cover tops of open caisson excavations with two thicknesses of 50 mm [2"] thick wood planks, or equivalent, secured against displacement. 5. Accept full responsibility for open caissons and damage to other Work or ' property due to Work of this Section. PART 2. : PRODUCTS ' 2.01 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices shall be the basis for adjustment to the Contract Price where subsoil , conditions vary from those given in the Geotechnical investigation report. Submit with Tender the following unit prices which shall be used for adjustment to the Contract Price. 1. Excavation of caisson and filling with concrete, per cu.m. [cubic yard]. The adjustment in Contract Price shall be based on the volume of concrete ' caissons installed compared with the volume calculated from the Tender Documents. Both the installed and tender volumes shall be calculated as the product of caisson length and caisson cross section area based on nominal diameters given in the Contract Documents. 2. Steel liners left in place on approval of Consultant, per tonne [ton]. 3. Removal of boulders and other obstructions will be paid for on a time basis at unit hourly rates submitted in Tender, as follows: (a) Caisson drill rig and crew, either lost time standing by or operating churn drill to break obstructions, per hour. (b) Independent crane and crew to operate churn drill to break i obstructions, per hour. (c) Additional excavation and concrete required due to removal of obstructions will be paid for at the unit rate given in Tender Form, based on actual volume of concrete required to fill caisson. 4. Excavation of weathered rock overlying sound rock, 20 per cu.m. [cubic yard]. ' BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 5 ' 5. Concrete: In place in caissons, 20MPa, per cu.m. [cubic yard]. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Generally: ' In accordance with Reference Standards. B. Concrete: 1. Provide materials, mix design and proportioning as specified in Section 03300. 2. Use a mix designed for placement by tremie. 3. Where necessary to prevent arching when liner is removed, use mix designed for increased slump and, if required, designed to employ a retarder. 4. Provide mix designed for strength indicated on Drawings, and for class of exposure S-1, in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1 Table 10. ' Use Type 10, Normal Cement. C. Steel Liners: ' Provide liners of sufficient strength to withstand handling stress, concrete pressure, and surrounding earth and water pressures encountered during excavation. 1 PART 3. : EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine site, review site survey and geotechnical investigation reports. No allowance will be made by Owner for difficulties encountered or expenses incurred ' on account of any site condition visible or known to exist when Tender is submitted. B. Verify that dimensioned lines and levels are properly related to building and are satisfactory for proper execution of Work of this Section. C. Locate all underground services at site. Report to Consultant services that interfere with caissons. D. Confirm that excavation by Others has been completed as required for execution of Work of this Section. ' 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate caissons,to dimensions shown,to bearing stratum capable of sustaining the allowable service load bearing pressures indicated on structural Drawings. B. Bottom elevation of caissons as shown are estimated from soil boring data and are minimum depths for caissons developing support by friction, or end bearing, or both, in soil or rock. The Geotechnical Engineer will determine actual final bearing level during excavation. C. Excavate for caisson bells, if required, immediately upon confirmation of the acceptability of the bearing stratum by the Geotechnical Engineer. Do not BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 2 SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 6 ells prior to confirmation of allowable service load bearing value b , excavate b p g Y Geotechnical Engineer. D. Remove all loose, friable and jointed material from bearing stratum to provide sound bearing, level within maximum 1/25 slope. If bottoms are sloping rock, excavate to a level plane or step with maximum step height less than one-quarter , (1/4)the width or diameter of the bearing area. E. Report to Consultant immediately, unusual or abnormal conditions or changes in ' general nature of soil encountered in carrying out this Work. F. Water Removal ' 1. Operate and maintain adequate means for immediate and continuous removal of water from caisson excavations by pumping to an approved place of disposal. 2. De-water caisson excavations to facilitate inspection. ' G. Test Caisson: Consider first caisson constructed as test caisson. Maintain accurate record of ' conditions encountered during excavation of this caisson. Record nature of soil and amount of water encountered at various levels. Report to Consultant immediately, conditions which vary from those described in Contract Documents. H. Remove excavated material from site. 3.03 LINER INSTALLATION , A. Temporary Liner: Use liners, mud-drilling or other techniques as necessary to exclude ground water ' and to prevent loss of ground during the drilling work. Provide liners for inspection of bottom of caisson excavation. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, arrange for inspection and obtain verification of caisson ' excavation in accordance with paragraph 3.6 Field Quality Control of this Section. B. Place concrete immediately after completion of excavation and after approval by ' Geotechnical Engineer. C. Do not leave belled excavations open overnight; fill belled excavation before workday is complete, immediately after approval by Geotechnical Engineer. D. Place concrete in caissons by means of chute so arranged that discharge can be controlled to obtain evenly spread uniform mixture over whole area without segregation or voids. E. Place concrete in each caisson in one continuous operation to completion. ' F. Install steel reinforcing dowels supplied under Work of Section 03200. BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 7 G. Vibrate top 2 m [6'-6'1 of concrete, after liner has been withdrawn, or when liner is permanent. ' 3.05 LINER WITHDRAWAL ' A. Coordinate liner withdrawal with concrete placement and withdraw liner vertically from excavation while concrete is being placed. B. Include in contract, sum for use of liner vibratory extractor to remove caisson liners that are difficult to remove by normal means. C. Maintain adequate head of concrete to balance outside soil and water pressure ' during liner withdrawal. D. Obtain Consultant's approval before leaving any temporary liner in place ' permanently. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company,when appointed as specified for Source Quality Control in paragraph 1.3.E, shall perform sampling, inspection and testing of 1 concrete Work at site. B. Inspect and test concrete as specified in Section 03300. 1 C. Perform inspection and testing as follows: 1. Verify that sub-surface conditions are consistent with geotechnical report and confirm that bearing capacity at founding stratum of every caisson is consistent with design bearing capacity given on Drawings. 2. Verify that bell and shaft are formed as indicated on the Drawings and that bottom of caisson is free of loose material and debris. 3. Verify that specified tolerances have been maintained. 4. Verify that drilling at bottom of caisson excavation has confirmed that sound rock is present. 5. Confirm that reinforcement is in accordance with Drawings. 6. Record technique and equipment used to penetrate large obstructions, if any. 7. Record rate of seepage into excavation. 8. Record concrete level in liner during liner withdrawal. 9. Record elevations of cut-off and length of caisson unit. 10. Verify that recording of Work and as-built drawings have been completed. ' 11. Inspection during removal of liner. 12. Provide verbal reports to Consultant, confirmed by written reports, whenever site conditions warrant immediate response. 3.07 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 2 , SECTION 02352 EXCAVATED CAISSONS Page 8 B. Replace defective Work as directed b Consultant. p Y C. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective ' measures, and related expenses if Work has proven to be deficient. 3.08 CLEANING UP ' A. Remove from building site excess and waste materials and debris resulting from Work of this Section. Leave premises in a condition acceptable to Consultant ' before completion of Work. -- End of Section -- ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED Provide all labour, materials, equipment and services required to complete the work of this 1 section. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Fine grading and proof rolling of subgrade. B. Supply, place and compact Granular'A' and Granular'B' base courses. 1 C. Supply, place and compact asphalt paving. D. Painted pavement markings. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Excavating, Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 B. Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 1 1.04 CODES AND REFERENCE STANDAR 1 A. All materials, equipment and methods shall conform to the Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (O.P.S.S). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work of this Section shall be completed by a bonafide road building Contractor engaged in paving work for at least five (5) years, and having all equipment necessary to complete the work as specified. 1.06 PROTECTION 1 A. Protect work of all trades and adjacent properties from damage from the work of this section. Barricade paved areas to prevent vehicle traffic for at least 24 hours after completion. i 1 E:\W ORDPERFECT\W PDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-02400.wpd 1 l DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 2 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING ' A. The Owner shall appoint an independent inspection and testing company. B. The inspection and testing company shall perform the following services: 1. Sample proposed sources of fill materials and advise as to acceptability, maximum densities obtainable and compaction procedures. , 2. Carry out density tests to ensure that the required density is achieved, and report the results of such tests in writing. ' C. The cost of employing the inspection and testing company shall be paid for by the Owner. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GRANULAR BASE MATERIALS A. Granular 'B' Base Course: Crushed or uncrushed bank or pit gravel or stone obtained from an approved source, conforming to requirements for Granular 'B' aggregate, Ontario Provincial Standard, Specifications Form No. 1010. B. Granular'A' Base Course Crushed ravel or stone obtained from an approved 9 � source conforming to requirements for Granular'A' aggregate, Ontario Provincial , Standard, Specifications Form No. 1010. 2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt (H.L.8) conforming to O.P.S.S. Form 1150 Bituminous First Course- shall be dense graded, hot mixed, hot laid. The aggregate used shall be clean, hard, durable crushed stone. The aggregate shall comply with the following gradation: Maximum particle size 26.5 mm Passing 4 mesh sieve 30- 50 Passing 200 mesh sieve 0%-7% E:\WORDPERFECT\WPDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-02400.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 3 1 2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' A. Asphalt (H.L.8) conforming to O P S S Form 1150 (Cont'd) The bituminous first course shall be laid to a compacted thickness as specified and graded to allow for 35 mm surface course. ' Void content - min. 2% max. 4% Marshall stability - min. 635 kg. at 60 deg. C. Marshall Flow - min. 9 B. Asphalt (H.L.3) conforming to O P S S Form 1150 Asphalt surface course shall be hot mixed, hot laid. The asphalt surface course shall be a suitable combination of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, with or without filler, uniformly coated and mixed with asphalt cement. It shall be laid to a compacted thickness as specified and the finished pavement shall have the following properties: Void content - min. 2% max. 4% Marshall stability - 725 kg. at 60 deg. C. Marshall Flow - 9 ' The aggregate used shall comply with the following: ' Maximum stone size - 16.0 mm Passing 4 mesh sieve - 45- 65 Passing 200 mesh sieve - 0% - 5% Emulsified Asphalt O.P.S.S. Form 1010. 2.03 PAINTED LINE MARKINGS A. To CGSB 1-GP-12C (White) Alkyd Traffic Paint. B. Yellow/Orange paint shall be to Ontario Ministry of Transportation Standard Colour and Specification. E:\WORDPERFECT\WPDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-02400.wpd DIVISION 2 , SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 4 PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of alt other , trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. ' B. Verify that asphalt pavement may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. C. Check rough grading, re-grade, re-level and re-compact as required. Soft spots, wet holes, shall be dug out and filled with granular fill placed in not over 150 mm layers and compacted. Remove surplus material from the site. D. Sub-grade shall be fully stabilized, compacted to 100% of standard Proctor Density and levelled to a tolerance of not more than 13 mm measured on a 3.0 metre straight edge. i E. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Consultant. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF GRANULAR BASE COURSES A. Granular material shall be placed in layers of such thickness that the equipment , being used can produce the specified density. B. Immediately after levelling the material shall be compacted to the specified density. C. Compaction. All granular material shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Standard Proctor Maximum Density. D. Finished elevation tolerance will be to within 13 mm of the required elevation. 3.03 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT SURFACING A. Asphalt surfacing shall consist of compacted thicknesses of H.L.8 and/or H.L. 3 fine laid in accordance with Ontario Provincial Standard Specification for Hot Mix Hot Laid Asphaltic Concrete. Materials,equipment and construction methods shall be in accordance with the current edition of O.P.S.S. Form No. 1010 including all amendments thereto. E.\W ORDPERFECT\W PDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-02400.wpd ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 5 3.03 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT SURFACING (Cont'd) B. Place asphalt paving where indicated on the drawings and as follows: Heavy Duty Asphalt Paving Compacted Subgrade 400 mm Granular'B' base course ' 100 mm Granular'A' base course 50 mm H.L.8 asphalt binder course 40 mm H.L.3 asphalt surface course Light Duty Asphalt Paving Compacted Subgrade 300 mm Granular'B' base course 100 mm Granular'A' base course 40 mm H.L.8 asphalt binder course 30 mm H.L. 3 asphalt surface course C. Finished surface shall be smooth of uniform density and texture and true to established finished elevations. Paving shall be of thickness specified and when checked with a 3.0 metre straight edge shall show no irregularity exceeding 6 mm in depth. Surface shall be sloped in order that all surface water will be drained to perimeter of asphalt, to catch basins or storm sewers. ' D. Paint contact edges of abutting concrete walls, catch basins and curbs with a thick coat of hot asphalt cement before paving mixture is placed against them. E. Joints in asphalt shall be kept to a minimum. Joints in base and top asphalt shall be staggered. ' F. Base asphalt shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to placing of top course of asphalt. G. Where asphalt does not adjoin concrete curbs, edges shall be trimmed and hand tamped to a clean straight line. 3.04 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Pavement markings shall be painted after completion of the asphalt paving and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Restrict traffic over areas to be painted during and for 24 hours after painting. Repaint any areas which are disturbed. E.\WORDPER FECT\W PDOCS%7100\SPECS\7100-02400.wpd 1 DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 6 3.04 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS (Cont'd) ' C. Markings shall be 100 mm wide, white. Locate as shown on the drawings. Paint lines straight, or uniformly curved with well defined edges and full paint coverage in all directions. D. Handicapped parking spaces to be painted with O.P.S.S. standard handicapped ' symbol. E. Dropped concrete curbs for handicapped access shall be painted yellow/orange. i 1 1 1 1 1 1 E:IW ORDPERFECT\W PDOCS\97100\SPECSV 100-02400.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02485 HYDRAULIC SEEDING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all hydraulic seeding called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Fine grade and level topsoil. B. Prepare base for seed and spread seed. C. Maintain grassed areas. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Excavating, Backfillin and Grading Section 02200 g 9 9 B. Sodding Section 02935 C. Planting Section 02950 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Grass Seed: Canada Certified No. 1 Grade in accordance with Government of Canada Seeds Act and Regulations. B. Mulch: "Verdyol Mulch Extra"or approved equal. C. Water: free of impurities that would inhibit germination and growth. D. Fertilizer: 1. Type 1: complete synthetic, with minimum 65% water soluble nitrogen. Ratio 1:4:4. 2. Type 2: complete synthetic, slow release, with maximum 35% water soluble nitrogen. Ratio 2:1:1. 7100-02485.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02485 HYDRAULIC SEEDING Page 2 2.02 GRASS SEED MIXTURE , A. 55% Creeping Red Fescue 30% Annual Rye 10% Perennial Rye 5% Kentucky Blue Grass B. In containers with original tags. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Truck: 1. Slurry tank: minimum 4500 L. 2. Pumps capable of maintaining continuous non-fluctuating flow of solution. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP ' A. Take reasonable care to prevent spraying items such as structures, signs, guide rails, fences, plant materials and utilities. B. Do no perform work under adverse field conditions such as wind speeds over 10 km/h, frozen ground or ground covered with snow, ice or standing water. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Ensure areas to be seeded have been cultivated to depth of 25 mm and are moist to depth of 150 mm before seeding. Fine grade free of humps and hollows and free of deleterious and refuse materials. 3.03 SLURRY APPLICATION A. Slurry mixture applied per hectare: 1. Seed: 115 kg. 2. Mulch: 1120 kg. 3. Fertilizer. Type 1, 895 kg; adjust fertilizer application as directed by soil test report. 4. Water: quantity as required to form slurry in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. 7100-02485.wpd jDIVISION 2 SECTION 02485 HYDRAULIC SEEDING Page 3 B. Apply seed slurry uniformly. C. Blend applications into adjacent sodded areas and previous applications to form uniform surfaces. D. Reshoot areas where application is not uniform. E. Remove slurry from items and areas not designated to be sprayed. 3.04 ESTABLISHMENT A. Perform the following operations from time of seed application until final j acceptance by Landscape Architect: 1. Water seeded area as required to ensure germination and continued growth of grass. Control watering to prevent washouts. 2. Cut grass to 40 mm whenever it reaches height of 60 mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass. 3. Fertilize seeded areas one month after seeding. Spread evenly and water in well. Use Type 2 fertilizer, ratio 2:1:1, at a rate as determined by soil test. Postpone fertilizing until following spring if application falls within four iweek period prior to expected end of local growing season. 4. Repair dead or bare spots to allow establishment of seed prior to acceptance. 5. Eliminate weeds by mechanical means. 3.05 ACCEPTANCE A. Areas will be accepted by Landscape Architect provided that: 1. Seeded areas are uniformly established and turf is free of rutted, eroded, bare or dead spots and free of weeds. 2. Seeded areas have been cut at least twice. B. Areas seeded in fall will be accepted in following spring one month after start of ' growing season provided acceptance conditions are fulfilled. i ' 7100.02485.wpd t tDIVISION 2 SECTION 02509 UNIT PAVING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. i 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all unit paving and granular base courses called for or implied by drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to full intent and meaning of drawings and specifications. Work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Supply and install unit pavers. B. Supply, place and compact base courses. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Curbs and Gutters Section 02516 B. Excavating, Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 1.04 SAMPLES IA. Submit full size sample of paving unit for review. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Interlocking Precast Concrete Paver: Units to be Traditional Holland, as manufactured by Brooklin Concrete Products Limited. Similar product of other manufacturers will be acceptable. Compressive strength 58 MPa minimum. Water absorption 5% maximum. Maximum weight loss 0.35% after 50 freeze-thaw cycles, when totally immersed in 3% sodium chloride solution. Abrasion hardness to ASTM C241-51(1976). Pavers to be 60 mm thick. Colour to be Red blend. B. Base Courses: .1 Setting bed - Clean well graded sand, free of organics and deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence. 7100-02509.wpd DIVISION 2 , SECTION 02509 UNIT PAVING Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) B. Base Courses (Cont'd) .2 Sub-Base - Granular 'A' conforming to O.P.S.S. Granular 'A' aggregate, Specification Form No. 1010. , C. Sand Filler: Sharp normal weight sand, to CSA A82.56-M1976. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SUB-BASE A. Place coarse granular fill to minimum 200 mm compacted thickness, in lifts not exceeding 100 mm thickness. Compact each layer to 95% maximum dry density as determined by Standard Proctor Density. 3.02 LAYING COURSE A. Place setting bed to 13 mm compacted thickness. 3.03 SURFACE COURSE A. Install unit paving where indicated, true to grade and free of movement, with , maximum joint width of 3 mm. B. Where required, cut units with approved cutter or saw to fit accurately, neatly and without damaged edges. C. Tamp and level units with mechanical vibrator. D. Fill voids in paver joints by sweeping in sand filler. Completely fill joints by watering j down paving surface. Add sand during watering down until joints completely filled. 1 7100-02509.wpd ( DIVISION 2 SECTION 02514 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A Excavating, Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 B. Asphalt Paving Section 02400 B. Concrete Curbs and Gutters Section 02516 C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 1 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C309-89 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ( B. ASTM D698-78 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-in. (305-mm) Drop C. CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction D. CAN/CSA-A23.2-M90 Methods of Test for Concrete E. OPSS 1010-88 Material Specification for Aggregates- Granular A, B, M and Select Subgrade Material F. OPSS1308-83 Material Specification for Joint Filler(Concrete) PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Base: Granular"A", OPSS 1010, as specified in Section 02200. B. Concrete: CAN/CSA-A23.1-M, CAN/CSA-A23.2-M, air entrained 5% to 7%, 25 MPa (3500 psi). Concrete shall be supplied in accordance with Section 03300. C. Curing Compound: Chlorinated rubber based, ASTM C309 Type 2. 7100-02514.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02514 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) D. Joint Filler. Premoulded, non-extruding and resilient bituminous. OPSS 1308 Type A joint filler. E. Form Lumber: No. 2 S.P.F., 38 x 89 mm, free of twist and warp. F. Reinforcing Steel: 150 mm x 150 mm x 9 gauge steel mesh. G. Polyethylene Sheeting: 4 mil, to CGSB CAN2-53.33. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Establish lines and levels as required for completion of work. B. Check adequacy of preparations for sidewalks done under Section 02200. Ensure that sub-base is compacted to 98% of Standard Proctor density ASTM D698. 3.02 PLACING GRANULAR BASE A. Sub-grade must be dry and compacted to smooth surface and required grade prior to placing granular base material. B. Place Granular Base to a uniform cross-section over required area in minimum 100 mm thickness. C. Finish granular base surface true to sidewalk founding elevations and compact to minimum of 98% of Standard Proctor density, ASTM D698. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Erect formwork for sidewalks to achieve lines and grades shown on the drawings. B. Install one layer of reinforcing mesh over compacted base. Set mesh on plastic or concrete chairs, raised 25 mm above base. C. Cut expansion joint filler to full cross sectional shape of the sidewalk and place at intervals not exceeding 5 metres. Refer to plans for patterns. D. Place expansion joint filler between sidewalks and curbs, between sidewalks and building foundations and between sidewalk and any poured concrete bases or piers. 7100-02514.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02514 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Page 3 3.03 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) E. Pour concrete on prepared sub-base to required levels and dimensions. Execute all concrete work to CAN/CSA A23.1, and CAN/CSA A23.2. F. Pour concrete sidewalks with minimum 100 mm depth, and with transverse slope of 6 mm/300 mm. G. Do not pour concrete when air temperature is, or may fall below 5° C (41° F) during or within 24 hours of pour, unless precautions are taken to prevent damage to concrete resulting from low temperature. H. Remove and replace any concrete damaged by freezing at no extra cost. 1 I. Finish concrete with light broom finish, transverse to direction of travel. J. Trowel smooth edges, minimum 75 mm wide. K. Apply membrane forming curing compound as soon as surface is free of bleed water to uniformly cover exposed concrete surfaces at rate of not less than 1.0 litre/5 m2 (1.0 gal/27 sq. yd.). Maintain this protection for minimum 7 days. L. Divide sidewalk between expansion joints in the pattern indicated on the drawings, with power driven carbide tipped blade, or other device approved for use by the consultant. t r t 1 7100-02514.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02516 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A Asphalt Paving Section 02400 B. Concrete Sidewalks Section 02514 C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C309-89 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete B. ASTM D698-78 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-Ib (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-in. (305-mm) Drop C. CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction D. CAN/CSA-A23.2-M90 Methods of Test for Concrete E. OPSS 1010-88 Material Specification for Aggregates- Granular A, B, M and Select Subgrade Material F. OPSS1308-83 Material Specification for Joint Filler(Concrete) PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Base: Granular"A", OPSS 1010.05. ' B. Concrete: CAN/CSA-A23.1-M, CAN/CSA-A23.2-M, air entrained 5% to 7%, 25 MPa (3500 psi). C. Curing Compound: Chlorinated rubber based, ASTM C309 Type 2. D. Joint Filler. Premoulded, non-extruding and resilient bituminous. OPSS 1308 Type A joint filler. 7100-02616.wpd i DIVISION 2 SECTION 02516 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 2 i 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) i E. Reinforcing of concrete curbs shall be 2-10M bars as specified in Section 03200. Precast Concrete Curbs: to OSSP Standard Specifications, parking bumper curb, weight 220 kg, size 2440 mm x 280 mm x 152 mm high, steel reinforced, as manufactured by Brooklin Concrete Products or approved equal. R TI i PART 3 3.01 PREPARATION A. Establish lines and levels as required for completion of work. B. Check adequacy of preparations for curbs done under Section 02200. Ensure that , sub-base is compacted to 98% of Standard Proctor density ASTM D698. 1 3.02 PLACING GRANULAR BASE A. Sub-grade must be dry and compacted to smooth surface and required grade prior , to placing granular base material. B. Place Granular Base to a uniform cross-section over required area in layers not r exceeding 150 mm (6") uncompacted thickness and to total depth shown on Drawings. , C. Finish granular base surface true to curb founding elevations and compact to minimum of 98% of Standard Proctor density, ASTM D698. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS A. Align concrete curbs and gutters with curves and tangents as shown on Drawings. B. Reinforce concrete curbs with 2 continuous 10M bars. Refer to Specification Section , 03200. C. Pour concrete on prepared sub-base to required levels and dimensions. Execute work, CAN/CSA-A23.1-M, CAN/CSA-A23.2-M. D. Do not pour concrete when air temperature is, or may fall below 5° C (41° F) during ' or within 24 hours of pour, unless precautions are taken to prevent damage to concrete resulting from low temperature. E. Remove and replace any concrete damaged by freezing at no extra cost. 7100-02516.wpd 1 ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02516 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 3 r 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS (Cont'd) rF. Finish concrete with a wooden float to produce an even gritty surface. G. Finish edges of concrete curbs and gutters in accordance with MBS Standard Drawings. H. Apply membrane forming curing compound as soon as surface is free of bleed water to uniformly_cover exposed concrete surfaces at rate of not less than 1.0 litre/5 m2 (1.0 gal/27 sq. yd.). Maintain this protection for minimum 7 days. t 3.04 JOINTS ' A. Joints between curb and gutter and any abutting sidewalk, catch basin and manhole frames, gutter outlets, or any structure, shall be formed with 12 mm (%Z') thick panels of joint filler, except for control joints for extruded or formed curb and gutter, where ' they may be saw cut or formed with a "Guillotine" knife. 3.05 PRE-CAST CONCRETE CURBS A. Place and anchor pre-cast concrete curbs where indicated on Drawings. r 3.06 DETAILS r A. Concrete curb and gutter shall be in accordance with OPSS detail 600.04 (with reinforcement added as specified herein). rB. Concrete barrier curb shall be in accordance with OPSS detail 600.11 (with reinforcement added or specified herein). 1 r r r 7100-02516.wpd r L U U ° Dropped curb at ° u entrances N v Typ Thickness Thickness of sidewalk of sidewalk � Finished 25 300 50 150--1 25 300 50 150 road I I surface x� �� �. : — a p �� q-0 N tn cli h � _ a o �--S h 25 dos 30 .n Qe r•.1 0 C"! o . .Note 3 :- -1 a • .Note .3: _I .S. F--- 525 -----I 4+- 50 1— 525 L 50 TANGENT Additional width where sidewalk is adjacent to curb SUPERELEVATED Typ NOTES: 1 Flexible pavement shall be 5mm above the adjacent edge of gutter. 2 Where sidewalk is continuously adjacent, reduce the dropped curb at entrances to 75mm. 3 For slipforming procedure, a 5% batter is acceptable. A Treatment at entrances shall conform with OPSD-351.01. LEGEND: B Outlet treatment shall conform with OPSD-610 Series. S — Rate of pavement superelevation in percent, C The length of transition from one curb type to another shall be 3.0m, except in conjunction with ONTARIO PROVINCIAL STANDARD DRAWING Date 1 1990 09 14 1 Rev guide rail, it shall conform to OPSD-900 Series. CONCRETE BARRIER CURB Date D All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise shown. WITH STANDARD GUTTER - - - - --- - - - - - -- - - - FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT OPSD - 600.04 Dropped curb at entrances 150-1 Thickness of sidewalk Finished road surface0 0 , .soy o 0 z �'s s 0 0 � a p • D I N D ~Note 2 �- - 250-----�50 �-- Additional width where sidewalk t is adjacent to curb NOTES : t I Where sidewalk is continuously adjacent, reduce the dropped curb at entrances to 75 mm. , 2 For slipforming procedure , a 5% batter is acceptable. A Treatment at entrances shall conform with OPSD-351.01 . B Outlet treatment shall conform with OPSD-610 Series. C The length of transition from one curb type to another shall be 3.0 m , except in conjunction with guide rail, it shall conform to OPSD-900 Series. D All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise shown. ONTARIO PROVINCIAL STANDARD DRAWING Date 1990 09 14 Rev ' Date CONCRETE BARRIER CURB ------------- OPSD - 600. 11 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02935 SODDING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Excavating, Backfilling, and Grading Section 02200 B. Hydraulic Seeding Section 02485 C. Planting Section 02950 ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Topsoil from each source, native and imported, shall be tested for N.P.K., altrazine, minor elements, as well as clay and organic matter contents and acidity (pH) range. Topsoil shall be tested, written test report submitted and approved by Consultant, prior to delivery to site. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect sod during transportation, for delivery to the site in a fresh and healthy condition. B. Install sod immediately, no later than 48 hours after arrival on site. Keep moist and fresh until installation. ' C. Handle sod carefully to prevent breaking or tearing. Immediately remove damaged and dried-out sod from the site. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 TOPS01 L A. Shredded, fertile and friable sandy loam with a minimum 2%organic matter content prior to mixing,with acidity value between pH 6.0 and 7.5, free from admixtures of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and roots over 50 mm diameter, free of toxic substances or any other foreign matter which would inhibit growth. 7100-02935.wpd i DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02935 SODDING Page 2 , 2.02 SOD A. Sod shall be a Certified No. 1 sod, 9 rown and sold in accordance with the latest ' specifications of the Nursery Sod Growers Association of Ontario (NSGA), composition of 50% Kentucky Blue Grass and 50% Merion Blue Grass. e B. At the time of delivery, sod shall have a strong, fibrous root system, be free of disease, stones, burned or bare spots,with a healthy green colour and contain not more than 1% twitch grass and other weeds. C. Sod shall be cut and rolled in sections of max. 1 sq. metre in area and approximately 32 mm thick as specified by the NSGA. 2.03 WOODEN PEGS ' A. Hardwood pegs, 25 x 25 mm square and at least 9" long, or longer as required for ' satisfactory anchorage of sod. 2.04 FERTILIZER A. Commercial type having a 10-10-10 ratio and shall be applied such that actual nitrogen is 20 lbs./10 sq metres. PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A. Adjust subgrade to allow the placing of topsoil to minimum depths specified. B. Scarify subgrade to at least 75 mm deep and remove debris and all stones 50 mm in diameter and larger. C. Arrange for inspection of finished subgrade by Consultant. D. Spread and grade topsoil evenly over approved subgrade. Provide minimum 125 mm thick topsoil. E. Finished sodded area top surface shall be uniform and evenly graded between elevations indicated, free of bumps, ridges and depressions. , F. Unless recommended otherwise on soil analysis report, apply a 10-10-10 fertilizer at the rate of 20 lbs./10 sq metres. 7100-02935.wpd i DIVISION 2 SECTION 02935 SODDING Page 3 3.01 SITE PREPARATION (Cont'd) G. Work fertilizer well and uniformly into the topsoil within 48 hours before laying sod. H. Fine grade, rake and roll surface until smooth and firm against foot prints, and free of depressions, lumps and irregularities. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Place sod closely knit together, so that no open joints are visible and pieces are not overlapping. B. Install sod to blend tightly and uniformly with adjoining grass areas and, unless otherwise detailed, to be flush with paving, top of curbs. C. On slopes of 3:1 and steeper, place sod perpendicularly to the slope and stake every row with wooden pegs at maximum 600 mm intervals. Drive pegs flush with sod. D. Immediately after installation, water with sufficient amount to saturate sod and underlying topsoil. E. As soon as sod has dried sufficiently to prevent damage, roll with roller to ensure a good bond between sod and topsoil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities. ' F. Clean up all areas and remove debris. 3.03 MAINTENANCE ' A. Maintain all sodded areas immediately after installation until all project work has been inspected, approved and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include all necessary measures to establish and maintain grass in a healthy, vigorous growing condition. ' C. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to the following work: .1 Mow grass areas at regular intervals as required to maintain grass height between 50 mm and 65 mm. Not more than 1/3 of grass blade shall be cut ' during one mowing. Handclip where necessary and keep edges neatly trimmed. Remove heavy clippings immediately after mowing and trimming. A minimum of two (2) cuttings is considered part of this Contract. 7100-02935.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02935 SODDING Page 4 ' 3.03 MAINTENANCE (Cont'd) .2 Weed and disease control when necessary. Use chemicals in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and be fully responsible for all damages resulting from use of chemicals. .3 Fertilize and water when necessary, with sufficient quantities of water to prevent sod and underlying soil from drying out. ' .4 Roll all sodded areas to remove minor depressions and irregularities. .5 Repair all erosion damage resulting from faulty workmanship and/or maintenance. .6 Replace all grass which has deteriorated or which shows bare spots. .7 Protect all grass areas against damage, including erosion and trespassing, ' by providing and maintaining proper safeguards. Remove safeguards at end of maintenance period. 7100-02935.wpd iDIVISION 2 SECTION 02950 PLANTING Page 1 i PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Excavation, Backfilling, and Grading Section 02200 B. Sodding Section 02935 C. Hydraulic Seeding Section 02485 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All planting work shall be carried out by experienced workmen, under the direction and supervision of an experienced, qualified plant person. B. All plants shall be No. 1 Grade nursery stock grown and supplied in accordance with current standards as adopted by the Canadian Nursery Trades Association, latest edition. iC. All plants shall meet or exceed all pertinent regulations with respect to inspection for plant disease and insect control. ' D. Submit sample of specified mulches and submit sample of plant accessories when required by Consultant. Keep approved samples on site, in an approved and protected location until work has been inspected, approved, and accepted. E. Topsoil from each source, native and imported, shall be tested for N.P.K., atrazine, and minor elements, as well as for clay and organic matter content, and acidity ' (pHO range). Topsoil shall be tested, written test reports submitted and approved by Consultant, before using topsoil on site. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE ' A. Deliver all materials in their original containers, with all labels intact and legible. Containers with fertilizers, peatmoss, bonemeal, shall clearly indicate contents, weight, analysis, and manufacturer's name. ' B. All materials which are subject to deterioration from weather, shall be stored in a dry, protected weatherproof area. 7100-02950.wpd DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02950 PLANTING Page 2 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE (Cont'd) C. Plants shall be protected from damage, and drying out from the time they are dug and during transportation, until plating on the site. D. Plants which cannot be P lanted immediately after arrival on the site shall be properly heeled in and protected and kept moist until they can be planted. 1.05 INSPECTIONS A. All plant materials shall be available for inspection at the nursery by Consultant. Give timely notice of availability of the material for inspection. B. Approval of plants at the nursery does not impair the right of the Consultant to ' inspect plants upon arrival at the site and reject plants which have been damaged, are in poor condition, or otherwise do not conform to the Specifications. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Fertile and friable sandy loam with a minimum 2% organic matter content prior to mixing, with acidity value between pH 6.0 and 7.5, free from admixtures of subsoil, clay lumps, stones or roots over 50 mm diameter, free of toxic substances or any other foreign matter which would inhibit growth. Do not use topsoil which contains , atrazine or generic equivalents. B. Except where different mix is indicated on Drawings, provide the following planting ' soil mixture: .1 Thoroughly mix 5 parts of topsoil and 1 part manure and shred to a fine, even texture. .2 Add bonemeal at 3.7 lbs./cu. yd. of soil and add fertilizer in accordance with , soil analysis report. 2.02 MANURE A. Well rotted, unleached cattle manure not less than 8 months and not more than 2 , years old,free of harmful chemicals and injurious substances, containing maximum 25% straw, leaves, and other foreign matter. 7100-02950.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02950 PLANTING Page 3 2.03 PEATMOSS ' A. Partially decomposed, fibrous or cellular stems of Sphagnum Mosses with a porous to spongy fibrous texture and with a pH ranging from 4.5 to 6.0. The peatmoss shall be supplied in bales, which shall be free of decomposed colloidal residue, wood, sulphur and iron and shall be finely shredded into particles not larger than 2.04 BONEMEAL tA. Commercial, clean bonemeal, finely ground and analyzing to a minimum 5% nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid. 2.05 FERTILIZER A. Inorganic, complete fertilizers containing not less than 60% unreaformaldehyde. 2.06 PLANT MATERIALS A. All plants shall be No. 1 Grade, nursery-grown stock of a grade and quality conforming to the horticultural standards and grown under proper cultural practices as adopted by the Canadian Nursery Trades Association (CNTA). B. Nursery stock shall be transplanted and/or root pruned regularly, but not later than nine (9) months prior to arrival on projects site. C. Plants shall conform to all regulations requiring inspection for disease and insect control. Plants which require chemical treatment as ordered by the Department of Agriculture shall be prohibited. D. All plants shall be true to name in accordance with Plant List, with botanical names conforming to the "International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants". ' E. Plants shall be tagged with name and size of plants. Labels shall not be removed until after final inspection at end of maintenance period. ' F. Substitutions for the specified plants are not allowed unless approved by Consultant in writing. ' G. Any plants dug from native stands, wood lots, and which have not received proper cultural maintenance as advocated by the CNTA, shall be designated as "Collected ' Plants". 7100-02950.wpd DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02950 PLANTING Page 4 2.06 PLANT MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' H. The supply and planting of "Collected Plants" will not be permitted unless approved, in writing, and subject to inspection by Consultant at the original growing location. Be responsible for all costs related to such inspection. I. The guarantee period for approved "Collected Plants" shall be one (1) year longer than the specified guarantee period for nursery-grown plants. J. Plants shall be supplied from nurseries located within the same hardiness zone, and grown in the same soil conditions as the project site, and in accordance with the Plant List, unless otherwise approved. K. Plants shall be freshly dug and be in healthy vigorous condition upon arrival at the ' site. Heeled-in plants or plants from cold storage are not allowed. L. Plants shall be sound, healthy and well-branched, free of disease and insects, and possess all the characteristics of the specified species, headers shall be straight and intact and stems and trunks free of sun scalds, frost cracks, abrasions and other damages. ' M. Old injuries shall be completely callused over with pruning wounds showing vigorous bark on all edges and all parts showing live, green Cambium tissue when cut. N. Plants shall be measured when the branches are in their normal position, with height and spread dimensions referring to the main body of the plant. ' O. Trees are specified by caliper which is the diameter of the trunk measured at 6" above grade. P. Root balls shall contain at least 75% of the fibrous roots and shall conform to the size specifications in the Guide Specification for Nursery Stock of the Canadian Nursery Trades Association. Q. Root balls shall be supplied, wrapped in burlap as follows: ' Root Ball Diameter: Up to 450 mm: 5 oz. Hessian burlap 451 to 750 mm: double burlap Larger than 751 mm: double burlap and drum laced with 6 mm rope at 200 mm spacing ' 7100-02950.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02950 ' PLANTING Page 5 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Wrapping material for tree trunks shall be burlap, or other material approved by Consultant, at least .90 oz./sq. ft. in weight and ranging in width from 150 to 250 mm. B. Stakes for support of small trees and large shrubs shall be as detailed, painted with ' two (2) coats of dark brown stain. C. Supports for large trees, as detailed, shall consist of zinc-coated guy cables, eye bolts and turnbuckles, or approved equal. Cables shall be used for trees 6" in caliper and over. ' D. Wires for tree supports shall be#9 gauge galvanized steel wire, encased in new black, two ply 13 mm diameter rubber hose. ' E. Anti-desiccant, where required, shall be"Wilt Proof' or similar product approved by Consultant. ' 2.08 MULCH A. Mulch in planting areas and tree saucers, shall be approved shredded pine bark mulch. B. Pine bark mulch shall be pieces not larger than 50 mm and shall be free of sticks and chopped or broken branches. ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A. Excavate to the specified depth, as detailed, or,where not indicated, in accordance with the following schedule: .1 Planting Areas Shrubs and Evergreens 450 mm minimum Groundcovers, Perennial and Annual Plants 300 mm minimum .2 Tree pits shall be deep enough to allow at least 150 mm of topsoil under root ball. B. Stake out the locations of all tree pits and planting areas to Consultant's approval before planting. 7100-02950.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02950 PLANTING Page 6 3.01 SITE PREPARATION (Cont'd) C. Scarify subgrade in tree pits and planting areas to minimum depth of 150 mm. ' 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Plant during periods suitable with respect to climatic conditions, locally accepted practice and to Consultant's approval. B. Plants shall be installed to give the best appearance as directed by Consultant. C. Plants shall be set plumb in the centre of pits and at the same relationship to grade as in their original growing locations. , D. Remove ropes, wires, and pull away burlap from top 1/3 of rootball. E. Backfill in 150 mm layers, firmly tamping each layer around the roots, and taking care not to leave air pockets. F. Thoroughly water when planting pit is half full and again when completely filled. , G. Allow each plant and tree to be about 75 mm above surrounding grade to permit natural settlement. H. Surround each plant, except when planted in a bed, with an earth saucer as large as planting pit, in order to retain water. Remove saucer at end of maintenance period. I. Thoroughly water all planting areas and trees immediately after planting. J. Place specified mulch around all trees and in all planting beds to a depth of 75 mm. ' 3.03 TREE WRAPPING A. Wrap all tree trunks prior to shipping with tree wrapping material. Tie with cord to keep wrapping snug and neat. Prior to applying wrapping, spray trunks with a wettable powder of long residual insecticide. Remove wrapping prior to final inspection. 3.04 TREE SUPPORT ' A. Install tree supports as detailed. Tighten guys without placing undue strain. Encase i wires in rubber hose at points of contact with bark. B. Remove all tree supports after the 1 year warranty period. , 7100-02950.wpd ! DIVISION 2 SECTION 02950 PLANTING Page 7 3.05 PRUNING ! A. Prune all plants as necessary to remove dead and broken branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of transplanting and digging in nursery. ! B. Preserve the natural character; do no remove leader or small branches along trunks. ! C. Use clean, sharp tools and make cuts clean and flush without leaving stubs. D. Cut back to living tissue all cuts, scars and bruises, shaped so as not to retain water. E. Paint all cuts, 25 mm and larger with tree paints. 3.06 MAINTENANCE ' A. Maintain all plants and planting areas immediately after installation until all project work has been inspected, approved and accepted. Further, maintain all plant material for the duration of the warranty period. ! B. Maintenance shall include all necessary measures to establish and maintain plants in a healthy, vigorous growing condition and planning areas are neat and tidy. LC. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to the following work: 1 Maintenance, repair and replacement, where necessary, of all accessories, such ! as tree guys, stakes, turnbuckles. .2 Regular inspection of all plants and control of insects and diseases. .3 Fertilizing, watering and pruning as necessary. Water is considered the Contractor's cost. .4 Removal of debris, broken branches, to keep planting areas in neat and tidy condition at all times. ' D. All plants shall be free of diseases and insect infestations in a healthy, good, growing condition, and planting areas free of weeds and freshly cultivated, at time of final inspection. E. Chemicals for control of weeds, insects and disease shall be used in strict accordance ! with manufacturer's recommendations. F. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all damages resulting from use of chemicals. ! 7100-02950.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02950 PLANTING Page 8 3.07 GUARANTEE A. All plants accepted shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from date of Substantial Performance. ' B. All plants shall be inspected at the end of the guarantee period. Plants which, at that time, are not in a healthy vigorous growing condition, to Consultant's approval, shall be replaced at no extra charge. C. Replacements shall be supplied and planted in strict accordance with Drawings, Plant List, and the specifications and shall be subject to the specified guarantee periods. D. Replacements shall be planted as soon as possible, but during the proper planting season, in accordance with accepted horticultural practice. E. All replacement trees shall be clearly marked in a visible manner. F. Notify Owner and Consultant, in writing, when replacements are to be planted. G. Replacements required because of vandalism, theft, or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, are not part of this Contract. 7100-02950.wpd BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 1 tAR . : GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. ' B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which Drawings are in imperial units. ' C. Obtain a copy of CSA Standard A23.1, and maintain on site. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Furnished but Installed by Others: Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete, to install recessed tie plugs. ' B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections: Section 02200: Earthwork Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03420: Precast Prestressed Hollow Core Slabs Section 05120: Structural Steel Section 05210: Steel Joists (for metal form pans) ' Section 05320: Steel Floor Deck C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others: Install anchors, ties, sleeves, bolts, inserts, cast-in miscellaneous metal items, expansion joint components, sub-frames, reglets and other items to be built into or anchored to, or passing through concrete Work, and which are specified for supply in Work of other Sections. D, Co-operation with Work of Other Sections: 1 1. Check Project Drawings and Specifications for requirements of other Sections which affect construction of formwork. 2. Inform those performing Work of other Sections, in writing or by schedules, of requirements for services, materials and built-in items prepared or supplied by other Sections which affect Work of this Section. E. Co-operation with Consultant: 1. Before commencing work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. 2. Schedule Work to allow sufficient time and access for Consultant to carry out periodic field review. F. Architectural Concrete: Architectural concrete shall mean concrete surfaces designated as"architectural concrete" in Contract Documents. Sandblasted and bush-hammered surfaces shall be considered as architectural concrete. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this Specification, in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1. CSA A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. 2. CSA S413-94, Parking Structures. ' 3. ACI 117-90, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials, American Concrete Institute. 4. CGSB Standard 41-GP-35M, Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop. 5. ASTM D1751-83(1991), Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 6. ASTM D1752-84(1992), Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. B. Qualifications: Formwork design engineer shall be insured against professional liability in accordance with section 74 subsection (1) of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with subsection (2) is not acceptable. C. Design of Formwork: 1. Assume full responsibility for complete structural design and construction of formwork in accordance with CSA Standard S269.1 2. Perform structural design of formwork for suspended concrete structural members by a professional engineer experienced in design of formwork and licensed to practise at location of Project. His responsibility shall include design of formwork and shoring, review of drawings related to this work,field review of formwork construction including stripping and reshoring, and when requested by regulatory agencies submission of written reports of site review of formwork and shoring. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: ' Conform to local and provincial regulations, including construction safety regulations. ' E. Tolerances: The indicated tolerances govern unless otherwise specified. , Concrete construction shall meet the specified tolerances. Tolerances are not cumulative. The most restrictive tolerance controls. Plus (+)tolerance increases the amount of dimension to which it applies, or raises a level alignment. Minus(-)tolerance decreases the amount of dimension to which it applies, or lowers a level alignment. A nonsigned tolerance means + or - . Where only one signed tolerance is specified (+ or-), there is no limit in the other direction. ' BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 3 Definitions: Arris - The line, edge, or hip in which two straight or curved surfaces of a ' body, forming an exterior angle, meet; a sharp ridge, as between adjoining channels of a Doric column. Bowing -The displacement of the surface of a planar element from a plane passing through any three corners of the element. Clear distance - In reinforced concrete, the least distance between the surface of the reinforcement and the referenced surface, i.e., the form, adjacent reinforcement, embedment, concrete, or other surface. Concealed surface-Surface not subject to visual observation during normal use of the element. Cover- In reinforced concrete,the least distance between the surface of the reinforcement and the outer surface of the concrete. Flatness-The degree to which a surface approximates a plane. Lateral alignment - The location relative to a specified horizontal plane or line, or to a point in a horizontal plane. Level alignment-The location relative to a specified horizontal plane. Levelness-The degree to which a line or surface parallels horizontal. Relative alignment - The distance between two or more elements in any plane, or the distance between adjacent elements, or the distance between an element and a defined point or plane. Tolerance- The permitted variation from a given dimension or quantity. The range of variation permitted in maintaining a specified dimension. A permitted variation from location or alignment. Specified surface, plane, or line -A surface, plane, or line specified by the contract documents; specified planes and lines may slope and specified surfaces may have curvature. Vertical alignment - The location relative to specified vertical plane or a specified vertical line or from a line or plane reference to a vertical line or plane. When applied to slabs, ramps, or other nominally horizontal surfaces established by elevations, vertical alignment is defined as the vertical location of the surface relative to the specified profile grade and specified cross slope. Warping - The displacement of the surface, portion, or edge of a planar 1 element from a plane passing through any three corners of the element. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 4 Class of Surface: Class A - For surfaces prominently exposed to public view where appearance is of special importance. ' Class B - Coarse-textured concrete-formed surfaces intended to receive plaster, stucco, or wainscoting. Class C-General standard for permanently exposed surfaces where other finishes are not specified. Class D - Minimum quality surface where roughness is not objectionable, usually applied where surfaces will be concealed. 2. Footings: (a) Lateral Alignment: - Eccentricity measured from centre of gravity of footing as cast to the centre of gravity as specified; 0.02 times width of footing in direction of misplacement, but not more than . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mm [2"] -Supporting masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [1/2"] (b) Level alignment: -Top of footings supporting masonry . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [1/2"] -Top of other footings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +12 mm [+1/2"] -50 mm [-2"] (c) Cross-sectional dimensions: - Horizontal dimension of formed members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +50 mm [+2"] - Horizontal dimension of unformed members cast against soil: 600 mm [2 feet] or less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +75 mm [3"] -12 mm [-1/2"] ■ - Greater than 600 mm [2 feet] but less i than 1.8 m [6 feet] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +150 mm [+6"] -12 mm [-1/2"] - Over 1.8 m [6 feet] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +300 mm [+12"] -12 mm [-1/2"] (d) Vertical dimension (thickness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 5 percent 1 BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 5 1 e Relative alignment: Footing side and top surfaces may slope with respect to the specified plane at a rate not to exceed the following amount jin 3 m [10 feet] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm [1"] 3. Other Cast-in-Place Concrete: (a) Vertical Alignment: For heights 30 m [100 feet] or less: ' Lines, surfaces, and arises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm [1"] Outside corner of exposed corner columns and control joint grooves in concrete exposed to view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [1/2"] For heights greater than 30 m [100 feet]: Lines, surfaces, and arises, 1/1000 times the height, but not more than . . . . . . 150 mm [6"] Outside corner of exposed corner columns and control joint grooves in concrete, 1/2000 times the height, but not more than . . . . . . . 75 mm [3"] ' (b) Lateral Alignment: - Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm 11"] - In slabs, centreline location of openings 300 mm [1 foot] or smaller, and edge location of larger openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [1/2"] - Sawcuts,joints, and weakened plane embedments in slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm [3/4"] (c) Level alignment: -Top of slabs: - Elevation of slabs-on-grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm [3/4"] - Elevation of top surfaces of formed slabs before removal of supporting shores 20 mm [3/4"] - Elevation of formed surfaces before removal of shores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm [3/4"] - Lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other lines exposed to view . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [1/2"] (d) Cross-sectional dimensions: - Members, such as columns, beams, piers, walls (thickness only), and BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 6 slabs(thickness only): - 300 mm [12"] dimension or less . . . . . . . +10 mm [+3/8"] - more than 300 mm [12"] dimension but not over 1000 mm [36"] dimension . . . . . . +12 mm [+1/2"] -10 mm [-3/8"] - over 1000 mm [36"] dimension . . . . . . . . . . +25 mm [+1"] -20 mm [-3/4"] r (e) Relative Alignment: - Stairs: , - Difference in height between adjacent risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 mm [1/8"] - Difference in width between adjacent treads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm [1/4"] - Grooves: - Specified width 50 mm [2"] or less . . . . . . . . 3 mm [1/8"] - Specified width more than 50 mm [2"] but not more than 300 mm [12"] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm [1/4"] - Formed surfaces may slope with respect to the specified plane at a rate not to exceed the following amounts in 3 m [10 feet]: -Vertical alignment of outside corner of exposed corner columns and control joint grooves in concrete exposed to view . . 6 mm [1/4"] - All other conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm [3/8"] -The offset between adjacent pieces of formwork facing material shall not exceed: Class of surface: Class A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 mm [1/8"] Class B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm [1/4"] Class C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [1/2'1 Class D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm [1'7 (f) Openings through members: - Cross-sectional size of opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -6 mm [-1/4'1 +25 mm [+1"] - Location of centreline of opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [1/2"] 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Professional Liability Insurance: t Submit proof of formwork design engineer's professional liability insurance coverage specified in paragraph 1.3.13. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 7 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit for Consultant's review, shop drawings for architectural concrete surfaces. 2. Submit shop drawings showing type, extent and locations of items to be built into concrete. 3. Sleeving Drawings: Submit drawings showing sleeves required through floors, roof and other structural members. 4. Submit drawings showing size and spacing of conduits and piping, if requested by Consultant. 5. For architectural concrete surfaces, submit shop drawings showing layout of panels, form ties, corner details and joint details. 6. Coordinate with other Divisions prior to submittal. 7. Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all submitted drawings. By this review, Contractor represents to have determined and verified field measurements, site conditions, materials, catalogue number and similar data and to have checked and coordinated each drawing with the requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of each drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 8. At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. 9. Consultant will review and return submitted drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule. Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for general arrangement, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in submitted drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of Contract Documents. 10. Contractor shall make any changes in submitted drawings which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by Consultant. When resubmitting, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 11. Do not commence placing sleeves, conduits or piping before drawings have been reviewed and Consultant's comments incorporated on drawings issued to site. 12. Assume responsibility for accuracy of Work. Review of submitted shop drawings does not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 13. Submit shop drawings as follows: 4 copies for review before any Work commences. 1 additional copy for distribution as directed by Consultant. 1 copy to Inspection and Testing Company. 14. Required by Regulatory Agencies: Submit shop drawings bearing signature and seal of Professional Engineer responsible for formwork design, as may be required by regulatory agencies. Proceed with construction of formwork only with their approval. C. Re-Shoring: Submit to Consultant for review information requested in paragraph 3.7.G. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 ' SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 8 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect formwork to prevent functional damage and damage to faces affecting appearance of concrete surfaces exposed to view. B. Prevent damage to fibre column forms, and protect against moisture. PART 2. : PRODUCTS 2.01 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as part of Tender shall include formwork materials, erection, bracing, shoring, incorporation of built-in items, release agent, stripping and removing. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Generally in accordance with Reference Standards. B. Formwork materials brought on site shall be new. C. Use metal forms only with approval of Consultant. D. Plywood: 1. Generally: Douglas Fir, minimum thickness of 17.0 mm [11/16"], to CSA Standard 0121, finished one side, fabricated specially for use as concrete form panels, with sealed edges. 2. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, provide panels smooth and free of defects which would be reproduced as concrete blemishes. 3. Where surfaces receive architectural finishing, such as sandblasting or bush-hammering, use coated or overlaid form panels: as Sylvaform by MacMillan Bloedel Building Materials Limited. E. Voidform: Honeycomb cellular core structure manufactured from Kraft fibre. Top and sides protected with wax coated corrugated board, and bottom unprotected. : Waxmat (by Shearmat Structures Ltd., Winnipeg, Manitoba), distributed by National Concrete Accessories (Acrow-Richmond), Rexdale, Ontario. (Note 1 to 2 week delivery period). F. Form Ties: 1. At architectural concrete surfaces: snap ties, with plastic cone, 25 mm [1"] break back, and grey plastic plugs,to Consultant's approval, and to provide 6 mm [1/4"] reveal. 2. At other surfaces: snap ties, with spreader washer and 25 mm 11"] break back. G. Chamfers: cut from 19 mm x 19 mm [3/4" x 3/4'1 wood, smooth, with no open r defects. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 9 H. Joint Tape: non-staining, water impermeable, self-release, as approved by Consultant. I. Lintel and Shelf Angle Anchors: built-in, adjustable, with askew head bolts, washers and nuts. : Acrow Richmond Peerless Wedge Adjustable Anchor Slot. J. Dovetail Anchor Slots: 0.55 mm [0.021"]thick galvanized steel, glass fibre filled. K. Copper Strip: 0.549 mm [16 oz.]thick cold rolled, to ASTM B370. The following supply flat stock copper sheet. Cambridge-Lea, Mississauga, Ontario. Drummond McCall, Hamilton, Ontario. L. Isolation Joint Filler: 1. Non-Bituminous Type: Premoulded, resilient, non-extruding, to ASTM 1752, and compatible with polysulphide urethane, polyepoxide urethane, or neoprene sealants, as applicable. PART 3. : EXECUTION 3.01 EARTH FORMS A. Where soil conditions are suitable, earth forms for wall foundations may be used with Geotechnical Engineer's approval. 1 B. Trim edges of excavation vertical and smooth. Completely remove trimmings. C. Install wood stringers for suspension of reinforcement. D. Install wood forms where earth form sides have collapsed. 3.02 FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION A. Build formwork with joints sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout or cement paste. B. Install chamfers specified in paragraph 2.2.G, at external corners exposed to view. C. Bed mud sills on sand, gravel or crushed stone placed over unfrozen, dry, solid and stable subgrade. iD. Voidform: 1. Install voidform specified in paragraph 2.2.E, and place 7.5 mm [5/16"] thick 1 plywood over voidform,to provide firm surface for supporting reinforcement. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 10 E. Elevation Survey: y 1. Before every pour of slabs spanning more than 8 m [26 ft.], as agreed with Consultant,survey area and record elevation of top surface of soffit formwork at each column or other permanent support at mid-point between columns, and at centre of each bay area. 2. Provide the Consultant with one copy of the formwork elevation survey before each pour. F. Advise Consultant when an area of formwork will be ready for review. Allow sufficient time for review before starting concrete placing. 3.03 BUILT-IN WORK , A. Form openings and build in anchors, inserts, sub-frames, sleeves, miscellaneous metal items, flashing reglets and similar items furnished under Work of other Sections,which are indicated on Drawings and on shop drawings of other trades, and as required for proper completion of Project. B. Do not embed wood in concrete. C. Shelf Angle Anchors: Install anchors specified in paragraph 2.2.1, as indicated on Drawings and shop drawings, and tighten nuts and bolts at each anchor. D. Anchor Bolts: 1. Use template to position anchor bolts. 2. Tie anchor bolts securely in position to prevent movement during concrete placing. 3. Verify that anchor bolts have specified projection above concrete. E. Openings or Sleeves Not Shown on Structural Drawings: 1. Obtain Consultant's written approval before forming openings or sleeves through columns and beams, or through slabs within 1 m [3'-0"] of their supports. 2. Obtain Consultant's written approval before forming openings or sleeves larger than 200 mm [8"] square in any location. 3. Do not relocate or interfere with bottom bar structural integrity reinforcement which extends from column to column. Report any interferences to Consultant. F. Embedded Pipe or Conduit Not Shown or Detailed on Structural Drawings: 1. Obtain Consultant's written approval before placing conduit or pipe which would be embedded in finished structure. G. Dovetail Anchor Slots: 1. Build in dovetail anchor slots for masonry anchors in locations directed by mason. 2. Install dovetail anchor slots for full height of vertical concrete surfaces faced with masonry that exceed a height of 400 mm [16"] and that are not waterproofed. 3. Install slots continuous and vertical at 600 mm [24"] centres maximum, with at least one slot at each surface 600 mm [24"] or less in width. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 11 4. At junctions of masonry walls and partitions with concrete walls and columns, install one continuous vertical slot at centre line of partition for full height. 5. Supply of dovetail anchor slots is specified in Section 04200, Masonry. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION & EXPANSION JOINTS A. Form construction and expansion joints with bulkheads to ensure straight lines. 1 B. Immediately before subsequent pour at a construction joint, remove bulkhead and tighten forms so that concrete surfaces will be on same plane with no overlapping of concrete. C. Review with Consultant and Structural Engineer proposed location and details of construction joints in walls, columns, beams and slabs. D. Construction Joints: 1. Construction joints shall present appearance of normal form panel joint. 2. Install continuous shear key in construction joints in walls and framed floors 1 which are 150 mm [6"] or more thick. 3. Locate construction joints in framed floors at point in span where shear will be equal to zero (normally at midspan under uniformly distributed load). 4. Provide vertical construction joints in walls at not more than 23 m [75'-0"] centre to centre, and in exposed-to-the-exterior retaining walls at not more than 12 m [40'-0"] centres. E. Construction Joints at Junction of Old and New Work: 1. Install continuous copper strip (flat sheet material specified in paragraph 2.2.K) waterstop, for full length of joint between old and new construction, shaped as detailed on Drawings, and with joints lapped and soldered to be watertight. 2. Cut dovetail chase to receive strip in existing structure with carborundum wheel. 3. Embed strip in chase with solidly packed metallic or chemical waterproofing grout. F. Slab-on-Grade Isolation Joints: 1. Install 12 mm [1/2"] thick joint filler specified in paragraph 2.21, around perimeter of slabs-on-grade at junction of vertical surfaces, equipment bases and where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install joint filler for full depth of slabs. 3. Install joint filler to within 28 mm [1.125"] of top of slab where sealant is indicated. 3.05 TREATMENT OF FORMWORK SURFACES iA. Form Release Agent: 1. Coat formwork with form release agent before reinforcement, anchors, accessories, and other built-in items are installed. 2. Do not coat plywood forms pretreated with release agent. 3. On surfaces to receive finish materials, adhesives, sealers, paint or other coatings or materials, use a compatible release agent. i BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 12 3.06 STRIPPING OF FORMWORK A. Elevation Survey: 1. Before removing shores prior to stripping soffit forms, survey pour area and record elevation of finished concrete top surface in same locations as specified in paragraph 3.2.E. 2. Provide Consultant with copy of survey. B. Be responsible for safety of structure, both before and after removal of forms, until concrete has reached its specified 28 day strength. C. Strip formwork for soffits of beams, slabs and other spanning members which support weight of concrete only when concrete has reached its specified 28 day t strength, except as specified hereafter. D. Formwork may be stripped when concrete has reached 75% of specified 28 day strength, but only in accordance with re-shoring procedures specified in this Section. E. Strip formwork on vertical surfaces when concrete has hardened sufficiently that no damage will result from stripping operations. F. Leave plywood forms in place as long as possible to permit maximum shrinkage away from concrete. G. Remove formwork at architectural concrete surfaces after other formwork has been removed, to prevent damage to surfaces. H. Do not remove plywood formwork by jerking loose or by metal pinch bars. Use wood wedges and gradually force panels loose. I. Take particular care not to damage external corners when stripping formwork. J. When forms are stripped during curing period, cure and protect exposed concrete in accordance with Section 03300. 3.07 RE-SHORING A. Re-shore concrete when formwork is stripped, as follows: 1. When floor is to support weight of newly placed concrete from floor(s) above during construction: re-shore and maintain in place as specified in paragraph 3.7.G. 2. When floor is not required to support weight of newly placed concrete from floor(s) above during construction, and formwork is stripped before specified 28 day strength is attained: re-shore and maintain in place until specified 28 day strength is reached. B. Submit for Consultant's review proposed schedule for stripping, methods of re-shoring, and controls to prove that 75% of specified 28 day strength of concrete has been reached. 1 BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Page 13 C. Re-shore in two directions so that no large areas of Work are permitted to support their own weight. D. Locate re-shores at midspan of members, but at no greater spacing that 3 m [10'-0"] centres. ' E. Place each tier of shoring concentric with the one below. F. Tighten re-shores to carry weight of new construction and any loads imposed tthereon. Do not overstress new construction by overtightening. G. Leave at least two storeys of shores or re-shores in place beneath framed floors which support weight of newly placed concrete above, and until newly placed concrete has reached at least 75% of its specified 28 day strength. 3.08 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. B. Replace defective Work, as directed by Consultant. C. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective measures, and related expenses, if Work has proven to be deficient. D. Movement and displacement of formwork during construction, variations in excess of specified tolerances and marked and disfigured surfaces that cannot be repaired by approved methods will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. E. Reconstruct defective formwork and replace concrete and reinforcement placed in defective formwork at no additional cost to Owner. -- End of Section-- rBOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 1 PART 1. : GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which 1 Drawings are in imperial units. C. Obtain a copy of CSA Standard A23.1, and maintain on site. 1.02 DESCRIPTION ' A. Sections which Specify Reinforcement Installed in Compliance with This Section. Section 02352: Excavated Caissons Section 02630: Concrete Sidewalks and Curbs Section 03420: Precast Prestressed Hollow Core Slabs B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete Division 15 and Division 16: Equipment bases, exterior catch basins and manholes and similar work specified for inclusion under mechanical and electrical Work. C. Co-operation with Consultant: 1. Before commencing work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. 2. Schedule Work to allow sufficient time and access for Consultant to carry out periodic field review. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards and Publications: The following Reference Standards and publications shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this specification, in which case the [after shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1. CSA A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. 2. CAN3-A23.3-M84, Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings. 3. CSA G30.5-M1983, Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. CSA W186-M1990, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction. 6. ACI Detailing Manual, 1994. 7. RSIC Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice, 1995. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 2 B. Qualifications: Welding: Undertake welding of reinforcement only by a fabricator or Subcontractor approved by Canadian Welding Bureau to requirements of CSA Standard W186. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Source Quality Control may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3. Identify and correlate reinforcing steel from Canadian mills with test reports for compliance with requirements specified. 4. Test unidentified reinforcing steel at expense of Contractor. Perform testing for each 1 tonne [ton] or part thereof supplied for incorporation in Work. 5. Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from cash allowance in Section 01020. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings, including placing drawings and bar lists. 2. Prepare placing drawings and bar lists in accordance with the American Concrete Institute(ACI) Detailing Manual, and the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada (RSIC) Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice, the typical details included with Contract Documents. 3. Prepare placing drawings to minimum scale of 1:50 [1/4" = 1'-0-']. 4. Submit placing drawings and bar lists sufficiently detailed and dimensioned to permit correct placement of reinforcement and accessories without reference to the architectural or structural Drawings. 5. Show reinforcement, including dowels, in elevation on placing drawings for wall reinforcement. 6. Show concrete cover to reinforcement. 7. Show location of construction joints. 8. Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review, Contractor represents to have determined and verified field measurements,site conditions, materials, catalogue number and similar data and to have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 9. At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. 10. Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule. Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for general arrangement, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of Contract Documents. 11. Contractor shall make any changes in shop drawings which Consultant may require consistent with Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 3 directed by Consultant. When resubmitting, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 12. Do not commence fabrication of reinforcement before drawings have been reviewed and Consultant's comments incorporated on drawings issued to fabricating shop. 13. Submit shop drawings as follows: 4 copies for review before any Work commences. 2 additional copies for distribution as directed by Consultant. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples of accessories. C. Inspection Reports. Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1. Submit reports of inspections and tests. 2. Distribute inspection reports as follows: 1 copy to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 1 copy to Contractor. PART 2. : PRODUCTS t2.01 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as part of Tender shall include detailing, materials, bending, placing and cleaning. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Generally: In accordance with Reference Standards. B. Bar Reinforcing Steel: 1. Bars which are to be welded by arc-welding process: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-G30.18 Grade 400W. 2. Other bars: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-G30.18 Grade 400R. 3. Bar areas are 100 mm2, 200 mm2, 300 mm2, 500 mm2, 700 mm2, 1000 mm2, 1500 mm2, and 2500 mm2 for bar designations 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, and 55 respectively. Be aware that some sources produce bars of same designation but with significantly smaller areas, and such bars shall not be used without written permission of Consultant and appropriate adjustments in number of bars. C. Chairs Where Exposed to View: plastic, plastic-tipped, or precast concrete. D. Welded Wire Fabric: to CSA Standard G30.5, and in flat sheets, not rolls. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 4 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing steel only in a permanent fabricating shop unless otherwise approved by Consultant. B. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with shop drawings. C. Tag reinforcing bars to indicate placement as designated on shop drawings. D. Provide padded contact surfaces for systems for handling epoxy-coated bars, to prevent damage to coating. E. Splices: 1. Provide splices only where specifically indicated on Drawings. 2. Stagger alternate mechanical splices 750 mm [30"] apart. 3. Stagger alternate end bearing splices 750 mm [30"] apart. 4. Install on threaded splices, plastic internal coupler thread protector and plastic bar end thread protector. F. Mechanical Connection Tension Splices in Column Reinforcement: Provide mechanical tension splices where indicated on Drawings. PART 3. : EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine formwork to verify that it has been completed and adequately braced in place before commencing to place reinforcement. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement in accordance with requirements of CSA Standard A23.3, typical details, and as indicated on Drawings. B. Do not cut reinforcement to incorporate other Work. C. Relocate or rebend bars only on written instructions of Consultant. D. Tie, do not weld, reinforcement in place. E. Reinforcement for Separate Topping: 1. Reinforce separate toppings 50 mm [2'1 thick and over. 2. Reinforce with flat sheets of welded steel wire fabric: 102 x 102 MW13.3 x MW13.3 for toppings 50 mm [2"]to 75 mm [3'1 thick 102 x 102 MW18.7 x MW18.7 for toppings over 75 mm [3"]to 100 mm [4"] thick. 3. Place wire fabric 40 mm [1.5"] below finished concrete surface. i BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 5 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and secure reinforcement in correct position immediately before concrete is placed. B. Remove contaminants which lessen bond between concrete and reinforcement. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide competent supervisor, with at least three years experience in reinforcement placement, to direct placement of reinforcement. B. Inspect placement of reinforcement for conformance with Drawings and Specifications, before each concrete placement, and correct as necessary. C. Be aware that Consultant's periodic review of selected areas of reinforcement are for verification of conformity to design concept and general arrangement only, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quality control, errors, or omissions, or conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. 3.05 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Incorrectly fabricated, misplaced, or omitted reinforcement, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. B. Replace or adjust defective reinforcement before concrete is placed, as directed by Consultant. C. Replace or strengthen concrete work which is deficient as a result of incorrectly fabricated, misplaced, or omitted reinforcement, which was not corrected before concrete was placed. D. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective measures, and related expenses, if Work has proven to be deficient. -- End of Section -- BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 PART 1. . GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which Drawings are in imperial units. 1 C. Contractor shall obtain a copy of CSA Standards A23.1, and A23.2, and maintain on site. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Sections Which Specify Concrete Work Performed in Compliance with This Section: Section 02352: Excavated Caissons Section 02630: Concrete Sidewalks B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: Section 02200: Earthwork Section 03100: Concrete Formwork Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement Section 03420: Precast Prestressed Hollow Core Slabs Section 04200. Unit Masonry Section 05120: Structural Steel Section 05320: Steel Floor Deck Section 05500: Metal Fabrications Section 07160: Bituminous Dampproofing Section 07951: Sealants and Caulking Division 15 and Division 16: Equipment bases, exterior catch basins and manholes and similar work specified for inclusion under mechanical and electrical Work. C. Co-operation with Consultant: 1. Before commencing work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. 2. Schedule Work to allow sufficient time and access for Consultant to carry out periodic field review. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this Specification in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply ' but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1. CSA A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. 2. CSA A23.2-94, Methods of Test for Concrete. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 , SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 3. CAN/CSA-A23.5-M86(R1992), Supplementary Cementing Materials. 4. CSA-S413-94, Parking Structures. 5. ACI 117-89, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete ' Construction and Materials, American Concrete Institute. 6. CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. 7. CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. 8. CAN/CGSB-37.2-M88, Emulsified Asphalt, Mineral-Colloid Type, Unfilled,for Dampproofing and Waterproofing and for Roof Coatings. 9. CAN/CGSB-37:3-M89,Application of Emulsified Asphalts for Dampprooflng or Waterproofing. 10. CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement. 11. CGSB 37-GP-6Ma, Asphalt, Cutback, Unfilled, for Dampprooflng. 12. CGSB 37-GP-12Ma, Application of Unfilled Cutback Asphalt for Dampprooflng. , 13. Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates - Granular A, B, M and Select Subgrade Material (1988 Edition). 14. Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1212, Material Specification for Hot-Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint Sealing Compound (1983 Edition). 15. ASTM C309-95, Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. B. Tolerances: 1. In accordance with ACI 117; definitions for tolerance terminology and tolerances for formed concrete surfaces are recapitulated in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 2. Difference between elevation of high point and low point in specified area not to exceed: In any bay up to 100 ml [1100 ftl: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm [%"] In any bay up to 400 m2 [4300 ftl: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm [1"] 3. Straightedge Method: Finish floor slabs to meet following tolerances when measured at 72 t 12 hours after completion of floor finishing, before shores are removed from formed slabs, by placing a freestanding unleveled straightedge anywhere on slab and allowing it to rest on two high spots. Gap between straightedge placed on two high spots and floor surface not to exceed: 3 m [10 ft.] straightedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm [5/16"] 2 m [6 ft.] straightedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 mm [3/16"] C. Sample of Floor Finishing: 1. Finish an area of floor slab where directed by Consultant to provide sample of finish for approval. 2. Provide new sample area until finish is approved. 3. If liquid membrane curing compound is to be used on Project, determine and apply correct quantity required to meet rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer for measured test area. 4. Approved sample will provide standard by which subsequent finishing will be judged and will be incorporated into Work. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 3 D. Source Quality Control: 1. Both source quality control, and field quality control specified in article 3.10, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3. Inspection and Testing Company shall be certified under CSA Standard A283, Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories, for Category 1 Certification. 4. Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from cash allowance specified in Section 01020. 5. Payment for additional tests (including testing of structure and its performance, and load testing) required by changes of materials or mix design requested by Contractor, and failure of completed Work to meet specified requirements, shall be made at Contractor's expense. I 6. Perform Work of source quality control in accordance with CSA Standard A23.2 and to include (a) verification that ready-mix supplier is qualified to supply concrete in ' accordance with Specification. (b) review of proposed concrete mix designs. (c) sampling, inspection, and testing of materials as may be required. 1.04 PROJECT RECORDS A. Concrete Pour Records: Record time, date, delivery slip serial number, and location in building of each concrete pour, and identify related test cylinders. Keep these records on site until Project is completed. B. Delivery Records: File duplicate copies of concrete delivery slips on which shall be recorded: supplier, serial number of slip, date, truck number, contractor, Project, Class of exposure, cementing materials content, air content, volume in load, and time of first mixing of aggregate, cementing materials and water. C. Record Drawings: 1. Record on a set of Drawings (a) time and date of each pour (b) high and low ambient air temperatures during each pour (c) date of removal of forms in each area (d) founding elevations of all footings 1 variations of foundation Work from that indicated on Drawings. 2. Make record drawings available for Consultant's inspection at all times. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 4 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit for inspection, material samples of specified mix designs. B. Concrete Mix Designs: 1. Submit concrete mix designs for review; when optimum bulk density of aggregates is specified, provide supporting evidence of compliance with requirements. 2. Review of mix design does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for compliance with Contract Documents. C. Inspection Reports: Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1. Submit written reports of inspection and tests. 2. Distribute reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 1 copy to Contractor. 3. On concrete cylinder test reports, include: (a) specific location of concrete represented by sample (b) design strength (c) unit weight of sample (d) Class of exposure (e) aggregate size and admixtures incorporated (f) date, hour and temperature at time sample taken (g) percentage air content (h) test strength of cylinder (i) type of failure if test fails to meet specification. D. Joint Location Drawings: 1. Submit drawings showing proposed location of control joints in slab-on- grade, where not shown on Drawings. 1.06 JOB CONDITION A. Environmental Conditions: In addition to Cold Weather and Hot Weather Requirements of CSA Standard A23.1, the following shall apply to Work of this Section: 1. Provide protection or heat, or both, so that temperature of concrete at surfaces is maintained at not less than 21°C [70°F] for three days after placing, not less than 10°C [50°F]for the next two days and above freezing for the next two days. 2. Do not permit alternate freezing and thawing for fourteen days after placing. 3. Vent exhaust gases from combustion type heaters to atmosphere outside protection enclosures. 4. Provide protection to maintain concrete continuously moist during curing period. 5. For field cured cylinders representing strength development of in-situ concrete, provide same specified hot and cold weather protection for storage of each concrete compression specimen as for concrete from which it was taken, until it is sent to testing laboratory. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 5 6. Do not place concrete when it is raining. Should rain commence during placing, cover freshly placed concrete. 7. Do not place bonded toppings on rough slabs that are less than 15°C[60°F]. 8. Do not grout at ambient air temperatures or concrete surface temperatures less than 5°C[40 0F], or when temperature is forecast to fall to less than 5°C [40°F]within 24 hours of grouting. 9. Do not apply sealants at ambient air temperatures or concrete surface temperatures less than 5°C [40 0F]. 1 B. Protection: Protect floor slabs,and concrete surfaces exposed to view or on which finishes are to be applied, from grease, oil, and other soil which will affect appearance of 1 concrete, or impair bond of toppings or finish materials. PART 2.: PRODUCTS 2.01 UNIT PRICES IA. Unit prices requested as part of Tender shall include concrete, and its placing, curing and finishing. i2.02 MATERIALS A. Generally: In accordance with Reference Standards. ' B. Cementing Materials: 1. Portland Cement: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-A5. 2. Cementitious Hydraulic Slag: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-A23.5. C. Fine Aggregate: 1. For slabs-on-grade, fineness modulus of fine aggregate to be between 2.7 and 3.1. D. Coarse Aggregates: 1. 20 mm [3/4"]to 5 mm [No. 4 sieve]except as specified below. 2. For Slabs-on-Grade: (a) Abrasion loss not to exceed 35%. (b) Petrographic number of aggregate not to exceed 125 when tested in accordance with ASTM C295, as conducted by Ministry of Transport of Ontario. 3. For Slabs-on-Grade 125 mm [5'1 and Thicker: 40 mm [1'/Z']to 5 mm [No. 4 sieve]; combine at least two of the single sizes specified in Table 2 Group II of CSA Standard A23.1, one of which is to be 40 mm [1%1, to obtain maximum bulk density (unit weight) and optimum grading, in accordance with an approved procedure. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 6 Joists OWSJ and Less: 12 mm '/z to 4. For Slabs Over Open Web Steel ( ), [ '] 5 mm [No. 4 sieve]. 5. For Columns Less Than 300 mm [12"] in Least Dimension, or Less Than 95,000 mm2[150 in2] in cross-sectional area: 10 mm [3 18"] to 5 mm [No. 4 sieve]. 6. Traprock Aggregate: Hard, fine-grained igneous rock with "lath-like" crystals interlocked; having a loss in 5 cycles of no more than 5% by weight when tested for soundness by magnesium sulphate in accordance with CSA Test Method A23.2-9A, a , maximum absorption of 1% when tested in accordance with ASTM C127, and maximum petrographic number of 100. E. Admixtures: 1. Conform to Reference Standards for chemical and air-entraining admixtures. 2. Provide only admixtures that are free of chlorides. 3. When requested, provide evidence acceptable to Consultant that superplasticizer does not increase shrinkage of concrete. F. Granular Underbed for Slabs-on-Grade: 1. 20 mm [3/4"] clear limestone, proof rolled for compaction, compacted thickness 150 mm [6"] under slabs 125 mm [5"] or less, 200 mm [8"] under thicker slabs. 2. 20 mm [3/4"]crusher run limestone to OPSS 1010 for type A aggregate, but , with 100 percent passing 22.4 mm [7/8"] sieve; proof rolled for compaction, compacted thickness 200 mm [8"]. G. Vapour Barrier: , Polyethylene membrane, 0.15 mm [6 mil] thick, perforated with 8 mm [5/16'1 diameter holes at 150 mm [6"] centres, each way. H. Curing-Sealing Compound: Membrane curing-sealing compound formulated from chlorinated rubber resins, or acrylic emulsion or solvent free for use in occupied buildings, to ASTM C309, type 1; select compound which will not discolour in sunlight for use in such areas. Masterkure CR Clear, by Master Builders Ltd. : Florseal WB, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario Sealtight CS309 or Vocomp-20, by W.R. Meadows of Canada Limited. I. Floor Hardener: 1. Metallic Hardener: Ferrous aggregate premixed with Portland cement and plasticizers. Ferroplete, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. Masterplate 200, by Master Builders Ltd. 2. Non-Metallic Hardener: Natural and synthetic materials with Mohs hardness 7 minimum, premixed with Portland cement. Durag Premium, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. Mastercron, by Master Builders Ltd. i J. Sealant: 1. Elastomeric Sealant: For use with non-bituminous type point filler. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 7 (a) Two component polysulphide, or two component polyepoxide urethane, in colour selected by Consultant, to CGSB Specification ' CAN/CGSB-19.24. For horizonal joints: THC 900, by Tremco Ltd. : For vertical joints: Dymeric, by Tremco Ltd. 1 (b) Or one part urethane, in colour selected by Consultant, to CAN/CGSB-19.13. 2. Sealant in Conjunction with Dampproofing: : Plastic cutback asphalt to CAN/CGSB-37.5. I K. Control Joint Filler: 1. For control joints in interior floors, approved semi-rigid joint filler, to protect against slab edge breakdown: (a) For sawcuts made with "Soff-Cut®"saw: Loadflex SC Plus, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. Euco 700, by The Euclid Chemical Company, Rexdale, Ontario. (b) For other sawcuts and joints: : Loadflex, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. 2. For control joints in exterior floors left exposed. I : Elastomeric sealant as specified in above sub-paragraph 2.2.J.1 L. Dampproofing: 1. For use in temperatures above 5"C [40°F]. ' : Mineral colloid asphalt emulsion, to CAN/CGSB-37.2. 2. For use in temperatures 5°C [40°F] and below : Asphalt cutback, unfilled, to meet CGSB 37-GP-6Ma. M. Non-Slip Inserts: Fine aluminum oxide, standard strips, 6 mm [1/4"]wide, 10 mm [3/8"]deep. N. Penetrant Sealer: 1. Penetrating silane sealer Hydrozo Enviroseal 20, by The Sternson Group, Brantford, Ontario. SM Deck Seal, by Canadian Barrier Ltd., Carp, Ontario Saltguard 12%, by Construction Products Distribution Services, Concord, Ontario Stifel S, by Dayton Superior Ltd., Rexdale, Ontario Hydrozo Silane 40 IPA, by The Sternson Group, Brantford, Ontario. Masterseal SL 40, by Master Builders. O. Curing Blanket: Amoco Propex#4551, white colour, by Amoco Propex, Hawkesbury, Ontario. 2.03 CONCRETE MIXES A. Concrete: 1. Ready mix,with 28 day compressive strength as indicated on Drawings, and in specifications. 2. Air dry unit weight: minimum 2300 kg/M3. [145 Ibs./ft3]adjusted proportionally for maximum air content listed in CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 15, Table 9. 3. Design concrete mix in conformance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 16, Table 11 (Alternative 1) and Clause 15, Tables 7, 8 and 9, and as follows. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 O SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 8 n Provide concrete meeting water/cementing materials ratio and air content of Table 8 in accordance with Class of exposure specified in following sub- paragraphs, and minimum strength specified on Drawings. Note that , concrete designed in accordance with water/cementing materials ratio of Table 8 may yield strength exceeding minimum strength specified on Drawings. (a) Class of exposure C-1 with 25 percent Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag: for parking garage floors, and walls, balustrades and columns adjacent thereto. Conform to the additional requirements of CSA Standard S413, Parking Structures,Clause 6.1. (b) Class of exposure C-2 with 25 percent Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag: for pavements, sidewalks, curbs and . gutters. (c) Class of exposure F-2 with 25 percent Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag:for basement walls and basement slabs, and for exposed exterior beams, columns, walls and slabs. (d) Slabs-on-Grade: (i) Use type 20 Portland cement, or replace 35 percent type 10 Portland cement with cementitious hydraulic slag. (ii) When mean daily temperature exceeds 25°C [77°F] at time of placement, replace 25 percent of type 20 cement, or 50 percent of type 10 cement, with cementitious hydraulic slag. (iii) Use water/cementing materials ratio 0.50 maximum. (iv) Use aggregates specified in paragraphs 2.2.0 and 2.2.D (v) Cementing materials content 285 kg/m3[480 lb./yd ]. (vi) Modulus of rupture 3.5 MPa [510 psi] average, 3.0 MPa [435 psi] minimum. (vii) Slump at delivery, before addition of superplasticizer, 50 mm [2'1; add superplasticizer, not water, to bring slump to level , acceptable to floor finisher for placement. (e) Interior Concrete, other than specified above, and not exposed to freezing and thawing or the application of deicing chemicals: Select water/cementing materials ratio and cementing materials content on basis of strength, workability and finishing requirements. 4. Columns: Incorporate superplasticizer to provide 200 mm [8"] slump concrete for columns. 5. Floor Hardeners: Confirm that concrete mix contains only materials compatible with floor hardener. 6. Caissons: Provide 150 mm [6"] slump concrete for caissons. 7. Submit evidence, and material samples if requested, acceptable to Inspection and Testing Company to verify that proposed concrete mix design will produce specified quality of concrete. B. Admixtures: 1. Chemical Admixture: Incorporate water-reducing admixture, type WN, in all concrete. 2. Air Entraining Agent: BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 9 Incorporate air-entraining agent in addition to chemical admixture in concrete of relevant Class of exposure, in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, ' Clause 15, Table 9. 3. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride in concrete. C. Structural Semi-Low Density Concrete: Provide concrete incorporating pelletized slag aggregate and having air dry unit weight of 2000 kg/m3. [125 Ibs/ft3]adjusted proportionally for maximum air content listed in CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 15, Table 9. D. Concrete Toppings: 1. Provide topping with minimum 28 day compressive strength of 30 MPa. 2. For floors left exposed and noted as traprock finish: Provide topping with traprock aggregate specified in sub-paragraph 2.2.D.6, and with minimum 28 1 day compressive strength of 35 MPa and maximum slump of 50 mm [2"]. E. Grout: I 1. Dry Pack Grout Under Steel Plates and Where Grout Thickness Does Not Exceed 75 mm [3"]: Mix one part Portland cement to two parts concrete sand that conforms to CSA Standard A23.1, with only sufficient water that mix will retain its shape when made into ball by hand. 2. Dry Pack Grout for Underpinning and Where Grout Thickness Equals or Exceeds 75 mm [3"]: Mix one part Portland cement, one and one-half (1'/) parts concrete sand and two parts of 10 mm [3/8"]pea gravel,with only sufficient water that mix will retain its shape when made into ball by hand. F. Premixed Grout: Mix with water in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Non-Shrink Metallic: Embeco 636 Grout, by Master Builders Ltd. Ferrogrout 939 Premix, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario 2. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic: V-3 Grout, by W.R. Meadows of Canada Limited. Masterflow 713 Grout, by Master Builders Ltd. M-Bed Standard Premix, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. 3. Flowable Grout: Non-metallic shrinkage compensating: M-Bed Superflow, by The Sternson Group, Brampton, Ontario. Masterflow 713, by Master Builders Ltd. In-Pakt Pre-Mix, by C.C. Chemicals Limited 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. Vibrators for Concrete Reinforced with Epoxy-Coated Bars: Kevlar/Polyurethane rubber headed vibrator manufactured by Oztec Industries Inc., and distributed by Castlefield Electric Tool Ltd., Toronto; Mega Industries Inc., Mississauga; and Nick's Power Tools Ltd., Weston, Ontario. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 10 PART 3.: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Confirm that subgrade of compacted fill conforms to requirements specified for ' backfilling before placing slab underbed. B. Confirm that surfaces on which concrete is to be placed are free of frost and water , before placing. C. Confirm that reinforcement,dowels, control joints, inserts and all other built-in Work are in place and secured before placing concrete. ' 3.02 PREPARATION FOR SLABS-ON-GRADE A. Granular Underbed: 1. Obtain Geotechnical Consultant's written confirmation that prepared subgrade is acceptable for placement of granular underbed. 2. Place granular underbed over entire area of building and proof roll. 3. Obtain Geotechnical Consultant's confirmation that thickness, elevation and proof rolling of granular underbed are acceptable. B. Vapour Barrier: ' 1. Place perforated polyethylene membrane specified in paragraph 2.2.G, on top of prepared granular underbed, lap sides and end joints 150 mm[6'1, and "shingle" laps in direction of concrete placing. C. Remove foreign materials from underbed and forms before placing concrete. , 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notification: f Notify Consultant at least 24 hours before commencing to place concrete, and 24 hours before wail forms are closed in. Regardless of any requirement of Reference Standards to inspect all of the work prior to placing concrete, field review of construction will be in accordance with Sampling Program. B. Beams, Girders, Columns: Place beams, girders, brackets, column capitals and haunches monolithically with floor system. C. Concrete Placed over Open Web Steel Joists: , Transport and spread concrete over joist construction in a manner to prevent lateral deflection and twisting of joists. D. Sloping Slabs and Other Sloping Surfaces: Commence concrete placement at bottom of sloping surfaces. E. Vibration of Concrete Reinforced with Epoxy-Coated Bars: Use rubber headed vibrators specified in paragraph 2A.A. 1 BOW MANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 11 3.04 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Floor, Roof, Stair Treads, and Other Slab Surfaces: 1. Perform finishing operations on plastic concrete surfaces in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 22, and as specified herein. 2. Refer to Drawings, Schedules, and other Sections of Specification, for required finishes and concrete toppings. 3. Verify with those responsible for Work of other Sections, that proposed finish is satisfactory for application of their materials. 4. Finish floors to match approved sample. 5. Screed surface to an even, level, or sloped surface, to elevations indicated on Drawings or required for specified finishes and concrete toppings. 6. Tile: Screed slab to level below finished floor necessary to accommodate finish material or topping. For bonded concrete topping, wire broom surface in ' accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 22.6.3. For tile, wire broom surface to texture approved by tile trade. 7. Covered or Painted Floor Surfaces: Provide smooth steel trowelled surface, free from ridges, trowel marks or undulations, for floors that are to be painted, or to receive permanent architectural covering, such as carpet,wood, resilient flooring, sheet flooring, and fluid or trowel applied flooring. 8. Exposed Floor Surfaces: Provide hard, smooth, dense, steel trowelled surface, free from blemishes, and of uniform appearance. 9. Non-Slip Floor Surfaces: Provide swirl trowel finish of texture acceptable to Consultant. 10. Hardened Floor Finish: (a) Apply premixed material specified in paragraph 2.2.1, prepackaged hardener, to total of 5 kg/ml[1 Ib/ftl of floor surface. (b) Apply in two shakes, of half total specified amount in each shake; the second shake at right angles to the first. (c) Finish as specified for "Exposed Floor Surfaces", sub-paragraph 3.4.A.8 . (d) Follow manufacturer's special finishing instructions if concrete is air entrained. 11. Insulation Board or Built-Up Roofing: Hand or mechanical float surface to uniform texture, free from hollows, bumps and ridges. Finish to moderately flat classification. B. Control Joints In Slabs-On-Grade: ' 1. Sawcut control joints along column grid lines and additionally so that spacing does not exceed 30 times slab thickness, except where concrete mix incorporates 40 mm [1'/z']aggregate proportioned to provide maximum bulk density in accordance with paragraph 2.2.D.3, sawcut so that spacing does not exceed 40 times slab thickness. 2. Sawcut before slab temperature starts to fall but commence within 18 hours of placement. 3. For slabs placed in longitudinal strips, sawcut transversely in sequence at half, then quarter, then eighth points. 4. Use 4 mm [3116"] diamond tipped saw blades. BOWMANVILLE ARENA , DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 12 5. Sawcut unreinforced slabs to a depth of 0.25 slab thickness, fibre reinforced slabs to 0.33 slab thickness. C. Joint Filler in Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: , 1. For floors which will be covered with finish materials which conceal joint: clean residue from floor and joint,fill with latex-sand-cement mortar worked into joint, or place fine silica sand in bottom of joint and fill top 12 mm [%'] of joint with specified control joint filler to flush top with surface; do not overfill. 2. For floors exposed in the finished building, prepare and fill joint in accordance with following sub-paragraphs. , (a) Do not fill joints until as long as possible after placing slab, but in no case less than 90 days. (b) Arrange for representative of sealant manufacturer to be present for a period of time at commencement of work to verify that proper procedures are being employed. (c) Clean sawcut residue from floor. ' (d) Clean residue from joint by power washing with 8 MPa [1200 psi] water jet and let dry. (e) Install polyethylene backer rod, of diameter 25 percent greater than joint width, flush with top of floor, to exclude dirt. ' (f) Install joint filler to thoroughly dry surfaces only, at ambient air temperatures above 5°C [40°F] (g) Keep off floor,construction traffic which may erode concrete at edges of sawcuts. (h) Immediately prior to filling joint, depress backer rod to bottom of joint and fill with control joint filler specified in paragraph 2.2.K; do not overfill. (i) Cut off any overpour of filler on adjacent slab surface after filler has hardened. (j) Immediately prior to handover of building, re-examine joint for separation of filler from slab. Clean separations with compressed air and fill. D. Formed Surfaces: 1. Treat formed surfaces in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clauses 24.1 and 24.2, and as additionally specified herein. 2. Provide"Smooth-Rubbed Finish"in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 24.3.4.2,for formed concrete surfaces which will be exposed to view in building and left unpainted. 3. Finish vertical surfaces to receive waterproofing membrane smooth with no ridges or depressions. 4. Finish surfaces to receive a hot-applied rubberized asphalt membrane smooth with no ridges or depressions, using "Sack-Rubbed Finish" in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 24.3.4.4. Clean surfaces of dust, oil, grease, salt, and loose or spalled material. Repair any honeycombed areas. Remove projecting mortar or concrete fins. , 5. Cleaning out of cracks, and filling of holes, cracks and honeycombing at surfaces to be chemical waterproofed is specified under Work of Section 07122. 6. Obtain Consultant's approval of exposed concrete. Regrind or otherwise correct surfaces Consultant has not approved, and to his satisfaction. ' BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 13 7. Plugs at Recessed Ties: Clean tie holes to remove all foreign matter. Coat plugs by dipping in adhesive and insert in hole. Remove excess adhesive immediately with thinner which will not stain concrete, as recommended by manufacturer. 8. Elastomeric Membrane: Provide light sandblast finish to vertical surfaces, where fluid elastomeric waterproofing membrane turns up vertical surface. E. Curb Edging: Finish external corners of curbs rounded and smooth. F. Stair Tread Non-Slip Inserts: 1. Install one non-slip insert specified in paragraph 2.2.M, at each tread and landing; place 40 mm [1'/"]from edge of nosings and extend for full width of nosings except for 80 mm [3"] at each end. 2. Set inserts in prepared grooves, secured with waterproof adhesive and with top set 1 mm [0.04"] above treads. ' 3.05 CURING AND SEALING A. Cure concrete in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 21 and as ' specified herein. B. Curing Compound Method: 1. Use curing and sealing compound specified in paragraph 2.2.H except: (a) On surfaces to receive epoxy or similar paint finish. (b) On surfaces to which architectural finishes will be adhered, the adhesives for which are incompatible with the curing compound. ' (c) Air-entrained concrete for exterior slabs and sidewalks placed between October 1 and April 1. 2. Select acrylic water compound except that if ambient conditions extend drying time unduly and if area is well ventilated and unoccupied by other workers, solvent based compound may be used. 3. Apply curing and sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, increasing application rate as necessary to cover surface completely. C. Plastic Film Method: Where curing compound method cannot be used, cure finished floor surfaces not exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals as follows: 1. Cover with 0.102 mm [4 mil]thick polyethylene sheets. 2. Lap edges 100 mm [4"] minimum and seal laps. 3. Leave in place for the "Basic Curing Period" in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1 Clause 21.1.2, but in no case for less than 3 days, and not less than 7 days for exposed warehouse and industrial floor surfaces. D. Curing Blanket or Wet Burlap Method: For parking garage floors; exterior sidewalks, pavements and curbs; and other finished concrete surfaces that will be exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals: BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 , SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 14 1. Cover with curing blanket specified in paragraph 2.2.0, or wet burlap overlaid with 0.102 mm [4 mil] thick polyethylene, and maintain in place for the "Additional Curing for Durability" period in accordance with CSA Standard ' A23.1 Clause 21.1.3, but in no case for less than 7 days. 2. Wet blanket or burlap regularly to maintain in moist condition. Do not allow to dry out. 3.06 GROUTING FOR STEEL MEMBERS A. Provide and place grout under column base and beam bearing plates. Co-operate with other trades that supply and set plates. B. Dampen concrete surfaces immediately before installing grout. ' C. Install grout in a manner to ensure positive bearing of full area of steel plate. D. Use non-shrink and shrinkage-compensating grouts only when grout will be contained against expansion and self-disintegration. E. Slope grout beyond edge of plate at 45 degrees. , F. Provide same environmental protection and curing as specified for concrete. G. Do not use flowable grout at beam bearing plates unless otherwise indicated, or approved by Consultant. 3.07 CAULKING A. Caulk: 1. Joints exposed to view in walls and slabs with elastomeric sealant specified in sub-paragraph 2.2.J.1, in colour selected by Consultant. 2. Joints not exposed to view in walls with cold poured liquid neoprene sealant ' specified in sub-paragraph ? . 3. Joints not exposed to view in slabs with hot poured asphalt specified in sub- paragraph ?, or cold poured liquid neoprene sealant specified in sub- paragraph ? . 1 B. Apply sealant to thoroughly dry surfaces only, at ambient air temperatures above 5°C [40 0F]. C. Confirm that preformed joint filler and backer rod are compatible with sealant. D. Caulk control joints in slab-on-grade in accordance with paragraph 3.4.6. E. Caulk other joints in accordance with following: 1. Do not commence joint preparation until concrete is at least 28 days old. 2. Thoroughly clean sides of joints with mason's router,or power saw,equipped with double blade where necessary to suit joint width. 3. Blow clean with compressed air with oil trap on line, or vacuum clean. 4. Install backer rod of diameter 25 percent greater than joint width, and of type recommended by sealant manufacturer to be compatible with sealant. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 15 Locate backer rod to p rovide for sealant depth of one-half joint width, but not less than 12 mm ['/"]. 5. Prime joint if required, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.08 DAMPPROOFING A. Apply dampproofing specified in paragraph 2.21, 3.8, to entire surface of earth face of exterior and interior foundation walls with earth on one side only. Apply dampproofing from exterior grade level down to and including top surface of footing. B. At temperatures of 5°C [40°F] and above, apply approved mineral colloid asphalt remulsion in accordance with CAN/CGSB-37.3, at rate of 1 ¢/m2 [2 gallons per 100 ft9 for each of two coats. C. At temperatures below 5°C [40 0F], apply approved unfilled asphalt cutback in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-12Ma at rate of 1 Q/m2 [2 gallons per 100 ft2] for each of two coats. D. Obtain Consultant's approval of dampproofing before backfilling. 3.09 PENETRANT SEALER A. Apply penetrant silane sealer specified in paragraph 2.2.N, to vertical surfaces, to a height of 1 m [3'-3'7 above floor, and from top of footing, or bottom of grade beams, to 1 m [3'-3"] above slab-on-grade. B. Lightly sandblast surfaces to receive penetrant sealer, within 72 hours before 1 applying sealer. C. Verify surfaces are dry, and concrete is at least 28 days old, before applying sealer. D. Apply at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company,when appointed as specified for Source Quality Control in paragraph 1.3.1), shall perform sampling, inspection and testing of concrete Work at site. B. Perform sampling, inspection and testing in accordance with CSA Standard A23.2, and to include: 1. Making of standard slump tests. 2. Verification of air content of air-entrained concrete. (a) For Class of exposure F-1, C-1 and C-2, test at frequency in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1 Clause 17.4.1.1. (b) Make first test before placing any concrete. (c) After stable air content has been established, frequency of tests will be determined by Consultant. (d) For other Classes of exposure,test at time of obtaining strength test specimens. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 16 3. Verification of unit weight of semi-low density concrete by the volumetric method, making one test for each 100 m3 [130 yd 3] placed. C. Inspection for Tolerances: 1. Confirm that concrete work meets tolerance requirements specified in paragraph 1.3.2. , 2. Use the elevation survey records of elevations of soffit form surfaces and finished concrete surfaces specified in Section 03100 and this Section as basis for judging compliance. , 3. Use approved aluminum straightedge to judge compliance with specified slab finish tolerances, except use dipstick equipment where F-number tolerance is specified. D. Slabs-on-Grade: 1. Monitor on a random basis acceptable to Consultant, that slab is being sawcut before slab temperature starts to fall. 2. Observe application of curing compound to sample slab, recording rate of application. 3.11 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances and marked and disfigured surfaces that cannot be repaired by approved methods will be considered defective work performed by this Section. B. Replace or modify concrete that is out of place, or does not conform to lines, detail or grade as directed by Consultant. C. Replace or repair defectively placed or finished concrete as directed by Consultant. D. Testing and replacement of deficient concrete in place: 1. Contractor shall pay for additional testing, design, and related expenses if concrete has proven to be deficient. 2 Contractor shall replace or strengthen deficient concrete work as directed by Consultant, and pay for all testing and related expenses for replaced work until approved by Consultant. 3.12 CLEANING UP A. Remove from building site excess and waste materials, mock-up panels, test areas, and debris resulting from Work of this Section. Leave premises in a , condition acceptable to Consultant before completion of work. -- End of Section-- BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 1 PART 1. : GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which Drawings are in imperial units. 1.02 DESCRIPTION ' A. Responsibilities and Scope of Work: 1. CSA Standard A23.4 Appendix A "Responsibilities" is a mandatory part of this Section. Table Al Option III and manufacturer's alternative (b) shall apply. 2. CSA Standard A23.4 Appendix B"Scope of Work"is a mandatory part of this Section. Be aware of division of work between General Contractor and Precast Manufacturer specified in Appendix B. 3. Where Appendix A or Appendix B is in conflict with this Section of the ' Specifications, the provisions of this Section shall govern. 4. The precast manufacturer shall be responsible for the erection of the precast slabs. B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 04220: Concrete Unit Masonry Section 05120: Structural Steel Section 07951: Sealants and Caulking (for caulking between precast and adjacent structure) C. Work Performed by this Section, but Specified Elsewhere: Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 07951: Sealants and Caulking (for caulking between adjacent ' precast units) D. Work Furnished by this Section, but Installed by Others: ' Section 03300: to install anchors Section 04220: to install anchors ' E. Co-operation with Work of Other Sections: 1. Check Project Drawings and Specifications for requirements of other Sections which affect Work of this Section. F. Co-operation with Consultant: 1. Before commencing Work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this Specification, in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1. CSA A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction 2. CSA A23.2-94, Methods of Test for Concrete. 3. CAN3-A23.3-M84, Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings 4. CSA A23.4-94, Precast Concrete-Materials and Construction 5. CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ' 6. CSA G279-M1982, Steel for Prestressed Concrete Tendons. 7. CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. 8. CAN/CGSB-11.3-M87, Hardboard. 9. CAN/CGSB-51.20-M87, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. 10. CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. 11. The Ontario Building Code, 1990 Edition. 12. The National Building Code of Canada, 1995 Edition, Appendix D. B. Qualifications: , 1. Execute Work of this Section only by a Subcontractor who has adequate plant, equipment and skilled tradespeople to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified,during a period of at least 5 years. 2. Design of precast units shall be by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the Province of Ontario,with at least 5 years experience in precast prestressed ' cored slab design. 3. Undertake fabrication of precast units only by companies certified under CSA Standard A23.4. ' 4. Undertake welding only be welders certified by Canadian Welding Bureau for the relevant type of welding. 5. Precast concrete design engineer shall be insured against professional ' liability in accordance with section 74 subsection(1)of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with subsection (2) is not acceptable. C. Design Criteria: ' 1. Design precast units to support superimposed loads shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the Ontario Building Code. ' 2. For floors not supporting or attached to nonstructural elements likely to be damaged by large deflections, do not exceed live load deflection of span/360. ' 3. For floor. or roof construction supporting or attached to nonstructural elements likely to be damaged by large deflections: For that part of the total deflection occurring after attachment of nonstructural elements(sum of the long-time deflection due to all sustained loads and the immediate deflection due to any additional live load), do not exceed span/480. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 3 4. Design precast units so that camber or deflection, both short and long term, do not render roof drain placement ineffective. ' 5. Design precast units to meet two (2) hour fire resistance rating, based of the requirements of Appendix D of the National Building Code for equivalent thickness and minimum concrete cover. 6. Design precast units to have concrete cover to reinforcement in accordance with Table 1 of CSA Standard A23.4, except that where exposed to weather the concrete cover shall not be less than 40 mm. In no case shall the cover be less than necessary to meet fire resistance requirements. 7. Design steel headers at openings, in accordance with CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16.1. Design precast slabs each side of header to support reactions from header. 8. Carry out vibration analysis to confirm adequacy of precast units for the intended occupancy of the building. D. Tolerances: 1. Conform to tolerances specified in CSA Standard A23.4, for dimensions of finished Work. ' 2. Tolerances are not cumulative. The most restrictive tolerance controls. 3. If tolerances are exceeded, Contractor shall provide and pay for corrective design and construction that may be required. ' E. Source Quality Control by Precast Manufacturer: 1. Precast manufacturer shall at his own expense carry out all inspection and testing of materials, to evaluate the quality of the manufactured unit, ' including testing of concrete in accordance with CSA Standard A23.4, and shall not rely upon any additional testing and inspection that may (or may not) be carried out by Owner. ' 2. Provide to Consultant records from in-house quality control programme based on plant certification requirements. 3. Precast manufacturer shall keep complete records of supply source of concrete material, steel reinforcement, and prestressing steel, and date when slabs cast, and provide to Consultant if requested. F. Source Quality Control by Inspection &Testing Company: 1. Inspection and testing of materials and shop fabrication of Work of this Section, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. This inspection and testing shall not be relied upon by the precast manufacturer, and is completely separate from testing and inspection required to fulfil plant certification programme requirements. 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company, if any,does not relieve Contractor and Precast Manufacturer/Erector of their sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor and Precast Manufacturer/Erector of their responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3. Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from a cash allowance specified in Section 01020. ' 4. On appointment by Owner, Inspection and Testing Company shall submit to Consultant for approval, random sampling procedure which will be followed to verify general compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Include BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 4 r instructions given to details of random sampling procedures, general mst uct g inspectors, and special instructions pertaining to aspects peculiar to this Project. Sampling procedure shall include, but not be limited to: ' (a) Identification and correlation of prestressing and reinforcing steel with test reports for compliance with specified requirements. (b) Check that placement of prestressing steel, reinforcement and ' hardware complies with tolerance requirements of this specification, and that concrete cover is in accordance with Specification. (c) Concrete tests. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Professional Liability Insurance: Submit proof of precast concrete design engineer's professional liability insurance coverage specified in paragraph 1.3.8.5. B. Calculations: Submit design calculations if requested by Consultant. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit erection diagrams and shop details, fully detailed and dimensioned, with complete information necessary so that units can be fabricated and erected without reference to Drawings. ' 2. Show on shop and erection diagrams: - member dimensions - design loading ' - material strengths - prestressing and reinforcing steel - fire rating ' - finishes - bearing details, anchorages and connection details - dimensions of pockets to be formed by other trades ' - openings required by other trades - predicted camber of units at time of erection - lifting and erection inserts - other items cast into members - show location of unit on erection drawings by same identification mark placed on member 3. Each shop drawing submitted shall bear signature and seal of Professional , Engineer responsible for precast concrete design. 4. Submit catalogue of standard manufactured precast units listing spans and loadings assumed in the design. , 5. Submit typical details of connections and any special connections for review before preparation of shop drawings. 6. Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review,Contractor represents to have determined and verified all field , measurements,site conditions,materials,catalogue number and similar data and to have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of ' each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. BOW MANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 ' SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 5 7. At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. 8. Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule. Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for general arrangement, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors and omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. 9. Contractor shall make changes in shop drawings which Consultant may require consistent with Contract Documents, and resubmit unless otherwise tdirected by Consultant. When resubmitting, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 10. Submit shop drawings as follows: 4 copies of erection diagrams and shop drawings for review before any Work commences. Additional copies of shop drawings for distribution as directed by Consultant. ' 2 copies of erection diagrams to Inspection and Testing Company. D. Inspection Reports: 1. Submit reports when shop work of this Section is in progress, at regular time periods as agreed with Consultant. 2. Distribute inspection reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 1 copy to Contractor; 1 copy to Precast Concrete Manufacturer. 3. On concrete cylinder test reports, include: (a) specific location of concrete represented by sample (b) design strength (c) unit weight of sample (d) class of exposure (e) aggregate size and admixtures incorporated ' (f) date, hour and temperature at time sample taken (g) percentage air content (h) test strength of cylinder (i) type of failure if test fails to meet specification. 4. Sign report by inspector who performs inspection, and describe progress of Work, deficiencies found and corrective actions taken. E. Samples: 1. Submit 600 mm x 600 mm [24"x24"] samples in accordance with Section 01300 to provide true representation of colour, texture, aggregate, and surface finish. F. Company Certification: 1. Submit p roof that recast manufacturer is certified under CSA Standard p A23.4. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 6 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Conform to the Cold Weather and Hot Weather Requirements of CSA Standard A23.1. 2. Do not grout or caulk when ambient air temperatures or concrete surface temperatures are less than 5°C [40 0F], or when temperature is forecast to fall to less than 5°C [40°F]within 24 hours of grouting or caulking. Enclose and heat, where necessary. 3. Provide protection to keep grout continuously moist during curing period. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Examine units at plant before shipping and do not ship stained units which will be exposed to view,or defective, cracked, or chipped units. B. Transport, handle and store units in accordance with the manufacturer's ' recommendations, to prevent overloading, chipping, cracking, staining or soiling. C. Store precast units to clear ground or other bearing surfaces,to prevent overstress, warp, twist, accumulation of water or snow in depressions and holes, and to afford free movement of air on all sides of each unit. D. Place stored slabs so that identification marks are discernible, and lifting devices are accessible and undamaged. E. Separate stacked slabs by battens across full width of slabs. ' F. Do not use upper slab of stacked tier as storage area. ' 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warrant Work of this Section against defects arising from manufacture or ' installation, for a period of 1 year after substantial completion of the building. B. Defective Work includes, but is not restricted to, discolouration, spalling, cracking, exceeding dimensional or camber tolerance, excessive creep, structural failure of items designed by manufacturer, visible evidence of corrosion, and failure of caulking. C. Warranty shall include the cost of removal and replacement of covering materials. PART 2.: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 UNIT PRICES ' A. Unit prices requested as a part of Tender shall include Work erected in place, including field grouting, and preparation and submittal of shop drawings. ' BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 1 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 7 B. Unit prices shall serve as a basis for computing value of additional or deleted Work. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Conform to Reference Standards specified herein. B. Cement, Aggregates, Water, Admixtures: to CSA Standards A23.1 and A23.4. C. Prestressing Steel: to CSA Standard G279. D. Concrete Reinforcement: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-G30.18, grade 400. ' E. Embedded Steel: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-G40.21, Grade 300W. ' F. Welding Materials: to CSA Standard W48.1. G. Zinc-Rich Paint-Organic Ready Mixed: Galvafroid, by W. R. Meadows Ltd., Weston, Ontario Glid-Zinc 100, by Glidden Company (Canada) Ltd., Brampton, Ontario. H. Bearing Pads: 3 mm [1/8"] thick masonite or tempered hardboard, smooth one side. I. Insulation: to CAN/CGSB-51.20 J. Bonding Agent: non-reemulsifiable bonding admixture, latex: Sikacem 810, by Sika Canada Inc., Mississauga, Ontario SBR latex, By Euclid Admixture Canada Inc., Rexdale, Ontario K. Galvanizing: to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-G164. 2.03 CONCRETE MIXES A. Concrete: 1. Concrete strength: in accordance with manufacturer's design requirements, but not less than 35 MPa at 28 days. 2. Concrete where exposed to weather, such as exterior balconies: to CSA Standard A23.1 Exposure Classification C1. 3. Density: normal weight concrete. 4. Air entrainment of concrete mix: in accordance with CSA Standard A23.4. ' 5. Do not use calcium chloride or products containing chlorides. B. Grout: 1. Mix one part Portland cement to two parts concrete sand that conforms to ' CSA Standard A23.1,with only sufficient water that mix will retain its shape when made into ball by hand. Minimum 28 day grout strength: 20 MPa. 2. Provide protection to maintain concrete continuously moist during curing ' period. BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 ' PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 8 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units in accordance with CSA Standard A23.4. B. Mark each precast unit to correspond to identification mark on shop drawings for location, on part of unit which will not be exposed. C. Provide hardware suitable for handling elements. , D. Provide 50 mm [2"]thick insulation in accordance with paragraph 2.2.1 at each cell end of hollow core at exterior of building, fitted tight to core. E. Fill ends of hollow core units solid with concrete of same strength as precast slab, , where bearing walls are supported above,where structurally required. Place dams and fill from end of unit to dam. F. Fabricate steel header supports. G. Provide anchors and steel embedments, and after welding touch-up with zinc-rich primer specified in paragraph 2.2.G. Do not apply primer to embedded portion of , steel. H. Provide hot-dip galvanized hardware where exposed to air or insulation space outside air barrier of building. Galvanize after fabrication. I. Provide openings required by mechanical trades. J. Provide closure slabs of special widths to suit Project conditions. K. Finishes: 1. Refer to Drawings, Schedules, and other Sections of Specification, for required finishes and concrete toppings. 2. Verify with those responsible for Work of other Sections,that proposed finish is satisfactory for application of their materials. 3. For bonded concrete topping, wire broom surface in accordance with CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 22.6.3. 4. Provide surfaces of uniform appearance where exposed to view, with no visible stressing bed seams. 5. Covered or Painted Floor Surfaces: Provide smooth steel trowelled surface, free from ridges, trowel marks or undulations, for floors that are to be painted, or to receive permanent architectural covering, such as carpet, wood, resilient flooring, or sheet flooring. ' 6. Formed Surfaces: Finish formed surfaces exposed in finished building to CSA A23.4"Standard Grade". , BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 9 1 PART 3.: EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Verify before delivery of materials to site that work to receive precast units is located correctly and at proper elevations. B. Verify that bearings are clean, smooth and level, and provision has been made for proper anchorage. C. Defective Work resulting from installation on unsatisfactory Work previously ' completed will be considered the responsibility of those performing the Work on this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Supply information required for installation of anchors,supports, inserts, and similar accessories that are required for Work of this Section, and are installed under Work of other Sections. Visit site for a period of time at commencement of installation and periodically thereafter, to verify that information has been understood and installation is being carried out properly. B. Inspect units before erection and reject or repair damaged, chipped and cracked units. Such units may be repaired only with the approval of Consultant. C. Provide and install bearing pads specified in paragraph 2.2.1-1 at masonry and concrete bearing surfaces. D. Provide minimum bearing 90 mm [3'/Z']on concrete and masonry, and 75 mm [3"] on structural steel. ' E. Locate and adjust bearing pads so they do not project beyond face of supporting wall or beam. F. Provide and install steel header supports at openings. G. Tape butt joints at slab ends, and verify that voids are aligned, where voids are to Ibe used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts. H. Erect units in accordance with shop drawings. I. Fit and align units straight, plumb, level, and square, with uniform joint widths. J. Conform to tolerances in CSA Standard A23.4, Clause 10, unless otherwise specified in this Section. K. Set elevations between units to within allowable tolerances before connecting units. L. Fasten precast units in place as indicated on Drawings. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 10 M. Supply and lace reinforcement(prestressing strand or bar reinforcement)in joints. , pp Y p (p N. Grout joint rebates and interfaces with masonry with grout specified in paragraph ' 2.3.6. Saturate surfaces of joints with water for one hour before grouting, and remove any free water before grouting. O. Where soffit is exposed, align soffit of adjacent units so that there is no noticeable ' difference in elevation when viewed from floor below. P. Clean field welds with wire brush and touch-up with zinc-rich paint specified in paragraph 2.2.G. Use one coat, except use two coats when outside the building envelope or exposed to moist or corrosive environment. Q. Precast manufacturer/erector shall field cut or drill holes and openings for , mechanical trades, only at locations approved by precast manufacturer. R. Electrical and other trades shall cut or drill their own openings up to 200 mm [8'1 round or square, but only at locations approved by precast manufacturer/erector. S. Do not cut reinforcement without approval of precast slab manufacturer and Consultant. T. Precast manufacturer/erector shall drill, chip carefully, or saw-cut units and grout t in reinforcing bars and dowels, as shown on Drawings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Precast manufacturer shall carry out field quality control to verify that field operations, including but not restricted to erection, location of bearings, fastening, reinforcement, grouting, welding, painting, and caulking are carried out in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this Specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. B. Replace defective Work, as directed by Consultant. C. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, design, corrective measures, and related expenses if Work has proven to be deficient. 3.05 WATCHING A. Repair damaged and defective precast units which have not been rejected by the Consultant. Submit to Consultant for approval, method and materials to be used for repair work. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 3 SECTION 03420 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW-CORE SLABS Page 11 B. Finish patches at exposed surfaces to match precisely the colour and texture of adjacent area. Remove and re-patch areas that do not match, to Consultant's ' satisfaction. C. Secure patch to concrete surfaces with a bonding agent specified in paragraph 2.2.J, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. For soffit repairs, provide mechanical anchorage within repair patch to substrate. 3.06 CLEANING UP A. Obtain approval from Consultant of cleaning methods before cleaning soiled precast concrete surfaces that will be exposed to view. B. Clean precast concrete exposed surfaces, to Consultant's satisfaction. -- End of Section -- 1 l 1 1 i 1 .. 1 1 1 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03555 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with requirements of Division 1. B. Include cementitious underayment as part of Alternate Price Item for enclosure for second floor viewing area. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Cementitious patching compound relating to Resilient Flooring Section 09660 ' B. Precast Concrete Slabs Section 03420 C. Concrete Work Section 03300 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicators shall be licensed or approved by material manufacturer and shall use equipment and tools as recommended by manufacturer. B. Underlayment shall meet the following requirements: .1 Self levelling. .2 Free of shrinkage, cracks, and spalling. .3 Minimum compressive strength 3000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C472. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and protect from freezing, direct sun exposure and exposure to moisture. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Underayment: Gyp-Crete Dura-cap floor underlayment as manufactured by Gyp- Crete Canada Inc., 115 lb./cu. ft. dry density, 3000 psi compressive strength, cement based, self levelling. B. Primer shall be as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 7100-03555.wpd DIVISION 3 ' SECTION 03555 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) C. Water: clean and potable. D. Sand: as manufactured by underlayment manufacturer. 2.02 MIXING A. Mix materials to proportions to provide 3000 psi compressive strength, and with equipment as directed by manufacturer. B. Mix thoroughly for a sufficient time to obtain a lump free mixture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install underlayment under conditions of temperature as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide continuous ventilation. B. All surfaces shall be solid, thoroughly clean and property primed. C. Concrete subfloors shall be free of oil, grease, dirt, curing compound and any other substance which might act as a bond breaker. Mechanically clean by shot blasting or other suitable method. D. Prime substrates with primer. Apply evenly with soft pushbroom. Do not leave any bare spots. Remove puddles and excess primer. Allow to dry to clear thin film. Do I not install underlayment until primer is dry. E. Underlayment shall be installed prior to installation of interior non-bearing partitions. 3.02 UNDERLAYMENT, SELF-LEVELLING A. Pour liquid underlayment over all hollow core precast concrete slabs, 1" thickness, spread in place with suitable spreader. Use smoother for feather edge and touch up. B. Workmen shall wear footwear with cleats to avoid leaving marks in underlayment. C. Pour underlayment to 25 mm thickness, apply multiple layers if necessary. Provide forms where required to retain underlayment. 7100-03555.wpd tDIVISION 3 SECTION 03555 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT Page 3 3.02 UNDERLAYMENT. SELF-LEVELLING (Cont'd) D. Provide protection to allow underlayment to cure for length of time recommended by manufacturer before allowing installation of finish flooring. Where underlayment will be subject to concentrated loads, or wheel loading, provide wood planking. 3.03 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Cooperate with testing agency and provide all samples as requested. B. Field Testing: to ASTM C472-79 using 50 x 50 mm cube moulds. 7100-03555.wpd t DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Pagel 1 PART GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS jA. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all masonry called for or implied by the drawings and ' specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Concrete Unit Masonry B. Architectural Concrete Block C. Concrete Lintel Blocks, Bond Beams and Other Special Units D. Mortar and Grout for Masonry E. Concrete Fill for all Bond Beams, Bearing Blocks and Pilasters F. Masonry Reinforcement G. Masonry Accessories H. Installation of Bearing Plates I. Loose Steel Lintel Installation J. Building in Miscellaneous Metal Items, Door Frames and Other Items K. Building-in items recessed in Masonry L. Control Joints M. Cleaning of Masonry 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Glass Block Section 04205 C. Structural Steel Section 05120 D. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 E. Air Barrier Section 07195 F. Spray Applied Polyurethane Insulation Section 07218 G. Fire stopping and Smoke Seals Section 07270 H. Hollow Metal Door Frames and Screens Section 08100 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 2 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do masonry work in accordance with CAN3-S304-M84 except where specified otherwise. B. Masonry contractors shall comply with CAN3-A370-M84. C. Conform to Ontario Building Code, Ontario Regulation 413/90 and local building bylaws. 1.05 QUALIFICATION A. The masonry sub-contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years continuous Canadian experience in work of the type and quality shown and specified. Proof of experience shall be submitted with the Tender and shall be subject to the approval of the Consultant. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be kept clean and dry. B. Deliver cement, lime and mortar ingredients with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. C. Cementitious material and aggregates shall be stored in accordance with the requirements of CAN A23.1-M90. D. Exposed units which become stained or chipped, surface marked or scratched, and materials which are affected by inadequate protection shall be replaced, at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine work of other trades for defects or discrepancies and report same in writing to Consultant. B. Installation of any part of this work shall constitute acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory. 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 3 1.08 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. When air temperature is below 5° C: Maintain temperatures of freshly placed masonry at not less than 5° C for 24 hours by means of covers, enclosures and supplementary heat. B. When air temperature is below 5° C: Carry out masonry work within enclosures and with auxiliary heat provided to maintain a minimum air temperature within enclosure of 5° C. Method of auxiliary heating shall not be detrimental to the work. Store masonry units within enclosure 1 before use. Minimum temperature of masonry units when laid shall be not less than 5° C. C. When air temperature is below 5° C take following precautions in preparing and using mortar: - Heat sand slowly and evenly. Do not use scorched sand, having a reddish cast, in mortar. - Heat water to 70° C maximum, 20° C minimum. - After combining heated ingredients maintain temperature of mortar between 5° C and 50° C until used. - Protect mortar from rain and snow. D. Maintain dry beds for masonry and use dry masonry units only. Do not wet masonry units in winter. E. Maintain at work area, thermometers to monitor and verify material and air temperatures 1.09 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings. 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 4 1.10 PROTECTION A. Keep masonry dry using secure waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from snow, rain and dirt, until masonry work is completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction. B. Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings. C. Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until mortar has cured and permanent lateral support is in place. 1.11 MOCK-UP A. Prior to proceeding with the work of this section, construct a 1200 mm long x 1000 , mm high panel mock-up to establish for the Architect's review and acceptance, the general construction and appearance of the installed masonry walls including mortar colours. Mock-up panel shall incorporate each type of architectural block specified and will include all coursing types shown on the drawings. B. Erect as many panels as are necessary to obtain Architect's acceptance without additional cost to the Owner. Remove rejected panels from site. C. Upon the Architect's acceptance, complete all masonry work in strict accordance with the standards established by the Architect in the mock-up. D. The accepted mock-up panel shall remain intact until the work of this section has been accepted by the Architect and shall serve as the basis of standard for the work. 1.12 SUBMITTALS Submit minimum 6 architectural concrete blocks in each size and colour specified for t Architect's review. 7100-04200.wpd i DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 5 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials specified herein. B. Masonry Units: Concrete Block: Modular, conforming to CSA A165 Series-M1977, Concrete 1 Masonry Units. 1. H/715/A/M concrete, masonry units, autoclaved. At all locations unless noted otherwise. 2. Special Units- Bullnose and comer blocks, base blocks, fillers, bond beam and lintel blocks, and the like as may be required. Provide Bullnose units for all exposed corners. 3. Exposed block shall all be made by one manufacturer and shall be uniform in colour, shade and texture. C. Architectural Concrete Block: Split face and smooth face block as manufactured by TGC Permacon or approve equal. Block shall be coloured. Block Type I: Winetka 2 rib split Block Type 11: Buff plain D. Pre-manufactured Masonry Control Joint: The use of control joints in lieu of the specified Built-up type of joint is at the option of the Contractor. Control joints as manufactured by the following are approved: ' Blok-Tite by Blok-Lok Limited Rapid Control Joint- Wide Flange - by Dur-O-Wall Limited 1 Safety Control Joint by Structural Specialties of Canada Limited. E. Masonry Reinforcement: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Wire 9 gauge dia., deformed, bright finish for interior wall locations, sized 1-5/8" to 2" narrower than wall or partition, as manufactured by the following are approved: Blok-Trus BL30 by Blok-Lok Limited Dur-O-Wall Truss or Ladder by Dur-O-Wall Limited Extra Heavy Duty Truss or Ladder Type by Debro Products Limited 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 6 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) E. Masonry Reinforcement (Cont'd) 2. Cavity Wall Reinforcing: 9 gauge wire, hot dip galvanized with adjustable veneer anchors; Adjustable Econo-Cavity Blok-Truss II BL37 by Blok-Lok, or approved equal. 3. Lintel Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel 60 k.s.i. yield grade, deformed billet steel bar, conforming to the requirements of CSA Standard G30.12-M. F. Control Joint Filler-As manufactured by the following are approved: Unifoam R1009 - Flexible by Goodco Limited Rescor Type S by W. R. Meadows Canada Limited G. Mortar Materials - Conforming to CSA A179-M1976 1. Aggregate: CSA A82.56-M1976, except that the maximum allowable percentage passing No. 30 sieve shall be 80% and maximum passing No. 50 sieve shall be 50%. 2. Cement: normal Portland to CAN3-A5-M77 or Masonry Cement to i CAN3-A8-M77. 3. Water shall be clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acid, alkalies, or organic materials. 4. Hydrated Lime: CSA A82.43-Latest edition. 5. Type'M' mortar shall be used for all masonry work below grade and Type 'S' mortar shall be used for all other masonry. 6. Proprietary Mortar Mixes (in lieu of 2 and 4 above) Domtar Construction Materials Limited, St. Lawrence Cement Company, Canada Cement, St. 1 Mary Cement or Lake Ontario Portland Cement Company. Mortar mixes shall conform to mix requirements specified. 7. Mortar colour for plain concrete block masonry work shall be grey. 8. Mortar colour for coloured architectural block shall be coloured, colour to be selected by the Architect. Pigment for mortar colour shall be Extra Strong Mortar Colour as manufactured by Northern Pigment. 7100-04200.wpd i rDIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 7 i2.02 MIXES A. Mixing: Prepare and mix mortar materials under strict supervision, and in small batches only for immediate use. Mix proprietary mortars in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce the specified mortar types in accordance with CSA A179-M1976. Do not use retempered mortars. B. For bedding steel bearing plates, lintels, for laying bearing courses under concentrated loads: Use Type 'M' cement mortar, having a compressive strength of 17 MPa (minimum) composed of: 1 part grey Portland cement 1/4 part hydrated lime - or 1 part Proprietary Masonry cement or approved equal plasticizer. 3 parts aggregate. 2.03 DAMP COURSE AND FLASHINGS Peel and stick modified SBS bitumen membrane fully compatible with spray applied polyurethane insulation: Vedagard Non-slip by Bakor Inc. Bituthene 5000 by W.R. Grace & Co. Mel-Dek by W.R. Meadows 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Brick vents: "Goodco Brick Vents"screened, as distributed by Goodco Ltd. Colour to match mortar colour. B. Grout: V3 by W.R. Meadows or M-Bed by Sternson. 2.05 METAL ANCHORS A. Cavity wall anchors shall be 22 gauge hot dip galvanized conforming to the Ontario Building Code: Adjustable Flex-O-Lok by Blok-Lok iBlock Shear Connections by Fero B. Column Ties: Column Lok BL-10 by Blok-Lok, hot dip, galvanized, spot weld to columns at 400 mm c/c. 7100-04200.wpd i DIVISION 4 r SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 8 , 2.06 FABRICATION A. Lintels in non-load-bearing walls shall be constructed with special bond or lintel block units unless shown otherwise on plans. Lintels shall bear 6" minimum and bearing shall be isolated with two layers of heavy asphalt coated paper. B. Reinforcing steel in lintels shall be 2 x 20 M bars or as noted on drawings. C. Concrete fill for lintels shall be 25 MPa or as noted on the drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. General lines and levels are provided under Division 1. Maintain dimensions, lines and levels. B. A competent masonry foreman shall supervise and direct the work and only skilled masons shall execute the work of this Section. The workmanship in construction of exposed masonry walls shall be of highest calibre and first class in all respects. C. Chipped, cracked or stained, and unsatisfactory material or workmanship of all t masonry work shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. D. Co-ordinate work of this Section with others such as, field welding of anchors to steel work, insulation application, and the like. Prepare all items to built-in as the work proceeds, either supplied and installed by other trades or installed under this Section. , E. Walls shall be constructed as true planes and when tested with a 3 metre straight edge placed anywhere on the wall in any direction shall be true within 3 mm. F. Variation in the Sizes of Wall Openings: A 6 mm maximum variation is allowed from the actual designated size of wall openings. G. Horizontal and vertical joints in alternating courses in line, and all horizontal courses carried at a uniform height around the room. Where stack bond is required, units to be gauged to length with suitable plumb lines erected from scaffolding at intermediate points as required. 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 9 3.01 GENERAL (Cont'd) H. Buttering comers of units, throwing mortar droppings into joints, deep or excessive furrowing of bed joints, will not be permitted. Do not shift or tap units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh supply. Bed and vertical joints shall be evenly and solidly filled with mortar. I. All mortar shall be used and placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours of mixing. Mortar not used within this time limit shall be discarded. J. Lay all joints 10 mm thick (uniform) unless otherwise specified or otherwise indicated on drawings or instructed by the Consultant. All joints shall be full of mortar except where specifically designated to be left open. ' K. All joints shall be slightly concave. Use sufficient force to press mortar tight against masonry units on both sides of joints. Remove excess material or burrs left after jointing by means of a trowel or rubbing with burlap bag. 3.02 BLOCK WORK A. Provide special shapes and sizes as required such a halves, jambs, lintels, solids, corners, bullnoses and double bullnoses, semi-solids, ashlar, etc. Use bullnose and double bullnose block at all external comers where block is to be left exposed. i B. Lay block with webs to align plumb over each other with thick ends of webs up. The top course of all partitions which do not pass through a ceiling or up to the ' underside of a roof deck shall have the open cells filled solid. C. Cut exposed block with power driven abrasive cutting disc or diamond cutting wheel for flush mounted electrical outlets, grilles, pipes, conduits, leaving 1/8" maximum clearance. 1 D. Do not wet concrete masonry before or during laying in wall. E. Notwithstanding current trade practices in this regard fill all vertical and bed joints, including plain end faces, through the entire wall thickness solidly with mortar. F. Bond intersecting block walls in alternate courses. G. Do not break bond of exposed walls where partitions intersect and if bond would show through on exposed face of walls. Bond these partitions to walls they intersect with prefabricated intersection masonry reinforcement in each course. ' 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 10 3.02 BLOCK WORK (Cont'd) H. In concrete masonry walls where shown on drawings provide through wall control joints full height of wall. Joint shall be 10 mm wide and formed by building up one side of the control joint and applying a double layer of tarred paper or asphalt emulsion to prevent mortar bonding. The other side of joint shall be built up to the same height and the resulting key cavity filled solid with mortar as each course is laid. Rake out vertical joint between block ends to a depth of 20 mm full height both sides and leave ready for caulking sealant. Pre-manufactured control joints as specified herein may be used in lieu of built-up type of joint. 1. Provide 10 mm wide joint, butting metal cladding ready to receive fibreglass filler and sealant. 3.03 PARTITIONS 1 A. Terminate non load bearing walls within 20 mm of structure above. B. Where walls are pierced by structural members, ducts, pipes, fill voids with mortar to within 20 mm of such members. C. Fill spaces between non-load bearing walls and structure, ducts and pipes with compressed glass fibre or mineral wool insulation completely from one side of wall to other. D. For fire separations, fill around wall penetrations and between top of wall and deck/structure with Dow Coming Fire Stop Sealant to provide the same rating as , the wall. 3.04 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE BLOCK VENEER A. Build masonry walls plumb, level and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment. B. Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings within minimum of cutting. C. Mixin g and blending: mix units within each pallet and with other pallets to ensure uniform blend of colour and texture. D. Where necessary to temporarily stop horizontal runs of masonry and in building corners: 1. Step-back masonry diagonally to lowest course previously laid. 7100-04200.wpa DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 ' MASONRY Page 11 2. Do not"tooth" new masonry under any circumstances. 3. Fill in adjacent courses before heights of stepped masonry reach 1200 mm. E. Except in cold weather,wet clay brick having an initial rate of absorption exceeding 1 g/min/100 mm2,wet to uniform degree of saturation, 3 to 24 hours before laying, and do not lay until surface dry. F. Wet tops of walls built of bricks qualifying for wetting, when recommencing work on such walls. G. Coursing Height: 200 mm for three bricks and three joints as indicated. H. Jointing: Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then tool with round jointer to provide smooth, compressed, uniformly concave joints where ` concave joints are indicated. I. Tie masonry veneer to backing in accordance with CAN3-S304-M84. J. Architectural Block shall be laid up in running bond with vertical joints in successive courses centring on mid-point of unit below. Provide soldier coursing, dentil coursing, quoins and inly patterns where shown on the plan. K. Mitre architectural block at all corners other than 900. Mitre soldier course at all corners. Rake joints at these locations. L. The cavity shall be kept free of mortar droppings at all times, by means of boards set in between and raised as the face brick work progresses. M. Place continuous dampcourse and flashing membrane at the bottom of all cavities, including at bottom of walls and over all openings. Lap joints 150 mm and seal with adhesive. N. Leave vertical joints open at not over 600 mm centres at the top of all walls, at the bottom of cavities, above and below openings, etc.,for ventilation and weeping and install cavity weep hole vents in each open vertical joint. O. Provide continuous control joints as indicated on the drawings. P. Install loose steel lintels. Centre over opening width. 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 12 ' 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Unless otherwise noted on plans, all masonry walls shall be reinforced with joint reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be installed in the first and second bed joints, 200 mm apart immediately above lintels and below sill at openings, and in bed joints at 400 mm vertical intervals elsewhere. Reinforcement in the second bed joint above or below openings shall extend two feet beyond the jambs. All other reinforcement shall be , continuous except that it shall not pass through vertical masonry control joints. I Side rods shall be lapped at least 150 mm at splices. Use prefabricated comer and tee sections for continuous reinforcement at corners , and intersecting walls. 3.06 BUILT-INS A. Build in items provided by other Sections, including bearing plates, door frames, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and loose steel lintels. Build in items to present a neat, rigid, true and plumb installation. Leave wall openings required for ducts, grilles, pipes and other items. , B. Fill voids between masonry and metal frames with masonry mortar or insulation, as shown or as required to provide a neat finished appearance. C. Set wall plates on masonry in non-shrink grout in accordance with manufacturer's e instructions. , D. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling, patching and making good for other trades in masonry work. E. Consultant's approval shall be obtained before cutting. 3.07 REPOINTING OR TUCK POINTING , A. Repoint defective joints as follows: (a) Cutback joints 12 mm, taking care not to damage units. Remove dust and loose materials by brushing or by water jet. If water jet is used, allow excess water to drain before repointing. (b) Repoint with original mix. (c) Pack mortar tightly in thin layers, and tool to required joint finish. 7100-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 ' MASONRY Page 13 3.08 CLEANING A. Obtain and follow block manufacturer's written instructions for Cleaning. Test sample area, 3.0 m x 3.0 m, to judge effectiveness of cleaning procedures and secure Consultant's approval. I B. Keep wall clean and free of mortar stains during laying. Allow mortar droppings which adhere to wall to dry out but not set. Then rub with small piece of masonry followed by brushing to remove all traces. On completion of masonry, after mortar ' is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry thoroughly. C. Protect windows, trim and metal from cleaning agents. iD. Remove mortar with wood paddles and scrapers before wetting. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. Clean block work using water, scrubbing brushes and wood paddles only. E. Remove mortar from concrete floor slabs. ' F. Leave entire area vacuum clean. i 1 1 1 1 i 1 7700-04200.wpd ' DIVISION 4 SECTION 04205 ' GLASS BLOCK Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all glass block called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 t1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed shop drawings and installation drawings for use during installation. B. Submit duplicate samples of each type of glass block specified. C. Submit samples of mortar colours selected by the consultant. L1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be kept clean and dry. B. Deliver cement, lime and mortar ingredients with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. C. Cementitious material and aggregates shall be stored in accordance with the requirements of CAN A23.1-M90. D. Exposed units which become stained or chipped, surface marked or scratched, and materials which are affected by inadequate protection shall be replaced, at no additional expense to the Owner. 7100-04205.wpd DIVISION 4 ' SECTION 04205 GLASS BLOCK Page 2 1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine work of other trades for defects or discrepancies and report same in writing to Consultant. B. Installation of any part of this work shall constitute acceptance of such surfaces as ' being satisfactory. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Glass Block: Pittsburg Corning Corporation "VUE" block, 197 mm x 197 mm x 98 mm thick. B. Mortar: to CSA A179, Table 2. C. Expansion Strips: Fibreglass Compressible 10.5 x 50 x 600 mm as supplied by glass block supplier. D. Panel Reinforcing: Galvanized 4.5 mm diameter steel wire installed in double row at each horizontal course. E. Panel Anchors: Galvanized (after perforating)20 gauge perforated steel strips 600 mm long x 25 mm wide; as supplied by the glass block supplier. F. Asphalt Emulsion: as supplied by the glass block supplier. G. Oakum: as supplied by the glass block supplier. H. Portland Cement: Normal, to CSA 3-A5, Type 10. I. Lime: Type S to ASTM C-207. J. Sand: to ASTM C-144 for thin joints. ' K. Caulking: Non-staining waterproof mastic 1 component silicone. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. General lines and levels are provided under Division 1. Maintain dimensions, lines , and levels. 7100-04205.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04205 ' GLASS BLOCK Page 3 3.01 GENERAL (Cont'd) B. A competent masonry foreman shall supervise and direct the work and only skilled ' masons shall execute the work of this Section. The workmanship in construction of exposed glass block shall be of highest calibre and first class in all respects. C. Chipped, cracked or stained, and unsatisfactory material or workmanship of all glass block work shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. D. Co-ordinate work of this Section with others such as, field welding of anchors to isteel work, insulation application, and the like. Prepare all items to built-in as the work proceeds, either supplied and installed by other trades or installed under this ' Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Conform to ANSI A41.1-1953 (R1970). ' B. Embed reinforcing in each horizontal mortar joint and in joints above and below all openings within panel. Reinforcing shall run continuously from end to end of panels and shall not overlap less than 150 mm where more than one length is used. C. Paint all surfaces upon which glass block is to be laid with asphalt emulsion or asphalt paint before spreading first mortar bed. Allow emulsion or paint to dry before spreading mortar. D. When asphalt is dry, place full mortar bed joint, do not furrow. E. Set lower course. All mortar joints shall be full and not furrowed. F. Joints shall be minimum 6 mm or 9 mm maximum. All joints shall be completely and evenly filled with mortar. Lay blocks plumb and true and all joints to be uniform and accurately spaced. Point and tool concave to a smooth surface after mortar ' has reached its initial set. Mortar to be coloured to later selection. G. Do not strike units with a metal tool while laying, but lay by a method known as "shoving"(working into place with the hands), thereby compressing vertical joints. H. Take care not to lay a greater number of courses than the joints will support without sagging. I. Provide open space for expansion. Space to be sealed under Section 07900. 7100-04205.wpd DIVISION 4 , SECTION 04205 GLASS BLOCK Page 4 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) , J. After initial set of mortar joints, tool exposed edges of joints with a rounded jointer so that they are throughly compressed. Finish surface of joints to be slightly concave, smooth and nonporous. , 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean and polish glass blocks in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. , 7100-04205.wpd BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 1 ' PART 1. : GENERAL ' 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which i Drawings are in imperial units. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Supplied by this Section but Installed by Others: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork: to install anchor bolts and cast-in ' anchorages Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete: to install loose bearings, bases and anchorages Section 04200: Unit Masonry: to install loose bearings, built in anchors and loose lintels ' B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete: grouting of base and bearing plates on cast-in-place concrete Section 04200: Unit Masonry: grouting of bearing plates on masonry Section 05210: Steel Joists Section 05310: Steel Roof Deck Section 05320: Steel Floor Deck ' Section 05500: Metal Fabrications Section 07410: Preformed Metal Siding Section 05510: Metal Stairs Section 09843: Cementitious Fireproofing Section 09845: Intumescent Coatings Section 09900: Finish Painting C. Co-operation with Work of Other Sections: Check project Drawings and Specifications for requirements of other Sections which will affect installation of Work of this Section. ' D. Co-operation with Consultant: Before commencing work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this specification, in which ' case the latter shalt govern.Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1. CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 , STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 2 2. CAN/CSA-S16.1-M89, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. 3. CAN/CSA-S136-M89, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 4. CSA W178.1-96, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. , 5. CSA W178.2-96, Certification of Welding Inspectors. 6. SSPC-SP 6-85, Structural Steel Painting Council, Commercial Blast Cleaning. , 7. ASTM A 653/A653M-95, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A 570/A570M-95, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. 9. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,Section 10,Architectural Exposed Structural Steel, latest edition. B. Qualifications: ' 1. Fabricate structural steel only by a Fabrication Member of the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction. 2. Undertake welding only by fabricators certified by Canadian Welding Bureau , under CSA Standard W47.1, Division 2.1. 3. Connections Designed by Consultant. Submission of shop drawings for connections which have been detailed on Drawings by Consultant shall represent acceptance by Contractor that , connection can be executed successfully. 4. Other Connections: (a) Design of other connections which cannot be selected from standard designs tabulated in CISC Handbook of Steel Construction shall be by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the Province of Ontario, experienced in structural steel connection design. (b) Consultant will review connection arrangement to verify general conformance with overall design concept of structure. (c) Connection design engineer shall be insured against professional liability in accordance with section 74 subsection (1) of Regulation , 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with subsection (2) is not acceptable. C. Design: 1. Connections: (a) Provide bolted or welded connections, unless shown otherwise on , Drawings. (b) Use high strength bolts, except that A307 bolts may be used for connections of roof purlins, bridging, girls and trimmer beams not connecting to columns, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. (c) Use slip resistant(friction-type)connections for bolted joints designed to resist reversible forces, except that bolt capacity need not be so limited under seismic force. , (d) Provide tension adjustment hardware at rod type bracing and at flat bar type bracing. (e) Do not permit connections to encroach on clearance lines required for installation of Work of other Sections. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 3 r2. Beam Connections: (a) Provide connections adequate to resist reaction of beam,when beam is loaded to maximum flexural capacity under uniformly distributed load, unless reaction or connection detail is shown on Drawings. For composite beam construction, use flexural capacity of composite section based on 100 percent shear connection of beam to slab. ' (b) Provide flexible beam connections for unrestrained members in accordance with CSA S16.1, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. (c) Select connections, wherever possible, from standard designs 1 tabulated in current edition of CISC Handbook of Steel Construction, except that length of beam web angles shall not be less than half the depth of beam, and single angles shall not be used for beams deeper than 600 mm [24"]. (d) Provide direct connections to flanges of spandrel beams (exterior perimeter beams) to restrain twisting. (e) Do not use fish plate, shear plate or tab connections. ' D. Tolerances: In addition to tolerances specified in CSA-S16.1, erect shelf angles and members to which frames of windows, doors and louvres are connected directly and which are attached to steel frame, within a tolerance of 3 mm [1/8"] plus or minus, and with abutting ends of members at same level. ' E. Random Splicing: Obtain in writing from Consultant, prior to commencement of shop drawings, special requirements that will be imposed as a necessary condition of acceptance of members with randomly located butt welded splices. ' F. Source Quality Control: 1. Inspection and testing of materials and shop fabrication of Work of this Section, and field quality control specified elsewhere in this Section, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3. Inspection and Testing Company shall be certified by Canadian Welding ' Bureau, in Category 1, Buildings, under CSA W178.1 . 4. Welding inspectors and supervisors shall be certified by Canadian Welding Bureau to CSA W178.2, to minimum level 2 certification. 5. Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company ' will be made from cash allowance specified in Section 01020. 6. Include in the contract sum, cost of inspection and testing of splices introduced by fabricator in steel sections at random locations. 7. Inspection and Testing Company when appointed shall carry out shop inspection to verify: (a) Structural materials and paint conform to Specifications. Mill test 1 reports, properly correlated to the materials,will be accepted in lieu of physical tests of structural materials. r BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 , SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 4 b Fabrication and welding conforms to Specifications and dimensioned , shop drawings. (c) Shop painting, and cleaning and preparation for same, conform to r specified requirements. (d) Surfaces inaccessible for cleaning and painting after assembly are treated before assembly. ' (e) For surfaces painted with zinc-.rich paint or zinc primer, specified surface preparation is followed, and specified paint thickness is applied. ' (f) Non-destructive Testing of Welded Connections: Carry out non-destructive testing of welded connections chosen at random as follows: , : 10% of moment connections involving use of fillet welds, by magnetic particle inspection. : All moment connections and all connections in direct tension involving use of Full Penetration Groove welds, by ultrasonic testing. , : Where moments are transferred by either fillet welds or groove welds into end plates in"T"joint configurations, examine base metal for lamellar tearing or cracking, by ultrasonic testing. , 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Professional Liability Insurance: , Submit proof of connection design engineer's professional liability insurance coverage specified in paragraph 1.3.B.4.(c). B. Calculations: r Submit design calculations if requested by Consultant. C. Shop Drawings: r 1. Submit for review typical details of connections and any special connections, before preparation of shop drawings. 2. Professional Engineer responsible for connection design shall either sign and seal each shop drawing submitted, or shall submit a signed and sealed letter at commencement of shop drawing preparation stating he will assume responsibility for compliance of connections with this Specification. 3. Where new Work connects to existing construction, determine existing conditions and all dimensions on site, including verification of all dimensions on Drawings. Report any necessary adjustment to Consultant. ' 4. Submit erection diagrams and shop details, fully detailed and dimensioned, - with complete information necessary so that steel may be fabricated and erected without reference to Drawings. , 5. Include whether snug-tight or pre-tensioned high-strength bolts are to be used, and whether threads are to be excluded from shear plane. 6. Show splice locations and details. , 7. Submit typical details of connections and any special connections for review before preparation of shop drawings. 8. Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review, Contractor represents to have determined and verified all field , measurements, site conditions, materials, catalogue number and similar data, and to have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the r BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 5 requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 9. At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. 10. Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule. Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for general arrangement, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors and omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility 1 for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. 11. Contractor shall make changes in shop drawings which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents, and resubmit unless otherwise directed by Consultant. When resubmitting, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 12. Submit shop drawings as follows: 4 copies of erection diagrams and shop drawings for review before any Work commences. 1 additional copy of shop drawings for distribution as directed by Consultant. 1 copy of erection diagrams to Inspection and Testing Company. ' D. Paint Performance: If requested by Consultant, submit paint manufacturer's certification that paint conforms to CISC/CPMA Standard specified. E. Inspection Procedure and Reports: Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1. Submit Inspection Procedure: Submit to Consultant procedure which shall be followed to verify compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. Include details of any random sampling procedures, general instructions given to inspectors and special instructions pertaining to aspects peculiar to this Project. Submission of this procedure shall not relieve Inspection and Testing Company of responsibility ' to confirm that completed structural steelwork complies with above requirements. 2. Submit reports at least weekly when shop and site Work of this Section is in progress. 3. Distribute inspection reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 1 copy to Contractor; 1 copy to Steel Fabricator. 4. Sign report by inspector who performs inspection, and describe progress of 1 Work, deficiencies found and corrective actions taken. 5. Include deficiency list of outstanding items from previous reports, and comment on status. F. Erection Procedures: 1. Submit to Consultant or regulatory authorities for review, diagrams showing methods of erection proposed, if so directed by Consultant or regulatory authorities. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 6 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver products that are supplied only under Work of this Section to trades responsible for their installation, to location they direct, and to meet construction schedule. B. Handle and store structural steel so that no damage or corrosion is caused to stored or erected Work, or to other property. C. Protect architecturally exposed steel during fabrication, handling, storage and erection to prevent marring of surfaces exposed to view, by marking, bending, denting, or coarse grinding. PART 2.: PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as part of Tender shall include Work erected in place, and , preparation and submittal of shop drawings. B. Unit prices shall serve as a basis for computing value of additional or deleted Work , and alterations, including cutting and reinforcing of holes, performed as Changes to Work. C. Base estimate of steel tonnage on CISC standard method of computing weights. Use net dimensions of shapes and plates, without allowance for weight variations due to mill tolerances. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide new materials in accordance with Reference Standards, of strength and quality noted on Structural Drawings. 1. Cold Formed Channels: Fabricate from hot rolled sheet to ASTM A570/A570M, Grade 50. Fabricate from zinc-coated sheet to ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Quality Grade 50 (345 MPa) Class 1. 2. Anchor Bolts: to ASTM A307, and to typical details on Drawings , 3. Studs: to ASTM A 108. B. Galvanizing: Zinc coating: to CSA Standard G164. C. Paint: 1. Shop Coat Paint, for steel that will not receive finish coat: to CISC/CPMA Standard 1-73a,A Quick-Drying One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel. 2. Prime Paint: to meet requirements of CISC/CPMA 2-75, A Quick-Drying Primer for Use on Structural Steel 3. Inorganic Zinc Primer: Carbo Zinc 12, by Corrosion Service Co. Ltd. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 7 Dimetcote 9 by Ameron Canada Inc., Oakville, Ontario Glid-Zinc 5530/5531, by Glidden Company (Canada) Ltd. 4. Zinc-Rich Paint-Organic, Ready Mixed: Galvafroid, by W.R.Meadows Ltd. Glid-Zinc 100, by Glidden Company(Canada) Ltd. ' 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Work of this Section in accordance with CSA-S16.1, and as specified below. B. Holes: 1. Punch holes 11 mm [7/16"1 to 28 mm [1-1/16"] diameter as required for attaching the Work of other Sections to structural steel members. Locate holes so that no appreciable reduction of strength of members is caused. 2. Provide holes for pipes and ducts, and reinforce openings as indicated on Drawings. Cutting of holes in structural members in field will not be permitted except with written approval of Consultant. 3. Provide effective drainage holes to prevent accumulation of water in tubular members. C. Base Plates: Provide single base plates. Do not use separate levelling plates for columns. D. Architecturally Exposed Steelwork: ' Fabricate and maintain straightness of structural steelwork which will be left exposed to view as finished surface, in accordance with American Institute of Steel Construction Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 10, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel, and as follows: 1. Continuously seal weld connections exposed on exterior of building. 2. Finish exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 3. Remove mill marks, identification, and surface imperfections smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 4. Do not mar surface with grind marks that are clearly visible after painting. E. Masonry Anchors: 1. Provide masonry strap anchors welded to structural steel. 2. Provide for attachment of adjustable flexible anchors that are supplied by mason. 3. Provide wall anchors for beams bearing on masonry or concrete. F. Lintels: Provide 150 mm [6"] minimum bearing for angle lintels, and bolt or weld together upstanding legs at 600 mm [24"] centres. ' G. Cleaning Steel: 1. Clean steel, whether it is to be painted or not, to the degree required by CISC/CPMA 1-73a, except as specified below. 2. Clean steel which is specified to be painted to CISC/CPMA 2-75 in accordance with that Standard. i BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 8 3. Clean steel which is specified to receive an organic zinc-filled epoxy P rimer, , or zinc-rich paint, or inorganic zinc primer, in accordance with SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. H. Painting: 1. Paint interior steel surfaces that are not specified to receive top coat or zinc , primer or zinc-rich paint, with one coat of paint to CISC/CPMA 1-73a. 2. Prime interior steel surfaces that are specified in Section 09900 to be finish painted, and are not specified to receive zinc primer, with one coat of prime paint to CISC/CPMA 2-75. , 3. Prime steel surfaces specified on Drawings to receive inorganic zinc primer, or zinc-filled.epoxy polyamide primer, with one coat to an average dry film thickness of 65 microns [2.6 mils] and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 microns [2 mils]. 4. Paint steel surfaces exterior to the building vapour barrier and not specified to be galvanized or painted with zinc primer,with two coats of zinc-rich paint , specified in paragraph 2.2.C.4, applied to an average dry film thickness of 38 microns [1.50 mils] per coat, and a minimum dry film thickness of 23 microns[0.90 mils] per coat. 5. Do not paint: Surfaces and edges within 50 mm [2"] of field welds. Surfaces encased in, or in contact with concrete, including the top flange of beams supporting cast-in-place slabs. . Surfaces to be spray fireproofed. 6. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's published directions. 7. Paint steel in shop under cover and keep under cover until paint has dried. I. Galvanizing: Galvanize lintels, brick support angles, architectural block support angles, and other members indicated as galvanized on Drawings, after shop welding is complete. PART 3. : EXECUTION i 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, before delivery of structural steel, that Work of other Sections on which Work of this Section is dependent is correctly installed and located. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Supply anchor bolts, base and bearing plates and other members to be built in ' under Work of other Sections as Work progresses. Co-operate with installers of this Work and provide instructions for its setting. B. Where new Work connects to existing construction, determine site conditions and i dimensions accurately in field. Report any necessary adjustment to Consultant. ' B O WMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 9 3.3 ERECTION ' A. Comply with requirements of Reference Standards and requirements of regulatory authorities, in erection of Work of this Section. B. Make adequate provision for horizontal and vertical erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing, to keep structural frame plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection, and installation of masonry, concrete work, and floor and roof decks which provide stability to completed building. C. Provide temporary steel members as may be required for erection purposes, and remove when no longer required. ' D. Beam Bearing Plates and Column Base Plates: 1. Set beam bearing plates and column base plates, at proper elevation, true and level, with steel shims, ready for grouting as specified under Work of other Sections. E. Erect architecturally exposed steel in accordance with specified requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 10, Architecturally Exposed Structural iSteel. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company, when appointed as specified in Source Quality Control elsewhere in this Section, shall perform: 1. Inspection of erection and fit-up, including placing, plumbing, levelling and temporary bracing and conformance with specified tolerances. 2. Inspection of bolted connections, including verification that A307, ' A325/A325M snug tight only bolts,and A3251A325M pretensioned bolts have been used appropriately, and that threads are excluded from shear plane where required. ' 3. Inspection of welded joints, including slag removal. 4. General inspection of field cutting and alterations; report immediately to Consultant, alterations or cutting not shown on reviewed shop drawings. 5. General inspection of shop coating touch-up. ' 6. Inspection of zinc primer and zinc-rich paint, including surface preparation and coating thickness. 3.5 COATING TOUCH-UP A. Clean welds to remove all residue from electrodes. ' B. After erection is complete, give one coat of touch-up paint to field bolts, field connections, burnt areas, and abrasions or damage to prime coats. 1. Use a compatible primer to touch-up 1-73a or 2-75 shop applied primer. ' 2. Use a compatible organic zinc-filled epoxy primer to touch-up inorganic or organic zinc primer. 3. Use a compatible zinc-rich paint to touch-up shop or field applied zinc-rich ' paint. C. Give areas of bare metal on galvanized members two coats of zinc-rich paint. BOWMANVILLE ARENA 1 DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 10 3.6 DEFECTIVE WORK 1 A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or 1 workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. 1 B. Replace defective Work, as directed by Consultant. C. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective 1 measures, and related expenses if Work has proven to be deficient. -- End of Section -- , 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 1 P RT 1 : GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which ' Drawings are in imperial units. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Supplied by this Section but Installed by Others: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork: to install cast-in anchorages. Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete: to install cast-in anchorages and loose bearings. Section 04200: Unit Masonry: to install loose bearings and anchorages. ' B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 04200: Unit Masonry Section 05120: Structural Steel Section 05310: Steel Roof Deck Section 05320: Steel Floor Deck Section 09900: Finish Painting C. Co-operation with Work of Other Sections: Check project Drawings and Specifications for requirements of other Sections which will affect installation of Work of this Section. ' D. Co-operation with Consultant: Before commencing Work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this 1 Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this specification, in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1 CAN/CSA-516.1-M89, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. 2 CAN/CSA-S136-M89, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 3 CSA W178.1-96, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. 4 CSA W178.2-96, Certification of Welding Inspectors. 5 The National Building Code of Canada, 1990 Edition (NBC). 6 The Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada, 1990 Edition. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 2 i B. Qualifications: 1 Undertake fabrication of welded steel joists only by fabricators certified under Division 2.1 or higher, by Canadian Welding Bureau under CSA Standard W47.1. 2 Design of joists shall be by a Professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, experienced in steel joist design. 3 Joist design engineer shall be insured against professional liability in accordance with section 74 subsection (1) of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with subsection (2) ' is not acceptable. C. Design Criteria: 1 Design joists to carry loads indicated on Structural Drawings. 2 Design for deflections not exceeding limits given in Appendix I of CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16.1, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. In Appendix I, interpret finishes susceptible to cracking to mean brittle finishes ' such as but not restricted to, drywall, plaster, masonry and ceramic tile. 3 Design roof joists and fastenings to resist the following minimum gross unfactored uplifts, where widths of "s" , "c" and "r" areas are defined in the ' Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada, Commentary B, Figure B-9. Edge strips "s" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 kPa [27 psf] Corner areas"c" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 kPa [27 psf] Other roof areas "r" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.06 kPa [22 psf] Dead load of roof deck construction may be deducted from these uplifts, after applying relevant load factors for wind load, and dead load resisting uplift. 4 Analyze joists composed wholly or in part of cold formed structural members as rigidly connected linear elastic frameworks, including all joint eccentricities in analysis. Design cold formed members for combined axial loads and bending moments predicted by analysis. Design hot formed members for , combined axial load and bending moment if eccentricity at one or both ends exceeds limits of CSA-S16.1. Design joists for the maximum eccentricity of end bearing from intersection of axes of top chord and end diagonal. 5 Tie Joists: Where tie joists are used, provide bottom chord to column connection with slotted hole and ASTM A307 bolts. 6 Bridging: Where joists support floor decks less than 100 mm [4"]thick, design bridging as follows: .1 Of sufficient stiffness to ensure that a load of 1.5 kN/m [100 lb./ft.]on one joist will be distributed by bridging to the adjacent joist on each side, without the loaded joist deflection relative to the adjacent joist exceeding 1/180 of the joist spacing. ' .2 Located at panel points and at maximum spacing of 2400 mm [8'-0"] centres. 7 Design special joist components to allow passage of mechanical and electrical ' services through webs of joists,where so indicated on Structural Drawings. BOWMANVILLE ARENA ' DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 3 i 8 Provide floor and roof joists meeting requirements of fire rated assemblies specified in Section 07250 . D. Tolerances: 1 Conform to tolerances specified in CSA S16.1 . 2 If tolerances are exceeded, Contractor shall provide and pay for corrective design and construction that may be required. ' E. Source Quality Control: 1 Inspection and testing of materials and shop fabrication of Work of this Section, and field quality control specified elsewhere in this Section, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by the Consultant. 2 Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance ' or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company,shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3 Inspection and Testing Company shall be certified by Canadian Welding Bureau, in Category 1, Buildings, under CSA W178.1 . 4 Welding inspectors and supervisors shall be certified by Canadian Welding ' Bureau to CSA W178.2. 5 Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from cash allowance specified in Section 01020. 6 Inspection and Testing Company, when appointed, shall carry out shop inspection to verify the following: 1 Structural materials and paint conform to Specifications. Mill test reports, properly correlated to the materials, will be accepted in lieu of physical tests of structural materials. .2 Fit-up, fabrication and welding conform to Specifications and dimensioned shop drawings. .3 Shop painting, and cleaning and preparation for same, including whether power wire brush cleaning or brush-off blast cleaning is used, conform to specified requirements. .4 Surfaces inaccessible for cleaning and painting after assembly are treated before assembly. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Professional Liability Insurance: Submit proof of joist design engineer's professional liability insurance coverage specified in paragraph 1.3.13.3. B. Shop Drawings: 1 Submit joist design drawings and erection drawings. 2 Professional Engineer responsible for joist design shall either sign and seal each shop drawing submitted, or shall submit a signed and sealed letter at commencement of shop drawing preparation stating he will assume responsibility for compliance of joists with this Specification. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 4 3 Where new Work connects to existing construction, determine existing conditions and all dimensions on site, including verification of all dimensions on Drawings. Report any necessary adjustment to Consultant. 4 Indicate on joist design drawings, in addition to the requirements of CSA S16.1, the loading for which joists have been designed, including concentrated loads required by NBC and wind uplift loading, location of bridging, dimensioned intersections of members, critical bending moments due to eccentricities,joist spacing, framing for openings, and slopes. 5 Detail welded connections using standard symbols for welded joints as published in current CISC Handbook of Steel Construction. 6 Indicate on erection drawings,for each type of joist and bearing condition, the centre of bearing assumed in design and if eccentric, distance from this point to intersection of axes of top chord and end diagonal. 7 Show on erection drawings dimensioned location of each joist,joist bridging, framing for openings and other required details. 8 Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all shop drawings. , By this review, Contractor represents to have determined and verified all field measurements, site conditions, materials, catalogue number and similar data, and to have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. ' 9 At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. 10 Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule. Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for ' general arrangement, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. 11 Contractor shall make changes in shop drawings which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents, and resubmit unless otherwise directed by Consultant. When resubmitting, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 12 Submit shop drawings as follows: 4 copies of erection diagrams and shop drawings for review before any Work commences. 2 additional copies of shop drawings for distribution as directed by Consultant. 2 copies of erection diagrams to Inspection and Testing Company. C. Paint Performance: If requested by Consultant, submit paint manufacturer's certification that paint conforms to CISC/CPMA Standard specified. D. Inspection Reports: Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1 Submit reports at least weekly when shop and site Work of this Section is in progress. 2 Distribute inspection reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 5 1 copy to Contractor; 2 copies to Steel Fabricator. 3 Sign report by inspector who performs inspection, and describe progress of Work, deficiencies found and corrective actions taken. 4 Include deficiency list of outstanding items from previous reports, and comment on status. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver products that are supplied only under Work of this Section to trades responsible for their installation, to the location directed, and to meet construction schedule. B. Handle and store joists so that no damage or corrosion is caused to stored or erected Work, or to other property. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as part of Tender shall include Work erected in place, and preparation and submittal of shop drawings. B. Unit prices shall serve as a basis for computing the value of additional or deleted Work, performed as Changes to Work. ' 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide new materials in accordance with Reference Standards. B. Steel Joists: Formed of hot rolled or cold formed shapes, hollow structural sections, plates and rods meeting requirements of Reference Standards. C. Paint: 1 Shop Coat Paint, for joists that will not receive finish coat: to CISC/CPMA Standard 1-73a, A Quick-Drying One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel. 2 Prime Paint,for joists to receive finish coat: to CISC/CPMA Standard 2-75, A Quick-Drying Primer for Use on Structural Steel. 3 Verify that prime paint is compatible with finish coat of paint. 4 Zinc-Rich Paint- Organic, Ready Mixed: Galvafroid, by W.R.Meadows Ltd. Glid-Zinc 100, by Glidden Company (Canada) Ltd. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Work of this Section in accordance with CSA-S16.1, and as specified below. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 , SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 6 B. Fabricate joists with attachments and accessories in accordance with Reference Standards. C. Prepare joists for attachment of other Work as indicated on Drawings and required by construction. D. Fabricate bridging not less than 3 mm [1/8"] in thickness. E. Extend bottom chords of joists where required to support ceiling. F. Provide extended top chords, reinforced continuously from end of joist to second panel point, where joists cantilever beyond bearing. G. Where angle between line of bearing and axis of joist is 80 degrees or less: 1 Design joists for a minimum 150 mm [6"] eccentricity between bearing and intersection of axes of top chord and end diagonal. 1 2 Provide extended top chords, reinforced continuously from end of joist to second panel point. H. Provide top chords of sufficient width and material thickness to permit 20 mm [3/4"] diameter arc spot welds of deck to joist to be formed, in accordance with CSA-S136. 1. Bearing on Masonry and Concrete: i 1 Fabricate joists so that centre of bearing lies within middle third of bearing wythe of masonry walls; centre of bearing is defined as intersection of axes of top chord and end diagonal. 2 Provide bearing plates concentric with centre of bearing, as defined herein. 3 Provide bearing plates at least 20 mm [3/4"] clear of face of bearing wythe. 4 Proportion bearing plates so that bearing stress under specified load does not ' exceed 1.2 MPa [175 psi] on masonry, 1.5 MPa [225 psi] on concrete filled lintel blocks, and 25 percent of the specified concrete strength for bearing on concrete. 5 Proportion height of joist shoe to meet above requirements and to avoid interference between end diagonal and inner face of wall, and to suit elevations. 6 Provide anchorage to meet the specified uplift requirements. J. Fabricate joists exposed to view in finished building, of uniform appearance. K. Cleaning and Painting: 1 Clean joists in accordance with requirements of specified CISC/CPMA Standard. 2 Apply one coat of specified paint in accordance with specified CISC/CPMA Standard and keep under cover until paint has dried. 3 Steel Surfaces Exterior to the Building Vapour Barrier: Clean steel in accordance with SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning and paint with two coats of.zinc-rich paint specified in paragraph 2.2.C.4, applied to an average dry film thickness of 38 microns [1.50 mils] per coat, and a minimum dry film thickness of 23 microns [0.90 mils] per coat. 4 Do not paint surfaces and edges to be field welded. 1 BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 7 1 5 Identify each joist with mark corresponding to shop drawing designation. 6 Mark erection orientation on joists fabricated to special design or loading requirements. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, before delivery of joists, that Work of other Sections on which Work of this Section is dependent, is correctly installed and located. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide necessary instructions to other trades for installation of bearings and anchors installed under Work of other Sections. Assist in installation if requested. B. If steel surfaces are painted where connections are made by welding at site, remove paint to bare metal for a distance of at least 50 mm [2"] beyond sides of joints. C. Where new Work connects to existing construction, determine conditions and dimensions accurately on site. Report any necessary adjustment to Consultant. 3.3 ERECTION A. Comply with requirements of Reference Standards and requirements of regulatory authorities, in erection of Work of this Section. B. Refer to Drawings for Work of other Sections and locate to avoid interference with ceiling construction, recessed lights, mechanical and electrical services, and similar Work. C. Install shims or packing to support joists at proper elevation. ID. Carry joists to centreline of beams,with a tolerance of+25 mm [+1 and-0 mm [-0"]. At beams with joists bearing from both sides, stagger joists. E. Weld each joist at bearings on structural steel members and bearing plates, or as indicated on Drawings. For joists of span of 18.0 m [60'-0"] and over, bearing on structural steel, provide bolted anchorage, in place of welds, minimum one 19 mm [3/4"] diameter bolt at each end bearing. F. Install framing for openings between joists as indicated on Drawings, and which is not specified under Steel Deck Section. G. Bridging: 1 Install steel bridging, transverse to joist spans to meet specified requirements of Reference Standards and the following. 2 Locate bridging at panel points wherever possible. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 8 3 Locate bridging to avoid interference with recessed lights, and mechanical and electrical services. 4 Where joists support floor decks less than 100 mm [4'7 thick, provide bridging as follows: .1 Designed in accordance with paragraph 1.3.C.6.1. .2 Located at panel points and at maximum spacing of 2400 mm [8'-0"] centres. H. Sheet Steel Pan Forms: 1 Fasten pan forms to top chords of joists with steel clips or wire at not more than 400 mm [16"] centres, or 2 for each sheet, whichever is closer; or by welding at similar spacing. Provide clips or wire of sufficient strength to prevent displacement-of forms during concrete placing. 2 Lap joints between pan forms to prevent leakage of wet concrete. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company, when appointed as specified in Source Quality Control elsewhere in this Section, shall perform: .1 Inspection of Joist Bearing:Where bearing does not comply with details shown on erection drawings,or with this specification,field measure length of joist and distance between supports and report verbally to Consultant immediately, before roof or floor deck is installed. 2 Inspect joist bearings for conformance to paragraph 2.3.1 Bearing on Masonry and Concrete. 3 Inspection of erection and fit-up, including placing, plumbing, levelling, and temporary and permanent bracing. 4 By rational sampling, verify that centre of bearing and intersection point of end diagonal and top chord coincide; if they do not coincide, and are not , dimensioned as eccentric on the erection drawings,verbally advise Consultant immediately, before roof or floor deck is installed. 5 Inspection of welded and bolted connections. 6 General inspection of shop coating touch-up. 3.5 COATING TOUCH-UP A. After erection is complete, clean by wire brushing and apply one coat of specified paint to field bolts,field connections, burnt areas, and areas of abrasions or damage to shop coat. 3.6 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. B. Replace defective Work, as directed by Consultant. C. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective measures, and related expenses if Work has proven to be deficient. r BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 9 r -- End of Section - r r r r �c r r r r r r r r r t r ' BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 1 PART 1 : GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1,General Requirements, shall govern Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed in brackets apply to Project for which the Drawings are in imperial units. 1.2 DESCRIPTION ' A. Work Supplied by This Section but Installed by Others: Section 03100: To install anchors Section 04200: To install anchors B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 04200: Unit Masonry Section 05120: Structural Steel Section 05210: Steel Joists Section 05320: Steel Floor Deck Section 09900: Finish Painting C. Co-operation with Work of Other Sections: Check project Drawings and Specifications for requirements of other Sections which will affect installation of Work of this Section. D. Co-operation with Consultant: Before commencing Work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards & Publications: The following reference standards shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this Specification, in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1. CSA S136-94, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. CSSBI 10M-86, Standard for Steel Roof Deck, published by Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. 3. CSSBI 101 M-84, Zinc Coated Structural Quality Steel Sheet for Steel Deck. 4. CSA W178.1-96, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. 5. CSA W178.2-96, Certification of Welding Inspectors. 6. CAN/CGSB-1.181-92, Ready-Mix Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. 7. The National Building Code of Canada, 1990 Edition (NBC). 8. The Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada, 1990 Edition. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 2 B. Qualifications: 1. Design of steel roof deck shall be by a Professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, experienced in steel deck design. 2. Consultant will review general arrangement to verify general conformance with overall design concept of structure. 3. Steel deck design engineer shall be insured against professional liability in accordance with section 74 subsection (1) of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with subsection (2) is not acceptable. C. Design Criteria: 1. Design roof deck and fasteners in conformance with CSSBI 10M Article 8.6. 2. Design roof deck and fasteners to support dead plus live loads shown on Drawings and concentrated loads"stipulated in NBC Table 4.1.6.6, and for not less than the load nor more than the deflection stipulated in CSSBI 10M Clause 8.6.5. 3. Design roof deck and fasteners to resist the following minimum gross unfactored uplifts, where widths of"s", "c" and "r" areas are defined in the Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada, Commentary B, Figure B-9. Canopies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.00 kPa [42 psf] Edge strips"s" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 kPa [26 psf] Corner areas"c" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38 kPa [50 psf] Other roof areas "r" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.00 kPa [20 psf] Dead load of roof deck construction may be deducted from these uplifts, after applying relevant load factors for wind load, and dead load resisting uplift. 4. Design roof deck and fastening, including side lap fastening, for diaphragm action and to resist diaphragm shears shown on Drawings. D. Suspended Loads: Do not suspend ceilings, lights, ducts, piping, or any other item from steel roof deck. E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Fabricate and install roof deck which forms part of a required fire rated system exactly as specified in Underwriters' Laboratories test design specification that validates required rating. F. Tolerances: , 1. Comply with requirements of CSSBI 10M, Clause 5.2 2. Lay and position roof deck within a tolerance of plus or minus 12 mm [%11] with respect to edges of deck parallel to flutes and centrelines of columns and building exterior lines. G. Source Quality Control: 1. Inspection and testing of materials and fabrication of Work of this Section, and field quality control specified elsewhere in this Section, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve Contractor 'of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 3 Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3. Inspection and Testing Company shall be certified by Canadian Welding Bureau, in Category 1, Buildings, under CSA W178.1. 4. Welding inspectors and supervisors shall be certified by Canadian Welding Bureau to CSA W178.2. 5. Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from cash allowance specified in Section 01020. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Professional Liability Insurance: Submit proof of design engineer's professional liability insurance coverage specified in paragraph 1.36.3. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit erection drawings in accordance with Section 01300 and as specified below. 2. Each shop drawing submitted shall bear signature and seal of Professional Engineer responsible for deck design. 3. Indicate: ,design loading; thicknesses and steel grade of material; zinc coating designations; layout of units; framing and supports; required minimum bearing; anchorages; size and spacing of fastening to meet uplift and diaphragm action; openings and their reinforcement; accessories; and details of construction, including warping of deck to provide slopes for drainage. 4. Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review,Contractor represents to have determined and verified all field measurements, site conditions, materials, catalogue number and similar data, and to have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of ' each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 5. At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. 6. Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule. Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for general arrangement, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. 7. Contractor shall make changes in shop drawings which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents, and resubmit unless otherwise directed by Consultant.When resubmitting,Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 8. Show on the shop drawings the Factory Mutual recommendations, including fastening type, size, and spacing for side laps and to supports, and a statement that the deck and its installation are designed to meet Factory Mutual recommendations. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 4 9. Submit sho p drawings s as follows: 4 copies for review before any Work commences. 2 additional copies of shop drawings for distribution as directed by Consultant. 2 copies of erection diagrams to Inspection and Testing Company. C. Steel Deck: 1. Submit evidence that steel deck is Factory Mutual approved. D. Inspection Reports: Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1. Submit reports at least weekly when shop and site Work of this Section is in progress. 2. Distribute inspection reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 2 copies to Contractor. 3. Sign report by inspector who performs inspection, and describe progress of Work, deficiencies found and corrective actions taken. 4. Include deficiency list of outstanding items from previous reports, and comment on status. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver anchors supplied under Work of this Section to those responsible for their installation, to place they direct and to meet construction schedule. B. Comply with requirements of CSSBI 10M, Clause 8.10. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as a part of the Tender shall include Work erected in place, and preparation and submittal of necessary shop drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: To CSSBI 101 M: Grade"A" minimum. Base steel nominal thickness 0.76 mm [0.030"] or greater. Minimum zinc coating designation ZF75. B. Verify that finish or treatment of zinc coated steel coil provided by steel mill is not detrimental to adhesion of paint system specified for steel roof deck in Division 9. ' BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 5 C. Zinc-Rich Paint: to CGSB Specification CAN/CGSB-1.181. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Comply with requirements of CSSBI 10M, Clause 5. B. Fabricate deck with 150 mm [6"]flute spacing, and with maximum 64 mm [2.4"]width of rib opening (rib opening measured at top of rib, not bottom), in accordance with Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-28. C. Reinforcement for Openings: Provide reinforcement for openings in accordance with CSSBI 10M, Clause 8.7. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify and approve alignment and levels of supporting members before laying roof deck. Do not proceed with erection until conditions are made satisfactory. 3.2 ERECTION A. Comply with requirements of CSSBI 10M, Clauses 7 and 8.7, and as specified herein. B. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Cut and fit roof deck and accessories around projections through roof. 2. Make cuts square with neatly trimmed edges. C. Closures: 1. Install sheet metal closures in flutes where indicated on Drawings and where required to close openings, as at junction of walls and partitions with deck. 2. Install sheet metal cover plates at changes of deck direction, and at ridges and valleys. 3. Secure closures and cover plates by either sheet metal screws or welding. D. Side Lap Fastening: 1. Fasten side laps as required to meet design requirements of paragraph 1.3C. E. Fastening to Supports: 1. Fasten deck to supports as required to meet design requirements of paragraph 1.3C. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company, when appointed as specified in Source Quality Control elsewhere in this Section, shall perform: BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 6 1. Verification of material thickness, depth and dimensions of profile and zinc coating thickness. 2. Verification that erection and fastening comply with Contract Documents. j 3. General inspection of coating touch-up. 4. Pry tests of roof deck welds to supports. 3.4 COATING TOUCH-UP ' A. After erection,wire brush, clean and paint welded areas, rust spots, and scratched or otherwise damaged areas of zinc coating on deck and shop-applied prime paint on structural members. B. Apply two coats of zinc-rich paint to zinc coated areas specified above. C. Apply one coat of prime paint to prime painted areas specified above. Verify that touch-up paint is same type as shop coat. 3.5 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. B. Replace defective Work, as directed by Consultant. C. Replace bent, warped, dented, punctured or weld-perforated deck where exposed to view. D. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing and related expenses if Work has proven to be deficient. -- End of Section -- BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 1 P R 1 : GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, shall govern the Work of this Section. B. Quantities and dimensions enclosed by brackets apply for Project for which Drawings are in imperial units. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Supplied by This Section but Installed by Others: Section 03100: To install anchors Section 04200: To install anchors B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: Section 03100: Concrete Formwork Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 04200: Unit Masonry Section 05120: Structural Steel Section 05210: Steel Joists Section 05310: Steel Roof Deck Section 09900: Finish Painting C. Co-operation with Work of Other Sections: Check project Drawings and Specifications for requirements of other Sections which will affect installation of Work of this Section. D. Co-operation with Consultant. Before commencing work, review with Consultant, Work performed under this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The following Reference Standards shall govern Work of this Section, except where they are in conflict with requirements imposed by this Specification, in which case the latter shall govern. Standards referenced by following Standards apply but are not necessarily repeated in following list. 1 CAN/CSA-S136-M89, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 2 CSSBI 12M-84, Standard for Composite Steel Deck, published by Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute, July 1984, Revised December 1988. 3 CSSBI 101 M-84, Zinc Coated Structural Quality Steel Sheet for Steel Deck. 4 CAN/CGSB-1.181-92, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. 5 CSA W178.1-96, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. 6 CSA W178.2-96, Certification of Welding Inspectors. 7 CAN/CSA-S16.1, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. 8 The National Building Code of Canada, 1990 Edition (NBC). BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 2 B. Design Criteria: 1 Design floor deck (either composite or non-composite as indicated on Drawings) in conformance with CSSBI 12M, Articles 7.6 and 7.7, including Appendix thereto, for loading indicated on Drawings, including concentrated loads stipulated in NBC Table 4.1.6.B. 2 Design composite deck sections for concrete strength indicated on Drawings. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Fabricate and install floor deck which forms part of a required fire rated system exactly as specified in Underwriters' Laboratories test design specification that validates required rating. D. Tolerances: 1 Comply with requirements of CSSBI 12M. 2 Lay and position floor deck within a tolerance of plus or minus 12 mm [%'I from its location shown on the Drawings, relative to centreline of columns and building exterior lines. E. Source Quality Control: 1 Inspection and testing of materials and fabrication of Work of this Section, and field quality control specified elsewhere in this Section, may be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by Consultant. 2 Review provided by Inspection and Testing Company does not relieve Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. 3 Inspection and Testing Company shall be certified by Canadian Welding Bureau, in Category 1, Buildings, under CSA W178.1 . 4 Welding inspectors and supervisors shall be certified by Canadian Welding Bureau to CSA W178.2. 5 Payment for specified Work performed by Inspection and Testing Company will be made from cash allowance specified in Section 01020. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Professional Liability Insurance: Submit proof of design engineer's professional liability insurance coverage specified in paragraph ?. B. Calculations: Submit design calculations if requested by Consultant. C. Shop Drawings: 1 Submit erection drawings in accordance with Section 01300 and as specified below. 2 Each shop drawing submitted shall bear signature and seal of Professional Engineer responsible for deck design. 3 Indicate: design loading, including concentrated loads required by NBC; concrete strength;material grade and thickness;zinc coating designation; UL BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 3 fire rating and test design specification number if applicable; whether deck is inverted;required minimum bearing; layout of units; framing and supports; anchorages; openings and their reinforcement; accessories; details of flashings or closures at openings and columns; edge forms to retain plastic concrete; and details of construction. 4 Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review all shop drawings. tBy this review,Contractor represents to have determined and verified all field measurements, site conditions, materials, catalogue number and similar data, and to have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 5 At time of submission, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from requirements of Contract Documents. 6 Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with an agreed schedule.Consultant's review will be for conformity to design concept and for general arrangement, shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. i7 Contractor shall make changes in shop drawings which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents, and resubmit unless otherwise directed by Consultant.When resubmitting, Contractor shall notify Consultant in writing of revisions other than those requested by Consultant. 8 Submit shop drawings as follows: 4 copies for review before any Work commences. 2 additional copies of shop drawings for distribution as directed by Consultant. 2 copies of erection diagrams to Inspection and Testing Company. D. Inspection Reports: Inspection and Testing Company shall: 1 Submit reports at least weekly when shop and site Work of this Section is in progress. 2 Distribute inspection reports as follows: 2 copies to Consultant; 1 copy to Consulting Structural Engineer; 2 copies to Contractor. 3 Sign report by inspector who performs inspection, and describe progress of Work, deficiencies found and corrective actions taken. 4 Include deficiency list of outstanding items from previous reports, and comment on status. r1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of CSSBI 12M, Clause 7.11. B. Co-ordinate Work of this Section with Work specified in other Sections for structural bearing members, and arrange to deliver and install deck in accordance with erection schedule of bearing members. Install steel deck at proper times to serve as safety planking during steel erection. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 4 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as part of Tender shall include Work erected in place, and preparation and submittal of necessary shop drawings 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: To CSSBI 101 M: Grade "A" minimum. Base steel nominal thickness 0.76 mm [0.030"] or greater. Coating: zinc coating designation ZF75. B. Studs: to ASTM A108. C. Zinc-Rich Paint: to CAN/CGSB-1.181. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Comply with requirements of CSSBI 12M, Clause 5. B. Provide sheet steel angles, curbs, cover plates, flashings at junctions of columns, openings and walls with concrete slabs, and similar locations to prevent leakage of concrete topping; cell closures; fasteners; stiffeners; and accessories as required. C. Reinforcement for Openings: Separate framing will be supplied under Work of Section 05120 for holes with dimensions across flutes greater than 300 mm [12"]. Reinforce openings from 150 mm [6'1 to 300 mm [12"] across flutes, with 51 x 51 x 6.4 mm [2"x 2"x 1/4'] structural steel angles in direction perpendicular to flutes at both ends of opening, and extend 450 mm [1'-6'7 past each side of opening. Weld angles to deck with 25 mm [1"] long welds on each side at 150 mm [6"] centres. D. Composite Non-Cellular Floor Deck: Provide bond between deck and concrete by deformations rolled into vertical webs. Profile as dimensioned in catalogue load tables. End Joints: swaged for 50 mm [2"] overlap and to provide faces of deck in same plane. Invert deck where indicated on Drawings. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 5 ' PART 3: EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify and approve alignment and levels of supporting members before laying floor deck. Do not proceed with erection until conditions are made satisfactory. 3.2 ERECTION A. Comply with requirements of CSSBI 12M, Clauses 6 and 7.8. B. Placing Floor Deck Units: 1 Place units with cells aligned end to end and to provide a minimum bearing on structural steel members of 45 mm [1.75"]. 2 Do not force units into place causing them to distort. 3 Lap ends of non-cellular panels no less than 50 mm [2"]. I C. Cutting and Fitting: 1 Cut and fit floor deck and accessories around projections through floor. 2 Make cuts square with neatly trimmed edges. t D. Reinforcement: 1 Reinforce all elements at top and bottom by a continuous web of sheet metal the same thickness as deck, where elements are cut longitudinally 50 mm [2"] or more from a vertical web. 2 Reinforce holes cut in floor deck in field as specified under article 2.3, FABRICATION. E. Cover Plates: 1 Install sheet steel cover plates over gaps wider than 3 mm [1/8"] between units, at expansion joints, and at intersections of units that span in different directions. Cover plates shall prevent leakage of wet concrete. 2 Install cover plates over junctions between abutting ends to electrical raceway cells. These cover plates shall be removable for inspection of raceway. 3 Cover welding access holes with recessed cover plates. Permanently secure cover plates to deck except where inspection of wiring is required at electrical raceways.The latter shall be permanently secured under Work of Division 16 4 Secure cover plates by either sheet metal screws or welding. F. Closures and Flashing: 1 Install sheet metal closures to seal ends of cell raceways at junctions between deck, and columns, walls, openings, where deck panels change direction and similar locations. 2 Install sheet metal flashing to contain concrete at edge of slab, columns, for side and end concrete forms at holes through floor and at perimeter of building,and similar locations where other construction does not perform this function. 3 Secure closures and flashing by either sheet metal screws or welding. BOWMANVILLE ARENA DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 6 3.3 FIELD ALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company, when appointed as specified in Source Quality Control elsewhere in this Section, shall perform: 1 Verification of material thickness, depth and dimensions of profile and zinc coating thickness. 2 Verification that erection and fastening and if applicable, special requirements for electrical raceways, comply with Contract Documents. 3 Verification of UL ratings. 4 General inspection of coating touch-up. 3.4 COATING TOUCH-UP A. For deck surfaces permanently exposed to view in finished structure: After erection, wire brush, clean and paint welded areas, rust spots, and scratched or otherwise damaged areas of zinc coating on deck and shop-applied prime paint on structural members. B. Apply two coats of zinc-rich paint to zinc coated areas specified above. C. Apply one coat of prime paint to prime painted areas specified above. Verify that touch-up paint is same type as shop coat. 3.5 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. B. Replace defective Work, as directed by Consultant. C. Replace dented, punctured or weld perforated deck where exposed to view. D. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective measures, and related expenses if Work has proven to be deficient. -- End of Section -- r rDIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 1 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Refer to Item 3.03 Schedule. r 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE rA. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Masonry Section 04200 C. Structural Steel Section 05120 D. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 E. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 F. Roofing Section 07530 G. Metal Flashing and Trims Section 07620 H. Painting Section 09900 rI. Dasherboard System Section 13180 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The latest issue of the following Codes and Standards shall govern the work of this Section. 1. CAN3-S136-M84 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members 2. CAN3-G40.21-M81 Structural Quality Steel 3. CSA W59.M-84 General Specifications for Welding of Steel Structures. 4. CAN/CSA S16.1-M89 Limit States Design for Steel Structures. 5. CSSB1 12M-84 Standard for Composite Steel Deck. 6. Design guardrails and handrails in accordance with sub-section 4.1.10 of the Ontario Building Code with respect to horizontal and vertical design loads. r 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS rA. Work of this Section shall be executed by a firm thoroughly conversant with laws, bylaws and regulations which govern and capable of workmanship of best grade of modem shop and field practice known to recognized manufacturers specializing in this work. Use workmen skilled in work of this Section. 7100-05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 2 1.06 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Label, tag or otherwise mark work supplied for installation by other sections to indicate its function, location and shop drawing description. B. Protect work from damage and deliver to a location at the site in order to meet the scheduling requirements. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop and Erection Drawings in accordance with General Conditions to the Consultant for review before fabricating miscellaneous metal work. 2. Verify site dimensions before proceeding with shop fabrication and to suit field conditions and field openings. 3. Show and describe in detail all the work of this Section including large scale detail of members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, including type, size and description of all fasteners and , anchors. 4. Shop drawings detailing structural members, steel stair/guardrail assemblies and dehumidifier platforms shall bear the stamp and signature of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS j A. General: Use materials specified herein. B. Structural Steel Sections and Steel Plate: CAN3-G40.21, Grade 300W. C. Hollow Structural Steel Section: CAN3-G40.21, Grade 350W. D. Architectural and Miscellaneous Mild Steel: CAN3-G40.21, Grade 300W. E. Machine Bolts and Nuts. ASTM Standard A307 low carbon steel externally and internally threaded standard fasteners. Dimensions, sizes, thread, strength, quality and type of items shall be designed for the work intended. 7100-MOO.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) F. Sheet Steel: (Structural Quality) ASTM-A570. G. Sheet Steel: (Commercial Quality)ASTM-A366, stretcher levelled or temper rolled. H. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot dipped galvanizing with minimum zinc coating of 600 g/sq. metre to CSA G164-1972. I. Pre-Paint Finish: For galvanized surfaces to be exposed and finish painted -ASTM D2092. J. Metal Floor Deck: (At stair landings only) 38 mm deep, ribbed profile, composite galvanized metal floor deck, C.N.T. = 0.030",with zinc coating designation of ZF75 to CSSB1 101M, grade 'A' sheet steel. Steel deck at roof structure shall be supplied by Section 05320. K. Galvanizing: All steel specified to be galvanized except above, ASTM A123, zinc (Hot-Galvanized) coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips. Galvanized after all welding complete. No welding of galvanized products allowed. L. Welding Materials: CSA W59.M-1984 and CSA W48 series. M. Metal Filler: Epoxy, Hysol 6C epoxy adhesive kit(or 4297 in bulk) manufactured by Hysol (Canada) Limited, or approved equal. N. Wire mesh reinforcing for stair treads shall conform to CSA G40.5, galvani zed. O. Steel pipe for handrails, guardrails and bollards shall conform to ASTM A120 or 1 ASTM A53, Schedule 40, Grade B. P. Primer: CGSB 1-GP-40M, colour to be grey to match structural steel. Q. Checker plate shall be 4.5 mm steel plate to CAN 3-G40.21, Grade 300 W, raised checkerboard pattern. R. Non-shrink Grout: Por Rok by Hallemite Products Ltd or SET 15 Minute anchoring cement by SET Products Ltd. S. Gratings to be galvanized, welded steel, of adequate strength and stiffness to support the loadings given on the structural drawings with a maximum deflection of 1/180 of the span. Type 15-4 by Dominion Bridge Company Limited, 63.5 x 4.76 i mm bearing bars. 1 7100-05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Contd) , T. Dehumidifier Platform - Dramex expanded metal carbon steel, catwalk grating, suitable for spacing of dehumidifier platform framing and to support O.B.C. loads for maintenance platforms. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate to reviewed shop drawings and in general to details, sizes and materials indicated on drawings and specified herein. 2. Fabricate work complete with all components required for anchoring; bolting or welding to structural frame; standing free or resting in frames or sockets; in a safe and sure manner. 3. Where possible fit and shop assemble various sections of the work and j deliver to site in largest practicable sections. Where shop fabricating is not possible make trial assembly in shop. 4. Grind and fill all welds after inspection and acceptance and leave ready for prime painting. 5. Fill all open joints, depressions, seams with metallic paste filler or by continuous brazing or welding and grind smooth to true sharp arrises and profiles. 6. Fit joints and intersecting members accurately. Make work in true planes with adequate fastenings. 7. Supply all fastenings, anchors, accessories required for fabrication and erection of work of this Section. Such items occurring on or in an exterior wall or slab shall be hot dip galvanized. Make thread dimensions such that nuts and bolts will fit without re-threading or chasing threads. 8. Make exposed metal fastenings and accessories of same material, texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur unless otherwise shown or specified. Keep exposed fastenings to an absolute minimum evenly spaced and neatly laid out. Make fastenings of permanent type unless otherwise indicated. 7100-05500.wpd i rDIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 5 3.01 FABRICATION (Cont'd) B. Shop Painting 1. Clean ferrous metals to remove rust, mill scale, oil dirt, and other foreign matter before commencing shop painting, in accordance with CGSB 31-GP-404a. 2. Clean welds by wire brushing and wash down with clean water, to remove the chemical residues left by the electrodes, prior to painting. 3. The following surfaces shall not be painted: I a) Surfaces and edges to be field welded. If painted, remove paint for field welding for a distance of at least two inches on all sides of the joint, to ensure proper fusion of the metal. b) The contact surfaces of friction type connections assembled by high strength bolts. c) Portions of steel members which are to be encased in or in contact with concrete. 4. All other ferrous metal work shall be given one prime paint coat type CGSB 1-GP-40M. Work paint into all comers and all joints. Metal parts in contact shall be primed before shop assembly. Priming damaged during erection or through lack of protection shall be cleaned and touched up. 5. Metals in contact with other dissimilar metals, concrete or masonry materials shall be insulated or separated from one another to prevent corrosion, staining or electrolysis by use of bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved methods and materials. C. Steel Stair and Handrails 1. Interior Stair treads shall be concrete filled metal pan type. 2. Stairs shall be constructed to safely sustain a live load of 125 p.s.f. evenly distributed over all treads and landings with a maximum deflection of U360. Furnish all supporting members required to connect to the building. 1 3. Stringers and fascias and supporting members throughout shall be of size and weight as shown on drawings. Stringers shall be continuous. All edges shall be ground smooth. 7100-05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 6 3.01 FABRICATION (Cont'd) , 4. Handrails and brackets shall be designed in accordance with Subsection 4.1.10 of the Ontario Code in regard to horizontal and vertical loading. 5. Subtreads, risers and landings shall be 10 gauge sheet steel formed as detailed. Treads and landings to be concrete filled, with welded wire mesh reinforcing. Risers to be exposed metal, with a formed W dust cove. 6. Fabricate handrails and guardrails as detailed on the drawings. Cap all ends with 3 mm steel plug, neatly welded and ground smooth. Extend handrails horizontally at top and bottom of each flight of stairs as shown on the drawings but not less than 300 mm beyond stair nosing at top of stair and 600 mm at bottom of stair. Railings shall have maximum outside diameter of 38 mm. Provide 13 mm diameter solid steel pickets at interior stair guards where shown on the drawings. 7. Provide all necessary angles, channels, clips, plates etc., as required to support all stair treads and landings and as shown on the drawings. 8. Fabricate stair landings as detailed on the drawings with 38 mm galvanized composite metal floor deck and welded wire mesh. Spot weld deck to framing 19 mm diameter puddle welds at 150 mm c/c along entire length of all framing members. Place reinforcing mesh. 9. Make provisions for support of metal furring around perimeter of areas where gypsum board soffits are to be installed. 10. Coordinate installation of cast in abrasive stair nosings supplied under Division 10 and installed by Division 6. D. Steel Pipe Bollards 1. Steel pipe bollards schedule 40 standard weight, steel pipe of size shown, complete with anchors and sleeves, install plumb and free of defects detrimental to appearance and performance. Bollards should be one piece construction no welds allowed. 2. Concrete supplied and installed under the works of Section 03300. E. Angle Supports at Masonry Deflection 1. Supply for installation by Section 04000, steel angles and clips for support of masonry walls where indicated and as detailed on the drawings. 7100-056W.wpa DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 7 F. Trench Grating and Frame 1. Supply and install angle steel grating frame for trench drain adjacent to Ice Resurfacer access door. Grating shall be Borden pressure locked type DA 38 x 5 mm bearing bars manufactured by Borden Metal Products. Galvanize grating and angle supports. 2. Supply and install grating and frame for snow melt pit. Grating as specified in Article 2.01 S. Grating and frame to be galvanized. G. Vanity Support Brackets 1. Provide triangular supports to vanities where indicated, constructed of 3 mm steel plate with 38 mm wide horizontal, angular and vertical legs formed to profile indicated. H. Change Room Bench Support Brackets 1. Provide steel angle bench support framing and anchors as detailed. All rough edges to be ground smooth. Steel to be prime painted. 1. Lightning tning SDikes 1. Lightning spikes shall be 3000 mm long x 19 mm diameter. Grade 40OW steel for installation at flagpole bases. Supply for installation by Division 3. 3.02 INSTALLATION 1 A. Work shall be fabricated and erected square, plumb and true, straight, level and accurately fitted to size detailed on reviewed Shop Drawings. All joints shall be welded unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth and/or flush. Rivetted parts shall be made with countersunk heads or blind rivets. Exposed work shall be finished smooth and even, close joints and neat connections. Exposed welds continuous for full length of joints. B. Where anchors or fastenings, sleeves, have to be built in by other trades, supply all necessary templates, instructions and supervision to ensure satisfactory installation. ' C D o all drilling, cutting and fitting necessary ry to attach this work to adjoining work and make it complete. D. Grind all field welds smooth, touch u shop coat of rime paint where damaged b P P P P 9 Y field erection. 7160-05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 8 , 3.03 SCHEDULE A. General 1. Supply and install all miscellaneous metal work indicated on Drawings and not included in the work of other Sections in addition to items listed below. Where items are required to be built into masonry, concrete or other work supply such items to respective Sections with all anchors and accessories for building in. 2. All items shall be of sizes and as detailed on drawings. B. Itemized List 1. Loose steel angles and channels. j 2. Coat hooks. 3. Pipe bollards. 4. Roof access ladders. 5. Handrails, guard railings, guards and accessory kick plates, as detailed. 6. Steel stairs. 7. Header trench framing and grating. 8. Bench support brackets. 9. Vanity support brackets 10. Angle frames at overhead door jambs. 11. Galvanized steel angle at overhead door sills. 12. Miscellaneous framing to support overhead door operators and track supports. 13. Masonry wall lateral support clips and angles. 14. Dehumidifier platforms and access ladders. 15. Lightning spikes at flagpole bases. 16. All other miscellaneous metal items shown on the drawings and not specified elsewhere. 7I M05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS t A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary for the design, fabrication and erection of a Pre-Engineered Structure called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Rigid frames, eave extensions, hangers, tie rods including vertical and horizontal cross bracing. B. Girts, sag rods, eave struts, purlins and framing of openings in walls and roof of Pre-Engineered Building including all miscellaneous support framing built into the wall system for the new score boards in the locations shown on the architectural drawings. C. Insulated metal wall panels. D. Pre-finished liner sheet. E. Prefinished metal flashing at parapet wall. F. Insulated metal roof system and accessories. rG. All necessary flashings, closures, weatherstripping and sealants and air seals. All required counter flashings for all roof and wall penetrations by other trades. H. Exterior gutters and rainwater leaders for pre-engineered structure only. 1. Supply and installation of additional steel purlins to support rink lighting fixtures in locations shown on the electrical drawings, support for dehumidifiers, gas radiant heaters, other mechanical loads. J. Design and supply of all anchor bolt assemblies for the pre-engineered building steel for installation under Section 03300. K. Air barrier sealing of pre-engineered roof and wall system including but not limited to additional air barriers shown on the drawings and specifications. L. All required engineering design for the pre-engineered building structure as specified and required by the Ontario Building Code. M. Cleaning and epoxy priming of all pre-engineered structural steel as specified. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Structural Steel Section 05120 C. Steel Deck Section 05310 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 2 , 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (Cont'd) D. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 , E. Air Barrier Section 07195 F. Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07620 , G. Sealants Section 07800 H. Painting Section 09900 I. Mechanical Division 15 J. Electrical Division 16 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design and fabricate building, structure and cladding in accordance with the ' following, latest revision, Codes and Standards: 1. Ontario Building Code 2. National Building Code of Canada 3. C.S.A. Standard S16.1 "Limit States Design of Steel Structures" 4. C.S.A. Standard S-136 "Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" 5. C.S.A. Standard W-59.1 "General Specification for Welding of Steel j Structures (Metal Arc Welding) 6, CAN/CSA-G164-M Hot dip galvanizing of irregularly shaped articles. 7. CSA 178.1 Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. 8. CSA 178.2 Certification of Welding Inspectors. 9. ASTM A653/A653M. 10. ASTM A570/A570M. 11. AISC Code or Standard Practice. 12. C.S.S.B.I. Technical Bulletin No. 3"Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Sheet Steel for Structural Building Products" 13. C.S.S.B.I. Technical Bulletin No. 5 "Coated Galvanized Sheet Steel for Structural Building Products". 14. C.S.S.B.I. 30.M-95 "Standard for Steel Building Systems". 15. CSSBI 20M-91 Sheet metal Cladding for Architectural and Industrial Applications. 16. The Occupational Health and Safety Act. , 1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design pre-engineered building in accordance with the Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute "Standard for Steel Building Systems" (latest revision). B. Design structural members fabricated from plate and bar stock or hot rolled structural shapes in accordance with the CSA S-16 (latest revision) "Steel Structures for Buildings". , 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 1 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 3 1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA (Cont'd) C. Design all members fabricated from light gauge cold formed material in accordance with the CSA S-136 (latest revision) - "Design of light gauge structural steel 1 members". D. Weld all shop connections in accordance with CSA W-59.1 (latest revision). E. Make all field connections with bolts conforming to ASTM A307, A325 or A490 bolts as "bearing type" connections, tightened by the "turn of the nut". F. Design loads and loading combinations in accordance with CSSBI 30M, Clause 7, and in accordance with Ontario Building Code, the National Building Code, and as 1 shown on the drawings. All loads shall be considered to act in combinations according to the National Building Code of Canada. 1 G. Design structure to suit dimensions and clearances shown on the drawings. H. Wall and roof panels and liner panels shall be designed in accordance with CSA 1 Specification S136-74 "Cold Formed Steel Structural Members". Panelling system shall be designed to support design live loads with a maximum deflection of 1/180 of the span at maximum load. 1. The pre-engineered building will be designed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice int he Province of Ontario. The design engineer will be insured against professional liability in accordance with Section 74, sub-section (1) of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with sub-section (2) is not acceptable. 1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection and testing of materials and shop fabrication of Work of this Section, and field quality control, will be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by the owner. 1 B. The Inspection and Testing Company, and welding inspectors and supervisors shall meet qualification requirements of CSA W178-1973, and shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau in Category 9A, Buildings. C. Inspection and report services: metal roof system manufacturer shall perform an inspection of the entire roof system and shall submit a written report tot he Owner, detailing all conditions requiring repair and/or maintenance by parties under the warranties specified herein. Inspections and report shall be completed once every other year over the weather tightness warranty period (20 years). The cost of inspection and report services will be included in the contract amount. 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 t SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 4 1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING (Cont'd) , D. Provide free access for inspectors to all places work is being performed, whether on site or off. E. Mill inspection shall ensure that materials conform to specified requirements. Mill test reports, properly correlated to the materials, will be accepted in lieu of physical tests. F. Shop inspection shall ensure that structural steel is fabricated in accordance with the shop drawings, and the specified fabrication and welding procedures. G. Shop paint preparation and painting shall ensure fabricated steel is cleaned as specified and paint is applied as specified providing dry film thicknesses specified. , H. Inspection and testing of air barrier assemblies including installation of liner panel vapour barrier and air barriers and sealing will be performed by an agency appointed by the Owner. 1.07 CERTIFICATION , A. Warrant that the design of the pre-engineered building has been made by a qualified designer to the requirements of this Specification and all referenced standards by submitting a written guarantee signed by a professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario and experienced in the structural design of building systems, stating that the design complies with this Specification and meets , all design requirements and codes of the authorities having jurisdiction. The certification must reference specific dead, live, snow, wind loads/speeds (including edge zone wind pressures) tributary area load reductions, concentrated loads, collateral loads, seismic loads, end use categories, governing code bodies and load applications. B. Submit certification verifying that the metal roofing system has been tested and approved by Underwriters Laboratory Canada as Class 90, and that the roofing system has been tested and approved by the US Army Corps of Engineers Guide Specification 07146 (Test Method for Structural Performance of Standing Seam Metal Room Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure) (MR-24(R), CMR-24(R) and VSR (TM)). C. Dealer Certification: submit certification that the building system supplier and metal roof system supplier is a manufacturer's authorized and franchised dealer of the system to be furnished. Certification shall stat the date on which authorization was granted. 7100-05550.wpd , DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 5 1.07 CERTIFICATION (Cont'd) D. installer Certification: submit certificate that the building mg and roofs stem installer has been regularly engaged in the installation of building systems of the same or equal construction to the system specified. E. Manufacturer's Certification: submit written certification by the manufacturer stating that the metal roofing system manufacturer will provide all warrantees and inspection and report service specified herein. 1.08 PAINTING SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Submit evidence normal painting subcontractor has previous experience and is qualified to clean the structural steel as specified and apply epoxy primer to the manufacturer's specifications. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proof of CSA-A660-M Certification, prepared and signed by a registered professional engineer. B. Submit proof of Design Engineers professional liability insurance coverage. C. Product data: Submit manufacturers product information specifications and installation instructions for all components and accessories. D. Submit shop and erection drawings and design calculations in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract, indicating shop fabrication, details and erection. Details shall be sufficient to clearly indicate proper assembly of all building components. E. Each drawing submitted shall bear the signature and stamp of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. ' F. Submit anchor bolt layout for setting of anchor bolts by another Section. G. Submit shop drawings of metal roof and wall systems. Show profile, size, lap dimensions and details, connections, attachments, anchorage, caulking, air seals and closures. Include necessary plans, elevations and details. Show on shop drawings locations of all double coat epoxy primer locations. H. Submit duplicate samples of all fasteners, including standing seam roof clips for application of roofing, siding and trim. 7100-05550.wpd r DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 6 1.09 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) I. Submit duplicate samples of manufacturer's colours for roof and wall panels for , selection by the Consultant. J. Metal siding, roofing and trim panels shall be custom colour to match existing material. 1.10 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Metal wall cladding shall be handled and stored on the job in such a manner that no damage shall be done to the material or the structures. B. Materials showing evidence of improper handling and storage shall be rejected and removed from the site at no additional expense to the Owner. C. Handle and store structural steel in such a manner that no damage, including , corrosion, is caused to the stored or erected work, or to other property. D. All primed structural steel must be carefully handled to avoid any damage to the primed surfaces. 1.11 WARRANTIES A. Guarantee that pre-engineered building system will remain free of defects in ' material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. Further warrant that: 1. Durability of the roof panels due to rupture, structural failure or perforation shall be guaranteed for a period of 20 years by the building manufacturer. 2. Wall and roof panels, and all associated trim will not chalk, crack, peel or , fade for a period of 20 years. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PRIMARY FRAMING A. All structural steel shapes, plates, etc. shall be new material conforming to CAN 3-G40.20-M81, Grade 300W, except hollow steel sections which will be Grade 350W. 7100405550.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 7 2.01 PRIMARY FRAMING (Cont'd) 1 B. Cold Formed Sections: Provide accurately formed channel or Zee sections of zinc coated steel as required for design loading, complying with ASTM Specification A446, Grade D, minimum zinc coating shall be Z275. C. All structural steel members are to be sheared,formed, punched and welded in the plant. All welding to be fully approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau to the requirements of C.S.A. Standard W47-1947 "Welding Qualifications Code". D. All primary building frame connections shall be bolted. Bolts and nuts shall be ASTM A325. E. Prior to shop prime painting, all structural steel shall be cleaned to the requirements of the Steel Structure Painting Council Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 - Standard SSPC-SP6, November 1, 1982, Commercial Blast Cleaning. F. All structural steel shall receive one shop coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer. Primer to be Glid-Guard Epoxy Chemical Resistant Double Build Primer No. 5461. Dry film thickness of first prime coat to be 3.0 mils. All areas which will be inaccessible for final finish painting after erection of the structural steel; and, roof and wall cladding systems, will receive a second primer coat with a dry film thickness of 3.0 mils. These areas will include the top flange of all frames and roof beams; outside flanges of all frames and columns, all locations where masonry walls will enclose pre-engineered steel framing prior to final painting. 2.02 ENDWALL FRAMING A. Precision cold-formed and/or shop-welded steel plate members consisting of rafters and columns fabricated for field bolted assembly. 1. Columns, rafters, splice plates, clips, angles and channels: factory fabricate to size required. ' 2. Plate stock endwall framing members: join flanges and webs by continuous automatic submerged arc welding process, under the supervision of welders certified in accordance with standard practices of AWS D1.1. 3. Clean components of oil dirt loose scale and foreign material and apply one (1) coat of manufacturer's standard primer. i 1 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 8 2.03 SECONDARY FRAMING A. Purlins and girts shall be roll formed '2' sections with stiffening lips. Sizes and profile shall be designed by preformed metal roofing supplier to meet applied loads and stresses. Minimum zinc coating shall be 2275. B. Windbracing shall consist of commercial grade steel diagonal rod bracing in both the roof and the walls. Double purlin struts shall be provided where required to , distribute the wind loads into braced bays. Provide rod bracing complete with necessary slope washers, flat washers and adjusting nuts at each end. 2.04 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor bolts shall be designed and supplied by the pre-engineered building t manufacturer and shall be sized to resist all shears and uplifts induced by the structure and shall not be less than the sizes shown on the anchor bolt layout drawings. All anchor bolts shall be unpainted so as to bond with the concrete. ' Foundation loads and reactions shall be furnished as required, in conjunction with layout drawings, to ensure the correct placement of anchor bolts (set by others). , 2.05 INSULATED METAL ROOF ASSEMBLIES A. Roof assembly shall be TMR-24 Thermal Roof System as manufactured by Butler Manufacturing Co. (Canada) Ltd. or approved equal and consisting of the following: 1. Liner Panel: 24 gauge (0.660 mm)aluminum-zinc alloy coated Galvalume, unpainted steel, 45 k.s.i. min. yield. Panels shall be min. 914 mm wide, factory cut to the lengths required and shall not extend beyond the structural line of the sidewall or the endwall. Panels shall be factory pre-punched at panel ends, to match pre-punched holes in the eave structural member, and for the end splice. 2. Thermal Spacer System: TMR thermal spacer assembly consisting of thermal roof clips,thermal blocks, hat shaped sub-purlins and MR-24 panel clips with sliding stainless steel tabs. 3. Insulation: AF-110 Fibreglas. Thickness as shown on the drawings. 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 9 2.05 INSULATED METAL ROOF ASSEMBLIES (Cont'd) 4. Roof Panels: Precision roll formed standing seam, MR-24 panels, 610 mm wide by maximum possible length. Panel material shall be 0.660 mm (24 gauge) aluminum-zinc alloy coated Galvalume, 5000 Series, pre-painted steel. Colour to be QC 260 Slate Blue. Roof panels shall be factory pre-punched at panel end to match pre-punched holes in the eave ' structural member. Panel end splices shall be pre-punched and pre-notched. Panel and splices shall allow the roof panels to expand and contract with roof panel temperature changes. 5. Accessories: Gutters (complete with support straps to withstand snow loads), downspouts, ridge ventilators, roof jacks, curbs, closures, flashing and metal trim shall be as standard with Butler Manufacturing Co. Ltd. or ' approved equal. All accessories to be formed from Galvalume pre-painted steel colour to match roof panel colour. 6. Standing Seam Sealant: approved type non-shrinking, non-drying, butyl- based sealant specifically formulated for factory application in standing seams and to allow roof panel assembly at temperatures from minus 10° F to 1400 F. B. Uplift Ratings: The roof system shall carry U.L. wind-uplift Class 90 rating to insure structural integrity. C. Ridge assembly shall be designed to allow roof panels to move lengthwise with expansion/contraction as the roof panel temperature changes. D. The roof shall provide for expansion/contraction without detrimental effect on the roof panel when ambient air temperature varies t 37° C from the temperature at which the roof was installed. A force of no more than 3.6 kg shall be required to initiate tab movement. i 2.06 INSULATED METAL WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Wall assembly Type A shall be Thermal Wall System as manufactured by Butler Manufacturing Co. (Canada) Ltd. or approved equal and consisting of the following: 1. Liner Panel: 0.660 mm (24 gauge)aluminum-zinc alloy coated Galvalume, Series 5000, pre-painted steel. Colour to be QC317 White White. Factory caulked, factory pre-punched, minimum 914 mm wide. 2. Subgirts: Cold formed, Z-shaped thermal subgirts, 1.2 mm (0.048") thick. ' 3. Insulation: AF-110 Fibreglas, 150 mm thick. 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 , SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 10 2.06 INSULATED METAL WALL ASSEMBLIES (Cont'd) , 4. Wall Panels. Precision roll formed Butlerib panels, 0.660 mm (24 gauge) thick aluminum zinc alloy coated, Galvalume 5000 Series, pre-painted steel. Colour to be OC260 Slate Blue. 5. Accessories: Flashing, trim and closures shall be fabricated from the same material, thickness and finish as the interfacing interior or exterior panel. ' 2.07 FASTENERS A. Type and size as recommended by the manufacturer. Exposed fasteners shall be colour matched to match colour of wall panels. e 2.08 CLAMPING PLATES A. Concealed, zinc coated cold formed steel, 1.27 mm thick. 2.09 CAULKING A. Concealed caulking shall be butyl rubber, curtain wall sealant factory applied to liner sheet female lips, and for panel bedding on supports and around perimeter. Exposed caulking to be Tremco Dymeric, colour matched to siding. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND EXAMINATION A. Provide anchor bolt layout to Section 03300. B. Check anchor bolt location, elevation and trueness of top of concrete footing. C. Site verify all elevations, dimensions and conditions. Examine all spaces and surfaces in which or to which work will be attached and report any discrepancies to the Consultant. Commencement of the work implies this Contractors acceptance of all spaces, surfaces and conditions. D. Where shown on drawings, insulated wall system shall be installed on structural steel framing or masonry supplied by others. Examine building frame and report any conditions which may affect system installation to the Consultant. 7100-05550.wpd iDIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 11 3.02 GENERAL A. The erection of the pre-engineered building, roof system, wall system and accessories shall be performed by a qualified erector licenced by the manufacturer iand in accordance with the manufacturers drawings and written instructions. Erection practices shall conform to current applicable Codes and Standards. B. Protect work of other trades from damage resulting from work of this Section. Make good any resulting damage, to the satisfaction of the Consultant, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Erection of steel building frame shall be as set forth in the CISC Standard Code of Practice. ' D. Supply and install all necessary framing (primary and secondary) for removable wall panels as shown on the drawings. Frame all openings as required by other Sections and in accordance with manufacturers standards. E. Where masonry occurs adjacent to building columns, provide 3.2 mm steel plate "U"brackets and galvanized 20 gauge adjustable metal ties at 400 mm o.c. for full height of masonry wall. Brackets shall be welded to columns. F. Where shown on the drawings, install all additional roof purlins and secondary framing required to support mechanical equipment, light fixtures, scoreboards and suspended structures. G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without manufacturer's approval. 3.03 ERECTION A. Structural Frames: 1. Erect true to line, level and plumb, brace and secure with temporary bracing in all directions as required. 2. Level base plates and secure to anchor bolts to level plane with full bearing to foundation supporting structures. ' B. Bracing: 1. Install all permanent diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof and sidewalks as ' approved by manufacturer. 2. Properly tighten rods to avoid excessive sag. 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 i SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 12 3.03 ERECTION (Cont'd) C. Framed Openings: 1. Securely attach to building structural framing members, square and plumb. 3.04 ROOF SYSTEM INSTALLATION , A. Fasten liner panels to roof secondary structural members at 305 mm o.c. at intermediate purlin locations and 152 mm at ends or splices. B. All liner panel side and end laps shall be sealed with Butyl sealant (weather sealing compound)to prevent the entry of vapour and movement of air. Install additional air barriers as shown on drawings and specified under Section 07195. Provide additional air barriers and caulking at all junctions between roof and wall and at all locations where liner panel meet other surfaces and at all laps, etc. to provide an air tight finished installation. C. Install thermal clips, fastened to roof secondary structural members. ' D. Install insulation to the top of the thermal clips with tightly butted joints, taking care to install insulation in the voids below the clips. Hat sections shall be positioned, aligned and fastened to the thermal clips. Install over hat sections, a continuous layer of insulation, 50 mm thick. E. Install panel clips. , F. Install prefinished roof panels, aligned with panel clips. All side laps shall be field seamed with a lock seaming device to form a double lock standing seam. End laps shall be minimum 152 mm, sealed and fastened together with clamping plates. G. Install all closures,flashing, trim and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions. H. Where shown on the drawings, provide roof jacks and curbs. 3.05 WALL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Closures shall be installed at top and bottom of all panel runs, top and bottom of all panel openings, at inside and outside corners. ' 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 13 3.05 WALL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd) B. Apply a continuous bead of caulking at top, bottom and ends of siding to provide a complete seal. Place liner sheets tightly against supports and secure with ' self-tapping screws at maximum 305 mm o.c. On lapped joints, caulk continuously between laps to provide a complete vapour seal. Lapped joints shall be made concealed behind girts. Refer to Section 3.03 B and provide all air barriers as specified. C. Install Z-bar subgirts directly to structural girts. D. Install base angles to floor slab on foundation wall. E. Install insulation with tightly butted joints. One layer of 50 mm insulation shall be installed continuously over the Z-bar subgirts. F. Install prefinished wall panels, fastened to Z-bar subgirts. Side laps shall be minimum one full corrugation. Panels shall be one piece, full height of building. G. Install all closures, flashing and trim, bedded in sealant. H. Caulk all openings, joints and around perimeter to provide a weathertight installation. 3.06 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Gutters for standing seam roof shall be suspended box sections of 26 gauge galvanized steel formed to match the configuration of the gable trim. Gutters shall ' be independent of the roof seal and shall be attached to the eave strut adapter by means of a gutter hanger. ' B. Gutter hangers shall be spaced at 1200 mm centres and attached to inside face of gutter and eave adapter by#12 self-drilling screws and to outer face of gutter by trim fasteners. iC. Gutter sections shall be lapped 50 mm and sealed with sealant and then fastened with fasteners as specified on manufacturer's drawings. D. Gutter end closures shall be sealed with sealant and fastened with pop rivets as specified on manufacturer's drawings. 7100-05550.wpd DIVISION 5 1 SECTION 05550 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING Page 14 1 3.07 COATING TOUCH-UP A. After erection touch up all epoxy primer damaged during erection, clean and paint 1 all field welds, bolts, steel abrasion areas and damaged paint film and miscellaneous connections. ' B. After erection, give one coat of zinc rich paint to field bolts, field connections, burnt areas, and abrasions or damage to galvanized surfaces. 1 3.08 CLEAN UP A. Before removing scaffolding from walls, clean off any marks on exposed surfaces. Remove debris and leave work ready for other trades. ' i 1 i 1 1 1 7100-05550.wpd 1 ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all carpentry called for or implied by drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to full intent and meaning of drawings and specifications. Work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Treated wood cover for header trenches. B. Sleepers, parapets, control joints and wood cants. C. Rough bucks, furring and blocking. D. Set all steel door frames. E. Temporary handrails, guardrails, ladders, stairs and doors. ' F. Temporary hoardings. G. Fire retardant plywood wall and ceiling. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Demolition and Removals Section 02050 ' B. Formwork Section 03100 C. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 D. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 E. Roofing Section 07530 F. Hollow Metal Door Frames and Screens Section 08100 G. Dasherboard System Section 13180 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Structural members shall conform to CAN3-086-M84, 'Engineering Design in Wood'. ' B. Sawn lumber shall be identified by the grade stamp of an association or independent grading agency approved to grade lumber. C. Plywood identification shall be by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA Standards. D. Pressure treated materials shall conform to CSA 0132.1. 7100-06100.wpd DIVISION 6 ' SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 , 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Hoardings shall be designed b a Professional Engineer to withstand all applicable E. 9 g Y g pp loads including wind loads. ' 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials shall not be delivered before they are required for proper conduct of the ' work. B. Protect materials, under cover, both in transit and on the site. ' C. Store materials to prevent deterioration or the loss or impairment of their structural ' and other essential properties. Do not store materials in areas subject to high humidity and areas where masonry and concrete work are not completely dried out. ' D. Protect work from damage during storage, handling, installation and until the building is turned over to the Owner. Make good damage and loss without ' additional expense to the Owner. E. Store sheathing materials level and flat, in a dry location. Protect panel edges from moisture at all times. 1.06 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit shop drawings for hoardings. B. Shop drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of a Professional Engineer , registered in the Province of Ontario. r PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials specified herein. ' B. Timber Material shall be'Grade Stamped'. r 7100-06100.wpd i DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ' ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) C. Construction Lumber: Grading shall conform to the CSA 0141-1970 "Softwood Lumber" graded to NLGA Standard for Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, published by the National Lumber Grades Authority. All lumber shall bear grade stamps. Moisture content of softwood lumber not to exceed 19% at time of 1 installation. 1. Framing lumber, plates, furring, blocking, No. 1 SPF. 2. All wood curbs, blocking and cant strips on roof shall be No. 2 Pine or better pressure treated as herein specified. ' 3. Nailing strips, furring and strapping: No. 4 Common Pine. 4. Fitment framing: No. 1 Common Pine. ' D. Panel Materials: Type, grade and thickness as specified in accordance with the following standards: 1. Douglas Fir Plywood: To CSA 0121-M1978, standard construction, good one side, thickness as shown on the drawings. Plywood used for interior finishes shall be select grade veneer, with fire retardant finish. 2. Waferboard: To CAN3-0437.0-M85, good one side, square edge 12 mm thick. E. Rough Hardware: Nails, screws, anchors and special fastening devices required for the erection of framing and hoarding. Items for rough carpentry shall be galvanized and conform to CSA Standards B111-1974, B34-1967 (R1972). F. Sealant: 'Mono' as manufactured by Tremco Manufacturing Ltd. G. Wood Preservative: 1. Pressure treated: CCA - Wolmanized Koppers Company Inc. 2. Surface-Applied: Pentox (Green) Osmose Pentox Inc. H. Building Paper: To CAN2-51.32M77, 15# asphalt impregnated paper. 7100-06100.wpd DIVISION 6 ' SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 ' PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship 1. Execute work using skilled mechanics according to best practice, as specified herein and indicated on drawings. 2. Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately cut and fit; erect in proper position true to dimensions; align, ' level, square, plumb, adequately brace, and secure permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing. B. Rough Hardware , 1. Work shall include rough hardware such as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, ' screws, Gips, hangers, connectors, strap iron, and operating hardware for temporary enclosures. 2. Fasten rough hardware; to hollow masonry units with adequate size toggle ' bolts; to solid masonry or concrete surfaces with expansion shields and lag screws. Where screws are required, use lead or inorganic fibre plugs. Wood or organic plugs are not permitted. Do not ramset fastenings into concrete floor or concrete block or structural steel sections. C. Cant Strips, Roof Blocking and Sleepers , 1. Provide and install framing, blocking and sleepers as indicated on the drawings. Anchor blocking securely in permanent manner as indicated on the drawings. D. Installation of Door Frames 1. Set frames plumb, square and level, maintaining door width and height. 2. Brace frames securely in position while being built-in. Install temporary wood spreader at mid height of frame until adjacent masonry work is complete. E. Header Trench Covers: 1. Construct header trench covers as insulated sandwich panels as detailed on the drawings. 2. All header trench covers shall be preservative pressure treated. , 7100-M100."d ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 5 F. Surface Applied Wood Preservative: 1. Treat surfaces of material with wood preservative before installation. Apply preservative after materials have been cut and fit to size. To cut end two coats of preservative shall be applied. 2. Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush or spray to completely saturate and maintain wet film on surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and one minute soak on plywood. 3. Retreat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming, or boring with 2 coats of brush application of preservative before installation. 4. All wood in contact with masonry or concrete shall be dipped in a tank of preservative for two minutes after fabrication. G. Hoardina: 1. Erect hoarding where shown on the drawings in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, and as necessary to complete the work. 2. Exterior hoarding shall be minimum 8'-0" high constructed to withstand all applied loading including wind loading. 3. Interior hoarding shall be full height to protect existing building and occupants. Provide temporary access doors. Hoarding shall be constructed with minimum 11 mm Douglas Fir plywood, both sides of 38 x 89 (minimum) wood studs at 16" c/c with voids filled with Fibreglas Pink ' Insulation. All joints and seams shall be sealed and caulked. 4. Provide additional hoarding and blank off openings in building walls to secure and protect the structure. ' 7100-06100.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all finished carpentry called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Installation of Doors B. Installation of Finishing Hardware C. Plastic Laminate Window Stools D. Locker Room Benches E. Miscellaneous Finish Woodwork F. Installation of Signage G. Acoustic Wall Treatment H. Installation of Washroom Accessories I. Wood shelving ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 C. Cabinet Work Section 06410 D. Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames Section 08100 E. Wood Doors Section 08210 F. Finish Hardware Section 08710 G. Painting and Finishing Section 09900 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do millwork to Millwork Standards of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) 1972. 1.05 SPECIAL PROTECTION A. Store finished carpentry items in clean dry area. During shipment and storage, materials shall have protective covering. 7100-06200.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 1.05 SPECIAL PROTECTION (Cont'd) B. Cover plastic laminate items with heavy Kraft paper and place in corrugated cardboard cartons with corners well padded to avoid damage. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of plastic laminate panelling and each type of solid wood or plywood to receive stain or natural finish, in accordance with Division 1. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide a written guarantee stating that "finished carpentry work shall be guaranteed for two years against warpage, opening of joints, cracking, shrinking, delamination of plastic laminate and similar defects." 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. B. Clearly indicate details of construction, profiles,jointing, fastening and other related details. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS , 2.01 MATERIAL A. Softwood Lumber: (for concealed framing of cupboards and fitments) To CSA 0141-1970 and National Lumber Grades Authority requirements, with maximum moisture content of 6% for interior work, Ponderosa Pine species, to AWMAC premium grade. B. Hardwood Lumber: I To National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) requirements, moisture content of 6% maximum maple species for bench slats, to AWMA custom grade; birch species where indicated. 7100-06200.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Confd) C. Hardwood Veneered Particleboard: To CSA 0115-1967, of thickness indicated, rotary cut face Birch veneer, unless specified otherwise on the drawings; good two sides for work with two sides 1 exposed to view; good one side for work with one side exposed to view. Use particleboard core with Type I bond. Select veneer to provide random match. D. Douglas Fir Plywood: To CSA 0121-M1978, good two sides, tight face select sheathing, high density overlaid. E. Poplar Plywood: To CSA 0153-1976 sanded grade construction grade overlaid grade. F. Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard: To CAN3-0188.1-M78 grade, sanded faces, of thickness indicated. G. Nails and Staples: To CSA B111-1974; plain finish, spiral thread nails. H. Plastic Laminate: " m " "Arborite" " " Formica , Pionite , or Wilsonart post-forming grading in colours to be selected by Consultant from available range of solid or pattern colours, in furniture finish, Velvatex .052"thick. Backing sheet .020"thick. 1. Rough Hardware: Bolts, lag screws, anchors, nails and expansion shields required to secure this portion of work. Rough hardware hot dip galvanized conforming to latest edition of CSA Specification G164. J. Acoustic Wall Panels: Tectum Interior Wall Panels as supplied by Sound Solutions Canada Ltd. Panels shall be 50 mm thick, 1213 mm x 2440 mm, bevelled butt edge acoustic panels, complete with hardware as recommended by the supplier. Galvanized furring channels shall be 19 mm x 1.6 mm thick. Provide manufacturers standard trim, and accessories. 7100-06200.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate casework to AWMAC conventional construction custom grade. Set nails and screws, apply stained plain wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and leave ready to receive finish. Provide 10 mm thick solid matching wood strip on plywood and particleboard edges 12 mm or thicker, exposed in final assembly. B. Shelves: Shall be 19 mm birch veneered particleboard. Exposed edges of fixed shelves shall have 6 mm wide birch strips by full thickness of plywood. Adjustable shelves shall have 6 mm wide birch strips applied to both edges and both ends. Strips shall be glued and securely fixed to plywood edges. 3.02 CABINET WORK INSTALLATION A. Provide grounds as necessary for secure installation of cabinetwork. B. All wood surfaces shall be sanded smooth, ready to receive finish. C. Provide all cutouts required by all plumbing, electrical, or other fixtures or equipment. D. Install and adjust cabinet hardware. Recess shelf standards. E. Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid plumb and square. F. Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinet work. 3.03 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Finish hardware will be supplied for installation under this Section. B. Install finish hardware complete in all respects, hang doors and make adjustments necessary. 7100-06200.wpd t DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 5 3.03 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION (Cont'd) C. Doors shall swing freely. Where thresholds are to be used, door bottom shall be finished to suit thresholds as required. Where indicated on door schedules or drawings under-cut doors. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install door grilles or undercut doors as shown on door schedule or on the Mechanical drawings. B. Install signage. C. Install acoustic wall panels, on metal furring channels at 600 mm o.c., securely fastened to building walls and structure in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Cut wall panels to fit tight around all penetrations. Use recommended fasteners. Install trim to all exposed edges in accordance with manufacturers recommended details. D. Install all miscellaneous specialties required in Section 10950 in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. i 7100-06200.wpd r DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINET WORK Pagel PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all cabinetwork called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the jfollowing: A. All cabinets and cupboards. B. Display cases (Cash Allowance Item). C. Washroom vanities (including stainless steel vanities). D. Plastic laminated pass through counters. E. Finishing of all exposed interior wood surfaces of cabinet work. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Metal fabrications, including supply of steel angle ' supports for wall mounted cabinetwork Section 05500 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 C. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 D. Wood Doors Section 08210 E. Display Case Doors Section 08800 F. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim Division 15. G. Electrical outlets Division 16 j 1.04 DEFINITION A. "Exposed"when referred to in this Section, shall mean all parts which can be viewed and shall include interiors of cupboards, cabinets and countertops, backs of doors, shelving, gables, and drawers. 7100-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINET WORK Page 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: unless otherwise specified, carry out finish carpentry work in accordance with requirements of"Millwork Standards" (latest issue) of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers'Association of Canada (AWMAC), Custom Grade. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed shop drawings for cabinetwork showing proposed assembly, connections, anchorage, materials, dimensions, thickness, and finishes. B. Submit samples of each type of solid wood and plywood used in exposed work, complete with transparent finish, prior to fabrication of cabinetwork. C. Submit sample of each type of cabinet hardware component used. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY. HANDLING & STORAGE A. Protect against damage, including damage by excessive changes in moisture content, during delivery and storage. Maintain minimum storage temperature of 16 0c, and relative humidity of 25% to 55%. B. Cover plastic laminate faces at shop with heavy Kraft paper. C. Do not deliver finish carpentry components to site before all wet trades are completed, , the building is closed in and humidity conditions on site are acceptable. Do not deliver during rain or damp weather. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY. HANDLING &STORAGE (Cont'd) D. Store materials on site in such a way as to prevent deterioration or loss or impairment of essential properties. Prevent excessive moisture gain of materials. 1.08 PROTECTION A. Provide coverings as necessary to protect finish carpentry components from damage of any kind during storage and after installation. 7100-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINET WORK Page 3 1.09 WARRANTY A. At no cost Owner, remedy any defects in work of this Section due to delamination and warping of plastic laminated finish carpentry components for a period of two (2) years from date of Substantial Performance. Provide Owner with a written warranty to this effect. jPART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Solid Wood: .1 Unless otherwise indicated, provide AWMAC Premium Grade. .2 All wood materials shall be new, straight and clean, free of sap, knots, pitch, and other defects, except as permitted by applicable grading rules. .3 All wood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 7%. .4 Hardwood: plain sawn Birch for exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. Trim and mouldings where shown on the drawings shall be red oak. Inlay material shall be cherry wood. .5 Softwood: to CSA 0141-1970, dressed all sides used in concealed locations. B. Plywood: .1 Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-M1982, Type II Good Grade Birch, where transparent finish is required and Solid Grade where paint finish is required. .2 Soft plywood: to GSA 0151-M1978 Standard Grade, solid two sides. Use in concealed locations only, except as indicated. .3 Douglas Fir plywood: to CSA 0121-M1978, good two sides, tight face select sheathing, high density overlaid. C. Hardboard: .1 To CGSB 11-GP-3M, Type 2, 6 mm thick or as indicated: Tempered "Masonite". D. Plastic Laminated Components: .1 Plastic laminate facing sheet: CSA CAN3-A172-M79, PF-S and GP-S; colours, ' gloss and texture will be selected by Consultant from full range of products by Pionite, Formica, Arborite, Nevamar, or Wilsonart (2 or more manufacturers may be selected). .2 Backing sheet: BK Grade by manufacturer of facing sheet. .3 Core: CAN3-0188.1 M78, Grade R. .4 Laminating adhesive: CAN3-0112 Series M1977. .5 Core sealer: clear water resistant synthetic resin sealer. 1 "1100-06410.Wpa DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINET WORK Page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) E. Fasteners and Adhesive: .1 Nails and staples: CSA 8111-1974, galvanized. .2 Screws: zinc, cadmium or chrome plated steel. .3 Adhesive: waterproof type as approved by Consultant. Contact bond not acceptable. F. Stainless Steel: Type 304 15 gauge satin finish stainless steel. G. Cabinet Hardware: Products listed below are a standard of acceptance. Products by other manufacturers, of equal quality and similar appearance may also be accepted subject to review and approval by Consultant. .1 Hinges for 19 mm door Blum 91-650, 170° with self closing spring. .2 Door to drawer pull: GSH 302 x 100 mm CTC 7.5 mm o.d. brushed stainless steel. .3 Drawer slides: KV 1429 full extension for 45 kg load @ 500 mm. .4 Drawer locks: CCL 0738 pin tumbler MK& KA by room. .5 Cabinet locks: CCL 0737 pin tumbler MK & KA by room. .6 Elbow catch: Ives 2-A14 on inactive door of locked pair. .7 Pilaster& clips: KV 255, 256. .8 Hardware finish: Chrome or nickel plated. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General Requirements: .1 Exposed joints and edges: a. Uniformly space exposed joints unless otherwise indicated. b. No edge grain shall be visible; mitre external corners, house internal fasteners. Glue mitred corners. c. All exposed edges of plywood and particle board shall have solid wood edging, pressure glued. .2 Mechanical Fasteners: a. Inconspicuously locate mechanical fasteners. Wherever possible, conceal fastenings. 7100-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINET WORK Page 5 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) b. Countersink nail heads. c. Where exposed to view, countersink screw and bolt heads and fill holes with matching wood plugs. d. Cutting and fitting: make cutouts in work of this Section as required to accommodate work of other Sections. 1 e. Make provisions in cabinetwork to accept built-in appliances, provided by others. .3 Plastic Laminate Components: a. Unless otherwise specified herein, comply with requirements of CAN3- 1 A172-M79 Appendix 'A'. b. Assembly: Bond plastic laminate to core with adhesive, under pressure. c. Core: unless otherwise indicated: 19 mm thick; countertops 29 mm thick. d. Balanced construction: plastic laminate covered components shall be of balanced construction, with plastic laminate on both faces of core. Seal core edges not covered with plastic laminate. 1 e. Use largest practicable plastic laminate sheet size. f. Provide joints symmetrically; provide joints as corners and at changes in superficial areas; provide concealed draw bolt anchors and joints. All butt joints shall have a blind spine. g. Construct countertops postformed or selfedged as detailed on Drawings. h. Apply self-edged minimum 1.0 mm thick plastic laminate to exposed ends of countertops. i. Construct splashbacks minimum 100 mm high or higher where indicated. Do not return postformed splashback at ends except where specifically called for. j. Openings and cutouts: i. Radius internal corners at least 3 mm and chamfer edges. ii. Where core edge is to remain exposed, cover with plastic laminate edging. iii. Where core edge is to be concealed, seal with sealer. .4 Stainless Steel Countertops/Vanities: Vanities where shown on the drawings shall be stainless steel bonded to 19 mm exterior grade Douglas Fir plywood. Install steel sheets in maximum practical lengths, full width of vanities, including skirt and splashback. All seams shall be welded and ground smooth. 1 7100-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 ' SECTION 06410 CABINET WORK Page 6 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) .5 Cabinetwork: , a. Except where otherwise detailed, use flush overlaid construction. Tenon, dado, dowel, or rabbet interior construction with all parts well glued. Shoulder mitre all exposed comers. Open ends or skeleton frames against walls are not permitted. Unless otherwise permitted by Consultant, use unitized construction system for all components. b. Unless otherwise indicated, construct all exterior components of cabinetwork, counters, cupboards, such as doors, drawer fronts, exposed end gables, from plastic laminate covered plywood; use Solid Grade hardwood plywood for interior components, not visible when cabinet doors, cupboard doors, drawers, are in closed position. C. Provide cupboards with 13 mm thick plywood backs. d. Construct gables of plastic laminate faced plywood. Rout gables for pilaster strips where adjustable shelving is required. e. Construct shelving of 19 mm hardwood faced veneer core plywood. f. Construct doors and drawer fronts of 19 mm plastic laminate faced plywood. g. Construct doors with 13 mm plywood sides and back, with sides tongued into front and back housed into sides. Construct bottom with 13 mm hardboard housed into front and sides. Plywood top edge for sides and back may be exposed. h. Install cabinet hardware in accord with hardware manufacturer's directions. Unless otherwise indicated, provide each drawer and door with pull, each drawer with extension hardware and each door with minimum two hinges. Provide locks where indicated. L Apply moisture repellent sealer to concealed backs of cabinetwork. 2.03 FINISHES A. Shop applied polymerizing two component catalytic conversion varnish system, stain colour and varnish sheen selected by Consultant. The individual components of the system used must be chemically compatible to assure perfect adhesion and top quality, durable final finish. B. All surfaces shall be carefully prepared and sanded, free of machine marks, before and between finish coats. C. Exposed interior of display cases, doors and drawer fronts where indicated, shall be finished as follows: 1 One coat wipe-on stain, Benjamin Moore solvent based penetrating stain, (use blend of stains to match sample provided by Consultant). ' 7100-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINET WORK Page 7 2.03 FINISHES (Cont'd) .2 One coat sealer(Wood Kote liquid plastic, exterior polyurethane satin#850-4). .3 Sand. .4 One clear top coat. D. Cabinet interior(cabinet with doors) and drawer bodies shall be finished as follows: 1 One coat sealer. .2 Sand. .3 One tinted top coat. E. Cabinet and case backs unexposed to view shall be given one coat of moisture repellent sealer. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinetwork components plumb, true and level and securely fasten in place. Accurately scribe and closely fit components to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. B. Accurately fit points in true plane, locate joints over bearing or supporting surfaces. C. Provide mechanical fastening devices such as nails, screws and bolts required for fastening wood components. Unless permitted, provide concealed fastening of components. D. Install wall mounted cabinets with steel angle supports secured to wall with drilled, self-tapping screw anchors. E. Where permitted, nail with small headed finishing nails. Countersink nail heads with nail setter. F. Install plastic laminate components using concealed fastening devices. G. Where components are fastened with screws or bolts, countersink screw and bolt heads and provide wood plugs matching surrounding wood. H. Where cabinetwork abuts other building elements, provide wood trim matching cabinetwork except where otherwise detailed. 7100-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 , SECTION 06490 CABINET WORK Page 8 3.09 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) I. Where access is required to valves and other mechanical and electrical components, located behind cabinetwork, provide removable plywood access panels of size required and secure with four brass screws. J. Check operation of all moveable parts and, if necessary, adjust to ensure proper and smooth function. , K. Upon completion of installation, inspect work of this Section and touch-up, where required, minor or damaged surface finish to restore it to original condition. Replace damaged components which, in the opinion of the Consultant, cannot be satisfactorily repaired. L. Items not detailed on the drawings will be Cash Allowance Items. Refer to Instructions to Bidders. 7100-06410.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all bituminous dampproofing called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Masonry Section 04200 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do dampproofing in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-3M. B. Do sealing work in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-11M except where specified otherwise. j C. Do priming of surface in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-15M except where specified otherwise. t1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Approved by material manufacturer. B. Workmanship Standards: 1. Prepare and apply materials in accordance with material manufacturer's specifications. 2. Keep copy of manufacturer's specifications on site for duration of work. 7100-07160.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 2 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not proceed with work when wind chill effect would tend to set bitumen before proper curing takes place. B. Do not apply dampproofing in wet weather. C. Provide forced air circulation during installation and curing periods for enclosed applications. D. Apply dampproofing only when air temperature is within limits specified by material manufacturer. E. Protect surrounding building surfaces from damage. i F. During cold weather, store materials at minimum 40°F until immediately prior to application. , 1.07 WARRANTY A. At no cost to Owner, remedy any defects in work, including work of this and other Sections, due to faults in materials or workmanship provided under this Section of Specifications appearing within a period of two (2) years from date of substantial performance of entire work of the contract as certified by Architect. Provide Owner with a written warranty to this effect. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit WHMIS Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)for all products prior to delivery to the site. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt: 1. For application and curing at temperatures above 5°C: To CGSB 37-GP-1M. Package label or bill of lading for bulk hot liquid asphalt must indicate type, softening point, flash point, equiviscous temperature range and final blowing temperature. 7100-07160.wpd r DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) 2. For application and curing at temperatures above 0°C but below 5°C: To CGSB 37-GP-6Ma+Amdt-Oct-78. Package label or bill of lading for bulk hot liquid asphalt must indicate type, softening point, flash point, equiviscous temperature range and final blowing temperature. S. Sealing Compound: Plastic cutback asphalt cement to CGSB 37-GP-5M. C. Asphalt Primer: To CGSB 37-GP-9Ma. I2.02 COMPATIBILITY A. Ensure that all materials used are compatible. rB. Provide proof of compatibility. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Keep hot asphalt: 1. Below its flash point. 2. At or below its final blowing temperature. 3. Within its equiviscous temperature range at place of application. r 3.02 PREPARATION A. All surfaces which are to receive dampproofing must be smooth, clean, dry, frost-free and in sound condition. All moisture, frost, grease, oils, or other foreign materials which may impede the adhesion of the dampproofing must be removed. B. Before applying dampproofing: Seal exterior joints between foundation walls and footings,joints between concrete floor slab and foundation and around penetrations through dampproofing with sealing compound. I3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply primer. 7100-07160.wpd r DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 4 3.03 APPLICATION (Cont'd) , B. Apply dampproofing in accordance with applicable CGSB application standard as follows: Material Application CGSB 37-GP-1M use CGSB 37-GP-3M CGSB 37-GP-6Ma+Amdt-Oct-78 use CGSB 37-GP-12M r 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Apply continuous, uniform coating to entire exterior faces of pit and trench foundation r walls and at all other locations shown on the drawings from 50 mm below finished grade level to and including tops of foundation wall footings. , B. Apply two additional coats of dampproofing to vertical corner and construction joints for a minimum width of 230 mm on each side, and all around and for 230 mm along pipes passing through walls. 3.05 INSPECTION AND REPAIR r A. Inspect membrane thoroughly immediately before backfilling and make any corrections to cracks, voids and other obvious defects which would impede the membrane from performing as intended. r r t r r 7100-07160.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 1 PART I: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all air barriers called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. This work includes but is not limited to the t following: I A. Cleaning and verification of substrates. B. All air barrier membranes. C. Air and Vapour Seals. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 C. Building Insulation Section 07200 D. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Insulation Section 07218 E. Metal Wall Cladding Section 07410 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest issues of the following codes and standards shall govern the work of this Section: 1 1. The Ontario Building Code 2. CAN2 51.33.M86 3. ASTM D-624 4. ASTM T-412 5. CGSB 57GP52M 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Approved by membrane material manufacturer. 7100-07195.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) ' B. Workmanship Standards: 1. Prepare and apply materials in accordance with membrane material manufacturer's specifications. 2. Keep copy of manufacturer's specifications on site for duration of work. C. Ensure that membrane manufacturer's field representative is present at site to observe installation of air barrier system and that he,,upon completion of work, confirms in writing that work is installed as specified. RA 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver material to the site in the original unbroken packages bearing the name of manufacturer. B. Store materials in an approved manner at the site preceding application and protect I from damage at all times. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS , A. Apply membrane only when air temperature is within limits specified by material manufacturer. B. Protect surrounding building surfaces from damage. C. During cold weather, store materials at minimum 40 deg. F until immediately prior to application. 1.08 WARRANTY ' A. At no cost to Owner, remedy any defects in work, including work of this and other Sections, due to faults in materials or workmanship provided under this Section of Specifications appearing within a period of two (2) years from date of substantial performance of entire work of the contract as certified by Architect. Provide Owner with a written warranty to this effect. 7100-07195.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 3 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three copies of manufacturers product data and installation instructions. B. Submit two 300 mm square samples of membrane. C. Submit MSDS data sheets for all products and materials prior to delivery to the site. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials specified. B. Air barrier membrane shall be an SBS modified bitumen peel and stick membrane, in roll widths of 914 mm, with the following minimum physical properties: Thickness 1.45 mm Permeability (ASTM E96) 0.05 perms Tensile Strength 8.8 N/mm C. Flexible air barrier shall be comprised of a high strength fibreglass centre scrim with S.B.S. modified bitumen both sides and covered face and back with polypropylene. The modified bitumen shall consist of at least 80% of the overall thickness of the sheet. Material must be compatible with spray applied polyurethane insulation specified in Section 07218. ' D. Acceptable Products: Vedagard Non-Slip by Bakor Inc. I Bituthene 5000 by W.R. Grace & Co. Mel-Dek by W.R. Meadows 1 E. Primers, adhesives and mastics shall be as recommended by the air barrier membrane manufacturer. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces to ensure conformance to the manufacturer's recommended ' surface conditions. ' 7100-07195.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 4 3.01 INSPECTION (Cont'd) B. Do not proceed with air barrier application until all substrate defects are repaired in accordance with the directions in 3.02 "Preparation". 3.02 PREPARATION A. All surfaces which are to receive flexible air barrier must be smooth, clean, dry, frost-free and in sound condition. All moisture, frost, grease, oils, or other foreign materials which may impede the adhesion of the air barrier must be removed. B. Concrete must be cured 28 days and dry before air barrier membrane is applied. Use form release agents which will not transfer to the concrete or adversely effect the adhesion of the membrane to the ultimate cured concrete. If concrete is cured with curing compounds, the compounds must not contain any oil, wax or other compounds which may impede or effect the adhesion of the membrane to the surface. Remove any and all sharp protrusions and repair any defects such as spalled or loose aggregate areas. 3.03 WSTALLATION A. Apply membrane in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. B. Apply membrane at locations shown on drawings, to bridge all gaps in the masonry , wall including control joints. Minimum width each side of joint shall be 150 mm. C. Apply membrane by heating the surface in contact with the substrate with a trigger-activated propane torch, type as recommended by the manufacturer. D. All side and end laps shall be overlapped a minimum of 50 mm and fused to the , adjacent sheet. E. At all window, wall and door openings, return the air barrier and terminate it in the rough opening. t F. Co-ordinate the construction of the roof/wall junction with the roofing contractor, the , metal siding contractor, and the pre-engineered building supplier so as to maintain continuity of the air barrier from the wall to the roof. 7100-07195.wpd jDIVISION 7 SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 5 3.04 INSPECTION AND REPAIR A. Inspect membrane thoroughly before covering and make any corrections to punctures, tears, voids and other obvious defects which would impede the membrane from performing as intended. B. Restrict construction traffic and equipment movement near the completed air barrier to only essentially related trades. For any other trades continuing to work near the completed air barrier, appropriate protection shall be provided. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Install air barrier membrane where required to provide a completely sealed building envelope at the following locations: 1. At junction between masonry cavity walls and metal siding supplied by Sections 05550 and 07410. 2. At all control joints in masonry cavity walls prior to the application of spray applied insulation (interior and exterior walls). 3. At all perimeters through masonry cavity walls. 4. At masonry cavity walls to provide air/vapour seal at junction between wall and roof assemblies. 5. At metal clad walls to provide air/vapour seal at junction between wall and roof assemblies. 6. At junction between wall assemblies and insulated soffits. ' 7. At all exterior door and window openings. 8. At all other locations shown on the drawings. i ' 7100-07195.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all building insulation called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. This work includes but is not limited to the following: A. All loose fill insulation. B. All perimeter foundation insulation. C. All underslab insulation. D. All vapour barriers. ' E. All insulation below interior hollow core floor slabs in dressing room area. F. All header trench cover insulation. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Excavating,Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 B. Masonry Section 04200 C. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 E. Air Barrier Section 07195 F. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Insulation Section 07218 G. Metal Wall Cladding Section 07410 H. Roofing Section 07530 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver material to the site in the original unbroken packages bearing the name of manufacturer. B. Store materials in an approved manner at the site preceding application and ' protect from damage at all times. ' 7100-07200.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 2 , PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials specified. B. Refrigerated Rink Slab Insulation 1. Rigid Insulation below refrigerated rink slabs and apron slabs shall be Styrofoam HI-60 insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical of Canada Ltd. Thickness shall be 2 layers, 50 mm each. 2. Insulation anchors shall be 6 mm diameter hardwood skewers. C. Header Trench Cover Insulation 1. Rigid ceiling insulation below precast concrete slabs shall be Styrofoam SM , insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical of Canada Ltd., 75 mm thickness or as shown on the drawings. 2. Adhesive shall be as recommended and manufactured by Dow Chemical , of Canada Ltd. D. Rigid Ceiling Insulation 1. Rigid ceiling insulation below precast concrete slabs shall be Styrofoam SM insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical of Canada Ltd., 38 mm thickness. 2. Adhesive shall be as recommended and manufactured by Dow Chemical t of Canada Ltd. E. Perimeter Insulation , 1. Rigid perimeter insulation below grade shall be extruded, expanded polystyrene to CAN/ULC S701-97, Styrofoam SM insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical of Canada Ltd. 2. Adhesive shall be as recommended and manufactured by Dow Chemical. e F. Batt Insulation and Loose Insulation 1. Fibreglass unfaced friction fit batts for steel stud application, wall and , ceiling application, width and thickness as shown on details. 2. Voids filled with loose batts where shown on details. 7100-07200.wpa , DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) G. Vapour Retardant ' 1. Vapour retardant 6 mil polyethylene film to CAN/CGSB-51.34-M in roll width of 3000 mm. ' 2. For vapour retardant below slab refer to Division 2. 3. Adhesive tape shall be 50 mm wide Scotch Brand No. 352 polyester or Y- 8086 Contractors Sheathing Tape by 3M Canada Inc. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Batt Insulation and Loose Insulation 1. Pack loose fibreglass insulation in crevices between exterior concrete and door and window frames and about lintels, frames, beams around ducts at holes and other places where shown or required to eliminate air infiltration. 2. Pack loose fibreglass into voids around mechanical and electrical pipes and ducts where they pass through walls and slabs. ' 3. Install friction fit insulation in spaces as shown on drawings. B. Perimeter Insulation 1. Install perimeter insulation just prior to backfilling. 2. Apply adhesive in gobs or pads to the back of the insulation board at a rate of 6 to 10 cu.m squared per 5 litres. Pads of adhesive shall be on approximately 300 mm centres and 50 mm in diameter. Joints shall be left dry with joints brought into tight contact. Apply insulation to the wall with a slight sliding motion to ensure good contact. 3. Protect insulation from damage until time for placing floor slabs. 7100-07200.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 4 3.01 INSTALLATION (ConVd) ' C. Vapour Barrier Retardant 1. Install vapour retardant where shown on drawings. Joints shall be lapped , minimum 150 mm and taped with pressure sensitive polyethylene tape. 2. Install vapour retardant over rigid ceiling insulation. Staple to wood furring and tape all joints with pressure polyethylene tape and seal edges with non- drying caulking. D. Header Trench Cover Insulation , 1. Cut and install insulation tight against all sides and abutting insulation. Secure to plywood with galvanized screws and galvanized discs normally used for mechanically fastening insulation. E. Refrigerated Rink Slab Insulation 1. Prior to installation, examine base course of granular fill and remove any , large or sharp materials which may damage the insulation. 2. Install vapour barrier as noted in Section 02200. Install insulation in two layers. Offset joints by one half the board dimension in each direction. Tightly butt all joints. Anchor first layer to granular base with min 200 mm long hardwood skewers. Anchor the second layer to the first with minimum 75 mm long hardwood skewers. All skewers to be installed at minimum 300 , from vertical. 3. Extend insulation below apron slab, minimum 1200 mm beyond rink slab and vertically at header trench and pits where shown on the drawings. 4. The finished surface of the insulation shall be within 3 mm of the specified surface. F. Rigid Ceiling Insulation ' 1. Install rigid ceiling insulation to underside of precast concrete slabs, cut tight to fit between wood furring strips. 2. Apply adhesive in gobs or pads to the back of the insulation board at a rate of 6 to 10 square metres per 5 litres. Pads of adhesive shall be on approximately 300 mm centres and 50 mm in diameter. Joints shall be left dry with joints brought into tight contact. Apply insulation to the wall with a slight sliding motion to ensure good contact. , 7100-07200.wpa DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section includes all spray applied polyurethane foam insulation called for or implied by the drawings and specifications together with all incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Cast-in-place Concrete Section 03300 B. Masonry Section 04200 ' C. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 E. Air Barrier Section 07195 F. Building Insulation Section 07200 G. Sealants Section 07900 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. CAN/CGSB 581.23-92 Thermal Insulation, Urethane, Spray in place. ' B. CAN/CGSB 51.39-92 Spray Application of Rigid Polyurethane Cellular Plastic Thermal Insulation for Building Construction. C. Manual for Installers of Spray Polyurethane Foam Thermal Insulation, Canadian ' Urethane Foam Contractor's Association. D. Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors Association (CUFCA) Quality Assurance Program, June, 1992. E. National Energy Conservation Association (NECA). ' 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials which maintain continuity of thermal insulation and air barrier at ' building enclosure in conjunction with thermal and air barrier materials specified elsewhere. B. Finished RSI value of spray applied insulation shall be minimum RS) 2.10 (R12) but in no case shall insulation thickness be less than 50 mm. ' 7100-07218.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 2 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd) ' C. Spray polyurethane foam to meet air leakage requirements of air barriers (<0.02 Us•m2 at 75 Pa). ' D. Spray polyurethane foam to have permeance rating of 19 ng/Pa•s•m2 for 50 mm thickness. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Before commencing work under this section, submit in accordance with Division 1: 1. Copy of Foam Contractors license under the CUFCA Quality Assurance Program; ' 2. Copy of applicator certification by CUFCA/NECA; 3. Submit WHMIS Data Sheets(MSDS)for all spray applied insulation and primers prior to material deliver to the site; ' 4. Field quality control procedures to be utilized by the applicator to ensure proper preparation and installation of the materials specified. 1.07 TEST REPORTS A. Submit test reports, verifying qualities of insulation that meet or exceed requirements of this specification. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor must be licensed under CUFCA and approved by the material ' manufacturer to perform work under this section. B. The contractor must have at least 5 years experience in the application of spray ' polyurethane foam insulations. 1.09 MOCK-UP ' A. Spray apply material in specified thickness to mock-up panel specified in Section ' 04200. Cooperate with masonry contractor to ensure timely completion of mock-up panel prior to commencement of the masonry wall construction. 1.10 PROTECTION A. Protect all adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by over spray. 7100-07218.wpd ' ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 3 1.10 PROTECTION (Cont'd) B. Apply spray insulation only at times and in conditions in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. C. Limit exposure of spray insulation to ultra violet light by providing opaque covers, tarpaulins and the like. Spray insulation which will be exposed for 48 hours before ' installation of the masonry shall be covered. 1.11 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store material as recommended by manufacturer's written instructions in original, sealed, labeled containers in accordance with Division 1. B. During cold weather, store raw materials in heated storage. 1.12 WARRANTY ' A. Warrant work of this Section against defects or deficiencies for a period of two (2) years from date of substantial completion in accordance with General Conditions. PART 2: PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. Spray polyurethane foam insulation to CAN/CGSB 51.23-92 and meeting the following criteria: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES TEST PROCEDURE UNITS RESULT Density ASTM D1622 Kg/M3 39.2 ' Compressive Strength ASTM D1621 KPa 185 Tensile Strength ASTM D1623 KPa 385 Shear Strength ASTM C273 KPa 264 Flexural Strength ASTM C273 KPa 230 Thermal Resistance 2 days at 23°C ASTM C518 m21C/W per 25 mm 1.39 Water Absorption ASTM D2842 % by Volume 0.48 Water Vapour Permeance ASTM E96 ' 25 mm Thickness ng/Pa•s•m2 2819 50 mm Thickness ng/Pa•s•m2 7100-07218.wpd DIVISION 7 ' SECTION 07218 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) PHYSICAL PROPERTIES TEST PROCEDURE UNITS RESULT Closed Cell Content ASTM D2856 % 97 Air Leakage 50 mm Thickness ASTM E283 and I/s•m2 0.000167 E330 Flame Spread CAN/ULC S-102 25-500 ' B. The sprayed polyurethane foam shall exceed the requirements for type III air barriers, as outlined by the Institute for Research in Construction - National Research Council of Canada (0.05 Us•m2. Indoor Humidity greater than 55%). C. Insulation to be CFC free formulation. i D. Primers: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations if required for surface conditions. , PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable to accept work required in this section. B. Report, in writing, defects in surfaces or conditions which may adversely affect the ' performance of products installed under this section to the Engineer; prior to commencement of work. C. Do not commence work until defects have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from over spray. ' B. Apply primers for special condition as required by foam manufacturer. C. Clean work area prior to commencing spray operations. D. Surfaces to receive sprayed polyurethane foam insulation shall be frost free and not coated with release agents or other deleterious substances. Commencement of work , shall be deemed as acceptance of existing work and conditions. 7100-07218.wpd 1 ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 ' SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 5 1 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to clean surfaces in accordance with CAN/CGSB 51-39-92 and 1 manufacturer's printed instructions. Use primer where recommended by manufacturer. B. Cooperate with other sections to ensure all air barrier, flashing membranes and the like have been installed as necessary. C. Apply air barrier membrane material in accordance with Section 07190 to bridge all 1 gaps and control joints in the masonry wall, prior to application of spray applied insulation. 1 D. Spray polyurethane foam insulation only during periods when ambient air temperatures are within range of 5° C to 32° C. 1 E. Finished polyurethane foam shall be free of voids and embedded foreign materials and to minimum thicknesses shown or specified on drawings. 1 F. Fill all door frames as indicated on the drawings with sprayed insulation 1 3.04 TOLERANCE A. Maximum variation from required thickness: 3 mm. 1 3.05 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 1 A. Installed assembly will be tested and inspected for conformance with specifications by an independent inspection and testing company retained and paid for by the owner. i 1 1 1 1 7100-07218.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07270 ' FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Sealants Section 07900 B. Fire stopping at Mechanical Electrical Penetrations Divisions 15 & 16 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Fire stopping components shall be listed and labelled by ULC. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to start of work, submit list of proposed fire stopping and smoke seal materials ' together with suitable documentation to verify that specified requirements will be met. B. Upon Consultant's request, submit samples of materials. PART : PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN4-S115-M85, ' asbestos free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of jurisdictional authorities; labelled by ULC. Fire resistance rating of installed systems shall be equal to fire resistance rating ' of adjacent/surrounding building components. B. Fire stopping materials: foamed in place insulation, mortar, grout, gun grade sealant, mineral fibre felt, or other materials bearing ULC label for required fire rating. C. Smoke seals and fire stopping exposed to view: sealant type. D. Service penetration assemblies: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115-M85 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19. ' 7700-07270.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07270 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 2 ' 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) , E. Service penetration fire stop components: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4- , S115-M85 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 019.15 under the Label Service of ULC. F. Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastometric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations. G. Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control; elastometric seal; do not use a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations. Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate and end , use. H. Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious ' substances. I. Damming and back-up materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's ' recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' J. Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging. K. Ensure fire stopping materials used are suitable for each particular application. Where fire stopping will be subjected to loading, use and install materials which will support the load. Obtain Consultant's approval before proceeding with installation. PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thickness and ' installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free. B. Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions. C. Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation. D. Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; ' remove stains on adjacent surfaces. 7100-07270.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07270 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 3 ' 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Install fire stopping and smoke seal materials in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and ULC test requirements. B. Provide fire stopping and smoke seal at control joints, between fire rated 1 walls/partitions and structural deck above, and at other locations, as required, to maintain integrity of smoke and fire barriers. ' C. Fire stopping and smoke seal in locations exposed to view shall be of the sealant type, alternatively, other fire stopping material may be used, provided it is covered by a bead of sealant. D. Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire ' separation are maintained. E. Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. F. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish. ' G. Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion. 3.03 INSPECTION A. Notify consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing fire stopping materials and service penetration assemblies. ' 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after ' application. B. Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials. 7100-07270.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07410 METAL WALL CLADDING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all preformed metal cladding Type 2 and pre-finished metal soffits called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but ' is not limited to the following: A. Insulated metal wall cladding and soffits. ' B. Metal liner panel. C. Closures, Flashings, air seals and trim. D. 'Z' Girts and miscellaneous framing. E. Caulking and sealant at siding. F. Flashing at expansion joints as indicated on drawings. G. Supply only of pre-finished sheet steel for coping flashing at parapet walls. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Structural Steel Section 05100 C. Steel Roof Deck Section 05310 D. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 E. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 F. Roofing Section 07530 ' G. Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07620 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The latest issues of the following Codes and Standards shall govern the work of ' this Section. 1. The Ontario Building Code. 2. CSA S136-1974 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 3. CSSBI Metric Standard for Sheet Steel Cladding. ' 7100-07410.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07410 METAL WALL CLADDING Page 2 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES (Cont'd) , 4. CSSBI - Standard Practice. 5. ASTM A446. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. B. Show profile, size, lap dimensions and details, connections, attachments, anchorage, caulking, closures and expansion joint detail. Include necessary plans, elevations and details. , C. Submit for approval duplicate samples in the selected colour(s). 1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Metal wall cladding shall be handled and stored on the job in such a manner that ' no damage shall be done to the material or the structures. B. Materials showing evidence of improper handling and storage shall be rejected and removed from the site at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.07 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. The erector shall be responsible for the examination and acceptance of surfaces and the conditions affecting the proper installation of his materials and shall not proceed until all satisfactory conditions have been corrected. All dimensions must be verified in the field prior to submittal of shop drawings. , B. P P 9 PART : PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS , A. Use materials as specified herein. Liner and exterior panel shall be formed from structural quality steel sheet to ASTM Spec. A.446 Grade 'A' and conforming to ' CSA S136 with a minimum yield stress of 230 MPa and a working stress of 144 MPa 7100-07410.wpd , iDIVISION 7 SECTION 07410 METAL WALL CLADDING Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) B. Metal wall cladding shall be Vicwest Steel Ltd., or approved equal as follows: i) Exterior Wall Panel (Type 2): Panel AD30OR C.N.T. 0.91 mm (0.036") Zinc Coating Designation of Z275 Prepainted Metallic series by Steel Company of Canada (Stelco), colour QC 2624 Silver. ii) Z Bars: Zinc coated (Z275) steel 1.22 mm thick Depth to accommodate insulation. iii) Insulation: ' 150 mm AF-180 Fiberglas iv) Interior Panel: ' Panel L-800 C.N.T. 0.65 mm (0.026") Zinc Coating Designation of ZF075 Female side of lip factory caulked. V) Exterior Soffit Panels: I Panel AD30OR C.N.T. 0.91 mm (0.036") Zinc Coating Designation Z275 Prepainted 5000 Series White White QC317. C. Flashing, trim and closers shall be fabricated from the same material, thickness and finish as the interfacing interior or exterior panel. D. Roof coping flashing: this section shall supply all flat stock necessary for perimeter flashings at roof parapets. Material shall be minimum of 24 gauge, prefinished ' galvanized sheet steel, zinc coating designation of Z275 colour to match exterior wall panel Type 2. At masonry parapet walls, colour shall be Antique Linen, QC3696. E. Robertson Building Systems, Peerless Enterprises, Cemal, and Canadian Metal Rolling Mills are approved equals to Vicwest Steel Ltd. ' 7100-07410.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07410 METAL WALL CLADDING Page 4 ' 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' F. Fasteners: Exterior panel fastened with exposed self-tapping, prefinished nylon hat ' "Colourmate"to match colour of siding. Interior sheets, sub-girts, etc., fastened with type "AB" hex head cadmium plated high carbon steel, self-tapping sheet metal screws. G. Caulking: Concealed caulking shall be butyl rubber, Tremco curtain wall sealant factory applied to liner sheet female lips, and for panel bedding on supports and around perimeter. Exposed caulking to be Tremco Dymeric, colour matched to siding. H. Closures: Unifoam PVC closures to profile of siding. I. Exterior wall panel Type 1 will be supplied and installed by the pre-engineered building manufacturer, as indicated in Section 05550. ' PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 FABRICATION A. Design metal siding and fasteners for a positive wind load of 1.0 kPa and a ' negative wind load of 0.6 kPa and a maximum deflection of 1/180 of the span at maximum load. B. Stress shall not exceed 144 MPa for Grade A steel. C. Fabricate all metal flashing, starter strips, closures and trim as required for ' complete installation of wall cladding, Hem all exposed edges minimum W for appearance and stiffness. Miter and seal corners with sealant. D. Roof cap flashing will be installed by the roofing and sheet metal contractor. This section shall supply flat stock to Section 07620 sufficient to complete all roof parapet coping flashings. , 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Examination 1. Examine building frame, take field measurements and examine other work which may affect this work. 7100-07410.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07410 METAL WALL CLADDING Page 5 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) 2. Notify Consultant of any conditions which would prevent proper installation ' of this work. 3. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing conditions. B. Erection shall be carried out by the manufacturer's trained erection crews or their approved erector, in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Install all fleshings and seal to provide a weather-tight structure. ' C. It will be the responsibility of the metal wall cladding erector to check the accuracy and alignment of the structural steel. If not within tolerances set forth in the CISC Standard Code of Practice, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant before proceeding with erection of the metal wall cladding. ' D. Endlaps 100 mm minimum formed over supports. E. Fasteners or method of attachment shall withstand all loads of wind or of suction 1 as may be imposed on the metal wall cladding. Exposed fasteners shall have precoated or nylon coated heads to match colour of the metal wall cladding. F. Before removing scaffolding from walls, clean off any marks on exposed surfaces. Remove debris and leave work ready for other trades. ' G. There shall be no apparent difference between face sheets of same colour when viewed from a minimum distance of 15 metres. Remove and replace off-colour sheets as directed by the Consultant. H. Installation of Siding 1. "U"closures shall be installed at top and bottom of all panel runs, top and bottom of all panel openings, at inside and outside corners. 2. Apply a continuous bead of caulking on faces of all supports and at top, bottom and ends of siding to provide a complete seal. Place liner sheets tightly against supports and secure with self-tapping screws at maximum 300 mm o.c. On lapped joints, caulk continuously between laps to provide a complete vapour seal. Lapped joints shall be made concealed behind girts. 1 3. Install Z-bar sub-girts directly to structural girts. 4. Install insulation with tightly butted joints. 1 ' 7100-07410.wpd DIVISION 7 ' SECTION 07410 METAL WALL CLADDING Page 6 ' 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) ' 5. Bed all flashings, closures and corner pieces in sealant to provide a weathertight installation. , 6. Caulk all openings, joints and around perimeter to provide a weathertight installation. Caulk at sides and top of metal siding where adjoining existing cladding. 7. Provide expansion joints complete with metal closures, flashings, caulking, etc., to provide a weathertight installation. ' 3.03 TOUCH-UP , A. Touch-up marred siding, soffit or panel surfaces to match finish, or replace as necessary, to the satisfaction of the Consultant. , 7100-07410.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ' ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division L 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all single ply E.P.D.M. roofing called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Vapour barrier B. Roof insulation, mechanical fasteners C. E.P.D.M. roof membrane and flashing, gravel surface D. Flexible flashings and bituminous flashings E. Control joints and expansion joints F. Caulking G. Make good existing roofing and sheet metal work where affected by demolition and where new work connects to existing. H. Removal and disposal of existing roofing, curbs, flashing, parapets and blocking down to existing deck to the schedule as specified. I. All cutting in and flashing at temporary curbs and waterproofing, including column work ' pockets temporary patches where roof mounted equipment has been removed or modified to provide a watertight roof at all times. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Metal Roof Deck Section 05310 B. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 C. Wood Blocking (Rough Carpentry) Section 06100 D. Air Barrier Section 07195 ' E. Metal Siding (Metal Wall Cladding) Section 07410 F. Roofing Specialties and Accessories Section 07800 G. Roof Drains And Mechanical Equipment Division 15, Mechanical 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. The roofing contractor shall have adequate facilities or access to facilities to take receipt of and store roofing materials so that the materials are ready to be built in. ' 7100-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 2 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE (Cont'd) ' B. Deliver and store materials undamaged in original unopened containers with manufacturer's label.and seals intact. Containers shall be stored upright and roofing membrane shall be stored on end to prevent flattening. All materials shall be ' protected from moisture at all times. No material shall be placed in direct contact with the earth. ' C. All materials, except membrane, must be stored between 5° C and 27° C. If exposed to lower temperature, restore materials to 5° C minimum temperature before using. D. All materials, except membrane, must be stored in a dry area and protected from ' water and direct sunlight. Damaged materials shall be replaced at roofing Contractor's expense. ' E. Storage of insulation and roofing materials, etc. on the roof is prohibited. 1 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply roofing in periods only approved by the roofing inspector. ' B. The roofing contractor must receive written authorization from the roofing inspector to proceed. C. Do not work during periods of rain, fog, sleet, snow or cold temperatures (below-15° C) 1.06 PROTECTION ' A. Provide adequate protection of materials and work of this trade from damage by weather, traffic and other causes. Schedule roofing installations in such a manner that ' traffic over the completed portions of roofing will be avoided. At the end of each day's work seal exposed edges of roofing membrane. Protect work of other trades from damage resulting from the work of this trade. Make good such damage at no , additional expense to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Consultant. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor represents that he has the special qualifications for doing the work and that the plans and specifications are, in his opinion, appropriate and adequate for the construction and/or renovations set out therein. 7100-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ' ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 3 1.07 GUARANTEE (Cont'd) ' B. The roofing Contractor hereby warrants the work of this Section, including vapour retardant, insulation and sheet metal work against defects of workmanship and ' material, and against any actual leakage for a period of five years from the date of Substantial Performance and agree to make good promptly any defects which occur or become apparent within the warranty period, such defects to include but not be restricted to leaking,failure to stay in place, undue expansion, lifting, deformation, loosening and splitting of seams, joint deformation, failure to adhere, deterioration, blisters, etc. C. The Contractor shall furnish the Guarantee Warranty in writing, on forms issued and approved by the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association, signed by the roofing ' Contractor. ' 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Consultant, samples and manufacturer's literature for all materials. ' B. Submit shop drawings of all components and accessories and including layout drawings and details for the tapered insulation system. ' C. Submit shop drawings detailing roof size, membrane sheet placement, location and type of penetrations, type of vapour retarder, insulation and insulation fasteners. D. Submit WHMIS Data Sheets for all products to be used on this project. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The roofing and sheet metal Contractor shall be of recognized standing with a proven ' record of satisfactory installations, and shall be a member in good standing of the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. ' B. All membrane work shall be carried out by applicators fully experienced in this type of work, and approved by the system manufacturer. ' C. Roofing and sheet metal work shall be executed under the full time supervision of a competent foreman. ' D. A membrane manufacturer's representative shall be available to review installation procedure and to impact the completed installation to verify compliance with all specifications and details. ' 7100-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 4 ' 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) E. The Owner will appoint and pay for an Independent Inspection Company to provide roofing inspection. The contractor shall provide full co-operation to the roofing ' inspector. 1.10 REFERENCE STANDARDS ' A. Canadian Roofing Contractor's Association (CRCA) Metric Specification Manual, 1979, , ' except as specified herein. B. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): "Loss Prevention Data, Insulated Steel Deck 1-28", FM "Approval Guide" including Revisions to date. , C. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada(ULC) "List of Equipment and Materials Volume II Building Construction" including supplements to date. ' D. Provide membrane roofing systems including insulation and all related materials to conform to"ULC Class A"and"FM Class I"design criteria, as shown and as specified ' herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS , 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' The roofing system shall be a loose laid, ballasted roofing system, Design 'B' Lexcan or approved equal, and including the following components: ' 1. Vapour retarder. 2. Rigid roof insulation including tapered insulation. 3. EPDM roofing membrane. , 4. Ballast. 5. All accessories, hardware and material required for a complete installation as described on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer of the roof , membrane. 1 7100-07530.wpd ' ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 5 ' 2.02 MATERIALS A. General 1. Use materials as specified herein only, or approved equal. 2. Compatibility between roofing system components is essential. All materials used on the roof shall be endorsed for compatibility by the applicator and the materials manufacturer. 3. All packed materials shall bear the manufacturer's name brand, weight and ' applicable specification number and printed instructions for storage, application, etc. Materials not identified shall be removed off the site. 4. Materials shall conform to the CSA or CGSB specification numbers named ' including all revisions to date or shall be the product named. B. Vapour Retardant- Lexsuco Permate (Ultra) vapour retarder and Permate adhesive. ' C. Roofing membrane shall be 1.1 mm Lexcan E.P.D.M. (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) Elastomer, supplied in factory fabricated sheets up to 12.2 m x 30 m and meeting the physical characteristics shown in the following table: PROPERTY A.S.T.M. TYPICAL TEST METHOD TEST VALUES Thickness Tolerance D-751 ± 10% Tensile Strength D-412, Die C 9.0 MPa. (1305 psi) min. ' Elongation, Ultimate D-412 400% min. Tear Resistance D-642, Die C 35.0 kN/m min. (200 Ibf/in.) tOzone Resistance D-1149 No Cracks @ 7x magnification 17 days at 100pphm, 40°C, 50%ext.] ' Brittleness D-2137 Does not break @-60°C Water Absorption, mass D-471 ± 1% ' Linear Dimensional Change D-1204 ±2% [28 days @ 115°C] Factory Seam Strength D-816 9.6 kN/m min. (55 Ibs/in.) After Heat Aging; 28 days @ 115°C Tear Resistance D-642, Die C 26.3 kN/m min. (150 Ibf/in.) Elongation, Ultimate D-412 200%min. Tensile Strength D-412, Die C 8.3 MPa (1205 psi) min. D. Bonding Adhesive - Lexcan#BA-90 or SAS 8000. ' 7100-07530.wpd 1 DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 6 ' 2.02 MATERIALS (Cont'd) , E. Splicing Adhesive- Lexcan#SA-747. F. Splicing Tape - 100 mm wide Lexcan Splice Tape. , G. Lap Sealant- Lexcan Lap Sealant. H. Night Sealant- Lexcan Frothpak. I. Water Cut-Offs- Lexcan water cut-off mastic or 50 mm x 1.6 mm Elastic Sealer Tape. J. Splice Cleaner- Lexcan SC-1 seam cleaner. K. Pourable Sealer- Lexcan pourable sealer. L. Termination Bar- Lexbar termination bar. ' M. Termination Tape - Lexcan 50 mm sealer tape. N. Roof board insulation- Lexsuco Isocyanurate with black facers or approved equal as recommended by the membrane manufacturer, thickness as shown on the drawings. O. Tapered Insulation: Posislope. ' P. Ballast- 19 to 38 mm diameter well graded, round washed river stone, clean and dry, free from dust, sand or organic impurities, soft or friable materials. Q. Stack jacks (vent pipe flashings) - Copper stack jacks supplied by Lexsuco Canada , Ltd. applicable at all plumbing vent pipes. Sleeves supplied by other trades will not be acceptable. R. Elastic flashings- Field fabricated with E.P.D.M. membrane or Lexflash, 1.6 mm thick , by Lexcan. Lexflash adhesive shall be Lexcan#SA-747. S. Insulation Fasteners - where required by the manufacturer to meet FM uplift requirements, Lexsuco"screw and plate", Weatherguard Fasteners' "Dekfast", Grefco ''Permafastener' or other FM - approved screw and plate fastener system with compatible screws in length to suit insulation thickness, and tested with specified ' insulation to FM 1-90 Uplift Classification. T. Substitutions- If this Contractor substitutes materials or trade names specified herein with others such materials shall be removed immediately from the site making good all other work disturbed for such removals. 7100-07530.wpd , DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 7 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS iA. Examine work of other trades and notify in writing to the Consultant and Contractor that the work is acceptable or of any defects or discrepancies. Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck or requires men and equipment to transverse roof deck has been completed or adequate protection is provided. B. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness which would prevent the execution and quality of application of the roofing system as specified. Do not proceed with application of the roof system until defects are corrected. Installation of any part of the work without the written ' acceptance of such surfaces shall require immediately removal of such installed work. 1 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Use only competent mechanics and ' execute work in accordance with drawings and specifications. B. Regard the manufacturer's printed recommendations and specifications as the ' minimum requirement for materials, methods and workmanship not otherwise specified. ' C. Maintain roofing equipment in good working order. D. Unsuitable or damaged materials shall immediately be removed from the site. E. Materials shall not be applied during inclement weather. Do not apply roofing over wet decks, or where frost or snow is present. ' 3.03 APPLICATION F VAPOUR RETARDANT ' A. Install vapour retarder membrane and seal all laps, edges and penetrations in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions. ' B. Apply in straight lines, free from wrinkles, tears or open laps. Minimum 150 mm end laps and 50 mm side laps tightly sealed with a continuous mopping of adhesive. At perimeters, vertical walls and curbs, etc. apply a 300 mm wide strip of vapour retardant ' and seal to air barrier membrane. C. No more vapour retardant shall be applied in any one working day than can be 1 covered with insulation and properly"dried-in". ' 7100-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 8 ' 3.03 APPLICATION OF VAPOUR RETARDANT (Cont'd) ' D. Vapour retardant shall not be installed to bridge across expansion joints or similar devices. , 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION , A. Keep insulation dry at all times. Insulation showing evidence of having been dampened since its manufacture or separation of laminations shall not be used. Lay insulation panels with all joints staggered. Insulation shall be laid with the longest side parallel to the flutes unless the manufacturer stipulates otherwise. Lay board in tight contact to prevent gaps and resulting loss of thermal insulation value. Cut boards to fit neatly around projections through roof. B. At roof drains, reduce the insulation thickness by 13 mm for a distance of 600 mm from the centre of the drain. Fill the flutes of the steel deck at roof drains with ' insulation board adhered with adhesive for a distance of 600 mm from the centre of the drain to ensure total support at all drains prior to placement of vapour retardant. C. Protect all exposed edges of insulation where roofing temporarily terminates at the , end of a working day by forming a water cut-off. Water cut-off shall consist of E.P.D.M. membrane, extending from the surface of the roof membrane minimum 200 ' mm onto the deck. Ensure water cut-off is continuously secured to the deck and is removed prior to proceeding with work the following day. D. Insulation shall be installed in 2 layers with staggered joint. ' E. Insulation shall not be installed to bridge across expansion joints or control joints. F. Perimeter insulation and insulation around large protrusions shall be mechanically fastened to the requirements of Factory Mutual for a Class I roof, and as required by the roof system manufacturer. , 3.05 ROOF MEMBRANE APPLICATION , A. Roof membrane shall consist of 1 ply of E.P.D.M. Elastomer sheets, loose laid and covered with ballast. B. Unroll membrane and position sheets, lapping edges a minimum of 100 mm. Allow sheets to relax a minimum of thirty (30) minutes. , i 7100-07530.wpd , DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 9 3.05 ROOF MEMBRANE APPLICATION (Cont'd) C. Bond membrane to all vertical surfaces using bonding adhesive applied evenly with no globs or puddles, using a lambswool paint roller, to both membrane and substrate. Allow adhesive to dry until tacky, but not stringing to the touch. Roll coated membrane into adhesive, avoiding wrinkles. D. Fold top sheet of splice area back and clean seam area using white gas or other recommended solvent to remove talc on membrane surface. Apply seaming adhesive to both matting surfaces with a clean paint brush, using a circular motion to ensure proper coverage. E. Install seaming tape to folded edge of membrane and roll heavily with a hand roller. Remove paper backing and close joint allowing membrane to fall into place without stretching. Roll completed seam with steel hand roller. Apply lap sealant to all seam edges and feather with suitable tools as recommended and provided by the manufacturer. F. Flash all corners, vent pipes and curbs in accordance with the manufacturer's standard recommended details. Use either E.P.D.M. membrane or Lexflash flashing for field fabrication. Where SA-747 adhesive is applied, use lap sealant at Lexflash seam edge. Seal drains with water cut-off mastic or Elastic Sealer tape as per ' manufacturer's standard recommended details. G. Adhere membrane to scuppers in accordance with the manufacturer's standard recommended details. H. All roof hoppers shall be temporarily blocked when gravel on roof is being placed to prevent gravel from failing down leaders into drains. Exercise care to remove temporary blocking when work is not proceeding to avoid flooding. I. Form control joints and expansion in membrane where indicated on the drawings and ' install elastic flashing. ' 3.06 BALLAST INSTALLATION A. Upon completion of each section of roofing membrane, and after inspection by ' manufacturer's representative, install gravel ballast evenly over entire area. B. Ensure that lifts of gravel ballast do not exceed roof design loads as noted on the structural drawings. C. Ballast shall be gently spread over membrane, taking care to protect membrane at all ' times. Ballast shall be installed at a rate of 50 kg/square metre (10 lbs./sq. ft.) and shall be of uniform thickness over entire roof area. ' 7100-07530.wpd i DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 10 ' 3.07 METAL FLASHING A. The roofing contractor shall complete all metal flashings in accordance with Section 07620. ' 3.08 PITCH POCKETS A. Provide and install pitch pockets around columns, handrail balustrades and other protrusions through the roofing, including the work of the Mechanical and Electrical Trades. Pockets shall be fabricated from 20 gauge steel with a Zinc Coating i Designation G90 to ASTM A446 (latest edition) Class W, to a size 6" greater on each side of the protrusion. Solder all seams and corners. B. Flash in the pitch pockets with Lexflash Flashing in accordance with the manufacturer's standard recommended details. C. Completely fill the pockets with plastic cement. Slope the top of the filled pockets down from the centre to finish flush with the outside edges. 3.09 TEMPORARY FLASHING A. Install temporary roofing and flashings in all areas of modifications as necessary to ' provide a weathertight roof. 3.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Provide necessary facilities and co-operate with designated inspection and testing , agency. B. Upon completion of the roofing system, an authorized manufacturers representative ' will make an inspection of the installation for warranty acceptance. 7100-07530.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07620 ' METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all metal flashing and trim called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Metal coping flashing and trim at roof edges and parapets (flat stock supplied by Section 07410). B. Metal counter flashing. C. Metal roof curb flashings. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 ' C. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 D. Metal Wall Cladding Section 07410 E. Roofing Section 07530 1 F. Roof Specialties and Accessories Section 07800 ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of sheet metal material in accordance ' with Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings showing all work of this Section. Drawings shall clearly show materials, profiles, fastenings, sealants, lap joints and the like. C. Submit duplicate colour charts showing full range of manufacturers available colours. D. Submit MSDS Data Sheets for all material proposed for use on the site. Material Data Sheets must be approved in writing by the Owner, prior to delivery to the site. 7100-07620.wpd DIVISION 7 ' SECTION 07620 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 2 ' 1.05 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Appearance: neatly and evenly lay out and install components. Exposed fastening devices not permitted. ' B. Effects of Wind: resist positive and negative wind pressures without detrimental effects. C. Water Control: prevent passage of water. D. Thermal Movement: accommodate expansion and contraction of component parts without buckling, failure of joints, undue stress on fasteners and other detrimental effects. E. Compatibility: components shall be compatible with dissimilar metals and materials , with which they are in contact or fastened to so as to prevent corrosion, staining and other detrimental effects. If required, treat or separate contact surfaces with ' inert and non-staining insulation material to achieve compatibility. 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS , A. Comply with the applicable provisions of the following reference standards: ' ASTM B32 - Solder Metal ASTM C920- Elastomeric Joint Sealants ' Canadian Roofing Construction Association Specification Manuals. 1.07 WARRANTY 1 A. Submit a warranty to repair or replace metal flashing work for a period of five (5) years from date of substantial completion of work of this Section does not remain ' watertight or free of material or workmanship defects affecting structure and appearance. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work of this Section shall be performed by a qualified sheet metal contractor with ' a minimum of 5 years experience in the type of work required and specified. Submit proof of experience where requested by the Architect. ' 7100-07620.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07620 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 3 1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Use materials only as specified herein and matching exactly, all approved samples. B. Ensure compatibility of all materials in contact with roof membrane. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: 0.024 (24 gauge) galvanized sheet steel, commercial quality to ASTM A526-71 with Z275 designation zinc coating, primed, protected and finished with ' 0.025 mm nominal coating thickness, Stelco or Dofasco 5000 series, colour: to be selected by Consultant. Material for roof coping parapet flashings shall be supplied by Section 07410 for installation by this Section. B. Continuous hook on strips and metal bellows: 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel P 9 9 9 , zinc coating designation ZF275. C. Isolation Coating: Alkali resistant bituminous paint to CAN/CGSB-1-GP-108-M89. D. Plastic Cement: To CGSB 37-BP-5M. E. Nails, Bolts, Screws and Other Flashings: same metal finish as sheet metal being used to CSA B111. The size of fastenings shall suit the applicable conditions. All nails, screws, and other flashings shall be subject to the approval of the Consultant or his representative. F. Caulking Sealant: Parr Uniseal Polysulphide as supplied by Pan- Paints and Sealants Ltd., Toronto or PRC rubber caulk#5000 as supplied by PRC Chemical ' Corporation of Canada Ltd. G. Underlay: No. 15 perforated asphalt felt to CSA A123.3-M79. ' H. Cleats: Of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured. PART 3: EXECUTION i3.01 GENERAL A. Install sheet metal work in accordance with CIRCA specifications and as detailed. 7100-07620.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07620 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 4 3.01 GENERAL (Cont'd) B. During the course of the work, report any damaged or unsuitable material , uncovered and allow for their repair or replacement as directed by the Architect. C. Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation. 3.02 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with applicable ' CIRCA specifications and as indicated. B. Form pieces in 2440 mm maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at ' joints. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 13 mm. Mitre and seal corners with sealant. D. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. E. Apply isolation coating (two coats) to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar or dissimilar metals. F. Install underlay under sheet metal in accordance with CIRCA "FL" series details. Lap joints 100 mm. G. All seams shall be of the "slip lock type"that permit adequate movement without ' resulting in deformation or loosening of metal flashings. Lapped joints or exposed raw edges will not be accepted. Exposed edges shall be "double back"at least 13 ' mm. At eaves, parapets, etc., metal shall be hooked over continuous starter strips minimum 1 gauge thicker than the metal used for flashing. Secure starter strips at 300 mm on centre or closer as required. ' H. Where metal terminates under fascia boards, secure metal at 600 mm centre using specified fasteners. At curbs to openings or at sleepers, etc., provide locked or standing seams at corners. Solder mitred comers, pop rivet or form standing ' seams. I. Secure metal flashings in reglets at 600 mm centres and further secure metal to ' vertical surfaces at locks as required. J. All flashings shall be installed in perfectly straight lines. Irregular or badly fitted i work will not be accepted. Exposed fastenings will only be permitted where concealed fastening is not possible. Provide neoprene washers for exposed fasteners. ' 7100-07e20.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07620 ' METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 5 3.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) K. Imperfections in metal flashing work such as holes, dents, creases, or oil-canning will not be accepted. L. Coping flashings shall be secured on the exterior by continuous hook strips fastened to metal siding with No. 10 min. sheet metal fasteners spaced at maximum 600 mm on centre. 3.03 CAULKING OF FLASHINGS A. Caulk all joints in flashing. B. Dissimilar metals in contact, or metals in contact with adjacent surfaces shall be separated from one another to prevent corrosion, staining, or electrolysis by use of approved methods and materials. C. Do caulking between metal flashing and concrete, through roof openings, and all reglets using caulking as specified. D. Caulking compound shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's application instructions. Use proper surface primers where necessary. E. Colour of caulking compound shall be the integral colour of the abutting material. 7100-07620.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07800 ROOF SPECIALITIES AND ACCESSORIES Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. S1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' This Section of the contract includes all manufactured roof specialities and accessories called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Roof access hatch. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 B. Roofing Section 07530 C. Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07620 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The latest issues of the following Codes and Standards shall govern the work of ' this Section. 1. The Ontario Building Code. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. B. Indicate size, materials, arrangement of hardware, operating mechanism and required clearances. 1.06 GUARANTEE ' A. Roof hatch shall be guaranteed to be free from material or workmanship defects for a period of five (5) years. E:\WORDPERFECRWPDOCS\.97100\SPECS\7100-07800.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07800 ROOF SPECIALITIES AND ACCESSORIES Page 2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Roof Access Hatch .1 Supply and install where indicated on drawings, metal roof hatch Type R- 100 as manufactured by Lexsuco Canada Ltd. Cover shall be 11 gauge mill finished aluminum with 75 mm beaded flange, neatly welded. Insulation shall be glass fibre 25 mm thickness, fully covered and protected ' by an 18 gauge mill finish aluminum liner. .2 Curb shall be 300 mm in height and of 11 gauge aluminum. It shall be formed with an 90 mm flange with holes provided for securing to the roof deck. Curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, full welded at the corners for weather ' tightness. Insulation on the exterior of the curb shall be rigid fibre insulation 25 mm in thickness. .3 Hatch shall be completely assembled with heavy pintle hinges, torsion bar ' spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, positive snap latch with turn handles and padlock hasps inside and outside, and neoprene gasket. Cover shall be equipped with an automatic hold-open arm complete with red vinyl grip handle to permit easy, one-hand release. All hardware shall be stainless steel. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five years. .4 Hatches shall be equipped with 35 mm diameter safety bar coated with 20 , mil PVC colour coated roof safety green.. Safety bar shall be mounted on the comer of the curb without impeding operation of the door. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Secure roof hatch to roof slab with bolts to meet the manufacturer's specifications. Shim and level roof hatch. E:\WORDPERFECT\WPDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-07800.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Pagel PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Conform with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all caulking and sealant called for or implied by the ' drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Caulking in Connection with Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 B. Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals Section 07270 C. Caulking Between Members of Metal Cladding Section 07410 D. Caulking in Connection with Roof Flashing Section 07620 E. Caulking Between Members of Aluminum Frames and Screens Section 08120 F. Acoustical Caulking in Connection with Gypsum Board Partitions Section 09100 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Sealant and substrate materials to be minimum 5 degrees C. B. Should it become necessary to apply sealants below 5 degrees C, consult sealant manufacturer and follow their recommendations and review with Consultant. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant that caulking and sealant work will not leak, crack, crumble, melt, shrink, run, lose adhesion or stain adjacent surfaces in accordance with General Conditions clause GC 24. Warranty for caulking and sealants shall be for three years. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of caulking shall be performed only by workmen thoroughly skilled and 1 specially trained in the techniques of caulking. 7100-07900.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 2 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) B. Caulking work shall be carried out in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. 1.07 DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Use all means necessary to protect caulking materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Store all caulking materials and equipment under conditions recommended by its manufacturer. D. Do not use materials stored for a period exceeding the maximum recommended shelf-life of the material. E. Materials shall be delivered to the job in their original containers or wrapping with the manufacturer's seal and labels intact. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials, and regarding labeling and provision of material safety data sheets. B. Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions governing use. C. Ventilate area of work as directed by Consultant by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer. 7100-07900.wpa DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (ConVd) B. Joint Fillers: - General: Compatible with primers and sealants, outsized 30 to 50%. - Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl: Extruded closed cell foam, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 20 psi to 29 psi (140 to 200 kPa). Sealtight-Etha Foam Backer Rod W. R. Meadows Canada Ltd. - Premoulded Joint Filler: Unifoam R1009 Goodco Limited C. Sealants: Vulken 116 Mameco of Canada Limited Dymeric Tremco Manufacturing Co. Uniparmastic Parr Industries Limited Betaseal Sternson Limited Colour of Sealants to be selected by Consultant. !i D. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant. E. Joint Cleaner: Xylol, methylethyleketon or non-corrosive type recommended by sealant manufacturer and compatible with joint forming materials. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect conditions and substrates upon which work of this Section is dependent. Report to Consultant in writing any defects that may jeopardize the performance of this work. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions. 7100-07900.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 4 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove dust, paint, loose mortar and other foreign matter. Ensure joint surfaces are dry and free of frost. B. Remove rust, mill scale and coatings from ferrous metals by wire brush, grinding or sandblasting. C. Remove oil, grease and other coatings from non-ferrous metals with joint cleaner. D. Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required. E. Prepare concrete, masonry glazed and vitreous surfaces to sealant manufacturer's instructions. F. Examine joint sizes and conditions to achieve correct depth ratio % of joint width with minimum width and depth of 1/4" (6 mm), maximum width 1" (25 mm). G. Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth. H. Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surface prior to priming and caulking. I. Apply bond breaker tape where required to ensure performance of sealant. J Prime sides of J oints when required to ensure performance of sealant immediately prior to caulking. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in continuous beads, to provide watertight joint. Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle. Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. Superficial pointing with skin bead is not acceptable. B. Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities. Neatly tool surface to a slight concave joint. C. Apply sealant to joints between window or door frames to adjacent building components, around perimeter of every external opening, to control joints in masonry walls where shown. 7100-07900.wpa DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 5 3.03 APPLICATION (Cont'd) D. Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean. Remove excess sealant and droppings using recommended cleaners as work progresses. Remove masking after tooling of joints. E. Caulk joints in surfaces to be painted before surfaces are painted. Where surfaces to be caulked are primed in shop before caulking, check to make sure prime paint and caulking are compatible. If they are incompatible, inform Consultant and change caulking to compatible type approved by Consultant. F. Sealant Locations: 1. Joints between metal frames (both sides) with concrete and masonry. 2. Joints between drywall ceilings with concrete and masonry walls. 3. Joints between steel stair stringers and adjacent walls. 4. Joints at metal frames and resilient flooring. 5. Joints in metal frames. 6. Construction and control joints. 7. Junction of masonry and other types of partitions. 8. At intersecting masonry wall. 9. Between vanities/countertops and walls. 10. Between window stools and window frames and wall. 11. Other locations where caulking is required to provide a neat clean junction. 12. Caulk the entire perimeter of all mechanical and electrical material or piping extending through or occurring in masonry walls. 7100-07900.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all hollow metal doors, screens and pressed metal ' frames called for or implied by drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. Work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Supply of hollow metal doors. B. Supply of pressed metal frames. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Structural Steel Section 05120 C. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 E. Metal Wall Cladding Section 07410 F. Finishing Hardware Section 08710 G. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 i 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Fabricate and install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 and U LC. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions to the Consultant for approval before fabricating hollow metal doors and frames. Co-ordinate with the Finish Hardware supplier. 7100-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 2 1.05 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) A. Shop Drawings (Cont'd) 2. Show each type of frame, door size, hardware blanking, reinforcing, tapping and drilling arrangements, metal gauges, thicknesses and finishes. Submit door and frame schedule identifying each unit. Each unit shall bear a legible identifying mark corresponding to that listed in the door and frame schedule. 3. Submit details indicating construction of reinforced doors. , B. Samples 1. Supply, for Consultant's approval, sample of frame corner showing construction, workmanship and finish if requested. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled or hot rolled, commercial quality, stretcher levelled, coated (galvanized), conforming to ASTM A526-64 light zinc coated (0.50 oz. per sq. ft.) conforming to ASTM A366-62. B. Gauges (min. thicknesses): Thickness (Inches) ember Galvanized Gauae Uncoated Frames 0.064 16 0.060 Spreaders 0.052 18 0.048 Anchors 0.052 18 0.048 Boxes 0.022 26 0.018 Reinforcement 0.139 10 0.135 Door Faces (Interior-Unreinforced) 0.052 18 0.048 Door Faces (Interior-Reinforced) 0.064 16 0.060 Door Faces (Exterior-Insulated) 0.052 18 0.048 Stiffeners 0.040 20 0.036 C. Door Fill Interior Unreinforced Doors: Honeycomb core material bearing ULC Label. D. Door Fill Exterior and Interior, Reinforced Doors: Semi-rigid fibrous insulation. Minimum density 2.4 kg/cu. m. 7100-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) E. Door Bumpers: Grey or black neoprene, single stud. Glynn Johnson Model No. GJ64. 1 F. Glazing Stops: Minimum 1 mm base thickness sheet steel with W25 wipe zinc finish to ASTM A525-80a. Tamper proof screws on exterior doors and frames. G. Primer (for touch-up): To CGSB 1-GP-181M. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Weldin 1. Conform to CSA Standard W59. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Fill all open joints, seams and depressions with filler or by continuous brazing or welding, and grind smooth to true shape and profile, sand to smooth, true, uniform finish. B. Hardware Requirements 1. Blank, mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors and frames to receive templated hardware as required. Check hardware lists for requirements. C. Era es 1. Fabricate frames to profiles shown fit with rubber bumpers. 2. Mitre comers of frames. Cut frame mitres accurate) and weld continuously muously on inside of frame. 3. Where site welding or splicing is required due to size of unit the location of field joints shall be shown on the shop drawings and strictly adhered to. 4. Protect strike and hinge reinforcements and other openings with metal guard boxes welded to frame. 5. Fit frames with channel or angle spreaders, two per frame, to ensure proper frame alignment. Install stiffener plates or spreaders between frame trim where required, to prevent bending of trim and to maintain alignment when setting and during construction. 7100-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 4 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) 6. Where frames occur in masonry provide an adjustable tee anchor for every 600 mm of jamb length or as required by U.L.C. to provide the rating of the door. 7. Where frames are to terminate at finished floor level, provide plates for anchorage to slabs. 8. Prepare frames for rabetted butt hinges including full height continuous hinges where required by the Architect. D. Doors 1. All doors shall be metric size as detailed on the drawings. 2. Fabricate to present one continuous face free from joints, tool markings and abrasions. Assembly by welding. 3. Provide steel top and bottom caps on all exterior doors. 4. Provide honeycomb core or thermal insulating material to fill all voids in doors. 5. Reinforce edges with channel reinforcing. Form seam between faces and door edges by tack welding, followed by continuous welding and grinding smooth. Bevel stiles 1/8". 6. Provide stiffeners for doors over 900 mm wide or 2100 mm high. 7. Interior reinforced doors shall be Fleming H Series steel doors, 16 gauge galvanized, steel stiffened with 20 gauge interlocking steel stiffeners at 150 mm c/c and 16 gauge end channels. Face of doors to be seamless. Provide additional reinforcement at hardware locations. E. Finishes 1. Doors and frames shall be wipe coat zinc, ready for painting. 7100-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 IHOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 5 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation. B. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. C. Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood spreaders at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary , spreaders after frames are built-in. D. Make allowances for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames. E. Install doors and hardware in accordance with templates and manufacturer's instructions. F. Install rated doors in accordance with U.L.C. requirements. G. Touch up doors and frames with primer where galvanized finish is damaged during fabrication and installation. 71W-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 1 _ ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all aluminum windows and doors called for or implied by the drawings and specifications together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Preparing openings, building in inserts and assisting in installation of work of this Section: iMasonry Section 04200 Carpentry Section 06100 Structural Steel Section 05100 B. Metal Wall Cladding Section 07410 C. Glazing for work of this Section: Glass and Glazing Section 08800 D. Caulking other than that related to work of this Section: Sealants Section 07900 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Products shall be designed to meet or exceed air and water infiltration criteria of the applicable C.G.S.B. Specifications. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Subcontractor executing the work of this Section shall have had at least five years continuous Canadian experience in the successful manufacture and installation of work of the type and quality shown and specified. 7100-08120.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 2 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS (Cont'd) B. Submit proof of experience upon Consultant's request. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for review in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Indicate and identify all items, show assembly, installation details and methods. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: .1 Use materials specified herein. .2 Extrusion framing system shall be as manufactured by the Kawneer Company of Canada or equal, as approved by the Architect. B. Aluminum Sections: Extruded from Alcan 6063 alloy with a T54 alloy and temper with wall thickness of 1.6 mm, 3.2 mm and 1.3 mm for window frames, door stiles and glazing stops. Extruded aluminum sills to size and shape to suit wall conditions, complete with end drip deflectors, expansion cover plates and necessary anchors. C. Fasteners: Series 300 stainless steel or Series 400 stainless steel radium plated, of , sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are intended. D. Thermal Break: All members in exterior framing systems to have extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride. E. Finish: Clear Anodized: All exposed surfaces shall be given an anodic oxide treatment in accordance with Aluminum Association Specification AA-M12C22A31, Kawneer#17 Clear. F. Bituminous Paint: Bituminous paint for back painting shall be acid and alkali resistant type in accordance with CGSB Specification 1-GP-108C. G. Glass: Refer to Section 08800, Glass and Glazing for glass for windows which shall be glazed by the wet seal and glazing splines method. H. Glazing Gaskets: shall be extruded, black, closed cell or dense elastomer of durometer appropriate to the function. 7100-08120.wpd r DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) I. Extrusion Framing System: .1 Windows: Sealair Series 516 (insulated) 108 mm deep framing system as detailed including thermal break separator and related sills. .2 Entrance Screens: Trifab 451T thermally broken 50 mm x 115 mm extruded aluminum with thermal break separator for double glazed sealed units. .3 Interior Screens: Trifab 450 non-thermally broken 45 mm x 115 mm extruded aluminum for single glazing. .4 Doors: Series 500 extruded aluminum swing doors with 127 mm top and side rails, 190 mm bottom rail and 210 mm centre rail . Door shall be single glazed, 45 mm thick. J. aulkin : Sealants as manufactured by the following are accepted, colour shall be selected by the Consultant. Product Manufacturer Vulkem 116 Mameco of Canada Limited Mono Tremco Manufacturing Co. Uraflex Sternson Limited 2.02 FABRICATION A. All Windows 1. Fabricate frames square to profiles shown and prepare for glazing. Fill frames with manufacturer's insulation. 2. Design and fabricate necessary brackets and anchorage devices so that, when installed, they will compensate for unevenness and dimensional difference in the structure to which they are secured, will allow full expansion and contraction of framing members as a result of such expansion and contraction of framing members and will adequately sustain themselves, the windows and superimposed wind and rain loads and all other stresses. 3. Take field measurements prior to fabrication. 4. Jig assemble components in shop and partially disassemble. 5. Accurately form joints and intersections to tight, hairline fit. 6. Nick threads to prevent loosening of nuts. Make bolted and screwed work as inconspicuous as possible. 7. Welding of component members will be permitted providing it does not in any way mar the surface appearance and with joints made tight, in true plane, ground and sanded smooth, flush with base metal. Do all welding on concealed surface. i 7100-08120.wpd r DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 4 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) 8. Provide thermal break to maintain the interior surface of frames and glass free from condensation and frosting under conditions of minimum -12 degrees C outside temperature with 24 degrees C inside temperature at 35% relative humidity. 9. Weathering and glazing spline of extruded black neoprene or"Durometer". 10. Construction a) Construct units from extrusions of size and shapes shown on the drawings and formed with clean, sharply defined profiles. Joints to be accurately machined, fitted, assembled and sealed to provide neat weathertight joinery. b) Draw joints together and secure by means of screws driven through the walls and into the integrally extruded screw channels of abutting extrusions. c) Intermediate members within units may be either solid or tubular design to suit windloading and weight carrying requirements. d) Design coupling mullions to eliminate the "seam joint" on the weathered side, while providing a functional split to permit unit module construction and provide for thermal expansion. When required, reinforce wind load carrying members with steel bars suitably treated to prevent electrolytic action. e) Overlap and seal glazing flanges of abutting members for the entire depth and width of the flanges to provide a solid, unbroken water barrier. Glass stops shall be screwless, lock-in type. f) Equip sill base with splice plate back up sections at joint in long runs. Seal ends and jambs to provide neat, weathertight joints. g) All members to have extruded P.V.C. thermal break integrated with the inner and outer aluminum extrusions by a roll-crimping process to form a rigidly interconnected assembly without the use of fasteners or other thermal bridging elements. h) Provide adequate, shielded drainage and pressure equalization where required. 11. Aluminum Sills- Extruded to size and shape as detailed, complete with end drip deflectors, expansion cover plates and necessary anchors. B. Doors 1. Fabricate units where practical in shop. The methods of construction, reinforcement anchorage, details of finish,jointing, etc. shown on approved Shop Drawings shall be accurately followed. 2. Units too large for handling or shipping shall be fitted and assembled in the shop to check accuracy, disassembled and marked for shipping and field assembly. 7100-08120.wpd r rDIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 5 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) 3. Frames consisting of sill, head,jamb and mullion members shall be securely and neatly assembled by approved methods. 4. Concealed fastenings shall be used to the greatest possible extent. 5. Aluminum doors for entrances shall be made of portable aluminum extrusions. Comers of doors shall be accurately joined and fitted to flush hairline joints. All welding shall be on the unexposed sides in order to prevent pitting, discolouration, weld halo or other surface imperfections. Bottom, top and side rails of doors shall be,a continuous extruded section. 6. Glazing stops for doors shall be interlocking snap-in type with neoprene bulb blazing. Exterior stops shall be lock-in tamper proof type. Exposed screws not permitted. Equip each door leaf with an adjusting mechanism located in top rail, near lock stile to permit minor clearance adjustments after installation. Door edges shall be bevelled. 7. Isolate joints of unlike materials with bituminous paint to prevent electrolytic action or chemical reaction. Provide all necessary holes for connections and fastenings. 8. Provide weep holes in horizontal members as required. Weep holes shall drain to the exterior. 9. Jamb frames at doors only are to be fabricated so they may be carried to the underside of structural steel supports and anchored there. See details on the Drawings. 10. Glazing must withstand a specified combined dead, live and wind load in accordance with requirements of the Ontario Building Code for the building location, with a maximum deflection of U200 of the span. 2.03 DOOR HARDWARE A. Style 'CS-9' Architects Classic pull with finish to match door. B. Style CD-II Architects Classic pull with finish to match door. C. Butt hinges, I Y2 pair per door, chrome finish. D. Concealed heavy-duty closer 5010 LCN for all doors not electrically operated. E. Adams-Rite MS-1850A deadlock with keyed cylinder, thumb turn and cylinder guard. F. Glynn Johnson Series 120 holder for interior and exterior doors. G. Extruded aluminum threshold seal underside with 2 beads of caulking prior to installation. ' 7100-08120.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 6 2.03 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd) H. Provide weatherseal to head and jamb of all exterior doors. Door seal to be aluminum with sponge neoprene a minimum of 1/4" (6 mm) thick, width to suit frame stop Type -TW2000. I. Door sweeps to be Sealeze EB 395 x door width. J. Provide removable mullion on exterior doors where shown on the drawings. K. Electric Door Operator: Stanley Magic Swing Operator, Electronic Control with push button/paddle type operators, and all controls and wiring as necessary. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF BUILDING A. Commence installation only when variations or discrepancies on the Site which will prevent satisfactory installation of this Section's work are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Windows 1. Provide all fastenings or anchors to be built in under other Sections. 2. Conceal all fastenings of window components from view. 3. Securely install frames plumb, true, square and straight in openings and free from distortion using the manufacturer's recommended anchors, anchor bolts and fasteners. 4. Clean and restore primer and bituminous paint to surfaces disturbed by field welding or other operations. 5. Aluminum to be placed in contact with concrete mortar, plaster or dissimilar metals shall be given a heavy coat of bituminous paint on contacting surfaces. 6. Caulk internal window joints. Seal joints between interior framing and masonry/drywall and between interior framing and mullion members in such a manner as to produce a completely airtight and watertight installation. 7. Caulk external window joints. Seal joints between exterior metal and masonry and between frame and aluminum sill in such a manner as to produce a completely watertight installation. 8. Leave final installation water and weathertight. 7100-08120.wpd ' r DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 7 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) B. 12oors 1. Erect and secure aluminum framing plumb, square and level, free from warp, twist or superimposed loads. 2. Use concealed fastenings where possible. Where concealed fasteners are not feasible, use flatheaded screws in countersunk holes. Exposed bolt or nut heads are not permitted. 3. Match exposed fastenings with finish or surfaces on which they occur. 4. Assess each component for appearance and colour. Any variations in appearance and colour will not be permitted. 5. Secure work adequately and accurately to the structure in the required position. 6. Glaze aluminum doors in accordance with Section 08800. 7. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions. 8. Install all electronic door operators and controls as required, and in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with Division 16. 3.03 CLEANING A. Immediately prior to the final cleaning of the glass and before handing over the Building to the Owner, make good all damage and disfigurement to the work, and remove all protective coatings, stains and foreign matter from all exposed, exterior and interior surfaces of work supplied under this Section, and leave in a uniform colour and in first class condition to the Consultant's satisfaction. B. Use soap and water, or water and approved solvents not injurious to aluminum, glass, glazing and sealant compounds. Abrasives shall not be used. 3.04 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturers maintenance, cleaning and operating instructions for aluminum doors and windows for inclusion into maintenance manuals as specified in Division 1. 3.05 EXTENDED GUARANTEE A. Submit a guarantee covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of four (4) years from the expiration of the standard one (1) year guarantee included in the contract under Article GC-24 Warranty in the General Conditions of the contract. Leaking, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming and failures of glazing units will be judged as defective work. 7100-08120.wpd r DIVISION 8 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. i1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply of all solid core wood doors called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 B. Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames Section 08100 1 C. Finishing Hardware Section 08710 D. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 E. Painting Section 09900 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING ' A. Use all means necessary to protect doors before, during and after installation and to protect the installed finish. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit one 300 mm x 300 mm corner sample of each wood door type showing door construction, core and faces. B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. Indicate door types, sizes, thicknesses and details of construction. 7100-08210.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS Page 2 1.06 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATING AGENCIES A. Door shall meet or exceed the following requirements: 1. CSA Standard 0132-M1977. 2. AWMAC Division 400 Standard. 3. NWMA Industry Standard 1.S. 1-78 Series. 4. Architectural Woodwork Institute Standard for Type SLC. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All door materials to conform to CSA 0132.2-M1977. r B. Acceptable Products: Super Structure LC4000, Premdor No. 4100. C. Doors shall be constructed with solid wood core with 3 mm thick paint grade plywood surface, 50 mm stiles and 75 mm top and bottom rails. Stiles to have 19 mm facing strips of birch. D. Core shall consist of low density wood blocks, random lengths with staggered joints. All cores shall be drum sanded both sides. , E. Door to be 45 mm thick. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and panels in accordance with CSA 0132.2-M1977. B. Vertical edge strips to match face veneer. C. Bevel vertical edges of single acting doors 3 mm on lock side and 1.5 mm on hinge side. D. Prepare doors for hardware, including continuous hinges where specified on the ' drawings. 7100-08210.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08210 1 WOOD DOORS Page 3 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation of doors will be by Division 6. B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Adjust hardware for correct function. D. Install grilles and stops where specified. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Re-adjust doors and hardware just prior to completion of building to function freely and properly. i ' 7100-08210.wpd tDIVISION 8 SECTION 08343 ROLLING SHUTTERS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all rolling shutters called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Supply and installation of rolling shutters. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1 A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 l1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings ' Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions to the Consultant for approval before fabricating rolling shutters. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Rolling shutters shall be unconditionally guaranteed for one year from date of substantial completion against any defects in manufacturing, or faulty workmanship during installation. Provide a written guarantee to this effect. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Rolling shutters as manufactured by the following are approved: Amstel Manufacturing Inc. Dynamic Closures Dynaflair Corporation 7100-08343.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08343 ROLLING SHUTTERS Page 2 , 2.02 MATERIALS ' A. Rolling shutters shall be heavy duty"Slim Line" counter shutters as manufactured by Amstel Manufacturing Inc. or approved equal B. Curtain: Constructed of extruded aluminum (6063 alloy) flat slats. Slats shall be 32 mm wide, 12.7 mm deep. Material thickness to be minimum 1.27 mm. Alternate slats to have end locks. Bottom bar shall be extruded aluminum tubular member with slide bolts for locking into guides. Bottom edge shall be furnished with black vinyl astragal. Shutter to be fitted with slide bolts at each jamb with padlock hasp and keeper. C. Guides: Heavy extruded aluminum sections with upset shoulders for curtain retention. Each guide shall be fitted with pile liners and snap in cover moulds. , D. Counterbalance Assembly: Spring counterbalance shall be housed in a steel pipe of sufficient diameter to carry the door load with maximum deflection of 2.5 mm per lineal metre of opening width. Doors shall be evenly balanced helical torsion springs designed to include an overload factor of 25%. Spring tension shall be adjustable from outside of end bracket plates. Supply sealed ball bearings at , rotating support points. E. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel. Supply hood primed, ready for paint. F. Brackets: Bracket plates shall be of sufficient thickness to support counter balance assembly and curtain and to act as enclosures and support for the hood. Steel plates shall be minimum 4.5 mm thick. , G. Finishes: As selected by the consultant from the manufacturer's full range of standard finishes. H. Operation: Hand crank, face mounted. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be by manufacturer or his authorized representatives. , B. Supply, for installation into masonry, all necessary hardware, anchors and accessories required to support counterbalance assembly and guides. , C. Install rolling shutters in strict accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. 7100-08343.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08343 ROLLING SHUTTERS Page 3 ' 3.01 INSTALLATION (Confd) D. Secure guides, brackets and hood to adjacent construction. E. Install and adjust shutters and operators to ensure smooth, dependable operation. ! 1 1 ! ' 7100-08343.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08346 _ ROLLING METAL DOORS Pagel PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all rolling metal doors called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Rolling metal doors B. Brackets and supports required for tracks, guides, shafts and operating mechanisms C. Motors and operators D. Electrical work as specified 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 C. Electrical Division 16 ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. Indicate material details, construction and accessory details, operating mechanisms, required clearances and electrical connections. B. Supply for Consultant's review if requested, sample of door section showing ' construction, workmanship and finish. C. Provide operation and maintenance data for rolling metal door hardware and operators t regarding adjustment, operator maintenance, wiring diagrams and troubleshooting for incorporation into operation and maintenance manual specified under Division 1. 1 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Fabricate rolling metal fire doors to NFPA 80 with labelled 1 hour fire rating. 7100-08346.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08346 ROLLING METAL DOORS Page 2 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Rolling metal door installation shall be unconditionally guaranteed for one year against any defects in manufacturing, or faulty workmanship during installation. All defects (material or workmanship) shall be made good without any cost to the Owner. Upon completion of all deficiencies a date for commencement of guarantee must be established. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Rolling metal doors as manufactured by the following are approved: Amstel Manufacturing Inc. , Cookson Co Inc. Kinnear Richards Wilcox of Canada Ltd. , B. Bolling Metal Doors: 1. Richards Wilcox Model No. 23-523 electrically operated rolling metal fire door. , 2. Curtain shall be interlocking steel slats, 51 mm wide, 0.91 mm thick, hot dipped , galvanized steel, rolled in easy, deep curves for stiffness. The bottom bar shall consist of two angles securely fastened to a special bottom slat. End locks shall be installed on each slat to prevent lateral movement and to provide a wearing surface in the guides. , 3. Guides shall be fabricated of 4.76 mm steel and shall have sufficient depth to retain the curtain. The top of the guides shall have a bell-shaped throat. 4. The counterbalancing spring barrel assembly shall consist of a solid steel shaft with oil tempered helical springs, shop assembled into a steel tube of sufficient , diameter to prevent sag and deflection. The complete assembly shall be mounted in bearings for maintenance-free easy operation. 5. The end brackets shall be fabricated of heavy steel plates and shall be fitted with reinforcing angle clips. Solid steel bearing bosses shall be welded to the end brackets for support of the spring barrel assembly. , 6. The hood shall be made from 18 gauge steel formed to fit the contour of the end brackets. The hood to contain a flame baffle with fusible link mechanism. 7100-08346.wpa 1 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08346 ROLLING METAL DOORS Page 3 2.01 PRODUCTS (Cont'd) 7. The curtain and hood shall be supplied in a galvanized finish. The fabricated steel guides and end brackets shall receive one coat of aluminum prime paint at the factory. C. Door Operators 1. Rolling metal doors shall be equipped with electric operators as required and , 1 specified. All doors shall be provided with manual chain hoist. 2. Electrical Door Operators ' a) Each door as specified shall be equipped with electric operators manufactured by Richards Wilcox of Canada Ltd. or approved equal as follows: 1. Model 50-283 heavy duty Gear Head Electric Operator. 2. Motor- 3/4 HP, 600V, 3 phase, CSA approved, overload and under voltage protection, high torque constant duty rated ball bearing motor. 3. Speed reduction system with a hardened worm driving a high quality bronze worm gear. 4. Special clutch release mechanism operable from the floor, in order that the door can be rapidly opened by means of the geared hand chain operator in case of a power failure. Safety interlock switch that ' will automatically cut power to operator when chain hoist is in operation. 5. Solenoid brake to prevent door from coasting and to secure locking of the door in closed position. ' 6. Heavy duty reversing contactor. 7. Adjustable automatic slipping clutch to protect door and operator in ' case of obstruction. 8. Limit Switches - Rotary type with oil lite bronze cams and precision Itype micro switches for both up and down positions. 9. Automatic electro-mechanical safety stop if travelling door meets an obstruction it shall reverse automatically. 7100-08346.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08346 ROLLING METAL DOORS Page 4 2.01 PRODUCTS (Cont'd) b) Three Button Controls 1. Three button controls, one for each door, mounted at door , (open/close/stop) in locations shown on architectural drawings, oil tight stations with cast back boxes to be used. 2. Control circuit 24 volt, Class II. 3. Control shall be wired to provide door movement and stopping when momentary contact is made with the Open, Close and Stop buttons. c) Provide pull chord operation on each side of door. , D. Chain Hoist 1. Hand chain hoist shall be provided on all overhead doors. The hoist shall be constructed of galvanized steel. The speed reduction mechanism shall consist of two sprockets and roller chain. Provide galvanized hand chains of the , appropriate length. Hand chain hoist shall be co-ordinated with electric operators. E. Weatherstripping 1. Weatherstripping shall be supplied and installed under this section for door heads,jambs and base. Weatherstripping shall be adjustable vinyl strip inserted in an aluminum extrusion approved by the Consultant. 2. Submit samples of weatherstripping and details of fasteners and methods of securement to steel jambs and heads. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Door frame shall be drilled and tapped to receive hardware. Door tracks and stops shall be fastened to door frame by means of machine bolts; welding will not be , permitted. B. Door shall fit snugly to edges of jambs and head of frame, and shall operate smoothly under all conditions. Door shall sit in any position in door opening and shall not drift upward or downward. 7100-08346.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08346 ROLLING METAL DOORS Page 5 3.01 INSTALLATION C. Necessary appurtenances such as metal plates and angles for bracing, mounting chain hoists, spring, etc., relating to the door installation required on the door frame shall be supplied and installed under this Section. D. The finished installation shall be weathertight. E. Complete wiring and installation of the electric operators is part of the work. F. Complete wiring from local disconnect switch to operator. ' G. Complete wiring of limit switches from door to operator. H. Complete wiring of operator including provision of additional transformers or other required accessories. 1. Complete wiring of three button controls to operator. J. Provision of three dry contacts which are closed when the door is open. One contact transfer at fully open, one transfers at approximately 3 feet open and the other ' transfers near the closed position. K. Adjust the doors, operators, etc. to ensure smooth dependable operation. 1 7100-08346.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08361 ' SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all sectional overhead doors called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Sectional Overhead Doors B. Brackets and Supports required for tracks, guides, header shafts and operating mechanisms. ' C. Motors and Operators D. Electrical Work as Specified ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Structural Steel Section 05120 C. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. Indicate material details, construction and accessory details, operating mechanisms, required clearances ' and electrical connections. B. Supply for Consultant's review if requested, sample of door section showing construction, workmanship and finish. C. Provide operation and maintenance data for overhead door hardware and operators regarding adjustment, operator maintenance, wiring diagrams and troubleshooting for incorporation into operation and maintenance manual specified under Division 1. 7100-08361.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Page 2 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Sectional overhead door installation shall be unconditionally guaranteed for one year against any defects in manufacturing, or faulty workmanship during installation. All defects(material or workmanship) shall be made good without any , cost to the Owner. Upon completion of all deficiencies a date for commencement of guarantee must be established. B. Provide an additional written guarantee of the doors against warping, delamination ' or loss of seal for a period of 2 years. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Overhead doors as manufactured by the following are approved: Kinnear , Ridge Nassau (Canada) Limited Edwards Power Door(Canada) Limited , Overhead Door Company Imperial Door Ltd. Richards Wilcox , B. Overhead Doors 1. Doors shall be insulated sectional upward-acting doors, Kinnear ' Thermospan 200. 2. All door sections shall be of stee/polyurethane/steel sandwich type , construction to include a thermal break and have an independently tested installed door "U" - value of .11, conducted under ASTM C-236-66. The exterior skin of structural quality, hot-dipped, galvanized steel with an alloyed coating of zinc-aluminum, will be factory-finished with baked-on polyester primer and white polyester finish coats, and features 6 mm wide pinstriping. The interior skin also will be of structural quality, hot-dipped, galvanized steel with an alloyed coating of sinc-aluminum, factory finished with a polyester primer and white polyester finish coates. The interior skin will have two 45 mm roll-formed integral struts per section. The cavity between the interior and exterior skins will be completely filled by foamed- in-place polyurethane core and separated by a thermoplastic thermal break. 3. The door shall be adequately reinforced with formed steel trusses to 1 prevent deflection of no more than 1/120 of the spanned width. 7100-08361.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08361 ' SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Page 3 2.01 PRODUCTS (Cont'd) 4. The bottom edge of the door shall be protected with a 10 gauge, formed metal U-strip completely covering the bottom 100 mm of the door and ' through bolted in place with 6 mm diameter bolts at 300 mm C/C, and designed to allow installation of a replaceable flexible neoprene astragal. 5. Refer to Drawings for door sizes. C. Hiah Lift Hardware 1. 75 mm Track - 11 gauge, commercially galvanized steel, formed track in profile as indicated on the Drawings. The vertical tracks shall be sloped for weathertight closing, mounted on adjustable steel angle bracket bolted to wall framing at a maximum spacing of 2'-0" (600 mm). Reinforce tracks with continuous angle vertical mounting for greater strength.. Track shall include curves of proper radius for quiet and free action and be mounted to full size gusset plates. Field check all clearances before fabricating track. Adjust track curvature 1 as required. Provide 75 x 125 x 6 x 1500 mm steel angle track protector at floor level continuously welded or bolted to door frame or door jambs and secured to floor. 2. Horizontal tracks shall be reinforced full length with steel angle of proper size. 3. Track Brackets - 11 gauge, commercially galvanized steel. The track brackets shall be fully adjustable to counteract any unevenness in the jambs. The brackets shall be mountable on both wood or steel jambs. 4. Track Hangers-commercially galvanized steel angles. A sufficient number ' to properly hang the hardware. 5. Rollers - rollers supplied shall be 75 mm in diameter and be ball bearing type. 6. Roller Brackets - hinged roller brackets shall be fabricated from 11 gauge commercially galvanized steel. These brackets shall be fitted with heavy steel tube cross pieces, in which the roller axles shall ride. 7. Bottom Roller Brackets - bottom roller brackets shall be "wrap around" design, picking up the bottom comer of the door as well as acting as the bottom roller carrier. The brackets shall be fitted with a pick-up cable anchoring device. 8. Hinges - Hinges shall be fabricated from 11 gauge, commercially galvanized steel and shall be located across the door as required. All ' hinges to be through-bolted to door. 9. Head Shaft-25 mm diameter or 32 mm diameter solid steel shafting shall be used as a head shaft. The shaft shall run in ball bearings located at both gusset plates, as well as at intermediate shaft brackets, located across the head shaft, as required. ' 7100-08361.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Page 4 , 2.01 PRODUCTS (Cont'd) ' 10. Drums - proper sized drums shall be used to suit the door height and the door weight. The height of the door shall determine the amount of cable ' which must be accommodated on the drum, while the door weight shall determine the cable diameter. Using these two factors, the drums shall be selected to suit the particular application. 11. Counterbalance-counterbalance mechanism spring shall be custom made torsion springs, mounting to spring plugs riding on the head shaft. The exact torque shall be set to allow the door to remain in a fully or partly opened position without being locked in that position. Springs shall be , lifetime, heavy duty, industrial type. 12. Cables to be used shall be preformed galvanized aircraft type with minimum safety factor of 5 to 1. 13. Finish - all hinges, brackets, tracks, shaft brackets, etc., shall be commercially galvanized having a zinc coating class of 2 oz./sq.ft. to ASTM-A525. 14. Hardware Attachment - All hardware shall be attached to the door with through bolted carriage bolts. D. Door Operators , 1. Sectional overhead doors shall be equipped with electric operators as required and specified. All doors shall be provided with manual chain hoist. 2. Electrical Door Operators 2.1 Each door as specified shall be equipped with electric operators manufactured by Automatic Doorman, Inc. or approved equal as , follows: 2.1.1 Operato r 1. Motor - 1/2 H.P., 120 V/1 Phase, overload and under - ' voltage protection. 2. Special clutch release mechanism operable from the floor, in order that the door can be rapidly opened by means of the geared hand chain operator in case of a power failure. Safety interlock switch that will automatically cut power to ' operator when chain hoist is in operation. 3. Solenoid brake to prevent door from coasting and to secure locking of the door in closed position. ' 4. Heavy duty reversing contactor. 5. Adjustable automatic slipping clutch to protect door and operator in case of obstruction. 7100-08361.wpd , ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08361 ' SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Page 5 2.01 PRODUCTS (Cont'd) 6. Limit switches - screw type with oil lite bronze cams and precision type micro switches for both up and down positions. 7. Automatic electro-mechanical safety stop if travelling door ' meets an obstruction it shall reverse automatically. 8. Operator shall be mounted to door by means of direct coupling cross header shaft. ' 2.1.2 Three Button Controls 1. Three button controls, one for each door, mounted at door. 2. Control circuit 24 volt, Class II. 3. Control shall be wired to provide door movement and ' stopping when momentary contact is made with the Up, Down and Stop buttons. ' 3. Electro-Mechanical Safety Edge: On bottom edge of each door to stop and reverse closing door upon meeting an obstruction. 4. Chain Hoist: Hand chain hoist shall be provided on all overhead doors. The hoist shall be constructed of galvanized steel. The speed reduction mechanism shall consist of two sprockets and roller chain. Provide galvanized hand chains of the appropriate length. Hand chain hoist shall be co-ordinated with electric or pneumatic operators. 5. Pull Chord: Provide door with pull chord switch operator on inside of door. E. Weatherstripping 1. Weatherstripping shall be supplied and installed under this section for door heads, jambs and base. Weatherstripping shall be adjustable vinyl strip inserted in an aluminum extrusion approved by the Consultant. 2. Submit samples of weatherstripping and details of fasteners and methods of securement to steel jambs and heads. PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Door frame shall be drilled and tapped to receive hardware. Door tracks and stops ' shall be fastened to door frame by means of machine bolts; welding will not be permitted. ' 7100-08361.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Page 6 , 3.01 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) ' B. Door shall fit snugly to edges of jambs and head of frame, and shall operate smoothly under all conditions. Door shall sit in any position in door opening and shall not drift upward or downward. C. Necessary appurtenances such as metal plates and angles for bracing, mounting ' chain hoists, spring, etc., relating to the door installation required on the door frame shall be supplied and installed under this Section. D. The finished installation shall be weathertight. , E. Complete wiring and installation of the electric operators is part of the work. F. Complete wiring from local disconnect switch to operator. G. Complete wiring of limit switches from door to operator. , H. Complete wiring of operator including provision of additional transformers or other required accessories. ' I. Complete wiring of three button controls to operator. J. Provision of three dry contacts which are closed when the door is open. One contact , transfer at fully open, one transfers at approximately 3 feet open and the other transfers near the closed position. K. Adjust the doors, operators, etc. to ensure smooth dependable operation. 1 7100-08361.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 ' FINISHING HARDWARE Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Supply of all finishing hardware. B. The cost of the finishing hardware shall include the supply and delivery F.O.B. Job ' Site of Finishing Hardware, and the service of a competent mechanic to inspect the installation of all hardware furnished under this Section and supervise all adjustment (by trades responsible for fixing) which are necessary to leave hardware in perfect order. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 B. Hollow Metal Doors Frames and Screens Section 08100 C. Wood Doors Section 08210 D. Aluminum Doors Section 08720 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 12 copies of the approved hardware list in accordance with general conditions to Consultant for approval. Hardware list shall be prepared by a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Show each item location type finishes, identifying mark corresponding to the door schedule. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING BY THE CONTRACTOR A. Receive the delivery of the Finishing Hardware and identify all items against the Finishing Hardware Schedule. Advise the finish hardware supplier and Consultant in writing of errors or omissions. B. Store Finishing Hardware in locked room or storage shed. Ensure each hardware items is accompanied by the correct template, installation instructions, special tools, fastening devices and other loose items. ' E:\WORDPERFECT\WPDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 2 ' PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.02 PRODUCTS , A. All hardware shall be supplied as specified in the Hardware Schedule. B. Supply of all finishing hardware will be a cash allowance item. Refer to Instructions ' to Bidders and Tender Form. PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 PREPARATION BY THE CONTRACTOR , A. Examination .1 Before installing any hardware, carefully check all architectural drawings of the ' work requiring hardware, verify door swings, door and frame materials and operating conditions, and assure that all hardware will fit the work to which it is ' to be attached. .2 Check all shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and , installation, and certify to the correctness thereof, or advise the hardware supplier and Consultant in writing of required revisions. B. Templates ' .1 Check the hardware schedule, drawings and specifications, and furnish promptly to the applicable trades any patterns, templates, template information and manufacturer's literature required for the proper preparation for and application of hardware, in ample time to facilitate the progress of the work. C. Installation 1 All hardware shall be installed by carpenter, skilled in the application of ' architectural hardware. Refer to Section 06200- Finish Carpentry. Instruction sheets, details and templates shall be read and understood before installation. .2 Install all materials as listed in the Finishing Hardware Schedule on the doors and frames listed. INTERCHANGING OF HARDWARE WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. .3 After installation, templates, installation instructions and details shall be put in a file and turned over to the Owner, when building is Substantially Performed. E.\WORDPERFECT\WPDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100A8710.wO ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 3 3.01 PREPARATION BY THE CONTRACTOR (Cont'd) D. Inspection by Hardware Manufacturer After installation of all hardware and before building is accepted, the Contractor shall request the hardware manufacturers of lock and latchsets, panic bolts, holders and closers to inspect the installation and certify in writing to the Consultant that the hardware is properly installed and supplied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and finishing hardware schedule. E. Guarantee ' The hardware supplier and the Contractor shall guarantee and warrant through the Contractor all hardware for a period of 2 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the General Contract, from defects in materials, workmanship and ' improper installation. F. Maintenance Schedule ' The hardware supplier shall through the Contractor provide a written maintenance program for all finish hardware requiring maintenance and the name and address of ' the supplier for future repairs and replacement.' ' E:\WORDPERFECRWPDOCS\97100\SPECS\7100-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08800 1 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS tA. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all glass and glazing called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Supply and install glazing to doors, frames and screens. B. Supply and install glazing to aluminum windows. ' C. Supply and install glass and sliding doors for display cases. D. Supply and install glass screens for ticket counters. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Glass Block Section 04205 B. Cabinet Work Section 06410 C. Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames Section 08100 D. Aluminum Doors, Windows and Screens Section 08120 ' E. Arena Shields Section 13180 ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of manufacturers standard tinted glass for selection by Architect. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Materials shall be free from bubbles, waves, discolouration, distortion and defects. 2. Material manufacturers shall label every piece of glass. Labels shall remain in place until final cleaning. Label shall note "manufacturer, registered name of the products, weight and quality of glass". ' 3. Design glass to satisfy opening size and applied loads in accordance with the Ontario Building Code with a maximum deflection of U200. 7100-08800.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING page 2 , 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' B. Products manufactured by the following are accepted: 1. Pilkington Glass ' 2. Canadian Pittsburgh Industries-A Division of PPG Industries Canada Limited 3. Glaverbel Glass Limited 4. 3M , 5. Tremco Manufacturing Company Limited C. lass: ' 1. Polished Plate or Float Glass: To CAN2-12.3-M, glazing quality of thickness indicated. 2. Wired Glass: To CAN2-12.11-M, type Georgian polished, wire mesh style. ' 3. Insulating Glass Units: To CAN2-12.8-M, with outer pane of blue tinted float glass and inner pane of clear float glass with 13 mm air space thickness for windows and screens. , - Twinsulite Pilkington -Twindow Canadian Pittsburg Industries , 4. Safety Glass: Tempered float glass, to CAN2-1.1-M thickness as noted on drawings. Exposed edges shall be ground with pencilled edges. Tinted glass at main entrance doors and frame shall match colour of insulating ' glass. 5. Mirrors: To CGSB CAN2-12.5-M76 +Arndt-Dec-76, silvered, 5 mm thick, ' ground and polished edges of sizes indicated. D. Accessories: 1. Glazing Tape: Black, as manufactured by the following Pp is approved: ' Tremco 440 by Tremco Manufacturing Co. Limited Durribon No.1.082 by Canadian Pittsburgh 3M by Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Co. Ltd. 2. Glazing Sealant: Two component polysulphide, bearing Thiokol Hallmark, , conforming to CGSB 19-GP-3M. Colour as selected by Consultant. 3. Setting Blocks & Spacers: Neoprene, setting blocks 70-90 shore "A" hardness. Spacers- neoprene 40-60 shore "A" hardness; or oil resistant rubber as approved by glass material manufacturer. E. Display Cabinet Track: Knape and Vogt Canada Ltd. Ezy Roll aluminum track assembly#P992 and #965 adjustable lock with satin nickel finish, complete with duplicate keys. ' ' 710o-0WW.wpa SDIVISION 8 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 3 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ' A. Replace all stops in their original positions, tighten all screws. B. Glaze doors, windows and screens scheduled to be glazed. ' C. Mark each light with a large white cross to indicate presence of glass. ' D. Replace under the work of this section, defective, damaged or broken glass due to faulty setting, handling or storage. ' E. Glass screens for ticket booths shall have 75 mm diameter speak holes with ground edges (tempered glass). 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Wipe dry and clean surfaces receiving tapes and sealants. ' B. Cut glazing tape to proper lengths. Apply tape against fixed stop, setting head and sill first,jambs will then be set. Weld comers together by butting tapes. Do not lap or run tape around corners. C. Place neoprene setting blocks, at quarter points of fixed openings. ' D. Paper backing from tape shall be removed just prior to setting the glass. Dab corners of tape with sealant to insure a good seal. E. Set glass on setting blocks, align edges and centre glass using shims at 610 mm to both sides of glass. Keep spacers below sight lines. Press glass securely into tape for complete contact and adhesion. F. Apply heel bead of sealant around perimeter of glass, maintain minimum 4.8 mm bite onto glass and a positive bond to sash. The void around glass shall be sealed ' completely. Ensure that sealant heel beads are large enough so that sealant will partially fill channel between glass and removable stops when they are set. 7100 UOO.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 4 3.03 DISPLAY CASE(CASH ALLOWANCE ITEM) A. Coordinate the work with Section 06410. B. Supply and install 13 mm thick tempered glass shelves with ground and polished , edges. C. Fabricate aluminum track assembly and install tempered glass doors to suit , finished dimensions of display case. Adjust hardware and provide adjustable lock. Glass doors to have finger pulls ground into leading edges. 3.04 COMPLETION A. Upon completion, go over all work of this trade, remove all surplus glazing and other foreign materials, taking care not to scratch or damage the glass or sash. B. Clean up and remove from building and site all debris, surplus glazing and other , foreign materials, tools and equipment and leave entire premises in a neat and tidy condition. , 3.05 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ' A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturer's maintenance procedures for cleaning of glass surfaces for inclusion into maintenance manuals. 7100-08800.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all gypsum board called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. This work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Gypsum Board B. Metal Stud System 1 C. Metal Furring D. Acoustic insulation in metal stud partitions. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 ' B. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 C. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08100 D. Acoustical Ceiling Section 09500 ' E. Painting Section 09900 F. Access Doors and Panels Section 15000 1 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do work in accordance with CSA A82.31-M1980 except where specified otherwise. ' 1.05 SAMPLES A. Submit duplicate 12" x 12" (300 x 300 mm) size samples of textured finishes in accordance with Section 01000. 1 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect gypsum board materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades ' affected by this work. ' 7100-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 ' SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 2 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING (Cont'd) , B. Store materials in a dry area inside the building. Do not remove wrapping until ready for use. Prevent damage to all edges and surfaces. C. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary , to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD A. Plain: To CSA A82.27-M standard for non-rated applications, Type X for rated ' applications, 1219 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, edges tapered with round edge, 12.7 mm thick or to thickness indicated on drawings. B. Water Resistant Board: To CSA A82.27-M standard 12.7 mm thick, 1219 mm wide x maximum practical length. C. Impact resistant gypsum board, by Canadian Gypsum, Domtar or Westroc, thickness as shown on the drawings. 2.02 METAL FURRING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS , A. Metal Furring Runners, Hangers, Tie Wires, Inserts, Anchors: To CSA ' A82.30-M1980, electro-zinc coated steel. B. Runner Channels: 38.1 mm x 19.0 mm x 1.52 mm and 38.1 mm x 9.5 mm x 1.22 mm, hot dip or electro-galvanized sheet steel. Use of various sizes governed by applied loads and applicable spans. C. Furring Channels: 19.0 mm x 38.1 mm x 1.22 mm and 38.1 mm x 9.5 mm x 1.22 mm, hot dip or electro-galvanized stud steel. Use of various sizes governed by applied loads and applicable spans. ' D. Drywall Furring Channel: Channel shaped furring member for screw attachment of drywall with knurled face. For interior use. Furring masonry or concrete surfaces. Cross furring under steel joist or suspended metal channels in suspended ceiling systems: 66.7 mm x 22.2 mm with knurled face, hot dip or electro-galvanized sheet steel. E. Hangers: 6.4 mm diameter mild steel rods. 7100-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 ' GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 3 2.03 METAL STUDS A. Non-Load-bearing Channel Stud Framing: To ASTM C645-76; to sizes indicated on drawings; roll formed from 0.5 mm thickness electro-galvanized steel sheet; for ' screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock-out service holes at 460 mm centres. B. Floor and Ceiling Tracks: To ASTM C645-76; in widths to suit stud sizes, 25 mm 1 flange height. C. Metal Channel Stiffener: 2 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust inhibitive coating. ' 2.04 FASTENINGS AND ADHESIVES A. Nails, Screws and Staples: To CSA A82.31-M1980. ' B. Stud Adhesive: To CGSB 71-GP-25M. C. Laminating Compound: To CSA A82.31-M1980, asbestos-free. D. Tie Wire. 1.63 mm, galvanized, soft annealed, steel wire or clip as recommended by the manufacturer of furring channels. ' E. Drywall Screws: Number 6 gauge, self drilling, case hardened gypsum board screws, length to suit board thickness and provide minimum 12 mm penetration of 1 screw through metal support. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Casing Beads 'L' and 'J' Type, Corner Beads (Fill Type): 0.5 mm base thickness ' commercial grade sheet steel with G90 zinc finish to ASTM A525-80A; perforated flanges; one piece length per location. ' B. Reveal Trim: 12.7 mm high, snap-on trim, of 1.6 mm base thickness galvanized sheet prefinished in satin enamel white colour, for use where partitions extend to underside of ceiling and at door and window jambs where detailed. ' C. Acoustic Sealant: To CGSB 19-GP-21 M. D. Polyethylene: To CAN 2-51.33-M80, Type 2, 6 mil polyethylene film an Y-8086 Contractors Sheathing Tape by 3M Canada. 7100-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 4 , 2.05 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd) ' E. Insulating Strip: Rubberized, moisture resistant, 13 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face; lengths as required. , F. Joint Compound: To CSA A82.31-M1980, asbestos-free. G. Sound Attenuation Batts: 70 mm thick glass fibre RSI 1.4 (R8) noise stop blanket. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION OF METAL STUDS ' A. Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at 600 mm o.c. maximum. Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000. , B. Place studs at 406 mm o.c. and not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer's instructions. ' C. Attach studs to floor and ceiling track using screws. D. Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections. E. Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider 1 than stud centres specified. Secure studs together, using column clips or other approved means of fastening. F. Erect track at head of door/window openings and sills of sidelight/window openings ' to accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate studs above and ' below openings in same manner and spacing as wall studs. G. Provide stud or furring channel secured between studs for attachment of fixtures behind lavatory basins, toilet and bathroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab bars and towel rails, attached to steel stud partitions. Wood blocking provided by Section 06100. H. Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes. 7100-09250.wpd ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 ' GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 5 3.01 ERECTION OF METAL STUDS (Cont'd) I. Extend partitions to ceiling height except where noted otherwise on drawings. ' J. Maintain clearance under beams and structural slabs or provide slip connection to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs and possible damage of studs. K. Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from uninsulated surfaces. L. Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant behind studs and tracks around ' perimeter of sound control partitions, (indicated on drawings as being acoustically insulated). ' 3.02 SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Erect hanger and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance with CSA A82.31-M1980 except where specified otherwise and indicated on drawings. ' B. Securely anchor hanger to structural supports 1219 mm o.c. maximum along runner channels and not more than 150 mm from ends. Under no circumstances ' shall hanger wires be secured to or supported from mechanical or electrical materials or equipment or penetrate mechanical ductwork. C. Space runner or furring channels as shown on drawings and not more than 600 mm o.c. maximum nor 150 mm from walls. Run channels in long direction of board. Bend hanger sharply under bottom flange of runner and securely wire in place with a saddle tie. Provide channels below mechanical or electrical equipment ' and mechanical ductwork to maintain maximum spacing. D. Install furring channels transversely across runner channels in short direction of ' wallboard at 600 mm o.c. maximum or 150 mm from walls and interruptions in ceiling continuity. Secure channels to support with furring clips or wire. Where splicing is necessary lap minimum 200 mm and wire tie each end with double loops ' of 1.63 mm galvanized tie wire, 25 mm from each end of overlap. E. Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 6" ' (150 mm) of each corner and at maximum 24" (600 mm) around perimeter of fixture. ' F. Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200. G. Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, 1 diffusers, grilles, etc. ' 7100-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 6 ' 3.02 SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS (Cont'd) ' H. Install furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud partition header track. ' I. Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within or at termination of ceilings. 3.03 WALL FURRING A. Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with CSA ' A82.31-M1980, except where specified otherwise and shown on drawings. B. Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, etc., on ' four sides. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers. C. Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated. ' 3.04 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION ' A. Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical, and ' mechanical work are approved. B. Apply gypsum board at right angles to framing members or furring using screw ' fasteners. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm o.c. or in accordance with ULC standards for fire rated assemblies. Apply type X gypsum board where indicated to obtain fire ratings as shown on the drawings. ' C. Apply water resistant gypsum board where ceramic wall tiles to be applied; adjacent to slop sinks in janitors room; washrooms, locker rooms, shower and , drying areas,walls and ceilings. Apply water-resistant sealant to edges, ends, and cut-outs which expose gypsum core. Leave space at base of board to prevent soaking up of moisture. ' D. Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each face of sound insulated partitions to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cut-outs around electrical boxes,ducts, and other penetrations in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustical sealant. 7100-09250.wpd ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 ' GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 7 ' 3.05 ACCESSORIES A. Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. ' Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. B. Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. C. Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board or casing beads abutting metal window or exterior door frames, to provide thermal break. ' 3.06 CONTROL JOINTS A. Construct control joints of preformed units or two back-to-back casing beads set ' in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint. B. Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints. ' C. Locate control joints at changes in substrate construction, at approximately 10 m spacing on long corridor runs. Install control joints straight and true. ' 3.07 TRIM A. Install reveal trim at gypsum board/ceiling juncture and at door and window jambs where indicated. ' 3.08 ACCESS DOORS A. Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective Sections. B. Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems, to satisfy fire rating requirements. 3.09 TAPING AND FILLING ' A. Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound,joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces. ' "00-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 8 , 3.09 TAPING AND FILLING (Cont'd) , B. Finish comer beads, control joints and trims as required with two coats of joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces. , C. Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after painting is completed. D. Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board. , E. Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for painting. 3.10 VAPOUR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Install polyethylene on warm side of insulation staple or apply with adhesive to , furring members. Tape seal areas where staples penetrate vapour barrier. B. Extend vapour barrier tight to perimeter of windows and other items interrupting , continuity of membrane. Tape seal. Lap all joints minimum of 150 mm and tape seal. , 7100-09250.wpd ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 ' CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Pagel PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all ceramic floor and wall tile and base called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile and Base as indicated on the Room Finish Schedule and Drawings. B. Shower bases including waterproof membrane. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Masonry Section 04200 ' C. Quarry Tile Section 09330 D. Resilient Flooring Section 09660 ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. For the actual installation of ceramic wall and floor tile, use only skilled tradesmen who are familiar with the referenced standards and with the requirements for this Work. B. Do tile work in accordance with Installation Manual 200- 1979, "Ceramic Tile", by Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada, except where this specification is more stringent. ' 1.05 SAMPLES A. After award of Contract and before any ceramic wall and floor tile are delivered to ' the job site, submit duplicate samples of tile to the Consultant for approval. Samples to be submitted on 300 x 300 mm sample board for each colour, texture, size and pattern of the in accordance with Division 1. Grout sample joints for ' representative sample of final installation. 7100-09310.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09310 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 2 , 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver all materials of this Section to the fob site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination; ' store only the specified materials at the job site. C. Use all means necessary to protect floor and wall tile materials, before durin g and , after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. D. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary , to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be graded and containers grade sealed, delivered to the job site in , their original packages or containers with the manufacturer's labels and seals intact. 2.02 FLOOR TIE ' A. Floor the shall be Ceramic Mosaic, unglazed, cushion edge, 50 mm square x 6 mm ' thick, Winburn as manufactured by Olympia and conforming to C.G.S.B. Specification 75-GP-1, Type II latest edition. Provide coves, corners, reveals, surf caps, inners and outers as required to complete the work. , B. Colour shall be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer's standard range of colours. 2.03 WALL TILE ' A. Wall tiles shall be 100 x 100 x 6 mm glazed ceramic, cushion edge, Maple Leaf Ceramic Wall Tile as manufactured by Olympia, or approved equal, complete with ' round edge trim, coves, angle beads, etc. Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer's standard range of colours. Up to two colours may be selected. 7100-09310.mW DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 3 2.04 BASE A. Base shall be 100 mm high with cove at floor, ceramic mosaic, unglazed 50 mm square x 6 mm thick, to match floor tile. B. Where glazed wall the occurs above base, top edge of base to be square, at all other locations top edge to serf. 2.05 SOAP DISHES ' A. Soap dishes shall be 100 x 100 mm x 75 mm deep recessed glazed ceramic type by Olympia, without extending lip, in colour as later selected by the Consultant. 2.06 SETTING COMPOUND ' A. Setting compound shall be"L&M Floor Mix"for floor tiles and "L & M Wall Mix" for wall tiles, or reviewed alternate. ' B. Setting compound for shower floors and bases, Mapei Kerapoxy Laticrete SP-100 or Flextile Flex-Epoxy 100 or C-Cure Epoxy 100. 2.07 GROUTING COMPOUND A. Grouting compound for wall tiles shall be "L & M Ceramic Mosaic Grout", or ' reviewed alternate, in colour as later selected by the Consultant. B. Grouting compound for floor and base tiles shall be "L & M Acid-R-Grout" or reviewed alternate, in colour as later selected by the Consultant. C. Epoxy grout for shower floors and bases, Mapei Kerapoxy or Flextile Flex-Epoxy 200, or C-Cure Epoxy 200. 2.08 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE ' A. Sternson Neoflex waterproof membrane and primer. ' 2.09 WIRE MESH ' A. Wire mesh reinforcing for shower bases shall be galvanized, 50 x 50 mm, 16 gauge mesh or equivalent. ' 7100-09310.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 4 , 2.10 MORTAR BED ' A. 1 part Portland Cement, 4 parts.sand, 1 part water, including minimum 1/10 part latex adhesive (per manufacturers instructions), Level-Cure by C-Cure. PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS , A. Surfaces on which wall and floor the is to be applied, shall be thoroughly cleaned down. , B. Drywall surfaces on which wall and floor the is to be applied, shall be free from dust, excess plaster and shall be plain and true without any irregularities. C. Concrete floor slabs, concrete and masonry walls on which floor and wall the are to be applied, shall be thoroughly cleaned down and all dust, efflorescence, dirt, etc. removed. Concrete and masonry wall surfaces to which wall the is to be applied shall be levelled off as required with "L & M Wall Mix" to produce true flat surfaces. , D. In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Consultant and do not proceed with installation in such areas until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 TILED WALLS AND FLOORS A. Refer to Drawings and Room Finish Schedules for locations. Wall and floor tiles shall be set by the thin set method, using setting and grouting compound, in strict ' accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.. B. Tile shall be laid out in pattern as directed by the Consultant with 1/16"joints and square with wall. C. Cut and fit ties neatly around all projections, curbs, recesses, fixtures, etc., spacing ' tiles accurately so that pattern is uninterrupted. D. Tile curbs in showers on all faces, using bullnose the for all corners. , E. All floor and base tiles in shower areas shall be installed using epoxy setting compound and epoxy grout. , F. Install one recessed soap dish at each shower. 7100-09310.wpd t DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 ' CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 5 3.03 SETTING BED A. Apply a thin pressured on skim coat of setting compound to substrate in the area to be tiled. Do not spread more mortar than can be covered before skinning occurs. Follow skim coat immediately with a doubling coat to form a 9.5 to 6 mm thick layer of mortar. Do not touch until just before placing tile. tB. Just before placing tile, notch the Thin-Set mortar bed with a suitable notched trowel, combing an area that can be covered within 5 minutes in hot dry surroundings, or no more than 10 minutes at under cooler, moister conditions. C. Place individual tiles against freshly combed setting compound with moderately firm pressure. Fallow soon with a thorough beat-in. Beat-in should be sufficient to cause ribs of notched mortar bed to flow together into a continuous layer. Make any necessary adjustments in alignment promptly following beat-in. D. Clean out joints for receipt of grouting compound and clean up smudges of mortar with a sponge moistened with clean water. ' E. Grouting shall be performed at any time after initial set has occurred. 3.04 GROUTING A. As soon as the beds have sufficiently set, the tile shall be washed clean and ' grouted with grouting compound in strict accordance with "L & M" printed instructions. B. Joints in the floor and base shall be filled solid and flush with "L & M Acid-R-Grout". C. Joints in wall tile shall be filled solid and flush with "L & M Ceramic Mosaic Grout". D. Prepare joints and mix grout in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Force maximum amount of grout into joints, avoiding air traps or voids. ' E. Remove all excess grout by washing diagonally across the joints. Check for voids, air pockets and gaps and fill same. Remove all discoloured grout and replace with new. F. Cure all joints. 3.05 SHOWER BASES A. Install waterproof membrane and primer in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Membrane shall turn minimum 150 mm up walls and over curbs. 7100-09310.wpd DIVISION 9 ' SECTION 09310 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 6 ' 3.05 SHOWER BASES (Cont'd) ' B. Install mortar bed reinforced with galvanized wire mesh. Slope mortar bed to floor drains as shown on the drawings. C Install ceramic floor tile with epoxy, using thin set method as described herein. 3.06 CLEANING A. Upon completion of wall tile installation and grouting, thoroughly clean and polish , all exposed surfaces of ceramic wall tile. B. Immediately following removal of grout from surface of floor tiles and base, remove , dust and wipe clean. Seal and finish the surface as per instructions in "Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada, Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition", for unglazed ceramic tiles, using T.T.M.A.C. approved products and procedures. , 3.07 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of the installation and as a condition of acceptance, deliver to the Owner one carton of each colour and pattern of ceramic tiles installed under this ' section for the Owner's maintenance program. Identify each carton for location and installation date. 7100-09310.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09330 QUARRY TILE Page 1 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all quarry tile flooring and base called for or implied by the drawings and specifications,together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: 1 A. Quarry Tile Floor and Base as indicated on the Room Finish Schedule and Drawings. 1 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile Section 09310 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. For the actual installation of quarry tile, use only skilled tradesmen who are familiar with the referenced standards and with the requirements for this Work. 1 B. Do tile work in accordance with Installation Manual 200 - 1979, "Ceramic Tile", by Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada, except where this specification is more stringent. 1.05 SAMPLES A. After award of Contract and before any quarry the is delivered to the job site, submit duplicate samples of the to the Consultant for approval. Samples to be submitted on 300 x 300 mm sample board for each colour, texture, size and pattern of the in accordance with Division 1. Grout sample joints for representative sample of final installation. i 1 7100-09330.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09330 QUARRY TILE Page 2 i 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver all materials of this Section to the job site in their original unopened , containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination; store only the specified materials at the job site. C. Use all means necessary to protect quarry tile materials, before, during and after i installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. D. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' PA 2.01 MATERIALS , A. Materials shall be graded and containers grade sealed, delivered to the job site in their original packages or containers with the manufacturer's labels and seals , intact. 2.02 FLOOR TILE ' A. Floor tile shall be 200 mm x 200 mm x 6 mm Porcelain Series as supplied by ' Ferleo. B. Colour shall be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer's standard range of colours. 2.03 BASE ' A. Base shall be 200 mm x 100 mm high quarry tile with cove and top serf to match , floor tile. 2.04 SETTING COMPOUND ' A. Setting compound shall be "L & M Floor Mix"for floor tiles. 7100-09330.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09330 ' QUARRY TILE Page 3 2.05 GROUTING COMPOUND A. Grouting compound for floor and base tiles shall be L & M Acid-R-Grout or reviewed alternate, in colour as later selected by the Consultant. 2.06 CAULKING COMPOUND A. One part polysulphide conforming o CAN2-19.13-MB2. Type 1 for horizontal and 9 P Type 2 for vertical application, Class B, Classification C. B. Colour shall match grout colour. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Surfaces on which floor and base tile is to be applied, shall be thoroughly cleaned ' down. B. Concrete floor slabs and masonry walls on which floor and base tile are to be applied, shall be thoroughly cleaned down and all dust, efflorescence, dirt, etc. removed. ' C. Existing concrete floor slabs to receive quarry tile shall be scarified to remove all paint and loose concrete to produce a sound flat surface. ' D. In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Consultant and do not proceed with installation in such areas until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 TILED FLOORS ' A. Refer to Drawings and Room Finish Schedules for locations. Floor tiles shall be set by the thin set method, using setting and grouting compound, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Tile shall be laid out in pattern as directed by the Consultant with 3 mm joints and square with wall. C. Cut and fit tiles neatly around all projections, curbs, recesses, fixtures, etc., spacing tiles accurately so that pattern is uninterrupted. 7100-09330.wpd DIVISION 9 ' SECTION 09330 QUARRY TILE Page 4 ' 3.03 SETTING BED A. Apply a thin pressured on skim coat of setting compound to substrate in the area to be tiled. Do not spread more mortar than can be covered before skimming occurs. Follow skim coat immediately with a doubling coat to form a 3/16" to 1/4" thick layer of mortar. Do not touch until just before placing tile. B. Just before placing tile, notch the Thin-Set mortar bed with a suitable notched trowel, combing an area that can be covered within 5 minutes in hot dry surroundings, or no more than 10 minutes at under cooler, moister conditions. ' C. Place individual tiles against freshly combed setting compound with moderately firm pressure. Follow soon with a thorough beat-in. Beat-in should be sufficient to cause ribs of notched mortar bed to flow together into a continuous layer. Make , any necessary adjustments in alignment promptly following beat-in. D. Clean out joints for receipt of grouting compound and clean up smudges of mortar with a sponge moistened with clean water. E. Grouting shall be performed at any time after initial set has occurred. ' 3.04 CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide 6 mm control joints in quarry the floors at maximum 6.0 m centres and directly above control joints in concrete subfloors. Caulk joints with specified ' caulking compound. 3.05 GROUTING A. As soon as tile beds have sufficiently set, the tile shall be washed clean and grouted with grouting compound in strict accordance with "L & M" printed instructions. B. Joints in file floor and base shall be filled solid and flush with "L & M Acid-R-Grout". C. Prepare joints and mix grout in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Force maximum amount of grout into joints, avoiding air traps or voids. D. Remove all excess grout by washing diagonally across the joints. Check for voids, air pockets and gaps and fill same. Remove all discoloured grout and replace with new. E. Cure all joints. ' 7100-09330.wpd ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09330 ' QUARRY TILE Page 5 ' 3.06 CLEANING A. Immediately following removal of grout from surface of floor tiles and base, remove dust and wipe clean. Seal and finish the surface as per instructions in "Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada, Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition", for unglazed ceramic tiles, using T.T.M.A.C. approved products and procedures. ' 3.07 EXTRA STOCK ' A. Upon completion of the installation and as a condition of acceptance, deliver to the Owner one carton of each colour and pattern of ceramic tiles installed under this section for the Owner's maintenance program. Identify each carton for location ' and installation date. 1 7100-09330.wpd ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09500 ' ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all acoustical ceilings called for or implied by the 1 drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Acoustical ceiling suspension system, panels and sound blankets as indicated on the Room Finish Schedule and Drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 B. Mechanical Division 15 C. Electrical Division 16 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The installation of all acoustic ceilings shall be carried out by an Acoustical Contractor approved by the manufacturer of the acoustical materials and thoroughly experienced in this work. ' 1.05 SAMPLES A. Submit samples of materials to the consultant for approval prior to commencement of work. 7100-09500.wpd DIVISION 9 ' SECTION 09500 , ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELS A. Acoustic panels shall be glass or mineral fibre 16 mm thick, 610 mm x 1220 mm with standard white paint finish,with flame spread rating of 25 or less, in directional fissured pattern: Minaboard Fissured by Armstrong. ' 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM , A. Suspension System-Interlocking Tee Grid, formed out of cold rolled zinc bonded steel, matte white baked enamel finish. "Donn DV System"or equal by "Universal". B. e Trim t Edg T m 24 gauge, zinc coated, cold rolled steel, L type with white matte baked enamel finish. "Donn Products" or"Universal'. C. Hangers galvanized mild steel 6 mm dia. rods and 25 x 4.5 mm flats and#9 gauge galvanized wire. D. Tie Wire#18 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire. 2.03 SOUND BLANKETS A. 2-1/2" sound blankets as manufactured by Fiberglas Canada Inc. ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Measure the ceiling area and lay out centre lines, both ways, providing balanced , borders at room perimeter unless matching existing grid. B. Establish ceiling elevation by use of a water level or transit. Install the wall mould accurately in position to provide correct finished ceiling height. C. Frame openings for.light fixtures or air diffusers and at changes in ceiling heights. , Obtain the weights of the various electric light fixtures and install extra hangers as required to support these fixtures. Conform to Ontario Hydro regulations. D. All joints shall be straight in alignment and the exposed surfaces shall be flush and level. Edge moulding shall be installed wherever the acoustic ceiling abuts walls, columns and other vertical surfaces. '7, .W I tDIVISION 9 SECTION 09500 ' ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 3 3.01 WORKMANSHIP (Cont'd) ' E. Where Reflected Ceiling Plans have been provided, the location of diffusers and light fixtures must conform to the layouts indicated. See Electrical, Mechanical and Architectural Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION: LAY-IN SYSTEM A. The suspension system shall be installed according to "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceiling Suspension Systems", published by the' Acoustical Materials Association, the Reflected Ceiling Plans, and to the satisfaction of the Consultant. B. Install hanger rods at minimum 1220 mm centres both ways suspended from structure above and crimp lower ends at correct height to engage the holes in the main tees. Hangers must not be more than 5 degrees from vertical. C. Main tee members may run either the long or short dimension of the room. Starting at one corner of the room, install the main tees and cross tees. Cut the ends of tees at the wall mould allowing some space for expansion. Frame up with tees, openings for light fixtures or air diffusers and at changes in ceiling height. ID. The grid layout shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 INSTALLATION: ACOUSTIC PANELS A. Lay in the acoustic ceiling panels carefully cutting and trimming to provide the specified layout. B. Remove and replace any damaged or marked panels. ' C. Provide one extra sealed carton of each type of acoustic panel upon completion of the project for the Owner's use. Identify cartons. 7100-09500.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 1 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS iA. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all resilient tile flooring and rubber base called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Resilient flooring, rubber base and stair treads required for this Work as indicated on the Room Finish Schedule. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Cementitious Underlayment Section 03555 C. Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile Section 09310 D. Rubber Floor Tile Section 09670 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Before any resilient flooring materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Consultant, a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the Work, stating manufacturer's name and catalogue number for each item, and product samples in colours specified. B. Accompanying the materials list, submit two copies of the manufacturer's current recommended method of installation for each item. C. Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for Operation and Maintenance Manual specified under Division 1. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect resilient flooring materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. ' 7100-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 2 , 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING (Cont'd) , B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Reinforced vinyl tile shall be 3 mm thick, 305 x 305 mm. Pattern and colours as selected by the Consultant. Tile shall conform to current C.S.A. Specification A- 126.1. Armstrong Excelon or acceptable alternate. B. The following are acceptable alternate manufacturers of vinyl floor tile: "Amtico", or"Flintkote". , C. Up to four (4) colours will be selected from manufacturers full range of standard colours. , D. Base shall be 100 mm high, top set coved, rubber type by Johnsonite or equal, not less than 3 mm thick with preformed internal and external comers. Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer's premium range of colours. E. Resilient Stair Treads: Johnsonite Roundel RH rubber treads with raised disc pattern and 50 mm contrasting colour grit tape. Size to suit tread, tapered gauge 5.33 mm to 2.87 mm. F. Primers and Adhesives shall be waterproof, best quality formulated for the , application of the resilient floor coverings and base over sub floor and wall surfaces as indicated on the drawings and Room Finish Schedules. Primers and adhesives to be type and brand recommended by the manufacturer of the products for use with his materials and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. G. Sub-floor filler and leveller shall be white premixed latex compatible with tile 1 adhesive. H. Floor Wax shall be as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. I. Metal edge strips shall be extruded aluminum, smooth mill finish, polished, with lip to extend under floor tile with tapered edge. J. All colours and patterns shall be as selected by the Consultant from the standard range of colours and patterns of the selected manufacturer, colours and patterns will be limited to not more than one per room unless specifically called for and detailed on drawings. 7100-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 3 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Confirm that resilient flooring may be installed in accordance with the original design and the manufacturer's recommendations. iC. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Consultant. D. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all resilient flooring in strict accordance with the original design and the 1 manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not lay floor coverings and base until all trades, except painter, have completed their work and just prior to completion of the building. C. The temperature of room floor surface and material shall be at least 70 deg. F. 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation. D. Fill all cavities, cracks, joints and all other surface imperfections in concrete substrate with latex fill or other approved subfloor filler in order to produce a smooth, flat, hard surface for receipt of resilient flooring. Scrape off all ridges, droppings, scale and other projections. Clean floor with an industrial vacuum ' cleaner. Remove all substance and materials affecting adhesive bond. E. Prime concrete floors and apply adhesive uniformly with notched spreaders, at correct coverage as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered before initial set takes place. F. Roll floor coverings, after laying, with a polished clean roller weighing at least 150 lbs. to ensure uniform adhesion and to remove air pockets. G. Where tiles terminate at doorways, or where tiles of different type or colour butt together the joint shall centre on the door. 7100-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 4 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) H. Provide and install metal edge strips where resilient floor tiles terminate against a concrete floor where no applied architectural floor finish is required. Metal edge strip shall be installed below centre of door where a door occurs. I. Tile shall be laid with all joints square and tightly butted together. Start installation from centre of rooms to ensure equal max. size edge tiles. Pattern and direction of tile shall be as directed by the Consultant. J. Tile to be laid full depth of closets, toe spaces, recesses, etc. Cut and fit tiles tightly against openings, breaks, frames, fixtures, columns and other vertical surfaces. Carry tile under all movable fitments. K. Install 100 mm high top set rubber cove base in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set base with waterproof adhesive of the type to suit the surface on which the base is to be applied. Fit and sandbag the base tightly j against wall and floor surfaces. Space joints uniformly. L. Base shall be installed in long lengths with tight, well fitted joints. All corners shall be formed with preformed internal and external moulded comer sections. Cut and fit base tightly against frames, breaks, columns, fixtures, fitments, etc. M. Install rubber base at all locations indicated on the Room Finish Schedule, including those areas scheduled to receive Rubber Floor Tile specified in Section 09670. , N. Cut rubber stair treads to fit stair, and set in place using adhesive. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove surplus adhesive from resilient floor coverings, carpet and base as the ' work progresses. B. Five days after installation of coverings, clean with cleaner, rinse, dry and apply one coat of wax in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations. Protect with non-staining building paper. C. Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protection, clean, dry or damp mop floors and apply one additional coat of wax. 7100-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 5 3.04 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Owner one carton of each colour and pattern of floor tiles, installed in this iWork, for the Owner's future use in patching. Label each carton for proper identification. Extra stock to be same production run as materials installed under this section. i 1 i t i i I t 1 t i i 7100-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09670 RUBBER FLOOR TILE Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all supply and installation of all rubber floor tile, adhesives, and accessories called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Floors Section 03300 B. Ceramic Tile Flooring Section 09310 C. Quarry Tile Flooring Section 09330 ' D. Resilient Flooring and Rubber Base Section 09660 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Before any rubber flooring materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Consultant a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the Work, stating manufacturer's name and catalogue number for each item, and product samples in colours specified. B. Accompanying the materials list, submit two copies of the manufacturer's current recommended method of installation for each item. ' C. Provide maintenance data for rubber flooring for Operation and Maintenance Manual specified under Division 1 including two (2) year manufacturer's warranty. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect rubber flooring materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. iB. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. 7100-09670.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09670 RUBBER FLOOR TILE Page 2 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flooring contractor shall be approved by the material manufacturer and shall have completed a minimum of three (3) projects of similar scope. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rubber floor the shall be Mondo Ramflex Sports Flooring System as manufactured by Gymcon Ltd. B. Rubber floor tile shall be 9.5 mm thick 914 mm x 914 mm. Pattern and colour to be selected by the Consultant from the full range of manufacturer's standards. Up to two (2) colours will be selected. All rubber floor the shall be compounded to sufficient density to preclude the possibility of creeping, stretching, or shrinking under traffic and shall have optimum resiliency. All colouring material shall be of the highest quality and all pigments shall be insoluble in water and non-bleeding. Rubber flooring shall have a hardness not to exceed 70 by the Type A Shore durometer test. C. Primers and adhesives shall be waterproof, best quality formulated for the application of the rubber floor coverings over subfloor as indicated on the drawings and Room Finish Schedules. Primers and adhesives to be type and brand recommended and supplied by the manufacturer of the products for use with his materials and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. i D. Subfloor filler and leveller shall be white premixed latex compatible with the adhesive. E. Reducer strips shall be manufacturers standard reducer strips, 38 mm wide tapered from 9.5 mm to 0 mm. Colour: Black. F. Self Polishing Finisher/Sealer: As recommended by tile supplier. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 7100-09670.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09670 RUBBER FLOOR TILE Page 3 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS (Cont'd) B. Confirm that rubber flooring may be installed in accordance with the original design and the manufacturer's recommendations. C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Consultant. D. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. i 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Install all rubber floor tile in strict accordance with the original design and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not lay floor coverings until all trades, except painter, have completed their work and just prior to completion of the building. ' C. The temperature of room floor surface and material shall be at least 21.1 deg C 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation. I D. Fill all cavities, cracks, joints and all other surface imperfections in concrete substrate with latex fill or other approved subfloor filler in order to produce a smooth, flat, hard surface for receipt of rubber flooring. Scrape off all ridges, droppings, scale and other projections. Clean floor with an industrial vacuum cleaner. Remove all substance and materials affecting adhesive bond. E. Prime concrete floors and apply adhesive uniformly with notched spreaders, at correct coverage as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered before initial set takes place. Place tiles so that adhesive is squeezed into tile joints and provides a watertight joint. F. Roll floor coverings, a fter laying, a polished clean roller weighing at least 24 kg to ensure uniform adhesion and to remove air pockets. 1 G. Where tiles terminate at doorways, or where tiles of different type or colour butt Y YP together the joint shall centre on the door. H. Provide and install reducer strips where rubber floor tiles terminate against a concrete floor where no applied architectural floor finish is required. Reducer strip Ishall be installed below centre of door where a door occurs. I. Tile shall be laid with all joints square and tightly butted together. Start installation I from centre of rooms to ensure equal max. size edge tiles. Pattern and direction of tile shall be as directed by the Consultant. 7100-09670.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09670 RUBBER FLOOR TILE Page 4 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) J. Tile to be laid full depth of closets, toe spaces, recesses, etc. Cut and fit tiles tightly against openings, breaks, frames, fixtures, columns and other vertical surfaces. Carry the under all movable fitments. Apply adhesive to provide watertight joint around all cut areas. K. Rubber base in locations specified shall be installed by others. 3.03 CLEANING 1 A. Remove surplus adhesive from rubber floor tiles as the work progresses. B. Five days after installation of coverings, clean and finish floor tiles in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations. Protect with non-staining building paper. C. Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protection, clean, dry or damp mop floors and apply one additional coat of manufacturer's self-polishing finish. 3.04 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Owner one carton of each colour and pattern of floor tiles, installed in this Work, for the Owner's future use in patching. Label each carton for proper , identification. Extra stock to be same production run as materials installed under this section. 3.05 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION A. Provide copies of the care and maintenance information for incorporation into the Project Maintenance Manuals. 7100-09670.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 1 LPART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS iA. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 (WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract-.includes all painting called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Painting of underside of exposed roof decking and underside of exposed floor decking. B. Painting of all structural steel including beams, columns, joists, trusses and all attachments. C. Painting of miscellaneous metals. D. Painting of interior metal liner panel. E. Painting of all hollow metal doors and pressed metal frames. F. Preparation and painting of all exposed mechanical equipment, piping and other roof specialties above roof level including all relocated equipment. G. Painting of concrete block walls. H. Hollow metal doors and frames. I. Drywall partitions and ceilings. J. Wood doors. K. Finishing of millwork items. L. Painting of spectator side of dasherboard system. M. Special coatings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Paint manufacturer colour charts 1. Submit five (5) copies of the paint manufacturer's colour charts from which the Consultant will prepare proposed colour schedules. B. SaMples 1. Prepare samples of various finishes for Consultant's approval either on Site or by submitting samples, as directed, at least thirty days before materials are required. Identify each sample as to job, finish, colour name, number, sheen name and gloss units, date and name of Sub-contractor. 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 ' SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 2 1.03 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) C. List of Materials 1. A list of materials proposed for use on the work, prepared by the paint manufacturer, shall be submitted in writing to the Consultant for review at least 30 days before the materials are required. The list shall bear the manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are equal to those specified herein. If products to be used are from various manufacturers submit a list from each manufacturer. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Site in their original containers with labels intact. Notify the , Consultant in writing that materials are on site and request examination by the Consultant before labels are broken on the original container. Store in space directed by Consultant. Keep stored materials covered at all times and take all necessary precautions against fire. B. Provide C(Y fire extinguisher of minimum 20 lbs. capacity in paint storage area. ' 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Temperature 1. Do not paint or finish in unclean or improperly ventilated areas. Do not paint in temperatures lower then 10° C or varnish in temperatures lower than 18° C. B. Protection 1. Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulin to protect surfaces in areas assigned for the storage and mixing of paints. 2. Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of , floors, furnishings and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical and special equipment, hardware, all other components of the building which do not require painting, from paint spotting and other soiling during the painting process. 3. Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of painting. 4. Protect paint materials from fire and freezing. 5. Keep waste rags in metal drums containing water and remove from building at end of each working shift. 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 3 1.06 EXTRA STOCK A. On completion of the work, deliver to the Owner, 4 litres of each colour h c ur and type of paint used, in tightly sealed containers, clearly labelled as to colour number and ' location used. Partial cans, or preopened cans will not be accepted. IPART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use material specified herein. ' B. Brand Manufacturer's Name: Canadian Pittsburgh Paints, unless noted otherwise, is used to establish a quality basis, except for Special Coatings. C. Equal products of the following manufacturers will be accepted subject to approval of List of Materials requested in Item 1.03 Submittals. The Consultant reserves the right to reject materials which are not equal to the specified material. The Contractor will be required to supply the specified material for those materials rejected at no additional cost to the Owner: Manufacturer Benjamin Moore & Company Ltd. Glidden Performance Coatings of Canada Ltd. Pratt and Lambert Sherwin Williams Pittsburg A.S. Clark Company Ltd. Mameco of Canada Limited United Coatings-Tech-Pro Coatings Ltd. D. Epoxy paint for Primed Arena Structural Steel specified in Section 05550 shall be Glidden Protective Maintenance Coatings as specified herein. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Condition of Surfaces 1. Check all surfaces with electric moisture metre and do not proceed if reading is higher than 12-15 without written permission from Consultant. 2. Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of a first class job. 3. Remove dust, grease, rust and extraneous matter from all surfaces (except ' that rust occurring on items specified to be primed under other Sections shall be removed and work reprimed under those Sections). 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 4 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete and Masonry 1. Test surfaces for alkalinity with pink litmus paper or other recognized method. 2. Where extreme alkalinity occurs, wash surface with 4% solution tetrapotassium pyrophosphate(5 oz.per gallon of water)where latex base paint is to be used and with zinc sulphate solution (3 lb. per gal. water) where other paint bases are to be used. B. Metal 1. Clean unpainted and shop painted metal, remove loose rust and prime bare , metal with zinc chromate primer. Feather out edges to make touchup patches inconspicuous. C. Galvanized Surfaces , 1. Phosphatize galvanized metal surfaces using CGSB 32-GP-116 pretreatment or prime with galvanized metal primer. D. Woodwork ' 1. Inspect millwork to assure surfaces are smooth free from machine marks and that nailheads have been countersunk. Seal all knots and sapwood in surfaces to receive paint, with a sealer compatible with finish specified. 2. Sand smooth all woodwork which is to be finished and clean surfaces free of dust before applying first coat. In the case of painted woodwork fill nail holes, splits and scratches with nonshrinking filler after first coat is dry. When these occur on a surface to receive a transparent finish, use putty tinted to match local grain condition. Between coats and lightly with No. 00 sand paper and remove dust. E. Gypsum Board , 1. Inspect drywall to assure surface as free from marks and blemishes. 2. Clean surfaces free of dust before applying first coat. ' 3. Inspect surface after prime coat and touch up and re-prime as necessary. 7100-09900.wpd , DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 5 3.03 APPLICATION A. Finishes and number of coats specified in Finish Schedule are intended to cover surfaces completely. If they do not, apply further coats until complete coverage is ' achieved as required. B. Any areas exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage shall have the entire plane painted. Patching will not be acceptable. C. Spraying will not be allowed without written permission. D. Arrange to have traffic barred from completed areas wherever possible. E. Apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions and specifications and be familiar with those directions and specifications. ' F. Apply primer-sealer coats by brush or roller method. Permit paint to dry before applying succeeding coats, tough up suction spots and sand between coats with No. 00 sand paper. ' G. Prime woodwork designated for painting as soon as possible after woodwork is delivered to Site. Prime all surfaces of such woodwork, whether exposed or not, before installation. Back prime woodwork which is to receive transparent finish with one coat of transparent finish reduced 25%. H. Where two coats of the same paint are to be applied, tint the first coat to differentiate from the final coat. I. Apply final coats on smooth surfaces by roller or brush. Hand brush wood tsurfaces. J. Paint shall be uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from brush or roller marks, sags, runs or other defects. K. Work by This Section as Related to Mechanical and Electrical Work 1. Finish paint primed mechanical equipment listed hereafter. ' a) Mechanical equipment on roof(exhaust fans, and new equipment). b) All exposed ductwork. c) Columns at fire hose cabinet locations to be painted red. ' 2. Paint insulated and bare pipes exposed to view in rooms scheduled to have painted walls and ceiling or other finished surfaces. Paint sprinkler main at ' elbows and ties red. ' 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 6 3.03 APPLICATION (Cont'd) 3. Prime and paint exposed, unfinished electrical raceways, fittings, outlet boxes,junction boxes, pull boxes and similar items in rooms scheduled to have painted walls or ceiling or other finished surfaces. , 4. Replace identification markings on mechanical and electrical work when painted over or spattered. ' 5. Paint work to match adjacent walls and ceilings unless directed otherwise. 6. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvres with one coat of flat black metal paint to limit of sight line. 7. Where walls and ceilings are not scheduled to be painted, the work described above shall be painted a colour selected by the Consultant except where galvanized or plated. 8. Paint all electrical distribution panels. Colour selected by Owner. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Locate testing area in Building to establish standard of workmanship, texture, gloss and coverage where designated. B. Apply samples of all finishes on each type of surface to be coated with correct material, number of coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss required. C. Retain test area until completion of work. Use approved work in test areas as 1 standard for corresponding work throughout Building. Correct and refinish work which does not compare with approved finishes. 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE A. General 1. In instances where materials specified are not suitable for a particular job , application or are contrary to manufacturer's recommendations for use on a particular surface, such condition shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification and instructions. ' 2. Finishes shall match approved samples but Consultant reserves the right to make reasonable changes to finish specifications to obtain desired results without additional cost or obligation of Owner. 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 7 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE (Cont'd) ' 3. Gloss terms shall have followin g values ASTM D523-67 "Test for S ecular ( P ' Gloss"): Gloss Term Gloss Value ' Flat 5 to 20 Eggshell 20 to 40 Semi-gloss 40 to 60 Gloss, medium 60 to 80 Gloss, high 80 to 90 ' 4. A colour chart giving colour schemes and gloss values for various areas will be prepared after tendering by Consultant. ' 5. Do not paint baked enamel, chrome plated, stainless steel, aluminum or other surfaces finished with a final factory finish. All primed surfaces shall be finish painted under this Section. ' B. Schedule of Surfaces and Number of Coats ' 1. Exterior Schedule a) Galvanized Metal. 1St Coat- Vinyl wash primer 1-GP-121M 2nd Coat- Steel primer 1-GP-40d 3 d Coat- Exterior enamel 1-GP-59M b) Primed Ferrous Metal Surfaces: 1St Coat- Spot priming 1-GP-40d 2nd Coat- Exterior enamel 1-GP-59M 3rd Coat- Repeat second coat 2. Interior Schedule ' a) Galvanized and Zinc coated Metal: 1St Coat- Vinyl wash primer 1-GP-121M ' 2"d Coat- Enamel Undercoat 1-GP-38M V Coat- Semi-gloss enamel 1-GP-57M ' 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 8 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE (Cont'd) ' b) Main Arena Structural Steel: 1St coat- Glid Guard Epoxy Chemical Resistant Finish 5242 (3 mil ' dry film thickness) 2"d coat- repeat first coat c) Primed Metal Surfaces: Touch up primer as required. , 1St Coat-Alkyd enamel exterior gloss 1-GP-59W 2"d Coat- Repeat first coat C) Zinc coated metal deck, liner panel and structural steel (other than t columns): Alkyd semi-gloss, dry fog type. d) Masonry: ' 1"Coat- Block Filler 1-GP-188 2"d Coat- Semi-Gloss Enamel 1-GP-57M 3`d Coat- Repeat second coat. , e) Gypsum Board Ceilings (other than Special Coating): 1St Coat- Primer-sealer 1-GP-119M ' 2"d Coat-Alkyd flat 1-GP-118M f) Gypsum Board Walls: 1St Coat- Primer-sealer 1-GP-118M 2"d Coat- Eggshell Alkyd 1-GP-202CP 31d Coat- Repeat second coat g) Wood-Paint Finish (Wood Doors): ' 1St Coat- Enamel Undercoat 1-GP-38M 2"d Coat-Alkyd flat 1-GP-118M 3`d Coat- Repeat second coat 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 9 ' 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE (Cont'd) h) Wood/Hardwood-Varnish Finish: 1St Coat- paste-filler 2nd Coat- Shellac 1-GP-16M, Type 2 1 3' Coat-Varnish gloss 1-GP-36M, Type 1 4th Coat- Varnish satin, 1-GP-36M i) Wood-Varnish Stain Finish (Cupboard Interiors) 1St Coat- Pigmented Stain 1-GP-145M Type 2 ' 2nd Coat- Shellac 1-GP-16M Type 2 3`d Coat- Varnish semi-gloss 1-GP-145M Type 2 4th Coat- Repeat third coat. j) Special Coating (High Performance Coating) Masonry: 1St Coat- Sanitile C. B. Base ' 2nd Coat- Sanitile High Gloss Drywall: ' 1' Coat- Sanitile Primer-Sealer 2nd Coat- Sanitile P. C. High Gloss 3`d Coat- Repeat second coat C. Surfaces: The following surfaces shall be painted/varnished: 1. Miscellaneous metals and structural steel. 2. Steel roof deck, floor deck and liner panel. 3. Masonry walls (special coating in Dressing Rooms). 4. Drywall partitions and ceilings (special coatings in Dressing Rooms and Shower Rooms). 5. Wood benches and trim. ' 6. Wood doors and frames. 7. Plywood ceilings. 8. Hollow metal doors, frames and screens. ' 9. Cabinet work. 10. Spectator side of dasherboards. 11. Exposed mechanical and electrical equipment mounted on the roof 1 including primed and galvanized surface but not factory pre-finished painted surface. 12. Exposed mechanical ductwork and bare and insulated pipes. 13. Exposed mechanical and electrical lines located on wall or ceiling surfaces to be painted. 14. Provide labelling/identification of pipes as required by Division 15. ' 7100-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 t SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 10 3.06 PAINT MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION REPORTS A. The Contractor shall arrange to have the paint manufacturer's representative of the product being used on the project submit written inspection reports to the Consultant. B. The representative shall visit the site as many times as required to assist the painting contractor in the proper application of the products to ensure a satisfactory , job. C. In addition to the requirements of 3.06 B the representative shall visit the site and , submit a written inspection report to the Consultant at the following times: 1. Prior to painting to see that proper surface preparation is carried out. 2. During each individual coat application including primer stage to see that there is no detrimental deviation from the manufacturer's specifications and the requirement specified herein. 3. At the final completion of painting to ensure a satisfactory job has been obtained. 3.07 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ' A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturer's cleaning , procedures in regards to each paint product type and gloss finish specified herein for inclusion into maintenance manuals as specified under Division 1. 7100-09900.wpd ' DIVISION 10 SECTION 10162 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all toilet partitions and screens and shower doors called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 C. Washroom Accessories Section 10800 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and describe in detail materials, finishes, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings, elevations, plans, sections, metal gauges, hardware and any other pertinent information. B. Submit duplicate samples of full range of manufacturer's standard colour charts. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Toilet partitions shall comply to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and the National Building Code of Canada with respect to Barrier Free Access. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. esi n: Overhead braced type steel toilet partitions manufactured by Hadrian. Products manufactured by Watrous, AAMCO or GSW are acceptable alternatives subject to available colour and finish selection. Base bid tender price shall be for Hadrian products as specified. ' 7100-10162.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10162 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page 2 , 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) , B. Sheet Steel: Commercial quality, stretcher levelled standard of flatness; plain commercial galvanized or wipe coated conforming to ASTM A526; or uncoated (not galvanized) cold rolled carbon steel conforming to ASTM A366. , C. Minimum Thicknesses: ' Member Thickness (Millimetres) Doors 0.71 (22 ga) Pilasters 0.91 (20 ga) Panels 1.71 (22 ga) D. ore: Of manufacturer's choice which will not delaminate and will keep panels and ' Pilasters rigid, straight, flush and smooth under normal use. E. Hardwa re: Adjustable, chrome-plated non-ferrous castings, bottom hinge having cam units activated by spring, concealed within door, with self lubricating thermoplastic nylon bearings. Hinges flush, heavy duty, chrome plated. Hardware ' shall include door pull, barrier free lever handle, and robe hook. Hardware shall be tamper resistant. F. Metal Filler: Epoxy. r G. Colou . As selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range of colours. , Notwithstanding colour selected, all paint shall be alkali resistant. H. Fasteners: Use tamper proof screws. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate toilet partitions. Take site measurements for areas where partitions are to be located and fabricate partitions to suit site dimensions. B. Fabricate doors, panels and pilasters from sheet steel laminated to both sides of , core material. If fibreboard is used as door core, use not less than 0.71 mm sheet steel. C. Form all edges of doors, panels and pilasters and secure together with lock seam edge or seal edge with continuous flat locking strip with mitred and welded comers. D. Provide chrome plated brass, or stainless steel hardware. Include pilaster shoes, hinges, latch and keepers, rubber cushioned door bumper, 1 coat hook per door and fastening brackets. 7100-10162.wpd IDIVISION 10 SECTION 10162 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page 3 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) E. Reinforce all partitions to receive washroom accessories and grab bars. Grab bars ' will be installed in all toilet compartments. 2.03 PAINTING A. Fill depressions and cavities with metal filler, sand smooth, de-grease and clean thoroughly. Prime bare sheet metal. Chemically pre-treat galvanized surfaces according to ASTM D2092. B. Apply 2 coats top quality, alkali resistant baking enamel and bake on conform to 1 CGSB 1-GP-88E, Type 2. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide all anchorage devices and attachments as required and install toilet partitions by anchoring securely to floor and walls. Hang doors and adjust hinges ' or doors to operate properly. Doors to hang open at rest except doors on handicap stalls which shall swing closed. ' 3.02 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturer's cleaning and maintenance procedures for pre-painted finished surfaces, and adjustment date for hardware for toilet partitions for inclusion in maintenance manuals. i t t 1 7100.10162.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10350 ' FLAGPOLES Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 QENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Excavating and Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 B. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03301 ' 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design flagpoles, bases and anchorage devices to resist minimum wind velocity of 145 km/hr unflagged, and 90 km/hr flagged. B. If requested by Consultant, furnish copies of structural calculations for review. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS ' A. Submit detailed shop drawings. Clearly indicate drawings dimensions, finishes, base jointing, anchoring, and support systems, cleats, halyard boxes, trucks, finials and base collar for flagpole. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Spiral wrap each flagpole with heavy kraft paper, wood strip and steel band, or polyethylene wrap and pack in tubing for shipment. B. Deliver flagpole in 2 pieces, if required, for shipping. ' C. Deliver anchor cage, bolts and lightning spike to site for setting in concrete by Division 3. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: .1 John Ewing & Co. Inc. ' 7100-10350.wpd DIVISION 10 , SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES Page 2 2.01 PRODUCTS (Cont'd) .2 Other manufacturers approved by Consultant. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel: weldable structural grade steel having required yield strength to meet design criteria specified. B. Aluminum: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063-T6 seamless extruded aluminum , tubing. 2.03 FLAG POLE FABRICATION ' A. Provide two (2) 10.670 metres high flagpoles complete with base, mounting brackets, anchorage, and fittings. B. Swaged sectional flagpole: Ewing model#STA-35 with 150 mm butt diameter and , 90 mm top diameter, minimum 4.064 mm thick T6063-T6 aluminum tubing: .1 Telescoped or stepped. .2 Join pipe sections of consecutively decreasing diameters. .3 Form tight shop and field joints between inserted sections with shrunk or closely telescoped fit attained by reducing diameter of outer section where required by hydraulic bell-die swaging. ' .4 Provide internal rest collar welded to inside of pipe for field joints. .5 Make joints air and watertight. .6 Finish shall be manufacturers standard clear brushed sateen aluminum ' brush finish. Do welding to appropriate CSA Standard, by welders certified by Canadian Welding Bureau. Finish exposed welds flush and smooth. 2.04 FITTINGS r A. Internal halyard system: Ewing "Econoline" consisting of revolving finial and cap, , neoprene or nylon covered stainless steel retaining loop and weight, stainless steel halyard, internal stop mechanism and flush lockable access door. Locate access door 1020 mm above pole base. B. Flagpole Base: Ewing#B5: fixed anchorage system consisting of: steel pole base and template base, hot dip galvanized SAE4145, anchorage cage and bolts, lightening rod, spun aluminum T6061 base cover matching pole finish. 7100-10350.wpd iDIVISION 10 SECTION 10350 iFLAGPOLES Page 3 i2.04 FITTINGS (Cont'd) C. Concrete anchors shall be galvanized steel with a minimum ultimate pull-out strength of 20,000 pounds complete with lightning spike, and anchorage cage. 2.05 INF ISHES A. Galvanized finish: hot dipped galvanizing with a minimum coating of 202 ounce/sq ft to CAN/CSA-G164-M92. B. Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components with clear anodic finish, in accordance with Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes: AA M10 C22 A41. C. Isolation Coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution. Shop ' apply to contact surfaces of dissimilar metals. ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Install flagpoles, base assembly and fittings to approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. iB. Do not weld field joints. If poles are shipped in sections, provide telescopic field joints requiring no bolts, pins or welds. C. Check and adjust installed fittings for smooth operation of halyards. i i 1 ' 7100-10350.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10800 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and/or manufacturers' data sheets and in sets in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract. B. Submit samples p s of washroom accessories, firnshes and fastening devices as required. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. General ' 1. The Contractor shall include in his Tender amount, a Cash Allowance for the supply of all washroom accessories. ' 2. The Owner will prepare a schedule of Washroom Accessories for tender by the Contractor. The washroom accessory supplier will become a normal sub- contractor to the General Contractor. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of all washroom accessories will be by Section 06200, and will be included in the Tender Price. ' B. Install washroom accessories securely with the concealed fasteners supplied by the respective accessory manufacturer in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers to the satisfaction of the consultant. 3.02 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS 1 A. At completion of project submit three copies of manufacturer's product data sheets showing size, capacity and operating instructions for each product specified herein. 7100-10800.wpd ' DIVISION 10 SECTION 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Pagel PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 ' B. Cabinet Work Section 06410 C. Flagpoles Section 10500 D. Washroom Accessories Section 10800 ' 1.03 19UBMITTALS ' A. Submit detailed shop drawings and where applicable complete colour charts or colour samples for each item specified herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Items specified herein shall be standard manufactured items, modified if required ' and as specified to suit conditions of this project. B. Fabricate work true to dimensions, square and plumb, to suit site conditions. ' C. Thickness of metals shall be adequate for the various conditions with requirements specified as a minimum. ' D. Finished work shall be free from warping, open seams, weld marks, rattles and other defects. Drilling shall be reamed and exposed edges finished smooth. ' E. Fastenings shall be concealed or theftproof type where possible. Exposed fastenings shall be neatly executed and shall be of the same material and finish as the base metal on which they occur. 7100-10950.wpd DIVISION 10 , SECTION 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Page 2 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions ' and recommendations. 3.02 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS A. Supply the following items and install where shown on Drawings, in accordance,, with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 1. Abrasive Stair Nosings: To be Wooster Products Inc., Type 231, extruded , 6063-T5 aluminum base with anti-slip filler consisting of minimum 65% virgin grain aluminum oxide/silicon carbide abrasive. Anchors shall be manufacturer's standard sure hold anchor. Nosings shall be 75 mm wide ' x 6 mm deep x length of stair tread less 3 mm. Colour of abrasive filler shall be selected by the Architect from full range of manufacturer's standards. ' 2. Eggcrate Lens: American Louvre of Canada Ltd. Type 15 white acrylic eggcrate louvres, 13 x 13 x 10 mm thick. Support trim to be maximum 13 , mm wide metal 'L' frame, white baked enamel finish. 1 7100-10950.wpd ' DIVISION 12 SECTION 12690 1 FOOT GRILLES AND MATS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. i1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 ' B. Quarry Tile Section 09330 ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings indicating size, location and details of each item. B. Submit duplicate copies full range of manufacturer's standard colours for selection by the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Items specified herein shall be standard manufactured items, modified if required and as specified to suit conditions of this project. B. Floor mats shall be Peditred Model 1550 A/LB recess mounted, abrasive tread, as manufactured by Construction Specialties Inc., Mississauga, Ontario or approved equal. C. Treads shall be factory bonded, two part epoxy containing aluminum oxide grit. Colour shall be selected by the Consultant from full range of manufacturer's standards. Treads shall be locked into 6063-T52 aluminum alloy, continuously ' hinged tread rails, at 50 mm cic. D. Frame shall be Style LB, 6063-T52 alloy continuous extruded aluminum frame complete with manufacturer's standard anchors and fasteners. 7100-12690.wpd DIVISION 12 ' SECTION 12690 FOOT GRILLES AND MATS Page 2 PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mats in maximum practical sizes. Field splices shall be kept to a , minimum. Where necessary, centre all splices between doors. B. Fabricate work true to dimensions, square and plumb, to suit site conditions. C. Thickness of metals shall be adequate for the various conditions with requirements specified as a minimum. , D. Finished work shall be free from warping, open seams, weld marks, rattles and other defects. Drilling shall be reamed and exposed edges finished smooth. , E. All fastenings shall be concealed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install floor grilles in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and ' recommendations. B. Install grilles with treads at right angles to traffic flow. ' C. Upon installation, protect floor grilles from construction traffic at all times for the duration of the project. , 3.03 SCHEDULE , A. Provide recessed floor grilles at the locations shown on the drawings. 7100-12690.wpd DIVISION 13 SECTION 13075 LOW EMISSIVITY CEILING SYSTEMS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' This Section of the contract includes all low emissivity ceilings called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Low emissivity ceiling system complete. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Structural Steel Section 05120 B. Electrical Division 16 C. Mechanical Division 15 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. Indicate material details, construction and accessory details. ' B. Supply for Consultant's review, duplicate samples of ceiling material, minimum 300 mm x 300 mm. ' 1.05 WARRANTY A. Entire ceiling systems shall be warranted against defects in material or workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of installation. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Low emissivity ceiling system shall be "Aluma-Zorb" as distributed by Bassai Limited, Burlington, Ontario (905) 319-9300. ' 7100-13075.wpd DIVISION 13 ' SECTION 13075 LOW EMISSIVITY CEILING SYSTEMS Page 2 2.02 MATERIALS ' A. Laminate -"Aluma-Zorb" laminate composed of 2/3 mil aluminum foil laminated with a special F.R. adhesive to a 2 mil embossed rigid vinyl film with a 5 x 5 fibreglass , scrim interposed for added strength. Emissivity of the aluminum facing shall not exceed 5%. Physical Properties: , Weight 0.5 oz/s.f. ' Tensile Strength M.D. 50 Win Panel Width (standard) 1372 mm Colour(exposed face) Silver Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Labelled. ' Foil Ex os d Vinyl Exposed Flame spread 10 15 Fuel Contributed 0 0 ' Smoke Developed 5 35 Temperature Resistance 12.22° C To 65.6° C ' B. Clamping Bars - each individual ceiling section shall be secured to a 4.76 mm O.D. Aircraft Cable suspension cable using rigid vinyl extrusion clip. C. Suspension System - Individual ceiling sections shall be supported by a suspension system consisting of lightweight galvanized or stainless aircraft cables 2.38 mm diameter plastic coated 4.76 mm O.D. 7 x 7 construction on approximately 1800 mm ' centres. Cables shall have a minimum breaking strength of 417 kg. Cables shall be secured at each end to elements of the building structure. Each cable shall be ' installed complete with one (1) turnbuckle to allow adequate tensioning. All cable connections shall be secured with minimum 2 clamps. Suspension cables shall be supported longitudinally at maximum 9144 mm c/c to reduce sag. 2.02 MATERIALS Where the Aluma-Zorb laminate terminates at a suspension cable, the cable shall be ' installed to reduce side deflections to maximum 50 mm. Use standard 2.38 mm PVC coated cable as above with appropriate be backs to building elements or by using 4.76 O.D. 7 x 19 plain galvanized aircraft cable properly tensioned. 7100-13075.wpd ' ' DIVISION 13 SECTION 13075 LOW EMISSIVITY CEILING SYSTEMS Page 3 ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Supply and install low'E' ceilings to the limits and profiles shown on the drawings. B. Laminate panels shall be overlapped minimum of 150 mm. C. Panels shall be tensioned so that overlapping edges are even and without appreciable gaps or sags. D. Slits shall be cut in the panels to accommodate obstructions such as lights, fans, etc. ' E. All edge cuts shall be supported by the adjacent panel or shall be taped with aluminum tape suitable for the service conditions. ' 7100-13075.wpd ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all dasherboard systems called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Supply and install arena boards and gates including removable board sections and casing of spectator side of boards (as shown on drawings). B. Supply and install tempered glass shields and aluminum glazing supports. C. Supply of base plates and anchors. D. Supply and install vertical lift machine gates. E. Supply and install players, penalty, timekeeper and goal judge boxes. F. Supply and install benches and timekeepers shelf including plastic coverings. G. Supply all anchor bolts for casting into concrete by others. H. Supply and install all structural steel supports. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 ' C. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 D. Painting Section 09900 E. Electrical Division 16 ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Submit layout of each ice surface showing dasherboards, gates, players and penalty ' boxes, removable panels and glass shields. C. Show and describe in detail all components of the work of this Section including large ' scale details of members and materials, of connection and jointing details and of anchorage devices. D. Submit a dimensioned layout drawing showing location of anchors and base plates to be set into concrete-apron slabs by another Section. ' 7100-13180.wpd DIVISION 6 ' SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 2 ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) E. Submit specifications and wiring diagrams for electric lift gate operators. F. Submit duplicate 300 mm x 300 mm samples of each colour of plastic surfacing materials. G. Submit maintenance manuals for installed system outlining all required maintenance , and cleaning procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of complete dasherboard system shall be by manufacturers own forces. ' B. A copy of the manufacturers printed installation instructions shall be kept on site for the duration of the work of this Section. C. System manufacturer shall have a minimum 5 years experience in the manufacture, design and installation of dasherboard systems. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in crates, with all seals and labels intact. Identify all materials with regards to locations and orientation. ' B. Store materials, under cover, in designated area on site. C. Store tempered glass arena shields vertically, on wood sleepers. Protect glass from work of other trades. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Guarantee that the entire work of this Section shall remain free of warping, twisting, , delamination, cracking, sagging of gates and other defects for a period of two years from the date of substantial completion. Guarantee glass arena shields against manufacturing defects and excessive breaking , under normal usage for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. Guarantee all electric operators and controls for lift gates for a period of 2 years from , the date of substantial completion. Provide a written guarantee to this effect. 7100-13180.wpd ' ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 3 1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. General: Use materials specified herein or approved equal. Equivalent products as manufactured by the following are acceptable: Crystalplex Bassai Proline B. Arena Boards: Complete interlocking, semi-removable, System 1100 dasherboard system as manufactured by Chrystaplex Plastics Ltd. or approved equal and ' consisting of the following: 1. Primary Framing System: 76 mm x 76 mm x 3.2 m HSS steel posts, CSA G40.21 M, Grade 300W, galvanized to CSA-G-164-M81, at nominally 1220 mm centres. Framing to receive one shop coat of grey primer to CGSB 1-GP-48W Marine for steel, 1 - 1.5 mils thick. Do not paint within 50 mm of welds. 2. 127 mm x 127 mm x 12.7 mm steel base plates with lug anchors, CSA I G40.21 M, Grade 300W. Anchors shall be 102 mm Nelson studs, 3 per base plate. Supply bolt down matching plates at removable sections. 3. Miscellaneous Steel Framing (doors, gates): Tubular steel, to CSA G40.21 M, Grade 300W, galvanized to ASTM A123. ' 4. Removable Board Sections and Removable Players Benches: Tubular, angle and channel framing and miscellaneous framing to be aluminum. Maximum section weight to be 90 kg. 5. Secondary Framing System: Wood framing, to CSA 0141, kiln dried and graded to NLGA Standard for Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. All lumber shall bear grade stamps: ' a) Framing: No. 2 Eastern Spruce or better, kiln dried. b) Preservative Treatment: CCA Wolmanized (pressure treated to CSA 080-M-83) Koppers Company Inc. and surface applied, Pentox (Green) by Osmose Pentox Inc. ' 6. Plywood Backer Panels: Douglas Fir waterproof exterior grade, to CSA 0121-M, 12.7 mm thick. ' 7100-13180.wpd DIVISION 6 ' SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' 7. Board Surfacing "Stay White" high density polyethylene board surfacing material, 12.7 mm thick x 1220 mm wide as manufactured by Chrystaplex Plastics Ltd., with coloured red and blue lines. ' 8. Backer panel surfacing: 10 mm high density polyethylene "Stay White" panels, integrally coloured, white. 9. Kick Band: 12.7 mm x 200 mm high, high density polyethylene, gold, top edge routed to 6 mm radius. ' 10. Sill Covers and Sill Band: 12.7 mm thick high density polyethylene, gold. Sill band to be 51 mm wide. ' 11. Thresholds: 25.4 mm thick x 152 mm wide solid high density chamfered at lift gates. Fasteners shall be countersink, 13 mm. 12. Arena Shield Supports: Solid Architectural grade extruded aluminum, 6351-T-6 alloy with Type 2C and 900 corner supports, aluminum safety caps and continuous PVC gaskets. "Mark V" system as supplied by Chrystaplex Plastics Ltd. Aluminum finish to be clear galvanized. 13. Base channel for arena shields shall be extruded, high impact plastic channel. 14. Arena Shields: Tempered float plate glass to CAN2-12.1-M79, Type 2, with ' ground "arena ready" edges and rounded corners. Heights as noted on drawings. All shields shall be 12.7 mm thick except at end zones and radii which shall be 15.9 mm thick. 15. Fasteners: Screws, nails, carriage bolts, locknuts and other hardware required for a complete installation and as supplied by Chrystaplex Plastics ' Ltd. All screws for fastening of plastic surfacing materials and trim shall be colour matched. Fasteners shall be hot dip galvanized to CSA G164 unless noted otherwise. Use shake free lock type fasteners at areas subject to ' extreme vibrations and deflections and at all removable board sections. 16. Gates: players gates (760 mm wide) access gates (914 mm wide) and machine gates (3048 mm wide) shall be of welded construction consisting of 75 x 75 x 3 mm and/or 51 x 102 x 3 mm galvanized vertical and horizontal members. ' 7100-13180.wpd ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 5 ' 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) 17. Hardware: ' 1. All metal hardware is to be plated or galvanized. 2. Player and Access Gate hinges are to be 10 gauge steel, continuous piano type on gates without glass. Lift-off self lubricating pin type hinges are to be used on Player and Access Gates with glass. ' 3. Machine Gate hinges are to be heavy duty adjustable hinges. 4. Player and Access Gate latches are to be 10 x 51 mm flat bar, easily opened with a gloved hand with a downward movement. 5. Ice-side release mechanisms shall be installed on all Player and Access Gates with glazing. 6. Heavy duty spring loaded, phenolic tired, adjustable casters are to be equipped on each leaf of doors over 1219 mm in width. ' 7. Closure bars are to be sliding type, manufactured form 50 mm diameter schedule 80 pipe brackets mounted on opposite leaf. Handle on closure bar is to turn down to avoid excessive protrusions on back of Dashers. Two closure bars per gate are to be used. 8. All fasteners are to be zinc plated. Fasteners are to be colour matched where necessary. 9. Fasteners for horizontal stringers are to be vibration resistant reamer tek screws 65 mm long. 10. Cane Bolts are to be used at the base of each leaf of the Machine Gate to secure the Machine Gate in place. 18. Lift Gates: Where shown on drawings, provide vertical lift machine gates, complete with all framing, tracks, counter weights and hardware required for a complete installation. Gates shall be raised and lowered by an electric motor drive with a manual chain hoist. Motor shall be 1/2 HP, 3 phase, ' 110/1/160(min.)or as required to provide long term, dependable operation of gate as designed and installed by supplier. 19. Players, Penalty and Timekeepers Boxes: 1. Interior finish of boxes is to be of similar construction as ice-side of Dasherboards, utilizing 10 m "Stay White" over 13 mm plywood underlay. Framing is to be similar construction as dasherboards. 2. "Stay White" high impact, integrally coloured, high density ' polyethylene 13 mm thick shall be installed on the back side of the ice side dashers to form a water bottle shelf. This shelf is to be equal in height to the middle stringer of the dasherboard frame. 3. Players boxes are to be 914 mm long by 1720 mm deep. Access via two gates per box on ice side. ' 7100-13180.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 6 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' 4. Penalty boxes are to be 2440 mm long by 1720 mm deep. Access via one gate on ice side. , 5. Timekeepers box is to be 1820 mm long by 1720 mm deep. Access via one gate on spectator or penalty box side. 20. Players, Penalty Benches and Timekeepers Table: 1. Player and Penalty bench construction is as follows: a) benches shall be 8.53 m long in players boxes and full width ' of the penalty box. b) benches are to be a nominal 235 mm deep and 508 mm ' above the finished floor. c) benches to be 38 x 240 mm natural polyethylene benches for players and penalty boxes. Bench supports are to be 63 ' x 63 x 3 mm tube sliding into 75 x 75 x 6 mm sockets under floor. Bench is to be 600 mm from back of dashers to centre of bench. d) bench supports are to be constructed of 76 x 76 x 3 mm galvanized HSS uprights and 38 x 38 x 5 mm horizontal galvanized angle. e) the tube supports will not exceed 2032 mm on centre and will be attached to the bench with 10 mm carriage bolts (4 per plate) and 10 mm lock nuts. f) tube supports are to be mounted to removable brackets in sockets in the raised flooring or permanently secured to the finished floor. ' g) all hardware is to be plated or galvanized. 2. Timekeepers table shall be constructed with 25 mm polyethylene supported by three wall mounted, removable angle brackets. r 21. Goal Frames: 1. Professional style goat frames are to be 870 mm deep complete , with knotless nets. Upper, lower and centre absorption pads are to be provided. Ballistic nylon net protectors are to be provided. 7100-13180.wpd ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 7 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) 22. Safety Netting: ' 1. End zone safety netting is to be 31 x 31 mm fire retardant white mesh with edges bound and grommetted. Net is to enclose end zone from end of both radii, extending 152 mm below the top of ' aluminum glazing supports and suspended to underside of structural steel using 3 mm aircraft cable and turnbuckles. 2.02 LIFT GATES A. Support Framing: ' 2. Vertical channel on each side of opening is to be c 10 x 15.3 x 6.1 m long, supported at top to structural steel and wall. When installation is more than 1800 mm from wall, horizontal cross bracing is to be added. 3. Vertical roller guide angle welded to face of C10 channel. Angle is to be 37 x 37 x 6 mm, 6.1 m long. 4. Horizontal spreader bars at top and middle location are to be 75 x 75 x 3.2 mm HSS. 5. Safety locking device bolted to channel is to lock door in either up or down position. 1 B. Gate Frame: 1. Gate Frame is to be steel construction consisting of 6 horizontal stringers; top, middle, and bottom at front and back. Stringers are to be 37 x 75 x 3.2 mm HSS. End plates are to be 6 x 300 mm flat bar. C. Counter Weights: 1. Counter-weight assembly is to be constructed of base weights welded to ' weight adjustment tubes which ride inside the vertical channels. 2. Four 12 gauge cold rolled steel two-piece counter weight covers are to be provided. 3. Ten V-groove roller wheels are to be used to guide door and cables. 4. Cable is to be 6 mm aircraft style. 5. Wound springs are not to be used to balance the door. D. Hand Operated Chain Hoist: 1. Chain hoist is to be mounted at top of channel and connected to a sprocketed shaft with roller drum. Chain hoist as manufactured by Lynx Industries. 7100-13180.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 8 2.02 LIFT GATES (Confd) , E. Electric Operator: 1. Electric Operator is to be model HDC Industrial Jackshaft type as manufactured by Lynx Industries. 2. Motor is to be % HP, 115 or 230 V.A.C. single phase. ' 3. Button control is to allow door to be stopped in any position and move up or down with three button control. 4. Precision micro limit switches are to control upward and downward movement. Switches are to be easily adjusted without tools. , 5. Operator is to be equipped with a solenoid brake to prevent door from coasting. 6. Operator is to be equipped with a disconnected device linked to a manual chain hoist. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ' A. Supply, to Division 3, base plates for installation in concrete apron slabs. Setting of base plates shall be done under the direct supervision of a representative of the dasherboard manufacturer. Supply all necessary templates and instructions to ensure a satisfactory installation. The dasherboard manufacturer will be responsible for the base plate layout on the concrete forms prior to pouring concrete. B. Maintain a minimum temperature of 16 deg. C during installation of plastic board surfacing materials. Allow for expansion and contraction of plastic materials in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. C. Work shall be fabricated and erected square, plumb and true, straight, level and , accurately fitted to size detailed on reviewed Shop Drawings. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. Exposed work shall be finished smooth and even, close joints and neat connections. Exposed welds continuous for full length of joints. ' D. Grind all field welds smooth, touch up shop coat of prime paint where damaged by field erection. E. Wood framing shall be dressed to size prior to delivery to the site. F. Bottom stringers and all vertical wood framing members shall be preservative pressure treated in accordance with CSA 080-1974 for a minimum average dry salt retention of 6.4 kg/cu m, after being dressed to size and prior to delivery to site. , All field cuts shall receive one coat of surface applied Pentox (Green). 7100.13180.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 ' DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 9 3.01 GENERAL (Cont'd) G. Treat edges and bottom 600 mm of all plywood dasherboard sheathing with 2 coats of surface applied Pentox (Green). H. All exposed edges of board surfacing materials shall be chamfered, rounded, 1 ground or otherwise machined for safety. 3.02 DASHERBOARDS A. Erect dasherboard system including goal judge, player's, penalty and timekeepers boxes complete in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. B. Install steel upright posts, welded to base plates. Framing shall be plumb. C. Fasten wood framing to posts using 9.5 mm cadmium plated carriage bolts and nylon insert lock washers. Joints of horizontal stringers shall be staggered. Install vertical framing at official lines. D. At curved sections, stringers shall consist of 2 layers 19 mm thick No. 2 spruce or better. E. Provide vertical, bevelled wood jambs at man gates, fastened to steel framing with 9.5 mm cadmium plates carriage bolts and nylon lock nuts. ' F. Inside surface of players benches shall be constructed of 12.7 mm plywood backup with 10 mm "Stay White"finish. SG. Fasten wood sill plate to stringers using 89 mm long Ardox spiral plated common nails at 200 mm c/c. All joints in sill plates shall be bevelled 45 deg. Accurately scribe sill and cut to match curve of boards. H. Fasten board surfacing materials, including official lines, kick band, sills, bench covers and shelf cover to wood framing using colour matched fasteners. Set fasteners flush using tools recommended by the manufacturer. Allow for expansion and contraction in surfacing materials. Official lines shall be flush and shall interrupt the "Stay White" surface completely. Offset vertical goal lines 1.6 1 mm towards centre of ice surface at kick plates and sill bands. The flat top surface of the sill and 50 mm down the face of the dasherboards on ' the spectator side shall be encased in 5.6 mm thick plastic material secured with colour matched fastenings. Colour of sill to Owner's selection. 7100-13160.wpd r DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 10 , 3.02 DASHERBOARDS (Cont'd) , I. Install Stay White surfacing material to inside surfaces of players, penalty and timekeepers boxes, including gates. Install plywood backing on spectator side of dasherboards where shown on the drawings. , J. Removable panels shall be interlocking type with matching end protrusions and notches. Steel support posts shall be bolted to base plates. Vertical ends of r removable panels shall be bolted to adjacent fixed or removable sections. 3.03 BENCHES AND TIMEKEEPERS SHELF r A. Fabricate benches of hardwood (maple) and as shown on drawings. Players ' benches to be detailed and fabricated to be removable as shown on drawings. B. Fabricate shelf of 19 mm plywood as shown on drawings. 3.04 GATES , A. Fabricate gates with welded tubular steel framing, 76 x 76 x 3.2 mm. Provide horizontal framing at location of gate latch. B. Bevel edge of ate and jamb at latch side of ate. Allow minimum 10 mm r 9 9 1 9 clearance. C. Install polypropylene thresholds at all gates, fastened to concrete with plated, ' countersunk screws and expansion shields. D. Install and adjust hardware. Drill concrete apron slab and install cane bolt sleeves, set in non-shrink grout. Lockable cane bolt shall secure all gates in the open position. r 3.05 LIFT GATES ' A. Fabricate lift gates with welded tubular steel sections, to sizes shown on drawings. Provide framing as necessary to prevent twisting and warping of gates. B. Install steel track, guide assembly, counterweight box with inspection panel including connection to structure above and bracing. Connections to structure shall be bolted, with slotted connections to accommodate movement. ' C. All necessary appurtenances such as metal plates and angles for bracing and mounting of operators shall be supplied and installed under this Section. 7100-13180.wpd 1 DIVISION 6 SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 11 ' 3.05 LIFT GATES (Cont'd) D. Complete wiring and installation of the electric operators is part of the work. ' 1. Complete wiring from local disconnect switch to operator. ' 2. Complete wiring from limit switches from door to operator. 3. Complete wiring of operator including provision of additional transformers or other required accessories. 4. Complete wiring of three button controls to operator. ' 5. Provision of three dry contacts which are closed when the door is open. One contact transfer at fully open, one transfers at approximately 3 feet open and the other transfers near the closed position. E. Chain Hoists: Hand chain hoist shall be provided on all lift gates. The hoist shall be constructed of galvanized steel. The speed reduction mechanism shall consist of two sprockets and roller chain. Provide galvanized hand chains of the appropriate length. Hand chain hoist shall be co-ordinated with electric or pneumatic operators. F. Gate shall fit snugly at jambs and shall operate smoothly under all conditions. Gate shall sit in any position in opening and shall not drift upward or downward. ' G. Adjust the gates and operators to ensure smooth dependable operation. H. Provide emergency stop for gate in case of lifting mechanism failure. Provide 'lock ropen'device for locking gate in open position for extended periods. Comply to all requirements of the Ontario Ministry of Labour Industrial Safety Act. 3.06 R M V B E DASHERBOARD SECTIONS ' A. Detail removable sections in all locations shown on drawings. Sections to be removable by simple bolt removal. Co-ordinate removable section sizes to conform to standard glass sizes specified. Provide access panels and lifting lugs for each 1 man handling. B. Maximum weight of removable sections to be 90 kg (200 lb.). C. Supply and install removable players benches complete with plugs to insert in base plates when seating removed. 7100-13180.wpd DIVISION 6 ' SECTION 13180 DASHERBOARD SYSTEMS Page 12 , 3.07 GLASS SHIELDS AND SUPPORT SYSTEM , A. Layout glass shields to minimize number of sizes required. A maximum of 3 sizes of each thickness and height will be permitted. All glass sizes will be to the Owner's approval. Provide glass shields as shown on the drawings. ' B. Install aluminum support framing in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. C. Cut snug fitting contoured openings in the finished sill and secure support framing ' with lag screws and wood blocking to the middle stringer of the dasherboards. All comers of such supports shall be rounded and they shall be without fastenings or, protrusions of any kind. Where the shields fit into the retaining groove of the supports, plastic cushioning channels shall be provided. The shields shall fit along their bottom edge into a PVC plastic channel. Where shield supports occur at ' end-of-runs, such as players boxes, they shall be provided with sponge rubber protection 'bumpers'. D. Fasten continuous plastic channel to finished sill. i E. Install tempered plate float glass shields into support system. Provide PVC gaskets at all supports. F. At timekeepers benches, provide glass shields with 100 mm diameter "speak , holes", located 1680 mm above refrigerated slab surface on front panel and 1300 mm above floor slab on side panels (penalty boxes). G. Provide additional support framing and shields on each side of the timekeepers box ' (between timekeeper and penalty box) to allow the timekeeper to open and close the penalty box doors. H. Supply two (2) sections of each glass size provided for Owner's future use. 3.08 CLEAN UP , A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all scrap materials from the ' site and leave premises in a neat and tidy condition. B. Wipe down plastic surfacing materials and clean all marks in accordance with the , manufacturers directions. C. Clean glass in accordance with manufacturers directions. , D. Provide protection to finished dasherboard system until building is handed over to the Owner. Cover plastic board surfacing materials with heavy kraft paper. 7100-13180.wpd , 1 1 ' ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON LKM #97309 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 INDEX SECTION TITLE PAGES ' Supplementary Bid Form 4 15050 Basic Mech. Materials & Methods 34 15240 Sound and Vibration Control 4 15250 Mechanical Insulation 8 15330 Sprinklers 7 15400 Inside Plumbing & Drainage 7 (Fixture List) 15490 Outside Plumbing & Drainage 7 15850 Heating,Ventilating& 31 Airconditioning r t DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 1 PART1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.5 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.6 DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.7 CODES AND REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.8 CERTIFICATES AND FEES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.9 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.10 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT 5 1.11 WORKSHOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.13 LIABILITY INSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.14 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.15 _CO-ORDINATION OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING 7 1.17 WORKMANSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ' 1.18 CONTRACTORS SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS 9 1.20 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.21 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.22 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.23 TEMPORARY HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.24 DATA BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT 11 1.26 DIRECTORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.27 CLEAN UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.28 GUARANTEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ' 2.1 THERMOMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.3 FILTER GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.4 STRAINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 AIR VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.6 PIPE SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ' 2.7 PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.8 ACCESS DOORS 15 2.9 MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - ii 1 ARTICLE NAME PAGE 1 2.10 STARTERS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.1 PIPE EXPANSION AND ANCHORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1 3.2 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.5 INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1 3.6 INSTALLATION OF AIR VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.7 HEADERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.8 CONCRETE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1 3.9 SUPPORTS AND BASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.10 INSERTS AND FASTENINGS . . . . . . . . . 20 3.11 SLEEVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1 3.12 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.13 COUPLING AND BELT GUARDS 23 3.14 DISSIMILAR METALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 1 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.16 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.17 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1 3.18 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.19 PAINTING . 26 3.20 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1 3.21 TESTING AND BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.22 AIR BALANCING 31 3.23 TEMPORARY SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 1 3.24 STANDARD SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 i 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 REFERENCE 1. The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements ' and/or Addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. ' 1.2 INTENT 1. This Section applies to all Sections of Division 15. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1. Comply with Section 01300 and specific additional requirements of Sections in Division 15. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Painting of exposed piping, ductwork and unfinished mechanical equipment - under Division 9. Painting of natural gas piping - under Division 15. 2. Concrete work required for the supports and bases for mechanical equipment - under Division 15. Division 15 shall provide all supports, brackets, stands and ' platforms required for the proper installation of its equipment and work as per manufacturers requirements. 3. Backfilling for piping inside the building and under paved areas outside the building from 300mm (12") above pipe - under Division 2. Backfilling around all piping and to 300mm (12") above pipe - under Division 15. Excavation for all piping (inside and outside the building) and all backfilling for piping outside the building not under paved areas - under Division 15. ' 1.5 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1. Tender price shall be based only on equipment specifically mentioned by name ' in the specifications, that is on 'Base Bid" equipment or on "Named Alternate" equipment. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 2 2. In the event that the tender price is based on any of the "Named Alternate" equipment, mark in the "Named Alternate" manufacturers in the appropriate space in the Tender Form. If no choice is indicated in the Tender Form, 'Base ' Bid" equipment shall be supplied. 3. For the purposes of these specifications and tender documents, the following , definitions shall apply: 4. 'Base Bid" - equipment or manufacturer shall be that named first in the ' specifications for any material or equipment; or equipment or manufacturer specifically described as 'Base Bid" equipment in the Specifications. 5. "Named Alternate" - equipment or manufacturer shall be that named second, ' third, etc., in the specifications, or equipment or manufacturer specifically described as "Alternate" equipment. 6. Materials not specified herein as to manufacture, quality, etc., shall be supplied of high commercial standard of quality, new and of uniform pattern. Used materials or equipment will not be accepted. 7. In case materials or equipment specified are unavailable, clearly state in the Tender the alternative material and/or equipment and price used in compiling ' the Tender. 1.6 DRAWINGS , 1. The drawings accompanying this specification are to be considered as diagrammatic only and do not show all the structural and construction details. Any information involving measurements of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings and at the building site. Make without additional charge any necessary changes or additions to the runs to ' accommodate structural conditions. 2. The drawings and these specifications shall be considered an integral part of the Contract Documents. Neither the drawings nor the specifications shall be , used alone. Misinterpretation of any requirements of either plans or specifications shall not change the requirements or intent of the specifications for proper completion of the work to the full approval of the Consultant. , DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 3 3. The drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by the pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., which are to be installed under this contract. ' Where the required conduit work, piping, ductwork, etc., is not shown on the plans or only shown diagrammatically, these shall be installed as tight as possible to structural members, concrete, ceilings and walls to interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. 4. The location of pipes, ducts, outlets and other equipment may be altered by the Consultant without charge to the Owner, provided the change is made ' before installation and the new location is within 3m of the original location. 5. Be responsible for the detailed layout of work with respect to the building ' structure and to other piping, ducts, conduit, etc. If required in certain sections, produce field drawings to show relative positions of various services and have these approved before work is proceeded with. ' 6. Consult with the Consultant and obtain detailed drawings and instructions for the exact location of equipment, and before the installation of fixtures and equipment.which .may interfere with the interior treatment of the building. 7. The listing hereinafter of any article, material, operation or method requires that each item listed be provided of the quality and subject to the qualifications noted. Perform each operation prescribed according to the conditions stated, providing therefor all necessary labour, equipment and incidentals. 8. The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other so that any details shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or ' vice versa, shall be executed in the same manner as if contained in the specifications and shown on the drawings. 9. Should any discrepancy appear between these specifications and the drawings ' to cause doubt as to the true meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications, a ruling shall be obtained from the Consultant before submitting the tender. If this is not done it will be assumed that the more expensive ' alternative has been included in the contract. 10. Any error or inconsistency in the drawings or specifications noted after award of contract must be reported to the Consultant before commencing work. 11. The omission or incorrect mention of work, materials, etc. that are indispensable to the completed work, is not to be interpreted as relieving of the necessity of providing such work, materials, etc. at no expense to the Owner. t DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 -4 12. The layout of the mechanical systems in the mechanical rooms and roof t mounted equipment is necessarily based upon one manufacturer's physical dimensions. In substituting equipment of different physical characteristics, ' submit shop drawings for approval, indicating the proposed layout and piping connections. 1.7 CODES AND REGULATIONS , 1. The whole of the work specified herein and on the Drawings shall comply strictly with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. The Electrical Safety Code, the Building Code as amended to date, and any additional requirements of the Electrical Utility, Gas Utility, Ontario Water Resources Commission Regulations respecting Plumbing and codes, Fire Marshall , regulations and by-laws of other jurisdictional authorities.form an integral part of this specification, and are the minimum requirements. Where the drawings or specifications call for piping, equipment, devices, wiring sizes or methods exceeding the minimum requirements of such codes, the drawings and specifications shall be followed. In case of doubt as to the interpretation of the codes, the local Electrical Inspector, Plumbing Inspector, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector, etc. shall be consulted and his decision shall be final. 2. Before starting any work, submit the required number of copies of the Drawings and Specifications to all authorities and utilities and obtain their approval. The Consultant shall be notified immediately of any changes requested before installation. Any work installed before approval is obtained from the above authorities shall be corrected without charge. Prepare and submit any additional drawings which may be required by Utilities. 1.8 CERTIFICATES AND FEES ' 1. Give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all necessary permits, and ' inspections required for the work herein specified. Pay all fees for examination of drawings and specifications. Furnish any certificates required as evidence that the work installed conforms with the laws and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction. ' 2. This shall apply to Electrical Inspection, Gas Inspection, Heating Inspection, Plumbing Inspection, Pressure Vessel, Piping and Boiler Inspection, Government, Municipal and Public Utilities and all other such bodies. 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 5 3. On completion of the work obtain final unconditional certificates of approval by all utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. All final certificates of approval shall be delivered to the Consultant before final payment is made. 4. Arrange and pay for all tests of the work. 1 1.9 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS 1. Upon completion of the project, present to the Consultant a signed statement 1 to the effect that all tests have been carefully carried out as required by the specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations and that the equipment and installations have been inspected by all jurisdictional ' authorities. 1.10 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT 1. Protect finished and unfinished own work and work of other contractors from damage due to own operations. Cover floors and other parts of the building with tarpaulins, etc. Repair all damage to floor surfaces or other parts of the building resulting from the carrying out of this work. ' 2. All.material damaged by weather or through negligence shall be removed and replaced with new material. 3. During freezing weather, protect all material in such a manner that no harm can be done to the installation already made and/or materials and equipment on the job. 4. Store all material and equipment neatly and out of the way. 5. Securely plug or cap all open ends of pipes, ducts, conduits and equipment to prevent obstructions during construction. 1.11 WORKSHOP 1. Provide temporary buildings for field office, workshop, tools and material storage as may be required for own use and be responsible for any loss or damage thereto. Temporary buildings shall be of a type approved by the Consultant and located as directed by him. Temporary buildings shall be removed after completion of work as directed by Consultant. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 6 1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER ' 1. Temporary light, power and water will be provided under Division 1. Provide all necessary extension cords, lamps, hoses, etc. for own use. 1.13 LIABILITY INSURANCE 1. Maintain such insurance as will fully protect the Owner and the Contractor from any and all claims under the Workmen's Compensation Act and all insurance as noted in the Instructions to Tenderers. ' 1.14 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS 1. Before submitting tender for this work, examine the site, local services and , local conditions, Electrical Drawings, Mechanical Drawings, Structural Drawings, and Architectural Drawings to ascertain that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown on these Drawings and as herein specified. Before commencing work examine the work of the other trades and report at once:any defect or,interference affecting the work of this section or the guarantee of same. No extra will subsequently be allowed to cover any such error, omission and/or oversight for not having made a thorough inspection of the grounds, existing conditions, drawings, and specifications. ' 2. Existing building shall be kept operational at all times. Provide for temporary gas, water piping and other connections as required to suit. Arrange with gas company and public utilities to provide temporary water meter, gas meter to relocate existing water meter room and gas service. Provide for off-hour work to make temporary connections. ' 1.15 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK 1. Assume full responsibility for layout of own work so as not to conflict with other ' trades and also for damage caused to other's work by improper location or carrying out of own work. 2. Arrange work in co-operation with other trades in such a manner as not to interfere with other work being carried on and co-ordinate layout of work with other trades to get all pipework, wiring, conduits, ductwork, etc., installed to the ' best advantage. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 7 t3. Assume full responsibility for the prompt installation of wiring, conduits, pipes, ducts, equipment and sleeves in advance of the work of other trades as 1 required. 4. Where any equipment supplied under this Section must be built in with the ' work of other Sections such as Masonry, Plastering or Concrete, supply the equipment to be built in, provide templates, anchors, sleeves, bolts and measurements to allow the installation of these in the proper sequence. 5. Confer and co-operate with all other trades in order to eliminate any unnecessary delay to any work being done under this Contract. ' 6. Submit composite drawings of crowded locations where there is possibility of conflict with the work of other trades. Indicate exact locations and elevations of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from field measurement. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 Refer to and be governed by specification Division 1. 2. Should any cutting and repairing of either unfinished or finished work be required due to failure of this trade to advise of or install equipment or sleeves on time, such cutting and patching shall be carried out by the trade affected and Division 15 shall pay all costs of such work. 1.17 WORKMANSHIP 1. Only first class workmanship will be accepted not only regarding the best accepted standard practices, safety, accessibility, durability, etc., but also regarding neatness of detail. Pipes shall be installed true to line and grade. All pipework, conduit, and ducts must be aligned parallel and at right angles to the building walls. Equipment must be accurately set, plumbed and levelled and hanger rods must be aligned vertically. The entire work shall present a neat and clean appearance on completion. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 8 i 2. Where possible, pipes, ducts, conduit and wiring are to be concealed in ceiling spaces, furred spaces, pipe spaces, walls, trenches, etc., except they shall be run exposed in the boiler and equipment rooms, or where specifically noted on the drawings. They shall be installed neatly and closely to the building structure so that the necessary furring, etc., is kept as small as possible. Where pipes, ducts, conduits and other equipment are exposed, they shall be installed as close as possible to building structure, ceilings and walls. Provide all offsets for this purpose at own expense, whether shown or not shown on drawings. 3. Any conduits, pipes, ducts or other work which is not, in the opinion of the Consultant, installed as it should be, shall be taken out and replaced without cost to the Owner. ' 1.18 CONTRACTORS SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Submit for review eight copies of detail drawings showing equipment and systems before ordering same and immediately after the award of the contract. 2. Submit eight copies of typed sheets, catalogue sheets, or illustrations, giving suppliers and catalogue numbers for such items as valves, traps, expansion joints, hangers, switches, types of thermal insulation for all services and any , other standard catalogue items. 3. These will be reviewed by the Consultant and returned. No allowance will be made later if equipment is condemned at the site because of failure to observe this instruction. 4. The Consultant reserves the right to reject any material or apparatus which, in his opinion, does.not conform with the requirements of the Specifications. 5. Notify Consultant in writing if shop drawings differ from Consultant's design ' drawings in any respect. Certify shop drawings that they have been checked and agree with Consultant's drawings and Specifications. Assume all responsibility for errors made on shop drawings or for changes made from ' Consultant's drawings and specifications, unless such changes were set out in written notification to Consultant. r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 9 r 6. Review is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not indicate approval of the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Section submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Section of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. Be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all other Sections. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS 1. Mark in coloured ink on a set of whiteprints, which will be provided, every change and deviation from runs of piping, ductwork, conduit and other services from where shown on drawings, so that on completion of the job the record drawings shall indicate the exact location of all services as actually installed. Record drawings shall be kept at the site and shall be kept up to date as the work progresses. Submit completed record drawings before final certificate of job acceptance is issued. 2. Dimension locations of buried drains, pipes, duct, conduit, tanks, pads, ' manholes etc. to building column centres or other fixed reference points. Also mark in location of all access doors. 3. In addition to the whiteprints, prepare and submit one set of transparencies of the record drawings. 4. Acceptance of record drawings by the Consultant does not constitute a guarantee by the Consultant of their accuracy, nor does the acceptance by the Consultant remove the Contractor's responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be on the record drawings. 1.20 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS 1. Samples shall be submitted to the Consultant for his approval before ordering such items as name plates, tags, valves, thermostats, grilles, diffusers, etc., and other repetitive materials where finish or detail can be better examined by sample. All materials used for the work shall be fully equal to the samples as approved. i r r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 10 1.21 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS 1. All equipment, materials, controls, wiring and wiring devices, etc., supplied shall conform to the CSA, HEPC, CGA & ASME requirements for the purposes for which they are to be used, and shall bear a CSA or CGA approval label. 2. Special equipment which does not have a standard CSA or CGA label shall be i inspected by the Special Inspection Department of the HEPC and the Approval Certificate shall be submitted to the Consultant as soon as possible. 1.22 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE , 1. It is understood and agreed that the temporary or trial usage by the Owner of 1 any mechanical device, electrical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or any other work or material supplied under this Section before final completion and written acceptance by the Consultant, is not to be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same by the Owner and it is further understood and agreed that the Owner shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage as soon as the Contractor shall claim that the said work is complete and in accordance with the drawings and specifications, and for such reasonable length of time as the Consultant shall deem to be sufficient for making a complete and thorough test of same and that no claim for damage will be ' made by the Contractor for the injury to, or breaking of any parts of such work which may be so used whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective material or workmanship of any kind whatsoever. 2. Should the Contractor feel that the equipment is being abused, improperly used or maintained, he shall advise the Consultant immediately. Verbal advice shall be followed up in writing, otherwise subsequent claims for damage will not be considered. 2.23 TEMPORARY HEATING i 1. All temporary heating required while the building is under construction will be provided under Division 1. i 2. The permanent pumps, convectors, unit heaters, etc., may be used for temporary heating, providing this equipment is installed in its permanent location and providing that the building is completely closed in and clean. Approval must be obtained from the Consultant for use of such equipment. r DIVISION 1.5 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 11 r 3. Fans and air systems may not be used for temporary heat except with permission and specific instructions from the Consultant. 4. Be responsible for the operation, care and maintenance of the permanent heating system when used for temporary heating. At the completion of the job and prior to the final acceptance all permanent heating equipment used for temporary heating shall be thoroughly cleaned and put in first class operating condition and appearance to the approval of the Consultant. All damaged equipment piping, etc., shall be replaced to the approval of the Consultant. Replace unit filters and steam clean all coils after construction is completed. 5. Give all necessary instructions for proper operation of the permanent heating system used for temporary heating. 6. In the event of construction and alterations to the existing heating system proceeding during the heating season, heating shall be maintained throughout the structure at all times. Provide all temporary piping and wiring, or temporary protective measures, required to maintain heating. l1.24 DATA BOOK 1. Bind within hard-covered, loose-leaf binders, two complete sets of manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions showing all major mechanical equipment and systems. Include shop drawings, detail drawings and operating curves. Instructions shall be complete for installation, operation and maintenance. Spare part suppliers, lists and addresses shall be included. Instructions shall be reviewed with the operating personnel to ensure a thorough understanding of the equipment and its operation. Include copy of the Valve Chart. 1.25 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT 1. Where it is indicated that equipment is to be installed in future, leave adequate space for such future equipment and install the piping, conduits, ducts and r other work in such a way that future equipment installations and connections can be made. Consult with the representative of the Consultant whenever necessary for the purpose. r r r r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 12 1.26 DIRECTORIES 1. Prepare diagrams of the major piping systems including chillers, antifreeze systems, compressors, cooling towers, boilers, pumps, air supply units, etc. Prepare diagrams of air supply and exhaust systems identifying the respective fans and locations being supplied and exhausted. Three framed copies of both the water and the air system diagrams shall be delivered to the Consultant. 1.27 CLEAN UP 1. All material shall be stored neatly and out of the way. Clean up daily all refuse caused by work. 2. On completion of the work remove from the premises all tools, debris, surplus and waste materials resulting from operations under this Section. Clean all fixtures and equipment and leave all items in perfect order ready for operation. 1.28 GUARANTEE 1. Before final payment is made, guarantee all materials and workmanship supplied in the performance of this contract, for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Consultant and, when called upon, make good without further charge any such defects as may appear within this period. Before final payment is made, test the operation of all equipment installed and regulate all balancing and control equipment, lubricate all mechanical equipment, etc., and demonstrate to the Consultant or his representative that all equipment is operating as intended, without undue noise and vibration. The period of this guarantee shall in no way supplant any other guarantee or warranties of longer period, but shall be binding on all other work not otherwise covered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOMETERS 1. Thermometers shall be Trerice BX or BX9 Series, 200mm (8") scale with brass separable sockets. Sockets to have extension necks for pipes with insulation. For air ducts use perforated stems. 2. Thermometers shall be Trerice, Taylor or Weksler. t DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 13 I2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES 1. Pressure gauges shall be 11 5m diameter Trerice No. 600. Pressure gauges shall be complete with 2.0 MPa isolating valve and shall suit fluid pressure measured. Steam gauges shall be complete with syphons. Gauges installed in pump suction and discharge pipes shall have Impulse Dampeners, Trerice No. 870 or approved equal. 2. Pressure gauges shall be Trerice, Ashcroft, Winters, U.S. Gauge. 2.3 FILTER GAUGES 1. Filter gauges shall be dial type magnehelic gauges. Filter gauges shall have sufficient range for all types of filters and sufficient tubing for a proper installation. 2. Filter gauges shall be Dwyer or Airflow Developments. I2.4 STRAINERS 1. Pipe strainers shall be Y-type and basket type strainers as shown and shall be selected for 100% of pump capacity. 2. Screen perforations and working pressure shall be suitable for the systems in which they are installed. 3. Strainers shall have monel screens and shall be reinforced when installed on pump sections. 4.. Y-type strainers shall be self cleaning and installed with 25mm (1") hose end valve on blow-off connection. 5. Strainers up to 50mm (2") shall be screwed and for sizes 60mm (2 1/4") and over shall be flanged. 6. All strainers connected to steel pipe and to copper pipe 60mm (2 1/4") and larger shall have cast iron bodies. All strainers connected to copper pipe 50mm (2") and smaller shall have bronze bodies. 7. Strainers shall be Sarco, Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Taco or Atlas. 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15050'- BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 14 i 2.5 AIR VENTS 1. Automatic air vents shall be Sarco Type 13 WN air trap. 2.6 PIPE SUPPORTS 1. Use Myatt Fig. No. 124 or Grinnell Fig. No. 260 clevis hangers. For cold ' insulated piping hanger shall be sized for the O.D. of the insulation and shall be provided with a protection shield, Myatt Fig. No. 251 or Grinnell Fig. No. 167. For insulated hot piping the lower strap of the hanger shall be longer to t place the horizontal rod outside the insulation - Myatt Fig. No. 124L or Grinnell Fig. No. 300. 2. Where hanger rods are too short to accommodate the axial movement due to thermal expansion, use Myatt Fig. No. 258 or Grinnell Fig. No. 174 hangers for pipes up to and including 125mm (5") size and Myatt Fig. No. 261 or Grinnell Fig. No. 171 for larger pipes. Include protection shields specified previously for cold insulated pipes. Include pipe covering protection saddles Myatt Fig. No. 210-240 or Grinnell Fig. No..160-165 for hot insulated pipes. Use similar heavy duty and extra heavy duty hangers where loads imposed exceed the capacity of the previously specified hangers, e.g. Myatt Fig. No. 125. 3. Vertical piping shall be supported using wrought iron pipe clamps, anchored to the concrete slab, Myatt Fig. No. 182 or Grinnell Fig. No. 261. For cast iron pipe, locate hub at clamp. 4. Provide special supports, racks, platforms, guides, stands, floor supports where such are indicated on drawings. Construct such supports in accordance with details provided. 2.7 PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1. Provide chrome or nickel plated floor plates where exposed pipes pass through the finished floors. These shall be split type of similar design to #1-13C or #10-BC shown on Page 1169 of Cat. 61 Crane Company or Grinnell Fig. 10. Where exposed pipes pass through ceilings and walls provide similar plates, but with set screws to hold them in position. 2. Escutcheons shall be chrome or nickel plated brass with set screws and shall be provided where exposed and uninsulated piping passes through the floors, walls or partitions, e.g. fixture supplies, waste pipes. Clip type escutcheons will not be accepted. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 15 2.8 ACCESS DOORS 1. Access doors shall be LeHage to suit construction, or Ormsby Kane, or Dillon, flush type with recessed hinges. Access doors in fire rated ceilings and/or walls shall match fire rating of ceilings and/or walls and shall be ULC approved. All access doors shall be equipped with screwdriver locks. 2. . Access doors shall be minimum size 450mm x 304mm and 600mm x 450mm (18" x 12" x 24") where it is necessary for persons to enter and shall be adequately sized to properly service and maintain the equipment they serve. 2.9 MOTORS 1. Unless otherwise specified for a particular application, motors up to and including 350 W shall be 120 Volt, 60 cycle, single phase, 1200 or 1800 RPM. 2. Motors larger than 350 W shall be 575 Volt, 60 cycle, three phase, 1200 or 1800 RPM. Unless specifically noted otherwise, motors with speed of 3600 RPM will not be accepted. Unless specifically noted otherwise, motors shall have open, drip proof fully guarded enclosures. 3. Motors shall be Leland Electric, Westinghouse, Lincoln Electric, Canadian General Electric. 4. All motors shall comply with Hydro Enermark efficiency requirements. 2.10 STARTERS AND CONTROLS t1. Unless modified in other sections of these specifications or by details or control diagrams, motor starters, control and disconnect switches shall comply with the following requirements. 2. Each motor shall be provided with a starter and all specified and required protective devices of suitable type and rating and adequate for the condition of application and in full accordance with Canadian and Ontario Electric Codes and Local requirements. 3. Starters shall be rated for safe making and interrupting of motor currents and shall be equipped with overload relays to make or break simultaneously each ungrounded line to the motor. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 16 4. Magnetic starters shall be used throughout this project, except that manual starters, with relays where required, may be used for single phase motors. 5. All manual starters shall have red or neon pilot lights. 6. Magnetic starters shall be equipped with: a. Red or neon pilot light. b. Maintained contact on-off selector switch unless otherwise specified hereinafter. C. Momentary contact start-stop pushbutton if starter is controlled by one or more remotely located start-stop stations. d. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch if starter is controlled by two wire , automatic devices such as thermostats, pressure switches, float switches, etc. On all combination magnetic starters the 'test' position shall be spring return. e. Auxiliary contacts - as required for the specified interlocks and control. f. Control Transformer - for remote control devices and stations of secondary voltage as required or specified. g. Fused Control circuit. h. Overload relays. L Reset Button. 7. Unless otherwise specified all magnetic starters shall be combination circuit breaker type. 8. In all cases where magnetic starters are located in equipment manufacturer's cabinets or panels, each motor shall have a separate disconnect and a , separate set of fuses. The panel shall have a main disconnect switch. 9. Single phase 120V starters shall be equipped with one thermal overload device and three phase starters shall be equipped with three thermal overload devices. Thermal overload devices shall be manual reset type. Overload devices shall have current rating as recommended by the motor manufacturer for the particular application. 10. Starter and control enclosures shall be suitable for mounting in the particular location in which they are to be installed. In dry and non-hazardous locations they shall be Nema Type i. Provide all required frames and supports as may be necessary for their proper installation, and as approved by the Consultant. 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 17 11. Selector switches, pilot lights, stop-lock-off, start-stop, up-stop-down, and similar controls shall be oil tight heavy duty type. r12. Selector switches, pushbutton stations, pilot lights, manual single phase starters, etc., located in finished areas or control panels shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall have brushed stainless steel cover plates. 13.. All starters shall be Canadian General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Allen-Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Canadian Controller or approved equal. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE EXPANSION AND ANCHORS 1. Provide for expansion and contraction of pipe work. Erect all pipe so that strain and weight does not come upon cast connections or apparatus. Provide bends, loops, swing joints and expansion joints. 1 2. Anchor piping at all points shown and where necessary, using substantial structural steel angles, channels, or plates, well secured to the building structure. Strength of anchor in shear and bending is to be approximately equal to strength of pipe being anchored. 3. Provide pipe roll or structural steel guides, two sets on each side of loop, joint ' or compensator, spaced at 14 pipe diameters or less and no more than 4 pipe diameters to first guide. Provide all required additional steel to span building structure for this purpose. Guides may be omitted on one side where anchor occurs within 10m. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS ' 1. Supply and install straight or angle pattern type thermometers where shown on the Drawings, where required and all other locations specified herein. In general, thermometers shall be installed in piping as follows: ' a. On leaving sides and return sides of all three-way mixing valves. This applies to both the heating and the cooling systems. b. Hot water supply and return mains. C. Where further indicated on the Drawings. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 18 2. In general, thermometers shall be installed in ductwork and fan apparatus as ! follows: a. In all supply fan discharges. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES 1: In general, pressure gauges shall be located as follows: , a. On suction and discharge of all circulating pumps. C. On low and high pressure sides of all pressure reducing valves. d. Where further indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 GAUGE GLASSES , 1. Provide gauge glasses on all expansion tanks as required, shown and further specified. , 2. Gauge glasses shall be approved fail-safe type complete with shut-off valves and ball checks. Gauge glasses shall cover the full height of the tank. 3. Where tank height exceeds maximum length of one glass (45cm) provide additional gauges and stagger location of gauges. Provide white enamelled brass backplates behind gauge glasses. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS 1. Provide strainers.where shown on the Drawings and in the following locations whether shown or not: a. Suction sides of all pumps b. Ahead of all pressure reducing valves. I C. Ahead of water meter ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050'- BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 19 ' 3.6 INSTALLATION OF AIR VENTS 1. Supply and install automatic air vents at all high points or pockets in the piping to remove air from the heating and cooling systems. A 12mm (1/2") discharge from all automatic air vents or traps shall be piped to the nearest open drain to catch any trap discharge, arranging the discharge so it is readily accessible and visible. All air vents shall be installed in concealed accessible locations. 2. Provide a shut-off valve at each air vent. 3.7 HEADERS 1. Supply and install and completely pipe up headers for hot water heating system, chilled water system, etc., as shown on the drawings. Valves, drains, etc., shall be as shown on the Drawings and/or as required. 3.8 CONCRETE WORK 1 1. All equipment.supports and bases above floor required for mechanical work shall be provided as part of the work of Division 15. 3.9 SUPPORTS AND BASES 1. Provide concrete foundations and bases and steel supports, stands-and platforms required for the proper installation of the equipment and work of this Division. Concrete shall be 20 MPa mix and formwork shall be plywood finish. 2. Hire the trade involved and pay all expenses. 3. Supports and bases shall be as shown on drawings, as specified, as ' recommended by manufacturer, as required and as approved by the Consultant. Equipment such as tanks, pumps, fans, softeners, heat exchangers, meters, boilers, compressors, transformers, switches, panels, shall be supported on concrete bases and independently from the piping and conduits and ducts so that no undue strain is placed on the equipment. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 20 4. Supply all necessary templates, anchor bolts, inserts and location drawings for , the equipment supplied, and supervise the work of installation of the bases. Support bases above the floor shall beat least 50mm (2") larger all around than the base of the apparatus, with chamfered corners and finished to a , smooth neat surface. Unless shown otherwise on drawings, bases shall be 150mm (6") above the floor and shall be dowelled to the concrete floor with not , less than four 12mm (1/2") dia. steel rods fastened to the reinforcing bars of the floor before pouring. 5. Wherever equipment is required to be suspended above floor level and details are not shown on the drawings, it shall be mounted on a platform bracketed from the wall. At locations where wall thickness is inadequate in the opinion of the Consultant to permit such brackets, supports shall be carried to either the , ceiling or the floor, or both, as required. Shop drawing details of such supports shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval. 6. Equipment stands shall be constructed of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings which shall be braced and fastened with flanges bolted to the floor. . Where saddles are indicated or required, provide welded steel or cast iron saddles, of the curvature to suit vessel being supported. 3.10 INSERTS AND FASTENINGS ' 1. Supply and install all inserts and fastenings required for support of equipment and hangers provided under this Division. Use beam clamps attached onto structural steel and/or inserts set in concrete. 2. Inserts shall be of the Midwest, Truscon manufacture and shall be firmly , secured to the forms before the concrete is poured. Be responsible for correct location of inserts. 3. Where supports are required under the roof slab and in other areas where , structural bearings of sufficient strength do not exist, provide angle or channel iron supports, properly sized to support the load from the structural framework using beam clamps. Where the wall, partition, floor or roof does not permit the support of heavy equipment, carry suitable support to building structure. 4. Percussion type fastenings of any kind will not be permitted unless prior ' approval in writing is obtained from the Consultant. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 21 5. Bolts and anchors at metallic waterproofed surfaces shall be supplied under this Section but installed under the Waterproofing Section. Refer to architectural drawings for such areas. 6. Brackets may be attached to masonry walls using expansion shields in shear, but walls must not be punched through and before drilling is started, approval must be obtained from the Consultant. 3.11 SLEEVES 1. Supply and set all necessary sleeves and be responsible for the exact location of all sleeves. Sleeves shall be of steel pipe for piping passing through masonry walls and 1.3mm galvanized iron for piping passing through concrete walls or floors. Sleeves for bare copper piping shall be lined with copper or lead. Sleeves shall be sized to permit insulation to pass through unbroken. Seal around pipes passing through sleeves with fire resistive non-hardening mastic (concrete not acceptable) to control transmission of sound and noise, and to provide the full fire rating of the wall or floor. Unused sleeves shall be 1 similarly sealed or filled with concrete. Use individual sleeves for each pipe. 2. Where ducts enter through equipment room floor provide 100mm (4") wide x 100mm (4") high concrete curb to stop water. Pipe sleeves through equipment room floor shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe with machine cut ends, with top end at 100mm (4") above finished floor. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS 1. Supply and install pipe hangers and their supports for all piping. 2. Piping and conduits shall be securely supported from hangers or supports, in a manner to ensure that building construction is not weakened or overstressed; that pipes are secure, vibration free, free to expand and contract, and properly graded; and that vertical adjustment of horizontal piping is possible after erection. 3. Cast iron pipe with MJ joints shall have two hangers for each length of pipe. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 -22 4. Pipe supports for all other piping shall be spaced at the following intervals, ' using round steel rod supports of the diameter indicated: Pipe Diameter Horizontal Spacing of Supports Rod Diameter Up to 20 mm 1.8m 10 mm ' 25 mm to 30 mm 2.0 m 10 mm 40 mm to 50 mm 2.5m 10 mm 60 mm 3.0 m 12 mm 75 mm to 125 mm 4.0 m 16 mm j 150 mm to 200 mm 4.8 m 22 mm 250 mm and over 5.8 m 22 mm min. 5. Rod diameter for larger pipes to suit weight being supported in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. i 6. For plumbing piping, horizontal spacing of supports shall not exceed 2.5m (8'- , 0") for pipes 25mm (I") and larger in accordance with the Plumbing Code. 7. Hanger rods must be vertical, without bends, or offsets, and workmanship must be such that finished piping is true both with respect to line and grade. They j must be complete with adjusting and stopping nut locks. Each hanger is to be supported independently from the structure, i.e. piping shall not be hung from other piping or equipment. , 8. No perforated or flat iron hangers shall be used. 9. Where hangers are installed under and in direct contact with pipes, packing of approved inert material shall be crimped around the hanger to prevent electrolysis and abrasion. Copper clad hangers will not be accepted. ' 10. Upper attachment of hanger rod shall allow rod to pivot without bending of the rod, i t DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 23 3.13 COUPLING AND BELT GUARDS 1. Provide all belt driven equipment with belt guards with tachometer openings at ' both the driven and drive shafts. Belt guards shall be open mesh expanded metal type. ' 2. Provide coupling guards for pumps with exposed couplings. 3. Belt guards and coupling guards shall be fastened by bolts or wing nuts, so ' that they may be easily removed for servicing of equipment. 3.14 DISSIMILAR METALS 1. Separate dissimilar metals from direct contact with each other. Install all necessary gaskets, and dielectric couplings. All metal screws, clamps, and fastenings shall be of the same metal and finish as the material supported. 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS 1. Provide access doors to all valves, cleanouts, electrical outlets, dampers, fire dampers, equipment, controls, plumbing devices and other apparatus requiring access where these are built in or concealed behind furring, walls or ceiling. 2. Access doors shall be supplied under this Division but installed by the trade providing wall or ceiling. Correct location of access doors is the responsibility of this Division. Frame and cover shall have a prime coat finish. Where it is necessary to have a number of access doors installed in the same area of a ceiling or wall, submit to the Consultant the location of these access doors for his approval. ,cuss doors provided in glazed tile walls shall suit the tile pattern. Refer to architectural drawings for room finish schedules. 3. Access doors in removable lay-in T-bar acoustic tile ceilings will not be required. Mark the location of the removable ceiling tiles with approved coloured marking devices in the four corners of the tiles to indicate by their ' colour the nature of the item behind. Colour for different services to be later determined by the Consultant. Refer to architectural drawings for the areas having such ceilings. 4. Provide two sets of record drawings showing the location of all access panels with cross reference to their function. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 24 3.16 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 1. Division 15 shall supply electrical motors, starters, controls, relays, ' thermostats, float switches, pressure switches, flow switches, pilot lights, remote control stations, safety devices, aquastats, control transformers, disconnects for control circuits, and interlocks. , 2. Division 15.shall mount the above equipment, except for line voltage wall thermostats and starters, which will be mounted by Division 16. 3. Division 1 6 will supply su ' and mount isolation disconnect switches where required for safe servicing of motors, as well as disconnects at electrical panels of all ' factory assembled package equipment, e.g. rooftop units, condensing units, air conditioning units. 4. In the case of roof mounted exhaust fans, safety isolation switches shall be , factory mounted within the fan, complete with wiring from switch to motor. 5. Division .16 will provide all power wiring as defined herein. 1 6. Division 15 shall provide all control and interlock wiring including connection to equipment and to source of supply. 7. Power wiring is defined as all single or three phase wiring carrying the full current of the mechanical equipment, including wiring of full equipment current ' carrying line voltage controls and isolation disconnects in line between the source and the mechanical equipment, and connection to the equipment. 8. Control and interlock wiring is defined as all mechanical equipment wiring other than power wiring outlined above. 9. Division 15 shall provide detailed wiring diagrams for each motor. , 10. Division 15, unless specifically indicated otherwise, shall provide all damper motor power and control wiring. , 11. To obtain line voltage supply for motorized dampers, motorized valves or other ' controls, provide wiring to the nearest lighting or power panel, including connection to same, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 25 1 12. Where low voltage supply source is required, obtain line voltage supply as described previously and also provide control transformers of necessary voltage and wattage to suit the low voltage equipment and controls. 13. Division 15, unless specifically indicated otherwise, will provide all wiring for damper motor power and control from nearest lighting panel except where the ' drawings indicate power outlets by Division 16. For these instances Division 15 will wire from the outlet to the damper motor. ' 3.17 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS AND CONTROLS 1. Unless otherwise specified, all controls, interlocks, start-stop stations, and r control wiring shall be 120 volts or lower, except if contained entirely within starter. Such lower voltage shall be obtained from transformers of adequate rating mounted within the starter. Transformers shall be oversized where r circuits carry external loads in addition to the holding coil of the starter. Where groups of motors are interlocked so as to function in a co-ordinated manner as in the case of an air conditioning system, all control circuit wiring shall be in raccordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Starter containing wiring powered by another starter (or source) shall have double voltage relays, mylar covered interlocks, or other such provisions permitted by applicable codes and regulations. ' 3. Each motor shall have a disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall consist of a disconnect switch of suitable rating designed to break all ungrounded conductors of the motor under full load. The disconnecting means shall be located within 10m and within sight of the motor and the machinery driven by the motor. 4. This Division shall provide detailed control wiring schematic diagrams for each rmotor. 5. Where motor control centres are shown on the drawing or where the number of starters grouped in one area warrants the use of motor control centres, these shall be as specified under 'Motor Control Centres' in this specification. 3.18 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT 1. Clearly mark all exposed ducts, pipes, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., to ' indicate the nature of the service. r 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 26 , 2. All starters shall be identified with black plastic laminated (Lamacoid) ' nameplates with white engraving, secured with screws. 3. Surface mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted on exterior face of door or cover. Flush mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted at the top of the inside face of the door or cover. 4. Every valve on the job except on radiation, unit heaters and fixture stops shall be provided with a 30mm (1 1/8") diameter brass tag secured with split rings or, ' brass 'S' hooks. The number on the tags shall be factory engraved in black ink. Prepare two framed and glazed valve diagrams showing the service, location and purpose of each valve so tagged. , 5. Identify all fans, pumps, remote controls and all other equipment as to service by a black lamacoid engraved nameplate with white core, firmly affixed with screws to each unit. Submit sample plate and lettering for Consultant's approval. All apparatus, including electrical motors, shall have a proper nameplate affixed thereto, showing the size, name of equipment, service, serial number,- and all information usually provided which shall include voltage, cycle, , phase and horsepower of motors and the name of the manufacturer and his address. All stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates shall be perfectly legible to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Nameplates shall not be painted , over, and where apparatus is to be insulated, nameplates shall be firmly attached with rigid insulation back-up, of equal thickness of that of jacket. 3.19 PAINTING 1. Unless specifically noted otherwise after all equipment is installed and piping , completed, thoroughly clean off rust and oil on all exposed iron and steel work of every description, including hangers, pipe, conduits, panels, etc., installed in mechanical equipment rooms, fan room, corridors, tunnels, etc., and leave the work ready for painting under Division 9. 2. This shall apply regardless of whether the material comes on the job painted or not. Unless specifically noted otherwise, equipment which is specified with t factory finish will not be painted. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 27 i 3. After piping, etc. has been painted by Division 9 this Section shall paint on all pipes installed by the Mechanical trades, neatly stencilled letters about 25 mm high designating the pipe service and arrows showing direction of flow. The wording shall be as later directed by the Consultant. The stencilling shall occur at approximately 3 m intervals and where pipes pass through walls, pipe shall be stencilled on both sides of the wall. All exposed pipes and pipes in pipe spaces near access doors shall be identified in this manner. 4. Approved colour coding with plastic bands may be used in lieu of stencilling ' described above. 3.20 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING ' 1. Do all necessary excavating and backfilling required in connection with this work. This applies to both inside and outside the building unless otherwise noted as specified in Section 15050, Item 1.4.3. 2. All construction work shall be subject to the Occupational Health and Safety ' Act, 1978 and.Regulations for Construction Projects passed by the Ontario Legislature, and any amendments thereto. 3. In addition, all excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with specification Division 2. 4. Excavations shall be kept dry at all times by bailing, pumping or other means as may be required. Sides and bottoms shall be kept from freezing. 5. Bottoms of excavation for pipes shall be graded as required and bedding for piping shall be provided. Where not shown or detailed on drawings, bottoms of excavations shall be shaped to fit the lower 1/3 segment of any pipes and sockets, care being taken to ensure even bearing along the barrels. No portion of pipe shall bear directly against any rock or other hard surface. 6. Banks of excavations shall be evenly cut and/or trimmed and they shall be shored as required to prevent caving in, and the material used shall be carefully withdrawn during backfilling. Lumber left in place without approval will not be paid for by the Owners. 7. Width of excavation shall be carefully controlled from the crown of the pipe to the invert, and shall be limited to twice the O.D. of pipe at crown and as further indicated on drawings. i 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 28 8. Do not disturb or damage any existing underground services. Make good any ' damage. Existing underground services are indicated approximately on the Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Site Plans. Location of such services has been determined from available information and has not been verified in , the field. Carefully check such locations, perform all necessary exploratory excavation and report any serious discrepancy before proceeding with any new work. Engage the services of local Public Utilities Commission, Hydro, Telephone and Gas Utilities to accurately determine location of any underground services. 9. Excavating, pipe-laying, testing nd backfillin shall be executed in limited , 9 9 length to enable all protective measures to function efficiently at all times. Not more than 100m of trench shall be open in advance of the completed buried , service. 10. Any rocks and boulders encountered shall be removed. Rocks and boulders removed from the excavation shall be broken up as required, to permit handling. Any rock encountered shall be removed by drilling and wedging as no blasting will be allowed. ' 11. Where any excavating is necessary in close proximity to and below any footing level, backfilling shall be done with 10MPa concrete furnished under this ' section to the level of the top of highest adjacent footing. 12. In the vicinity of manholes and catchbasins backfill under pipes with 10MPa ' concrete, from virgin soil to springline of pipe. This shall be carried to a distance from manhole to a point where firm support of pipe by virgin soil is available. Backfill similarly with concrete at points where pipes cross other ' pipes or electrical services. 13. Should the excavation by negligence or error, be carried to greater depth than shown or authorized, such extra excavation shall be replaced with well-compacted clean crushed limestone or 10MPa concrete at the expense of this Section, as required to give a bearing value equal to that provided by adjacent soil. 14. A concrete pad, properly reinforced, or masonry piers, shall be provided by this Section under piping in earth stratum when a solid undisturbed earth bed is not ' obtainable, all as described in the Ontario Water Resources Commission Plumbing Code. i iDIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 29 15. Where piping enters or leaves the building and crosses excavation for footings, use extra heavy piping and either excavate to solid undisturbed soil and backfill with 10MPa concrete from such soil to the pipe, or support piping on a reinforced concrete pad, resting at both ends on solid undisturbed earth or a check in concrete foundation wall, all as shown on Detail Drawing D-101 attached. Cost of such pad shall be borne by this Section. ' 16. Any concrete support shall be shaped to provide a minimum bearing for the lower 113 segment of the pipe. 1 17. Trenching for drains in the building shall not be commenced until fill has consolidated and Consultant's approval is obtained. Backfilling shall not be ' commenced until installation is inspected and approved, the testing is completed and the Consultant's approval has been obtained. 18. Backfill from bottom of trench, around pipe and to 600mm (24") above pipe shall be clean sand, compacted mechanically in 150mm (6") layers to 95% Modified Proctor Density. Take particular care to tamp thoroughly under and iat sides of pipe. 19. Exterior backfill above 600mm (24") above pipes in areas to have concrete ' walks or asphalt paving shall be D.H.O. granular Class B compacted in maximum 150mm (6") layers by mechanical compactors to achieve 95% Modified Proctor Density. 20. Exterior backfill above 600mm (24") above pipes in areas to receive sod or seed shall be clean fill, free from organic material and debris, placed in maximum 300mm (12") layers and compacted to achieve 90% dry density as determined by the Standard AASHO test. 21. Frozen earth shall not be used for backfilling, nor shall any backfilling be placed on or against frozen ground. 22. All interior backfill of pipe trenches under building floor shall be clean sand compacted mechanically in 150mm (6") layers to 95% Modified Proctor density. 23. If settlement occurs, it shall be made up as soon as possible, so that traffic near the work will not be inconvenienced. After a period adequate to reveal settlement has passed, fill all depressions to restore the correct grade. Be responsible for making good any subsequent settlement of fill and pay all costs ' involved in making good paving, curbs and all other surfaces damaged by such settlement and subsequent restorations. i 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 30 24. Excavated materials shall be piled, stored and/or disposed of during the progress of construction in such places and in such a manner that a minimum of damage or disfigurement of existing ground will result. On completion of the work remove any excess from site and/or dispose of as arranged or directed by the Consultant. The site shall be left clear and unencumbered to the Consultant's satisfaction. 3.21 TESTING AND BALANCING 1. All water piping shall be tested to a pressure of at least 1000kPa (335 ft). , 2. Piping connected to the fan-coil and chilled water system shall be tested at , 2500kPa (840ft.). 3. All drains shall be tested for tightness and grade as required by the Ontario Water Resources Commission Act respecting Plumbing revised to date, and , local authorities. 4. Make tests before application of pipe covering and before pipes are concealed behind furring. 5. Make any tests required by the Consultant during the progress of the work or ' at its completion. Provide all necessary labour and equipment for such tests. Such tests shall be carried out solely for the purposes of determining if the work as actually installed meets specified requirements. ' 6. All tests must last at least 2 hours and if leaks develop, these must be corrected and the test repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner and the local authorities. 7. Caulking of threaded joints shall not be permitted, faulty piping shall be replaced with new pipe and fittings. 8. Notify the local Plumbing Inspector of all tests and conduct same to their satisfaction and in the presence of their representatives. 9. Provide all labour and equipment for tests and conduct same. Repeat tests until system is shown to be leak-tight and in proper working condition, all to the satisfaction of all Inspectors having authority. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 31 10. All piping shall be completely flushed out. After the cleanout period, the systems shall be drained, each strainer cleaned out and the systems refilled. Boiling out of systems shall be carried out as specified elsewhere. 11. All high pressure steam piping shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of all jurisdictional authorities including local or Provincial authorities. 12. All necessary adjustments to the automatic temperature control systems shall be made and the controls left in first class operating condition. 13. Supply lubricating oils, packing, etc., for proper operation of the systems. The final tests and acceptance will not be made until the work is finally completed. 14. After the job is completed, keep one skilled mechanic on the job to operate it ' for two days and instruct permanent operators of the plant in the method of operation, one day during the heating season and one day during the cooling season. Refer to further testing as outlined under further divisions of these specifications. 3.22 AIR BALANCING 1. The air balancing must be carried out by a firm specializing in such work. The firm shall be an independent testing company with at least 5 years of proven experience in the balancing of air systems and shall have completed not less than 5 jobs of comparable size and complexity. 2. Air systems shall be balanced with clean filters in place and so that the fans operate at as low a static pressure as possible. 3. Static pressure dampers shall be installed where static pressure must be ' reduced for control of either pressure or noise. 4. Fan speeds and dampers shall be adjusted until air quantities within 5% of those shown on drawings for each outlet, minimum noise level and minimum static at fan are obtained. 5. Adjust each outlet by anemometer, velometer, pitot tube, or anemotherm readings to provide proper air quantities. Adjust each supply outlet to provide proper throw and distribution in accordance with space and occupancy requirements. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 32 6. Upon completion of the air balance and submittal of the air balance report, ' provide, if called for, a spot check on the system with the Consultant's representative. If actual air quantities do not agree with the air balancing report data, completely rebalance the system until satisfactory to the Consultant. 7. Furnish all necessary equipment including gauges, pitot tubes, anemometers, ' velometers, etc., required for the testing,and air balance, of quality and capacity to ensure proper accuracy. The Consultant may require proof of calibration of instruments. 8. Upon completion of the balancing, supply the Consultant with three complete ' sets of final balancing report showing actual air quantities at each outlet. 9. The report shall include the following information: a. Diffusers, grilles, registers, floor outlets: System, room no, outlet ' 9 Y , designation and required air volume as per drawings, test air volume, test air velocity. b. Air supply systems: Provide design and test information including fan number, fan make, total fan air volume, minimum outside air volume, return air volume, total pressure, total static pressure, suction static pressure, discharge static pressure, fan r.p.m., motor make, size, motor nameplate information, rated amperage, actual amperage. ' C. Exhaust systems: Provide information including fan number, size and model, motor size, motor nameplate information, rated amperage, , actual amperage, fan r.p.m., total pressure, static pressure, suction static pressure, air volume. d. Operation of VVT systems, thermostats, MAU's or HRU's and controls ' for all air handling systems.. ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 33 3.23 TEMPORARY SERVICES .1 Gas Service: .1 Arrange with gas co. to install a temporary gas meter on south face of building &tie back to roof HVAC units. ' .2 Water Service: .1 Arrange with local public works dept. to install a temporary water meter ' on south face of the building (existing staff room area) and tie- back to CW piping over this toom to service existing building. 1 .3 Sprinklers: .1 Makes a temporary sprinkler header with check valves, SV, FS and connection to F.A..system and connect piping to dry zone, wet zone, and existing siameses in the staff lounge room ' .4 Sanitary Mains: .1 Protect existing sanitary main & Septice system during construction. ' .2 Install 200 phase sanitary main from road (see site plan) and make connections upstream of septic tanks, Protect all piping from freezing & ' damage during construction period. .5 Domestic Hot Water: .1 Supply and install 2-100 gallon electric hotwater tanks to be located in staff room and pipe to existing DHW main onnce this room complete with recircular. pump. .6 Remove temporary water meter, gas meter, sprinkler mains, DHW tanks etc, upon completion of new mechanical room an all permanent service connections. .7 Allow for off hour work to make temporary and permanent tie-ins for all services. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 15050 - 34 3.24 STANDARD SHEETS ' The following detail drawings attached here in shall form a part of the contract documents: S-114 Piping Legend S-115 Plumbing Legend S-116 Ventilation Legend 5-117 Heating Legend S-443 Municipal Water Meter Connection Standard ' S-420 Municipal Sprinkler System Standard SYMBOL PIPING LEGEND DESCRIPTION — COLD WATER (CW) - - HOT WATER (HW) ' — -- — HOT WATER RECIRC. (HW RECIRC.) SANITARY DRAIN (BURIED) SANITARY DRAIN (HUNG) STORM DRAIN (BURIED) STORM DRAIN (HUNG) EXISTING HUNG SANITARY DRAIN ! 'cXlSTiNG BURIED SANITARY DRAIN• EXISTING HUNG STORM DRAIN ° EXISTING BURIED STORM DRAIN V— —— VENT LINE F FIRE LINE ' --G —"— GAS LINE SP----- SPRINKLER MAIN (WET) OSP SPRINKLER MAIN (DRY) OXY OXYGEN VAC VACUUM N:0 NITROUS OXIDE MCA MEDICAL COMPRESSOR AIR N NITROGEN '-- FSP""—'— F1RE STAND PIPE Lo LAB DRAINAGE PIPING HWS HEATED WATER SUPPLY HWR HEATED WATER RETURN CHS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CHR CHIU.._D WATER RETURN ' CWS CONOENSER WATER SUPPLY CWR — CONDENSER WATER RETURN ' ST STEAM SUPPLY CO CONDENSATE A COMPRESSED AIR RCS— REHEAT COIL SUPPLY RCR REHEAT COIL RETURN DATE: AUG/1991 DRAWING N0. LFIPCIGER, KAMINKE.R, MITELMAN, SCALE: N.T.S. CUPLINKAS & ASSOCIATES LIMBED. S- 114 DRAWN BY: E.T.S. CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO PLUMBING LEGEND ' SYMBOL OESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION o- SUPERVISED PRY �3 CAPPED r BUTTERFLY VALVE 11 CLEANOUT ' SV O SUPERVISED BUTTERFLY VALVE G�� CLEANOUT IN FLOOR ABOVE ® CHECK VALVE WITH BALLDRIP ---DC----O VALVE AND CAP ALARM CHECK VALVE—WET SYSTEM FLOOR DRAIN © ALARM CHECK VALVE—DRY SYSTEM PARKING GARAGE DRAIN ' BFP BACKI'LOW PREVENTER DKI GATE VALE • PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD D4 VALVE 0 UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD C80 GLOBE VALVE 0 CONCEALED SPRINKLER HEAD 0 CHECK VALVE O RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD ® BALANCING VALVE , N SIOEWALL SPINKLER HEAD L0.05.1, VALVE AND ACCESS PANEL 0 3—PORT AUTOMATIC MIXING VALVE I ca C/l ELBOW p;d 2—PORT CONTROL VALVE DROP (PLUMBING) 0 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE DROP (DRAINAGE) pb PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL VALVE RH ROOF HOPPER ABOVE STRAINER ' RH® ROOF HOPPER 4 PRESSURE GAUGE i�•••/--11-x- TRAP / RUNNING TRAP Q THERMOME i cR ' --II =ANOU T SAFETY RELIEF VALVE --�-- PUMP ■ SPRINKLER FLOW SNATCH -(P-FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER Si SUPPERVISED VALVE FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET PRESSURE S'MTCH , .r._.�� SIAMESE CONNECTION D�+a PRE-ACTION VALVE ---�(HS HOSE BIBB 00. MEDICAL GAS OUTLET ' NFHB NON FREEZE HOSE 8188 D EXIST. MEDICAL GAS OUTLET C8 CATCH BASIN PRESSURE GAUGE WITH COCK ' f FD FLOOR DRAIN EMH 0 EXIST. MANHOLE R%t RAIN WATER LEADER MH 0 MANHOLE OATS: AUG/1991 DRAVMNG NO. LEIPCIGER, KAMINKER, MITELMAN, ' SCALE: N T.S. CUPLINKAS & ASSOCIATES LIMITED. S-115 DRAWN BY: E.T.S. CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO SYMBOL TILATION LEGEND �,,eoL LICHT TROFFER SUPPLY OR RETURN FIRE DAMPER y-� V.A.V. BOX OR REHEAT COIL �um-3 UNIT HEATER MOTORIZED DAMPER (PLAN) MOTORIZED DAMPER (SECTION) r-==: FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ACCESS DOOR ® BLANKED-OF SECTION OF DIFFUSER i ® SUPPLY AIR RE TURN AIR OUTSIDE AIR EXHAUST AIR DUCT TURNED UP DUCT TURNED DOWN ' BALANCING DAMPER I BALANCING DAMPER 200 SUPPLY 200 CFM M 10 x 6 GRILLE 10 EXHAUST 100 CFM 8 x 4 GRILL' `00 SUPPLY 400 CFM NECK SIZE �t ARROW DENOTES DUCT TO RISE IN DIRECTION OF ARROW 1/2' OR 1' INTERIOR ACOUSTIC INSULATION - AS SPECIFIED ' MARINE LIGHTS ' F OR MANUAL LOUVRE DAMPER SAIL SWITCH IN DUCTWORK Q 12x12 SQUARE DIFFUSER IN 24x24 MODULE 12x12 SQUARE DIFFUSER 24x24 SQUARE DIFFUSER 24x24 ROUND DIFFUSER DATE: AUG/1991 DRAWING N0. � LEIPCIGER, KAMINKER, MITELMAN, SCALE: N.T,; CUPLINKAS & ASSOCIATES LIMITED. S-116 DRAWN BY: E.T.S. CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO HEATING LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION — 1D PIPE DOWN 0 MOTORIZED BUTTERFLY VALVE , PIPE UP OA ANNUSAR FLOW SENSOR -- PIPE ANCHOR STARTER j — DIRECTION OF FLOW EXPANSION JOINT SLOPE PIPE DOWN PIPE GUIDE D74 GATE VALVE 'Dd-'--- CONTROL VALVE �a VALVE FIN GLOBE VALVE D;C SOLENOID VALVE DY4 2 PORT CONTROL VALVE 3 PORT CONTROL VALVE Did PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE ® CHECK VALVE ® BALANCING VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE 4' SAFETY RELIEF VALVE ' AUTOMATIC AIR VENT STRAINER UNION 4 PRESSURE GAUGE i I THERMOMETER Q HUMIDISTAT rJT THERMOSTAT ! FLOTREX VALVE CO DETECTOR , --�}-- PUMP 2-WAY MOTORIZED BUTTERFLY VALVE ' PRESSURE GAUGE C/W GAUGE COCKS n LOCKSHIELD BALANCING GLOBE VALVE i 3-WAY MOTORIZED BUTTERFLY VALVE � DATE: LEIPCIGER, KAMINKER, MITELMAN, DRAWING NO. i SCALE: CUPLINKAS & ASSOCIATES LIMITED. S-117 ' DRAW BY: CONSULTING ENGINEERS. TORONTO a • ••�.• wit^ r'1.�.11 l 1`.l.1 J 11'K.. . V 1 O J J./ L�.✓ I WIN. M, N. 300 FINISHED FACE � �g 300 OF WALL STRAINER 1 ME�R - SEE NOTE 1 VICTAULIC COLWLING UTILITY ROCU SHALL BE MISULATED. HEATED AND 6RESTRAINED fOIHi MIN, 1315 . 2035 INSULATED STEEL AOEOUATELY UT. (THE R AS ABOVE DGOR CENTRED WITH THE METER BUILDING OWNER IS DOOR TO 9E LOCKED AND A KEY RESPONSIBLE IF THE P1tavwD TO ?HE REGION. METER 15 OA L&MO CUE -- TO COLD TCNPERATLRES. 1 M1 L ' sTTw" PLAN — TYPICAL VERTICAL FEED N.T.S. PLAN — TYPICAL HORIZONTAL FEED N.T.S. ALL VALVES SKALt V FLASHED CEILING BE PL04MO 1N NN UPRIGHT POSITMN BY-PASS TS NOT REOUIRED FOR SERVICES 50 mm OR LESS 5'itMNER �� Eli l � METER - SEE NOTE t 300 MIN. -- I NN. 3 $i VICTAULPC COUPLLWG R-STRAINEp • I 3 JOMTT ^`I RESTRAINED ' DIRECTION ,K71NF I'VO 'IED FLOOR OF FLOW METER AS ELEVATION --TYPICAL VERTICAL FEED 300 ' ASOK N.T.S. 01 It --}--F—- 1 - NOTE 1 1. MATER METER SHALL BE A 7C mm TO 50 mm, SIZE TURBINE. COMPOUND DR S R PROTECTUS TYPE. Z. BY-PASS PIPE SHALL K (A) THE SAME SIZE AS THE INCOMING PIPE WPIEN USINC A TURSIN£ CR JOINT PROTECTUS hVER. OR ONE PIPE CwuETER SwtLLER THAN THE INC�NG PIPE WHEN U59NG A COMPOUND METER. (B) REOL49ED ON ALL SERVICES FOR MULTI-RESIDENTIAL. COWWSCK AID ELEVATION — TYPICAL WusTRIA(, BUE.ONCS. (C) REOU:gED ON ALL OTHCR SER%nCCS LARGER THAN 50 mm. HORIZONT61- FEED 3' M'"• tLFJRANCES SNDr.+ FCR BALI MOUNTED SY-PASS TC BE APP_IED TD FLOOR MOUNTED BY-PASS. N 7.5. ALL DPAENSCNS IN MILL&AEIERS EXCEPT wHER'C NOTED. THE REGIONAL MUNICIPALITY CF DURHAM MRKS DEPARTMENT CHEOcED* RCNSICN MO.: ? APPROVED. WATER METER ROOM DATE: Ivor 02 DATC: Iw 0, S-443 I _ 1 - FROM WGA ARCHITECTS INC PHU-E NO. : 416 535 OE23 P0z- 1 30D I MIN. 600 300 rmisvEO FACE OF BALL IAN. IN UICTAULIC 1 i COUPLING MIPI 2000 �7c�w. . PLAN — TYPICAL VERTICAL FEEQ N.T.S. ALL VALVES SMALL BE PLACED IN AN mss EO CEIUNC CPM04T POSITION �3 LAIN. • . "'��G1tN. RESTRAINED ANT FINISHED FLOCK . r MCgtpiJWUCC ' RESwAWE0 ANT ELEVATFON — TypicAL VERTICAL F D ... N.7.S. I. g BARD SMALL BE USED FOR BAOWLow oREvENTID+ DEVICES ' (DOUBLE CMECK VANE AW REDUCE PRESSURE PRmr-PAL) 63 Rum TO 200.�. 2. SrotmwoS SHALL BE USED FOR BAOCFLow PREVENTION OE{ACLS LOCATED At ABOVE GROUND now OR CHAMBER. 3. THE SAORFLOW DEVICE SHALL BE SORTED W AN APPROVED YAHNER, 3. CHAMBERS SHALL, BE LIGHTED. 5. CHAMBERS SMALL BE KEPT DRY At AL. TIMES BY wAY OF Sump ACTIVATED AUTOMATICALLY. OR INHERE FEASIBLE. A GRAM PIVE CONNECTED TO A STORM SEWER. ALL O&UENyONS IN MII.IIurl(aS CACEPT WHERE NOTED TFtE REGI AL MUNIOPAUTT OF OURHAU WXMS DEPARTMENT CHECKED BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE LAYOUT REMs4N 140.' 1 APPROWD: J FOR CHAMBER OR BUILDING DATE: 1945 02 CATE: 63 mm TO 200 mm 5-420 I DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS Page: 15240 - i PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . 2 2.2 SPRING HANGERS 3 i PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.1 ISOLATION BASES 3 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPRING HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1 i� 1 1 I 1 1 i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS Page: 15240 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide sound and vibration isolation for all equipment as required to maintain acceptable noise (NC) levels in the occupied areas of the building. .2 Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of equipment to be isolated. These drawings to show belt centres, operating weights and motor positions. .3 Obtain all other applicable mechanical, structural and architectural drawings required to complete the vibration and sound control installation drawings. .4 Supply all silencers as shown on silencer schedule in specifications or listed on the drawings. .5 All fans, pumps and air handling equipment shall be provided with vibration isolation devices of floor, suspensions or brackets, etc. .6 After the air system has been balanced, submit a report, including sound curves to substantiate that all equipment has been adequately isolated and that acceptable noise levels exist in the occupied areas. .7 All vibration isolation, duct silencers and acoustic plenums shall be supplied by a single manufacturer, who will take on complete responsibility for the entire project. .8 Vibron Limited has been used as a base for this Specification. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are Amber/Booth Co., Vibro-Acoustics Ltd., Korfund Sampson Ltd. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. I DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS Page: 15240 - 2 r .2 Submit shop drawings for the following: .1 Isolation Bases .2 Vibration Isolators r .3 Spring Hangers PART.2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS .1 All springs shall be completely stable, colour coded and selected to operate at no greater than two-thirds solid load. .2 All spring isolators shall be complete with levelling devices, 6mm thick ribbed neoprene sound pads and zinc plated hardware. For applications subject to outdoor or high humidity conditions, the housings shall have a two-coat system of rust resisting paint and the springs shall have two coats of neoprene unless otherwise specified. .3 Type CM closed spring mounts shall be complete with top and bottom housings separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. .4 Type FS open spring mounts shall have extra stable iso-stiff springs with a - minimum horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness ratio (Kx/Ky) of 1.0. .5 Type CSR open controlled mounts shall have heavy rigid steel base frame, built in limit stops and removable spacer plates. Springs shall be iso-stiff with a minimum horizontal to vertical stiffness ratio (Kx/Ky) of 1.0. .6 Type MD elastomer rubber mount shall have threaded insert and hold down bolt holes. .7 Type R waffle pads shall be 30 durometer natural rubber (14MPa tensile), a minimum of 12mm thick and selected for an optimum loading of 42kPa. When pads are built into spring isolators or hangers, 50 durometer (21 MPa tensile) pads are acceptable with an optimum loading of 630kPa. .8 Type N waffle pads shall be 50 durometer neoprene (12500kPa tensile), minimum of 12mm thick and selected for an operating load of 630kPa. r r r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS Page: 15240 - 3 .9 Type RSR rubber-steel-rubber pads shall consist of two layers of 12mm thick type R pad, as specified above, bonded to 6mm steel plate. All holes to be sleeved and complete with an isolation washer. .10 Type NSN neoprene-steel-neoprene pads shall consist of two layers of 12mm thick type N pad, as specified above, bonded to 6mm steel plate. All holes to be sleeved and complete with isolation washer. .11 Type KIP Kinetic precompressed moulded fibreglass pads shall be coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Glass fibres, produced by the multiple flame attenuation process, shall have a diameter not exceeding 0.0046mm. ' .12 Pads shall be capable of sustaining 300 per cent overload without damage, permanent set, collapse or permanent loss in natural frequency. 2.2 SPRING HANGERS .1 Type SH shall have fabricated steel housing with one coat of anti-rust paint, and be complete with a colour coded stable spring, retaining cups and acoustic washer. .2 Type SHR shall be as for type SH above but shall have a 25mm elastomeric element in lieu of acoustic washer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION BASES .1 "T" shaped concrete inertia pump bases shall be used only where shown on the drawings and shall be of sizes shown. .2 Type S integral steel fan and motor bases, complete with adjustable motor slide rails welded in place, shall have minimum vertical sections of 75, 100, I 150, 200 and 250mm for motor horsepowers up to and including 2.2, 5.6, 15, 37.3kW, and larger than 37.3kW respectively. .3 Type SS slung steel base shall be of structural members with gusset plates welded to ends. .4 Type C reinforced concrete inertia bases shall have full depth perimeter structural channel frames with flanges pointed into the centre of the base. These are provided under Division 3. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROLS Page: 15240 -4 .5 For spring mounted units the load shall be carried by gusseted brackets forming an integral part of the channel frame. .6 Unless otherwise specified, isolation materials shall be installed on 100mm concrete sub-bases, which extend at least over the full base and isolator area of the isolated equipment. Concrete work will be provided under Division 3. .7 All steel bases and inertia bases shall clear the sub-bases by at least 25mm -and 50mm respectively. All bases shall be blocked and shimmed level, so that all ductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system, at the operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPRING HANGERS .1 All piping over 50mm diameter connected to spring isolated equipment shall be supported with minimum 25mm static deflection spring mounts or hangers as follows: Up to 25mm diameter - first 3 points of support 125 to 200mm diameter - first 4 points of support 250mm dia and over - first 6 points of support .2 The first point of support shall have a static deflection of twice the deflection of the isolated equipment, but not more than 50mm. .3 Any piping supported from the mechanical penthouse floor shall be isolated on type CM or SL mounts with the deflection being equal to that of the isolated equipment. End of Section i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT 1 1.3 MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 1 PART,2 PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.1 WORKMANSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 3.2 HOT FLUID PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.3 HOT EQUIPMENT 4 3.4 COLD WATER PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.5 COLD EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.6 PUMPS 6 3.7 DUCTWORK AND AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 .3.8 RECOVERING AND FINISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment required for installation of Thermal Insulation as as specified and as otherwise required, in a satisfactory manner, for all Sections of Division 15. .2 Pipe covering, equipment and duct insulation shall be provided by a recognized specialist insulation applicator with an established reputation for this type of work. .3 Product type designations of Fiberglas Canada Ltd., for insulation materials, Flintkote and Childers for coatings, sealers and adhesives, are used in 1 Specification and on Drawings to indicate physical properties and quality standards not otherwise described. Equivalent products of the following manufacturers are acceptable. .1 Insulation Materials Fiberglas Canada Limited Manville Canada Ltd. Holmes Insulations Limited .2 Coatings, Sealers and Adhesives Foster Division, Amchem Products Inc. ' Minnesota Mining and Mfg. of Canada Ltd. Paisley Adhesives Ltd. 1 1.3 MATERIALS LIST .1 Where applicator proposes to use materials other than those specified as acceptable, he shall submit a complete list of such materials, indicating thickness of material for each individual service. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 -2 .2 Do not purchase materials so submitted until approval in writing has been received. 1.4 STANDARDS .1 The type, manufacture and application of pipe covering materials including application of sealer coat, shall be in strict accordance with requirements and final approval of local and Provincial authorities having jurisdiction. .2 All materials shall be asbestos free. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Pipe Insulation: Fibreglas one-piece or sectional insulation with All Service Jacket, 88 kg per cubic metre density. .2 Duct and Equipment Insulation: Fiberglas AF-545 with Reinforced Foil and Flame Retardant Kraft Facing (RFFRK), 72kg per cubic metre density. .3 Vapour Barrier Lag Adhesive: Flintstik 230-04 or Childers CP-82. .4 Insulation Lagging Adhesive: Flintkote 120-09 or Childers CP-50. .5 Glass Fabric Reinforcing: Flintkote Yellowjacket or Childers Chilglas. .6 Canvas Cloth: 200g per sq m. .7 PVC Jacketing and Fitted Pipefitting Covers: Manville Zeston, 25/50 rated. .8 Aluminium Jacketing: .41mm thick aluminium jacket with 13mm wide bands of same thickness. r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP .1 Ensure the pipe fittings and equipment are dry and clean before applying covering. .2 Do not apply insulation until the item to be covered has been tested. .3 Apply covering in a neat workmanlike manner so that finished job is of uniform diameter and smooth in finish. Locate longitudinal seams so as to be invisible. .4 Mitre insulation at pipe elbows 25mm size and smaller and wrap joint with Mac-Tac tape. Use PVC Pipefitting Covers or cover joint with canvas pasted 1 on and extending one covering diameter each side of joint throat. .5 Neatly cover flanges at fittings, strainers, expansion joints, valves and equipment; 75mm size and over, using "box" type flange insulation. .6 Treat insulation and finishes so that maximum flame spread does not exceed a rating of 25 or as directed by local bylaws or requirements. Smoke developed classification shall not exceed 50 where required by applicable Codes. .7 To maintain the integrity of fire ratings and to control transmission of noise tightly pack annular space between sleeve and pipe covering where insulated pipes pass through sleeved openings in walls or floors, for full length of sleeve, with approved fireproof insulating packing and finish flush at each end with caulking compound, aluminum colour, as manufactured by: .1 The Tremco Manufacturing Co. - Last-Meric .2 Canadian Hanson & VanWinkle Co. Ltd. - Poly-Tite Joint .3 Foster Div., Amchem Products Inc. - Elastoler Sealant - 95-44 .8 Pipes covered with insulation having a vapour barrier jacket shall pass through walls or floors with continuous covering. Protect exposed pipe insulation at floor line with an 18 gauge galvanized iron jacket approximately 100mm high, ' secured to floor slab in an approved manner. r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - 4 i .9 A steel insulation shield shall be placed between the hanger and the insulated pipe by pipe installer. .10 At pipe support points with steel insulation shields use insulation with higher crushing strength to ensure that integrity and continuity of insulation and , vapour barrier are maintained. .11 Make good in an approved manner existing coverings damaged or cut back due to installation of new work, using same materials as specified for new work. 3.2 HOT FLUID PIPING .1 Cover domestic hot water piping, domestic tempered water piping, domestic water recirculation piping, with one piece fibreglass insulation with factory applied fire resistive all service jacket. Covering shall be 25mm thick for pipes smaller than 60mm and 40mm thick for larger pipes. .2 Cover fittings, valves, flanges and strainers with insulating cement of a thickness equal to that of the adjacent insulation, regardless of whether the adjacent pipe covering is recanvassed or not. 3.3 HOT EQUIPMENT _ .1 Cover domestic hot water storage tanks, convertors, heat exchangers, with 40mm insulation wired on. Recover with 12mm thickness of insulating cement, reinforced with 25mm hexagonal wire mesh. The final finish shall consist of canvas jacket adhered with lagging adhesive and brushed with one coat of lagging adhesive. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - 5 ' 3.4 COLD WATER PIPING .1 Cover domestic cold water piping, soil and waste piping, rainwater piping, (including roof hoppers and fittings), with 25mm thick insulation. Insulation thickness may be reduced to 12mm for piping 50mm size and under. i .2 Fkrmaflex insulation may be used for this service. 1 .3 Vertical runs of soil, waste and rainwater piping may be left uninsulated where installed in airtight pipeshafts without ducts, but only if not subject to freezing (not close to outside walls) and not subject to sweating due to free air motion. i .4 Cover fittings and valves with a layer of glass fibre insulation with vapour barrier. Recover with insulating cement to insulation on adjacent piping and canvas neatly pasted on with adhesive regardless of whether the adjacent pipe covering is recanvassed or not. i .5 Domestic water piping, sanitary drains, storm drains, fire protection piping, wet sprinkler system piping, sprinkler drum drips, storm sump pump discharge piping, sanitary sump pump discharge piping, piping installed in the unheated areas (ice pads and related areas) shall be similarly insulated, except that it shall be finished with aluminium jacket banded with aluminium bands. Co-operate with Section which will install electrical tracing wiring between the pipe and insulation. 3.5 COLD EQUIPMENT .1 Cover cold water and water meter, with 25mm rigid glass fibre mesh blanket with integral vapour barrier and high rib metal lath. Recover with 12mm thickness of insulating cement, reinforced with 12mm hexagonal wire mesh. ' .2 With 25mm thick flexible fibreglas insulation, sealed with glasfab lapping. Recover with 3mm of fire resistant vapour seal adhesive trowelled smooth and ' sealed over the edge of the adjacent jacket. .3 The final finish shall consist of canvas jacket adhered with lagging adhesive and brushed with one coat of lagging adhesive. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - 6 3.6 PUMPS .1 Enclose chilled water pumps with sheet metal boxes made so that packing , gland is accessible for service from outside. Line box on inside with 50mm thick 72 kg per cu m density glass fibre rigid board. Fabricate boxes from aluminum or copper of suitable thickness and construction. .2 Apply insulation to interior surface of box with mechanical pins and speed washers. Seal joints and edges with adhesive and reinforce with glass cloth membrane. 3.7 DUCTWORK AND AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT .1 Externally insulate: .1 fresh air ducts .2 exhaust ducts min. 1.5m back from outdoor connection .3 air supply ductwork located in the fan rooms .4 all air supply ducts, exhaust and return air ducts exposed to cold and warm spaces in icepad area and unconditioned areas. .2 Do not apply insulation to casings, ducts or plenums which have been lined with acoustic insulation, unless indicated otherwise. External insulation shall extend 300mm over internal acoustic lining. .3 Ensure that sheet metal surfaces on which insulation is to be applied is free from moisture, dirt, and rust, before applying insulation. .4 Cover plenums, casings, and ductwork which are to be thermally insulated with 25mm thick rigid preformed flexible foil faced duct insulation with factory applied fire retardent vapour barrier, or field applied Kraft laminate attached with adhesive. .5 Insulate circular ductwork with vapour seal 25mm flexible reinforced foil faced duct insulation. .6 Insulate ductwork exposed to outdoors to provide an R value of not less than 1.25 RSI. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - 7 .7 After insulation is applied, seal holes, corners and joints the same day with 75mm wide Mac-Tac scrim foil tape. .8 Cover angles or standing seams on the outside of plenums, casings and ducts, which extend beyond face of applied rigid insulation with a 12mm layer of i flexible fire resistant fibreglass, 16 kg per cu m density, with facing. Extend this insulation 75mm on each side of the angle and place tight around the projecting leg of the angle. Apply rigid insulation, overlapping edge of flexible fiberglass on angle, so that vertical part of insulated angle projects through work. Vapour seal joints with an approved sealer. j .9 Secure insulation to flat sheet metal surfaces by means of welded pins or perforated base metal fasteners and speed washers. Locate on not more than 500mm centres throughout the sheet metal surface with a minimum of two rows per duct side, and adhere with fire resistant cement. Place insulation on the metal spikes, attach speed washers on spikes and cut off the excess spike flush with washer. .10 Secure insulation to circular ducts with adhesive applied in strips 100mm wide at approximately 300mm centres. Seal joints and holes as previously specified. i3.8 RECOVERING AND FINISHING .1 Recover exposed pipe or equipment insulation in finished rooms, fan rooms, imechanical equipment rooms, duct and pipe shafts where access is available, pipe spaces, penthouses, with PVC or aluminum jacket. .2 Finish externally insulated ducts in fan rooms, penthouses, duct shafts where access is available and equipment rooms, with canvas and lap adhesive after joints and holes have been sealed with 75mm wide Mac-Tac scrim foil tape. .3 Cement recovering laps with lapping adhesive. After canvas has been applied, give the entire surface a heavy brush coat of the same adhesive applied undiluted. .4 Canvas for recovering shall be as previously specified with close weave and smooth finish. Submit sample of canvas for approval before installation. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Page: 15250 - 8 .5 For recovering and finishing of exposed pipe or equipment insulation PVC or aluminum Jacketing may be used instead of canvas. Apply Jacketing and Pipefitting Covers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .6 Securely fasten a layer of 25mm hexagonal wire mesh over externally insulated exposed fresh air intakes, exhausts, return and supply plenums, (excluding those formed by masonry walls or those acoustically lined), sheet metal blank-offs, and units and casings which are susceptible to damage (i.e. mounted at floor level). Securely apply a comer bead on comers. Apply a 12mm coat of insulating cement in two 6mm layers. Temper final coat with Portland cement. Recover finish coat with canvas as previously described. , .7 Cover insulated circular ducts in exposed locations with backing paper prior to applying canvas. .8 Hot and cold water p i P 9 in in the kitchen area where above the floor and exposed in finished areas, shall be covered with Johns-Manville Metal-on Jacket insulation. .9 Insulation exposed to outdoors shall be finished not with canvas, but a layer of 880 kg per cu m roofing felt, lapped at all joints, sealed with lap cement and held in place with metal bands on not more than 300mm centres. End of Section DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 - i ARTICLE NAME PAGE tPART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 i1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.2 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.3 WET AND DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.5 SPARE SPRINKLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1 INSTALLATION 5 3.3 RISERS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 All work under this Section shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. .2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Sprinkler Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND SCOPE ' .1 These specifications for the Fire Protection Systems are "Performance" specifications and are intended to establish design criteria and basic guidelines for the work. This contractor shall assume full responsibility for the layout and details of all fire protection work to meet the requirements of local governing Codes or regulations; and to the approval of The Ontario Fire Marshall. The basic location and routing criteria for mains, cross mains, and branch line piping shall be as shown and noted on the drawings. Design based on schedules system Hydraulic designed systems are acceptable. ' .2 As minimum requirements, all fire protection work shall comply with the applicable provisions for the National Fire Codes published by the National 1 Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the local Fire Department. .3 The scope of work shall include all labour, materials, equipment and accessories necessary for the complete fire protection systems including, but t not limited to the following major items: .1 Sprinkler contract starts at flanged connection where indicated on drawings. .2 Sprinkler riser and accessories at the general location indicated on the ' drawings, including alarm checks, excess pressure pump, water motor gong, electric bell and accessories. .3 Siamese fire department connection and fire pump test connection as indicated on the Drawings. National Fire Equipment flush mounted siamese connection Model 229 all chromeplated "Auto Sprinkler". DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 t SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 - 2 .4 Connection of existing wet and dry sprinkler zones to new sprinkler mains and headers. .5 Preparation of detailed shop drawings and hydraulic calculations for the , fire protection sytems to meet the approval of local authorities having jurisdiction on this project and as required by the Engineer. .6 Payment of all costs relating to fees, permits, inspections, tests, and plan reviews for the fire protection work and systems. .7 All signs and labels required by the insurance rating agency and/or local authorities. .8 Hangers and supports, drains, test connections, sleeves, escutcheons, , spare sprinkler heads with cabinet, and other necessary appurtenances. .9 Perform all testing and submit completed contractor's test certificate for each sprinkler system. .9 Associated jockey pump. (Relocated). .10 Electric tracing cable and insulation. , 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Prepare a set of construction shop drawings, immediately after the award of the contract, showing the complete system and have same approved by local authorities, insurance rating organization, and as required by codes and regulations. After the above approvals have been obtained, the contractor shall submit the drawings to the Consultant and Engineer for approval. Materials shall not be ordered nor shall any work be installed until ALL the approvals have been obtained. , .2 To avoid interference and clear all obstructions, any piping layouts shall be coordinated in the field with contractors of other trades, prior to the submission of shop drawings for approval at no additional cost. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 - 3 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS .1 Black steel Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A120 or ASTM A53. Schedule 30 pipe may be used in sizes 8" and larger. Light wall pipe with roll groove for mechanical couplings may be used for all piping where permitted by Codes and authorities. .2 Fittings shall be cast iron, malleable iron or steel welding type. Screwed unions and couplings shall be used on piping 2" and smaller. Screwed couplings, flanges, or welding shall be used to joint piping 2-1/2" and larger, except where mechanical couplings are allowed as specified herein. .3 Mechanical couplings and fittings such as manufactured by Victaulic which are ULC listed for fire protection service and meeting with the approval of the insurance underwriting agency and governing Codes may be used to join above ground piping. 2.2 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES .1 All valves shall be ULC listed for fire protection service. r .2 All gate and check valves shall be rated for 175 psig non-shock cold water pressure. ' .3 Valves shall be as manufactured by Jenkins, Crane, Newman-Hender, Grinnell, Keystone, Victaulic. .4 Except as otherwise specified, all gate valves shall be OS&Y U-42 (two way) type and shall be electrically supervised. .5 Butterfly valves may be used in place of gate valves where approved by authorities. ' 2.3 WET AND DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS .1 This contractor shall provide hydraulically calculated wet and dry sprinkler systems designed to deliver the minimum densitities over the hydraulically most remote design areas as specified below. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 - 4 .2 System shall be installed in accordance with "Ordinary Hazard Occupancy" for ' entire building, using automatic spray heads. Include necessary "accelerators", drum drips to maintain maximum clearance below sprinklers. 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS , .1 Sprinkler heads shall be ULC listed and shall be of the type and temperature , rating as required. .2 Ceiling sprinklers in all areas shall be fully recessed concealed type Grinnell "Clean Line". Paint escutcheon plate to match ceiling. .3 Sprinkler in exposed areas shall be upright type with plain bronze finish , complete with guards. .4 All sprinkler heads shall be equal to Grinnell "Dura Speed" series. .5 Unless otherwise noted, fusible links for sprinkler heads shall be Ordinary Temperature rated. Locations and clearances for sprinkler heads near hot equipment or piping, etc., shall comply with NFPA Pamphlet 13. 2.5 SPARE SPRINKLERS .1 Provide not less than the minimum number of spare sprinkler heads, for each type and rating used on the job, in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13. .2 Provide metal cabinet or cabinets for storage of spare sprinklers. Cabinets shall be provided, hinged door and latch and shall be finished with red enamel paint. Provide engraved plastic sign on each cabinet front to read: SPARE , SPRINKLERS. Provide a sprinkler wrench in each cabinet. 2.6 JOCKEY PUMPS , .1 Jockey Model .1 The jockey pump shall be Armstrong Darling. The jockey pump shall be driven by 3600 RPM, 575 volts, 3 phase, 60 cycle, ODP horizontal motor. .2 Jockey Pump Controller , .1 The jockey pump shall be controlled by an automatic jockey pump controller model JP. 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 - 5 .3 Selected Options for Jockey Controller .1 Minimum run period timer (0-10 minutes), 50VA control trans. c/w secondary circuit breaker. "Motor Run" Alarm Contacts. .4 System Operation .1 Upon system pressure drop, the jockey pump will start up automatically and pressurize the system to the set pressure and then stop. 2.7 ELECTRIC TRACING .1 All wet pipe sprinler piping running through arenas and all drum drips shall be electrically traced using 120V 5 W/ft. self-regulating cable. Obtain power from nearest junction box provided by Division 16. Extend power wire in conduit from junction box to electric tracing cable outlet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.11 INSTALLATION .1 The entire installation shall apply with NFPA 13 as minimum requirements. .2 Coordinate the installation of all fire protection systems with the work of all other trades. Provide all necessary offsets in piping to avoid interference with other equipment and systems and provide additional sprinkler heads due to offsets and/or interference as required to achieve design coverage at no additional cost. .3 All horizontal piping shall be installed as high above finished floor as possible with due allowance for clearances for sprinklers as required by NFPA 13. Refer to notes on the drawings for additional requirements, if any, regarding clear heights for piping. .4 Provide drain valves and piping as required to permit all sprinkler piping to be completely drained. Provide inspector's test connections in accordance with NFPA 13 and as required by governing Codes and the insurance underwriting agency. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 -6 .5 All drains and test connections shall be discharged into the building drainage system through an approved indirect waste connection or shall be piped to discharge to the building exterior. The contractor shall provide precast concrete splash blocks at all drains and test connections discharging to the building exterior at unpaved points. .6 All piping shall be concealed in finished rooms and areas. Drains and/or test connections shall not be terminated exposed in finished rooms, areas or toilet rooms. .7 All piping through interior walls and partitions shall be sleeved and closed off with escutcheons where visible. Penetrations through fire rated walls shall be sleeved, packed, and grouted as required to maintain the fire rating of the wall. Piping through floors and exterior walls, including foundation walls, shall be t sleeved, packed and grouted with non-shrinking cement as required to make watertight. 3.2 INSULATION A All electrically traced pipe shall be insulated with 1' thick rigid fiberglass pipe insulation with ASJ. Finish insulation with preformed plastic cladding. 3.3 RISERS AND ALARMS .1 Flanged connections shall be used at the base of all risers. Steel pipe shall not be extended into the ground at the base of risers. Provided cast iron flange , and spigot piece at the floor penetration for connection to the steel pipe riser. .2 Risers penetrating floors shall be sleeved, packed with oakum, and made watertight and non-shrinking grout. .3 Each riser shall be equipped with an alarm clock valve assembly, water motor alarm, drains, gauges, and related piping, valves and accessories. Water motor alarm gong shall be mounted on the exterior face of the building wall near the riser. Pressure gauges, complying with NFPA 13 complete with stop cock and draining provisions shall be provided on the supply and discharge side of each alarm check valve. .4 Provide automatically operated excess pressure pump at alarm check valves and pressure gauge on pump outlet. f DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLERS Page: 15330 - 7 1 .5 Provide automatically operated air compressor at dry pipe alarm check valve(s). Connect compressed air lines to systems complete with relief valves and pressure gauges on compressor outlet. Provide all compressor controls. .6 Provide a pressure flow switch on the discharge side of each alarm check valve. Flow switches mounted in horizontal piping shall be mounted on the top side of"the pipe. Waterflow switches shall be mounted at least 2 feet from elbows or tees and at least 10 pipe diameters from control valves. ' .7 Provide air pressure flow switches on the discharge side of each dry pipe alarm check valve. Air flow switches shall be mounted at least 2 feet from elbows or tees and at least 10 pipe diameters from control valves. .8 Provide where indicated on the drawings a siamese fire department connection and pump test connection with two - 4" hose connections, caps and chains. Hose threads to meet local Fire Department requirements. Fire Department connection shall have check valve and automatic drip piped to drain. ' End of Section f 1 f f 1 f f 1 f DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT 1 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.4 STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS 2 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 PLUMBING PIPE AND FITTINGS 3 2.2 VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.3 CLEANOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.5 FLOOR AND ROOF DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.6 GREASE INTERCEPTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2.7 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.8 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.9 GAS FIRED DOMESTIC HOT WATER BOILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.10 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.11 PLUMBING FIXTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION 10 3.2 JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.3 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.4 PIPE HANGERS 11 3.5 FLASHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ' 3.6 PIPE EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.7 TRAP PRIMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.8 BACKVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.9 AIR CHAMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.10 DRIPS AND DRAINS 13 3.11 COLD WATER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.12 HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.13 DRAINAGE AND SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.14 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANKS AND HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.15 SPECIAL WATER AND WASTE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ' 3.16 NATURAL GAS PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.17 TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.18 FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ' 3.19 STERILIZATION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.20 ELECTRIC HEAT PIPE TRACING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. ' 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all labour, materials, plant, tools, transportation, testing and put into proper operation a complete plumbing and drainage system to the full intent of the drawings and/or.specifications. ' .2 In general, the major divisions of the work are as follows: .1 Plumbing fixtures, floor drains, roof hoppers and other plumbing fittings and equipment. .2 Storm and sanitary drainage piping inside the building and to 1.5m rY 9 P p 9 outside the building. .3 Domestic hot, cold, tempered and recirculation piping inside the building and to 1.5m outside the building. .4 System of natural gas piping. .5 Service connections to equipment furnished by others. .6 Miscellaneous Plumbing Work as shown on drawings and/or as ' specified herein. .9 Connections to refrigeration plant equipment for Division 17. Coordinate ' for water and drain requirements from Division 17 and provide all necessary connections as per O.B.C. and Plumbing Codes including backflow preventers and isolation valve at each equipment. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 2 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS .1 Thermal insulation - under Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation. i 1.4 STANDARDS .1 All work shall conform to the the Ontario Building Code; and all regulations of City, Local, Provincial or Territorial Authorities having jurisdiction. In case of - confliction of codes with Specifications and Drawings, the most severe , requirements shall apply. Where Drawings call for pipe sizes larger than minimum of the codes, Drawings shall be followed. The codes, however, shall not be violated under any circumstances. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission ' requirements. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Valves , .2 Plumbing specialties, including cleanouts, floor drains, roof drains, backwater valves, scupper drains, area drains, trap primers, garbage can wash drain, grease interceptors, etc. .3 Storm and sanitary sump pumps .4 Submersible pumps .5 Water softening equipment , .6 Domestic hot water boilers and heaters .7 Storage tanks .8 Fire extinguishers , .9 Plumbing fixtures, including water closets, lavatories, sinks, showers, faucets, traps, stops, etc. ' i i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 3 iPART 2 - PRODUCTS i2.1 PLUMBING PIPE AND FITTINGS .1 Buried storm and sanitary drainage piping and fittings shall be plastic SDR 35 i type. .2 Unless otherwise noted, above ground storm and sanitary drainage piping and fittings, including main vent piping, shall be cast iron Class 4000 with mechanical joints, factory coated with raw linseed oil, or type "DWV" hard drawn copper with drainage type cast bronze or wrought copper solder fittings. .3 Above ground sanitary drainage piping between grids 6 and 12, J1 & G1 shall be plastic SDR-35. .4 Asbestos cement Transite Type I pipe with Crowle fittings may be used for above ground rainwater piping. .5 Branch vents shall be type "DWV" hard drawn copper with cast bronze or wrought copper solder type fittings. Buried vents may be plastic ABS DWV itype piping. .6 Domestic water piping installed above the floor, including hot and cold and recirculating piping shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing with cast ' bronze or wrought copper solder type fittings. No copper piping shall be in contact with ferrous materials. Unions or flange connections similar to Epco "Di-Electric" pipe fittings shall be used when making such connections. Copper pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the latest issue of C.S.A. Standard Specification. i .7 Buried water pipe 100mm size and larger shall be Class 150 Ring-Tite PVC or cement lined ductile cast iron water pipe. Buried water pipe less than 100mm size shall be soft temper copper with no joints below the floor, Type "L". i .8 Above ground sump and sewage pump discharge piping from pump to gravity drain shall be Type "L" copper. ' .9 Piping for special systems such as Natural Gas, etc., are specified in other articles of this Specification Section. 1 i i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 -4 2.2 VALVES .1 All valves shall be suitable for 1.5MPa water working pressure and up to and i including 60mm size, shall be all brass. Larger sizes shall have iron bodies and bronze trim. All valves 100mm and larger on main distribution piping shall be O.S. & Y. type with rising stem and shall be flanged. .2 Check valves 50mm size and smaller shall be 15 degree swing type with brass disc, Figure 4092 for screwed ends and Fig. 4093 for soldered ends. Check valves larger than 50mm shall be Jenkins Fig. 587. .3 Valves on branch piping supplying plumbing fixtures from mains and riser shall be globe valves set behind access doors, except for unfinished areas, where they may be exposed. .4 Gate valves on steel pipe up to and including 60mm size shall be Jenkins Fig. 810 for screwed ends and Type 813 for soldered ends or Crane 430. Globe valves shall be Jenkins 106B or.Crane 7. .5 Gate valves on steel pipe 75mm size and over shall be Jenkins 454 or Crane 465. Globe valves shall be Jenkins 142 or Crane 7. .6 Valves on copper pipe up to and including 60mm size shall be brass solder joint globe valves rising stem and shall be Jenkins 106 BP or Crane 1310. ' .7 Ball valves size 50mm and less may be used in lieu of globe and gate valves, Jenkins Fig. 33 for screwed ends and Fig. 34 for soldered ends for on-off ' service. .8 Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of globe and gate valves size 60mm and over as follows: .1 Size 60mm to 125mm - Jenkins Fig. 2232EL lug type with with bronze disc and EDPM liner and lever operated. .2 Size 150mm and over, as above with gear operator Jenkins Fig. 2232GG. ' 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 5 - type,.9 Outside hose bibbs shall be 20mm non freeze yp , Ancon HY725PB or approved equal in Enpoco satin bronze box face, loose key handle, brass wall sleeve, locknut and BFP. In general, all bibbs shall be located approximately 60cm above grade. .10 Inside hose bibbs shall be Crane C-5046, Emco 4710/14 or approved equal, chrome plated 12mm or 20mm bibb and located in general 1 m above floor unless otherwise specified. .11 Valves shall be Jenkins, Crane, McAvity, Red & White. Butterfly valves shall be Jenkins, Keystone, Victaulic or Grinnell. 2.3 CLEANOUTS .1 Cleanouts shall be Ancon CO200 series or approved equal in Enpoco, to suit floor construction. 2 Cleanout plugs shall be gasketed and fastened with brass hex bolts. .3 Cleanouts in waterproofed areas shall have flashing clamp devices to receive the waterproofing membrane. 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS .1 Flexible connectors shall be Flexonics RW-81 or RW-91, all bronze construction, of length as recommended by manufacturer. 2.5 FLOOR AND ROOF DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES .1 Roof hoppers shall be lacquered cast iron body with removable dome galvanized strainer, flashing clamp and gravel stop, deck clamp, etc., equal to Ancon RD-100BEW for conventional roof, RD-100B CDHW1 for IRMA type roof complete with control flow device, or equal in Enpoco. Controlled flow drains have number of weirs indicated on Drawings. .2 Floor drains in washrooms and showers, unless otherwise noted, shall be Ancon FD200L 5x5 or equal in Enpoco with double drainage feature, lacquered cast iron body and adjustable satin bronze strainer. Strainer to be 150mm diameter. Use 175mm diameter strainer with removable sediment bucket in showers and janitor's mop sinks. Provide membrane clamp where required to suit floor finish. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 6 .3 Floor drains in mechanical equipment rooms, workshop, areas where carts are used or traffic is heavy, shall have adjustable ductile iron tractor grate, Ancon FD340 complete with bucket, or equal in Enpoco. .4 Floor drains located at players' benches shall be Ancon FD300-4-6. ..5 Combination drains (floor and funnel drains) in mechanical rooms and fan rooms shall be Ancon FD20OG or equal in Enpoco. .6 Scupper drains shall be lacquered cast iron body Ancon FD-100-C-AS or equal in Enpoco or Zum with brass strainer. .7 Area drains shall have lacquered cast iron body with galvanized dome strainer, , Roto-Tech Smith 2140 or equal in Enpoco or Zurn. .8 Backwater valves shall be Ancon BV200 or equal in Enpoco. Where backwater valves are located more than one foot below floor level, include an access pit with steel cover.and cover frame set in floor of proper depth and size to permit .servicing of the backwater valve and running trap. .9 All floor drains, hub drains, funnel drains, etc., shall be trapped and provided with a 10mm water connection for trap seal. Install electronic trap primer units, Precision Plumbing Products PT6, PT12 and PT24. 10 Floor drains in waterproofed areas protected with metal or lead safe, or any waterproofing membrane, shall have flashing ring and clamping device to receive the waterproofing membrane. .11 Hub drains shall terminate 25mm above finished floor. Provide welded steel funnel caulked into hub and sized to accommodate all open drains. 2.6 GREASE INTERCEPTORS , .1 For type, size and construction of grease interceptors, refer to drawings. Unit shall be cast iron construction with cadmium plated non slip gasketted cover. 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 7 i 2.7 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS .1 Submersible sump pump units shall consist of a submersible electrical motor driven pump, and controls. Include galvanized steel cover plate, and frame for each pump. .Each pump shall have discharge pipe connecting to the drains with break flange and gate and check valves in horizontal portion of the line from pump, adjacent to the pump. .2 Pumps shall be Bames or Myers with all electrical controls and accessories to make a completely automatic system. Size and type are indicated on drawings. .3 Include manual starter with pilot light. Include all wiring from starter to level control and to motor.. .4 Where indicated on drawings, pumps shall be provided with remotely located high water alarm. Do all wiring between control panel and remote alarm. .2.8 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANK .1 Tank shall be Alco Al-Krete lined steel storage tank, in horizontal construction, complete with saddles, constructed to A.S.M.E. Code for 800kPa working pressure conditions. AI-Krete lining to be applied on tank shell to 20mm thickness over steel mesh lining. All flanged connections to be fully Al-Krete lined, and all screwed connections to be Everdur construction. Lining shall be guaranteed in writing to be free of defects for a period of 10 years from date of final acceptance and any defects in the lining and damage to the shell as a result of such defects, shall be repaired or replaced without charge to the Owner. Include valved 30mm drain piped to nearest floor drain. .2 An A.S.M.E. Code rated temperature and pressure relief valve shall be mounted on tank as well as a 12mm vacuum breaker. Tank shall be complete with well for temperature controller and 275 x 375mm manhole. All connections 75mm size and over shall be flanged. �i .3 A Taylor or Trerice industrial thermometer with removable socket shall be installed on the tank, with angle stem and 225mm face with suitable range. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 8 i .4 Provide all hot, cold, and recirculation piping and drain connections. 2.9 GAS FIRED DOMESTIC HOT WATER BOILERS .1 Domestic hot water boiler(s) shall be fully automatic burner/boiler units. Each unit shall be Raypak coppertube hot water boiler built in accordance with ASME and the Province of Ontario Codes for working pressure of 160 psig. .2 Each gas train shall be CGA approved and include pilot regulating valve, pilot and main gas pressure regulating valves,firing valve, electric gas valve and lubricated plug cock. .3 Each unit shall have solid state electronic ignition and flame safeguard controls with .8 second safety shutdown and electric spark ignition. .4 Each unit shall have: .1 Heat exchanger consisting of 25mm integral finned copper tubes rolled into heavy duty bronze headers and sealed with silicone "0" rings tested at minimum of 3500kPa and stamped with ASME rating of 1100kPa complete with baffles to ensure full efficiency and approved draft diverter outlet. The complete heat exchanger shall be guaranteed for 10 years. .2 Combustion chamber constructed of castable refractory interlocked and designed for continuous rating of 760 degrees C and maximum rating of 1200 degrees C. .3 Burners of stainless steel titanium stablized type with large high efficiency ports, mounted in an easily removable burner drawer. .4 The outer casing of baked enamel finished steel shall be air cooled internally and contain a heavy steel base. .5 Bronze body circulator. .6 L4008A operating aquastat mounted and wired on boiler. .5 Each boiler shall be complete with ASME rated safety valve (set 860kPa) with try level, piped to hub drain, McDonnell-Miller FS-4 flow switch interlocked with ignition system to prevent operation of boiler in event of'no-flow" condition. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 9 2.10 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ' .1 Extinguishers shall be Chubb Model No. ABCSP or equal in Walter Kidde or Levitt Safety, complete with suitable mounting bracket. 2 Where indicated on drawings provide recessed cabinets suitable for flush mounting Wilson & Cousins Model No. 1 E10 or equal in Levitt Safety or Kent Fire Protection. 2.11 PLUMBING FIXTURES .1 Plumbing fixtures shall be as described in the attached Plumbing Fixture Schedule and shall be as manufactured by Eljer, Crane or American Standard. .2 Fixtures shall be complete with necessary trim, including traps, faucets, supplies, stops, strainers, escutcheons, spuds, wastes, tail pieces, gaskets, brass bolts & carriers. .3 Provide wheel handle or screwdriver stop valve on the hot and cold water supply to every fixture on the job, in addition to the valve or faucet on the fixture itself. .4 Shop drawings for fixtures shall consist of a carefully prepared portfolio showing illustrations, dimension drawings and detail descriptions of the fixtures 1 to be furnished. .5 Trim shall be as manufactured by Crane, Cambridge Brass or Symmons. 1 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION , .1 All work shall be executed by plumbers holding certificates of competency. All fixtures and equipment shall be roughed-in, installed and connected exactly in conformity with respective manufacturer's details and all fitted with individual shut offs. All lines shall be laid or hung to approved falls, and all lines shall be . arranged so that any or all systems may be completely drained. All roughing-in shall be concealed, save where specifically excepted by the Consultant. Piping shall not touch the structure, sleeves, other piping, conduits or equipment at any point, save at the necessary connections. This shall be observed carefully to avoid transmission of noise. Allow sufficient space in sleeves, etc. for thermal expansion of piping. .2 Where piping is installed in filled ground, or earth that cannot support piping, piping shall be supported on a concrete pad or piers, or alternatively it shall be cast iron hung at every joint from reinforcing rods 10mm diameter min. asphalt coated as described in Plumbing Code. Where piping passes through foundation walls, it shall be supported on a reinforced concrete pad as specified under "Excavation and Backfili" in Section 15050. .3 In all piping 75mm size and over, located anywhere, install copper or brass flanges at each valve and at apparatus. .4 Water i e in boiler room and mechanical equipment rooms shall be P P copper as previously specified but disconnecting copper or brass flanges shall be installed at boilers, chillers, etc., using wrought copper streamlined fittings and with Silfos solder within 8m of such connections. .5 Pipes to circular wash fountains and island fixtures shall be insulated, wrapped with polyken tape and run in individual ABS Plastic conduits. 3.2 JOINTS .1 Joints in cast iron pipes shall be Mechanical type. .2 Joints in screwed steel pipe shall be made up with an approved joint compound. The use of lampwick will not be permitted. Pipe threads shall be full and clean cut. Pipes shall be reamed after being cut. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 11 .3 Joints in copper piping shall be made using special tools of proper size. Ends shall be cut off at right angles to pipe and reamed. Inside of fitting and outside of pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned with steel wool and coated with flux. Joints shall be soldered with a blowtorch or oxyacetylene flame using single or double tip torch depending on fitting size. Use hard solder made up of 95% tin and 5% antimony for pipe sizes up to and including 78mm. Use Silfos for pipe sizes 100mm and above. Working parts of valves must be removed during soldering. Wrought copper steamlined fittings must be used where Silfos is specified. .4 Joints in plastic piping to be solvent welded. .5 All solders and jointing materials shall meet the current code requirements regarding the maximum allowable lead content. 3.3 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION .1 Provide cleanouts for drains 16m apart in all straight runs of sewers, at all changes of direction, at the end of all branches, at the base of all riser lines, on all exposed or accessible traps (except water closet traps), at all points on the system where so indicated or required by Code, or where necessary because of interruption of general line of flow. .2 Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe up to 100mm and not less than 100mm for larger pipes. Full size "Y" or "TY" branches shall be provided for cleanouts on drains and their branches. .3 All cleanouts shall be made accessible and wherever necessary branch connections shall extend to finished surfaces of floors with polished bronze floor plate and frame for each, set flush with floor and with vandalproof socket head screws to match the cover finish. .4 Care shall be taken to locate all Barrett type cleanouts above any curbs, bases, etc. Barretts shall be covered with access doors as specified. 3.4 PIPE HANGERS .1 Provide pipe hangers and supports for all piping and equipment supplied and installed under this Section. Refer to Section 15050 for detailed requirements. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 12 3.5 FLASHING .1 All piping extending through the roof or other waterpr000fed area shall be flashed with Thaler Roofing Specialties Products roof flashing. Flashing shall be left ready as directed by the roofers or water proofers for them to make watertight connections. .2 Where pipes pass through walls, flashing shall be turned back into the wall and caulked. 3.6 PIPE EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION .1 Provide for the expansion and contraction of pipe work. Erect all pipe in such a manner that the strain and weight does not come upon cast connections or apparatus. Provide bends or swing joints for this purpose. .2 Provide anchors and expansion loops where required and where shown on drawings. Anchors shall be equal in strength to the pipe being anchored, both in shear and in bending. 3.7 TRAP PRIMERS .1 All floor drains, hub drains, funnel drains etc., shall be trapped and provided with a 10mm water connection for trap seal. .2 Install electronic trap seal priming units as manufactured by PPP Model PT6- P12 and PT24. 3.8 BACKVENTS .1 Every plumbing fixture shall have its own trap and these shall be vented in accordance with the Ontario Water Resources Commission Plumbing Code or any other local rules and regulations. Vents are shown on drawings only to indicate the required routing. .2 Vents smaller than 75mm shall be increased to 75mm before passing through the roof. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 13 3.9 AIR CHAMBERS .1 Provide premanufactured and preengineered shock guards on all fixtures. Location and size shall suit manufacturer recommendations. Units shall be as manufactured by Ancon. 3.10 DRIPS AND DRAINS .1 Supply and install 12mm drip cocks with hose connectors at the base of all water risers and all low points. These shall be Dahl 2316 or James Robertson JR-4532 (Type "C" for copper pipe). i3.11 COLD WATER DISTRIBUTION .1 Provide a new water service and water meter as shown c/w flanged connection for sprinklers. .2 Connect piping to existing icepad/service rooms/wasrhooms, etc. at locations shown. 3.12 HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION .1 Run hot water and tempered hot water piping as indicated on the Drawings and connect to all fixtures, hose bibbs, and all other miscellaneous equipment requiring tempered or hot water connection. Also provide connections to existing icepad/service/washroom, etc. including recirculation piping at locations shown. .2 There shall be no high points or air pockets in any recirculation lines. Lines shall be so arranged and graded that air shall collect at the fixtures or at the hot water tanks. Where it is impossible to avoid high points, install automatic air eliminator traps, Sarco Type 13WN with discharge piped to nearest drain. .3 Provide a separate circulating loop on tempered water supply to all showers and 3 new melting pits complete with pump, 3 way mixing valve and connections to hot and cold water piping. 3-way valve shall be 3 to 1 ratio supply type equal to Symmons, Powers or Leonard. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 14 3.13 DRAINAGE AND SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM .1 The general arrangement of the storm and sanitary drainage piping is shown on the Drawings. Install a complete drainage system as shown. .2 The area drains connecting to internal drainage system are part of the work of this Section. 3.14 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANKS AND HEATERS .1 Provide all hot, cold, and recirculation piping and drain connections. .2 Supply and install 125mm scale thermometer in supply main from each hot water tank. Thermometer to have separable socket and to be installed so that it can be read easily. Thermometers installed in insulated lines shall have extended bulbs and sockets. Thermometers shall be Taylor or approved equal. 3.15 - SPECIAL WATER AND WASTE CONNECTIONS .1 Supply and install all hot and cold water, waste and vent connections required in the mechanical equipment rooms, and in any other locations where shown or required for all items shown on Mechanical or Architectural Drawings, including "Not-In-Contract" (N.I.C.) items, "Cash Allowance" items, "Supplied by Owners" (S.B.O.) items. Co-operate with all other trades to the extent of properly locating any connections they require and connect up complete to all pieces of apparatus so served, installing a valve on each water and gas connection close to each piece of apparatus. Install a cast brass trap with cleanout and vent on the waste connections, unless waste discharges into a floor drain, hub or combination drain. Include piping from apparatus waste connection to such open drains in the latter case. .2 Supply and install all necessary gas pressure and water pressure regulators where required by individual apparatus and equipment and run necessary vents to atmosphere. .3 In all direct connections of city water to equipment such as expansion tanks, boilers, fill connection to piping systems, provide a reduced pressure back-flow preventing device, approved by Ontario Water Resources Commission and local Plumbing Inspection. Backflow preventors to be Watts, Clayton or Singer manufacture. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 15 .4 Provide reduced pressure backflow connectors on all inside and outside hose bibb connections equal to Watts manufacture. .5 In the case of"Existing Relocated" items include all work and materials for disconnection in the old location and reconnection in the new location. .6 All exposed valves, traps, etc. in kitchen and dining area to be chromeplated. Provide pressure reducing valve assembly on water line to dishwasher to maintain 140-175kPa with 45 L/min flowing. Include 75mm chromeplated pressure gauge on low pressure side and 3 valve bypass around reducing valve. .7 Supply and install gas solenoid valves on gas lines serving gas fired equipment under kitchen hoods. 3.16 NATURAL GAS PIPING 1 Make all necessary arrangements, pay all charges and do all necessary work for a new firm gas service into the building where shown on the Drawings. Arrange piping and pay all charges for gas meter installations including service valve, etc., pressure reducing assemblies, relief valves, vent piping to the outside, etc., as and if required by the Gas utility. Continue piping from the meter installation, connecting to all gas fired equipment on the job as indicated on the Drawings. Include the supply and installation of a lever operated approved type gas cock at each piece of equipment close to the point of connection. Tie into existing main serving existing rooftop equipment. .2 Gas piping shall be standard weight black steel pipe with standard weight malleable iron screwed fittings. Piping shall be welded wherever required by the Gas Utility Inspection Officials. Piping shall be installed and tested in strict accordance with C.S.A. BI49 Standard, together with any other local rules and regulations having jurisdiction. .3 All concealed or buried piping shall be welded, vented and protected as required by the Gas Company. No such piping shall be installed or concealed until approval is obtained from the Gas Company. .4 All gas piping to be painted and identified by this Section as required by Code. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 16 3.17 TESTING .1 All water piping shall be tested to a pressure of at least 1050kPa. .2 All drains shall be tested for tightness and grade as required by the Ontario Water Resources Commission Act respecting Plumbing and local authorities. .3 All tests shall be made before the application of pipe covering and all concealed pipes shall be tested before being covered up. Underground drains shall be tested before backfill is placed. .4 Any tests required by the Consultant during the progress of the work or at its completion, shall be made without cost to the Owner. Such tests shall be carried out solely for the purpose of determining if the work as actually installed meets specified requirements. .5 All tests must last at least 2 hours and if leaks develop, these must be corrected and the test repeated to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the local authorities. .6 Caulking of threaded joints shall not be permitted, faulty piping shall be replaced with new pipe and fittings. .7 Notify the Consultant and the local Plumbing Inspector of all tests and conduct same to their satisfaction and in the presence of their representatives. Provide all labour and equipment for tests and conduct same. Repeat tests until system is shown to be leak-tight and in proper working condition, all to the satisfaction of all inspectors having authority. 3.18 FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND SUPPORTS .1 Supply, install and connect up complete all plumbing fixtures shown on the Drawings. Protect all fixtures until the building is accepted by the Owner. .2 All wall hung plumbing fixtures shall be supported by wall or floor brackets. The bolts for these brackets are to be carried through the wall and through a steel plate 150mm wide, 3mm thick and full length of bracket, plus 50mm or to suit studs on wall or lagged to floor using lead anchors with galvanized bolts. r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - INSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Page: 15400 - 17 .3 Supply and install below showers, janitor's receptors, and all other waterproofed areas required for plumbing fixtures a 2.5mm sheet lead safe, soldered at all joints, flashed into the floor drain and turned up 150mm into all walls and curbs. "Compotite" manufactured membrane may be used in lieu of sheet lead. 3.19 STERILIZATION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEM .1 Before placing into service, chlorinate the potable water piping system by injection of mixture of 5% calcium hypochlorite and 95% water thoroughly mixed from paste form to full mixture. .2 Inject the mixture into the mains in such a manner as to ensure treatment of the entire line. .3 Retain a dosage of 50 p.p.m. in the line for 4 hours after which a residual of 5 p.p.m. minimum should be obtained. .4 When a pipe line is already filled with water, inject a concentrate chlorine mixture at intervals along the pipe line. The retention period in this case shall be 8 hours. .5 Operate all valves during chlorination so that they will be sterilized in the procedure. After chlorination period flush out the lines at extremities until water tests are equal, chemically and bacteriologically to those of the source of supply. 3.20 ELECTRIC HEAT PIPE TRACING SYSTEM .1 Piping listed on drawings shall be electrically traced with a self regulating cable as manufactured by Raychem XL Series cable. Wafts per unit length of pipe shall be pre-engineered to suit pipe diameter and insulation thickness and shall be 120V, 1 phase. Installation shall be to manufacturer recommendations and shall be complete with all necessary XKL-P power junction kits complete with junction boxes. This contractor to obtain power from nearest junction box provided by Division 16. Extend power wire in conduit from junction box to electric tracing cable outlet. End of Section DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING FIXTURE LIST Page: 15400 - 1 WC WATER CLOSET WHITE VITREOUS CHINA ELJER 111-1425 "AUBURN" C/W 9T400 ACCESS PANEL, ANCON CARRIER SERIES CA-101, TECK FLUSH VALVE 83T145 AND CENTOCO 50OCC WHITE SEAT OPEN FRONT LESS COVER. WC-1 WATER CLOSET SAME AS FIXTURE TYPE "WC" ABOVE EXCEPT MOUNT AT WHEELCHAIR HEIGHT AND SEAT TO BE CENTOCO 820ST. U URINALS WHITE VITREOUS CHINA ELDER 161-1045 "CORRECTO" C/W ANCON CO-441 RD 1 .5 CLEANOUT C/W CAMBRIDGE BRASS 1000T6403. ELECTRONIC FLUSH CONTROL WITH TRANSFORMER CARRIER ANCON CA-321-TE. L LAVATORIES COUNTER (PUBLIC WASHROOM) WHITE VITREOUS CHINA 051-2954 "ROBERTA" C/W OFFSET TRAP WITH CLEANOUT AND OPEN GRID STRAINER TRIM ELECTRONIC CAMBRIDGE BRASS 200OT2238 C/W TRANSFORMER. L-1 LAVATORY WALL HUNG (STAFF, FIRST AID) WHITE VITREOUS CHINA ELJER DELWYN 051-1644 C/W ANCON CA-411 . PROVIDE TRAP WITH CLEANOUT, SUPPLIES WITH STOPS AND CAMBRIDGE BRASS 21T134 TRIM. SH SHOWER - PUBLIC SYMMONS MODEL 3-325 SHOWER OFF PUSHBUTTON C/W INSTITUTIONAL HEAD. UNIT TO BE C/W CHECK STOPS. SH-1 SHOWER - STAFF SYMMONS 96-1-295-X TEMPTROL PRESSURE BALANCING MIXING VALVE C/W SHOWER HEAD. SH-2 SHOWER - HANDICAPPED SAME AS FIXTURE TYPE "SH" EXCEPT REPLACE HEAD WITH 54" CHROME BAR AND HAND SHOWER. SS STAINLESS STEEL SINK (CONCESSION) ARISTALINE LBT6410-1 C C/W CRUMB CUPS. TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 26T2633. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING FIXTURE LIST Page: 15400 - 2 SS-1 STAINLESS STEEL HAND SINK ARISTALINE LBS6807-1 C C/W CRUMB CUP. TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 26T2144. SS-2 DOUBLE STAINLESS STEEL SINK ARISTALINE LBD6407-1 CB. TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 27T3833. MS MOP SINKS CAMBRIDGE BRASS 28T94. TRIM 28T9, 28T910, 28T911, 28T912. WS WORK ROOM SINK ELJER 242-0150 ROLLINS. TRIM CAMBRIDGE BRASS 28T8073. DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN (NON-REFRIGERATED) HALSEY TAYLOR MODEL HT-EBP. DF-1 DRINKING FOUNTAIN (REFRIGERATED) HALSEY TAYLOR HAC-8FS ALL STAINLESS STEEL C/W OPTIONAL GLASS FILLER KIT. EW EYEWASH/SAFETY SHOWER GUARDIAN MODEL G-1902-P-SC. l I DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15490 - OUTSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINGE Page: 15490 i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 STANDARDS 1 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 SEWER STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.3 VALVES AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.4 FRAMES AND COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.5 POST HYDRANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.6 FIRE HYDRANT 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES 4 3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.3 LINES AND GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.4 HANDLING OF PIPE 4 3.5 BEDDING OF PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.6 JOINTING OF PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.7 PROTECTION OF PIPE LAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.8 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.9 CLEANOUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . � . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.10 BRANCHES 6 3.11 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.12 CLOSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.13 TESTS FOR ALIGNMENT 7 3.14 FINAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.15 MUNICIPAL CHARGES FOR STREET CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 I 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all labour, materials, plant, tools, transportation and testing to the full intent of the drawings and/or specifications. .2 The work is generally as follows: .1 Relocate water service from street mains to within 1.5m of building. .2 New storm service from street mains to within 1.5m of building. .3 New sanitary service from street mains to within 1.5m of building. .4 Miscellaneous additional work such as manholes, catchbasins, etc. 1.3 STANDARDS .1 The whole of the work specified herein and on the Drawings shall comply strictly with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Any additional requirements of the Ontario Water Resources Commission Regulations respecting Plumbing and codes, Ontario Building Code, Ontario Fire Marshall regulations and by-laws of other jurisdictional authorities form an integral part of this specification, and are the minimum requirements. Where the drawings or specifications call for piping, exceeding the minimum requirements of such codes, the drawings and specifications shall be followed. In case of doubt as to the interpretation of the codes, the local plumbing inspector, etc., shall be consulted and his decision shall be final. 2 Before starting any work, submit the required number of copies of the Drawings and Specifications to all authorities and utilities and obtain their approval. The Architect Consultant shall be notified immediately of any changes requested before installation. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS .1 Piping inside the building and within 1.5m outside the building - under Section 15400 Inside Plumbing and Drainage. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. 1 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15490 - OUTSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINGE Page: 15490 2 .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Valves .2 Fire Hydrants .3 Post Hydrants .4 Manhole Frames and Covers .5 Precast Manholes .6 Precast Catchbasms PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS .1 Storm sewer pipe up to and including 400mm diameter shall be concrete pipe conforming to CSA Standard A257.1 (latest revision) standard strength with similar fittings. .2 Sanitary sewer pipe shall be PVC SDR-35. .3 Buried water piping up to 50mm size to be Type K copper with wrapped joints. Buried water piping 100mm size and over shall be cement lined ductile cast iron mechanical joint, or Tyton joint, Class 2A, A.W.W.A. C-151, or PVC Class 150 manufactured to AWWA Specification 6-900-75. All water pipes shall be anchored with concrete thrust blocks where pipe changes direction and at dead ends. Concrete by this Section. 2.2 SEWER STRUCTURES .1 Provide all catchbasins, manholes, meter chambers, headwalls, indicated on the Drawings in accordance with local/regional standards. All concrete work for sewer structures outside the building shall be provided under this Section. All concrete shall be 20MPamix. Include all necessary drainage fittings, cast iron tops, frames, grating, manhole steps, etc. Manholes, catchbasins, meter chambers, headwalls, to be constructed to Municipal Standards. Precast units will be accepted. .2 Hand form all manhole benching to the satisfaction of the Architect Consultant. 1 DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15490 - OUTSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINGE Page: 15490 3 2.3 VALVES AND FITTINGS .1 Gate valves on cast iron pipes "Darling" No. 55, or approved equal, with mechanical joint ends. Open valve by turning counter-clockwise. Solid wedge gate valves not acceptable. .2 Valve boxes cast iron, auger sleeve, sliding type of suitable length, as manufactured by J.R. Ferguson Company, Dundas, or approved equal. 2.4 FRAMES AND COVERS .1 Manhole Frames and Covers: Canron No. DS-579 or J.W. Wotherspoon & Son Standard. City of Scarborough, heavy duty, standard, without perforations. .2 Catchbasin Frames and Gratings: Canron No. DS-586, or John Hepburn Standard. Standard 600mm square, bicycle proof, flat top frame and grate, 218kg. 2.5 POST HYDRANT 1 Provide Wade Series W-8610 (50mm supply connection and 30mm hose connection, 2m depth) non-freeze full flow type post hydrant with bronze head and lower valve casing, galvanized steel standpipe, bronze non-rotating rod and plunger mechanism, bronze removable key handle and bronze housing. 2.6 FIRE HYDRANT .1 Supply and install fire hydrants hydrant where shown on drawings. Hydrant shall be of type as required by the municipality and shall be installed in accordance with its requirements. Hydrants shall be Darling B-50-8-24 or Century, McAvity M-15-59-M or M-67. At each hydrant provide a shut-off valve complete with valve box, extended stem and sleeve to grade. .2 Provide wall hydrant equal to Wilson and Cousins where shown on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES .1 The existing building must be kept in operation at all times. Arrange work so that any interruptions of services will be kept to the very minimum. This requirement is very important and under no circumstances shall any existing lines be interrupted until permission is obtained in writing from the Architect Consultant, establishing clearly the time the interruption is to start and its DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15490 - OUTSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINGE Page: 15490 4 length and the service affected. 3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING .1 Refer to Section 15050 for details of excavation and backfilling. 3.3 LINES AND GRADES .1 Mark out the centre lines of the sewer and water main system on the site, with stakes set at 30m intervals in straight run, and at all terminations and changes of direction, and the locations on site shall be referred to the plan by labelling on the stakes. At this stage, an inspection shall be made by the Architect Consultant, and work shall not proceed until approval has been obtained. .2 Reference elevations shall be set and established around the work, and elevation of service point of the sewer system confirmed. Elevations of inverts throughout the entire work shall be established and confirmed. Offset marks shall be placed to locate the centre line of the sewer, and all junctions and direction after excavation is underway shall be set and labelled. .3 Be responsible for the alignment, elevations and dimensions of each and every part of the work. Check to own satisfaction the correctness of reference and governing elevations and locations before starting work at any point, and notify the Architect Consultant in writing of any questionable consideration. 3.4 HANDLING OF PIPE .1 All pipe and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench with proper equipment and appliances. Before lowering and while suspended the pipes shall be inspected for defects and run with a light hammer to detect cracks. All foreign matter shall be removed from inside the pipes. 3.6 BEDDING OF PIPE .1 When the sewer is to be laid, the material forming the bed shall be carefully freed of stones. The pipe shall then be evenly bedded over the lower third of its circumference, special care being taken to remove only enough of the bed to leave a uniform support for the entire length of pipe except the bell under which a recess shall be excavated to a sufficient depth to relieve it of any load and to allow ample spacing for making the joint. When the pipe has been bedded satisfactorily and a joint made, the recess under the bell shall be refilled with the bedding material which shall be refilled and tamped on each side of the pipe to hold it securely in place taking care not to disturb the position of the pipe during this process. i DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15490 - OUTSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINGE Page: 15490 5 .2 All bedding for outside services shall be Type B bedding as indicated on Standard Drawing No. D-107. .3 Concrete encasement for storm sewer under the new addition indicated on 1 drawings shall be as shown on Detail Drawing D-107. 3.6 JOINTING OF PIPE .1 Rubber gaskets for.concrete pipes shall be installed on the pipe as recommended by the manufacturer. The rubber gaskets and the receiving portion of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign matter and shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to either jointing surface. Immediately before the joint is made the joint shall be lubricated as recommended by the manufacturer. Except for pipes 300mm and under when a hand lever may be used, mechanical means shall be used to draw the pipes together and hold them in intimate contact until sufficient tamped backfill is placed to prevent the joint from opening apart. The mechanical means shall be an arrangement of jacks, winches or power equipment that can exert sufficient force without disturbing line or grade to close pipe to its tightest position until tamped partial backfill can be accomplished. No pipe shall be tamped or partially backfilled unless mechanical force is acting to hold the joint tightly. A visual inspection of all joints shall be made before backfilling is completed. 3.7 PROTECTION OF PIPE LAID .1 The ends of the pipe shalt' be carefully protected from all injury. Trench excavation shall be fully completed at least 10m in advance of laying pipes. In all cases, the end of the pipe exposed shall be protected by a board or other stopper fitted to the pipe so as to prevent earth and other substances from entering. In no case shall water be allowed to rise in or about the pipe before the mortar of the joint has become thoroughly set. No walking on or working over the pipes after they are laid, except as may be necessary in tamping the earth and refilling, will be permitted until the pipe is covered with specified backfill to at least 300mm depth above pipe. 3.8 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS .1 Where an opening is made in a manhole chamber or sewer or where a bulkhead has been removed, for the purpose of connecting a sewer, the opening around such sewer connection shall be made good with suitable masonry. The ends of pipes which enter masonry shall be neatly cut to fit the face of the masonry. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15490 - OUTSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINGE- Page: 15490 6 3.9 CLEANOUTS .1 Provide cleanouts at all locations on outside storm and sanitary systems where so required by the Plumbing Code and where necessitated by the interruption of the general line of flow. .2 Cleanouts on exterior storm drains shall be installed on straight pipe runs at points not more than 30m apart. .3 Cleanouts installed on straight pipe runs shall be capped at pipe level with a pipe stopper secured firmly in place. All other cleanouts installed shall be brought up to within 300mm of finished grade in 1 00m diameter pipe, capped with a bolted cast iron cleanout top and accurately located on a record drawing, before backfilling. 3.10 BRANCHES .1 Open ends of branch pipe shall be sealed with stoneware stoppers cemented into place in an acceptable manner. The branches shall be laid so that the tap is on an angle of 30 degrees above the horizontal. 3.11 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS .1 The Architect Consultant reserves the right to suspend the work at any time should he deem the climatic conditions to be unfavourable to the proper execution of the work. In general, no work shall be done in freezing or near freezing weather, or when frost is or is likely to be in the ground. 3.12 CLOSURES .1 All open sewer lines shall be plugged when construction is not in progress, such as the end of working days and on weekend and holidays, to prevent infiltration and damage to the system and dirt deposits in the system. 3.13 TESTS FOR ALIGNMENT .1 After pipes have been inspected and approved, the trenches shall be backfilled to a foot above the pipes and the following inspection shall be made by the Architect Consultant. A strong light shall be flashed between manholes or manhole locations. If alignment is true and no pipes are misplaced, there are no obstructions within the pipe and the work has been carried out to the satisfaction of the Architect Consultant, backfilling shall be continued. If required by the Architect Consultant, supply a steel or wooden ball of a diameter 50mm less than the inside diameter of the pipe which shall be drawn DIVISION 15 PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15490 - OUTSIDE PLUMBING AND DRAINGE Page: 15490 7 l through the sewer. If any obstruction prevents the easy passage of the ball, remove and replace defective work at own expense to the satisfaction of the Architect Consultant. 1 3.14 FINAL INSPECTION .1 If, in the final inspection, any broken or crushed pipes or specials or any defects are found in the sewer or in any part of its appurtenances, this section shall cause the same to be repaired or removed and replaced by the proper materials and workmanship, without extra compensation for the labour and materials required. 3.15 MUNICIPAL CHARGES FOR STREET CONNECTIONS .1 Make all necessary arrangements and pay all charges for connection of underground services to the municipal mains. All such charges for work to be performed within the street allowance by the municipality or the Contractor shall be included as part of the work of this Section. This includes the pipework, connections, excavation and backfilling, reinstatement of paving, curbs, sidewalks, lawns, etc. End of Section I DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - i ARTICLE NAME PAGE PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS 1 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 iPART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENGINEERING GUIDE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 INDIRECT FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNIT C/W MECHANICAL COOLING . . . . 7 2.3 ROOFTOP HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.4 GAS VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5 EXHAUST FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.6 PROPELLER FANS 12 2.7 V-BELT DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.8 FAN BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1 2.9 AIR FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.10 FILTER GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.11 RANGE HOODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.12 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.13 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.1 DUCTWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.2 SHOWER EXHAUST DUCTWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.3 DUCT SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 PLENUMS, CASINGS, BAFFLES 20 3.5 VOLUME AND SPUTTER DAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1 3.6 FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE STOP FLAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.7 MOTORIZED DAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.8 ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.10 STORM LOUVRES AND BIRDSCREEN'. 24 3.11 OUTSIDE OPENINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.12 EXTERIOR INTAKE AND DISCHARGE COWLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.13 CONNECTION TO LOUVRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.14 BLANKING OFF LOUVRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1 3.15 ACOUSTIC INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.16 PITOT TUBE OPENINGS 26 3.17 COVERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.18 PAINTING OF DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO OUTDOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.19 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.20 ADDITIONAL START-UP SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.21 LOCATION OF OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - ii 1 ARTICLE NAME PAGE 3.22 SMOKE DETECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.23 SERVICE ROOM VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.24 VENTILATION CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.25 FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.26 CARBON MONOXIDE/NITROGEN DIOXIDE CONTROL SYSTEM. . . . . . . . 28 3.27 PROPANE CONTROL SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.28 VVT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.30 CONTROLS 31 i i 1 1 . 1 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sectio n 15050 forms an integral g p art of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour as required for complete systems of ductwork and equipment for ventilation , heating, and cooling of the various areas of the building. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS .1 Thermal insulation - under Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation. .2 Refrigeration piping, refrigerant and testing of refrigeration system - under Section 15530 Refrigeration. .3 Gas piping, domestic water piping and drains - under Section 15400 Inside Plumbing and Drainage. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Air handling units .2 Rooftop units .3 Condensing units .4 Make-up air units .5 Gas vents .6 Fans DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 2 .7 Air Filters .8 Infra red heaters .9 Air terminal units .10 Grilles and diffusers .11 Fire dampers .12 Storm louvres PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENGINEERING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS .1 General .1 Furnish and install Munters Drycool IceAire unitsor approved equal. Sizes arrangements, capacities and performance shall be as indicated on plans and schedules. .2 Ice Aire units shall be factory preassembled, tested and shipped complete with all components necessary to maintain humidity control levels independent of load variation within design limits. .3 Ice Aire units shall ge desinged for year round (24) hr/day service and outdoor or indoor installation requiring only connection of ductwork, utilities and remote sensor/controllers. .4 A space humidity set point shall be maintained by staged control of the Honeycombe Dehumidifier of type, size and capacity shown in schedules. .5 At reduce humidity levels, an analog humidity sensor, furnished by the IceAire unit manufacturer, shall cause the dehudifier to shut down. At increased hunmidity levels, the process shall ge reversed. .6 Reactivation energy shall be in the form of modulating direct fire glass, electric resistance heat or other suitable means. The auxiliary heat shalll be automaticallt cycled off to conserve energy at reduced humidity loads. .2 Constuction Specification IDIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 3 .1 Unit base shall be all welded steel construction with formed 2" x 8" 12 gauge galvanized steel channel around the outside perimeter and reinforced with 2" X 6" 12 gauge galvanized steel channel around the inside perimeter. Cross support members shall be 6" X 2" 12 gauge steel galvanized channel and welded on center not exceeding 24 inches. Completed base weldment shall be constructed with G90 galvanized materials. .2 18 gauge galvanized steel floor panels shall be fastened to the base weldment, and all seams shall be sealed watertight. 1 inch thick ductboard insulation shall be secured to the underside of the floor panels so that it is not foot traffic. Insulation shall be mechanically secured on all sides. Base shall be provided with welded lifting lugs. ' .3 Cabinet .1 The unit housing shall be constructed of .050 embossed aluminum panels. All cabinet panels shall be sealed and removable. All wall panels shall have a minimum of 1 inch fiberglass ductboard insulation mechanically secured on all sides with no exposed edges. The r000f ' panels shall be formed with a standing seam and sealed with a cap to prevent water leakage. The roof shall have 2 inches of fiberglass duct board insulation. .2 Access to all service areas shall be provided by full size service doors. Doors shall be furnished with a continours aluminum estruded hinge, compression type latches, and redilient gaskets. All access door shall have a minimum of 1 inch fiberglass ductbord insulation. 1 .3 Unit shall Include a built-in service vestibule that provides access to the electrical panel, dehudifier compinents and controls, while providing protection from the weather. The service vetibule shall include a sunthetic rubber floor matting that provides electrical insulation to 20,000 volts RMS/AC, a main unit disconnect switch, and a ervice light and ground fault duplex receptacle powered independently from the main unit power supply. .4 Dehumidifier and Control Components .1 Dehumidifier shall be of design and construction proven in the field by a minimum of five years operating performance. .2 Dehumidifier shall be non cyclic sorption type with a single desiccant rotary structure designed for continous operation. Construction arrangement shall provide counter flow of process and reactivation ari DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 4 streams with full face pressure seals to prevent cross leakage with statictic pressure differentials up to 8 inces water gauge. .3 The rotary structure shall consist of 100% inert silicates impregnated with an inorganic, non granulr, crystalline desiccant which transfers water into vapor phase or of a non-crystalline form fo silicon dioxide (silica gel). The design shall assure laminar air flow through the structure for minimum pressure loss with maximum tranfer surface. .4 The dudumidifier shall include: a Hone Y combe desiccant wheel and drive system, auxiliary reactivation heater, fan and motor assemblies for reactivation and process air flow, reactivation and process air flow indicating gauges, inlet filters for reactivation and process air, reactivation energy control system, and overhear and underheat and rotation fault circuity. ' .5 Fans .1 The units shall be equipped with process air and reactivation air fans to provided to scheduled air flows that the static pressures indicated. All fans shall be rated in accordance with AMCA standard 210. , .2 Process air fan shall be doubel widath, coubel inlet with forward curved blades. Process fan shall be belt driven with an adjustable motor ' sheave. .3 Reactivation air fan shall be single width,single inlet with backward air foil blades. Reactivation fan shall be direct with the TEFC motor. .4 Belt driven fans shall have shafts of ground and polished solid steel, coated with a rust inhibitor, and sized to operate an not more than 80% of its first critical speed. Bearnings shall be self- aligning , heavy duty and sized for 2000.000 hours average life. Motors shall be open drip proof NEMA design B with Class B insulation and a 1.15 service factor. .6 Filters .1 Process air inlet, reactivation air inlet, and return air inlet plenums shall be quipped with heavy gauge galvanized steel racks to provide for easy removal of filters. Filters shall be 2 inches thick, pleated disposable type with a non-woven media held in place by a wire support gride. Filters shall be 35% - 30% average efficienct per ASHRAE test stamdard 52-76. r ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 5 1 .7 Direct Fire Reactivation r .1 Direct fire gas reactivation may be used to reactivate the silica gel wheel. The direct fire burner will be capable of an output capacity over r a fully modulated range from 2000,000 BTU to 750,0000 BTU input at a constant airflow. The burner shall produce no measurable carbon monoxide in the air stream. .2 The stream shall be. designed to meet ANSI requirements. .3 The control shall provide fully automated control of the furnace. .8 Dampers and Louvers r .1 Make-up air balancing damper shall be constructed with heavy gauge galvanized steel framed, galvanized steel blades with oil impregnated bushings. Damper shall be of the opposed blade type and shall include ' position indicating quadrans and locking hardware. .2 Louvers for outside air intake of reactivation air, make-up air, and -combustion air for gas burners shall be provided as an .integral part of the unit housing. .11 Roof Curb .1 A prefabricated unit support curb shall be provided for field assembly on th roof decking prior to unit shipment. The roof curb shall be constucted of a minimum 12 gauge galvanized steel adn shall include all hardware required for assembly, and gasketing for field mounting between the unit base and roof curb. The roof curb shall be a perimeter type to provide complete perimeter support of the air handling portion of the unit, and shall be a minimum of 12 inches high. .10 Electrical .1 The main electrical control panel shall be located in a dervice vetibule that includes a vapor roof service light and ground fault rectacle powered independently from the main unit power supply. All electrical controls shall be UL listed and the entire unit factory wired in accordance with National Electric Code standards adn EATL approved. The unit shall be supplied with a nonfused main power disconnect which is mounted on the control panel and engaed by an operating mechanism on the panel cover. A single point power connection shall be provided for all units. 1 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 6 .11 Post Heating .1 Provide a post heating system WIM full modulating (10:1 turndown) burner control 240MBH capacity & T'STAT controls. .12 Post Cooling , .1 Supply and installl a DX coil (257 on capacity) & matching condensing unit on the roof, interlocking, refrigeration piping, controls to maintain set space temperature. Compressors shall be provide with hot gas by passes and shall be individually circulated. .13 Documentation .1 Submittals shall include the following: , a. Equipment schedule containing dehumidification, fan motor data, , gas requirement, electrical power requirement and filtration schedule. b. A System Flow Diagram showing air volumes and conditions ' througout the system. C. A general affangement Daigram showing three views of the , IceAire unit with overall dimension, general utility connection locations, ducatwork connection points and bolting patterns, total , weight and required service or equipment removal clearances. d. Control Diagrams and Parts list showing all electrical circuits, component ratings and any applicable setpoints. e. Recommended Spare Parts List with long and short term requirements. f. Curb details and installation instructins. .14 Sequence of Operation .1 The IceAire unit is an environmental control system designed specifically for the unique dehimidification requirement of ice rinks. .2 With the main disconnect turned on, and the Auto-Off-Manual switch at the electrical panel turned to the Auto position, the supply fan will energize in respoonse to a signal from a remote control panel. If the DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 7 humidity level in the rink exceeds the control set point, then the ' Honeycombe dehumidifier energized. .3 The dehumidifier consist of a Honeycombe desiccant wheel, a shell drive motor, a process air circuit, and a reactivation air circuit. On a call for dehumidification, the desiccant whell drive motor is energized to rotate the whell through the process and reactivation aire streams at ' a rate of 8 RPH. The process fan is energized to draw a blend of outside air for ventilation and return air from the store through the desiccant wheel. The desiccant draws water vapor from this air stream which is then returned to the sotre through the cooling or heating coils and then supply blower. The reactivation air fan and heater are energized to draw heated outside air through the wheel. The air is heated by the auxillary natural gas heater. This heated air drives the moisture from the desiccant and is discharged to atmosphere. .4 The dehumidification process is continous as the dessiccant wheel ' rotates through the process and reactivation air streams. When the rink humidity returns to its control set point, the dehumidifier is de- energized, but the fan runs continously. .5 Heating/Cooling space T'STAT shall energized to cool the supply air during winter to maintain set space temperature. ' .6 DX Coil circuit shall be energized to cool the supply air during summer to maintain set space temperature. 1 .7 provide contacts and wiring to start unit on 100% from air mode during ice resupacer operation in the rink for a predetermined period by a Imanual timer control 2.2 INDIRECT FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNIT C/W MECHANICAL COOLING .1 The unit shall be Engineered Air and shall be CSA or CGA approved. .2 The unit shall be as detailed herein and shall be completely factory assembled, tested and shipped in one piece to the job site. .3 The unit shall provide the capacities detailed in the schedule with 7" WC gas pressure at the inlet valve. The ampacity and horsepower provided in the schedule are the maximum acceptable values. .4 The unit shall be specifically designed and manufactured for outdoor installation. Unit shall be constructed on a structural steel base with integral DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 8 .4 The unit shall be specifically designed and manufactured for outdoor installation. Unit shall be constructed on a structural steel base with integral ' welded steel cross members to carry all component loads. .5 Unit casing shall be of minimum 18 gauge satin coat galvanized sheet metal. Finish shall be air dry enamel, applied at least 3 mils thick, to all exposed surfaces. .6 Generally, all walls, roofs, and floors, shall be of interlocking construction, with , at least two breaks at each interlocking joint. Joint shall be secured by sheet metal screw or pop rivet. Wall and floor joints shall be broken in, roof joints broken out (exposed) for rigidity. All joints shall be caulked with a water impervious sealant (Weatherban 222) resulting in a tightly sealed cabinet. Openings at panel seams and corners are not acceptable. ' .7 Unit shall be provided with access panels to the following components: - Fans and motors - Filters - Inlet dampers and operators - Control panels - Burner controls. Access panels shall be lift-out type with camlock fasteners. All access panels shall have neoprene gasketting around perimeter of openings to give air tight seal. .8 Unit shall be internally insulated with 1" 1-'/z lb. density, neoprene coated fiberglass thermal insulation, securited to metal panels with 100% coverage of a fire retardant adhesive and welded steel pins at 16" centres. All longitudinal , joints and butt ends shall be covered by a sheet metal break. Walk in floor areas shall be insulated on the underside. Coverage of all interior surfaces must be 100%. Uncovered mullions and other metal surfaces are not acceptable. .9 Fans shall be centrifugal forward curved type as noted in schedule and shall be rated in accordance with AMCA Standard Test Code, Bulletin 210. All fans and fan assemblies shall be selected for stable operation at least 25% below the first critical RPM. Bearings shall be pillow block type mounted securely on heavy angle iron frame. Bearings shall be greasable. Extended lubrication lines shall allow lubrication from the service access side of the unit. Each motor shall be mounted on an adjustable base secured to rigid fan assembly or base. ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 10 .10 Fan and motor assembly shall be provided with internal, 95% efficient, spring type vibration isolators. Isolators shall be secured to welded steel channels directly connected to the structural frame of the unit. Fans shall be attached to the discharge panel by a heavy glass fabric, neoprene impregnated, with a double locking fabric to metal connection. .11 Unit shall have a tight sealing outside air intake damper complete with a factory wired, two position, normally closed, spring return damper operator. .12 Heat exchanger shall be f the primary drum and multiple tube secondary type with a free floating stress relieve design. Both primary and secondary heat exchangers shall be constructed of titanium stainless steel. Unit shall be provided with an integral flue. .13 Each burner assembly shall be blow-through positive pressure indirect fired ' type with 10:1 modulating turndown ratio and 80% efficiency throughout operating range. Burner shall be provided with modulating gas and modulating combustion air controls. Flame surveillance shall be solid state programmable relay, utilizing flame rod sensor. Each operation shall commence with prepurge cycle. Flame failure shall require manual reset. Step controlled burners are not acceptable. A factory test is required to confirm 80% efficiency at low fire. .14 Supply and install a DX coil with bypass damper and integral condensing unit to supply tempered air. Coil bypass airflow shall be 2:1 ratio with coil LAT at 55°F/54.8 0F and tempered air at 70°F at 60% RH (max) after mixing of cooled and bypass air. Provide a reheat module to heat air to 80°F at RH 50%. All controls and duct thermostat and humidistat shall be supplied by unit manufacturer. .15 The filter section shall contain 2" replaceable media filters in metal frames with retaining screens arranged for side removal. ' .16 On signal from remote interlock contacts, the unit intake dampers open and the fan runs continuously with the gas burner modulated by an electronic control system to maintain discharge air setpoint. .17 Provide unit control panel contacts for connection to EMS for monitoring and ' resetting unit operation. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 11 2.3 ROOFTOP HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ' .1 Supply and install complete package type rooftop self-contained air cooled units where shown on drawings. Units shall consist of compressor, condenser, evaporator, gas fired furnace where indicated, electric ignition, filters, motors, controls, compressor and fan contactors, thermal overloads and variable pitch sheaves to give fan speed adjustable for 10% increase or decrease in speed from rated. Unit shall be completely weather proofed for outdoor installation and shall be internally insulated at the factory. This applies to all rooftop AC units in schedules. .2 Unit shall be supplied with a roof mounting frame complete with a nailing strip. .3 Unit shall be complete with a power saver. Power saver shall have 100% exhaust air damper and relief section, and shall have adjustable outdoor air thermostat to lock out compressors on economizer control. Unit shall be complete with power exhaust and suited for VVT application where applicable. , .4 Compressor(s) to have extended 5 year warranty. Include mixed air, outdoor air controllers and compressor monitor. .5 Each unit shall be complete with trapped condensate drain which shall spill onto roof. Include extension to drain if required so drain does not spill on , flashing. .6 Each unit shall be complete with heating/cooling thermostat with sub-base with ' fan, off, auto and heat, auto, cool selector switches. Supply and install necessary transformers, etc., wiring required for low voltage temperature control. .7 Each unit shall be supplied with an occupied/unoccupied switch to be mounted beside the room thermostat or remotely, as indicated on Drawings. In the occupied position outside air shall be limited to the minimum flow rate specified in the Fan Schedule. In the unoccupied position fresh air dampers shall close and the unit shall operate on 100% recirculated air. ' .8 Each unit shall be supplied with a seven day occupied/unoccupied timer with reserve on power failure to be mounted beside the room thermostat or remotely as indicated on drawings. In the occupied position outside air shall be limited to the minimum cfm specified in the Fan Schedule and unit fan shall run continuously. In the unoccupied position fresh air dampers shall close and the unit shall shut down. ' r ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 rSECTION 15850 —HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 12 ' .9 Size and fan characteristics for each unit shall be as specified in Fan Schedule. .10 Unit shall be of Carrier, Trane or York manufacture. .11 Provide wiring between thermostat, occupied/unoccupied switch and unit. 2.4 GAS VENTS .1 Provide system of gas vents as shown. Gas vents shall be complete with draft hood connectors, weather top, cone flashing, storm collar, cleanout at vent base and all other necessary fittings to make a complete installation. r .2 Include vents for domestic hot water boilers, infrared heaters, etc. .3 Gas vents shall be approved Selkirk or Metalbestos, Type B for draft hood vented systems. ' .4 Gas vents shall be Type A for forced draft systems. .5 Flashings and curbs at the roof are under Division 7. Do all counterflashing in connection with gas vents. .6 Unless noted otherwise on drawings, gas vents shall be terminated at the height above roof as specified in Ontario Gas Utilization Regulation. .7 The complete installation shall be in accordance with all governing rules and regulations of all local and provincial authorities. Vents to be securely ' supported from building structure. 2.5 EXHAUST FANS .1 Exhaust fans shall be supplied as indicated on Drawings. Units shall be centrifugal belt driven roof exhausters with 13mm mesh bird screen and r motorized louvre dampers, motorized damper as indicated for each fan. Roof mounted fans shall be complete with prefabricated soundproofing roof curb for installation on flat, sloped or peak of sloped roof as required. Include ' undercover lock-off switch and wiring between lock-off switch and motor. .2 Exhaust fan(s) shall be interlocked as described in other sections of this ' specification. 1 r r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 r SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 13 r 2.6 PROPELLER FANS r .1 Propeller fans shall be non-overloading, of size, type and capacity listed in schedules. Wheels shall have not less than four dieformed aluminium or steel blades rivetted to machined steel hubs and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. .2 Motors shall be totally enclosed, sleeve or ball bearing type. Provide wireguard , where location is exposed. .3 Where automatic dampers are not required, fans shall be complete with gravity ' backdraft dampers with galvanized steel frames, bronze bearings, felt edged min. 26 gauge aluminium blades. .4 Provide 13mm mesh birdscreen. 2.7 V-BELT DRIVES .1 The V-belt drive provided with each fan shall be selected with 140% safety margin over motor horsepower listed. All fan and motor sheaves shall be minimum 2 groove, two belt. All sheaves for 5.6kW motors or smaller shall be of the adjustable type with companion sheaves, on the corresponding fan. For larger motors, the fan and motor sheaves shall both be fixed pitch type, but , provision shall be made by fan supplier to furnish one additional motor sheave for each fan on the job, if it is found necessary to adjust fan speed. 2.8 FAN BEARINGS r .1 All fans shall be equipped with heavy duty pillow block type bearings. Access , doors shall be provided in casings or ductwork to permit the bearings to be inspected and replaced if necessary. .2 Except for permanently lubricated bearings, run in all bearings and after they , are run in, drain, flush out and refill with new charge of oil or grease as required. .3 Provide extended lubrication tubes for all bearings that require periodic lubrication. For permanently lubricated bearings provide for a future grease fitting. 1 r r i ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 14 2.9 AIR FILTERS .1 Supply and install filter banks as shown on the drawings. Filters shall be of ' overall arrangement as shown on the drawings and filter velocities shall not exceed 2.5 m/s. .2 Panel filters shall be standard sizes, renewable media type 50mm thick mounted in steel frames. .3 All filter media shall be non-flammable to the approval of the appropriate authorities. ' .4 Air filters shall be Farr, American Air Filter or approved equal. 2.10 FILTER GAUGES .1 Supply and install across each filter bank Dwyer Series 450-AF filter gauge with a range of 0 to 250Pa. ' 2.11 ' RANGE HOODS .1 Supply and install a Garland Waterwash 1800 long, 1200 deep range hood ' model complete with accessories, Ansul fire extinguishing system, solenoid valve on gas pipe with all interlock wiring to shut down gas and activate fire extinguishing system and contacts for fire alarm system. .2 Install a 16 ga. black iron welded duct to roof complete with fire damper and restaurant grade Delhi fan, exhaust stack (2400 above roof level). .3 Complete installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 96 standard. 2.12 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS .1 Supply and install, Modine or approved equal unit heaters of size and ' characteristics shown on the drawings and described in the Equipment Schedule. Units shall be supplied complete with field installed flue gas venter, disconnect, 24 volt thermostat, and vertical and horizontal louvres. Heat exchanger shall be aluminized steel. Motors shall be 110 Volt, single phase, 60 cycle with inherent protection. Thermostats shall have sub-base to allow continuous fan operation. Supply and install necessary transformers, interlock ' wiring, etc. for low voltage temperature control. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 15 .2 Install flue gas venter complete with air proving switch and all associated ' equipment. In addition, provide all necessary interlock wiring for flue gas venter and associated equipment. 2.13 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS .1 Supply and install all grilles and diffusers as required and as shown on ' drawings. .2 Supply grilles shall be: , .1 aluminium construction .2 curved frame.32mm wide , .3 through frame screw mounting .4 adjustable double deflection airfoil blades on 19mm centres .5 vertical face bars , .6 key operated opposed blade dampers with removable key .7 off-white baked enamel finish. , .8 prime coat finish for later painting by Division 9. , .9 round supply air grilles in lobby shall be anodized bronze finish. .3 Wall return and exhaust air grilles shall be: .1 fixed single deflection 45 deg. horizontal face bars on 19mm centres .2 construction, frame, mounting, dampers and finish as for supply grilles above. , .4 Ceiling return and transfer grilles shall be: .1 0 deg deflection 12mm eggcrate grid ' .2 T-bar type for lay-in ceiling frame as for supply grilles for wall ceilings ' .3 PP Y 9 rY 9 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 16 .4 construction and finish as for supply grilles above. ' .5 Door grilles will be provided by Division 8. .6 Door grilles shall be. .1 steel construction .2 inverted-V louvre blade sight proof core .3 finish as for supply grilles above. ' .7 Special linear type grilles are specified on drawings. .8 Diffusers shall be as follows: .1 steel construction ' .2 combination damper and grid .3 type indicated on drawings ' .4 finish as for supply grilles above. .5 Round diffusers shall be 4 cove adjustable pattern. .9 Grilles and diffusers shall be equal to E.H. Price, Titus, Krueger, Nailor Industries. .10 In the Ice Pad Areas diffusers and cores shall be chained to the ductwork. Finish as for supply grilles above. ' .11 Ice Pad Area return air grilles shall be heavy duty steel with horizontal face bar grilles deflection and separate frame. Finish as for supply grille above. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 DUCTWORK .1 All ductwork shall be constructed in strict accordance with the latest ASHRAE ' Guide. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 17 .2 All ductwork unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be made of galvanized ' iron. Metal shall be best quality open hearth steel. The galvanizing shall be carefully done to prevent cracking. .3 All laps shall be in the direction of air flow. No sheet metal screws shall be ' used in the duct where it is possible to use rivets and bolts. All edges and slips shall be hammered down so as to leave a smooth finished surface inside the ducts. .4 All ducts shall be braced and stiffened so that they will not breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. .5 Rectangular ducts shall be constructed by breaking the corners and grooving ' the longitudinal seam, using the Pittsburgh lock or approved air tight joint. Elbows and transformation sections shall be formed with Pittsburgh corner seams or double seam corners. .6 Ducts shall be free of obstruction, vibration and rattle. Leakage will be permitted to a maximum of 5% in the longest duct run. , .7 A!I rectangular ductwork carrying air at low or medium pressure and having any side over 300mm in width or depth shall be reinforced by cross bracing. .8 All ducts shall be complete in themselves and no single partitions shall be p 9 permitted between ducts unless specifically shown. .9 All tees, elbows or bends shall be made with a centre-line radius of not less ' than 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Where space conditions do not permit the specified radius, then square throat fittings may be used complete with ' double thickness turning vanes. .10 In special cases only, with prior approval of the Consultant, pipes may pass , through ducts. In these cases, the pipe shall be covered with a streamline deflector, the duct shall be sealed air-tight and increased in size to provide the original free area. .11 Where drawings indicate that the ductwork is to be insulated, make provisions for neat insulation finish around damper quadrants, access doors, etc. Mount 1 metal collars of suitable size and width on insulated ducts to allow insulation to be neatly finished. .12 Provide counterflashing for roof mounted equipment and any other duct openings in the roof. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 18 ' .13 The sides of tapered fittings shall not slope at an angle exceeding 15 deg. from the line of air flow unless specifically shown or approval of the Consultant is obtained. .14 The transitions at the axial fan shall not exceed 10 deg. .15 Minimum low pressure duct gauges shall be as follows: .16 Rectangular Ductwork, Galvanized Iron- Up to 300 mm (Largest side).55 mm thick 310 to 750 mm .70 mm thick 760 to 1370 mm .85 mm thick 1380 to 2150 mm 1.01 mm thick 2160 mm and up 1.31 mm thick .17 Round Ductwork, Galvanized Iron- (including spiral ductwork in Ice Pads, Gym, Community centre and All Exposed Ductwork) 660mm or less dia. .55mm thickness 670 to 910mm dia. .85mm thickness ' 920 to 1270mm dia. 1.01 mm thickness 1280 to 1520mm dia. 1.31 mm thickness .18 Round ductwork shall be shop or factory fabricated of helically wound galvanized iron strips with spiral lock seam. Each duct section and fitting shall have a plain and a belled or swaged end to permit a sliding fit with an overlap of not less than 100mm. Insert sheet metal screws in joints at 300mm centres ' around perimeter with not less than three screws per joint. Ducts over 1 000m dia. shall have flanged joints. Surface of overlap or flanges shall be cleaned and painted with duct sealing compound before sections are joined. .19 Ninety degree elbows shall be of five piece construction. Mitred elbows with approved turning vanes may be used where space limitations do not permit use of five piece elbows. Forty-five degree elbows shall be of three piece construction. ' .20 All ductwork in connection with the kitchen and dishwasher exhaust systems shall be made absolutely watertight and sloped back to low drain points where possible. Access doors shall be provided in the sides of the ducts leading from ' the kitchen hoods at all changes of direction and shall be 200 x 300mm. Provide access doors to bottom of kitchen exhaust duct risers. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 15850 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 19 .21 Ductwork from the dishwasher, shower, exhaust systems shall be aluminium , ductwork of gauges as previously specified. The manner of construction, however, will differ in that the bottom and a portion of each side shall be formed by bending the sheet metal upwards at each side, thereby leaving no seams on the bottom of the duct. The joints of this ductwork shall be soldered and caulked. .22 Kitchen exhaust ductwork from the hoods that is not exposed shall be separate and shall be 16 gauge carbon steel, welded ductwork. .23 All exposed ductwork in connection with hood exhaust systems in kitchen shall , be constructed of No. 316 stainless steel, 18 gauge, No. 4 finish. All seams, etc. shall be continuous external weld, polished smooth. ' .24 Make final connections to kitchen hoods. Install kitchen hoods supplied by others. ' .25 Installation of the kitchen exhaust system shall be in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 96. .26 Supply and install deflectors or splitters with quadrant dampers at all points on supply systems and exhaust systems where small ducts are taken from larger ones. ' .27 Supply and install manual louvre dampers and turning vanes where shown. 3.2 SHOWER EXHAUST DUCTWORK .1 Slope shower exhaust ductwork up in direction of air flow to facilitate drainage ' of moisture back through exhaust grilles. Shower exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of aluminum with sealed joints throughout. 3.3 DUCT SUPPORTS .1 Ducts 1500mm and less in width or depth shall be supported by 25mm wide by 16 gauge or heavier galvanized bent hangers fastened to the side and bottom of the duct by bolts, rivets or metal screws. Straps shall be continuous under the duct. Speed nuts and nailed units shall not be used to fasten hangers to ' ducts. Hangers shall be spaced at not more than 2.5m intervals. tDIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 20 ' .2 Ducts over 1500mm width or depth shall be supported with 10mm diameter vertical rod hangers bolted to an angle supporting the duct from below and bolted to the bottom of the duct at 600mm intervals. Space hangers at not more than 1200mm intervals. .3 Where vertical ducts pass through floors, they shall be supported by angles 1 rivetted or bolted to the duct and bearing on the building structure. .4 Support all ducts immediately adjacent to flexible connections. .5 Duct hangers for ducts shall not be suspended from the steel roof deck. Hangers for such ducts shall be supported from structural bearings such as ' beams, top chords of steel joists, or structural concrete slabs. Where structural bearings do not exist, provide angle or channel iron from nearest structural bearings to support hangers. .6 Refer to Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods for further details regarding hangers and supports. 3.4 PLENUMS, CASINGS,BAFFLES ' .1 Casings, plenums and connections between components of air supply units, all outdoor air intake and exhaust plenums and plenums around built up casings for double width fans shall be of 1.6mm thick prime quality galvanized steel plates. Each sheet of material shall be fabricated as a panel. Panels, both side, wall and roof, shall be joined by a 40mm standing seam. Seams parallel to air flow shall be mismatched in adjacent panels for strength and appearance. Standing seams shall be on outside of casing. Seams shall be ' rivetted or bolted on approximately 300mm centres. .2 Drop type roof shall be assembled to side walls by standing seams extending ' 40mm above roof. .3 In general, standing seams perpendicular to air flow shall be placed outside ' casing. Supplemental reinforcing angles, where required, shall be placed inside casing parallel to air flow. Inside angles shall be bolted or rivetted to casing wall adjacent to standing seam. Rivets or bolts shall be on approximately ' 300mm centres. .4 Side walls to 1200mm high and roof span to 1200mm wide, will not have inside angles. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 21 ' .5 Larger spans shall be reinforced as follows: Inside Reinforcing Angles Side Wall Heights or No. Angles Roof Width Angles Spaced Up to 1.25m 0 1.26 to 2.5m 1 Middle ' 2.51 to 3.7m 2 1/3 Points Over 3.7m Variable 1.25m centres .6 Where access door is in casing, one side angle shall be located just above the , door. A similar angle shall be provided just below door to span only the panel in which door is included. .7 Casing access door openings shall be framed above and below door with 40 x 40 x 3mm galvanized angle spanning between vertical seams_securely ' rivetted to panel. Bottom where plenums rest on floor shall be in accordance with Drawing No. D-116. Bracing in addition to that outlined above, shall be used as required to provide a structurally sound assembly. ' .8 Heating coils and cooling coils and their frames shall be completely enclosed within the casing. Casings shall be flanged and bolted to heating coils, cooling coils and other such equipment with galvanized 6mm stove bolts on 1 approximately 75mm centres uniformly spaced, or as determined by holes in equipment flanges. All joints shall be air tight. Waterproof gaskets shall be provided on all joints on both sides of cooling coil section. ' .9 Baffles shall be installed in the mixing chamber to prevent stratification. Baffles shall be Barber Coleman prefabricated "Air turns" located where shown and as , required for proper air mixing. .10 Mount metal collars on plenum openings where insulation is to be applied to ' provide a neat finish. .11 Openings for pipes, conduits, etc. shall be sealed air-tight. ' DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 22 I3.5 VOLUME AND SPLITTER DAMPERS .1 Supply and install all hand operated splitter and volume dampers, complete with locking quadrant operators, in locations specified, as shown on the drawings, and as required for balancing purposes. .2 Provide balancing dampers at all supply and exhaust take-offs. .3 For supply ducts, splitter dampers shall be air foil type, fabricated from 18 gauge galvanized steel and shall be the full depth of the branch duct and not less in length than the duct width of the branch duct. .4 Splitters under 300mm in height or length shall have a pivot rod fastened to one end of the splitter sheet. The rod shall be held in place by a quadrant type damper control using Duro-Dyne Quadrant K-8 or K-9. .5 Splitters over 300mm in height or length shall be hinged to the duct crotch at the pivot end and shall be fitted at their downstream end with extension rods passing through to the duct wall and fastened to holding clips using Duro-Dyne SRP-40 and SRP-24. .6 Volume dampers shall be opposed blade with each blade not more than ' 175mm in width. Dampers larger than .5 sq m shall be multi-sectional with 1.22m maximum length of blade. ' .7 All balancing, splitter and volume dampers shall be free from noise and vibration in any position. ' 3.6 FIRE DAMPERS AND FIRE STOP FLAPS 1 Supply and install a system of fire dampers and fire stop flaps. Dampers and flaps shall have ULC labels. Follow manufacturer's Installation Instructions. .2 Dampers, housings, and method of installation shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A - "Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems" and shall have C.S.A. and UL (Canada) approval. .3 Fire dampers shall be located within the fire separation membrane which the duct is penetrating and the opening in the fire separation membrane, e.g. masonry wall or floor, shall be sleeved and fire stopped with approved fire stopping material around and within the sleeve to provide for expansion and to maintain the integrity of the fire partition. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 23 .4 Where ducts penetrate dry-wall (gypsum board) construction, fire dampers shall be framed with double steel studs all around the opening, tied into the steel studs of the fire rated membrane. .5 If the fire damper cannot be installed within the fire rated membrane, the off-set must be of the same or equivalent material as the fire rated membrane. .6 Curtain type fire dampers in ducts 300mm and less in height shall be Type B. Type A dampers may be used in ducts over 300mm in height. . .7 Fire dampers shall be supported by structural members and independently from the ductwork. .8 Ducts and fire dampers shall penetrate the fire rated membrane perpendicularly (at right angle). .9 Generally fire dampers shall be installed in, but not necessarily confined to, the following ducts: .1 Ducts that enter or leave Mechanical Rooms and Fan rooms. .2 Ducts that enter or leave fireproof shafts. ' .3 Ducts passing through fire walls. .4 Ducts passing through floors and not enclosed in fireproof shafts. ' .5 As further required and/or indicated on the drawings. .10 Fire dampers in stainless steel and aluminium ductwork shall be of stainless ' steel construction. .11 Confirm all fire damper construction and location with all Authorities having jurisdiction. 3.7 MOTORIZED DAMPERS .1 Motorized dampers will be supplied under Section 15950. The dampers however shall be installed under this Section. i 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 24 3.8 ACCESS DOORS .1 Supply and install access doors in ducts and plenums for servicing of control elements, fire dampers, balancing dampers, damper motors, coils and all other duct mounted equipment, and for oiling of bearings and removal of electric 1 motors. .2 Access doors in ductwork shall be a minimum of 450 x 300mm clear, 1.3mm thick, or as close to these dimensions as duct size permits, with edges of door ' folded and duct opening provided with a frame. Door shall be secured with a minimum of 4 sash fasteners, shall be provided with a gasket, and shall be air tight. Fasteners shall be equal to Duro-Dyne SL-1. .3 On insulated ducts access doors shall be double wall construction, with void filled with insulation equivalent to the duct insulation. t3.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 1 1 On the suction and discharge of all fans, provide 150mm wide airtight Duralon, elastomer coated, fibreglas fabric, flexible connections to isolate the fan from the ductwork. 3.10 STORM LOUVRES AND BIRDSCREENS .1 Unless specifically noted otherwise provide all storm louvres, birdscreens and door grilles. Provide birdscreen for roof mounted exhaust fans. .2 Storm louvres shall be Airolite, size and type indicated on Drawing. Connect ductwork to same and seal to make weathertight connection between louvre and duct. Supply louvres in prime coat left ready for painting. Supply and install all anchor bolts and counter flashing for all roof mounted fans and ducts passing through roof to provide a weathertight installation. 3.11 OUTSIDE OPENINGS .1 Openings will be left under Divisions 3, 4 and 7 in the outside wall, roof, etc., where shown and required for fresh air intakes and exhaust. .2 Flashing for roof curbs and ducts under Division 7. Counterflashing by this Section. ' .3 Supply and install all necessary ductwork and plenums for intakes and exhausts and patch around same to make a weathertight job. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 25 3.12 EXTERIOR INTAKE AND DISCHARGE COWLS j .1 Supply and install exterior cowls where shown on plans. Cowls and hoods shall be equipped with 12mm mesh brass birdscreens fastened at the mouth of the intake or discharge of the cowls. Cowls shall be fabricated, set in place and flashed by this Section. Cowls shall be firmly secured to the structure. They shall be 18 U.S. gauge galvanized or as detailed. The flashing shall be ' soldered. .2 Roof hoods, where shown, shall be galvanized steel, complete with bird , screen. Units shall be equal to Penn "Airette". 3.13 CONNECTION TO LOUVRES .1 Extend ductwork up to weatherproof louvres and make connections to same. Fill and caulk all openings to prevent water from draining to the wall or ceiling between the louvre and ductwork. 3.14 BLANKING OFF LOUVRES .1 Fasten 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal to unused louvres and unused portions of louvres and seal all around to prevent entry of air. .2 Apply 25mm thick rigid duct liner consisting of fibreglass formed into a rigid board of 72 kg/cu m density and coated on the exposed side with neoprene compound, with conductance of 0.032 W/(m.C) at 24 deg C mean temperature, to inside of sheet metal. Impale insulation over mechanical fasteners and secure with clips. Paint raw edges of insulation with sealing compound. 3.15 ACOUSTIC INSULATION .1 Insulate the inside of ductwork and plenums with 50mm thick Fiberglas type AF-545 rigid duct liner, neoprene coated. Fasten with Flintstick 230-14 adhesive and metal clips and washers on 300mm centres for all rooftop units including AC, MAU's, HRU's minimum 6m from unit discharge opening. .2 All insulation shall be cut to fit tightly between bracing angles and sizes left inside the insulation shall be the duct sizes shown on the drawings, i.e. the drawing dimensions are the finished inside clear dimensions. .3 Exposed edges of insulation shall be provided with metal nosings. i 1 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 26 a .4 Flame spread on insulation shall be in accordance with the requirements of all Authorities having jurisdiction. .5 Increase the duct size by 50mm in each direction to maintain the clear cross section shown on the drawings. This generally applies to ductwork above the roof for the rooftop A/C units on the roof. 3.16 PITOT TUBE OPENINGS .1 Pitot tube openings shall be made in the ductwork for all supply and exhaust systems. A metal cap complete with spring device to ensure no air leakage shall be provided for each opening. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, a removable plug of approved insulation material inside a metal ring shall be installed. Openings shall be provided at all supply discharges and exhaust fan inlets. These openings shall be in straight duct runs. Supply and install a minimum of three holes per duct at each of the above locations and at not more than 500mm centres. In addition openings shall be provided where necessary for complete balancing of all systems. .2 The insulation shall be finished flush against the metal ring so that the openings may be used in future without damage to the insulation. ' 3.17 COVERING .1 Refrigerant suction lines shall be insulated with 19mm thick Armaflex with cemented joints pipe insulation. .2 Supply and install 25mm thick rigid fibreglas RFFRK insulation applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for combustion air intakes, and fresh air intakes. .3 Cover emergency generator exhaust inside the building and through roof with flexible 40mm thick Fibreglas metal mesh blankets Type 900 with R facing or 40mm thick calcium silicate block insulation, held in place with 20mm metal bands on 300mm centres, or 40mm thick magnesia block insulation, wired on with 25mm air space between pipe and insulation, using expanded metal lath. Recover with 12mm hydraulic setting insulation cement applied in two layers I and trowelled to a smooth hard finish. Insulation is to be installed so as to allow for expansion. Provide thimble and sleeve and raincap where pipe passes through roof. t DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 27 r 3.18 PAINTING OF DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO OUTDOORS .1 All ductwork exposed to outdoors shall be carefully sealed with Dow Corning silicone sealer. Ductwork shall then be painted on the outside with primer and two coats of Asphaltum or similar weather and corrosion resistant paint. This shall apply to intake and discharge cowls, hoods, cabinets, etc. 3.19 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR FANS , .1 Supply to Section 15240 shop drawings of all fans, pumps and other equipment for isolation device selections. Such drawings shall be provided as soon as possible so that the progress of the project will not be hindered. 3.20 ADDITIONAL START-UP SERVICE ' .1 In addition to service covered under guarantee provide start-up and shut-down of air conditioning systems for first full cooling season. Also provide start-up after the first full season. 3.21 LOCATION OF OUTLETS .1 The position of all outlets shown on the Drawings is approximate only. Check the location of all outlets with the Consultant and make such adjustments in position as are necessary to conform with architectural features, acoustic the pattern, etc., and the outlets required by the other trades, without extra charge. Ceiling outlets and their assemblies must be constructed so that they fit the spacing and manufacture of the removable acoustic ceiling. .2 Be responsible for exact dimensions and positions of openings required for the passage of pipes, ducts, etc. 3.22 SMOKE DETECTORS .1 Mount in ductwork smoke detectors provided under Division 16, in accordance with the Ontario Building Code and applicable standards. 3.23 SERVICE ROOM VENTILATION .1 Provide line voltage thermostat for electrical room ventilation. Wiring of same by Section 16. Thermostat shall cycle fan and intake motorized damper to maintain 21 degrees C. 1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 28 3.24 VENTILATION CONTROLS .1 Provide line voltage thermostat for room ventilation. Wiring of same by Section I 16. Thermostat shall cycle fan and associated motorized dampers to maintain 70 deg. F. .2 Emergency Generator Ventilation Control - On generator start-up, respective intake and exhaust dampers shall open fully. Power shall be taken from emergency circuit. 3.25 FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN .1 For all rooftop units and exhaust fans provide auxiliary contacts to shut down units on activation of Fire Alarm. Wiring between Fire Alarm and Unit Starter and any additional relays by Division 16. 3.26 CARBON MONOXIDE/NITROGEN DIOXIDE CONTROL SYSTEM .1 Supply and install CO/NO2 gas monitors, sampling system, timing control, alarms, end-of-line sample filters, guards and enclosure for ice resurfacer room, maintenance garage and vehicle entrance to ice pad. .2 Control system shall be extractive gas type, vacuum pump draw through filtered air samples from copper tubing remote sampling stations manufactured by MSA Toxgard, Acme, Enmet or Sinkel. .3 CO sensors shall be electromechanical gas specific sensor with no decontamination cycle and shall not be affected_by humidity, unburnt hydro carbons, temperature variations and carbon dioxide with 0-100 PPM range +/- 2 PPM CO, two 5-amp SPDR latching and non-latching alarm relay contacts, one 5-samp SPDT non-latching warning relay contact. .4 NO2 sensors shall be similar to CO sensors with 0-10 PPM NO2 range with alarms as noted for CO. I .5 Sampling system shall be fully integrated including solenoid valves, vacuum pump, flow meters, calibration valves, in-line filters and all necessary hardware. i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 29 .6 Timing control and alarm system shall be from programmable timer for sequential switching of all solenoid valves and sample point indicating lights. Field adjustable setpoints for automatic ventilation controls, factory preset 35 PPM CO, and 3 PPM NO2, relay contacts shall energize local exhaust fan and fresh air damper when either of setpoints is energized. Field adjustable alarms factory set for 100 PPM CO and 10 PPM NOZ common to all relay contacts with visual and audible alarms and DPDT relay contacts for central control shall be provided. .7 Manual selector switch on auto, fans respond to gas sensors and on "ON" position, fans run continuously. .8 Enclosure shall be locking, heavy duty gauge metal cabinet with plexiglas windows to home components. Unit shall be factory wired and tested. , .9 End-of-line sample filters shall be D.3 micron with guard for 2 in ice resurfacer room, and 2 for vehicle entrance to ice pad. .10 Make air opening damper, exhaust fan damper and fan shall be interlocked to operate in response to sample simple. CO/NO2 sensors shall override local thermostatic control of exhaust fans when in use. .11 Remote audible alarms in Staff Room shall ring if levels exceed set safe levels. ' Local audible and visible alarms shall also be activated on exceeding safe levels. .12 Install all necessary type "L" copper tubing from sample filters to control enclosure and exhaust fan (each sensor to be piped separately to controls, not in series). Sensors shall be installed 1200 AFF. ' .13 Provide factory trained personnel on site as required to perform start-up service and system commissioning as directed by the Consultant. 3.27 PROPANE AND NATURAL GAS ALARM SYSTEM .1 Supply and install gas monitor, sampling system, timing control, alarms, filters, guards, control panel for ice resurfacer room sump pit above high water level. .2 Control system, enclosures, pumps, sensors, filters, tubing fan control and accessories shall be similar to specified for CO/NOZ sensors. .3 Sensors shall be factory set for 10 PPM and alarm and activate exhaust fan. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 30 ! .4 All alarms, controls, and installation shall be similar to and verified by manufacturer on site as noted for CO/NO2 installation. 3.28 VVT SYSTEM .1 WT System Carrier WT system complete with zone dampers, thermostats, bypass dampers, monitor and slave stats, all interconnecting control wiring, transformer and wiring to electrical junction box for line voltage, outside air sensor, return air and supply air temperature sensor, controllers, relays, extenders, etc. or equal in Lennox and Trane. .2 The contractor shall provide a variable volume/variable temperature direct digital control system consisting of necessary zone dampers, thermostats, central unit control interfaces and an air bypass control system. All electronic components shall be designed specifically for their intended function in this system. The system shall be capable of either manual or automatic heating/cooling changeover control. .3 The temperature control system shall incorporate a communication capability that allows all thermostats and bypass controllers in a building to communicate with one another. The time-of-day shall be broadcast to all thermostats and each thermostat shall have the capability of having its own setup/setback time schedule. .4 The same thermostat sensor that proportionally controls its respective zone damper shall be capable of controlling the central unit as well. Separate sensors for the central unit control and zone damper control functions are not acceptable. Each zone shall have an input as to the operation of the central unit. The central unit shall be capable of providing cooling or heating based on the cooling or heating demand from any one zone. Systems which control the central unit by averaging zone sensor inputs are not acceptable. .5 Each thermostat shall have separate and independently set heating and cooling temperature set points. All thermostats shall incorporate a ventilation mode logic which allows individual zone air circulation to occur when there is no zone heating or cooling demand while not allowing counter productive air to enter the zone. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 31 .6 Each system's bypass controller shall control a bypass damper to maintain a minimum airflow across the central unit and to prevent excessive duct static pressures from occurring. The bypass controller shall incorporate a purge cycle logic that will purge hot air from the supply air duct when changing over from cooling to heating prior to initialization of the respective latter cycle. .7 The system shall incorporate a two stage high and two stage low limit supply air duct temperature function that will protect the central unit from excessive duct temperatures. .8 The manufacturer shall provide properly trained personnel to factory check, test and start-up supervise and for owner instruction of the temperature control system. The manufacturer shall also provide customized wiring diagrams for this specific application and 115 to 24V transformers for each component that needs it. .9 Perimeter VVT boxes shall be interlocked by corresponding electric baseboard heters. All wiring by Division 15850. .10 Carrier is selected as Base Bid, York, Trane are alternates. 3.29 CONTROLS .2 Supply and install a local standalone control system located in office area to monitor following: .1 Ice pad unit - on/off/status , - S.A. & R.A. temp. - RH level (R.A.) .2 MAU: - On/Off/Status - S.A. temp. .3 AC Unit: - On/Off/Status. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page: 15850 - 32 ' .4 Alarms: - CO/NOX/Propane/Natural Gas. .3 Ice resurfacing room exhaust fan shall be activated by CO/NOX/Gas sensor to start and stop with override for thermostat. .4 Ice melting pit exhaust fan shall be activated by sensor located at 6" above water level. .5 Refrigeration room exhaust fan shall be operated by room thermostat with an override from refrigeration sensor to start fan. End of Section ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON LKM #97309 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE 1 1.2 INTENT 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS 1 1.5 SEPARATE PRICES 2 1.6 ALTERNATE PRICES 2 1.7 CASH ALLOWANCE 2 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S WORKSHOP 2 1.9 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER 2 , 1.10 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS 3 1.11 DEFINITIONS 3 1.12 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3 1.13 DRAWINGS 3 O 1.14 CODES AND REGULATIONS 5 1.15 CERTIFICATES AND FEES 5 1.16 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS 6 , 1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS 6 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS 7 1.19 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS 7 1.20 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS 7 1.21 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE 8 1.22 TEMPORARY HEATING 8 1.23 DATA BOOK 8 ' 1.24 CLEAN UP 9 1.25 GUARANTEE 9 1.26 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS 10 2.2 CONDUCTORS 10 2.3 ACCESS DOORS 10 2.4 INSERTS AND HANGERS 11 2.5 PLASTIC FILM 11 2.6 GROUND RODS AND CONNECTIONS 11 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 11 2.8 FIRE RATED SEALS 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT 12 3.2 COORDINATION OF WORK 12 3.3 WORKMANSHIP 13 3.4 METHOD OF WIRING 13 3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION 14 3.6 INSTALLATOIN OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16 3.7 GROUNDING 18 3.8 SUPPORTS, HANGERS, SLEEVES, AND CONCRETE WORK 19 3.9 CONCRETE WORK 20 3.10 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS 21 3.11 WIRING OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OWNERS 21 t DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - ii t 3.12 WIRING FOR ILLUMINATED SIGNS 21 3.13 WIRING FOR CONCESSION EQUIPMENT 22 3.14 MOUNTING HEIGHT AND OUTLET LOCATION 22 3.15 CIRCUITING OF OUTLETS 24 3.16 ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION 25 , 3.17 PAINTING 26 3.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING 26 3.19 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT 27 3.20 TESTING 29 , 3.21 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER'S PERSONNEL 29 3.22 SEQUENCE OF WORK 29 3.23 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS & CONTINUITY OF SERVICES 29 3.24 RELOCATION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 31 3.25 DISPOSAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED 31 3.26 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT 31 3.27 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 32 , 3.28 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCTBANK 34 t t t t . t t t t t t t DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 1 I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Comply with General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1. 1.2 INTENT .1 This Section applies to all Sections of Division 16. .2 The mention herein and/or indication on the drawing of any article, material, operation or method requires that it shall be provided and shall be of the quality and subject to the qualifications noted. Perform each operation prescribed according to the conditions stated, providing therefor all necessary labour, equipment and incidentals. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Comply with Division 1 General Requirements and specific additional requirements of , Sections in Division 16. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS , .1 Painting of exposed conduits, ducts and unfinished electrical equipment - under Division 9. .2 Excavation and backfilling inside the building - under Division 16, unless specified otherwise. Conform with Div. 2 specifications. .3 Excavation and backfilling outside the building - under Division 16, unless specified otherwise. Conform with Div. 2 specifications. 1.5 SEPARATE PRICES .1 State separate prices in the Tender Form for addition of specified work. Prices shall include the complete cost of the work, i.e. all equipment, wiring, material, labour, incidentals, profit, overhead, taxes, etc; .2 It shall be the Owner's option to add to the Contract any of the work indicated at the prices stated. Separate prices shall be listed in the Tender Form. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 2 1.6 ALTERNATE PRICES 1 .1 Alternate prices requested for certain options are required to give the owner a clear indication of the cost implications involved in each option. It is therefore required that alternate prices include all costs necessary to make the changes required if the option is accepted by the owner. This shall include all direct and indirect costs required to make the changes. If other divisions are affected and their costs are not included in the alternate price, state so clearly in the tender form. .2 It shall be the owner's option to accept or reject any or all alternate prices. Alternate Prices shall be listed in the Tender Form. 1 1.7 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 The following cash allowances shall be carried in the Contract for the items indicated, ' each including all equipment, wiring, material, labour, incidentals, profit, ovehead, taxes, etc. For each item, if the actual cost is less tahn the Cash Allowance for that item, the remainder shall revert to the Owner. If the actual cost exceeds the Cash Allowance, you will re-imbursed for this amount by the Owner. Cash Allowances shall be listed in the Tender form. .1 Telephone sevice relocation, Hydro connections and transformer: $30,000.00 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S WORKSHOP .1 Provide temporary buildings for field office, workshop, tools and material ' storage as may be required for own use and be responsible for any lossor damage thereto. Temporary buildings shall be of a type approved by the Consultant and located as directed by him. Temporary buildings shall be 1 removed after completion of work as directed by Consultant. 1.9 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER ' .1 Temporary light, power and water will be provided under Division 1. Provide all necessary extension cords, lamps, hoses, etc. for own use. 1.10 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS .1 Before submitting tender for this work, examine the site, local services and local ' conditions, Electrical Drawings, Mechanical Drawings, Structural Drawings, and Architectural Drawings to ascertain that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown on these Drawings and as herein specified. Before commencing work examine the work of the other trades and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work of this Division or the guarantee of same. No extra will subsequently be allowed a DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 3 to cover any such error, omission and/or oversight for not having made a thorough inspection of the grounds, existing conditions, drawings, and specifications. 1.11 DEFINITIONS t .1 "Provide" shall mean "supply and install". "Install" shall mean "mount and wire". "Wire" shall mean "supply and install all required wire and raceways and make all connections". .2 Unless clearly indicated otherwise, words such as "approved", "allowed", "permitted", "satisfactory" and "as instructed" shall refer to such approval, allowance, etc. by the t Consultant. 1.12 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ' .1 Materials and equipment specifically described and listed by name or catalogue number in this specification are materials and equipment on which tender price shall be e based. .2 Where only one manufacturer's name appears, base tender on that manufacturer's , price. .3 Where more than one manufacturer's name appears, use any of the manufacturers listed. Note, however, that the design is based on the dimensions and physical configurations of the manufacturer's equipment listed first. .4 Submit tenders based on equipment named in Specification. If alternate equipment is proposed, indicate saving in cost. .5 Assume full responsibility for any failure of the alternate to meet the requirements of the specifications, and for any change in labour and/or materials required by this or any other Section due to the use of the alternate. Also ensure that the alternate can be fitted into the allotted space. The acceptance of an alternate by the Consultant does not remove or change such responsibility. , .6 Equipment not specified herein as to manufacture, quality, etc. shall be supplied of high commercial standard of quality. Used equipment shall not be accepted. ' .7 If equipment specified is unavailable, state in the Tender the alternate equipment and price used in compiling the Tender. 1.13 DRAWINGS , .1 The drawings are to be considered as diagrammatic only and do not show all the structural and construction details. Any information involving measurements of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings and at the DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 -4 building site. Make without additional charge any necessary changes or additions to the runs to accommodate structural conditions. .2 The drawings and specifications shall be considered an integral part of the Contract Documents. Neither the drawings nor the specifications shall be used alone. Provide and install all work as required for a complete and functioning installation. Misinterpretation of any requirements of either drawings or specifications shall not change the requirements or intent of the specifications for proper completion of the work to the full approval of the Consultant. .3 The drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by the cables, ducts, conduits, etc., which are to be installed under this contract. .4 Where the required conduit work, cables, etc. is not shown on the plans or only shown diagrammatically, these shall be installed as tight as possible to structural members, concrete, ceilings and walls to interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. .5 The location of conduit, ducts, outlets and other equipment may be altered by the Consultant without charge to the Owner, provided the change is made before rinstallation and does not necessitate additional material, and the new location is within 3.05 metres of the original location. .6 Be responsible for the detailed layout of work with respect to the building structure and to other piping, ducts, conduit, etc. If required in certain sections, produce field drawings to show relative positions of various services and/or equipment and have these approved before work proceeds. .7 Consult with the Consultant and/or the Architect and obtain detailed drawings and instructions for the exact location of equipment, and before the installation of fixtures and equipment which may interfere with the interior treatment of the building. .8 The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other so that any details shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be executed in the same manner as if contained in the specifications and shown on the drawings. .9 Should any discrepancy appear between these specifications and the drawings, or between one part of the specifications and another, or between one location on the drawings and another, to cause doubt as to the true meaning and intent of the ' drawings and specifications, a ruling shall be obtained from the Consultant before submitting the tender. If this is not done it will be assumed that the more expensive alternative has been included in the contract. .10 Any error or inconsistency in the drawings or specifications noted after award of contract must be reported to the Consultant before commencing work on the item involved. 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 5 1 1 .11 The omission or incorrect mention of work, materials, etc. that are indispensable to the completed work, is not to be interpreted as relieving of the necessity of providing such work, materials, etc. at no expense to the Owner. 1.14 CODES AND REGULATIONS .1 The whole of the work specified herein and on the Drawings shall comply strictly with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. The Electrical Safety Code, the Ontario Building.Code, Ontario Fire Marshal, and regulations and by-laws of other ' jurisdictional authorities form an integral part of this specification, and are the minimum requirements. Where the drawings or specifications call for conduits, equipment, devices, wiring sizes or methods exceeding the minimum requirements of such codes, the drawings and specifications shall be followed. In case of doubt as to the e interpretation of the codes, the local Electrical Inspector, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector, etc. shall be consulted and his decision shall be final. .2 Before starting any work, submit the required number of copies of the Drawings and Specifications to all authorities and utilities and obtain their approval. The Consultant shall be notified immediately of any changes requested before installation. Any work , installed before approval is obtained from the above authorities and the Inspection Authority shall be corrected without charge. Submit any additional drawings which may be required by the Inspection Authority. 1.15 CERTIFICATES AND FEES .1 Give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all necessary permits, and inspections required for the work herein specified. Pay all fees for examination of drawings and specifications. This shall apply to Electrical inspection Government, Municipal and Public Utilities and all other such bodies. .2 On completion of the work, obtain final unconditional certificates of approval by all utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. All final certificates of approval shall be delivered to the Consultant before final payment is made. .3 Arrange and pay for all tests of the work. .4 Furnish certificate that the work installed conforms with the laws and regulations of all e authorities having jurisdiction and generally complies with the drawings and specification as revised by addenda, change orders and written field instructions. 1 e e e DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 6 ' 1.16 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS .1 Upon completion of the project, present to the Consultant a signed statement to the effect that all tests have been carefully carried out as required by the specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations and that the equipment and installations have been inspected by all jurisdictional authorities. 1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review eight white prints of detail drawings showing panels, transformers, transfer switches, contactors, electric heaters, alarm systems, sound systems, intercom systems, special outlets, control systems, control panels, and any other major ' equipment before ordering and immediately after the award of the contract. Indicate all pertinent data such as options, voltage, type of fuse clip etc. .2 Submit eight copies of typed sheets, catalogue sheets, or illustrations, etc., giving suppliers and catalogue numbers for such items as switches, lighting fixtures and any other standard catalogue items. Indicate all pertinent data such as fixture letter types, ballast voltage, options, special finish or mounting etc. ! .3 These will be reviewed by the Consultant and returned. No allowance will be made later if equipment is condemned on the site because of failure to observe this ' instruction. .4 The Consultant reserves the right to reject any material or apparatus which, in his opinion, does not conform with the requirements of the Specifications. ! .5 Notify Consultant in writing if shop drawings differ from Consultant's design drawings in any respect. Certify shop drawings to indicate that they have been checked and agree ! with Consultant's drawings and specifications. Assume all responsibility for errors made on shop drawings or for changes made from Consultant's drawings and specifications, unless such changes were set out in written notification to Consultant. .6 Review is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not indicate approval of the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Division submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Division of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. Be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job ' site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for coordination of the work of all other Divisions. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 7 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS , .1 Mark on a set of white prints as the job progresses, changes made through any approved change order as well as the location of feeders, conduit runs, junction boxes, and all changes in circuiting location of equipment, runs of conduits, wiring, etc. from that originally shown, so that on the completion of the job the record drawings will show the exact conditions as actually installed. .2 Also mark on final actual room names and numbers. .3 Location of concealed and buried ducts, conduits and cables shall be dimensioned ! from fixed reference points. Also mark location of all access doors. Record drawings shall be kept at the site and shall be brought up to date as the work progresses. , Submit completed record drawings before final certificate of job acceptance is issued. .4 In addition to the white prints, prepare and submit one set of mylars of the record , drawings. Make any corrections required by the Consultant and submit the corrected mylars to the Consultant. 1.19 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS , .1 Samples shall be submitted to the Consultant for his approval before ordering such items as name plates, tags, thermostats, etc., and other repetitive materials where ' finish or detail can be better examined by sample. All materials used for the work shall be fully equal to the samples as approved. 1.20 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS .1 All equipment, materials, controls, wiring and wiring devices, etc., supplied shall conform to the CSA, and Inspection Department requirements for the purposes for which they are to be used, and shall bear a CSA approval label. .2 Special equipment which does not have a standard CSA label shall be inspected by the Special Inspection Department and the Approval Certificate shall be submitted to the General Contractor as soon as possible. 1.21 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE 1 1 ' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 8 ! .1 It is understood and agreed that the temporary or trial usage by the Owner of any electrical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or any other work or material supplied under this Section before final completion and written acceptance by the ! Consultant, is not to be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same by the Owner and it is further understood and agreed that the Owner shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage as soon as the Contractor shall claim that the said ! work is complete and in accordance with the drawings and specifications, and for such reasonable length of time as the Consultant shall deem to be sufficient for making a complete and thorough test of same and that no claim for damage will be made by the Contractor for the injury to, or breaking of any parts of such work which may be so used whether caused by weakness or inadequacy of structural parts or by defective material or workmanship of any kind whatsoever. ! .2 Should the equipment be abused, improperly used or maintained by the Owner, advise the Consultant immediately. Verbal advice shall be followed up in writing, otherwise subsequent claims for damage will not be considered. ! 1.22 TEMPORARY HEATING .1 All temporary heating required while the building is under construction will be provided under Division 1. .2 The permanent electric baseboards, unit heaters, etc., may be used for temporary ' heating, providing this equipment is installed in its permanent location and providing that the building is completely closed in and clean. Approval must be obtained from the Consultant for use of such equipment. ' 1.23 DATA BOOK .1 Bind within hard-covered, loose-leaf binders, a complete set of manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions showing all major electrical equipment and systems. Include shop drawings and detail drawings. Instructions shall be complete for installation, operation and maintenance. Spare part suppliers, lists and addresses shall be included. .2 Make any additions and/or corrections required by the Consultant and submit two correct copies to the Consultant. .3 Instructions shall be reviewed with the operating personnel to ensure a thorough understanding of the equipment and its operation. ! 1.24 CLEAN UP ' .1 All material shall be stored neatly and out of the way. Clean up daily all refuse caused by the work. ! DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 9 .2 On completion of the work remove from the premises all tools, debris, surplus and waste materials resulting from operations under this Section. Clean all fixtures and equipment and leave all items in perfect order ready for operation. 1.25 GUARANTEE .1 Before final payment is made, guarantee all materials and workmanship supplied in the performance of this contract, for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Consultant and, when called upon, make good without further charge any such defects as may appear within this period. Before final payment is made, test the , operation of all equipment installed and demonstrate to the Consultant or his representative that all equipment is operating as intended. The period of this guarantee shall in no way supplant any other guarantee or warranties of longer period, but shall be binding on all other work not otherwise covered. 1.26 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED .1 The following documents shall be submitted to the Consultant on completion of the , project as described above: .1 Electrical Inspection Certificate .2 Fire Department Certificate .3 Fire Alarm Verification Certificate .4 As-Built Drawings ' .5 Data book .6 Guarantee .7 Service Equipment Coordination Certificates .8 Grounding & Groundfault Protection Test Certificates .9 Other Certificates Specified 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS .1 Rigid steel conduits shall be thick-walled, electrogalvanized with threaded couplings, , locknuts and bushings. Bushings shall have nylon insulation to protect conductors. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 10 ' .2 Electro metallic tubing EMT shall be thin-walled, electroplated with steel set screw type couplings and connectors. Connectors shall have nylon insulation to protect conductors. Rigid PVC conduits shall be "Schedule 40" Scepter, Cobra, Canron or equal. Flexible PVC conduit shall be Scepter"Cor-Line" Type ENT with toolless snap-in connectors, couplings and EMT adapters. 2.2 CONDUCTORS .1 Generally, unless otherwise shown on the drawing or herein specified or required by Electrical Code, conductors run in conduits, ducts or other raceways shall be RW 90 copper x-link as manufactured by Canada Wire and Cable, Industrial Wire, CGE or equal. .2 Where Corflex is indicated on the drawing, Teck, Flexform by Northern Electric shall be considered as equal. .3 Exterior underground wiring, unless otherwise indicated, shown as direct buried shall be type RWU 90 copper - x link installed in rigid PVC conduit with mechanical protection as required by the Electrical Code. .4 Where aluminum sheathed, Teck Corflex or mineral insulated cables are specified they shall have copper conductors as shown on the drawings, complete with a bare copper ground wire. Termination of cables shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations and local inspector's satisfaction. .5 Conductors installed in underground ducts or conduits unless otherwise shown shall be type RWU 90, x-link copper. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS ' .1 Access doors, unless otherwise specified or shown, shall be at least 12 gauge steel, finished prime coat only, with concealed hinges, anchor straps, plaster lock, without screws. Access doors in ceilings, where acoustic the is applied to plaster or gypsum board, shall be dish type designed to receive the inserts. .2 Access doors shall be as manufactured by: ' .1 Zurn Industries Canada Ltd. - Inspectors .2 Wade International Limited - LeHage .3 A.G. Baird Limited -ABCO 2.4 INSERTS AND HANGERS .1 Inserts, hangers and supports shall be Electrostrut, Unistrut or equal. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 11 i 2.5 PLASTIC FILM .1 Plastic film to mark buried services telephone, secondary and primary service ducts, cables and conduits shall be 155mm wide as manufactured by A.B. Chance Co. 3M or equal. Film shall contain continuous printed warning and messages designating service buried. 2.6 GROUND RODS AND CONNECTORS .1 Ground connectors of the mechanical type shall be Burndy Hyground using specially designed dies which emboss the die index number into the Hyground connection. .2 Ground rods shall be "Copper Weld" or equal. .3 Welded connectors shall use the thermit process as manufactured by Cadweld or equal. .4 Solderless grounding connectors shall be Burndy or Thomas and Betts. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS .1 Flexible conduit fittings shall be nylon insulated throat type as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Series 5331 and "0" ring Series 5262. ' .2 Connector shall be Tite Bite type with nylon insulated throats as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Series 3110 or equal. .3 Flexible conduit shall be PVC jacketed and shall be T&B, Greenfield or equal. 2.8 FIRE RATED SEALS ' .1 Dow Corning Silicone RTV Foam as distributed by Pilgrim Products or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT .1 Protect finished and unfinished own work and work of other contractors from damage due to own operations. Cover floors and other parts of the building with tarpaulins, etc. Repair all damage to floor surfaces or other parts of the building resulting from the ' carrying out of this work. .2 All material damaged by weather or through negligence shall be removed and replaced with new material. ' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 12 ' .3 During freezing weather, protect all material in such a manner that no harm can be done to the installation already made and/or materials and equipment on the job. .4 Store all material and equipment neatly and out of the way. .5 Securely plug or cap all open ends of pipes, ducts, conduits and equipment to prevent ' ingress of obstructions during construction. 3.2 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK .1 Assume full responsibility for layout of own work so as not to conflict with other trades and also for damage caused to other's work by improper location or carrying out of own work. .2 Arrange work in co-operation with other trades in such a manner as not to interfere with other work being carried on and co-ordinate layout of work with other trades to get all pipework, wiring, conduits, etc., installed to the best advantage. ' .3 Assume full responsibility for the prompt installation of wiring, conduits, ducts, equipment and sleeves in advance of the work of other trades as required. .4 Where any equipment supplied under this Division must be built in with the work of other Divisions such as Masonry, Plastering or Concrete, supply the equipment to be built in, provide templates, anchors, sleeves, bolts and measurements to allow the ' installation of these in the proper sequence. .5 Confer and co-operate with all other trades in order to eliminate any unnecessary delay to any work being done under this Contract. .6 Submit composite drawings of crowded locations where there is possibility of conflict with the work of other trades. Indicate exact locations and elevations of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from field measurement. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP .1 Only first class workmanship will be accepted not only regarding the best accepted standard practices, safety, accessibility, durability, etc., but also regarding neatness of detail. Conduits shall be installed true to line and grade. All conduits, ducts and cables shall be aligned parallel and at right angles to the building walls. Equipment shall be accurately set, plumbed and levelled and hanger rods shall be aligned vertically. The entire work shall present a neat and clean appearance on completion. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 13 .2 Where possible, ducts, conduit and wiring shall be concealed in ceiling spaces,aces, furred spaces, pipe spaces, walls, trenches, etc., except they may be run exposed in the boiler and equipment rooms, or where specifically indicated. They shall be installed neatly and closely to the building structure so that the necessary furring, etc., is kept as small as possible. Where ducts, conduits and other equipment are exposed, they shall be installed as close as possible to building structure, ceilings and walls. Provide ' all offsets for this purpose at own expense, whether shown or not shown on drawings. .3 Any conduit, duct or other work which is not, in the opinion of the Consultant, installed as it should be, shall be taken out and replaced without cost to the Owner. 3.4 METHOD OF WIRING .1 Unless otherwise shown or hereinafter specified rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be ' used in all locations required by Electrical Code and for: .1 All exposed wiring subject to mechanical damage. ' .2 Wring in damp locations, except where non-metallic duct is specified or shown. ' .3 Rigid PVC or type ENT flexible PVC conduit may be used in poured concrete slabs and walls. .2 All conduits, couplings, connectors and boxes in poured concrete slabs and walls in contact with earth shall be non metallic. .3 Unless otherwise specified and subject to Electrical Code and any local authority having jurisdiction, electrical metallic tubing may be used for: surface work, in furred walls, in poured concrete slabs not in contact with the grade, in poured concrete walls not in contact with the grade, ceiling spaces, and in masonry walls not in contact with the grade. All conduits shall be installed neatly, parallel and perpendicular to ceiling grid. Diagonal runs are not permitted. .4 Unless otherwise specified and subject to the Electrical Code and any local authority having jurisdiction, armoured flexible cable AC-90 (BX) may be used only for short down-drops to lighting fixtures. .5 Flexible conduit shall be used for final short connections between outlet and electrical equipment such as recessed fixtures, motors, transformers, motorized equipment or fixed appliances. .6 All low voltage and multi conductor cables shall be installed in conduit. ' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 14 1 1 .7 If number of conductors in any one conduit exceeds six (6) line conductors, conductor size shall be increased to allow for derating as required by Code. .8 A/S, Corflex, MICC,BXL and other such cables shall be used only where their use is specifically indicated on the Drawings. t .9 Branch wiring installed underground outside the building shall, unless otherwise indicated, be RWU 90 x-link installed in type ENT PVC conduit, with an insulated ground wire included. .10 Rigid PVC conduit shall be used for direct burial underground. Ducts shall be sloped at least 1 in 400 and shall be buried at not less than 915mm below finished grade unless otherwise indicated. ' .11 Supply and install a 155mm wide plastic film 200mm below finished surface or grade to mark the location of buried cables and conduits. 3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION .1 All conduits generally shall be run concealed where possible except that conduits in boiler room, equipment and electrical rooms may be installed on surface. .2 All conduits shall be completely installed with bushings in place before conductors are ' pulled into the conduits. .3 Conduits installed on surface shall be run in neat lines parallel to walls and ceiling. ' .4 Conduits shall be sized as per Electrical Code. Where conduit sizes are shown on the Drawings, these are minimum and in no case shall be reduced without the approval of the Consultant. .5 Conduit shall enter properly and shall be secured to all fittings, outlet boxes, etc., by means of locknuts and bushings. ' .6 Locknuts and bushings shall be screwed up tightly to ensure a perfect mechanical and electrical bond. ' .7 Where conduit joints occur in concrete, couplings shall be concrete tight and painted with asphalt paint. .8 Where conduits cross building expansion joints, provide conduit expansion joints with telescoping sleeve and insulated bushings. Straight runs of conduit 30m or longer shall have expansion joints. Location of expansion joints shall be taken from Architectural and Structural Drawings. .9 Running threads shall not be used. Where required, Erickson couplings shall be used. 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 1 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 15 .10 All cut conduit ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges. .11 Conduit shall be laid out so as to avoid interference with other work and so that it can , drain with no pockets in which water can collect. Conduits shall be at least 50mm clear of all mechanical pipes, flues, etc. .12 All rigid steel conduit and E.M.T. shall be supported with one-hole pipe clips or by ' hangers, with supports at intervals specified in Electrical Code. .13 Field bends and offsets shall be uniform and symmetrical without flattening of conduit. Minimum bending radius shall be 10 times conduit diameter. Where two or more exposed conduits are running parallel and close to each other all bends shall be concentric. .14 Conduits or cables run outdoors shall be 915mm below finished grade unless otherwise specified. .15 Conduits below floors on grade shall be installed 305mm below the slab and shall be rigid PVC. Conduits in concrete slabs shall be installed between the top and bottom reinforcing steel and tied securely in place to the reinforcing steel. ' .16 Where conduits are installed in concrete slabs, obtain Structural Engineer's approval on size of conduit that may be used therein. Conduits larger than 32mm I.D. shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, without prior written approval from the Consultant. .17 Conduits in concrete or masonry shall be securely held in place during pouring and construction. Cap conduit during pouring with interlocking plastic "Space Caps" to , prevent conduit damage and to maintain the proper spacings. .18 Conduits which are required to be installed, but left empty shall be tested for clear bore and shall be left with fish wire and shall be sealed at both ends to prevent entrance of ' dirt and moisture. .19 All conduit in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical room, fan rooms, boiler room, , and in such other areas as are indicated on the Drawings, shall be run exposed with outlets installed after mechanical or other equipment is installed. Outlet locations in the above areas as shown on the Drawings are approximate only, and are shown only to , indicate the quantity of outlets required. Outlets shall be relocated to clear pipes, ducts or mechanical equipment. Relocation of lighting outlets shall be consistent with good distribution of light to the satisfaction of the Consultant. .20 Where rigid conduit enters cabinets, panels, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, auxiliary gutters or other such enclosures the conductors shall be protected by a nylon insulated metal bushing. .21 Where electrical metallic tubing is installed, the couplings and connectors shall be steel set screw type. The connectors shall have nylon insulated throat. ' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 16 .22 Where a flexible raceway is exposed to continuous or intermittent moisture, the conduit shall be the liquid tight flexible type, CSA type UA. It shall be installed in such a manner that liquids tend to run off the surface and not drain toward the fittings. Sufficient slack shall be provided to reduce the effects of vibration. Where the fittings are brought into an enclosure with a knock-out, a gasket assembly, consisting of an "0" ring and retainer, shall be installed on the outside. .23 The final raceway connection to motors, transformers, and other equipment subject to vibration shall be flexible metallic conduit at least 12 conduit diameters long. i .24 Where a conduit pierces a fire rated wall or floor, seal the opening with suitable material. .25 All conduits and outlet boxes shall be supported from building surfaces and shall not be supported from other conduits, ducts or pipes. Where existing hangers have space for the new conduits, these may be used but proper fastening devices shall be utilized and proper clearances maintained. .26 Electrical conductors shall be installed in service spaces that do not contain other ' combustible material or shall be protected against exposure to fire to ensure continued operation for a period of one hour. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ' .1 All conductors unless otherwise specified, shall be copper minimum #12 AWG except that control wiring shall be minimum #14 AWG. Wiring for emergency battery system shall be minimum #10 AWG. .2 Conductors for 15 amp 120/208V branch circuit home runs up to 30 metres shall be minimum #12 AWG and for home runs over 30 metres. shall be minimum #10 AWG. For 15 amp 347/600V branch circuit home runs up to 75 metres conductors shall be minimum #12 AWG and for home runs over 75 metres shall be minimum #10 AWG. In no case shall wire be smaller than shown on Drawings. ' .3 Conductors for circuits greater than 15 amps, and for which size is not shown on the Drawings, shall be sized for current-carrying capacity of breaker or fuse protecting them, and to limit the voltage drop at the outlet to 2% as shown in Table D3 of the Electrical Code. .4 Single conductor aluminum sheathed, Teck and Corflex cables shall be spaced I diameter apart and installed in such a manner that they will qualify for their free air current rating and cables 250 MCM and larger shall be installed to have no sheath current. .5 Cables shall be unjacketed and, where installed for no sheath current shall be installed on insulated supports to prevent sheath currents. i DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 17 .6 Cables shall be properly clipped and protected against mechanical injury. Clips shall be , single conductor non ferrous type. .7 Cables shall be installed on building surfaces, cable trays, trapeze hangers. Cables shall not rest on mechanical pipes, ducts, conduits or ceiling (unless fished in existing inaccessible spaces) nor shall they be supported from pipes, ducts or conduits. .8 Control wiring shall be of type and size required for that particular system and voltage. i Unless multiconductor cable is specified minimum #14 AWG wire shall be used. .9 Method of installation shall conform to the Electrical Code. .10 Wire connections shall be made with pressure type solderless connectors. Wire connection shall be twisted prior to splicing and shall be insulated with vinyl insulating caps and locking rings. Provide pigtails for all electrical fixtures and devices to ensure that neither the neutral or the power supply lines are opened when a fixture or a device is removed from the circuit. .11 For multiple (parallel conductor) runs of cable, test for equal load sharing. .12 Measure the insulation value of all lighting and power circuit feeders and sub-feeders. ' If resistance between conductor and ground is less than that recommended by the Electrical Code, such circuits are to be considered defective and must be replaced. 3.7 GROUNDING ' .1 All grounding of services, equipment, light standards, feeders, conduits, etc., shall be done in accordance with the Electrical Code and any requirements of the local supply authorities. Provide code size insulated ground wire in all conduits and raceways. .2 The following requirements are supplementary and additional to the above requirements. .3 Grounding conductors run inside buildings beyond the electrical rooms or closets and ' transformer room/vault shall be run in EMT conduit where surface and PVC in slab and concrete walls of sufficient diameter. .4 Provide a green insulated grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits. Size of grounding conductor shall be as shown on the Drawings. If size is not shown follow Electrical Code. Ground conductors shall be installed inside conduit or tubing containing the phase conductors. .5 Conduits installed under concrete slabs on grade and in concrete or in masonry exterior walls below grade shall have a green ground conductor. The conduits shall not be relied upon for grounding continuity. i DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 18 .6 All PVC conduits shall have a green insulated Code size copper ground conductor run parallel to the line conductors in the tubing. .7 All feeder and subfeeder conduits in excess of 45 metres shall have a green ground conductor run parallel to the line conductor in the conduit. .8 Ground connections shall be made with approved solderless ground connectors, or by welding, using thermit process. .9 All ground connections underground and in places which will become inaccessible after installation, shall be made only by welding using the thermit process. .10 Where ground continuity through conduits is not maintained, a green insulated ground wire shall be installed inside the conduits. .11 Where isolated ground receptacles are specified provide a separate ground and separate neutral conductor from panel for each duplex or quad receptacle. .12 The conduit system shall not be used for grounding transformer neutrals. Transformer neutrals shall be connected directly to an approved grounding electrode to the full satisfaction of the Inspection authority. .13 Mechanical connector hardware shall be bronze or stainless steel. .14 All Corflex cables shall have a bare copper ground wire running parallel to the conductors from power source to the load. .15 Continuous rows of fluorescent fixtures and fixture wiring channels where such are used shall have a green ground wire of same size as phase conductors. The fixture or channel body shall not be relied upon to provide ground continuity. 3.8 SUPPORTS, HANGERS, SLEEVES,AND CONCRETE WORK ' .1 Unless specifically noted otherwise, provide all foundations, supports, stands, platforms, etc. necessary for the proper installation of the work of this Section. 1 .2 They shall be concrete, steel, etc. as shown, specified or required and as approved by the Consultant. All equipment such as panels, transformers, switches, etc. shall be supported independently of the conduit. ' .3 All concrete foundations, and curbs for all equipment, unless otherwise shown or noted, shall be provided by this Division. Hire the trade involved and pay all expenses. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 19 .4 Where concrete bases are specified for floor mounted equipment they shall be constructed of 3000psi concrete using plywood forms. Supply and install dowels for all concrete bases unless noted otherwise. Concrete bases or curbs shall be not less than 100mm thick and not less than 100mm larger than base of equipment, and with chamfered edges and smooth finish. .5 Supply all necessary templates, anchor bolts, inserts and location drawings for equipment supplied and supervise the work of installation of same. .6 Hanger rods must be vertical without bends or offsets. Where other structural supports do not exist, provide angle or channel iron supports, properly sized, to support the load from the structural framework. .7 Percussion type fastenings of any kind will not be permitted unless prior approval in t writing is obtained from the Consultant. .8 All electrical panels, switches or other electrical equipment shall be complete with suitable mounting brackets. Provide required angle or channel iron supports to bear the equipment weight. .9 Supply and set all necessary sleeves and be responsible for the exact location of all sleeves. Sleeves shall be plastic where allowed by building code. In the fan room and in other areas where water may accumulate on the floor, sleeves shall be of steel pipe and shall be extended 50mm above floor. .10 Install oversized sleeve for conduits passing through floor slab, caulk around joint. Apply cold cure fire resistant mastic between sleeve and conduit to maintain full fire rating. .11 Openings in floors for groups of conduits shall have a 100mm curb around the opening and voids between conduits and ducts shall be sealed to prevent sound transmission and to provide full fire rating of floor. .12 Where sleeves pass through fire walls voids shall be filled to restore full fire rating of ' wall so penetrated and prevent sound transmission. .13 Inserts for hangers, etc. shall be firmly secured to the forms before the concrete is poured. Supply these inserts and be responsible for their correct location. .14 Hangers, equipment etc., may not be supported from any precast concrete slab construction without the Consultant's approval. Where conduits, equipment, etc., are to be supported under pre-cast concrete slab construction, or under the steel roof deck, support all this equipment from the building structural steel beams, trusses or joists, using beam clamps. i DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 20 .15 Where structural supports do not exist, or are spaced too far apart to be suitable for proper support of conduits and cables supply and install angle or channel steel members between beams of the structural framework as required for proper supporting of same. .16 Where holes are required in precast floor or roof construction, pay the appropriate trade for cutting of any such holes. Be responsible for accurately laying out the location and size of holes necessary and obtain prior approval for all such holes from Consultant. 3.9 CONCRETE WORK .1 All concrete work required for electrical work shall be done by Division 16, and shall conform with the appropriate articles in the Architectural divisions of the Specifications. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS .1 Provide access doors to all junction boxes, and other electrical equipment, where built in or concealed behind furring, walls or ceiling. Access doors shall be minimum size 305mm x 457mm and 610mm x 457mm where it is necessary for persons to enter and shall be adequately sized to properly service and maintain the equipment they serve. .2 Be responsible for their correct location. Frame and cover shall have a prime coat finish. Where necessary to have a number of access doors installed in the same area of a ceiling or wall, submit to the Consultant for his approval the location of these access doors. .3 Employ trade in whose work the access doors occur and pay for the installation of these. .4 Size and locate access doors in applied tile or in glazed or unglazed structural tile to suit the patterns. Refer to Architectural Room Finish Schedule and details on Architectural Drawings in this regard. .5 Submit list of proposed access door locations and obtain approval thereof before commencing access door installation. .6 Access doors in removable acoustic tile ceilings are not required. .7 Provide two sets of record drawings showing the location of all access panels with reference to their function. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 21 3.11 WIRING OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OWNERS .1 Completely wire and connect all items listed as supplied by Owner; Refer also to the Architectural Drawings. These items will be installed in place by other Divisions but this Division shall do all electrical work required for installation of these items, including control wiring. 3.12 WIRING FOR ILLUMINATED SIGNS .1 Exterior illuminated signs will be supplied and installed by Sign Installer. Wire to and connect each of the signs, the location of outlets shall be verified with the Consultant before installation. Obtain roughing in drawing from Consultant. .2 Interior illuminated signs shall be supplied under other Division but shall be installed and completely wired by this Division. .3 For each illuminated sign supply and install a disconnect switch at the sign. 3.13 WIRING FOR CONCESSION EQUIPMENT .1 Install all conduits, outlets, receptacles and wiring for concession equipment. Outlet locations shown on the Drawings are for estimating purposes only, and actual installation shall be in accordance with rough-in drawings, provided by the equipment supplier. Wiring in wet areas shall be liquid tight. .2 Unless otherwise shown where motors for equipment are provided by the equipment supplier, these motors will be supplied complete with all starters and control devices. Install starters and control devices required, and do all wiring including control wiring, wiring to starters and wiring to motors in accordance with Manufacturer's requirements. For each motor which is not controlled from a point within 9 meters and within sight of , the motor and the equipment driven by the motor, supply and install a suitably sized unfused disconnect in a suitable location within 9 metres and within sight of the motor and its driven equipment. .3 Refer to concession equipment drawings for scope of work by this Division. Provide all field wiring and connections indicated. 3.14 MOUNTING HEIGHT AND OUTLET LOCATION .1 The location of outlets and equipment is subject to change without extra cost to the Owner, providing information is given prior to installation. No extra amount will be paid for outlets or equipment relocated requiring extra labour and materials up to 3.05 metres from the original location, nor will credits be anticipated where relocations up to 3 metres reduces the materials and labour. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 22 .2 Unless dimensioned, symbols on the drawings show approximate locations only. Care shall be used to locate each fixture at the centre of spaces or rooms and to align continuous rows of fluorescent fixtures. Ensure that rough-in for suspended lighting fixtures exactly matches suspension points. .3 Location of outlets in public areas or generally in any corridor, lobby, or in any areas having decorative wall finishes such as glazed tile, mosaic tile, marble, wood panelling, prefabricated panels, etc., shall be confirmed with the Consultant prior to installation. .4 Where outlets are located within 1524mm of a mechanical device such as a thermostat, co-ordinate with the Mechanical Trade to ensure that the items are located to the approval of the Consultant. .5 Outlets shall not be mounted halfway through a ceramic or glazed tile dado line. If necessary, the mounting height specified shall be adjusted and the outlet located above the dado line. .6 Outlet boxes intended for wall receptacles, switches, telephone outlets, etc., located in exposed concrete block, brick walls or ceramic tile walls shall be saw-cut into the top or bottom edge of the nearest course of block, brick or tile at a height nearest the specified elevation, and the height shall be uniform throughout the project. Opening shall be of minimum size required to take the outlet box and such that the device cover plate will conceal the cut. .7 Where a number of outlets are located side by side, their centre lines shall be aligned horizontally. Where outlets occur one above the other, their centre lines shall be aligned vertically. In each case the distance between cover plates shall be 25mm. .8 Final roughing-in locations of all floor outlets shall be obtained from the Architectural furniture and equipment layout drawings. .9 Receptacles in counters or furniture shall be mounted as detailed on Architectural Drawings. .10 Outlets in kitchen shall be mounted at various heights and in locations shown on kitchen roughing-in drawings. Locations shown on electrical drawings are for pricing only. .11 Obtain mounting heights from the Consultant for all outlets that do not have mounting height indicated. .12 All measurements listed, unless otherwise noted, refer to centre line of device from finished floor. I13 Mounting height above floor shall be as follows: .1 Highest operating device or circuit breaker in panel board, 1982mm AFF. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 -23 .2 Lighting switches shall be located on the knob/latch side of the door unless otherwise indicated or applicable, and shall be mounted at 1200 AFF. .3 Recessed motor starters shall be mounted at same height as light switches in I that area. .4 Receptacles, telephone, data and T.V. antenna outlets 457mm. .5 Receptacles above counters 1070 in general. However coordinate this with actual counter or backsplash height; obtain details from architectural drawings. .6 Fire alarm manual pull stations 1200mm AFF. .7 End of line resistor for signal and alarm circuits shall be mounted in service rooms, at 1829 AFF. .8 Alarm signals, unless otherwise indicated, 2438mm and 305mm below ceiling in areas where ceiling height is lower than 2743mm. .9 Clocks unless otherwise detailed 2438mm and 305mm below ceiling in areas where ceiling height is lower than 2743mm. .10 Speakers unless otherwise detailed 2438mm and 305mm below ceiling in areas where ceiling height is lower than 2743mm. .11 Sound system switches at 1200mm AFF for wheelchair use. .12 Thermostats shall be mounted 1200mm AFF. i .13 Telephone intercom handsets at 1200mm AFF: .14 Receptacles in the Mechanical Rooms and other unfinished areas 1200mm AFF. .15 Bottom of lighting fixtures over mirrors 50mm above mirror. Check Architectural drawings for details. 3.15 CIRCUITING OF OUTLETS , .1 Each outlet shown on the drawing shall be connected to the lighting panel indicated. Outlets with same branch circuit number shall be connected to the same branch circuit breaker. Outlets without circuit number designation shall be connected to a spare circuit breaker in the nearest lighting panel, normal or emergency in accordance with the nature of the service required. Circuit numbers shall correspond to breaker number in panel. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 24 .2 Circuit numbers also show grouping of outlets connected to any given circuit. Circuit numbers may be changed only where required to balance loads in a panel. 1 .3 Common neutral may be used for circuits on different phases for non-dimmed lighting loads and circuits for all general purpose receptacles. Separate neutrals shall be provided for dimmed circuits, circuits connected to ground fault protected circuit breakers and circuits with isolated ground. .4 All 120VAC line voltage lighting switch outlet boxes shall have circuit neutral passing through same. 3.16 ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION .1 Division 15 will supply electrical motors, starters, controls, relays, thermostats, float switches, pressure switches, flow switches, pilot lights, remote control stations, safety devices, aquastats, control transformers, disconnects for control circuits, and interlocks. .2 Division 15 will mount the above equipment, except for line voltage wall thermostats and starters, which shall be mounted by Division 16. Refer to Mechanical Drawings for exact locations of thermostats and starters. .3 Division 16 shall supply and mount isolation switches for safe servicing of motors, as well as at electrical panels of all factory assembled package equipment, e.g. rooftop units, condensing units, airconditioning units. .4 The isolation switch shall be located at the equipment being isolated. Provide all 1 isolation switches as required by Codes, whether or not shown on the drawings. .5 Unless otherwise indicated Division 16 shall provide all power wiring as defined herein. .6 Division 15 will provide all control and interlock wiring including connection to equipment and to source of supply. .7 Power wiring is defined as all single or three phase wiring carrying the full line current of the mechanical equipment, including all wiring of line voltage controls and isolation disconnects connected in line between the source and the mechanical equipment and including connection to the equipment. .8 Control and interlock wiring is defined as all mechanical equipment wiring other than power wiring outlined above. .9 Division 15 will provide detailed wiring diagrams for each motor. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 25 1 unless specifically indicated otherwise, will provide all wiring for damper .10 Division 6, u p y p motor power from nearest lighting panel except where the drawings indicate power outlets by Division 15. For these instances Division 15 will wire from the outlet to the damper motor. .11 Ascertain exact location of starters, motors and line voltage controls from Mechanical Drawings. If no location is indicated on the Electrical Drawings, obtain it from the Mechanical Drawings or from the Consultant prior to closing of Tenders. 3.17 PAINTING .1 Unless otherwise specified, all surface mounted equipment such as panels, transformers, etc. shall have factory prefinished exterior surfaces. All prefinished equipment surfaces shall be cleaned and any scratches shall be touched up with original paint on completion of project. .2 All equipment intended for recessing, such as flush panels and recessed electric heaters and equipment specified with finish suitable for painting shall have factory applied prime coat of paint. Final painting of prime painted equipment will be done under Painting Section of this specification. .3 If in the Consultant's opinion, touching up is not sufficient to provide a satisfactory appearance, the equipment shall be replaced and/or repainted to the Consultant's approval. .4 Unless specifically noted otherwise after all equipment and conduit is installed, thoroughly clean off rust and oil on all exposed iron and steel work including hangers, conduits, panels, etc., installed under this Division, such as in mechanical, electrical rooms, etc. and then paint same with one coat of chrome oxide phenolic base primer and one coat of 100% Alkyd base enamel of Consultant approved colour. 3.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 Refer to and be governed by General Specification applicable Division. .2 Should any cutting and repairing of either unfinished or finished work be required due to failure of this trade to advise of or install equipment or sleeves on time, such cutting and patching shall be carried out by the trade affected and Division 16 shall pay all costs of such work. Cutting and patching in existing building shall be by Division 16. .3 General Contractor will patch and make good surfaces cut by Division 16. .4 No powder activated tools shall be used on this project. j DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 -26 .5 After penetration of any fire separation and installation of conduits or panels, restore the fire separation to its original rating. .6 No holes through the Structure shall be permitted without prior written approval of structural consultant. Sleeving and coring information shall be provided to Structural by Division 16 contractor. .7 All coring locations shall be identified by Division 16 contractor and concrete sub- contractor shall cut the openings at the expense of Division 16. .8 Pneumatic hammers and other excessive noise-producing equipment shall not be used without prior permission from the Owners. If water-cooled drills or saws are used, water shall be collected locally and not allowed to spread through other areas or drip uncontrolled through floor openings. 3.19 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT .1 All power, lighting, signal and telephone panels, disconnect switches, starters, splitters, contactors and time switches shall be identified with black plastic laminated (Lamacoid) nameplates with white engraving, secured to the equipment with screws, to indicate function, voltage feed source, and designation appearing on drawings. .2 Cover plates for recessed motor starters shall have engraved designation, to the satisfaction of the Consultant, to differentiate them from light switches, e.g. "FAN'. .3 All fusible units and/or breakers in power panels and switchboards shall be identified with black plastic laminated (Lamacoid) nameplates with white engraving secured with screws to indicate load served. .4 Surface mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted on exterior face of door or cover. Flush mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted at the top of the inside face of the door or cover. .5 Each panelboard shall have a typewritten legend to indicate area or equipment controlled by each branch circuit. .6 All feeders in pullboxes shall be tagged with load. Tags shall be T & B "E-Z Code" ' markers or equal. .7 Terminal strips in control panels shall be indexed and wires shall be colour coded. .8 Raceways and junction boxes of the various systems shall be identified by colour bars, dots or rings on the exterior of the raceway at 9 metre intervals and at termination points. The identification may be coloured adhesive tape or paint and shall be located ' 155mm from the conduit coupling. Sheathed cables shall be marked at 15 metre intervals and at termination points. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 27 .9 The identification shall be by voltage and system type as follows: , 600V & 347/600 volt - orange 120/240V & 120/208 volt - blue (light) 120/240V & 120/208 volt - Emergency - blue and white Fire alarm system - red Alarm systems - black Bell Telephone - green Low voltage system - brown .10 All conductors shall be colour coded. All conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller shall have the colour impregnated into the insulation at the time of manufacture. In the case of conductors size No. 6 gauge and larger they may be colour coded with adhesive colour coding tape, but only black insulated conductors shall be employed in this case except , for neutrals which shall be white whenever possible. Where colour coding tape is utilised, it must be applied for a minimum of 25mm at all terminations and junction boxes. Painting of conductors will not be accepted under any conditions. The colour coding shall also apply to all bussing in panels, in which the phasing shall be 'A','B','C', from left to right when facing the panel. .11 Conductor colour coding shall be as follows: Phase 'A' - Red Phase 'B' - Black (Yellow) Phase 'C' - Blue Neutral - White Ground - Green Control - Orange Fire Alarm: Stations - Red and Blue Signals - Black and White Detectors - Red and Blue .12 All equipment, including electrical motors, shall have a proper nameplate affixed thereto, showing the size, name of equipment, service, serial number, and all information usually provided which shall include voltage, frequency, phase, and horsepower of motors and the name and address of the manufacturer. All stamped, ' etched or engraved lettering on plates shall be perfectly legible to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Nameplates shall not be painted over, and where apparatus is to be insulated, nameplates shall be firmly attached with rigid insulation back-up, of equal thickness of that of jacket. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 -28 ' 3.20 TESTING .1 Make any tests required by the Consultant during the progress of the work and at its completion. Provide all necessary labour and equipment for such tests. Such tests shall be carried out for the purposes of determining if the work as actually installed meets specified requirements. .2 Tests must last for duration specified, defects and faults developed shall be corrected and the test repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner, Consultant and the local authorities. 3.21 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL .1 When the installation is completed and ready for acceptance, demonstrate to, and instruct, owners staff or representative in the operation of each piece of equipment and system. Provide required labour and equipment for the demonstrations and instructions. 3.22 SEQUENCE OF WORK .1 The work may have to be carried out in certain stages. Refer to Architectural Specifications for further details. 3.23 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS & CONTINUITY OF SERVICES 1 .1 Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical alterations and additions are being made in the existing areas as noted on Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and Specifications. .2 The existing building must be kept in operation at all times. Arrange work in such a manner that interruptions in services occur only at scheduled time and such interruption must be kept to a minimum. Unavoidable interruption shall be scheduled ' with the Consultant and the Owner at least 48 hours in advance of the interruption and duration of interruption shall be approved by the Consultant and Owner and shall conform to the limitations stipulated in the specifications. Include all overtime, shift work and weekend work as necessary to fulfil these requirements. 1 .3 Visit the site and examine the existing conditions and all tendering documents, drawings and specifications and make necessary allowances in tender price for removal, relocation, rerouting, reconnection of existing electrical equipment and wiring as may be necessary for the execution and completion of this project. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred by this trade through failure to make this examination. i DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 29 .4 Remove and/or relocate and reinstall all wiring, fixtures and equipment as necessary to , accommodate Architectural and Structural alterations and additions indicated on the drawings. Wiring located in areas being altered or demolished, but feeding outlets or equipment required to remain in service shall be rerouted as required to maintain the continuity of these services. .5 Sequence of removal and relocation of existing equipment and wiring shall be coordinated with the other trades and shall conform to the requirements and conditions outlined in the Specifications. .6 Supply, install and maintain all required temporary and bypass wiring to occupied areas at all times. Provide adequate protection to existing wiring and equipment serving the existing and new areas and particularly where wiring and electrical equipment have become exposed to mechanical injury or moisture in the course of alterations or new construction. .7 Supply and install all temporary and permanent bypass feeders, conduits, wiring and protective devices required for the addition of equipment or changeover from the existing supply sources, panels, transformers, etc., to the designated new supply sources, panels, transformers, etc. .8 Where mechanical equipment is being installed and ceiling are removed for this purpose, remove all electrical devices, light fixtures and conduits interfering with said installation and reinstall same. .9 In some instances, new outlets and equipment may be shown in the same location as the existing outlets, these may be fed through the existing conduits provided that the conduits are in good condition and are acceptable to the Inspection Department as reusable. .10 Existing fixtures and wiring indicated to be removed and not to be reused may be used for temporary lighting, and shall be removed as soon as their use becomes unnecessary. .11 Existing electrical equipment removed and indicated for reuse shall be cleaned before installation. All unused conduit entrance openings shall be sealed before reinstallation. .12 Obsolete conduits and cables shall be disconnected from their source of supply, and ' shall be removed. 3.24 RELOCATION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT .1 Certain items are identified on the drawings as existing equipment "Relocated". Disconnect said equipment from its present source and after relocation reconnect and reinstall all electrical components. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 30 I .2 Electrical devices such as starters, disconnect switches, controls, etc., not mounted on the equipment but serving the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled in the new location. .3 After disconnecting the existing equipment in its present location, cut back, disconnect, remove and make safe the previous supply lines which became obsolete through the disconnection. 3.25 DISPOSAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED I .1 All existing equipment and material not required in the final installation shall be carefully removed at the appropriate time and shall be disposed of as follows: .1 Unless otherwise specified, this equipment shall remain the property of the Owner and shall be carefully stored in a safe location on the site as designated by the Consultant. Remove all extraneous wiring, fittings,etc. from the equipment before storage. The Owner's representative shall, from time to time, examine this equipment thus stored and designate which equipment to be retained and what to be disposed of. Owners shall be able to remove from equipment designated to be disposed of any parts or items which they may need as spare parts for other existing equipment. Remove from site and dispose of equipment designated for disposal. Move equipment retained by the Owner to area designated by his representative. r .2 Obsolete and not reused cables, wires, conduits, boxes and splitters shall be removed from the site as the job progresses. 3.26 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT .1 Where it is indicated that equipment is to be installed in future, leave such space clear and install the conduits, outlets, equipment and other work in such a way that future equipment installations and connections can be made. Consult with the representative of the Consultant whenever necessary for the purpose. t3.27 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING .1 Excavate and backfill as required for this work both inside and outside the building. All trench excavation shall be carried out in strict conformity with the Trench Excavator Protection Act and Amendments. Statutes of Ontario and Regulations, as revised and amended to date. .2 All excavation and backfilling shall also conform with the requirements of the Excavation and Backfilling Section of the Specification. r DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 31 .3 Carefully check and avoid disturbing or damaging any existing underground piping, , conduit or other services uncovered during carrying out of work. Make good any damage. .4 Existing underground sewers and other services are indicated approximately on the Mech., Elec., or Arch. Site Plans. The location of such services has been determined from available information but has not been verified in the field. Carefully check such locations, perform all necessary exploratory excavations and report any serious discrepancy before proceeding with any new work. Engage the services of local PUC, Hydro, Telephone and Gas Authorities to accurately determine location of any underground utilities. .5 Excavations for all underground services shall be of the required depth and dimension and shall be: a. Prepared as required, so that no portion of any duct shall bear directly against any rock or other hard surface. , b. Kept dry at all times by bailing, pumping or other means. Sides and bottoms shall be kept from freezing. C. Bottoms of excavation shall be graded as required. d. Banks of excavations shall be evenly cut and/or trimmed and they shall be shored as required to prevent caving in, and the material used shall be carefully withdrawn during backfilling. e. Width of excavation shall be carefully controlled and shall be limited to twice the O.D. of ducts, conduits or ductbank, and as shown on the Drawings. f. Excavating, duct laying, and backfilling shall be executed in limited length as , determined by the Consultant to enable all protective measures to function efficiently at all times. g. Any rocks and boulders encountered shall be removed. Rocks and boulders removed from the excavation shall be broken up as required, to permit handling. Any rock encountered shall be removed by drilling and wedging as no blasting will be allowed. .6 Where any excavating is necessary in close proximity to and below any footing level, backfilling shall be done with 2000#concrete furnished under this Section to the level of the top of highest adjacent footing. .7 All ducts and duct banks entering and leaving the Building or passing other excavated areas shall be supported on a reinforced concrete pad, resting at both ends on at least 6' solid undisturbed earth or a check in a concrete foundation wall. ' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 32 .8 Any concrete encased duct banks crossing unstable or excavated areas shall have reinforcing. .9 In areas where reinforced suspended slab is indicated on structural drawings, duct or duct banks shall be supported from reinforcing rods. I .10 Should the excavation by negligence or error, be carried to greater depth than shown or authorized, such extra excavation shall be replaced with well-compacted approved Granular B crushed stone fill or 2000# concrete, as required to give a bearing value equal to that provided by adjacent soil. .11 Backfilling shall not be commenced until installation is inspected and approved. Backfilling shall be carried out carefully to avoid injury to the work and subsequent ' settlement and shall be executed as follows. .12 All backfilling required to bring level up to underside of stone fill (under parking areas, and roads) and to underside of sidewalk shall be Granular B material, supplied and ' placed under this Section and tamped every 150mm in depth to consolidated said fill. Fill shall be clean, shall not have particles over 60mm in largest dimensions, with not more than 8% passing a #200 sieve. 1 .13 All backfilling under driveways, sidewalks, etc. shall be compacted in 150mmm to 200mm layers to a 95% standard Proctor Density. Cost of testing and inspection of said fill including checking the placing and compaction of fill, shall be borne by trades doing the work under this Section. One test shall be made (every 2 layers of fill) for each 500 sq.m. or less of filled areas for driveways, parking areas and sidewalks. .14 Exterior backfill in areas to receive sod or seed shall be clean fill, free from organic material and debris, placed in maximum 300mm layers and compacted to achieve 90% dry density as determined by the standard AASHO test. Frozen earth shall not be used for backfilling nor shall any backfilling be placed on or'against frozen ground. .15 Backfill trenches within building with Granular B crushed stone in layers and compact to 100% Standard Proctor Density. .16 Supply and install a 150mm wide plastic film 200mm below finished surface or grade to mark the location of ducts, cables and conduits. Film shall be manufactured by ' Griffolyn or equal and shall contain continuous printed warning and message designating service buried. Film shall be orange for power lines and green for communication lines. ' .17 If settlement occurs, it shall be made up as soon as possible, so that the regular traffic in and around the work will not be inconvenienced. After a period of adequate to reveal that settlement has passed, fill all depressions to restore the correct grade. .18 Patching of all paved areas, roads, walks, sodding, etc. damaged by new work will be done by another division. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 33 .19 Be responsible for making good any subsequent settlement of fill and pay all costs involved in making good paving, curbs and all other surfaces restorations. .20 Excavated materials shall be piled, stored and/or disposed of as follows: .21 During the progress of the contract, in such places and in such a manner that a minimum of damage or disfigurement of existing ground will result. ' .22 On completion of work, dump all excavated material on site where dedicated by the Consultant. The site shall be clear and unencumbered to the Consultant's satisfaction. 3.28 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT BANK .1 Provide underground concrete encased duct banks for cables indicated. Concrete work , as detailed herein shall be provided by this Section. Trenching and backfilling shall be done by this Section. .2 Duct banks shall follow general route shown on the drawings and shall terminate at specified locations. Exact location of ductbanks and terminating points shall be verified on the site prior to commencement of work. .3 The duct bank shall consist of paralleled ducts encased in concrete. The number and arrangement of ducts shall be as shown on the drawings. .4 Ducts shall be C.S.A. certified rigid PVC for concrete encasement, with an internal r diameter of 100mm minimum unless otherwise shown on the drawings. .5 Bends shall generally be as factory supplied of approved radius. Radius of such bends ' shall not be less than standard for the 100mm duct(1 m). .6 The duct lengths shall be joined together with an approved coupling to provide a sound joint. Adjacent couplings shall be staggered by at least eight 200mm. Joint solvent shall be used to seal the couplings. .7 Where trench is dry and firm, no bed shall be required; where trench is wet, supply , and install a 150mm layer of crushed stone in the bottom. No concrete shall be poured in trenches containing water. .8 The ducts shall be laid with a minimum spacing of six 150mm centre to centre, both horizontally and vertically for 100mm ducts; for larger ducts spacing shall be increased correspondingly. Spacers shall be installed on 3m centres and within 600mm of each , coupling used. Spacers shall be specially formed plastic. Wood spacers shall not be used. .9 The ducts shall be on even grade sloped not less than 1 in 400 in direction indicated on the drawings. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 34 .10 The top surface of the concrete encasement shall be a minimum of 750mm below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated on the drawing. 1 .11 No ferrous metal shall be installed between primary cable ducts. Re-enforcing shall be installed only near bottom of duct unless specifically indicated otherwise or required by local hydro supply authority. .12 Where the duct bank is constructed over recent fill or unstable ground or passes through walls or footings or under driveways or parking lots, the concrete shall be reinforced with 15mm diameter Hi-Bond steel bars laid longitudinally at six (6) inches lateral spacing and set at 2/3 the depth of the concrete envelope below the bottom row of ducts. ' .13 All reinforcing rods used shall have a minimum length of 2m. Individual lengths of re- enforcing rods are to be overlapped by a minimum of 300mm and is to extend at least 1m onto solid ground. In all cases where the duct bank enters a building it shall be reinforced for a distance of 2.5m outside the building. Duct bank passing beneath or through building footings, under highways, streets, roads or heavily travelled driveways shall be reinforced and reinforcing shall extend a distance of 1.5m beyond in both directions. .14 The ducts shall be encased with minimum 21 mPa concrete with a minimum cover of 75mm on all sides. The concrete shall have a slump of 100mm to 150mm and be of pea gravel aggregate. .15 To prevent any displacement of the duct structure during pouring the duct structure sha11 be braced down every 3m and the concrete shall be deflected down alongside the ducts to the bottom and up through the duct assembly. .16 When crossing other utilities the concrete duct encasement shall maintain a minimum 1 of six inches vertical clearance. When running parallel'to another utility the duct bank shall be a minimum of 1.5m clear of said utility, but in no case shall it be installed in the same excavation. r .17 When completed, the ducts shall be cleaned and the ends plugged with duct plugs. The ducts shall be tested for clearance by pulling a steel wire brush and a 95mm mandrel through their complete length. .18 Ducts installed for P.U.C. cables and ducts left as spare shall have one continuous length of 10mm polypropylene rope installed in each duct to facilitate the installation of the cables in the duct. Termination points, grades and route of duct bank shall be confirmed by the P.U.C. on site. .19 Notify the Consultant at least 48 hours before concrete is poured to permit inspection of the duct installation. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 16050 - 35 .20 Assume responsibility to have the ducts inspected by the Inspection Office and P.U.C. , prior to pouring of concrete and again prior to backfilling. End of Section r DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour required for a complete and adequate installation of electrical materials as shown on the drawings and as described herein. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS , .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements and Section 16050 for details regarding shop drawing submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Cover plates. .2 Light switches. .3 Receptacles. i .4 Circuit breakers. , .5 Time switches. .6 Photo-Electric controls. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES .1 Underground junction boxes: Crouse Hinds Type EGJ-422 or EGJ-421 complete with Ozite compound or equal. , .2 Condulets, outlet boxes and fittings shall be as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds of Canada Limited, Kondu Manufacturing Company Limited, Thomas and Betts Limited, Killark of Canada Limited and Efcor of Canada Limited. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE 1 ' 1.2 INTENT 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.1 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES 1 2.2 COVERPLATES 2 2.3 LIGHT SWITCHES 2 , 2.4 RECEPTACLES 3 2.5 PILOT LIGHTS 3 2.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 4 2.7 FUSES 4 2.8 PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROLS 5 2.9 TIME SWITCHES 5 , 2.10 CONTACTORS 6 2.11 OUTLET BOXES 6 2.12 PULLBOXES, SPLITTERS, ETC. 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF EXTERIOR LIGHTS 7 3.2 TERMINAL CABINETS 8 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES, SPLITTERS, ETC. 8 3.4 OUTLET BOXES 9 3.5 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES 10 3.6 FUSES 10 3.7 RACEWAYS FOR TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 11 3.8 EMPTY CONDUITS FOR SPECIAL SYSTEMS 12 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 -2 2.2 COVER PLATES .1 Cover plates for receptacles, switches, pilot lights, telephone outlets, T.V. outlets and other devices requiring cover plates for flush mounted boxes shall be: .1 stainless steel with Type 301 brushed finish .2 plate shall be protected by adhesive plastic film which shall be removed after painting. .2 Weatherproof cover plates shall be diecast corrosion resistant PVC type with two separate lids for duplex receptacles suitable for mounting on F.S. type boxes. All weatherproof cover plates shall have rubber or neoprene gaskets between cover and box. .3 Plates for surface mounted cast boxes shall be galvanized formed steel type. .4 Cover plates for other flush mounted equipment shall be supplied of quality and performance specified by the manufacturer of the equipment. .5 Cover plates shall not carry manufacturer's name. i .6 Coverplates of quality specified shall be Bryant or approved equal. Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. .7 Cover plates for receptacles other than 15 amps and 120 volt shall have the amperage and voltage engraved into the plate and filled with black paint. .8 Cover plate for individual telephone outlets shall be brushed stainless steel to match those specified in Cover Plate article in this Section. 2.3 LIGHT SWITCHES .1 Switches shall be unless otherwise indicated Bryant quiet type with ivory handles as follows: ' .1 Heavy Duty Grade 15A 20A Key15A Key20A Single Pole 120V 4801 4901 4801 L 4901 L Double Pole 120V 4802 4902 4802L 4902L 3-Way 120V 4803 4903 4803L 4903L 4-Way 120V 4804 4904 4804L 4904L DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 3 .2 Heavy Duty Grade 15A 20A Single Pole 347V 6801 6901 Double Pole 347V 6802 6902 3-Way 347V 6803 6903 4-Way 347V 6804 6904 .2 Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. 2.4 RECEPTACLES .1 Receptacles shall be, unless otherwise indicated, U ground type, ivory, screw terminal type. .2 Catalogue numbers listed are Bryant. Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. .3 Receptacles where shown on the drawings shall be as follows: .1 Specification Grade - 15A 125V duplex 5262 ' 15A 125V duplex (emergency) 5262RED 15A 250V single 5661 20A 125V single 5391 20A 250V single 6391 15A 125V duplex ground fault GFR52FT 30A 125/250V 3 pole 4 wire 9430FR 50A 125/250V 3 pole 4 wire 9450PR 2.5 PILOT LIGHTS .1 Neon type, red plastic jewel for switch plate opening shall be Bryant 48071-R. .2 Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. 2.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES .1 Disconnect switches shall have ample gutter space for top or bottom wiring and shall have fully visible blades when in the "off' position with cover open. Disconnect switches shall have a quick-make, quick-break mechanism and shall be horsepower rated. , DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 -4 .2 Disconnect switches shall have a mechanism by which their covers are interlocked with the handle to prevent opening when in the "on" position, but which can be defeated by means of a screwdriver or similar tool. Disconnect switches shall have pad locking provisions. .3 Disconnect switches shall be equipped with suitable fuse clips to take fuses specified. .4 Fuse clips shall have appropriate rejection feature where HRC fuses are specified. .5 Flush mounted unfused disconnect switches shall have flush mounting trim and door and front operated rotary type handle. .6 Disconnect switches shall be Federal Pioneer, Square D, Westinghouse, Commander or Siemens Electric. 2.7 FUSES 1 Fuses shall be CSA certified HRCI-J for ratings 1 to 600 amperes or HRC-L for ratings 601 to 6000 amperes. Ratings as shown. .2 Fuses for motor and transformer circuits rated 1 to 600 amperes shall be CSA certified ' HRCI-J Time Delay. .3 For overcurrent protection of motor circuits, Time Delay fuses shall be rated up to 150% of motor full-load current unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 1 Bussman LPJ-SP or Gould equal. .4 Each fusible device provided with HRC fuses in compliance with the above requirements shall be provided with a suitable warning label on the inside cover specifying that HRC type fuses only shall be used on that device. .5 Fuses for special devices shall be as specified in corresponding article. .6 Provide one complete set of spare fuses identified and tagged for each type and rating ' of fuses installed. .7 Provide a fuse cabinet large enough to accommodate all spare fuses supplied. Mount cabinet in Main Electrical Room. t DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 5 2.8 PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROLS .1 Photo-electric controls shall be weatherproof temperature compensated and shock and vibration resistant. The electric cell shall be screened against ultraviolet rays. .2 "On" and "off' action shall be adjustable from 20 to 500 Lux. Switch shall have a minimum of 5-second delay to prevent false switching due to temporary flashes of light. , .3 Should any part of the photo-electric control fail to operate, the switch shall be in the "on" (fail-safe) position. .4 Photo-electric control shall be suitable for mounting on a flush mounted cast outlet box , cover plate and shall have a swivel mount. .5 Photo-electric control shall be Tork Cat. #2100 or approved equal. 2.9 TIME SWITCHES .1 Time switches shall have Standard dial day omitting device and reserve power feature, Tork Cat. #67000 or equal. .2 "On" and "off' operation shall be adjustable in one-half hour increments. ' .3 The time switch shall be powered by a self-starting synchronous motor. Time switch contacts shall be 40 amps T-rated at 120 volts and shall have number of poles shown on the drawing, or otherwise required. .4 Time switches controlling mechanically held contactors shall be single pole double ' throw 120 volt 40 amps. .5 Enclosure shall be EEMAC-1 surface mounting type unless noted otherwise. .6 Flush mounted time switches shall have hinged door and lock. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 -6 ! ! 2.10 CONTACTORS .1 Contactors shall be electro-magnetically operated, mechanically held. The contactors sizes 0 to 5 shall be of the vertical action design, employing double break silver alloy ! contacts. Contacts controlling lighting load shall be rated to take 100% tungsten filament load and 80% continuous non-inductive heating load without enclosure. Enclosure shall be EEMAC-1 and of sufficient size as not to derate the device to less than 90% of the continuous open nominal current rating. Each contactor shall be capable of carrying continually without overheating the load specified on the drawing. If necessary,the next higher rated contactor shall be supplied. ! .2 Contactors shall be provided with shading coils imbedded in the magnet frame to reduce the a/c hum to a minimum. ' .3 Contactors shall have 120 volt control coils and control circuit fuse holder and fuse. Contactors controlling 208, 440, 347 or 600 volt loads shall have integral control circuit transformer. .4 Mechanically held contactors controlled by maintained contact pilot devices shall have coil clearing contacts. .5 Electrically operated contactors shall have an "on-off-auto" selector switch in the cover except that heating load contactors shall have "auto-off' selector switches. .6 Mechanically held contactors shall have momentary contact on-off push buttons in cover. .7 Lighting contactors shall be Square D Class 8903. Other contactors shall be Square D Class 8502. Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. .8 Remote pushbuttons shall be flush mounted in brushed stainless steel cover plate. ! .9 Cover plate shall match cover plates specified elsewhere in the specifications. Square D Class 9001 type BB-9 or equal. ' 2.11 OUTLET BOXES .1 Outlet boxes shall be electro-galvanized and made of code gauge steel. Boxes shall be of size and type suitable for the particular location and application. .2 Unless otherwise specified, receptacles and switch boxes shall be sectional where recessed and formed steel, solid type boxes where surface mounted. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 7 .3 100mm square boxes with single gang plaster ring or extension ring shall be used for single devices where necessary to accommodate wiring and conduit entries. .4 Outlet boxes for ceiling and wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be 100mm octagon. Outlet boxes for recessed fixtures shall be 100mm octagon or 100mm square of depth as required by code. Where special outlets are required for wall mounted fixtures or to accommodate non-standard wall construction, these shall be used. .5 Where more than one switch is shown on plan, a multigang box shall be used. .6 Outlet boxes for grouped outlets such as TV and receptacles, telephone and receptacles shall be solid gang type with barriers to separate the various systems and shall be Westinghouse type GSB with GBC plaster covers. .7 Outlet boxes for the various systems shall be as specified in their respective Sections ' of this Specification, and as required by manufacturer of the system. .8 Wiring devices located on prefabricated partitions shall be mounted in boxes supplied by the partition manufacturer. ' .9 Outlet boxes for 347 volt light switches shall be Westinghouse MBD-I-HV, or MBS-1-HV single or multi- gang as required. 2.12 PULLBOXES, SPLITTERS, ETC. .1 Boxes and splitters shall be as manufactured by Pursley or approved equal, and shall ' be constructed of Code gauge steel with equipment grey enamel paint finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF EXTERIOR LIGHTS .1 Contactors, photo-electric controls and time switches shall be used to control the exterior lights and signs. .2 If the photocell is not indicated on the Drawings, obtain the location from the , Consultant. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 8 .3 The photo-electric cell shall be wired so as to control a magnetic contactor and shall ' cause the magnetic contactor to close at dusk and open at dawn for all-night items such as security lights. For each group of other items, a time switch shall shut off the appropriate contactor at the designated hours. Obtain designated hours from the owner. Each contactor shall have an "On-Off-Auto" switch to permit manual operation of the individual contactor. .4 Where exterior lights are fed from a number of panels, a number of contactors shall be provided to accomplish the above stated operation. .5 Control circuit of contactor shall be taken through a control transformer from line side of contactor through a control circuit fuse mounted within the contactor enclosure. .6 Contactors shall have lamacoid nameplates indicating that control circuit is supplied ' from a different source. 3.2 TERMINAL CABINETS .1 Provide terminal cabinets in all locations shown, and where required. Surface cabinets shall be type T. Flush mounting cabinets shall have recessed trim. Terminal cabinets shall be complete with screw type terminal strips (one for each conductor), Terminal ' cabinets for T.V. do not require terminal strips. Each conductor shall be identified with E-Z Code Marker tape. .2 Minimum size of terminal cabinet unless otherwise shown shall be 300m x 350mm x 100mm. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES, SPUTTERS, ETC. .1 Wherever necessary for proper installation of anchoring of cables, whether shown on the drawings or not, pullboxes, junction boxes or cable anchor boxes shall be installed. ' .2 Pullboxes, junction boxes, cable anchor boxes, splitter boxes, splitter troughs, etc., shall be suitable for the application and location in which they are used. Where joints are made inside any of the above boxes these shall be equipped with terminal blocks with screw terminals for each wire. .3 Flush mounted pullboxes, etc., shall have screw-on covers and a 20mm overlap on all sides and shall be prime coated for painting. Location of all flush mounted pullboxes in finished areas must be approved by the Consultant prior to installation. ' .4 Splitter boxes shall have hinged covers equipped with sealing hasps. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 ' SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 9 .5 Boxes shall be located so as to be accessible after the building is completed. Supply ' access panels where required to make boxes accessible. .6 Each wire in pullboxes and junction boxes shall have wire ends colour coded and/or marked with E-Z Code Marker tape. 3.4 OUTLET BOXES .1 Outlet boxes recessed in exposed concrete block or masonry walls shall be saw-cut into the upper or lower edge of the block at the appropriate course of block or file closest to the specified mounting height. Uniform mounting heights shall be maintained throughout the project. Opening shall be of minimum size required to fit the outlet box, and sufficiently small that the outlet box cover plate will conceal the cut. Outlet boxes on exterior wall shall be provided with vapour barrier. .2 Outlet boxes for exterior or weatherproof receptacles and switches shall be cast F.S. , type with gaskets and shall be recessed, where possible, in the wall or structure. .3 Free standing weatherproof duplex receptacles (in planter boxes) outlet shall be ' supported on 50mm x 25mm x 1m channel and driven 750mm into the soil. .4 Outlets in plaster walls shall consist of 100mm square box with raised plaster cover. ' For ganged outlets use solid gang type boxes with raised plaster cover. .5 Offset outlet boxes, shown back to back in partitions, horizontally to minimize noise transmission between adjacent areas. .6 Outlet boxes for devices mounted side by side or one above the other shall be ' separated by a minimum of 25mm. .7 Outlet boxes for outlets located in poured concrete ceilings shall consist of 100mm octagonal concrete rings and covers. Outlet boxes shall be of sufficient depth to avoid ' the need of conduit offsets. Conduits shall enter box between the top and bottom reinforcing rods. .8 Outlet boxes for connection of equipment located against walls or partitions shall be 100mm square and 65mm deep, complete with metal cover. Connection from box to equipment shall be made with extension box and flexible conduit and angle connector. .9 Outlet boxes used for high and low voltage devices which are indicated to be ganged shall use multigang boxes with securely fastened metal dividers. I 1 iDIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 iSECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 10 i i .10 Ceiling outlet boxes supporting suspended incandescent chandelier type lighting fixtures shall be provided with fixture studs. .11 Wall mounted exterior fixtures, unless otherwise shown shall have their outlet boxes ' flush mounted in the wall. .12 Outlet boxes shall be supported independent of the conduit. 3.5 CONDULETS, FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES i .1 Where conduits are exposed, cast aluminum outlet boxes and condulets with suitable covers and gaskets shall be used. Conduit fittings shall be of a type suitable for their particular use. P.V.C. type outlet boxes may be used where P.V.C. conduit is used and permitted by code. .2 Condulets and outlet boxes shall have threaded hubs of size and number required for the application. Condulet covers shall be located in such a manner that the removal iand access of the covers shall be clear of any obstructions. .3 Where necessary for proper pulling or anchoring of cables, junction boxes or cable anchor boxes shall be installed. All shall be installed in such a manner that they will be i accessible after building is completed and they shall be set to come within finished surfaces of the building. i3.6 FUSES .1 Unless otherwise specified, low voltage fuses shall be HRC, CSA certified in iaccordance with Standard C22.2 No. 106, latest edition. .2 Fuses shall be so selected as to provide a fully coordinated system for both overload and short circuit fault conditions. i .3 Application of all fuses shall comply with the Canadian Electrical Code - Part I and local inspection authority regulations. i .4 Each fusible device provided with HRC fuses in compliance with the above requirements shall be provided with a suitable warning label on the inside cover specifying that HRC type fuses only shall be used on that device. ' .5 Fuses for special devices shall be as specified in corresponding article. i .6 Provide one complete set of spare fuses identified and tagged for each type and rating of fuses installed. 1 i 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 i SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 11 1 i .7 Provide a fuse cabinet large enough to accommodate all spare fuses supplied. Mount cabinet in Electrical Room. i 3.7 RACEWAYS FOR TELEPHONE .1 Supply and install completely independent empty raceway systems complete with i conduits, pullboxes, panels, outlet boxes, and coverplates, suitable for the installation of telephone cables. The complete conduit installation shall meet all Telephone Company requirements. ' .2 Unless otherwise shown, each outlet shall have a 20mm conduit run to the telephone backboard, panel or zone conduit location as applicable. ' .3 Raceways shall be rigid, galvanized steel conduit where exposed to mechanical injury. In all other locations, EMT may be used. .4 All conduit shall be fished with pull line. All blocks shall be cleared, and all outlet and i pull boxes cleaned out at the completion of the installation. .5 Unless otherwise shown, wall outlets shall be recessed flush with the wall finish. , .6 Where outlets are shown ganged with other outlets a multigang solid type box shall be i used as specified above with appropriate barriers. The telephone outlet shall occupy one gang of the multigang outlet box. The data outlet shall occupy two gangs. .7 The terminal cabinets, sized and located as shown on the Drawings shall be of i standard galvanized steel code gauge, complete with trim, door and combination lock and latch. Cabinets shall be for surface or flush mounting as shown on the Drawings and shall have recessed trim as described for Lighting panels. The cabinets shall be ' equipped with 20mm plywood backboard, painted black, and securely fastened with flat head bolts to the back of the cabinet. .8 The door opening shall be practically full size of the cabinet front. Conduit shall , terminate in cabinets with ample clearance in front of mounting board. .9 Provide plywood backboards, painted and securely fastened with flat head bolts to the wall, where indicated. .10 Provide a 120 volt power outlet on a separate circuit adjacent to each telephone ' equipment location for telephone company's step down transformer. i 1 1 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLS Page: 16100 - 12 1 .11 Unless otherwise shown, steel pullboxes shall be installed every 30m or less of straight conduit run; every 25m or less of straight conduit run and one 90 deg. bend or equivalent; every two 90 deg. bends or equivalent. .12 Minimum of space requirements in pull boxes having one conduit each in opposite ends of the box shall be at least 8 times the diameter of the largest conduit. ' .13 All conduits shall be grounded to building ground. .14 A 20mm conduit shall be run from the telephone service panel to service ground to provide a ground for the telephone service. 1 3.8 EMPTY CONDUITS FOR SPECIAL SYSTEMS 1 .1 Supply and install a complete system of empty conduits, boxes and panels for the enclosure of wiring for systems specified. .2 All conduits shall be specified in 'Basic Electrical Methods". Conduits shall be cleared ' and cleaned and all outlets and pullboxes cleaned out at the completion of the installation. All conduit shall be left with a pull line installed from outlet to outlet fastened at each box. ' .3 Conduit bends shall have a bending radii of not less than ten times the conduit diameter. Conduit shall be reamed out and all ends identified. ' .4 All conduits shall be grounded to building ground. .5 Additional steel pullboxes shall be installed where necessary, so that throughout the ' entire system, there shall be not more than two 90 degree or equivalent bends in each run so that wire or cables may be pulled in or withdrawn with reasonable ease. 1 End of Section i 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - i PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 REFERENCE 1 1.2 INTENT 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SWITCHBOARD 1 2.2 UTILITY METERING 3 2.3 CONTROL WIRING 3 2.4 GROUND FAULT RELAYS 3 2.5 MOULDED CASE DISTRIBUTION BREAKERS 4 2.6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 4 ' 2.7 LIGHTING PANELS 5 2.8 POWER PANELS 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRIC SERVICE 7 3.2 METERING CABINETS 8 ' 3.3 CALIBRATION AND TESTING 8 3.4 RE-TORQUING 8 3.5 EMPTY CONDUITS AT PANEL & TERMINAL CABINET 9 ' 3.6 CO-ORDINATION STUDY 9 3.7 COMMISSIONING 9 3.8 EQUIPMENT SPRINKLER PROTECTION 10 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour required for a complete and adequate ' service and distribution system as shown on the drawings and as described herein. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for details regarding shop drawing submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Main Switchboard. , .2 Power Panels. .3 Lighting Panels. , .4 Transformers. , .5 Circuit breakers. .6 Ground Fault Relays. ' .7 Unfused Isolation Switches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SWITCHBOARD .1 Switchboard shall be as shown on the drawings and as specified. Switchboard shall , conform to all applicable CSA and EEMAC standards and shall be suitable for use on a 600/347 Volt grounded wye system with a short circuit capacity of 30,000 Amperes R.M.S symmetrical. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 2 .2 Switchboard shall be totally steel enclosed, with required overhangs, ventilation louvres; drip pans and barriers to protect the entire switchboard against damage from fire protection sprinkler head water flow. The switchboard shall be dead front, freestanding, mounted on 100mm x 40mm high full length channels at front and rear. Switchboards shall be mounted on a 100mm concrete base. .3 Each section shall contain a full length ground bus linking and bonding together all sections and provision for connecting to the electrical room ground. .4 The ground bus shall have a momentary rating equal to or greater than that of the apparatus in the assembly and in no case shall the cross section area of the ground bus be less than 6 x 50mm. .5 All welded joints shall be ground flush with the surface of the base metals. Each section to have full height and depth metal barriers and insulated bus through each section shall be provided. Special tools required for the operation and maintenance of equipment shall be supplied. .6 The interior and exterior of cubicles to be factory finished with rust resistant primer coat and two coats of light grey ASA 61 semi-gloss enamel. One extra litre of paint shall be supplied. .7 Lamacoid nameplates of 50mm x 75mm shall be provided on front and back doors of each section for identification purposes, showing section number, name, rating and size of feeders. All secondary breakers shall be provided with similar nameplates mounted above operating handles showing load supplied and breaker trip rating. All moulded case breakers shall have 25mm x 100mm lamacoid nameplates identifying each unit and breaker as to connected load. .8 The switchboard shall be constructed to prevent twisting and moving during shipping and installation. .9 Complete switchboard shall be rodent-proof with maximum screen openings of 6mm. .10 Switchboard shall be manufactured in sections of suitable size as required to permit passage through corridors, door openings, etc. All sections of switchboard shall be approximately 2400mm high. All sections shall be interconnected with buswork and bolted together to form a self supporting structure. .11 Switchboard or specific cubicles of switchboard shall be made front accessible where back access is obstructed by walls, columns, future equipment, etc. Access to current transformers, etc. shall be by means of separate formed hinged doors at front and side where required. Provide doors over the secondary breaker sections. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 3 .12 All bus bars shall be 98% conductivity copper, silver plated at the joints for maximum conductivity. All bus joint hardware shall be anti-corrosive. 2.2 UTILITY METERING .1 The switchboard shall be constructed to include for each section, current transformers, ' and potential transformers which shall be built into the board by the switchboard manufacturer. The switchboard drawings must be approved by the Consultant before fabrication. Door over C.T. compartment shall be hinged with provision for sealing and padlocking. 2.3 CONTROL WIRING ' .1 Switchboard shall be complete with all necessary control wiring and devices. Control circuits shall be protected by HRC fuses suitably located in an accessible space at the supply bus. 2.4 GROUND FAULT RELAYS .1 Ground fault relays shall control breakers or switches indicated. Ground fault relays shall be solid state flush mounted draw out, indicating type with required sensors and transformers and may be integral with the switchgear controller. Relays shall be field adjustable for both current and time. Breakers or switches activated by ground fault relays shall be equipped with required shunt trips and HRC fused control circuits and transformers. .2 Main breaker shall be equipped with ground fault relay, ground strap current transformer installed between the switchboard neutral bus and the ground bus, control transformer and fuses. .3 Coordination curves shall be prepared and submitted to the Consultant for approval immediately after award of contract. , .4 Main breaker and secondary breakers indicated shall be equipped with single phasing and low voltage protection relays. .5 Ground fault equipment shall be Federal Pioneer or approved equal. Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 -4 i 2.5 MOULDED CASE DISTRIBUTION BREAKERS .1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall have number of poles, frame size and trip setting indicated and unless otherwise shown shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 22,000 amps. RMS symmetrical. Breakers indicated as "Spare" shall be complete with breaker of frame and with trip setting indicated. Breakers indicated as "Space" shall have all required bus work and mounting brackets installed except for hardware which normally is supplied with the breaker. 2.6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ' .1 Dry type distribution transformers shall be indoor air cooled type rated three phase 60 hertz, of KVA rating shown on the drawings,600-208Y/120 volts, 1.2 KV class, and capable of withstanding a IOKV basic impulse level (BIL). They shall have standard primary taps and copper or aluminum windings. The transformer shall be designed with a Class H insulation system with maximum design temperature rise of 150°C. .2 The sound level in decibels shall be in accordance with NEMA TRI current standards. The transformer shall be equipped with terminal boards, primary tap changing links, suitable solderless connectors and shall have a ventilated code gauge steel enclosure complete with removable metal side panels and mounting brackets for floor or wall tmounting as shown. .3 The completed assembly shall be painted with a primer coat and a finish coat of ASA #61 grey. The transformer shall conform to GSA-C9, NEMA TRI and EEMAC L2 current standards except where noted and shall be approved to CSA code part 2 specification C22.2 No. 47 where applicable. .4 Floor mounted transformers shall have Vibro-Acoustic vibration isolators installed between case and floor. .5 Wail mounted transformers shall have wall mounting angle iron platforms with appropriate vibration isolating hangers and/or brackets. ' .6 Dry type transformers shall have metal drip pans, overhangs,louvres, etc. as required to protect them against fire protection sprinkler water flow. .7 Transformers shall be CSA type ANN and shall be as manufactured by Federal Pioneer or approved equal. i l 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 5 2.7 LIGHTING PANELS .1 Lighting panels shall be breaker type and shall contain number of branch circuit breakers shown on the drawings. .2 Panels shall be flush mounted except in electrical and mechanical service rooms and closets where they shall be surface mounted. .3 Panels shall have lugs suitable for the number, type and size of conductors feeding the panel. .4 Minimum size of mains shall be governed by size of breaker protecting the panel. .5 Panels shall be constructed of code gauge steel with hinged door and combination latch and key lock. Locks shall be common to one key and each panel shall be equipped with two keys. .6 Panel trim shall be fully adjustable, and shall be attached to the panel with concealed screws. .7 Panels shall have plain door trim with no advertising or impression of any type. Surface mounting panel trim shall be finished in baked grey enamel paint. Flush mounting panel trim shall have exterior surface prime coated for painting and interior surface shall have baked grey enamel paint finish. .8 Panel tubs for both flush and surface mounted panels shall have the interior and exterior surfaces finished in baked grey enamel. .9 Each panel in addition to required number of breakers shall have a minimum of 20% of spare breakers. .10 Panel bus bars shall be copper. ' .11 All breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, toggle type, with definite trip position and with line terminals bolted to the panel bus. Breakers shall be complete with , thermal-magnetic trips sized as shown, and shall have ambient temperature compensation. .12 Two pole and three pole breakers shall have common trip; tie handles will not be accepted. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 6 .13 "Duplex, 13mm or"Twin" breakers will not be accepted. .14 Filler plates over unused breaker spaces shall fit tightly into the panel interior face plate. .15 Unless otherwise noted, panels shall be for 120/208V, 3 phase, 4wire operation. ' .16 Handle locking devices shall be provided on all panel breakers feeding night lights, sign outlets, mechanical equipment, controls,intercommunication and signal circuits, exit and stair lights, time switches, signs, etc. .17 Circuit loads shall be balanced across phases as closely as possible. .18 Complete typewritten legend shall be provided on the inside of the door of each panel ' mounted in a metal frame and covered with transparent plastic. .19 Circuit breakers feeding weatherproof receptacles shall be ground fault interrupter type. .20 Circuit breakers feeding unswitched lighting circuits shall be"Switching Duty" SWD type. .22 Lighting panels and breakers shall be as manufactured by Federal Pioneer or approved equal. 2.8 POWER PANELS .1 Power panels shall contain circuit breakers. .2 Panels shall be surface or flush type as indicated on the drawings. .3 Switches or breakers feeding power panels which supply mainly motor loads shall be equipped with single phasing protection. .4 Panels shall have lugs suitable for type, number and size of feeders shown. Minimum size of mains shall be governed by size of breaker or fused section protecting the panel. .5 Each panel shall have number of breakers of size and frame indicated. .6 Minimum interrupting capacity of breakers shall be as indicated on the drawings. Where this is not shown or specified rating shall be sufficient to interrupt and/or withstand the available fault current at that point in the electrical system. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 7 .7 Each breaker shall have a lamacoid nameplate attached with contact cement or screws. Nameplate shall carry name of equipment or panel served by this breaker or unit. .8 Breakers indicated as "Space only" shall have all required bus work and mounting brackets installed at this time except for hardware and bus links which normally are supplied as part of the"unit kits". .9 Breakers designated as "Spare" shall be complete with breaker. Each panel in addition ' to required number of breakers or units shall have a minimum of 20% of spare breakers or fusible units. .10 Circuit breakers shall have ampacity and frame size shown on the drawings. Breakers shall have definite off and trip positions with provisions for padlocking. Breakers shall be bolted to the buses and 2 or 3 pole breakers shall have common trips. ' .11 Flush mounting panel boards shall have doors with concealed hinges and combination latch and key lock. Panel trim and door shall have no markings, and shall be fully adjustable and attached to the panel with concealed screws. .12 Free standing panel boards and surface mounted panels unless otherwise specified shall have full length doors. , .13 Panel bus work shall be copper, adequately braced to withstand the available short circuit capacity of system or short circuit specified. .14 Power panels shall be manufactured by Federal Pioneer or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRIC SERVICE .1 The Main service switch, meter box and other service equipment shall be sized as , shown on the Drawings but the final arrangement shall be satisfactory to the local P.U.C. All clearances and height of equipment shall conform to the local P.U.C. and Electrical Code regulations. .2 Service conduits and cables entering building below grade shall be provided with a watertight seal to prevent the entrance of moisture into building. Underground conduits or ducts shall be drained in accordance with regulations and as directed by the local inspector. ' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 8 .3 All grounding of service, equipment, feeders, etc., is to be done in accordance with electrical code regulations and the local P.U.C. requirements. .4 The neutral conductor of the wiring system together with the conduits system and service equipment shall be bonded to the water service as near as practical to the service entrance. ' .5 Before proceeding with the installation of the main service equipment, submit the required number of Drawings to the P.U.C. for their approval and record. .6 Supply and install ducts with concrete envelope for the cables as shown on the Drawings. .7 Ducts and concrete envelope shall be installed in accordance with the P.U.C. requirements and ducts and trench shall be inspected by the Electrical Inspector prior to pouring of concrete. .8 The ducts shall be 100mm inside diameter, PVC type. Where ducts run over excavated areas, they shall be steel reinforced with 15mm rods. .9 Drive 4 ground rods in the transformer vault and connect the ground rods with #3/0 bare copper ground wire. Run a #3/0 copper ground conductor from the main water service to this grounding loop. 3.2 METERING CABINETS .1 The Cabinet shall be mounted on the wall as shown on the drawings and to the satisfaction of the local P.U.C. 3.3 CALIBRATION AND TESTING .1 Manufacturer shall provide a written report describing the calibration test results. All costs of this work shall be included in this Division. 3.4 RE-TORQUING .1 After installation is complete, for switchboard and service entrance board. Retorque all bolted connections. t DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 ' SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 9 3.5 EMPTY CONDUITS AT PANELS & TERMINAL CABINET .1 All flush mounted lighting panels shall be provided with two 25mm empty conduits from the panel to the ceiling space above and, where applicable, one to the ceiling space below the panel and terminated in a suitable pull box in the nearest accessible space for future branch circuit conductors. .2 All flush mounted telephone and power panels shall be provided with one 50mm empty , conduit terminated in accessible ceiling spaces as described above. .3 All flush mounted terminal cabinets such as P.A., T.V. antenna, Fire Alarm, etc. shall be provided with one 20mm empty conduit terminated in accessible ceiling spaces as , described above. 3.6 CO-ORDINATION STUDY .1 Provide a co-ordination study for the distribution system. Include time-current graphs showing opening curves of all appropriate breakers and fuses and inrush current and damage curves of transformers. .2 Ground fault protection curves shall be included. .3 Indicate clearly curves for any downstream devices which do not co-ordinate with the appropriate upstream devices. .4 Co-ordination study shall be carried out by equipment manufacturer or independent electrical power system engineering analysis and field testing group. 3.7 COMMISSIONING .1 Commissioning costs shall be included and paid for by this Division. .2 Commissioning shall be conducted by an independent electrical power system engineer and technical field specialists such as G.T. Wood or Rondar. .3 Commissioning tests shall include the following equipment,transformers, switchboards, power panels and shall generally include the following: .1 Testing of all overcurrent devices, short circuit device and all protective relays. .2 Setting of all relays in accordance with coordination and fault current analysis. .3 Phase rotation identification. t DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97333 SECTION 16400 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Page: 16400 - 10 t .4 Checking of all terminations. 1 .5 Application of dummy loads and load testing. ' .6 Infrared testing of all joints. .7 Testing of protective and indicating instruments. r3.8 EQUIPMENT SPRINKLER PROTECTION .1 Electrical equipment located in area with fire protection sprinklers shall be provided with suitable protection against waterflow from sprinkler heads. This protection shall be of a type acceptable to the local Hydro Inspection Department. End of Section I DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE 1 1.2 INTENT 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1 1.4 BALLAST AND LAMP WARRANTY 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMPS 1 ' 2.2 BALLASTS 3 2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES 4 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of ' this Section. 1.2 INTENT 1 Supply and install all electrical interior and exterior lighting fixtures, luminaires, lighting standards, bases and all required accessories as indicated on the drawings by letter type or number and as hereinafter specified. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for details regarding shop drawing ' submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for each lighting fixture type. 1.4 BALLAST AND LAMP WARRANTY .1 Replace and install without extra cost to the Owner, all defective or noisy , ballasts for a period of one year and any incandescent lamp which fails within 30 days of takeover, and any fluorescent and H.I.D. lamps which fail within 90 ' days of takeover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMPS .1 Lamp ordering codes refer to Philips Lighting product. Refer to Supplementary Bid form for acceptable alternate manufacturer. .1 Incandescent .1 Unless otherwise noted, all incandescent lamps shall be standard service medium screw base, 130 volt, 1000 hours, inside frosted "A" shape. ' .2 Incandescent "PAR", "R" and "ER" lamps shall be minimum 2000 hours, 130 volt. Krypton gas filled lamps shall be minimum 4000 hours, 130 volt. ' DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - 2 .3 Incandescent decorative lamps shall be minimum 2000 hours, 120 volt, except that G30 and G40 lamps shall be minimum 4000 hours, 120 volt. .2 Halogen .1 Unless otherwise noted all line voltage halogen lamps shall be rated 2000 hours, 120 Volt. Reflectorized lamp distribution shall be as noted. .2 All low voltage halogen lamps, unless otherwise noted shall be rated 3000 hours, 12 volt, and shall be MR16 dichoric reflector type (in enclosed fixtures only), or ALR aluminum reflector type, as specified. ' .3 Tubular Fluorescent ' .1 Straight 1219mm lamps shall be rapid start, rated not less than 20,000 hours, 3050 lumens, F32T8/TL835. .2 914mm lamps shall be rapid start, rated not less than 20,000 hours, 2250 lumens, F25T8/TL835. .3 610mm lamps shall be rapid start rated not less than 20,000 ' hours, 1400 lumens, F17T8/TL835. .4 1219 mm "U" shape lamps shall be rapid start, rated at not less than 20,000 hours, 2650 lumens, FB31T8/TL835 .4 Compact Fluorescent .1 Short compact fluorescent lamps (PL-S) shall be 7W, 9W or 13W, 3500°K, G23 or GX23 base, 10,000 hours, 400, 600 or 900 lumens output respectively; PL-S7W/35, PL-S9W/35 or PL- ' S 13W/35. .2 Cluster compact fluoresent lamps (PL-C) for use with electromagnetic ballasts shall be 13W, 18W or 26W, 3500°K, 1 GX23-2, G24d-2 or G24d-3 base, 10,000 hours, 860, 1250 or 1800 lumens output respectively, PL-C13W/35/USA, PL-C 18W/35, or PL-C26W/35. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO, 97309 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - 3 .3 Cluster compact fluorescent lamps (PL-C) for use with rapid ' start electronic or dimming ballasts shall be 26W, 3500°K, G24q-3 base, 10,000 hours, 1800 lumens output, PL-C26W/35/4P. .4 Long compact fluorescent lamps (PL-L) shall be 38W, 3500°K, ' 2G11 base, 20,000 hours, 3150 lumens output, PL- L40W/35/RS. , .5 H.I.D. 1 Metal Halide lamps shall be minimum CRI of 65, for general applications and minimum CRI of 80 in merchandising and special applications as noted. Minimum lamp life shall be 5000 hours for 70W, 20,000 hours for 400W, 12,000 hours for , 1000W and 10,000 hours for all other sizes. .2 All lamps shall be as manufactured by Philips Lighting or , approved equal. Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. 2.2 BALLASTS .1 Each fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) fixture shall be equipped with ballasts as herein specified. ' .2 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start, high power factor (0.95 or better), electronic integrally thermal overload protected, class "A" sound rated, manufactured in accordance with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Standards. Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be 15% or less. Ballast factor shall be minimum .85 and Crest Factor shall be maximum 1.5. Four lamp ballasts shall not be used. Ballasts shall be Philips Mark V or approved equal. Dimming ballasts shall be as specified in the Fixture Schedule. .3 Ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps shall be as follows: , .1 for 2-pin PL-S and PL-C lamps, 1-lamp, preheat, high power factor, Class "A" sound rated. .2 for 4-pin PL-C lamps, 2-lamp electronic, high power factor, Class "A" ' sound rated. i i DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - 4 .3 for PL-L lamps, 1 or 2 lamp, high power factor, electronic, Class "A' sound rated. .4 Ballasts for H.I.D. lamps shall be 1-lamp constant wattage regulator high power factor type, manufactured to Certified Ballast Manufacturers Standards. Ballsts shall be premium quality encapsulated core and coils, non-PCB capacitor and ignitor. Minimum ballast starting temperature shall be -30°C, for Metal Halide. .5 Ballasts for double-ended (HQI) metal halide lamps and high CRI (white SON) H.P.S. lamps shall be high power factor, electronic only. .6 All ballasts causing objectionable noise shall be replaced with new replacement ballast to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Long range lamp ignitors shall be selected for remotely ballasted fixtures. .7 Ballasts for compact fluorescent and H.I.D. fixtures shall be Advance or approved equal. Refer to Supplementary Bid Form for acceptable alternates. i2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES .1 The flame spread and smoke development rate of fixture lenses shall not exceed those permitted by the Ontario Building Code. .2 Unless otherwise specified, all fluorescent fixtures shall have baked white 1 enamel finish. .3 Unless otherwise indicated steel poles shall have polyester powder finish of colour designated by Consultant. .4 Metal halide fixtures shall be equipped with tempered glass lenses or polycarbonate lenses. Catalogue numbers listed and fixture description may or may not specifically state this requirement, but all metal halide fixtures supplied shall be equipped with protective lenses, regardless of lamp size and lamp manufacturer. ( PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES .1 Fixtures shall have C.S.A. labels and shall be complete with lamps, ballasts, and all necessary accessories for their hanging and mounting. Fixtures shall be 1 installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. i DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - 5 e .2 Unless otherwise indicated support all lighting fixtures, including those mounted in suspended ceilings, directly from the building structure. .3 Fluorescent and HID fixtures installed in inverted T bar ceilings may be supported by the ceiling provided the ceiling support system is designed to carry the weight of the fixtures, however each fixture shall be equipped with secondary security supports. .4 Provide all necessary supports and hangers prior to the installation of the ceilings. All supports or hangers shall be of a non-combustible nature. Provide metal channels or similar supports as required. .5 Recessed fixtures shall have trim designed to fit into ceiling types used. Before ordering fixtures check ceiling types used in all areas on the latest Architectural Drawings. Assume full responsibility to supply fixtures with appropriate trims. ' .6 Fixtures delivered to site shall be stored in clean, dry and protected areas until required for installation. .7 Supply plaster frames and rings for all fixtures recessed in non-removable ceilings (i.e. plaster, drywall, wood, sheet metal, etc.). Hand these to the appropriate trade for installation. Supervise the installation to ensure correct , mounting and spacing. .8 Co-ordinate the installation of lighting fixtures with all Trades to provide spacing intended. i .9 Fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the reflected ceiling layouts with due consideration for mechanical diffusers, bulkheads, sprinkler heads, and , other obstructions. Check Mechanical and Architectural drawings before roughing in to avoid any possible conflict. Ensure that suspended fixture outlet boxes are positioned accurately with respect to supension points. .10 All fixtures shall be installed accurately, in line and level. Fixtures shown in continuous rows or broken lines shall be fully aligned so that all rows appear as straight lines. Crooked lines or misplaced fixtures will not be accepted and such poor workmanship shall be corrected at no extra cost to the Owner. .11 Fixtures installed in continuous rows shall be suitable for such mounting with required joiners and clips as may be necessary for a proper installation and alignment and shall have dimensions required to fit into ceiling modules designated. 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - 6 .12 Fixture studs or other equally secure methods of attachment shall be used throughout. .13 Where fixtures are hung on chain hangers, the chain shall be of closed link type capable of supporting ten times the fixture weight. .14 Unless otherwise specified suspended industrial fluorescent fixtures shall be mounted on chain at height indicated. .15 Recessed, surface mounted, or suspended lighting fixtures of weights in excess of standard units shall be suitably supported from the structure independent of the ceiling suspension system. .16 Suspended industrial incandescent and H.I.D. fixtures unless otherwise noted shall have 13mm rigid conduit stem hangers with ball aligners, length of hangers shall be as required to provide fixture mounting height specified. Hangers and ball aligners shall be painted aluminum colour. ' .17 Recessed or semi-recessed incandescent and H.I.D. fixtures shall be wired with 1.2m of wire in flexible steel conduit to adjacent outlet boxes placed above the finished ceiling, within reach of the fixture hole. .18 Exterior wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be mounted on recessed boxes except where fixtures with integral outlet boxes are specified in which case the recessed outlet box is not required. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored to the wall. .19 Outdoor area lights shall be positioned and aimed after dark as directed by the Consultant. .20 Unless otherwise indicated supply and install concrete bases for lighting standards. Concrete bases shall be trowel finished with all exposed corners bevelled at 45 degrees. Junction boxes shall be carefully set and anchored to ensure flush fit of junction box cover. Concrete bases shall be constructed of 20MPa concrete air entrained and steel reinforced as shown on Drawings. ' .21 Where suspended commercial type fixtures are mounted on surface-mounted outlet boxes, deep fixture canopies shall be used. .22 Provide two loose chain supports for each recessed and surface mounted H.I.D. and fluorescent fixture and attach to the structural members of the ' building as secondary security support. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING Page: 16500 - 7 .23 Fixtures shall be properly cleaned and left clean and dust free. Any fixture showing marks or scratches due to handling or toolmarks shall be replaced. .24 Where luminaires are surface mounted on inverted Teebar ceilings, they shall be supported directly from the building structure. Where this is not possible due to presence of mechanical ducts or other obstruction, supply and install galvanized steel channel, Unistrut or equal, above the ceiling, securely attached to the structure and not from the suspension system for the ceiling, and fasten the luminaires to the channel with clamping nut, bolt, flat washers and lock washer, to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Provide bolts at least every 1.2m length of fixture (i.e. 3 bolts for 2.4m fixture). End of Section r DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICALPROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16505 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM Page: 16505 - i PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 r 1 r i r r r r r r r r r DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 16505 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM Page: 16505 - 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16050 forms an integral part of this , Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Supply and install all equipment and accessories for a complete emergency lighting i system as described herein. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for details regarding shop drawing submission. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the complete emergency lighting system. 1.4 WARRANTY , .1 The complete system shall be guaranteed for a period of one year against defects in workmanship and materials from the date of acceptance. .2 The battery portion of the equipment carries a 10 year pro-rata warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 1. Central system rated at 110V do with installed battery capacity of 3500 W for 1/2 hour and to produce not less than 91% of nominal do system voltage with ac supply "off'. Complete with automatic transfer switch of rated capacity plus 25%. 2. Control panel containing: .1 Battery and charger alarm panel .2 A/C input breakers. .3 Alarm silence switch. .4 Brownout protector. , .5 Equalize LED. i 1 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16505 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM Page: 16505 - 2 .6 AC on LED. .7 Float LED. .8 Ground leakage alarm. .9 Battery charge ammeter (2% accuracy) .10 Battery voltmeter (2% accuracy). .11 AC fail alarm. 3. Enclosure: .1 Mounted in CSA type 1 freestanding enclosure with sprinkler protection, front access only. Batteries mounted in tier/step arrangement in separate cabinet. Both cabinets with hinged lockable doors. ' 4. System shall be CSA approved for use as an emergency lighting system. 5. Battery Charger: .1 Fully automatic solid state type using integrated circuit control. Output voltage variation +/- 0.5% for input variation of +/- 10%. Charger shall recharge batteries wihtin 24 hours. Include low voltage disconnect to automatically disconnect batteries when voltage falls below 87.5% of nominal. .2 Automatic equalize cycle on 28 day rotating basis to initiate equalize charging ' of batteries. 6. Batteries: .1 Sealed maintenance free lead calcium gas recombinant type. Plates shall be ' constructed of high strength material to resist shedding, flaking or mechanical failure. Design life 10 years. 7. Normally-Off Panel .1 Twelve (12) circuit 120V, 2 wire (or 3 wire 120/240V with bridged mains) 100A mains with breakers as indicated no spares. 8. Central equipment, remote heads and auxiliaries shall be by same manufacturer. 9. Acceptable manufacturers: Lumacell, Emergi-Lite, Dualite. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 16505 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM Page: 16505 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING .1 Wiring shall be installed in EMT conduits, minimum #10 AWG, maximum voltage drop ' 5%. Method of wiring shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Installation of the system shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. End of Section 1 i 1 1 I ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS , GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 1 LKM#97309 REFRIGERATION INDEX ' NO. OF PAGES 1. COVER PAGE 1 2. MECHANICAL BID 3 3. SECTION - 17050 24 4. SECTION - 17240 4 5. SECTION - 17250 5 ! 6. SECTION - 17500 6 7. SECTION 17700 17 i ! 1 i 1 ! 1 � i i 1 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - i PART1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.5 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.6 DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.7 CODES AND REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ' 1.8 CERTIFICATES AND FEES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.9 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ' 1.10 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.11 WORKSHOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.13 LIABILITY INSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.14 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.15 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.17 WORKMANSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.18 CONTRACTORS SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.20 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.21 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.22 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.23 DATA BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.24 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.25 DIRECTORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.26 CLEAN UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.27 GUARANTEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PART2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.1 THERMOMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.3 STRAINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.4 AIR VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.6 PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.7 ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.8 MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.9 STARTERS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 PART3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.1 PIPE EXPANSION AND ANCHORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.2 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.4 GAUGE GLASSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.5 INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - ii 3.6 INSTALLATION OF AIR VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.7 HEADERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.8 CONCRETE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.9 SUPPORTS AND BASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.10 INSERTS AND FASTENINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.11 SLEEVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.12 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.13 COUPLING AND BELT GUARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.14 DISSIMILAR METALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.16 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.17 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.18 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.19 WIRING 22 3.20 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.21 PAINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.22 TESTING & BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.23 WATER BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 DIVISION 17- REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050- BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050- 1 PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or Addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith. .2 Approved subcontractors for this Division are: Cinco Refrigeration Drennen Refrigeration J.L. Wilson Ltd. 1.2 INTENT .1 This Section applies to all Sections of Division 17. .2 This Section is responsible for designing, installing and commissioning of complete refrigeration system for one new ice pad and relocation of existing refrigeration equipment for existing pad including all piping, compressors, chillers, pumps, heat exchangers, power wiring, MCC's, controls and control wiring, under slab heating, Ammonia monitoring and fan.controls, laying pipes in trenches, under slabs and ice pads. Also refer to 17500 for details of work responsibility. .3 Refer to architectural drawings for size of ice pads,trench location and room layouts to produce working drawings for systems proposed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Comply with Section 01300 and specific additional requirements of Sections in Division 17. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE t .1 Painting of exposed piping, ductwork and unfinished mechanical equipment- under Division 9. .2 Concrete work required for the supports and bases for mechanical equipment- under Division 17. Division 17 shall provide all supports, brackets, stands and platforms required for the proper installation of its equipment and work. .3 Plumbing (water, drain)in 15400. Coordinate with Plumbing Contractor for refrigeration plant water and drain requirements and provide equipment connection sizes for all services. .4 Division 16 shall provide one 400 and one 200 amp, 600 volt 3 phase service and make connection to line side of the MCC. Division 17 shall coordinate with Division 16 on site for routing, location and any other specific requirements. DIVISION 17- REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050- BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050- 2 1.5 STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .1 Tender price shall be based only on equipment specifically mentioned by name in the specifications. .2 Materials not specified herein as to manufacture, quality, etc., shall be supplied of high commercial standard quality, new and of uniform pattern. Used materials or equipment will not be accepted. .3 In case materials or equipment specified are unavailable, clearly state in the Tender the alternative material and/or equipment and price used in compiling the Tender. 1.6 DRAWINGS .1 The drawings accompanying this specification are to be considered as diagrammatic 1 only and do not show all the structural and construction details. Any information involving-measurements of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings at the building site. Make without additional charge any necessary changes or additions to the runs to accommodate structural conditions. j .2 The drawings and these specifications shall be considered an integral part of the Contract Documents.. Neither the drawings nor the specification shall be used alone. Misinterpretation of any requirements of either plans or specifications shall not change the requirements or intent of the specification for proper completion of the work to the full approval of the Consultant. .3 The drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by the pipes, ducts, conduits,etc.,which are to be installed under this contract. Where the required conduit work, piping, ductwork, etc., is not shown on the plans or only shown diagrammatically, these shall be installed as tight as possible to structural members, concrete, ceilings and walls to Interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. i 1 t DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 3 .4 The location of pipes, ducts, outlets and other equipment may be altered by the Consultant without charge to the Owner, provided the change is made before installation and does not necessitate additional material, or in the case of electrical outlets the new location is within 3m of the original location. .5 Be responsible for the detailed layout of work with respect to the building structure and to other piping, ducts, conduit, etc. If required in certain sections, produce field drawings to show relative positions of various services and have these approved before work is proceeded with. .6 Consult with the Consultant and obtain detailed drawings and instructions for the exact location of equipment, and before the installation of fixtures and equipment which may interfere with the interior treatment of the building. .7 The listing hereinafter of any article, material, operation or method requires that each item listed be provided of the quality and subject to the qualifications noted. Perform each operation prescribed according to the conditions stated, providing therefore all necessary labour, equipment and incidentals. .8 The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other so that any details shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be executed in the same manner as if contained in the specifications and shown on the drawings. .9 Should any discrepancy appear between these specifications and the drawings to _cause doubt as to the true meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications, a ruling shall be obtained from the Consultant before submitting the tender. if this is not done it will be assumed that the more expensive alternative has been included in the contract. .10 Any error or inconsistency in the drawings or specifications noted after award of contract must be reported to the Consultant before commencing work. .11 The omission or incorrect mention of work, materials, etc. that are indispensable to the completed work, is not to be interpreted as relieving of the necessity of providing such work, materials, etc. at no expense to the Owner. .12 The layout of the mechanical systems in the mechanical rooms and roof mounted equipment is necessarily based upon one manufacturer's physical dimensions. In substituting equipment of different physical characteristics, submit shop drawings for approval, indicating the proposed layout and piping connections. 1 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 4 1.7 CODES AND REGULATIONS .1 The whole of the work specified herein and on the Drawings shall comply strictly with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. The Electrical Safety Code, the Building Code as amended to date, and any additional requirements of the Electrical Utility, Gas Utility, Ontario Water Resources Commission Regulations respecting Plumbing and codes, Fire Marshall regulations and by-laws of other jurisdictional authorities form an integral part of this specification, and are the minimum I requirements. Where the drawings or specifications call for piping, equipment, devices, wiring sizes or methods exceeding the minimum requirements of such codes, the drawings and specifications shall be followed. In case of doubt as to the interpretation of the codes, the local Electrical Inspector, Plumbing Inspector, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector, etc. shall be consulted and his decision shall be final. .2 Before starting any work, submit the required number of copies of the Drawings and Specifications to all authorities and utilities and obtain their approval. The Consultant shall be notified immediately of any changes requested before installation. Any work installed before approval is obtained from the above authorities shall be corrected without charge. Prepare and submit any additional drawings which may be required by Utilities. 1.8 CERTIFICATES AND FEES .1 Give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all necessary permits, and in required for the work herein specified. Pay all fees for examination of drawings and specifications. Furnish any certificates required as evidence that the work installed conforms with the laws and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction. .2 This shall apply to Electrical Inspection, Gas Inspection, Heating Inspection, Plumbing Inspection, Pressure Vessel, Piping and Boiler Inspection, Government, Municipal and Public Utilities and all other such bodies. .3 On completion of the work obtain final unconditional certificates of approval by all utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. All final certificates of approval shall be delivered to the Consultant before final payment is made. .4 Arrange and pay for all tests of the work. 1.9 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS .1 Upon completion of the project, present to the Consultant a signed statement to the effect that all tests have been carefully carried out as required by the specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations and that the equipment and installations have been inspected by all jurisdictional authorities. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 5 1.10 PROTECTION AND CARE OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT .1 Protect finished and unfinished own work and work of other contractors from damage due to own operations. Cover floors and other parts of the building with tarpaulins, etc. Repair all damage to floor surfaces or other parts of the building resulting from the carrying out of this work. .2 All material damaged by weather or through negligence shall be removed and replaced with new material. .3 During freezing weather, protect all material in such a manner that no harm can be done to the installation already made and/or materials and equipment on the job. .4 Store all material and equipment neatly and out of the way. .5 Securely plug or cap all open ends of pipes, ducts, conduits and equipment to prevent obstructions during construction. 1.11 WORKSHOP .1 Provide temporary buildings for field office, workshop, tools and material storage as may be required for own use and be responsible for any loss or damage thereto. Temporary buildings shall be of a type approved by the Consultant and located as directed by him. Temporary buildings shall be removed after completion of work as directed by Consultant. 1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT, POWER AND WATER .1 Temporary light, power and water will be provided under Division 1. Provide all necessary extension cords, lamps, hoses, etc. for own use. 1.13 LIABILITY INSURANCE .1 Maintain such insurance as will fully protect the Owner and the Contractor from any and all claims under the Workmen's Compensation Act and all insurance as noted in the Instructions to Tenderers. 1.14 INSPECTION OF SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS .1 Before submitting tender for this work, examine the site, local services and local conditions, Electrical Drawings, Mechanical Drawings, Structural Drawings, and Architectural Drawings to ascertain that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown on these Drawings and as herein specified. Before commencing work examine the work of the other trades and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work of this section or the guarantee of same. No extra will subsequently be allowed to cover any such error, omission and/or oversight for not having made a thorough inspection of the grounds, existing conditions, drawings, and specifications. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 -6 1.15 CO-ORDINATION OF WORK .1 Assume full responsibility for layout of own work so as not to conflict with other trades and also for damage caused to other's work by improper location or carrying out of own work. .2 Arrange work in co-operation with other trades in such a manner as not to interfere with other work being carried on and co-ordinate layout of work with other trades to get 1 all pipework, wiring, conduits, ductwork, etc., installed to the best advantage. .3 Assume full responsibility for the prompt installation of wiring, conduits, pipes, ducts, equipment and sleeves in advance of the work of other trades as required. .4 Where any equipment supplied under this Section must be built in with the work of other Sections such as Masonry, Plastering or Concrete, supply the equipment to be built in, provide templates, anchors, sleeves, bolts and measurements to allow the installation of these in the proper sequence. .5 Confer and co-operate with all other trades in order to eliminate any unnecessary delay to any work being done under this Contract. .6 Submit composite drawings of crowded locations where there is possibility of conflict with the work of other trades. Indicate exact locations and elevations of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from field measurement. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING A Refer to and be governed by specification Division 1. .2 Should any cutting and repairing of either unfinished or finished work be required due to failure of this trade to advise of or install equipment or sleeves on time, such cutting and patching shall be carried out by the trade affected and Division 17 shall pay all costs of such work. .3 General Contractor will make good and patch surfaces cut by the mechanical trades. 1.17 WORKMANSHIP .1 Only first class workmanship will be accepted not only regarding the best accepted standard practices, safety, accessibility, durability, etc., but also regarding neatness of detail. Pipes shall be installed true to line and grade. All pipework, conduit, and ducts must be aligned parallel and at right angles to the building walls. Equipment must be accurately set, plumbed and levelled and hanger rods must be aligned vertically. The entire work shall present a neat and clean appearance on completion. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 7 .2 Where possible, pipes, ducts, conduit and wiring are to be concealed in ceiling spaces, , furred spaces, pipe spaces, walls, trenches, etc., except they shall be run exposed in the boiler and equipment rooms, or where specifically noted on the drawings. They shall be installed neatly and closely to the building structure so that the necessary furring, etc., is kept as small as possible. Where pipes, ducts, conduits and other equipment are exposed, they shall be installed as close as possible to building structure, ceilings and walls. Provide all offsets for this purpose at own expense, whether shown or not shown on drawings. .3 Any conduits, pipes, ducts or other work which is not, in the opinion of the Consultant, installed as it should be, shall be taken out and replaced without cost to the Owner. 1 .18 CONTRACTORS SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review eight copies of detail drawings showing equipment and systems before ordering same and immediately after the award of the contract. .2 Submit eight copies of typed sheets, catalogue sheets, or illustrations, giving suppliers and catalogue numbers for such items as compressors, chillers, condensers, pumps, valves, traps, expansion joints, hangers, switches, types of thermal insulation for all services and any other standard catalogue items. .3 These will be reviewed by the Consultant and returned. No allowance will be made later if equipment is condemned at the site because of failure to observe this instruction. .4 The Consultant reserves the right to reject any material or apparatus which, in his opinion, does not conform with the requirements of the Specifications. .5 Notify Consultant in writing if shop drawings differ from Consultant's design drawings in any respect. Certify shop drawings that they have been checked and agree with Consultant's drawings and Specifications. Assume all responsibility for errors made on shop drawings or for changes made from Consultant's drawings and specifications, unless such changes were set out in written notification to Consultant. .6 Review is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not indicate approval of the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Section submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Section of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. Be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all other Sections. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 8 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Mark in coloured ink on a set of whiteprints, which will be provided, every change and deviation from runs of piping, ductwork, conduit and other services from where shown on drawings, so that on completion of the job the record drawings shall indicate the exact location of all services as actually installed. Record drawings shall be kept at the site and shall be kept up to date as the work progresses. Submit completed record drawings before final certificate of job acceptance is issued. 1 .2 Dimension locations of buried drains, pipes, duct, conduit, tanks, pads, manholes etc. to building column centres or other fixed reference points. Also mark in location of all access doors. .3 In addition to the whiteprints, prepare and submit one set of transparencies of the record drawings. .3 Acceptance of record drawings by the Consultant does not constitute a guarantee by the Consultant of their accuracy, nor does the acceptance by the Consultant remove the Contractor's responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be on the record drawings. 1.20 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS 1 Samples shall be submitted to the Consultant for his approval before ordering such items as name plates, tags, valves, thermostats, grilles, diffusers, etc., and other repetitive materials where finish or detail can be better examined by sample. All materials used for the work shall be fully equal to the samples as approved. 1.21 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVALS .1 All equipment, materials, controls, wiring and wiring devices, etc., supplied shall conform to the CSA, HEPC, CGA & ASME requirements for the purposes for which they are to be used, and shall bear a CSA or CGA approval label. .2 Special equipment which does not have a standard CSA or CGA label shall be inspected by the Special Inspection Department of the HEPC and the Approval Certificate shall be submitted to the Consultant as soon as possible. 1 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 9 1.22 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE .1 It is understood and agreed that the temporary or trial usage by the Owner of any mechanical device, electrical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or any other work or material supplied under this Section before final completion and written acceptance by the Consultant, is not to be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same by the Owner and it is further understood and agreed that the Owner shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage as soon as the Contractor shall claim ' that the said work is complete and in accordance with the drawings and specifications, and for such reasonable length of time as the Consultant shall deem to be sufficient for making a complete and thorough test of same and that no claim for damage will be made by the Contractor for the injury to, or breaking of any parts of such work which may be so used whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective material or workmanship of any kind whatsoever. .2 Should the Contractor feel that the equipment is being abused, improperly used or maintained, he shall advise the Consultant immediately. Verbal advice shall be followed up in writing, otherwise subsequent claims for damage will not be considered. 1.23 DATA BOOK .1 Bind within hard-covered, loose-leaf binders, two complete sets of manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions showing all major mechanical equipment and systems. Include shop drawings, detail drawings and operating curves. Instructions shall be complete for installation, operation and maintenance. Spare part suppliers, lists and addresses shall be included. Instructions shall be reviewed with the operating personnel to ensure a thorough understanding of the equipment and its operation. Include copy of the Valve Chart. 1.24 SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT .1 Where it is indicated that equipment is to be installed in future, leave adequate space for such future equipment and install the piping, conduits, ducts and other work in such a way that future equipment installations and connections can be made. Consult with the representative of the Consultant whenever necessary for the purpose. , 1.25 DIRECTORIES .1 Prepare diagrams of the major piping systems including chillers, antifreeze systems, , compressors, evaporative cooling towers, pumps, air supply units, etc. Prepare diagrams of systems. Three framed copies of both the water and the air system diagrams shall be delivered to the Consultant. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 10 1.26 CLEAN UP .1 All material shall be stored neatly and out of the way. Clean up daily all refuse caused by work. .2 On completion of the work remove from the premises all tools, debris, surplus and waste materials resulting from operations under this Section. Clean all fixtures and equipment and leave all items in perfect order ready for operation. 1.27 GUARANTEE I .1 Before final payment is made, guarantee all materials and workmanship supplied in the performance of this contract, for a period of three years from date of final acceptance by the Consultant and, when called upon, make good without further charge any such defects as may appear within this period. Before final payment is made, test the operation of all equipment installed and regulate all balancing and control equipment, lubricate all mechanical equipment, etc., and demonstrate to the Consultant or his representative that all equipment is operating as intended, without undue noise and vibration. The period of this guarantee shall in no way supplant any other guarantee or warranties of longer period, but shall be binding on all other work not otherwise covered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOMETERS .1 Thermometers shall be Trerice BX or BX9 Series, 200mm (8") scale with brass separable sockets. Sockets to have extension necks for pipes with insulation. For air ducts use perforated stems. .2 Thermometers shall be Trerice, Taylor or Weksler. 2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES .1 Pressure gauges shall be 115mm diameter Trerice No. 600. Pressure gauges shall be complete with 2.0 MPa isolating valve and shall suit fluid pressure measured. Steam gauges shall be complete with syphons. Gauges installed in pump suction and discharge pipes shall have Impulse Dampeners, Trerice No. 870 or approved equal. .2 Pressure gauges shall be Trerice, Ashcroft, Winters, U.S. Gauge. ' 2.3 STRAINERS .1 Pipe strainers shall be Y-type and basket type strainers as shown and shall be selected for 100% of pump capacity. .2 Screen perforations and working pressure shall be suitable for the systems in which they are installed. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 ' SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 11 .3 Strainers shall have monel screens and shall be reinforced when installed on pump sections. , .4 Y-type strainers shall be self cleaning and installed with 25mm (1") hose end valve on blow-off connection. .5 Strainers up to 50mm (2") shall be screwed and for sizes 60mm (2 1/4") and over shall be flanged. .6 All strainers connected to steel pipe and to copper pipe 60mm (2 1/4") and larger shall , have cast iron bodies. All strainers connected to copper pipe 50mm (2") and smaller shall have bronze bodies. .7 Strainers shall be Sarco, Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Taco or Atlas. 2.4 AIR VENTS .1 Automatic air vents shall be Sarco Type 13 WN air trap. 2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS , .1 Use Myatt Fig. No. 124 or Grinnell Fig. No. 260 clevis hangers. For cold insulated piping hanger shall be sized for the O.D. of the insulation and shall be provided with a , protection shield, Myatt Fig. No. 251 or Grinnell Fig. No. 167. For insulated hot piping the lower strap of the hanger shall be longer to place the horizontal rod outside the insulation - Myatt Fig. No. 124L or Grinnell Fig, No. 300. .2 Where hanger rods are too short to accommodate the axial movement due to thermal expansion, use Myatt Fig. No. 258 or Grinnell Fig. No. 174 hangers for pipes up to and including 125mm (5") size and Myatt Fig. No. 261 -or Grinnell Fig. No. 171 for larger pipes. Include protection shields specified previously for cold insulated pipes. Include pipe covering protection saddles Myatt Fig. No. 210-240 or Grinnell Fig. No. 160-165 for hot insulated pipes. Use similar heavy duty and extra heavy duty hangers where , loads imposed exceed the capacity of the previously.specified hangers, e.g. Myatt Fig. No. 125. .3 Vertical piping shall be supported using wrought iron pipe clamps, anchored to the concrete slab, Myatt Fig. No. 182 or Grinnell Fig. No. 261. For cast iron pipe, locate hub at clamp. .4 Provide special supports, racks, platforms, guides, stands, floor supports where such are indicated on drawings. Construct such supports in accordance with details provided. ' t ' DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 —BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 12 2.6 PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS .1 Provide chrome or nickel plated floor plates where exposed pipes pass through the finished floors. These shall be split type of similar design to#1-BC or#10-BC shown I on Page 1169 of Cat. 61 Crane Company or Grinnell Fig. 10. Where exposed pipes pass through ceilings and walls provide similar plates, but with set screws to hold them in position. ' .2 Escutcheons shall be chrome or nickel plated brass with set screws and shall be provided where exposed and uninsulated piping passes through the floors, walls or partitions, e.g. fixture supplies, waste pipes. Clip type escutcheons will not be 1 accepted. 2.7 ACCESS DOORS ' .1 Access doors shall be LeHage to suit construction, or Ormsby Kane, or Dillon, flush type with recessed hinges. Access doors in fire rated ceilings and/or walls shall match fire rating of ceilings and/or walls and shall be ULC approved. All access doors shall be equipped with screwdriver locks. .2 Access doors shall be minimum size 450mm x 300mm and 600mm x 450mm (18" x 12" x 24") where it is necessary for persons to enter and shall be adequately sized to properly service and maintain the equipment they serve. 2.8 MOTORS .1 Unless otherwise specified for a particular application, motors up to and including 350 W shall be 120 Volt, 60 cycle, single phase, 1200 or 1800 RPM. .2 Motors larger than 350 W shall be 600 Volt, 60 cycle, three phase, 1200 or 1800 RPM. Unless specifically noted otherwise, motors with speed of 3600 RPM will not be accepted. Unless specifically noted otherwise, motors shall have open, drip proof fully guarded enclosures. .3 Motors shall be Leland Electric, Westinghouse, Lincoln Electric, Canadian General Electric. .4 All motors shall meet Hydro EnerMark efficiency ratings. 2.9 STARTERS AND CONTROLS .1 Unless modified in other sections of these specifications or by details or control ' diagrams, motor starters, control and disconnect switches shall comply with the following requirements. 1 .2 Each motor shall be provided with a starter and all specified and required protective devices of suitable type and rating and adequate for the condition of application and in full accordance with Canadian and Ontario Electric Codes and Local requirements. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 13 .3 Starters shall be rated for safe making and interrupting of motor currents and shall be equipped with overload relays to make or break simultaneously each ungrounded line , to the motor. .4 Magnetic starters shall be used throughout this project, except that manual starters, with relays where required, may be used for single phase motors. .5 All manual starters shall have red or neon pilot lights. .6 Magnetic starters shall be equipped with: , .1 Red or neon pilot light. .2 Maintained contact on-off selector switch unless otherwise specified hereinafter. .3 Momentary contact start-stop pushbutton if starter is controlled by one or more remotely located start-stop stations. .4 Hand-Off-Auto selector switch if starter is controlled by two wire automatic devices such as thermostats, pressure switches, float switches, etc. On all combination magnetic starters the 'test' position shall be spring return. .5 Auxiliary contacts - as required for the specified interlocks and control. .6 Control Transformer - for remote control devices and stations of secondary voltage as required or specified. .7 Fused Control circuit. , .8 Overload relays. .9 Reset Button. .7 Unless otherwise specified all magnetic starters shall be combination circuit breaker i type. .8 In all cases where magnetic starters are located in equipment manufacturer's cabinets or panels, each motor shall have a separate disconnect and a separate set of fuses. The panel shall have a main disconnect switch. .9 Single phase 120V starters shall be equipped with one thermal overload device and , three phase starters shall be equipped with three thermal overload devices. Thermal overload devices shall be manual reset type. Overload devices shall have current rating as recommended by the motor manufacturer for the particular application. .10 Starter and control enclosures shall be suitable for mounting in the particular location in which they are to be installed. In dry and non-hazardous locations they shall be Nema Type I. Provide all required frames and supports as may be necessary for their proper installation, and as approved by the Consultant. .11 Selector switches, pilot lights, stop-lock-off, start-stop, up-stop-down, and similar , controls shall be oil tight heavy duty type. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 14 .12 Selector switches, pushbutton stations, pilot lights, manual single phase starters, etc., located in finished areas or control panels shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall I have brushed stainless steel cover plates. .13 All starters shall be Canadian General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Allen-Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Canadian Controller or approved equal. 2.10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES .1 This Division shall supply and install motor control centres where shown on the drawings. .2 Centres shall consist of standardized vertical sections of 2300mm height, width and 1 depth as required to house the equipment contained, all joined together to form a rigid, free standing, completely dead front Cema Type I enclosed assembly. Power shall be distributed by means of a continuous three phase horizontal bus. All units shall be arranged for front access only. Centres to be complete with sprinkler hoods. .3 All control units shall be wired for Class II, Type 'C' construction. .4 Each vertical section shall be fabricated of 2.5mm steel shaped and reinforced to form a rigid, free standing structure. .5 The top and bottom of each section shall be provided with horizontal wiring compartments which shall line up with adjacent sections to form a wiring trough the continuous length of the control centre. A 100mm (4 ) wide full height wiring trough shall be provided per section for unit wiring complete with cable supports. Horizontal cross channels shall be removable with or without starter unit in place. .6 Motor control centres shall be arranged for 600 Volt, three phase, 3 wire operation. Each vertical section shall contain three phase main horizontal bus and vertical bus rated as to carry the full load of all motors plus 25%.in each section. .7 All joints in the horizontal bus shall be silver plated. All vertical bus shall be silver plated for its complete length to ensure a good contact surface for the plug-in stabs. Bus work shall be suitably supported to withstand short circuit current as shown on the electrical drawings. For the number and rating of starters and breakers refer to electrical drawings. .8 Each section shall be provided with flanged formed doors with concealed hinges for all ' starter units. DIVISION 17 REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 15 .9 Starter units shall be of the combination type containing motor starter and circuit breaker, with 14 kA interrupting capacity. Each starter shall include: .1 3 phase overload protection with integral heaters, differential phase failure protection, ambient temperature compensated .2 two normally closed and two normally open auxiliary contacts .3 control transformer in each unit .4 fixed mounted terminal blocks .5 wire markers .6 standard nameplate. .10 Branch feeder units are of circuit breaker moulded case type with 14 kA interrupting capacity. .11 Motor control centres shall be of Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer, Allen Bradley, , C.G.E., or Westinghouse manufacture. PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3.1 PIPE EXPANSION AND ANCHORS .1 Provide for expansion and contraction of pipe work. Erect all pipe so that strain and weight does not come upon cast connections or apparatus. Provide bends, loops, swing joints and expansion joints. .2 Anchor piping at all points shown and where necessary, using substantial structural , steel angles, channels, or plates, well secured to the building structure. Strength of anchor in shear and bending is to be approximately equal to strength of pipe being anchored. , .3 Provide pipe roll or structural steel guides, two sets on each side of loop, joint or compensator, spaced at 14 pipe diameters or less and no more than 4 pipe diameters to first guide. Provide all required additional steel to span building structure for this purpose. Guides may be omitted on one side where anchor occurs within 10m. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS 1 Supply and install straight or angle pattern type thermometers where shown on the Drawings, where required and all other locations specified herein. In general, thermometers shall be installed in piping as follows: .1 On entering and leaving sides of water chillers. ' .2 On entering and leaving sides of condensers. .3 On leaving sides and return sides of all three-way mixing valves. .5 Chilled water supply and return mains. .5 On entering sides of Glycol pumps. .8 Where further indicated on the Drawings. i DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 16 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES i .1 In general, pressure gauges shall be located as follows: .1 On suction and discharge of all circulating pumps. i .2 On entering and leaving sides of all chillers and condensers. .3 On all expansion tanks. .4 On low and high pressure sides of all pressure reducing valves. .6 Where further indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 GAUGE GLASSES .1 Provide gauge glasses on all expansion tanks as required, shown and further specified. .2 Gauge glasses shall be approved fail-safe type complete with shut-off valves and ball checks. Gauge glasses shall cover the full height of the tank. i .3 Where tank height exceeds maximum length of one glass (45cm) provide additional gauges and stagger location of gauges. Provide white enamelled brass backplates behind gauge glasses. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS .1 Provide strainers where shown on the Drawings and in the following locations whether shown or not: i .1 Suction sides of all pumps. .2 Ahead of all pressure reducing valves. i3.6 INSTALLATION OF AIR VENTS .1 Supply and install automatic air vents at all high points or pockets in the piping to remove air from the cooling systems. A 12mm (1/2") discharge from all automatic air vents or traps shall be piped to the nearest open drain to catch any trap discharge, arranging the discharge so it is readily accessible and visible. All air vents shall be ' installed in concealed accessible locations. .2 Provide a shut-off valve at each air vent. i i DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 17 3.7 HEADERS .1 Supply and install and completely pipe up heat, chilled water system, etc., as shown on the drawings. Valves, drains, etc., shall be as shown on the Drawings and/or as required. 3.8 CONCRETE WORK .1 All equipment supports and bases above floor required for mechanical work shall be provided as part of the work of Division 17. All equipment pumps, compressors, chillers, heat exchangers, tanks,MCC's etc, shall be mounted on concrete pads. 3.9 SUPPORTS AND BASES .1 Provide concrete foundations and bases and steel supports, stands and platforms ' required for the proper installation of the equipment and work of this Division. Concrete shall be 20 MPa mix and formwork shall be plywood finish. .2 Hire the trade involved and pay all expenses. .3 Supports and bases shall be as shown on drawings, as specified, as recommended by manufacturer, as required and as approved by the Consultant. Equipment such as tanks, pumps, fans, softeners, heat exchangers, meters, boilers, compressors, transformers, switches, panels, shall be supported on concrete bases and independently from the piping and conduits and ducts so that no undue strain is placed on the equipment. .4 Supply all necessary templates, anchor bolts, inserts and location drawings for the equipment supplied, and supervise the work of installation of the bases. Support bases above the floor shall be at least 50mm (2") larger all around than the base of the apparatus, with chamfered corners and finished to a smooth neat surface. Unless shown otherwise on drawings, bases shall be room (4") above the floor and shall be dowelled to the concrete floor with not less than four 12mm (1/2") dia. steel rods fastened to the reinforcing bars of the floor before pouring. .5 Wherever equipment is required to be suspended above floor level and details are not shown on the drawings, it shall be mounted on a platform bracketed from the wall or suspended from roof structure. At locations where wall thickness is inadequate in the opinion of the Consultant to permit such brackets, supports shall be carried to either the ceiling or the floor, or both, as required. Shop drawing details of such supports shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval. .6 Equipment stands shall be constructed of structural steel members or steel pipe and ' fittings which shall be braced and fastened with flanges bolted to the floor. Where saddles are indicated or required, provide welded steel or cast iron saddles, of the curvature to suit vessel being supported. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 18 3.10 INSERTS AND FASTENINGS .1 Supply and install all inserts and fastenings required for support of equipment and hangers provided under this Division. Use beam clamps attached onto structural steel and/or inserts set in concrete. .2 Inserts shall be of the Midwest, Truscon manufacture and shall be firmly secured to the forms before the concrete is poured. Be responsible for correct location of inserts. .3 Where supports are required under the roof slab and in other areas where structural bearings of sufficient strength do not exist, provide angle or channel iron supports, properly sized to support the load from the structural framework using beam clamps. Where the wall, partition, floor or roof does not permit the support of heavy equipment, carry suitable support to building structure. .4 Percussion type fastenings of any kind will not be permitted unless prior approval in writing is obtained from the Consultant. .5 Bolts and anchors at metallic waterproofed surfaces shall be supplied under this Section but installed under the Waterproofing Section. Refer to architectural drawings for such areas. ' .6 Brackets may be attached to masonry walls using expansion shields in shear, but walls must not be punched through and before drilling is started, approval must be obtained from the Consultant. ' 3.11 SLEEVES .1 Supply and set all necessary sleeves and be responsible for the exact location of all sleeves. Sleeves shall be of steel pipe for piping passing through masonry walls and 1.3mm galvanized iron for piping passing through concrete walls or floors. Sleeves for bare copper piping shall be lined with copper or lead. Sleeves shall be sized to permit insulation to pass through unbroken. Seal around pipes passing through sleeves with fire resistive non-hardening mastic (concrete not acceptable) to control transmission of sound and noise, and to provide the full fire rating of the wall or floor. Unused sleeves shall be similarly sealed or filled with concrete. Use individual sleeves for each pipe. .2 Where ducts enter through equipment.room floor provide 100mm (4") wide x 100mm (4") high concrete curb to stop water. Pipe sleeves through equipment room floor shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe with machine cut ends, with top end at 100mm (4") above finished floor. ' 3.12 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS .1 Supply and install pipe hangers and their supports for all piping. i DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 19 .2 Piping and conduits shall be securely supported from hangers or supports, in a manner to ensure that building construction is not weakened or overstressed; that pipes are secure, vibration free, free to expand and contract, and properly graded; and that vertical adjustment of horizontal piping is possible after erection. .3 Cast iron pipe with MJ joints shall have two hangers for each length of pipe. , .4 Pipe supports for all other piping shall be spaced at the following intervals, using round ' steel rod supports of the diameter indicated: Pipe Diameter .Horizontal Spacing of Supports Rod Diameter Up to 20 mm 1.8m 10 mm , 25 mm to 30 mm 2.0 m 10 mm 40 mm to 50 mm 2.5m 10 mm 60 mm 3.0 m 12 mm 75 mm to 125 mm 4.0 m 16 mm 150 mm to 200 mm 4.8 m 22 mm 250 mm and over 5.8 m 22 mm min. ' .4 Rod diameter for larger pipes to suit weight being supported in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .5 For plumbing piping, horizontal spacing of supports shall not exceed 2.5m (8'-0") for pipes 25mm (1") and larger in accordance with the Plumbing Code. .6 Hanger rods must be vertical, without bends, or offsets, and workmanship must be such that finished piping is true both with respect to line and grade. They must be complete with adjusting and stopping nut locks. Each hanger is to be supported independently from the structure, i.e. piping shall not be hung from other piping or equipment. .7 No perforated or flat iron hangers shall be used. , .8 Where hangers are installed under and in direct contact with pipes, packing of approved inert material shall be crimped around the hanger to prevent electrolysis and ' abrasion. Copper clad hangers will not be accepted. .9 Upper attachment of hanger rod shall allow rod to pivot without bending of the rod. ' i DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 20 3.13 COUPLING AND BELT GUARDS .1 Provide all belt driven equipment with belt guards with tachometer openings at both the driven and drive shafts. Belt guards shall be open mesh expanded metal type. .2 Provide coupling guards for pumps with exposed couplings. .3 Belt guards and coupling guards shall be fastened by bolts or wing nuts, so that they ' may be easily removed for servicing of equipment. 3.14 DISSIMILAR METALS .1 Separate dissimilar metals from direct contact with each other. Install all necessary gaskets, and dielectric couplings. All metal screws, clamps, and fastenings shall be of the same metal and finish as the material supported. ' 3.15 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS .1 Provide access doors to all valves, cleanouts, electrical outlets, dampers, equipment, controls, and other apparatus requiring access where these are built in or concealed behind furring, walls or ceiling. .2 Access doors shall be supplied under this Division but installed by the trade providing wall or ceiling. Correct location of access doors is the responsibility of this Division. Frame and cover shall have a prime coat finish. Where it is necessary to have a number of access doors installed in the same area of a ceiling or wall, submit to the Consultant the location of these access doors for his approval. Access doors provided in glazed the walls shall suit the tile pattern. Refer to architectural drawings for room ' finish schedules. .3 Provide two sets of record drawings showing the location of all access panels with cross reference to their function. ' 3.16 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ' .1 Division 17 shall supply electrical motors, starters, controls, relays, thermostats, float switches, pressure switches, flow switches, pilot lights, remote control stations, safety devices, aquastats, control transformers, disconnects for control circuits, and interlocks. .2 Division 17 shall mount the above equipment. ' .3 Division 17 will supply and mount isolation disconnect switches where required for safe servicing of motors, as well as disconnects at electrical panels of all factory assembled package equipment, e.g. condensing units, chillers, compressors, pumps, etc. ' .4 Division 17 will provide all power wiring as defined herein. i DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 -21 .5 Division 17 shall provide all control and interlock wiring including connection to equipment and to source of supply. .6 Power wiring is defined as all single or three phase wiring carrying the full current of the mechanical equipment, including wiring of full equipment current carrying line voltage controls and isolation disconnects in line between the source and the mechanical equipment, and connection to the equipment. .7 Control and interlock wiring is defined as all mechanical equipment wiring other than , power wiring outlined above. .8 Division 17 shall provide detailed wiring diagrams for each motor. .9 Division 17, unless specifically indicated otherwise, shall provide all damper motor power and control wiring. .10 To obtain line voltage supply for motorized valves or other controls, provide wiring to , the nearest lighting or power panel, including connection to same, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. ' .10 Where low voltage supply source is required, obtain line voltage supply as described previously and also provide control transformers of necessary voltage and wattage to suit the low voltage equipment and controls. .11 Division 17, unless specifically indicated otherwise, will provide all wiring for damper motor power and control from nearest lighting panel except where the drawings indicate power outlets by Division 16. For these instances Division 17 will wire from the outlet to the damper motor. .13 Refrigeration contractor shall be responsible for all electrical wiring, MCC, starters, , motors, transformers, except that Division 16 shall provide main power service up to the MCC. 3.17 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS AND CONTROLS .1 Unless otherwise specified, all controls, interlocks, start-stop stations, and control , wiring shall be 120 volts or lower, except if contained entirely within starter. Such lower voltage shall be obtained from transformers of adequate rating mounted within the starter. Transformers shall be oversized where circuits carry external loads in addition to the holding coil of the starter. , .2 Starter containing wiring powered by another starter (or source) shall have double voltage relays, mylar covered interlocks, or other such provisions permitted by , applicable codes and regulations. i i DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 22 .3 Each motor shall have a disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall consist of a disconnect switch of suitable rating designed to break all ungrounded conductors of the motor under full load. The disconnecting means shall be located within 10m and i within sight of the motor and the machinery driven by the motor. .4 This Division shall provide detailed control wiring schematic diagrams for each motor. i .5 Where motor control centres are shown on the drawing or where the number of starters grouped in one area warrants the use of motor control centres, these shall be as specified under 'Motor Control Centres' in this specification. i3.18 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES .1 Division 16 will wire to the line side of motor control centres. i .2 All other wiring shall be provided as part of the work of this Division. .3 Shop drawings shall be complete with all control circuit schematics. 3.19 WIRING i .1 Wiring shall be in conformity with Ontario Electric Code and local regulations and motor manufacturer's recommendations and Division 16. Verify wiring requirements for work under Division 17 with Division 16 specifications. .2 The following are minimum requirements and are not intended to override any minimum requirements or those shown in the electrical specifications: Power Wiring #12 Gauge Control Wring #14 Gauge .3 In wet locations use wire type RW90 or TWH. In warm locations such as refrigeration rooms, use wire type RW90. Wiring to or near heat producing equipment shall be fireproof type. i3.20 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT .1 Clearly mark all exposed ducts, pipes, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., to indicate the nature of the service. .2 All starters shall be identified with black plastic laminated (Lamacoid) nameplates with white engraving, secured with screws. .3 Surface mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted on exterior face of ' door or cover. Flush mounted equipment shall have the nameplates mounted at the top of the inside face of the door or cover. ' DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 -23 .4 Every valve on the job except on radiation, unit heaters and fixture stops shall be provided with a 30mm (1 118") diameter brass tag secured with split rings or brass 'S' ' hooks. The number on the tags shall be factory engraved in black ink. Prepare two framed and glazed valve diagrams showing the service, location and purpose of each valve so tagged. .5 Identify all fans, pumps, remote controls and all other equipment as to service by a black lamacoid engraved name plate with white core, firmly affixed with screws to each unit. Submit sample plate and letter or Consultant's approval. All apparatus, including electrical motors, shall have a proper nameplate affixed thereto, showing the size, name of equipment, service, serial number, and all information usually provided which shall include voltage, cycle, phase and horsepower of motors and the name of the manufacturer and his address. All stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates shall be perfectly legible to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Name plates shall not be painted over, and where apparatus is to be insulated, nameplates shall be firmly attached with rigid insulation back-up, of equal thickness of that of jacket. 3.21 PAINTING .1 Unless specifically noted otherwise after all equipment is installed and piping completed, thoroughly clean off rust and oil on all exposed iron and steel work of every description, including hangers, pipe, conduits, panels, etc., installed in mechanical equipment rooms, trenches, tunnels, etc., and then paint same with one coat of chrome oxide phenolic base primer and one coat of 100% Alkyd base enamel of approved colour. This shall apply regardless of whether the material comes on the job painted or not. Unless specifically noted otherwise, equipment which is specified with factory finish will not be painted. Where galvanized items are exposed in areas mentioned above, said items shall be coated with a galvanized primer and one coat of ' 100% Alkyd base enamel of approved colour. .2 All new exposed insulation and covering shall be painted with two coats of 100% Alkyd base enamel of approved colour. .3 After piping, etc. has been painted, paint on all pipes neatly stencilled letters about 25 mm high designating the pipe service and arrows showing direction of flow. The wording shall be as later directed by the Consultant. The stencilling shall occur at approximately 3 m intervals and where pipes pass through walls, pipe shall be stencilled on both sides of the wall. All exposed pipes and pipes in pipe spaces near access doors shall be identified in this manner. .4 Approved colour coding with plastic bands may be used in lieu of stencilling described above. 3.22 TESTING AND BALANCING .1 All water piping shall be tested to a pressure of at least 1000kPa (335 ft). .2 Piping connected to the and chilled water system shall be tested at 2500kPa (840ft.). DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 17050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Page: 17050 - 24 .3 Make tests before a pp lication of pipe covering and before pipes are concealed behind furring. ' .4 Make any tests required by the Consultant during the progress of the work or at its completion. Provide all necessary labour and equipment for such tests. Such tests shall be carried out solely for the purposes of determining if the work as actually installed meets specified requirements. .5 All tests must last at least 2 hours and if leaks develop, these must be corrected and the test repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner and the local authorities. .6 Caulking of threaded joints shall not be permitted, faulty piping shall be replaced with new pipe and fittings. .7 Notify the focal Provincial Inspector of all tests and conduct same to their satisfaction and in the presence of their representatives. ' .8 Provide all labour and equipment for tests and conduct same. Repeat tests until system is shown to be leak-tight and in proper working condition, all to the satisfaction of all Inspectors having authority. .9 All piping shall be completely flushed out. After the cleanout period, the systems shall be drained, each strainer cleaned out and the systems refilled. Boiling out of systems shall be carried out as specified elsewhere. .10 All necessary adjustments to the automatic temperature control systems shall be made and the controls left in first class operating condition. .11 Supply lubricating oils, packing, etc., for proper operation of the systems. The final tests and acceptance will not be made until the work is finally completed. .12 After the job is completed, keep one skilled mechanic on the job to operate it for two days and instruct permanent operators of the plant in the method of operation. Refer to further testing as outlined under further divisions of these specifications. 3.23 WATER BALANCING A Water balance all pumps for chillers, condensers, coils and under slab, heating and cooling systems. .2 Supply and install flow metering Taco Flowmeters on all pump and discharge headers }' with one remote measuring device provided for testing on site as required. .3 Provide a written report on pump flow rates, pressure data, motor HP, motor amps and voltages for design flows. End of Section DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL Page: 17240 -i PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 .1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.2 SPRING HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 ISOLATION BASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPRING HANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.3 CONDENSERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL Page: 17240 -1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 17050 forms an integral part of this Section. ' 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide sound and vibration isolation for all equipment as required. ' .2 Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of equipment to be isolated. These drawings to show belt centres, operating weights and motor positions. .3 Obtain all other applicable mechanical, structural and architectural drawings required to complete the vibration and sound control installation drawings. .4 Vibron Limited has been used as a base for this Specification. Acceptable alternate manufacturers are Amber/Booth Co., Vibro-Acoustics Ltd., Korfund Sampson Ltd. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. .2 Submit shop drawings for the following: .1 Isolation Bases .2 Vibration Isolators .3 Spring Hangers DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL Page: 17240 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS , .1 All springs shall be completely stable, colour coded and selected to operate at no greater than two-thirds solid load. with levelling devices 6mm thick , .2 All spring isolators shall be complete g , ribbed neoprene sound pads and zinc plated hardware. For applications subject to outdoor or high humidity conditions, the housings shall have a two-coat system of rust resisting paint and the springs shall have two coats of neoprene unless otherwise specified. .3 Type CM closed spring mounts shall be complete with top and bottom housings separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. .4 Type FS open spring mounts shall have extra stable iso-stiff springs with a minimum horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness ratio (Kx/Ky) of 1.0. .5 Type CSR open controlled mounts shall have heavy rigid steel base frame, built in limit stops and removable spacer plates. Springs shall be iso-stiff with a minimum horizontal to vertical stiffness ratio (Kx/Ky) of 1.0. .6 Type MD elastomer rubber mount shall have threaded insert and hold down bolt holes. .7 Type R waffle pads shall be 30 durometer natural rubber (14MPa tensile), a minimum of 12mm thick and selected for an optimum loading of 42kPa. When pads are built into spring isolators or hangers, 50 durometer (21 MPa tensile) pads are acceptable with an optimum loading of 630kPa. .8 Type N waffle pads shall be 50 durometer neoprene (12500kPa tensile), minimum of 12mm thick and selected for an operating load of 630kPa. .9 Type RSR rubber-steel-rubber pads shall consist of two layers of 12mm thick type R pad, as specified above, bonded to 6mm steel plate. All holes to be sleeved and complete with an isolation washer. .10 Type NSN neoprene-steel-neoprene pads shall consist of two layers of j tDIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL Page: 17240 -3 12mm thick type N pad, as specified above, bonded to 6mm steel plate. All holes to be sleeved and complete with isolation washer. .11 Type KIP Kinetic precompressed moulded fibreglass pads shall be coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Glass fibres, produced by the multiple flame attenuation process, shall have a diameter not exceeding 0.0046mm. .12 Pads shall be capable of sustaining 300 per cent overload without damage, permanent set, collapse or permanent loss in natural frequency. 2.2 SPRING HANGERS .1 Type SH shall have fabricated steel housing with one coat of anti-rust paint, and be complete with a colour coded stable spring, retaining cups and acoustic washer. .2 Type SHR shall be as for type SH above but shall have a 25mm elastomeric element in lieu of acoustic washer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION BASES i .1 "T" shaped concrete inertia pump bases shall be used for all pumps and rotating equipment. .2 Type S integral steel fan and motor bases, complete with adjustable motor slide rails welded in place, shall have minimum vertical sections of 75, 100, 150, 200 and 250mm for motor horsepowers up to and including 2.2, 5.6, 15, 37.3kW, and larger than 37.3kW respectively. .3 Type SS slung steel base shall be of structural members with gusset plates welded to ends. .4 Type C reinforced concrete inertia bases shall have full depth perimeter structural channel frames with flanges pointed into the centre of the base. These are provided under Division 3. .5 For spring mounted units the load shall be carried by gusseted brackets forming an integral part of the channel frame. .6 Unless otherwise specified, isolation materials shall be installed on 100mm concrete sub-bases, which extend at least over the full base and isolator area of the isolated equipment. Concrete work will be provided under DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17240 - SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL Page: 17240 -4 Division 3. .7 All steel bases and inertia bases shall clear the sub-bases by at least 25mm and 50mm respectively. All bases shall be blocked and shimmed level, so that all ductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system, at the operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPRING HANGERS .1 All piping over 50mm diameter connected to spring isolated equipment shall be supported with minimum 25mm static deflection spring mounts or hangers as follows: , Up to 25mm diameter - first 3 points of support 125 to 200mm diameter - first 4 points of support 250mm dia and over - first 6 points of support .2 The first point of support shall have a static deflection of twice the deflection of the isolated equipment, but not more than 50mm. .3 Any piping supported from the mechanical penthouse floor shall be isolated on type CM or SL mounts with the deflection being equal to that of the isolated equipment. 3.3 CONDENSERS .1 Condensers ton roof) shall be mounted on structural beams with vibration isolator springs. End.of Section DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 93169 SECTION 17250 - REFRIGERATION INSULATION Page: 17250 - 6 PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 WORKMANSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 3.2 COLD WATER PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.3 CHILLED WATER PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.4 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.6 PUMPS 5 3.7 RECOVERING AND FINISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 93169 SECTION 17250 - REFRIGERATION INSULATION Page: 17250 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 17050 forms an integral part of this Section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment required for installation of Thermal Insulation as shown, as specified and as otherwise required, in a satisfactory manner, for all Sections of Division 17. .2 Pipe covering, equipment and duct insulation shall be provided by a recognized specialist insulation applicator with an established reputation for this type of work. .3 Product type designations of Fiberglas Canada Ltd., for insulation materials, Flintkote and Childers for coatings, sealers and adhesives, are used in Specification and on Drawings to indicate physical properties and quality standards not otherwise described. Equivalent products of the following manufacturers are acceptable: .1 Insulation Materials Fiberglas Canada Limited Manville Canada Ltd. Holmes insulations Limited .2 Coatings, Sealers and Adhesives Foster Division, Amchem Products Inc. Minnesota Mining and Mfg. of Canada Ltd. Paisley Adhesives Ltd. j1.3 MATERIALS LIST .1 Where applicator proposes to use materials other than those specified as acceptable, he shall submit a complete list of such materials, indicating thickness of material for each individual service. .2 Do not purchase materials so submitted until approval in writing has been received. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 93169 SECTION 17250 - REFRIGERATION INSULATION Page: 17250 - 2 1.4 STANDARDS .1 The type, manufacture and application of pipe covering materials including application of sealer coat, shall be in strict accordance with requirements and final approval of local and Provincial authorities having jurisdiction. .2 All materials shall be asbestos free. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Pipe Insulation: Fibreglas one-piece or sectional insulation with All Service Jacket, 88 kg per cubic metre density. .2 Duct and Equipment Insulation: Fiberglas AF-545 with Reinforced Foil and Flame Retardant Kraft Facing (RFFRK), 72kg per cubic metre density. .3 Vapour Barrier Lag Adhesive: Flintstik 230-04 or Childers CP-82. .4 Insulation Lagging Adhesive: Flintkote 120-09 or Childers CP-50. .5 Glass Fabric Reinforcing: Flintkote Yellowjacket or Childers Chilglas. .6 Canvas Cloth: 200g per sq m. .7 PVC Jacketing and Fitted Pipefitting Covers: Manville Zeston, 25/50 rated. .8 Aluminium Jacketing: .41mm thick aluminium jacket with 13mm wide bands of same thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP .1 Ensure the pipe fittings and equipment are dry and clean before applying covering. .2 Do not apply insulation until the item to be covered has been tested. .3 Apply covering in a neat workmanlike manner so that finished job is of uniform diameter and smooth in finish. Locate longitudinal seams so as to be invisible. .4 Mitre insulation at pipe elbows 25mm size and smaller and wrap joint with Mac-Tac tape. Use PVC Pipefitting Covers or cover joint with canvas pasted on and extending one covering diameter each side of joint throat. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 93169 SECTION 17250 - REFRIGERATION INSULATION Page: 17250 - 3 .5 Neatly cover flanges at fittings, strainers, expansion joints, valves and equipment, 75mm size and over, using "box" type flange insulation. .6 Treat insulation and finishes so that maximum flame spread does not exceed a rating of 25 or as directed by local bylaws or requirements. Smoke developed classification shall not exceed 50 where required by applicable Codes. .7 To maintain the integrity of fire ratings and to control transmission of noise tightly pack annular space between sleeve and pipe covering where insulated pipes pass through sleeved openings in walls or floors, for full length of sleeve, with approved fireproof insulating packing and finish flush at each end with caulking compound, aluminum colour, as manufactured by: .1 The Tremco Manufacturing Co. - Last-Meric .2 Canadian Hanson & VanWinkle Co. Ltd. - Poly-Tite Joint 3 Foster Div., Amchem Products Inc. - Elastoler Sealant - 95-44 .8 Pipes covered with insulation having a vapour barrier jacket shall pass through walls or floors with continuous covering. Protect exposed pipe insulation at floor line with an 18 gauge galvanized iron packet approximately 100mm high, secured to floor slab in an approved manner. .9 A steel insulation shield shall be placed between the hanger and the insulated pipe by pipe installer. .10 At pipe support points with steel insulation shields use insulation with higher crushing strength to ensure that integrity and continuity of insulation and vapour barrier are maintained. .11 Make ood in an approved existing coverings damaged or cut back due to 9 PP manner 9 installation of new work, using same materials as specified for new work. 3.2 COLD WATER PIPING .1 Cover cold water piping with 25mm thick insu!aticcn. Insulation thickness may be reduced to 12mm for piping 50mm size and under. .2 Armaflex insulation may be used for this service. .3 Cover fittings and valves with a layer of glass fibre insulation with vapour barrier. Recover with insulating cement to insulation on adjacent piping and canvas neatly pasted on with adhesive regardless of whether the adjacent pipe covering is recanvassed or not. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 93169 SECTION 17250 - REFRIGERATION INSULATION Page: 17250 - 4 3.3 CHILLED WATER PIPING .1 Cover brine piping headers in trenches, chilled water piping, secondary circuit water piping, equalizer lines to the expansion tanks on chilled water systems, refrigerant suction piping, external spray washer piping and pump, with glass fibre insulation with fire resistant vapour barrier jacket and fire proof adhesive at joints. .2 Cover fittings, valves, flanges and strainers on chilled water piping with a layer of glass fibre insulation with vapour barrier and finished with insulating cement to thickness of insulation on adjacent pipe. Recover with canvas neatly pasted on with adhesive, regardless of whether the adjacent pipe covering is recanvassed or not. .3 Wrap butt joints with 1 00m wide vapour barrier strips of same material as jacket. Insulation shall pass unbroken through pipe sleeves. Thickness of insulation shall be 25mm except for chilled water piping 150mm size and over which shall have 40mm thick insulation. Insulate or pack around anchor plates where the above pipes are anchored, with a similar type of insulation to that used on piping. .4 All condenser piping installed outside building and for 1 m inside building, including supply and return piping and makeup water piping, shall be insulated a similar manner to chilled water piping. Recover exterior portion of these lines with aluminum jacket .41 mm thick applied with aluminum lock type bands 300mm apart. Coat joints with an approved fire retardant mastic, reinforced with a glass cloth membrane. Do not apply insulation for cooling tower piping until electric heating system for piping has been installed, tested and approved. .5 Completely cover expansion joints and flexible hose connectors on chilled water piping with same type of insulation as used for chilled water piping. Allow for movement and flexing of joints and flexible hose connectors. 3.4 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT .1 Surfaces of the chiller equipment that are subject to sweating and where recommended by chiller manufacturer, expansion tanks of the chilled water and secondary water system, shall be covered with two layers of 25mm thick Armaflex s yet insulation adhered to surface with insulation adhesive. .2 Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's recommendations. .3 Apply two coats of Armaflex finish directly to the insulation surface. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 93169 SECTION 17250 - REFRIGERATION INSULATION Page: 17250 - 5 3.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING .1 Liquid refrigerant lines outside the building (from the inside of the building to the condensing unit) and the entire length of the refrigerant suction lines inside the building and outside the building, shall be insulated with 19mm thick Armaflex foamed plastic insulation as manufactured by Armstrong. 3.6 PUMPS .1 Enclose chilled water pumps with sheet metal boxes made so that packing gland is accessible for service from outside. Line box on inside with 50mm thick 72 kg per cu m density glass fibre rigid board. Fabricate boxes from aluminum or copper of suitable thickness and construction. .2 Apply insulation to interior surface of box with mechanical pins and speed washers. Seal joints and edges with adhesive and reinforce with glass cloth membrane. 3.7 RECOVERING AND FINISHING .1 Recover exposed pipe insulation in finished rooms, trenches, mechanical equipment rooms, pipe shafts where access is available, pipe spaces, penthouses, with PVC jacket neatly applied. .2 Cement recovering laps with lapping adhesive. After canvas has been applied, give the entire surface a heavy brush coat of the same adhesive applied undiluted. .3 Canvas for recovering shall be as previously specified with close weave and smooth finish. Submit sample of canvas for approval before installation. .4 For recovering and finishing of exposed pipe insulation in trenches and refrigeration room PVC Jacketing shall be used instead of canvas. Apply Jacketing and Pipefitting Covers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .5 Insulation exposed to outdoors shall be finished with a layer of 880 kg per cu m roofing felt, lapped at all joints, sealed with lap cement and held in place with metal bands on not more than 300mm centres and covered with metal jacket in lieu of PVC jacket. End of Section DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17500 - HEATING AND COOLING Page: 17500 - i ARTICLE NAME PAGE iPART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 PIPE 2 2.2 FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . • 3 2.4 METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS . 3 2.5 AIR CUSHION TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.6 WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I . . . . . 4 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 4 3.2 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES . . . . 5 3.3 METAL HOSE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17500 - HEATING AND COOLING Page: 17500 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE ! .1 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 17050 forms an integral part of this Section. Refer to 17700 for equipment sizes and controls. 1.2 INTENT .1 Provide all material, equipment and labour required for a complete refrigeration plant, heating system and cooling system as shown on the drawings and as described herein. .2 Refrigeration contractor shall be responsible for system design, installation and operation. .3 Refrigeration contractor shall provide a complete functioning system including equipment, piping, layout, commissioning, controls, electrical wiring, plumbing and all anciliary services from mechanical room to two ice pads (including slab heating piping). Specification and drawings show minimum requirements only. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS .1 Section 15400 will provide hub, floor and funnel drains. Section 15400 will provide domestic cold water piping to equipment rooms, etc. Cooperate with Section 15400 in properly locating and arranging all such connections. Division 17 shall provide all connections for equipment supplied by them. .2 Thermal insulation - under Section 17250 Mechanical Insulation. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Refer to Section 01300 for details regarding shop drawing submission requirements. .2 Submit Shop Drawings for the following: .1 Pumps. .2 In-Line Circulators. .3 Refrigeration Compressors. .4 Condensers and Condensing Units. .5 Water Chillers. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO, 97309 SECTION 17500 - HEATING AND COOLING Page: 17500 -2 j .6 Heat Exchangers. .7 Metal Hose Connections. .8 Air Cushion Tanks. .9 Water Treatment. .10 Antifreeze Mixing and Feeding System. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE .1 Unless otherwise specified, piping shall be as follows: .1 Brine piping headers, glycol piping, chilled water piping, shall be new, standard weight steel pipe, C.S.A. Specification B-63-1949 Grade B Schedule 40. .2 Steel pipe 50mm and under shall be butt welded. Pipe 60mm and over shall be electric resistance welded. .3 Domestic water piping and drain lines shall be type "L" hard drawn copper tubing. 2.2 FITTINGS t .1 All elbows on any steel piping where welding is employed, shall be cf t`ie prefabricated type, Tube-Turn or equal. Long radius elbows shall be installed where pipe bends are used to take up expansion. .2 All screwed fittings in steel piping shall be minimum 1050kPa class. All welding fittings shall be standard weight where used with Schedule 40 pipe. They shall be extra heavy where used with Schedule 80 pipe. .3 All fittings used with copper pipe shall be wrought copper streamline fittings. Where it is necessary to connect threaded pipe.to copper tubing, use unions or flange connections similar to Epco "Di-Electric" pipe fittings. .4 All fittings used in connection with red brass I.P.S. pipe, shall be screwed and of cast bronze. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17500 - HEATING AND COOLING Page: 17500 - 3 i 2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES .1 Unions in copper pipe, 50mm diameter and smaller, shall be wrought copper with ground joints, and with soldered connections. For 60mm and 75mm copper pipes, unions shall be brass ground joints. For copper pipes larger than 75mm, flanges shall be 1050kPa cast brass. .2 Unions in steel pipe 50mm and smaller shall be brass to iron ground joint. For steel pipe 60mm and larger,flanges shall be 1050kPa steel slip on type. .3 Gaskets for cold water service shall be 1.6mm red rubber. Gaskets for other services shall be 1050kPa 1.6mm of material suitable for these services. .4 Bolts for flanges shall be carbon steel, A.S.T.M. A-107. 2.4 METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS .1 Metal hose vibration absorbers shall be Flexonics RW 91, bronze braded assemblies with close pitch corrugations and 1050kPa 2.1 MPa working pressure. Use screwed connections for sizes up to 60mm, flanged connections for larger sizes. Vibration absorbers with screwed connections shall have a union nut and nipple at one end. Hose live length shall be 300mm for sizes up to 50mm, 450mm for sizes 75mm to 125mm, and 700mm for larger sizes. 2.5 AIR CUSHION TANK .1 Expansion tank shall be sized as shown on drawings and shall meet the requirements of the Ministry of Commercial and Consumer Relations and A.S.M.E. for a working pressure of 860kPa. .2 Tank shall be complete with manual air vent, sight glasses, drain valve and relief valve. 2.6 WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS .1 Pumps shall be vertical in-line type with outside mechanical seal and split type spacer coupling to permit servicing the seal without disturbing pump or motor or electrical wiring. .2 Pumps shall have radially split casings. They shall be single stage centrifugal type with cast iron casing, bronze impeller and stainless steel shaft. Pumps shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 860kPa. .3 The driving motor shall be of the vertical, solid shaft, normal thrust, "P" base, squirrel cage induction type. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17500 - HEATING AND COOLING Page: 17500 -4 .4 The complete pumping unit, including the seal, shall be suitable for the service shown in the pump schedule. The pump manufacturer shall conduct running tests to verify the conditions of head and capacity specified. .5 Pump casings shall have renewable bronze casing and/or impeller wear rings on both sides of the impeller. .6 Inlet and discharge ports shall be flanged. All pumps shall have such performance characteristics that the motor will not be overloaded at low head conditions, nor will the pump develop excessive head at low flow conditions. Impeller diameter shall be not larger than 85% of maximum allowable for a particular casing size. Velocity in discharge nozzle shall not exceed 3.5m/s. .7 Impellers shall be enclosed bronze, dynamically balanced. .8 Approval information shall include characteristic curves, power, head, capacity data and general construction details. .9 Pumps shall be suitable for continuously circulating low temperature brine solutions pressure. .10 Pumps shall be S.A. Armstrong or equal in A.S Leitch, Canada Pumps and Bell and Gossett. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING pipe 50rnmi and larger shall have welded joints. At connections to apparatus, valves, at convenient points in long runs of piping and at connections to risers, flanges or unions shall be installed. .2 Steel pipe less than 50mm size may be welded or assembled using screwed fittings. All reducing fittings in horizontal pipe shall be eccentric. .3 Water piping shall slope up in direction of flow 0.25%. Branch piping shall have greater slope. .4 Piping shall be reamed and cleaned before assembly. It shall be installed straight and true with uniform grade. .5 Piping shall not touch the structure, sleeves, other piping, conduits or equipment at any point, save at the necessary connections. This shall be observed carefully to avoid transmission of noise. .6 The runs of mains and details of connections are shown on the Drawings. .7 All welding shall be performed by first class certified welders. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17500 - HEATING AND COOLING Page: 17500 - 5 .8 Risers shall be valved where they connect to the mains, and in addition supply and install 20mm drain valves with hose end at the base of all risers. In cases where there are no down-feed risers, or connections, the drain valve shall be between the shut-off valve and the heel at the riser. In cases where there are down-feed connections from the riser runouts below the level of the main, all piping shall grade in such a manner that the up- and down-feed risers and branch connections shall drain to the drain valves installed at the lowest points in the piping. .9 Providedrains at all low points in piping systems terminating with a plugged gate valve. .10 Provide overflow and drain piping from apparatus to hub, floor and funnel drains. .11 Where either mains or branches are less than 150mm, weld branch connections directly into the main pipe run if the main is 50mm or larger and at least one pipe size larger than the branch, otherwise welding outlet fittings or prefabricated welding tees must be used. Where branches are welded directly into the main pipe run, openings must be cut true and bevelled, and any branch pipes must not be allowed to project inside the main pipe. Openings into mains must not be cut large enough to permit entry of welding metal and slag within the pipes. .12 For all connections between mains and branches where both are 150mm or over, use welding tees. .13 Joints between copper pipes shall be made with copper to copper couplings soldered. No copper material shall be in contact with ferrous material. Solder shall be 95/5 tin antimony. .14 For all changes in pipe sizes and connections to valves and equipment other than pipe size, use eccentric reducers for air elimination and proper grading of pipe. .15 Valves shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for servicing and repacking. Valves installed in locations where operation is difficult shall be provided with extension spindles or operating chains, sprockets and guides. .16 Provide flanges or unions at all equipment requiring servicing and/or replacing. 3.2 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES .1 Safety relief valves shall be installed where required and in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and all other Codes and authorities having jurisdiction. .2 Run discharge lines from discharge elbow and safety valve independently of any other drain lines to nearest hub drain. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17500 - HEATING AND COOLING Page: 17500 - 6 3.3 METAL HOSE CONNECTIONS .1 Provide vibration absorbing metal hose connections in supply and return piping of suction and discharge pipes of circulating pumps. .2 Firmly support or anchor piping near metal hose connections to prevent swaying of pipe. End of Section DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - i l PART1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 .1 REFERENCE 1 1 .2 INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 RELATED WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 COMPRESSORS C-3, C-1 & C-2 EXISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 j 3.2 EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS(EC-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ` . . • • 3 3.3 BRINE CHILLERS (BC-2) (BC-1 EXISTING) . . 5 3.4 WARM BRINE HEATERS (HX-2) (HX-1 EXISTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.5 POTABLE WATER HEATERS (HX-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.6 BRINE/GLYCOL HEAT EXCHANGER (HX-4) 6 3.7 BRINE PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1 3.8 WATER PUMPS (P3B) (P3-A EXISTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • 7 3.9 COMPRESSOR JACKET PUMPS (P4A, P4B) . . • • 8 3.10 SPECIALITY PUMP (P-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 I 3.11 CONDENSER SUMP (T-1) (EXISTING). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.12 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (T-3) . . . . . . 9 3.13 PIPE AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.14 VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.15 ACCESSORIES 11 PART 4 - INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 4.1 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 4.2 SYSTEM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 4.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 4.4 EQUIPMENT WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.6 CONTROL SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.7 ADJUSTING AND STARTUP AND MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE .1 Contractor shall refer to all General Provisions for Contract per General Conditions, Instruction to Bidders, Supplements and Addenda. .2 All sections of Div. 17050 Form integral this section. 1.2 INTENT .1 Contractors shall bid directly to the General Contractor. Only contractors ' having completed 3 rink installations in the past five years shall be qualified to bid this project. .2 All work mechanical, refrigeration equipment, piping, heat exchangers, valves, controls, electrical wiring, MCC, Ammonia monitoring system and interlock to ventilation system, concrete work (pads), roof condensers, pumps, headers, piping under the rinks for heating and cooling shall be the iresponsibility of this trade. System commissioning, operator training (for 3 working days) and after service for 1 year shall be carried by this contractor. This includes relocation of existing rinK refrigeration plant in Irs entirety. .3 Supply of brine, ammonia, glycol, etc. for system fill shall be supplied by this trade. 1.3 RELATED WORK .1 Sections of this work are specified elsewhere in order to maintain consistency of the project. Related work specified elsewhere includes; Plumbing and Drainage Section 15400 Electrical Division 16 insulation Section 17250 Concrete and Structural Steel Bases Section 17050 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK .1 Supply and install an indirect ammonia/brine refrigeration system, complete with all necessary pipe, fittings, refrigerant, oil, etc., to provide a complete installation. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 2 .2 The primary and secondary refrigeration system, shall be installed in strict accordance with all current provincial regulations, including: CSA B.52 Mechanical Refrigeration Code CSA B.51 Pressure Vessel Code ANSI B.31 .5 Refrigeration Piping Code Ontario Building Code Ontario Plumbing Code Department of Labour, Boiler Inspection Branch .3 Provide all electrical wiring, starters and controls for the complete refrigeration system, including the heat recovery equipment supplied by the refrigeration contractor. Equipment and installation shall be per Section 17050. , .4 Supply design details for supply and installation of concrete bases for all compressors, pumps, tanks and for the structural supports on the roof for the evaporative condensers. Concrete bases shall be part of Division 17 work. .5 Supply all pipe and vessel insulation for all low temperature piping, chillers, t chilled brine piping and domestic cold water piping within the Mechanical Equipment Room. See Section 17250 for specifications. .6 Submit all equipment, drawings and details for approval. .7 Submit and register all pressure vessels and systems with MCCR Ontario. .8 Provide framed schematic flow diagram with all valves marked and tagged for installation in Mechanical Equipment Room. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CO SCrS C-3 (`'-1 & C-2 E�tcT�r;GJ�Si nra?`�) .1 General Conditions i Refrigerant - Ammonia Saturated Suction Temperature -12°C {10°F) Saturated Discharge Temperature +32.2°C (90°F) .2 Supply one (1) Model N4WA Mycom 75 H.P., (C-3) or equal, on System running at a maximum speed of 1200 RPM and drawing not more than 50 BHP when providing 42 tons refrigeration, complete with 50 HP motors. Compresoor C-3 shall be oversized to 75 H.P. But supplied WIM 50 H.P. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 3 motor for future application WIM 75 H.P. motor. Supply a spare change of pulleys & belts for 75 H.P. operation. .3 Relocate two esixtinf 75 H.P. compressors & pipe om mew refrigeration room. .4 All motors to be high efficiency, 1800 RPM, ODP 1 .15 S.F. 3/60/575 volts. .5 The refrigeration plant is to have no operator requirements under the current Operating Engineers Act of Ontario. .6 Each compressor is of the reciprocating type with unloaders, suction strainer, safety relief, water cooled oil cooler, water cooled heads, oil filter, oil pressure gauge suction and discharge stop valves, steel fabricated base for compressor motor assembly, vee-belt drive and pulleys, vee-belt guard, discharge line oil separator with automatic oil return, discharge line check and stop valves, safety cutouts; for high pressure, low pressure oil pressure, Iand high discharge and high oil temperatures. Each compressor also to be fitted with thermostatically controlled crankcase heaters. I .7 Relocate existing compressors and tie back to the system. 3.2 EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (EC-2), (EC-1 EXISTING/RELOCATED) .1 General Refrigerant - Ammonia Saturated Suction Temperature -12°C (10°F) Saturated Discharge Temperature +32.2°C (90°F) Design Wet Bulb +24.4°C (76°F) .2 There shall be two condensers installed WIM total capacity of 1800 MBh. Existing relocated EC-1 iAnd Condenser #2 (EC-2) - 900 MBH Total Heat Rejection (corrected for operating conditions). ISupply discharge duct connection to roof of enclosure. .3 The evaporative condensers shall be Evapco, Model LSCA135 or equal. Fan motor shall be a 15 HP high efficiency TEFC motor rated for outdoor service on 3/60/575V service. Motor is to be of sufficient power to provide dry fan operation without overloading the motor. t DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 4 .4 Pan and Casing .1 The pan and casing shall be constructed of G-210 hot-dip galvanized steel for long life and durability. The heat transfer section shall be removable from the pan to provide easy handling and rigging. .2 The pan/fan section shall include fans, motors and drives mounted and aligned at the factory. These items shall be located in the dry , entering air stream to provide maximum service life and easy maintenance. Standard pan accessories shall include circular access doors, and stainless steel strainers. .5 Centrifugal Fans/Drive .1 Fans shall be forwarded curved centrifugal type of hot-dip galvanized ' construction. The fans shall be factory installed into the pan-fan section, and statically and dynamically balanced for vibration free operation. Fans shall be mounted on either a solid steel shaft or a hollo steel shaft with forged bearing journals. The fan shaft shall be supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning bearings with cast iron , housings and lubrication fittings for maintenance. .2 The fan drive shall be V-belt type with taper lock sheaves designed for 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower. Drives are to be mounted and aligned at the factory. .6 Heat Transfer Coil , .1 The coil(s) shall be all prime surface steel, encased in steel framework with the entire assembly hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Coil(s) shall be designed with sloping tubes for free drainage of liquid refrigerant and tested to 350 psig air pressure under water. This coil shall have an Ontario CRN number and be made wth ASTM Code materials. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 5 ' .7 Water Distribution System .1 The system shall provide a water flow rate of not less than 6 GPM over each square foot of unit face area to insure proper flooding of the coil. The spray feeder shall be constructed of schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride pipe for corrosion resistance. All spray branches shall be removable and include a threaded end plug for cleaning. The water shall be distributed over the entire coil surface by precision moulded ABS spray nozzles (1 " x 1/2" orifice) with internal sludge ring to eliminate clogging. Nozzles shall be threaded into spray header header to provide easy removal for maintenance. .8 Eliminators .1 The eliminators shall be constructed entirely of inert polyvinyl chloride (PVC) that has been specially treated to resist ultra violet light. rAssembled in easily handled sections, the eliminator blades shall be spaced on 1 inch centers and shall incorporate three changes in air direction to assure removal of entrained moisture from the discharge ' air stream. They shall have a hooked leaving edge to direct the discharge air away from the fans to minimize recirculation. .9 Finish .1 All pan and casing materials shall be constructed of G-210 heavy gauge mill hot-dip galvanized steel for maximum protection against corrosion. During fabrication, all panel edges shall be coated with a 95% pure zinc-rich compound. After fabrication, the completed unit shall be coated externally with zinc chromatized aluminum paint. .10 Relocate existing evaporator condenser c/w support structure to the new ' locations and pipe to the system. 3.3 BRINE CHILLERS BC-1 (HEAT EXHANGER/PLATE & FRAME) t .1 Provide one (1) brine chiller, flooded ammonia, Plate & Frame designed to cool 1 .2 S.G. brine from 181 to 160 with 10°F saturated suction temperature. Chiller to be complete with Titanium, Plates & Flanges. Vertical gas velocity to provide proper gas/liquid separation. .2 Chiller to have a capacity of 136 tons refrigeration while circulating a minimum of 1900 USGPM at a maximum pressure drop of 7 psi. .3 Chillers shall be Alfa Laval Model BMID. i 1 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 6 1 hall be factor insulated with 2" thick foamed in lace insulation b .4 Chillers s y P Y this section, and covered in hard plastic, or fibreglass shell. .5 Existing shell & Tube chiller shall be removed from site by this section. , .6 Relocate existing chiller and pipe back to the system. • 7 CHt'-'C9 S,10+-Z, 66 & rlrzA)v-n t=on M[N• 200#0.S.I- 3.4 WARM BRINE HEATERS (HX-2) (HX-1 EXISTING) .1 Provide one (1) shell and tube ammonia to brine heat exchangers, each with the capacity to heat 120 USGPM of 1 .2 S.G. brine from 421 to 45° (approximately 145000 BTU/hr.). .2 Each heat exchanger is complete with ammonia liquid drainer for draining of �! any condensed liquid back to the chiller. .3 Heat exchanger shall be CIMCO 6" x 6'-0" long or equal and designed for , 250 psig on the shell and 150 psig on the tube side. .4 Relocate existing brine heater and tie back to the system. 3.5 POTABLE WATER HEATERS (HX-3) , .1 Provide one (1) ammonia to potable water heat exchanger to heat 30 GPM potable water from 60°F to 120°F with superheated ammonia discharge ' gas. Unit is completed with dual ammonia circuit and ammonia liquid drainers. .2 Heat exchanger shall be constructed with a double wall tube to allow a vent path between the tubes. Units shall be enclosed in 18 gauge insulated casing. .3 Heat exchanger shall be Doucette or equal. Model CADS 48M 12TP-12T (C) with DWP of 300 psig on shell and 150 psig on the tube side. .4 HX-3 system layout, equipment, etc. shall be similar to HX-2 system ! complete with expansion tank, valves, feeding outlets, etc. 3.6 . BRINE/GLYCOL HEAT EXCHANGER (HX-4) ! .1 Supply and install one plate and frame heat exchanger as shown on drawings ' to provide jacket cooling for all compressors. Plates to be constructed of #316 stainless steel. Unit to have minimum heat transfer rating of 133,000 BTU/HR, and be equal to Nixon Vicarb Model V-8MST-LP-25-CDX. ' DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 7 3.7 BRINE PUMPS i .1 Brine Pumps (cold) (P1 B) (P1 A Existing/Relocated) Supply and install one (1) base mounted, end suction centrifugal brine pumps, rated at 950 USGPM at 70ft. head. .1 Pumps shall have cast iron or alloy steel impeller carbon steel shaft with stainless steel sleeves, mechanical seal, flexible self-aligning coupling, grease lubricated cast iron bearing housing, and designed for calcium chloride use. .2 Pumps shall be S. A. Armstrong model 8x6x10 or equal. ' .3 Pumps shall be fitted with 30HP high efficiency 1 .15 S.F. O.D.P. 1800 RPM motors 3/60/575V. 1 .4 Relocate existing brine pump anc connect to common heater. .2 Brine Pumps (warm) P26) (P2A Existing/Relocated) .1 Supply and install base mounted, end suction centrifugal brine pumps rated at 120 USGPM at 40ft. head. ' .2 Pumps shall be as per 3.6.2. above. .3 Pumps shall be S.A. Armstrong model 3x2x8 or equal. .4 Pumps shall be fitted with 5HP high efficiency 1 .15 S.F. ODP 1800 RPM motor 3/60/575V. .5 Relocate existing pump and tie back to the system. 3.8 WATER PUMPS (P3B) (P3A EXISTING/RELOCATED) .1 Supply and install a base mounted, end suction centrifugal water pumps, rated at 180 USGPM at 50ft. head for the evaporative condenser. .2 Pumps shall have bronze impeller, carbon steel shaft, mechanical seal, flexible self-aligning coupling, grease lubricated bearing housing and designed ■ for water use. .3 Pumps shall be S.A. Armstrong model 4x3x8W or equal. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 , SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 8 .4 Pumps shall be fitted with a 5 HP 1.15 S.F. ODP high efficiency 1800 RPM motor 3/60/575V. .5 Relocate existing pump and tie back to the system. 3.9 COMPRESSOR JACKET PUMPS (P4A-P4B) .1 Supply and install two (2) close coupled or end suction centrifugal pumps, , rated at 60 USGPM of 40% ethylene glycol at 60 ft. head (one 100% standby). .2 Pumps shall be fitted as 3.7.2. as above. .3 Pumps shall be S. A. Armstrong model 1 1/2x1 x6, complete with 3 HP 1 .15 , S.F. ODP motor 3600 RPM 3/60/575V (or equal). 3.10 SPECIALITY PUMP (P-5) ' .1 Supply and install one (1) high rate sand filter, with 24" (600mm) diameter plastic tank, sand filter media, 3 cubic ft. of filter area, 6 position valve, complete with a 45 USGPM Jacuzzi 5MAG-F pump (T-2). .2 Pump is complete with integral 3/4 HP 1/60/11 OV motor. 3.11 CONDENSER SUMP (T-1) (EXISTING/RELCOATED) .1 Relocate and install a remote sump. .2 Evaluate existing sump capacity & install additional tank if required to match condensers drainage requirements without oveflowing during noramal ON/OFF cycle. .3 New Sump tank shall be constructed of 1/4" mild steel, and connected to existing tank with equalizing connections with isolation valves. .4 Tank shall be fitted with all necessary coupling and stub connections for 3/4 water makeup 2 drain, 6 overflow and 6 pump suction. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 9 3.12 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS (T-3) .1 Supply and install a Dearborn Modulmatic 1, automatic chemical feed and bleed off system, complete with PVC mounting panel on steel supporting frame, magnetic impulse solenoid pump with suction line, foot valve, injection fitting and discharge hose. System shall include contact head water meter and shall be a pre-wired package. Existing systme may refused with additional capacity added with new system if necessary. .2 Chemicals - provide Dearborn #560 scale and corrosion control - provide Dearcide 702 into the sump tank for algicide control ' .3 Equipment to be 1/60/115V. .4 Supply necessary test kits and monthly inspection reports for period of one year. 3.13 PIPE AND FITTINGS .1 Refrigeration Piping. .1 All refrigerant piping shall conform to CSA Standard 652 Mechanical Refrigeration Code ASHRAE/ANSI 631 .5 Refrigeration Piping Code. .2 All fittings shall conform to the above codes and be registered in Ontario with proper CRN numbers. .3 All refrigerant piping 2" and larger shall be welded. .4 All refrigerant piping up to and including 1 1/2" shall be threaded, socket welded or butt welded. .5 All refrigerant valves shall be registered for use in Ontario. .6 Design test pressure for high side pressure shall be 250 psig. .7 Design test pressure for the low side pressure shall be 150 psig. .2 Brine Piping .1 All brine piping and headers shall be Schedule 40 ASTM A53 black steel pipe. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 10 i .2 All rink floor cold piping and underfloor warm piping shall be low , density, virgin resin polyethylene pipe, having an inside diameter of 1.049" and a wall thickness of 0.1". Pipe shall be made of CSA resins with a maximum working pressure of 60 psig at 73°F. .3 Water and Glycol Piping .1 All water and glycol piping up to 2" in diameter shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or type L copper. .2 All water and glycol piping 3" and over shall be Schedule 40 ASTM A53 black steel pipe. 3.14 VALVES ' .1 Refrigerant Valves .1 All refrigerant stop valves shall be designed for the duty intended and have CRN registration. Valves can be screwed or butt welded. Acceptable manufacturers, Henry, Hubbell, Frick. . i .2 All refrigerant control valves shall be manufactured by Refrigeration Specialities, Phillips, Armstrong or Henry as required. .2 Brine Valves .1 All brine valves up to 2" shall be gate type or ball type, screwed, suitable for the fluid being controlled. .2 All brine valves 3" and over, shall be butterfly type, iron body type 316 stainless steel stem, replaceable Buna "N" seat and suitable for mounting between 150 lbs. ANSI flanges. Acceptable manufacturers, Keystone, Bray. .3 All insulated valves shall have extended necks and shafts where the thickness of the insulation interferes with the operation of the handle. .3 Water Valves .1 For copper piping 1/2" to 2", use bronze body solder end gate valves solid wedge disc with non rising stem. .2 For galvanized piping 1/2" to 2", use bronze body screwed end, gate valves, solid wedge disc with non-rising stem. i 1 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 11 3.15 ACCESSORIES .1 Thermometers .1 Supply Trerice series BX or equal, 8"scale, universal angle and locate for easy reading from floor. Provide thermowells for all thermometers. Scale shall be 0°C to 120°C. On compressor's jacket, use min. 3" dia. bi-metal dial thermometer. .2 Supply and install thermometers on brine water, glycol water, heat exchangers, condensers, suction and discharge piping. .2 Gauges ' .3 Supply pressure gauges Trerice 600 series or equal. 4" diameter with range of 0 to twice pressure being measured. Isolate gauges with steel valve or petcock as required. Supply gauges on suction and discharge side of all pumps, strainers, compressors, flow meters. .4 Brine Expansion Mixing Tanks .1 Provide plastic expansion tanks of sizes and capacities to suite plant size complete with all necessary fittings. Drain connections, pressure gauges, backflow preventers and isolation valves shall be supplied at each expansion tank. .5 Motor Control Centre (New Equipment Only/Existing MCC To Be Relocated) .1 The Motor Control Centre shall be Class 1 , Type B and constructed of standardized vertical sections bolted together with a common 600 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 hertz bus bar system rated 600 Amperes. All equipment shall be "front" mounted and front accessible, and be installed in an EEEMAC-2 enclosure with ASA #61 light grey finish. .2 Each starter shall be combination type and provided with fused disconnect switch, fuses, three (3) overload heaters and control transformer. Each starter shall have an engraved lamacoid nameplate designating the name of the equipment controls. Fuses shall be CSA HRCI-J class. .3 The Motor Control Centre shall be complete with all necessary control relays, control transformers, selector switches, pilot lights main disconnect and be completely wired to operate and control the mechanical equipment connected to it. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700- EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 12 .4 Unit to have bottom mounted, continuous copper ground bus. .5 All incoming conductors shall be installed on marked terminal blocks. , .6 All equipment shall be CSA approved and the complete installation shall meet the latest requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code. .7 Relocate existing MCC and tie back all existing equipment. 1 .8 Motor starters shall be of the following sizes and shall be Hand/Off/Auto options. Motor HP One at EEMAC No. 3 Starter Compressor C-3 50 (size to suit future 75 H.P. Motor) One at EEMAC No. 2 Starter Condenser Fan 15 One at EEMAC No. 3 Starter Brine Pump P-1 B 30 One at EEMAC No. 1 Starter Warm Brine Pump 26 5 One at EEMAC No. 1 Starter Condensing Pumps P3B, 5 5 Two at EEMAC No. 1 Starter Jacket Water P4A,P4B 3 One at EEMAC No. 1 Starter Sand Filter Pump P-5 0.75 .9 Contractor shall provide 575 to 120 volt transformer in MCC and feed all , 120 volt equipment (chemical feeds, pumps, wiring and interlocks, etc.) for all work to be carried out in the refrigeration room. Sizing of transformer shall meet Division 16 and Hydro Requiremetrns. anrtr>luc, R.,Fcoca-7c'V mrr, sh/t 3E krurr-v FaX Exls7lNC R.ccoc47ep y�4mPj; Cowpvnffre-2 , 7/7VXf e Safety Equipment .1 Provide and install an ammonia gas mask and canister set. 1 .2 Provide and install a gas leak detector for ammonia and wire to exhaust fan and fresh air motorized damper for room ventilation. , .3 Provide and install an emergency fire box, painted red on outside wall. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 13 .4 Provide emergency remote switches and panel for compressors and ventilation. On detecting a leak in the room, amonia leak control panel shall override room ventilation thermostat and start exhaust fan and open fresh air motorized damper. Panel shall be mounted outside the refrigeration room. All wiring for control panel, fan and damper contacts (end switches) by Division 17700. .7 Flow Meters .1 Supply and install Taco flow meters and matching readout instrument for brine pumps, condenser pumps, warm brine pumps and jacket water pumps loops. .8 Inserts .1 Supply and install four goal anchors and inserts on two ice pads. .9 Snow Pit Heating .1 Supply and install heating coils of size and capacities shown on drawings complete with pumps, piping, valves, expansion tnaks, etc. to provide 600 MBH of heating from coil to snow pit water. .2 All piping from pumps to heating coils shall be installed in refrigerant pipe trenches and supported on structural steel provided by this contractor. Piping shall be instaltted yb Div. 15400 from refrigeration room to snow pit. This section shall supply coil and controls to Div.15400 for final piping connection. .3 Coils shall be supported with minimum 4 legs and anchored to pit floor. PART 4 - INSTALLATION i4.1 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT .1 Install all piping and equipment in a neat manner, including water piping to refrigeration system. Section 15400 will provide a 1" (25mm) valved cold water line to Compressor Room within 20 ft. of this contractors equipment. .2 Section 15400 will provide drainage piping and hub/funnel drains in Refrigeration Room. Locate exactly on a dimensioned print so that Section 15400 can adequately carry out their work. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 14 .3 Install all ground floor equipment on concrete bases. Coordinate forms and anchors to provide adequate clearance for maintenance and equipment removal for service. Install all upper level equipment on steel bases or brackets. .4 The General Division shall provide pipe trenches. Provide, locate and set all , pipe header support frames. All sleeves through trench walls, shall be supported by the refrigeration contractor. .5 Provide all rink pipe supports. Provide all ice pad chair and anchoring systems. Have a representative present when sand is placed and compacted over warm brine pipes, and concrete is poured over rink piping to be sure piping is not disturbed or damaged. During the concrete pour, water main pressure shall be used to maintain a test pressure on the floor piping. Immediately after concrete pour, ties between rebar and pipes will be saw , cut to allow separate expansion and contraction of floor. .6 Section 15850 will provide ventilation for Compressor Room except that the ammonia leak monitoring system and fan control override shall be supplied by this division. 4.2 SYSTEM CHARGING .1 Charge brine system with an inhibited calcium chloride brine with a specific , gravity of 1 .2. .2 Charge refrigeration system with refrigerant R-717. .3 Charge jacket water system with ethylene glycol, downtherm SR1. .4 This contractor shall supply an approved ammonia charging hose and hand oil pump for charging oil and ammonia into system. 4.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION .1 Colour code and identify piping with stencilling with 1 " (25mm) letters. Colour coding shall be by colour bands 4" (100mm) wide every 6 meters. Provide flow direction arrows. .2 Where pipes pass through walls, identify on each side of wall. .3 Service Bantling Colour Legend Dom. Cold Water Green D.C.W. Refrigeration Condenser DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 15 Water Supply Green C.T.S. ' Refrigeration Condenser Water Return Green C.T.R. Chilled Brine Green C.Brine Supply/C. Brine Return Warm Brine Green W.Brine Supply/W.Brine Return Ammonia Yellow NH3 i 4.4 EQUIPMENT WIRING ' .1 Division 16 Contractor shall supply and install and then connect one (1) 600 volt, 3 phase 400 amp, 3 wire feeder into the motor control centre and 1- 600V, 3 phase, 3W 200 amp to a new MCC II. All wiring for the refrigeration system shall be supplied and installed by this Section to the Division 16 specifications. MCC's supplied and installed by Div. 17. 4.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION .1 Each ice surface shall be individually controlled by a buried ice sensor. sensorSensor shall be wired to brine control system to operated brine pump. .2 The brine pumps P1 A, P1 B and the refrigeration compressors C-1,C-2,C-3 are all controlled from the Ice Rink Controllers located and wired to Staff room by this contractor. .3 Each Ice Rink Controller shall be capable of individually programming day, night and game temperature conditions throughout a 24 hour period, 7 days a week. ' .4 The controller will display compressor run time, temperatures of the ice surface, supply and return brine as well as dry bulb temperatures both inside and outside the arena. 4.6 CONTROL SEQUENCE .1 P1 A,P1-B and Brine Control Valves C1 .1 A and C1.113 .1 The two rink buried sensors drive the respective motorized brine control valves (CV 1.1 A) or (CV 1 .1 B) to the wide open position when the average temperature rises above the set point for each rink. .2 When either of the two brine control valves are driven to wide open, ' respective pump shall start. DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 16 .3 The brine pumps will continue to operate until both control valves have been driven to the closed position. .4 For fast cooling of either of the ice rinks, valve to the ice rink shall be opened and both pumps and chiller loads shall be directed to one ice rink manually. On achieving ice temperatre, the sysetm shall revert back to one rink, one pump sequence as noted in item .1, .2 & .3 above. .5 Manual override for continuous brine pump operation shall be provided on pump starter "hand" position. Compressors shall still cycle "on and off" as noted in Compressor Sequence Section 4.6.2. ' .2 Compressors C-1,C-2,C-3 .1 Compressors C-1,C-2, and C-3 will not start unless the brine pump P-1 A and P-1 B is running. .2 There are time delays between all compressor starts. The starting and ! stopping of the compressors is initiated by the microprocessor controller for each rink and the set points programmed into the corridor. .3 If the first compressor started does not lower the ice surface temperature to set point the second machine will start after a short time delay. Similarly the third machine will start on the 3 compressor system. .4 If the small rink is satisfied and down to set point temperature and the prime control is closed, the second rink can initiate compressors C- ' 1,C-2 and C-3 and direct the total refrigeration effect to one rink. .5 Each compressor control circuit is wired to the following safety controls that will stop the specific motor driving the compressor if a failure is detected; high ammonia pressure, low ammonia pressure, oil failure, high discharge temperature, high oil temperature, high liquid level in the chiller(s). ! .3 The first compressor jacket glycol pump (P-4A) will start if any one compressor is started. ' .1 The second compressor jacket glycol pump (P-48) will start act as a 100% standby for the first pump. ' .2 The pumps can be alternated through lead-lag selection i 1 DIVISION 17 - REFRIGERATION PROJECT NO. 97309 SECTION 17700 - EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS Page: 17700 - 17 .4 The condenser fan (EC-1 and EC-2) and condenser spray water pumps (P-3) are controlled by individual reverse acting high pressure controls on each of the refrigeration systems. ' .1 The condenser water pump will start first on rise in discharge pressure to preset valve. .2 If the pressure continues to rise, the condenser fan will start on attaining the preset pressure on the control. .3 EC-1 and EC-2 shall be cycle automatically to meet chiller load. .5 Underfloor Heating Pumps P2-A, P2-13 .1 Underfloor temperature sensors TS-5 in rink "A" and TS-6 in rink "8" will cycle their respective heating pumps on or off. .2 The heating pumps will not run if all compressors on their respective system are off. .6 The sand filter water pump will run continuously during operation of the ' spray water pump. This pump should be stopped manually when switching the sand filter to the backwash position. ' 4.7 ADJUSTING AND START-UP AND MANUALS .1 After the plant has been test run and brine temperatures have been dropped ' to normal operating conditions, this contractor shall set, test and ad;ust all operating controls, and also instruct the owners in the operation and control of the equipment and systems for a period of 24 hours 3-day sessiosn. Two ' (2) copies of operating and maintenance manuals for all equipment, will be provided. End of Section SET NO. ADDITION AND RENOVATIONS 4, ARNET B . RICKAR [D Q; Otv IFILEX MUNKWALlTY OF CLARINGTON TENDER NO. CL 9727 ARIO BOWMANVI E ONT PROJECT NO. 97100 NOVEMBER 13 1997 1 IUD FOR MUNICIPALITY OF Ofl a) x 0 Z Q 0 ONTARIO 0 LIST OF DRAWINGS j W Z ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION ELECTRICAL Q A101 SITE PLAN 5100 KEY PLAN AND GENERAL NOTES M101 SITE PLAN MECHANICAL R201 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN REFRIGERATION E101 SITE PLAN, AND DETAILS � ELECTRICAL A102 PLANTING PLAN 5101 TYPICAL DETAILS M201 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING R801 SCHEMATICS + DETAILS REFRIGERATION 0 + DRAINAGE E201 ELECTRICAL NEW RINK LIGHTING LAYOUT m A103 ENLARGED SITE AND LANDSCAPE S200 FOUNDATION PLAN R802 SCHEMATICS DIAGRAM REFRIGERATION PLAN AT MAIN ENTRANCE M202 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING E202 ELECTRICAL NEW RINK POWER LAYOUT S201 FOUNDATION PLAN + DRAINAGE A201 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PLAN E203 ELECTRICAL PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR S202 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN M203 FLOOR PLAN SPRINKLER ZONING PLAN LIGHTING + POWER LAYOUTS U= A202 PARTIAL GROUND FLOOR PLAN, S203 ROOF FRAMING PLAN M204 PARTIAL GROUND FL. PLAN H.V.A.C. E204 ELECTRICAL PART FLOOR PLAN 0 FRONT LOBBY LIGHTING + POWER LAYOUTS S204 PART ROOF FRAMING PLAN M205 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN H.V.A.C. A203 PARTIAL GROUND FLOOR PLAN, ARENA E801 LEGEND, DETAIL AND SINGLE LINE S300 FOUNDATION SECTIONS M206 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL A204 PARTIAL UPPER FLOOR PLAN S301 SECTIONS M801 SCHEMATICS + DETAILS MECHANICAL A205 ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS E802 LIGHTING FIXTURES SCHEDULE, PANEL S302 SECTIONS SCHEDULE AND DETAILS ELECTRICAL A206 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A207 ROOF PLAN A301 PARTIAL NORTH + SOUTH ELEVATIONS 0 A302 PARTIAL EAST + WEST ELEVATIONS CONTRACT DRAWINGS A303 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS OWNER CONTRACTOR Z Corporation of the Munici alit of Clarin t Peak Engineering & Construction Inc Z A304 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS name of owner name of contractor A305 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS WITNESS signature signature A401 SECTIONS "-7, 7e, e name nd title f per signing lyA1o� name and title ofperso signing A402 SECTIONS A403 SECTIONS si nature signature signature signature NUNN A501 DETAILS name and title of person signing 4_ /f name and title of person signing name and title of person signing name and title of person signing A502 DETAILS O A503 DETAILS CL U A601 PLAN DETAILS A701 STAIR DETAIL A801 SCHEDULES A901 MILLWORK DETAILS w 00 991 ) LIMITED BARRY BRYAN ASSOCIATES 1 d � I•--- z z-1 a O cv Ld NGIN R ARCHIT CT ROJ CT ANAG RS 0 t F�'-�� � ,.'.° , .•..,- ,"` ... ' I.J. Y.! W _ 4 Q- ` - _ _ 4 L = - STANLEY COURT WHITBY ONTARIO LIN 8P9 (905) 666 5252 o LIJ4 .. W _ . - LLJ f m o , L - U L T '' j f - MITELMAN AND PARTNERS CARRUTHERS AND WALLACE:;�:�" LEIPCIGER KAMINKER cv � F-- J � s � � � = O W Z CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS CONSULTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS 0 C/ TORONTO, ONTARIO (416) 489 0052 _ 4 ' ,,. &i ` Vf DON MILLS, ONTARIO (41 6) 445 8255 o w� ' Q Q O C7 � - O C .ti 3 r L s g O - � � � �. � . t/��������/ ! � � G` \ \§! v \ %� ' , . f �2 � � � � �d§ ! . � . >» . . ,. ! ��:�\ _ y: �\ 5%222} _ . . ..11. ;. Y<. Y ,y I _ _ - i.. 3.�,, • 1 f 4 :. <. .. 1. - -I 11 . .., ' _ _ - - _:. - - .:, ,' - coN rACtOR SHALL cHtCK ANO VERiP"!-I ,F 14, . ROAD ALL O!'YA/I OZ ,9Z /V G'1�NC1`S.SYONS > & 2 ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE (NOT OPEN) -PLAN SHOWING TOPOGRAPHICAL DETAIL 1 . I OF PART OF LOT 15, CONCESSION 1 , TOWNSHIP OF DARLINGTON, now in the MUNICIPALITY OF' CLARINGTON N0. ISSUES PATE BY REGIONAL MUNICIPALITY OF DURHAM X01 ' SLOPE TO DRAIN i �� 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT D.L B. SOLE — t' . 400 I / 2 97 , . 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1309 D.L.B. SURVEY BY BROWN do COGGAN LTD., ONTARIO LAND SURVEYORS B11 i N5�1 . 11 1 DIVISION STREET, SUITE 'B', BOWMANVILLE (905) 623-7251 .I I I I' SURVEY DATED: AUGUST 15, 1997 - FILE NO. 1970713 BACKFILL PER SPECIFICATIONS • - _ BENCH MARK 9g NNh95 . ELEVATIONS SHOWN HEREON ARE REFERRED TO A CUT CROSS -,r-PROPOSED FOUNDATION WALL NNE• ON TOP OF THE CONCRETE BASE FOR THE DURHAM REGIONAL g 3 (bill=: SEE STRUCTURAL' DUR. REG. POLICE � SaN POLICE SIGN APPROXIMATELY 12m NORTH OF THE NORTH EAST NpI ,, ASf HAL T CORNER OF THE SUBJECT PROPERTY AND HAVING A GEODETIC 19 g1 ELEVATION OF 115.58m. 1111 BRICK �g �� • NNh• . BUILDING , �1 �� ���`'' NOTE , � � `9 5o NNe• NN6. ,\'\ I UNDERGROUND HYDRO, UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE AND GAS MAIN WERE � flll "1A � NN1 ��� 1e" - q z N N1' LOCATED AND MARKED BY THE APPROPRIATE UTILITY TECHNICIAN. u N N1 -1 1 06 R 1 �0 0 N5' WATERMAIN LOCATION ALONG REGIONAL ROAD 57 1S DERIVED FROM INFORMATION _ __ �� N1N. 0, 0 11 NN6 SIGN 0" . , SUPPLIED BY DURHAM REGION AND IS APPROXIMATE ONLY. 00 6 1N1 �, ASPHALT P DE PLASTIC WOVEN 100mm DIA. PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE '1 N,o 'dam 156 AND BOTTOM CABLE 1`0 P WITH FILTER SOCK AT BASE OF FOOTING. a BE MAINTAINED RIGID I g LEGEND PLACE AT SAME DEPTH IN LOCATIONS x p�\):5 6 05 AT ALL TIMES THROUGHOUT W v. F RE NSO N9 OF GRADE BEAM COMMUNICATIONS .MANHOLE NNa�1 �N1 NN1 A CONSTRUCTION HYDRANT( �`�' 9 1209A EXISTING GRADE FILTER: 19mm CLEAN STONE N2N 6 D TOWER 1,`0'� 132.80 ,, I UTILITY 'I • r a g9 GsIB/O/V• krO WALL TELEPHONE PEDEST yg5N542`L�PS�L 1 IN FILTER TRANSITION: GEOTEXTILE FILTER CLOTH N71 26 00 E �� NN N5. ! 6 I miIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII x PROPOSED GRADE OR 150mm MIN. THICKNESS OF FINE AGGREGATE OPSS 1002 A5 ON GRASS 151 CABLE TV PEDESTAL DIRECTION & PERCENT SLOPE ( ) N 1�' N1 N20 NN* RELOCATED ,, l N1 ' FIRE HYD. REMOVE PROVIDE CAST-IN-PLACE - - - -- -- - --- -- ---- --- -- -- GATEPOST , �� 'r 4= DIRECTIONAL ARROW FOR TRAFFIC ---- --_______,____W_________. %_- - -- -` - CURB TO EDGE OF SHOULDER 1. (TO BE PAINTED ON ASPHALT) p L.D. ASPHALT —; �- _ 2g LI BASEBALL DIAMOND 50 PAVEMENT TAPER CURB AT TERMINATION RIM 1®20.75 1 Q1 N2N ,50 / 1 BOLLARDS ��8�'� GRAf�£L t 4� �16�9� L D. ASPHALT M x � Z - EXIST. FEATURE TO BE REMOVED S U B D RAl N DETAIL N 55 N2 EX. GRAI/EL I N2o PA�I� RIM 11 I - "" 1, EXIST. TREE TO BE REMOVED A101 N.T.S. N2 P ` �~�• ! a Ew I e Q CONSTRUCTION ACCESS/ FOR RELOCATION N 50 - 1 1 1' REM SODDED N6y1 - ,j yy9 _ o - Y EGRESS ONLY. L.D. LIGHT DUTY - / N PROP. FIN. ELEV. - -- - __CA IH - GATEFOS' (Ou ' T. UNDERCl10U _ -O9 ------ 0 N1 `�f 1 N� 5 N URB vALVE NN5 3I H.D. HEAVY DUTY �. 9/L x . WATER 1 ® NEW CATCH BASIN/MANHOLE 09 j N1 EXIST. NO _ N1 ' N �,► REMDVE N/L ' y1 CATCH N2N• XI .,A EXIST. � C.B./M.M. •N/ZN BASIN I * FIRE NN6 `� �s�N p ■ NEW CATCH BASIN GRADE TO MEET 1 ! ,2N�� NS , 1 (RELOCATE) 0 W m SA ST. REMOVE ,2, i / ABANDON EXIST. STORM N`L�� I 9 m E, SIGN BASE ` O . D.LC.e. . NEW DITCH INLET CATCH BASIN AND REPLACE ALL I ' 9°" 0 I O a EXIST. DAMAGED I 0 PIPING AND PROVIDE ,1 1. x Om 1 U 2 � x �� N NEW AS SHOWN CATCH EXIST. CATCH BASIN ASPHALT N1N' R i i SEE MECHANICAL DWGS. I Q CON PAD 3a § I p O BASIN GRASS � I -� N N I � I SUBDRAIN - Ommo PERF. -- - - - 1 1 z 14 N5 y� � . ------- NEW SUBDRAINAGE PIPE R f PIPE. SLOPE D DRAIN TO i . I PERIMETER P . PLACE N9 k (100mm DIA. PERFORATED) I p SEE DETAIL 1 A101 FOR 1' 00 I IN1N\ IN MIN. 150m DEEP bRECH 'L.D. ' �-�5• I I O DETAIL AT FOUNDATION WALL �� I 02 '�, ON 1 IN NATIVE SU OIL AND SURRO ED U AVEME 4 �' 4 I . N, 1 � N20 t, BY 100mm RAVEL AND Z Ill, FILTER CLOTH x NNQj9° o ,�.\°c SIDEWALK I I I z N�9 HALT R , N 9 I I � �.`1, ® z S00 I I 8 61 I N`��` N \5 60 -- ASP _ GU E 12 I w ` 116�p o ti C I a�j �fi I I�\ET NIL 9 ATC I (� t^\09 v I .t� I R I�r I 0, I I 1 ATE E> NSA, X01 S/DEryALK N10g11i N MODIFY EXIST. LINE N20°' Q I `'� PROPOS D � M o-' - _ PAINTING TO DELINIATE I � ge1 I / ADDITIO a SOD �FIREQ 'i0U O - 9 ISLANDS AS SHOWN 1 2° �y % I p HYDRANT 011 09 ASPHALT J __r--_ - N2 i i �N,).N 1 O 1A O __ m In 6 I I I I N ®x NN , • ==`�'__,, alrT R 066 CATCH i I O N _.-== g6 N 1,;,) BASIN 0 I � G101RNET B. RICiI�AR� I " N ` 1500 ,� RIM 11i.96 I , O =- con�RETA 413 N2a � �I RECREATION COMPLEX N2N Q 1 _ I EXISTING STRUCTURE I o I �__ - -_ N2N 05 N1 9 D D I I i W ; N1°' 6000 0 6000 O �� LIG T grk I I I Q I - - LIFE PAIN G FO 0. N1 ' (�y ROADWAYS do P ING (TYP) N1 ST DA D � Q EXISTING FINISHED I I I I 0 I FLOOR®ION ON Om 9 2 . I I 1 I CON PAD 1 0 -� 6.1 Q 0 9N N1°- 10 96 N 93 1 I I N.01 N20' PROVIDE C 100mm0 3 w 5�N N1 ' N �;� SUBDRAIN UND EXTERIO o PILE , O j OF BLDG. CONNECT TO c� ~J- �: g� 016 , ! I EXIST. AN DRAIN TO SUMP 1 i�? � 1° i 209 \ ( AT SEC ER OF ADDITION m 6 N� a\ Og1 0 I 1 FLOOR ELEVATION V_ ______ V _ .- N1 9 ATC :2° REFER TO D X03 F0�ENLARGEMENT OF �►REA N 1, + N6 Pik II N °• Ord R V Vol— p�`�" --- � 6 k 1 N , I % PROVIDE 2400 HIGH I N 61 NN O CURB •N v 15 j N -1 CAT H I SOLID HOARDING IN N1 _� F.F.E. tY ul � LIGHT O PATIO AREA. ENGINEER & I PROPOSED � 3 I ► MODIFY EXIST. LINE Og3 � CONSTRUCT TO WITHSTAND 000 � ANDARD O. PAINTING TO DEUNIATE i N� � (HYDRO TRANSFORMER ON I OCT I ISLANDS AS SHOWN I � WIND LOADS ETC. ( PAD No12mx2m CONC. PAD � 2 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 D.L.B. V ! _ N2 6 PLANTING 1 30/97 '1 I 4 I . r-- UN�ERCR0vND NN N$6 _ V _ _ s 0 1 PER ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCT D.L.B. �I - , 30 9 GRASS Ii � I -- -- -- -- - GAS '1 UNDERGROUND C� � 1 3:1 N EX. ASPHAL T PARK/NG LOT CP'1f I I r — i r ,LN�NI VALVE N2o, Z0. P'`'�^'E --�- - I 1 R, . N 1 iN1N o1- EX T, N2°'9 ,\S%.1 -_ �� ppy) .F, 'r, I � 5 3, �0 w, AA� N0, REVISIONS DATE BY L 1.I- —r 'TRRN 1 y,X,I 90N — �. •\ , 95 D RD g r — IS liEQ".w«n ,_ SODDED' 6 NO I `v``` \ON . I I O. N�pS I\� k' } i ,' 1 1. U 1 1 x N XIS . N w /* �_ I I Q BARRY • BRYAN II - \`� PLAN G - tT # t . 1 ��0 20 2 - MANHOLE � BED I ;'� x PLAZA CONCRETE - - �' N, 11� N _ NJ#' o ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED I�wi NT; 0, 1) ( ® / r N e NNe ARCHITECT • ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS aN I.\ N � 7 � x I ,20.7 ��- ',, o - - --> ----- - I �1 • Telephone (905) 666-5252 N,L° k �,0g0 �9I I i r- QP , py�\ 1, gg 0 �, 01 i i i l� 1%r" N2N a t �, v R 6 .% O r t� ` 1N N20• PROVIDE 100mmv SUBDRAIN 5 N1 N?-N'FI E i I ('"�''�` \ ^ ) � NEW D.I.C. . BOOp P/ NN66 �N,C tiG,./�' `� O� \� �a N2°• y BELOW GRANULAR MATERIAL ON N P LT HYD T; ! ( `LJ, V Q o6 SODDED RIM 11a.00 1-- �;, - ,- N2o �s \~ ' •__ g5 BOTH SIDES OF MAIN ROAD I � Z , _` ; I c� a-- , _ ° A N20' 0 AS INDICA D. 0 N D s- OF 2 �+ Q © 66 Q . r 209 C NN CT 0 B.' 2370 o V ,R=1 0 0 NNe' 0 f " �_ N o ;� ". I -' 20 rO S � -- 20. - 1�1 (� 6N ,L 11 ^ --:a ,w N 20 �- N NC CUB GR ✓£ — ,-- , R. .\g. 9,1 / ® : N 1 3. C G E TO E __ I ) W 1 9qp N NN �yaF p pY /3 �n O 0$ 0 1 5 N a , .. SOD 3A ST. R ALT 1 " i I l i J 0 0 N / 1 2 IRE P� ! i1 y�� N1 N O9 2°I---- cr SODDED p ` EXIST. O9> --- .Oil- N 6 65N Gay d/ A / ' NV' - \' g 1 AND REPLACE ALL CATCH x _ _ ,� . `Z�`" 250mms °05 N8. N yYW/L£ -.-r-' . 14 HYD ANT I � ,( -° ri x Or 09N �1 �® o x ASPH. DAMAGED 1N N2N 2° i N2 X20 f�? 4 i .�5i j i�2 Inc N2 x N 6 \ QQ' N - ,,( 'N2 N109, N201 2 } 209 N °,ra►1 9 • ' I i :�s Rd�s; \,\ '1 '�J l G N9'bk 1N9°` 6 'D -\15 NN66 - d �+ �D�_._---- , N 2°' 204 --_. N' i rV� ,J BF�U t / �ggy NNc'�a" HYDROSEEDED N 9 ,� `- AT I 1 0 6 H D ASPNAL _ 6000 1 �' . __--- --- - - L . H T o .{�A e) PA R 1°` PA M 1 , DD D N2a. - j _ --� ) - 1 -� --- r - -A ti Ll�>a/ - - -- N BASIN DETAIL 6 g GUTTE 1 N --- - to--- - - 17 kf ' ti --- - - -- -- -� 8X ' I,2Q,-- - - - EXIST. ----AS—HaLr 8 -- -- ---- -- - -- - -- - / % ;R ..„ I n I' I - - O � O 1 L-_ ___ .� � � � J NUMBER �1 I ;�� 60 N2 B SIN N2 - w" _—_�;. u: �� fir,d y ° _ PAINTED 1 CO _' ` S [ �� �` TIL DETAIL OR iJla. C {ST. t 89000 4 ISLANDS NP. 5er 20, TC •Nt ( e ;SOD EDO 0 ,Nj g1, s' POLE }��, REFERENCE 1� N20 16 n °q 2FjO0 N2N x gyp, IN •1 _ 9 9� N .� DRAWING NO. 4 ��, $ 1 �� --/ , - 5 / N,5 NN6 V +` 0 4� 5 ,/ti % LIGHT p U N�,N 1--..- \ O� 1 56 �°�"�� �Ga' 2' I2 01 N,I,," it OSTANDARD CURB \. 0' 16 a 1 O 11 0�0 - ! ,o y°' ( SODDED 22 1 x c.'tASB x® L.D. ASPHALT IT 1 qR � _, ,�1% O N1 N5 1 2 .1 N20�1 v�- I' A5 GRASS I ,\ �� PAVEMENT x -sy;G 1 .� 20 N b 1�%To. 1 30 At - �q, 1�' .I N � ,,� I,I I PROJECT: ' N2o Z 20yN N2°�1 �N2° + ) 6000 2N - N I� I N R"? v x N p/ �k 01' i `11 � - 1e ��p 56 fi N 01 RIM t2•10 -�-•" ®x S°. - �O p 1 N2 �b 2 ATERRVALVE RH ;I '�. g / ��l AND p� /� N2o �.N2 1� ' 1\ ' R SODDED /mot J j � �:SV �°z Ne"a� N N 1'1f\V �1G V11 ` �`' 1 1 �-°� ---W N1 I y6 5k PEDE �� c+� N C ., `� 1 S O x 11 SODDED P T TPEE TALE 1° / 1 r�9 . / 9 COMPLEX 05 I 112244 I x x pA MENT `�- 1 30.48 M NN 1 k6 o s. NN N1 e ( N�` N1N' �I •5730 E NN 1 0 , MUNICIPALITY 0 CLARINGT N ,20 y6 �lr � ( ;1 � t �� SODDED- t-�., �; ,�,N fO �j N' ,f i 61.L) •'�2N ...i:�r. N2N• •:POL WrvT� � 'I ,,c��1�1� ,%� _. , ¢ ---^�- z 4 - � WATER VALVE 0 5 SODDED x P N2N N 6 $`" a 61 " , y' -mac° I Ng`� ,/ 1 • N ® AS Ng4�0 30 E - =1 —�` HYDRAnZT N,1 a s2 NN6 N /' ,o ,e5 100 2440 KING STREET WEST 11 I 1 1___ ;fi ( -----��- o N2N�y1� ". NZN• mil'- Xv - NN186 D CN ` �,e SIDEwA�K REt R E N�1' 1 BOWMANViLLE ONTARIO Q �I \ _ - - _r- - 2A 6e 965L11 DARQ � DNS Q_, 0 A ? - N6. N 6 NN • g A Nh FI 11. �.�"� N96A - - N,y . 5 ��- 92 F �3 - -" gN5 IR N N N ,N , r-�,, 1N _ - N6. N6. RETE k DRAWING. t' 18 ,� -"l N `�� 05 LIGHT N CONC NNS � ATCH NN5 S ----_11 1. m �� NN9 O GAS �" NN9' �0.. ���' STANs. s ', ASIN N850 _ y T ---- TER 9N-11 9 ON -�- i r;._._,r CRp i N91 N �°`_ �1 N 6 G(7 N N1 o 1 NN / %I0• NDER _ %5N N �- N8, CONCRETE . 9 e9 \ N9 65 �l,\g 65 NN9 6 "'e--t-- , "E , N�9• ZN9 N6. N CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ACCURATE NN® r .r - , N * __ - 06 N N62• 00 � N�• _ GUTTER LOCATES OF ALL U/G SERVICES SITE PLAN > k 0 0 • 0 _ _-- INCLUDING DEPTH OF SERVICES PRIOR , � Ng11 � 45 N . - O LIGHT -- --- J TO ANY EXCAVATION ON SITE. -> N NN%, SIGN 5 56- 1 0 • N,\q. STANDARD ��-- NN6 0 N N9. 960. GUY POLE NN9 K NN9°� S/D£WAL ~ LIGHT 1 NN9. _yc�: NN9' g , 01 PA�£MENT 6 °� 1 52.74 NN9 CONCRETE , 4• IRE O LIGHT N92o. _ �N NNs - Al NN STAND N91 H L . N95 HYDRA1y7 N 1 �- N91 NNA„ N N n..; NN91 STANDARD Y. BY. DRAWN B CHECKED oa N65'44'00 E NN9. 96 - yo. OF - - A.M.M. D.L.B. - C> 1 r 90`L MANHOLE ot. _ CONCRETE 11 _ _.-- C;; -_„� C FT. NN 5 LIGHT :: I I . NN9 DATE SCALE' E �, - � NN9•) STANDARD r,,+ _ Na SEPTEMBER 1997 1: 40-0 (METRIC) r..o N : I I N6 . . . - --- , , q -.--- PROJECT N0: • DRAWING NO:#0 -OHWA - 11 . I I I c� 5 ,5 - HT . 0 9 2 -__ r ( 669 S�tANDARD NN6 �16v N 9 CATCH N NN N 6' BASIN �2 1 ,�N93°`' ,. . L. 11. i l l , 11 En I 1 : IS, 5 -I.-L'' -1 I T 6 R 'L r „'.!,,,- , - , . . 'L - 11, -1. I rHfw Y . L . I I I I . . I I I 11, . I I -L 9 N I :1 I . I .. . ' :_ I . t., I . I I L , I I I .: A • I - .L L 39 , .1 - 1 . 1. ; N- , .� r b fR . �., g 6� : N „ . ca wy - _ .. , E, :, s .. ... .. _v y .,. i �_: L, -......�A.��n_�,.-.z...-..__.-.v.,.c.._.__.�x,:..v:.:.zau�wr�a�. � t � t{ f r� r Tn Pt G ^i E d � rK" r , CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY- r , . ALL DIMENSIONS AT ,THE SITE ;ri ,• - .SLANT l.LfST -- TRE. ES KEY BOTANICAL NAME COMMON NAME NUM. SIZE COND. REMARKS A ACER PLATMODES 'CRIMSON KING' CRIMSON KING, MAPLE 4 60mm cal EXIST. 4 EXISTING FOR RELOCATION w B AGER PLAT WDES 'SCHWIEDLERI' SCHWEDLER MAPLE 8 Gomm cal W.B. C ACER SACCHARUM SUGAR MAPLE 9 60mm cal W.B. I NO. ISSUES DATE BY D /WELANCHIER; CANADENSIS SERVICEBERRY 7 40mm cal BdtB SINGLE-STEM SPECIMENS N / ED FOR TENDER ''OCT 1 ISSUED A.W.M' - E FR/tXINU$ PENNSYLVANK:A 'PAT'MORE' PATMORE ASH 14 Gomm -cal W.B. V97 F GLEDITSiA TRIACANT'HO5 'SHAflEMASTER' SHAOEMASTER HONEY LOCUST 2 90mm col W.B. 1 EXISTING FOR RELOCATION 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1309 p.L.B;' G PICEA OMORIKA SERBIAN SPRUCE 3 150cm ht. WB H PICEA PUNGENS BLUE SPRUCE , 15 240cm ht. EXIST. 14 EXIS71NG FOR RELOCATION PILAUS NIGRA AUSTRIAN PINE 5 240cm ht. EXIST. 5 EXISTING FOR RELOCATION J PRUNUS VIRGINIANA 'SHUBERT' ''SHUBERT CHOKECHERRY 11 50mm cal B&S , A K QUERCUS OAK 1 60mm cal EXIST. EX ISTING FOR RELOCATION BRICK I SPh'AL T BUILDING L SYRINGA RETICULATA"IVORY SILK' NOR,Y SILK TREE LILAC 10 50mm cal BdcB SPECIMENS M TILIA CORDATA 'GREENSPIRE' GREENSPIRE LINDEN 14 Gomm cal WB 13 EXISTING FOR RELOCATION SIGNASPHALT TREE RELOCATION NOTES : 03 � R� FIRE �, COMMUNICATIONS O MANHOLE WATER VALVE FR' ; TOWER A NUMBER OF TREES ON SITE HAVE BEEN NOTED FOR RELOCATION. D R. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE EQUIPMENT (IE TREE SPADE) OF SUITABLE SIZE TO SAFELY RELOCATE TREES TO PROPOSED LOCATIONS. WHERE POS THE TREES SHALL, BE DIRECTLY PLANTED INTO THEIR PROPOSED N71.26'00"E G.aBiON WA[[ 132.80 I POLE TELEPHONE PEDEST I LOCASTIONS AND GUYED APPROPRIATELY. .SOME LOCATIONS MAY NOT CABLE TV PEDESTAL BE READY TO ACCEPT THE TREES AT TIME OF REMOVAL. THESE TREE'S � I SHALL BE PLACED IN A HOLDING AREA EITHER ON SITE {AS DIRECTED BY OWNER) OR AT.AN OFF-SITE LOCATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL - ---------- - -------- -- --- - --- ------------- - `: ATEI'C;ST I i __ - -- CUR - 1 BE RE5PONS18LE TO MAINTAIN (IE WATER ETC.) THE TREES UNTIL SUCH �' L.D. ASPHALT CO"i"' ✓-�' TIME AS THEY CAN BE PLANTED IN THEIR PERMINANT LOCAPON. PAVEMENT M H ALL TREES SHALL BE GUARANTEED FOR A ONE YEAR PERIOD FROM GR.4t/EL -�� 9 GROVEL L.D. ASPHALT / ca THE TIME OF ACCEPTANCE BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. ,' 3 PAVEMENT REM NE SODDED / .— o -- GATE DST c�oU s -� IN E/TGROU M1�--- C _C B_ - • / WATER EXIST. CATCH _ - VALVE BASIN - I � HYDRANT 3 I u� w v ( 1.2x3.Om a ci v N v Q CONC. PAD N z o v a O LS c� Q • i � H L.D. .ASF+HAL PAVEMENT � � 4 O ASP/,H[r _ G ER I ; I G O . ATC I I D ASI � I �, I m N s/DEw�K I Z rF oI PROPOSED� o ADDITION I ¢a O AS_pH4LT ( ` I HYDRANT - - GUTTER CATCH =R r BASIN I GARNET B. RICKARD I I Q � RECREATION COMPLEX I ! 3 ' EXISTING STRUCTURE EXI l_IG T D RD ST DAD ��• �O I � j I I CONC. PAD 4S 6 V I W _U ILITY V P LE O D Uf 2 E SZE Arc I REFER TO DWG. A103 FOR ENLARGEMENT OF THIS I - ---- - — CAT H ' m I --- L 3 I 4 r----1- 5 4 LIGHT O PROPOSED n S ANDARD I HYDRO TRANSFORMER PAD I PAD, GRASS I p I UNDERC�PDUND _ - - - EX, ASPHALT PARK/MC LOT j I GAS UNDERGROUN i a 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 t3O9 D.L.B. II r VALVE r � EX ST. ; i > ! ~` Q ` NO. REVISIONS DATE BY RELOCATE + SODDED L �. EX. BL_ 0 8 O 2400 ht • C DAR } BARRY s BRYAN SJ 2 MANHOLE 3 • PEA J 0 -/ S ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED �a1 O �❑ E GOB•/�� 3 i J ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS L �� Telephone (905) 666-5252 5 Q� SODDED I - z. F D A T HYDRA ` !T Of* EX, LOCUST r., A v a O soo (RELOCATE t) 2 'SODDED SWALE ( r -� _- - ( lV R TE )ZID SODDED EXIST. _ 4., MAPLE �. CATCH _--- v 4 8011 IRE I BASIN HYD ANT �'a•1 �LMBA ��y y f CDC, PHAL I — - R��"' �` a ore P N� rkz I _ _ L. H T i � t � __ N ? � �--� O-'� � � i l� �'} r',`� — HYDROSEEDED I rf �� ,1 - PA M ' OCATp i EX. OAK , ;J , _- ---- - - - - - _ ' ^F s r! 6 c� OIJC �� 801 - -- H L BASIN CATCH V - 45P'Ha[r SODDE 5'lZr 11[k -- - - ----- --- - -- - - EX-- -- -- 1 J UI�' ( NUMBER y ---- - -------- - ---- --- --- ,' . LINDEN J t EXIST _ - -- -- -- - W ` 9 O 801 CATCH CO y B�►S+N g 4 C B IST. J DDED w �f • POSE 1 DETAIL OR cx TC p I REFERENCE K IN / DRAWING NO. aa LIGHT WG�ATE" 5. V r,c eti't Q STANDARD ' A M WNEL 5 0�24W ht__ PAVEMENT�T 3 / RELOCATE O G'f�ASS PROJECT: ` G V EX. S3R O Eht `pT,cb (i, IRE O. N�!0� �`w�FP� J Z 0/ 4 ATER VALVE J 0 iv n / �� AW MNOVATFVIr�7 5 ; E SODDED �' —�� 4 _ LT f.-----"'� TPED STS / � ,�f p s Z PA MEt�T I �..` 30 48 sODD f--- _,_ ._.._.,.PONe_57 30 E /_.. o° f ED , '�-�-- wAT %' MUNICIPALITY Of CLARINGTON I ---" Ex. MAPLE. X WATER VALVE E ` ' ,,j' �� / HYDRANT- tJ� 2440 KING STREET WEST SODDED R P - -- I Ex. MArL N X. �� Ex. MAPLE BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO EX. MAPLE STANDARD 0 N Of' ��" IRP 'EX. MAP ,sort ,� ,� . DRAWING: 6A �— ,' 3 r ` r t �/ 3201...> � - �' LA DA - BASIN , f L,a _ La` RO �r 2 PLANTING PLAN EX, MAPLE; \ <, SIGN `2801 o R VAL.'�IE -, O f STANDARD 0GUY POLE LIGHT _---^~" S/dfWALK STAN 52.74 HYDRA - - CpA/CRE NT O LIGHT PAVEMENT STANDARD r v t"46644!00"E _ Of MANHOLE COMG`+PETf LIGHT� _„_.. , DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: b STANDARD =_ DATE. ,SCALE. E1 A.M.M. - �. SEPT1rM�R 1997; 1: 40Q (METRIC) G : RD. v PROJECT 0: STA>+ff3A CATCH I � DRAWING . e .. BASIN N DRAWI GU7T < COA R - " An ' 4 /C , r ; t .. 5.. _ .'- ... : .-:. - '. .. ., - ,.. .- .. '•. r' •.. to n. • A- , i � ( �\ \ � | ) \ E\2\\ ?2 d2 § < - \22§ L /ECG ,, .1.,. , , _ , r :. :- r . t .L� , - _ > `, _ - r,.._ Y' I a , a. , • .. 315. : .. _ _ .. .. %@. ,y.,• 4 r :. - a - -.: CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY. , , - 8000 -_.- i I I _, .11 �., .. r ,' ALL DIMENSION AT ?H E SITE ,,. gg S g , 0 _ ,1J FF ,1% I. ' t- 11 LIGHT 0 r I . .1 1.- . r I • SAWCUT AND REMOVE EXIS'Il P TO 0 fy... __" : : : , 1 c STANDAR - .11 NG A T '—\ExTENTS SHOWN.-cAPOFF EXIS°r. EiA I o tl _ DRAIN AS REQUIRED. EXCAVATE BEDS I N 1 1U MIN. 800inrtl DEPTH AND PLACE a TRIPLE-MIX PLANING MEDIUM I EXIST. ' 1 "HYDRO . PROPOSED' ! CONCRETE .. ov i - I . . . ,r � . 1. �. I r I " REMOVE EXIST. LOCUST TREE;FOR I PAD TRANSFORMER ON W v PRUNE SO AS TO MAINTAIN NATURAL t I f RELOCATION. . REMOVE CONIC. CURB - 2mx2m CONC. PAD J FORM OF TREE. LEADER SHOULD NOT ^ I ' UNDERCr�UNO HYDRO \\ BE CUT OR DAMAGED. EDGING. DISCONNECT. ELEC. OUTLET 1 , , a+ I I PRIOR TO DEMOLITION ` ti y_ _ \ - l-- �' NO. ISSUES DATE BY �.. - .... _ _ .- _ _�. ._ � �. - - --- - - - - -� EXIST. UND£kGRl7 GAS C JJ & .f VAL 5 1 { 10 sPOLE 15 14 12 �P� ; 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT AaM.M. . G• � 2 97 N I I G07 - -•� NOV . rz ♦ + e + t ♦ + + t t + + —r 11 GAS 1 � 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 13 - .M.M + + I { I I I / SODDED �/, Z 8 r- 7 + 't UNIT I PAI!&R ACC i �' �� FL , t� ENT O A0 37 \ + -�--- , LINE$�-HERE--,- ---- ---- , ' — $ GJ ,� fwv Hfm STAKE TREE WITH TWO STEEL T-BARS 'r ' � , I 2895 50x50x6mm AND MINIMUM 2400 LONG. SECURE TREE WITH TWO STRANDS OF I r i I i 2g 1 1 / / #12 GUAGE GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED 11. ! , , 40 , - ------1 - - -A-- ---1------L ----- IN 20mm DIA. REINFORCED RUBBER ', . � EE �� + + + + + + 1 11500 1 2 i I �/ Q HOSE AROUND TRUCK. , <' . .- - M 23 Q"� + + • + ; CONCRE�E _ ___ -� , ✓ 0 0 BURLAP OR OTHER APPROVED WRAP r + + + + + I I PLAZA I �� i9Q� - � , q ON TRUNK TO BOTTOM LIMBS. ;"; - ---------I -----i --- - i--- GGJ / - KK I I I cA -_ 75mm LAYER OF APPROVED MULCH _j �~ �'_,. 28 i N 1 i ZACCENT ` i j Q 100mm SAUCER AROUND TREE. � I � (P UNIT PAVER o 1. l ' LINES SEE DETAIL I � 1) � \, 4 i F71/ I 1�3 APPROVED PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE � 717 I 0 _ \ =111 1=`I I — . — _ _ NEW CONC. WALK - ---- -;--- OGJ� �� '` I - _ _ _ TO MEET FLUSH / �'� �i' J \' I 300 `"` 1 /" Z I — BURLAP. REMOVE ALL ROPES AND/OR � ' O ' '% �.�. `� I I I i L I I I III I -. y=- ,- './ 1 I I I -I I I I_I TURN D. OR REMOVE TOP 1/3 OF J, _ WITH EXIST. PATIO _ I 1 i / CAST- -PLACE / _ TYP WIRES FROM AROUND BASE OF TRUCK /% 4 , CO EDGING O. F. °� � � ; --- P `` - - `_'`'`_ ;'-� , `-� ��I--IIIIi TO AWID GIRDLING. '�`, "- !1l1 I l l I1 SODDED ----- T MATCH EXIST. `�' - _ I 1 �- a 4 Q �11 I 11=�I I II ; � \� � � �� . \���������7 � � �C\�\�^�� H ° � - - � § } � s& ( � 2 � \ �?\/ 2�R� � mrS §d 2c� . \��.�2��������, . " y r A. CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK ANa°:VERIFY ' ALL 61MENSIONS AT THE SITE O z NO. ISSUES DATE, BY FOR ENLARGED PLAN 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 2 97 B.S.S, REFER . TO DRAWING A2 0 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION NOV . 2 0 13/97 B.S.S. 1x 1b 1c 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 7a 8a 10 0 1 2 NOTE; THE FOLLOWING EXISTING ROOMS AND/OR EQUIPMENT PLUS ASSOCIATED SERVICING MUST STAY IN OPERATION DURING PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD UNTIL > �'' ` - - - _ - - - - -- - - � - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - — - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' T _ _ - - — — — — — SUCH TIME THAT RECONECTION OR SWiTCHOVER TO NEW _ SERVICES IS POSSIBLE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION TO ARENA OPERATIONS: 1 , T A: MECHANICAL ROOM 1 B: ICE RESURFACER ROOM " 1 I I C: REFRIGERATION ROOM I I 1 I I i 1 D: ELECTRICAL ROOM a . E: STAFF EMPORARY (TO ECHANICAL ROOM) �j I-- — ---t-- — — — — 4- F: EXISTING TRANSFORMER G: BURIED SEPTIC TANKS H: SEPTIC BED (REFER TO SITE PLAN) ° 0 I I I I I REFER TO ALL ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, .* " ELECTRICAL, SITE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULING FOR THESE AND �.J OTHER AREAS. ALL CHANGE OVER DATES TO BE SCHEDULED WITH AND APPROVED BY THE OWNER. a FOR ENLARGED PLAN REFER TO DRAWING A202 ° SEPTIC TANKS TO REMAIN. DECOMMISSION, FILLED I I I I I AND LEFT IN PLACE. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY I '. -- - -_ --- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -, -- - - - - - - — — — — — — — - - - - - - - - - - - — EXACT LOCATION. 1 1 I I SET OUT LINE Z A 0 SEPTIC BEDS TO BE STRIPPED OF TOPSOIL, COMPACTED I 7D TO 98% STANDARD MAXIMUM PROCTOR DENSITY. �A, � I I � — — —. � .— .Z Q If I . — r – LLJ �� - - - - - - _ _ -- L - - - - - - - ; _ -Il•ii _ _ _ - - - - _ u-- I, it I ! 4 �I r_ I i i - I it jl 1 j ' f* I ICI I I I I j FOR ENLARGED PLAN OF UPPER FLOOR p DRAWING A204 REFER TO II j I I I j j y I', I I r , OCT REISED FOR ADDENDUM 2 G.P.G.c 23 qR_N�, ,,j r- I I I � LJ Y Ie w NO. REVISIONS DATE BY II iii ' 1 BARRY • BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED PI;P( ):•F i LTI-P F'PU"E i U : i-F ' I j ri.� .�''_�',E �INn, I ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS M.. !A9 J1 ' -P cT 0�;r'4 pq one a-_ --__ -"---•_-.- ( C -.'"-.__ -.-'�.=J., f t�� 'I Telephone 9.45) 666 5252 , FIAYtR_ _� : � 7,T(-,' i _, I � , _. _ !, _ _ j Ilrf� �I I '!lf-1 i,l'� ( ,I' :F: r,, I .li`� �' I , i I�. 'll r:��.'. I �t-' r ;j? I _,T �F?ra' Ir1�"IR ,T � ;ra.. li-'4(; j _'C II S1�IFG �' _ _ i - - T' I it �� I ���.. `. v. .�E�I II I ELI it i i i I I i E( I 7 —+ - -- —— — — —_ ----- ----a F`-- ---- t `I L I J 'F i_i' I i L ~ ` l _, L 1 �` L. rI i i i i � � I . , —j � I I I �, �� �� I j l � C i I I II I C � it I I I I � i j J I i I HR_'T j F-p .-HIS ��'�`� F RE ! Il i E IN= .i ��` I �� ( t_, ra ..- i�i ; _. I l:FE r 111,1. ( jl DRESS (,.,' DRt N ) G I :ril I S� :S r'i'J 4 DF �5 I> II i G"<f S � (i – - - - - _— _ 0 ', I Ii �"�! � I: r � __ _---- I I --�_,:' —ti I I it-- -- I iJ -- -_� I --- - - r=-�� -- Ili I - --- - -- ----- � r--. -_-11, �;-- -- DETAIL , I I -H,I �rl ar n JF I H- al i rR' `;Fir f („ly'o II' Z , /� L ! — NUMBER j I 51 , W._ II_F,_NE I S UWE: _HJWEK j fi._Wr_ �_ JW' I I II I E„II t�.b_+I�I S uP”,-. EJ j I j r -I — .- — — - -�j I ' J,I ';'i: VI' i r' I' 1 I I I I 1= u I j 1 I I I I DETAIL OR , y TT SAJC I REFERENCE ' i EXISTING ANNUNCIATOR------- - I _--�L__ J —__ _ i�L_ —1 L— =-- _— i - - - ------- -- --- -- DRAWING N0. LICENCE y,'a F j I i j I EXISTING SIAMESE I PANEL CONNECTION ' �` - - - - - - - - - - -'� ! PROJECT: - I GAMEY B RICKAM COMPLEX 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 2440 KING STREET- WEST BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DRAWING: cn FLOOR PLAN cn 1=200 GENERAL m ARRANGEMENT PLAN o GROUND FLOOR r- DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: G P.G. B.S.S. o -- T DAE: SCALE:` EM xE , ©, 5EP t 1997 ..> p HAS BEEN PREPARED TO Y-a2�4}NTHIS D RAW I N G 0' 0. r r INDICATE GENERAL - LAYOUT ONLY. REFER CDC. TO OTHER DRAWI GS AND SPECIFICATIONS !97 r FOR MORE - DETAILED NFOR AT ON. • ro �j�� I.' ��� '.1 f: ��� _ . ., „_ -, .. `' � . .W '. .: .. ,.. .. ,. .., .. •... .-.is _ - .. - J . - ?.,. CONTRACTOR'SktALL CHECK`AND: VERIFY ALL OIMENStONS AT THE SITE 10 0 1 2 WALL TYPES DEMOLITION AND FNOVATION NOTES 1 W10 16• DRYWALL REFER ALSO TO SPECIFICATION & OTHER DRAWINGS FOR ` WO EXISTING WALLS 4O AIR BARRIER ADDITIONAL INFORMATION = TO REMAIN FIBROUS INSULATION I— 150 MTL STUDS GENERAL 16455 W1 190 CONCRETE BLOCK 1 (A IMPACT RESISTANT DRYWALL AIR BARRIER THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE AND/OR 700 5225 I 5530 0 50 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSUL (ARENA SIDE ONLY) MODIFY EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN THIS AREA TO Z 25 AIR SPACE ACCOMMODATE NEW DESIGN AND LAYOUTS AS SHOWN 90 COLOURED ARCHITECTURAL AND AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A FINISHED BUILDING 7800 2670 5530 NO. ISSUES DATE . BY CONCRETE BLOCK (SEE ELEVATIONS W11 13 DRYWALL FOR DETAILS FIBROUS INSULATION REMOVE ALL ABANDONED CONDUITS, DRAINS ETC TO 100 ! W2 CONCRETE BLOCK (SEE 93 DRYWALLDS SLAB FOR�NEW FINISHES PATCH AND MAKE GOOD CONCRETE 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT S 2590 2010 3200 2670 5175 PLAN FOR THICKNESS) 2 97 do AIR BARRIER A 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION NOV ` R.S.$; O1 REMOVE AND/OR RELOCATE EXISTING ELECTRICAL 13/19713-S' 35 50 AIR SPPAACI�OLYURETHANE FOAM INSUL EQUIPMENT SEE SPECIFICATIONS AND ELECTRICAL 90 CONCRETE BLOCK DRAWINGS FOR PROCEDURE AND SCHEDULING b ,� W3 CONCRETE BLOCK (SEE W12 ARCHITECTURAL BLOCK (SEE O REMOVE PART OF EXISTING WALL. MAKE GOOD ' ° PLAN FOR THICKNESS) 0 PLAN FOR THICKNESS 0 - HEADER ENC 50 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSUL 1 50 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE 1 ALL FLOOR AND WALLS ACCESS I = 10 AIR SPACE FOAM INSUL FORM NEW OPENINGS IN 90 COLOURED ARCHITECTURAL 10 AIR SPACE O3 BLOCK WALLS PROVIDE NEW LIINTEL OVER , t CONCRETE BLOCK 90 COLOURED ARCHITECTURAL PER LINTEL SCHEDULE ` CONCRETE BLOCK REMOVE EXISTING DOORS, FRAMES AND PART � W4 PLAIN CONCRETE BLOCK (SEE O WALL MAKE GOOD ALL WALLS AND FLOOR a PLAN FOR THICKNESS DENOTES 1 HR FIRE SEPARATION FIRESTOP ALL JOINTS IN O REMOVE EXISTING STAIR AND PART WALL. EXISTING TELEV 120.350 1 WALLS AND CEILING TO ENSURE SKYLIGHTS AND WALLS ABOVE TO REMAIN. MAKE W5 COLOURED ARCHITECTURAL COMPLETE FIRE SEPARATION GOOD ALL SURFACES ,. - CONCRETE BLOCK (SEE PLAN FOR THICKNESS) O REMOVE EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME.. BLOCK UP ; - - -- - - - - - - S OPENING TO MATCH EXISTING yy '9 EXISTING WALLS TO O REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE BLOCK WALLS , o W6 GLASS BLOCK REFRIGERATION I I 7 MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES BE REMOVED. MAKE GOOD ALL FINISHES (TYP) 1,4 W1 0 W7 PREFINISHED METAL SIDING I I I ♦ 150 INSULATION NOTE I W2 STAIR NO.6 ° APPROXIMATE LOCATION LINER SHEET g OF,NEW PAD MOUNTED STRUCTURAL GIRTS REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS , �' TRANSFORMER. REFER To AND ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE FOR 3T I SITE PLAN & ELECTRICAL APPLIED FINISHES I 0250 300 DWGS. FOR DETAILS OF - W8 190 OR 140 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE BLOCK ROOF ACCESS CONC. PAD & CONNECTION - 50 'Z' BARS LADDER 50 RIGID INSULATION 1 4 13 GYPSUM BOARD T INTERIOR FINISH SEE PLANS FOR THICKNESS ' EYE WASH AND I DELUGE SHOWER — P, 14 W9 75 PREFIN '2' ARS SIDING 1 1 X W4 AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER 40 i 7 I I 50 RIGID INSULATION g 40 ® 190 CONCRETE BLOCK i MECHANICAL. ° 113 1 N W4 W1 112 0� 0. I ® ELECTRICAL W2 _ i07 _ ° I - I - - FOR EAST SECTION OF li - RECD" - U� PLAN SEE ADJACENT FLOOR PLAN Fl 08 07 Wt W4 11 I __j W4 APPROXIMATE LOCATION I I OF EXIST SEPTIC TANKS M ( II W/R Q REFER TO MECHANICAL & SPECIFICATIONS 2 `_) i W4 ao 2 FOR DETAILS OF DECOMMISSIONING U AND NEW SANITARY CONNECTION I W4 I � N� 2 CO R W/ o u� N N `90 W4 140 3 90 ( STAFF Z A901 ��Pl�ln �' r MATCH LINE N 106 END OF CAN PY VE I Q ® I - 8 W 109 IN [, ELEV. 121350 o w LOW LEVEL �i vs I w vUi°x ° I YY5 Z - - - V .... N I W4 W4 CORRIDOR ZA I : 0 / I ( ) <n)> 5080 I ("�� n1 123 Z w o3 I RAMP o I I U1 \ 8 C SEPTIC TANKS TO REMAIN. DECOMMISSION, FILLED o ° Z Q TOP OF CONC. ® �c UP 1:1 M I ^) W/R ° W4 PRO SHOP I g \ A6 1 AND LEFT IN PLACE. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY -� O �/ ELEV. 121.075 = 4 ( ,10 � ,05 1 W \ EXACT LOCATION. a IW3 �) I'n 8 [t] 140 ! 2 20 g I 1401 ® \ 1 1810f 3450 3100 I 3590 I'I 2010 [355 Q � 4400 740 190 2690 ( 25o W SEPTIC BEDS T4 BE STRIPPED OF TOPSOIL, COMPACTED I SITE - A/ W I 191 1 g 1 t 90 04 \ ''t TO 98R STANDARD MAXIMUM PROCTOR DENSITY. O i r Y.. � \ Mr O 1 O W5 00, w - tai x - - .-�- .__..- ®� 104 �� -- ... -- -- -- -- �- - - ----- -- � � - - � _ X _ N � •t 23 I, i SCREEN SC6 MV4 90 C6NC w p3 i JI L �.l po, -74 190 5035 BLK MALL ° i ©w 3 1 N • . • �, c DENOTES DOORS EXIST. VIEWING AVERY = 1 7 ( ( 50 190 L01 , TYPE 2 •� ''� WITH AUTOMATIC OPENER I _ 1100 1610 2600 BUT COLOURED ALIT I r � * pMATIC DOOR DIVISION 18 SHALL SUPPLY AND INSTALL i ; t 102 30 AS TYPE 1 OPENER (PUSH) RIGID STEEL CONDUIT C/W JUNCTION BOXES FROM STAND UP OUNTER ♦ Ot Ot 1�u DOOR OPERATORS TO ALUM ENTRANCE SCREENS I p(1S1, II P 18 $ It ° FOR WIRING OF OPERATOR, AND SHALL SUPPLY .= S171Nt NO.1 TOP OF CONC. Z S POWER TO DOOR OPERATORS. - � (3N#/CONCESSION MATCH EXIT. W co DIVISION 4 SHALL BUILD IN JUNCTION BOXES AND I z 3 �«' i Ij g i52 CONCEALED CONDUIT. p N OCT Ws 3 ELEV. 121''15'50 N ' 40 ! � � � REMOVE AND/OR RELOCATE EXIST 3 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 2 9 G.P.G. A9O OR 101. RECESSED FOOT GRILL %r z i j j FIXTURES AND FITTINGS FROM EXIST 3 CONCESSION AND STORAGE AREA SEE 2 ISSUED FOR ADDENDUM 3 OCT G.P.G. SHELVES 1 8 4 STAND UP 1200 — I RELOCATE XIST SHUTTERS 5 I MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL. MAKE 23 9 COUNTER 30 W1 \ TO NEW C CESSION i GOOD ALL!FINISHES. REMOVE FLOOR OCT R22850 30 SCREEN SC9 A6O I Q°, I :T_ FINISH AN PREPARE TO RECIEVE 1 REVISED FOR ADDENDUM 2 G.P.G. _ 1 I - - SET OUT LINE _ _ I I NEW vcT LOORING 23/97 _ 4 \ Yx _ i 13 I NO. REVISIONS DATE BY i 30 A60 w6 I I ---` o "r STORAGE _ ° 117 1 3 r- - - - 116 1 1 1 I r' RELOCATED CONCESSION Z I - I BARRY i BRYAN -- -- -- ' 1 SlaTER.14L \ERIEY SIil R DISP Y I Q _�$ _ '�SCRF�N SC11 -____ 6 I SIZE AND UST DIMENSION N REMOVE EXIST WOOD I -- - ASSOCIATES ( LIl IITED � N.LC ( � - CEILING & LIGHTS � 'ry , EQUIPMENT. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND 17 20 I- - - - EXIST GAS OF EXIST TRANSFORMER. REFER SUSPENDED CEIU HOLLOW METAL REMOVE AND/OR RELOCATE EXISTING REFRIGERATION APPROXIMATE LOCATION REPLACE WITH 1 __ MECHANCIAL/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR PRECEEDURE - --_. -�BQr-- _ -VALVE I , , To SPECIFICATIONS AND ELECTRICAL AS PER SCHEDULE------ I ARCHITECT ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS AND SCHEDULING. REFER TO DWG 6/A205 FOR 21 ° 3400 874 DRAWINGS FOR SCHEDULE OF REMOVAL CONCESSION LAYOUT. I CORRIDOR ----- Telephone (905) 666-5252 W4 6 WO 3 STORAGE -- ---- -� - W 1 - - ---- -- -�' --- - A I o REMOVE EXIST. SUSPENDED CEILING 119 i `--,V RCK I 2 v1 REPLACE WITH NEW AS PER SCHEDULE B�OCNOMINAL GLASS z 3 ---I- - -- A601 ,� 1 SH' ER (R.S.)r -CONCESSION 1 122 40 590 C - ----- --�A- _ WO _ STAIR N0.2 4 I - 121` _-- -- - " 1O _ � C — -- - -- - - � I ° Cai ° \ I N : r 153 20 ( - -- - - -- -- - -- I 101 LINE OF NEW CANOPY ABOVE -_. Ly" = W4 � �� A6 r-- , - - N RECESSED FOOT GRILL SCREEN SCI 11 O P\18R 1 i I I I J. I III 1 CRE l SC i .1 i I, 27 M - - - L L1 LJ L-I 1 - - I 1 2875 1 241 1200 1010 , i r \ 0 D -- -- - - - -- -- --- -- -. 4 -- _RELOCATE A0dS.TL-- -- -- - -- -- - - -- _ — DETAIL 0 ATED CONC SITN - - - / } "' 4 I MEETINGI- - LE - _ _ - =g- - S�EENUELEACTR CAL EL NUMBER O {S VER SHUTTER 03 i ---� , ZE AND UST IMENSION f 6 1 / W1 1 °� 40 i t 128 W5 127 3 25 W5 I a ;� DETAIL OR 11 3200 6 9 / 2810 - F OI REFERENCE PIA LICENCE 32 140 -4 3810/ 55 I I 2 12 CORRIDOR 26 i I O °$o I DRAWING NO. %�. 547 CE 1 7 N 0 I N PENING � $;( 126 � -- S'"'+Niinwun►a'� ® o M b 4 f ►'a I 6 I X27 c CORRIDOR / CREEN SC 15 ' ROJ C : 123 ' M - -- - - - i - - ------- I ---- - --I - -- Ate ALTERATIONS 7 2210 1 2500f / i REMOVE EXIST ENTRANCE REMOVE EXISTING SCREENS. DOORS SITE VERIFY REEN AND DOORS 200 AND TICK OFFICE ENCLOSURE I o REMOVE EXISTING FLOORING AND B. / g ° --- - --- - _ _ -- - ----- - -- -- - - --- - - -- PREPARE-f T6-RECEW-MW FL001� _ W1 7 I FINISH AS PER ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARI N G TON 40 i 1 NOTE: REMOVE EXISTING OFFICE WALLS, DOORS, 2444 KING STREET. WEST 1 z END OF CANOPY o I ` AND FRAMES. HAND OVER ALL EQUIPMENT BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO wi ro TO OWNER MATCH LINE DRAWING: - 10 11 12 13 10 11 12 13 -. ., PARTIAL GROUND Q FOR WEST SECTION` OF FLOOR PLAN, PLAN SEE ADJACENT FLOOR PLAN i FRONT LOBBY ` 1? DRAWN BY: /CHECKED BY: f PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN (NEW LoBBY) PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN (EXISTING LOBBY G•P.G. B.S.S. AV 1=100 - :.. 1 a 100 DATE. SCALE: EMi O SEPTEMBER 1.997 1=100- .^ PROJECT NO:•;. .. DRAWING NO: : az " 97= 4 A2-0,2 t • , ..,. — , M. r lz w kk , l �,e... ,� - ,� .u, � ,r , �� '�� ,� � s; �� a4 � C � k (� .. ,_ �. l �.- - ,..r iii+`{` r 5. b 4 . rt', 1 - - .. _ _ - - _ 1. I. _ a .�! t - ...%., , , _ t - i - a . - _ _ - -11 s : , , ,- r ,. :. _ -. .- : _ .. ,. 1. ., - • 1 y ,,11 1. .> syr- - , - - - ,, .. ,_ _ �. :. , «at : ., .CONTRAC; S` , . .. ` , - . ,., . - ,. TOR ,SHALL CHECK AND �ERtt`Y . - A ALL DIMENSIONS AT 'THE 51'tE ,11 �. .F - -v 0 1x 1b 1c 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a -7 6 3 z ) I a 40 �a 4O 10 N0. ISSUES DATE BY 0 � _ 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT $ S.S: ;1' 4 6000 7300 7300 73b4 7300 �Yi 7300 7300 2 9� I 7300 7300 7300 455 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION NOV B•S.S� I 1 �. 7� 13/97 ' 12390 2010 ., 37810 {11 010 ,2390 40'10, NO 190 hi 190 1 BLOC COURSING DIFFERS 6600 f; 355 00 6600 BY 7 mm DO NOT TOOTH IN 5 A60 --_ 1 100 355 ,� ��` A601 Typ 40 — _ _ ~�' � 2010 2135 2590 2010 .�� ., - -_ -- ------ ,-- TYP 1� N — — — _ _ n� \ A6 y% .. 0 ' \ / w — B CH — '_` — — — —�1 — —vd — - r cc) 9 �, '� .� M � �� N 9000 2135 1 2135 0 2135 9000 8 APP std` STORA� (9 . I I I . ,- . 151 - O �. 1 1 6800 g 1 LOCATION�P.) 115 1200 D EEL ANGLE ' 51 q'1 - - - - - - - - - - I - - - / - - ? .11,ti • N I 1 - I- l ( SKATE FLOORING ( I SKATE FLOORING - - pj - - - tD 1 PLAYE�S BENCH 1829 HIGH 1 62 i 1 A601 !�I I ,/;;� ' X11, 501 TIME KEE R'S 7 GLASS _� , , . �hFp,L "/- ��0 G 1829 HIGH S \- - - -- ---- SHELF --- _,-- -.� I I/,' ':' ,I $ �� 9 ti `- A 0 nrp -- - - 1829 HIGH GLASS 15 I I ', N ''. TYP. SOT D 40 - ni - --- ____� rH ENDS I - : � &------�-\ I if I - - — - - --o I 17 S. 1 6000 +/- i o .�d e JCD . � r r . .� I \\ 12200 1530 TO SUIT PANEL SIZE I • / 1500 I I I I I k J 1 I t boo 340 R TION � i 1 i O I ,y� i I I I 2 114 y II•- I 1 DIMENSIONS E TYPICAL q Q` I I -� I \\j (. , . �1+ k� 4 I . Z r I 0�--�� " �� I - - - — . . - .-- - — - 11 - - - — I - - — - --- - ,— - — - Iz- - - I- -,-� i I 1 . . . I I I 1 1200 1 1 1 IL - W4 -\-9— � 190 CONC BLOCK r- g I 11 �` BACKUP m cc I I , .7 . . L � , I - - L I . , . I , 1 I I I I I I I I i 1 I I 11 LL . 3025 1.8300 90 3 40 15 I I N O . 6 1 I 30 25 18 3025 - -I g MEC14ANICAL ly 40 I NEW ARENA i 6 N I' l-_ - �, 1 I I 150 (@� I A901 TAIL Q U _ _ _ - ' I I _ - - _ _ _ F 0 J I I I I II I W2 m'' _0N , I I I 30 %$ 11 I I W4 w� Q . 1 4 2 I I I I 11 I g g 30 I I I 20 I I I. I w/R Z Z . 8 1 = I I 1,1 I ' I I `° m 1 i w I I I I �.- I I I I 4N�'I I L ) ZQ 12200 1530 I-- % i \ .Z 3 ° / O LL , ! I I I I o U - - -I- I - - - - - - I I_.-z- 1 I vii z- - - Q � ��� - @------- . � - - - - - - - - - - _ _ - II_ II I o I II N M o FINISH FLOOR o k 1 o a ELEV 1 .925 R = 46pp I1 11 RAM - W 8 I `, I % I I I I I , I I I .W 9 UP 1:12 0 11J 0 120.950 ,r I I I 1 r A g i TOP OF CONC. 8000 +/_ 1 Iiw o � V)11.1!� i I cj ELE KALIF OPERATED 2 120.925 70 SUIT PANEL SIZE 4 0) ' A60 LIFT SECTION 4 3 40 \ OF AS BOARD 40 N - (U 2 7 F - -- -- - -w7- f----N --- - `T +120.925 I I I , I Aso1 I i % 1829 H G S 1219 HIGH GLASS I , ,% 1 X }-- - - _ � _ . BOTH END _ _ 29 GLASS I I / 8 z ID ABOVE I TRENC EXTENT OF H SLOPSI AND - - - NTH - - - ^��— I _ --03 - I 1/2HR FIRE SKATE FLOORING DASHER BOARD HOSE B B 20 5 I r-�I w3 SEPARATION N 50 20 50 TYPIrA CONNE I N 24 1 �1 -is �� 8 i STORAGE GARAGE) 80 I \ 800 590 ti 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - J _ !I Ali �' � "' I 1 1.2 5+ �p 1 410 110 1 5400 010 12 90 1010 1010 _ 5490 2 0 5490 10,0 1010 12 40 - —1010 19 ow, ,b'\ c�GL3 � 102 0/ = = / �` I OP OF CONCRETE ,� � AIR N0. s� I � 3° N OCT LEY 121 075 I ® 4s --- - L /'" - - - A�€ FS.�RtNG _ -------t�P-Z �ONe _ G.P.G. SKATE FLOORING K _ _ 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 -- -- BENIt LATE -�. ___ -a, W5 - TYP _- -- -- -- -- - - -- -- _ -------TY�=-- - o - - - - �9 23 9 4 -- -- 1 / \ _ �, 121.075 / \ STAIR N01 0 1 1 R •" g - - _ _ NO. REVISIONS - DATE BY I REMFIeY�ER 1901 1` 1855 3550 SKA 3 L lr�) �— 1 _ UP 0 102X 152 1 148 FL �IG ( I I T I 14 W5 0 9 N I I DRESSING ROOM o DRESSING ROOM DRESSING M I DRESSING ROOM DRESSING ROOM DRESSING ROOM 13 5 1 3400 N ® o N I BARRY BRYAN WS 142 r) 139 138 1 0 136 N 134 133 N R W5 I I w4 4 WORK SHOP N I 3 I '� 6510 Q 3QO 0 N 651 300 "' 6510 rn Pi I I 0 � M 1�11 1 300 651 300 I 6510 boo 6510 ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED TED 1• ' 8 146 I W5 I o 4 143 300 300 300 300 300 15 , 1 3305 X 1 0 1910 W5 o I g TE ROOI�NG I - W3 i ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS 9 o r - - --- 1 _ 20 _ -- - -- - - - o 0 I � � � I I I � 1 1� I I 140 I� 90 0 . Telephone (905) 666-5252 Q-.1 I w5 \ ° REFEREE - I � I � i _ r �' r N�: `- -$ i 0 144 ( ` I STORAGE t STORAGE i i STORAGE S I1 N g I I �I , W I i I I I �\ 1 I/;' STORAGE I GRAB o I 1 I I 1 I I 130 I 11 s g . "" cYi I I (` 0 14 � �'i% 0 141 140 $ \ �` 0 i-, 37 I I �°c S I ca ( 135 i J B m H • � WEI 1 132. I 11"- , FURR /GYP BD COL .tj)=°i I• 1 n I FIRST AID 47 I r (� N N i t / , N STAI NO.$ 1 I N _ ,!ER SH R N I D I 1 OFFICES (TYP) o I -._ -1 DN cv o �iL)l I (~e STEP DN P DN r- % \ - 1 I I - , o I 131 g F70 1 U E OF EXIST — II �� 75 � S ;, 1 I '� ` p 1 ! ;,� I '�. �� STEP ON I `) W8 W 1 IL�11 MA SONIRT WALL - --- - _ _ 5 _ A 3 -- --- u Si I ---.- 41 40 R -- - �•�---I W4 . A 1 I --/ - - - ---- --- 37 -- -- ---- -- ------- -- - - -- - - ------ -- _ _ I I _ ____— _ _ _ �_ __ -___-- - ��- 75 I W8 29 I 2 Q t- - -- - - EL If- 134"---- - - - -- " -- - ------- - -- -- - ----- -- - - - -- --- -- 3 - l sso 410 i - - - - EXLSt- - - - - -- - - - -� __.---- O 3 EISANG RAISE[}- 3 ._- I _ -- / -- -- \ I- -- - _ t / ----- , 20 1 3 J I R.W.L EXTENT OF -- - _ RLATFORM ELEV C - - - - - - -- - - - - - T4 I I �- I i� A$$ __ SKATE _ - --- I 00,11 ( FLOORING -- - - _ __- ------ -----��. X22 A50 --- --- ------- ' -- ----- -------- ---_-1tEl -EXISTING ALLS AND ROOF I I I . I '1 I 00 1� \� $ _ _ I I Or 11 q--- - —_ - -- -- -- --- ----- - g __ _ -- --- - __ i -------- — --- -_----- ---- -- - __- - - T - -- � I- I . 1 m �'' 11 I / REMOVE 0 - ----__------ -- _ --- - I �f -- - -- ---—PART�F EXIST Sa& AND -- - SATE _ ! I f NUMBER I AND FILL — - — — - -- -- - - — - --- -------- ----- - -1 2 i — --- I I +1 1 �� WITH BLOC --�-- _.. __._ ( --- - ---..---------- - - 1�1ECMAt £tFiC10NS I FEW SURAGE--------- - - I . �1 ' I — - - -- - ( , PROCEDURE ► - 1. I 6 _E1Q R ----- ------{ r-- -- --- - --- - - -- ~SC -- —---7.% — _ I I 20 < Az 1 I I - - --- ---- - ----- — -— --- - — _- _ --- ---'— - -- -- --- - -- ---- - -- - /f �l -141 o I I L - - TT 5At)[+ DETAIL OR _ - CO ++ - - 1 f 1 I V 30 - -_ - ---------- — -- -- -� 1 j -�� , ------- -$—' - ----- --- ---- - - -�~' 1 DRAWING 0. y� ANL LICENCE I W7 -r - - _ --- -----" - -- _ T ' - - Y —� -T� --+- ---------- — -- _- I __._ LA�1J�A�-�-OWN, ---`--- � FORK wFw - OVE E�(IST. �! T�� `• I I � I I 18R g 3 �.y�3478 T wAU. • RE V Alf-' `�iT � I � 1 ST .Z' N quN�en - _-----� I I -, j I i �\ , - ---- —j_ - - --- ----- MA O•D --__,--_j,�.STaRS I �` / i J I 11 - ----- - - I -- I 1` I I —_ 1 1 - - -- _--._ ------ — I I I , - -- - - -- - - -- y - 1 - - - _-_ - _.- _ _ _ --- _ - �i- --- _-- _____- _ =- - - - - -- - - - - --- - --- --- - - - -- -- -- - - -- - .� - - -�--- -- ,20 --/ r I _ _ --_--- _ _- -] -- _ _ _ _ -_— - _ - _, N-- - - - — _ - PROJECT. Wl •/ I j + _; EW H ER 1. TRENC To i 1 ; 601 A x L-- - - - = - - - - -� �V I NEW TRENCH DRAIN 5 I i I ! I LIMIT APPROXIMATE ' \� / CONNE TO I I 1 _ - - I 1 '�- i 1211.025 �EXlST DOORS. REP I _-—_ PIPING ��/' EXISTI i �� ML. �1 i�✓��V 11 - \ 90 I I, I ' Y��EW ELECTRICALLY OPtER I I I I i i `��,. \ ! ::\ I j py�syy/�� �� �� I II I I,�VERTICAL LIFE DOOR I I I r,� I r II / B. R!CKA CAM 1, ,' + Ext ELEV I EXIST. ARENA { ,1 \`` - =.r. 12 .000 I r------- I ' MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINCTON y / 149 I i EXISTING GATES TO IBE NEW CON5TRU - ' FOR THIS AREA REFER ; I I - . I + I BOLTED IN CLOSED \ NOT C STRU� TO ITEM 2.5.4 OF POST I % / I I ! I POSITION I \ WITH EXISTING - 2440 KING STREET WEST r I � ) I I I I I / I � TENDER ADDENDUM 1 I I ARE PIPING BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO , 1 I � m I 6000 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ g DRAWING:le 14 . 10 m 1 PARTIAL GROUND 47 L 1 .m . . FLOOR PLAN, 1x 1b 10 1 ." . 'L I > . , 2 , x ARENA , . . , ':; c+�' DRAwN 8Y: • PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN . k� . , . . r G.P.G: o :,. e,HECK�a BY• - : o . X . ATE` , . ti " 1=1 Q� - ' EM,O6 w ., - .SEPTEMBER: "1997• 00 ., :", " , .. PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: 1. ., , - ; � S._ .b p�' �. � a 66�'ra�au .;.ter i � ;� � � >>��;i � ,. R ,;��, • - I m, i ' -, ,- .•-_., . . .rte .. :..: `.''' _ -. _ r. ;< r CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY•' , - ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE - 1x 1b 1c 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 7a 8a 10 NO. ISSUES DATE BY OCT 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 97 B.S.S. ; 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 13�g B.S.S. I - I I I I I I I I 0 0 0 0 • I I I I I I I I W7 GUARD SEE - EMTOR S�aTING- - _ _ - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - DETAIL SEE DETAIL 9 9 2 90 ,0 9 f 501 A501 I 390 / I " A601 - ___ THESE WINDOWS TO BE PROVIDED --- _ - �1 - - - --- ----- -STAIR �' O O,�O N 1iVllkl OREf2�48Lf t8 LE SLIDERS - -- -- -- 9RDF7�{IL - --- -- -- ------ - - - - --- 40 MM GU - o l I -_ - _— Y1f4 - - a FIXED BENCH SEATING 0 30 W9 a^°o I Wg DN 4R DN 4R ° DN 4R FURR OUT POSSIBLE FUTURE At W5 , ° COL WITH SCREEN PARTITION _ — _ I FIGURE SKATING 40 MM GUARDRAIL 13DGFURRING I STAIR N0.1 - ------ 30 � DN17 $ � ago � 0 53 7300 43800 5 8 DN 18R - 0 EXIST SIDING TO REMAI 0 STAIR NO.4 VIEWING RWM 5 W5 15 I j 01 ° -- 201 — STAIR N0.2 --- S N ON17R --- --- F1531 _ -_ - ) MEEHA1vIei1E _-- -- - - I' j- O f - - - - ----- ----- - i rt "T FL °0° I I �_ fNSULATED P.S. FRAME WITH ---- --T- - DUCTS i' �c 3O I NEW ROOF ------ -- - u -� --- _----- --- z_--- -;---- -- - --------- ---- - -- INSU -61-�E9--1JN�TS-(��-- ---------- - __- -----�------------- --- -+------ - �`_- ----r 1- __ +-.T �_�� _--- - _ ----'-- ---- --- - �---- -------- rs�_-� � � �I.� I , _- I 2-5 -TEMPERED- - -- ----------- - ---- -- ( ( ALL fRAMING. ----•- }-- --�----------- - Ij .' I,, n -'�---- - --' , --- - - - ------- - ----- _Q - -- ------- ---- --- --- ------ + _ f.--- ---- _ _._�.--- -- - - - - ---- - - -- E)QS11NG-SEATING— - -- -- ----- EXISTING CONC. CUT �OPENtNG-1N--EXIST- WALL - --- -- a- - +--,- - - L_ ___ - - - ----- - ---i - -- _ - - ---- -- - - -- - - --- ----- --j--- -' - - - - t BLOCK WALL TO IOW FOR-tNSTALti4TTON--- -- ---------- ----- --- --- ----- -- -------- ---- ----- -'-� -- ---- ----- -- _ _ -- _ 2 ------- _�_ _ ------ -----t, k" - - -_-` -------- _ y -------- ---- - --- ---- - - - -- -- --- - +-. 400 ao 3 OF WfND0VV- --- - ---�- t----- ------ - - - - - -- -- ------------- - - _-- __ o ----- --- --- - - - ----- ----- ---- --- I - - --- - -- - - -- - - - ---- ---- --- ---- -±--- --- --- -+ - ;- - _}, 30p ?400 _ °'I II - ----t ------ --------- �- �- I - -------- - ----- -;--{-------- -- - - --- ±- ---- - - - -1----- _ _ -- EXISTING SKYLIGHT - - -- - ---- ' -- --_ j --- - - -- -- -- -- --- � of I! r---------- -----------�---- - -- -- ---- -- ---- ---—_----- -__ ,, „� � I, \ � -_ 00 - --- - -- -- - - - -- - - ,., W? aI II ., --- -- ----- --I-- -----------------}i III I j ...., j-- '---- --- -'-- ----'- ------- -- - -- --- _. ._.___... ._..-- -1- ---- '- - _, --- _±1 -- -- 2�g� __, A2 SEPARATION EXISTING ROOF SECOND FLOOR PLAN Ey 1=100 �, • I !{ i 11 I I I i i I � �a II, OCT 00 I i + i i. 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 23/9 G.P.G. N0. REVISIONS DATE BY BARRY • BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 Ass DETAIL o NUMBER i DETAIL OR IAN SAUIC . REFERENCE � LICENCE DRAMANG N0. ''a,, 3478 ••'� - �INIl1glIHN��� PROJECT: ADDITION AND ALTEIAl10N$ CARNET R FICKARD �:OMPI:ESC MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 2440 KING STREET WEST BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DRAWING: cn cn PARTIAL UPPER cli FLOOR PLAN w DRAWN BY: CHECKED '01* G.P.G. B.S.S. o" DATE: SCALE:. �EM10Ct Q' - SEPTEMBER 1997 1=10.0 o PROJECT. NO: DRAWING N0: i 97100, t , e : r Y. r ' r w• ..,4r _ .-,:. .... .. _• - $. .: : , ..,. .: / '- \ � �\��\ ���\� . ~`\�� \ [ � � �° � ~ � � e)7 k � ?\{ t��� , ,��\ � � . my: � �Go�J \ �\��m�t(��� � ^ F t .1 R,t -. CONTRACTOR RACTOR SHAL,>z, CHECK AND VERIFY ALL.DIMENSrOAS AT THE SIZE• 1600 1680 1010 190 140 vvn 2590 3270 S.S. COUNTER SEE < DETAIL PLAM COUNTER .'.. ' A90 TYPICAL TOILET 190 140 140 1�0 j PART1T10N g 2100 810 1210 910 I g HM :M SD SO( } r TRH SID J r C� TOILET P ION NO. ISSUES DATE DY t W4 W R CE IC ° (TYPICAL) TILE W �i ®FD 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER _OCT B.S.S: i 140 WALL ° 11 j 109 2/97 *' �,' O BELOW M N $ OFD — 9. 140 2 ISSUED -FOR CONSTRUCTION NOV g.S. . ° o ` j' CH 990 800 �n 3590 �p r mil. 140 ° i M. `1 c FD 140x140_CURB 4 � 13 o as ° HD �� �'�\ 6 CH+ J �l HD ao SHE %�_� TRH LF cb �i � �) D PIPE SPACE �'-`-, - w4 F F E 910 140 g L� W4 PLAM COUNTER o SHOWER STALL w5 W4 $ GRAB BARS ° ° CERAMIC r- 777 TILE (�1 LOW L URINAL w 150x150 CURB g 2 ENLARGED WASHROOM PLAN I-- �� (CHILD H". 4- C4 W5 W4 TRH � REM A202 1-5o ; Y LEGEND SYMBOL j PLAM COUNTER 143' eFD 190 TYPICAL CHANGE 4 ' TRH TOILET ROLL HOLDER BENCH WITH C `r 3305 1910 6 COUNTER � g (� PIPE SPACE PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER COAT HOOK 4 I TYPICAL COUNTER W/0 TYPICAL COUNTER W/ A901 w ft 1�, r�`x HID - --' HAND DRYER 1 ASO UPPER CUPBOARDS CUPBOARDS ABOVE - g HD ---- ----- - AIL �- a� NV .NAPKIN VENDOR -- - - - - H� N ND = NAPKIN DISPENSER g ' $ -� / '' \ 9O v°� WAR SD - SOAP DISPENSER -��.� _- --� '� I M W5 ` y 110 w4 M - MIRROR COLUMN SEE ' -�._ �- . - E - PRO SHOP STRUCTURAL i HM = HANDICAPPED MIRROR 105 M'_ o ®FD o CH = COAT HOOK N I 1 ,-' PARTITIONS TYPICAL P.LAM = PLASTIC LAMINATE 'f --— Y- ------ SD o PREFIN MTL TOILET I PLAM COUNTER pTD 1 LAM COUNTER VCT = VINYL COMPOSITE TILE 1 � FIRST AID ` \ M W4 YV5 , XX REFER TO DWG A202 FOR NOTATION ' 147 ®FD Wxx REFER TO DWG A202 FOR NOTATION 1160 3510 10 j oI 47 / o g f BARS ®FD FLOOR DRAIN T S r TE TRH 1 140 190 190 ' N OORIN o ERAMIC o h 7LE 1 � N -' g EXIST CONC WALL REMOVE EXIST OVERHEAD - - - - 462 DOOR AND FILL OPENING WITH i'STU'�- 1090 1610 850 CONCRETE BLOCK TO MATCH EXISTING. MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES 190 140 AND PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING 1 TYPICAL REFEREE ROOM 3 ENLARGED FIRST AID ROOM PLAN 4 ENLARGED WASHROOM PLAN A203 1=50 A203 1s5o A202 1=50 CUT OPENING IN EXIST WALL TO SUIT NEW DOOR NOTE MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES SHADED WALLS DENOTE EXIST CUT OPENING IN EXIST WALL WALLS TO REMAIN 190 5360 140 650 1010 590 TO SUIT RELOCATED ROLLING SHUTTER. 5260 140 600 1010 100 MODIFY DIMENSION AS REQ'D TO SUIT vv MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES � I o E REMOVE EXIST DOOR & FRAM & ACCENT BLOCK COURSE - _ — - -- - - - - --- v NEW BLOCK TO EMATCH_EX ST. J -- --- — --- - - I ----- 3210 --- - ___3_90 2140 ° 1800 ! I 2h NEW OPENING 0 1950 3 J 1 REMOVE ALL WALLS lo O SHOWN DOTTED DRESSING ROOM g -_ !-, r-------- N DRESSING ROOM 133 - -, O w0 O XXX - - - - -- - -_- - II - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- ---- -- -- 2850 1210 2750 7 ! - _ — 1 3960 760 2390 610 f �- �- -- -- - -� DETAIL H SEE Q i 3S � - M (�) ®� I I NEW ROLLING SHUTTER f I REMOVE ALL WALLS ( ) ! I WOOD BENCH WITH C NTIN. i A50 TYP Q I COAT HOOK OVER. SE DETAIL E 4 SHOWN DOTTE O r ° I P TION & DOOR PLAM COUNTER TICKETS Q NP ! ( I i VY5 NEW ROLLING SHUTTER T A901 122 1 CONCESSION TYP g -- — - - —- -- -- - -- - COUNTER _ 121 - - -- -- - - - - - -NOUN?£ - -_ ° g g PLAM _ _ �F$ 2 Q . CONC CURB I - II — / — - a - - - - - - - -- - _ -- - 4 ; g CH CH CH 140 WALL SEE 1 SKATE CT - C/W WAND HD _ ! NEW ROLLING SHUTTER 90 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 OCT G.P.G. BELOW A50 ° GRAB BARS FLOORING - - -- -- -- ; _ -- - 30 9 ^� STORAGE ° ®FD SLOPE j ;•'� 500x840 FOLDING __ - - - - - - - -= R.S. �- - - - ��l_ A901 7 REVISIONS XXX ) �' u ,( j I BENCH SEE SPECS TYP O N0. DATE BY o STAINLESS M STEEL I 3 i PLA� COUNTER - COUNTER ()FD O FIXED SAFETY g g I TRENCH DRAIN N i GLASS (TYP) BARRY • BRYAN •- � 6 2 2 5 ! '' S.S. COUNTER ! 2`Q I I � _- ` - ! TRH SLOPE / V PLYWOOD J I of 90 v i --- -- —- - I` : R.S. I I ---� v PIPE SPACE 1 6 ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED 9 DRAIN ----- - - - - r- - - -w - - - -- x _ -' H.M. CUT OPENING Vii I ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS G EXIST ALL TO SUIT RELOCATED ROLLING SHUTTER. 3 6� Telephone (905) 666-5252 ------ �- NCH DRAIN-/ - - - I MODIFY DIMENSION AS REQ'D TO SUIT. MAKE GOOD SURFACES C OPENING IN EXIST WALL TO SUIT NEW ROLLING SHUTTER. EXIST WALLS I 920 740 2160 2410 7 0 MM E GOOD ALL SURFACES REMOVE ALL WALLS 1 SHOWN DOTTED 910 760 140 18110 410 190 140 140 190 1 190 190 3385 590 2810 190 le 390 NEW OPENING 270 4 TYPICAL DRESSING ROOMS s BARRIER FREE DRESSING ROOMS r6 '� CONCESSION A203 1=50 A203 1-50 A202 1=5 LAYOUT PLAN `O ASSo 0 DETAIL NUMBER Q' R DETAIL OR ' REFERENCE ,y RIA LICENCE� DRAWING NO. 3478 PROJECT: ADDI11" APO ALTERAUM GA f&7 B. RICKAW COmpm MUNICIPALITY -OF CLARINGTON 2440 KING STREET WEST BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO .� DRAWING: ENLARGED m FLOOR. PLANS o Z BY: CKED BY- DRAWN G. .G. B.5.S. cu P . DATE; SCALEr Ed50 SEPTEMBER 1997 1=50 . . - WING NO: t.PROJECT NO: � r DRAWING -a CD - • ��jj u . • e. _ vs , 5. v , •y t EFIYAN y Olc I) LIN11TED a , r _ CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY', ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE Silt ,o GYPSM BD. BULHEAD 10 2 r— 1 P�TUGHf A AT .2400 + - AFF I 1- 610 x 1220mm RECESSED FLUORESCENT O I 1 ® LIGHT FIXTURE AT 2400D+�CEi AFF 40 � I NZ 0 ' f I FOR LIGHTING ANDEDIFFU8ERS I 305 x 610mm RECESSED FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE NO. ISSUES DATE BY 800 SURFACE MOUNTED INCANDESCENT; LIGHT- I TYP I 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT B.S.S. " FIXTURE OR PENDANT TYPE LIGHT FIXTURE - - _ - 2/97 I I I 0 RECESSED POT LIGHT FIXTURE O 0 I I ( I I 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION'' Li NOV S` r_ IINMMII EGGCRATE LENS I 1 _ - - p - -�► - - -- I �� R ® DIFFUSER I I I I ® AIR GRILLE - .. - -- ---- - — _—_____. _ -------- -- --------- -- ----.-- - ------- _ ' • SPRINKLER HEAD - - - O O Q'e , ® ® I I GYPSUM BOARD CEILING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN RM 202 TYP CEILING ACCESS PANEL 1 100 — — — -- — — — — — — — — S 0 0 O GYPSUM BD. CEILING & POTLIGHTS ES AT 2400 +/- AFF GYPSUM BD. CEILING AT 2400 +/- ABOVE LANDING ELEV.(TYP) ROOF ACCESS HATCH REFLECTED CEILING PLAN VIEWING RM 201 1-100 I\X I ��my 7 i Y- 49 ES ES EX SED STRUCTURE (ES) N �d1 FO R EAST SECTION OF ® PLAN SEE ADJACENT REFLECTED PLAN I Fo ES REFER TO MECH. DWGS FOR SPECS (TYP) SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC Iii I TILE CEILING AT 2800mm Q ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR I N 'E SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC ' TILE CEILING AT FLOOR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR � x 1220mm TYf' _ ----------- r ----- — SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC TILE CEILING AT 2800mm - ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TYP ( I I - -_ _ PROVIDE DROPPED BULKHEAD I I I ALONG ENTRY TO LOBBY 200mm CHANGE IN CEILING HTS - v ICI I I i I L___k a__j Ll I I SUSPENDED GYPSUM BD. CEILING AT 2600mm ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR `I L —- I 305 x 1220mm RECESSED - + FLUORESCENT LIGHTING SUSPENDE ACOUSTIC NEW SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC '•r: I TILE CEILING AT 2800mm EXIST'G EXIST. TILE AT 2800mm HIGH O I �SFiED ABOVE FIN FLOOR i WD CEILING DUCT 1 N I 40 _.. . __ , :� I i ' 1 I I I I 1525 0 O O 20 $ .. 1 N O O 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 20C9T G,P.G: I SET OUT LINE ! O - — — Y)( ———— ——--—— I I NO. REVISIONS DATE BY Y NEW SCREEN IN —\1 PROVIDE NEIN BULKHEAD OF I EXIST. WALL IMPACT RESISTANT DRYWALL BARRY BRYAN REMOVE EXIST. WOOD CEILING LIGHTS ON METAL .FURRING TO ENCLOSE i • REPLACE WITH NEW SUSPEN (CEILING EXIST. ME H. DUCT — AS SHOWN I I CONSTRUCT TO MAXIMIZE CEILING HT. SECTION ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED -- ------ --1 ,4,206 1=100 ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS '•''''�' , ,^ O i I i � SUSPENDE� ACOUSTIC I Telephone (905) 666-5252 TILE CEILING AT 2800mm ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR GYPSUM BD. CEILING IN ! i TICKET RM. 2800mm A.F.F. I j 0 0 - --�-I - - �- - ----- - - - - -- - ----_ - ------ I. I REMOVE EXIST. SUSPENDED CEILING do LIGH 1S PREFIN. METAL SIDING SOFFIT (TYP) I REPLACE MATH NEW SUSPENDED CEILING do LIGHTS 0 O O >; Vs POTLIGHTS�AS SHOWN �:` AS SHOWN c, ---- 1 - --- __ - --- - i --- - ---------- - - - --- --- ---- ----- s$ 0 610 x 1220mm TYP ( ( ) I KYUGHT ABOVE I SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC I) O TILE CEILING AT 2800mm �` ABOVE FMl15FIEb FLOOR j DETAIL PROVIDE DROPPED BULKHEAD -- --------- --- --- --- - _--�`�------- ---------- NUMBER O T �r—- a 200mm BELOW CEILING U)EL 8 i DETAIL OR A SAUL r REFERENCE ''�,y LICENCE I W POTLIGHTS AS SHOWNi 40 I Ii O O I DRAWING NO. ''�.. 3478 .••�' L -- -- i i-- --- -- -i j - ---- - — --- i 1 0 0 _ -- � PROJECT: RELOCATE EXIST. FIXTURES ------ I t J---- - -- -- --- -- - -- ---- -- --- --j - - I /'iVLr ff M AND ML . AS SHOWN. SEE ELECT. DMIGS , - — �� REMOVE EXIST. CEILING TOTALLYl MAKE GOOD EXIST. WOOD CEIUN �_—� I I REPLACE WITH NEW SUSPENDEiP,.CEILING II I do LIGHTS AS SHOWN I B. _COMPLEX 11� MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 40 ! I I 2440 KING STREET WEST i I BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO j DRAWING: cn . m 10 11 12 13 10 11 _1�- Q 2 13 PARTIAL a CD REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR WEST SECTION OF PLAN SEE ADJACENT REFLECTED PLAN ,a DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY , PARTIAL REFLECTED . CEILING PLAN PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN S.W.H. e.s.s. 0 1¢100, 1-100 DATE: SCALE. ` EM100 SEPTEMBER 1=100. 1997 PROJECT, AWi N . RO CT NO DR NG O• , THIS DRAWING TO E3E READ? IN CONJUNCTION WITH ELECT. & . MECH . DWGS . w : .,97100 A206 . En - , r ,. ,. .. ." �y k 4. , a.. r ityFf UNIFED ,. _. ... ..:: /. �' a .i . •. . :�. r ... ,. '.- :. .. .. r . r. ^. .. a., .. r. .'-. ..v J.S. ..' .. _ '.:r .. .., .�•° .. :. .. .. r, .- -. a .. e :. 1 AT AL DaAENS10NS CHECK AND VERIFY ; CONTRACTOR SHAH THE SITE }x 10 0 1 2 4 I I i MAKE UP AIR UNIT REFER TO MECHANICAL 1 c 2a 3a 4a 5a I 6a 7a 8a NO. ISSUES DATE BY I 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT B.S.S. i I-- - - - - - -- - -, 2/97 I 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION NOV 7 SS. R I I D CONDENSER UNIT REFER TO MECHANICAL = I I FOR TYPICAL PITCH POCKET I I-- - — VRD — — DETAIL REFER TO 1 2 50 TrP � • I � I 1 2 3 A 5 C 7 Q C1 I PROVIDE CRICKET AT ROOF `t 6 8 7 ACCESS HATCH RD EXHAUST FAN REFER TO MECHANICAL EXHAUST FAN REFER TO MECHANICAL PARTIAL ROOF PLAN 1:100 FLUE C/W RAIN COLLAR 1 x 1 b 1 c 2a 3a 4a 5a 60 7a 8a 10 0 1 2 REFER TO MECHANICAL — — — — — — — U DUCT C/W GOOSENECK REFER 0 MECHANICAL I I I I I I I I I I i RE TO MECHANICAL I RD I I CONDENSER UNIT \••/ I I I I I I I I I I ( EXHAUST FAN J REFER TO MECHANICAL AIR CONDITIONING UNIT REFER TO MECHANICA! REFER TO MECHANICAL FOR MECHANICAL CURB i SEE DETAIL T EXHAUST FAN REFER TO MECHANIC 50 TYP FLUE C/W RAIN CO REFER TO MECHANtC CRICKET R F EXHAUST FAN AIR CONDITIONING U i' REFER TO MECHANICAL REFER TO MECHANICAL DUCT C/W GOOSENEC I R EXHAUST EFER TO MECHANICAL AREA OF FLAT ROOF REFER TO MECHANICAL V INDICATED BY SHADING V i I I 1 i I I 1 ' AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 'f REFER TO MECHANICAL CRICKET ROOF ;'. X EXHAUST FAN — — — REFER TO MECHANICAL EXHAUST FAN REFER TOM ANICAL � MAKE UP AIR UNIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT REFE TO MECHANICAL REFER TO MECHANICAL Z - - Yx I i �_ I RD i I I I I I I EXHAUST FAN '"; EXHAUST FAN REFER TO MECHA 1IC ;" / _ REFER TO MECHANICAL � i' O C T / L� I P T T N R N M 1 i 11 1 OS E DE DDE DU G G. r i' Q 1 7 i 3. 9 -, I i i- 50 EXHAUST F i EX ST AN i. ;t1 REFER � R T MECHANICAL I N �.'. 0 N0. REVIS 0 S A BY r D ATE AZ EXHAUST FAN REFER MECHANICAL EXHA FAN BARRY BRYAN I / ' , REFER TO MECHANICAL Z I ` ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED XHAUST FAN j /!; EXHAUST FAN REFER TO MECHANICAL , X REFER t0 MECH CAL ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS L� Telephone (905) 666-5252 I i I I ® I -- ° ,i PARTIAL ROOF PLAN 1:100 ASSp � I ( I I I I 1 X lb DETAIL NUMBER FF j' \/ _ _ DETAIL OR t �� v REFERENCE I TT SAUL DRAWING NO. LICENCE 3478 I EXISTING RANGE HOO EXHAUST AND I — - - I PROJECT: STACK TO BE RELOCA D SEE MECHANICAL. I CAP EXISTING CURB WITH PRESSURE TREATED I I A�� AM AL LGriA I PLYWOOD AND 1NSULAI]�. COVER WITH NEW I I DEHUMIDIFIER UNIT I /1 , �'+, �^ ELEV. ELEV. MEMBRANE ROOFING D FLASH TO EXISTING 3400 6100 ROOF WITH FR40 FL BLE FLASHING I RD I GAF�VET B. RKXAF� CC*AK .EX SUPPORT DEHUMIDIFIER AS INDICATED o ON STRUCTURAL. DRAWINGS AND I MUNICIPALITY OF CLARfNGTON I i I I PROVIDE WEATHERPROOF PITCH POCKETS AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE INSTALLATION 2440 KING STREET WEST — Et.EV. BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO l. 2800 D CONDENSER UNIT DRAINING: cn z _ _ 3400 3230 i i I , SUPPORT CONDENSER AS INDICATED ROOF PLAN -— ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND PROVIDE WEATHERPROOF PITCH POCKETS — -� w _ — REQUIRED TO COMPLETE INSTALLATION F 1 - • A — --- DRAWN BY: CHECKED,.6Y:, r . L G.P.G: I N' DATE: SCALE, EM Q. .RO-bF PLAN PARTIAL ROOF PLAN SEPTEMBER 1997 1=205} ` r: 1+20Q 1:100 Rp I PROJECT NO: ORA#fihfG NO: Y 10 14 15 16 _ y. 971 < r r p .r n' J _ M ;, �1 i 3 S t..S.![!�[f J : a - ,i t=i CONTRACTOR SHAD. CHECK AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE r .� NO_ ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT 97 g.S.S. Nov-, , 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 97 B;S.S, R S T u V X Y z A Az _ ------__._____---------_------------------- ------- _----- I I EXIST BUILDING l _ f -- --- PREFIN MTL F RING PREFIN MTL SIDI G - ------_-__ TO MATCH SIDIN TYPE 1 -- — -- TYPE 1 WITH PR EFIN - ---fLASHING- TO MA rCH Sc call ill: PREFIN MTL FLASHING i I I COLOUR TYPE 3 127.275 T.O.S. II I II II I II HIGH lE1lEl. ICE RESURFMCER PREFIN MTL SIDING TYPE 1 I I 125,075 TOP OF MASONRY I i U S STEEL 125.475 i o I I I i RIB SPLIT FACE CONC - -- ----" I I I j l' I I I l l l I z TYPE 1 (TYP) II li ; l, j' I ' ijl , j N W ) RED PLAIN CONIC f I I I I K FEATURE BAND TYPE Z \ \ \ \ I I I ! I I I t0 MATCH EXIST I� EXIST FIN FLR CHANGE ROOMS — CHMIGE ROOMS mmmminummm 120.925 FIN — 120.350 -- 1 OVERHEAD DOOR NORTH ELEVATION 1:100 A z X V u T S R I I I 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 N 97 G.P.G. N0. REVISIONS DATE BY EXIST BUILDING PREFIN MTL FLASHING TO MATCH TYPE 2 SIDING I I I BARRY • BRYAN PREFIN MTL FLASHING ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED PREFIN MTL SIDING TYPE 1 TO MATCH SIDING PE 1 WITH FLASHING ABOVE TO MATCH COLOURED PLAT C ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS BLOCK FEATURE BAND E 2 Telephone (905) 666-5252 (TYP) TO MATCH EXIST I PREFIN MTL FLASHING COLOURED P N CONC FETU BA D TYPE 2 COLOUR TYPE 3 (TYP) TO MATH EXIST PREFIN MTL SIDING BLOCK TYPE 1 COLOURED PLAIN CONIC PREFI MTL �LASH�IG PREFIN MTL SI ING BLOCK FEATURE BAND TYPE 2 COLO R TYP 3 PREFIN MTL FLASHJNG I � WITH FLASHING I COLOUR TYPE 3 (TYP) TO MATCH EXIST TO MATCH I i ' I iI � I ; ; I it ; lilll � i !I li l Iillll _ TOP OF W)ON 125.550 Dr --I] I Ii li!4- - C`' I J ASSpC/ I 2 RIB SPLIT FACE CONIC DETAIL �i / BLOCK TYPE 1 ( ) TO MATCH EXIST NUMBER I i OP BLOCK _ DETAIL OR 1 © © EXIT 121.150 I I NPI - REFERENCE B A 5 TT SA'UC ' CJ I DRAWING N0: LKENCt CJ — _ FIN FLR 121.075 '� 3478 — LINE OF WALL N(�ROOMS 4•� ��'�r►m�nrrnr•••+� I - - CHAFW 120.925 BEHIND 2 RIB SPLIT FACE CONC LASS BLOCK flR SEALED INSULATED TEMPERED ARVl1 PAD S BLOCK TYPE 1 (TYP) FRAME. (TYPICAL). ALL ZED ALUM ElILAB c 2 RIB SPLIT FACE CONIC P R O J-E C T. BLOCK TYPE 1 (TYP) TO MATCH EXIST TO BE BLUE TINT N SOUTH ELEVATION REFRIGERATION 120.350 - SOUTH ELEVATION AMMON AND AL7�RAT10NS r . , • ,:100 . GA ET B. RCKARD C GMPL.EX - MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 24.40 KING STREET WEST - BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DRAWING: Q - PARTIAL NORTH & SOUTH ELEVATIONS Z DRAWN BY. CHECKED BY: G.P.G. rn SEPTEMBER 1.991' 1ti00 EM1Q0 AREM i - PROJE CT NO: DRAWING ` 4^ . .p ° - ° , r: ., - >.: : QC 09-011) U ELI LO I M • y r n .. .. . .. _ r r _ al -, CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY. , - E SITE . ALL DIMENSIONS AT TH NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 9 B.S.S. 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 13 NOV B.S.S. 1 11 10 8a 7a 6a 5a 2a 1c 1b 1x I -T-F I I I- F I I T I I I -T 1 -1. 1 PREFIN MTL SIDING TYPE 2, WITH rLASHING TO MATCH COLOI IRED PLAIN CONC PREFIN MTL FLASHING BLOC [`EATURE BAND TYP 2 TO MATCH SIDING TYPE i (TYP)1 TO MATCH EXIST � _-- PREFIN MTL FLASHING TO M TCH SIDING TYPE 1 I : I i n 1 _ _ ~I LOUVRE SEE { ; i MECHANICAL li i , COLOURED PLAIN CONC PREFIN MTL SIDING I 1 I I _ TOP OF NI�SONRY 126.475 BLOCK FEATURE BAND E 2 TYPE 1 COLOURED PLAIN CONC r I I I (TYP) TO MATCH EXIST BLOCK FEATURE BAND TYP TOP OF MASONRY 125.550 (TYP) TO MATCH EXIST (I I I ! I I I I I ! I � i II i � I l l j !i � I Ili ll,ll � l 1 hill ' I TOP OF MASONRY 125,475 r : I I fill] I� l it i , lf�l N fl II IIfI �j li I Iilllii illlil I I l l I l' Ili I f EXIST TOP OF MASONRY 123.075 lI i �I I II l� lllll�' I� 12 RIB SFUT FACE i lIl + I lji IIl it I N +----- E I I M BLOCK E 1 TYP ( ) - / 2 RIB SPUT FACE CONC / \ TO MATC EXIST 11 l I \ / Ililrlll �, / \ 121.15 BLOCK TYPE 1 (TYP) TO MATCH EXIST--� \ / dill I IIII I ' � it Il, llll 1 — I 121.150 ii IST \ / 121.075 \ / I IIi � � i� l� l �llll � r I FlCiHANGE ROOMS 121.075 -- -- --— — — it _ t20.925 I ( I I CONC ARENA FLR .- N 120.350 REFRIGERATION EAST ELEVATION 1:100 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 N 97 G.P.G. NO. REVISIONS DATE BY BARRYs BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 PREFIN MTL FLASHING TO MATCH SIDING TYPE 1 r - _ I ` i LOUVRE EE ECCHHANICAL = I I l ; l r ! ;j � j i ';,i l ' ' ', � j l ; �0 ASSp�,� llli � II I I : I 11� I ' I Ilrl Ii � j ' I � � iii jI I IIIIIiI� lli � NUMBEQE7AIL R 0 , I Illl ii l I PREFIN MTL SIDING � � I ; !r f I I I , l I 1 I � � � � � i I r � � : DETAIL OR TYPE 1 i I I I I 1 1 I !1 REFERENCE 1 y� , DRAWING N0. / LICENCE I / \ d' BRIA SCOTT SAULICENCE I i uueu�ua�` III it Ili III I {' 1 iI ii a : PROJECT: t REMOVE EXISTING SCREEN AND ADDf ON AND AL.��1 t KM. PART PART WALL PROVIDE NEW MASONRY. SCREEN AND DOORS �Nr B. �Iv A W FO �P� WEST ELEVATION 1:100 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 2440 KING STREET WEST BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DRAWING: cn LOr. . Q PARTIAL m EAST & WEST ELEVATIONS o - Z DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Cu G.P.G. B.S.S. m : Q, DATE: SCALE: EM 100 a SEPTEMBER 1997 1=100 uj s PROJECT NO: DRAWING $0: cn 971^^ A -302 r i , 1 r wN . ,.. .. ,':.. _, ... -.. .. a .. .. }. r:. N Ern y : > a , , - ,.._ 7 ;: CONT6tACT,QR SHALL.,CHECK AND VERIFY._ ; .. OVI G DOW E Silt a PR_ DE SAFETY LASS TIGKE'�.�lh►IN ,. , ,ALL bIMEAISIONS AT TH C/W 75mm OIA SPEAKING HOLE HORIZ. CENEEERED AT 1400mm A.F.F. - r.: do MONEY SLOT 50 x 200mm , H CENTERED AT BOTTOM OF WINDOW 013' _0 CD _ . HORIZ. EN BO - :. _. RED INFlLL ABOVE SHUTTER WITH GYPSUM 8D.(�OTH SIDES) ON - ,. AL 4 / OF DECK MET SPUDS TO EXTEND T U S INFlLL ABOVE NEW DOORS WITH 2 Spy RI8 COIVC. BLOCK (TYP) GYPSUM BD.(BOTH SIDES) ON REMOVE EXIST. BLK TO ALLOW FOR NEW COLOUR TYPE 1 METAL STUDS TO EXTEND P.LAM FINISHED RECESSED HEADER OVER LINE OF WALL BEYOND TO U/S OF DECK NEW OPENING TO CEILING HT. (TYP) REFER TO RELECTED CEILING PLAN - •. REFER--,.TO RELECTED CEILING PLAN - � PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. COLOUR TYPE 2 PLAN FINISHED EADER FOR CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) FOR CEILING LAYOUT (fYP) COURSE At CEILING LEVEL (TYP) ABOVE OPENING F{TYP) MIN -_-----___ _ - - REMOVE EXIST. DOOR � FRAME N0. ISSUES DATE BY AND ACCENT BLK. SURROUND TG1 _ INFlLL OPENING WITH RECLAIMED _ 1 ISSUED F TENDER/. BLK. TO MATCH MST. � OR TE R / P.S.S. 2 97 PROVIDE NEW HANDRAIL �- - / \ - MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES OCT A ERIMETER OF / ~s / \ ,rf \�_ APPED PLATFORM f j / S N NOV 100 MAX E 1 C $ _ //' `\\ N _ ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION BSS. N I �- - 2 13/97 r I11:;J1 � m iii .�: ` w \\ U � // f.••S - - - 121.350 FIN. FLR. - t r,y r TG 1 TG 1 -- - - - RAISED PLATFORM _ y \ 121.150 FIN._FLR. ` / L i 2 t.150 FIN. _FLR. _ CONC. RAMP PROVIDE COURSE SMOOTH COLOUR TYPE 2 LOBBY AREA NEW CORRIDOR RENOVATE EXIST. EXIST. WALL LOBBY AREA oq RAISED. H/CAPPED PLATFORM I' RECESSED AREA FOR VENDING MACHINES � F� � 0 MATCH EXIST. »7111"` EXIST. WALL NEW LOBBY AREA NEW ARCHITECTURAL BLK. WALL TO MATCH .EXIST. ROOM 102 ROOM 102 rT� INTERIOR ELEVATION LOBBY AREA 2 INTERIOR ELEVATION LOBBY - AREA �12 1:50mm A202 1:5omm COLUMN IN LOBBY (FOREFRONT) PROVIDE NEW STAND UP COUNTERTOP PROVIDE 3 COURSES SMOOTH BLK. COLOUR TYPE 2 20mm PLYWOOD P.LAM FINISH BACKING FOR STANDUP COUNTER AT LOBBY COLUMN RADIUS ALL CORNERS 100mm MAINTAIN VERTICAL JOINTS C/W 20mm PLYWOOD GUSSETS (P.LAM) MECHANICALLY FASTENED TO COUNTERTOP & CONC. WALL 2 SPLIT RIB CONC. BLOCK (TYP) 2 SPLIT RIB CONC. BLOCK (TYP) PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. COLOUR TYPE 1 COLOUR TYPE 1 COURSING FOR PIER AT BOTH REFER TO RELECTED CEILING PLAN PROVIDE NEW SCREEN GLASS BLOCK ENDS OF GLASS BLK. SURROUND PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK, PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. FOR CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) SEE PLAN FOR DETAILS COLOUR TYPE 2 COURSE AT CEILING LEVEL (TYP) COURSE AT CEILING LEVEL (TYP) Jr. T - TG1 TG1 TG2 TG1 TG2 -t - - - TG2 -I - TG2 Ile _011 00 N N 2 I TGt 1 L TG1 1- - - - w W TG1 ♦ / TG2 TG2 -� TG2 t TG2 71 TG2 TG1 �`� ,'� TG2 - �- `j: _ TG2 - _, TG2 ,..I I 121.150 FIN._FLR. _ \ / - - - - - LOBBY AREA PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. COLUMN IN LOBBY PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. PROVIDE.SMOOTH BLK. FIRST COURSE (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 2 FOREFRONT NEW DISPLAY CABINET TO BE FIRST COURSE (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 2 FIRST COURSE (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 2 ROOM 0 2 CUSTOMIZED TO GLASS BLK. SURROUND 3 INTERIOR ELEVATION LOBBY AND CORRIDOR AREA A202 1:50mm PROVIDE 3 COURSES SMOOTH BLK. COLOUR TYPE 2 PROVIDE NEW ARCHITECTURAL BLK. WALL BACKING FOR STANDUP COUNTER AREA ONLY TO MATCH EXIST. MAINTAIN VERTICAL. JOINTS C/W OPENING FOR TICKET WINDOW PROVIDE NEW STAND UP COUNTERTOP SEE LINTEL SCHEDULE (TYP) 20mm PLYWOOD W/ P.LAM FINISH C/W 20mm PLYWOOD GUSSETS (P.LAM) INFlLL ABOVE SCREEN WITH PROVIDE SAFETY GLASS TICKET WINDOW MECHANICALLY FASTENED TO COUNTERTOP do GYPSUM BD. (BOTH SIDES) ON METAL STUDS C/W 75mm DIA. SPEAKING HOLE CONC. WALL HORIZ. CENTERED AT 1400mm A.F.F. PROVIDE NEW OPENING IN EXIST. 2 SPLIT RIB CONC. BLACK TYP 2 SPLIT RIB CONC. BLOCK (TYP) do MONEY SLOT 50 x 200mm CONC. BLK. WALL FOR NEW (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 1 HORIZ. CENTERED AT BOTTOM OF WINDOW DOOR dt FRAME AS SHOWN PROVIDE NEW GYPSUM BD. BULKHEAD COLOUR TYPE i SEE STRUCT. DWGS. 200mm BELOW LOBBY CEILING HT. PROVIDE NEW SCREEN REFER TO RELECTED CEILING PLAN I ENTRY AREA TO ICE PAD PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. SEE PLAN FOR DETAILS FOR CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) P.LAM FINISHED HEADER EXIST SPUT RIB BLK. INCEILING HT 2600mm) COURSE AT CEILING LEVEL (TYP) ABOVE OPENING (TYP) _r 4- I t"— i G1 - ' I I. PROVIDE NEW R HANDRAIL AT PERIMETER OF j--- - M a. I t g H/CAPPED PLATFORM \ \ - I - -- CD Q TG t r - --� 4 U - - I - - - - I } - I W i- -�- � i 1-L ,'/ �- -� I - /'/ /�/ � •r' -f � � , � ��� I I_� � ,..'„_,� I I I -t- - I -� i } _i --1—�-+- ' + � O 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 CT P I 30/97 \ / :• r. ., .� � , � � � / - / it.• �' a. •�� ti'''I, I I I TG1 TG1 ♦ ' „� -+ �- - t- // - - ? /' I /' ` "'r - •)� ^' •` .* � 1.��_�.� t-, i 121.350 N0. REVISIONS DATE BY - / - — - -- I - j a FIN. FLR. 121.150 FIN._FLR. _ \ / - i 11/ / • y _ _ - -wismil RAISED PLATFORM LOBBY AREA rs IN EXIST. WALL EXIST. WALL NEW CURVED WALL PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. FIN. _FIR. 121.150 FIRST COURSE (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 2 RAISED H/CAPPED PLATFORM BARRY ,* BRYAN LOBBY AREA PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. FIRST COURSE (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 2 PROVIDE NEW OPENING IN EXIST. ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED CONC. BLK. WALL FOR NEW DOOR do FRAME AS SHOWN ROOM 102 SEE STRUCT. DWGS. ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 4 INTERIOR ELEVATION LOBBY AND CORRIDOR AREA A202 1:50mm REMOVE EXIST. DOOR do FRAME 0 Assn PROVIDE NEW OPENING IN EXIST PROVIDE NEW GYPSUM BD. BULKHEAD LINE OF EXIST WD. CEILING INFILL ABOVE SCREEN WITH GYPSUM BD.(80TH SIDES) ON CONC. BLK. WALL FOR NEW SCREEN INFILL ABOVE SCREEN WITH GYPSUM BD.(BOTH SIDES) ON 200mm BELOW LOBBY CEILING HT. -9 TO BE REMOVED do EXIST. BEYOND METAL STUDS TO EXTEND TO U/S OF DECK AS SHOWN. REFER TO PLAN FOR DETAILS METAL STUDS TO EXTEND TO U/S OF DECK IN ENTRY AREA TO ICE PAD i 2585mm, +/- A.F.F. DETAIL NEW IMPACT RESISTANT DRYWALL BULKHEAD PROVIDE NEW BULKHEAD OF IMPACT NUMBER PROVIDE NEW SCREEN REFER TO RELECTED CEILING PLAN TO TERMINATE FLUSH WITH WALL FACE REFER TO RELECTED CEILING PLAN RESISTANT DRYWALL ON METAL FURRING REFER TO RELECTED CEILING PLAN 2 SPLIT RIB CONC. BLOCK (TYP) SEE PLAN FOR DETAILS FOR NEW CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) FOR NEW CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) TO ENCLOSE EXIST. MECH. DUCT FOR CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 1 DETAIL OR - CONSTRUCT. TO MAXIMIZE CEILING HT. REFERENCE SRIAN SCOTT SAUL ---------------------- -- -------------------------- --- AWING C�NC - --------------- Lt E DR N0. I yam'• 3478 �,a C9 g t c4 tE O / \\\ I) N W O = �O O = N I O pp PROJECT: / TG1 \ ♦ \x , �� N � TG2 TG2 T 2 r • N� ADDffM AND ALTS 1 IVI�1� TG1 TG1 TG1 TG ' I - _ TG1 W I -� ,. m - l Li gm U f QAR*7 B. RICKARD COMPLEX z TG1 YG1 \� // TG1 TG1 TG1G1 •r �} - _ I 121.150 FIN. FIR. / Z 121,150 FIN. FLR. _ 121,150 _ 1- i 1_ I v FIN FLR. L.�..�_ - - MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON EXIST-LOBBY-AREA LOBBY AREA LOBBY AREA PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. PROVIDE SMOOTH BLK. FIRST COURSE (TYP) COLOUR TYPE 2 FIRST COURSE TO MATCH EXIST. NEW SCREEN IN EXIST. WALL NEW SCREEN IN EXIST. WALL NEW SCREEN IN EXIST. WALL NEW SCREEN IN EXIST. WALL 2440 KING STREET WEST PATCH dt MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES PATCH do MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES PATCH dt MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES PATCH do MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES NEW CONSTRUCTION EXIST. WALL CONSTRUCTION BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO ROOM 124 ROOM 124 ROOM 102X DRAWING: I NTERIOR ELEVATION CORRIDOR AREA (EXIST. BLDG) r5 INTERIOR ELEVATION CORRIDOR AREA (EXIST. BLDG) r6N� PARTIAL INTERIOR ELEVATION LOBBY AREA cn Cn A202 1:50mm A202 1:50mm A203 1:50mm .w Q INTERIOR ELEVATION$ 0 z _ m DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: F- S.w.H. D.L.B. M DATE: SCALE:` El 0 OCT/97 1 50mm. o x PROJECT NO. DRAWING N0: w 0 - q - 9�10Q t A3 to NI Q ; r . , - ' Y 1 t. } �i LL . a (110?I) LIM i 1 ,' , .: : a ` , • CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY " A I z.. j ALL DIMENSION ' 51TE ., SMOOTH'.CONC.'.. " REFER laD REFI.EGTEI�'.!E�IL�'PLNL!1' _ - SEE-SCHED. FOR FINISHES ---`----- FOk COLM LAYOUT (IYP� ra - - GYPSUM BD HEADER , , . r� ;. P M, eD' WINDOW GYPSUM HOLLOW METAL ( ) BD. CEILING PROVtI� HORNY. SLIDING WINDOW' `' PRO RIZ. SLIDING WINDOW ` ' W - SC _ - CIJGHTS REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN IN ENA BANK OF SCREEN / ON SIDES OF ROOM ONLOOKING FOR CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) 1" PADS i I tE W.. 31.IDE NO. ISSUES DATE BY \ SLIDE PROVIDE NEW P.LAM COUNTERTOP D x \\ C W 4 EQUAL LOWER UNITS g = t \ .c� W/ ADJUSTABLE BRACKETS 1 SHELF PER UNIT .f c� ,� OCT � T�— , _ N : T 1 T 1 TYPICAL FOR OPPOSITE SIDE OF ROOM N T o Tc Tc rc 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 2 g7 D.L.B. • �� - g ,. \. �' .,' `. ,' `\ n `. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTLON '1309 B',S.S. ; Q \ 2 aS 124.475 FIN. _FLR. �_ \ _ ' 124.475 FIN. FLR. - - UPPER�OR UPPER FLOOR 124.475 UPPER FLOOR \\ EQ. EQ. EQ. . HOLLOW METAL W8 WALL CONSTRUCTION HOLLOW METALA S 1 v DELETED rT*�� P ARTIAL INTERIOR ELEVATION (ROOM 201 PARTIAL INTERIOR ELEVATION (ROOM 202) 2 PARTIAL INTERIOR ELEVATION (ROOM 203) ) A204 1:50mm A204 1:50mm A204 1:5omm EXIST. STEEL COLUMN TO EXIST. SIDING — BE SUPPORTS ON NEW — _- _ �_ _ STEEL BEAM REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -- - --- _ EXIST. SIDING FOR CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) FOR CEILING LAYOUT (TYP) — STRUCTURAL DWGS. ------- ------- ( REMOVE.EXIST. SIDING & O O PROVIDE NEW CONC. BILK INFILL ° � '" EQ. EQ. _ '` EQ. EQ. EQ. . _ g. 2 I EXIST. COLUMN TO REMAIN WT WTG WTG WTG G G WI' WTG G v ---- ---- NEW 0/H DOOR ENTRY ALLOW METAL nSCREEN ---------- -- EXIST. SIDING FOR ICE RESURFACER �n HOLLOW METAL SCREEN co 1 ---- - -- 124.475. FIN. FLR. 124.475 FIN. FLR. UPPER-�R UPPER FLOOR WS WALL CONSTRUCTION - — - --_ - W8 WALL CONSTRUCTION --- — — ---- ---� EXIST. BLK. WALL --- — -- i r5N� P ARTIAL INTERIOR ELEVATION (VIEWING RM 201 ) EXIST,PARTIAL INTERIOR ELEVATION (VIEWING RM 201 ) -----'- ------ --- --- t3LK. WALL � Z A204 1 Gomm 1:50mm - - O Z 3800 2200 3' 3800 -- __---- — <\ / - --- - - - ---_-_ -- - -' SO 50 50 50 50 50 50 , 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 ---- 750 10.25 1025 750 1025 1025 1065 1070 1065 750 1025 1025 750 iz/ lo lo lo A Al A Al '10 lo 'o - \ / y, INTERIOR UNITS �. INTERIOR UNITS EXIST. COLUMN EXTENT OF NEW OPENING IN EXIST. BLK. WALL TO HAVE TG1 TO HAVE TG1 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG2 TRANSOM TG2 TG2 TG2 TG2 '� TRANSOM do TG2 TG2 TG2 EXIST. DOORS IN NEW EXTENT OF EXIST. WALL TO BE INFILLED �i �i �i SIDELIGHTS / \ � METAL FRAMES REMOVE EXIST. DOORS I t FRAMES PROVIDE NEW DOOR At FRAME IN PROVIDE NEW CONC. BL.K. WAIL NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION g $ // \\ g �/ \\\ O SEE PLAN FOR DETAILS SEE PLAN FOR DETAILS 04 04 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG1 TG1 N TG2 JITG2 TG2 O TG2 TG1 TG1 , ]TG2 rn 6 PARTIAL INTERIOR ELEVATION EXIST. ARENA TG2 TG2 TG2 TG2 '� c TG1 \ To TG2 TG2 TG2 "� � TG2 TG1 \\\ � TG2 � A203 1:50mm ' FINISHED N N i SCREEN SC1 SCREEN SC2 SCREEN SC3 SCREEN SC4 3800 2680 5650 1600 2250 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 54 50 50 50 790 900 790 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1500 1050 1050 Lrl 750 1025 1025 750 5 c� c 1 TGt TG1 TG1 i•S TG1 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG? TG2 O TG2 'n TG1 TG1 � i III\ \\ 2 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 30C9 G•P.G. •\\\\ o o �, $ $ $ 1 REVISED FOR ADDENDUM 3 3OCT Gi#'.G. ' 8 , 8 N r- N r N ^' N NO: REVISIONS DATE BY T \TG� G1 TG1 TG1 JTG' TG1 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG2 TG1 TG1 ET \TG1 59 TG1 TG1 TG2 TG2 tG2 TG2 TG2 i° ' �'TG2 TG1 TG1 BARRY BRA o Fl"' HED ASSOCIATES (1991.) L LIMiTED N N SCREEN SC5 SCREEN SC6 SCREEN SC7 SCREEN SC8 SCREEN SC9 ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT` MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 5580 34,00 2200 1600 2400 5 34050 950 50 950 50 995 1000 50 995 50 1065 50 1070 1065 50 50 665 50 670 50 665 50 7 50 7 5" 0 7 50 7 50 Lr/ 25 25 25 50 725 LF/ o �IA DETAIL g ' TG1 \ \ N N oG NUMBER U TG \ ' TG1 TG1 TG1 TG1 TG1 TG1 'n DETAIL OR \\ �, o 0 o REFERENCE 416.B A SAUL DRAWING N0. 1�� LICENCE TG1 \ TG1 TG1 TG1 TG1 TG1 TG1 '� ° 'y, 3478 \ / ��han�tNM� FINISHED g FLOOR SCREEN SC 10 SCREEN SC 11 SCREEN SC 12 SCREEN SC 13. SCREEN SC 14 PROJECT: ADDRM At�D AL IERATIC B 2200 . 14001 19501 1025 1025 50 SITE VERIFY SITE VERIFY 1800 50 5Q 50 5o 50 5o MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 900 50' 900 900 825 825 INTERIOR UNITS 2440 KING STREET WEST TO HAVE TG2 M BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO 11 -+ N DRAWING: cn, TG1 TG1 �_ cv g S \\` 01 TG1 rn N ` N TG 1 T6`1 `\ WG yyG g INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Cri \ p / / r., FINISHED / FLOOR SCREEN IC15' SCREEN. SC16 SCREEN SC17 SCREEN SC18 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: .., S:W.H. - - A'tE:` � SCALE:- yEt a. n L7 C E' T01 = SEALEt. INSULATED UNITS OF SINGLE PANE TEMPERED GLASS. S REEK, TYPE X TG2 .= SF.�:ED NSULATBD UNITS OF DOUBLE PANE TEMPERED GLASS, SEPTEMBER 1997 _1:50rnm SCALE 1:60mm t' WTG SEALED INSULATED UNITS'OF 1 PANE TEMPERED &,:I PANE GWG P E ROJ CT"Nb DRAWING NO n4 l�ix -w>G SE&w,.INsutATED UNITS OF -SINGLE WIRED.GLASS 97 'Aw R : _ : : _ t , w - , , •Y. .:: ., .. r _-- • :1. .. .. - , . :.. .- .. _ - 'mot,,. n ._ _ ',"..• a ,- :.. .. -' - -. ,. .n. .....-,. -.... -:a .... t: .. .-v .. - w '. _. +. :" .: .. - ,. - .. •2,.-. , Li 1.71 • e i 3 J s • r CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK,AND VORtFY .� ALL DIMENSIONS. AT,THE SITE 1 , „ NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 2/97 B.S.S. 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1309 B.S.S. R S T U V X Z A A Z Y X V U T S R PROVIDE 2 SPLIT RIB CONIC. BLK. PROVIDE PLAIN CONC. BLK. _ -~-- COLOUR TYPE 1 PAINT FINISH 128.050 STUDS ABOVE SCREEN T.O.S. __-- _-- - - -- - PROVIDE GYPSUM BD. ON METAL �---" � LOW POINT OF CAMBER _ 127.275 T.O.S --- - -- ----- - _{ �1 ------ --- ----- ILL L i IF- HK�i LEYEl �-LINER SHEET-, GIRT LINE TO - ---- GIRT LINE TO -- - ---- --- l ICE RESURFA,CEER 0 ---- SUIT FRAMING ____�__ LINER SHEET --- ----- - G WT WTG SUIT FRAMING ----- -- -_ - v► - -- -- G 125.075 TOP OF MASONRY 425.075 125.180 o -- - - _- --- - - - - ZuNER V�.INING AREA _.__-- ---__ ___ _ SHEET ` —--- - N Arrr --r--- -- 1---- -----t-----r-- -� ? r--� PROVIDE HORIZ. SLIDER ° �o _F - - - p T�- T-T--I--�- 7---T-----r- ---I-----r----T----�- - ---- ----- ---� --- ----T----T-- II I I I _ _ -- Ell Ll i r PROVIDE 2 SPLIT RIB CONIC. BLK. I i I I I t COLOUR TYPE 1 j I i i I 1-1-.-1---- ! I I I I I I I 1 1 I I i 1 I � I i I °I I 1 I__L_ G G ELL - uwr I I I t--t—i-- I I I i I I I I I I I I $ I I _--t-_- 121.150 �!. . 1- -� ----1--- --- --- ----�---- --1----1- O/H DOOR �_I_ J_T-- - j if !, sc, S e civa; » 2?\} , . :. a , . {. -;.- - y Y , � n I . :. _ _. T. , ,. ,• . -: f : � x pp ,- , r ... :- ..11 I �- - - , - - s�. - .. .. . - - - _ - -, d .`;- , - - _ .. ,.. . CONTR I �: �; .. R. ALL' CHECK 'AND"iERIEY . , .r - e- ALl DIMeNSIONS','AT THE S11t , I I I I ., 5 - I 50 ,z I .1 � I � � I . � � I I � - . , - ;1 } I . TOa OF MASONRY 27.35 NQ. ISSUES DATE BY ,. �,_ �--r - - - _ j. ROOF' CONSTRUCTION PROFILE WALL I I I I I I - 1 I I" �� 11 12 OCT[ I . .7 1` BEYOND I. 1 ISSUED FOR fiENDER B,S,$. I I I PREFlNISHED METAL 2 97 , ' . - I - ( REMOVE EXISTING ROOF f ' NOV T0�_ FLASHING lJ 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1� 9 B.S.S. `. OF STEEL 27.27 ASSEMBLY AND PART OF ' - EXISTING WALL PLAIN COLOURED BLOCK I. -_ - - - - - - - - - - ___ I ACCENT BAND (COLOUR TYPE Z) I EXISTING CONC. BLOCK WALL -�- - - - I EW ROOF COMPRISING \�� I ' 2 SPLIT RIB ARCHITECTURAL �- _ - _ _�_ _ - - - MEMBRANBAILAST ON EPDM \ - --- - __ -_ -- BLOCK (COLOUR TYPE 1) i ; REMOVE EXISTING ROOF ROOM I---I RIGID INSULATION ON V.B. ) --- ------.----------------- -_.-- I 50 SIM'IV ASSEMBLY AND PART OF 201 H STEEL DECK AND OWSJ ------- - -----. --- TYPICAL EXISTING WAIL F- - - - - - - - - - - - - -� - - �,' ---- --. ---.--------- -- 1 It ri I REMOVE EXISTING ROOF TOP I I ( - L', I I ROOF CONST: 1 EQLIIIPMENT SEE MECHANICAL I ---- --- --- - ____ , . u , 11 SFIIdK N0.- 3 C. ON DECK ON JOISTS I Sflltli NO. 2 __K , - -i ( T � . . 154 S STRUCTURAL I OP OF STEEL 25.15 25,15 TOP OF STEEL -- ------ ==d ,L_ - - - - -� - - - - - - - -� 153 - -- - ------------ - ---}. .. _ -- = --- _ -- _- - _ _ _ ---- ---- g L - - -- � i ------------ -----I R _- - -_- _�- - - - - - - FASCIA - PREFlNISHED METAL SIDING _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \ 7� T\ 7t -� - TC- l� - ----� TYPE 2 ON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME CAVITY WAL AND �I / INSULATION ----- --- FILL solomp - - - -- - - -- -- - - ` - NEW STEEL BEAM TH 16 TYPE] "X" F] NEW SUSPENDED ---.-- I , -4 -- SEE STRUCTURAL L n - --- - GELLING SEE SCHEDULE -- --- GYP. B ON l U ( FURRING - - U --- _T SOt=FIT PREFINiSHEO METAL SIDING RECDV�iG ! __-- �----- I REMOVE EXISTING WALL TO _---------- - - _ -_ _-- -- --i - - TYPE 2 - COLOUR WHITE - ON STEEL o - EXISTING WALL -- -- ----J FRAWiNG - SEE STRUCTURAL ------' ----._-- I-� I 1 HR. FIRE 1 I I 200 BELOW EXISTING SLAB I --- 108 71,H I CONCN�L2W RATED _- - -- -- 1 $ r-j - - TICKET I - -"�-T11 . 140 COI}!C. BL I ' I N n --� WINDOW - -- _ I ---- WALL W�H s0 - 124 CORRIDOR. - -- -- I , SID 11NS 130 I ( , I MAKE GOOD EXIST FLOOR -_... ------ - I - I _ _ � `±�123 --____ u BOARD I31 GYP. -- � . � I TO REMAIN I - _ --� ------ -- - - - - .1.I H - FORM NEYV OPENING ------ --- I ' I --- --- FOR NEW DOOR - - r-I I I H --- - - = - --- - - - OP OF CONCRETE SLAB 21.15 21.15 TOP OF CONCRETE Slge 11 I .� I -m -- SAWCUT EXISTING SLAB m I . . PROVIDE NEW SLAB I I THICKENING - SEE VSAWCUT EXISTING I FOR DETAILS OF 9 STRUCTURAL SLAB AT EXISTING DOOR I I FOUNDATION WALLS LOCATION AND FOOTINGS REMOVE ONE BLOCK l SECTION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ COURSE - � ) STRUCTURAL POUR NEW S11+8 _ - - _ .__I SECTION ; - - - - - - - 03 A2 1:50 AT THRESHOLD A202 1:50 PROVIDE NEW WEEPING ___ TILE AT PERIMETER - FOUNDATIONS OF NEW V BUILDING v A V X A x - . NEW INFILL ROOF TYPICAL PRE ENGINEERED INSULATED SEALED UNITS STONE BALLAST ON PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING 1300 9 ROOF OF GWG AND TEMP GLASS EPDM MEMBRANE ON `` SYSTEM ROOF ASSEMBLY 50 PREFlNISHED SIDING ON IN INSULATED P.S. FRAMES RIGID INSULATION . NOTE: PRE TRUCTURE 10 D I g THERMAL BREAKERS (TYP.) ', ON VAPOUR BARRIER ON METAL \� WITH 200 MM INSULATION 50 SIM DECK ON NEW STRUCTURAL STE HEIGHT AT IS I AND PREFlNISHED LINER I _ _ POINT /� --_.. -- ----------�,\ EET --------------i / /� �� 27.97 STRUCTURAL EAVE HEIGHT � __ __ -- &-r 27.97 STRUCTURAL EAVE HEIGHT ----- - --- -- _- -------.--.-.--,---- I PARAPET BEYOND I' f-� . I - i ---------------- ----- 27.27 TOP STEEtI - ' TOP STE _ _-_ _--- ---- -_� 27,27 26.87 ` / PREFNISHED LINER -----_ __ _ ___ I -- - -- -- I �- 1 G.W.B. - \ _ = SHEET AND --------------- ------ - - -- --- - - - - -- - - - - - - - INSULATION , EXISTING SIDING ASS BN(- - IT T4 REMAIN T . REQUIRED POSSIBLE ENCLOSED _ _ \ � I CLEARANCE VIEWING AREA (SEPARATE � I PRICE ITEM) - SEE I � - �, 1 I- � N DWG. NO A204 0 § _ I 5 � , ASO1 g i OISSTEMSIADN G ASSEMBLY a ! A701 --\ "' -_--_--- - _-__--__---- i POURED CONC. � ------ ------ I -- - � I CAP _ _-�-.. _ - ,--T--,-- / I , 1 1 GUARDRAIL -�- 1_ 1 T L 1 -- - r / i I - __ -- --- --- BUILT OFF EXISTING 24.47 OP_Mi1S0 RY ! � � r 7 T � $ 24.47 OP JiIASONRY_--- - ----------_- - - - - i I TIE BACK AT EACH UMN I o FIXED WOOD j - o o a o 0 0 o d4 o o g.o< , 0 0 0 `o' o o.o p o p o 0 0 ------- - - TOP OF MASON ANGLED WALL _ - -- --- g BENCH SEATI -- . PER DETAIL AT BOND `- I M I- o o °o •6 a - FORM NEW OPENING IN EXISTING - ---- I ---- ---' -.------ ------ - - -- LOCATION -J �- L - I WALLS TO RECEIVE NEW DOORS --- -- ~- ` 1220 x HOLLOW C E _ -+ PLAIN CONC. -.----_--_ - SPLIT RIB -� �� 3 _ -J / PART OF EXISTING _ -- STRUCTURAL o ao 0 0 0 PREC NC. UNITS PROVIDE NEW LINTEL OVER EACH I BLOCK PAINTED - BLOCK TYPE 1 1 J � � _ WALL TO REMAIN _ __ _- CONC. BL t AS PER SCHEDULE ------ -- 1(1 4-J - - - I - ---------------- I _J EXISTING WALL I i 1 WALL I --- _ _� EX REMAIN i I BEYOND �- CONC. B --- --- WALL I HAND WALL � -- J , RAIL EXISTING RAISED a ° � _ \ � In ' ' o M 11 J EXISTING DOOR M 11 g I - $SING ROOM o v� PLATFORM I M r7� -- I - - i1 -J \� TO REMAIN 1 M I a 9 --- 130 I --- -- - J I , , A501 1 ( j I I 1 s -__ ' SKATE - - - _-� - - _J " ---- 2 LAYERS OF TYPE "X r I - GYPSUM BOARD 1 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 OCT G.P.G I SKATE Ft00RNVG 1 FLOORING 131 - _ I _.__.-- ---__ -1 ,j-� 132 / 20 FURRING AT I i I ' 3T 97. N L I I _ ! Iw / - NEW STEEL - - - 400 MAX 2 FLOOR HANGE MS - STAR - - 1 I 21.15 I I T - __ -- - +--. s-J_J 'I / I i + ! N0. REVISIONS DATE BY 2 LAB FI FVATInN I ' I �� L/ 21.15 I � . ..00 POURED CON FORS DETAILS OF -/ . • _ - BARRY * BRYAN� -\..................I AND FOOTINGS WALLS I FOR DETAIL OF STAIR ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED SLOP SINK AND FOOTINGS SEE'E�DETAL SEE A701 `,\ SEE STRUCTURAL 4 rT� SECTION 4 A701 ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS K-2"� 5 50 �11 1:50 Telephone (905) 666-5252 SECTION �o ------1, A203 1:5o p 1 D PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING v SYSTEM ROOF ASSEMBLY ' x . A PREFlN MTL FLASHING . PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING REMOVE EXISTING ROOF TO MATCH SIDING TYPE 1 SYSTEM ROOF ASSEMBLY FINISHES, DECKS, JOISTS p PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING R SYSTEM ROOF ASSEMBLY ASSp I EXIST WALL TO REMAIN. y� i1 /'� ��\� �`�4 PREFlN MTL SIDING - - I CUT AND REWORK TO SUIT I I TYPE 1 DETAIL 1, NEW VIEWING ROOM f 27.97 STRUCTURAL HEIG - I_� NEW WALL NUMBER -- - TYPE W 10 2 .97 T T RAL.EAVE HEIGHT _ DETAIL OR 27,27 T STEEL --,-- SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC SUSP. A C. TILE __._ -- rr . - TILE CEILING CEILING I _ - - DRAWING NO. i� LICENCE REFERENCE RI S CTT SAUE . - - - - - I - - - - - - - - I 127.275 - - ( ,, Ihtf„347$f,f. I I r- ,�iy � I HIGH LEVEL . I ICE RESURFACER 13 GYPSUM I-1 - - - \�-___ /- - I I / � �'� FILL T°P 2 PROJECT: BOARD ON 20 I COURSES SOUO �/I ` . FURRING CHANNELS--{ FLOO CO UCTION ' ON O.W.S.J. I I g I S SEE STRUCTURAL I 1 HO R ED ASSEM Y I REMOVE DOOR 04 c ���NG RWM 62 C NC. N I SIDOG ESN g BLOCK UP OPENING I , ee'' W I 1 A f"� T (- 38 L ECK ON I 1 4 _ STRU STEEL 1 -1 F REMOVE PART OF 201 16 M "X' G.W. I 25.47 ZQp OF MASONRY 125.075 TOP OF M,�SONRY ` - I EXISTING WALL ON 2 FU NG - I I REMOVE EXISTING -- --.------- -- LAP AND SEAL AIR B. . + I� AT 4 0. I I GUARDRAIL - _-t - --- -_- _--_ I BARRIER AT LINER PANEL FKXAM COMPLEX a 24.47 To MASON I , I I BXE'M�tS T REM N ° 1 - ------ MTL SIDING '� I MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON s .._ [STING TOP OF WALLSEMBLY \ I GIRT 7 ----------- PREFlN MTL SIDING - r- OP °F CONC. FLOG 150 FIBRE INSULATION ! -2440 KING STREET WEST WITH 'Y GIRTS o OF ( I I ' I �I Flu TOP 2 COURSES BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO LINER PANEL i SOLID TYPICAL S OFFICE I STRUCTURAL GIRTS Ii i i1- TO REMAIN 90 W� ALL I SUSPENDED A.C. I 129 q t j' cn cn - � TILE CEILING NEW 140 CONC. STEEL BEAM AND I i DRAWING: . , - BLOC WALL CHANNEL (SEE STRUCTURAL) I : 7 TYPEE 1 Mn SIDING ' 1. N SITE VERIFY I : Asa m g 2 SPLIT RIB \ GL�NERN. M I r; - WALL BEYON FUR OUT I r- PREFlN MTL 1 I , ro I (TYPE 1) 130 W _WITH I DRIP FLASHING Mll L SIDING 102 13 (dYP. BD. NEw 14o CONC . 1 , L I s SECTIONS BLOCK INFl WITH L ASSEMBLY �, 50 RIGID IN LATION !! 121,150 \ N MTt SIDING -- $ - FtM NE'W OPENINGS AND 13 GYPSUM BOARD I I pn \ P50FlFIBRE INSULATION o FOR NEW DOORS I � TH '2 GIRTS AID 93 -- P DE LINTELS AND I I I � N I I � 111. I 6 1.15 PLAIN COLOURED CONC, BLOCK GOOD � f/ � I ( !90 ONC BLOCK I H F- EXISTING SLAB 1 15 21.15 Ey�STIFLR _ I -3 121`.075 FlN FIR - . ,- -�-- DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY:ROM b NEW CONC. FLOOR 21.07 / C.D.S. B.S.S. BSS. .° REMOVE EXISTING VERHEAD CHAWGEROOMS -L'-t -< - SEE 9TRUCTIiRA EXIST. FLOOR `.. DATE: SCALE: Et DOOR, TRACK AND EQUIPMENT , ' n SLAB HAND OVER TO WNER 20.92 FlN. FIR. I �---"- SEPTEMBER 1997 1 5b �� °� L RENA 120,9 5 FLR - 4 S CT� N EwsTUvc . w j PROJECT N0: DRAWING N0: o FOUNDATION . A203 t. AND- WALL A . . . s SETION A501 s �, ,, I A2D3 Aso I 11 - CT ON C _ o 11 I �I . *il". -1- 1:50 3 - � I - .- ., -.l. :, . I I -.' Fri ' _-, _ , . � '. . I � q., y .. 'a . .t ,. _ I 1. F.,: ,' / : :.. ?i. - .. - TM .. _ _ , :: n, - .. . - .': y. _ y ..... r F „ v - Y.. :1, .-: '.: :. ' '.. r. . s� _,,. a .< ti 1 ��,�� r. � f. ;/ ��, ,, . r � ry � � n `__._. - c. „ as.. , , .. .. u y _ CONTRACTOR, SI+ALL Q8ECK AND VERIFY ,p ALL IMENSIONS At THE Sr D TE : YX T S >AIRARRIER rPREFINISHED METAL FLASHING TO MATCH .TYPE 1 PREFIMISHED METAL SIDING ,TYPO 1 SI 5O COM WP RTS rH IN REFINISHED METAL FLASHING - TO MATCH TYPE 2 I I I I I I NO. ISSUES DATE BY B1fOND - -�. ._ _. .._ - --r-- - - - _._. .� - ._ - - ._: _ - _ -I- SIDING - TYPE 2 I PREFINISHED METAy II--I PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING - TO MATCH TYPE 1 � , I I 1 OCT ISSUED FOR TENDER BBS FEAWSHING N CAP PREFINISHED MET SIDING - TYPE 1 { I { i 0 97 (( 1 27.37 T O 3TL I 2 II -\ ;.ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1309 5. ' �- _ - t -- I ! i TYPICAL FIAT ROOF CONSTRUCTION \ - - - - - -REMOVE EXiSTIN ROOF AND�STRUC - - - � I I � I I I � � I � t I PREFINISHED METAL NEW - _ � _ - _ ► if I NEW PREFIN. -r -T -r � r � "'�'; I r � I '�' '-� - � I � � I , � �; STONE BALLAST ON EP.O.M. MEMBRANE FLASHING ON BLOCKING I ' FLASHING I 1 j 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 l--J � ' � I I � I � I i I I I ': ON VAPOURDBARRIER ON STEEL DECK COLOUR TYPE 3 TYPE 3-�� E ISTI SKYLIGHT ( I I" REMOVE PART I ( I ( I & STRUCTURAL ROOF FRAMING REMANUFRABTURED R D WALLS NEW SINGLE PL MEMBIZ E ROOF I I-{ OF CONC. BL I I ' ( ' I i I 1 a _ --- �%J METAL CU T REM N I WALL { SEE STEEL AND N I I NO 1 1 n I { I I I I 50 / I I 25.55 T/O STEEL u Jim "511"A. �_ 25.15 T/0 MASONRY t r TOP OF EXISTING MEZZANINE I- -1 WASHROOM I MECHANICAL I ( 1 -� - - - - - - - - - ELEVATION 124475 EXISTING CONC. BLOCK WALL N SUSPENDED A.C. TILE CEILING 50 _._--------- - ------- - ---------- -------- __._ 111 112 - - , - REMOVE EXIST. CONC. AIR REINFORCED C NCRETE -_ -_ -_ -_ AND PART FLOOR j SUPPORT B ---- --- J - !-- - -- --- --- SUSP. GYP. BD- CEILING I if - - - - To BE REMOVED ---- --- ^--- - ----- - - - -- --- --- - -- REFRIGERATION g 11 t- — — — CONIC. BOCK ( CONCESSION I STORAGE EXISTING 200 CONC. LOBBY ________- SHOWER CURTAIN & S.S. ROD I o0 114 g I I F WALL BLOCK WALL AND 121 N 117 FOUNDATION AND 102 E _ _ _ _ REMOVE EXISTING STAIR r� - I I - - - - AND SIDE WALL { "� FOOTING --. —cr -- -- r ROOF ACCESS [[��''I STORAGE _ --- - - - -- TOILET PARTITION LADDER AND HATCH AN STAIR L tS_TlN { ----- - - AND HANDRAIL I B BY- 120 I I I -- _ -_- -- --- _._.-- -- - ------ t-- - ( NEW CONC. SLAB ON GRADE I I TOP OF CONC FLOOR SLAB TI _ NEW CONC. S.O.G. - ----- ----- -- - -- - - ------ -- -- ELEVATION TO MATCH EXISTING , . $ IN ARENA BEYOND EXIST. FLOOR SLAB i SEE STRUCTURAL - - -_-- RAISED PLATFORM r 11 � 1+1 5 T 0 EXI - - -- - . ------ --_- __-_- _ ---�_,_._ ...._ 21.15 T/0 SLAB (EXIST B. - - - -- - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - -- - - - - & NEW LOBBY) CONCRETE FOUNDATION/ - - - SAW CUT EXIST. RETAINING WALL - - - - SLAB & PROVIDE NOTE 1: AT ALL NEW JOIST SEE STRUCTURAL NEW SLAB THICKENING LOCATIONS PROVIDE CONC. FILL TO CONC. WALL - 50 RIGID PERIMETER INSULATION (TYP) MIN. 2 COURSES (1•YP) � X �p � j SECTION - ---- - ------------- A04A23 1:50 �B iC 2 I LAP AND ADHERE NEW MEMBRANE UP WALL MINIMUM OF 800 MM APPROX. UTIN OF EXISTING -- --------------------- ---- 4 40 3 .—� - - - -- - - - - -- PREFINISHED METAL ROOF I SO CUT OFF AND PEEL BACK PART ARENA PROFILE OF EXIST. AND SIDING BEYOND BEHIND I G 15 OF EXISTING SIDING M PROVIDE NEW GIRT & PREMANUFACTURED A501 INSULATED METAL ROOF CURB 4 3 I 1_. __�____-___ _L - _-- -- --L ------------------�--- I LAP NEW MEMBRANCE FLASHING OVER t--- ---- -- --------------- -_- - -- � CURB AND UP WALL. REINSTALL SIDING 40 50 IM - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I TYP. FLAT ROOF CONSTR. I I ' NEW 190 CONC- - - - 27.27 T 2— - —--------- BLOCK WALL NEW STEEL BEAM Slit' U/S STEEL- - ------ ------ I SEE STRUCTURAL 71 13 G.W.B. I I .-. _ ON FURRING REMOVE PART OF CHANNELS ON I ALLOW CLEARANCE NEW STEEL B _ _ _ _ EXISTING SIDING O.W.S.J. I f 380 HANDRAIL FOR 0/H DOOR GEAR SEE STRUCTU - 04 III i I - ------ - 25.47 U/S STEEL SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC I ,� POURED CONC. ------- --- PANELS BEYOND I N CAP I L-1 STAIR N0. 4 I --_ �_-,--�I NEW 190 CONC 200 HOLLOW CORE I FIGURE SKATING SEE A701 _ --� PRECAST CONC. UNITS ( 200 PRECAST CONC. -- ----- - (1 HR F.R.) I I 202 UNITS ------- BLOCK WALL I INSULATED 0/H , .r � -------- -- EXIST. BLOCK + ICE RESURFACER ICE RESURFACER t 4871 To BE REMOVED - - - - Fl-48 LJ - - - - -- - ---- -—� NOTE 1 I-.� H FILE OF EXISTING z (DING I --- FIRST AID -- - - - o M 147 L_I —— — — 21,15 T o CON(,:_ — — — — st P D�M1N _-- --� 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 31/97 G.P.G. u — — —— CORRIDOR REFEREE ExlsT• ( Y P. LAM, FINISH H - 144 NO. REVISIONS DATE B I TO TOP, SPLASH h I _ _ _ I I 145 BACK dt CPDS - - -- 21,07 T O CON/. I LO TYP. COUNTER L_J - -' -- -- CHANGE RMS BARRYsBRYAN 21.15 T CON/. - _ & CUPBOARDS - - -- EXIST• - ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED 50 RIGID PERIMETER I I 21.07 T 0 cONC. INSULATION i Q ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS 3 S ECTI 0 N Telephone (905) 666-5252 CHANGE RMS I I A203 1:50 1B PERIMETER WEEPING 2 : SECTION TILE (TYP) swr A204 1:50 5 3 1X 4 Iu 40 40 40 NORTH END 40 TYPICAL FLAT OF EXISTING ROOF ARENA ROOF I L200 INSULATION /� AZ AX VAPOUR BARRIER do ASSp / PREFIN MTL SIDING FULLY CAULKED 9>, I I I I UNDER SHEET DETAIL F NUMBER O O } I ' STEEL COLUMN BEYOND j I I I i I I I (SEE STRUCTURAL) DETAIL OR DRAWING NNO. a 81:IANUC IN1ZE LJI I I 3478 O , U/S STEEL- 1 HR FIRE RATED PROJECT: ROLL-.UP DOOR �2�5.47 U/S STEEL- -- -- PRE-ENGINNEEREO - I STEEL BEAM AND PLATE ` BUILDING CONC BLOCK BEYOND LINTEL - SEE STRUCTURAL A� AM " LTE 7cC BEAM WITH 190 STEEL BEAM WITH 190 ww ,�^�� � ��y BLOCK ABOVE CONC BLOCK ABOVE PRE-ENGINNEERED Q!•11 V&7 B. AM G'VMPL.SX F.R. - I 1 HR F.R. I I _ BUILDING - — - _ - sroi�R CONC BLOCK WALL s�uTErER MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON -- BEYOND I � ICE .RESURFACER 2440 KING .STREET WEST �- -- - - - --- ? 148 BOWMANVILLE '�- ONTARIO ICE RESURFACER -F- - - --- DRAWING. h • � � ---_ TRENCH DRAYYING. , g DRAIN PLAN) - - 21.15 T O CONC. - - - -- -- - SLOPE N = �- SECTIONS �; -- — ExIST. 50 RIGID PERIMETER 21.15 T 0 CONC. _ _ _, z EXIST. - - - INSULATION 21.07 0 CON/. - CHANGE RMS 50 RIGID PERIMETER 50 RIGID PERIMETER I DRAWN BY: CHECgD BY: 21,07 T CONC.' INSULATION INSULATION C.D.S. B.S.S. D.L, , CHANGE RMS SEE STRUCTURAL SEPT 199750 E1 I o O I FOR CONCRETE I I I I . ° FOUNDATIONS , r, PROJECT N0: DRAWING-NO f PERIMETER S ECTI ON WEEPING A203 1:50 . ` TILE + � (�) 4 W PREFINISHED METAL , SECTION - A 03 1:5Q o t .m c y 1 „ te..w y f' is i`i`JI p-I I-_ _ .: _ .. , _ �: 1 .. ; , _ - _ : c •• .. 4 , ,.: .: ,. r _ - alb x 1.I.. a .. :,-. 1 : .. s - .. �r _. , e , � �. , -. 1. . . ,..r.:,r.I-I.I I I.,".1 I.t,-...-1 I 1 1�,...1�..�1*-I..I,1,I�..��-�..I 1�I 1.�-I�.1,�.1,I,I.....r'I 1�.I r;1I"�,�lr.�I.1,I".�.�I.1�,1 I 1.I�-.,1,1 I�I 4I Z I I�I..�.I I.1 I I I I.�I.p"�I I I I I I I.I.�,1 I I..I ,� ...__-,I-I�..N_.r C��I.I 1,I O.....LU I.MSI 1I.U N S PI.R.EE.NI M.D I OEI.VL I D E I I I I I.I I PN.��AI E.I-���R W I /.1-r�I I_',,/I i.�"--,,1I 11 I."1.-_y�--.I I_-_I�I.1 I I",_-M- �1 I C. ._.P LI�Y�4-.. I I=-S*TI 4E./_ -,.-*.I� �-,�I I I,I I - : A I I�-I r..I. ���'�:...1-,I"-I,�-_I.:.I.,���I:i I���'. I��jf-S;�b=j;�_41",�"I-.,�,C..=d�n,>.�u 4'�,n�,I D�_;)-I 4...�I I,��'I::"�I�.I 1,-1_.:���I�I,rI��1I 1I�I-.�1 I�I�r.�,11..�,I.�..I,,I.I-L'.7- ..�.I,,I.,,I'rr.I I.I 1 I 1�I.I I I I.-I�'.-.-I-I I.._I�.1 1 I.I*I I..�.I r,I I..I�I,I.,�.I I�-I I,�"T I 1!,'r.�-.I,II...1 ,I I 1.I I I I 4I...I I I I 1 I I�1I I I-I I.L.�I..I..I-I�*;/�.`,-I I L.�,I.I.,%-.I I l�_�I"1.,��:I ".I�,��.�i,I..I 0.j I��I_�'I I=�.I I�I,..,�.I r 1I-�,.�I.��I,.I 1 r i I,I I�I.I I.-I I I.1 =.1 I I.r I�..�1 I I,��I r,I,,-.,�..�-I.�.r_�._,'I?',�.._I:�I�"�'-.,_I%.�.I.�..I I�I�'I i.-...�.,��.I..I�.I I.�I I 1..�-Y I.y1 I r I,._I.-m I?kI...I.I�-.1-I.1 I 1�,1'r,I-I��v.I I.I.1 1 I I.-I I-',.��I e v-.�.I 1 mI\Z�I��I,�,��I,I 1e.�..1,I�r�I I�.q.,-,�I r-�I I��I h�I..I.yI��1I�'%r 1.v.",��,"I r A,��-.1�-���,"C-��.�I 1.1''I 2.I.I.I I.I�I M..A,�'I I.h�I I I L.I.t2I,I...I-I G�rI,I').y..&;:.E F%�I__Y�W..I_�._ O,I%RRI�I I�.,N�lMO�.,,�.l I D O.-.�r.UI M/-��-.I R S.I I.--...I 1 1.1-I I i I-.I 0\�-"/./.-1-1.m-�,_eK\ .�,I_�T,t_,�E_I___.I E.;I/_I"I I._.-_I�,1/H_-�I�-;j//I;�,/7-z_//n-\A_-�'1--_"",�.,.�"1./\ "�_,.I,.-1I f, \�-"/--,,"I/1"""�-_;4I�I�1 I.O i I/I I///.. .\//>I.I�I I..I-,r I�1 /\I--�.I \\\LI II_I I_.I. EI z .._...t I._1 I 1I�I.4,b),-_\.1 1 r,I,\r,. -/_I.�I_14 I;.�t_ �1._",_*H."I_r 1.\4_�1-y I-/�I 1_ I I I 1_ _-I i�__'-T,I I�- I CI_.2---1PA0-I c-1 I SI.-��I z 1 r 1 I 1 -L-_-_11L..,-�_I 1�_.-_I.---.F N_,__.-11__,_11- ll-1I 11-.11_1 11�_-�___�-H.I.I _I_I I I I I_1--1._..�._I I.- )_.- I_-_-_----I__-1��__I I�. .I I _11 _ �- I.I DI I I. DI.��,/I�-I.I r'..l.n-r JI w I�ON�I I A w N I-, I �I I I I P -,�-- dI I C--._�.I� .�1.I�I,, �I A L .\I 1 1.� -I.I,�.,,,.-��"��-I r I.I.I I"C� ..I I rI 11.I I I ,.�I I'..I� -. �.".L-" ,M... I::I.I II I I .�O_�1-... ,I� ��..r I,�.I c�I.. ���1 I .I,1.1..LI I j 1 I I,I�I:I 4.."��.�.I"� .�,. ,'��1. ,11�.,r. .l,,�, .I I,.�I-�, �I.A �� I I I .r . -, ,�;�..-,'r _,,,.��z.I,.,I�. ,r ,--. �1,I�I I ,�.,�1�I� I,.1 1 -. I I ,I I�r,.��r 1.� . E r : r::,, " F,:. , r CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK ANLl-:VERIFY i",,.: • . ' a ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE . 8A` 10 », .�, ,. I . 11c. . - r TYPICAL PRE ENGINEERED. . a ROOF SYSTEM`SF�1M SIDING . PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING , . . SYSTEM ROOF CONSTRUCTION - ° STEEL BEAM (SEE STRUCTURAL) R - S . . WITH 100x100x8 ST L HANGERS I PREFlNISHED AT 1200 MAX O.C. AND C200 METAL ROOFING CHANNEL AT SCREEN HEAD PROVIDE WALL OF i'3 GYPSUM I BOARD, VAP BARRIER, 150 INSULATION AND 13 GYPSUM BOARD ON 150 METAL SPUDS AT 400 0/C 27.97 STRUCTURAL N0.- ISSUES DATE BY . PREFINISHED LINER 1 2 CAULK TO U/S DECK HEIGHT SHEET V.B., INSULATION . AND SIDING 14 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT B.S.S. 1 A501 TYPICAL SIDING - 2/97 ' PREFlNISHED METAL SIDING ,: STEEL COLUMN 50 150 INSULATION 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 13/97 B.S.S: SEE STRUCTURAL I GYPSUM BOARD , V B NOV 1 �J EACH SIDE OF - STORAGE RM SHEET CAULKED LINER I 7 I 90 METAL STUDS - 104 BEYOND ON STRUCTURAL GIRTS r " I , A50 Sim AT 400 O,C. 50 --- CANo r CAULK TO / U/S DECK - - / \ COAT. -- `.:,;+ i � -- -- GIRT / \\TOP OF MASONRY 25.55 - ------- 25.55 TOP OF M ` I I ZOP L 25.15 TQP O 25.15 \, I --- - . WAY BEYOND BEYON D __v__ i STEE STEEL -- MASONRY WALL . / BEYOND - -- .- - ------- -- -- ------ B RAGE ROOM -_-- - / \ // - - - -- - _ - ----- - _,� \ - __ --- /-- --- - - ------------- OP OF_ 24.07 ' 23.87 TOP OF - - MASONRY - - -- --- -------- /,, / I AC. TILE CEILING - - -- - - -- --___ - _0 AT 2800 A F.F. -- � � - __s0_MT- PREFlNISHED METAL SIDING - - \ ,* 101 3 FRAM GFlNISH ON STRUCTURAL - --. , - --- - . STORAGE triECHANICAI. BULE --- - - ';' " " / /' - _- ,22 ------ - ATION \ BUILT IN HEATER -- -- ------- --- -- C� --- i 12 , 113 SEE MECHANICAL - ----- - ---- - ------\ .--- \ . PROVIDE 1 COURSE -- --- - / OF TYPE 2 BLOCK - -.- -- --- -- --- -- --- ( / AROUND OPENING - __ - ----- r , FlN FLOOR t---- ' , ' , 21.15 21.15 TOP OF FOUNDA mI,�,I_\-,A.,,I�n"i"�I�..-��.0 I r,K%"_.I-I'1�1.L N I I�r -.,I-.-r q r I,I I I I.I_--r.I C,CI 5ACAGE I I-��I 1 ORROLOO1,0E�E I",I I,I.I I I .---I�rI � 7-.I I I--%,I 1 I i I� .l-�..I I'I�X,�I N,/r. .9.�I 1 I"I�.",.',. -_..�I1--�'.-,-"�7-I��/-71�I�1 1,'"0".I.I I 1 I.].--,I.-../.j-I,T.S 1 A.OI-T I 11.I�EP L% ,,,Ir.I I�I v..,A�0 I,�,1/I,�,I""4 1.I,�,I�,�'1&I I.,I�I,4 I?,I 9.I ,�1/,I i[�I,. I 21.07 N_F4i - -� f N. 21,15 - -- - ------ I EXISTING - HEADER . POURED CONC. CONCRETE SIDEWALK � TRENCH ( FOUNDATION WALL MATT SINKAGE / 21.07 N. /- 50 RIGID INSULATION SEE I AND FOOTING I I TO BE DOWELED \ 20.92 FIN. FLR. I \ // TO FOUNDATION 1 $ I STRUCTURAL I CHANGE ROOMS � ONC FLR 5 RIGID I 50 RIGID INSULATION -.- I WALL 50 - 20,92 FlN. FLR 1 SECTION INSULATION I I 4 0 13 °- - - - - - - - - - - - - - o 01 1:50 I I A501 - -� ON NA L . l ) 50 ------ ------- -- 2 SECTION .3 SECTION 8A 10 A202 1:50 �01 1:50 PREFlNISHED METAL TYPICAL PRE ENGINEERED . STANDING INSULATED ROOF SYSTEM SEAM SIDING SPACE PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING 200 INSULATION AND SYSTEM ROOF CONSTRUCTION R V.B. S FULLY CAULKED METAL (ROOFING I f LINER SHEET i 0 27,97 STRUCTURAL EAR . HEIGHT I i I . 11 2 STORAGE ROOM 1 104 STEEL COLUMN 5O SEE STRUCTURAL • CANOPY FASCIA - ME 2 SIDING I I . 13 GYPSUM BOARD V.B. ON STRUCTURAL STEEL 6 SIDING TYP 1 140 AF110 INSULATION FRAMING CANOPY RIGID FRAME COLUMN 150 METAL STUDS AND I CONT. i" �'I 13 GYPSUM BOARD ------------ 50 // N \ 7 GIRT / STRUCTURAL FRAMING l 50 \TOP OF MASONRY 25.55 - ---------------_ _ -_ - - -- -------- --------- ----------- 25,47 TOP OF MASONRY I ` ----------------- ------- - _-------- -_ ------ _I- -T 25.15 TOPIOF - 25.15 ` '` I -_---- CONC. BLOCK ' STEEL \ - --- / I 0 \ ----- -- - ---- -------- WAY BEYOND - - --- - -__ __- STORAGE ROOM " \ / A.C. TILE CEILING PLAN COLOURED BEYOND - _---- � AT 2800 AF.F. CONC: BLOCK I I --- ---- STORAGE ROOM - - --- --- _ --- -_ ___ --- - - - ---------- 8 r . TYPE 2 I I BEYOND -- -- ---- - - -- TOP" AF- 24.07 i-�--__7 r-�._,__r�.P_,,_"r E 1-._____-"_,_-__2_,_" A701 N I - " + class eLQcK _.. ._-___ _O--�I C...K I�d-I I I I T I!�I I O \1L-I�0I I 1 1 I\..I\I.--1I I I--.I r 11 I'I_-I__*L I-/__--�-I I-_r_-L_,f 1GC_I 4 Y__I K iI V-PI_ll.F"�S .r FA _�A_R y I_I I/D..`_\_I o-e.-7" . 2 SPLIT RIB - I _ •------- - --- LOBBY g TYPE 1 I DISPLAY CASE --- - r I (CASH AIIIOWANC . • I 102 TYPE 2 N.LC.) o --- -- ocr1) FRO I I NEW STEEL -- REFRIGERATION STAR AND CONC. BLOCK N BEYOND I - ! I N ( -- - - E ATION HANDRAIL CLADDING TO I __1 I ___-__ I PLAN COLOURE 7--� 121 I I BEYOND § CONC. BLOCK I�_I_I r�--1L --L II-_I-II-4"I/_N 1�_--I.11 I�.�z, ,�;.I./_----I I,I-_".i/I-I I-,.__/-/_-/I 1_-_F.-\�,_I/-')I I I I I_I I-1-, TYPE 2 _ 1 COUR E Wt T 80 FOUNDATION -__ ' I 2 SPLIT RIB I t I i rn'E 1 > TOP OF 4ASONR 21.35 // ( I 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 OCT G•P.G. I FIN. FLR 21.15 °o _r I IN. ��Fll. / 31 97 21.07 Nom$ I I +'- 1 EXIST NG =r`- - ------- ---- I o I I PLAN COLOURED I N0. REVISIONS DATE BY RENCEH I °� ( I "CONE.2BLOCK II I I 21.15 / 20"92 N. FIR. I SEE GRADE VARIES ` I 50 RIG( INSULATION 21.07 \ / BARRY BRYAN STRUCTURAL ONE' FLR I .... POURED CONC. PIER `T' "`-'---""--' --'- CHANGE ROOMS � ` 50 RIGI�r INSUtATK)N I •� L� .. � I �. I ,r. . . . I r r r I.5 RIGID I I I I AND FOOTING BEYOND _ _ - _ INSULATION I I _ _ _- _ _ _ _ 0 20.92 FIN. FLR o $ SOCI r (1991 ) ",,"L1.,"I I I 1 J Fl 20.35 50 I I �--------- ---- R IG TION A ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS t , i 50 RIGID INSULATION (TYP.) Telephone (905) 666=5252 0 s S TION 6 SECTION A202 1:50 A203 1:50 4 SECTION L- - -� 4 L_ _ _j'''--""` CONC. STEPPED FOUNDATION 50 WALL AND FOOTINGS SEE A203 1:50 STRUCTURAL 1B 1C PRE ENGINEERED BUILDING SYSTEM ROOF CONSTRUCTION TYP. ARENA SIDING - -! METAL (ROOFING I A►sSo 1 --- 1 2 PREFlNISHED METAL '" SIDING (TYPE 1) DETAIL ,� NEW PREFlNISHED METAL TYPICAL FLAT ROOF NEW PREFlNISHED M AL ' SIDING ON Z BARS WITH ` 2 SIDING ON Z BARS H 150 AF 110 50 RIGID INSULATION AND i CONSTRUCTK)N 50 RIGID INSULATION AND PREFlNISHED METAL ON Z BARS WI NUMBER FLASHING COLOUR TYPE 3 DETAIL OR y $R A1J 3C AIR BARRIER L I CONC. STONE BALLAST ONE INSULATION V.B. BLOCK WALL MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER ON CO C. AND PREFlNISHED I , ON 75 RIGID INSULATION BOK WALL METAL LINER FULLY I REFERENCE ' CT,TT SALN . ON V.B. ON I I TYPICAL FLAT ROOF I CAULKED DRAWING NO. LICENCE . ` ON METAL DECK CONSTRUCTION STEEL COLUMN a, 44 . Leo I - �, , TYPE 2 BLOCK SEE STRUCTURAL_ N+w,u1nia'`� PREFlNISHED METAL I PREFlNISHED METAL --- --- GALVANIZED META_ p REMOVE CAP FLASHING FLASHING COLOUR REMOVE CAP FLASH( FLASHING COLOUR ----------- COUNTER FLASHING I P I�0 J E C T: . FROM EXISTING WALL TYPE. 2 PY BEYOND FROM EXISTING W TYPE 2 -- - BUILD UP WALL WITH BUILD UP WAIL WTT 13 190 CONC. BLOCK TO W 1 WALL I 4 1 --- - ---- -_ / � 7 ELEVATION NOTED ELLEV ZION NO 10 - --- - - ` 50 PREf4ANUFACTURED / ,�I . , I� - I r'P� w, � + . � A50 - ----------- -- ---- \ METAL CURB D MLA 1 BIAT , TYPE 2 BLOCK / ---- - -- --- 25.47 TOP OF MAS 50 TOP OF `_. 25.15 25.15 - - --- -- - -------- - �.7MflN� B. 1�1D I-L.C/� . II _ ---- -- -- -- -- . EXISTING B.U.R. PiCAL OC . EXISTING B.U.R. I TYPI __�- INSULATION AND EMANUFACTURED OF EXIST NG T I INSULATION AND ` 1 -; �AN UFACTURED -4_-___ _ - 1_ _:- BLOCK CONC. \ ( -/ - ----- _.------------- STEEL DECK uLATED cuR6 STEEL DECK IN�TED cuR6 -_ _\ -- --- ------------ - - -- MUNICIPALITY OF CLAR I N G TON WOOD CEILING - 50 RIGID INSULATION , ' (RIGID INSULATION - -- - - . \ L WALL TYPE ------ -- N - ------ - ---- - ---- PROTECTED WITH 13 „ TECTED WITH 13 Wt -- -- . I TYPE 2 BLOCK PROVIDE LATE - 5 SIM / -- -- T 2440 KING STREET WEST SUPPORT TO WALL, W 23.87 Of_g T _ ----- --- --- EXISTING 200 HEAD OF, SCREE EXISTING 200 ---- F�' -- - -__ I BOWMANVIL_LE ONTARIO CONC. BL. WALL WITfi�t NEW META, CONC. BL WALL -._.. _ _ __ STUDS AT 800 d/C t___ - - K --- - TID U/S OF EXI NG EXISTING BEAM --- ----.---__ Sa li II DECK coRRIDOR vESn- x. , -- - - -- - DRAWING: rn` I I A.C. TILE CEILING _ --- --- . -- � II II EXISTING AT 2800 A.F.F. �,,-, ;., TYPE 2 BLOCK �40��NC BL K 123 $� 103 '�/ \�` $ ---- STORAGE - ---- - T cTi II I� W/R OORRIDOR a WALL AND ENTRANCE TICKET N ------- c0 I 141 - -- ----- I - c+, . SCREEN WINDOW • ` N N ii it ,23 _-- - SECTIONS di I I 13 FLEXIBLE FILLER REMOVE 3 FLEXIBLE FI R fit\ �� . . II II AND SEALWT (TYP.) TYPE 2 BLACK EXISTING. AND SEALANT .) - `` / / __ - . II 11' E1N FLOOR SLAB ENTRANCE SCRE N EW FLOORS FG / \ i , ; i', i. AND DOOR �_._ , TOP OF 21.15 - ' 21.1 i z I . �_ 1 EXISTING 200 CONC. ALL' FLASHING I i; I MATT RE S w_ DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: M, I BLOCK WALL, (TYP.) I cES THROUGH 21.07 / / C.D.S. B.S.S. B.S.S. U FOUNDATION AND . - - EXISTING I WALL FLASHING \ / 'a I-I FOOTING I FOUNDATION WALL I (Np,) CHANGE ROOMS / � 50 RIGID INSULATION DATE: iSCALE: `E1,•° ° D FOOTING SEPTEMBER 1997 1=56 n ., . I� - - - - - - - , L ° 8 I PROJECT N0: DRAWING NO: AN ° .- : 20. 2 _r. .r 5. A• 0 TYP Q .. TI .. _ SECTION- - 8 I g SECTON } . . 9 SCT �N ,x 2 A20 ,. r� I r..r.�-I I -.1 �4.. , �.: I�,- ..I� - I I �, I ,�� .54 ,:r, A202 1:50 I.1.1,I ��,r-�I,,-�"r,l , ,- � I I �i I I � � I � . I .'I..�.1-I I � �.. I : �„ - 1 _ .,,����-I I�' 1... I .I I I r .-'r I �I�r� I 11 I �..."��,� . 11 I I,I .I I- • A203 I I . q, : _ ,.r �..,. � I I r� I . ,.r I r . I. . . -1-I.I I. I �. -.- I I� I ,. ���I � I � I �,,�I� . I� r, I�.1�;!;t I:I I.�:I I �-.. a- '. ;. I I- �, r�I,3tr' Y , f �1, I . I " ., , � t: -.- - - - t , : .M'. _s'l6 ,. . e F : a Y r .1 x ... _..,.. r :i. -: .. _.: �i _- .. 'F a '- : _. _... '. .-. .•. - ,'.� .. �. - _. ,' ., .. .. .mil _ 1 _ ,... :' : ..I-L.+ - .. - - -1.w t:, r•. ✓. x, ". .., _ .�.. ,.- v 5 x a `'Yt :.. . . F. -..f r V ri ... .. : Y. �p _. .. v... i .: r. .: c' ...gyp+_ -x :..., fr. a .:11 �, �� ;�' tl `I �� ,�� i= ,- - - `��, r- �r ..: i y`J ht�. ....a.. ... ___.�.- _,��,r�� � ,y ..�_.I.!,.�..::.,I.t..I.�"...I-....-_�-L.,�./'�I I.I/.-,---11_1.:1"I E.I A I I I I I�1..,-,.I���.1I-I I l_,l,,,I,"".���,m-___.--,I 1I,I,'��1I I�-l,l,��I�I.I�L-l,//./.,<,i.:,MI�."1�I'I�I I.I e I�.,.�,I I.I..�.I I I-I_-�i",e._���-I_I�.1 r.A.I.1�,I I�-��,I,c;'I'..l 1 I=,_�il",_,l.�I I-,m*i,�l��-q-I,�.�,'.i�.1,.l�..,:I��,.,I,I�-I.�I I-�I--I.I....I���,�I.�.:�:�,I"���I.l�,,-I�-",I,.,�I 1.;-I I..,�I�I 1.I,,1-I I�.V�1,"�._.m,�.I,��.I.-,.,I1'�,-..,�.I"1 I l.V-l,,.l j I,I�.--,'4�.e 1�1�.,�I:-_,I,":�I-;I,.,r.��.I L V;�I_"I-.t-.,...,�.4;�.�,I��",I.�.�,..�I��-I I-I�,1I 1'�_I�,,1�'-*,�l:I,.,�...I'�I�.I 1,1K�;�.�,�I.I.*_II I I I-,I,-',I 0��.-,0,�I.1.�,0I�I.L�,1�I�,..I��1',.`.�L I,..I,'�I,"A-�,_I;'-...�:.-.,_I',.I N,.�.'g-.�,�,I�,I I__..,.,.I_I�I_�.,-I-i,,I_I 7..�1-I�l%1,�I.,1 I�l"_1.I I I I,�I w I..,,"I�-*,��I�-.�x,�,;�--'.���',,,-.,-�I��,t,',-1..1.���I�,�..-�,�.._�.I-I I.I��,-.I I--,.-..,j--I-..I,.,-,.,.I�I,...,�..W.\II N,I m.�I.�mI."�I I"m1..I I I I m 1,I-...I�m.I--m.-mI.,.m�.I�o�I-,I l:;.m��-�,"I m.�-..-I'-oI I I 1.!I I,-.-m.-I m-I I I I--I"I I�I-.I.�-..-.I�I 1i I I I l I�,1 t V,I I,' I/p�/��.�1,/'I�,,/,1 I"I ,-'.,.,,I�.I I'I I I I/�I-,/1'.'-l v I/1I;I�I I�1,-/�'.I"'I/,\I.I I I'�1�,.I�,'l I,"-/1...��./A,,,,�A"r 1 I r V/I .'I.�1,I.I,I,"1 11�I-1.."�""1_,..I,,I/--","i:l,a"I I,�7 .I I,I 1I.1,*I I-0.1 I.I I,�I I�1-,1.I I.�/..I I I�..L.,a�.....I n 4-I..I-,1....1.�..��,.I 1.�.4-,. 1��1.1 i 1�N":,.I' ,�:--:.-.-_-,--------_._:--.-7�-�:.----::-_-I---_-I.:�_�-_-_:-,__�I_:_:7_.:._-O� N�.., .,�I,..-:-I.'"-I,1..�w:_,1..I 1.�--I.,o I I">,_�.I,.1,_.:�V,���.-i�/."I,<,l-I I�1_F 1I�`-��I I,,,,..l I.�I_.1�I.__I�-I_w_�.1 l-�""_��_:"I I.I.//"'.1-,1�"/.1 I/1 I 1 ,1�I 1..,,,-I.I-��,..'I,,�I�1 1,I 1�1 I 1_,l�I>�_;--I,_.,I:5�.1�-- I I.;.H,-"I I�.t.I.I.I I.-/-i.�.�-.,-�.I I I I 1.I�./�-r I.8.-.- I�.��I 1.I.I,-,�"I I I I 1 I I,-i�-o.'�.."I I m'I �I.,.z I.�I I,�.I....I/I_r I 1.I I 1��OI��/1 I.I--�I I I I R�:/.N,,.�l_'I I.I I I-'T I l�.-?I I�_,I��A I,I I rI�&I I r,I I�.:I_�.'�I.I,�,,-�-I.S-_.��-1�:.�I 4\I_.�.�U,,1,,,l,�.L.�I 1 I%I�;.i- :T I 4�,l I�,I.L�I..,�--1�4_�.�.I..N,.I I�-,��,l 7"I,.�.I,I I I,,�I._I:�,I.-1 1..,. -I l�..=,I N1�.,I�,'.,..*_."I 1 1�.I l)�-�I,I I I I.-,..I�.",I I--I�I".II i�".-"��.I,�I�,��.I-.-�,j l�I,�.,I .I�I I,11,I�-"I-...I.,�,.I�."�,r,%.�..-�-�.�I I,I.,.�� I�I I.-I I��I 1..,,�,4 I 1I,�_�1.I..�I,_,-,;1 I�,�1 I,_.,,,',.,,,I I��.,1 K�I.I I 1�I I I I..�I.�l�-.I.S I��-E.II.T.—I�_.I E_.�.11'L`I"Z.�AN 3 I:I-I S'N-P'-.�.-"I�1 D��_�..I��11_4 A.I,,U. N..-o'1/�.-1 l_--z1_/�_.C,--:I._-1 1/I�_-�\I.-_ I-1_�-I I f_9,".�_.w"-.6 I l_.-, I_.m-.I/r/0.__1.1-�x. =-_-_�_,�_-.\L_:-___�1=-,_:_;X�--�_�:_:___,,_-I_- I_\d,I_/_.I I I'II..._.�.,.I -!_:.:-__-I F I I 1 l 1�:,'�.�.�..l..1:'',:�.I:I,.I j/�::i.;,,I;I-I;I-I-��I�;..I�,�:..I\2 I:I:; ��1._C�I lF;_.:�I._:I K.:N�I/Iil 4 N.,�-rr,.I�/ m :�.. .F l,-I I� I:I I l/�Ul.,:E.:;.�.R 4.I�P.I S I-I I-�l I�iT,,.I I I A..,'�Y ..,-�I v.I I,�,4l:�.,�..,I-�I I_�,1�-,l..�l I,��.I�I,I-I 1 s 1 1 ��I 141'�,-,.,z_I 1:�I I.I I I,. .��.�-"I I�,,,I�I",I I I I:,l� ::I.I_/I.t,�.�".:,1_.r_I".I--:_.;,,I I�I-I*�I I -'I A-,1��11.�,�1 I;��-\4;�.�;f;�-.!f a.I I... �,F*.I I,(���./I.,,�I---I��-�_I,_-'-.-,�,-�I,,_-:.�_I�'.�::I 1_<<<,_I.��tI�;l 4�I,I_. x e. x L 1j , : .: 3. , v - ♦ k k t. , i .. .. K _. _ 1. ., , Y4. ?%r. r f ,q,.,�--.,.,,,,�-�.��-���.�.�.I.1-,r l I .I.I- -.. - .. A I/,i I.I -1.--1�-s-�1 r I.I�,,.-.._I o.'�.11.,1 I I I,..,,6 I I,I!:�--\l,:-j 1 I I I I.,..�1 I.,.K.I,�I I E I I\T.S�I I�I.. m1,1.,_I,I�--,B,I��I,-J�I--_,i:E\ �\1D;I�.-I I N_ .I 11�E"..F,.R I:I I I 3�I,LI I]IM I, E LL,I;�I"�..�,-�I 1I. !I!_I�.�-',_1I�.I=.-7 -I-,:--_"I��7_F 7.I'1 1 1 I I�II ll .I I Q I f,..�,I I�I I I I I\ .o.-=. - �--.�-,_;L.I -4-1.,.1 I l 1""1 I_,_i'I I I, I. I 1.I=_II, ...1 T.I.. I I . r n ,:-. , - Sc 1_ ,,t - , re r , _' . k + tin e F' �r I�.I�I,.I.�I., .1.�, 1. 11'I 1A.1W 1I, L 11 I-1111...I,�I% I,.-I�.�I I I.I.. -,�4..�I 1,I_1 -:. _ e : f , _ .. + - -. .. s :. w a. w d + ., ., , ,.. r _ ': ., :. ..: i_- :..fir, ._ .. ,: .. .,, ,... ..� '+.�. -, :._ �-. . T. � , w: I I I�.I-"..,. r,�I. 1 I ."�-�I �:�..�I �,�-. f .1 ,c. _ _ _ :. , cc�Irl7,actdR.: Ai.L w c�I ' pi��- i: . - _ - - _ . AL DtMEN NS_,A.TH SITE:. A ,^ $ . . „ _ o ; . .. ROUN . . , p` DED TOP f OmmO ROD FORMED fOR LENGTH MID WIDTH 14E3 - COAT HOOKS WE��CC TO - OF SHOWER: SEE PLANS' � I ` ,y0 ROUNDED ENDS(TYP 38x286 `MAPLE WITH VARNISH . ,4 I,1,�1 I I."I'l,-I 1.,\�l:-_.I,-,��0I-k I!:.�;.:!;;!;;I;;.�;;.- ..I A1 l,-;.I.�'"'1�.I:-"�I,�_�I I 1,.�,.-1 1 I.._,.-`"1I I 1..-I.I.I,1-I I i.��I i;�, ",1 I�, I,1�,�1.�..� FINISH FASTENED TO CO�2E5LAB 5.6 HIGH DENSITY PLASTIC y,',\ I�.I I� . I l,I I�,.I-___7 I AT 1200 C/C COYER WITH CHAMFERED 6X100 PLATE O 1730 AF.F. FlXED TO - EDGES. SECURED WITH WLOUR WALL BY KWIK BOLT 12mm0 NO. ISSUES DATE BY MATCHED COUNTERS UPIK O 45 C/C SPECIAL COAT FINISH SCREWS O 400 O.C. , 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER - -OCT B.S.S. SEE ROOM FI NISH SCHEDULE 2/97 750 GALV. POST O 38x288 No.. 1 SPRUCE FOR WALL do FLOOR FINISHES. 0 1500 STEEL•PIPE BOLLARD - NOV 1200 O.C. MAX. .ANCHORED TO PLATE WITH (PANT) 1 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 13 9 B-S.S 2 - g.5 LAG SCREWS O • /1. ET 130 / 13 1200 O.C. ' -- FACE OF MASONRY CONC. BLOCK (SEE PLANS) , SOLID BLOCK ALL AROUND , WOOD PLUG 200x 100x9.5 GALV. TOP THINSET C.T. FLOOR AND I PLATE WELDED TO POST 38X140 MAPLE RAILS BOLTED FILL BOLLARD WITH _ BASE - COVED TILE TOP 4 ! 305 LAG SCREWS VARNISH FN. 25MPa CONC. I AND BASE ° II ° ° 6 MM ROUND IYP. LAG BOLT BASE PLATE TO SEALANT CONC FLOOR WITH 190 ------ . 15Ox15Ox9.5 GALV. BOLTS. ENSURE MINIMUM 12.5 12.5 6mm ROUND(TYP) -- - ----- ° ° a BASE PLATE I 100 PENETRATION. (2 PER PLATE) . I , SLOPE DN . ° n ° 25MPa CONC. FOUNDATION I ° `t ,<\ I C ALL POSTS, PLATES' , n `�, 75X8 BENT GALVANIZED N ,;\ ° AND ANCHORS BY NOTE: SEE PLAN FOR r` METAL STRAP AT 1200 C/C •-X' 1 0 4 ° ° SECTION 05500 LENGTH OF BENCHES BOLTED TO WALL (PAINT) TRENCH DRAIN 4 , q ° PLASTIC COVER, x OR T4 SUIT ° d WOOD AND SCREWS K - ti WATERPROOF WALL THICKNESS - BY SECTION 06609 • MEMBRANE < ;��� ' FINISH FLOOR POURED CONC. CURBy j ~ g CURB NOT REQ'D IN DOWELED INTO CONC. r 11 >., x< . HANDICAPPED SHOWER WITH 3-1 OM BARS AND DRESSING ROOM 133 1OM DOWEL GROUTED . INTO MASONRY 480 l TYPICAL SHOWER BASE 2 SPECTATOR SEATING DETAIL 3 TYPICAL FREESTANDING BENCH 4 ., BENCH AND COAT HOOK DETAILS 5 BOLLARD DETAIL . A205 1:10 A204 1:10 A203 1:10 A2Q5 1:10 A203 1:20 7MM PLASTIC TOP HINGE TOP FOR TIME CLOCK 7MM PLASTIC TOP ON 38x189 SILL 610 CONTROL, STORAGE ETC. ON 38x189 SILL 380 PAINTED PIPE RAIL PROVIDE NOTCH O ONE SIDE CAST INTO CONCRETE CHAMFER EDGES FOR WIRING CHAMFER EDGES 19 PLWD WITH "STAY WHITE" I . ,, I FINISH SPECIAL COAT FINISH I CUTOUT EDGE BLOCKING 600 UPP T SHELF BY SECTION 06609 k\ CONC. BLOCK (SEE PLANS) CHAMFER EDGE COUNTER SUNK SCREWS SOLID BLOCK ALL AROUND THINSET C.T. FLOOR AND I COUNTER SUNK SC EWS POURED CAP BEYOND BASE - COVED TILE TOP 38x140 BLOCKING WITH AND BASE STAY WHITE FINISH 38x89 BLOCKING 25 RAD I SEALANT i ---.-- _---_-- __ _---_---- - --- - 38x89 BLOCKING " 38Xi40 WD BLOCKING I- -- i (2 LAYERS 19 PLYWD . SLOPE DN t OM I AT CURVED SECTION) 1:50 I °o • • FlXED MAPLE BENCH -----_____-_-----_-- -_--_-- - ------.__._ i 38x232 BACKING AND POURED CONC CAP DOWELED .= °o ' °I 1 .; SEAT PER DETAIL k. 1 1 1 BLOCKING WITH 12.7 0 TO CONC FILLED CONC BLOCK p�,� I LAG SCREWS O BACK AND o / WITH 1OM RODS AT 400 C/C N `a- g ' SIDES N STAGGERED °'I ' ' 1 0 /` STAYWHITE ON 19 MM ' I 0 WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED PLWD BOTH SIDES FILL TOP 2 COURSES ' xf t, " . ° WALL4 THIC NESS PLWD ITE. ON 19 MM HSS75X75X5 GALV POST BOEARIN WALLS y I 1 - lI ° " ' r , G . - DREAM BY POURED CONC. CURB NSS75X75 STEEL POST BEYOND 38x140 P.T. 140X140X12 PL SET . 200 DEEP HOLLOW C E PRECAST BLOCKING I FLUSH INTO CONC 1 t UNITS SPANNING B 190 DOWELED INTO CONC. I C./W ANCHORS UNIT SAN W 140 CONC WATERPROOF WITH 3-10M BARS AND I I,I : L ALLS BLOCK FILLER MEMBRANE 10M DOWEL GROUTED 38x140 BLOCKING I , INTO MASONRY 23.67 TOP OF CONIC '" 6 , ° _ ' SHOWER BASE REFEREES ROOM . s A 205 1:10 • . • J s DASHER BOARD SECTION t LINTEL BLOCK . • PER SCHEDULE �LLIDTOPP COURSES 1x TIME KEEPER'S SHELF A2o3 ':'° BEARING WALLS A203 1:10 , COLOURED PLAIN CONC _ BLOCK TYPE 2 IN RECESS � : - I WITH FR40 FLASH NG ARRIER 1 2 TYPE 2 COLOFIASHING 3 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 31OCT G.P.G. t FR40 FLASHING CANT 2 REVISED FOR ADDENDUM 2 OCT G•P.G. BL K TYPE 2 ;' = I OVER PARAPET. LAP AND 9 GUARDRAIL D ETA I L 31 9 SEAL ALL JOINTS EXPANSION JOINT SUPPORT A204 1:10 1 REVISED FOR ADDENDUM 1 OCT G.P.G. __ 31 97 I -- -- BY MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER . _ W1 WALL _ __= II PREMANUFACTURED INSULATED LAP VAPOUR BARRIER WITH MEMBRANE COUNTERFLASHING NO. REVISIONS DATE BY _ ___ I I ROOF CURB ROOF MEMBRANE AND SEAL ADHERED WITH SPLICING CEMENT PREFIN MTL CLOSURE I TYPICAL MEMBRANE WOOD BLOCKING ANCHORED ROOF TYPICAL MEMBRANE TO DECK. HEIGHT TO MATCH BARRY • BRYAN PREFIN MTL SIDING 11 ROOF 25 INSULATION THICKNESS BLOCK TYPE 1 = I 50 BAGRIDS INSUL WITH _ - . - AIR BARRIER ��--_- ASSOCIATES (19.91) LIMITED�,_"",,I,-. ,l-.1.�1_I..-�1 - 190 CONC BLOCK -I - ,� 1 1- :j :I, �) �,- ( } '(�'� ) -- _< _ TOP OF STEEL _ _ -� % ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS _ 125.t 5 r - - - - 27.83 Telephone (905) 666-5252 `' --- - 11 1, r 1 ,1 - "> <, BLOCK TYPE 2 _ _x SUM BOARD ON _ - I�•!:,I,I ;,. „, „ ;�;,;,I ; ' . , , r� I EXISTING SIDING AND RRING. FILL WITH _- ROOF ASSEMBLY LOOSE INSULATION _ :_ - , , BEAM AND PLATE PREFIN MTL DRIP _ _- LINTEL FLASHING = _ - FILLERSION JOINT I THROUGH WALL FLASHING = 'i PREFIN MTL - STL FRAMING AND WEEPHOLES OBOOC/C - FLASHING --_ SEE STRUCT L76x76x6 lYP PATCH ROOF WHERE :_= 50 RIGID INSULATION WITH FLE BELLOWSFIN I I I I. �-I�,,. .1,. I I.. I � �I�_.I�I.I,I 11,�I.1.I,.I .I�.I...,.!-"L"�-.�1 I.II,I I.�. I".,-�L.,�:�I.I.L�., I._�,..-. �_,�,1;I k 1,1.,".,I.,.I.�.,�"1�'�-,I,,.I,,-,-I,,.J t.- - - - DISTURBED WITH B.U. 13 GYPSUM BOARD PROVIDE NEW C8 CHANNEL AND PREFlNtSHED METAL ROOF TO MATCH EXIST -- NEW E 1 BENT STEEL PLATE _-__- - =_" REMOVE EXIST PARAPET SIDING EYOND CLAD BLOCKING AND CONTINUE UP CURB - - SAG ROD TO SUPPORT CUT END DOOR JAMB -__ _ _ AS INDICATED _ FUISHING AND WOOD OF SIDING. PROVIDE NEW 'Z' GIRT INSULATED SECTIONAL NSTALLATIONROFASE FOR REFERENCE SKA15 I MAKE GOOD NISULATION ING �`(� p`S SCJ / _- = OVERHEAD DOOR _ BLOCK COURSES © PACK TH LOO E NSU ION DETAIL 4? 7�+ - AND TRACK EXIST CONC 1 DETAIL I I NUMBER / Q ---- = _:_ BLOCK A207 1:10 -- I DETAIL OR U I REFERENCE IAN S SAUC CnON TO BE REVISED TO EXIST B.U. ROOF - SIDING FLASHING = r DRAWING N0. ... ASSEMBLY - = LICENCE SUIT PRE ENGINNEERED 2 TYPICAL- MEMBRANE - ,%'' ROOFING NEW PREFIN METAL .,,,�'f 347811s BUILDING ENCLOSURE = BELLQWS FLASHING CANT STRIP REFERENCE SKA7 2 TYPICAL MEMBRANE ROOFING I ��' _�� �� -r�O ��C X Q� > _I- ; ADDIT1oNAl. AIR i o DETAILS .1.,III 1.l; .. .I ,I _ _ _ M BARRIER PROJECT: _ I,I,y,��7,4- _N I- _ _ _ 1 - 11 II 1 II I I I I. I I 1 II 11 I I 1 1t I 1 �� -_ - -i_ I . - _ II 11 II 11 11 11 II II II II I1 V III 11 II II 11 11 II If it If -II 11 I7 II !1 fl II 11 11 II II Ii !I II II 11 ,� II it I, _ 1/f 1 j' .. ' ) i A4d3 1:10 I i - - _ _ II �III �� ,I I �� II�II Il1111 VIII�I I�lilll I:�II 11 �� 11111 - i � AL� OW I i i i _ - TOP OF STEEL 26.47 P oFILE of oECK ANA BEW (� I TYPICAL PREMANUFACTURED INSULATED MUNICIPALITY OF` C L AR I N G TO N D1 _ P'1 CAULKED (TYP) ( \� NOTE: i ,�� CURB AND BLOCKING • i I _ - I 1 PLAM ON 19 400 I I 2440 KING STREET WEST iF I I _ I I PLYWOOD SILL I BEAM ANDD ROOF DETAILS I. = I I;'' - ALUM THRESHOLD BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO _ QT BASE AND FLOOR 13 GYPSUM BOARD i,I/ _ I'I _ 2 ROWS OF 20ox10ox60 VAPOUR BARRIER I y' . RECESSED FOOT GRILLE PAVERS ON 60mm SAND 140 MT STUDS O400C/C � ' SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 4 I NEW 190 CONC BLOCK MALL }A'n = 13 GYPSUM BOARD STEEL H FOR DETAILS OF BEAMS I I AND BEAM SEE STRUCTURAL D R A Wt t XG: ' °' BENT STEEL PLATE _ " AND NEL - I I I TOP OF STEEL °.. s ' ., % -- - - 25.95 Q ANCHORED TO WALL - INSULATED SECTIONAL a AT 600 C/C VERT d TOP STL . - OVERHEAD DOOR ° / - - - + _ UN1T:L 25:87 crn -- AND TRACK d ��S USTIC TILE tt "' BAR DCEILINGO 190 CONC BLOCK WALL I D E T /� T L S ° /1 Ln - - -� _ _° -- TO HEAD OF ROLLER SHUTTER i r, • • TEFL ANGLE FRAMING X I S REMOVE E ISTING SIDIN _ - I I INSULAITON. AND LINER PANEL o -_ FOUNDAT ON W AND - I I z SLAB = • tI •° , - ° SLAB TO BE DOWELLED WITH , I I - r , . ° 1I 1OM BARS AT 40OC/C . : ... , x _ ° • DRAWN BY p _ ° FLEX FILLER 'J' MOULD I I C.D,S. B:S.S. I DATE: SCALE: EM10 .< PLAN 50 RIGID P R - • . . °, . ,° I AND SEALANT SEALED DOUBLE GLAZED TYPE 2 PREFINISHED WHITE + °o INSULATION METAL SIDING I I I SEPTEMBER 1997 1=1p UNITS OF TEMPERED GLASS . � • - ,' °% ° I I I PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: N lT-fERMALLY BROMGEN ; ,.W' _ ,' :. , . REFERENCE D6-1 _ ANODIZED ALUM FRAMES .•.� REFERENCE D9 1 • REFERENCES D7-91, - . - /y\ - - . „` - - - - .c 12 Q - �, . DETAIL DE 'ALL �4 DETAfL� � s ,: - A2C}3 1•.1 o . - ' DETAI J : - A403 . t,:to ;., A403 1:10 a. ,,, , A402 T:10 3 - .. - . ,, s as z . ., . - G. ; .. - ,�:• ;, A r : ;,:m _ '>i.' ..: • :_. _. '.".: .-. .r.�� • ... ,... _. ter. .- e . -... .. - - Y _ .. is _ ,. ...... .. o - _ - a .. � ..' .:, ,. J. .. - is .. , q .. - ...E:, _ ; _ -A .. , _I 1. - .- . ;I .1. � . I� ,I.. I� I I I .I �.I I� . I I I I I . I � ,�.. . I� CARRY r 3 _ _. _ _ , . , ,�, _ ..: � . , . ; , - _.. _ _. r ,- a : : _ .. r .-- - - C 1rr I. ). - - - ,1. �: . - ., - .. _ r- 11 rt ..w - .. _ -11 i' a. � +. -} x _ is , ry ,. A 1 , ,y , yf 1 ; .. :. n ..,. : - :.1. :.. _ .r•. -. -.. TfACTOR-SHALL L CHECK AND VERIFY 1.CON AL r•`.1. . _ ALL: dlMl'sh1510NS:AT THE SITE ; _ . q., PREFIN METAL. FLASHING �.. - '' _1.P RING REflN: ALU1S . ON STARTER STRIPS - STRIPS ; PREFIN METAL FLASHING _: ,;° -, ON STA � ! ON.STARTER 5T#i1P5 EPtM 1 :MEMBRANE - , ON EPDM MEMBRANE 125x75x8 :G►ALV ANGLE L.L.V © 1$MM PT PLYWD w :-. ON 19MM PT PLYWD Z ANCHORED TO CONC ---�- ON EPDM MEMBRANE RI X - 0 BLOCKING , ; ON WOOD BLOCKING : ON 19MM PT PLYWD ON WOOD"BLOCKING . ANC D TO PREMANUF ANCHORED TO PREMANUF - �iCHORED- T'O MASONRY EPDM MEMBRANE INSULA CURB"& EPDM; MEMBRANE INSULATED CURB Qe BEN EPDM MEMBRANE SANDWICH PANEL OF PRESSURE TREATED I 11 AD CURB COUNTERFLASHING 12 GA ,CLOSURE COUNTERFLASH 12 GA METAL CLOSURE COUNTERFLASHING 19 PLYWOOD EACH SIDE OF_ . 38x89' PRESSURE TREATED FRAMING . I PREFgV MET PREFIN METAL FLUTE WITH 75 RIGID INSULATION . . AIR BARRIER To s> TYPICAL ROOF ASS Y 0 . CONTINUOUS AND BALLAST AN EPDM MEMBRANE CLOSURE FULL AULKED TYPI ROOF ASS Y CLOSURE FULLY CAULKED TYPICAL ROOF ASS'Y . OVERLAP TO FORM I ON 75 RIGID INSUL ON COMPLETE BARRIER VAP BARRIER'ON TOP OF STEEL 127. 5 I TOP OF STEEL 127.675 - 38 STEEL DECK ON - -- - N0. ISSU5. DATE BY I // r __ STRUCT STEEL - -- E _ _= R _ - AIR BARRIER TO BE - - -- AIR BARRIER TO B _ _ ° OCT NR VENT -- CONTINUOUS AND - _:w CONTINUOUS AND - - _ . . ° ° AT 800 C/C- L`� OVERLAP TO FORM` __ OVERLAP TO FORM - __ a " ° ° 1 ISSUED' FOR TENDS B $ S'. V c,,� _ _ ----� COMPLETE BARRIER . '__ — ----- COMPLETE BARRIER __ --- -- a° N r r. L , I ,I IrrII , I T ° 2 97 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 9 S S - __, - \ 1309. -- ----� - -- - - - 2 B I . 1 -- t � _) YY -- L )� fit' TYP SIDING _ _ `-- -���O ��C ���' _ TOP�+TWO COURSES - -_ C L _ _ -- �, - ��-� _, - - - - - - - - - - - - � __ ° o. FILLED WITH CONIC — II 11 I II !I II II III II II II III 11 — - II , II II II II II it II II it I6 II II II II WALL ASS Y — — II II 11 ,1111 it II.I 11 11 I,!I II II II II II II II II 11 II 1 • __ . X II II II II 11 tl II 1 II it II II II I1�11 II !I II II II II I! it II II II I! i II tl II I II II VIII II II II II 11 11 II II II II it !1 II I! 11 11 II !1 IIII I�I 11 II II IJ -II 11 11 II Li ll II I;�1�1 II 11 it II __ __ F I . TOP OF STEEL \ - ..�' 1.r __ `t% TOP OF STEEL 127.275 TOP OF STEEL 127.275 ) - - k, k, - r -- - _= S E P , __ CONC HEADER TRENCH 11 f �—- ---- I '� FO WI S _ r — `• - - MASONRY TIES/ , - - --- - U� - --_---- -------------- > -- - REtNFORCEMENT `. ,' -----© ---- '� - - - ----- - T -_ T%, X. r x' — _ ` \% k STL BEAM SEE - STL BEAM SEE -_ ., X, STRUCT DWGS n STRUCT DWGS v x . _ TOP TWO COURSES x TOP TWO COURSES -- ' " TOP TWO COURSES - >' _ _- 100 RIGID INSULATION FILLED WITH CONC . / ' �x ,, FILLED WITH CONC FILLED WITH CONIC ,> __ . . ° . _ Y, X I AROUND TRENCH ,� _ r a; k / LAP MEMBRANE _ WITH AIR BARRIER k - . , TYP MASONRY TYP SIDING - 4-- - h SLOPE s " __ P.T. WOOD WALL ASS'Y WALL ASS'Y - ,, BLOCKING - _ ° ° _- 90 CONC BLOCK = ° ° 11 ---/" r 38 PREFIN'METAL - _ a 25 AIR. SPACE SIDING TYPE 1 = 50 RIGID INSUL I _- ON Z BARS ON PREFIN METAL FLASHING ;i{,,;; AIR/VAPOUR BAR NR APOUR BAR - - TYPICAL ROOF ASS'Y 190 CONC BLOCK /V 190 CONC BLOCK o _ ' / PREFIN METAL RING % ' PREMANUF INSULATED M =_ = CURB - . ,. , , ` - -_- FOR FURTHER INFORMATION REFER TO TOP Of RY 126.475 _ - / / - -----_ - STRUCTURAL AND REFRIGERATION DRAWINGS - � ' i' I ��� -,. �� , �XI_ �. STL BEAMS SEE ACC BLOCK 2 % - - 1l_ � � l�)� -- - - _ y //FL``]`�\ =�-` ! --�-�) � STRUCT DWGS r 2 / _ __ J �'' /� /' II II II II II II IIII 11 11 II II,IIII I! II II II II — i /I/ TYPE WALL - r T P OF STEEL 126.275 - r r r - --- ---- - - REFERENCE SKA9 - r 1 2 SECTION K'TN� S ECTION S ECTIONS x TYPICAL MASONRY WALL PARAPET . A402 1:10 A402 1:10 A402 1:10 A403 1:10 i i p . PREFIN METAL FLASHING I I R I RI ON STARTER STRIPS I I 1�N P N METAL FLUTE ON EPDM MEMBRANE I CLOSURE FULLY CAULKED ON WOOD PT BLOCKING I _ � 25 ON WO00 BLOCKING I PREFINISHED LINER SHEET . ANCHORED TO CONC I I VAPOUR BARRIER i ->-<) 90 190 TOP OF STEEL 128.350 BLOCK WALL do BENT I t5o AF110 SEMI RIGID '}``' )F 12 GA METAL CLOSURE I I INSULATION - ' NR BARRIER TO BE 'x' y X I I r',' ) 11 1 OVERLAP TO FORM X. x' I I - REMOVE PART OF I I / _ COMPLETE BARRIER /, I I EX WALL �.�) TYP SIDING 'F I I W1 WALL WALL� ASS'Y I I I 90 CONC BLOCK THROUGH WALL FLASHING FILL COURSES �, PREFIN METAL FLASHING CLOSURE ,,� - 25 AIR SPACE I WITH WEEPHOLES AT 80OC/C MAX i I I GIRT HEIGHT VARIES 50 RIGID INSULATION FILLED WITH CONC , k'_ ON STARTER STRIPS - AIR BARRIER v X/ I ON FR40 FLASHING �- 190 CONC BLOCK LAP MEMBRANE I ON TAPERED PT , I1 "�,, FILL TOP COURSE SOLD WITH AIR BARRIER �`; ( I ANCHORED TO SOLI D I1 BLOCK WOOD `1 v FILLED BLOCK WALL - ' L `\ , . I > PREFIN MTL FLASHING - PREFIN METAL (LASHING NOTE: i TYPICAL ROOF ASS'Y : - >,� 1 i sECOrNio cousR5E� - 10mm FLEXIBLE JOINT TYPICAL W1 wALL PREMANUF INSULATED , 1\,X, _ X FILLER AND SEALANT CURB - CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY _ -_--_�- - -- __ I\ TYP SIDING ACTUAL CONDITIONS AND = WALL ASS'Y REPORT ANY DISCREPENCIES _ • ° , EXIST TO THE ARCHITECT - 1 °° ° ' 1` , ° r ,� �' �1 �� 7t"��.-_ - '` SKYLIGHT EX 190 CONC BLOCK WALL GRADE �' I 11 I � �'� �� � )�, 1� x k ( �) � �> � - , 1 I I I•�I I I �,1 I °I I I I.I I I I I I I 1�I 1 I I !� I ,mw IIIIIIIIIIII F_ IIIIIIIII; sip "a =q No - i:11 1 I �� III'1 11 1i�11 1� I Ii 11111 II II I II -1I = _ �� / . c ° I t ,:11L I I I�L�:1�L� .a I I (1 ELI III I I I t! _ - ..,\ � ,c°% . X� TOP OF STEEL 127.275 I RAKE OUT JOINT do 100 I , _ -____ __ INSTALL NEW PREFIN METAL --- -------- --_ - FLASHING FULLY CAULK _ --j� � JOINT SEE STRUCTURAL FOR DETAILS o - 50 RIGID PERIMETER : L� FR FLEXIBLE FLASHING °F FLOOR STAB AND e c > °r __ INSULATION FOUNDATION WALLS I I ADHERED de MECH FASTENED TO EX WALL >I, t - k, -------° _ _ EPDM MEMBRANE COUNTERFLASHING PREMANUF INSULATED CURB S E CT I O N $ S ECTI O N STL BEAMS SEE W/ P.T. TAPERED BLOCKING sTRUCT Dwcs I TYPICAL ROOF ASS'Y A403 1:10 A402 1:10 OCT I EPDM MEMBRANE 2 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 31 9 B.S.S. COUNTERFLASHING NOTE: ROOF ACCESS HATCH 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 3�C9 G:P.G. ROOF ACCESS HATCH TO TYPICAL ROOF ASS'Y HAVE SAFETY BAR x_,. _�\ EXHAUST FAN NO. REVISIONS DATE BY CURB FLANGE I 1 -- I - - PREFIN MET FLASHING CONT WOOD NAILER - - - - - - _ -_----- - _ � FR40 FLASHING - BY MECHANICAL FR40 FLASHING - - - - BARRY 9 RYAN r` =_ ---__-- - ---- -___ ---f ,I "� _ _ PREFAB INSULATED 11 x.� )� > _,( -> - - �- �� - ,;r __�-_ TYP►CAL MEMBRANE = ASSOCIATES 1991} LIiITI ROOF PREFABRICATED INSUL METAL CURB i ? � g' METAL CURB BY MEC -- - _ - ARCHITECT • ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS li !i II 11 It 11 11 II II II II I� '.� 11 IIIII�.II II11 II I — — 1! II II Il:il'.II� 11 11 I��I-�{I! II I II II !��II III / { ' \ t _ I I I ! I' I I I I I 1 I I! I!I I I I I 1 1 1 I 1 1 '-'—"—' - - _ - H — ( I t �( \_ /1 I �`'�` �- ._ _- II IIII� I�II ' I II VIII !I,II II.. ,.,, I� •� I I - - - - A )_ `L" - ; - �� ? l )� - I ` " '� Telephone (905) 666 5252 TOP OF STEEL 125.150 i ,X,^1 _ 1 SEALANT II III., 11 II II 11 II II 11111 I, II II II 11 III -- ---------' �_`----'--- ._ r_-1 ''!� �... = !I ! !, I 1 ! I I I I 1 1 (I 1 ! ! III •III I ;, -'- - - - ---- 1 1 1 1 1 I I, I I!I I I P I i t ,I 1 l 'l I l i l 1 1 1!1 1 III!1 1• - I METAL DECK CLOSURE CONT MTL `•----- -Q.----__------ ----___ 6 SECTION - . s SECTION �_ -- -- -- __ A401 1:10 A402 1:10 STL FRAMING SEE ROOF FRAMING v STRUCT SEE STRUCT PREFIN. ROOF DECK X A i ci I - I ON INSULATED Z-BARS 3300 '' 5001 - '° FULLY CAULKED PREFIN. LINER SHEET EXIST. COL. TO FAKE REFERENCE SKA6 REFERENCE SKA7 ASSp 11 FLUTE CLOSURE do °F E"'sT' MASON 10 -SECTI O N 11 SECTIONS �. -�,, , FLUTE CLOSURE SULATED I A502 1:10 �O2 1:10 NUMBER Z R IT T 0 1 DETAIL OR ( ) ) r\ ' -- / �- ftw STL COLUMN REFERENCE ) ( ) 38 MTL DECK ON DRAWING NO. j ) THROUGH ROOF STEEL JOISTS 9EE STRUCT FILL TOP 2 COURSES WITH y�� RIAN`SCdTT SOUL 1 1, Lt $CE i CONC SILL AT JOIST SHOE , %,� v. 1 -_- ------ -- - _-- f TOP OF BENT COUNTER LOCATIONS SEE STRUCT ��''��.�n�,�.h,�,M EXIST. ROOF do EAVESTR01}6H i - .i, PREFIN MTL COUNTER , I FLEXIBLE SEALER ° - /���, PREFIN. METAL FLASHING// FLASHING - TOP OF STEEL 23.87 I PREFIN. METAL SIDING FR40 FLASHING - PROJECT: - EAVE HEIGHT (._ � TYPE 1 ON 2 BARS do PITCH POCKET AROUND 127.975 - ) PREFIN. LINER SHEET STL COLUMN ✓ CURB ON 12mm P.T. PLY I TYPICAL MEMBRANE /�� •���A �� / ` /'1L�I GfV1 STUDS AT 8400 0/C ( \ _ - - ---- } EXISTING - _ _- ___ - , — - -- - , (� `, PREFIN. MET. FLASHING ✓) 127.8301 \ i�/ _ _l( � ��� )� ( J f! �� )t� I(^)` i- �./ B. 1.' __ WOOD BLOCKING FR40 � X l - - <, - - - - > EXISTING ,CHANNEL If�ll 11 11111 II II II II II 11 II 1;�:111 11 II II , Y`- 11 VIII II 11 11 I: it 11 l ,I II( II I 1 � I! , II I i , FLASHING �) III I, I I MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BELLOWS "I STONE BALLAST ON EPDM \Q2 ;�:r I 11:., ,f, I I.L,.I w l L;.i! ILu " ", , FLASHING - = MEMBRANE ON 1% 1 `` - : . -- ON 75 RIGID INSUL. -- PACK WITH INSULATION r 2440 KING STREET WEST - - ON VAP. BARRIER `` -- ON STEEL DECK { _ EXISTING PLYWOOD. \ BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO INSULATED ANUFACT. - n __ STUD SIDING TO REMAIN /� - INSULATED METAL ,� __ -- ) = 1 - -�-- -- - - - METAL DECK CLOSiJRE __ --- CURB - �, ( T . i -- ( c :! 1 -Y�Vic:; - \ I SECTION ,2 = DRAWING: r 1 II II II II II II It It 11 II II ,I II f IIIIi Ii II II II II II II II 11 II ,V � - - : 'r.. r` TOP STEEL — — I I I I I I I I I I ,1.1 1 I I I I: I I , I 1 I I !1 I I I I 1 1 I f l 1 1 I t ,I 1 1 NEW STL COLUMN -- VARIES�SEIrSTRUC - THRU ROOF 1. STEEL LINTEL SEE STRUCt . w i -- - I PREFlNISHED c\j J MOLD METAL FLASHING ONC FILL BLOCK cv - I. 1 DETAILS cri I 200 BEAM i ; ; < ;' . r 350 O.W.S.J. . _ U/S BEAM I - 23.27 z°°' c: w DRAWN BY: - CHECKED BY:X.� . ',� .. . .. REFER TO FRAME SCHEDULE S.M H B.S.S.- L � - o - I ) : PITCH POCKET FOR FRAME NOTES DATE: SCALES : EM10 Ir, NEW. TO BE FASTEN / AROUND S?L. COLUMN SEPTEMBER 1997 1=i l? a TO EXIS CJOLUMN SEE OCT r ° 0 13 GYP. BD. ON 20 METAL FURRING PLAN - PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: 0 REFERENCE SKA5 REFERENCE D5--6 w w o r: . . CD Q I 1 g SECTION N I c" 12 12 SECTION S C EC N S TIO , , � _� . „ - _ , A401 : o --- A502 x:10 I 1 1 A40 1 10 :. �, - , . , , r. r -, 11 , . . t- 1 , y z • I ` r - U. . - s 11, x - .. 4. • e a I , y, II b t ,, .. `r. r ,:. ,. tip: _ _ .. .. _ .._ _ ._ _ _ .. ... ., .. - _ �. i _� ,_:.. a _. y, .: _ .� ,. — _.. _ __ �SSOCIATE3 0-,` IA" to S f. 4 s y x CONTRACTOR' SHALL CHECK 'AND VERIFY AT THE SITE _ ALL DIMENSIONS 50 SIM REMOVE 'EXIST ROOF'DECK TO C TINUE FR40 TO 1800mm �►1f,LOW FOR INSTALLATION OF M'EDGE OF ROOF FR44 FA MNG. REINSTALL FLAT STOCK FLASHING CAULK MTL QECK°AND MAKE -GOOD. INUE MEMBRANE ALONG EXIST S`OPED ROOF AND SEAL AND SEAL ALL AROUND. COLOUR TO MATCH PARAPET I PREMOULDE LUTE TYPICAL MEMBRANE - = NO. ISSUES DATE BY P BLOCK DOWN 1 COURSE FILLER INSUTA N ROOF -- SHOWN. FLASH AND CAULK LINE OF PARAPET BEYOND Y - 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION NOV ' B.S.S. ,..` P NETRATION �'U _ _ TYPICAL MEMBRANE W 13 97 P EFlN MTL ROOF \ FIAASHING —MP OF MASONRY 125.9b I Z iii 1 { { i I I I I — i l { i { {{ { { REMOVEABLE GALV i _= o VI II II II II It II it II 1 ! 11 It it II II It It II 1 II II It II II 11 111 U STEEL GRATING L L L L 1 400 N V ANGLE L45x45x6 MASONRY WALL TO EXTEND = _--__, K_— TOP OF MASONRY 125,70 15M ANCHORS 0300C/C - TO MATCH .INFILL WALL - / ii ria : n i I N – TOP OF STEEL 125.50 a °' ° - \ LAP FLASHING AS N ° SHOWN AND SEAL , I W W _ BEAM AND GUSSET ° W PLATE SEE STRUCT l_ NEW BEAM SEE STRUCT ----- m N= B OWSJ SEE EXIST STL FRAMING i -----— ""' - OWSJ _ GYPSUM BOARD TO FOLLOW 1*O a - EXIST N STUDS PROFILE OF MTL DECK. FIRE V - FIBRE INSULATION I STOP ALL FLUTES I °° ° ° EE STRUCT RAMING - 13 GYPSUM BOARD I REMOVE EXIST MTL SIDING R '_ - TO REMAIN i AND PLYWOOD. INSTALL MTL ° = PREFlN MTL SIDING FURRING AND 13 GYPSUM BOARD ° - TYPE 1 ON ANGLE AND TO UNDERSIDE OF MTL DECK 7 ° 190 CONC BLK - ° AIR BARRIER _ 950 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME. ACOUSTIC PANEL 50 RIGID INSUL _ SEE STRUCTURAL DWGS MAKE GOOD ALL SURFACES OF CEILING EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN I I STL LINTEL - O150 300 150 SEE STRUCT m v - r� 1 g o = COLOURED PLAIN ARCH ` RETURN GYPSUM BOARD BLOCK COLOUR AS TYPE 1 PREFIN CLOSURE� PR FIN DRIP TO DOOR FRAME PREFlN MTL SIDING FLASHING INSTALL MTL STUD FRAMING TYPE 1 AS REQUIRED TO SUIT NEW OPENING RUBBER BASE REFERENCE SKA13 REFERENCE SKA4 REFERENCE SKAB FACE OF WALL 'L' FRAMING ff BEYOND DETAIL© 2 DETAILa 3 TYPCIAL' TRENCH DRA10' 4 DETAIL A503 1:1 o A503 1:10 A503 1:10 A503 1:10 2 TYPICAL MEMBRANE ROOF FILL FLUTES WITH =_ LOOSE INSULATION - i PREFlN CLOSURE - -- - - - - - - - - — —— — - -- — 2 �dd I,_ - 1 L �:'.r.l:;�.��:.I.J.: li �1 �.:��.1�.,r::r:�:� ' L1..� - r 1 Il�.�. :: ' 'L:�:I:1�:: ; �.:� i 50 HOSE BIB e i SIM SEE MECH 190. SIDES TILED WITH GYPSUM BOARD TO EXTEND 50x50 CERAMIC TILE INTO FLUTES AND TO BE STEEL BEAM ANGLE FRAMING AS PER SHOWERS 13 GYPSUM BOARD FULLY CAULKE T{:� ( AND SUSPENDED STRUCTURAL VAPOUR BARRIER MEMBERS. SEE STRUCT INSULATION PREFlN METAL SIDING r 040OC/C 190 13 GYPSUM BOARD . ------------ -- ."� — '�-- TYPE 2 Q POURED CONC CURBS STEEL STUD FRAMING NJI FACE WITH TILE FLOOR TILED WITH 50x50 CERAMIC TILE FLEXIBLE FILLER AS PER SHOWERS AND CAULK ALL AROUND %N SL — g oP I 3 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 31 9 G.P.G. d 190 CONIC A BLOCK WALL SUSPENDED GYPSUM 'J' MOULD PREFlN MTL SIDING TYPE 2 PREFlN MTL FLASHING 1so SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC BOARD CEILING COLOUR—WHITE 2 REVISED FOR ADDENDUM 2 OCT G P.G. TILE CEILING 31 /97 FLOOR DRAIN SEE MECH LATERAL SUPPORT 1 REVISED FOR ADDENDUM 1 OCT G.P.G. ANGLE CUPS 200x200 GLASS BLOCK 31/97 FLOOR DRAIN N0. REVISIONS BATE BY SEE MECH CENTRE LINE o WATERPROOF MEMBRANE OF L�1rSIfViZ - - BARRY * BRYAN SETTING BED WITH TYPE 2 CONIC BLOCK �.• — GLASS BLOCK BEYOND WIRE MESH I ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED 140 BULI.NOSE BLOCK ARCHITECT - ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS 50 Telephone (905) 666-5252 10 FLEXIBLE FILL 1 COURSE OF TYP AND SEALANT CAVITY-WALL-HALF BLOCK UNITS ONLY SECTION PLAN - SLAB ON GRADE -- � SEE STRUCT k o° REFERENCE D6-2 N THROUGH WALL FLASHING AND s DETAILS - A401 1:10 50 RIGID INSULATION INTERIOR LINE OF ( I DETAIL '`� OF '%A FOUNDATION WALL BEYOND —+� DWGS FORNDETAJLS. SEE STRUCT NUMBER QR REFERENCE D7-10 DETAIL OR REFERENCE BRfAN COTT SAUC DRAWING NO. LICENCE 6 D ETAI LO �-�• 34�$ 0 �01 1:10 ""tiMUUUU . �r r PROJECT: ADDFTK)N AND ALTERATIONS GAFO&7 B. RICKARD COMPLEX MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 2440 KING STREET WEST BOWMANVIL.E ONTARIO s DRAWING: cTI ch DETAILS DRAWN BY: G.P.G. B.S.S. DATE: SCALE: SEPTEMBER 1997 1=10 o^ 4 PROJECT NO:. DRAWING NO: - , ca 900 AM_ _'3 rd u r F F3 1 zN 1.r: .. y ::. : -• - •.... ... ..,-,.. .:- ,: .. r-•' '.,: T- -.. ." a -. : - - , n A v i GONTRACibR SNALI.. CHECK *41) VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE S17E RI , , R1 RI '+ = 1b 100 355 100 ;' / 190 110 378 TYP. EXTERIOR 3s PREFlN MTL sIDINc MASONRY STRAP ANCHOR I CAVITY WALL PREFlN MTL CLOSU j I SITE RIFY 150 FIBRE INSULATION AS SPECIFIED EVERY �, TYP. EXTERIOR 1190 BARRIER BLOCK SECOND COURSE TO L BENFULLY CAULKED ,�. / CAVITY WALL SEALANT et BACKUP BOTH SIDES ,( DATE BY PREMOULDED 1 -L N---EXIST COLUMN 150PFlBRE INSULATION MTL NO ISSUES �, -t_ LINE 'Z' SEPT JOINT FILLER : 15# BUILDING '� -� `�' X 'X' Z GII21"S 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER B.S.S. PAPER � �: :i i:' i ii�u n �� :: : �+ i i� is i� ii ii u :: :� i, i+ �: �� i� :i ii n u �i +: i+ i� i, �r i, i� � � — PR F �� � E IN MTL LINER PANEL J �. ED MTL \ ( 2 97 X X X I ( � PREFINISHED CLOSURE r ►� - -- RIMOVE PART OF EXIST FRAME AND DOORS ( �`-, �.-- � � � X, . �( EX T MULLION. MAKE :, ++ GOOD E T FRAME C X � X �� � t,� I STL COLUMN III i \ i _ - I , \ CUP WELDED TO COLUMN g � SEE STRUCT BY STRUCT STL SUPPLIER a g TO MASONRY ED - - - f � — — y - - AT 16" C/C VERT '` TERMINATE MASONRY TERMINATE EACH BLOCK IN OPENING WITH MORTAR KEY 2 SPLIT RIB REUSED OR NEW BLOCK SIDE OF CONTROL JOINT . -- — — — COLUMN SEE CONC BLOCK TO MATCH EXISTING X + PROVIDE STRAP ANCHORS AS ' LAP AIR BARRIER WITH SHOWN AT ALL EXTERIOR COLUMN (SEE STRUCT) _ STRUCTURAL I LINER PANEL AND SEAL COLUMNS - 150 190 COLUMN SEE PREFINISHED MTL TYP. EXTERIOR STRUCT CLOSURE 190 CONC BLOCK CAVITY WALL TYP. EXTERIOR 38 100 CAVITY WALL TYPE W1 l PLAIN CONC BLOCK 25 ARCH BLOCK SPACE 2 SPLIT RIB TYPE 1 38 PREFIN MTL SIDING I ( TYPE 2 50 RIGID INSULATION 150 FIBRE INSULATION . AIR BARRIER LINER SHEET 190 CONC BLOCK LOWER LEVEL UPPER LEVEL ---------------- ----- --L-�- EXIST DOOR REMAIN TYP CONTROL JOINT 2 COLUMN ANCHOR AT MASONRY WALL 3 PLAN DETAIL 4 PLAN DETAIL PLAN DETAIL 1=10 A203 1=10 A�O3 1=10 A�O3 1=10 A203 1=10 ! BULLNOSE BLOCK ( PLAN ON 19 PLYWOOD SILL - PREFIN MTL SIDING TYPE 1 I = ON 'Z' BARS WITH 150 AN 10 I INSULATION, VAPOUR BARRIER - ; AND PREFINISHED LINER SHEET TYP. EXTERIOR BULLNOSE BLOCK CAVITY WALL 1 __ SEALED UNITS E GEORGIAN NEW STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN. \ � 34 - WIRE AND TEMPERED GLASS APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF � � - CONTINUE AIR BARRIER TO , TYPE W IN PS INSULATED FRAMES PROVIDE MASONRY TIES EVERY = \ CANOPY TERMINATION i' LINER SHEET. LAP AND SEAL SECOND COURSE SEE �, PROVIDE SUFFICIENT EXCESS TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS = VERTICAL STEEL CHANNEL ALLOW FOR BUILDING SETTLEMENT M — \ COLUMN SEE STRUCTURAL -- \ '` PREFINISHED METAL TYPE 1 BELLOWS FLASHING PREFlN MTL SIDING LINE OF CANOPY - TYPE 1 ' I -7 50 RIGID INSULATION = \ ABOVE AND AIR BARRIER \ FILL VOID WITH INSUL -- PREFlN MTL SIDING TYPE 2 ON PROVIDE STRAP ANCHORS TYP. EXTERIOR = _= 75 z BARS EVERY SECOND COURSE CAVITY WALL \ - 50 RIGID INSULATION / = _ \\ o - AIR 90 BARRIER NC BLOCK c CJ 190 PLAIN - CONC BLOCK - \ g R — ( 190 94` SEAL SCREEN FRAME AT = \ PREFlN MTL CLOSURE. PREFlN MTL CLOSURE. \ COLOUR TO MATCH SIDING COLOUR TO MATCH SIDING = 0 CONC BLOCK _ \ TYP. INTERIOR _ \ CAVITY WALL = 190 CONC BLOCK I _ — I �� �i �j�:� . !, I :e rr1 1 _ - BULLNOSE BLOCK = 2 SPLIT RIB ARCH BLOCK =_ TYPE 1 WITH PLAIN COLOURED ON TYPE 2 AT BASE AND CEILING 19 PLYWOOD SILL i - HEAD-SEE INTERIOR ELEVATION _ \ . NOTE 190 i ' THERMALLY BROKEN 01, IZED " r I ALUM FRAME WITH D - COURSING OF TWO WALLS I UNITS OF 2-5mm GLASS VARIES BY 75mm. DO NOT TOOTH IN MITRE BLOCK AT SEAL AIR BARRIER I 190 CONC BLOCK CORNER AT SCREEN FRAME i I ALUM FLASHING TO BASE\ � - 2 SPLIT RIB PLAM SILL ON ARCH BLOCK 19 PLYWOOD SILL ( OF WINDOW _ s PLAN DETAIL PLAM ON 19 PLYWOOD SILL CONC BLOCK I \ 100 190 1100 190 SEE PLAN FOR TYPE \ i A203 1=10 PLAN DETAIL s PLAN DETAIL 9 PLAN DETAIL r7 I �O3 1=10 A203 1=10 A204 1-10 / PLAM ON 19 THERMALLY BROKEN ANODIZED NOV I 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 11 97 G.P.G PLYWOOD SILL I UNIITS OF 2-3mm TEMP GLASS 1200 I PLAN ON 19 I N0. REVISIONS BATE BY PLYWOOD SILL CAULK AND SEAL FRAME AT 590 I — — — — — — — — — — — — ;' I CONC BLOCK TYPICAL 190 CONC BLOCK BARRY BRYAN THERMALLY BROKEN ANODIZED WALLS i ALUM FRAME WITH SEALED ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED I UNITS OF 2-5mm TEMP GLASS — — — — "" — - ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS ( — — — _. — ..._ ._ .— WALL TYPE W1 190 _ 90 Telephone ,(905) 666-5252 f NEW CONC FILLED ' 2 SPLIT RIB q:7 I CAULK AND SEAL FRAME AT PAN AND STEEL STAIR TYPE 2 BOTH SIDES - I9 2 SEE DETAIL CONC BLOCK TYPICAL 10 AIR BARRIER I i 50 FOR ELEVATION - REFERENCE _ 190 35 _ �I I 35 =- 200x200 NOM GLASS BLOCK WITH REINF PANELS REMOVE PART OF EXISTING EXPANSION STRIP MASONRY WALL. PROVIDE ' LINTEL OVER. REFER TO STRUCT -= CAULK AND SEAL NEWSTRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN. MASONRY TIES EVERY PROVIDE -- — — — — — — — — — — — — — — EXIST WALL ' I I = SECOND COURSE SEE TO REMAIN I STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 140 CONC BLOCK -_ TYPE 2 FACING = : "O A o ' NUMBER NEW STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN. YX o ,_ DETAIL PROVIDE MASONRY TIES EVERY ,n — — -- — — — — f l' SECOND COURSE SEE - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - C - - — f I STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS r 140 AR H CONC REFERENCE DETAIL OR BLOCK 1 AND 2 DRAWING N0. BRIAN SCOT=SAU!' " SPECIAL CORNER UNITS LICENCE STRUCT COLUMN C/W I I RUNIING BOND 3475 - CAULK JOINT ANCHOR STRAPS. SEE a: ''�nuun�n• HANDRAIL ON OTHER SIDE STRUCT DRAWINGS BULLNOSE BLOCK TO EXTEND 550 BEYOND PROVIDE STRAP ANCHORS FILL FRAME WITH FIRST RISER AND LADDER REINFORCEMENT a PLAM COUNTER PROJECT: MORTAR BETWEEN NEW AND EXISTING 590 LINE OF DISPLAY CASE N.I.G. ADDI110N AND ALTERA71ONS 10 PLAN DETAIL 11 PLAN DETAIL rl2 PLAN DETAIL 13 PLAN DETAIL A203 ,-,O A2o2 1-10 A2o3 1=10 202 1-10 GARNET,B. RMARD ooMPLEX MUNICIPALITY Of CLARINGTON 2440 KING STREET WEST BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO cn DRAWING: M PLAN DETAILS DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY- o G.P.G. B.S.S. DATE: sC�►L>=: EM10 SEPTEMBER 1997 Y='10 cr► ' PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: 971M w. . : a tr, r , r + - 1 (i f� EM :T ? r � , .y. , • ._• ' - - - AQ ou CONTRACTOR. SHALL OMECk AND VERY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE r, X A Yx q X A 4 NO. ISSUES 'DATE BY OCT JL 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER B.S.S. EXISTING SIDING EXIST SKYLIGHT 2 97 ASSEMBLY 04 EXISTING SIDING I 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION B.S.S. ( TO REMAIN EXTEND HANDRAIL 305 I ASSEMBLY NOV GUARDRAIL FROM TOP TREAD ON I TO REMAIN 13 9 GYPSUM BOARD , BEYOND OPPOSITE SIDE STAIR ao5 5 I GYPSUM BOARD Q 30 CEILING 5 i 70 CEILING I I I A701 GYPSUM BOARD I 380 HANDRAIL 380 HANDRAIL 380 HANDRAIL Ni >1 1h 380 HANDRAIL �� I ZSTLFRAMING SEE CONC PAN STAIR STRUCTURAL STRUCK RAL SEE CONC PAN STAIR EXISTING WALL 6 N EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN N CONC FILLED I 7O1 A7O CONC FILLED �w HOLLO CORE I TO REMAIN Y I PAN STAIR PAN ST R SLAB J p / W t I 1 HR FIREIRATED DR ALL I I I I I I I 1 HR FIRERATED DRYW I j ASSEMBLY BELOW STAIRS I 1 HR FlRERATED Dt7YWAL I ASSEMBLY BELOW STAIR ` I i 3 I Q I I ASSEMBLY BELOW STAIR rN 1 A701 4 4 A70 \,A701) 17 TREADS AT 250 17 TREADS AT 250 A70 SIM 18 EQ TREADS AT 250 17 EQ TREADS AT 250 REV NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR SEAL ALL BREAKS IN FIRE RATED SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR SEAL ALL BREAKS IN FIRE RATED SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR SEAL ALL BREAKS IN FIRE RATED ALL STAIRS PRIOR TO FABRICATION ASSEMBLY WITH FIRE RATED CAULKING ALL STAIRS PRIOR TO FABRICATION ASSEMBLY WITH FIRE. RATED CAULKING ALL STAIRS PRIOR- TO FABRICATION ASSEMBLY WITH FIRE RATED CAULKING 1 STAIR 3 SECTION rTN� S TAIRS 1 AND 2 SECTION 3 STAIR 4 SECTION A701 1=50 A702 150 A701 150 19 19 WELDED WIRE MESH 19 NOTE: WELDED WIRE MESH NOTE: WELDED WIRE MESH SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ABRASIVE NOSING ALL STAIRS PRIOR TO FABRICATION ABRASIVE NOSING ABRASIVE NOSING 3/16" CHECKERPLATE ALL STAIRS PRIOR TO FABRICATION LANDING Qp o AND POSTS HANDRAIL x x x X X "� X x x x x M x x x x x FACE OF WALL SURFACE 25 TYP. TREAD DETAIL TYP. TREAD DETAIL 25 TYP. TREAD DETAIL 40 N. ° EXTEND 305 ONE 38 CONT. 380 STEEL PIPE FILL GAP WITH 25NPa HANDRAIL CAP ENDS 380 HANDRAIL 6 CLOSURE PLATE CONCRETE SIDE OF STAIR ONLY FILL MTL PAN STAIR (SEE DETAILS FOR LENGTH) A WITH 25 MPa CONC TYP FILL MTL PAN STAIR 6 CLOSURE PLATE 250 305 PAINT FINISH 250 WITH 25 MPa CONC TYP 305 250 EXTEND HANDRAIL AT ONE MTL PAN STAIR C/w - 250 SIDE OF STAIR ONLY. �' ��-_ 100 WIDE ANTE-SUP � FINISHED FLOOR MTL PAN STAIR C/W in 100 STEEL BRACKETS 0 SEE PLAN— NOSING TYP 100 WIpE ANTI-SUP °i 1070 C/C MAX. �s NOSING TYP FINISHED FLOOR PAINT FINISH - -- 59 ` r'S -- I STEEL COVER PLATE BOLTED INSTALL SHEET MTL PLATE I L38x38x4 I I TO WALL (PROVIDE SOLID WD. - — AT GAP TO ALLOW FOR / BACKING AT LOCATIONS WITH CONCRETE FILL / I GWB FINISH) _ w 250 _ i 3/16 CHECKERPLATE J I TREAD -- - -I ar NOTE: AT SPARFIL LOCATIONS -- 1/8" STEEL PLATE W PROVIDE 2-79x64 "RAWL" /'/ RISER NUTS MTL PAN STAIR C W HOLLOW CORE SLAB W8 BEAM SEE STRUCT CAP END OF SEE STRUCTURAL / r STRINGER(TYP) 100 WIDE ANTI-SLIP i --- - C10 STRINGER NOSING TYP 2 LAYERS 1/2" TYPE 'x' GYSUM 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 NOV G.P G. BOARD (STAGGERED JOINTS) ON 90 MTL 13 9 e'�y, I — W8 BEAM SEE STRUCT 90 MTL STUDS AT 400 C/C WELD TO CHANNEL AND FILL MTL PAN STAIR - -- BOLT TO CONC. FLOOR WITH 25 MPa CONC TYP 1210 4 TREADS 0250 NO. REVISIONS DATE BY 2 LAYERS 1/2- TYPE 'X' GYSUM BOLT TYP. BOARD (STAGGERED JOINTS) ON 90 MTL WITH 13 DIA. EXPANSION 90 MTL STUDS AT 400 C/C BARRY .. • -'BRYAN 6 CLOSURE PLATE r`'r ��/ C10 STRINGER C10 STRINGER ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED L1 ooxloox6x150 LONG 5 STAIR DETAIL r6"N\ S TAIR DETAIL 7 STAIR 5 SECTION 7A ARCHITECT ENGINEER •TYPICAL HANDRAIL DETAIL E PROJECT MANAGERS WELD TO CHANNEL AND A701 1 a5 B�BOLT TO CONC. FLOOR 1-5 A 701 1:5 P � ) 113 IA EXPANSION �, - -- A701 1-20 Telephone 905 666-5252 FINISHED FLOOR 0 C10 STRINGER ^� U/S METAL DECK L 380 HANDRAIL AND POSTS 3/16" CHECKERPLATE LANDING FACE OF WALL FACE OF WALL 4 STAIR DETAIL � 460 � 460 A 701 1-5 NOTE: — 6x45 — SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FO FLAT BARS ALL STAIRS PRIOR TO F CATION sxso 9150.6 HOOP BARS DETAIL �i NOTE: o FACE OF WALL NUMBER SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR DETAIL OR REFERENCE RIAAt SCOTT SAL".* ALL STAIRS PRIOR TO FABRICATION DRAWING No. LICENCE � 3/16" CHECKERPLATE LANDING ��°•y 3478 . � 380 POST AT 150 a� an .,.n•�� 380 HANDRAIL 1220 C/C MAX o BRACKET AND �� LINE OF ROOF d DELETED colvc. BLOCK WALL PROJECT: �i FIN FLOOR o ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS • GA IMT B. RICKARD COMPLEX 0 U/S METAL DECK 305 ?� MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON EXTEND 305 ONE 3/16" CHECKERPLATE y : SIDE OF STAIR ONLY TREAD r °' LINE OF WALL 2440 KING STREET WEST _ 1/8" STEEL PLATE BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO .n RISER f 64x10 BRACKET II L.38x38x4 CONT C14 NGER 250 305 METAL CAGE 150 BRACKET FIXED TO BLOCK rn � I I — — 0 1220 C/C (GALV.)TYP (GALVANIZED) DRAWING. _ — 15 POST WITH TOP AND EXTEND 305 ONE -- ,n (GALVANIZED) OM PLATE. BOLT TO FLOOR. SIDE OF STAIR ONLY (Gx V BARS ZI 3/16" CHECKERPLATE �. o ( ) v � TREAD � GRADE 19 RUNGS O CAP END OF 1/8" STEEL PLATE 11 ° 305 0/C (t1rP) STAIR D E TA I L I' '' (GALVANIZED) STRINGER(TYP) RISER 64x10 BRACKET 7 z 11 FIXED TO BLOCK O 1220 C/C 460 ELI L1o0xlOOx6x150 LONG JJ (GALVANIZED) TYPICAL WELD TO CHANNEL AND C10 STRINGER ENO OF BOLT TO CONC. FLOOR 51R 75x 10 BARS WITH 13 DIA. EXPANSION (TYP) DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY (GALVANIZED) BOLT TYP. - _ G.P.G. B.S.S L100x100x 50 LONG FIN FLOOR 19 RUNGS O DATE: SCALE: FM50 WELD'TD CH EL AND 0 3 TREADES 0250 1510 - 305 O/C (TYP)l -- BOLT TO CONC. R SEPTEMBER 197 1=50 ci WITH 13 DIA. EXP ON GALVANIZED) uj BOLT TYP. PROJECT N0: DRAWING NO: 480 a - cn $ r STAI R 6 SECTION 9 STAIR SECTION (ALARNATE 'PRICE ITEM :. �A701j 1-20 10 ROOF ACCESS 11 ,701 i 25 S LADDER ROOF ACCESS LADDER M -►ANICAL f �. 1 NTS A 701 Nib ra c , • , r r . . F v r LYn+♦ ., -.:, '... : .. . .:..._ :. ,..rd's:' ..: ...,: s h.._0!I• a T r . ♦ , : v.. , ev 7 r (~ }\ / ate\ƒ � \ � ( \ , : a i 4 , • a ,., ECK AND VERIFY SHALL C9 . 3 ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE'' _ I E. ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE DOOR & FRAME SCHEDULE ROOM. FINISH SCHEDULE. ROOM WALLS ROOM WALLS DOOR FRAME HARD- DOOR BASE DOOR FRAME CEILING CEILING REV. REMARKS FLOOR BASE DOOR <=RAME CEILING REV. REMARKS RATING WARE REMARKS NO. NAME NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST HEIGHT NO. NAME NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST . HE NO. SIZE do THICKNESS TYPE MAT. FIN. LOUVRE GLASS TYPE MAT. FIN: GROUP MAT.: CONC CB GL CB GL GL AL AL ACPNL 2800 MAT. ALL NEW WALL WORK .101A 2-1025X215OX45 2G AL ANOD TG SC4 SEE DETAIL AL ANOD A 101 VESTIBULE FIN. OT QT AN AN MAT 51NKAGE 149 EXIST ARENA FIN. DOORS AND FRAMES TO 1 618 2-1025X215OX45 2G AL ANOD TG SC4 SEE DETAIL AL ANOD A COL COL JOE PAINTED EP 102A 2-1025X215OX45 2G SCW P GWG F2A H1 J1 PS P 3/4HR A INSULATED FRAME MAT. CONC CB ACB ACB ACB AC$ SCW PS ACPNL 2800 MAT. CONC CB ACS EXPOSED, C8 PAINTED 103A 2-1025X2150X45 2G AL ANOD TG SC2 SEE DETAIL AL ANOD A 102 LOBBY FlN._ VCT" R P P 150 NEW ARENA FIN. S EXP STL PAINTED, GUARDRAILS 1038 2-1025X215OX45 2G AL ANOD TG SC2 SEE DETAIL AL ANOD A COL COL HANDRAILS PAINTED 104A 90OX2150X45 M SCW P F1 H2 42 PS P A NO. ISSUES DATE BY M1�T. C iC CB AC9 ACB B SCW PS ACFNL 2600 ; ;` r� 1 y MAT. CONIC CB CB C8 CB CB HM PS EXP 1048 900X2150X45 M HM P F1 H1 J1 PS P A 1021E LOBBY FIN. VCT R R P 151 STORAGE FIN. S R P P 105A 90OX215OX45 2G AL MI00 TG SC6 SEE DETAIL Al- 'ANOD A OCT D.L.B.1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 2 97 COL COL 106A 9WX215OX45 M HM P F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB AL AL ACPNL 2800 MAT. CONC CB C8 CB CB CB SCW PS GB VARIES 107A 90OX21SOX45 M HM P F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION NOV B.S.S. 103 VESTIBULE FIN. QT QT P P P P AN AN 152 STAIR NO 1 FIN. R R P P P P P P P EXP STL PAINTED 108A 2-900 150X45 M SCW P_ F2A H2 J2 PS P A 13 9 COL COL 1068 2-95OX215OX45 M HM P F3 H1 J7 PS P A MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB SCW/HM PS ACPNL 2800 MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB - CB SCW PS GB VARIES 111A 90OX2150X'45 - M HM P F1 H2 J2 PS P A 104 STORAGE FIN. VCT R P P P P P P 153 STAIR NO 2 FIN. R R P P P P P P P EXP STL PAINTED 112A 2-95OX215OX45 M HM P F3 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A COL COL 113A 90OX215OX45 NL HM P F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONC C8 CB C8 CB CB SCW PS ACPNL 2800 MAT. CONC CB ACB CB ACB CB EXP 114A 95OX215OX45 M HM P F3 H1 11 PS P A 105 PRO SHOP FIN. I VCT R P P P. P P P 154 STAIR NO 3 FIN. R R P P 1148 90OX215OX45 NL HM P F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A COL COL. 115A 2-1025X2150X45 M HM P F2A H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED DOOR AND FRAME MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS ACPNL 2800 MAT. CONC CB ACB C8 ACB CB EXP 1158 2-1025X215OX45 M HM P F2A H2 J2 PS P A INSULATED do REINF DOOR AND FRAME 106 STAFF FIN. VCT R P P P P P P 155 STAIR NO 4 FIN. R R P P 116A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A COL. COL 117A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONIC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS EXP 118A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A 10.7 ELECTRICAL FIN: S P P P P P P 119A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A COL 120A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. OONC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS EXP MAT. CONC CB/GB GB GB CB GB SCW PS 121A 90OX215OX45 NL SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P A 108 RECEIVING FIN. . S P P P P P P 201 VIEWING ROOM FIN. VCT R P P P P P P 1218 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P A COL COL 122A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB GB 2600 PREFIN TOILET PARTITIONS MAT. CONC CB C8 CB CB CB SCW PS ACPNL 2400 GB CLG BULKHEADS 123A 2-1025X215OX45 2G AL ANOD TG SC5 SEE DETAIL AL ANOD A- 109 MEN'S WASHROOM FIN. CT CT CT CT CT CT P 202 FIGURE SKATING FIN. R P P P P P P TO BE PAINTED 1238 2-925X215OX45 2G AL ANOD TG F2 H2 J2 PS P COL COL �. 24A 2-95OX215OX45 2G HM P TG SC1� A MAT. CONC CB - CB CB CB CB GB 2600 PREFlN TOILET PARTITIONS MAT. 1 900X215OX45 NL SCW —Ir - F1 H2 J2 A 110 WOMEN'S WASHROOM FIN. CT CT CT CT CT CT P FIN. 126A 90OX215OX45 2G SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P A CbL COL 1268 90OX215OX45 2G SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS GB 2600 SHOWER TO RECEIVE 127A- 2-1025X215OX45 2G AL ANOD TG SC15 SEE DETAIL AL ANOD A 111- WASHROOM FIN. CT ' CT EP EP EP EP P P P CT WALLS AND FLOOR 1278 2-1025X215OX45 2G AL ANOD TG SC15 SEE DETAIL AL ANOD A COI,, 128A 90OX215OX45 NL SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS EXP 129A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P GWG F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A INSULATED FRAME 112 MECHANICAL FIN. S P P P P P P 1298 90OX215OX45 NL SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P A COL, 130A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P TO F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS EXP 131A 90OX215OX45 NL SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P A INSULATED FRAME 113 VESTIBULE FIN. S P P P P P P 132A 90OX215OX45 EX DOOR TO REMAIN COL — 133A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME W CONT HINGE MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS EXP 134A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME W CONT HINGE 1.14 REFRIGERATION FIN. S P P P P P P 135A 90OX21 SOX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P A INSULATED FRAME COL. 150 50 136A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P _ F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME W CONT HINGE MAT. CONC C8 CB CB CB CB HM PS EXP 1 50 137A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P A INSULATED FRAME 115 STORAGE FIN. S P P 138A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME W/CONT HINGE COL 139A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME W CONT HINGE MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB HM PS EXP 140A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P- F1 H2 J2 PS P A INSULATED FRAME 116 STORAGE FIN. ' S P P 141A 900X21SOX45 M SCW P F1 H2 J2 PS P A INSULATED FRAME COL, 142A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME W CONT HINGE MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB SCW PS GB 2800 GL 143A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 Ji PS P A INSULATED FRAME 117 STORAGE FIN. VCT R P P P P P P P 144A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P' F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME COL r. 145A 90OX215OX45 NL SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P A MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB SCW PS GB 2800 r � 146A 90OX215OX45 NL HM P GWG F1 H2 J2 PS P A 118 JANITOR FIN. VCT R P P P P P P P l_ GL 147A 1100X215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED FRAME COL' 148A 3000X440OX45 RU F5 SEE DETAIL STL P 1HR A ROLLING DOOR MAT. CONC CB CB C8 CB C8 SCW PS GB VARIES 1488 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H1 J1 PS P 3/4HR A INSULATED FRAME 119 STORAGE FIN. VCT R P P P P P P P M 2G N L RU STEEL FIRE RATED OH 148C 3000X440OX45 RU F5 SEE DETAIL STL P 1HR A ROLLING DOOR ROLL UP DOOR COL DOOR GRILLE 148D 360OX440OX45 OH F5 SEE DETAIL STL P A INSULATED OVERHEAD DOOR MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB C8 SCW PS GB VARIES (SEE MECH) INSULATED OVERHEAD DOOR 148E 90OX215OX45 M HM P F1 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED DOOR AND FRAME 120 STORAGE FIN. VCT R P P P P P P P 149A 2-925X215OX45 M HM P F2A H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED DOOR AND FRAME COL - 150A 3-90OX215OX45 M HM P F4 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED DOOR AND FRAME MAT. CONC C8 CB C8 C8 C8 SCW PS ACPNL 2800 1508 2-95OX215OX45 M HM P F3 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED DOOR AND FRAME 121 CONCESSION FIN. VCT R EP EP EP EP P P 150C 2-95OX215OX45 M HM P F3 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED DOOR AND FRAME COL 151A 2-95OX215OX45 M HM P F3 H2 J2 PS P A INSULATED do REINF DOOR AND FRAME MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB SCW PS ACPNL 2800 DOOR TYPES 1518 2-95OX215OX45 M HM P F3 H1 J1 PS P A INSULATED DOOR AND FRAME 122 TICKETS FIN. VCT R P P P P P NITS 152A 90OX215OX45 2G SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A COL, 153A 90OX215OX45 2G SCW P TG F1 H2 J2 PS P 3/4HR A MAT. CONC CB ACB ACB ACB SCW PS ACPNL 2800 201A 90OX215OX45 M SCW P F1 H4 J4 PS P 3/4HR A INSULATED FRAME 123 CORRIDOR FIN. VCT R P P 202A 90OX215OX45 NL SCW P TG F1 H5 J5 PS P A INSULATED FRAME COL MAT. CONC CS EX CS EX CB EX CB EX CB EX PS ACPNL 2800 NEW FINISHES TO 124 CORRIDOR FlN. VCT R P P P P P P EXIST AREA COL PAINT BULKHEAD SCHEDULE LEGEND MAT. EX CONC OB EX CB EX CB EX CB CB SCW PS ACPNL 2800 NEW FINISHES TO 125 MEETING ROOM FIN. VCT R P P P P P P VERIFY EXIST ROOM COL MAT. EX CONC CS EX CS AC8 EX CB EX C8 SCW PS ACPNL 2800 NEW FINISHES TO AL ALUMINUM AN ANODIZED 126 CORRIDOR FIN. VCT R P P P P P VERIFY EXIST AREA COL MAT. CONC CB ACB EX CB AL AL ACPNL 2800 NEW FINISHES TO ACB ARCHITECTURAL CONIC BLOCK CB CONIC BLOCK 127 VESTIBULE FIN. OT QT P AN AN VERIFY EXIST AREA 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 NOV G.P.G. COL MAT SINKAGE 13/97 MAT. EX CONIC CB EX C8 EX CB CB EX CB W PS ACPNL 2800 NEW FINISHES TO ACPNL ACOUSTIC PANEL EP EPDXY PAINT NO. REVISIONS DATE BY 128 MEETING FIN. VCT R P P P P P P VERIFY EXIST AREA COL. EX EXISTING EXP EXPOSED MAT. CONC CB Ce CB GB EX CS SCW PS ACPNL 2600 BARRY • BRYAN 129 MANAGER'S OFFICE FIN. VCT R P P P P P P COL GL GLASS R RUBBER MAT. CONC CB CB CB G8 CB HM PS ACPNL 2600 REMOVABLE ASSOCIATES 1991 LIMITED MULLION 130 GENERAL OFFICE FIN. VCT R P P P P P P ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS COL GB GYPSUM BOARD ST STAIN MAT. CS EX CB ACB ACB EX CB SCW PS ACPNL 2600 BENT STL Telephone (905) 668-5252 PLATE 131 CORRIDOR FIN. SK.F R P P P P COL HM HOLLOW METAL STL STEEL MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB SCW PS EXP VARIES 132 STORAGE FIN. S P P P P P P HR HOUR SCW SOLID CORE WOOD COL MAT. CONC CB CB CB co CB SCW PS EXP SHOWER TO RECEIVE 133 DRESSING ROOM FIN. SK.F R EP EP EP EP P P CT WALLS AND FLOOR P PAINT CT CERAMIC TILE COL EP ABOVE 2600 MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB SCW PS EXP SHOWER TO RECEIVE 134 DRESSING ROOM FIN. SK.F R EP EP EP EP P P CT WALLS AND FLOOR F1 F2 F2A F3 F4 F5 PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE S SEALER \Q AS SQ�., Ij COL EP ABOVE 2600 �Q` 'y„�► MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB SCW PS EXP DETAIL 1 DETAIL 35 STORAGE FIN. S P P NUMBER IT O COL FRAME TYPES P ES PS PRESSED STEEL SKF SKATE FLARING , i MAT. CONC CB CB CB C8 CB SCW PS EXP SHOWER TO RECEIVE NITS 136 DRESSING ROOM FlN. SK.F R EP EP EP EP P P CT WALLS AND FLOOR DETAIL OR ;ZIA SCOTT SAUC QT QUARRY TILE VCT VINYL COMPOSITION 111E D AWINGNNO. ✓r'�f°'�., L3478 E .+�'�� COL EP ABOVE 2600 uy,,,,,,,.•``'� MAT. CONC CB CB C8 CB CB SCW PS EXP 137 STORAGE FIN. S P P COL MAT. CONC CB CB C8, CB CB SCW PS EXP SHOWER TO RECEIVE PROJECT' 138 DRESSING ROOM FIN. SK.F R EP EP EP EP P P CT WALLS AND FLOOR w COL EP ABOVE 2600 ADDrrM AM ALTERAUM MAT. CONC CS CB CB CB CB SCW PS EXP SHOWER TO RECEIVE 139 DRESSING ROOM FIN. SK.F R EP EP EP EP P P CT WALLS AND FLOOR �1-11rU B. COMPLEX COL EP ABOVE 2600 = _I SEE SEE PLAN II SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SEE PLAN fU�1 MAT. CONC C8 CB CB CB CB SCW PS EXP 140 STORAGE FIN. s P P = _ i I MUNICIPALITY Of CLARINGTON �' � CONIC BLOCK CONIC BLOCK I I CONIC. CONIC. MAT. CONIC C8 CB CB CB CB SCW PS EXP _ -I PLAIN OR ARCH ;' PLAIN OR ARCH I I BLOCK BLOCK 244a KING STREET WEST 141 STORAGE FiPt. S P P BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO COL. I MAT. CONC C8 C8 CB C8 C8 SCW PS G8 SHOWER TO RECEIVE - 'n I I n TYPE 'X' GYP BD AT HEAD cr)cn 142 DRESSING ROOM FIN. SK.F R EP EP EP EP P P P CT WALLS AND, FLOOR BULLNOSE FRAME AS PER ONTARIO D I AWING: c COL EP.ABOVE 2600 BULLNOSE y BULLNOSE II I ;' BULLNOSE 12 / BLOCK BUILDING CODE BLOCK(PLAIN) ( I BLOCK CID MAT. CONC_ CB C8 CB C8 CB SCW PS GB 2600 SHOWER TO RECEIVE 143 REFEREE FIN. SK.F R EP EP EP EP P P P CT WALLS AND FLOOR COL - 128 AT DOOR MAT. CONC C8 CB CB CB CB SCW PS GB 2600 SHOWER TO RECEIVE 115A ONLY C-' r 144 REFER FIN. SK.F R EP ' EP EP EP P P CT WALL AND FLOOR ) SEALANT 1 SEALANT SEALANT L _ _ —— SCHEDULES Z L - - J COL ca cii MAT. CONC CB ACS ACB ETC C8 SCW PS G8 VARIES DOOR FRAME 148. CORRIDOR FlN. S R P P P P 146 SEALANT SEE PLAN ANCHOR COL 146 FILL FRAME 146 FILL FRAME 146 m W/GROUT W/GROUT DRAWN BY: CHECKED 8Y. o MAT. CONC CB CB CB CB CB � HM F'S CONIC 2800t 'GB FURRED T13 - • 146 WORK: SHOP FIN. S EP EP EP EP P P P U/S JOISTS FILL FRAME S.M.H. B.S.S. 4 L H 1 J 1 W�INSULATION H 2 J 2 H 3/J 3 H 4/J 4 H 5 J� DATE:TEMBER 1997 1 SCALE: EM,O / / / °o MAT. CONIC' CS CB ce CB CS SCW PS, ' CONC, 2600 GB FURRED TO CT N DR ` r. 147 - P?RST ! D,.' AN. VCT R EP EP EP EP P P P U/S JOISTS► '• PROJECT 0• AWING N()• cm FRAME DETAILS CB LIN> UPIER LTNER N HM PS' CONC R LINER EQ? NITS 91 • 1 :. ro 148: ICE iZESURFAL`€R W/S „ PREIN PR�F,IN PIREM , A8 01 44 y a s u Pi BARIE „ y r r CONTttACTOFt SHILL C1'E K.AND VERIFY , - ALL-DIMENSIONS At :THE SITE ` 'I J a ACPNL CONC BLOCK 330 of GABLE 19 PLYWD. GABLES 125 j��W AT 900 C/C MAX. /HARDWOOD NOSINGS N0. ISSUES DATE BY COUNTER ELEVATION I 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER B.S.S. 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION B.S.S. 19 P.LAM. 70P, BOTTOM, SIDES, / 19 FIXED PLYWD. 13/97 GABLES & DOORS LINTEL SEE STRUCT j SHELVES W/HARDWOOD NOSINGS(PAINT) SLIDING GLASS WICKET IN ALUM TRACKS 305 203 19 ADJUSTABLE PLYWD. SHELF SEALANT ON METAL PILASTERS BACK SPLASH & SIDE SPLASH CONT. WOOD BLOCKING 19 PLYWD W/P.LAM FIN. (EACH END OF 19 ' LAG TO WALL AT 300 C/C ) 6 PLYWD. BACK m N W/COUNTERSUNK EXPAN. PLYWD. W/P.LAM. FACE ROLLING METAL SHUTTER r� i BOLTS. I N M Z`' \ � I � N 38X89 CONT FRAMING 19 PLYWD. WITH BOLT TO WALL I, P.LAM. FACE WOOD BLOCKING j cr-01 SEALANT 38X140 CONT WD BLOCKING I ° PLYWD. STIFFENERS 1 BOLTED TO CONC BLOCK g 25 { 6 PLYWD. BACKING I I ( ^ o WOOD FRAMING NOV FIXED TO WALL 356 356 635 19 P. LAM. TOP WITH BACK o GABLE: 19 P.LAM 292 & SIDE SPLASH I PLYWD. BOTH SIDES I OF 38X89 WD FRAMING 19 PLYWD W/P.LAM FIN. ANCHOR BASE PLATE CERAMIC TILE FINISH TO FLOOR AT GABLE CERAMIC TILE FLOOR \ r) WITH 100 A.B. & BASE 83 .� M No N _ — _ - o FINISHED FLOOR N &E DS. DOORS I 3 JANITOR SHELVES r4N� T YPICAL OFFICE COUNTER �5 - TYPICAL SHELF DETAIL 6 PLYWD. BACK A205 1:10 A205 1:10 A205 1:10 6 PLYWD. BACK j 19 ADJUSTABLE PLYWD. SHELF ON METAL PILASTERS 19 ADJUSTABLE PLYWD. SHELF ON METAL PILASTERS ismr- 19 PLYWD. BOTTOM & GABLES 19 PLYWD. GABLES 1200 C/C 19 PLYWD. BOTTOM BASE BASE u• c N SOUD WOOD BASE o NOTE: ALL EXPOSED PLYWD. EDGES TO HAVE SOLID WOOD BASE SOLID WOOD NOSINGS. NOTE: ALL EXPOSED PLYWD. EDGES TO HAVE SOLID WOOD NOSINGS. CONCESSION COUNTER 2 TYPICAL COUNTER A205 1:10 A205 1:10 SEALANT MIRROR SEALANT N 19 PLAM BACK AND SIDE SPLASH VARIES (ST. STL. IN DRESSING RMS) 19 P.LAM COUNTER 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM 1 NOV G.P.G. (ST. STL FOR ALL DRESSING RM VANITIES) 13/97 N ON DOUGLAS FIR PLYWOOD NO. REVISIONS DATE BY � r — —' S BENT PLATE BRACKETS AT BARRY • BRYAN 9000/C. LAG TO SOLID WD BLOCKING ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED ARCHITECT • ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 38X89 CONT SUPPORTS FINISHED FLOOR 6 VANITY DETAIL AMBER OF A205 1:10 DETAIL OR , REFERENCE BRIAN SCOTT SAUL f DRAWING NO. LICPNCE r�r n 3476 fir• ry11111,unarNWit'`L PROJECT: ADDMON AND ALTERATION$ GARNET B. FICKARD COMPLEX MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 2440 KING STREET WEST BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO`' DRAWING: MILLWORK c. O 0 DETAILS r DRAWN BY:C.D.S. B.S.S. o DATE: SCALE E1iA10' Q SEPTEMBER 1997 1=1f1 CA PROJECT NO: DRAWING'`N0: , w i 0 - _ .. a , a r. , r . q - "-,01 E ems' •-: ,�� :��. ;.�+ � F �L_3�ij 7� y r � I6'm'.�q ' �, - �� �r�xws..:ar,......�:�i.- � - U _ - 1 .. Irk : C�?'OR SHALL IWD VERM&'`,' ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE LINTEL NOTES GENERAL NOTES .3 OVER OPENINGS IN MASONRY WALLS, PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING LINTELS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED: 1. GENERAL BLOCK WYTHES; BLOCK LINTEL UNITS FILLED WITH 20 MPa CONCRETE WITH 1.50 (6") SLUMP OR GROUT CONSISTING OF ONE PART NORMAL PORTLAND CEMENT, 2.5 PART SAND, 1.5 PARTS PEA 1. 1 CHECK DIMENSIONS ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AGAINST ARCHITECTURAL GRAVEL AND SUFFICIENT WATER FOR 150 (6' ) SLUMP. DRAWINGS AND EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS. REPORT INCONSISTENCIES TO r CLEAR SPAN DEPT H REINF. FOR EACH 100 (4") OF BLOCK CONSULTANT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. WALL THICKNESS OR PORTION THEREOF: ; 1. 2 READ DRAWINGS IN CONJUNCTION WITH SEPARATELY BOUND SPECIFICATIONS. \� z� UP TO 1200 (4'-0") 200 (8") 1-10 TOP & BOTTOM N0. ISSUES DATE BY 0 1. 3 DO NOT EXCEED DURING CONSTRUCTION, DESIGN LIVE LOADS SHOWN ON '1 OVER 1200.70 1800 (4'-0" TO 6'-0") 200 (8") 1-15 TOP & BOTTOM PLANS, REDUCED AS NECESSARY UNTIL MATERIALS REACH DESIGN STRENGTH. `�Q , °� 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 1`, P;G: . OVER 1800 TO 2300 (6'-0" TO 7'-6") 400 (16") 1-15 TOP & BOTTOM 1997 .- 1. 4 DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. al PLUS No. 10 HAIR PIN TIE IN EACH CELL. ELEVATIONS ARE IN METRES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 :13 wl OVER 2300 TO 2600 (7'-6" TO 8'-6') USE STEEL LINTEL AS FOLLOWS 9g7 c 1. 5 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. FOR 150 (6") BLOCK 5200 x 27 + 130 x 10 (5' x 318") PLATE BOTTOM. G // 1 4 EXTEND PLATE 200 (8") INTO SUPPORTS. 2. DESIGN TOP Of STEEL "'` \` 7 4 FOR 200 (8") BLOCK S200 x 27 +� 180 x 10 (7" x 3/8") PLATE BOTTOM. 2. 1 DESIGN I S I N ACCORDANCE WITH THE ONTARIO 0 BUILDING CODE, 1990 EDITION. � / EL.126.275 10000 EXTEND PLATE 200 (8"} INTO SUPPORTS. EXCEPT SNOW LOADS ARE BASED ON NATIONAL BUILDING CODE 1995 EDITION. FOR 250 (10") BLOCK S200 x 34 + 230 x 10 (9" x 3/87) PLATE BOTTOM. CONCRETE 2 2 MEMBERS AR E DESIG N ED I N ACCORDANCE W I T H CS A STANDARD TOP OF STEEL EXTEND PLATE 250 (10") INTO SUPPORTS. CAN3-A23. 3-M84. STRUCTURAL STEEL IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH EL.t 25.150 CSA -STANDARD CAN/CSA-S16, 1-M89. MASONRY IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE 3.8 7.4 %/ I 300 (12") EACH END; WITH CSA STANDARD CAN3-S304-M84, TIMBER IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE 0 5 (3/16 75 (3") ® 300 (12") BETWEEN. WITH CSA STANDARD CAN/CSA-086. 1-M89. 2. 3 UNIT FLOOR AND ROOF LOADINGS, SOIL BEARING PRESSURES AND SNOW LOAD = 2.35 kPa BEAR BEAM ON BUTTER COAT OF CEMENT MORTAR EACH END. FOUNDATION LOADS GIVEN ON DRAWINGS ARE UNFACTORED, TOP OF STEEL EXPANSION�OtNT MEMBER FORCES GIVEN ON DRAWINGS ARE FACTORED. - - - - - - T - -.- r- - - -�-. �- � EL.127.275 I ' / ' / ! BRICK AND 100 (4") THICK BLOCK WYTHES: FOR EACH 100 (4") WIDTH OF WALL: CLEAR SPANS UP TO 1500 (5'-0") 1 L - 90 x 90 x 8 (3.5" x 3.5' x 5/16") 3. MATERIALS x x x x 3. 1 SEE NOTES UNDER PLANS AND SCHEDULES FOR STRENGTH OF CONCRETE. CLEAR SPANS OVER 1500 (5'-0") UP TO 2300 (7'-6") 1L- 125 90 8 (5" 3.5" 5/16") � � SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR CLASS OF CONCRETE AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS. • i' , ` /�/ �- /./'� / / � , ' //.' / %� ' ,� `` \� � CLEAR SPANS OVER 2300 (7'-6") UP TO 2600 (8'-6") 1L- 150 x 90 x 8 (6" x 3.5" x 5/16") , 3. 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL: TO CAN/CSA-G40. 20/G40. 21-M92 GRADE 30OW, EXCEPT TOP OF STEEL ' / ' !/ /" / ` NOTES HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS TO GRADE 35OW CLASS C. EL.126.575 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SNOW LOAD 2.5 kPo ��' ' �.' / � ��' /''` ,' !� ' � `.` �� 1. ANGLES LONG LEG VERTICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. BEARING LENGTH: 150 (6") MINIMUM EACH END (STEEL ANGLE LINTELS) 200 (8") MINIMUM EACH END (BLOCK LINTELS) 3. 3 MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH FOR DEFORMED REINFORCING STEEL: 400 MPa; 3. CONNECT ANGLES AT 600 (24") o/c BY WELDING OR BOLTING FOR ANGLES WITH WELDED WIRE FABRIC: 440 MPa. A TOTAL LENGTH OF 1800 (6'-0"•) OR MORE. USE 160 (5/8") BOLTS. 4. SET STEEL ANGLE LINTELS WITH ENDS WRAPPED WITH 6 mil. POLYETHYLENE SHEET 3. 4 REINFORCING BAR AREAS ARE 100, 200, 300, 500, 700, 1000, 1500 ' ,c'X f ST I I� �i A R E N'A'/ % ON 10 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL PLATES ON MASONRY EACH END. AND 2500 SQ. mm FOR BAR DESIGNATIONS 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45 h AND 55 RESPECTIVELY. REINFORCEMENT IN MASONRY 4. FOUNDATIONS LINTELS HOOKED o _ 4. 1 CARRY EXTERIOR FOOTINGS DOWN 1200 mm MINIMUM BELOW FINISHED M MASONRY O R S T EEL G RA DE. PROTECT F 00 T I N GS EXPOSED TO FROST DURING CONSTRUCTION iAN LE LINTEL p WITH 1200 mm OF EARTH OR ITS EQUIVALENT TO PREVENT FREEZING OF SOIL UNDER FOOTINGS. L-150 x 100 x 8 WITH 2 -M20 (3/4") ANCHOR BOLT / + 40 x 4 x 300 1 1 x 3/16"x i S 4. 2 DO NOT EXCEED A RISE OF 7 ( /2" 2") STRAP ANCHORS IN A RUN OF 10 IN THE LINE OF SLOPE WELDED TO ANGLE. (STRAP ANCHORS FOR MASONRY LINTELS ONLY) BETWEEN ADJACENT EXCAVATIONS. MAXIMUM STEP 600 mm APPROXIMATELY. FOR CONNECTION TO EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES USE 2-M20 (3/4 HILTI KWIK BOLTS. FOR CONNECTION TO STEEL STRUCTURE USE 1/4" WELD. 4. 3 CAP DEPTHS GIVEN ARE FOR ASSUMED SUBSOIL CONDITIONS. RAISE OR LOWER FOOTING BASES AND ADJUST CAP DEPTHS IF ACTUAL CONDITIONS LINTEL CONNECTION TO CONCRETE OR STEEL STRUCTURE VARY, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING: DIMENSIONS ARE mm, EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE FEET & INCHES. MINIMUM CAP DEPTH IS 300 mm. BUT NOT LESS THAN: i) UNDER STEEL COLUMN: TWICE THE GREATER HORIZONTAL CAVITY WALLS > 1800 CLEAR < 2500 PROJECTION OF THE CAP BEYOND THE COLUMN BASE PLATE. ii) UNDER CONCRETE COLUMN, THE GREATER OF: o) TWICE THE GREATER HORIZONTAL PROJECTION OF THE CAP 10 mm STIFF. BEYOND THE COLUMN; HSS 203 x 203 x 6.35 AT 500 c/c b) DOWEL EMBEDMENT LENGTH DIMENSION ' X' PLUS 80 mm MINUS + L- 125 x 90 x 8 EXTEND 200 mm DEPTH OF FOOTING BASE, (SEE TYPICAL DETAIL) . + 10 x 350 PLATE ONTO BLOCK WALL 4. 4 WHERE FOUNDATION CONDITIONS REQUIRE LOWERING FOOTING BASES TO ROOF KEY PLAN CAVITY WALLS > 2500 CLEAR < 4000 THE EXTENT THAT CAP DEPTH EXCEEDS 3 TIMES ITS LEAST HORIZONTAL SCALE 1 400 DIMENSION, OBTAIN CAP REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS FROM CONSULTANT. 10 mm STIFF. 4. 5 PLACE BASEMENT AND GROUND (FIRST) FLOOR SLABS AND ALLOW TO SET HSS 305 x 203 x 9.5" AT 500 c/c BEFORE BACKF I LL I NG AGAINST WALLS. PROVIDE SUPPORT AT TOP AND > . + L- 125 x 90 x 8 EXTEND 200 mm BOTTOM OF WALLS WHERE SLABS CANNOT BE POURED UNTIL BACKFILL HAS + 10 x 350 PLATE ONTO BLOCK WALL BEEN PLACED. WHERE BACKFILL IS PLACED ON EACH SIDE OF FOUNDATION WALLS, DO NOT EXCEED A GRADE DIFFERENCE OF 600 mm. 5. CONCRETE WALLS 5. 1 ADD 2 - 15 BARS IN HEADS, JAMBS AND SILLS OF OPENINGS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. EXTEND 900 mm PAST OPENING. ( " i 5. 2 DO NOT LOCATE HORIZONTAL JOINTS BETWEEN FLOORS, UNLESS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 5. 3 LEAVE CHASES IN WALLS FOR SLABS, BEAMS AND CONCRETE STAIRS. PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDING 6. MASONRY WALLS 6. 1 CONSTRUCT MASONRY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CSA STANDARD CAN3-A371-M84, ROOF LOADS (NOT INCLUDING SELF WEIGHT OF STRUCTURE) ' MASONRY CONSTRUCTION FOR BUILDINGS' . SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD = 0.5 kPo (MECHANICAL HANGER ALLOWANCE) 6. 2 DO NOT CUT HOLES THROUGH MASONRY BEARING WALLS, OTHER THAN HOLES SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, UNLESS APPROVED BY CONSULTANT. SNOW LOAD = MINIMUM 1.44 kPa PLUS ACCUMULATION BASED ON NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF CANADA, 1995. 7. BEARINGS " LATERAL LOADS 7. 1 PROVIDE MINIMUM BEARING OF 200 mm FOR CONCRETE, STEEL, OR WOOD - BEAMS BEARING ON WALLS. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WIND - AS PER NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF CANADA, 1995. q = 0.43 kPo 7-. 2 BEAMS ON MASONRY WALLS: BEAR BEAMS ON SOLID ItA"NRY LAID IN (1/10) CEMENT MORTAR CONSISTING OF ONE PART PORTLAND CEMENT, ONE PART Ely q (t/30) = 0.52 kPo MASONRY CEMENT, AND 2. 5 PARTS SAND BY VOLUME, OF LENGTH EQUAL TO NO. REVISIONS DATE TWICE THE LENGTH OF BEARING OR BEARING PLATE AND HEIGHT EQUAL TO THE LENGTH OF BEARING OR BEARING PLATE, PARALLEL TO WALL. FOR SOLID I EARTHQUAKE - AS PER NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF CANADA, 1995. MASONRY USE EITHER CLAY BRICKS, 100% SOLID BLOCKS OR HOLLOW UNITS ZC = 1 GROUTED AS NOTED BELOW FOR LINTELS. DO NOT FILL HOLLOW UNITS WITH BARRY ° BRVkN J Zv 1 MORTAR. USE ONLY GROUTED HOLLOW UNITS WHEN ANCHOR BOLTS ARE ! v = 0.05 SET IN WALL. PLACE BEARING PLATES BACK 12 mm MINIMUM FROM ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED FACE OF WALL. 7. 3 PROVIDE MINIMUM SLAB BEARING OF 150 mm FOR SLABS LESS THAN 150 mm ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROTECT MANAGERS THICK AND 200 mm FOR THICKER SLABS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. Telephone (905) 666-5252 Carruthers & Wallace Limited Consulting Structural Engineers 90 Eglinton Ave W.e-Toronto, Ontario *1448 2E4 f Q'koF LS �o 972'50 DETAIL NUMBER P ANDFORC? DETAIL OR REFERENCE DRAWING NO. OF 10 SEAL OUST BE =*ED AM DATED,.TO BE %I" PROJECT: , ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS i GARNET B. RIGKARD COMPL X _ MUNICIPALITY OF Cl�ARINGION HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD` BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DRAWING LIST DRAWING: k., 5100 KEY PLAN AND GENERAL NOTES 5101 TYPICAL DETAILS KEY PLAN AND `J k S200 FOUNDATION PLAN GENERAL NOT�S ' S201 FOUNDATION PLAN r S202 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S203 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S204 ROOF FRAMING PLAN DRAWN BY: CHECKED,' R.P.F. -'.S. DATE: SCALE: 5300 SECTIONS SEPTEMBER 1997 w " S301 .SECTIONS PROJECT NO: DMWWG N0` i S302 SECTIONS 97100 R: • , ' r sj�� � w � Ursa , i -� �i w'''7 r ! I �i��;, E, `;I G - CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY • ALL Diht�NS10N'S AT THE.'SIl'E• PS N TRENCHES O - AEA PLACEMENT ROOF JOI T_ BEARING DT'A L SLAB ON GRADE STEPS A D COLUM t-,OUNDATIC N DETAILS SLAB N BADE R S , . R SC PLATE. COLUMN, crw ar FOOTING CENTRE LtNr uNLESS NOTED . SEE STEEL`JOIST SPECIFICATIONS OF SUPPORTING WYTHE DOWELS. SE H" SHAPED COLUMN SQUARE COLUMN DRYpACK CONCRETE PR EOTION bATUirt ItNE GNEN PR ECTION COLUMN SCHEDULE. i , FOR BEARING AND GROUT_WHERE NOTED •p ON COLUMN SCHEDULE p• LOCATE DOWELS ' ' OF JOIST REACTION WITHIN MIDDLE, JOIST ANCHORAGE SAWCUT JOINT ' THIRD OF SUPPORTING WYTHE. ON COLUMN SCHEDULE PME�E s COLUMN I " I REQUIREMENTS. t t0®300 FOR COVER & FRAME SEE L , 150 (6 ) COLUMN 150 (6 ) JOIST ANCHORAGE y _ IF PARTIAL COURSE REO'D, EACH WAY 100300 MECH. & ARCH. DRAWINGS DISTANCE TO U/S OF DISTANCE TO TOP ' MIN. BASE PLATE MIN. ' BY STRUCTURAL STEEL EACH WAY BASE PLATE GIVEN ON OF CAP GIVEN ON SPLICE, SEE TYPICAL I I I , a INTRODUCE HERE. t/3 t/ t/3 1-15 CONT. 75 O'j COLUMN SCHEDULE COL. SCHEDULE COLUMN DETAILS r ( ) SEE COLUMN SCHEDULE L •--}--------�-------- -------- ---------�--- IF h IS LESS THAN 25 1" USE STEEL SHiM5. FOR ANCHOR BOLT D1A. _ __ __ _ - IF h IS BETWEEN 25 (1") AND 75 (3-), �, za to®300 (t2") TIES - m ° I I I j---j USE DRY PACK GROUT. DRY PACK GROUT IF. REQ'D. a ` t FOR 20 (3/4°) DIA. BOLT: _ _ I _ _ _ _ IF h IS OVER 75 (3") AND LESS THAN 190 (7.5 )• ° N0. ISSUES DATE BY X 2-MINIMUM z , 25 1 MIN., 75 MAX. o DIM A-75 (3•'), DIM 0-340 (12•) A z-i- I I USE DRY. PACK GROUT AND SOLID BLOCK. I ( ) (�') t FOR 25(1") DA. BOLT u' - ° z Q -.� _ _a_ _ - o , 2 EMBED 300 (12") INTO -_-- ---` �{�,r, i 2-10 TIES _ _ _ __ w • 300 (12") IM 'W -'2 , , h CONC. & PROVIDE NUT w o,. Qt 2 t 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 997 .P,G:S. DIM. 'W' �, }= °`ter- , , & STANDARD WASHER - o o , , , AT BOTTOM - °oo z<v 100300 (12") TIES I o z w (3' ) I V.t 3 F0 75 (3") 2-MINIMUM °n SEE NOTE No.2 --' ' ' ' IN. ONE LINE OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION P.G:S. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE __ :_ __ _�_ -4__ , , 1 11 -1--------�--- MIN. t997 ON SCHEDULE. CLEAR 4-15 DOWELS ------ --------- �`-------7------- � � O � � HORIZONTAL BRIDGING •AT i 4-15 DOWELS , , ' n}" z _ 00 MINIMUM (MINMUM) ' I I I V) _ 2°C7 0 O ( ) 1 , , v, BorroM CHORD FIRST � FLOOR TRENCH SEE NOTE No.t SEE NOTE No.] I , ---=_ x FORM CIRCULAR CONSTRUCTION w °w Y PANEL POINT. BAR DIM. , , V) w >0 200 75 (3") HOOKED WHEN NOTED SIZE "X" JOINT. REMOVE FORM 0 0 0 O BEFORE PLACING IfJF1LL EDGE OF SHOE OR BEARING PLATE ( ) CLEAR ON FOOTING BASE -- -i- -- -�- - N 0= 8" SPREAD FOOTING UNDER OTHE SCHEDULE SPREAD FOOTING UNDER 20 430 14 0 J ,n DO NOT PLACE INFILL 0 ¢ � o �\ AT LEAST 20 0.75" FROM S. � 'x• ,� \ .•' • ( ) STEP : THAN POURED-CONCRETE COLUMN CONCRETE COLUMN OR PIER 25 60 2 I I L CONCRETE AT COLUMN UNTIL 0 1- ° EDGE OF WALL. 1. WHERE RATIO OF 'H' TO 'W' EXCEEDS 3 TO t, INCREASE MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT TO 0.5% OF CAP AREA 30 660 2 AT LEAST 21 DAYS AFTER PLACING M O NOTES: 35 790 31 SAWCUT OR KEYED w LOW WEB BLOCK DIMENSIONS ARE mm, EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE INCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN COLUMN OR FOOTING SCHEDULE. ADJACENT SLABS. [17 �- 2. WHERE DIMENSION 'X' EXCEEDS 'H', EXTEND COLUMN DOWELS TO BOTTOM OF FOOTING CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 0 POUR INFILL DOWN TO D o INVERTED LOW WEB BLOCK 3. DIMENSIONS ARE mm EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE INCHES. TOP OF CAP OR PIER. z � SAWCUTS FOR BAYS EXCEEDING WALL FOUNDATION DETAILS 'X' = 30 TIMES SLAB ti } 6 ,5 (S/8" ANCHOR BOLT, ON JOINT AT JUNCTION OF DOWELS AT JOINT AT EXPANSI j7r ON REINFORCED I �i (6") THICKNESS, MAXIMUM. (NOTE #4). COLUMNS o ¢ z DOWELS IN SAME MASONRY I (�� e PLANE, AT SAME SPACING AND OF WALLS. �-` w NEW AND EXISTING WALLS SAME SIZE AS VERTICAL WALL M -J N M REINFORCEMENT WHEREVER SHOWN " _ / 7 w W¢ � � N0. 15 CONT. TOP & BOTTOM 75 (3") CLEAR ON SECTIONS. NOTES -' c� o -T o m o CHAIR BOTTOM BAP,. I REINFORCEMENT IF 2-15 CONT. 0 10 1. FORM AROUND COLUMNS. NOT REQUIRED AT CIRCULAR COLUMNS a ~ SPLICE = 800 (32") EXISTING CONCRETE WALL -�- NOTED ON DRAWINGS. TYPICAL ( ) 12 (0.5") CAE �� HOOK IF NOTED. 75 (3"} 2. PLACE SLAB AREA NO LARGER THAN CAN BE FINISHED IN ONE DAY. iw _ CLEAR 3. SAWCUT CONTROL JOINTS AS SOON AS CONCRETE HAS SET SUFFICIENTLY TO AVOID V> c�Z NO. 10 BAR CONCRETE WALL MASONRY WALL STEPPING OF WALL FOOTINGS RAVELLING EDGES, BUT IN NO CASE MORE THAN 18 HOURS AFTER PLACING SLAB. IN ALTERNATE CELLS 30 (7.25") DOWELS NOT REQUIRED IF WALLS 4. SAWCUT AT COLUMN CENTRELINES. FOR BAYS EXCEEDING 'X' SAWCUT ALSO INTO WALL DETAILS POURED MONOLITHIC. EXTEND WALL PANELS NOT EXCEEDING 'X', UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS. 25 (r') REINFORCEMENT THR. & BEND SIMILARLY. 5. LIMIT RATIO OF LENGTH TO WIDTH OF ANY SAWCUT PANEL TO 1 .5 MAXIMUM. / 25 (t") 36 m 6. FILL SAWCUT JOINTS WITH SEMI-RIGID EPDXY, IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATION. FILL WITH CONTINUOUS RECHEM AND FOR FACES EXPOSED 7. DIMENSIONS ARE mm, EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE INCHES. 65 (2.5") FILL WITH METALLIC OR CHEMICAL TO WEATHER OR IN FOR INSIDE FACES: p _ v CONTACT WITH EARTH 25 (1") CL. ° WATERPROOFING GROUT. WHERE FORM IS USED: o N JOIST SPAN NUMBER OF REINFORCED COURSES 0.549 (16 OZ.) 40 (1.5") CL. FOR FOR FACES IN M (FOR JOISTS 2 SIDES EXTERIOR INTERIOR ° COPPER WATERBAR No. '15 BAR OR SMALLER. CONTACT WITH $ iv SLAB ON GRADE - JOINT DETAILS OF WALL, USE (JOISTS i SIDE OF WALL) (JOISTS 2 SIDES OF WALL) SEE SPECIFICATION. EARTH WHERE NO FOR INSIDE FACES 50 x 100 AVERAGE SPAN). 50 (2") CL. FOR No. 20 190 (8") 240 (10") 290 (12") 190 (8"} 240 (10") 290 (12") ^�/50 (•2°.) EXPANSION JOINT BAR OR LARGER, FOR( I) USED: 25 (1") CL. 300 (2" x 4") FOR EXPOSED SURFACES: o e., 75 3" CL. 12 KEY 5 20 EDGE EACH SIDE WITH `b \i\ (3/16") (0 75, ) 10000 (33') OR LESS 4 3 3 8 6 5 v •\/ ; 3 (1/8") RADIUS. T TYPICAL WALL WALL POURED LAPPING AT CORNERS DOWELLING OF t/4 12000 (39') OR LESS 5 4 3 10 8 6 WATERBAR O y JOINT FILLER f1GA1NST EARTH INTERSECTING WALLS t 40 (1.5") ;�� SEE SPECIFICATIONS (WITHOUT FORMS) IF MOR THAN 1800 7 ' a 14000 (46') OR LESS 6 4 4 11 9 7 STEP FOOTING TO 50 (2") CLEAR--L MAINTAIN 1800 (72") SPAN t 13 10 8 p s NEW CONCRETE WALL .' � •�• ' :_'. : 16000 (52') OR LESS 6 5 4 p el I 18000 (59') OR LESS 7 6 5 14 11 10 NOTE: z LAPS FOR HORIZONTAL 8 6 5 16 13 11 0 50 (2") DRY-PACK 20000 (65') OR LESS W WALL BARS 36 DIAMETERS. GROUT IF FOOTING IS w CONSTRUCTED BEFORE ����ii�i/` ;'�j�;\� �;, ,.� :�` \. i W�a 50 (2") CLEAR EXCAVATION. 22000 (72') OR LESS 9 7 6 18 14 12 4 10 MPa CONCRETE 50 (2") COMPRESSIBLE BACKFILL WHERE EXCAVATION MATERIAL AROUND SAWCUT CONTROL JOINT KEYED CONSTRUCTION JOINT 24000 (79') OR LESS 10 8 s 19 15 13 S.RUNS PERPENDICULAR TO & z PIPE RUNS. WALL AND REGLET UNDER LINE OF FOOTING. FOR SLAB GREATER THAN 100 (4') 26000 (85 ) OR LESS 10 8 7 21 17 14 PLAN FOR OTHER CASES, (OMIT KEY FOR 100 (4") SLABS). • MAINTAIN LINE OF SLOPE TYPICAL WALL SECTION GIVEN IN GENERAL NOTES BACKFILLING UNDER DIMENSIONS ARE mm EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE FEET AND INCHES. DIMENSIONS ARE mm, EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE INCHES CONTINUOUS WALL FOOTING ROOF DECK CHANGE IN DIRECTION OF SPAN LATERAL SUPPORT FOR TOP ROOF OR FLOOR ABBREVIATIONS TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH 125 RINK SLAB OF MASONRY WALLS 25 (1") ON W (±) SKIM SLAB CONTINUOUS ANGLE WELDED TO EACH JOIST I TOP OF - CLEAR U/N SPANS UP TO 2250 7'-6" L 65x65x6 ! ROOF DECK 25 (1") CLEAR -`- -------- -- ------ AB ANCHOR BOLT LE LEFT END SPANS UP TO 2750 �9'-0") L 75x75x8 ALL ROUND CHANNEL AIFB ASPHALT IMPREGNATED FIBREBOARD LG LONG/LENGTH If 25 (1") ROOF OR FLOOR ALT ALTERNATE LL LIVE LOAD POURING f, CLEAR U/N 25 (1") CLEAR ARCH ARCHITECTURAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL SEQUENCE SLOTTED HOLE - - ' UNLESS NOTED LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL a BEAM OR JOIST I B ( BOTT) BOTTOM L SINGLE ANGLE ( z W o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ,z - - SEE PLAN. -- BC ELEV BOTT. OF CAISSON JL DOUBLE ANGLES -o ^� / BEW BOTTOM EACH WAY z 0 W BLL BOTTOM LOWER LAYER MAX MAXIMUM z wm SUPPORT CHANNEL OR BM BEAM MIN MINIMUM o N STEEL FRAMING @ BM BENDING MOMENT BAR m METRE i 2000 (6'-6") MAX. ,s BPL BEARING BASE PLATE m2 SQUARE METRE C 100 x 8 (C4 x 5.4) 2 r-I 100 x 75 x 6 (4" x 3" x 1/4") / RINK SLAB KEY PLAN 50 BRIDGING FOR ROOF JOIST BEARING U/N OTHERWISE. x 1.50 (6") LONG. BRG BEARING MM MILLIMETRE WELD TO TEE 1 NUMBERS ON PLAN INDICATE POURING SEQUENCE. MIN. ON MASONRY, SEE ROOF L100 x 75 x 6 (LLV) WELDED TO JOIST BOTTOM CHORD. BSMT BASEMENT trnn2 SQUARE MILLIMETRE 2 SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR POURING PROCEDURE. JOIST BEARING TYPICAL x 150 LONG 2000 (6'-6") MAX. DETAIL. BUL BOTTOM UPPER LAYER MPa MEGAPASCAL NOT S THAN ON 125 51") TEE CUT FROM W250 (W10) t I ( / " SPACING OF CROSS + 2-t5 (5/8"� BOLTS L.__._ -•�J x46"x LONG) ® 42000 BETWEEN LATERAL SUPPORT. GROUT INTO BLOCK WALL. (6'-6") MAX. WELD . AT PARTITION PERPENDICULAR WIRES + 50 WWF LAP DETAIL C CHANNEL NBC NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF CANADA CONTINUOUS ANGLE WELDED TO EACH JOIST TOP OF SOUPPORT CHANNEL. °R TO JOIST OR BEAM CA COLUMN ABOVE NCB NO COLUMN BELOW SPANS UP TO 2250 7'-6" L 65x65x6 ROOF DECK CB COLUMN BELOW NF NEAR FACE SPANS UP TO 2750 (9'-O"3 L 75x75x8 UNDERSIDE OF STEEL FRAMING '- 25 (1") CLEAR U/N CANT IL CANTILEVER NTS NOT TO SCALE (FRAMING AT RIGHT ANGLES TO WALL). tR NO. REVISIONS DATE BY CF CONCRETE FIREPROOFED v ALL PIPE CHAIRS TO BE 50 STEEL WIRE ROD, ----- ----- ----._�__ CJ CONTROL JOINT OBC ONTARIO BUILDING CODE o y COMPLETE WITH BED PLATE. ----- E -�-- --- - ---- - ---- ---- -- CL CLEAR OPNG OPEN 1 NG v' `O BARRY BR1C'I�N COMP COMPOSITE OWSJ OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST � BLOCK INFILL IF SHOWN COL COLUMN ----- ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED ON ARCHITECTURAL DWGS. L1 GO x 75 x 6 x 175 LONG (LLV) CONC CONCRETE 1800 (4" x 3" x 1/4" x 7') CONST JT CONSTRUCTION JOINT Pf; ARCHITECT • ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS ® 2000 (6'-6") MAX. C f; T f; 50 100 I 100 100 25 x 3 (1" x 1/8") EACH SIDE STAGGERED. FASTEN TO CONT CONTINUOUS Mf; Vf FACTORED LOADS Telephone (905) 666-5252` T-WWF 102 x 102 - MW 13.3 x 13.3 25 (1") M ADJUSTABLE STRAP UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE WITH P; T; C; V; M UNFACTORED LOADS ADD NON-METALLIC SHAKE HARDENER MUST BE IN SHEET PANELS. ROLLS CLEAR U/N AT 600 (24") 2-M16 (5/8") HILTI KWIK BOLTS DET DETAIL PL PLATE TO SURFACE OF FIN. CONCRETE ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. Carruthers & Wallace Limited BRIDGING i ® 100 (4"), PER ANGLE. D FIR DOUGLAS FIR PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE _ _ _ ° _ - - _ _ .��__ _ _ L100 x 100 x 6 - - - -' - `- - - - _ - - - - - . = �.�` � _ Consulting Structural Engineers 40 (1.5") x 150 LONG D I A DIAMETER 90 Eglinton Ave W.•Toronto, Ontario .M4R 2E4 CONNECT BRIDGING TO (4" x 4" x 1/4" x 6" DIM DIMENSION RE I NF REINFORCEMENT 0A STEEL BEAM. _ LONG) ® 2000 25 (1") CLEAR U/N RE RIGHT END - (6'-6") MAX. EA. SIDE STAGGERED DL DEAD LOAD v 0_ DIMENSIONS ARE mm, EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE FEET AND INCHES. v WELD TO STEEL FRAMING. L150 x 100 x 8 DP DEEP S STANDARD BEAM >�- o x 175 L.G. (LLH) DWG DRAWING SECT SECTION : , ° ��ESS, _... (6" x 4" x 5/16" x T) cn I o O e.,Q�o 9?230 ® 2000 MAX. (6'-6") DWL DOWEL SF SPRAY FIREPROOFED AT EDGE OF SLAB. I " � REMAINDER SAME AS DIN DOWN Sim M SIMILAR � � I � I °O ~ Q PARTITION SUPPORT A sL SLAB , ' I UMBER a DFO / UNDERSIDE OF STEEL FRAMING DETAIL ABOVE. EA E CH (FRAMING PARALLEL TO WALL) EE EACH END SOG SLAB ON GRADE r BRINE PIPES SEE MECHANICAL - / EF EACH FACE SP SPANDREL; SPRUCE 0 15®300 DETAIL OR CE / DIMENSIONS ARE mm, EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN UNDERSIDE OF z DRAWING No. c f� BRACKETS ARE FEET AND INCHES EJ, EXP. JT. EXPANSION JOINT ST STRAIGHT o PIPE CHAIRSIE TO BRINE CONCRETE FRAMING EL, ELEV ELEVATION STIR STIRRUP � SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND . ` EMBED EMBEDMENT r DATED TO BE,VALID n rt i < i `; 1 - � � { 75 RIGID INSULATION PROJECT. EQ EQUAL t THICKNESS t� f EX, EXIST EXISTING T TOP cry L, BLOCK PARTITIONS NOT EXCEEDING 150 (6") IN TC ELEV TOP of CAISSON , r r rk � VAPOUR BARRIER THICKNESS AND 3640 12'-0' IN HEIGHT. FIN FINISHED T E W TOP EACH WAY ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS DO NOT LOCATE CONSTRUCTION OR CONTROL JOINTS THAT ARE PARALL F L FLOOR T L E TOP LEFT END " ANCHORAGE OF MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL FTG FOOTING TLL TOP LOWER LAYERk > �� �' 250 SAND WITH GARNET B. RICKARD COIIPLX TO WALL, WITHIN 1000 (3 4 ) OF PARTITION. `f pc �'' n '.r„t HEATING PIPES 1 PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS PARALLEL TO PARTITION, NOT MORE THAN ; =' 201 FROM EACH SIDE OF PARTITON. FMC FULL MOMENT CONNECTION THE TOP RIGHT END 2 fy YIELD STRENGTH TUL TOP UPPER LAYER MUNICIPALITY OF CLARIN TON,,;;, ►4 LOOSE STRAP IN f' C COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONC TYP TYPICAL 300 COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD BLOCK COURSING. A FF FAR FACE BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO U/S UNDERSIDE COLUMN NOTE: FILL CELL GALV GALVANIZED U/N UNLESS NOTED _ 2 t WITH MORTAR AT UPT UPTURNED PROVIDE ADEQUATE CHAIRS TO SUPPORT REINFORCING. DO NOT SUPPORT REINFORCING (WEB OR �, STRAP. DRAWING: y 'p ' `o ' FLANGE). - =r JL- --�--- HH HOOK-HOOK { HOOK EACH END) STEEL UPON REFRIGERANT PIPING. NO CONCRETING APPARATUS IS TO BE SUPPORTED c ° d' -�;_ -- OFF OF REFRIGERANT PIPING SUPPORTS. ' I A HOR HORIZONTAL VERT VERTICAL NOTE: A SURVEY ESTABLISHING THE ELEVATIONS OF THE TOP OF THE SKIM SLAB MUST : ',.•. ' 2-15 CONT. G II .�=• BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE PLACEMENT OF ANY TYPICAL DETAILS z SPLICE 630 (2,5") MIN. 38 x 5 x 400 (1.5" x 3/16" x 16") U :I."JL _ _ HEF HORIZONTAL EACH FACE VBF VERTICAL BRACED FRAME ' ..':� � . .' . + 10®1200 (48•") i LONG BENT PLATE + 5 (3/16") _ HS HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION VEF VERTICAL EACH FACE REINFORCING CHAIRS, PIPING, ETC. , FOR THE RINK SLAB. THIS IS REQUIRED ` TRANSVERSE SPACERS. BENT PLATE SLOTS -�1--WELDED I'1� II " S TO ENSURE THAT THE TOLERANCES SPECIFIED ARE BEING COMPLIED WITH. TO COLUMN-..AT 800 (32") o !! 50 (2 ) VSC VERTICALLY SLOTTED CONNECTION ;~-: DESIGNER TO INDICATE M - `� VERTICALLY TO MATCH BLOCK o �_ _JL___-__-_-_ k N K I L DNEWT ON THIS DIMENSION. N COURSING. (HSS COL. SIMILAR) -fir -- �� kPa K I LOPASCAL W WIDE FLANGE BEAM s IF �NOT INDICATED, n v 90 (3.5") ASSUME 100 mm (C). II II WT STRUCTURAL TEE -' FOIJN©AT1ON FOR MASONRY PARTMONS. WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC DRAWN BY: ..C1.1ECKE4 BY r. EXCEEDING 3600 (12'--0'} IN HEIGHT OR "� A WWF WELDED WIDE FLANGE R.P.F. .. MASONRY PAS 190 (7.5') AND THICKER. SECTION A DATE: SCALE. SEPTEMBER 1997 1. PROVIDE FOOTING FOR MASONRY PARTITIONS 190 (7.T) AND THICKER. 2 t PROJECT N0: tSRAWING N0:% 2. SUPPORT THINNER MASONRY PARTITIONS ON SLAB ON GRADE. 1 NO SLAB THICKENING IS REQUIRED: COLUMN TIES • i . IN BRACKETS ARE f INCHES. , 97100 3, DIMENSIONS ARE mm, EXCEPT DIMENSIONS B C ETS E EET dt _ DIMENSIONS..ARE mm EXCEPT DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE INCHES. :y. , „ R , _.ve Ry l t �, _. COwTRRCTOR SIMi,a. LHE>t;1C Ayp wRIFy P _ ALL WMEtrStONS 141r .THE SITE_. d` !Z,/)1 B 1 C 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT. O.G S. 1997 FTG. 2000 x 3600 x 1000 DP I REINF. 10-30 SEW 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION P.G.S. 7-25 LONGIT. TOP 97 1997 OQ 10-25 TRANS. TOP y0 DETAIL E/S300 U/S FTG. EL_ 116.900 k, O vo+ ° I I 4 o o S300 P c� GR. BM. 350 x 1500 GR. BM 350 x 1500 GR. BM. 350 x 1500 GR BM. 350 x 1500 GR. BM. 350 x 1500 -+- - GR. BM. 350 x 1500 -+ GR. SM. 350 x 1500 I GR. BM. 350 x 1500 GR. BM. 350 x 1500 R - _ _ - -------- -J GRADE BM. 190 x 1500 -L J-J --z_ _ ---�____� _ J_ L_L J t GRADE SM. 190 x 15010- tJ b - " -- - - REINF. 2-25 T&B S301 o REINF. 2-25 T&B I 100300 TIES f 1 cJ I ; I I 10 0300 TIES , x ! 100300 H.E.F. _J I 5300 L- 100300 H.E.F. s S30o o W150x22 �� I G. F9 qb/ `�p�� 1000 x 1 0 x 350 DP. I \,� _ J O�'Q REINF. 7-10 B.E.W. >I _EL. 116.9b S - L _J - ► x O- L J r_ GRADESB o 150 SLAB x 150200BOTT. m'I � Q L _J I WOOD PLANK � j SEE ARCH. 'I 40 - 1 5300 j °, �- I 5 �N �� o S� 1 ( mf z0 F j 10? I jl 0I U L __j j Ij J I I I Q x Z Z I I 1 z COORDINATE FOUNDATIONS - I ;� mI WITH PRE-ENGINEERED O BUILDING ITEM 2.4.5 U �- SIMILAR Li W i O I LO P` 5300 \ x ( G °+ ob� V 1 w OP GR. SM. 359-g 1500 _- SEE +TR DETAIL �� I ,�` mll I•I \\ ry FOR DRAIN I �I / o�� \ I O� O,�h PROVIDE \ �5 F, . '� L_ _ J \ � , � � i ' ' r ,' / NON-METALLIC 1 GPI��Q � 1 - - JN X FLOOR HARDENER G�P� $�- 1 ;� �/ ' - - - j � 1 h° i m S300 NO. REVISIONS DATE BY P ° / t ------------------------ -- - -r�------- �, 125 INFO ON GRADE r� r1 f 1 r1 I 1 -- ----- ---- -------------------------- UNREINFORCED. F2 I I TYPICAL 500 WIDE FTG. ( I I TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED L—_J 1 I 125 SLAB /� i� I I I S300 I I x 300 DEEP t I I I I I _ t I I I I I 10®200 TOP `� p 1 0 , , , I ( --- ► I f l I I L- -J I ► I I I ► , , BARRY BRYAN 0 i I I I I I I 1 1 1 t I I I FTG. 1500 x 2600 I I I I I I I I 1 I I ' -------- ------ ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMNED x �,,, i I I I I x 600 DP. - S300 ,� I 1'4° ,� ,� yo° I I j ( vi 1 1 I I REINF. 6-25 LONGIT.,BOTTOM I I 1 1 , I ►� I 0` `� ' i `� 1 I o 8-25 TRANS. BOTTOM r1 -- -- -------- t ---`---_ `---- ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS' ° rl Lt rJ Ll CAP 800 x E 00 --- ----- , - I ------- f Telephone (905) 666-5252. m IT 0. f DETAIL D/S300 rj 'F Ij !J !J I , I I I I `� I I - I ► / I I I I - I f I I i t I i I I IT I Z � - - 1- I U S FTG. EL. 1 19.65 + �-- ---� - ,_ -i _ 1 , I ! I I I CI Carruthers & Wallace Limited I'� I L__ I J I I i _ I I _ 1 I _ I I _ F _ I I _ _ _ o° +xo I ! I V� oo I I - o� eo I I o o ,o I I 1 v oar - I I I o� eo ! I v o ao I t I I - I o o o F` o o o o , I I j Consulting Structural Engineers I I i ti l I I ti ti I 1 ti ti i I ti I I ti ti I I ti ti I I `� ti I I I I I I U"') ���' +oQ + ��� +oe + ��� +0e'+ I \6ti- +oe + \�� + oe + j \�� +oQ'+ �6�' +oQ'+ i F , I �` 1 I ± ' t _ _-- ± e� -�- t --- �Q ��� I l I __ 6 _, �Q ,�� 1�h �� I I I -- -_ _, I 90 Eglinton Ave W.•Toronto, Ontario *M4R .2E4 o I I �,h0 X60 �,60 0060 6 F2 �,ho 0060 6 60 000°6 L_ ho 006o e �o oo�o°�, L— 60 0060° i . °° +�Q 5300 I ( 1 +GQQ I I I GQ Il I r I ��" f .-i f ��' t � I I (-:1 I ��' I' I f .-I I �� 1 f,-1 I ��• ----- - �+ 00 0� �� I 1 + Q• CD 015 I I I I .,�- I I I I I I t I I I ;' ° �P`' oo° �P O� ° \� -- ESP to�'E5isTMPCAP- - I I I I I I t I ! I I I t I I I I I t I I I - - i 1 i I I _._+ PQ I I , - L--------- I 11 t- ----- - -t--f i f- - 1- i- I I t- t t-- T- - t t.;;-t----- --- -- fi- I P O -- --- - - -- - --- - - - — - - -- --- ---- G -------------L--- �' - M. x 7500 EX GR. BM 200 x 7500 ► EX. GR. 13M. 200_x 1500- EX. GR. BM. 200 x 1500 ► ( I I EX. GR. BM. 200 x 1500 _� _ EX. GR. BM. 200 x 1500 I I I I EX. GR. M 200 x 1500 EX. BM. 200 x 1500 I ( 9voESSl A _ -- - - - - I I I I - o% , G, �. 00 I i I i I I I L I I LJ I I L�LJ I I J I I J I I _--_ - , 20d x 200 \\ +,Q J L_fi_J L_ : _J L_.* _J L_ 7 _J L_ _J L_ i _J L_ }_J L_ _J , II 1 0 I I ,I _I` J i i �' 9�zso x I Cok. CURB ;I��;6yo��; ! I I --- I I I I DETAIL 3 P DFOR t' ° + • I I L_------ i! 1 I I f I --- NUMBER a EXIST. 200 CONC. 7 I -' WALL + _-- m I I `. 600 x 300 DP FTG. S300 I ( L , ' ( DETAIL OR ¢ / 500 O� EXIST. 100 SLAB ON GRADE ` I I REFERENCE x 3 ---------- ----I I DRAWING NO. cr AZ I , G i 1 -- + Q--------- ----, j SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND i I , I +�°0 0 1 I I DAtED TO MAUD ;1g M. x 1700 , ;, �o+pQ60 , FOUNDATION PLAN I I---- ��, I N �� b©�o�.0 SCALE 1:100 r_ - '6-��----------1 3 I _ _= --_ = -= - -- - - -- 1 GROUND FLOOR AT ELEVATION ]21. 075 EXCEPT AS CROSSED ------ -- - - --- - - I -- ... _ . PROJECT: - �/ _ FINISHED SHED R - , AND NOTED. �_� � I I I I I f•- Q \O �s �, I 2 BOTTOM OF CAISSONS AT ELEVATION 115. 900 UNLESS NOTED ,r �-= J I I ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS XIST. COL. TO - OTHERWISE ON PLAN AS 'BC' . I v I I E REMOVED �. , AX � .8. 2 BOTTOM OF COLUMN FOOTINGS AT ELEVATION 119. 650, UNLESS NOTED /� � i OTHERWISE. � GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX ti4o REMOVE EXISTING , F5 I I �`' AND REP E WITH 3 CARRY FOOTINGS DOWN TO NATURAL UNDISTURBED SOIL OF 300 kPa x MUNICIPALITY Of CLARChtGTW I I " t. o SLAB ON GRADE W ALLOWABLE BEARING CAPACITY. �; NEW FOOTING 1 C L-1�`'` NEW 125LAB WITH j I 4 TOP OF CAISSONS AT ELEVATION 119. 575 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON I ` \ 500 x 2000 x 350 DP. +�, / TRENCH DRAIN. PLAN AS 'TC' . b REINF. 4-15 LONGIT I �' I j HWY N0. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD 7-15 TRANS. t % 5 CARRY CAISSONS DOWN TO NATURAL UNDISTURBED SOIL OF 1400 kPo I EL. 119.650 I--t--I / ALLOWABLE BEARING CAPACITY. POUR NEW FOOTING BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO 6 BEFORE PLACING SLAB-ON-GRADE VERIFY THAT BEARING CAPACITY OF \ ' OVER EXIST. FTG. I I I REINF. CAP 3-25 VERT+ SUBGRADE AND COMPACTION OF SUB-BASE ARE ADEQUATE TO SUPPORT �. i r 10®300 TIES ( 25 (50) kPo UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD ON SLAB-ON-GRADE WITHOUT I �, !t ( I SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT BETWEEN SLAB AND BUILDING ! DRAWING. FOOTINGS. ; 7 CAISSON & FOOTING ELEVATIONS, AND BEARING VALUE OF SOIL j CAISSON REORCEMENT UNDER CAISSONS AND FOOTINGS AND SLAB ON GRADE I ARE BASED ON INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT TIME I FOUNDATION`�lo' " � ' `r DRAWINGS ARE ISSUED. REPORT ADJUSTMENTS NECESSARY DUE TO 7500 9-25V 100400 TIES 0 ACTUAL CONDITIONS TO CONSULTANT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. ;R 9000 12-25V 100400 TIES 0 8 CONCRETE FOR SLAB ON GRADE: SEE SPECIFICATION. 9 CONCRETE OTHER THAN SLAB ON GRADE: 25 MPo MINIMUM AT 28 DAYS, EXCEPT 15 MPo FOR SKIM SLABS AND 20 MPo FOR CAISSONS. . 10 SEE ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DEPRESSIONS IN SLAB ON GRADE. 11 SEE GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS ON DRAWINGS SIDO & S101. O DRAWN BY: CHECKED 6Y, R.P.F. P.S. HATE: SCAt - "' SEPTEMBER 1997 1;tw PROJECT NO: DRAWING Nt31* 20�_ , • 4 �CCfp 91) LIMNTr ".: COhf'fRACTOR SHALL CHECK, NERlF'Y ALt DIMENSIONS AT THE WE , , . 12A X _ w II 10A 11A i 1 O N DATE BY,, ISSUES ,, 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER T' P.S 1.997 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 973 F9 P.G. . F8 i S30t S301 F8 I 5300 - t , tom }� o �? , L r � lo I— S lo x \ I { I S20 '.' t o I I I � W' r — \ I I. S301 --- ---- L r �= 1 ' 1 1 �° \ . I I i I x --- -----------"1 — .' z I o rF5 "' S30t F2 I I S301 1 1 I ------------ ------- --� o ------ – ol j — "��, LF -::::3 I - -, U L , 1 1 S301 O -- O SC?r O,-� I 125 SLAB ON GRADE TOP OF CONCRETE I X \ _ ' �`�p UNREINFORCED. EL. 12 t.150 U/N. I { tz Z O I I '�^�� TYPICAL UNLESS I fn _; u) Q-` � ____= NOTED I S W 1 0 _ I I m ( �DETAT FOR � cn of STEP F2 —} °' \ a S301 LLj - —_--------- -- i OPP. HAND V Z Z I L —J - - i ————- —————— _ I I I F4 , i i i li B I� S201 PART FOUNDATION PLAN i l o l s3o1 l i i i I Q ) I LO i � I I I SCALE 1:100 •-IL I i t I ',I' FOR FOUNDATION NOTES SEE DRAWING S200. O cy x I I I I / / U Q // // M ( I I I I ; — / r ---- ----- � F1 N // // m � ��G.�p LJ I I �G•� j � —_-- — —� ' 5301 l_L_ L!J / — vim�, �.o, 1 1 1 I I O W ,/ I 1"��,• rr T. , I X I , V I I 1 Lt-—J L J I I I L _J +��C r -I ----------I 'Till &o 0,0% 11 0 + FAO I I I ai I I soo FOOTING ?w UNREINFORCED300 DP. -- C B r–L – BASE PLATE 1 F-3 I II I tz°i 5201 W J 5301 r- 1 OPP. HAND I I ----------------------- — ----- ------- ' Is`---�-- B 5201 ; ' i I I I I ----------- ---� 1 t NO. REVISIONS DATE BY --------------------- _ --------- ----- L L J \ \ i - YX L– -- HSS COL. I LJ I --------r T --------- I uilt _ 50 100203 x 203 BARRY o BRA ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED WALL ROJ ARCHITECT • ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS 100 PROJ. x 200 DP. i ' 1 I �� ���0 �/{ � I I � Telephone (905) 666-5252 • i -- -_-----_------- - ---- I _ A Carruthers & Wallace Limited F3 i `I 1 --I`------� --- -- ----- A S201 +- w � — SCALE 1:20 Consulting Structural Engineers I I J { 1 I I ► I I I I , ! { 5,201 90 Egiinton Ave W.•Toron#o, Ontario O M4R 2E4 OP F. HAND I TYPICAL PIER ALONG LINE 12A U/N I L-----_ , { I i--------- -----j if I s o1 I - - ' I I { QROF ESS� /---------- N. { i II I �� I { I \ I V. FOOTING N. I ------------- -J I it 1- -------- ------I I I rl ---- -I 700 x 800 x 300 DP. DETAIL ! UNREINFORCED NUMBER w DF 0 i --------------� 1----------✓--i --1 I L J j == --� �\ 1\ 450 .: +_ ' r BASE PLATE DETAIL OR r _._. _ . i I I I I I \ I L_ REFERENCE i L_ —J { I I I , I I I ———— DRAWING NO. I ! tD I I SEAL MUST E'''SIGNED AND_ r DATED TO BE V"; { I I t FAO I I L—T -- HSS COL. 203 x 2D3 PROJECT: -_ _ i i I ADDMON AND ALTERAMON4 W r� L ----- ---� �— II I ; —+-+---- ———— I I) I B LE S201 ; OOL PROD. —_-- x 20o DP. GARNET B. RICKARD COMP 1 I . I I I I I F� I { . , o MUNICIPALITY Of CLARINGTON II I 1 L HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD i I , ! { I 5201 " - SCALE 1:20 BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO , f j ' ------ a I I I --- , 11 DRAWING : , s 10 i X `r 13 FOUNDATION PLAN f r . 11 _ I J=7=3 1 I II I F6 A ll i - 5301 S2D1 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: --- --_ r---- ,- - EPTEM ER 1997 scaLE: 1 _ _ I I � I II I ��'• _ PROJECT NO: . . , DRAWING NO.. 9;100 i • I --- — , -- B r✓y -� . _ b ;!N. r _.r. r_ _ 5 t - - • ,.: ,ti ., ,. _ CONTRACTOR SH�1U. CHECK WO V'�Rlf�' B 1 C 9 10L ourlBilss AT THE, SITE _ A50 kOwSj { 350 OWSJ p Wtot A = 7.4 kPa Wtotal = 7.1 kPo CONT. L CONT. L 0 0 76x76x6 730 O Wtot I = 7.4 RPo Wtotal = 7. kPa _- 38 COMPOSITE STEEL DECK 38 COMPOSITE STEEL DECK N0. ISSUES DATE BY Wtota = 2.5 kPa Wtotal" = 2.5 kPa 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ wtot I = 7.4 kPa Wtotal = kPo 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER Cr P.G.S. 1997 TOP OF STEE I JOIST TOP 0 STEEL JOIST NOV.13 AT EL. 123.7 5 AT EL. 123.775 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION P.G.S. 350 OWSJ 350 WSJ 1997 Wtotal 74 k Wtotal = 4 kP CONT. PLATE 1 CONT. PLATE ! 100x6 + I I 100x6 + 160 STUDS x 160 STUDS x 100 LG. ® 400 C/C 100 LG. 0 400 C/C I 1 A 1 B 1 C 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 I 1 I I � r COORDINATE FRAMING WITH PR E-E GINEERED I j BUILDING ITEM 2.4.5 I' 1: / I _ X 11 w6 ^I W I n 1 I 1. i - I 3 - - TYPICAL 1 .I I i i 1 BPL3 �►�,O W200 x 21 I I 11 i_. 1 ' o_ - - ---- - - - ---- --- -- -- - --- - -- - -- _ _ - jj — -- _---_---- __ __-__--- ___-----_---__-- ---_-- __ --=----- -_ —_- ------------ ----- - - I _. 1. w310 x 31 r I �� _-- --,— ---- - -- ---------I �----------------------------- I I ----_ ---------------- __------III - ----- --- _ .__.. --_ ------ I I I I --__--- � Y i — i I } MI r if; w I i U I j -- -- L J D d : mil 1. W310 x 31 �'' x I r S301 -- ---- -- 0 CL 3 1 i rJ L1t 1 r� 11 tJ L1 rJ Ll r ao + -- r i II r— 4•__.. i M F W200 x 21 ----_�_ _ _—__---- �I - i Z I I I _ it 1. W310 x 31 0 BPL3 E.E. _1.4 1- - -- - / ( 200 HOLLOW CORE I - ( J ------ - - --- - _ ---------- - - Y - - - - v L- 102x102x6.4 PRECAST 1 1 111 I I I I I I z I 5 0 6 if I I I I I ( I I I I 200 HOLLOW CORE PRECAST SLAB I I I I I I I I I I I 1. W31 x 31 S301 x - 5301 - -._ N ` ► W2 21 $ M ------- I S301 3 i 65 CONC. ON BPL3 III I I -_ ; 38 COMP. STEEL DECK - -- - - - 1_ - W310 x 39 - - ----- -- -- - --' - - -. � x SLIDING BEARING W 10 x 31 ` 11 ti 11 1 I' i 1 i I i — it I 7 -- o: ! 11! i1 N —L , N I Al I' �_.. O I I 'I t .i I DD 10 'Lo 3 i 1 1., � � G----- ------..--.----------- -----------.—.------------- ---------...----------- ,:, , , � �..._. .. -- -------- -- -----_--- -�- -- _ -------- ----- ----r- - t - - N0. REVISIONS DATE BY REMOVE EXISTING _.f, --- ---- _ -- _ -1-- ---- - -_- ---- -- - - - - - - —---- - -- -- --- � CONCRETE SLAB w 1• I i I v i , F, I 1• I 1 _ - - --- -- - -- ---_ � --- -- - -- - ---- __ _ -- -- - - - /yam _.. is� : J BARRY AY O BRYAN. ♦ ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS 1 B t ;�; '� --- ; ! � j = - Telephone (905) 666-5252 AX Al 1 C Carruthers & Wallace Limited, Consulting Structural Engineers --J; 90 Eglinton Ave VII. Toronto Ontario *"M4f� 2E'�4 /i� � i t i ♦`� I I I � 1 i ! ,1 �\� �! ill VItOE ESS/ta,, DETAIL NUMBER P AN,DFOR© DETAIL OR �o REFERENCE DRAWING NO. OF SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN SCALE 1:100 SEAL MUST t# SIGNED Arr9 DATED TO BE W AJD 1. TOP OF FINISHED SECOND FLOOR AT ELEVATION 124.475 EXCEPT AS CROSSED AND NOTED. PROJECT: 2. LIVE LOAD IS 4.8 kPo. 3. CONCRETE STRENGTH IS 25 MPo AT 28 DAYS. ADDITION AND ALTERATKY 4. REINFORCE CONCRETE ON DECK WITH ONE LAYER 152 x 152 MW9.1/MW9.1 GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX WELDED WIRE FABRIC PLIUS 10 0300 x 1500 LONG OVER SUPPORT PARALLEL TO DECK. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN -ROAD BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DRAWING: 1` SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN : . . r DRAWN BY: CHECKED' BY: R.P.F. P.S. DATE: SCALE: SEPTEMBER 1997 PROJECT NO: DRAWING N0: I 97100, 6 � - - 4 | � }�> , R B &N § d=;gigI §gƒ Hdj ] : - jy.) l w t 4 CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AW"1IERIf7 ALL DIMENSIONS' AT THE'SITE f, . `. .:. _ _ - - - .. - :: . '....... .. ,,.x•i'..a .,:'.... O 1 B 1 C 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 No. ISSUES DATE BY OCT' P.-G.S.ISSUED FOR TENDER 19 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 991 1997 P.G.S. I I I R - f i . t ' i �y z Q i Q- �Q I 0 lop PR = oRP Z 0 0 N - _ - I _ U) \ , Q t z z z J I SUBSTITUTE PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING ITEM 2.4.5 I U C) V 1A W 0 W L- (f) / l 5302 I i \ VBF , i _ 1 W W 310 x 31 PRE ENGINEERED i a vov BUILDING COLUMNS W310 x 31 / +200 i �\ i 1 X � tO x 31 \ DEHUMIDIFIER=80kN 2. W310,x3 I \ 1 x 1�' *, g 3 i _ N 5 5302 1 2. 310/x 31 5302 I \ \ -_1 3 CONT. W200 x 27 i' I I I \ NO. REVISIONS DATE BY ON TOP OF STEEL BMS. j I I I I I I, r 2. W'3161 x 31 1 111 Y Y j ! BARRY a BRIAN o ` 1.13 2. W 3,0 x ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED 38 STEEL DECK I I 1 ' M n \ r Wd= .75 kPa ' r I II ARCHITECT - ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS v ,, �' I I 1 x 3 W 310 x 31 HANGER .I` I { 11 Telephone 905 666-5252 C200xt7 C20ox17 'T I t 12 P W200 x 36 MECHI. NIT MECHL. U IT TOP;Or STEEL 12kN 12kN I TYPICAL i TYPICAL EE.'126.275 FRAMING FRAMING 1 I . 3. W 36 x 39 LOW t1 -- -- w 360-x 72 -- 1 W-360 x 72 -- - -- - - Z x HI H W200 x 21 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ 350 OW 350 OWSJ 35 OWSJ ---#1#-- 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ -350 OWSJ 11 Carruthers & Wallace :Limited \ 9 $ ExP. JaNT ' II I BPl3 Consulting Structural Engineers ,S302 I C' 2' S302 W 310 x 3 �► �,� I N N ! N ( i N N _ _ N _ __ _ 1 1 `�' -- -- 3 S E 90 g nton. Ave W.*Toronto,, Ontario •M4R: 2E4 _ _ __ _ __ _ t 8 TEEL D E I i O CONDE�I SER �, N w 0 x 1 -350 OWSJ -� 350 OWSJ " 350 - 350 " 350 OWSJ x 350 OWSJ x 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ S " Wd=.75kPa Xf 30kN x x �`'b o 0 0 o Wd= 1.7 kPa ° ° o o n SLIDING BEARING ° I 0 I o I o $ g 0 0 2. 3310 xW 2 TYPICAL 10 LOCATIONS N N �' N N N N N N 3 3 3 _ 3 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ 3 OWSJ 350 OWSJ I 1 L-76x76x�5.4 N r W 0 31 350 OWSJ 350 OWSJ ______---350 OWSJ ----- - ---_ - ----350 OWSJ _ �- - ----350 OWSJ - - - -- ,r--'_�_ _ __ -- - ----- - -' - - - - -' - -- -- ----------- -- -- I 3 m'71 -- -- - __ . 3 3 3 � ---•+r- A - 3 3:310 x 1 W200 x "21 Fk/ LINTEL F F F-r ---ro c�'I- —T F.r/ fl/ �-Fi i F-I'/S. G� i I i BPL3 Q�`� ? W200 x 27 + *w"01 ly �/ /S`T I iys S� I !y6 ST h6 ST �Y6 T 972'° Q 3 ` C�• s�0 c s, c i 6/O C z i 6/O C 70 C` 70 E+° /O' �,° rO C° X00 I I 1 <n r 0 180 x 10 PLATE 1 q 3 3/ 0( 10 + °l, k + °<. N + °�. { °<- ! ,j<• + �� k ,)< } I I / DETAIL JL 3 5 g 4 I g Z 4 a 4 4 4 �yti i t 1 1 1 NUMBER P OFf,"/ . 2 2, W 310 x 3 7 W x 21 W200 x 21 LOW 5302 I tI/ 5302 W I I I I/ DETAIL OR p / TOP OF STEEL I I � REFERENCE / i 1 EL 126.550 I �-- DRAWING N0. !" W200 2 38 STEEL DECK AZ \, I SEAL MUST BE SIGNED ANN + ly W200 x 21 Wd= .75kPa I i I DATED TO BE VALID ' X00 VBF I I I LINTEL W310 x 31 + I I I 2 / 180 x 10 PLATE I -- --- I -- __ ------ ----- ' - ------- PROJECT: ST I I ( I i i ; { \ SFF 0 00, ; i i I ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS AX ?03 AY a GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX ek s20 1 C 3'O k 39, MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTOh� 1C W Y Z AZ 1B 1A 1A 1B i HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD ROOF FRAMING PLAN ao� x 150 _. BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO ' SCALE 1:100 o 800-0,4-- TYPICAL U/N y�+ N V' O 1 TOP OF STEEL AT ELEVATION 127.275 EXCEPT AS NOTED ' SHORE EXIST. DRAWING: 2 LIVE LOAD IS 1.44 kPo EXCEPT AS CROSSED AND NOTED, OR INDICATED BY . 1• ��a *1°' ?��, 1 COLUMN SNOW LOADING DIAGRAMS. /-' 16} uNTEI 16 9 �,+ R EL. 125.350 ,+, g* �� •� g+ �, ROOF FRAMING PLAN 3 "Wd" FOR O.W.S.J DENOTES- DEAD LOAD IN kPo. SEE S100 FOR LIVE LOAD. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR / asp +�s e9+ w� 4 s r; t WIND' UPLIFT. DEAD LOAD FOR UPLIFT CALCULATIONS IS JOIST WEIGHT PLUS 0.5 kPo. 4ti + �Os �y`� ti +? ° �4'k mss+ X X ' •+ '� a1°, BEAM H Mt200 x 46-8 + STRAPS o H W200 x 21 + STRAPS H W200 x 21 + STRAPS BEAU o H w200 x 46 + STRAPS 4 "Wd" FOR ROOF DECK DENOTES SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD. SEE S 100 FOR LIVE LOAD. O EL. 124.075 N N N o EL. 124.075 N H W200 x 48 + STRAPS N g w DESIGN DECK FOR Ws, CONCENTRATED LOAD REQUIRED BY OBC, AND WIND + ?� a A. `�� 1°j . e m 3 3 # UPLIFT GIVEN IN SPE TIONS. �a + !8 + la J REMOVE EXIST. J r 1�O d9 a 1�O B 6 9 0 x cc x o COLUMN BELOW c0i t L � x t �► Ic + � x � x � x � x + 9+ +� S 40 x 5 SEE GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS ON DRAWINGS S100 & S101. x N � �� `� � x x��., X2 x soh Aso ��+ se°'yp�� �$+mss+ x g x g W W + $ S x N g $a �� hL ,� $ S w DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EL_ 121.075 sm 1 3mm got - 3m 3m `1' `o 'l .9 3m - m - R.P.F. P. . -` DATE: SCALE, USOF�J _ US OF U5OF-TE ' BASE PLATE BASE PLATE t SASE PLATE SEPTEMBER 1997 ?BOO 300 300 PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO. A" -300 , _ NEW W250 x 45 + •- W530 x 82 rx ON LINE 1A ELEVATION ON LINE W ELEVATION ON LINE AZ W250 5203 SCALE 1:100 97100 LOOKING WEST LOOKING EAST r W530 .350 n CAI �ASSOGDA—I ES (10,91) LOOP r,a : CONTRACTOR $HALL CHECK AND VERIFY ALL f3piA NSIOINS AT THE SftE _ n. 4 10 1 OA 11 A 12A _ t I N0, ISSUES DATE, BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER OCT: 1997 13 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 .13 S302 � I - - R 500 OWSJ Wd=1. k a -- CONT. W1 50 x 22 ALL POSTS 16 y 5500 W150 x 22 T x 12 S302 ;OQ� W 410 x 54 0Q B. PL. 170 x 12 x 170 -- TYPICAL o 14 - AZ--►$ - S302 W150 x 22 . 0Q 0� , kN 54..-*---- -,. 0Q� - - i 5500 S W 410 x 54 0Q` ----- i �N,j- ° p W15o x 22 TYPICAL ROOF OPENING PROVIDE 15 ROOF OPENINGS TO BE LOCATED AND I W All, COORDINATED WITH MECHANICAL. I 500 OwsJ ® 1550 C a MAX. Wd=1.1k a I CONDENSER UNITS FRAMING PLAN o SCALE 1:100 1. TOP OF STEEL GRILLAGE AT EL. 125.800 -- I 2. LIVE LOAD - MECHANICAL UNIT 67 kN. CONT. PL. 0o SIM. TO 3. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO RECEIVE 2 COATS OF ZINC RICH PAINT. 13/S302 f 4. ALL CONNECTIONS TO BE FULL MOMENT CONNECTIONS. ' I � W z < - -- w WA CI x 39 0Q� U 0 38 S EEL DEC v Wd= 0.75 k I v v 0 14 z-0 7 0 ------ --- I � 'n 5302 ®L ® L _0 o P °o Q I o CO 30 L L 'n SIM. TO 13 302 Z V s _ V TYPICAL NEW COLUMNS N -- - 0Q a HSS 203 x 203 x 6.4 °, F-- 1 7 BASE PLATE 450 x 200 x 20 x S302 v �,�,' v ,,, O + 2-M20 A- BOLTS N o Z x o GZy�I� U N W 0 , o 0 21 x -A 21 Ui �iY i `' i 1 9 3 ; 02 5302 5302 0 1 i i ® o N I e " S302 Q Q LL W o 3 x Q�� TCl1�P50 12 30 w2 0x21 i LA o O 3 x �Q x 0 0 WN to p N 2 2 I W41 x 54 .4. W410 5. W410 x x X V x N x Ox \ W OOX 1 •- 0 Z-1 N N J? X OQ,� 23 20 23 ooxz �, � •� � �2O s3o2 5302 1$ 5302 S302 p o O o N No 5302 p 0 a x ►� w N N LA _Y X _ Y p x p x x Z LOO ,on S3 o M ;, , 33 3 0 25 HANGER DN. HANGER UP S302 1 L-76x76x6.4 1 L-76x76x6.4 0Q� - W41 x 54 6. W410 x 39 8. 410 x 54 C T NT, ----- - - _-_-. _ Yx , x 22 Yx -- - - - - - a 1 L-76x76x6.4 N0. REVISIONS DATE BY 1 L-76x76x6.4 - -- o Y 24 -- - Z - -- 24 - Z BARRY ° BRYAN Oo �'^ f p x S302 x No S302 CONT, PL. ®1^ p o x ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED i u 51 A. 30 3 3 , ) ° ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS To �: x ci 3 1 /5302 - - --- 3 3 3 0 ° N Telephone (905) 666-5252 S O o HANGER DN. = HANGER UP `" Q '� to W410 x 54 CONT. x 54 1 L-76x76x6.4 x 22 1 L-76x76x6.4 rt W 410 46 8.fn y 310 x 1---- - - - CANT CONT. - - - - - ._- - - - -- - --------- - u - - _ ---- -- -------- -- --- - ---- --- Carruthers it , , , - ----- C uthers & Wallace Limited. Consulting Structural Engineers OTI ��� X X X 90 Eglinton Ave W.*Toronto, Ontorio •M4R 2E4 CL\Y 3U U) � Ox M O x SOFFIT LEVEL FRAMING PLAN 3 3 � 1 L- x BRAG G 3 O Ii 1L- x i64 x 4 O W20Ox21 _ N 2 � � SCALE 1:100 �pf£s� z i 1 UNDERSIDE OF STEEL AT ELEVATION 124.150 EXCEPT AS NOTED �� Q�� 9-7250 - -9. -!x_4'10 x 39 2 ALL STEEL OUTSIDE BUILDING HEATED ENVELOPE TO RECEIVE OETAIL `" _________ x I �y �� 2 COATS OF ZINC RICH PAINT. NUMBER Wf Q D ' EXIST JOIST J9 0 BELOW 1 26 x gQ 0Q °L `�' DETAIL OR / HANGER DN. J' 5302 o REFERENCE i.4 " EXIST. J91 L- 76 x 76 x 6.4 I'm o EXIST. ROOF - --------- °' Qom^, �� N Q�� Q�ti DRAWING N0. T.O.S. AT �� _ Q 3 2-2 0 4 j EL. 124.350 ; ''�. "� x S302 0 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED Ati1) x to 20 Q Q�� BEADING PLATE SCHEDULE DATE° T° _ EXIST. J9 0 �3 S302 0 i 1 - ----____ M 21 I ; -- --- i 3 r°° x s3oz TYPE D B t SEE NOTE N PROJECT: ( . O EXIST. JOIST J9 ---- -ice- �, X I x I , ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS' SPL 1 400 150 25 1 ,2,3 x 3 GARNET B. RICKARD CONI�'L.EX BPL2 300 150 20 1 ,2 .3 � I �Y 4 BPL3 200 150 15 1 ,2 2 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINCN HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD- ;I - eQ�' � ' x BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO- PART ROOF FRAMING PLAN SCALE 1:100 r Y o NOTES I 1 TOP OF STEEL AT ELEVATION 125.150 EXCEPT AS NOTED Q�h W �, 3 1. ALL BEARING PLATES TO BEAR ON 50mm DRY PACK GROUT. DRAWING : '1 I 2 LIVE LOAD IS 1.44 kPa EXCEPT AS CROSSED AND NOTED, OR INDICATED BY i 1; w p 2. PROVIDE 2-16� ANCHOR BOLTS I� SNOW LOADING DIAGRAMS. 3. WHERE PLATE POSITIONED DO LENGTH 'D' IS PARALLEL TO BEAM . 3 "W& FOR O.W.S.J DENOTES DEAD LOAD IN kPa. SEE S100 FOR LIVE LOAD. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR Q,Q� M 3 PROVIDE 150 x 25 x 4mm THICK SHIM. SEE TYPICAL DETAIL. I f WIND UPLIFT. DEAD LOAD FOR UPLIFT CALCULATIONS IS JOIST WEIGHT PLUS 0.5 kPo. I i PART ROOF FRAM hl'C1cV 27 W200 x 1 I SHIM PLATE 4 `Wd" FOR ROOF DECK DENOTES SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD. SEE S100 FOR LIVE LOAD. 5302 ,t j BEAM I �` DESIGN DECK FOR Ws, CONCENTRATED LOAD REQUIRED BY OBC, AND WIND aQ BEARING PLATE ! ' UPLIFT GIVEN IN SPECIFICATIONS. ; i I 1 I i 5 SEE GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS ON DRAWINGS 5100 & S101. Q�y :' x DRAWN BY: CHECKEtS BYi. r' e i 1 m R.P.F. P.S ` to ! I p i I 1 !3 D DATE: SCALE: ,�` 0Q f MASONRY SEPTEMBER 1997 � BEARING WALL PROJECT N0:- DRAWING..NO ' W200 x , 1 EX. W204x27 _ E -W200 x 27 ------- In"71100 10 11 12 13 ' t , N' r Y.. .. - '. _ a ... -- .. ,. •. n ,. ..., � .. .:. .t'. C` Oc t CONTRACTOR Sll`W L CHECK AtO VERIFY ALL D14ENUM AT T1 4E SITE L , COLUMN ISSUES DATE By- COLUMN AND ANCHOR �' 4 BOLTS BY PRE-ENGINEERED OCT.% 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER PG S, , CONT. GALV. L j i 2Ls- 76 x 76 x 6.4 GALV. BUILDING CONTRACTOR 1 997 76 x 76 x 10 + i + STRAPS 40 x 5 x 200 LG. �� 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 7 P. .S. 40 x 5 x 200 LG. ;' ® 300 c/c � i 1997 STRAPS 0 300 C/C i 1-15 CONT. ; 100300 —1 750 L- 76 x 76 x 6.4 GALV. + 100300V + 3-15 CONT. EL.121.075 // �'• 1 I,A AO n - • / a lid Up _--- a ° •d • `,;' ' '��Y%�' COLUMN PIER 750 ,J M ,n ° , • C,10: ° ° a BEYOND 50 DRYPACK e ` 1 ® 4 I v II I I II ( va GROUT 100300 v. I I �--� 11 O a 0 DOWELS 1 1 E • O d In a S> O t t 5300 '� ° ° Id L0 M0 t 1 ° 100300 �' •° TYP. GRADE BEAM • H & V o o t SHEAR KEY • REINF, U/N d ° I I CO-ORDINATE WITH 3-25 CONT. • I 1 PRE-ENGINEERED T & B a BUILDING CONTRACTOR 1 I (__5 d 100300 HEF 2-15 CONT. S3OO a 10®250 TEW T & B Id 1 ' 10®300 TIES • �- t ° ( SCALE 1 20 a � t GRADE BEAM GRADE BEAM a 0 1 I (SEE PLAN) 350 (SEE PLAN) 350 1350 i I 450 500 100250 300 100 L FTG 1 1 DOWELS FOR LENGTH OF PIT 1 t 1400 t t I • tI it Ii LJ I 1 2 (_3 t1 � t 5300 SCALE 1 : 20 S30O SCALE 1 : 20 5300 SCALE 1 : 20 1 { t I 0 11 it 11 tI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -I- - - - { t 1 �• 1 1 1 1 DOWELS TO MATCH CAP REINF, IN SIZE I AND LOCATION S300 SCALE 1 . 20 EXIST. PIER CHIP 2Ls- 51 x 51 x 6.4 GALV. 4 ' DOWN CONC. TO + STRAPS 40 x 5 x 200 LG. � I EL.120.925 0 300 c/c EL.121.075 EL.121.15 --------- __ ________ / -� 1 it° n� A ,,. , n n• , , n n• � JK L"d, • ch • F", � BEAM 350 x 850 3-25 T&B 100300 TIES SEE DETAIL 8/S300, d 100300 HEF l '/ I 0 ° CONT. GALV. L EXIST. GRADE BM. o a 200 x 1500 0 ® 152 x 102 x 10 5300 = ° � W i 100300 HEF 100300 VEF REINF.. NO. REVISIONS DATE BY 100300 TEW SEE 8/S300 GRADE BEAM -�-- BARRY ° BRYAN (SEE PLAN) 350 � ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMIT ED r-7 ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS 5300 200 200 200 Telephone 905 666-5252 SCALE 1 20 P ) 8 g Carruthers & Wallace Limited S300 SCALE 1 : 20 S300 Consulting Structural Engineers, SCALE 1 20 90 Eglinton Ave W.*Toronto, Ontario •M4R 2E4 350 Q�OFESSN �o r 97250 DETAIL w NUMBER a P. ANDIF D 250 DETAIL OR REFERENCE 0 DRAWING NO. OF SEAL MUST BE SIGNED ANO DATED TO VAL , N 0 PROJECT: N ' ADDITION AND ALTERATICIM 6 450 GARNET 8. RICKARD COMt' X S30O SCALE 1 : 20 100300 8-25V 400 400 t TIES MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTC" 100300 100300 HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD TIES � 8 25v 250 o BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO M s , O � x (� ° DRAWING: N O N 100300 FOUNDATION SECTIONS � I' u' TIES LA O N O 00 r O to 10-30V 10-30V "' 350 250 350 250 300 300 DRAWN BY: CHECKED .BY: R.P.F. P.G.S. ; a DATE: 'SCALE: rA g rc rD SEPTEMBER 1997. • rE PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: w 5300 SCALE 1 : 20 S300 SCALE 1 : 20 5300 SCALE 1 : 20 S300 SCALE 1 : 20 S3O0 SCALE 1 : 20 - 97100 , :S3001 ,i a � BARLRI BRYAN,! SOCI UE-S (199 IA SS US rz ��•J(3 CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AN6'VEMPY — — ALL DOAENSIONS AT THE SITE CONT. L- CONT. L- 102x 102x6.4 102 102x6.4 • HOLLOWCORE CONC. ON CONT. L- CONT. L- L- 102 x 102 CONT. L- 25 mm NO. ISSUES DATE BY SLAB STEEL DECK 102 x 102 x 6,4 102 x 102 x 6.4 102 x 102 x 6.4 . - - ADD 100150T ��P. JOINT — — — — ti >. - 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER DCT. P. S. '}'• '��• � ,:, 199? ' -� 2 15SUED FOR CONSTRUCTION `13 P.G.S. W200 W200 � W310 � - 1947 �` CONT. 100 x 6 PLATE W310 BEYOND W310 W310 + 16 0 STUDS i x 75 LONG 0 400 c/C W310 j - CANTIL. SLAB W410 W410 -./ 1 2 3 4 5 .6 8 5301 SCALE 1 20 5301 SCALE 1 20 5301 SCALE 1 20 530 SCALE 1 20 S301 SCALE 1 20 5301 SCALE 1 20 S30 SCALE 1 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 10 10 I I COL. BEYOND j I ( , HSS 203 x 203 HSS 203 x 203 \ BY OTHERS I COL. BEYOND ��. COL. BEYOND ` ` (SEE PLAN) \1 } 2-20 CONT. 2-15 CONT. \ T&B T&B ` I l EL. 121.075 F., 1 EL. 121.075 T&B CONT. EL.121.15 o d q • a d - - _ co 0 0`� on I I o N161% r , d / i i o QJ d d / b O y> ->r-- `4_.. 1G•; .r>i ,,., ro:x- i d �yi �' ,.,j. • POUR SLAB TO I 2N ° a ° "' • . DEPRESS TOP OF GRADE ° TOP OF COL. CAP u BEAM AND TOP OF REINF. � 4 ° 100300 a ve U-N AT COLUMN LOCATIONS eQ U-� �J.�tai 4 e DOWELS e o _ o _�- ° ° � 00 t 00 d 00 d COL. CAP BEYOND z a 00 SEE DETAILS ° Z ° • o o ®® A/S201 & B/S201 � • • • A • 100300 0° o ° 500 WIDE d 10 0300 0° DOWELS `�' o ELEVATION STEPS `�' SEE PLAN 1003 COL. CAP d DOWELS 2-15 CONT. 3-25 CONT. •d 3-25 CONT. 100 DOWELS T & B T & 8 j T & B + �_ • • • 1500 x 1500 FOOTING • 190 ° REINF. WITH 6-15 B.E.W. ° °o e ° ° d 4 TYPICAL FOR COL. FOOTINGS o ° e ELEV. VARIES N EL.119.65 400 350 ALONG LINE '10' 350 ° SEE PLANS 500 d ELEV. VARIES 100 100 SEE PLANS 100 350 100 low , COL. FOOTING 100 350 100 200 VARIES 200 M 450 BEYOND —o- - - -° - - - - � 475 450 F 1 rF2 KF3 1500 FOUNDATION F6 5301 SCALE 1:20 5301 SCALE 1:20 5301 SCALE 1:20 5301 WALL BEYOND l SCALE 1:20 rF4-N� 5301 SCALE 1:20 EL.118.000 NO, REVISIONS DATE BY !' rF5'� \I 5301 SCALE 1:20 BARRY o BRYAN I ASSOCIATES (1991 ), LIMITED ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 2-15 CONT. T&B \ I `+' Carruthers & Wallace Limited EL.121.15 Consulting Structural Engineers 2-20 CONT. - - -- - --- - -- - — - - - - _ ��., T&B 90 Eglinton Ave W.*Toronto, Ontario •M4R 2E4 ° o� o 190 • ° �� 1-15 CONT. eitOF ESS/pt'14 ° 100300 DOWELS � 9 71—,l3, CONT. GALV. L DETAIL N >= d 1-15 CONT. 76 x 76 x 8 + °ono • ° 40 x 5 x 200 LG. 1 NUMBER W P• DF 00 °O o 1 0 q. o0o a "�'-" o � oo STRAP ANCHORS 0 DETAIL O O °/ O O 00 �'C . " ✓00 C/C DI�NL OR MMM W I 0 4 ° REFERENCE „y d 10®300 d 2-20 CONT. DRAWING NO. OF DOWELS T&B SEAL MUST' BE SIGNED AND ' • ° e ° DATED TO BE VALID d 4 PROJECT: o ELEVATION STEPS - ° SEE PLAN ° d s ADDITION AND ALTERA�'OM 190 100300 °o d 100300 GARNET DOWELS a DOWELS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 500 �- =�-- MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTN ° O d d p rF 7 o a ELEV. VARIES N ELEV. VARIES 5301 SCALE 1:20 -� SEE PLANS �— SEE PLANS HWY N0. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD ` BOWMANVtLLE ONTARIO 100 350 100 100 350 100 DRAWING: (�F8 F9 SECTIONS � "r W��:. � • 5301 SCALE 1:20 5301 SCALE 1:20 e` a . DRAWN BY: CHECKED FBY:*r; R.P,f. P.S. DATE: SCALE: SEPTEMBER 1997 , PROJECT NO: ggwkG NO: 97100 7: Y T S,3 0 14 �a � s gg� C 77. A,"% �. ji ASSOCIATES - ----- -- -- - CONTRACTOR SRALL CHECK AND VERIFY ' — ALL DUENS40NS_AT THE SM • r CONT. L- CONT. L- 102x 102x6.4 102x 102x6.4 HOLLOWCORE CONC. ON CONT. L- CONT. L- L- 102 x 102 CONT. L- 25 mm NO. ISSUES DATE BY $V46 STEEL DECK 102 x 102 x 6.4 102 x 102 x 6.4 102 x 102 x 6.4 ADD 100150T EXP. JOINT . 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER CT• P' C:S .F• .�. .- . .1 .,. 1.997 /Z - — — W200 I 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1997 P.G.S . W200 i W310 �. CONT. 100 x 6 PLATE W310 BEYOND W310 W310 + 16 0 STUDS x 75 LONG ® 400 c/C Y7 W310 CANTIL. SLAB W410 W410 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 g 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 5301 SCALE 1 : 20 10 10 \ \ \\\\ COL. BEYOND I I , HSS 203 x 203 \ \ COL. BEYOND 03 \\ \` BY OTHERS I COL. BEYOND 1 \ \ \ \`\ `', �,� (SEE PLAN) &220 CONT. v 2-15 CONT. v \ �y w `I v� 2-20 CONT. \ EL. 121.075 T&B \ \ \ I I EL. 121.075 EL.121.15 p `\ c •. oo° 1; c',c o ..:° cc;� - i I e e I a n n ^ • • ° I ^ d $ ° ^o B -o °sA• c°'';o n °" I I ,+moo x ow 000 s,...,: U, . �u°, I - d .�o �� d .�.� ,V !., - °- U O U��.l O `F'1 ° lye JJ� ° I I• / r -J G • lY�-° U 'J Ct I / / \ r.�.�r 'cr.� °a$` �§,w/ / d a ° DEPRESS TOP OF GRADE OP OF COL. BEAM AND TOP OF REINF. e cj d ° 100300 ° ° U_cn AT COLUMN LOCATIONS a U_0 • p DOWELS ar W W ar m W ° 0 2 F— 0 2�_ ° f 00 00 ° A ° • d 0 0 a 0 0 COL. CAP BEYOND ° z • • 4 0 0 0 o SEE DETAILS A/S201 & B/S201 /- 100300 A ° ° 500 WIDE 10®300 °o DOWEL 0 ELEVATION STEPS t 0®3 COL. CAP d ° • 100 DOWELS "' SEE PLAN °d DOWELS • 3-25 CONT. 3-25 CONT. 2-15 CONT. T & B T & B T & B —� • • • 1500 x 1500 FOOTING • ° 190 �--- ° REINF. WITH 6-15 B.E.W. 00 00 ° ° ° p ° TYPICAL FOR COL. FOOTINGS O ° Al 04 ELEV. VARIES 500 N EL.119.65 400 35Q ALONG LINE '10' 350 d ELEV. VARIES SEE PLANS �- SEE PLANS 100 100 100 350 100 ,o� } COL. FOOTING 100 350 100 200 VARIES 200 450 - BEYOND _ 475 450 _ F 1 rF2 KF3� 1500 FOUNDATION rF6 5301 SCALE 1:20 5301 SCALE 1:20 5301 SCALE 1:20 WALL BEYOND 5301 1 SCALE 1:20 rF4 _ .. S301 SCALE 1:20 EL.118.000 NO. REVISIONS DATE BY f. rF5_ 0 5301 SCALE 1:20 BARRY BRIAN- ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED, ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 \ 2-15 CONT. T&B + W Carruthers & Wallace Limited Q EL.121-15 ' Consulting Structural Engineers 2-20 CONT. - - - -- - - -- - - — - - - 90 Eglinton Ave W.*Toronto, Ontario •M4R 2E4 T&B 190 • ° \ 1-15 CONT. QRpFESS� f ° 100300 DOWELS [� 0 o A 1-15 CONT. CONT. GALV. L DETAIL 9 7 2�© P. • 76x76x8 + 0 0 ° 40 x 5 x 200 LG. NUMBER v, P• DFOR �►7 no c oc , oc., d STRAP ANCHORS 0 °L OU f�° a °° Yx o°�� ,y 300 C/C DETAIL OR y v ° ��� d a REFERENCE x.. a 10 0300 p 2-20 CONT. DRAWING NO. OF l DOWELS T&B SEAL MUST' BE SIGNED AND ` • ° d ° DATED TO BE VAi,.I� " d d ELEVATION STEPS PROJECT: a SEE PLAN ° p AMMON AND ALTERATl NS 190 I ° 100300 °o 4 100300 DOWELS d DOWELS GARNET B. RICKARD- COMOLEX. 500 —+--- — MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTt N -7 0 ° d ° rF / N 4 ELEV. VARIES N ELEV. VARIES HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD 5301 SCALE 1:20 �— SEE PLANS �— SEE PLANS . BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO 100 350 100 100 350 100 DRAWING: rF8 9 SECTIONS S30 1 SCALE 1:20 5301 SCALE 1:20 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 4 _ R.P,F. P.S. DATE: SCALE. f SEPTEMBER 1997;, w NO PROJECT t:�WIA1G NO' • - 4 .97100 v \ . f Bz B k% 1 \ \ \ r , CpNT#2A�T(3R ta�111LL. CHECK M1C) YERIfY :. ALL Dt1aRENSI0N5 AT THE SrtE,:. I � B Z . . rr --CONT. L ONT. L 76 x 76 x 6.4 76 x 76 x 6.4 k CONT. L CONT. L CONT. L CONT. L 7b x 76 x 6.4 76 x 76 x 6.4 R W200 76 x 76 x 64 1 L- 76 x 76 x 6.4 76 x 76 x 6.4 1 L- 76 x 76 x 6.4 . ZINC RICH VERTS 0 1200 C/C VERTS 0 1200 C/C PAINT F - - - - NO. ISSUES DATE BY ROUGH ROO ADJUSTABLE STRAPS 1 ISSUED'FOR TENDER DCT. 40 x 5 0- 800 C/C WT BRACKETS WT BRACKETS 1997 GROUT IN MASONRY 01200 C/C 01200 C/C 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION A 3 F.G.S. 160 STUDS x SEE TYPICAL. DETAILS 160 STUDS x SEE TYPICAL DETAILS 150 LG. 0 800 C/C OF MASONRY WALLS FOR LATERAL SUPPORT 150 LG. 0 800 C/C OFRMASONRY WALLS MASONRY TYPICAL. TYPICAL. CONT. 10mm PLATE -// LATE CONT. 10mm PLATE x 250 WIDE x 250 WIDE NOT USED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 S302 SCALE 1:20 S302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 SECTION 1A SIMILAR EXCEPT NO FACE BRICK 10 t � EXIST. COLUMN FLANGE CONT. 100 x 6 PLATE 25mm EXP. JOINT + 160 STUDS x 100 LG. 0 400 C/C TYPICAL Rf= 60kN TEFLON BEARING j PAD W310 x 60 FMC TO EXIST. COLUMN ADD 12mm STIFF. PLATES EACH SIDE OF EXIST. W610 COLUMN WEB. ri0 11 rl2 S302 SCALE 1:20 S302 SCALE 1:20 S302 SCALE 1:20 5mm CAP PLATE SEAL WELD CLIP L 152 x 152 x 10 t 76 x 76 x 6.4 EXTEND HSS 203 x 203 O 800 C/C 76 x L TO TOP OF MASONRY GALVANIZED +2-160 x 100 TOP & BOTTOM PARAPET WALL SHELF ANGLE / LG. STUDS CONT. L 76 x 76 x 6.4 CONT. L 76 x 76 x 6.4 METAL ZINC RICH 152 x 152 x 10 PAINT ABOVE CONT. L CONT. PLATE WELD TO JOIST PLUS L 76 x 76 x 6.4 WELD TO JOIST STRAPS 40 x 5 SIDING ROOF ADJUSTABLE STRAPS 76 x 76 x 6.4 ROUGH ROOF 100 x 6 + 160 STUDS 160 A-BOLTS 0 VERTICALS O BRACK O 800 C/C x 100 LG. 0 400 C/C 800 C/C MAX. // C200 x 17 SEE TYPICAL DETAILS �s I JOIST / BRIDGING / 160 BOLTS / � / ® 800 C/C BRAC S WT 125 + & END CONT. BOND BEAM WT 12 BOLTS X-BRIDGING i GROUTED INTO BLOCK BEARING PLATE BY BEARING PLATE BY 76 x L CONT. L JOIST SUPPLIER. JOIST SUPPLIER. / 76 x 76 x 6.4 / 76 x 76 x 6.4 SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS NO. REVISIONS DATE BY VV 7"q CANOPY SOFFIT j ONT. x 6.4 BARRY BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS 13 rl4 15 16 17 18 ri9 20 Telephone (905) 666-5252 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 S302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 5302 SCALE 1:20 Carruthers & Wallace Limited` Consulting Structural Engineers 90 Eglinton Ave W.*Toronto, Ontario •M4R ,2E4 CONT. L CONT. L CLIP L CLIP L 76 x 76 x 6.4 76 x 76 x 6.4 152 x 152 x 10 152 x 152 x 10 0 800 C/C 0 800 C/C GALVANIZED +2-160 x 100 GALVANIZED +2-160 x 100 C EXIST. ROOF SHELF ANGLE LG, STUDS SHELF ANGLE LG. STUDS OFESS� SEE 20/S302 SEE 20/S302 CONT. L CONT. L EXIST. W200 +�, X7230 CONT. L CONT. L i EL. 125.35 N 76 x 76 x 6.4 76 x 76 x 6.4 VARIES VARIES 76 x 76 x 6.4 J - - / 76 x 76 x 6.4 DETAIL / NEW 38 STEEL DECK NUMBER DF0 F i/ EL. 125.15 EL. 125.15 _ DETAIL OR o ! 12mm STIFF. PLATE a I NEW W200 REFERENCE EACH SIDE DRAWING NO. 0 WT BRACKET �� NEW W200 SEAL MUST BE SIGNED AND FMC TO BEAM Z 190 DATED TO BE VALID . 350 JOIST NEW COLOURED I I CONCRETE UBLOCK PROJECT: L76x76x6.4 L76x76x6.4 ( t i VERTICALS 0 12 C/C 1 L- 76 x 76 x 6.4 VERTICALS 0 1 L- 76 x 76 x 6.4 I ► _ EL. 124.35 ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS.'' / 0 VERTICALS 1200 S/C 0 VERTICALS I I L HANGER W15 140 I •I EL 124.350 - �" ! I ,. EXIST. IL_j ! JOIST GARNET B. RICKARD COMPL� C I I W310 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON . HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD CONT. L ZCONT. L 76 x 76 x 6.4 76 x 76 x 6.4 EXIST. MASONRY BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO GLASS BLOCK WALL. 21 22 r23 24 25 (26 S302 S302 S302 S302 S302 S3o2 DRAWING SCALE 1:20 SCALE 1:20 SCALE 1:20 SCALE 1:20 SCALE 1:20 SCALE 1:20 r f SECTIONS 27 (28 Y S302 SCALE 1:20 S302 SCALE 1:20 , - S1ST r - - - DRAWN BY: CrtECKE��e�: ' R.P.F. P.S. s DATE: SCALE, SEPTEMBER 1997. - O't,2Q ` y iL _ PROJECT NO: DRAWING NQ; 971M ra t SSO LATE` 70 ROAD AL L O&ANCE BETWEEN CO/1/C -5, DNS / �' CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY (t/O'T OPENS ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE st><E ` NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2 KS 1997 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13 KS 1997 FIRE DEPARTMENT HEADWATERS o CONNECT BUILDING 2000 STORM TO 4500 MAIN AT THIS LOCATION ILI NEW C.B.M.H. TOP 120.75 F INV. 116.87 ° 4 oa LOCATED FIRE HYDRANT EXISTING M.H. ; 132.80 I A FOR CO N71'26'OT E s -Y -.�- rf'I'tNU `t1�JN° TOP 120.91 600 LG CSP SEE SITE PLAN BELOW LEA. INV. 118.60 - - - CONCRETE THRUST TERMINATE WITH I 450 O 3.2.% BLOCK (TYPICAL) C/W OUTFALL GRATE INV 113.24 2000 O 1% >;-:," 450 O 4.4.X ------------------------ ---- ------ 450 O 3.2X �. 200d O 1X _ ,$ 150 200 _.; +' R 200 300 O 1.7X- � ,.•. NEW SAN. M.H. TOP 200 GATEP T NEW MAN HOLE THE KING HIGHWAY No. 2 ENT. INV. 115.55 LEA. INV. 115.53 !NV 14 a a TOP 116 55 � I 200 - - -� - - EXISTING SAN. M.H. 33-1 W. INV. 114.25 I o EXIST. INV. 114.2 I � O CONNECT NEW 150 FIRE X. I LINE TO EXISTING AT THIS LOCATION. n PART SITE PLAN I RELOCATE EXIST. FIRE O HYDRANT TO NEW I SCALE: 1:800 I [ LOCATION AS SHOWN , I� I EW C.B. p e (� TOP 117.90 N I ^� Q 300 O 1.6X INV. 115.90 W Z IQs PROPOSED \s NEW C.B. o` ADDITION I ,: TOP 117.90 ' `O s i I INV. 116.15 ' k GARNET B. RICKARD RECREATION COMPLEX I \ I Q EXISTING STRUCTURE i : a , I : u� a i � F NEW BOILER RM. REMOVE EXISTING GAS do WATER a t MAINS do CONNECT TO NEW I 250 O 1.6X LOCATIONS AS SHOWN ON P k D DRAWINGS I y x �L. L d i i LJ: " s . ,tA....... TEMPORARY MECH. RM - - r ISSUED AS PER POST-TENDER 11/13 I ' ADDENDUM M 1 1997 KS i may. I - I > � NO. REVISIONS DATE BY TOP s . ; j F� G r > + - _ G ENT. INV. 19.60 , BARRY • BRYAN f `2s LEA V 6 X � I IN 19 0 20 0 O EXISTING WATER & GAS ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED SERVICES. CONNECT TO C ! TEMPORARY WATER k GAS EXISIING FOR TEMPORARY f..: $ I I STAFF ROOM EXISTING AND PERMANANT SERVICES ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS DURING de AFTER CONSTRUCTION. _ (SEE DWG M202 k SPECS. Telephone (905) 666-5252 FOR DETAILS) Q LEIPCIGER O O I I KANMNKER - \ / NEW C.B. NIIiITELNAAN f TOP 116.00 And Parinor• Inc. r� `A DO Nc I '�' r� � INV. 116.8 . � CONIL TM 1349#4M 1349#4M i r I v I i z o • a� TORONTO /(705)675-6881�(416)445-8255 ENT. INV. 118.75 i I ( O .0 I I a � I I O ------ --- ---- ----- - ASPHA[ ".. - ---- ------------- �_- --- - ------ w .. , .,` DETAIL 1� 0. X i --------- A[K ---- ------ ---- ------ ASPHA[r ---- --- -------------- - \r NUMBER ------ - -------------- 1 r� �' K.SHARMA DETAIL OR REFERENCE \ / DRAWING NO. $< NEW SAN. M.H. �: `. ��'�� OF 0' ,y, a.. TOP T. INV. 118.80 LKM #97309 LEA. V. 118.83 �. .� .....�.. y C �l EW C.B. �,'' X ��, PROJECT: NE SA M.H. TOP 120.10 / ' / �� r� /�- �`O INV. 119.00 : .,6,} / `� ADDITION AND RENOVATIONS TOP / a ENT. INV. 117.20 ` LEA INV. 117.25 BUS PARKING 1.1x GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 0 O �" 30.48 FXKM C N66 57'30 E MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON p � „�.. N64 0 HWY N0. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO FOR CONTINUATION 2000 O 1X SEE PART PLAN ABOVE 17 0000 1 .33 --� DRAWING: a .a SITE PLAN 0000 r� N62 MECHANICAL O r °IA,q�` 52.74 5.44'00 E DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: N6 _ 2 < � �� Q C.V.L. K.S. DATE: SCALE: E1 _ No. SEPTEMBER 1997 1:400 (METRIC) f H16'1 IJ� -'-"�' �!4 A PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: � � ` � THE 97100 M101 „„�;w..... -�...� �� CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY REDUCED PRESSURE B.F.P. -- - EXISTING COLD WATER LINE (TYPICAL) ���,� LEGEND ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE' -- EXISTING HOT WATER LINE r. 20 HOSE --- EXISTING HOT WATER RECIRC. LINE TEMP. WATER UN 1 25 C.W. LINES H.W. &-- - NEW COLD WATER LINE 12/ O 12 ISOLATION VALVES -- NEW HOT WATER LINE TO WC & LAV. 32 2 C/W ISOLATION VALVES--- NEW HOT WATER RECIRC. LINE O G EXISTING GAS LINE —EXISTING 4500 BURIED STORM SEWER COLD WATER LINE -32 HOSE TO LAV. C ISOLATION VALVE G NEW GAS LINE Q3 20 TEMP. WATER LINE SP EXISTING SPRINKLER LINE DIGITAL METERING STATION TO SHOWERS NO. ISSUES DATE BY SP NEW SPRINKLER LINE 3 do AUTO. VALVE 4Q 20 TE P. WATER LINE EXISTING BURIED SANITARY DRAIN .450 C/ OLATION VALVE 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2 KS EXISTING BURIED STORM DRAIN DEfAL A' -+--20 HOSE OWER 1997 F=— 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13 KS NEW BURIED SANITARY DRAIN . N.T.S. .1997 rAl Now NEW BURIED STORM DRAIN !Z,) -- - - - -- NEW HUNG STORM DRAIN 1 B 1 C A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 9 10 NEW HUNG SANITARY DRAIN .150 150 CONNECT TO EXISTING TO RELOCATED FIRE HYDRANT -� r --THRUST BLOCK I I I I I I I I I ALL PIPING TO BE HEAT TRACED WITH INTERNAL TRACING CABLE TO RUNNING TRAP (RAYCHEM 120V, GM-2XI) 100 WEEPER CONNECTIO FRO CONTINUATION I I I I I I I REFER TO SITE PLAN I I ON DWG. M101. uf. ........., j,........... ...:................. STORAGE 100 � ———— —r T ——— —— � STORAGE UNNING TRAP I I i 115 10 151 I I 1 XIR woo xxxxxxxxxxxx MY 00000000v --- -- ------- - - -- -- - - - - ---- - - I- --- --' --� - 100 FD , I (TYPICAL) REFRIGERATION 100 S - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \ I �—II 114 ' I \ I I 100 SEDIMENT PIT, STORM do SAN. SUMP PITS, \ I I PUMPS &I (REFER TO DWG. M202 110 FD I ( ) / I I 100 � I \ IF jI � II III II t 3 I I I ,t I REMOVE EXISTING 450 STORM DRAIN AND 1500 I , COLD WATER LINE AND �R I , , INSTALL NEW 4500 STORM I I do 150 WATER LINES C/W I I MH'S do FIRE HYDRANT I I I I MECHANICAL (REFER TO SITE PLAN I """ I I I �---a I CAL ON DWG. Miot) i NEW ARENA i I 112 I I I I 150 I I t I I I r I II i I I I II II W/R 3 II 111 I , I ' I , V — — — I I FINISHED FLOOR I �� ELEV 1'20.925 32 GAS LINE TO UH-1 t EXIST. FIRE HYDRANT z i // ��� REVISED AS PER POST—TENDER 11/13 TO BE RELOCATED 2 ADDENDUM M-1 KS 100x2400 TRENCH DRAIN 1997 i C/W HEAVY DUTY GRILLE I I I J„ I ii' I 25 GAS LINE TO 1 REVISED AS PER ADDEN. M-1 10/6 \ (TYP. FOR BOTH PADS) *. RA T HEATERS 1997 N REVISIONS DATE 13Y / DIAN EATER > i ii --Y-- - - - -} - - - - - - -.. - -- -- -- -- -- - \\ 75 RD// DRAIN PIPE TO BE ELECT. HE4T TRACED \\ // I - -- - --- ---- -- -- — - - ---- - - -- - -- - - - - - - --- - - -- - - -- --- - - - - - - - ---- ---- ------------- ? — --- ------- ---- — --- ---- --- -- Ir-_-_jl LOBBY BARRY • BRYAN \\ �/ 11 STAIR N0.4 I I I I I REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT FROM i I., 102 ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED I I EXISTING WATER METER ROOM I ! i I do REINSTALL IN NEW MECH. RM. ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS 7 I OOFD 155 ;I I r.I 'SH' _1 AI NO I 152 FRO CONTINUATION / \ _ . DRESSING R�Om _. . I 1- I ' 666 S2 REFER TO SITE PLAN I \ I I I � DRESSING ROOM +--RUNNING TRAP _.:--:- 'L' I I � �.,.. I M,01. I 7� RD \ , DRESSING ROOM _ `: I . tNC 142 39 f DRESSING ROOM I "' DRESSING ROOM I DRESSING ROOM I I I I LEIPCIGER 1 138 ��,,••'',,,, ,,'' AMWFR // 200 \\ I 200 150 F _. ,._._ _. N_, 134 133 rl I �Itb• 136 - - ,Do MIT F. _ -75FD And Periners In*. / �I — —3 150 WORK SHOP I q EFEREE too RWL D s' ( I I 1 150 RWL DN. 1 (TYp _J I I 100 RWL �I �I- f GEN C AL COMPAIM e+�u RESURFACER 150 146 },43,.. ,.�.,� ._, _..,._...,._ .,, i I 100 RWL N. 100 L ON. [- _.,.,. _._�y:; ., _ w.;;" . ,_ ..,. .... TORONTO 148 100 RD CORRIDOR _ 75 w+ 6 I (416 445-8255 705 675D6881 1 _ .� .� — REfEE 3 3 t'Sij 100 RD 3 f 100 RD (TYP.) 3 I i I I 1 131 13Q� /( ) 20 N.F.H.B. 1 12 L 2 3 144 - 7 'L' I I — II`-11 REMOVE GAS, WATER, 3 � H(HC) 150 32 1 138 118 �4 .L, _ 3 SPR PIPING FROM WATER -- T T' - -- ---- -- - T -- *• -- -- L. - .L.s -- -- ;-L- -- .L.z _ _+ I METER ROOM TO FOYER _ I I I 32 COLD do TEMP. WATER --- T- --- T T _-- --- __ T _ _ T -- _- - - - RECONNECT TO NEW DETAIL _ _ „ _ LINES DN. TO FILL STATION - - - - ---#►'� _ _ _ _ - -- _ -- - -?- -- -- -- _ .�- _ -- --- NUMBER P - - % T do ECON SERVICES C/W B.F.P 15CrF VALVE ( 75 FIRST Alp - - - - _ -- - _ - -- - SHARMA `38 1'SH �-�. ORAG ! 'S H' STAIR ORA o E ... > +--� �—♦- I •�I �. STORAGE AND 4M LONG HOSE. WC 5 f I SH ; SH j DETAIL OR (SEE DETAIL 'A') 1 147 141 WC WC •WC ,WC. o SHII �.: 140 . ' 137 - REFERENCE _.,. ._ k __ . ,. . . .._. ........ .. . M. .. ._ C_........ ......... _. i DRAIMNG A EXISTING 2000 I I k (C/W - - �5 BURIED STORM 3 1 'WC' 1 ( 1 I _ IOdFD „ R 1 EXISTING RWL 132 i I 32 GAS LINE I( I I MAIN LKM #97309 FROM ABOVE 32 GAS LINE _.. a A.: .v I OFFICE TO UH-2 + ,.,,.,,, I PROJECT: e, c _. , M„ .._, ,, I OJECT. + „ . DRAG „_. _. . _. I HEATTRACE ........ ...... :. .............. .....,. ...,w,... ..,;.. .., :,._...... .,:.,,... _.,. .._. `r � -"�° / _ .. DRAIN PIPE I l...,. r: ST E _ � � ._:.....,.. �... .�,.._ . ....._._........�.... ...: ,.. _ _,,.. ...._... .. .... � . , .... 120 I .,....:::., ,�., ..,:._._.,, L. ...,„..,.._... ,....,.,._., .. ... .,,.... ,....,_.,.:,. ...,.:...,..: ., ..:: ,. .._ ¢ ..�.. ..._....I ... ..r ADD AND ALTERATK�VS , _ __ ._ , .. moN I A Z a .,...! ... I ,. T .s._. GARNET B RICKARD COMPLEX _., 10 — I rs -- - - --- Y _ _ � ; _ _.... : ._ : � . , : __ .., ,r... .. .... .... .. .. ._ . ., _.._ . .,,. . .. , _.� ,_., _ , ..,__ �. . ., .::., ,. .. _.. ,: .. �- ,. F, � � .. I MUNICIPALITY OF CLARfNGTON I EXIST. ARENA \S' I I I I I ► I I I .; �� RELOCATE 40 EXISTING HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD F149 I I I DEHUMIDIFIER DRAIN 100x2400 TRENCH DRAIN 50 TEMP. WATER, 50 C.W., (-- 100 FD IN- TO r _. . „ 20 TEMP. WATER RECIRC., I SUIT. BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO , BOTTOM RENCH (TY 25 H.W. do H.W. RECIRC. LINES F t I I I IRE II I �� DRAWING: CAP DRY, WET ZONES do SIAMESES 1 AT THIS LOCATION do CONNECT TO A)7, NEW SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO MAINTAIN - EXISTING SPRINKLER COVERAGE. PARTIAL FLOOR P L A N 10Ox2400 TRENCH DRAT PLUMBING & DRAINAGE C/W HEAVY DUTY GRILLE I DRAWN BY CHECKED BY C.V.L. K.S. DATE: SCALE: EM100 SEPTEMBER 1997 1=100 PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: 97100 M201 E�E� _ ��}�� � ��` �} E � '_l ,� f �.: �. _d �.r-F � ��.%r °`i 7 CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VEPJFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE 10 1 2 TO DOM. H.W. BCLERS EXCHANGER BY PFM_C0NNMTM SIZES ET 0 140'F REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR BY DIV. 15400 r1V ITEMS HOT WATER COLD WATER TEMPERED WATER DRAIN 0 c-r--- WC 25 NO. ISSUES DATE BY 100 WEEPER CONNECTION t5O 0 LAV/MS 12 12 -D c-L--- URINAL 20 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2 KS 0 N.F.H.B. S.S. 12 12 1997 20 H.B.*— 11/13 SHOWERS 20 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION KS 1997 EW/SH 20 BURIED f 50 C.W. LINE TO REFRIG. YSTE DRAIN 100 BY DIV. 15400 BY REFRIG. CONTRACTOR 10 REFRIGERATI(N 0 100FD F-11-4 FOR CONTINUATION 100 REFER TO DWG. M201 600x6DOx2400 STORM SEDIMENT PIT 600x600x2400 STORM SUM PIT C/W COVER & SUMP PUMP (DUPLEX) 100--1 PUMP P-6: BARNES MODEL 2EH 3311A. 1/3 HP, 10GI- 00 100 5 GPM, 10FT. HEAD, 120V/1/60, C/W FLOAT SWITCHES, LEVEL CONTROL, CHECK VALVE. ALTERNATING PANEL a & HIGH WATER LARM. 600x6OOx2400 SAN. SUM PIT T C/W COVER & SUMP PUMP (P-5) BARNES MODEL 2EH 3311A, 1/3 HP, 5 GPM, LOFT. HEAD, 120V/1/6 C/W FLOAT SWITCHES, LEVEL CO,ONTROL, SUR NO.6 -----CONNECT 20 C.W. TO EXISTING HIGH WATER ALARM PANEL & CHECK VALVE ON DISCHARGE SIDE. OOFD 50 C.W. LINE TO REFRIG. ROOM —NEW BOILER B-3 u 150 RWL DN. 1 GAS M VERIFY LOCATION OF EXISTING 75 GAS LINE DN. TO BOILERS MECHANICAL 15 7� 111 —PIPING IN THIS AREA -2] 20 TEMP. WATER LINE 50 WATER LINE TO DOM. H.W. SYSTEM .4 112 '1 00 TO EW/SH rmm LEWASH/SHOWER 00 a G RELOCATED BOILERS B-1 & B-2 - 100CD L; EW/SH 12 H & C.W. LINES ELECTRICAL TO LAY & WC L: ONNECT TO EXISTING GAS PIPE RELOCATED DOM. HWT F1 077 NEW DOM. H 00 12 HB rl 1 ECEIVING [:iK LINE - —EXISTING LINE 'WC'T- /R DN. TO 2 WC'S 32 C.W. & 12 H.W.1 TO BE REMOVED FOR EAST SECTION OF 'L' 1 LINES TO LAV, 2 Wq'S'�O'( k1c 10 & 2 URINALS. 'SH PLAN SEE ADJACENT FLOO PLAN L200 TEMPORARY GAS & WATER PIPING H 75FD 150..... W/R 10 W (BY DIV. 15) cl F,097 G I L U. 75FD N- 'SS-1' STAFF ~) 15 100 RD-�N U. 'WC-1' G 12 F106 32 -100 RWL DN. 100 HP GAS TO NEW AND F123 'L' wcl EXISTING EQUIPMENT 50 TEMP. WATER, 20 TEMP. RECIRC., F PRO SHOP -L, 75 C.W., 50 H.W., 20 H.W. RECIRC. __75FD F 1-05] W/R 12 12 H & C.W. TO 3 LAWS i Fril 12 C.W. jJNE TO WC 110 REVISE UPRIGHT SPRINKLERS TO I it CHROME PENDANT SPRINKLER TO STORAG� SUIT NEW T-BAR CEILING 10 dil cl 10 FE �R FE EXIST. VIEWING GALLERY _j 100 cliff 100 GAS LINE UP G 150-T Exii I-nn, EXISTING TRIPLE SINK, GREASE INTERCEPTOR STAIR NO.I F-F A & WATER COOLED COMP. TO REMAIN. 152 _z 15 LOBBY 5 00- F102 1 32 REVISED AS PER POST—TENDER 11113 TEMPORARY GAS & WATER PIPING 2 ADDENDUM M-1 1997 KS 100 RWL UP (BY DIV. 15) G 1 REVISED AS PER ADDEN. M-1 10/6 KS CAP 12 C.W. PIPE AT 1997 SET OUT LINE HIGH LEVEL. REMOVE, RELOCATE & REINSTALLL TRIPLE SINK & GREASE INTERCEPTOR IN NEW IT. -150 CONCESSION & CONNECT SERVICES TO S NO. REVISIONS DATE BY STORAGE 117 ANITO t7f 150 G F RELOCATE EXISTING RWL (100) 0 HIGH LEVEL, OFFSET & RECONNECT BELOW BARRY • BRYAN FOR CONTINUATION FLOOR LEVEL TO SUIT WALL REMOVEL. MS' -150 RWL DN. RD REMOVE GAS MAIN UP TO R SEE DWG. M-1 T GAS METER. ARRANGE WITH ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED 12 H At GAS COMPANY TO RELOCATE C.W. LINES TO Ims, GAS METER TO NEW ARCHITECT - ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS TO It-c I I I I LOCATION. or DRY ZO Telephone (905) 666-5252 IT s REVISE SPRINKLER LAYOUT TO SU L N REVISED ROOM LAYOUTS. LEIPCIGER STO E L KAHWER 7 SS-11 12 H & C.W. LINES TO SINK I I - 1 0 / --- RELOCATED TRIPIE SINK 'N IMITIELMAN CONNECT 65 C.W., 32 H.W. & 20 H.W. I luj FF IF122 & GREASE INTERCEPTOR And Puriners Ina. _Li 7L_- ------- _j 32 GAS UN KITCHEN ` \ \ \ \ ` CGM9tJlJNC BiC�s RECIRC. TO EXISTING AT THIS LOCATION STORAGEI __7: I ri __7:j EQUIPME C/ EACH TORONTO SUDBURY 1 120 STAJR NO.2 I — I APP CE (3 EQ IPME (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 TEMPO 120 GALLON, ELECTRIC EQUAL F153] ch V) 00 TO RHEEM EG 120-C-12, 575/3/60) 38 HOT & COLD CAP & RECONNECT TO NEW GAS 1 00 WATER PIPING. MAIN SERVICE ON ROOF 10- TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES, SPRINKLER HEADER K, #pOFESSIN G L (1 DRY ZONE, 1 WET ZONE, SIAMESE CONNECTIONS) \ D 1)GAS UP TEMPORARY GAS METER & PIPING TO EXISTING ON ROOF. j DETAIL ch NUMBER 1z I K.SH ___SP——— I CONNECT NEW 150 STORM DRAIN TO 1/ 1 A I t� /VESTIBULE DETAIL OR EXISTING STORM 0 THIS LOCATION a---------- 4 REFERENCE CONNECT 650-5 Ib TO EXISTING I DRAWING NO. TO EXISTING SIAMESES 0- LL 103 AT THIS LOCATION ON ROOF. OF V) ZZZZ-410 riqlz:n� - 1 6 EXISTING 65 C.W., 32 H.W. & TEMPORARY SPRINKLER ZONE PIPING 20 H.W. RECIRC. TO REMAIN LKM #97309 E.150 CORRIDOR R ---- -- - - - - - -- - - - - -- -- -- PROJECT: 41 F I F1237 EXISTING 150 BURIED SAN. DRAIN -1 71 E.15" GARNET B. RIICKARD COMPLEX EXISTING 150 BURIED STORM DRAIN - REMOVE, RELOCATE & REINSTALL HOSE BIBB. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON XIST. DF TO REMAIN HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD BOWMANV`ILLE ONTARIO REMOVE ALL FIXTURES, PIPING IN RENOVATED AREA & CONNECT TO NEW EQUIPMENT I DRAWING: 10 11 12 10 11 12 13 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN FOR WEST SECTION OF PLUMBING & DRAINAGE PLAN SEE ADJACENT FLOOR PLAN PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN DRAWN BY. CHECKED BY: 1=100 1=100 —C.V.L K.S. DATE: SCALE: EM11100 SEPTEMBER 1997 1=100 PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO' 97100 M202 G H/', A L t \ Jd ( /\ �\� { NOV ` ? b ,K~SR2�� Ej JOE --------- P4 CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND:VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE 0 NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2 KS 1997 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13 KS B 1 c A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 1997 11F� 01 11 of ol 11 x x x NEW DRY SPRINKLER ZONE #2 (NEW RING) INSTALL NEW PIPING FROM SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY TO EXISTING ZONES & CONNECT AT LOATIONS SHOWN INCLUDING SIAMESES. DESIGCN & INSTALL REST OF NEW ZONES 2, 4 & 5. NEW WET SPFWA(LER ZONE (GROUND FLOOR — OFFICES, CHANGE ROOMS ETC) o" oe NEW WET SPF KLER ZONE #5 (M FLOOR VIEWING GALLERY + PRWATE ROOMS OVER .,—REVISE EXISTING UPRIGHT SPRINKLER CHANGE ROOMS) o TO CHROME PENDANT TO SUIT T—BAR I AND/OR DRYWALL CEILINGS IN THIS AREA. A LOCATION OF TEMPORARY SPRINKLER HEADER, ENAL TIME ENAL ------ ZONE VALVES. FOR DETAILS. —APPROX. LOCATION OF EXISTING WET ZONE MAIN. L APPROX. LOCATION It OF EXISTING DRY ZONE RISER PROVIDE ADDITIONAL EPRINKLER HEADS + IN CORRIDOR FROM EXISTING ZONE#3 APPROX. LOCATION Or EXIST. SIAMESE MAIN. WOMEN +1 tXUnNG MY S1*&JQ.ER ZONE N I I i I VIEW NC + (EXUrING FM E E ARENA REVISIONS DATE BY + i + BARRY 9 BRYAN -REVISE EXISTING UPRIDIT SPRINKLER TO CHROME PENDANT 10 SUIT T-BAR KITCH. I CEILING IN THIS AREA. I I I I ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED MULTI-PURPOSE MULTI-PURPOSE MULTI-PURPOSE MULTI-PURPOSE STORAGE ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM AREA Telephone (905) 666-5252 PLAYERS PLAYERS I EXISTING WET 81"W.LER 03 1 1 A LEIPCIGER KAMWER STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR. STOR STORAGE RAGE STORAGE JAN MTELMAN STORAGE TO I ZAGE EVISE SPRINKLER IN TIIS AREA TO SUIT NEW ARCH. OUT And Perfn*rs Ina. TORONTO SUDBURY (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 FIR ST PRO SHOP \ REFRERE Q f[ DRESS NO.6 __.I�RNO�5 DR SS NOA DRESS N .3 DRESS NO.2 DRESS NO.1 LOBBY CORRIDOR MECRM.2 H ILA V LA I LAV LA DETAIL S_ I I A j HOWE HOWER SHOWER SHOWER �HOWE SHOWER — — — — — — — — — NUMBER SHARMA MEETING STORAGE DETAIL OR T WOM�� [I JAN REFERENCE MEN 1E DRAWING NO. C)F EXISTING SIAMESE CONNECTION LKM #97309 EXOTING WET SPRINKLER ZONE #3 PROJECT: ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON HWY NO. 2 AND MARTIN ROAD BOWMANVIU-E ONTARIO DRAWING: FLOOR PLAN 1=200 FLOOR PLAN SPRINKLER ZONING DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY- C.V.L. K.S. DATE: SCALE. EM200 SEPTEMBER 1997 1-200 PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO: 97100 M2031 5 �� q� ,. i �: e � F y;G� .� i'. t i d l7! �.4 � �:r���r �.,� r ._ ,• � 7,�- �7'_ ,----' - �;,.-,-:-: -, - I—,-_-F- -__1711-7- _-1-1.q I,---- ��_-- -_� i I �� � , I I - .. . �. �-_- .-.-�----- - --------, " -__ _ _-- --. .- .-� -,_ __ - �----- - ---- _..__I__.-,--�-___- - 1- I .1 � I , -� . . �� . � . ,� ,� - . . . I � I . - � .. , ;1' , ''� , . . L I.1 , �ti��, I I . I I I I I I I - -_ � . - -_:" i�",_:___ -_ - -7 - 7�-. I I -� � , � � . � ,I , , , I , _____ 7 ,-�7 _7:7- ,-",-,,- 777- 77-77--, . . , 6.1 � -, .r . _ - I I �-� I I ----- �- , ,,- . I _ � . � -1 -1-1 _ I - - - . - I� - - -- - - - � II, .1,11- -T7 -,-�,-�'�,`--,� --� ; , ", , I , :. ) .7 . . - , - - � I - ; , - I . I I � I . I . � ,. I � � � � � . . � I � I I I�- �,,-- -1. � , 7 I � I I I I � I I . I I I I I I I - I I I I . I . CON11RACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY I I I . I I � . ALL DIMENSIONS AT T14E SITE . I I I 1 4 1 'i I . I I � I � . I = - I I I B C . A 3A 4A 5A A 7A 9 0 KNI!z,) NO. ISSUES DATE BY I I I I I 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 1097 KS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13 KS - 1997 1 1 1 � 1000W B/B HEATER - ; BY DIV. 16 � I I I I I I . . I I I I BY DIV. 16 BIRDSCREEN & B.D.D. I . I �. ., I 11. (TYP. FOR 2) I , I � . " I ... 111..., .� 11 -, I - - -_ - - - - - - - - -_ - - - - I � -4- - ff I (D- - - - - - - I- STORAGE - - - -I- - - - - I EF-9 I . i -L I [I - ill- - - - I I 1000W B/B HEATER " I F-151] / I I -11 STORAGE %._EE�K] � I BY DIV. 16 i = I I I I I _-] F115 . w . I q - - - - --- - - FN� - "LLA I �, � - - I_ - - - -1 - - I (�- - = - - - __ .� , -_ - - - - - - - - - - ,:::: I .1 I - : .. . , I I I � , j : �. i. � F 1000W 8/8 HEATER .1 I I I . � I � I ___: __�] ! � I. I I . I I � I I I BY DIV. 16 � I � � � � 7 . I � , I \ ,, - . - --ji . i � � ., ..." 11. t : � 4 1 ,,� : � �� /11 � I .I .1 1. .I—— I— 1�i�. ., � : I i : .1 , \' .11 - I � I. '... .1, e ,. , I , � k e�, \ .1 ... , z .1-�: , � � � : ,3OOx2 . I , � : I .- -_ 1 50 T/A GRILLE . I � ."'. ,.�� � � � � - �` "I, ''.1 I � , � 14� �, , ..., � � �� ::.,� 1�, � � + z : ..-f�_ 4 - - - I., - - � � - � ; - - - I , I- , �)_ - - - - - - - - �' i - / f�� ." - - - - . I - - - I i- - - i - I- - - - - _� - - - i : , i i I . � , I I I., ! .1 .. . � . . . :. z � I +1 + , 11 ., . . 1� 1�� % I ' z� / I . I I �.�. I I � . DEHUMIDIFIERS DH-1 & DH-2 C/W � :� � _4 �� I . , : . � I I . z I I I , . :� 600 HIGH STRUCTURAL SUPPORT I � . � I . 3 . . I I -1 ,� . . . . I . : . . : �� : I & WALLS, � I ..� . 4 , I . I 1� I I . I . . . . + . 'I, 7.5 TON CAPACITY, 25#/HR MOISTURE i; /A GRILLE- - :1 I � � : "I I I 11 REFRIGERATION .1 .. � � � �. 1\ 1: 11 I . . I � ., � 11 ., . I � � � . f REMOVAL, 4500 CFMI, 575/3/60. 20 � �' I . � I � � � . I---�T- .� I I :� � I T '.� . . ; _-] , � I . I � I . .. I I . I 1; I I � I � .: I � I . I MCA, DISCHARGE DUCT (900 LONG) I F114 . .. � : � . I STARTERS, HUMIDISTAT, COND. DRAIN. I , . 1 1 � : . I . I , I I . � I I � I � I . . - m I � I ,. � I I I I � � . I 11 I � i I I I . . I I I I EF-2 & MOT. DAMPER C/W STARTER, I I I I . . �. , .. :. . li ::� � ., I � LEVEL AND INTERLOCK WITH MOTORIZED :. I I I 1. .. I I : :1 , , I : I - __-�? _f�.,� - - - - - I :� I : I � : . � I . :, DAMPER AT GRID 1B : . i �)_ - - - - - - - - �_ I - - _: _ - - . . - - - - - I + . I �I .: < 1� �. - - - - -_ - - - . I _\ , I . . � 1200x1200 LOUVRE. INSTALL AT HIGH I I I .: I z .� I � ., , � - - - - - �, - - - - - - - - - - - � . - , .: / - .. + , " I + I � . � - , " 1. . I I + . I � � I 1. I . ,� � ., "I . I / n I . I . I .. . .� . . � , I I .. : / . .�. 11 I I / .1 I � : � I . " - , '. � - , .. 'I 11 " I - � I / . I �;il ,� I � "I . 1, �. �, ..: 0; : , . . , 11 - � . I � , ', .. ;q � / I . � . d "... I I I I ; �II li- . � I , � I . ! . , , � I . ; , I I . . � .� �I I 0 18000200 LOUVRE C/W 18000200 MOT. DAMPER, I . . 1. I 11 BIRDSCREEN 0 HIGH LEVEL AND INTERLOCK WITH I 1�'� � : .. I MECHANICAL � I . '-..,_,j I I . . � � .� . � .: I I .:, . I LO EF-2 & MANUAL SWITCH IN RESURFACING ROOM. I . � �. : �� �j ,t2 1 � I I I I i I r NEW ARENA ; ; � � : : � I I EF-2 - I � � � q ;I z 0 i � � � � � � : . � �D I 0� : � F150] � + �; . . . �.--., ! I � . : � z + i: � ,� ,'I I I I . � I � � .. ., � I I I ! 11 11 11 M ON . . . � ; � � � I I . . . : I . zz � � � . � I - - - - - - - - - - - I � ,� �j I - 4 . - I - - ___� -_ - -, :- - - � � '. - I d � : , - - - . I I - -: � - - I . � I I - - /I I . I - - I /I A .1 : I.- I . . .I I I I I I < I . . � I t . . � I � : : �. � � I I � : : I I �I I : . : I !� �I � - - - - - - I I 1, @0z I� . - - - - Q_ - - - - - - - - F I - � , I_ > I ..11 �.I .. ." I .. "I... I I � . I �� I I _ I I - � I z z I / - . I., $ � '. �� . 11 , � � I " 1,.. I / - . � '. �I � I . I i � I � q. �1, .: I 11.q ...., ,+ I . �. � I , I : zli � .. : / F 1117 z.� � - �, � 1, , . I z . � 'I, I .1 I I � - . , ; i � I . . � I '.1 I I I � + + ,. 1� � � "I I :, , , : -- �: I �� ,. � .� F .� I I I � , � �,, I . 4, I" i I j 1 4 � ." � I � ` � , � . I I ,.", � !, ,I � I I :� ��,� .. ,` ? � .I- z N " � I .. . � . �", � , � � � I Z < � . I ,. � . : . � I I` I I . � I � I I I I �� I � ........ , , � I I � ,_ ___.�,...... q , , I . � � . I �. ,I� . I� : � : � 1. e I . � I� , � . , m I �11 . 0 ff I . I � I . 1 . 4 � � , I � I . I � I � I I I I I I I 1, , ,--------I � ; . � I ,. � � � I �1� � U o I � 11 . . � � . . 11 : I I . I I ; I . . _j+_ - _11" - - - - - - - - - - - - � I � � L= � ____ I I - - - - - _ � I - - - - - I � � - - - � � I . . � � i � - 7- - - - - - I 1 1 1 _ ., - @_ - - - - - - - I - - - I I I - ; . ., I FINISH�Q FLOOR � .1, .1� v I I I �I�, . I I � I I . � � : . %. I I . � . I . 4 1 or_ bi , I . I I i I � �� .. I � .. . . � ELEV 120.925 � � - - - - I I , 11 I . .. . 7 1 � . 5 . I � I ;1 ; & � ! I � I I I 1, � : '� I � � 600400 LOUVRE C/W BIRDSCREEN /' I �� i � � I .1 i : ; � : ! � 0 Lij I : , � � I � I , I � � : -1 �� . �� '�I I I I � � I .� I I , . I I ", & B.D.D. I . f, , � z z I I) � )) "l , I I I � � � ,� � � . k. I I ! )) I'� �,� ., : � �� I I- f, :- I .. : : . .. z LL (f) . I I I �� . I'll EF-12 I ,,,, " 41, �e I . � , N I . 11 , . 1�. . 1. ! � I k . I I I // � . I I 1; I I // I - � . � . � � / 1,� I � � � . I � � , . , � I .., !�..... ' ' 4 DH-2 I . � I . . � � � � // I . � / I 1. I " .�.. � � I // z .1 1 I �, ��,, $ �� , I , -.4 I � . I . . - - - - I �". �� .� I", 1 I � : � � ,. �. ,� . . : t I .. --%�, I I I I _11 I ; �� \ � I : I .., I . . � , : I� -, 1� ., �111' � . .1. I � .11 , I I � I ,., ,, �_ , I I I I 1. . � � " � m�$ // I �, , � (�>_ - - - .."t 1 , � �. I I I- 11 I '. ��� . : I � � I I _ . N, __,_,_..., ___ � ', - - I - -_ - - - - - - - �I f- - - -_ - , , 4 61 4 . I I � - - . -_ - - - - - - _ ___ - - - . � � I o � : ! - - - - .,- � :_:14 -- - - - - I - � _ _ _ _ __7I �... . � � i I 0- - - - -I __ k , 1 . w . I � I I . - - - I \ / I REMOVE EXIST. GAS U/H AND I� i I LOBBY I � � 1 �, . � I �, � REINSTALL IN NW MECH. RM. -_ � I � I \ // I/ � I _,-, I � I � � I i i I . "I -,, r . I " I � . I 1�' ,1- .11 I I I I � I I I C/W GAS PIPE & FLU I I F102FI , . - � .... 1.11 � I I - IL, 11 +, , I - ''.�,�,� +, I., - - - - - - - - - - , ., . , , � � - . I \ /f I I.�"I',-,' ` ".1 . _# - - - ----------I-I\ �,N., �I�.�. 11 I REMOVE EXIST. FAN AND U/H I �i�I'11, ." , I . ! � �,+__ I �,,� - L) - .. FROM EXIST. ZAMBONI ROOM REVISED TENDER 11/13 �� 1 KS � �1� .11, 11 11 ADDENDUM M-1 I \ 0..1 ..., "" i �. 1997 \ / I .1 __ . � 1, UNIT HEATER WITH GAS PIPING -, ' ! \ / ��,, .1. - NSULATE DUCT /'. � -11 .K11 - �, � I I � & 2000 FLUE UP THROUGH x -....__ . j I 1\ I 11 - STAIR NO � I . I I I ' ll , -- - ROOF (TYP. FOR 2). 1 , - - I - 9�i I fl N REVISIONS DATE e / \ I 1/\ ��. I " . I .: � I � - 1. �� I I 11 � � I I � 111-1.11111..., 1.� 11+1 .1--I.I..-u 1, I..,..�ll,�,�..'�"."+"",. , ..�..- I.-I-1, 1-11 I— I..'' 1 -1 ,...... 1, ,I*u / I!-- 1, I - . i 1. : . � , " "' " � " " , * I �. ... .�'ll".�.�,��1.1.1,1' '.-".,.,�ld'..��.��ld'..+ .. �,.�.I.I � 1-...I___._......111-11.1-1-1,11 111-11-1 1-1 _111-1-11- � 1, I � � , - I . 1� � '. u� L"I , * . .. I .- f � I _' I . / I I I 1.1` / - I/ : " , * , --- J iAi � � --- f I - A- L � �� , i 0 1 / \ I S EF_11.. /, I/ .V I � � � 11 �,: ,.' /, .1 � 11 I . ... ___ - ,� � . L .1 I / 77-��7711/// 30ox %J%..- I 40ON300- . �.350x.3 L30ox250 --25^x2OO � I MANUAL SWITCH WITH TIMER TO- I / \ I 11 ZEFEREE - I EL I, . I , , \ - -- 450x3OOj .L 00 I / I t q I z z / I � . i � -4 ON 10OX FRESH \ I r355x2(0 - : I � 1. . r b.3 , L � � I / � - ...... . I : - -1 I START AC AIR o 143 J � I � I L- -1-_ L. :............I....I I.. . L I L,..........,,._::f __11. : I L WOK SHOP - . � (TYP. FOR 6) ' � � I i 11�........I / L /0 CIA I � � z � I` � . 11 I , : I � I I � J I I : MODE. INSTALL UNIT CONTROL \ I " . : � I � � . I �L 1 15 - --I ASSOCIATES ( 99 )11 LIMITED : I � : I i PANEL IN OFFICE AREA. .__111 I _ / . I ,!. OOx2OO . : � � . � � : 1 15 1 ,\ � � � 4 q � L � v - - _� /, rE ""'L " ' �;, � ; I , � I ESSING ROOW �f / P± : L :.1, . � . i DRESSING ROOV � I � I I I � x ! � I L 1,11.1 . � I . I � � � .L -� -11 ,I I'll F-1-7 _111 �_, / .11, L..'' - � """dL......0%%Nm��N�d- / -+ f- -77- ARCHITECT - ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS I - I : " � ' rNG ROOM ( -, - ' ... � zv, � . . "e. . � . z . /, /f . z -: I I I � � lelIv 1, Telephone (905) 666-5252 . � i I . q i � k, � I � / I I � - I . . I , I . $. 5Ox3OO I � : I I / * T p I 1. ' . i . / -"o _1_�r I V1.11, - / z ___FI 4 I- / �. ......94",' '41....".11 � / * 142 , - ' 139 z � : I � � I . - - - , q ! I � � � / / : : . 11- __ .---,*+ ""I . .,�... ...1 +_ 250 _j - F , �.-L i I -t� 3OOx25 � _,�],� I L � .IA... ,I : " DRES - . Om I .' T ' 11 I ------7 � ' - - - _ _t '�. . . ROOM DRIES N � m _+� / ---I H,, . - DRESSING ROOM � I .- L dL. _.%,"' _,."- I - - - I . I 1 134 1 � I F t I � _ I I 11 1. - -- - , � - - -_ L I , L' . - - - - - - I--.11. ..1-111.11 L._L, .1.Id , I - I � - I �s - - -1 -7 .11 __4 1 11 11- _.,�_. - ' 'I - AV 7 : �: 7 � _ . I 1 7 .:p, � I --I - - ----� -�ffo� LEIPCIGER .1., _.L - L . I - � I I 1+ I � / / I � I L . 0 .111�' ICE 11 � ... I : � : , 3OOx3OO LOUVRE C/W (D / / 1 . 11 ill I , � � RESURFACER 0 , , , . 1 I KA~ER 4: :. -- .. w MIN% 0, , / BIRDSCREEN & B.D.D. �1' 11-I , 77-7-77 A CORRIDOR / � REFEREE I-J. 'L. UL � I a& "� .j J-1 ,� A. I ,0/ I 11 i OFFICE I t 11 , � I L + I i : -..... , .� L I-, I % : / 'I 41 1 1. I V 132 � MITELMAN - � � � i / r __ Z3 " . 30 . . t;"X L � I� � . I :I . I ,� . ,. � 1125ux .L . / And Partner• Inc. L : 1 20 1 1,i i z I �� . . L� I �, � � I : � �I � i I --I I :� : RAGE / L , � ; I LV <q �L , ,, / Ijfj.' � � "" k 'I 141 141 1 :4�' - STORAGE L t4l 'w'� STORAGE i _-] 3OOx2O ,\ 1411 50x , 11 ; , [ 148 � 171-i&I ` -0 F_17') 141 j: " � R < , EF 7 F k r-A : M z (D " T> , : I 1. EF-1 4 4TYP. � : -1 .0 STORAGE I I C> I 17 , + I I . 9A STAIR NO.5 I I � L / - vo ,� CONMAIM 901P � . 111___.._ I SUDBURY " L. ... . � ! � � - I I . + ! � . � ," . I � ' � ,, � 47 1 f-'_ . � i .1� I I . -1 4 1 , 1, , I : I � 1, 130 ' Ol ., I �� '�.........."N' 2 -9 Ox3Oj r �350007 30 -1 1 ' Id I I � I � ,I- 94 .d f!FIRST AIQ, 147 :� ,.j I . � 14 - FD 47 . .,. F'3'5 7 1 1 p , � TORONTO I .11 I L . - I I�r I L q ---0--ft.r-A- . j I a � 11L I (�) L-i ��� k n M* ) �. IL \ �& 150050 EF-18 � I - 11 , (416)445-8 705)675-6881 z .1, . 1 1 1 [` L . . 25C I N I __ ___ FD �b -ii � f 11 /1, . 1 -,,,-I- iiq!1Kr, _____ f+ t'", ,"' I..1. 1..L1 � ' I 77211777 L.-I-111.1 1..11-1.1 �..................-'-,---'-L--''-",- ...... .""',r"L.-"�............... - t7i I I P L , ' - 111-. - " ,1- @� 111-1"I ,_ _ , � . � .. - - I L I _ 1� .1 . . +. � I I .1, .t I I -1 � FD I I :m � I . I- L,- - . - x .. - .4 XTERNALLY INSULATE I ./ I � (D- - - - - - - - I V 121 .1-50- - - 1, - ,,, . - - I - . - - .. - - --i / 11 T MAIN _, ..i! fill L.. : L' - 11 ;L � .. i 11 r I f ALL DUCTWORK. - I- ; OF IICE- U_L-� � - � �I . ., I . � 1, I SNOW PIT de INTERLOCK WITH ,. � L I ': _'. - - I I � 6OOx6O0 LOUVRE � i .,_0 I'L." s. .d'I., _.,� INSTALL A PROPANE SENSOR I L � 3W E �, f9-+ I . � * ; ?1001 N--,-- C/W BIRDSCREEN � : : & MOT. DAMPER 300000 LOUVRE �." I I I I I I 11 11 " 129 I I DUCT U 0 '5Ox45O DUCT UP 0 LOUVRE I I"I , � . .., , : � I ..- ��. L 'r -__ - --...... .�..-----�l,,--.-'-'-"'�L",--,"""'-'�,�r�-_____',".-'-""",L,�,�"-,--d�""-',',�.�'L,""%._1......." -"----I--'--111111 11.I'.�,1-11-11,1,, . . � I . .. DETAIL �9. � ; . + � L - _,_.,, .L...... �_�, L'_............"" "" ,- ............ .L.........L�- L , 1,11".."..,11 L . i�_ L W=� 621 _j 1% EF-10. � " ,_.'__L........ ................L.........L,L'L_' ..............-........'," ......V' " '."',". ._. .,___,_�_ ............._,_�......':,�'L"","',""L'","..","".L ._,A.","'��,L"��,_.''L'�""L ,� - .1.1 .. , - I .*r _t , , L"" L".1".- I 111�', I- I I i ,+ ......__�_..�_'"'___ . I .,L.......�..... . � L' '-- L "'- '""- ..... 1, .....� t _ 1!4] . :: . I . ., i NUMBER � � L ....d-""L.......__._'d....... .......�L",',"� -`,� . I I � e � I : SHARMA I , -...........�� """',.......4k�" . " _'-t........L'-"'',-'-�+-+"L�"-'�"�,""�'�"L"-�'L��,"-"'-'-,""-""", - ' ' -". ""----"-"---'-'r-_-+- . � I. � : I L , i I.. 'j-'-----' --"'-"-'-%...................-11 111.11--l-I...- � 1_,_.1..1_._..__.,. " ,. � , - � I . I I . I � � I'll- "'. � i ,--., : , .. -'LL... ....--j" ,,...... "'' . ' � I . I .11. "' .11 t-'d......d......L' '' ...........L- 'L L,L -"_L... ".L ......��......111-1.......�.,. ]_, ........... .I.-I......d I I .11 I � I � ....I.,I ... �.I . I& -. 0� -- 1. 1 1.1.� ... ,..- .............. - __ ...� I i��.d��'L"'t I��" . - -. b L t i .... I �� � DETAIL OR 2000 DUCT DN. TO SNOW � i", i.,. .....4.................L.......L......L................. , -........� .�............ ".1..............I— 'I"'+_.__..........L_......L'...�............ ...L�............. " _. . .� .'I � : � . . . . , , _,t ,_ - _'� 'L il . - I " . I I " '- 'd -' '''d.......� __ L I ,f....�" '�.......... . � . , . � L L"L......L............L'.1.' '"'''.' -"'''L.......'L..............-'- �.�.-",�--'.-L.......�"'''........� '.........._%,_L ""-",�.................d ',LL'L L�'_L,L,,,,,L,,,,_ , ; , : :: L "L"��''"',,-,-,LL.'_,%".,.,,'.'L'd--",-,-- .,._",d,�. , _ q , ` ' ,N!� I I - f I PIT AT WATER LEVEL I % . 'STAT , .......-�...".1._,L.��L.+, ,.��""-" I i ,,_, .- _�'--"--,..-__.-'-'L-.'-'',d L........L"d�""_......,-L''_-'L- ,,,_ 'L""........._.L-,-�'L"-,.-�''L"`''-L',L "d,_-�,+ .....L ,-, ,, � ; � - - UNIT C/W T L �� � . I r ., I . � / � -1. d +I I I,,,...... "'. .1. ..11.1. . I L . I I , . I - 1�. /,.j I L.",L.'". -.1 11 . . � , .L --.�L,"I., .,L d.L LL ......L-:'"+. . 'LL'�...... I 1.I "I I L'-" -I. . .. 1....11.11 I I..'11. '"' ''� 'd" .,.,,",'L-" .,",,,.""".,.,:L''L"' I +'LL% "'"'''+''' ��.... ',L "L'""' I I , �'.'. L........"',.,�_.L'. -%............L"'." """''- ''' ,."....... + '+, , .L � I , L" 1,,� �,I I . � � 71" ,. L I 1 & FLUE. .. ,�� ,. . _1 - _,-._,__...� / \ REFERENCE ,, L . d .1"I -..,::.. .11"I I"I" ."..",L........ I L . .I 1��r". I I L - - '- L :''"'-I�',L'L.L-.L' I I I I+L I I.- . I. ......I r .. I I.'. L +,''L I. +I.I 1. ,'L"L,'L' ,L' d L I I I'L"''',L - ..�. � . ,L ,, .I.I ��.. 11 I I "'-' '-�' � .11-1... d I. 1.,, .I. . � . I--, , . :,,,,'',L "d..� . �: I L - L L......,"', 11'�......� L '", �.L'�'. ..'".,,L",r ."I I .'.. .I 11 �. .11 I .1 ,"L 1,...� � L'"' ' ""',"""L�-':' '.:���,'+�: � �"'�'L',-L........L, ....... - ,,,.� 'L...L""'.I", i,.,-.., -1.,d .'.�, L .,.",,,,,. .1. . I 1 I -1, �'L L,".I I :.. -I- . . 'L I,_.,,�,.1 I I + I . I , I . . ' .,'.,,,,L -, L I _ -''�...+,L�L',_dd'',.,L L I I -.I�I I I .%L. .1. I I., 11.1,1 . VI.1 ., �I ""L� L ' ', I L'..", .'�.'.L,"' 11 I- �, I r).-11� EXISTING DEHUMIDIFIER DRAWING NO. ,:', -1 , � I � I L"' . . I �_' �L_ '- *...... """",'',""'LL , ",, "","""L............�....... ,,_ � I +1 '", �2 _7 7,7 F 7 77 OF I � _ L ' � ...d, .I. - I I I LL L I .I d..1.. . . i 11...I .....I .I. ... I I.1.1. I I ....,...I., .'L ... .I........ ......L,"Z'L...... ...... , L .. + I'll., ......L.-...L. .......L 11. I"..-1- ......"11.....-1.11 L.. ?�m � � � .....L,,--L _', ' - -,- "'," '-" L .... .....L............. ...........'-''"---' -'.,-'-, L"' L�' - . ':' L' 11 /. 00 LOUVRE C/W_____/ = . I� d.�I., . � ; : I , --, SHALL BE RELOCATED � . I L . �z: I 1 .....".. .. ." ..,.�.I. �l,, ..�. ...L"L.L ' L .... ...L...', '' i I + . ,� :L'''L,,L. �....1+11' 11. -I- I I�.�..11 I...... �..�-L-. ,' L'd L,. ..... .......� . -L.�..................L.....L...... '"",, ".d....... ......... ........ ' ' ' L'L�+" ' "'..... -1 I-. dl L L. 11 L ��....d-....... --....... .. _,,�. .. , "I I . ,�: I *1 : I .1 � I I ,�L I � I L - - - ,*'',- - ,'L, ,."L'. '_ ' , ..,. L 11 I 11+I 11...,.;.,..� .11. ....... �' -"- LL" "" L''"'',,' L''''','''''' ,'L,,',, "" ,'-,L...�I...1.�I 1.�.1 "L I.....1. L.. .........Z�..........L" I'll....."I.......L''L L'I, - 'L. " - ... .� ,� . I . - d � . - - - - : - * L I , I , -,",, -,, , - ...... *" , .I I I.+... .'.''L' I"..1. .�_, .1 1.I L'""' 1, �L........_ ,.-L-L"L."" ". I.L.". ._., ....... ' I, : � 1�: "7F-*"- +_.. ............. _L___,____.1...11.1� . I/L & REINSTALLED C/W L �' . @ 3OOx3 - - 1� � ...L _ _ _. - �- I'll, -,-..-" 11. 111+ _ �� . ��I''',...........L L.-,.,�.L--'' I......,�._,-.'..........,''L 11-d-,,,, ..L _L . , .........11�I.,. ,.I I, � : -, � . BIRDSCREEN & B.D.D. . : . �,� . � 1'�'L ��L.............��....L .111114.......... ' ' '" 'L............ ... ' �............. ''d....L' ''-L- ', .,-'.-,..__.,___.L--'.�- '' ', ',"'".,,' L,-,+.,'.-,.',,'.,,,,,�, �.� -1 I STXIR, NO.2, . I I " - ' ' , L .L L - � L I � . � , :�.� .1 I ..�....I.....I I I....L d ,L.1 I I. L.,LL', ''-' '-'''",L��"L...',,,,, ..," I � . ' I . , . _............I1-1- .I. ..-�L......-'L"' L''�,.L _ .-,L�L,�''%-'-"'-_'"''0'-"',-L -,L...........L -''L , --�,-�_.r-d 'L�.......L'_L�"-'--- I , ��� . . _ - , -Z I I � + . __ � " , I 11 � � SUPPORT STAND TO I LKM #97309 L I . I , . : .. I .........."."..."""'... - .1 ."',_,..' � .� .L .11 ,L . 'N L ...... L' L'' L-:w..,.. ....�.. ............. .L -_.,.._' � -1 111-1111.1.111-1 I....1.- -1. ,.. ____ I L �_11.11 I..., I.. I.. '_1 SUIT NEW ARCH. LAYOUT. EF-1 0 1 1 '""' ..I..'__"" .. k�� 1 i; .,-. L"'--'_,'''''',L'' �L'''.1 ''''"'-,'�'L�'L', " L:,' .,�L+�',.'L...� O/ 11 I I . �'L''''� '�"'L (E� �L � i z *1� L',....1 _� I - - - - - - - a _ - I . . �-'`1::�::::""" 'L ".,J_',L.......I I _1-.L' ��I ,;, !� ,�,�,� le, - ..I . , - �, �,,�, I:�,:��1,1-:,I ':L'-' 0�, I . �. : I : '�, =�� Ir .,� . I .... I� I �. I� �.,n L"1'1'�,,�:,, -1�:��,:��,,-7 ---, �-,-�-L�'-:L.:- , - "d,"�!:L'..-�:"::�:L":''':L"''"'-';N�n t"`�:�-�:':7"� L�;,L '�'"":'L" . I I 'L ,-,.,��, .1 I _��:_ _ L...... d :,L, � L,.-;.�"��-: , �,,'n.� � _:�� -, � , ." ,,,,,,��. �� . -��:.L -, - , ", +�'�',�.� �,L,� N '.� I I 111::e�'� `L::.'� ,�'L��.,"::�,_L�"': �. ., : 117- ��, ..I�. ' "- .-1.1...'.1, e I ,,,+,::,++L�",L L':!. L��:�.-.,;,�L 'L':..�:':,!:��::,. ,.,:Z:-L: �,.:,,�1�t L';�1,- +'.I�'.�:"::' ",�'L � ':-���,�r ._"�:�'�+':: ��, .11, I�111 1 � � ., 7.,�,��§". X+��� \ � . I 'L 11,L'.... .I . L L", .,.. L 11 1.I " L .....I 'L.I L+.I .I I I L .. ",,L L...........L'' . .L .'L�.,. �. 1.IN".: I -..I.- -'k�'L I: .� , , a:,:,�T�� ��,,"� .* �'14 � �:"��, �.:",..;,, L e -L:.'.' �:,:_� +,:;,L_,��,:.'.',�'+:�,.V,',-,I- ;'!L:��_",L:;:�.%;��r:_����:..:".:',�,',,,"': !.:-:::".L��.,..,�- - - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,� \ ��:�:."��,;,�_ I �...I ...L� I ��.,." _ , \N L L, � i 'r , "..':L .I ,,_. ., . : -- ...L . __ . I � . �- I 1 . � ---- - - - --- 1 .4 - I L . I \ _ I" � . ': _ ' ' L. � ,.�'.'�'.."�' .L _ 1. ." ' "' I ' ' '. ' /* PROJECT: �7:' �,�� ':�I, +.1 4,.,_,:,.x,_' :� 'L:��:`�+,", n �� ,_ , � \11w\ - - - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - i - ..-.-- - - - . L_L,- 1-1.. ,"I 1.'L-.. -I_.-"'"""L�L'."' ",..,,.L.'L' ... L,, '-*F EL i m�m j 9�L%+& 0 9�0 0% - L,j __� - - � ___�11_\\ - . �. EXIST. ARENA 11 � I \\\ , �.._L I I ; I , � �1� I � '- , ++'�.L � . I � L I I . - _e . _. 41, : L .1 1; . . I . . I L � L . . , _-] 6 . L I I .L _ I I I / F149 ,.x . L I , ,. I 11 11 ADDMON AND ALTERATIONS , I .-�",C, '.."L ,,��::� ." -" � i . I � L �_'� d . � I I ..1�L L - " I.1 d, I�.,, L . I . ; 1. L L L.L ...L' ''''d-..,%...I ,.,,. . I I I .., d, ,.. - � � ,�, ,��. I .,.,, . . . � 1. .. L.� I I . � . '... . " �I :I I. I I - � I � !, . � - I I I I I I I I . I I I - L I �, . I i I I"., L" ., I I ��f_l GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX : +1 � : 1 I . q I 11 : L, J, I L L I : . � ", 1, k :� L .. � I . 11/I . i I . � I � L :1 41- ��_ I I � I I . L. I � : I-, 4P . 1. . � � z . �. ...L 1� MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON . . , , 4� � "I 115�I- L ...... . ,� , � �. ...L.11.1 W..I.-I I—I I I : L I : L . Z I I . HWY NO. 2 AND MAR11ON ROAD 11 ,. . - .1 . I : z I " I :L 1. I 'A I , ;: .. � I I � I t . 1 i I I � � % I 11 . I I I L' . , L , � . � � I .: , I . I , I 11 $ 1 I � L I I . I � : � I I � 1. I I .1, 1 7 , BOWMANMLLE ONTARIO � . I . : . F . L ' L I I I I I ? I DRAWING: PARTIAL GROUND FL. PLAN H . V. A. C. DRAWN BY CHECKED BY- C.V.L K.S. I I DATE. SCALE: EM106 SEPTEMBER L 1=100 . 7 PROJECT NO: DRAINNG NO- . I L I T T T I T 7 T T - ril= 97100 I/ i I :: _- : - I + � � L I I . I I I � I . L . � � � .1 I I I - I L I I I I I L I I I I � � I I I . L - . I I I �vL V i 97 7,T7-_--,-�-- ., - 7-7 7 77, % CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK' AND VERIFY' ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SIE 10 1 2 LEMM Narm -------- EXISTING DUCTWORK 1.) SUPPLY INSULATED 18 Go. PAINTED METAL COVERS TO COVER NEW DUCTWORK ROOF OPENINGS WHERE EXISTING FANS HAVE BEEN REMOVED AND RELOCATED. 0 BALANCING DAMPER 2•) ALL rsTATs To BE C/W LOCKABLE CLEAR PLASTIC COVERS. TRANSFER AIR DUCT NO. ISSUES DATE BY EXISTING S/A DIFFUSER 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 992 1KS 1 1200x600 LOUVRE C/W 131RDSCREEN F= NEW S/A DIFFUSER 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/73 KS MOT. DAMPER. M 1997 FYI - - - - - - - - - ff Q EXISTING R/A GRILLE R NEW R/A GRILLE A I I To EXISTING T'STAT TO REMAIN NEW T'STAT RELOCATE T'STAT To L RELOCATED UNIT HEATERS & T'STAT (BY DIV. 16) 0 HUMIDISTAT ❑ EXISTING STARTER S REFRIGERATION I NEW STARTER A SMOKE/PROPANE SENSOR INSTALL RELOCATED GAS UNIT ID HEATER C/W T'STAT. INSTALL FD FIRE DAMPER NEW FLUE THROUGH ROOF. VJ INTERLOCK EF-7 WITH REFRIG. C) MD MOTORIZED DAMPER SENSORS TO START FAN ON HIGH 500x4OO DUCT UP THROUGH SPEED. SENSOR TO OVERRIDE ROOF C/W GOOSENECK AND T'STAT CONTROL COORDINATE WITH DIV. 17. BIRDSCREEN. TERMINATE ___1 0 450 A.F.F. PROVIDE M.D. EF-7 STAIR N0.6 ON DUCT & INTERLOCK WITH BURNERS OF B-1, B-2 & B-3. T 200x200 DUCT UP THROUGH T "TIT ROOF C/W GOOSENECK At BIRDSCREEN. TERMINATE D MECHANICAL UP AT HIGH LEVEL. < 300x300 LOUVRE C/W EF-6 BfRDSCREEN & MOT. z DAMPER. 0 VE� < 6000 FLUE UP THROUGH T _j ROOF, 2400 ABOVE ROOF F�1731 RELOCATED EXH. FAN FROM EXISTING n LEVEL C/W RAIN COLLAR. ELECTRICAL ELECT. ROOM & INSTALL T'STAT, FAN. T SWITCH & NEW ROOF CURB. 450x450 DUCT UP THROUGH ECEIVING 17107 11 ROOF C/W GOOSENECK & MOT. DAMPER. 200050 Fl-0-8-1 0 i-j 25Ox250- FOR EAST SECTION 0 F L J- 7 W/R STAFF RELOCATED U/H & T'STAT PLAN SEE ADJACENT FLOO PLAN z 0 111 50x150 LF-50 100 F-106] (BY DIV. 16) 0 N f;:�j 94 1000W B/B HEATER 1250W B/B HEATER 2000 94 L BY DIV. 16 BY DIV. 16 94 2 Ox2OO- 2000 L 0Ox2O0 < 2000 Hm CORRIDOR EF-5 111D Er—3— z z 1. E�] 200x200 PRO SHOP ELECT. RAD HEATERS TO 1EMAIN. rm -A 94 141 -_ n RELOCATE T'STAT Z < 200x200 F-105] 1250W 8/8 HEATER AC-17 200x2OO I L I BY DIV. 16 0 fy 300x200 u vIN 11, 94 U 2000 P�, 94 1 1 1 300x200 -, I I 2000 188 L L (2- 0� 950x*50 R/A DUCT STORAGE 300OLL-9— 750x450 to 11 1000W B/B HEATER 0 w 1, BY DIV. 16 TT LL V) mini 1500 7 x R r� R R EXIST. VIEWING GALLERY � (T 300x300 J r 3OOx2OO 1 E r EXISTING S/A DUCT 2.4 KIN F/F HEATER TO REMAIN (TYP.) 700x350 BY DIV. 16 I I I EXIST. F= L J F= 11 1 BAF\,ICES�ION Ot— __t��j I I I ELECT. RAD HEATER TO REMAJN. 1188 A RELOCATE T'STAT LOBBY 25001 J2500 r -1 17— -1 F 1-021 REMOVE EXIST. U/H ral. I REUSE IN NEW Vil iu I I LN IL-V — 450x350 141 EXISTING RANGEHOOD TO REMAIN —TENDER 11/13 F MECH. ROOM & 6OOx2OO R/A EGGCRATES (TYP.) 2500 L J L_ J REVISED AS PER POST KS IGERATI N RM. 711 ADDENDUM M-1 1997 300x200 T/A DUCT SET OUT LINE (2-WAY) LrH I (TYPKA' L) Ir m I REMOVE, RELOCATE & REINSTALL NO. REVISIONS DATE By i�-150050—DUCT UP �HR ---- ---- -- -- I I I L I ORAL ROOF C/W GOOSENECK I RANGEHOOD & ROOF EXAHUST GENER — EF-8 T T FAN TO NEW CONCESSION AREA. 17117 SUPPLY & INSTALL NEW WELDED OFFICE- A 4- Ox2OO DUCT FROM HOOD TO ROOF FAN. BARRY • BRYAN I lls — I — — 188 235 2.35 TO AC-1 73-80(; I ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED 94 RELOCATE RANGEHOOD & EXH. FAN 250x (EF-13). INSTALL 300000 WELDED ARCHITECT - ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS i&0_01 1 v I I - I DUCT C/W EXHAUST STACK & RAIN CAP. -500 I SUPPLY NEW ROOF CURB, STARTER, REMOVE EXISTING REMOVE EXISTING S/A DUCT & Telephone (905) 666-5252 DRAG --*-350x250 T 300x3OO WELDED DUCT, DISCHARGE DUCT FOR S/A GRILLE AND 141 600x600 GRILLES. SUPPLY & INSTALL Tit A COMPLETE INSTALLATION AS PER CONNECT 2500 600x200 DUCT, GRILLE & BALANCE 1A I - - __1 DUCT. CORRIDOR FOR 235 L/S (-R?. FOR 2). INSTALL ,3n N.F.P.A. 96. 2 00 STRUCTURE. LEIPCIGER - ___T7- GRILLES TIGHT TO ROOF S OFFICE 119 REMOVE EXIST. FAN AND U/H 60040 DIFFUSER 524� KAMNKER 129 1 14 41 11=4 IrKETS FROM EXIST. ELECT. ROOM. TYPICA IMITELMAN 1250W B/B HEATER And Partnowe In*. 71 0 47 BY DIV. 16 c .1 CONNA1111%8 1 ONNEM —/ 12p� 1 1 2=2 r Q_ "I 500 jr7 REMOVE, RELOCATE & REINSTALL T T- -EXISTING UNIT STARTERS & T'STATS 'dONCESSION L —A———— __71 I I NECT TO EXISTING— TO REMAIN. TORONTO SUDBURY - --- -- - n— EXIST. UNIT HEATER C/W T'STAT (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 y 11 94 L E,0 4- 75OW B/B HEATER-611 2000 200x200 M E ElTnI Room EXISTING A/C UNIT ABOVE EF-16 194111 1 IN BOOTH BY DIV.16 /U (2 WAY) & MAIN DUCT 125 III}illl IIIIIIIII / III MEEIINGII JI I ST J. --I i-I-LL J-1-i -T-- 1�0 128 1 FD - - - -- - - -- iiA_1-_ —A— L, DETAIL NUMBER BER SHARMA 250x200 K —REMOVE EXIST. FANS 10 94 FROM EXIST. REFRIG. 47 ROOM. 2000 FD FD FD DETAIL OR B 1 1500 -I REFERENCE rT_ - -1 500 ULE __j DRAWING NO. V4t OF LL - 3 R R L III —200x200 - - - - - - - -/ LKM #973 CORRIDOR _j l� 11 126 123 PROJECT: 0 , 750W B/B HEATER U BY DIV. 16 ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS 71 & REINSTALL RELOCATE T'STAT 2000 TO SUIT. GARNET B. RIICKARD COMPLEX RELOCATE EXISTING F/F HEATER -1 (2 WAY) RELOCATE 2 DIFFUSERS & 2 R/A MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON GRILLES. INSTALL A FIRE DAMPER ON MAIN SUPPLY AIR DUCT & HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD n FIRE FLAPS ON ALL SUPPLY & 150050 1250W B/B HEATER R/A OUTLETS. BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO U BY DIV. 16 DRAWING: 10 11 12 71 12 13 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN 2000 FOR WEST SECTION OF (2 WAY) H . V. A.C. PLAN SEE ADJACENT FLOOR PLAN c AWN BY. CECKED BY- PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN V.L. K.S. 1=100 1=100 DATE. SCALE:- EM100 SEPTEMBER 1997 1=100 PROJECT NQ DRAWING NO: 97loo M205 REFRIGERATION NOTI 720 AR )R T Ox2OO � ( p§ E?J 9 CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 1 1997 997 KS 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION �g97 KS 1X 1B 1C A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O o FINISHED FLOOR 0 O ELEV I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 450x300 TRANSFER AIR LGB10 (283 L/S a GRILLE (DOUBLE SIDED) Q I I I 00 GAS LINE ON. 400x30 reseal 0� n w 3 O 0 STAIR N0.4 STAIR NO.3 G —400x300 O � 154 300x25 o Of I 155 250x25 I AC-2 DN 4R DN 4R 400x300 SUPPLY do RETURN N DN 4R 141 AIR DUCTS UP. A-29-ow 4 00 RWL ON. G G G G ( ) 00 MUSIC r—______—_ too �� � — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 100 RD� — — — — 0 3 T DN 17R RESURFACER I EF-19 II — —Df� - - - - - - I 148 FIGURE SKATING 18R — I 3oox2o I II VIEWING ROOM 202 45ox3oo x EF 1 \ -201] N0.2 \ GRILLE I I 153 MAU-1 17R A — — — — — — — —I-- — — — -�--- — — -� — s — I 300x200 I FIB f9 �I GB10 (283 L/S) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 500x500 DN. 50x450 DN. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I f-I-tt-I-t I I I -4 �i� _=6 NEW ROOF 300x300 GRILLE 6I REVISED AS PER POST-TENDER 11/13 2 ADDENDUM M-1 1997 KS AREA OF HIGH ROOF /i I I I I I EXISTING coNC BLOCK WALL 1 REVISED AS PER ADDEN. M-1 10/6 KS 1997 I NO. REVISIONS DATE BY II EXISTING SKYLIGHT III EGG CRA>ESA I - - - - - - - - - BARRY • BRYAN (TYP. FOR 2) \ INTERLOCK MAU-1 & EF-1 ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED L _ ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone (905) 666-5252 I I I I I I I I I I EXISTING ROOF "17 LEIPCIGER KAN94KER K ATELMAN And Partners tne. I I I I I I I I I I CONSeuNG ersR*M TORONTO SUDBURY (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 �QIpF�/per rN TAIL MB ER K.SHARMIA DETAIL OR REFERENCE DRAWING NO. / OF SECOND FLOOR PLAN LKM #97309 1=100 PROJECT: ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO DRAWING: PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY- C.V.L. K.S. DATE: SCALE: EM100 SEPTEMBER 1997 1=100 PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: 97100 M206 � r�t�;�2���� � � ��{)\� ) �; � �`\ � � � _� . � . � 2 C ` ^ 3� � ! � �A R� F§'/ � (�EGGS[S /2y} R 5 C 2§\ T'; 7 Fv 777 7 CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY. All DW84SMS AT THE SITE NOTES: B-1, 8-2 & HWT-1 ARE EXISTING TO SIAMESE S & RELOCATED. ALL PIPING SHALL BE TO WET ZONE NEW AND/OR RELOCATED. EXISTING 600x600 UP THROUGH ROOF - VALVES, CONTROLS ETC. MAY BE TERMINATE 2400 ABOVE ROOF CONNECT TO EXSTING C.W. PIPING TO DRY ZON REUSED IF OPERATING PROPERLY. LEVEL -----CONNECT TO EXISTING DOM. H.W. PIPING 6000-- 8 TO EXISTING RELOCATED MIXING VALVE 75 GAS LINE FLOW SWITC EXT. INSULATED BLEECHING NEW 1500 FLUE— NO. ISSUES DATE BY 5-� (TYP.) 75— 10/2 1 DRY 2 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 1997 KS I— 1 01 SUPERVISED VALVE— TEMPERED WATER TO BUILDING G G G 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/73 KS (TYP-) 501 1997 —2 120 GAL TANKS CHECK VALVE' 150 N.C. 3 (TYP-) NEW KITCHEN q 50 RELOCATED UNIT HEATER--J —32 32 38 EXISTING H.W.T. 3 3&— TO T'STAT- 20 r WT-1 0-2 L75 1i —25 H.W. TO ZAMBONI RM. 5 ONNECT TO EXISTING H.W. RECIRC. PIPING ECIRC. PUMP S-37, 120/1/60 L--TEMPORARY WATER METER E —32 1 A —32 60 COLD WATER LINE CONCRETE PAD (TYPICAL� FROM PREHEAT IN j65 REFRIG. SYSTEM 38 HOT WATER LINE HEAT EXCHANGER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES N.T.S. 0 EXISTING RELOCATED BOILERS B-1 & B-2 25 H.W. RECIRC. FROM r L--RELOCATED P-1 AND HOT WATER TANK ZAMBONI RM. 0 W041 s NEW MIXING VALVE— T vcla TO PAD No 2 SHOWERS & LAWS -NEW NON SCALDING VALVE & ALARM PANEL T RELOCATED RECIRC. PUMP P-2 V� (EXISTING BUILDING LOOP)20 NEW PUMP P-4 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM F- (TEMPERED WATER RECIRC. PUMP) N.T.S. EXISTING UH-1 —38 COLD WATER LINE EXISTING DOMESTIC-- 80 DOM. WATER LINE H.W. BOILER B-1 ---EX 15 1 r ISTING WATER METER STATION G G -EXISTING DOUBLE CHECK TYPE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY COOLING MOISTURE WITH RELIEF PIPED TO DRAIN MIN. FAN UNIT VOLTAGE & HEATING CAPACITY UNIT NO. UNIT NAME LOCATION SIZE L/S Pa. RPM HP PHASE MCA BREAKER INPUT (MBH) CAPACITY REMOVAL REMARKS MBH #/HR EXISTING DOMESTIC- ROOF 48TJO 12 1880 125 850 3 575/3/60 22.6 25 180 120 CARRIER ROOFTOP GAS HEATING, DX COOLING UNIT C/W FILTERS, H.W. BOILER B-2 t-E-80 AC-1 GROUND FLOOR OFFICES (4000) STARTER, ROOFCURB, PROGRAMMABLE T'STAT, ECONOMIZER, 32 540 POWER EXHAUSTER. G CARRIER ROOFTOP GAS HEATING, DX COOLING UNIT C/W FILTERS, IF AC-2 2ND FLOOR VIEWING AREA ROOF 48TJO04 (1200) 125 960 3/4 575/3/60 7.9 15 74 36 --- STARTER, ROOFCURB, PROGRAMMABLE T'STAT, ECONOMIZER, POWER EXHAUSTER. EXISTING P-4 50 EXISTING BACKFLOW PREVENTER ENG 'A' STATIONS WITH RELIEF PIPE DJ60 1880 -- --- ENG.A' GAS HEATING UNIT C/W ROOFCURB, FILTERS. 4 TO DRAIN. MAU-1 CHANGE ROOM ROOF OR REZNOR (4000) 125 875 3 575/3/60 31 40 400 STARTER, CONTROL PANEL, S.A. 68'F/70% RH, SPACE T'STAT. 4 EXISTING H.W. TANK TO NEW ZAMBONI RM. GREENHECK 1040 EF-1 CHANGE ROOM EXHAUST ROOF DOMEX GB-140 (2200) 187 1500 1 575/3/60 GREENHECK ROOF FAN, BELT DRIVE, STARTER, ROOFCURB, B.D.D. RELOCATE EXISTING MIXING EXISTING P-2 32 L GREENHECK 4720 SIDEWALL PROPELLER FAN C/W OSHA MOTOR GUARD, LOUVRES, — G EF-2 NEW RINK EXHAUST WALL MTD. SPF-30 (10000) 30 780 1 575/3/60 MOT. DAMPER & STARTER. EF-3 PRO SHOP EXHAUST ROOF GREENHECK 141 75 1400 1/30 120/1/60 GREENHECK DIRECT DRIVE FAN C/W STARTER, ROOFCURB, B.D.D. 0 G-80 (300) ---—--- -- t-32 EF-4 ELECT. ROOM EXHAUST ROOF EXISTING -- -- -- -- -- ROOF FAN. BELT DRIVE, STARTER, ROOFCURB, B.D.D. 2 EF-5 WASHROOM EXHAUST ROOF GREENHECK GREENHECK ROOF FM, BELT DRIVE. STARTER, ROOFCURB. B.D.D. GREENHECK 329 EF-6 MECH. ROOM EXHAUST ROOF GB-90-4 (700) 125 1360 1/4 120/1/60 GREENHECK ROOF FAN, BELT DRIVE, STARTER, ROOFCURB. B.D.D. EXISTING COMPRESSOR— 100 SPRINKLER LINE TO WET ZONE EF-7 REFRIGERATION ROOM EXHAUST ROOF GREENHECK 1180 90 1250/2500 2 575/3/60 GREENHECK TWO-SPEED ROOF FAN, BELT DRIVE, STARTER, GB-140 (2000/4000) ROOFCURB, B.D.D. PIPE CLAMP FASTENED TO GAS LINE GREENHECK 47 GREENHECK CABINET FAN C/W SWITCH, B.D.D., GOOSENECK I OOXI 00 WOOD. CLAMP TO BE EF-8 JANITOR ROOM EXHAUST ROOF SP-117 (1()0) 25 1450 1A 120/1/60 AND BIRDSCREEN. ONE SIZE LARGE THAN PIPE 100X100 WOOD TO BE SECURED TO WOOD 1 REVISED AS PER POST-TENDER 11113 KS DIAMETER. BASE. LENGTH TO SUIT DIAMETER OF SPRINKLER LINE TO DRY ZONE--4 SIAMESE CONNECTION EF-9, 9A STORAGE ROOM EXHAUST CEILING GREENHECK 94 25 1690 1A 120/1/60 GREENHECK CABINET FAN C/W SWITCH, B.D.D., GOOSENECK, ADDENDUM M-1 199 PIPE. EF-15, 16 SP-117 (200) LOUVRES & BIRDSCREEN. ROOFI r/ -P""ISTING SPRINKLER ZONES & FIRE PUMP BARRY 9 75 1250 1/4 120/1/60 BARRY SPARK RESISTANT WHEEL/HOUSING C/W STARTER, LOUVRE, NO. REVISIONS DATE BY EF-10 SNOW PIT EXHAUST ROOF --- (200) B.D.D.. VIBRATION ISOLATORS. 50 STYROFOAM SM WOOD BASE NOTE: EF-1 1 WORKSHOP/15T AID EXHAUST CEILING GREENHECK 188 125 1050 3.7A 120/1/60 GREENHECK CABINET FAN C/W SWITCH, B.D.D., LOUVRE & INSULATION c/w PLACED ON STYROFOAM. COMPLETE SYSTEM SHALL BE RELOCATED CSP-16 (400) BIRDSCREEN. BARRY BRYAN TC MASTIC. NOTESd EXISTING WATER METER ROOM TO NEW MECHANICAL ROOM IN ITS ENTIRETY EF-12 ICE SURFACER ROOM EXHAUST WALL MTD. GREENHECK 940 50 1200 1/2 120/1/60 SIDEWALL PROPELLER FAN C/W LOUVRE, B.D.D., STARTER N.T.S. & REINSTALLED C/W ADDITIONAL BOILER SPN-24 (2000) AND BIRDSCREEN. ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED GAS MOUNTING DETAIL 1. ALL WOOD BLOCKING TO BE CEDAR. & HOT WATER TANK. 700 RELOCATED EXH. FAN C/W FAN SWITCH, WELDED DUCT ARCHITECT - ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS 2. STYROFOAM TO BE SECURELY a EF-13 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST ROOF EXISTING (NFPA 96), ROOF SLEEPERS. N.T.S. ADHERED TO WOOD BASE- (1500) Telephone (905) 666-5252 EF-14, STORAGE ROOM EXHAUST ROOM GREENHECK 141 90 1000 1.87 120/1/60 GREENHECK CABINET FAN C/W SWITCH, B.D.D., GOOSENECK CSP-150 (300) AND BIRDSCREEN. LEIPCIGER EF-1 7. 18 STORAGE ROOM EXHAUST ROOM SP-117 71 30 1690 1.0 120/1/60 EXH. FAN C/W VIBRATION ISOLATORS & SPEED CONTROLLER. KAMNKER (200) EF-1 9 FIGURE SKATING ROOM ROOM CSP-150 188 25 1100 1.7 120/1/60 EXH. FAN C/W VIBRATION ISOLATORS & SPEED CONTROLLER. MITELMAN (400) `And Partners In*. CONS 01611111m EXISTING SIAMESES (AT WEST ENTRANCE TO BUILDING) TORONTO_ SUDBURY UH-1, 2 RESURFACER ROOM ROOM REZNOR FE-125 -- 1/4 120/1/60 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATER C/W FLUE, T'STAT (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 CONNECT TO EXISTING IN CEILING EXISTING CORRIDOR ADJACENT TO EXISTING RINK TO 2ND FLOOR WET SYSTEM DETAIL % B-1 & 2 RELOCATED EXIST. BOILERS FLOOR EXISTING ifj�r_ .0 TO EXISTING & NEW WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO REFRIGERATION ROOM NUMBER SHARMA 50 TO H.W. BOILERS B-3 NEW BOILER FLOOR RAYPAK1125 1125 RAYPAK BOILER C/W CONTROLS, AQUASTAT DETAIL OR I REFERENCE CONNECT TO EXISTING DRY SYSTEM DRAWING NO. AT SE CORNER OF EXISTING RINK FLOW SWITCH (TYPICAL) RP B.F.P� P-1,2.3 RELOCATED EXIST. PUMPS FLOOR EXISTING EXISTING RELOCATED LKM #97309 TO NEW PAD DRY DRY SYSTEM 50 HEAT EXCHANGE P-4 RECIRCULATING PUMP FLOOR ARMSTRONG S-37 1/4 120/1/60 IN—LINE CIRCULATOR C/W STARTER, ALL BRONZE PROJECT: P-5 SANITARY SUMP PUMPS SUMP BARNES 1/3 120/1/60 Pumps C/W HIGH WATER ALARM, CONTROL PANEL, REMOTE ALARM. ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS DRY VALVE C/W COMPRESSOR 2EH 3311A —0 --a (TYPICAL) P-6 STORM DUPLEX SUMP PUMP SUMP BARNES 1/3 120/1/60 2EH 3311A PUMPS C/W HIGH WATER ALARM, CONTROL PANEL, REMOTE ALARM. GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX BY SPR. CONTRACTOR BY DIV. 15400 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON SUPERVISED VALVE 13Y DIV. 15400 BY REFRIG. HVff NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD T BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO 5 BY—PASS NOTES —75 1.) MAU-1/EF-1 CONTROLS: DRAWING: 100 5 .1 UNOCCUPIED MODE: .1 MAU-1 & EF-1 OFF 0 .2 OCCUPIED MODE : SCHEMATICS & DETAILS .1 MAU-1 & EF-1 ON L100 .2 MAU-1 OPERATES ON HEATING MODE WITH OUTDOOR TEMP. BELOW 70'F WITH DUCT T'STAT CONTROL —200 .3 MAU-1 OPERATES IN COOLING MODE WITH OUTDOOR TEMP. ANOVE 70`F WITH DUCT T'STAT CONTROL MECHANICAL 2•) AC-1, AC-2, EXHAUST FANS: .1 UNITS OPERATE TO MAINTAIN SET SPACE TEMP. DURING OCCUPIED MODE W R METER .2 UNITS OPERATE M MAINTAIN NIGHT SET BACK SPACE TEMP. DURING UNOCCUPIED MODE .3 EXHAUST FANS OPERATE TO MAINTAIN SET SPACE TEMPERATURES .4 EF-7, EF-10, EF-12 INTERLOCKED WITH REFRIG., CO, PROPANE SENSORS RESPECTIVELY TO START ON SENSING HIGH LEVELS OF GASES IN SPACE WITH T'STAT OVERRIDE. DRAWN BY. CHECKED BY: �-200 WATER SUPPLY C.V.L. K.S. — DATE: SCAM EM100 SEPTEMBER 1997 AS NOTED PROJECT NO- DRAWING NO: SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY N.T.S. 97100 M801 5 1 C VALVEJ _VE 5T tE- 3 73 3 ZAMBONI RM- ECIRC. PUMP 1\coi 0''um 0_1 15- mrw PUMP 3 T E N11 DETAIL NUMBER N 3 D R �DR —750 k' b c- CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SITE 10 1 2 z N0. ISSUES DATE BY I i I 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2 1997 KS 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 99 KS I . I I I 'I II II _ JI II II ►1 II 11 II I I II II i j j I REFRIGERATION 114 II I II II II II II i STAIR NO.6 I i it I — I � i 10 I � I I I RELIEF & SAFETY SHUT—OFF VALVES I j ' MECHANICAL VE � 1 112 113 ----- _ ELECTRICAL -RECEIVING u ' I II I I I j 1oa I I REFRIGERATION I II W/R STAFF I I 114 I 111 106 ( EXISTING RELOCATED SPRAY WATER SUMP W/R a° II II J II II ® 109 — — — — r------------1 ------� CONDENSER ON ROOF (TYPICAL) 150 COLD & 75 W FOR NEW RINK I i I I \ I -----J PRAY PUMPS W/R PRO SHOP \\ I r �J \ 110 NEW COMPRESSOR 75 HP (50 HP MOTOR) I I i i I I STORAG 104 SLAB HEATING HEAT EXCHANGERS I I I I EW PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER �L, I LOBBY II ' 102 EXISTING RELOCATED COMPRESSOR 1 11 I I 75 HP (75 HP MOTOR) II it I I I Er II II STAIR NO.1 I * I ( I I i EXISTING ALARM SYSTEM SAFETY 101 I I I WATER SUMP C/W SPRAY WATER PUMP I I L J II I' & 2-CHEMICAL PROPORTIONING PMPS. I I REVISED AS PER POST-TENDER 11/13 II I I I OM. H.W. HEAT EXCHANGER 1 KS SET OUT LINE —- I I ADDENDUM R-1 1997 EXISTING RELOCATED COMPRESSOR NO. REVISIONS DATE BY - - ------- 75 HP (75 HP MOTOR) it I� STORA j — — — — I I I I 200 COLD BRINE & 100 WARM I I ST0_E „7 _ _ _ _ r _ I I BARRY • BRYAN BRINE FROM NEW REFRIGERATION I I I I JAN ROOM TO EXISTING RINK. I 118 I I I I - I ASSOCIATES 1991 ) LIMITED I - -_J L-- - - J I 0 COLD WATER LINE ' BRINE & SLAB HEATING PUMPS ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS I GENERAL _ i t OFFICE I r EXISTING 2-75 HP COMPRESSORS I I I _ _ _ _ EXISTING ROOF EVAPORATOR i I i ( I -J i , I MCC-11 13FP Telephone (905) 666-5252 CONDENSER. i I ;I ( _ LEIPCIGER VIIA CHILLER TO BE REMOVED I I I I STORAGE -'I I J - —fT— - - -%$ I�— �- - � I I � � KAMINKER - I IT MAN FROM SITE i I 119 MAIN I I I j TICK I j I I And Partnori Ins. OFFICE 1 I I I CONCESSION 122 I I i i\\ , ` cam acar I I TORONTO SUDBURY EXISTING TANK i I 129 I I 'T _ I I 416 445-8255 705 675-6881 II I sTO �� i ===X21= == __ =�1 I I I ( ) �( ) II 1 12 --- --- - - I REFRIGERANT PIPING - I I F-153-7I IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII / i REFRIGERATION ALARM PANEL -- IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII / DETAIL CONNECT TO EXISTING HEADERS 1 I NOTES K.SHARMA (150 COLD BRINE, 75 WARM BRINE I XISTING M.C.0 / NUMBER OR C/W ECCENTRIC REDUCERS) I I I K ROOM �� I / SCALE: 1:50 REEFER REFERENCE I I I VESTIBULE i.) COMPLETE REFRIGERATION PLANT SHALL BE RELOCATED DRAWING NO. ' I BRINE PUMP i SLAB HEATING J / & REASSEMBLED IN NEW REFRIGERATION ROOM C/W ALL OF HEAT EXCHANGE rr - / VALVES, PUMPS, HEAT EXCHANGERS, CONDENSER, TANKS, 1 PUMP/HEAT E CHANGER � - 103 I I I / RELIEFS, M.C.C., ALARM SYSTEM ETC. it I LKM #97309 2.) EXISTING SYSTEM (2-75 HP) & NEW (1-75 HP) / COMPRESSOR WITH 50 HP MOTOR, CHANGE OF BELTS AND PULLEYS TO SUIT A 75 HP MOTOR FOR FUTURE) SHALL __3 CORRIDOR / I BE PIPED TOGETHER WITH RELOCATED CONDENSER AND PROJECT: / NEW 75 HP EVAPORATOR CONDENSER, NEW PLATE TYPE ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS II FI-23 / HEAT EXCHANGER & CONTROLS. GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX / i MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON I I I HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO I I I DRAWING: 10 11 12 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN FOR WEST SECTION OF 13 REFRIGERATION PLAN SEE ADJACENT FLOOR PLAN DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY PART FLOOR PLAN C.V.L. K.S. SCALE: 1:100 DATE: SCALE: EM100 SEPTEMBER 1997 AS NOTED PROJECT NO: DRAWING N0: 97100 � ! � . 1-11 2= . ,. \ �()�� CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE SIZE NO. ISSUES DATE By 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 1997 KS 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/1 KS 32mm O.D. PLASTIC RINK PIPING 6mm DOUBLE PRONGED SUPPORT LEGS SPACED 30mm CLEAR APART, PLACED ALTERNATELY ON EITHER SIDE OF 10mm BAR. 10mm CONTINUOUS SMOOTH BAR IR DISCHARGE F30 CLEAR T.O.C. R00 65 0 L) 0 CD mm SUPPORT LEGS ALL PIPE CONNECTIONS THIS SID EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER ON ROOF 10mm SMOOTH BAR BOLTED DOWN TO SUPPORT STEELWORK CONDENSER OPERATING WEIGHT APPROX. Ir 4750 KG. DETAL OF RI�NC PPE CHAS AIR INTAKE THIS SIDE N.T.S. 2000 CONDENSER RETURN TO REMOTE SUMP TANK. ROOF I STEEL I BEAM W31 009 (TYP. FOR 2) STEEL COLUMN SUPPORTED FROM STRUCTURAL STEELWORK (TYP. FOR 4) COLUMN LOCATIONS TO SUIT JOIST LAYOUT (BY STRUCTURAL). S.S. HOSE CLAMP (TYPICAL) REFRIGERATION ROOM 1 REVISED AS PER POST—TENDER 11/13 KS 1 00m ADDENDUM R-1 1997 I NO. REVISIONS DATE BY EDGE OF — RINK SLAB BARRY • BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS SECTIONAL ELEVATION OF EVEPORATIVE CONDENSERS DETAL OF PLASTIC PPE FETURN BINDS Telephone (905) 666-5252 N.T.S. (TYPICAL FOR 2) N.T.S. LEIPCIGER KAMWER MITELMAN And Partners Ina. CC04M LTND EPIGI � TORONTO SUDBURY (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 r TAIL BER — .SHARMA-7 STEEL SADLE FABRICATED FROM 2 STAINLESS STEEL WORM GEAR PIPE TRENCH COVER DETAIL OR INK BOARDS 5mm PLATE C/W 12mmo SHACKLE REFERENCE BOLTS TO SUIT 1500 SCHEDULE 40 CLAMPS IN TANDEM (TYPICAL) DRAVIANG NO. (144qr OF 0� BRINE PIPING. 38mm MINIMUM CONCRETE TOPPING LKM X97309 PROJECT: STEEL SADL 00 CENTRES 1500s BRINE SUPPLY do RETURN S E L O LEFT WOOD BLOCKIN 1 ( PIPE HEADERS ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS //' ' ICE 37mm REIGID INSULATION I TOP OF SLAB GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX /' / SLEEPERS C/W IRON CHAIRS TO SUPPORT RINK Q MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ° 4 ° / / PIPES. HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD 4 ° HORIZONTAL SUPPORTS FOR HEADERS e ( ° (BY REFRIGERAION CONTRACTOR) BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO / ' 75x75x8 STEEL SNGLES O 1500 CENTRES 1 , 2 N /' I 13050000 LONG STEEL PLATE O 1500 �\ / _ _ _ _ _ CENTRES (BY OTHERS) DRAWING: 750 BRINE I I SUPPLY d RETURN HEATING PIPE HEADERS. SCHEMATICS & DETAILS DEPRESS BRINE PIPING AT ° UNDERFLOOR HEATING PIPES ° RINK BOARDS FOR RIGID ° O 300 0.C. 50mm RIGID INSULATION ON 3 SIDES REFRIGERATION INSULATION do CONCRETE a a TOPPING. e e e zi e ea ° CONCRETE TRENCH BY OTHER ° ed a ° DIVISION SLOPE TO DRAIN ° DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: C.V.L K.S. TRENCH PFM DETAL SADDLE DETAL TF&NCH DETAL DATE: SCALE: EM100 SEPTEMBER 1997 AS NOTED N.T.S. N.T.S. N.T.S. PROJECT N0: DRAWING N0: 97100 R801 . : 1`-97 r . CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND 'VIERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT THE 517E L.E4E NOTE 1.) DIAGRAM SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY.REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR SHALL RD REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE BE RESPONSIBLE FOR RELOCATING EXISTING PUMPS. TANKS, COMPRESSORS. RS REFRIGERANT SUCTION MCC, HEAT EXCHANGERS do ACCESSORIES AND INSTALL IN NEW ROOM C/W NEW PLATE/FRAME CHILLER. NEW COMPRESSOR. PUMPS, TANKS ETC. •RL REFRIGERANT LIQUID 2.) EXISTING CONDENSER SHALL BE RELOCATED & PIPED ALONG WITH NEW RR '— REFRIGERANT RELIEF 3*) CONDENSER 3. ALL PIPING SHALL BE NEW B BRINE SUPPLY 4. PROVIDE NEW MCC FOR ADDITIONAL EQUIPMWENT ADDED 5. ALL PIPING IN TRENCHES AND DISTRIBUTION PIPING TO NEW PAD BY BR BRINE RETURN 6.) REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR HALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING A ( I I I I I I I ( I C CONDENDSER WATER SUPPLY COMPLETE FUNCTIONING SYSTEM FOR BOTH ICE PADS, INCLUDING SIZING OF I ( I I I I I N0. ISSUES DATE BY CR CONDENDSER WATER RETURN PUMPS, CONDENSERS, PIPING, PLATE/FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER AND CONTROLS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10/2 -- - WATER SUPPLY FOR ICE TEMPERATURE, CONDENSERS, PUMPS ETC. I I ( ( ( I I I I I ( ( ( I I I 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 1997 KS n PIPE INSULATION 11/13 32 PLASRIC UNDER SLAB PIPING I I I I I ( I I f f f I I I I AT 300 ON CENTER I I I I I I ( I I f I I I I I f 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1997 KS (TYPICAL) 20 VENT 32 PLASRIC RINK PIPING I I I I I I I I I I I I f AT 100 ON CENTER I I I I I I I I I I I f f f ( I (TYPICAL) IIIIIIII IIIIIIII 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I l i f l f l l 20 PURGE (TYPICAL) I I I I I I I I CONNECT TO EXISTING 1500 HEADERS I I f I ( f AND 75 HEADERS IN EXISTING TRENCH PIPING FROM NEW PAD 20 DRAIN (TYPICAL) I I f f I f f 150 BRINE SUPPLY RETURN I I I I I I I I FOR COLD & WARM BRINE PIPING Y DRAIN LEVEL GAUGE 38mm NEW BRNE EXPANSION TAN�C e I I I I I I I I I 38mm 0 BR -- IIIIIIII I -- Ililfllf i ' 7 IIIIIIII fulfill ----- -- --� � 1- -i- -1�— — ---II — - - - - - - - - - - L_ 20-- r i i i I I I I I �IE-�---- -- ---L- --�--L— ----�—� I I �— - - - - - - — — — I — _ �- — �- - -L — - - - - � -� Yi r-------- -- -------- — ------� I - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - -J 2 38mm NEW ROOM RNWC EXISTM NDOOR RNWC �--20 2 38mm L--REVERSE RETURN —25 NEW BRINE CIRCULATING PUMP 200 O B 200 BRINE SUPPLY k RETURN FROM EXISTING PAD O BR 10 00 2 - 25 GLONE VALE IN SERIES I ( L200 -4--- 20 MAKE-UP CONNECTION 2 SAFETY RELIEF VALVE SET -BRINE MIXING TANK (TYPICAL) 20 MAKE-UP CONNECTION 25 EQUALIZING LINE FOR 1723 kPa (250 PSI) 50 AMMONIA 7 (TYPICAL) 20 DIFFUSER � 15 PURGE (TYPICAL) 20 EW PUMP EXISTING RELOCATED WARM BRINE CIRCULATING PUMP. RD RD O 15 DUAL RELIEF VALVE LJ DOMESTIC H.W. RD HEAT EXCHANGER 10 I I RELOCATED PUMP F I INCREASE TO 100 CONNECTION (TYPICAL) Ag W-4 L200 200 PLATE/FRAME HEAT EXCHANQEA o 10 2 ALFA LAVAL TYPE MID DWP-250# TITANIUM 3 o EXISTING RELOCATED EVAPORATOR 200 I i 15 PURGE (TYPICAL) O r, B.V. 3 INCREASE TO 100 CONNECTION - 50 TO NEW RINK (TYPICAL) 44� BY DIV. 15400 BY REFRIG. R4 T REVISED AS PER POST-TENDER 11/13 1 ADDENDUM M-1 1997 KS JI V-4 B.V. 75 NEW EVAPORATOR CONDENSER 200 TO EXISTING RINK �25 � cr L) U LSCB-75 N0. REVISIONS DATE BY 25-j 0 0 OVER FLOW (TYPICAL) BARRY • BRYAN BALANCE FLOW EQUALLY FOR BOTH PADS 100 DRAIN (TYPICAL) FOR COLD BRINE do WARM BRINE. SURGE DRUM ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED (900x,eoo) I ( -100 I i ARCHITECT - ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS I Telephone (905) 666-5252 1251 LEIPCIGER SDmm KAMINNKER 75 25 MITELMAN 25- (QUID TRAP i And Partner Inc. EXERM RELOCATED Cat�uM ENG�l5 SLAB HEATM TORONTO SUDBURY LMOER HEAT EXCHANGER (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 1IF—K IF— 0: —25 0 200 150 �-75 DETAIL e� NUMBER - K.SHARMA 50 EMERGENCY COLD WATER DETAIL OR NEW UNDER SLAB HEATNK� FLOAT VALVE SUPPLY CONNECTION DRAWING 0. � � HEAT EXCHK�ER 0 DOMESTIC WATER LINE 125 AMMONIA VAPOR HEADER LKM #97309 50mm I DOM WATER LINE REDUCE PRESSURE BACKFLOW PROJECT: N.C. PREVENTER do HUT-OFF VALVE 00 F100 N C BY PLUMBING DIVISION ADDMON AND ALTERATIONS 38mm 5 i 0 I BY REFRIG. GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX 2 I I BY DIV 15400 I MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON I OIL SEPARATOR 38mm 0 I (TYPICAL) 1 75 COMMENCE WATER CONNECTION TO HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT AT THIS BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO 100 SUCTION 40 POINT. 5 2 2 2 ° 250 WITH HOSE END FITTING DRAWING. 2 2 PH CONTROL SYSTEM 5 L50 FLOAT (TYPICAL) ° 15 PLASTIC TUBING 5 TO MOTOR STARTER 20 -•��0 OIL RETURN 0 - SCHEMATICS DIAGRAM (TYPICAL) p GLOBE VALBE - ADJUST FLOW RATE 40 TO GIVE 10' TEMP. RISE ACROSS REFRIGERATION C-1 EXISTING RELOCATED C_2 EXISTING RELOCATED �'-`� COMP. AT FULL LOAD. 100 75T COMPRESSOR 75T COMPRESSOR 75T (TYPICAL) CHEMICAL PROPORTIONING PUMP NEW COMPRESSOR 100 SOLENOID ENERGIZED �� OIL COOLS 75 HP (50 HP MOTOR) OPEN ON COMP. START (TYPICAL) � (TYPICAL) � � EXISTING RELOCATED NEW SPRAY WATER PUMP DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: SPRAY WATER SUMP C.V.L K.S. 100 OVER DATE: SCALE: EM100 XISTING RELOCATED SEPTEMBER 1997 N.T.S. SPRAY WATER PUMP PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: 97100 R802 , . y ! 7 � flew}� ® Jol, ������/m�� - s .. ra CONTfiACTI�R SHAH CHECK ANA-VERIFY ALL T»MEIRS11oNs AT THE st"ta=" NOTES: RE HYDRO:SERVICE t 1000 v ,i (TYP. 1- ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE NEW TRANSFORMER PAD. GROUNDING EXISTING FINISHED GRADE j NEW DUCT BANK CONNECTED TO EXISTING AT A SUITABLE LOCATION. REUSE FINIS lU GROUNDING PLATE HV CABLES AND PULL INTO NEW TRANSFORMER PIT. IN 1000 ELECTRICAL ROOM \� \ r \\ \ \, \ ° A (TYP.) 2- EXISTING 500WA TRANSFORMER SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH NEW • • CAB[F 75OkVA TRANSFORMER BY ONTARIO HYDRO. ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE BY OPENING MrDRO. 00 PRECAST CONCRETE FOUNDATION 3- TEMPORARY FEED TO EXISTING ELECTRICAL ROOM: EXISTING FACILITY SHALL REMAIN . �° OPERATIONAL AT ALL TIMES. 440 LEAVE 3000mm OF COILED CABLE INSIDE FOUNDATION (TYPICAL) 1. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 600A TEMPORARY UNDERGROUND FEEDER 7 120 120 i- FROM NEW TRANSFORMER 70 EXISTING PAD. CONNECT TO EXISTING CABLES. NO. ISSUES DATE BY N 0 N N f 3//0 BARE Cu GROUND WIRE 0o � 0o fj 00 DIRECTLY BURIED 300mm BELOW 2. TEMPORARY FEEDER SHALL REMAIN UNTIL NEW ELECTRICAL ROOM IS BUILT AND 1 ISSUED FOR HYDRO'S REVIEW 9/23/97 T.H. GRAS TRANSFER IS COMPLETE THEN THE TRANSFORMER PAD AND CABLES SHALL BE . : 3000 PSI CONCRETE REMOVED/ABANDONED. EXISTING SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE REMOVED. REFER TO n t , ••... 00 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND POWER LAYOUT FOR DEVILS. 10011 2 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2/97 T.H. 4- EXISTING METER SHALL BE RELOCATED TO NEW LOCATION. PROVIDE CONDUITS AND TYPE II DUCTS TO GROUNDING PLATE WIRING TO SUIT. - - �'.., : . IN GROUNDING ROOM 'r 4 PLASTIC SPACERS 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13/9 T.H. • • • • EXTEND EXISTING GROUND 5- ALL WORK SHALL MEET ONTARIO HYDRO'S REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO GROUND ROD (19mm►x3000L) CO-ORDINATE WITH HYDRO PRIOR TO PROCEEDING. '� O 1.5M O.C. WIRE O COLUMN A7 & A8 c°w AND RECONNECT TO NEW (4 REQUIRED) 6- SHUTDOWN FOR TRANSFER SHALL BE KEPT TO MINIMUM, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO 356 1118 356 52 457 610 457 [152, 1829 GROUNDING LOOP CO-ORDINATE SCHEDULE WITH THE OWNER AND ONTARIO HYDRO. ^ •• a L L 1829 .•�. e.-•. 10M REINFORCING RODS 1829 PLAN P LA TRANSFORMER S FO R M E R PAD GROUNDING PLAN NOTES RE EEPONE SERVICE:PLAN N.T.S N 1- EXISTING TELEPHONE SERVICE SHALL BE RELOCATED TO NEW ELECTRICAL ROOM. 75 to ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE r CONDUIT CONNECTED TO EXISTING DUCT AT DUCT BANK DETAIL (SECTION Q, LIFTING HOLES 1829 A SUITABLE LOCATION. EXISTING CABLE SHALL BE REUSED AND PULLED TO NEW LOCATION. N.T.S. I I CO-ORDINATE WITH BELL TELEPHONE COMPANY PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH WORK. 1829 10 ELEVATION CN ELEVATION I 1 I 1 1829 �, 1 1 N r I r -j r ELEVATION °HYDRAN7i 0 1 0 I 1 1 N I ( � I I HALL 132.80 $POLE It 1829 1 1 1 I PRECAST BASE FOR PADMOUNT N71.26'OCE 610 TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION TELEPHONE PEDESTAL 1 GRASS CABLE TV PEDESTAL I ELEVATION = 1 I ELEVATIONELEVATION BCP- 1 14B ,-- - ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- NOTES. GRAVEL P RECAST TOP FOR PAD M 0 U NT PRECAST FOUNDATION 1. CONCRETE STRENGTH - 4500 PSI (MINIMUM) CRAW Z 2. DIMENSION - 1829 x 1829 x 152 �� I a E� TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION FOR PAD M 0 U NT TRANSFORMER 3. LIFTING HOLES FOUR (4) VAUGHAN HYDRO SPECIFICATION ONLY. 0 °u 4. REINFORING - STEEL i �, BCP- 114T BCP- 114 P 5. THREAD INSERTS - 13 NC DUI. x 38 "cc! .C --- --------i----�---- -_-__\\ _ 6. WEIGHT - 3225 LBS. (APPROXIMATE) ` WATER \ I 1. TOP ENTRY OPENING - 1118 x 508 1. CABLE ENTRY OPENINGS - 610 x 457 EXIST. CONNECT 0 EXTERIOR \ I VALVE CATCH - WALL UNTED LIGHTING � I 2. CONCRETE STRENGTH - 4500 PSI (MINIMUM) 2. CONCRETE STRENGTH - 4500 PSI (MINIMUM) BASIN - CIRCU M-13 3. DIMENSION - 1829 x 1829 x 229 3. DIMENSION - 1829 x 1829 x 1219(H) C 152 WALLS J 4. LIFTING HOLES - FOUR (4) - VAUGHAN HYDRO SPECIFICATION ONLY. 4. LIFTING HOLES - FOUR (4). I 5. REINFORING - STEEL i i 6. THREAD INSERTS - 13 NC DUI. x 38 5. REINFORING - STEEL I Q 7. WEIGHT - 2275 U3S. (APPROXIMATE) 6. WEIGHT - 5800 IBS. (APPROXIMATE) I � PYLON. A�1-17 . 347V, !� FOR S. AVAILABLE IN 229 THICKNESS UPON REQUEST - INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING CASH ALLOWANCE IN THE (ENDER: VAUGHAN HYDRO SPEC. 114T9 1- TELEPHONE SERVICE RELOCATION, HYDRO CONNECTIONS AND TRANSFORMER $30.000.00 (THIRTY THOUSAND) Q I ( 4 I 915 MIN. I WHERE POSSIBLE I COVER o CURB a A5PMt n� TC I 2S I N + FINISHED GRADE 1 I h I I I I Lij 00, v b I - --- �S e I Z ATE E> ANCHOR BOLTS 5/QEWALK I \ A D D I T I O N HYDRANT 4 EXISTING LIGHT E]x 25 PVC CONDUIT A4P r GUS m STANDARD V CATCH i ARNE T B. RiCKARD I � , m W T � RE� BASIN ; RECREATION COMPLEX 15M O 305 TIES 5:Q_ - --- EXISTING STRUCTURE �, WO ? T T GI D 4 #20M ST DA * • it I •A- I I �tLE I O ml woo 75 MIN. FROM EDGE OF COVER TO CONCRETE BASE I PAD MOUNTED TO BE CONFIRMED PRIOR TRANSFORMER s ` r;��TO POURING CONCRETE BAS TC NEW L ION OF V 111EPHON SERVICE O 6L SEE F PLAN V. I 1 _ '4 4 ( LI HT 1 REVISED AS PER POST TENDER 11/13f97 T.H. CAT H N ELECTRICAL ROOM r� STANDARD EXISTING TRANSFORMER �ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM E1 TO BE REMOVED ; PAD NEW DUCT REVISIONS DATE BY ODD a >a V -�_ UNGRCRn!/ND NO. LGHTING POLE BASE TYPE DD & DDT ) I o I I I N.T.S. EX. ASPHALT PARK/NG LOT raj 11 I I GAS uNw cq ox� I --- - - ------ --- ,vALVE L BARRY • BRYAN - CONCRETE STRENGTH 20 MPA I I Z ���7 --- � • - - PLACE CONCRETE IN PRE AUGERED HOLES I I - -- --- - ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED IOGND - 25C M-9 I � O is ARCHITECT - ENGINEER - PROJECT MANAGERS I I 1 - MANHOLE ':. EE` ( 3 #10 + OGN - Telephone (905) 666 5252 NEES RE EXTERIOR LIGHTINGS o � � 1'' �� I Q � � I EIPCIGEI� 1- ALL UNDERGROUND WIRING FOR PARKING LOT UGHIING SHALL EXISTING LIGHT \ R \`-J ❑.E� BE 10 AWG RWU90 MINIMUM C/W SEPARATE #10 AWG GREEN STANDARD 1 -F--- CRO ND WIRE IN RIGID PVC CONDUIT. INSTALL UNDERGROUND ► , M-g� 'D(f CONDUITS AT A MINIMUM OF 1000mm BELOW GRADE. 1 w w, 64 M-7 I �/11�1 I 1 Z QD' And Partners .Inc. 2- VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF LIGHT STANDARDS AND SIGNS ON 1 1 EX. MAPLE I p C0 BVGt48 SITE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. Lr Fl E! \a\ `�J J 4' �6/ ( / HYDRA T �� 3- RELOCATE EXISTING PHOTOCELL TO THE ROOF. RECONNECT TO _ I / ONNECT N DUCT TO TORONTO SUDBURY CONTACTORS AS REQUIRED. o V ( IN ( ) /(705)675-6881 OF I I / EXISTING D c� 416 445-8255 I I / LOCATIO 0 BE 4- PROVIDE 6 - POLES 20A LIGHTING CONTACTOR FOR NEW 1 i i •b ON ►� I EXTERIOR LIGHTING CIRCUITS #M-5, 7. 9. 11, 13 AND 17 GR VE \�� eL CU CONTROLLED BY PHOTO CELL EXIST. ' 1.' l (� I / \ RE. p CATCH �- �-� 1 ' I SMGI[E `� BASIN -�` 1 1 �J M-9 EX. CRABAPPLE a ry DD' : '�i i.�+ J 1 1L.//« EX. OAK O O ---------CT ' --- -- CATCH 0 ' \ IN 5 1 _/ -------- ---- -- _ ------------------------ -------- A' ---------- BAS AsP r J EXIT. - ------ - _ OF BASIN DDr 1 s ` I i,�� \ 2 0 ht POLE LKM #'97309 R i Es Pi UTILITY -� A 0 #1 ND - 25C / r20 I 1.� FINISHED GRADE M 5 EXISTING G TELEPHONE ` `��g �� 1 ; �! U PROJECT. SERVICE NOTES I g -� -� 4 0 71- \ 1 ,,<v \ \\ c' EXISTING LIGHT DDr' EXISTING HV U _ ,r ',: b AND AL 1 ERtA 1 I M ANCHOR BOLTS 2 #10 + #IOGND - 25C TO REMAIN. EX. SP ti � �' � D� STANDARD I 2X10 + NO - 25C SEE HYDRO SERVICE NO / 1.'' s,s,,,� ° Off' t' C " ET B. COMPLEX EX 25 PVC CONDUIT tR ° ' HE I `, :•:Y �` T - T / ATER �VE J / 0 PEE STAL I I ' MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 15M O 305 TIES j BUS PARKING 30-413 HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD T v ---- +� ,IW PoLE N66.57'30 N BOWMAIWLLE ONTARIO <^ - 61 .0 WA7rAUV •I 4 #20M -�`�`' WATER VALVE�� N64 O 30"E HYDRANT°FIRE 40Dr �H . s��"'A LIKK DRAWING: STD�D G� 1r 75 MIN. FROM EDGE OF EPN COVER TO CONCRETE BASE TO.BE CONFIRMED PRIOR ,µq/N 1 1.33 --�' CONCH A) TO POURING CONCRETE BASE LIGHT R CATCH SITE PLAN, AND D AI L BASIN Gum ELECTRICAL N Fa-ad „E N62 p0. GUS w OSIGN O LIGHT - LIGHTING POLE BASE (TYPE EC) O i_ sio�r�K STANDARD DRAWN BY: K.H. CHECKED BY: T.H. GUY POLE LIGHT PA12r�r N.T.S. STANDARD 52.74 ' CONCRE7�� HYDRANT LIGHT DATE: SCALE: 1:400 SEPT. /97- - CONCRETE STRENGTH 20 MPA H STANDARD n/ - PLAICE CONCRETE IN PRE AUGERED HOLES / V O PROJECT N0: DRAWING N0: Hli'/A MAWOLE LIGHTS H/G r r � �oo STANDARD 16NC7 , THZ E!01, :4 NM.: 1897 11:40 AK1 , a ;! 1991 B ARFy Wn1',, LSI�ICIATES (1991; LIMITED ..... r^{. v :, qq x. <.. • _ - - CON7IOACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AT.THE SITE 18 iC 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 Ion 'E2011 I I I I I I I I I I I NO. ISSUES DATE BY I I I I I I 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2/97 T.H. PROVIDE CHAIN M HANG 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13/97 T.H. I` FIXTURE O 3000 AFF ! PROVIDE CHAIN TO HANG FIXTURE O 3000 AFF (TYP.) j M-13 -1 M-3 I j BBw F9W R - - - --- - - - --- - -' -- - - - - - - wa EM#1 w EM#11 STORAGE i EM#1 X2w STORAGE w w� STORAGE �" �#1 �#1 �1 i " • . i 151 F•5' 115 l � I I F5 • I M-26.6 w FT MOMANTARY "ON'. SPRING RETURN "OFF" 13 �X�TOGGLE SWITCH FOR GOAL LIGHTING M-18.10 sic w • wqw w • .�. wAw A A .qw A .A7 j wqw M-10 EM#1 wq■ M-4 M-8 M-10 M-6 Ds -- - --- - - - -J-- - ----- - - - ---- -- --- e i I REFRIGERATION 114 I O \ O O O I EM#1 I j _ w w w qw ■q■ ! .qw ■Ar A" A I M-6 I I "BB" M-13 I MECHAK& I j I 1f2 "A1" "A1" NEW ARENA wA1" •q,- i ®M-2 ®M-2 150 O ®M-2 GAA-2 I � (Du -- EM#1 I I W/R i w ■ • w ■Aw rqw •qw wqw wqv 111 ! M-8 M-8 EM#1 V I O / O O O I M-1 B GEM#1 I w8 i ! I rq. - sic C wA7 mg M-6 I 1 M-6 M-10 "FV wFT M-8 M-4 M-4 M-10 0__ - ------- - -__-- - U S OF)FIXTURE O 6100 A.F.F. ' I LOW i • NEW ZAM I do HORN #3 CONTROL Q ENT TO 102 EXIST= .# D- F, I . . w w F5 - REf EM#2 EM#3 EM#3 E #3 EM 3 ` 1 STAIR N0.4 EM#2 #2 / 143 ,55 3 r� "Ft M-3 STAIR N0. �+ r F6" "X "rte "� r w I M-26.5 w - 4.11 "F6w wFfr "Fir •F'6• LY � "F6" wF6w "F6" "F6w "F6" "F6w "F6" wFar 0 i F5 F6" M-24.1 - EM D" -3 1 REVISED AS PER POST TENDER 11/13/9 T.H. _ EM 42 EM sm NQ.3 "F1" ADDENDUM # Et w g}IOp w DRESSING ROOM ROOM DRESSING ROOM DRESSING ROOM DRESSING ROOM DRESSING ROOM 3 No. REVISIONS DATE BY. � � � M-24.12 142 139 138 136 134 #3 F6' #2 146 M-26.2 M-24.5 2 M-22.8 M#3 M-22.6 M-22.3 M-22.2 M-3 M-26.3 "Fir F wFt� FB" �w 3 I w F4Aw "FE' wF6w "F8" "F6" "F6" "F6" "F6" wFSw "F6" "F6" "F6" "F6" "Fer "F6" *FS" "Far aFf wF6w #3 BARRY 9 BRYAN M-3 Z _- - ___-- - --- - -- - - --- -- - --- - " I I I -F4A" ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED F5 #2 F6" S -16.11 11 wB8" 6EM#2` -- -- -- EM#2 c CORRIDOR F6" F6w ��� STORAGE wll SEr wF8�' wFW wFEBw STORAGE 1 2 • O ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS Ff M EFT wF5 "Fir "F wFS' wF5 F "F5' • 135 w 3 w 141 140 I F5 -24.6 M-2 2 -22.9 •� M-22.10 w� qA- -22.4 M- 2.1 FS" AA-3 Telephone. (905) 666-5252 "Ft Fg, M-24.4 M-24 M-22.5 M-26.4 -2 , "FO I 0 37 "Fg■ "Far w fv - .15 131 LEIPCIG►ER off RESURFAICER /� DA - - -- - - - 148 14RR I M#3 M- .14 F1 And AN Inc.RU I I I RELOCATED ZAMBONI WAR IIIING LIGHTS , + SO COl!{91AJNC EN6t AND HORN C/W CONTROL, DEVICES i w F5 "F5 I I w F5 CCT.# D-50 I I I F1 w TORONTO SUDBURY - I I � LOCATION 3 -16.1 (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 - LOBBY/ RMDOR LIGHT SWITCH (CCT.# M-20) I I - LIGHTING CONTROL FOR NEW RINK. 120 I I - VIEWING AREA CCT.# M-30 I I I - LIGHTING CONTROL FOR EXISTING RINK (RELOCATED) EM#2 ST NO.2 h_ I I L F53 . . ANG • � EXIST. ARENA 149 i ! i 0 LKM #97309 E I I I i I II i I I I I E I ■ PROJECT: • j RE ' ADDITION AND ALTERATIONS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GARNET B. RCKAFO COMPLEX 1 X 1 EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT. CO ELECTRICAL�M MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BATTERY UNITS. (SIZE AS NOTED) ■ z �C HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD BATTERY UNIT SHALL BE LUMACELL CAT. #RG12s (347V AC - 12V DC, 36OW �• AA-2 _J BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO CAPACITY). UNIT SHALL BE FOR OPERATION ON 347V. SINGLE PHASE WITH NUMBER ------ (MAINTENANCE) OF HEADS AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. UNITS SHALL BE C HARDWARE CONNECTION WITH SEALED PURE LEAD 10 YEAR LIFE BATTERY. E CHARGER 20A.1 P i ■ SHALL BE COMPLETE AUTOMATIC, SOLID STATE TYPE WITH BROWN OUT FEATURE, CAPABLE OF FULLY RECHARGING DISCHARGED BATTERY IN 24 HOURS. TRANSFER ( 0 DRAWING: DEVICE SHALL AUTOMATICALLY SWITCH LOAD ON AT POWER FAILURE AND OFF OFF ON RETURN OF NORMAL POWER. . w CCT. #4/8 (20A,2P) 14- UNITS SHALL HAVE LOW VOLTAGE DISCONNECT FEATURE. --� , z o ELECTRICAL ■ NOTES: RE EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT LIGHTS 20A,2P i i Q (V . I I E.:. w NEW RINK • 1- REMOTE SHALL BE SINGLE OR DOUBLE SURFACE MOUNTED, VANDALPROOF C/W LEXAN CUBE AND I I m CCT. #8/10 (20A,2P) Q LIGHTING LAYOUT 12W, 12V QUARTZ HALOGEN LAMP - LUMACELL RSQB/RSQBD I I � 0 2- TYPE "X1' EXIT LIGHT: I 1 ■ z Z 347/60OV, 30, 4W 20A.2P ( 1 I RED LETTER ON WHITE BACKGROUND. LED TYPE FOR 347VAC AND 12VDC OPERATION - LUMACELL CAT.# LER-400 SERIES I I I Z Q DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 3- TYPE w Xf EXIT LIGHT: PUSHBUTTONS ± SAME AS TYPE X1 BUT VANDALPROOF LUMACELL. CAT.# LER-400-VR-SIP. O � K.H./H.N. T.H. , LOCATED IN f--�•-L�J u ■ U C� DATE: SEPT /97 SCALE: 1100 4- DUAL-LITE, EMERGI-LITE ARE CONSIDERED AS EQUAL OFFICE 130 1 L . - . - . J 5- UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. EXIT LIGHTS SHALL BE TYPE "X1" L1J PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO. W RINK .LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM (/) 6- CONNECT ALL EXIT LIGHTS TO CIRCUIT M-f AND BATTERY UNIT AS NOTED. ■ N.T.S 971Q0 : f a , ' , '4, ,, _ , .., , > • c.�r+c;�D\rrnwr+�s����os��2ot.uwc, NOV n�c�u ss� ��s� #.. .Ma Mw•rm�eruw.� . . .. __ ly �4 ry[ w � {y CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY AT THE SITE` , NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2/97 T.H. 1 C 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13 T.H. I I I I I ~ I I I I I F-vi Z. wp id 1 d EF-9A i D-7 STORAGE ! A- A-28 -� j WP 151 S,i3ORAGE ! D-9 i 115 A-31 A-33 I FOR HEAT TRACING CABLE 50mmC TO SCORE BOARD FOR HEAT TRACING CAB LE FOR HEAT TRACING CAB CCT.j D-36 VERIFY LOCATION CCT.# D-36 VERIFY LOCAMON CCT.# D-36 VERIFY LOCATION WITH DIV.15 (GFl BREAKER) WITH DN.15 (GFl BREAK WITH DN.15 (GFI BREAKER) -� sly I DEHUMIDIFIER 600V. 30, 20A S - -- -- -- -- ----------- -- ------ — ------- FED FROM 'AAA" I RIEFRK�ITION 114 I I 0 0 0 0 I MOTORIZED DAMPER CCT.jA-16 EF-2 - 60OV, 30, 1 HP BS-49/51/53 (15A. 3P) SCORE BOARD D-6 NEW ARENA � I 150 II ,AL 100mm x 100mm -BOX ('TYPICAL) 2 il2E KEEPER'S BOX 2 #12 - 13mmC 112 ITO 1 d 25mmC TO P/A TO TIME KEEPER'S /0 - SYSTEM Cri td � FYI (®MD GOAL IJGHT / 25mmC TO J-BOX O n GOAL UGHT NOTE #4) -202 D- D1-3 ! COUNTER IN FIGURE ?S SKATING ROOM. p b w ^ 111 i I I i I O— 0 0 I 0 0 HEAT ING LE D-48 I 4HP - 20BV. 10 LIFT D- 2/34 (15A.2P) EF 12 D 22(PO-At)20V. -9 LOW — - — - -- I F-22 102 UNIT UH1 ' REVISED AS PER POST TENDER — — D-30 f H R 2082 1 ADDENDUM # E1 11/13/ T.H. \ / I /45 (15��2P \ / DEHUMI 20A .3/ I 1 NO. REVISIONS DATE 13Y \ / j C C-26/28 f (30vA.3P) AIR N0.1 \ / I STAR No.4 D-w WP 152 BARRY • BRYAN F155� a ❑ RELOCATED MECHANICAL CONTROLS ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED - X D-31 � D_2 D-1 D1-20 51-14 D1-8 D1-2 FROM EXISTING OFFICE CCT.� F-21 0/H DOOR 2082/10 I I NO.3 I FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ARCHITECT ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS D-51/53 (15A,2P) I I / \ I D IG ROOM DRESSING RON DRE NG ROOM DRESSING ROOM L F-17.,9 Telephone (905) 666-5252 / \ D-13 �' LNG ROOM 139 138 136 6' 134 133 d GFl 143 142 � — LEIPCIGER i / \ D-1 -33 � — — � WOf SHOP D T F1 476 CORF=R T D-13 D-25 D- 9 D1-22 ! _ D1-10 D1-4 Inc. Z - � - I � I I I I I I I F-18 — — — — 145 GFl ♦1 And Portnors CFI GFl Fl GFl GFl GFl STORAGE I F-22 F-16 EXISTING FAN AND U/H CONSULIM afto 8 115 i -35 144 TO BE RELOCATED TORONTO SUDBURY D-27 -21 D1- STORAGE 1-18 D1-1 135 I i 2 �' _ (416)445-8255/(705)675-6881 _ ® D-15 FIRST ND I i 141 I 137 ! I I -24 1'.IO ,'� 1202. 3.7A 147 D1-1 I I FOR PfA SYSTEM f D-29 I LP'D 1' 1-6 I I F = D-3 / D-15 { D-37 D-37 1 ,� a. T R FOR MECHANICAL CONTROL LIT I o T I kT 131 F_20 _ } PANEL D-54 _ EF-17 ( /GHP.120V) ,WIPE SUMP PUMP CONTROL I I UNIT HEATER UH-2 1d, C T.��D-6zP'120v) EF-18 (1/6HP,120V) E-- CCT. D-60 45KVA MO 1 d 01-7 I I Dl-9 E 1 d I F+ O ` D-58 RESIXAM I I I Lp'CC' THIGH ( EFL- 0 I I I _1 D I I I S PAM / ' OF II 1Z0 LKM X97309 O/H. D-4 DOOR 2082/1. I I PROJECT: - MD i D-47/49 (15A.2P) I REINST EXISTING I DEHUMI IFIER STAR NO.2 D-3 I I I ; ► HEA TRACING CABLE 'S3 - _ _ _ _ - AND ALTERA! NS ER CCT. D1-5 SCCTT. PUMP. 1202.-,/4HP ; CARNET B. RUIUM COMPLEX E)gST. ARENA HD-48 TRACING CABLE 149 I MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON L I I 1 HWY N0: 2 AND MARTION ROAD j 3D/3/ 1 203V.. P) uFr BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO ! 5 6 7 g 9 10 � 2 3 4 � o DRAWING: 1 X 1 WMS RE TEMPORAW COMMON FOR TEMPORARY MECHANICAL SERVICES GENERAL NOTES: 1 z - ELECTRICAL 1) EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN RENOVATED AREAS SHALL BE REMOVED OR O N NEW RINK RELOCATED. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWING FOR DETAILS. F— W 1- PROVIDE TEMPORARY CONNECTION FOR THE FOLLOWING WHERE EQUIPMENT IS TO BE REMOVED, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO DISCONNECT 1- TWO 15A. 3P BREAKERS IN EXISTING SWITCHBOARD AND FEEDERS FOR POWER FOR SAFE REMOVAL BY OTHER. REMOVE ALL CONDUIT AND WIRING Q POWER LAYOUT TWO 15A. BR K ELECTRIC HOT WATER TANKS. WHERE EQUIPMENT IS TO BE RELOCATED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO EXTEND D 0 CONDUIT, WIRING OR PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT AS SHOWN. INCLUDING CONTROL Z Z 2- ONE 120V. 10, 15A CIRCUIT FOR RECIRC. PUMP (1/4HP) WIRING AND CONTROL DEVICES 1 —• 3- CONNECTION TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FROM SPRINKLER VALVES AND 2) EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN RENOVATED AREA SHALL BE REMOVED Z Q DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY' UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. O K.H.\H.N. T.H. i 2- TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS SHALL BE REMOVED WHEN TRANSFER IS COMPLETE. 3) CIRCUIT FOR TRACING CABLE TO BE C/W GFl BREAKER 30mA TRIP LEVEL REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWING FOR DETAILS. CO-ORDINATE WITH DN.15 DATE: SEPT. f97 SCALE 1:100 4) PROVIDE A TOTAL OF TWO GOAL LIGHTS. CONSISTING OF GROUSE HINDS 10tr1V INC CAST ALUMINUM FIXTURE C/W CAST GUARD. VERTICALLY MOUNTED ABOVE 0 W PROJECT No:. DRAWING NO: -; FENCE BOARD, ALL METAL PARTS TO BE WHITE ENAMEL BAKED PAINT FINISH. , �LJ T 97100 t t99T: ,.t,t:41:NIU . c:\acAo\rt+urr\e7\973o9\E202.n", ++t'W , \ 11 t W d i rJ ` Ehri�f !j ' ��.WJ :. F , - -. 1; y f..f , . CONTRACfOR SMALL CHECK ,N0 VERIFY - _, - AI:1. DIMElIS /II'.Ttd E SITE ' NO. ISSUES DATE BY 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2/97 T.H. 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13 T.H. 1 B 1 C 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 ROOF OF LOWER AREA I � (TYPICAL) HUNG O A.F.F. F ■ w ■ i ■ j V1 I r] fm 1 I i 1 w • F EM#4 EM#4 EM#4 EM#4 t o _ - L. "FSAw wFSA"AA-3 "F5A■ "F5�gw -F5A• •F5A• ■F5A■ "FSAw wFwAA-3 "FSA" "F5A" ��Oft AA-28.1 _3 Inc "C•® EM � � "F5A" w FW "FSAw AA-3 ■ w _.._ w� � EM Bw AA A i h FT � w F5 AA-3 j AA-3 E �$�1 EM# AA-28.3 AREA OF HIGH ROOF EM#4 EM#4 EM#4 EM#4 EM#6 — --— —-- — +------ -- -- ----- - AA 28. [Ell —� NEW ROOF rl 11 , F1 / I EXISTING CONC BLOCK WALL EXISTING SKYLIGHT I i I I LIGHTING LAYOUT 1B 1C 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9 10 REVISED AS PER POST (ENDER 1 ADDENDUM # E, 11/13/9 T.H. i NO. REVISIONS DATE BY, ROOF OF LOWER AREA BARRY BRYAN ' I ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED 1/4HP EXHAUST FAN I STAIR N0.3 F-14 154 ARCHITECT ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS. Telephone (905) 666-5252 I LEIPCICER D-10 N�TELMAN. DN 4R DN 4R DN 4R F-12 `And Partnoe• 'In*. D 12 1 10" ® STAIR Nl0.1 TORONTO U08 Y D-10 F-23 152 (416)445-8255/(705)67,5-6881 oo" FOR 0 SPOT (20A) DN F-14 Z — FIGURE SKATING 202 D-8 10" _ WP MAU-1 ON ROOF EF-1 ON ROOF HEM R --�IT TOP OF 5T/11R Z WP D-8 $T N0.4 C .3M C 320/22/24 ~-CC-2/4/6/(15A.3P) N 201 55 (15 , 3P) O STMt NO.2 D-8 D-26 D-28 D-28 D-28 D-28 DN 153 Z AREA OF HIGH ROOF ®WT F1 OF e(� UCM #97309 7 F-12 F-10 NEW ROOF PROJECT: F-,z ADDffM AND ALTERATKM EXISTING CONC BLOCK WALK CIARNET B. RrA( M COMPLEX EXISTING SKYLIGHT \ MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON HWY NO. 2 AND MAR71ON ROAD BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO EXISTING ROOF DRAWING: ELECTRICAL PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN LIGHTING & POWER LAYOUTS DRAWN BY: K.H\H.N. CHECKED BY: T.H. POWER LAYOUT DATE: SEPT. /97 :, fYt. PROJECT NO: DRAWING N0: 97100 203 . -mwc t9�? _ ,. _ c: rHt sI e� -` . • tfitKr ' , , .r ` g E . %ail Ui\el i i.J r ; • ,. CON R $hiMl CHECK Mo VERIFY . 5059 _ , ALL DIMt'N01N3 AT THE,Sii'E° = . .� . . , ,_. _ .>�► MATCH. LINE. BOILER -.3 LFPW 2 CCT.# A-�7 CMACTOR r,�►-' FOR CONTINUATION CABINET 1 AIR COMPRESSOR EF-6 ON ROOF. 1/4HP. NOTES RE EXISTING ELECTRICAL ROOM M 3 SEE DETAIL #'I 120V. CCT.# A-4 A-3?(20A) 1- EXISTING 600A SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE REMOVED AFTER ALL CIRCUITS ARE MD TRANSFERRED TO NEW PANEL. S 0 FIRE ALARM CONTROL A-2 2- PROVIDE,J-BOX WHERE EXISTING CONDUIT AND WIRING ARE EXTENDED. F7 PANEL ACCESS DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED IF J-BOX IS LOCATED IN INACCESSIBLE "�" LP a1w CEIUNG. OHERWISE, NEW WIRING SHALL BE PROVIDED. _ A-22 N0. ISSUES DATE BY EXCESS 35 CCTM# AP 10 3- UNDERGROUND CONDUITS MUST BE EXTENDED TO NEW PARTITION WALL THEN PUMP 2 UP TO CEING SPACE. NO EXPOSED CONDUIT IS ALLOWED. PROVIDE ALL ILE* CCT.# AP 12 ^ EF-4 ON ROOF. 12OV. 3008 CUTTING AS REQUIRED. �_� Comm 1/30HP. CCT# A-2 (9.87') 1 ISSUED FOR HYDRO'S REVIEW 9/23 T.H. LP 123 SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY RELOCATED U/H FROM 4- REMOVE EXISTING 50 KVA TRANSFORMER AND LP-1,2 LOCATED IN ELECTRICAL FY F1 F1 EXISTING ELECTRICAL° ROOM. TRANSFER CIRCUITS BEING REUSED TO NEW LP "C". M-3 S -- M 3 2 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2/9 T.H. ROOM. 3KW. B(15A.3. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ON SIZE. PROVIDE NEW BREAKERS TO SUIT. O BB-8/10/12 (15A3P) 0. RE 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1,/,3/9 T.H. A-1 5- RELOCATE EXISTING BATTERY UNIT TO STORAGE ROOM. EXTEND CONDUIT, CCT.� #P3 14 BBB" PUMP P4 1/4HP. � WIRING AND RECONNECT TO SUIT. 120V. .# A-6 - wr,, JbR RELOCATED UNIT HEATER 6- RELOCATE UGHTING CONTACTORS AND TIMER TO NEW ELECTRICAL ROOM. MD �- /�/� (2�►) PROVIDE CONDUITS. WIRING AND RECONNECT TO SUIT. RELOCATE PHOTO CELL A-16 TELEPHONE BACKBOARD TO ROOF OF BUILDING, RECONNECT TO SUIT. HWA A-18 11A wum -4 ® ELECTRICAL ROOM LAYOUT BOILER #B-5 SCALE: 1:50 �•�` A-11 MECHANICAL ROOM LAYOUT SCALE: 1:50 "Fr 10 RELOCATED U/H FROM EXISTING 1A 11A �� (C�N�,HUNG 0 A.F.F. REFRIG. ROOM. (15KW. 60OV.30) E E E AA-3 BB-14/16/18(20A.3P) �.1.._., �^ �O �I U 1A 1A 12A I S TO REMAIN M 3 �] EMS A-16 I i • "F5" E E wF o o � t JOUPLEX A-SUMP�PUMP 2-1/4HP , E 1 ) M-3 RE• I HWA E ER 1 ®A-36 E F1 F1 F1 _ TION I C i OS SUMP PUMP. 1 4HP. E - EMS 120V. CCT.# A-30 ER "F5" 'F5" i EXACT LOCATIONS TO BE CO- RDINATED WITH S " 1 4 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR ON SITE TO SUIT. RELOCA D U/H FORM EXISTING - --- - PROVIDE CHAINS TO HANG RES (TYPICAL REFRIG. ROOM (15KW.-600V.30.) P C --- - -- - - -- f FOR LIGHTING IN MECH. do R IGERATION BB-20/ /24(20A.3P) RE REI -3 � .:- ROOM 114 - °` "F5" ®A-32 F -16.3 "FT M-18.1 HWA P I � C 4 t`' EF-7 ON ROOF. A-18 I ! F1" Fl 1 HP.- 600V.30. 5A.3p x/36 ...•,..,.,. STAIR NO.s ( ) x } w..,. .. "F1' F1' "F1" FOR GAS DETECTOR . EM 5 -!- - -- --- T - - -- - -- - --- - -- - - -- - w NOS CCT. A-4o D - ... t _ , _. fir, \ I J M-1 1 S S 1. .F1. f NEW DU BANK & w w 128 w 7-At) #5 MCC-1 SECON FEEDER NEW.TRANSFORMER PAD F1 F1 F1 F1• SEE NOTES RE HYDRO SERVICE M-18.2 M_ MCC-2 ETER NET P R M-3 6 "F5" "F5" I F," F1' MECHANICAL EM#5 / 3 112 113 _1 - D SEE LAYOUT ON RAWING NLESSTHIS 4% RE 10E 0 E E B OTHERWISE NOTED. EYE WASH "F5' 'Fs 1E1.E ELECTRICAL CHANICAL A-3a ELECTRICAL. - -- ---- VEMLE -- - 5 112 107 -fi--�. - 127 ------ RECEW; S F4 M-18.4 F4 1 ~�° SEE LAYOUT ON THIS O i ,08 M-3 EMUS _ � DRAWING UNLESS I ° AA � ■mow -13(20A 108 A-22 6" OTHERWISE NOTED. U/G TEMPORARY FEEDER "F3"w s� w�R m (SEE NOTE RE HYDRO SERVICE) � O 111 ■F�, •F • 1 6 111 `J STWF F7 Fit "F3" _ LIGHTING LAYOUT - DETAIL 2 E #5 J5 109E S A-19 20A) HD W/R 108 O F1 wEr 18.9 F1 71 EF-5 ON ROOF 109 A-21 C MATCH LINE. S) 1 'S 1/4HP. 120V. A-21 1 "F3' - -- - - V CCT. A-20 a D A-23 A 1 F1 F1 I*F1'_ \ A-2 - A925 FOR CONTINUATION A-25 F-4 SEE DETAIL #1 Fl " ' RAMP � HD � �' 1 •AAo HD A�23 1 .6 AAO-11 DRINKING FOUNTAIN 26(2 EF-3 ON ROOF Ft Fl M 3 OS S 1 STORAGE � F-26 � CCT�A-2 120V. EM 15 104 I FROM SWBD AMA PRO SHOP ' w • 5 18.8 w R A-23;`' 105 �;A-27 4 VENDING MACHINES 110 „ I REVISED AS PER POST TENDER wg. ° EM 15 _1 .7 F_6 z` 62/6 B2 a� ` i 123 1 ADDENDUM E1 11/13/0 T.H. F1 F1 F1 Fi F7 M-11 3 kW �/ ,... �. /� F-7 F-9 F-11 A-27 - -- - X N0. REVISKNNS DATE BY } 104 F1 F, 8" A-27 LM M . . I BARRY BRYAN SUM NO.1 � Fi O F1 1 F1 � wMw LOW WP ._, RE 152 F1 F1 ' 102 ' RE R v ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED 1 u I o UP 18 AC-2 ON ROOF. DOOR OPERATOR OPERATOR M 3 AA 3 1" N0.1 43%45/47 (15A.3P) CCT. F-15 CCT. F-15 ARCHITECT •ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS STAN Telephone (905) 666-5252 152 1 1• Sfi� I . • F-4 ER " F1 F1 F1 F1 M I RE IN LEIPCIGER To AREAS EF-15 77, KAK*4aR F-2 EXISTING OUTLETS NIMMAN AA 6.9 I - F-60 TO REMAIN k And Partners In*. . _ ` coNrs ems TORONTO SUDBURY F1 F1 F7 F1 30 _ STO OR AA AOLES SHALL BE REMOVED UNLESS STORAGE -1 .7"F4" "F4" -2 •1 S ■i FF26 I 1- (416)445-8255 /(705)675-6881 _� I Er 118 - --- Z F- -3 JANITOR -- Z 1 ar 2 QLIIYLEiI T BE i {ACATED. ER ' - 16.1 _ - - - 1 -1 F-1 118 EXHAUST HOOD TO BE RELOCATED _ N SHALL BE RELOCATED TO F1 F1 F1 7 I rl EXITING TRANSFORMER PAD TO NEW CONCESSION. I', NOT UM ITED T0: LFr r SEE NOTES RE HYDRO SERVICE "F1" F1" f- M aj yI -3 I 120 EXISTINGCTRICAL ROOM 6.8W '_AND ` AiIVECT TO SUIT ,�_ z STORAGE - - - - -- A -- - - - -- - NaRING�I�ROPHONEOWIRING C__16 A D ,a iC SUIT, REFER TO P/A SYSTEM NOTES. OF 119 SEE DETAIL • .M. ON DRAWING F_4 LKM X97309 _ 6 E801 I F1 O F1 M 1, STAIR NO.2 "F4- S S 4 CORRIDOR f PROJECT: F1 0 -16. F1 C- 2 153 121 j 124 EXISTING P/A SYSTEM TO BE 11DD 1 ION AND AL•1 GI' A 120 _,8. 22 M 1 RELOCA TO NEW OFFICE #130 t ■ w ' ' , EM#6 w FS' P F- I ���� COMPLEX M-3 EF-18 M-1 I -3 i E � C -------------- --� �..1ttV"11�1� B. �1 � C-70 I J # E E E i F1 F1 6' 600V.30. E E RE BB-2 P 6 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON z 0 0 RE M-11 z ( MEEIING ROOM HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD ER -3 EM 6 'BB" � TEMPORARY MECHANICAL ROOM N pR BOLE 125 BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO OE I O F1 EM 6 F1 SEE NOTE ON DRAWING E202 103 ISTINGR L/F�� (SEE NOTES) rrL � F1 RE L' E E vest>etJLE p -----_-----__ MEETING ER 127 EXISTING FIRE ALARM- - DRAWING: 0 E E �.� / I •Mw 103 � / � R .ANNUNCIATOR TO Z r O A1A- , N R R R `FOR 1 8 --� AND R ELECTRICAL 0 F7 z 0 I 1Z3 / RE RE CORRIDOR N 0 N 1 PART FLOOR PLAN I"' WI - W 126 Q Q ___ LIGHTING & POWER LAYOU Z) 0 T -3 z z Z) 0 CCT.# BB-26/28/30 EXISTING CIRCUIT CM z � 1 ~ DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 10 z 1 0 1 K.H. T.H. �- 0 (J Q Q �� DATE: SEPT. /97 SCALE' 1:100 { MATCH LI E FOR CONTINUATION MATCH LINE FOR CONTINUATION PRa,E� ,�; DRAWING ,,,� o w LIGHTING LAYOUT SEE DET IL #2 w POWER LAYOUT SEE DETAIL #2 � o 12 13- W - ' DETAIL 1 �. DETAIL 1 12 12 POWER LAYOUT -- DETAIL 2 9 E�204 00 , �... . _ �. rHi � 7 e2o4.r�` t: �4 NON. O ,, , r r f,ptm 6;97 a ,. SOGI.ATES Y. RY r ... .... ...P�r' _ _ _ s .. .. .. r x ,�, T,_.. ., _..r.. _. .. xr Yt ?,k. r.. Yom_: .,. --... .. -..., .r. .:w - - t - :.; y,; 4 Y n - _ c�ami,,� Ma}_ ,. .,. .. :. .: ...s h r: .:.,a.., ... S - .. ,........ SI ... .. r.. .,,_ .. 'yt ..a ,. _ ......xt- .... .- ,.. y . ,,,. , .cep' N. t .. .. _. r..:. :... .. _. _.. _ ..a.. ,,, ... cr f- S-.,, to A r. v r ' 5, -r ,�J f -_ x,:.. _. .t .,..... ..' .. ,. :.- , t.. _+'rks TED.I '1171 A, y� -. ,. ... } - .. ,.,n.. . ,.. a ,- :. ...... .. _ :._ ,.. '. ... ,�:1. h+ ,r k. .. F _. ,..sue... ,. _ ,. _. ,: ox.. .., - ai� , ..'3?'-ter:..: � ._ I 11 +. s .- _I 1. �_ - .. CONTRACTOR SHALL L CHECK AND VERFY 1.. - . , - ALL DIME[ IS AT THE Sits < . , ._ . _ . , r _. LAF�1A - - - �___—� , � 3 3r 0 50mtnC �— PROVIDED BY OTHER DMSION. F~Z' FLUORESCNl STRiPLIGHT FIXTURE. LENGTH SHOWN TO SCALE ON 20O �-- J FINAL CONNECTION BY DIV. 18 }--� / THE DRAWINGS. LETTER DENOTES TYPE PER SCHEDULE. 11 I 1— EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS EDWARDS 6500• SHALL i E RELOCATED M NEW .2 THAT THE WIRING CONNECTIONS TO ALL EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS SHOW TWAT CEILING OR WALL—IA�UNTED LlGH11NG FIXTURE. RESPECTIVELY. . ELECTRICAL ROAM AND SHALL BE EXPANDED TO COVER NEW AREA. i'ROiVIDE ALL THE INSTALLER UNDERTOOK TO ,HAVE OBSERVED ULC AND CSA REQUIREMENTS. I � 3 500MCM — 76mmC RELOCATED RELOCATED BY OTHER DIVISION. ® 5� INSCRIBED LETTER DENOTES TYPE PER SCHEDULE NECESSARY MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT.REQUIRED FOR THE CONTROL MCC-1 I FINN. CONNECTION BY DIV. 16 �, PANEL PROVIDE NEV RECESSED REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR .3 THAT EQUIPMENT OF THE MANUFAt;TURER'S MANUFACTURE HAS BEEN INSTALLED 400/ L__ _J FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURE. CEILING OR WALL—MOUNTED RESPECTIVELY,1. REFER TO ZONING SCHEDULE FOR NEW ADDITTONN. ZONES. IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. AND THAT ALL ' I © �� . ` . SIGNALLING DEMC6 OF WHATEVER MANUFACTURER HAVE BEEN OPERATED OR NOTE 1 SHOWN TO SCALE. INSCRIBED LETTER DENOTES TYPE PER SCHEDULE. TESTED TO VERIFY THEIR OPERATION: AND EXISTING 72 2— PROVIDE NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES AS SHOWN ON PLANS DEVICES CONDUITS, WIRING AS 200/12 P I ® ® LIGHTING FIXTURE A5 ABOVE, CONNECTED NIGHT LIGHT CIRCUIT . REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEMS. NEW FIRE ALARM (MANUAL PULL STATORY. .4 THAT THE SUPERVISORY WIRING OF THOSE CIEM5 OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO I N0. ISSUES DATE BY BELLS, SMOKE DETECTORS, HEAT DETECTORS) SHALL MATCH EXISTING. A SUPERVISED CIRCUIT IS OPERATING AND THAT THE GOVERNMENTAL REGULATIONS. �� 1 EXISTING T3 � � CEILING OR WALL—MOUNTED ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGN RESPECTIVELY, SINGLE 3— COMPLETE INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH IIiE REQUIREMENTS OF THE IF ANY, CONCERNING SUCH SUPERVISORY WIRING, HAVE BEEN MET TO THE I OR DOUBLE—FACE AS INDICATED BY FILLED IN PORTIONS, WITH ARROW AS CAN ULC S524—MBB 'STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSiEbIS'. SATISFACTION OF INSPECTION OFFICIALS. 200/12 P NOTE INDICATED LEITER DENOTES TYPE IRO SOCKET CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT. 1 ISSUED FOR HYDRO'S REVIEW 9/23/97 T.H. WHERE THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION EXCEED THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS THE MANUFACTURER SHALL SUPPLY REASONABLE AMOUNTS OF TECHNICAL „_„ EXISTING RINK ASSISTANCE WITH RESPECT TO ANY CI HINGES NECESSARY TO CONFORM TO THE RELOCATED C `� LIGHTING 2 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2/9 T.H. OF THE ULC STANDARDS, THESE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL GOVERN. ABOVE DURING THE PERIOD OF INSPECTION BY THE MANUFACTURER. MAKE METER CABINET M I 60/40A,3P SURFACE MOUNTED EMERGENCY LIGHTING REMOTE HEAD OR HEADS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. LETTER DENOTES TYPE 4— MANUAL PULLSTATKM SHALL COMPLETE WITH BREAKGLNS.S ROD. PULL LEVER. AVAILABLE MANU MANUFACTURER. MANUFACTURER ELECTRICIANS AS DESIGNATED BY THE r'�NOTE #2 - EXISTING WEST 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13/8 T.H. EVACUATION ALARM KEY SWITCH TO MATCH EXISTING. THE VERIFICATION MUST MEET CAN STANDARD S537 AND OPEN FLAME IS NOT . 300 3Qh3P `" PARKING LIGHTING 120 VOLT SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES WITH ONE. TWO OR THREE GANG TO BE USED FOR TESTING. COVERPLATE 15 AMPS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5— THERMAL DETECTORS SHALL HAVE TWIST LOCK MOUNTING FOR EASE OF MAINTENANCE. ON COMPLETION OF THE INSPECTION AND WHEN ALL OF THE ABOVE CONDITIONS _ r.——__� 12 — 13mmC 4 12 — 13mmC F A TESTING AND REPLACEMENT ACTIVATION OF THE FIXED TEMPERATURE ELEMENT IN THE .ABOVE HAVE BEEN COMPLIED WITH. AND DEFICIENCIES INDICATED IN PRELIMINARY I $ SWITCHES AS ABOVE, SUBSCRIPT DENOTES 3 WAY OR 4 WAY. DETECTOR SHALL BE INDICATED BY A VISIBLE MEANS. DETECTOR SHALL MATCH EXISTING. REPORT HAVE BEEN CORRECTED, THE MANUFACTURER SHALL ISSUE TO THE 30/15A,2 I RELOCATED TRANSFORMER L----J 3 3 4 FOR OTHER SUBSCRIPTS SEE ABBREVIATION. ARCHITECT: SEE NOTE 3 3 — 25mmC 347 VOLT SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES WiTH ONE, TWO OR THREE GANG 8— SMOKE DETECTORS SHALL MATCH EXISTING. EXISTING HVAC FROM. TRANSFORMER PAD .1 A COPY OF THE INSPECTING TECHNICIAN'S REPORT SHOWING LOCATION OF 100/7 I UNIT # 1 ® COVERPLATE 15 AMPS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7— FIRE ALARM AUDIBLE SIGNALS SHALL BE (1(' OR B' BELL AS NOTED) VIBRATING EACH DEVICE AND CERTIFYING THE TEST RESULTS OF EACH DEVICE. / ''3P CT's POLARIZED DC TO MATCH EXISTING. 2 RUNS OF SEE NOTE 3 3 — 25mmC EXISTING I•NAC �h 120 VOLT 15 AMP DUPLEX OR SINGLE U—GROUND RECEPTACLE RESPECTIVELY. .2 A CERTIFICATE OF VERIFICATION CONFIRMING THAT THE INSPECTION HAS BEEN 4 #500MCM — 100mmC _ UNIT . 2 W 8— WIRING SHALL BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLASS 2 REQUIREMENTS, BUT SHALL BE COMPLETE AND SHOWING THE CONDITIONS UPON WHICH SUCH INSPECTION CONCRETE ENCASED —"'I 100/70A.3P � • 4 3 0 — 50mmC . " � 120 VOLT SINGLE RECEPTACLE OF AMPERAGE AS INDICATED. PROTECTED FROM MECHANICAL INJURY OR OTHER INJURIOUS CONDITIONS SUCH AS AND CERTIFICATION HAVE BEEN RENDERED. LP A OA 1. MOISTURE, EXCESSIVE HEAT OR CORROSIVE ACTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLASS I _ 112.SkVA 800-120/208V I 200A, 3P 120 VOLT 15 AMP DUPLEX OR SINGLE RECEPTACLE, SUBSCRIPT DENOTES REQUIREMENTS. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE SOLID COPPER. SIZED TO SYSTEM .3 LN�S OF LIABILITY SHALL BE IN FOR THE TENDER INSPECTION. ALL COSTS INVOLVED I I 30. 4W TRANSFORMER (DwP SPECIAL TYPE AS PER ABBREVIATION UST. MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. ALL COST INVOLVED IN THIS INSPECTION SHALL BE IN THE TENDER PRICE. i I I I SPACE 0 0. AS A� BUT MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER OR 1010MM ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. 9— VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT AN INSPECTION OF THE SPECIAL RECEPTACLE 208 VOLT OF AMPERAGE AND TYPE AS INDICATED. FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT. EXISTING AND NEW. INCLUDING THOSE COMPONENTS NECESSARY 200/150A.3P THERMAL 10— MISTING SPRINKLER PUMP SHALL BE REMOVED BY DN.15. MISTING SPRINKLER ZONES = I � 14 3 0 — SommC 30A U—GROUND UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. TO THE DIRECT OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM SUCH AS MANUAL STATIONS, MAY BE REUSED FOR NEW ZONES. ( I 2 3P IP C" CONCESSION DETECTORS. SMOKE DETECTORS AND CONTROLS SHAD. BE CARRIED OUT BY AN INDEPENDENT 3RD PARTY. THE INSPECTION SHALL COMPRISE AN EXAMINATION OF SUCH I I 3 #1/0 — 38mmC i I 120 VOLT 15A DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, SPLIT WIRED WITH EACH HALF ON EQUIPMENT FOR THE FOLLOWING: .1 THAT THE TYPE OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IS THAT DESIGNATED IN THE 4 #500MCM — 89mmC SEPARATE CIRCUIT. SPECIFICATIONS. I I I 4 3 — 32mmC LP "F,. v TELEPHONE OUTLET WITH 19mmC E.C. TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD . 100A, 3P I I _ Q.N UNFUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH, SIZE AS NOTED. FOR OTHER SUBSCRIPTS SEE ABBREVIATION. . DP "BBB" i 20 208V 4W -•c�o{� �30�� FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH, SIZE As NOTED (E.G. 30 AMP WITH 20 AMP FUSES) / \ ^ ;,I „ zoNE # 11 ZONE 1 s —� 400 MAINS L_p ARENA LIGHTING (SEE DETAIL �'l..J AS ABOVE BUT WiTH FUSETRON FUSES.T� I I ON DRAWING E201) //1600 m m HIGH ® MOTOR STARTER. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 4 #3 — 32mmC .M" l LOCATION ZONE No. LOCATION I 100/100A, P I EXTERIOR LIGHTING CCT.# j - _ — -- — =T=- AA-5. 7, 8, 11, 13. 15 AND 17 �/ MOTOR AS INDICATED. INCUIDE FINAL CONNECTION ARENA (EXISTING) 1 2 MAIN VALVE SVII u .ARENA (EXISTING) 3 4 MAIN VALVE SV2 T Z 7`7 iT 1 � I I 6 POLE 20A LIGHTING CONTACTOR CONNECTED TO IXISIING PHOTOCELL 120 VOLT DIRECT CONNECTION FOR USE AS NOTED. INCLUDE FINAL CONNECTION. MULTIPURPOSES ROOM (EXISTING) 5 6 MAIN VALVE SV3 \/ _ _ • \ --= �' 208 VOLT, SINGLE PHASE CONNECTION FOR USE AS NOTED. INCLUDE NEW EAST ARENA 7 8 MISTING WET SYSTEM SV4 _ _ J _ I I 4 3 0 — 50mmC "BB" ® FINAL CONNECTION.--T I-_I,/r NEW GROUND FLOOR 9 10 MISTING WET SYSTEM PS1 / ( I 200/20QA' P I ® CONNECTION. NEIM SECOND F100R 11 12 NEW WET SYSTEM SV5 ZONE 17 208 VOLT THREE PHASE CONNECTION AS ABOVE. INCLUDE FINAL KITCHEN HOOD 13 14 NEW WET SYSTEM PS2 I I 45KVA 600-120/208V ® 600 VOLT, THREE PHASE DI ; NNECTiON AS ABOVE. INCLUDE FINAL FAST STAIR 15 18 MISTING DRY SYSTEM SV8 STORAGE AREA 3w, 4W TRANSFORME2 CONNECTION. (CHANGE ROOMS) '' WEST STAIR 17 18 EXISTING DRY SYSTEM PS3 I 4 #3 — 32mmC "Cc, 4 #2/0 — 50mmC -�■r I♦ FLUSH OR SURFACE MOUNTED ELECTTICAL PANEL RESPECTIVELY. 100 100A. P L•,p "if LP "D1' MISTING WET- SYSTEM FS1 19 20 NEW DRY SYSTEM SV7 I / I � Q JUNCTION BOX 11 I NEW WET' SYSTEM FS2 21 22 NEW DRY SYSTEM PS4 • e d [1] PUSH BUTTON EXISTING DRY SYSTEM FS3 23 24 NEW SECOND FLOOR WET SYSTEM SV8 ZONE # 7 I I �. 3P 3 #6 — 25mmC NEW DRY SYSTEM f54 25 26 NEW SECOND FLOOR WET SYSTEM PS5 60A, 3P 4 #6 — 25mmC ® THERMOSTAT.11 NEW SECOND FLOOR WET SYSTEM FS5 27 28 SPARE \ ( I 3 #10 — 19mmC WP A/C # 1 ON ROOF e FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR. SPARE 29 30 SPARE I 30/30A, I 20A. BOOV. 30 Q FIRE ALARM HEAT DETECTOR. SPARE 31 32 SPARE I 3 #10 — 19mmC DEHUMIDIFIER FIRE ALARM MANUAL PULL STATION.-I zz�1111Z,141LZII.l SPARE 33 34 SPARE ZONE # 9 I I 3o/30A, 'L'� 20A, 600V' 30 0/PIZ I SPARE 35 36 SPARE ;/5" SPARE 37 38 SPARE I I I �� FIRE ALARM BELL, 1 d'DNA. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SPARE 39 40 SPARE "V FIRE ALARM DUCT MOUNT® SMOKE DETECTOR. / I I 1— THE ACTIVATION OF ZONES 2 TO 26 (EVEN NUMBERS ONLY) SHALL CAUSE TROUBLE ONLY. SPRINKLER SYSTEM VALVE/SWITCH. SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY DN. 15 - ZONE # 1 i I WIRED TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BY DIVISION 16 2— ALTERNATE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (NOTIFIER) IS ACCEPTABLE PROVIDED THAT EXISTING DEVICES TO BE SV SUPERVISED VALVE REPLACED WITH NEW. ALL DEVICES, NEW AND EXISTING, SHALL BE OF SINGLE MANUFACTURER. (IN DING SEATING) r i I FS : FLOWSWRCH f PS : PRESSURE SWITCH rf�ff�fffe"11 1 ffr�f?rrfr f SPACES I 0 Fl1E ALARM CONTROL PANEL fff fff ff ff ff fff fff ff f I ff ff�f f ZONE # 5 "/ ff f f I 1 B V ELECTRIC HEATER WiTH INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT. ZONE # 3 ff '�/ ff f/ f/ f/ f/ ELECTRIC HEATER DESIGNATION, LETTER DENOTES TYPE AS PER SCHEDULE. f fr 1?/�ff�f1/f/ ff�fff L . — . . J f f f f f V NUMBER DENOTES KILOWATTAGE AS PER DRAWINGS. _ . SWBD "AAA" 800A-347/600V 3�D 4W N/L NIGHT LIGHT. RT INDICATES RAINTiGHT. . WP INDICATES WEATHERPROOF. NOTES: GFl INDICATES GROUND FAULT INTERRUPIER. 1 REVISED AS PER POST TENDER 11/13 T.H. ADDENDUM # E1 25m C EX1511NG ARENA (O CENTRE OF RINK) 1— EXTEND EXISTING CONDUITS AND WIRING FROM TRANSFORMER "T2" (WEST ARENA) AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. NO. REVISIONS DATE , BY . EXISTING SIAMESES (AT WEST ENTRANCE TO BUILDING) 25mmC AND T3' (MULTIPURPOSE ROOM) TO NEW SWBD AAA" NIEC NOT IN THIS ELECTRICAL CONTRACT. NEW ARENA 2— RELOCATE EXISTING 3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS FOR RINK LIGHTING, WEST PARKING LIGHTING. A.1 DENOTES CIRCUIT #1, PANEL "A" BARRYs BRYAN MAD EX ERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING FROM MISTING ELECTRICAL ROOM TO NEW ELECTRICAL OFFICES ROOM. EXTEND CONDUITS. WIRING (INCLUDING CONTROL WIRING) AND RECONNECT TO SUIT. A,2,1 DENOTES SWITCH #1, CIRCUIT #2. PANEL "A"LOBBY AND I M 2ND FLOOR WET SYSTEM S S S — — I VIEWING ROOM 3— EXTEND EXISTING CONDUIT WIRING AND RECONNECT TO SUiT HD DENOTES POWER CONNECTION FOR HAND DRYER ASSOCIATES (1 991) LIMITED MISTING SPEAKERS 4— WIRING FROM MCC-1 AND MCC-2 TO REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BY OTHERS TO MISTING WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM E DENOTES MISTING EQUIPMI if nTO FI� ; ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS _ � Telephone 905 666-5252 M NEW WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM ER DENOTES EXISTING EQUIP TED P ( )9,1 FIGURE SKATING ROOM RE DENOTES MISTING EQUIPMEN1 y 11 ON. EXTEND CONDUIT, LEIPCIGER 797. TO EXISTING DRY SYSTEM AT SE M M WIRING AND RECONNECT TO, , ' OTHERWISE NOTED. y CORNER OF EXISTING RINK ..,: KAM�lCER / 12mmC R DENOTES EXISTING EQUIPMENT 'iO 1��MTELMAN + - .k - ---FLOW SWITCH ('TYPICAL) P/A M TICKET BOOTH _ - TO NEW PAD DRY SYSTEM SYSTEM 12mmC And ParM�rs Inc. M STAFF ROOM NACHO CHEESE HEATER 7 CONStR.TNG H�.�6 I 11 120V-545W — C-46 „N TORONTO SUDBURY 1. w (416)445-8255/(705)675-6881 NACHO C — CABIN CASH REGISTERr , 11 DRY VALVE C/W COMPRESSOR 12 M OFFICE 120V—ASSN C-46 FS5 FS1 FS2 FS4 (TYPICAL) 12mmC 85OW MICROWAVE C-44 y ` FS3 M TIME KEEPERS BOX s �a I POP DISPENSER >_ C—� �� �' PS5 PS1 2 PS3 PS4 p A 11. ", {- x / AMG K o FRI E 1 x -,a li SUPERVISED VALVE �� C_6 C-49 C-88 �$t SV3 SV8 SV4 SV5 SV6 SV7 (TYPICAL) _ — _ _ — _ _ I r J - L _J — — SCALE N.T.S. L — - - ---- — — — ---- Z 100 I — 120/208V. tr. 3W POPCORN �. r ��� ' ' OF cr SV2 SV1 I POPPER. 2400W C-51/53(3QA>1.2P) r razes; ' C-1i f ,, LKM #97309 200 1) PROVIDE A COMPLETE EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM C/W PULL STRING FOR P/A SYSTEM I 2) PROV10E 4"x4" OUTLET BOX AT SPEAKER LOCATIONS AND 2"x4” BOX O MICROPHONE _J JUICE COOLER HOOD. CONNECT FIRE SUPPRESSION PROJECT: LOCATIONS SYSTEM TO A SEPARATE F/A ZONE IN LINE COFFEE MACHINE I \ / _ AND ALTERATK)NS WATER SUPPLY 3) TERMINATE ALL CONDUITS INTO A 1Tx12' BOX IN CEILING SPACE AND 50mm C-5 / CONDUIT DOWN TO PA SYSTEM 1900W 120V I \ C�52 S L�R IM�Ni� 4) ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE 19mm UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN i / \\ 100A 100A SPACE GARNET B. RICKARD COMPLEX HOOD 200A F— E —— C_54 100A 1 OOA .I- N.T.S. C— 11 � r---I MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON IG I I C-61 r— BOA 30A 200A I HWY NO. 2 AND MARTION ROAD EF-16 C 4 I 30A 30A EF-1 C-66 IC-45 2438.4 200A BOWMAMALLE ONTARIO I (96") 200A CASH REGISTER -- C-44 JUICE COOLER 200A POP DISPENSER POPCORN IG __ C-63 . 800A DRAWING: C-60 120/208V, 10, 3W SPACES MAIN 2400W. — C-55/57 400A SWITCH (30A, 2P) LEGEND, DETAIL AND MICROWAVE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM CASH REGISTER POP DISPENSER - C-44 C-56 ELECTRICAL a jp�-"1 wJN� �� ��W 1 65.2-- --- 965,2 65.2----- `1 1. w (38') (38") (38 ) SCALE: 1:50 DRAWN BY: K.M. CHECKED 8Y: T.H. NOTES: "��' � � DATE: SEPT. /97 SCALE: N.TS.` SCALE. N.T.S. 1— POWER LAYOUT IS SHOWN FOR PRICING PURPOSES ONLY. LOCATION SHALL BE VERIFIED ON SITE WITH THE OWNER AND THE ARCHITECT. PROJECT NO: DRAWING .NO: 2— VERIFY POWER' REQUIREMENTS (VOLTAGE/PHASE/AMPERAGE) PRIOR TO ROUGHING—LN. ��100 - � . . I I I r - . � . 01 . - C: kb TMI 9 97 EW1_.DWG ,N M 10. 1997 11:43 & ' : . , .. , .: I :. 1997 LIMITED .. ... .. - .- .. - _ .-... .. .r . r _ i CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY ALL DNMf]lSONS AT THE SITE t f TYPE i f f 7WE. NB LP PANEL D 1 . . � PANEL A INNS: 225 AMPS LOCATION: ELEC"IRICAL ROOM PANEL C INNS: 22$ NIPS LOGT�N: STORAGE MAINS: 225 AMPS LOCATION: STORAGE _ . 1 Z08Y .311 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE 120 08V 4W MOUNTM: 120 20BV 39 4W MOU U LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE WATT'S DESCRIPTION PROT. CIRCUITS PROT. DESCRIPTION WATTS WATTS DESCRIPTION PRAT. CIRCUITS PROT. DESCRIPTION WATTS WATTS DESCRIPTION PROT. CIRCUITS PttOT. DESCRIPTION WATTS TELEPHONE BACKBOARD 15A 1 2 15A EF-4 (1/30HP) do 14 (1/30HP EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 1 2 15A EXISTING CIRCURS RECEPTACLES 15A 1 2 15A RECEPTACLES TYPE LAMPS DESCRIPTION APPROVED EQUAL BOILER (CONTROL) 15A 3 4 15A EF-6 (1/4HP) EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 3' 4 15A EXISTING r CIRCUITS GOAL LIGHT 15A 3 4 15A RECEPTACLES "A" 40OW MH PENDANT MOUNTED METAL HALIDE FIXTURE, WIDE DISTRIBUTION, PRISMATIC KEEN LENS, SPECULAR REFLECTOR, DIE CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, 347V HPF BALLAST COOPER BOILER (CONTROL) 1501 5 6 1501 PUMP P-4 (1/4HP) EXISTING CIRCUITS 1501 5 8 1501 EXISTING CIRCUITS SPARE 1501 5 6 1501 RECEPTACLES C/W WIREGUARD AND STEM HUBBELL BOILER (CONTROL) 15A 7 8 15A HIGH WATER ALARM EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 7 8 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPARE 15A 7 8 15A RECEPTACLES ACCULITE CAT.# AG400MH — 347 BOILER (CONTROL) 15A 9 10 15A PUMP P1 EXISTING CIRCUITS ISA 9 10 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPARE 15A 9 10 15A RECEPTACLES NO. ISSUES DATE BY 40OW MH BOILER (CONTROL) 15A 11 12 15A PUMP P2 EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 11 12 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPARE 15A 11 12 15A RECEPTACLES 'A1' 15OW SAME AS TYPE "A" BUT C/W STAND—BY LAMP. RELAY KIT. QUARTZ 1 ISSUED FOR TENDER 10/2/9 T.H. HANG DRYER 20A 13 14 15A PUMP P3 EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 13 14 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 13 14 15A RECEPTACLES Gn RECEPTACLE 15A 15 16 15A MOTORIZED DAMPER EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 15 19 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 15 16 15A RECEPTACLES 'L7 2x13W PL RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGHT. 7 5/LI" DLL. 5 5/1 S' UGHTOUER 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 11/13/97 T.H. SPARE 20A 17 18 15A RECEPTACLE EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 17 18 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 17 18 15A RECEPTACLES DEEP. DIE CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR, 347 VOLT CAPRI HPF BALLAST. CAPRI HAND DRYER 20A 19 20 15A EF-5 (1/4HP) EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 19 20 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 19 20 15A RECEPTACLES HALO CAT. H800 HUBBELL RECEPTACLE 15A 21 22 15A RECEPTACLES EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 21 22 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 21 22 15A RECEPTACLES 'C' 2x18W PL RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLGHT. 7 5/8"DIA. , 5 5/16' DEEP, UGHTOUER CT HPF PRESCOUTE RECEPTACLE 15A 23 24 20A HAND DRYER EXISTING CIRCUITS" 15A 23 24 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 23 24 15A RECEPTACLES DIE CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, CLEAR ALZAK REFLE OR. 347V H BALLAST CAPS HALO CAT.j H802 HUBBELL RECEPTACLE 15A 25 26 20A HAND DRYER EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 25 26 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 25 26 SPACE RECEPTACLE 15A 27 28 15A EF-9A (1A) EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 27 28 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 27 28 SPACE "Or' 28W PL SURFACE MOUNTED VANDAL RESISTANT COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES KENNAL 9r' SQUARE DIE CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, FULLY GASKETTED PRISMATIC LENS RECEPTACLE 15A 29 30 15A SUMP PUMP (1/4HP) EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 29 30 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 29 30 SPACE AND 347V HPF BALLAST. RECEPTACLE 15A 31 32 15A HIGH WATER ALARM EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 31 32 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 31 32 SPACE FAIL—SAFE CAT.# EC SERIES RECEPTACLE 15A 33 34 20A DUPLEX SUMP PUMP (2x1/4HP) EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 33 34 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 33 34 SPACE "G" 2x26W PL SURFACE MOUNTED COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE 17 1/4" DIA. EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP 2001 35 36 1501 HIGH WATER ALARM EXISTING CIRCUITS 1501 35 36 1501 EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 35 36 SPACE POLYCARBONATE LENS DIE CAST HOUSING. WHITE FINISH 120V HPF BALLAST UGHTOUER VISION I I� A171 B AIR COMPRESSOR 20A 37 38 15A SPARE EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 37 38 15AA EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 37 38 SPACE CFI SPARE 15A 39 40 15A SPARE EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 39 40 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 39 40 SPACE "F1' 2x32W T8 2'x4' RECESSED IN T—BAR CEILING FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE. HINGED DOOR PEERLESS FRAME. ACRYUC LENS, 347V RS ELECTRONIC BALLAST. COLUMBIA SPARE 15A 41 42 15A SPARE EXISTING CIRCUITS 15A 41 42 15A EXISTING CIRCUITS SPACE 41 42 SPACE MEIN= CAT.# G SERIES. HUBBELL SPACE 43 44 SPACE JUICE COOLER (3,7A) 15A 43 44 15A CASH REGISTER SPACE 45 46 SPACE JUICE COOLER (3,7A) 15A 45 46 15A NACHO CHEESE HTR. & CABINET 700 'F2" 4x32W T8 SAME AS TYPE F7 BUT C/W 4 (AMPS CPEERLESS SPACE 47 48 SPACE 1900 COFFEE MACHINE 20A 47 4a 15A MICROWAVE 850 PAN EL f 1 f �E' NBLP METALUX GT. G SERIES COLUMBIA MATS: 225 AMPS LOCATION: STORAGE C&M, HUBBELL SPACE 49 50 SPACE 1900 COFFEE MACHINE 20A 49 50 15A MICROWAVE 850 120/208V, 30 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE WATTS DESCRIPTION PROT. CIRCUITS PROT. DESCRIPTION WATTS "F3A" 2x32W T8 1'x4' RECESSED IN T—BAR CEILING FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE, HINGED DOOR CF) PEERLESS SPACE 51 52 SPACE 3001 51 52 1501 EF-13 FRAME, ACRYLIC LENS 347V RS ELECTRONIC BALLAST, COLUMBIA' 2400 POPCORN RECEPTACLES 15A 1 2 15A EF-15 do EF-8 (1A) METALUX CAT.# G SERIES. C&M. HUBBELL SPACE 53 54 SPACE 2P 53 54 1501 H000 SPACE 55 56 SPACE 30A 55 56 15A POP DISPENSER (5A) RECEPTACLES TICKET BOOTH 15A 3 4 15A RECEPTACLES SPACE 57 58 SPACE 2400 POPCORN 2P 57 58 1501 POP DISPENSER (501) RECEPTACLES TICKET BOOTH 15A 5 6 15A RECEPTACLES "F3" 2x32W T8 SAME AS TYPE "F3A" BUT C/W FLANGE FOR DRYWALL CEILING { SPACE 59 60 SPACE RECEPTACLES 15A 59 60 15AA POP DISPENSER (5A) VENDING MACHINE 1501 7 8 2001 HAND DRYER 'F4' 2x32W T8 FLUORESCENT STRIP LIGHT, LENGTH SHOWN TO SCALE. 347V RS ELECTRONIC CFI VENDING MACHINE 15A 9 10 15A RECEPTACLES BAL�T, PEERLESS SPACE 61 62 30A RECEPTACLES 15A 61 62 15A FRIDGE 2x25W T8 METALUX CA7.f SS SERIES CC&M.MB HUBBELL SPACE 63 64 F/F HEATER 6000 RECEPTACLES 15A 63 64 15A FRIDGE VENDING MACHINE 1501 11 12 1501 RECEPTACLES VENDING MACHINE 15A 13 14 15A RECEPTACLES "F4A" 1 x32W FLUORESCENT STRIP UGHT. LENGTH SHOWN TO SCALE. 347V RS ELECTRONIC CFl SPACE 65 68 3P SPARE ,501 65 66 1501 RECEPTACLE PEERLESS SPACE 67 68 ,501 RECEPTACLE DOOR OPERATORS 15A 15 16 1501 RECEPTACLES 1x25W T8 COLUMBIA METALUX GT. SN SERIES CAM. HUBBELL SPACE 69 70 1501 EF-16 CONTROL 15A 17 18 15A RECEPTACLES f TYPE: NHDP CONTROL 1501 19 20 1501 RECEPTACLES "F5" 2x32W T8 TWO LAMP FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE INDUSTRIAL TYPE C/W REFLECTOR 347V CF]PEERLESS PANEL rY1 MAINS: 225A LOCATION: — SPACE 71 72 15A RECEPTACLES RS ELECTRONIC BALLAST. COLUMBIA 347/600V. 301 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE SPACE 73 74 15A RECEPTACLES CONTROL 15A 21 22 15A RECEPTACLES METALUX GT. DIM SERIES. C&M. HUBBELL WATTS DESCRIPTION PROT. CIRCUITS PROT. DESCRIPTION WATTS WT 15A 23 24 15A P/A SYSTEM SPACE 75 76 1501 RECEPTACLES � EXIT LIGHTS 15A 1 2 20A LIGHTING (ARENA) SPACE 77 78 15A SPARE SPACE 25 28 1501 DRINKING FOUNTAIN "F5A" 2x32W T8 SAME AS TYPE F5 BUT C/W WIRE GUARD CO�L.UM�BIA NIGHT LIGHTS 20A 3 4 30A SPACE 79 80 15A SPARE SPACE 27 28 15A RECEPTACLES C&M. HUBBELL EXTERIOR LIGHTING 20A 5 6 LIGHTING (ARENA) SPACE 81 82 1501 SPARE SPACE 29 30 15A RECEPTACLES "F8" 2x32W TB SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT L.UMINAIRE, VANDAL RESISTANT, FULLY KENNAL EXTERIOR LIGHTING 2001 7 8 3P SPACE 83 84 1501 SPARE SPACE 31 32 1501 RECEPTACLES GASKETTED, CLEAR PRISMATIC LENS. 347V RS ELECTRONIC BALLAST. METALUX CAT.# FPS SERIES EXTERIOR UGHTING 20A 9 10 20A SPACE 33 1 34 15A SPARE "F7" 2x32W T8 SURFACE MOUNTED 1'x4' FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE. HINGED DOOR FRAME, CFI EXTERIOR LIGHTING 20A 11 12 LIGHTING (ARENA) SPACE 35 36 15A SPARE ACRYLIC LENS, BLACK FINISH 347V RS ELECTRONIC BALLAST. PEERLESS EXTERIOR LIGHTING 2001 13 14 3P PANEL 'CC' MAI S: 225 AMPS LOCATION: STORAGE SPACE 37 38 15A SPARE METALUX GT. MC SERIES. C&M. HUBBELL EMERGENCY BATTERY UNIT 15A 15 16 20A LIGHTING 347 600V 30 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE SPACE 39 40 15A SPARE PYLON SIGN 20A 17 18 20A LIGHTING WATTS DESCRIPTION PROT. CIRCUITS PROT. DESCRIPTION WATTS SPACE 41 42 15A SPARE 'Fg 2x32W Ta SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT OMI. C E. R PRISMATIC RESISTANT. FULLY KENNAL GASKETTED FOR USE IN SHOWER ROOM. CLEAR PRISMATIC LENS. 347V RS SPACE 19 20 20A LOBBY/CORRIDOR LIGHTING 60A 1 2 15AA ELECTRONIC A• FAIL—SAFE GT.# RC SERIES. SPACE 21 22 20A LIGHTING TRANSFORMER 45WA 3 4 EF-1 (IMP) SPACE 23 24 2001 LIGHTING 3P 5 8 3P 'F8A" 1x17W T8 SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE. VANDAL RESISTANT. FULY KENNAL GASKETTED FOR USE IN SHOWER ROOM. CLEAR PRISMATIC LENS. SPACE 25 26 20A LIGHTING SPARE 15A 7 8 15A SPARE ELECTRIC HEATER SCHEDULE 347v0 • FAIL—SAFE CAT.# MC SERIES SPACE 27 28 20A UGH71NG SPARE 15A 9 10 15A SPARE SPACE 29 30 20A LIGHTING (SEATING) SPARE 15A 11 12 15A SPARE TYPE DESCRIPTION APPROVED EQUAL "FBLr 1x32W T8 SAME AS TYPE FSA BUT 1283mm LONG OR 900mm LONG AS SHOWN KENNAL SPACE 31 32 15A SPARE SPACE 13 14 SPACE 1 x25W T8 FAIL—SAFE CAT.j PC SERIES SPACE 33 34 15A SPARE SPACE 15 16 SPACE 208V, 36 ELECTRIC FORCE AIR HEATER, TEMPER PROOF, RECESSED STEL.PRO 'AA" 10OW MH RECESSED METAL HALIDE DOWNUGHT, 9" DIA. 11" HIGH — DIE CAST UGHTOUER SPACE 35 36 1501 SPARE SPACE 17 18 SPACE Er MOUNTED.X WATTAGE R AS SHOWN,ON DRAWING C/W BUILT—N THERMOSTAT OUELLET ALUMINUM HOUSING. CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR BLACK BAFFLE AND TRIM PRESCOUTE RING. FRESNEL LENS. CAPRI SPACE 37 38 15A SPARE . SPACE 19 20 1501 HALO GT. M6024T. HUBBELL SPACE 39 40 15A SPARE SPACE 21 22 MALI f 1 3HP 'BBr 1DOW MH SURFACE MOUNTED METAL HIWDE, 17 1/4' DNA, POLYCARBONATE LENS. SPACE 41 42 15A SPARE SPACE 23 24 3P DIE CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING WHITE FINISH — 347V HPF BALLAST UGHTOLIER VISION 1 # A172 SPACE 25 26 30A SPACE 27 28 DEHUMIDIFIER 'CC" 25OW MH SURFACE MOUNTED FLOOD LIGHT. CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS LENS., SPECULAR KEEN PANEL '13B' MAINS: 225A LOCATION: ELECTRICAL ROOM REFLECTOR. DIE CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, FULLY THE A Tm FOR WET HUBBELL , SPACE 29 30 3P LOCATION C/W GAOLINTIIG HARDWARE COLOUR BY THE ARCHITECT. 347V HUBBELL 347 60OV 30 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE HPF BALLAST COOPER CAT. f WARRIOR MHWR-65S-250. WATTS DESCRIPTION PROT. CIRCUITS PROT. DESCRIPTION WATTS 5" 2 15A PAN E L `D f TYPE.: 2255 AMPS LOCATION: STORAGE ] REVISED AS PER POST TENDER 'D1 r' 1000W MH POLE MOUNTED METAL HALIDE FIXTURE. SINGLE ROUND FIXTURE C ARM GARCO EXISTING ARENA EXHAUST MOUNTING HEIGHT 43FT. DIE CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, CONVEX PERED KIM 1 11/13/Ii7 T.H. VERTICAL LAMP. TYPE Y DISTRIBUTION. 347V LOW TEMP BALLAST HUBBELL ' FAN # 1 & 2 (1/2HP) 120 208V 3/ 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE POLE LENS, 6' ROUND TAPPF.RED. 40FT. COLOUR BY THE ARCHRECT. � 3 4 EXISTING VESTIBULE HEATER ADDENDUM Et 3P 5 6 3P WATTS DESCRIPTION PROT. CIRCUITS PROT. DESCRIPTION WATTS COOPER GALLERIA—911-26—AR NO. REVISIONS DATE 15A 7 a 15A EF-10 (1/4HP) 15A 1 2 15A SUMP PUMP (1/4HP) EXISTING ARENA EXHAUST 9 10 EXISTING ELECT. ROOM U/H EF-11 (3,7A) 15A 3 4 1501 HIGH WATER ALARM "DDT" 10DOW MH SAME AS TYPE "DCr' BUT TWO FIXTURES. BARRY • BRYAN FAN 3 do 4 (1/2HP) "Er 175W MH POLE MOUNTED METAL MAUDE FIXTURE ON ROUND, NON—TAPERED ALUMINUM 3P 11 12 3P EF-12 (1/2HP) 2OA 5 8 1501 SCORE BOARD 15A 13 14 20A EF-9 (1A) 15A 7 8 15A RECEPTACLES 14FT POLE. ROUND BASE COVERS. SINGLE FIXTURE, POST TOP. COMPLETE ASSOCIATES (1991 ) LIMITED EXISTING EMERGENCY WITH 347V HPF LOW TEMP BALLAST. EXHAUST FAN 15 16 EXISTING REFIGERATION RM. U/H RECEPTACLES 15A 9 10 15A RECEPTACLES MOLDCAST CLASSIC TORCHIERE #85112/86112 ALUMINUM FINISH. 3P 17 18 3P RECEPTACLES 15A 11 12 15A RECEPTACLES ARCHITECT ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGERS 15A 19 20 20A RECEPTACLES 1501 13 14 15A SPARE Telephone (905) 666-5252 EXISTING WAC UNIT f 1 (5HP) 21 22 EXISTING REFIGERATION RM. U/H RECEPTACLES 15A 15 16 15A SPARE LEIPCIGER 3P 23 24 3P RECEPTACLES 15A 17 18 15A SPARE KAMNWCER 40A 25 26 15A RECEPTACLES 15A 19 20 15A SPARE ` N And Porfn�rs Inc. EXISTING WAC UNIT 4 (19HP 27 28 UNIT HEATER RECEPTACLES I SA 21 22 15A SPARE F n' CONSULNO 84614 M 3P 29 30 3P RECEPTACLES 15A 23 24 15A EXHAUST FAN 1/4HP r ' TORONTO SUDBURY 20A 31 32 15A RECEPTACLES 15A 25 26 15A RECEPTACLES r �4: �-,1 � � ��' (416)445-8255/(705)675-6881 EXISTING DEHUMIDIFIER � 34 NEW EF-7 (IMP) RECEPTACLES 1501 27 28 1501 RECEPTACLES DH-1 (8 1/2HP) 3P 35 36 3P RECEPTACLES 15A 29 30 20A UNIT HEATER 7 3001 D HEATERS RECEPTACLES 15A 31 32 1501 20A 3 38 BASEBOARD 4250 EXISTING DEHUMIDIFIER 3/ 4HP LIFT _ 39 40 30011 HEATER 5250 RECEPTACLES 1501 33 34 2P F- OANG • DH-2 (8 1/2HP) r 3P 41 42 3001 HEATER 4000 RECEPTACLES 1501 35 36 1501 HEATING CABLES � �'�� ,� 0 1501 43 44 2001 RECEPTACLES 1501 37 38 6001 •� z , i AC-2 (701) 45 46 UNIT HEATER 1501 39 40 LP 'D1' 3P 47 48 3P 3/4HP UFT 2P 41 42 3P OF 1501 49 50 SPACE 1 1501 43 44 1501 RECEPTACLES '{ UCM J97309 EF-2 (2HP) 51 52 SPACE 0/H DOOR 2P 45 46 15A RECEPTACLES 3P 53 54 SPACE 15A 47 48 15A HEATING CABLES PROJECT: h •: /�� AND /�� p/� SPACE 55 56 SPACE O/H DOOR 2P 49 50 15011 ZAMBONI ROOM LIGHT do HORN � � �- ��'� �1V�N f11VD E•'1L�f1�1T SPACE 57 58 SPACE H DOOR 15A 51 52 15A SPARE SPACE 59 60 SPACE O 2P 53 54 15A CONTROL � , C"ET 1 B. FOC11ARD COMPLEX SPACE 51 62 SPACE SPARE 15A 55 56 15A CONTROL SPACE 63 64 SPACE SPARE 1501 57 58 1501 MOTORIZER DAMPER MUN�CIPA 1 1 OF CLM�NV FON SPACE 65 66 SPACE SPARE 15A 59 60 15A SPARE HWY N0. 2 AND MARTION ROAD SPACE 61 62 SPACE BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO SPACE 63 64 SPACE SPACE 65 66 SPACE � DRAWING: LIGHTING FIXTURES SCHEDULE, PANEL SCHEDULE AND DETAILS ELECTRICAL DRAWN BY: K. T.H. CHECKED BY: DATE: SEPT. /97 SCALE: 1'100 PROJECT NO: DRAWING NO: 97100 E802 C:\ACRD\tHINH\97\97309\E802.DWG NOV 10, 1997 11:43 AAA _ r { t^� "l G w 3 �A,�� � .ww � ii Y `'('p D gyp+